The MIT License (MIT)
-Copyright (c) 2014-2018 Omar Cornut
+Copyright (c) 2014-2019 Omar Cornut
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
//---- Don't implement some functions to reduce linkage requirements.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS // [Win32] Don't implement default clipboard handler. Won't use and link with OpenClipboard/GetClipboardData/CloseClipboard etc.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS // [Win32] Don't implement default IME handler. Won't use and link with ImmGetContext/ImmSetCompositionWindow.
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS // [Win32] Won't use and link with any Win32 function.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS // Don't implement ImFormatString/ImFormatStringV so you can implement them yourself if you don't want to link with vsnprintf.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_MATH_FUNCTIONS // Don't implement ImFabs/ImSqrt/ImPow/ImFmod/ImCos/ImSin/ImAcos/ImAtan2 wrapper so you can implement them yourself. Declare your prototypes in imconfig.h.
//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS // Don't implement default allocators calling malloc()/free() to avoid linking with them. You will need to call ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions().
-// dear imgui, v1.63 WIP
+// dear imgui, v1.68 WIP
// (main code and documentation)
// Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp for demo code.
// Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' below for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
// Get latest version at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
// Releases change-log at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases
+// Technical Support for Getting Started https://discourse.dearimgui.org/c/getting-started
// Gallery (please post your screenshots/video there!): https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1269
+
// Developed by Omar Cornut and every direct or indirect contributors to the GitHub.
+// See LICENSE.txt for copyright and licensing details (standard MIT License).
// This library is free but I need your support to sustain development and maintenance.
-// If you work for a company, please consider financial support, see README. For individuals: https://www.patreon.com/imgui
+// Businesses: you can support continued maintenance and development via support contracts or sponsoring, see docs/README.
+// Individuals: you can support continued maintenance and development via donations or Patreon https://www.patreon.com/imgui.
// It is recommended that you don't modify imgui.cpp! It will become difficult for you to update the library.
// Note that 'ImGui::' being a namespace, you can add functions into the namespace from your own source files, without
/*
- Index
- - MISSION STATEMENT
- - END-USER GUIDE
- - PROGRAMMER GUIDE (read me!)
- - Read first
- - How to update to a newer version of Dear ImGui
- - Getting started with integrating Dear ImGui in your code/engine
- - Using gamepad/keyboard navigation controls [BETA]
- - API BREAKING CHANGES (read me when you update!)
- - ISSUES & TODO LIST
- - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ), TIPS
- - How can I tell whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard to imgui or to my application?
- - How can I display an image? What is ImTextureID, how does it works?
- - How can I have multiple widgets with the same label or without a label? A primer on labels and the ID Stack.
- - How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2/ImVec4?
- - How can I load a different font than the default?
- - How can I easily use icons in my application?
- - How can I load multiple fonts?
- - How can I display and input non-latin characters such as Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Cyrillic?
- - How can I use the drawing facilities without an ImGui window? (using ImDrawList API)
- - I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and the text or lines are blurry..
- - I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and some elements are clipping or disappearing when I move windows around..
- - How can I help?
- - ISSUES & TODO-LIST
- - CODE
+Index of this file:
+
+DOCUMENTATION
+
+- MISSION STATEMENT
+- END-USER GUIDE
+- PROGRAMMER GUIDE (read me!)
+ - Read first.
+ - How to update to a newer version of Dear ImGui.
+ - Getting started with integrating Dear ImGui in your code/engine.
+ - This is how a simple application may look like (2 variations).
+ - This is how a simple rendering function may look like.
+ - Using gamepad/keyboard navigation controls.
+- API BREAKING CHANGES (read me when you update!)
+- FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ), TIPS
+ - How can I tell whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard to imgui or to my application?
+ - How can I display an image? What is ImTextureID, how does it works?
+ - How can I have multiple widgets with the same label or with an empty label? A primer on labels and the ID Stack.
+ - How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2/ImVec4?
+ - How can I load a different font than the default?
+ - How can I easily use icons in my application?
+ - How can I load multiple fonts?
+ - How can I display and input non-latin characters such as Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Cyrillic?
+ - How can I interact with standard C++ types (such as std::string and std::vector)?
+ - How can I use the drawing facilities without an ImGui window? (using ImDrawList API)
+ - How can I use Dear ImGui on a platform that doesn't have a mouse or a keyboard? (input share, remoting, gamepad)
+ - I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and the text or lines are blurry..
+ - I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and some elements are clipping or disappearing when I move windows around..
+ - How can I help?
+
+CODE
+(search for "[SECTION]" in the code to find them)
+
+// [SECTION] FORWARD DECLARATIONS
+// [SECTION] CONTEXT AND MEMORY ALLOCATORS
+// [SECTION] MAIN USER FACING STRUCTURES (ImGuiStyle, ImGuiIO)
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPER/UTILITIES (Maths, String, Format, Hash, File functions)
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPER/UTILITIES (ImText* functions)
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPER/UTILITIES (Color functions)
+// [SECTION] ImGuiStorage
+// [SECTION] ImGuiTextFilter
+// [SECTION] ImGuiTextBuffer
+// [SECTION] ImGuiListClipper
+// [SECTION] RENDER HELPERS
+// [SECTION] MAIN CODE (most of the code! lots of stuff, needs tidying up!)
+// [SECTION] TOOLTIPS
+// [SECTION] POPUPS
+// [SECTION] KEYBOARD/GAMEPAD NAVIGATION
+// [SECTION] COLUMNS
+// [SECTION] DRAG AND DROP
+// [SECTION] LOGGING/CAPTURING
+// [SECTION] SETTINGS
+// [SECTION] PLATFORM DEPENDENT HELPERS
+// [SECTION] METRICS/DEBUG WINDOW
+
+*/
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// DOCUMENTATION
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+/*
MISSION STATEMENT
=================
- - Easy to use to create code-driven and data-driven tools
- - Easy to use to create ad hoc short-lived tools and long-lived, more elaborate tools
- - Easy to hack and improve
- - Minimize screen real-estate usage
- - Minimize setup and maintenance
- - Minimize state storage on user side
- - Portable, minimize dependencies, run on target (consoles, phones, etc.)
- - Efficient runtime and memory consumption (NB- we do allocate when "growing" content e.g. creating a window,
- opening a tree node for the first time, etc. but a typical frame should not allocate anything)
+ - Easy to use to create code-driven and data-driven tools.
+ - Easy to use to create ad hoc short-lived tools and long-lived, more elaborate tools.
+ - Easy to hack and improve.
+ - Minimize screen real-estate usage.
+ - Minimize setup and maintenance.
+ - Minimize state storage on user side.
+ - Portable, minimize dependencies, run on target (consoles, phones, etc.).
+ - Efficient runtime and memory consumption (NB- we do allocate when "growing" content e.g. creating a window,.
+ opening a tree node for the first time, etc. but a typical frame should not allocate anything).
Designed for developers and content-creators, not the typical end-user! Some of the weaknesses includes:
- - Doesn't look fancy, doesn't animate
- - Limited layout features, intricate layouts are typically crafted in code
+ - Doesn't look fancy, doesn't animate.
+ - Limited layout features, intricate layouts are typically crafted in code.
END-USER GUIDE
PROGRAMMER GUIDE
================
- READ FIRST
+ READ FIRST:
- Read the FAQ below this section!
- Your code creates the UI, if your code doesn't run the UI is gone! The UI can be highly dynamic, there are no construction
- or destruction steps, less data retention on your side, less state duplication, less state synchronization, less bugs.
+ or destruction steps, less superfluous data retention on your side, less state duplication, less state synchronization, less bugs.
- Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() for demo code demonstrating most features.
- - You can learn about immediate-mode gui principles at http://www.johno.se/book/imgui.html or watch http://mollyrocket.com/861
-
- HOW TO UPDATE TO A NEWER VERSION OF DEAR IMGUI
+ - The library is designed to be built from sources. Avoid pre-compiled binaries and packaged versions. See imconfig.h to configure your build.
+ - Dear ImGui is an implementation of the IMGUI paradigm (immediate-mode graphical user interface, a term coined by Casey Muratori).
+ You can learn about IMGUI principles at http://www.johno.se/book/imgui.html, http://mollyrocket.com/861 & more links docs/README.md.
+ - Dear ImGui is a "single pass" rasterizing implementation of the IMGUI paradigm, aimed at ease of use and high-performances.
+ For every application frame your UI code will be called only once. This is in contrast to e.g. Unity's own implementation of an IMGUI,
+ where the UI code is called multiple times ("multiple passes") from a single entry point. There are pros and cons to both approaches.
+ - Our origin are on the top-left. In axis aligned bounding boxes, Min = top-left, Max = bottom-right.
+ - This codebase is also optimized to yield decent performances with typical "Debug" builds settings.
+ - Please make sure you have asserts enabled (IM_ASSERT redirects to assert() by default, but can be redirected).
+ If you get an assert, read the messages and comments around the assert.
+ - C++: this is a very C-ish codebase: we don't rely on C++11, we don't include any C++ headers, and ImGui:: is a namespace.
+ - C++: ImVec2/ImVec4 do not expose math operators by default, because it is expected that you use your own math types.
+ See FAQ "How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2/ImVec4?" for details about setting up imconfig.h for that.
+ However, imgui_internal.h can optionally export math operators for ImVec2/ImVec4, which we use in this codebase.
+ - C++: pay attention that ImVector<> manipulates plain-old-data and does not honor construction/destruction (avoid using it in your code!).
+
+ HOW TO UPDATE TO A NEWER VERSION OF DEAR IMGUI:
- Overwrite all the sources files except for imconfig.h (if you have made modification to your copy of imconfig.h)
+ - Or maintain your own branch where you have imconfig.h modified.
- Read the "API BREAKING CHANGES" section (below). This is where we list occasional API breaking changes.
If a function/type has been renamed / or marked obsolete, try to fix the name in your code before it is permanently removed
from the public API. If you have a problem with a missing function/symbols, search for its name in the code, there will
likely be a comment about it. Please report any issue to the GitHub page!
- Try to keep your copy of dear imgui reasonably up to date.
- GETTING STARTED WITH INTEGRATING DEAR IMGUI IN YOUR CODE/ENGINE
+ GETTING STARTED WITH INTEGRATING DEAR IMGUI IN YOUR CODE/ENGINE:
- - Run and study the examples and demo to get acquainted with the library.
+ - Run and study the examples and demo in imgui_demo.cpp to get acquainted with the library.
- Add the Dear ImGui source files to your projects or using your preferred build system.
- It is recommended you build the .cpp files as part of your project and not as a library.
- - You can later customize the imconfig.h file to tweak some compilation time behavior, such as integrating imgui types with your own maths types.
- - You may be able to grab and copy a ready made imgui_impl_*** file from the examples/ folder.
+ It is recommended you build and statically link the .cpp files as part of your project and not as shared library (DLL).
+ - You can later customize the imconfig.h file to tweak some compile-time behavior, such as integrating imgui types with your own maths types.
- When using Dear ImGui, your programming IDE is your friend: follow the declaration of variables, functions and types to find comments about them.
- Dear ImGui never touches or knows about your GPU state. The only function that knows about GPU is the draw function that you provide.
Effectively it means you can create widgets at any time in your code, regardless of considerations of being in "update" vs "render"
phases of your own application. All rendering informatioe are stored into command-lists that you will retrieve after calling ImGui::Render().
- Refer to the bindings and demo applications in the examples/ folder for instruction on how to setup your code.
+ - If you are running over a standard OS with a common graphics API, you should be able to use unmodified imgui_impl_*** files from the examples/ folder.
- THIS IS HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE
- EXHIBIT 1: USING THE EXAMPLE BINDINGS (imgui_impl_XXX.cpp files from the examples/ folder)
+ HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE:
+ EXHIBIT 1: USING THE EXAMPLE BINDINGS (imgui_impl_XXX.cpp files from the examples/ folder).
// Application init: create a dear imgui context, setup some options, load fonts
ImGui::CreateContext();
ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
- // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls
- // TODO: Fill optional settings of the io structure later.
+ // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls.
+ // TODO: Fill optional fields of the io structure later.
// TODO: Load TTF/OTF fonts if you don't want to use the default font.
// Initialize helper Platform and Renderer bindings (here we are using imgui_impl_win32 and imgui_impl_dx11)
ImGui_ImplWin32_Shutdown();
ImGui::DestroyContext();
- THIS IS HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE
- EXHIBIT 2: IMPLEMENTING CUSTOM BINDING / CUSTOM ENGINE
+ HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE:
+ EXHIBIT 2: IMPLEMENTING CUSTOM BINDING / CUSTOM ENGINE.
// Application init: create a dear imgui context, setup some options, load fonts
ImGui::CreateContext();
ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
- // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls
- // TODO: Fill optional settings of the io structure later.
+ // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls.
+ // TODO: Fill optional fields of the io structure later.
// TODO: Load TTF/OTF fonts if you don't want to use the default font.
// Build and load the texture atlas into a texture
// Shutdown
ImGui::DestroyContext();
- THIS HOW A SIMPLE RENDERING FUNCTION MAY LOOK LIKE
+ HOW A SIMPLE RENDERING FUNCTION MAY LOOK LIKE:
void void MyImGuiRenderFunction(ImDrawData* draw_data)
{
// TODO: Setup render state: alpha-blending enabled, no face culling, no depth testing, scissor enabled
- // TODO: Setup viewport using draw_data->DisplaySize
+ // TODO: Setup viewport covering draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize
// TODO: Setup orthographic projection matrix cover draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize
// TODO: Setup shader: vertex { float2 pos, float2 uv, u32 color }, fragment shader sample color from 1 texture, multiply by vertex color.
for (int n = 0; n < draw_data->CmdListsCount; n++)
{
+ const ImDrawList* cmd_list = draw_data->CmdLists[n];
const ImDrawVert* vtx_buffer = cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Data; // vertex buffer generated by ImGui
const ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Data; // index buffer generated by ImGui
for (int cmd_i = 0; cmd_i < cmd_list->CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_i++)
else
{
// The texture for the draw call is specified by pcmd->TextureId.
- // The vast majority of draw calls with use the imgui texture atlas, which value you have set yourself during initialization.
- MyEngineBindTexture(pcmd->TextureId);
+ // The vast majority of draw calls will use the imgui texture atlas, which value you have set yourself during initialization.
+ MyEngineBindTexture((MyTexture*)pcmd->TextureId);
// We are using scissoring to clip some objects. All low-level graphics API should supports it.
// - If your engine doesn't support scissoring yet, you may ignore this at first. You will get some small glitches
- // (some elements visible outside their bounds) but you can fix that once everywhere else works!
+ // (some elements visible outside their bounds) but you can fix that once everything else works!
// - Clipping coordinates are provided in imgui coordinates space (from draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize)
// In a single viewport application, draw_data->DisplayPos will always be (0,0) and draw_data->DisplaySize will always be == io.DisplaySize.
- // However, in the interest of supporting multi-viewport applications in the future, always subtract draw_data->DisplayPos from
- // clipping bounds to convert them to your viewport space.
+ // However, in the interest of supporting multi-viewport applications in the future (see 'viewport' branch on github),
+ // always subtract draw_data->DisplayPos from clipping bounds to convert them to your viewport space.
// - Note that pcmd->ClipRect contains Min+Max bounds. Some graphics API may use Min+Max, other may use Min+Size (size being Max-Min)
ImVec2 pos = draw_data->DisplayPos;
MyEngineScissor((int)(pcmd->ClipRect.x - pos.x), (int)(pcmd->ClipRect.y - pos.y), (int)(pcmd->ClipRect.z - pos.x), (int)(pcmd->ClipRect.w - pos.y));
// Render 'pcmd->ElemCount/3' indexed triangles.
- // By default the indices ImDrawIdx are 16-bits, you can change them to 32-bits if your engine doesn't support 16-bits indices.
+ // By default the indices ImDrawIdx are 16-bits, you can change them to 32-bits in imconfig.h if your engine doesn't support 16-bits indices.
MyEngineDrawIndexedTriangles(pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer, vtx_buffer);
}
idx_buffer += pcmd->ElemCount;
}
}
- - The examples/ folders contains many functional implementation of the pseudo-code above.
+ - The examples/ folders contains many actual implementation of the pseudo-codes above.
- When calling NewFrame(), the 'io.WantCaptureMouse', 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' and 'io.WantTextInput' flags are updated.
- They tell you if ImGui intends to use your inputs. When a flag is set you want to hide the corresponding inputs from the rest of your application.
- In both cases you need to pass on the inputs to imgui. Read the FAQ below for more information about those flags.
- - Please read the FAQ above. Amusingly, it is called a FAQ because people frequently have the same issues!
+ They tell you if Dear ImGui intends to use your inputs. When a flag is set you want to hide the corresponding inputs
+ from the rest of your application. In every cases you need to pass on the inputs to imgui. Refer to the FAQ for more information.
+ - Please read the FAQ below!. Amusingly, it is called a FAQ because people frequently run into the same issues!
- USING GAMEPAD/KEYBOARD NAVIGATION CONTROLS [BETA]
+ USING GAMEPAD/KEYBOARD NAVIGATION CONTROLS
- - The gamepad/keyboard navigation is in Beta. Ask questions and report issues at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/787
+ - The gamepad/keyboard navigation is fairly functional and keeps being improved.
+ - Gamepad support is particularly useful to use dear imgui on a console system (e.g. PS4, Switch, XB1) without a mouse!
+ - You can ask questions and report issues at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/787
- The initial focus was to support game controllers, but keyboard is becoming increasingly and decently usable.
- Gamepad:
- Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad to enable.
0.0f= not held. 1.0f= fully held. Pass intermediate 0.0f..1.0f values for analog triggers/sticks.
- We uses a simple >0.0f test for activation testing, and won't attempt to test for a dead-zone.
Your code will probably need to transform your raw inputs (such as e.g. remapping your 0.2..0.9 raw input range to 0.0..1.0 imgui range, etc.).
- - You can download PNG/PSD files depicting the gamepad controls for common controllers at: goo.gl/9LgVZW.
+ - You can download PNG/PSD files depicting the gamepad controls for common controllers at: http://goo.gl/9LgVZW.
- If you need to share inputs between your game and the imgui parts, the easiest approach is to go all-or-nothing, with a buttons combo
to toggle the target. Please reach out if you think the game vs navigation input sharing could be improved.
- Keyboard:
When you are not sure about a old symbol or function name, try using the Search/Find function of your IDE to look for comments or references in all imgui files.
You can read releases logs https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases for more details.
+ - 2019/02/14 (1.68) - made it illegal/assert when io.DisplayTime == 0.0f (with an exception for the first frame). If for some reason your time step calculation gives you a zero value, replace it with a dummy small value!
+ - 2019/02/01 (1.68) - removed io.DisplayVisibleMin/DisplayVisibleMax (which were marked obsolete and removed from viewport/docking branch already).
+ - 2019/01/06 (1.67) - renamed io.InputCharacters[], marked internal as was always intended. Please don't access directly, and use AddInputCharacter() instead!
+ - 2019/01/06 (1.67) - renamed ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder to ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder. Keep redirection typedef (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/12/20 (1.67) - made it illegal to call Begin("") with an empty string. This somehow half-worked before but had various undesirable side-effects.
+ - 2018/12/10 (1.67) - renamed io.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges to io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges as we are doing a large pass on configuration flags.
+ - 2018/10/12 (1.66) - renamed misc/stl/imgui_stl.* to misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.* in prevision for other C++ helper files.
+ - 2018/09/28 (1.66) - renamed SetScrollHere() to SetScrollHereY(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/09/06 (1.65) - renamed stb_truetype.h to imstb_truetype.h, stb_textedit.h to imstb_textedit.h, and stb_rect_pack.h to imstb_rectpack.h.
+ If you were conveniently using the imgui copy of those STB headers in your project you will have to update your include paths.
+ - 2018/09/05 (1.65) - renamed io.OptCursorBlink/io.ConfigCursorBlink to io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink. (#1427)
+ - 2018/08/31 (1.64) - added imgui_widgets.cpp file, extracted and moved widgets code out of imgui.cpp into imgui_widgets.cpp. Re-ordered some of the code remaining in imgui.cpp.
+ NONE OF THE FUNCTIONS HAVE CHANGED. THE CODE IS SEMANTICALLY 100% IDENTICAL, BUT _EVERY_ FUNCTION HAS BEEN MOVED.
+ Because of this, any local modifications to imgui.cpp will likely conflict when you update. Read docs/CHANGELOG.txt for suggestions.
+ - 2018/08/22 (1.63) - renamed IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() to IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() for consistency with new IsItemEdited() API. Kept redirection function (will obsolete soonish as IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() is very recent).
+ - 2018/08/21 (1.63) - renamed ImGuiTextEditCallback to ImGuiInputTextCallback, ImGuiTextEditCallbackData to ImGuiInputTextCallbackData for consistency. Kept redirection types (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/08/21 (1.63) - removed ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ReadOnly since it is a duplication of (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly).
+ - 2018/08/01 (1.63) - removed per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide beta flag in favor of a global io.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges [update 1.67 renamed to ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges] to enable the feature.
+ - 2018/08/01 (1.63) - renamed io.OptCursorBlink to io.ConfigCursorBlink [-> io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink in 1.65], io.OptMacOSXBehaviors to ConfigMacOSXBehaviors for consistency.
- 2018/07/22 (1.63) - changed ImGui::GetTime() return value from float to double to avoid accumulating floating point imprecisions over time.
- 2018/07/08 (1.63) - style: renamed ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDarkening to ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg for consistency with other features. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete).
- - 2018/07/06 (1.63) - removed per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide beta flag in favor of a global io.OptResizeWindowsFromEdges to enable the feature.
+ - 2018/06/08 (1.62) - examples: the imgui_impl_xxx files have been split to separate platform (Win32, Glfw, SDL2, etc.) from renderer (DX11, OpenGL, Vulkan, etc.).
+ old binding will still work as is, however prefer using the separated bindings as they will be updated to be multi-viewport conformant.
+ when adopting new bindings follow the main.cpp code of your preferred examples/ folder to know which functions to call.
- 2018/06/06 (1.62) - renamed GetGlyphRangesChinese() to GetGlyphRangesChineseFull() to distinguish other variants and discourage using the full set.
- 2018/06/06 (1.62) - TreeNodeEx()/TreeNodeBehavior(): the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader helper now include the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag. See Changelog for details.
- 2018/05/03 (1.61) - DragInt(): the default compile-time format string has been changed from "%.0f" to "%d", as we are not using integers internally any more.
removed the IsItemRectHovered()/IsWindowRectHovered() names introduced in 1.51 since they were merely more consistent names for the two functions we are now obsoleting.
- 2017/10/17 (1.52) - marked the old 5-parameters version of Begin() as obsolete (still available). Use SetNextWindowSize()+Begin() instead!
- 2017/10/11 (1.52) - renamed AlignFirstTextHeightToWidgets() to AlignTextToFramePadding(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/09/26 (1.52) - renamed ImFont::Glyph to ImFontGlyph. Keep redirection typedef (will obsolete).
- 2017/09/25 (1.52) - removed SetNextWindowPosCenter() because SetNextWindowPos() now has the optional pivot information to do the same and more. Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
- 2017/08/25 (1.52) - io.MousePos needs to be set to ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) when mouse is unavailable/missing. Previously ImVec2(-1,-1) was enough but we now accept negative mouse coordinates. In your binding if you need to support unavailable mouse, make sure to replace "io.MousePos = ImVec2(-1,-1)" with "io.MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX)".
- 2017/08/22 (1.51) - renamed IsItemHoveredRect() to IsItemRectHovered(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). -> (1.52) use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly)!
- the signature of the io.RenderDrawListsFn handler has changed!
old: ImGui_XXXX_RenderDrawLists(ImDrawList** const cmd_lists, int cmd_lists_count)
new: ImGui_XXXX_RenderDrawLists(ImDrawData* draw_data).
- argument: 'cmd_lists' becomes 'draw_data->CmdLists', 'cmd_lists_count' becomes 'draw_data->CmdListsCount'
+ parameters: 'cmd_lists' becomes 'draw_data->CmdLists', 'cmd_lists_count' becomes 'draw_data->CmdListsCount'
ImDrawList: 'commands' becomes 'CmdBuffer', 'vtx_buffer' becomes 'VtxBuffer', 'IdxBuffer' is new.
ImDrawCmd: 'vtx_count' becomes 'ElemCount', 'clip_rect' becomes 'ClipRect', 'user_callback' becomes 'UserCallback', 'texture_id' becomes 'TextureId'.
- each ImDrawList now contains both a vertex buffer and an index buffer. For each command, render ElemCount/3 triangles using indices from the index buffer.
- 2015/01/19 (1.30) - renamed ImGuiStorage::GetIntPtr()/GetFloatPtr() to GetIntRef()/GetIntRef() because Ptr was conflicting with actual pointer storage functions.
- 2015/01/11 (1.30) - big font/image API change! now loads TTF file. allow for multiple fonts. no need for a PNG loader.
(1.30) - removed GetDefaultFontData(). uses io.Fonts->GetTextureData*() API to retrieve uncompressed pixels.
- font init: const void* png_data; unsigned int png_size; ImGui::GetDefaultFontData(NULL, NULL, &png_data, &png_size); <..Upload texture to GPU..>
- became: unsigned char* pixels; int width, height; io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height); <..Upload texture to GPU>; io.Fonts->TexId = YourTextureIdentifier;
- you now more flexibility to load multiple TTF fonts and manage the texture buffer for internal needs.
+ font init: { const void* png_data; unsigned int png_size; ImGui::GetDefaultFontData(NULL, NULL, &png_data, &png_size); <..Upload texture to GPU..>; }
+ became: { unsigned char* pixels; int width, height; io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height); <..Upload texture to GPU>; io.Fonts->TexId = YourTextureIdentifier; }
+ you now have more flexibility to load multiple TTF fonts and manage the texture buffer for internal needs.
it is now recommended that you sample the font texture with bilinear interpolation.
(1.30) - added texture identifier in ImDrawCmd passed to your render function (we can now render images). make sure to set io.Fonts->TexID.
(1.30) - removed IO.PixelCenterOffset (unnecessary, can be handled in user projection matrix)
- 2014/08/28 (1.09) - changed the behavior of IO.PixelCenterOffset following various rendering fixes
- ISSUES & TODO-LIST
- ==================
- See TODO.txt
-
-
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ), TIPS
======================================
- When 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' is set, imgui wants to use your keyboard state, and you may want to discard/hide the inputs from the rest of your application.
- When 'io.WantTextInput' is set to may want to notify your OS to popup an on-screen keyboard, if available (e.g. on a mobile phone, or console OS).
Note: you should always pass your mouse/keyboard inputs to imgui, even when the io.WantCaptureXXX flag are set false.
- This is because imgui needs to detect that you clicked in the void to unfocus its windows.
+ This is because imgui needs to detect that you clicked in the void to unfocus its own windows.
Note: The 'io.WantCaptureMouse' is more accurate that any attempt to "check if the mouse is hovering a window" (don't do that!).
It handle mouse dragging correctly (both dragging that started over your application or over an imgui window) and handle e.g. modal windows blocking inputs.
Those flags are updated by ImGui::NewFrame(). Preferably read the flags after calling NewFrame() if you can afford it, but reading them before is also
Q: How can I display an image? What is ImTextureID, how does it works?
A: Short explanation:
- You may use functions such as ImGui::Image(), ImGui::ImageButton() or lower-level ImDrawList::AddImage() to emit draw calls that will use your own textures.
- - Actual textures are identified in a way that is up to the user/engine.
+ - Actual textures are identified in a way that is up to the user/engine. Those identifiers are stored and passed as ImTextureID (void*) value.
- Loading image files from the disk and turning them into a texture is not within the scope of Dear ImGui (for a good reason).
Please read documentations or tutorials on your graphics API to understand how to display textures on the screen before moving onward.
GLuint my_opengl_texture;
glGenTextures(1, &my_opengl_texture);
glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, my_opengl_texture);
+ glTexParameteri(GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_MIN_FILTER, GL_LINEAR);
+ glTexParameteri(GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_MAG_FILTER, GL_LINEAR);
glPixelStorei(GL_UNPACK_ROW_LENGTH, 0);
glTexImage2D(GL_TEXTURE_2D, 0, GL_RGBA, image_width, image_height, 0, GL_RGBA, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, image_data);
Finally, you may call ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow() to explore/visualize/understand how the ImDrawList are generated.
- Q: How can I have multiple widgets with the same label or without a label?
+ Q: How can I have multiple widgets with the same label or with an empty label?
Q: I have multiple widgets with the same label, and only the first one works. Why is that?
A: A primer on labels and the ID Stack...
Begin("MyWindow");
Button("OK"); // Label = "OK", ID = hash of ("MyWindow", "OK")
End();
+ Begin("MyOtherWindow");
+ Button("OK"); // Label = "OK", ID = hash of ("MyOtherWindow", "OK")
+ End();
- If you have a same ID twice in the same location, you'll have a conflict:
- If you want to completely hide the label, but still need an ID:
- Checkbox("##On", &b); // Label = "", ID = hash of (..., "##On") // No visible label!
+ Checkbox("##On", &b); // Label = "", ID = hash of (..., "##On") // No visible label, just a checkbox!
- Occasionally/rarely you might want change a label while preserving a constant ID. This allows
you to animate labels. For example you may want to include varying information in a window title bar,
but windows are uniquely identified by their ID. Use "###" to pass a label that isn't part of ID:
- Button("Hello###ID"; // Label = "Hello", ID = hash of (..., "ID")
- Button("World###ID"; // Label = "World", ID = hash of (..., "ID") // Same as above, even though the label looks different
+ Button("Hello###ID"); // Label = "Hello", ID = hash of (..., "###ID")
+ Button("World###ID"); // Label = "World", ID = hash of (..., "###ID") // Same as above, even though the label looks different
sprintf(buf, "My game (%f FPS)###MyGame", fps);
- Begin(buf); // Variable label, ID = hash of "MyGame"
+ Begin(buf); // Variable title, ID = hash of "MyGame"
- Solving ID conflict in a more general manner:
Use PushID() / PopID() to create scopes and manipulate the ID stack, as to avoid ID conflicts
within the same window. This is the most convenient way of distinguishing ID when iterating and
creating many UI elements programmatically.
You can push a pointer, a string or an integer value into the ID stack.
- Remember that ID are formed from the concatenation of _everything_ in the ID stack!
+ Remember that ID are formed from the concatenation of _everything_ pushed into the ID stack.
+ At each level of the stack we store the seed used for items at this level of the ID stack.
- Begin("Window");
+ Begin("Window");
for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
{
- PushID(i); // Push i to the id tack
- Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = Hash of ("Window", i, "Click")
+ PushID(i); // Push i to the id tack
+ Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of ("Window", i, "Click")
PopID();
}
for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
{
MyObject* obj = Objects[i];
PushID(obj);
- Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = Hash of ("Window", obj pointer, "Click")
+ Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of ("Window", obj pointer, "Click")
PopID();
}
for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
{
MyObject* obj = Objects[i];
PushID(obj->Name);
- Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = Hash of ("Window", obj->Name, "Click")
+ Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of ("Window", obj->Name, "Click")
PopID();
}
End();
- - More example showing that you can stack multiple prefixes into the ID stack:
+ - You can stack multiple prefixes into the ID stack:
- Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "Click")
+ Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "Click")
PushID("node");
- Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "node", "Click")
+ Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "node", "Click")
PushID(my_ptr);
- Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "node", my_ptr, "Click")
+ Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "node", my_ptr, "Click")
PopID();
PopID();
- Tree nodes implicitly creates a scope for you by calling PushID().
- Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "Click")
- if (TreeNode("node"))
+ Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "Click")
+ if (TreeNode("node")) // <-- this function call will do a PushID() for you (unless instructed not to, with a special flag)
{
- Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "node", "Click")
+ Button("Click"); // Label = "Click", ID = hash of (..., "node", "Click")
TreePop();
}
ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_in_pixels);
io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() or GetTexDataAsAlpha8()
- (default is ProggyClean.ttf, rendered at size 13, embedded in dear imgui's source code)
+ Default is ProggyClean.ttf, monospace, rendered at size 13, embedded in dear imgui's source code.
+ (Tip: monospace fonts are convenient because they allow to facilitate horizontal alignment directly at the string level.)
+ (Read the 'misc/fonts/README.txt' file for more details about font loading.)
New programmers: remember that in C/C++ and most programming languages if you want to use a
backslash \ within a string literal, you need to write it double backslash "\\":
Q: How can I easily use icons in my application?
A: The most convenient and practical way is to merge an icon font such as FontAwesome inside you
- main font. Then you can refer to icons within your strings. Read 'How can I load multiple fonts?'
- and the file 'misc/fonts/README.txt' for instructions and useful header files.
+ main font. Then you can refer to icons within your strings.
+ You may want to see ImFontConfig::GlyphMinAdvanceX to make your icon look monospace to facilitate alignment.
+ (Read the 'misc/fonts/README.txt' file for more details about icons font loading.)
Q: How can I load multiple fonts?
A: Use the font atlas to pack them into a single texture:
- (Read misc/fonts/README.txt and the code in ImFontAtlas for more details.)
+ (Read the 'misc/fonts/README.txt' file and the code in ImFontAtlas for more details.)
ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
ImFont* font0 = io.Fonts->AddFontDefault();
// Options
ImFontConfig config;
- config.OversampleH = 3;
+ config.OversampleH = 2;
config.OversampleV = 1;
- config.GlyphOffset.y -= 2.0f; // Move everything by 2 pixels up
+ config.GlyphOffset.y -= 1.0f; // Move everything by 1 pixels up
config.GlyphExtraSpacing.x = 1.0f; // Increase spacing between characters
- io.Fonts->LoadFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_pixels, &config);
+ io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_pixels, &config);
// Combine multiple fonts into one (e.g. for icon fonts)
- ImWchar ranges[] = { 0xf000, 0xf3ff, 0 };
+ static ImWchar ranges[] = { 0xf000, 0xf3ff, 0 };
ImFontConfig config;
config.MergeMode = true;
io.Fonts->AddFontDefault();
- io.Fonts->LoadFromFileTTF("fontawesome-webfont.ttf", 16.0f, &config, ranges); // Merge icon font
- io.Fonts->LoadFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_pixels, NULL, &config, io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesJapanese()); // Merge japanese glyphs
+ io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("fontawesome-webfont.ttf", 16.0f, &config, ranges); // Merge icon font
+ io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_pixels, NULL, &config, io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesJapanese()); // Merge japanese glyphs
Q: How can I display and input non-Latin characters such as Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Cyrillic?
A: When loading a font, pass custom Unicode ranges to specify the glyphs to load.
// Or create your own custom ranges (e.g. for a game you can feed your entire game script and only build the characters the game need)
ImVector<ImWchar> ranges;
- ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder builder;
+ ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder builder;
builder.AddText("Hello world"); // Add a string (here "Hello world" contains 7 unique characters)
builder.AddChar(0x7262); // Add a specific character
builder.AddRanges(io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesJapanese()); // Add one of the default ranges
Windows: if your language is relying on an Input Method Editor (IME), you copy the HWND of your window to io.ImeWindowHandle in order for
the default implementation of io.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn() to set your Microsoft IME position correctly.
+ Q: How can I interact with standard C++ types (such as std::string and std::vector)?
+ A: - Being highly portable (bindings for several languages, frameworks, programming style, obscure or older platforms/compilers),
+ and aiming for compatibility & performance suitable for every modern real-time game engines, dear imgui does not use
+ any of std C++ types. We use raw types (e.g. char* instead of std::string) because they adapt to more use cases.
+ - To use ImGui::InputText() with a std::string or any resizable string class, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h.
+ - To use combo boxes and list boxes with std::vector or any other data structure: the BeginCombo()/EndCombo() API
+ lets you iterate and submit items yourself, so does the ListBoxHeader()/ListBoxFooter() API.
+ Prefer using them over the old and awkward Combo()/ListBox() api.
+ - Generally for most high-level types you should be able to access the underlying data type.
+ You may write your own one-liner wrappers to facilitate user code (tip: add new functions in ImGui:: namespace from your code).
+ - Dear ImGui applications often need to make intensive use of strings. It is expected that many of the strings you will pass
+ to the API are raw literals (free in C/C++) or allocated in a manner that won't incur a large cost on your application.
+ Please bear in mind that using std::string on applications with large amount of UI may incur unsatisfactory performances.
+ Modern implementations of std::string often include small-string optimization (which is often a local buffer) but those
+ are not configurable and not the same across implementations.
+ - If you are finding your UI traversal cost to be too large, make sure your string usage is not leading to excessive amount
+ of heap allocations. Consider using literals, statically sized buffers and your own helper functions. A common pattern
+ is that you will need to build lots of strings on the fly, and their maximum length can be easily be scoped ahead.
+ One possible implementation of a helper to facilitate printf-style building of strings: https://github.com/ocornut/Str
+ This is a small helper where you can instance strings with configurable local buffers length. Many game engines will
+ provide similar or better string helpers.
+
Q: How can I use the drawing facilities without an ImGui window? (using ImDrawList API)
- A: - You can create a dummy window. Call SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f), call Begin() with NoTitleBar|NoResize|NoMove|NoScrollbar|NoSavedSettings|NoInputs flags.
+ A: - You can create a dummy window. Call Begin() with the NoBackground | NoDecoration | NoSavedSettings | NoInputs flags.
+ (The ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration flag itself is a shortcut for NoTitleBar | NoResize | NoScrollbar | NoCollapse)
Then you can retrieve the ImDrawList* via GetWindowDrawList() and draw to it in any way you like.
- You can call ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList() and use this draw list to display contents over every other imgui windows.
- - You can create your own ImDrawList instance. You'll need to initialize them ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData(), or create your own ImDrawListSharedData.
+ - You can create your own ImDrawList instance. You'll need to initialize them ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData(), or create
+ your own ImDrawListSharedData, and then call your rendered code with your own ImDrawList or ImDrawData data.
+
+ Q: How can I use this without a mouse, without a keyboard or without a screen? (gamepad, input share, remote display)
+ A: - You can control Dear ImGui with a gamepad. Read about navigation in "Using gamepad/keyboard navigation controls".
+ (short version: map gamepad inputs into the io.NavInputs[] array + set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad)
+ - You can share your computer mouse seamlessly with your console/tablet/phone using Synergy (https://symless.com/synergy)
+ This is the preferred solution for developer productivity.
+ In particular, the "micro-synergy-client" repository (https://github.com/symless/micro-synergy-client) has simple
+ and portable source code (uSynergy.c/.h) for a small embeddable client that you can use on any platform to connect
+ to your host computer, based on the Synergy 1.x protocol. Make sure you download the Synergy 1 server on your computer.
+ Console SDK also sometimes provide equivalent tooling or wrapper for Synergy-like protocols.
+ - You may also use a third party solution such as Remote ImGui (https://github.com/JordiRos/remoteimgui) which sends
+ the vertices to render over the local network, allowing you to use Dear ImGui even on a screen-less machine.
+ - For touch inputs, you can increase the hit box of widgets (via the style.TouchPadding setting) to accommodate
+ for the lack of precision of touch inputs, but it is recommended you use a mouse or gamepad to allow optimizing
+ for screen real-estate and precision.
Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and the text or lines are blurry..
A: In your Render function, try translating your projection matrix by (0.5f,0.5f) or (0.375f,0.375f).
Rectangles provided by ImGui are defined as (x1=left,y1=top,x2=right,y2=bottom) and NOT as (x1,y1,width,height).
Q: How can I help?
- A: - If you are experienced with Dear ImGui and C++, look at the github issues, or TODO.txt and see how you want/can help!
- - Convince your company to fund development time! Individual users: you can also become a Patron (patreon.com/imgui) or donate on PayPal! See README.
+ A: - If you are experienced with Dear ImGui and C++, look at the github issues, look at the Wiki, read docs/TODO.txt
+ and see how you want to help and can help!
+ - Businesses: convince your company to fund development via support contracts/sponsoring! This is among the most useful thing you can do for dear imgui.
+ - Individuals: you can also become a Patron (http://www.patreon.com/imgui) or donate on PayPal! See README.
- Disclose your usage of dear imgui via a dev blog post, a tweet, a screenshot, a mention somewhere etc.
- You may post screenshot or links in the gallery threads (github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1269). Visuals are ideal as they inspire other programmers.
+ You may post screenshot or links in the gallery threads (github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1902). Visuals are ideal as they inspire other programmers.
But even without visuals, disclosing your use of dear imgui help the library grow credibility, and help other teams and programmers with taking decisions.
- If you have issues or if you need to hack into the library, even if you don't expect any support it is useful that you share your issues (on github or privately).
#include <stdint.h> // intptr_t
#endif
-#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING 0
-#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS 0
+// Debug options
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING 0 // Display navigation scoring preview when hovering items. Display last moving direction matches when holding CTRL
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS 0 // Display the reference navigation rectangle for each window
// Visual Studio warnings
#ifdef _MSC_VER
-#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant
-#pragma warning (disable: 4505) // unreferenced local function has been removed (stb stuff)
-#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
+#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant
+#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
#endif
-// Clang warnings with -Weverything
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
#ifdef __clang__
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning : unknown warning group '-Wformat-pedantic *' // not all warnings are known by all clang versions.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. great!
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning : use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wglobal-constructors" // warning : declaration requires a global destructor // similar to above, not sure what the exact difference it.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion" // warning : implicit conversion changes signedness //
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-pedantic" // warning : format specifies type 'void *' but the argument has type 'xxxx *' // unreasonable, would lead to casting every %p arg to void*. probably enabled by -pedantic.
-#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-void-pointer-cast" // warning : cast to 'void *' from smaller integer type 'int'
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-void-pointer-cast" // warning : cast to 'void *' from smaller integer type 'int'
+#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning : zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#endif
+#if __has_warning("-Wdouble-promotion")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
+#endif
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-pointer-cast" // warning: cast to pointer from integer of different size
#endif
#endif
-static const ImS32 IM_S32_MIN = 0x80000000; // INT_MIN;
-static const ImS32 IM_S32_MAX = 0x7FFFFFFF; // INT_MAX;
-static const ImU32 IM_U32_MIN = 0;
-static const ImU32 IM_U32_MAX = 0xFFFFFFFF;
-static const ImS64 IM_S64_MIN = -9223372036854775807ll - 1ll;
-static const ImS64 IM_S64_MAX = 9223372036854775807ll;
-static const ImU64 IM_U64_MIN = 0;
-static const ImU64 IM_U64_MAX = 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFull;
-
// When using CTRL+TAB (or Gamepad Square+L/R) we delay the visual a little in order to reduce visual noise doing a fast switch.
-static const float NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY = 0.20f; // Time before the highlight and screen dimming starts fading in
-static const float NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY = 0.15f; // Time before the window list starts to appear
+static const float NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY = 0.20f; // Time before the highlight and screen dimming starts fading in
+static const float NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY = 0.15f; // Time before the window list starts to appear
+
+// Window resizing from edges (when io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = true and ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors is set in io.BackendFlags by back-end)
+static const float WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS = 4.0f; // Extend outside and inside windows. Affect FindHoveredWindow().
+static const float WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_FEEDBACK_TIMER = 0.04f; // Reduce visual noise by only highlighting the border after a certain time.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Forward Declarations
+// [SECTION] FORWARD DECLARATIONS
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-static bool IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat = true);
-
static void SetCurrentWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
-static void SetWindowScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_x);
-static void SetWindowScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_y);
-static void SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond);
-static void SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond);
-static void SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond);
static void FindHoveredWindow();
static ImGuiWindow* CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImVec2 size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags);
-static ImGuiWindowSettings* CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name);
static void CheckStacksSize(ImGuiWindow* window, bool write);
static ImVec2 CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window, bool snap_on_edges);
static void AddDrawListToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list);
-static void AddWindowToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImGuiWindow* window);
-static void AddWindowToSortedBuffer(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window);
+static void AddWindowToSortBuffer(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window);
static ImRect GetViewportRect();
-static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiTextEditCallback callback, void* user_data);
-static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end);
-static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining = NULL, ImVec2* out_offset = NULL, bool stop_on_new_line = false);
+// Settings
+static void* SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name);
+static void SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line);
+static void SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* imgui_ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf);
-static inline int DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_ptr, const char* format);
-static void DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, void* arg_1, const void* arg_2);
-static bool DataTypeApplyOpFromText(const char* buf, const char* initial_value_buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format);
+// Platform Dependents default implementation for IO functions
+static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data);
+static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data, const char* text);
+static void ImeSetInputScreenPosFn_DefaultImpl(int x, int y);
namespace ImGui
{
static bool BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags);
+// Navigation
static void NavUpdate();
static void NavUpdateWindowing();
static void NavUpdateWindowingList();
+static void NavUpdateMoveResult();
+static float NavUpdatePageUpPageDown(int allowed_dir_flags);
+static inline void NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
static void NavProcessItem(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& nav_bb, const ImGuiID id);
+static ImVec2 NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
+static void NavSaveLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* nav_window);
+static ImGuiWindow* NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
+// Misc
static void UpdateMouseInputs();
static void UpdateMouseWheel();
static void UpdateManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4]);
-static void FocusFrontMostActiveWindow(ImGuiWindow* ignore_window);
+static void RenderOuterBorders(ImGuiWindow* window);
-// Template widget behaviors
-template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
-static bool DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power);
-
-template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
-static bool SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags);
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Platform dependent default implementations
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data);
-static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data, const char* text);
-static void ImeSetInputScreenPosFn_DefaultImpl(int x, int y);
-
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Context
+// [SECTION] CONTEXT AND MEMORY ALLOCATORS
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Current context pointer. Implicitly used by all ImGui functions. Always assumed to be != NULL.
-// CreateContext() will automatically set this pointer if it is NULL. Change to a different context by calling ImGui::SetCurrentContext().
-// If you use DLL hotreloading you might need to call SetCurrentContext() after reloading code from this file.
-// ImGui functions are not thread-safe because of this pointer. If you want thread-safety to allow N threads to access N different contexts, you can:
-// - Change this variable to use thread local storage. You may #define GImGui in imconfig.h for that purpose. Future development aim to make this context pointer explicit to all calls. Also read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/586
-// - Having multiple instances of the ImGui code compiled inside different namespace (easiest/safest, if you have a finite number of contexts)
+// Current context pointer. Implicitly used by all Dear ImGui functions. Always assumed to be != NULL.
+// ImGui::CreateContext() will automatically set this pointer if it is NULL. Change to a different context by calling ImGui::SetCurrentContext().
+// 1) Important: globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! If you use DLLs or any form of hot-reloading: you will need to call
+// SetCurrentContext() (with the pointer you got from CreateContext) from each unique static/DLL boundary, and after each hot-reloading.
+// In your debugger, add GImGui to your watch window and notice how its value changes depending on which location you are currently stepping into.
+// 2) Important: Dear ImGui functions are not thread-safe because of this pointer.
+// If you want thread-safety to allow N threads to access N different contexts, you can:
+// - Change this variable to use thread local storage so each thread can refer to a different context, in imconfig.h:
+// struct ImGuiContext;
+// extern thread_local ImGuiContext* MyImGuiTLS;
+// #define GImGui MyImGuiTLS
+// And then define MyImGuiTLS in one of your cpp file. Note that thread_local is a C++11 keyword, earlier C++ uses compiler-specific keyword.
+// - Future development aim to make this context pointer explicit to all calls. Also read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/586
+// - If you need a finite number of contexts, you may compile and use multiple instances of the ImGui code from different namespace.
#ifndef GImGui
ImGuiContext* GImGui = NULL;
#endif
// If you use DLL hotreloading you might need to call SetAllocatorFunctions() after reloading code from this file.
// Otherwise, you probably don't want to modify them mid-program, and if you use global/static e.g. ImVector<> instances you may need to keep them accessible during program destruction.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS
-static void* MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data) { (void)user_data; return malloc(size); }
-static void FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data) { (void)user_data; free(ptr); }
+static void* MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); return malloc(size); }
+static void FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); free(ptr); }
#else
-static void* MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data) { (void)user_data; (void)size; IM_ASSERT(0); return NULL; }
-static void FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data) { (void)user_data; (void)ptr; IM_ASSERT(0); }
+static void* MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); IM_UNUSED(size); IM_ASSERT(0); return NULL; }
+static void FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); IM_UNUSED(ptr); IM_ASSERT(0); }
#endif
static void* (*GImAllocatorAllocFunc)(size_t size, void* user_data) = MallocWrapper;
static void (*GImAllocatorFreeFunc)(void* ptr, void* user_data) = FreeWrapper;
static void* GImAllocatorUserData = NULL;
-static size_t GImAllocatorActiveAllocationsCount = 0;
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// User facing structures
+// [SECTION] MAIN USER FACING STRUCTURES (ImGuiStyle, ImGuiIO)
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
ImGuiStyle::ImGuiStyle()
ScrollbarRounding = 9.0f; // Radius of grab corners rounding for scrollbar
GrabMinSize = 10.0f; // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar
GrabRounding = 0.0f; // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs.
+ TabRounding = 4.0f; // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs.
+ TabBorderSize = 0.0f; // Thickness of border around tabs.
ButtonTextAlign = ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f);// Alignment of button text when button is larger than text.
- DisplayWindowPadding = ImVec2(20,20); // Window positions are clamped to be visible within the display area by at least this amount. Only covers regular windows.
+ SelectableTextAlign = ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f);// Alignment of selectable text when button is larger than text.
+ DisplayWindowPadding = ImVec2(19,19); // Window position are clamped to be visible within the display area by at least this amount. Only applies to regular windows.
DisplaySafeAreaPadding = ImVec2(3,3); // If you cannot see the edge of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Covers popups/tooltips as well regular windows.
MouseCursorScale = 1.0f; // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). May be removed later.
AntiAliasedLines = true; // Enable anti-aliasing on lines/borders. Disable if you are really short on CPU/GPU.
ScrollbarRounding = ImFloor(ScrollbarRounding * scale_factor);
GrabMinSize = ImFloor(GrabMinSize * scale_factor);
GrabRounding = ImFloor(GrabRounding * scale_factor);
+ TabRounding = ImFloor(TabRounding * scale_factor);
DisplayWindowPadding = ImFloor(DisplayWindowPadding * scale_factor);
DisplaySafeAreaPadding = ImFloor(DisplaySafeAreaPadding * scale_factor);
MouseCursorScale = ImFloor(MouseCursorScale * scale_factor);
memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
// Settings
- ConfigFlags = 0x00;
- BackendFlags = 0x00;
+ ConfigFlags = ImGuiConfigFlags_None;
+ BackendFlags = ImGuiBackendFlags_None;
DisplaySize = ImVec2(-1.0f, -1.0f);
DeltaTime = 1.0f/60.0f;
IniSavingRate = 5.0f;
FontDefault = NULL;
FontAllowUserScaling = false;
DisplayFramebufferScale = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f);
- DisplayVisibleMin = DisplayVisibleMax = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- // Advanced/subtle behaviors
+ // Miscellaneous options
+ MouseDrawCursor = false;
#ifdef __APPLE__
- OptMacOSXBehaviors = true; // Set Mac OS X style defaults based on __APPLE__ compile time flag
+ ConfigMacOSXBehaviors = true; // Set Mac OS X style defaults based on __APPLE__ compile time flag
#else
- OptMacOSXBehaviors = false;
+ ConfigMacOSXBehaviors = false;
#endif
- OptCursorBlink = true;
+ ConfigInputTextCursorBlink = true;
+ ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = true;
+ ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly = false;
- // Settings (User Functions)
+ // Platform Functions
+ BackendPlatformName = BackendRendererName = NULL;
+ BackendPlatformUserData = BackendRendererUserData = BackendLanguageUserData = NULL;
GetClipboardTextFn = GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl; // Platform dependent default implementations
SetClipboardTextFn = SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl;
ClipboardUserData = NULL;
RenderDrawListsFn = NULL;
#endif
- // Input (NB: we already have memset zero the entire structure)
+ // Input (NB: we already have memset zero the entire structure!)
MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
MousePosPrev = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
MouseDragThreshold = 6.0f;
// - on Windows you can get those using ToAscii+keyboard state, or via the WM_CHAR message
void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharacter(ImWchar c)
{
- const int n = ImStrlenW(InputCharacters);
- if (n + 1 < IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputCharacters))
+ InputQueueCharacters.push_back(c);
+}
+
+void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* utf8_chars)
+{
+ while (*utf8_chars != 0)
{
- InputCharacters[n] = c;
- InputCharacters[n+1] = '\0';
+ unsigned int c = 0;
+ utf8_chars += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, utf8_chars, NULL);
+ if (c > 0 && c <= 0xFFFF)
+ InputQueueCharacters.push_back((ImWchar)c);
}
}
-void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* utf8_chars)
+void ImGuiIO::ClearInputCharacters()
{
- // We can't pass more wchars than ImGuiIO::InputCharacters[] can hold so don't convert more
- const int wchars_buf_len = sizeof(ImGuiIO::InputCharacters) / sizeof(ImWchar);
- ImWchar wchars[wchars_buf_len];
- ImTextStrFromUtf8(wchars, wchars_buf_len, utf8_chars, NULL);
- for (int i = 0; i < wchars_buf_len && wchars[i] != 0; i++)
- AddInputCharacter(wchars[i]);
+ InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// HELPERS
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPER/UTILITIES (Maths, String, Format, Hash, File functions)
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#define IM_STATIC_ASSERT(_COND) typedef char static_assertion_##__line__[(_COND)?1:-1]
-#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(_VAL) ((int)((_VAL) * 255.0f + ((_VAL)>=0 ? 0.5f : -0.5f))) // Unsaturated, for display purpose
-#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(_VAL) ((int)(ImSaturate(_VAL) * 255.0f + 0.5f)) // Saturated, always output 0..255
-
ImVec2 ImLineClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& p)
{
ImVec2 ap = p - a;
return proj_ca;
}
+// Consider using _stricmp/_strnicmp under Windows or strcasecmp/strncasecmp. We don't actually use either ImStricmp/ImStrnicmp in the codebase any more.
int ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2)
{
int d;
void ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count)
{
- if (count < 1) return;
- strncpy(dst, src, count);
- dst[count-1] = 0;
+ if (count < 1)
+ return;
+ if (count > 1)
+ strncpy(dst, src, count - 1);
+ dst[count - 1] = 0;
+}
+
+char* ImStrdup(const char* str)
+{
+ size_t len = strlen(str);
+ void* buf = ImGui::MemAlloc(len + 1);
+ return (char*)memcpy(buf, (const void*)str, len + 1);
}
-char* ImStrdup(const char *str)
+char* ImStrdupcpy(char* dst, size_t* p_dst_size, const char* src)
{
- size_t len = strlen(str) + 1;
- void* buf = ImGui::MemAlloc(len);
- return (char*)memcpy(buf, (const void*)str, len);
+ size_t dst_buf_size = p_dst_size ? *p_dst_size : strlen(dst) + 1;
+ size_t src_size = strlen(src) + 1;
+ if (dst_buf_size < src_size)
+ {
+ ImGui::MemFree(dst);
+ dst = (char*)ImGui::MemAlloc(src_size);
+ if (p_dst_size)
+ *p_dst_size = src_size;
+ }
+ return (char*)memcpy(dst, (const void*)src, src_size);
}
const char* ImStrchrRange(const char* str, const char* str_end, char c)
{
- for ( ; str < str_end; str++)
- if (*str == c)
- return str;
- return NULL;
+ const char* p = (const char*)memchr(str, (int)c, str_end - str);
+ return p;
}
int ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str)
{
+ //return (int)wcslen((const wchar_t*)str); // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bits
int n = 0;
while (*str++) n++;
return n;
}
+// Find end-of-line. Return pointer will point to either first \n, either str_end.
+const char* ImStreolRange(const char* str, const char* str_end)
+{
+ const char* p = (const char*)memchr(str, '\n', str_end - str);
+ return p ? p : str_end;
+}
+
const ImWchar* ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin) // find beginning-of-line
{
while (buf_mid_line > buf_begin && buf_mid_line[-1] != '\n')
buf[p - p_start] = 0; // Zero terminate
}
-template<typename TYPE>
-static const char* ImAtoi(const char* src, TYPE* output)
-{
- int negative = 0;
- if (*src == '-') { negative = 1; src++; }
- if (*src == '+') { src++; }
- TYPE v = 0;
- while (*src >= '0' && *src <= '9')
- v = (v * 10) + (*src++ - '0');
- *output = negative ? -v : v;
- return src;
-}
-
// A) MSVC version appears to return -1 on overflow, whereas glibc appears to return total count (which may be >= buf_size).
// Ideally we would test for only one of those limits at runtime depending on the behavior the vsnprintf(), but trying to deduct it at compile time sounds like a pandora can of worm.
// B) When buf==NULL vsnprintf() will return the output size.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS
+
+//#define IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF
+#define STB_SPRINTF_IMPLEMENTATION
+#include "imstb_sprintf.h"
+#endif
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(vsnprintf)
+#define vsnprintf _vsnprintf
+#endif
+
int ImFormatString(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, ...)
{
- IM_ASSERT(fmt != NULL);
va_list args;
va_start(args, fmt);
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF
+ int w = stbsp_vsnprintf(buf, (int)buf_size, fmt, args);
+#else
int w = vsnprintf(buf, buf_size, fmt, args);
+#endif
va_end(args);
if (buf == NULL)
return w;
int ImFormatStringV(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
- IM_ASSERT(fmt != NULL);
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF
+ int w = stbsp_vsnprintf(buf, (int)buf_size, fmt, args);
+#else
int w = vsnprintf(buf, buf_size, fmt, args);
+#endif
if (buf == NULL)
return w;
if (w == -1 || w >= (int)buf_size)
}
#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS
-// Pass data_size==0 for zero-terminated strings
+// CRC32 needs a 1KB lookup table (not cache friendly)
+// Although the code to generate the table is simple and shorter than the table itself, using a const table allows us to easily:
+// - avoid an unnecessary branch/memory tap, - keep the ImHashXXX functions usable by static constructors, - make it thread-safe.
+static const ImU32 GCrc32LookupTable[256] =
+{
+ 0x00000000,0x77073096,0xEE0E612C,0x990951BA,0x076DC419,0x706AF48F,0xE963A535,0x9E6495A3,0x0EDB8832,0x79DCB8A4,0xE0D5E91E,0x97D2D988,0x09B64C2B,0x7EB17CBD,0xE7B82D07,0x90BF1D91,
+ 0x1DB71064,0x6AB020F2,0xF3B97148,0x84BE41DE,0x1ADAD47D,0x6DDDE4EB,0xF4D4B551,0x83D385C7,0x136C9856,0x646BA8C0,0xFD62F97A,0x8A65C9EC,0x14015C4F,0x63066CD9,0xFA0F3D63,0x8D080DF5,
+ 0x3B6E20C8,0x4C69105E,0xD56041E4,0xA2677172,0x3C03E4D1,0x4B04D447,0xD20D85FD,0xA50AB56B,0x35B5A8FA,0x42B2986C,0xDBBBC9D6,0xACBCF940,0x32D86CE3,0x45DF5C75,0xDCD60DCF,0xABD13D59,
+ 0x26D930AC,0x51DE003A,0xC8D75180,0xBFD06116,0x21B4F4B5,0x56B3C423,0xCFBA9599,0xB8BDA50F,0x2802B89E,0x5F058808,0xC60CD9B2,0xB10BE924,0x2F6F7C87,0x58684C11,0xC1611DAB,0xB6662D3D,
+ 0x76DC4190,0x01DB7106,0x98D220BC,0xEFD5102A,0x71B18589,0x06B6B51F,0x9FBFE4A5,0xE8B8D433,0x7807C9A2,0x0F00F934,0x9609A88E,0xE10E9818,0x7F6A0DBB,0x086D3D2D,0x91646C97,0xE6635C01,
+ 0x6B6B51F4,0x1C6C6162,0x856530D8,0xF262004E,0x6C0695ED,0x1B01A57B,0x8208F4C1,0xF50FC457,0x65B0D9C6,0x12B7E950,0x8BBEB8EA,0xFCB9887C,0x62DD1DDF,0x15DA2D49,0x8CD37CF3,0xFBD44C65,
+ 0x4DB26158,0x3AB551CE,0xA3BC0074,0xD4BB30E2,0x4ADFA541,0x3DD895D7,0xA4D1C46D,0xD3D6F4FB,0x4369E96A,0x346ED9FC,0xAD678846,0xDA60B8D0,0x44042D73,0x33031DE5,0xAA0A4C5F,0xDD0D7CC9,
+ 0x5005713C,0x270241AA,0xBE0B1010,0xC90C2086,0x5768B525,0x206F85B3,0xB966D409,0xCE61E49F,0x5EDEF90E,0x29D9C998,0xB0D09822,0xC7D7A8B4,0x59B33D17,0x2EB40D81,0xB7BD5C3B,0xC0BA6CAD,
+ 0xEDB88320,0x9ABFB3B6,0x03B6E20C,0x74B1D29A,0xEAD54739,0x9DD277AF,0x04DB2615,0x73DC1683,0xE3630B12,0x94643B84,0x0D6D6A3E,0x7A6A5AA8,0xE40ECF0B,0x9309FF9D,0x0A00AE27,0x7D079EB1,
+ 0xF00F9344,0x8708A3D2,0x1E01F268,0x6906C2FE,0xF762575D,0x806567CB,0x196C3671,0x6E6B06E7,0xFED41B76,0x89D32BE0,0x10DA7A5A,0x67DD4ACC,0xF9B9DF6F,0x8EBEEFF9,0x17B7BE43,0x60B08ED5,
+ 0xD6D6A3E8,0xA1D1937E,0x38D8C2C4,0x4FDFF252,0xD1BB67F1,0xA6BC5767,0x3FB506DD,0x48B2364B,0xD80D2BDA,0xAF0A1B4C,0x36034AF6,0x41047A60,0xDF60EFC3,0xA867DF55,0x316E8EEF,0x4669BE79,
+ 0xCB61B38C,0xBC66831A,0x256FD2A0,0x5268E236,0xCC0C7795,0xBB0B4703,0x220216B9,0x5505262F,0xC5BA3BBE,0xB2BD0B28,0x2BB45A92,0x5CB36A04,0xC2D7FFA7,0xB5D0CF31,0x2CD99E8B,0x5BDEAE1D,
+ 0x9B64C2B0,0xEC63F226,0x756AA39C,0x026D930A,0x9C0906A9,0xEB0E363F,0x72076785,0x05005713,0x95BF4A82,0xE2B87A14,0x7BB12BAE,0x0CB61B38,0x92D28E9B,0xE5D5BE0D,0x7CDCEFB7,0x0BDBDF21,
+ 0x86D3D2D4,0xF1D4E242,0x68DDB3F8,0x1FDA836E,0x81BE16CD,0xF6B9265B,0x6FB077E1,0x18B74777,0x88085AE6,0xFF0F6A70,0x66063BCA,0x11010B5C,0x8F659EFF,0xF862AE69,0x616BFFD3,0x166CCF45,
+ 0xA00AE278,0xD70DD2EE,0x4E048354,0x3903B3C2,0xA7672661,0xD06016F7,0x4969474D,0x3E6E77DB,0xAED16A4A,0xD9D65ADC,0x40DF0B66,0x37D83BF0,0xA9BCAE53,0xDEBB9EC5,0x47B2CF7F,0x30B5FFE9,
+ 0xBDBDF21C,0xCABAC28A,0x53B39330,0x24B4A3A6,0xBAD03605,0xCDD70693,0x54DE5729,0x23D967BF,0xB3667A2E,0xC4614AB8,0x5D681B02,0x2A6F2B94,0xB40BBE37,0xC30C8EA1,0x5A05DF1B,0x2D02EF8D,
+};
+
+// Known size hash
+// It is ok to call ImHashData on a string with known length but the ### operator won't be supported.
// FIXME-OPT: Replace with e.g. FNV1a hash? CRC32 pretty much randomly access 1KB. Need to do proper measurements.
-ImU32 ImHash(const void* data, int data_size, ImU32 seed)
+ImU32 ImHashData(const void* data_p, size_t data_size, ImU32 seed)
{
- static ImU32 crc32_lut[256] = { 0 };
- if (!crc32_lut[1])
- {
- const ImU32 polynomial = 0xEDB88320;
- for (ImU32 i = 0; i < 256; i++)
- {
- ImU32 crc = i;
- for (ImU32 j = 0; j < 8; j++)
- crc = (crc >> 1) ^ (ImU32(-int(crc & 1)) & polynomial);
- crc32_lut[i] = crc;
- }
- }
+ ImU32 crc = ~seed;
+ const unsigned char* data = (const unsigned char*)data_p;
+ const ImU32* crc32_lut = GCrc32LookupTable;
+ while (data_size-- != 0)
+ crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ *data++];
+ return ~crc;
+}
+// Zero-terminated string hash, with support for ### to reset back to seed value
+// We support a syntax of "label###id" where only "###id" is included in the hash, and only "label" gets displayed.
+// Because this syntax is rarely used we are optimizing for the common case.
+// - If we reach ### in the string we discard the hash so far and reset to the seed.
+// - We don't do 'current += 2; continue;' after handling ### to keep the code smaller/faster (measured ~10% diff in Debug build)
+// FIXME-OPT: Replace with e.g. FNV1a hash? CRC32 pretty much randomly access 1KB. Need to do proper measurements.
+ImU32 ImHashStr(const char* data, size_t data_size, ImU32 seed)
+{
seed = ~seed;
ImU32 crc = seed;
- const unsigned char* current = (const unsigned char*)data;
-
- if (data_size > 0)
+ const unsigned char* src = (const unsigned char*)data;
+ const ImU32* crc32_lut = GCrc32LookupTable;
+ if (data_size != 0)
{
- // Known size
- while (data_size--)
- crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ *current++];
+ while (data_size-- != 0)
+ {
+ unsigned char c = *src++;
+ if (c == '#' && src[0] == '#' && src[1] == '#')
+ crc = seed;
+ crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ c];
+ }
}
else
{
- // Zero-terminated string
- while (unsigned char c = *current++)
+ while (unsigned char c = *src++)
{
- // We support a syntax of "label###id" where only "###id" is included in the hash, and only "label" gets displayed.
- // Because this syntax is rarely used we are optimizing for the common case.
- // - If we reach ### in the string we discard the hash so far and reset to the seed.
- // - We don't do 'current += 2; continue;' after handling ### to keep the code smaller.
- if (c == '#' && current[0] == '#' && current[1] == '#')
+ if (c == '#' && src[0] == '#' && src[1] == '#')
crc = seed;
crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ c];
}
return ~crc;
}
+FILE* ImFileOpen(const char* filename, const char* mode)
+{
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(__CYGWIN__) && !defined(__GNUC__)
+ // We need a fopen() wrapper because MSVC/Windows fopen doesn't handle UTF-8 filenames. Converting both strings from UTF-8 to wchar format (using a single allocation, because we can)
+ const int filename_wsize = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(filename, NULL) + 1;
+ const int mode_wsize = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(mode, NULL) + 1;
+ ImVector<ImWchar> buf;
+ buf.resize(filename_wsize + mode_wsize);
+ ImTextStrFromUtf8(&buf[0], filename_wsize, filename, NULL);
+ ImTextStrFromUtf8(&buf[filename_wsize], mode_wsize, mode, NULL);
+ return _wfopen((wchar_t*)&buf[0], (wchar_t*)&buf[filename_wsize]);
+#else
+ return fopen(filename, mode);
+#endif
+}
+
+// Load file content into memory
+// Memory allocated with ImGui::MemAlloc(), must be freed by user using ImGui::MemFree()
+void* ImFileLoadToMemory(const char* filename, const char* file_open_mode, size_t* out_file_size, int padding_bytes)
+{
+ IM_ASSERT(filename && file_open_mode);
+ if (out_file_size)
+ *out_file_size = 0;
+
+ FILE* f;
+ if ((f = ImFileOpen(filename, file_open_mode)) == NULL)
+ return NULL;
+
+ long file_size_signed;
+ if (fseek(f, 0, SEEK_END) || (file_size_signed = ftell(f)) == -1 || fseek(f, 0, SEEK_SET))
+ {
+ fclose(f);
+ return NULL;
+ }
+
+ size_t file_size = (size_t)file_size_signed;
+ void* file_data = ImGui::MemAlloc(file_size + padding_bytes);
+ if (file_data == NULL)
+ {
+ fclose(f);
+ return NULL;
+ }
+ if (fread(file_data, 1, file_size, f) != file_size)
+ {
+ fclose(f);
+ ImGui::MemFree(file_data);
+ return NULL;
+ }
+ if (padding_bytes > 0)
+ memset((void*)(((char*)file_data) + file_size), 0, (size_t)padding_bytes);
+
+ fclose(f);
+ if (out_file_size)
+ *out_file_size = file_size;
+
+ return file_data;
+}
+
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImText* helpers
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (ImText* functions)
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Convert UTF-8 to 32-bits character, process single character input.
}
}
+// Not optimal but we very rarely use this function.
+int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end)
+{
+ unsigned int dummy = 0;
+ return ImTextCharFromUtf8(&dummy, in_text, in_text_end);
+}
+
static inline int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(unsigned int c)
{
if (c < 0x80) return 1;
return bytes_count;
}
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPER/UTILTIES (Color functions)
+// Note: The Convert functions are early design which are not consistent with other API.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
ImVec4 ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in)
{
float s = 1.0f/255.0f;
return out;
}
-ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul)
-{
- ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
- ImVec4 c = style.Colors[idx];
- c.w *= style.Alpha * alpha_mul;
- return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c);
-}
-
-ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(const ImVec4& col)
-{
- ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
- ImVec4 c = col;
- c.w *= style.Alpha;
- return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c);
-}
-
-const ImVec4& ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx)
-{
- ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
- return style.Colors[idx];
-}
-
-ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImU32 col)
-{
- float style_alpha = GImGui->Style.Alpha;
- if (style_alpha >= 1.0f)
- return col;
- ImU32 a = (col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT;
- a = (ImU32)(a * style_alpha); // We don't need to clamp 0..255 because Style.Alpha is in 0..1 range.
- return (col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (a << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT);
-}
-
// Convert rgb floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]) to hsv floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]), from Foley & van Dam p592
// Optimized http://lolengine.net/blog/2013/01/13/fast-rgb-to-hsv
void ImGui::ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float& out_h, float& out_s, float& out_v)
}
}
-FILE* ImFileOpen(const char* filename, const char* mode)
+ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul)
{
-#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(__CYGWIN__)
- // We need a fopen() wrapper because MSVC/Windows fopen doesn't handle UTF-8 filenames. Converting both strings from UTF-8 to wchar format (using a single allocation, because we can)
- const int filename_wsize = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(filename, NULL) + 1;
- const int mode_wsize = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(mode, NULL) + 1;
- ImVector<ImWchar> buf;
- buf.resize(filename_wsize + mode_wsize);
- ImTextStrFromUtf8(&buf[0], filename_wsize, filename, NULL);
- ImTextStrFromUtf8(&buf[filename_wsize], mode_wsize, mode, NULL);
- return _wfopen((wchar_t*)&buf[0], (wchar_t*)&buf[filename_wsize]);
-#else
- return fopen(filename, mode);
-#endif
+ ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
+ ImVec4 c = style.Colors[idx];
+ c.w *= style.Alpha * alpha_mul;
+ return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c);
}
-// Load file content into memory
-// Memory allocated with ImGui::MemAlloc(), must be freed by user using ImGui::MemFree()
-void* ImFileLoadToMemory(const char* filename, const char* file_open_mode, size_t* out_file_size, int padding_bytes)
+ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(const ImVec4& col)
{
- IM_ASSERT(filename && file_open_mode);
- if (out_file_size)
- *out_file_size = 0;
-
- FILE* f;
- if ((f = ImFileOpen(filename, file_open_mode)) == NULL)
- return NULL;
-
- long file_size_signed;
- if (fseek(f, 0, SEEK_END) || (file_size_signed = ftell(f)) == -1 || fseek(f, 0, SEEK_SET))
- {
- fclose(f);
- return NULL;
- }
-
- size_t file_size = (size_t)file_size_signed;
- void* file_data = ImGui::MemAlloc(file_size + padding_bytes);
- if (file_data == NULL)
- {
- fclose(f);
- return NULL;
- }
- if (fread(file_data, 1, file_size, f) != file_size)
- {
- fclose(f);
- ImGui::MemFree(file_data);
- return NULL;
- }
- if (padding_bytes > 0)
- memset((void *)(((char*)file_data) + file_size), 0, (size_t)padding_bytes);
+ ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
+ ImVec4 c = col;
+ c.w *= style.Alpha;
+ return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c);
+}
- fclose(f);
- if (out_file_size)
- *out_file_size = file_size;
+const ImVec4& ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx)
+{
+ ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
+ return style.Colors[idx];
+}
- return file_data;
+ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImU32 col)
+{
+ float style_alpha = GImGui->Style.Alpha;
+ if (style_alpha >= 1.0f)
+ return col;
+ ImU32 a = (col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT;
+ a = (ImU32)(a * style_alpha); // We don't need to clamp 0..255 because Style.Alpha is in 0..1 range.
+ return (col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (a << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT);
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImGuiStorage
+// [SECTION] ImGuiStorage
// Helper: Key->value storage
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// std::lower_bound but without the bullshit
-static Im
Vector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>::iterator LowerBound(ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>& data, ImGuiID key)
+static Im
GuiStorage::Pair* LowerBound(ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>& data, ImGuiID key)
{
- ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>::iterator first = data.begin();
- ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>::iterator last = data.end();
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* first = data.Data;
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* last = data.Data + data.Size;
size_t count = (size_t)(last - first);
while (count > 0)
{
size_t count2 = count >> 1;
- ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>::iterator mid = first + count2;
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* mid = first + count2;
if (mid->key < key)
{
first = ++mid;
int ImGuiStorage::GetInt(ImGuiID key, int default_val) const
{
- Im
Vector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
+ Im
GuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
return default_val;
return it->val_i;
float ImGuiStorage::GetFloat(ImGuiID key, float default_val) const
{
- Im
Vector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
+ Im
GuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
return default_val;
return it->val_f;
void* ImGuiStorage::GetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key) const
{
- Im
Vector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
+ Im
GuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
return NULL;
return it->val_p;
// References are only valid until a new value is added to the storage. Calling a Set***() function or a Get***Ref() function invalidates the pointer.
int* ImGuiStorage::GetIntRef(ImGuiID key, int default_val)
{
- ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
it = Data.insert(it, Pair(key, default_val));
return &it->val_i;
float* ImGuiStorage::GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val)
{
- ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
it = Data.insert(it, Pair(key, default_val));
return &it->val_f;
void** ImGuiStorage::GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void* default_val)
{
- ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
it = Data.insert(it, Pair(key, default_val));
return &it->val_p;
// FIXME-OPT: Need a way to reuse the result of lower_bound when doing GetInt()/SetInt() - not too bad because it only happens on explicit interaction (maximum one a frame)
void ImGuiStorage::SetInt(ImGuiID key, int val)
{
- ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
{
Data.insert(it, Pair(key, val));
void ImGuiStorage::SetFloat(ImGuiID key, float val)
{
- ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
{
Data.insert(it, Pair(key, val));
void ImGuiStorage::SetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key, void* val)
{
- ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+ ImGuiStorage::Pair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
{
Data.insert(it, Pair(key, val));
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImGuiTextFilter
+// [SECTION] ImGuiTextFilter
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]"
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImGuiTextBuffer
+// [SECTION] ImGuiTextBuffer
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// On some platform vsnprintf() takes va_list by reference and modifies it.
// va_copy is the 'correct' way to copy a va_list but Visual Studio prior to 2013 doesn't have it.
#ifndef va_copy
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#define va_copy(dest, src) __builtin_va_copy(dest, src)
+#else
#define va_copy(dest, src) (dest = src)
#endif
+#endif
-// Helper: Text buffer for logging/accumulating text
-void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args)
-{
- va_list args_copy;
- va_copy(args_copy, args);
+char ImGuiTextBuffer::EmptyString[1] = { 0 };
- int len = ImFormatStringV(NULL, 0, fmt, args); // FIXME-OPT: could do a first pass write attempt, likely successful on first pass.
- if (len <= 0)
- {
- va_end(args_copy);
- return;
- }
+void ImGuiTextBuffer::append(const char* str, const char* str_end)
+{
+ int len = str_end ? (int)(str_end - str) : (int)strlen(str);
- const int write_off = Buf.Size;
+ // Add zero-terminator the first time
+ const int write_off = (Buf.Size != 0) ? Buf.Size : 1;
const int needed_sz = write_off + len;
if (write_off + len >= Buf.Capacity)
{
- int double_capacity = Buf.Capacity * 2;
- Buf.reserve(needed_sz > double_capacity ? needed_sz : double_capacity);
+ int new_capacity = Buf.Capacity * 2;
+ Buf.reserve(needed_sz > new_capacity ? needed_sz : new_capacity);
}
Buf.resize(needed_sz);
- ImFormatStringV(&Buf[write_off - 1], (size_t)len + 1, fmt, args_copy);
- va_end(args_copy);
+ memcpy(&Buf[write_off - 1], str, (size_t)len);
+ Buf[write_off - 1 + len] = 0;
}
void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendf(const char* fmt, ...)
va_end(args);
}
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImGuiSimpleColumns (internal use only)
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-ImGuiMenuColumns::ImGuiMenuColumns()
+// Helper: Text buffer for logging/accumulating text
+void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
- Count = 0;
- Spacing = Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
- memset(Pos, 0, sizeof(Pos));
- memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
-}
+ va_list args_copy;
+ va_copy(args_copy, args);
-void ImGuiMenuColumns::Update(int count, float spacing, bool clear)
-{
- IM_ASSERT(Count <= IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos));
- Count = count;
- Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
- Spacing = spacing;
- if (clear) memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
- for (int i = 0; i < Count; i++)
+ int len = ImFormatStringV(NULL, 0, fmt, args); // FIXME-OPT: could do a first pass write attempt, likely successful on first pass.
+ if (len <= 0)
{
- if (i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f)
- Width += Spacing;
- Pos[i] = (float)(int)Width;
- Width += NextWidths[i];
- NextWidths[i] = 0.0f;
+ va_end(args_copy);
+ return;
}
-}
-float ImGuiMenuColumns::DeclColumns(float w0, float w1, float w2) // not using va_arg because they promote float to double
-{
- NextWidth = 0.0f;
- NextWidths[0] = ImMax(NextWidths[0], w0);
- NextWidths[1] = ImMax(NextWidths[1], w1);
- NextWidths[2] = ImMax(NextWidths[2], w2);
- for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++)
- NextWidth += NextWidths[i] + ((i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f) ? Spacing : 0.0f);
- return ImMax(Width, NextWidth);
-}
+ // Add zero-terminator the first time
+ const int write_off = (Buf.Size != 0) ? Buf.Size : 1;
+ const int needed_sz = write_off + len;
+ if (write_off + len >= Buf.Capacity)
+ {
+ int new_capacity = Buf.Capacity * 2;
+ Buf.reserve(needed_sz > new_capacity ? needed_sz : new_capacity);
+ }
-float ImGuiMenuColumns::CalcExtraSpace(float avail_w)
-{
- return ImMax(0.0f, avail_w - Width);
+ Buf.resize(needed_sz);
+ ImFormatStringV(&Buf[write_off - 1], (size_t)len + 1, fmt, args_copy);
+ va_end(args_copy);
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImGuiListClipper
+// [SECTION] ImGuiListClipper
+// This is currently not as flexible/powerful as it should be, needs some rework (see TODO)
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
static void SetCursorPosYAndSetupDummyPrevLine(float pos_y, float line_height)
{
- // Set cursor position and a few other things so that SetScrollHere() and Columns() can work when seeking cursor.
+ // Set cursor position and a few other things so that SetScrollHereY() and Columns() can work when seeking cursor.
// FIXME: It is problematic that we have to do that here, because custom/equivalent end-user code would stumble on the same issue.
// The clipper should probably have a 4th step to display the last item in a regular manner.
ImGui::SetCursorPosY(pos_y);
ImGuiWindow* window = ImGui::GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y - line_height; // Setting those fields so that SetScrollHere() can properly function after the end of our clipper usage.
- window->DC.PrevLineHeight = (line_height - GImGui->Style.ItemSpacing.y); // If we end up needing more accurate data (to e.g. use SameLine) we may as well make the clipper have a fourth step to let user process and display the last item in their list.
+ window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y - line_height; // Setting those fields so that SetScrollHereY() can properly function after the end of our clipper usage.
+ window->DC.PrevLineSize.y = (line_height - GImGui->Style.ItemSpacing.y); // If we end up needing more accurate data (to e.g. use SameLine) we may as well make the clipper have a fourth step to let user process and display the last item in their list.
if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
window->DC.ColumnsSet->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y; // Setting this so that cell Y position are set properly
}
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImGuiWindow
+// [SECTION] RENDER HELPERS
+// Those (internal) functions are currently quite a legacy mess - their signature and behavior will change.
+// Also see imgui_draw.cpp for some more which have been reworked to not rely on ImGui:: state.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+const char* ImGui::FindRenderedTextEnd(const char* text, const char* text_end)
+{
+ const char* text_display_end = text;
+ if (!text_end)
+ text_end = (const char*)-1;
+
+ while (text_display_end < text_end && *text_display_end != '\0' && (text_display_end[0] != '#' || text_display_end[1] != '#'))
+ text_display_end++;
+ return text_display_end;
+}
+
+// Internal ImGui functions to render text
+// RenderText***() functions calls ImDrawList::AddText() calls ImBitmapFont::RenderText()
+void ImGui::RenderText(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_hash)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ // Hide anything after a '##' string
+ const char* text_display_end;
+ if (hide_text_after_hash)
+ {
+ text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (!text_end)
+ text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
+ text_display_end = text_end;
+ }
+
+ if (text != text_display_end)
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end);
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_display_end);
+ }
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderTextWrapped(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ if (!text_end)
+ text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
+
+ if (text != text_end)
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_end, wrap_width);
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_end);
+ }
+}
+
+// Default clip_rect uses (pos_min,pos_max)
+// Handle clipping on CPU immediately (vs typically let the GPU clip the triangles that are overlapping the clipping rectangle edges)
+void ImGui::RenderTextClippedEx(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_display_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align, const ImRect* clip_rect)
+{
+ // Perform CPU side clipping for single clipped element to avoid using scissor state
+ ImVec2 pos = pos_min;
+ const ImVec2 text_size = text_size_if_known ? *text_size_if_known : CalcTextSize(text, text_display_end, false, 0.0f);
+
+ const ImVec2* clip_min = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Min : &pos_min;
+ const ImVec2* clip_max = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Max : &pos_max;
+ bool need_clipping = (pos.x + text_size.x >= clip_max->x) || (pos.y + text_size.y >= clip_max->y);
+ if (clip_rect) // If we had no explicit clipping rectangle then pos==clip_min
+ need_clipping |= (pos.x < clip_min->x) || (pos.y < clip_min->y);
+
+ // Align whole block. We should defer that to the better rendering function when we'll have support for individual line alignment.
+ if (align.x > 0.0f) pos.x = ImMax(pos.x, pos.x + (pos_max.x - pos.x - text_size.x) * align.x);
+ if (align.y > 0.0f) pos.y = ImMax(pos.y, pos.y + (pos_max.y - pos.y - text_size.y) * align.y);
+
+ // Render
+ if (need_clipping)
+ {
+ ImVec4 fine_clip_rect(clip_min->x, clip_min->y, clip_max->x, clip_max->y);
+ draw_list->AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, &fine_clip_rect);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ draw_list->AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, NULL);
+ }
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderTextClipped(const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align, const ImRect* clip_rect)
+{
+ // Hide anything after a '##' string
+ const char* text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
+ const int text_len = (int)(text_display_end - text);
+ if (text_len == 0)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ RenderTextClippedEx(window->DrawList, pos_min, pos_max, text, text_display_end, text_size_if_known, align, clip_rect);
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ LogRenderedText(&pos_min, text, text_display_end);
+}
+
+// Render a rectangle shaped with optional rounding and borders
+void ImGui::RenderFrame(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, bool border, float rounding)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, fill_col, rounding);
+ const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize;
+ if (border && border_size > 0.0f)
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min+ImVec2(1,1), p_max+ImVec2(1,1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
+ }
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, float rounding)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize;
+ if (border_size > 0.0f)
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min+ImVec2(1,1), p_max+ImVec2(1,1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
+ }
+}
+
+// Render an arrow aimed to be aligned with text (p_min is a position in the same space text would be positioned). To e.g. denote expanded/collapsed state
+void ImGui::RenderArrow(ImVec2 p_min, ImGuiDir dir, float scale)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+ const float h = g.FontSize * 1.00f;
+ float r = h * 0.40f * scale;
+ ImVec2 center = p_min + ImVec2(h * 0.50f, h * 0.50f * scale);
+
+ ImVec2 a, b, c;
+ switch (dir)
+ {
+ case ImGuiDir_Up:
+ case ImGuiDir_Down:
+ if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) r = -r;
+ a = ImVec2(+0.000f,+0.750f) * r;
+ b = ImVec2(-0.866f,-0.750f) * r;
+ c = ImVec2(+0.866f,-0.750f) * r;
+ break;
+ case ImGuiDir_Left:
+ case ImGuiDir_Right:
+ if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) r = -r;
+ a = ImVec2(+0.750f,+0.000f) * r;
+ b = ImVec2(-0.750f,+0.866f) * r;
+ c = ImVec2(-0.750f,-0.866f) * r;
+ break;
+ case ImGuiDir_None:
+ case ImGuiDir_COUNT:
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->AddTriangleFilled(center + a, center + b, center + c, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderBullet(ImVec2 pos)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(pos, g.FontSize*0.20f, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), 8);
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderCheckMark(ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, float sz)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ float thickness = ImMax(sz / 5.0f, 1.0f);
+ sz -= thickness*0.5f;
+ pos += ImVec2(thickness*0.25f, thickness*0.25f);
+
+ float third = sz / 3.0f;
+ float bx = pos.x + third;
+ float by = pos.y + sz - third*0.5f;
+ window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx - third, by - third));
+ window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx, by));
+ window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx + third*2, by - third*2));
+ window->DrawList->PathStroke(col, false, thickness);
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderNavHighlight(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (id != g.NavId)
+ return;
+ if (g.NavDisableHighlight && !(flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw))
+ return;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame)
+ return;
+
+ float rounding = (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding) ? 0.0f : g.Style.FrameRounding;
+ ImRect display_rect = bb;
+ display_rect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
+ if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault)
+ {
+ const float THICKNESS = 2.0f;
+ const float DISTANCE = 3.0f + THICKNESS * 0.5f;
+ display_rect.Expand(ImVec2(DISTANCE,DISTANCE));
+ bool fully_visible = window->ClipRect.Contains(display_rect);
+ if (!fully_visible)
+ window->DrawList->PushClipRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max);
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min + ImVec2(THICKNESS*0.5f,THICKNESS*0.5f), display_rect.Max - ImVec2(THICKNESS*0.5f,THICKNESS*0.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, THICKNESS);
+ if (!fully_visible)
+ window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+ }
+ if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin)
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, ~0, 1.0f);
+ }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MAIN CODE (most of the code! lots of stuff, needs tidying up!)
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// ImGuiWindow is mostly a dumb struct. It merely has a constructor and a few helper methods
ImGuiWindow::ImGuiWindow(ImGuiContext* context, const char* name)
: DrawListInst(&context->DrawListSharedData)
{
Name = ImStrdup(name);
- ID = ImHash(name, 0);
+ ID = ImHashStr(name, 0);
IDStack.push_back(ID);
- Flags = 0;
+ Flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_None;
Pos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
Size = SizeFull = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
SizeContents = SizeContentsExplicit = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
WindowPadding = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
WindowRounding = 0.0f;
WindowBorderSize = 0.0f;
+ NameBufLen = (int)strlen(name) + 1;
MoveId = GetID("#MOVE");
ChildId = 0;
Scroll = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
Active = WasActive = false;
WriteAccessed = false;
Collapsed = false;
- CollapseToggleWanted = false;
+ WantCollapseToggle = false;
SkipItems = false;
Appearing = false;
Hidden = false;
HasCloseButton = false;
+ ResizeBorderHeld = -1;
+ BeginCount = 0;
BeginOrderWithinParent = -1;
BeginOrderWithinContext = -1;
- BeginCount = 0;
PopupId = 0;
AutoFitFramesX = AutoFitFramesY = -1;
AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(const char* str, const char* str_end)
{
ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
- ImGuiID id = ImHash(str, str_end ? (int)(str_end - str) : 0, seed);
+ ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(str, str_end ? (str_end - str) : 0, seed);
ImGui::KeepAliveID(id);
return id;
}
ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(const void* ptr)
{
ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
- ImGuiID id = ImHash(&ptr, sizeof(void*), seed);
+ ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&ptr, sizeof(void*), seed);
ImGui::KeepAliveID(id);
return id;
}
ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetIDNoKeepAlive(const char* str, const char* str_end)
{
ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
- return ImHash(str, str_end ? (int)(str_end - str) : 0, seed);
+ return ImHashStr(str, str_end ? (str_end - str) : 0, seed);
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetIDNoKeepAlive(const void* ptr)
+{
+ ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
+ return ImHashData(&ptr, sizeof(void*), seed);
}
// This is only used in rare/specific situations to manufacture an ID out of nowhere.
{
ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
const int r_rel[4] = { (int)(r_abs.Min.x - Pos.x), (int)(r_abs.Min.y - Pos.y), (int)(r_abs.Max.x - Pos.x), (int)(r_abs.Max.y - Pos.y) };
- ImGuiID id = ImHash(&r_rel, sizeof(r_rel), seed);
+ ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&r_rel, sizeof(r_rel), seed);
ImGui::KeepAliveID(id);
return id;
}
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Internal API exposed in imgui_internal.h
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
static void SetCurrentWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize();
}
-static void SetNavID(ImGuiID id, int nav_layer)
+void ImGui::SetNavID(ImGuiID id, int nav_layer)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow);
g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[nav_layer] = id;
}
-static void SetNavIDWithRectRel(ImGuiID id, int nav_layer, const ImRect& rect_rel)
+void ImGui::SetNavIDWithRectRel(ImGuiID id, int nav_layer, const ImRect& rect_rel)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
SetNavID(id, nav_layer);
if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
{
g.ActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
- g.ActiveIdValueChanged = false;
+ g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressed = false;
+ g.ActiveIdHasBeenEdited = false;
if (id != 0)
{
g.LastActiveId = id;
}
g.ActiveId = id;
g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = 0;
+ g.ActiveIdBlockNavInputFlags = 0;
g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
g.ActiveIdWindow = window;
if (id)
{
- g.ActiveIdIsAlive = true;
+ g.ActiveIdIsAlive = id;
g.ActiveIdSource = (g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id || g.NavJustTabbedId == id || g.NavJustMovedToId == id) ? ImGuiInputSource_Nav : ImGuiInputSource_Mouse;
}
}
+// FIXME-NAV: The existence of SetNavID/SetNavIDWithRectRel/SetFocusID is incredibly messy and confusing and needs some explanation or refactoring.
void ImGui::SetFocusID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
// Assume that SetFocusID() is called in the context where its NavLayer is the current layer, which is the case everywhere we call it.
- const int nav_layer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
+ const ImGuiNavLayer nav_layer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
if (g.NavWindow != window)
g.NavInitRequest = false;
g.NavId = id;
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
g.HoveredId = id;
g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
- g.HoveredIdTimer = (id != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id) ? (g.HoveredIdTimer + g.IO.DeltaTime) : 0.0f;
+ if (id != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id)
+ g.HoveredIdTimer = g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f;
}
ImGuiID ImGui::GetHoveredID()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
if (g.ActiveId == id)
- g.ActiveIdIsAlive = true;
+ g.ActiveIdIsAlive = id;
if (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == id)
g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = true;
}
-void ImGui::MarkItemValueChanged(ImGuiID id)
+void ImGui::MarkItemEdited(ImGuiID id)
{
- // This marking is solely to be able to provide info for IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange().
+ // This marking is solely to be able to provide info for IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit().
// ActiveId might have been released by the time we call this (as in the typical press/release button behavior) but still need need to fill the data.
- (void)id; // Avoid unused variable warnings when asserts are compiled out.
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == 0 || g.DragDropActive);
- g.ActiveIdValueChanged = true;
+ IM_UNUSED(id); // Avoid unused variable warnings when asserts are compiled out.
+ //IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId == id);
+ g.ActiveIdHasBeenEdited = true;
+ g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited;
}
static inline bool IsWindowContentHoverable(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
return;
// Always align ourselves on pixel boundaries
- const float line_height = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineHeight, size.y);
+ const float line_height = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y, size.y);
const float text_base_offset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset, text_offset_y);
//if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(size.x, line_height), IM_COL32(255,0,0,200)); // [DEBUG]
window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + size.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
- window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2((float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.IndentX + window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX), (float)(int)(window->DC.CursorPos.y + line_height + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y));
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
+ window->DC.CursorPos.y = (float)(int)(window->DC.CursorPos.y + line_height + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y);
window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x);
window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y);
//if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddCircle(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, 3.0f, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255), 4); // [DEBUG]
- window->DC.PrevLineHeight = line_height;
+ window->DC.PrevLineSize.y = line_height;
window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = text_base_offset;
- window->DC.CurrentLineHeight = window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
+ window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y = window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
// Horizontal layout mode
if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), text_offset_y);
}
-static ImGuiDir inline NavScoreItemGetQuadrant(float dx, float dy)
+// Declare item bounding box for clipping and interaction.
+// Note that the size can be different than the one provided to ItemSize(). Typically, widgets that spread over available surface
+// declare their minimum size requirement to ItemSize() and then use a larger region for drawing/interaction, which is passed to ItemAdd().
+bool ImGui::ItemAdd(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const ImRect* nav_bb_arg)
{
- if (ImFabs(dx) > ImFabs(dy))
- return (dx > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Left;
- return (dy > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Up;
-}
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-static float inline NavScoreItemDistInterval(float a0, float a1, float b0, float b1)
-{
- if (a1 < b0)
- return a1 - b0;
- if (b1 < a0)
- return a0 - b1;
- return 0.0f;
-}
-
-static void inline NavClampRectToVisibleAreaForMoveDir(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImRect& r, const ImRect& clip_rect)
-{
- if (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right)
- {
- r.Min.y = ImClamp(r.Min.y, clip_rect.Min.y, clip_rect.Max.y);
- r.Max.y = ImClamp(r.Max.y, clip_rect.Min.y, clip_rect.Max.y);
- }
- else
+ if (id != 0)
{
- r.Min.x = ImClamp(r.Min.x, clip_rect.Min.x, clip_rect.Max.x);
- r.Max.x = ImClamp(r.Max.x, clip_rect.Min.x, clip_rect.Max.x);
+ // Navigation processing runs prior to clipping early-out
+ // (a) So that NavInitRequest can be honored, for newly opened windows to select a default widget
+ // (b) So that we can scroll up/down past clipped items. This adds a small O(N) cost to regular navigation requests unfortunately, but it is still limited to one window.
+ // it may not scale very well for windows with ten of thousands of item, but at least NavMoveRequest is only set on user interaction, aka maximum once a frame.
+ // We could early out with "if (is_clipped && !g.NavInitRequest) return false;" but when we wouldn't be able to reach unclipped widgets. This would work if user had explicit scrolling control (e.g. mapped on a stick)
+ window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext |= window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask;
+ if (g.NavId == id || g.NavAnyRequest)
+ if (g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav)
+ if (window == g.NavWindow || ((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened))
+ NavProcessItem(window, nav_bb_arg ? *nav_bb_arg : bb, id);
}
+
+ window->DC.LastItemId = id;
+ window->DC.LastItemRect = bb;
+ window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags = ImGuiItemStatusFlags_None;
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+ if (id != 0)
+ ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(&g, nav_bb_arg ? *nav_bb_arg : bb, id);
+#endif
+
+ // Clipping test
+ const bool is_clipped = IsClippedEx(bb, id, false);
+ if (is_clipped)
+ return false;
+ //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,120)); // [DEBUG]
+
+ // We need to calculate this now to take account of the current clipping rectangle (as items like Selectable may change them)
+ if (IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max))
+ window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect;
+ return true;
}
-// Scoring function for directional navigation. Based on https://gist.github.com/rygorous/6981057
-static bool NavScoreItem(ImGuiNavMoveResult* result, ImRect cand)
+// This is roughly matching the behavior of internal-facing ItemHoverable()
+// - we allow hovering to be true when ActiveId==window->MoveID, so that clicking on non-interactive items such as a Text() item still returns true with IsItemHovered()
+// - this should work even for non-interactive items that have no ID, so we cannot use LastItemId
+bool ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (g.NavLayer != window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
+ if (g.NavDisableMouseHover && !g.NavDisableHighlight)
+ return IsItemFocused();
+
+ // Test for bounding box overlap, as updated as ItemAdd()
+ if (!(window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect))
return false;
+ IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows)) == 0); // Flags not supported by this function
- const ImRect& curr = g.NavScoringRectScreen; // Current modified source rect (NB: we've applied Max.x = Min.x in NavUpdate() to inhibit the effect of having varied item width)
- g.NavScoringCount++;
+ // Test if we are hovering the right window (our window could be behind another window)
+ // [2017/10/16] Reverted commit 344d48be3 and testing RootWindow instead. I believe it is correct to NOT test for RootWindow but this leaves us unable to use IsItemHovered() after EndChild() itself.
+ // Until a solution is found I believe reverting to the test from 2017/09/27 is safe since this was the test that has been running for a long while.
+ //if (g.HoveredWindow != window)
+ // return false;
+ if (g.HoveredRootWindow != window->RootWindow && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped))
+ return false;
- // When entering through a NavFlattened border, we consider child window items as fully clipped for scoring
- if (window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow)
- {
- IM_ASSERT((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
- if (!window->ClipRect.Contains(cand))
+ // Test if another item is active (e.g. being dragged)
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
+ if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != window->DC.LastItemId && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != window->MoveId)
return false;
- cand.ClipWithFull(window->ClipRect); // This allows the scored item to not overlap other candidates in the parent window
- }
-
- // We perform scoring on items bounding box clipped by the current clipping rectangle on the other axis (clipping on our movement axis would give us equal scores for all clipped items)
- // For example, this ensure that items in one column are not reached when moving vertically from items in another column.
- NavClampRectToVisibleAreaForMoveDir(g.NavMoveClipDir, cand, window->ClipRect);
-
- // Compute distance between boxes
- // FIXME-NAV: Introducing biases for vertical navigation, needs to be removed.
- float dbx = NavScoreItemDistInterval(cand.Min.x, cand.Max.x, curr.Min.x, curr.Max.x);
- float dby = NavScoreItemDistInterval(ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.8f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.8f)); // Scale down on Y to keep using box-distance for vertically touching items
- if (dby != 0.0f && dbx != 0.0f)
- dbx = (dbx/1000.0f) + ((dbx > 0.0f) ? +1.0f : -1.0f);
- float dist_box = ImFabs(dbx) + ImFabs(dby);
-
- // Compute distance between centers (this is off by a factor of 2, but we only compare center distances with each other so it doesn't matter)
- float dcx = (cand.Min.x + cand.Max.x) - (curr.Min.x + curr.Max.x);
- float dcy = (cand.Min.y + cand.Max.y) - (curr.Min.y + curr.Max.y);
- float dist_center = ImFabs(dcx) + ImFabs(dcy); // L1 metric (need this for our connectedness guarantee)
-
- // Determine which quadrant of 'curr' our candidate item 'cand' lies in based on distance
- ImGuiDir quadrant;
- float dax = 0.0f, day = 0.0f, dist_axial = 0.0f;
- if (dbx != 0.0f || dby != 0.0f)
- {
- // For non-overlapping boxes, use distance between boxes
- dax = dbx;
- day = dby;
- dist_axial = dist_box;
- quadrant = NavScoreItemGetQuadrant(dbx, dby);
- }
- else if (dcx != 0.0f || dcy != 0.0f)
- {
- // For overlapping boxes with different centers, use distance between centers
- dax = dcx;
- day = dcy;
- dist_axial = dist_center;
- quadrant = NavScoreItemGetQuadrant(dcx, dcy);
- }
- else
- {
- // Degenerate case: two overlapping buttons with same center, break ties arbitrarily (note that LastItemId here is really the _previous_ item order, but it doesn't matter)
- quadrant = (window->DC.LastItemId < g.NavId) ? ImGuiDir_Left : ImGuiDir_Right;
- }
-
-#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
- char buf[128];
- if (ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(cand.Min, cand.Max))
- {
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "dbox (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\ndcen (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\nd (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\nnav %c, quadrant %c", dbx, dby, dist_box, dcx, dcy, dist_center, dax, day, dist_axial, "WENS"[g.NavMoveDir], "WENS"[quadrant]);
- ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList();
- draw_list->AddRect(curr.Min, curr.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,100));
- draw_list->AddRect(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,200));
- draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Max-ImVec2(4,4), cand.Max+ImGui::CalcTextSize(buf)+ImVec2(4,4), IM_COL32(40,0,0,150));
- draw_list->AddText(g.IO.FontDefault, 13.0f, cand.Max, ~0U, buf);
- }
- else if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) // Hold to preview score in matching quadrant. Press C to rotate.
- {
- if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C)) { g.NavMoveDirLast = (ImGuiDir)((g.NavMoveDirLast + 1) & 3); g.IO.KeysDownDuration[g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_C]] = 0.01f; }
- if (quadrant == g.NavMoveDir)
- {
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%.0f/%.0f", dist_box, dist_center);
- ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList();
- draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200));
- draw_list->AddText(g.IO.FontDefault, 13.0f, cand.Min, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
- }
- }
- #endif
- // Is it in the quadrant we're interesting in moving to?
- bool new_best = false;
- if (quadrant == g.NavMoveDir)
- {
- // Does it beat the current best candidate?
- if (dist_box < result->DistBox)
- {
- result->DistBox = dist_box;
- result->DistCenter = dist_center;
- return true;
- }
- if (dist_box == result->DistBox)
- {
- // Try using distance between center points to break ties
- if (dist_center < result->DistCenter)
- {
- result->DistCenter = dist_center;
- new_best = true;
- }
- else if (dist_center == result->DistCenter)
- {
- // Still tied! we need to be extra-careful to make sure everything gets linked properly. We consistently break ties by symbolically moving "later" items
- // (with higher index) to the right/downwards by an infinitesimal amount since we the current "best" button already (so it must have a lower index),
- // this is fairly easy. This rule ensures that all buttons with dx==dy==0 will end up being linked in order of appearance along the x axis.
- if (((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? dby : dbx) < 0.0f) // moving bj to the right/down decreases distance
- new_best = true;
- }
- }
- }
+ // Test if interactions on this window are blocked by an active popup or modal
+ if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(window, flags))
+ return false;
- // Axial check: if 'curr' has no link at all in some direction and 'cand' lies roughly in that direction, add a tentative link. This will only be kept if no "real" matches
- // are found, so it only augments the graph produced by the above method using extra links. (important, since it doesn't guarantee strong connectedness)
- // This is just to avoid buttons having no links in a particular direction when there's a suitable neighbor. you get good graphs without this too.
- // 2017/09/29: FIXME: This now currently only enabled inside menu bars, ideally we'd disable it everywhere. Menus in particular need to catch failure. For general navigation it feels awkward.
- // Disabling it may lead to disconnected graphs when nodes are very spaced out on different axis. Perhaps consider offering this as an option?
- if (result->DistBox == FLT_MAX && dist_axial < result->DistAxial) // Check axial match
- if (g.NavLayer == 1 && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
- if ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && dax < 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && dax > 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up && day < 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down && day > 0.0f))
- {
- result->DistAxial = dist_axial;
- new_best = true;
- }
+ // Test if the item is disabled
+ if ((window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled))
+ return false;
- return new_best;
+ // Special handling for the dummy item after Begin() which represent the title bar or tab.
+ // When the window is collapsed (SkipItems==true) that last item will never be overwritten so we need to detect the case.
+ if (window->DC.LastItemId == window->MoveId && window->WriteAccessed)
+ return false;
+ return true;
}
-static void NavSaveLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* child_window)
+// Internal facing ItemHoverable() used when submitting widgets. Differs slightly from IsItemHovered().
+bool ImGui::ItemHoverable(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
{
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window = child_window;
- while (parent_window && (parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0 && (parent_window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0)
- parent_window = parent_window->ParentWindow;
- if (parent_window && parent_window != child_window)
- parent_window->NavLastChildNavWindow = child_window;
-}
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.HoveredId != 0 && g.HoveredId != id && !g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap)
+ return false;
-// Call when we are expected to land on Layer 0 after FocusWindow()
-static ImGuiWindow* NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- return window->NavLastChildNavWindow ? window->NavLastChildNavWindow : window;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (g.HoveredWindow != window)
+ return false;
+ if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != id && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap)
+ return false;
+ if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max))
+ return false;
+ if (g.NavDisableMouseHover || !IsWindowContentHoverable(window, ImGuiHoveredFlags_None))
+ return false;
+ if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled)
+ return false;
+
+ SetHoveredID(id);
+ return true;
}
-static void NavRestoreLayer(int layer)
+bool ImGui::IsClippedEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool clip_even_when_logged)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NavLayer = layer;
- if (layer == 0)
- g.NavWindow = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(g.NavWindow);
- if (layer == 0 && g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0] != 0)
- SetNavIDWithRectRel(g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0], layer, g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[0]);
- else
- ImGui::NavInitWindow(g.NavWindow, true);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (!bb.Overlaps(window->ClipRect))
+ if (id == 0 || id != g.ActiveId)
+ if (clip_even_when_logged || !g.LogEnabled)
+ return true;
+ return false;
}
-static inline void NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag()
+bool ImGui::FocusableItemRegister(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id, bool tab_stop)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NavAnyRequest = g.NavMoveRequest || g.NavInitRequest || (IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING && g.NavWindow != NULL);
- if (g.NavAnyRequest)
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL);
+
+ const bool is_tab_stop = (window->DC.ItemFlags & (ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop | ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled)) == 0;
+ window->FocusIdxAllCounter++;
+ if (is_tab_stop)
+ window->FocusIdxTabCounter++;
+
+ // Process keyboard input at this point: TAB/Shift-TAB to tab out of the currently focused item.
+ // Note that we can always TAB out of a widget that doesn't allow tabbing in.
+ if (tab_stop && (g.ActiveId == id) && window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext == INT_MAX && window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext == INT_MAX && !g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab))
+ window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = window->FocusIdxTabCounter + (g.IO.KeyShift ? (is_tab_stop ? -1 : 0) : +1); // Modulo on index will be applied at the end of frame once we've got the total counter of items.
+
+ if (window->FocusIdxAllCounter == window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent)
+ return true;
+ if (is_tab_stop && window->FocusIdxTabCounter == window->FocusIdxTabRequestCurrent)
+ {
+ g.NavJustTabbedId = id;
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ return false;
}
-static bool NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet()
+void ImGui::FocusableItemUnregister(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0;
+ window->FocusIdxAllCounter--;
+ window->FocusIdxTabCounter--;
}
-void ImGui::NavMoveRequestCancel()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NavMoveRequest = false;
- NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
-}
-
-// We get there when either NavId == id, or when g.NavAnyRequest is set (which is updated by NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag above)
-static void ImGui::NavProcessItem(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& nav_bb, const ImGuiID id)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- //if (!g.IO.NavActive) // [2017/10/06] Removed this possibly redundant test but I am not sure of all the side-effects yet. Some of the feature here will need to work regardless of using a _NoNavInputs flag.
- // return;
-
- const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = window->DC.ItemFlags;
- const ImRect nav_bb_rel(nav_bb.Min - window->Pos, nav_bb.Max - window->Pos);
-
- // Process Init Request
- if (g.NavInitRequest && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
- {
- // Even if 'ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus' is on (typically collapse/close button) we record the first ResultId so they can be used as a fallback
- if (!(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus) || g.NavInitResultId == 0)
- {
- g.NavInitResultId = id;
- g.NavInitResultRectRel = nav_bb_rel;
- }
- if (!(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus))
- {
- g.NavInitRequest = false; // Found a match, clear request
- NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
- }
- }
-
- // Process Move Request (scoring for navigation)
- // FIXME-NAV: Consider policy for double scoring (scoring from NavScoringRectScreen + scoring from a rect wrapped according to current wrapping policy)
- if ((g.NavId != id || (g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId)) && !(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav))
- {
- ImGuiNavMoveResult* result = (window == g.NavWindow) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : &g.NavMoveResultOther;
-#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
- // [DEBUG] Score all items in NavWindow at all times
- if (!g.NavMoveRequest)
- g.NavMoveDir = g.NavMoveDirLast;
- bool new_best = NavScoreItem(result, nav_bb) && g.NavMoveRequest;
-#else
- bool new_best = g.NavMoveRequest && NavScoreItem(result, nav_bb);
-#endif
- if (new_best)
- {
- result->ID = id;
- result->Window = window;
- result->RectRel = nav_bb_rel;
- }
-
- const float VISIBLE_RATIO = 0.70f;
- if ((g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet) && window->ClipRect.Overlaps(nav_bb))
- if (ImClamp(nav_bb.Max.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) - ImClamp(nav_bb.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) >= (nav_bb.Max.y - nav_bb.Min.y) * VISIBLE_RATIO)
- if (NavScoreItem(&g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet, nav_bb))
- {
- result = &g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet;
- result->ID = id;
- result->Window = window;
- result->RectRel = nav_bb_rel;
- }
- }
-
- // Update window-relative bounding box of navigated item
- if (g.NavId == id)
- {
- g.NavWindow = window; // Always refresh g.NavWindow, because some operations such as FocusItem() don't have a window.
- g.NavLayer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
- g.NavIdIsAlive = true;
- g.NavIdTabCounter = window->FocusIdxTabCounter;
- window->NavRectRel[window->DC.NavLayerCurrent] = nav_bb_rel; // Store item bounding box (relative to window position)
- }
-}
-
-// Declare item bounding box for clipping and interaction.
-// Note that the size can be different than the one provided to ItemSize(). Typically, widgets that spread over available surface
-// declare their minimum size requirement to ItemSize() and then use a larger region for drawing/interaction, which is passed to ItemAdd().
-bool ImGui::ItemAdd(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const ImRect* nav_bb_arg)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- if (id != 0)
- {
- // Navigation processing runs prior to clipping early-out
- // (a) So that NavInitRequest can be honored, for newly opened windows to select a default widget
- // (b) So that we can scroll up/down past clipped items. This adds a small O(N) cost to regular navigation requests unfortunately, but it is still limited to one window.
- // it may not scale very well for windows with ten of thousands of item, but at least NavMoveRequest is only set on user interaction, aka maximum once a frame.
- // We could early out with "if (is_clipped && !g.NavInitRequest) return false;" but when we wouldn't be able to reach unclipped widgets. This would work if user had explicit scrolling control (e.g. mapped on a stick)
- window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext |= window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask;
- if (g.NavId == id || g.NavAnyRequest)
- if (g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav)
- if (window == g.NavWindow || ((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened))
- NavProcessItem(window, nav_bb_arg ? *nav_bb_arg : bb, id);
- }
-
- window->DC.LastItemId = id;
- window->DC.LastItemRect = bb;
- window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags = 0;
-
- // Clipping test
- const bool is_clipped = IsClippedEx(bb, id, false);
- if (is_clipped)
- return false;
- //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,120)); // [DEBUG]
-
- // We need to calculate this now to take account of the current clipping rectangle (as items like Selectable may change them)
- if (IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max))
- window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect;
- return true;
-}
-
-// This is roughly matching the behavior of internal-facing ItemHoverable()
-// - we allow hovering to be true when ActiveId==window->MoveID, so that clicking on non-interactive items such as a Text() item still returns true with IsItemHovered()
-// - this should work even for non-interactive items that have no ID, so we cannot use LastItemId
-bool ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (g.NavDisableMouseHover && !g.NavDisableHighlight)
- return IsItemFocused();
-
- // Test for bounding box overlap, as updated as ItemAdd()
- if (!(window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect))
- return false;
- IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows)) == 0); // Flags not supported by this function
-
- // Test if we are hovering the right window (our window could be behind another window)
- // [2017/10/16] Reverted commit 344d48be3 and testing RootWindow instead. I believe it is correct to NOT test for RootWindow but this leaves us unable to use IsItemHovered() after EndChild() itself.
- // Until a solution is found I believe reverting to the test from 2017/09/27 is safe since this was the test that has been running for a long while.
- //if (g.HoveredWindow != window)
- // return false;
- if (g.HoveredRootWindow != window->RootWindow && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped))
- return false;
-
- // Test if another item is active (e.g. being dragged)
- if (!(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
- if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != window->DC.LastItemId && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != window->MoveId)
- return false;
-
- // Test if interactions on this window are blocked by an active popup or modal
- if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(window, flags))
- return false;
-
- // Test if the item is disabled
- if ((window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled))
- return false;
-
- // Special handling for the 1st item after Begin() which represent the title bar. When the window is collapsed (SkipItems==true) that last item will never be overwritten so we need to detect tht case.
- if (window->DC.LastItemId == window->MoveId && window->WriteAccessed)
- return false;
- return true;
-}
-
-// Internal facing ItemHoverable() used when submitting widgets. Differs slightly from IsItemHovered().
-bool ImGui::ItemHoverable(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.HoveredId != 0 && g.HoveredId != id && !g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (g.HoveredWindow != window)
- return false;
- if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != id && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap)
- return false;
- if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max))
- return false;
- if (g.NavDisableMouseHover || !IsWindowContentHoverable(window, ImGuiHoveredFlags_None))
- return false;
- if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled)
- return false;
-
- SetHoveredID(id);
- return true;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsClippedEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool clip_even_when_logged)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (!bb.Overlaps(window->ClipRect))
- if (id == 0 || id != g.ActiveId)
- if (clip_even_when_logged || !g.LogEnabled)
- return true;
- return false;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::FocusableItemRegister(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id, bool tab_stop)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- const bool allow_keyboard_focus = (window->DC.ItemFlags & (ImGuiItemFlags_AllowKeyboardFocus | ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled)) == ImGuiItemFlags_AllowKeyboardFocus;
- window->FocusIdxAllCounter++;
- if (allow_keyboard_focus)
- window->FocusIdxTabCounter++;
-
- // Process keyboard input at this point: TAB/Shift-TAB to tab out of the currently focused item.
- // Note that we can always TAB out of a widget that doesn't allow tabbing in.
- if (tab_stop && (g.ActiveId == id) && window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext == INT_MAX && window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext == INT_MAX && !g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab))
- window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = window->FocusIdxTabCounter + (g.IO.KeyShift ? (allow_keyboard_focus ? -1 : 0) : +1); // Modulo on index will be applied at the end of frame once we've got the total counter of items.
-
- if (window->FocusIdxAllCounter == window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent)
- return true;
- if (allow_keyboard_focus && window->FocusIdxTabCounter == window->FocusIdxTabRequestCurrent)
- {
- g.NavJustTabbedId = id;
- return true;
- }
-
- return false;
-}
-
-void ImGui::FocusableItemUnregister(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- window->FocusIdxAllCounter--;
- window->FocusIdxTabCounter--;
-}
-
-ImVec2 ImGui::CalcItemSize(ImVec2 size, float default_x, float default_y)
+ImVec2 ImGui::CalcItemSize(ImVec2 size, float default_x, float default_y)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImVec2 content_max;
return ImMax(wrap_pos_x - pos.x, 1.0f);
}
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
void* ImGui::MemAlloc(size_t size)
{
- GImAllocatorActiveAllocationsCount++;
+ if (ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui)
+ ctx->IO.MetricsActiveAllocations++;
return GImAllocatorAllocFunc(size, GImAllocatorUserData);
}
void ImGui::MemFree(void* ptr)
{
- if (ptr) GImAllocatorActiveAllocationsCount--;
+ if (ptr)
+ if (ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui)
+ ctx->IO.MetricsActiveAllocations--;
return GImAllocatorFreeFunc(ptr, GImAllocatorUserData);
}
bool ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(const char* version, size_t sz_io, size_t sz_style, size_t sz_vec2, size_t sz_vec4, size_t sz_vert)
{
bool error = false;
- if (strcmp(version, IMGUI_VERSION)!=0) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(strcmp(version,IMGUI_VERSION)==0 && "Mismatch version string!"); }
+ if (strcmp(version, IMGUI_VERSION)!=0) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(strcmp(version,IMGUI_VERSION)==0 && "Mismatched version string!"); }
if (sz_io != sizeof(ImGuiIO)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_io == sizeof(ImGuiIO) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
if (sz_style != sizeof(ImGuiStyle)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_style == sizeof(ImGuiStyle) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
if (sz_vec2 != sizeof(ImVec2)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vec2 == sizeof(ImVec2) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
return !error;
}
-void ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions(void* (*alloc_func)(size_t sz, void* user_data), void(*free_func)(void* ptr, void* user_data), void* user_data)
+void ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions(void* (*alloc_func)(size_t sz, void* user_data), void (*free_func)(void* ptr, void* user_data), void* user_data)
{
GImAllocatorAllocFunc = alloc_func;
GImAllocatorFreeFunc = free_func;
return GImGui->FrameCount;
}
-ImDrawList* ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList()
+static ImDrawList* GetOverlayDrawList(ImGuiWindow*)
{
+ // This seemingly unnecessary wrapper simplifies compatibility between the 'master' and 'viewport' branches.
return &GImGui->OverlayDrawList;
}
-ImDrawListSharedData* ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData()
+ImDrawList* ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList()
{
- return &GImGui->DrawListSharedData;
+ return &GImGui->OverlayDrawList;
}
-// This needs to be called before we submit any widget (aka in or before Begin)
-void ImGui::NavInitWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool force_reinit)
+ImDrawListSharedData* ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData()
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(window == g.NavWindow);
- bool init_for_nav = false;
- if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
- if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || (window->NavLastIds[0] == 0) || force_reinit)
- init_for_nav = true;
- if (init_for_nav)
- {
- SetNavID(0, g.NavLayer);
- g.NavInitRequest = true;
- g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
- g.NavInitResultId = 0;
- g.NavInitResultRectRel = ImRect();
- NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
- }
- else
- {
- g.NavId = window->NavLastIds[0];
- }
+ return &GImGui->DrawListSharedData;
}
-static ImVec2 NavCalcPreferredRefPos()
+void ImGui::StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
+ // Set ActiveId even if the _NoMove flag is set. Without it, dragging away from a window with _NoMove would activate hover on other windows.
+ // We _also_ call this when clicking in a window empty space when io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly is set, but clear g.MovingWindow afterward.
+ // This is because we want ActiveId to be set even when the window is not permitted to move.
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.NavDisableHighlight || !g.NavDisableMouseHover || !g.NavWindow)
- return ImFloor(g.IO.MousePos);
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ SetActiveID(window->MoveId, window);
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+ g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - window->RootWindow->Pos;
- // When navigation is active and mouse is disabled, decide on an arbitrary position around the bottom left of the currently navigated item
- const ImRect& rect_rel = g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer];
- ImVec2 pos = g.NavWindow->Pos + ImVec2(rect_rel.Min.x + ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.x*4, rect_rel.GetWidth()), rect_rel.Max.y - ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.y, rect_rel.GetHeight()));
- ImRect visible_rect = GetViewportRect();
- return ImFloor(ImClamp(pos, visible_rect.Min, visible_rect.Max)); // ImFloor() is important because non-integer mouse position application in back-end might be lossy and result in undesirable non-zero delta.
+ bool can_move_window = true;
+ if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove) || (window->RootWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
+ can_move_window = false;
+ if (can_move_window)
+ g.MovingWindow = window;
}
-static int FindWindowIndex(ImGuiWindow* window) // FIXME-OPT O(N)
+// Handle mouse moving window
+// Note: moving window with the navigation keys (Square + d-pad / CTRL+TAB + Arrows) are processed in NavUpdateWindowing()
+void ImGui::UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- for (int i = g.Windows.Size-1; i >= 0; i--)
- if (g.Windows[i] == window)
- return i;
- return -1;
+ if (g.MovingWindow != NULL)
+ {
+ // We actually want to move the root window. g.MovingWindow == window we clicked on (could be a child window).
+ // We track it to preserve Focus and so that generally ActiveIdWindow == MovingWindow and ActiveId == MovingWindow->MoveId for consistency.
+ KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.MovingWindow && g.MovingWindow->RootWindow);
+ ImGuiWindow* moving_window = g.MovingWindow->RootWindow;
+ if (g.IO.MouseDown[0] && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos))
+ {
+ ImVec2 pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset;
+ if (moving_window->Pos.x != pos.x || moving_window->Pos.y != pos.y)
+ {
+ MarkIniSettingsDirty(moving_window);
+ SetWindowPos(moving_window, pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
+ }
+ FocusWindow(g.MovingWindow);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ClearActiveID();
+ g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // When clicking/dragging from a window that has the _NoMove flag, we still set the ActiveId in order to prevent hovering others.
+ if (g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->MoveId == g.ActiveId)
+ {
+ KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId);
+ if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+ }
}
-static ImGuiWindow* FindWindowNavigable(int i_start, int i_stop, int dir) // FIXME-OPT O(N)
+// Initiate moving window, handle left-click and right-click focus
+void ImGui::UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame()
{
+ // Initiate moving window
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- for (int i = i_start; i >= 0 && i < g.Windows.Size && i != i_stop; i += dir)
- if (ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(g.Windows[i]))
- return g.Windows[i];
- return NULL;
-}
+ if (g.ActiveId != 0 || g.HoveredId != 0)
+ return;
-float ImGui::GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput n, ImGuiInputReadMode mode)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Down)
- return g.IO.NavInputs[n]; // Instant, read analog input (0.0f..1.0f, as provided by user)
+ // Unless we just made a window/popup appear
+ if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->Appearing)
+ return;
- const float t = g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[n];
- if (t < 0.0f && mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Released) // Return 1.0f when just released, no repeat, ignore analog input.
- return (g.IO.NavInputsDownDurationPrev[n] >= 0.0f ? 1.0f : 0.0f);
- if (t < 0.0f)
- return 0.0f;
- if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed) // Return 1.0f when just pressed, no repeat, ignore analog input.
- return (t == 0.0f) ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
- if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)
- return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.80f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.80f);
- if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow)
- return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 1.00f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 2.00f);
- if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast)
- return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.80f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.30f);
- return 0.0f;
-}
+ // Click to focus window and start moving (after we're done with all our widgets)
+ if (g.IO.MouseClicked[0])
+ {
+ if (g.HoveredRootWindow != NULL)
+ {
+ StartMouseMovingWindow(g.HoveredWindow);
+ if (g.IO.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly && !(g.HoveredRootWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
+ if (!g.HoveredRootWindow->TitleBarRect().Contains(g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0]))
+ g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+ }
+ else if (g.NavWindow != NULL && GetFrontMostPopupModal() == NULL)
+ {
+ // Clicking on void disable focus
+ FocusWindow(NULL);
+ }
+ }
-// Equivalent of IsKeyDown() for NavInputs[]
-static bool IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput n)
-{
- return GImGui->IO.NavInputs[n] > 0.0f;
+ // With right mouse button we close popups without changing focus
+ // (The left mouse button path calls FocusWindow which will lead NewFrame->ClosePopupsOverWindow to trigger)
+ if (g.IO.MouseClicked[1])
+ {
+ // Find the top-most window between HoveredWindow and the front most Modal Window.
+ // This is where we can trim the popup stack.
+ ImGuiWindow* modal = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
+ bool hovered_window_above_modal = false;
+ if (modal == NULL)
+ hovered_window_above_modal = true;
+ for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0 && hovered_window_above_modal == false; i--)
+ {
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+ if (window == modal)
+ break;
+ if (window == g.HoveredWindow)
+ hovered_window_above_modal = true;
+ }
+ ClosePopupsOverWindow(hovered_window_above_modal ? g.HoveredWindow : modal);
+ }
}
-// Equivalent of IsKeyPressed() for NavInputs[]
-static bool IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput n, ImGuiInputReadMode mode)
+static bool IsWindowActiveAndVisible(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- return ImGui::GetNavInputAmount(n, mode) > 0.0f;
+ return (window->Active) && (!window->Hidden);
}
-static bool IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput n1, ImGuiNavInput n2, ImGuiInputReadMode mode)
+static void ImGui::UpdateMouseInputs()
{
- return (ImGui::GetNavInputAmount(n1, mode) + ImGui::GetNavInputAmount(n2, mode)) > 0.0f;
-}
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags dir_sources, ImGuiInputReadMode mode, float slow_factor, float fast_factor)
-{
- ImVec2 delta(0.0f, 0.0f);
- if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard)
- delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_, mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_, mode));
- if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad)
- delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft, mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp, mode));
- if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick)
- delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft, mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp, mode));
- if (slow_factor != 0.0f && IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
- delta *= slow_factor;
- if (fast_factor != 0.0f && IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast))
- delta *= fast_factor;
- return delta;
-}
+ // Round mouse position to avoid spreading non-rounded position (e.g. UpdateManualResize doesn't support them well)
+ if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos))
+ g.IO.MousePos = g.LastValidMousePos = ImFloor(g.IO.MousePos);
-static void NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(int focus_change_dir)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget);
- if (g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
- return;
+ // If mouse just appeared or disappeared (usually denoted by -FLT_MAX components) we cancel out movement in MouseDelta
+ if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePosPrev))
+ g.IO.MouseDelta = g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MousePosPrev;
+ else
+ g.IO.MouseDelta = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || g.IO.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f)
+ g.NavDisableMouseHover = false;
- const int i_current = FindWindowIndex(g.NavWindowingTarget);
- ImGuiWindow* window_target = FindWindowNavigable(i_current + focus_change_dir, -INT_MAX, focus_change_dir);
- if (!window_target)
- window_target = FindWindowNavigable((focus_change_dir < 0) ? (g.Windows.Size - 1) : 0, i_current, focus_change_dir);
- if (window_target) // Don't reset windowing target if there's a single window in the list
- g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window_target;
- g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
+ g.IO.MousePosPrev = g.IO.MousePos;
+ for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); i++)
+ {
+ g.IO.MouseClicked[i] = g.IO.MouseDown[i] && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f;
+ g.IO.MouseReleased[i] = !g.IO.MouseDown[i] && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] >= 0.0f;
+ g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[i] = g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i];
+ g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] = g.IO.MouseDown[i] ? (g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
+ g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[i] = false;
+ if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i])
+ {
+ if ((float)(g.Time - g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i]) < g.IO.MouseDoubleClickTime)
+ {
+ ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ if (ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos) < g.IO.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist * g.IO.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist)
+ g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[i] = true;
+ g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] = -FLT_MAX; // so the third click isn't turned into a double-click
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] = g.Time;
+ }
+ g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i] = g.IO.MousePos;
+ g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i] = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = 0.0f;
+ }
+ else if (g.IO.MouseDown[i])
+ {
+ // Maintain the maximum distance we reaching from the initial click position, which is used with dragging threshold
+ ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i], ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos));
+ g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].x = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].x, delta_from_click_pos.x < 0.0f ? -delta_from_click_pos.x : delta_from_click_pos.x);
+ g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].y = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].y, delta_from_click_pos.y < 0.0f ? -delta_from_click_pos.y : delta_from_click_pos.y);
+ }
+ if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i]) // Clicking any mouse button reactivate mouse hovering which may have been deactivated by gamepad/keyboard navigation
+ g.NavDisableMouseHover = false;
+ }
}
-// Window management mode (hold to: change focus/move/resize, tap to: toggle menu layer)
-static void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowing()
+void ImGui::UpdateMouseWheel()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* apply_focus_window = NULL;
- bool apply_toggle_layer = false;
-
- ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
- if (modal_window != NULL)
- {
- g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
+ if (!g.HoveredWindow || g.HoveredWindow->Collapsed)
+ return;
+ if (g.IO.MouseWheel == 0.0f && g.IO.MouseWheelH == 0.0f)
return;
- }
-
- // Fade out
- if (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim && g.NavWindowingTarget == NULL)
- {
- g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha - g.IO.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f);
- if (g.DimBgRatio <= 0.0f && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha <= 0.0f)
- g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = NULL;
- }
- // Start CTRL-TAB or Square+L/R window selection
- bool start_windowing_with_gamepad = !g.NavWindowingTarget && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Menu, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
- bool start_windowing_with_keyboard = !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab) && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard);
- if (start_windowing_with_gamepad || start_windowing_with_keyboard)
- if (ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow : FindWindowNavigable(g.Windows.Size - 1, -INT_MAX, -1))
- {
- g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window;
- g.NavWindowingTimer = g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 0.0f;
- g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = start_windowing_with_keyboard ? false : true;
- g.NavInputSource = start_windowing_with_keyboard ? ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard : ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad;
- }
+ // If a child window has the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse flag, we give a chance to scroll its parent (unless either ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs or ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar are also set).
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.HoveredWindow;
+ ImGuiWindow* scroll_window = window;
+ while ((scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs) && scroll_window->ParentWindow)
+ scroll_window = scroll_window->ParentWindow;
+ const bool scroll_allowed = !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs);
- // Gamepad update
- g.NavWindowingTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
- if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
+ if (g.IO.MouseWheel != 0.0f)
{
- // Highlight only appears after a brief time holding the button, so that a fast tap on PadMenu (to toggle NavLayer) doesn't add visual noise
- g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f));
-
- // Select window to focus
- const int focus_change_dir = (int)IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow) - (int)IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow);
- if (focus_change_dir != 0)
+ if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && g.IO.FontAllowUserScaling)
{
- NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(focus_change_dir);
- g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 1.0f;
- }
+ // Zoom / Scale window
+ const float new_font_scale = ImClamp(window->FontWindowScale + g.IO.MouseWheel * 0.10f, 0.50f, 2.50f);
+ const float scale = new_font_scale / window->FontWindowScale;
+ window->FontWindowScale = new_font_scale;
- // Single press toggles NavLayer, long press with L/R apply actual focus on release (until then the window was merely rendered front-most)
- if (!IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_Menu))
+ const ImVec2 offset = window->Size * (1.0f - scale) * (g.IO.MousePos - window->Pos) / window->Size;
+ window->Pos += offset;
+ window->Size *= scale;
+ window->SizeFull *= scale;
+ }
+ else if (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && scroll_allowed)
{
- g.NavWindowingToggleLayer &= (g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha < 1.0f); // Once button was held long enough we don't consider it a tap-to-toggle-layer press anymore.
- if (g.NavWindowingToggleLayer && g.NavWindow)
- apply_toggle_layer = true;
- else if (!g.NavWindowingToggleLayer)
- apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget;
- g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
+ // Mouse wheel vertical scrolling
+ float scroll_amount = 5 * scroll_window->CalcFontSize();
+ scroll_amount = (float)(int)ImMin(scroll_amount, (scroll_window->ContentsRegionRect.GetHeight() + scroll_window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f) * 0.67f);
+ SetWindowScrollY(scroll_window, scroll_window->Scroll.y - g.IO.MouseWheel * scroll_amount);
}
}
-
- // Keyboard: Focus
- if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard)
+ if (g.IO.MouseWheelH != 0.0f && scroll_allowed && !g.IO.KeyCtrl)
{
- // Visuals only appears after a brief time after pressing TAB the first time, so that a fast CTRL+TAB doesn't add visual noise
- g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f)); // 1.0f
- if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab, true))
- NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(g.IO.KeyShift ? +1 : -1);
- if (!g.IO.KeyCtrl)
- apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget;
+ // Mouse wheel horizontal scrolling (for hardware that supports it)
+ float scroll_amount = scroll_window->CalcFontSize();
+ SetWindowScrollX(scroll_window, scroll_window->Scroll.x - g.IO.MouseWheelH * scroll_amount);
}
+}
- // Keyboard: Press and Release ALT to toggle menu layer
- // FIXME: We lack an explicit IO variable for "is the imgui window focused", so compare mouse validity to detect the common case of back-end clearing releases all keys on ALT-TAB
- if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap) && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_KeyMenu_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Released))
- if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) == IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePosPrev))
- apply_toggle_layer = true;
-
- // Move window
- if (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
- {
- ImVec2 move_delta;
- if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard && !g.IO.KeyShift)
- move_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
- if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
- move_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
- if (move_delta.x != 0.0f || move_delta.y != 0.0f)
- {
- const float NAV_MOVE_SPEED = 800.0f;
- const float move_speed = ImFloor(NAV_MOVE_SPEED * g.IO.DeltaTime * ImMin(g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.y)); // FIXME: Doesn't code variable framerate very well
- g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow->Pos += move_delta * move_speed;
- g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
- MarkIniSettingsDirty(g.NavWindowingTarget);
- }
- }
+// The reason this is exposed in imgui_internal.h is: on touch-based system that don't have hovering, we want to dispatch inputs to the right target (imgui vs imgui+app)
+void ImGui::UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- // Apply final focus
- if (apply_focus_window && (g.NavWindow == NULL || apply_focus_window != g.NavWindow->RootWindow))
- {
- g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
- g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
- apply_focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(apply_focus_window);
- ClosePopupsOverWindow(apply_focus_window);
- FocusWindow(apply_focus_window);
- if (apply_focus_window->NavLastIds[0] == 0)
- NavInitWindow(apply_focus_window, false);
+ // Find the window hovered by mouse:
+ // - Child windows can extend beyond the limit of their parent so we need to derive HoveredRootWindow from HoveredWindow.
+ // - When moving a window we can skip the search, which also conveniently bypasses the fact that window->WindowRectClipped is lagging as this point of the frame.
+ // - We also support the moved window toggling the NoInputs flag after moving has started in order to be able to detect windows below it, which is useful for e.g. docking mechanisms.
+ FindHoveredWindow();
- // If the window only has a menu layer, select it directly
- if (apply_focus_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == (1 << 1))
- g.NavLayer = 1;
- }
- if (apply_focus_window)
- g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
+ // Modal windows prevents cursor from hovering behind them.
+ ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
+ if (modal_window)
+ if (g.HoveredRootWindow && !IsWindowChildOf(g.HoveredRootWindow, modal_window))
+ g.HoveredRootWindow = g.HoveredWindow = NULL;
- // Apply menu/layer toggle
- if (apply_toggle_layer && g.NavWindow)
- {
- // Move to parent menu if necessary
- ImGuiWindow* new_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
- while ((new_nav_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask & (1 << 1)) == 0 && (new_nav_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0 && (new_nav_window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0)
- new_nav_window = new_nav_window->ParentWindow;
+ // Disabled mouse?
+ if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse)
+ g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;
- if (new_nav_window != g.NavWindow)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* old_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
- FocusWindow(new_nav_window);
- new_nav_window->NavLastChildNavWindow = old_nav_window;
- }
- g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
- g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
- NavRestoreLayer((g.NavWindow->DC.NavLayerActiveMask & (1 << 1)) ? (g.NavLayer ^ 1) : 0);
+ // We track click ownership. When clicked outside of a window the click is owned by the application and won't report hovering nor request capture even while dragging over our windows afterward.
+ int mouse_earliest_button_down = -1;
+ bool mouse_any_down = false;
+ for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); i++)
+ {
+ if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i])
+ g.IO.MouseDownOwned[i] = (g.HoveredWindow != NULL) || (!g.OpenPopupStack.empty());
+ mouse_any_down |= g.IO.MouseDown[i];
+ if (g.IO.MouseDown[i])
+ if (mouse_earliest_button_down == -1 || g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] < g.IO.MouseClickedTime[mouse_earliest_button_down])
+ mouse_earliest_button_down = i;
}
-}
-
-// Window has already passed the IsWindowNavFocusable()
-static const char* GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
- return "(Popup)";
- if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) && strcmp(window->Name, "##MainMenuBar") == 0)
- return "(Main menu bar)";
- return "(Untitled)";
-}
-
-// Overlay displayed when using CTRL+TAB. Called by EndFrame().
-void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowingList()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL);
+ const bool mouse_avail_to_imgui = (mouse_earliest_button_down == -1) || g.IO.MouseDownOwned[mouse_earliest_button_down];
- if (g.NavWindowingTimer < NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY)
- return;
+ // If mouse was first clicked outside of ImGui bounds we also cancel out hovering.
+ // FIXME: For patterns of drag and drop across OS windows, we may need to rework/remove this test (first committed 311c0ca9 on 2015/02)
+ const bool mouse_dragging_extern_payload = g.DragDropActive && (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern) != 0;
+ if (!mouse_avail_to_imgui && !mouse_dragging_extern_payload)
+ g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;
- if (g.NavWindowingList == NULL)
- g.NavWindowingList = FindWindowByName("###NavWindowingList");
- SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(g.IO.DisplaySize.x * 0.20f, g.IO.DisplaySize.y * 0.20f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX));
- SetNextWindowPos(g.IO.DisplaySize * 0.5f, ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, g.Style.WindowPadding * 2.0f);
- Begin("###NavWindowingList", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize);
- for (int n = g.Windows.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
- if (!IsWindowNavFocusable(window))
- continue;
- const char* label = window->Name;
- if (label == FindRenderedTextEnd(label))
- label = GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(window);
- Selectable(label, g.NavWindowingTarget == window);
- }
- End();
- PopStyleVar();
-}
+ // Update io.WantCaptureMouse for the user application (true = dispatch mouse info to imgui, false = dispatch mouse info to imgui + app)
+ if (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != -1)
+ g.IO.WantCaptureMouse = (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != 0);
+ else
+ g.IO.WantCaptureMouse = (mouse_avail_to_imgui && (g.HoveredWindow != NULL || mouse_any_down)) || (!g.OpenPopupStack.empty());
-// Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view
-// NB: We modify rect_rel by the amount we scrolled for, so it is immediately updated.
-static void NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& item_rect)
-{
- ImRect window_rect(window->InnerMainRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), window->InnerMainRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1));
- //g.OverlayDrawList.AddRect(window_rect.Min, window_rect.Max, IM_COL32_WHITE); // [DEBUG]
- if (window_rect.Contains(item_rect))
- return;
+ // Update io.WantCaptureKeyboard for the user application (true = dispatch keyboard info to imgui, false = dispatch keyboard info to imgui + app)
+ if (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != -1)
+ g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != 0);
+ else
+ g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.ActiveId != 0) || (modal_window != NULL);
+ if (g.IO.NavActive && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) && !(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard))
+ g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = true;
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (window->ScrollbarX && item_rect.Min.x < window_rect.Min.x)
- {
- window->ScrollTarget.x = item_rect.Min.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x - g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
- window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f;
- }
- else if (window->ScrollbarX && item_rect.Max.x >= window_rect.Max.x)
- {
- window->ScrollTarget.x = item_rect.Max.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
- window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 1.0f;
- }
- if (item_rect.Min.y < window_rect.Min.y)
- {
- window->ScrollTarget.y = item_rect.Min.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
- window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f;
- }
- else if (item_rect.Max.y >= window_rect.Max.y)
- {
- window->ScrollTarget.y = item_rect.Max.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
- window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 1.0f;
- }
+ // Update io.WantTextInput flag, this is to allow systems without a keyboard (e.g. mobile, hand-held) to show a software keyboard if possible
+ g.IO.WantTextInput = (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != -1) ? (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != 0) : false;
}
-static void ImGui::NavUpdate()
+void ImGui::NewFrame()
{
+ IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() or ImGui::SetCurrentContext()?");
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.IO.WantSetMousePos = false;
-#if 0
- if (g.NavScoringCount > 0) printf("[%05d] NavScoringCount %d for '%s' layer %d (Init:%d, Move:%d)\n", g.FrameCount, g.NavScoringCount, g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL", g.NavLayer, g.NavInitRequest || g.NavInitResultId != 0, g.NavMoveRequest);
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+ ImGuiTestEngineHook_PreNewFrame(&g);
#endif
- bool nav_keyboard_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0;
- bool nav_gamepad_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0;
-
- // Set input source as Gamepad when buttons are pressed before we map Keyboard (some features differs when used with Gamepad vs Keyboard)
- if (nav_gamepad_active)
- if (g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Activate] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Input] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Cancel] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Menu] > 0.0f)
- g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad;
+ // Check user data
+ // (We pass an error message in the assert expression to make it visible to programmers who are not using a debugger, as most assert handlers display their argument)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
+ IM_ASSERT((g.IO.DeltaTime > 0.0f || g.FrameCount == 0) && "Need a positive DeltaTime!");
+ IM_ASSERT(g.IO.DisplaySize.x >= 0.0f && g.IO.DisplaySize.y >= 0.0f && "Invalid DisplaySize value!");
+ IM_ASSERT(g.IO.Fonts->Fonts.Size > 0 && "Font Atlas not built. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() / GetTexDataAsAlpha8() ?");
+ IM_ASSERT(g.IO.Fonts->Fonts[0]->IsLoaded() && "Font Atlas not built. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() / GetTexDataAsAlpha8() ?");
+ IM_ASSERT(g.Style.CurveTessellationTol > 0.0f && "Invalid style setting!");
+ IM_ASSERT(g.Style.Alpha >= 0.0f && g.Style.Alpha <= 1.0f && "Invalid style setting. Alpha cannot be negative (allows us to avoid a few clamps in color computations)!");
+ IM_ASSERT((g.FrameCount == 0 || g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount) && "Forgot to call Render() or EndFrame() at the end of the previous frame?");
+ for (int n = 0; n < ImGuiKey_COUNT; n++)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[n] >= -1 && g.IO.KeyMap[n] < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown) && "io.KeyMap[] contains an out of bound value (need to be 0..512, or -1 for unmapped key)");
- // Update Keyboard->Nav inputs mapping
- if (nav_keyboard_active)
- {
- #define NAV_MAP_KEY(_KEY, _NAV_INPUT) if (IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[_KEY])) { g.IO.NavInputs[_NAV_INPUT] = 1.0f; g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard; }
- NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Space, ImGuiNavInput_Activate );
- NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Enter, ImGuiNavInput_Input );
- NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Escape, ImGuiNavInput_Cancel );
- NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_ );
- NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_RightArrow,ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_);
- NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_ );
- NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_DownArrow, ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_ );
- if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow] = 1.0f;
- if (g.IO.KeyShift) g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast] = 1.0f;
- if (g.IO.KeyAlt) g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_KeyMenu_] = 1.0f;
- #undef NAV_MAP_KEY
- }
+ // Perform simple check: required key mapping (we intentionally do NOT check all keys to not pressure user into setting up everything, but Space is required and was only recently added in 1.60 WIP)
+ if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_Space] != -1 && "ImGuiKey_Space is not mapped, required for keyboard navigation.");
- memcpy(g.IO.NavInputsDownDurationPrev, g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration, sizeof(g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration));
- for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.NavInputs); i++)
- g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] = (g.IO.NavInputs[i] > 0.0f) ? (g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
+ // Perform simple check: the beta io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges option requires back-end to honor mouse cursor changes and set the ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors flag accordingly.
+ if (g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges && !(g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors))
+ g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = false;
- // Process navigation init request (select first/default focus)
- if (g.NavInitResultId != 0 && (!g.NavDisableHighlight || g.NavInitRequestFromMove))
+ // Load settings on first frame (if not explicitly loaded manually before)
+ if (!g.SettingsLoaded)
{
- // Apply result from previous navigation init request (will typically select the first item, unless SetItemDefaultFocus() has been called)
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow);
- if (g.NavInitRequestFromMove)
- SetNavIDWithRectRel(g.NavInitResultId, g.NavLayer, g.NavInitResultRectRel);
- else
- SetNavID(g.NavInitResultId, g.NavLayer);
- g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] = g.NavInitResultRectRel;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsWindows.empty());
+ if (g.IO.IniFilename)
+ LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
+ g.SettingsLoaded = true;
}
- g.NavInitRequest = false;
- g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
- g.NavInitResultId = 0;
- g.NavJustMovedToId = 0;
- // Process navigation move request
- if (g.NavMoveRequest && (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID != 0 || g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0))
+ // Save settings (with a delay after the last modification, so we don't spam disk too much)
+ if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer > 0.0f)
{
- // Select which result to use
- ImGuiNavMoveResult* result = (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID != 0) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : &g.NavMoveResultOther;
+ g.SettingsDirtyTimer -= g.IO.DeltaTime;
+ if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
+ {
+ if (g.IO.IniFilename != NULL)
+ SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
+ else
+ g.IO.WantSaveIniSettings = true; // Let user know they can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory(). user will need to clear io.WantSaveIniSettings themselves.
+ g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
+ }
+ }
- // PageUp/PageDown behavior first jumps to the bottom/top mostly visible item, _otherwise_ use the result from the previous/next page.
- if (g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet)
- if (g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.ID != g.NavId)
- result = &g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet;
+ g.Time += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+ g.FrameScopeActive = true;
+ g.FrameCount += 1;
+ g.TooltipOverrideCount = 0;
+ g.WindowsActiveCount = 0;
- // Maybe entering a flattened child from the outside? In this case solve the tie using the regular scoring rules.
- if (result != &g.NavMoveResultOther && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.Window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow)
- if ((g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox < result->DistBox) || (g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox == result->DistBox && g.NavMoveResultOther.DistCenter < result->DistCenter))
- result = &g.NavMoveResultOther;
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow && result->Window);
+ // Setup current font and draw list shared data
+ g.IO.Fonts->Locked = true;
+ SetCurrentFont(GetDefaultFont());
+ IM_ASSERT(g.Font->IsLoaded());
+ g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen = ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.IO.DisplaySize.y);
+ g.DrawListSharedData.CurveTessellationTol = g.Style.CurveTessellationTol;
- // Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view.
- if (g.NavLayer == 0)
- {
- ImRect rect_abs = ImRect(result->RectRel.Min + result->Window->Pos, result->RectRel.Max + result->Window->Pos);
- NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(result->Window, rect_abs);
+ g.OverlayDrawList.Clear();
+ g.OverlayDrawList.PushTextureID(g.IO.Fonts->TexID);
+ g.OverlayDrawList.PushClipRectFullScreen();
+ g.OverlayDrawList.Flags = (g.Style.AntiAliasedLines ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines : 0) | (g.Style.AntiAliasedFill ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill : 0);
- // Estimate upcoming scroll so we can offset our result position so mouse position can be applied immediately after in NavUpdate()
- ImVec2 next_scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(result->Window, false);
- ImVec2 delta_scroll = result->Window->Scroll - next_scroll;
- result->RectRel.Translate(delta_scroll);
+ // Mark rendering data as invalid to prevent user who may have a handle on it to use it.
+ g.DrawData.Clear();
- // Also scroll parent window to keep us into view if necessary (we could/should technically recurse back the whole the parent hierarchy).
- if (result->Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
- NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(result->Window->ParentWindow, ImRect(rect_abs.Min + delta_scroll, rect_abs.Max + delta_scroll));
- }
+ // Drag and drop keep the source ID alive so even if the source disappear our state is consistent
+ if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == g.ActiveId)
+ KeepAliveID(g.DragDropPayload.SourceId);
- // Apply result from previous frame navigation directional move request
+ // Clear reference to active widget if the widget isn't alive anymore
+ if (!g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame)
+ g.HoveredIdTimer = 0.0f;
+ if (!g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame || (g.HoveredId && g.ActiveId == g.HoveredId))
+ g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f;
+ if (g.HoveredId)
+ g.HoveredIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+ if (g.HoveredId && g.ActiveId != g.HoveredId)
+ g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+ g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame = g.HoveredId;
+ g.HoveredId = 0;
+ g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
+ if (g.ActiveIdIsAlive != g.ActiveId && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == g.ActiveId && g.ActiveId != 0)
ClearActiveID();
- g.NavWindow = result->Window;
- SetNavIDWithRectRel(result->ID, g.NavLayer, result->RectRel);
- g.NavJustMovedToId = result->ID;
- g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = false;
- }
+ if (g.ActiveId)
+ g.ActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+ g.LastActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+ g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame = g.ActiveId;
+ g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = g.ActiveIdWindow;
+ g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEdited = g.ActiveIdHasBeenEdited;
+ g.ActiveIdIsAlive = 0;
+ g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = false;
+ g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated = false;
+ if (g.ScalarAsInputTextId && g.ActiveId != g.ScalarAsInputTextId)
+ g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;
- // When a forwarded move request failed, we restore the highlight that we disabled during the forward frame
- if (g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_ForwardActive)
- {
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequest);
- if (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0)
- g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
- g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_None;
- }
+ // Drag and drop
+ g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr;
+ g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = 0;
+ g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX;
+ g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
- // Apply application mouse position movement, after we had a chance to process move request result.
- if (g.NavMousePosDirty && g.NavIdIsAlive)
- {
- // Set mouse position given our knowledge of the navigated item position from last frame
- if ((g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) && (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos))
- {
- if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow)
- {
- g.IO.MousePos = g.IO.MousePosPrev = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
- g.IO.WantSetMousePos = true;
- }
- }
- g.NavMousePosDirty = false;
- }
- g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
- g.NavJustTabbedId = 0;
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavLayer == 0 || g.NavLayer == 1);
+ // Update keyboard input state
+ memcpy(g.IO.KeysDownDurationPrev, g.IO.KeysDownDuration, sizeof(g.IO.KeysDownDuration));
+ for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown); i++)
+ g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] = g.IO.KeysDown[i] ? (g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
- // Store our return window (for returning from Layer 1 to Layer 0) and clear it as soon as we step back in our own Layer 0
- if (g.NavWindow)
- NavSaveLastChildNavWindow(g.NavWindow);
- if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow != NULL && g.NavLayer == 0)
- g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow = NULL;
+ // Update gamepad/keyboard directional navigation
+ NavUpdate();
- NavUpdateWindowing();
+ // Update mouse input state
+ UpdateMouseInputs();
- // Set output flags for user application
- g.IO.NavActive = (nav_keyboard_active || nav_gamepad_active) && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs);
- g.IO.NavVisible = (g.IO.NavActive && g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight) || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL) || g.NavInitRequest;
+ // Calculate frame-rate for the user, as a purely luxurious feature
+ g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum += g.IO.DeltaTime - g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx];
+ g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx] = g.IO.DeltaTime;
+ g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx + 1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame);
+ g.IO.Framerate = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum > 0.0f) ? (1.0f / (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum / (float)IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame))) : FLT_MAX;
- // Process NavCancel input (to close a popup, get back to parent, clear focus)
- if (IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Cancel, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed))
+ // Handle user moving window with mouse (at the beginning of the frame to avoid input lag or sheering)
+ UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame();
+ UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags();
+
+ // Background darkening/whitening
+ if (GetFrontMostPopupModal() != NULL || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha > 0.0f))
+ g.DimBgRatio = ImMin(g.DimBgRatio + g.IO.DeltaTime * 6.0f, 1.0f);
+ else
+ g.DimBgRatio = ImMax(g.DimBgRatio - g.IO.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f);
+
+ g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow;
+ g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = g.WantTextInputNextFrame = -1;
+ g.PlatformImePos = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f); // OS Input Method Editor showing on top-left of our window by default
+
+ // Mouse wheel scrolling, scale
+ UpdateMouseWheel();
+
+ // Pressing TAB activate widget focus
+ if (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.NavWindow != NULL && g.NavWindow->Active && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab, false))
{
- if (g.ActiveId != 0)
- {
- ClearActiveID();
- }
- else if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow)
- {
- // Exit child window
- ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.NavWindow;
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.NavWindow->ParentWindow;
- IM_ASSERT(child_window->ChildId != 0);
- FocusWindow(parent_window);
- SetNavID(child_window->ChildId, 0);
- g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
- if (g.NavDisableMouseHover)
- g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
- }
- else if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0)
- {
- // Close open popup/menu
- if (!(g.OpenPopupStack.back().Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal))
- ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1);
- }
- else if (g.NavLayer != 0)
- {
- // Leave the "menu" layer
- NavRestoreLayer(0);
- }
+ if (g.NavId != 0 && g.NavIdTabCounter != INT_MAX)
+ g.NavWindow->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = g.NavIdTabCounter + 1 + (g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : 1);
else
- {
- // Clear NavLastId for popups but keep it for regular child window so we can leave one and come back where we were
- if (g.NavWindow && ((g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)))
- g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0] = 0;
- g.NavId = 0;
- }
+ g.NavWindow->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : 0;
}
+ g.NavIdTabCounter = INT_MAX;
- // Process manual activation request
- g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavInputId = 0;
- if (g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight && !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+ // Mark all windows as not visible
+ IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size == g.Windows.Size);
+ for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
{
- bool activate_down = IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_Activate);
- bool activate_pressed = activate_down && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Activate, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
- if (g.ActiveId == 0 && activate_pressed)
- g.NavActivateId = g.NavId;
- if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && activate_down)
- g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavId;
- if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && activate_pressed)
- g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavId;
- if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Input, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed))
- g.NavInputId = g.NavId;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+ window->WasActive = window->Active;
+ window->Active = false;
+ window->WriteAccessed = false;
}
- if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
- g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
- if (g.NavActivateId != 0)
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavActivateDownId == g.NavActivateId);
- g.NavMoveRequest = false;
- // Process programmatic activation request
- if (g.NavNextActivateId != 0)
- g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavInputId = g.NavNextActivateId;
- g.NavNextActivateId = 0;
+ // Closing the focused window restore focus to the first active root window in descending z-order
+ if (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindow->WasActive)
+ FocusPreviousWindowIgnoringOne(NULL);
- // Initiate directional inputs request
- const int allowed_dir_flags = (g.ActiveId == 0) ? ~0 : g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags;
- if (g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None)
- {
- g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_None;
- g.NavMoveRequestFlags = 0;
- if (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindowingTarget && allowed_dir_flags && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
- {
- if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Left)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft, ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Left;
- if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Right)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight,ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_,ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Right;
- if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Up)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp, ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up;
- if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Down)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown, ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down;
- }
- g.NavMoveClipDir = g.NavMoveDir;
- }
- else
- {
- // Forwarding previous request (which has been modified, e.g. wrap around menus rewrite the requests with a starting rectangle at the other side of the window)
- // (Preserve g.NavMoveRequestFlags, g.NavMoveClipDir which were set by the NavMoveRequestForward() function)
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None && g.NavMoveClipDir != ImGuiDir_None);
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued);
- g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardActive;
- }
+ // No window should be open at the beginning of the frame.
+ // But in order to allow the user to call NewFrame() multiple times without calling Render(), we are doing an explicit clear.
+ g.CurrentWindowStack.resize(0);
+ g.BeginPopupStack.resize(0);
+ ClosePopupsOverWindow(g.NavWindow);
- // PageUp/PageDown scroll
- float nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = 0.0f;
- if (nav_keyboard_active && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavLayer == 0)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
- bool page_up_held = IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp]) && (allowed_dir_flags & (1 << ImGuiDir_Up));
- bool page_down_held = IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown]) && (allowed_dir_flags & (1 << ImGuiDir_Down));
- if ((page_up_held && !page_down_held) || (page_down_held && !page_up_held))
- {
- if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavHasScroll)
- {
- // Fallback manual-scroll when window has no navigable item
- if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp], true))
- SetWindowScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y - window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight());
- else if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown], true))
- SetWindowScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y + window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight());
- }
- else
- {
- const ImRect& nav_rect_rel = window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer];
- const float page_offset_y = ImMax(0.0f, window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight() - window->CalcFontSize() * 1.0f + nav_rect_rel.GetHeight());
- if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp], true))
- {
- nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = -page_offset_y;
- g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down; // Because our scoring rect is offset, we intentionally request the opposite direction (so we can always land on the last item)
- g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Up;
- g.NavMoveRequestFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet;
- }
- else if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown], true))
- {
- nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = +page_offset_y;
- g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up; // Because our scoring rect is offset, we intentionally request the opposite direction (so we can always land on the last item)
- g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Down;
- g.NavMoveRequestFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet;
- }
- }
- }
- }
+ // Create implicit/fallback window - which we will only render it if the user has added something to it.
+ // We don't use "Debug" to avoid colliding with user trying to create a "Debug" window with custom flags.
+ // This fallback is particularly important as it avoid ImGui:: calls from crashing.
+ SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(400,400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+ Begin("Debug##Default");
+ g.FrameScopePushedImplicitWindow = true;
- if (g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None)
- {
- g.NavMoveRequest = true;
- g.NavMoveDirLast = g.NavMoveDir;
- }
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+ ImGuiTestEngineHook_PostNewFrame(&g);
+#endif
+}
- // If we initiate a movement request and have no current NavId, we initiate a InitDefautRequest that will be used as a fallback if the direction fails to find a match
- if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavId == 0)
+void ImGui::Initialize(ImGuiContext* context)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *context;
+ IM_ASSERT(!g.Initialized && !g.SettingsLoaded);
+
+ // Add .ini handle for ImGuiWindow type
+ ImGuiSettingsHandler ini_handler;
+ ini_handler.TypeName = "Window";
+ ini_handler.TypeHash = ImHashStr("Window", 0);
+ ini_handler.ReadOpenFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadOpen;
+ ini_handler.ReadLineFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadLine;
+ ini_handler.WriteAllFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll;
+ g.SettingsHandlers.push_back(ini_handler);
+
+ g.Initialized = true;
+}
+
+// This function is merely here to free heap allocations.
+void ImGui::Shutdown(ImGuiContext* context)
+{
+ // The fonts atlas can be used prior to calling NewFrame(), so we clear it even if g.Initialized is FALSE (which would happen if we never called NewFrame)
+ ImGuiContext& g = *context;
+ if (g.IO.Fonts && g.FontAtlasOwnedByContext)
{
- g.NavInitRequest = g.NavInitRequestFromMove = true;
- g.NavInitResultId = 0;
- g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
+ g.IO.Fonts->Locked = false;
+ IM_DELETE(g.IO.Fonts);
}
+ g.IO.Fonts = NULL;
- NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+ // Cleanup of other data are conditional on actually having initialized ImGui.
+ if (!g.Initialized)
+ return;
- // Scrolling
- if (g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.NavWindowingTarget)
+ // Save settings (unless we haven't attempted to load them: CreateContext/DestroyContext without a call to NewFrame shouldn't save an empty file)
+ if (g.SettingsLoaded && g.IO.IniFilename != NULL)
{
- // *Fallback* manual-scroll with Nav directional keys when window has no navigable item
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
- const float scroll_speed = ImFloor(window->CalcFontSize() * 100 * g.IO.DeltaTime + 0.5f); // We need round the scrolling speed because sub-pixel scroll isn't reliably supported.
- if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavHasScroll && g.NavMoveRequest)
- {
- if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right)
- SetWindowScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed));
- if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down)
- SetWindowScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed));
- }
-
- // *Normal* Manual scroll with NavScrollXXX keys
- // Next movement request will clamp the NavId reference rectangle to the visible area, so navigation will resume within those bounds.
- ImVec2 scroll_dir = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down, 1.0f/10.0f, 10.0f);
- if (scroll_dir.x != 0.0f && window->ScrollbarX)
- {
- SetWindowScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + scroll_dir.x * scroll_speed));
- g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = true;
- }
- if (scroll_dir.y != 0.0f)
- {
- SetWindowScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + scroll_dir.y * scroll_speed));
- g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = true;
- }
+ ImGuiContext* backup_context = GImGui;
+ SetCurrentContext(context);
+ SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
+ SetCurrentContext(backup_context);
}
- // Reset search results
- g.NavMoveResultLocal.Clear();
- g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.Clear();
- g.NavMoveResultOther.Clear();
+ // Clear everything else
+ for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++)
+ IM_DELETE(g.Windows[i]);
+ g.Windows.clear();
+ g.WindowsFocusOrder.clear();
+ g.WindowsSortBuffer.clear();
+ g.CurrentWindow = NULL;
+ g.CurrentWindowStack.clear();
+ g.WindowsById.Clear();
+ g.NavWindow = NULL;
+ g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;
+ g.ActiveIdWindow = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = NULL;
+ g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+ g.ColorModifiers.clear();
+ g.StyleModifiers.clear();
+ g.FontStack.clear();
+ g.OpenPopupStack.clear();
+ g.BeginPopupStack.clear();
+ g.DrawDataBuilder.ClearFreeMemory();
+ g.OverlayDrawList.ClearFreeMemory();
+ g.PrivateClipboard.clear();
+ g.InputTextState.TextW.clear();
+ g.InputTextState.InitialText.clear();
+ g.InputTextState.TempBuffer.clear();
- // When we have manually scrolled (without using navigation) and NavId becomes out of bounds, we project its bounding box to the visible area to restart navigation within visible items
- if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect && g.NavLayer == 0)
+ for (int i = 0; i < g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
+ IM_DELETE(g.SettingsWindows[i].Name);
+ g.SettingsWindows.clear();
+ g.SettingsHandlers.clear();
+
+ if (g.LogFile && g.LogFile != stdout)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
- ImRect window_rect_rel(window->InnerMainRect.Min - window->Pos - ImVec2(1,1), window->InnerMainRect.Max - window->Pos + ImVec2(1,1));
- if (!window_rect_rel.Contains(window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer]))
- {
- float pad = window->CalcFontSize() * 0.5f;
- window_rect_rel.Expand(ImVec2(-ImMin(window_rect_rel.GetWidth(), pad), -ImMin(window_rect_rel.GetHeight(), pad))); // Terrible approximation for the intent of starting navigation from first fully visible item
- window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].ClipWith(window_rect_rel);
- g.NavId = 0;
- }
- g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = false;
+ fclose(g.LogFile);
+ g.LogFile = NULL;
}
+ g.LogClipboard.clear();
- // For scoring we use a single segment on the left side our current item bounding box (not touching the edge to avoid box overlap with zero-spaced items)
- ImRect nav_rect_rel = (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].IsInverted()) ? g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] : ImRect(0,0,0,0);
- g.NavScoringRectScreen = g.NavWindow ? ImRect(g.NavWindow->Pos + nav_rect_rel.Min, g.NavWindow->Pos + nav_rect_rel.Max) : GetViewportRect();
- g.NavScoringRectScreen.TranslateY(nav_scoring_rect_offset_y);
- g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x = ImMin(g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x + 1.0f, g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max.x);
- g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max.x = g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x;
- IM_ASSERT(!g.NavScoringRectScreen.IsInverted()); // Ensure if we have a finite, non-inverted bounding box here will allows us to remove extraneous ImFabs() calls in NavScoreItem().
- //g.OverlayDrawList.AddRect(g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min, g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); // [DEBUG]
- g.NavScoringCount = 0;
-#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS
- if (g.NavWindow) { for (int layer = 0; layer < 2; layer++) GetOverlayDrawList()->AddRect(g.NavWindow->Pos + g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[layer].Min, g.NavWindow->Pos + g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[layer].Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); } // [DEBUG]
- if (g.NavWindow) { ImU32 col = (g.NavWindow->HiddenFrames == 0) ? IM_COL32(255,0,255,255) : IM_COL32(255,0,0,255); ImVec2 p = NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); char buf[32]; ImFormatString(buf, 32, "%d", g.NavLayer); g.OverlayDrawList.AddCircleFilled(p, 3.0f, col); g.OverlayDrawList.AddText(NULL, 13.0f, p + ImVec2(8,-4), col, buf); }
-#endif
+ g.Initialized = false;
}
-void ImGui::StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
+// FIXME: Add a more explicit sort order in the window structure.
+static int IMGUI_CDECL ChildWindowComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
{
- // Set ActiveId even if the _NoMove flag is set. Without it, dragging away from a window with _NoMove would activate hover on other windows.
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- FocusWindow(window);
- SetActiveID(window->MoveId, window);
- g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
- g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - window->RootWindow->Pos;
- if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove) && !(window->RootWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
- g.MovingWindow = window;
+ const ImGuiWindow* const a = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)lhs;
+ const ImGuiWindow* const b = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)rhs;
+ if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
+ return d;
+ if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
+ return d;
+ return (a->BeginOrderWithinParent - b->BeginOrderWithinParent);
}
-// Handle mouse moving window
-// Note: moving window with the navigation keys (Square + d-pad / CTRL+TAB + Arrows) are processed in NavUpdateWindowing()
-void ImGui::UpdateMouseMovingWindow()
+static void AddWindowToSortBuffer(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.MovingWindow != NULL)
+ out_sorted_windows->push_back(window);
+ if (window->Active)
{
- // We actually want to move the root window. g.MovingWindow == window we clicked on (could be a child window).
- // We track it to preserve Focus and so that generally ActiveIdWindow == MovingWindow and ActiveId == MovingWindow->MoveId for consistency.
- KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId);
- IM_ASSERT(g.MovingWindow && g.MovingWindow->RootWindow);
- ImGuiWindow* moving_window = g.MovingWindow->RootWindow;
- if (g.IO.MouseDown[0] && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos))
- {
- ImVec2 pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset;
- if (moving_window->Pos.x != pos.x || moving_window->Pos.y != pos.y)
- {
- MarkIniSettingsDirty(moving_window);
- SetWindowPos(moving_window, pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
- }
- FocusWindow(g.MovingWindow);
- }
- else
+ int count = window->DC.ChildWindows.Size;
+ if (count > 1)
+ ImQsort(window->DC.ChildWindows.begin(), (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiWindow*), ChildWindowComparer);
+ for (int i = 0; i < count; i++)
{
- ClearActiveID();
- g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+ ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i];
+ if (child->Active)
+ AddWindowToSortBuffer(out_sorted_windows, child);
}
}
- else
+}
+
+static void AddDrawListToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list)
+{
+ if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.empty())
+ return;
+
+ // Remove trailing command if unused
+ ImDrawCmd& last_cmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.back();
+ if (last_cmd.ElemCount == 0 && last_cmd.UserCallback == NULL)
{
- // When clicking/dragging from a window that has the _NoMove flag, we still set the ActiveId in order to prevent hovering others.
- if (g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->MoveId == g.ActiveId)
- {
- KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId);
- if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
- ClearActiveID();
- }
+ draw_list->CmdBuffer.pop_back();
+ if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.empty())
+ return;
}
+
+ // Draw list sanity check. Detect mismatch between PrimReserve() calls and incrementing _VtxCurrentIdx, _VtxWritePtr etc. May trigger for you if you are using PrimXXX functions incorrectly.
+ IM_ASSERT(draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_VtxWritePtr == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size);
+ IM_ASSERT(draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_IdxWritePtr == draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size);
+ IM_ASSERT((int)draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size);
+
+ // Check that draw_list doesn't use more vertices than indexable (default ImDrawIdx = unsigned short = 2 bytes = 64K vertices per ImDrawList = per window)
+ // If this assert triggers because you are drawing lots of stuff manually:
+ // A) Make sure you are coarse clipping, because ImDrawList let all your vertices pass. You can use the Metrics window to inspect draw list contents.
+ // B) If you need/want meshes with more than 64K vertices, uncomment the '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' line in imconfig.h to set the index size to 4 bytes.
+ // You'll need to handle the 4-bytes indices to your renderer. For example, the OpenGL example code detect index size at compile-time by doing:
+ // glDrawElements(GL_TRIANGLES, (GLsizei)pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer_offset);
+ // Your own engine or render API may use different parameters or function calls to specify index sizes. 2 and 4 bytes indices are generally supported by most API.
+ // C) If for some reason you cannot use 4 bytes indices or don't want to, a workaround is to call BeginChild()/EndChild() before reaching the 64K limit to split your draw commands in multiple draw lists.
+ if (sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2)
+ IM_ASSERT(draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx < (1 << 16) && "Too many vertices in ImDrawList using 16-bit indices. Read comment above");
+
+ out_list->push_back(draw_list);
}
-static bool IsWindowActiveAndVisible(ImGuiWindow* window)
+static void AddWindowToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_render_list, ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- return (window->Active) && (!window->Hidden);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.IO.MetricsRenderWindows++;
+ AddDrawListToDrawData(out_render_list, window->DrawList);
+ for (int i = 0; i < window->DC.ChildWindows.Size; i++)
+ {
+ ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i];
+ if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(child)) // clipped children may have been marked not active
+ AddWindowToDrawData(out_render_list, child);
+ }
}
-static void ImGui::UpdateMouseInputs()
+static void AddRootWindowToDrawData(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- // If mouse just appeared or disappeared (usually denoted by -FLT_MAX component, but in reality we test for -256000.0f) we cancel out movement in MouseDelta
- if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePosPrev))
- g.IO.MouseDelta = g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MousePosPrev;
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
+ AddWindowToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[1], window);
else
- g.IO.MouseDelta = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || g.IO.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f)
- g.NavDisableMouseHover = false;
+ AddWindowToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], window);
+}
- g.IO.MousePosPrev = g.IO.MousePos;
- for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); i++)
+void ImDrawDataBuilder::FlattenIntoSingleLayer()
+{
+ int n = Layers[0].Size;
+ int size = n;
+ for (int i = 1; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); i++)
+ size += Layers[i].Size;
+ Layers[0].resize(size);
+ for (int layer_n = 1; layer_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); layer_n++)
{
- g.IO.MouseClicked[i] = g.IO.MouseDown[i] && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f;
- g.IO.MouseReleased[i] = !g.IO.MouseDown[i] && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] >= 0.0f;
- g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[i] = g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i];
- g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] = g.IO.MouseDown[i] ? (g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
- g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[i] = false;
- if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i])
- {
- if ((float)(g.Time - g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i]) < g.IO.MouseDoubleClickTime)
- {
- ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- if (ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos) < g.IO.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist * g.IO.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist)
- g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[i] = true;
- g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] = -FLT_MAX; // so the third click isn't turned into a double-click
- }
- else
- {
- g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] = g.Time;
- }
- g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i] = g.IO.MousePos;
- g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i] = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = 0.0f;
- }
- else if (g.IO.MouseDown[i])
- {
- // Maintain the maximum distance we reaching from the initial click position, which is used with dragging threshold
- ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i], ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos));
- g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].x = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].x, delta_from_click_pos.x < 0.0f ? -delta_from_click_pos.x : delta_from_click_pos.x);
- g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].y = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].y, delta_from_click_pos.y < 0.0f ? -delta_from_click_pos.y : delta_from_click_pos.y);
- }
- if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i]) // Clicking any mouse button reactivate mouse hovering which may have been deactivated by gamepad/keyboard navigation
- g.NavDisableMouseHover = false;
+ ImVector<ImDrawList*>& layer = Layers[layer_n];
+ if (layer.empty())
+ continue;
+ memcpy(&Layers[0][n], &layer[0], layer.Size * sizeof(ImDrawList*));
+ n += layer.Size;
+ layer.resize(0);
}
}
-void ImGui::UpdateMouseWheel()
+static void SetupDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* draw_lists, ImDrawData* draw_data)
+{
+ ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+ draw_data->Valid = true;
+ draw_data->CmdLists = (draw_lists->Size > 0) ? draw_lists->Data : NULL;
+ draw_data->CmdListsCount = draw_lists->Size;
+ draw_data->TotalVtxCount = draw_data->TotalIdxCount = 0;
+ draw_data->DisplayPos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ draw_data->DisplaySize = io.DisplaySize;
+ draw_data->FramebufferScale = io.DisplayFramebufferScale;
+ for (int n = 0; n < draw_lists->Size; n++)
+ {
+ draw_data->TotalVtxCount += draw_lists->Data[n]->VtxBuffer.Size;
+ draw_data->TotalIdxCount += draw_lists->Data[n]->IdxBuffer.Size;
+ }
+}
+
+// When using this function it is sane to ensure that float are perfectly rounded to integer values, to that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render produce correct result.
+void ImGui::PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->DrawList->PushClipRect(clip_rect_min, clip_rect_max, intersect_with_current_clip_rect);
+ window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopClipRect()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+ window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
+}
+
+// This is normally called by Render(). You may want to call it directly if you want to avoid calling Render() but the gain will be very minimal.
+void ImGui::EndFrame()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (!g.HoveredWindow || g.HoveredWindow->Collapsed)
- return;
- if (g.IO.MouseWheel == 0.0f && g.IO.MouseWheelH == 0.0f)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
+ if (g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount) // Don't process EndFrame() multiple times.
return;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.FrameScopeActive && "Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()?");
- // If a child window has the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse flag, we give a chance to scroll its parent (unless either ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs or ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar are also set).
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.HoveredWindow;
- ImGuiWindow* scroll_window = window;
- while ((scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs) && scroll_window->ParentWindow)
- scroll_window = scroll_window->ParentWindow;
- const bool scroll_allowed = !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs);
+ // Notify OS when our Input Method Editor cursor has moved (e.g. CJK inputs using Microsoft IME)
+ if (g.IO.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn && (g.PlatformImeLastPos.x == FLT_MAX || ImLengthSqr(g.PlatformImeLastPos - g.PlatformImePos) > 0.0001f))
+ {
+ g.IO.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn((int)g.PlatformImePos.x, (int)g.PlatformImePos.y);
+ g.PlatformImeLastPos = g.PlatformImePos;
+ }
- if (g.IO.MouseWheel != 0.0f)
+ // Report when there is a mismatch of Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls. Important: Remember that the Begin/BeginChild API requires you
+ // to always call End/EndChild even if Begin/BeginChild returns false! (this is unfortunately inconsistent with most other Begin* API).
+ if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size != 1)
{
- if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && g.IO.FontAllowUserScaling)
+ if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1)
{
- // Zoom / Scale window
- const float new_font_scale = ImClamp(window->FontWindowScale + g.IO.MouseWheel * 0.10f, 0.50f, 2.50f);
- const float scale = new_font_scale / window->FontWindowScale;
- window->FontWindowScale = new_font_scale;
-
- const ImVec2 offset = window->Size * (1.0f - scale) * (g.IO.MousePos - window->Pos) / window->Size;
- window->Pos += offset;
- window->Size *= scale;
- window->SizeFull *= scale;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1 && "Mismatched Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls: did you forget to call End/EndChild?");
+ while (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1) // FIXME-ERRORHANDLING
+ End();
}
- else if (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && scroll_allowed)
+ else
{
- // Mouse wheel vertical scrolling
- float scroll_amount = 5 * scroll_window->CalcFontSize();
- scroll_amount = (float)(int)ImMin(scroll_amount, (scroll_window->ContentsRegionRect.GetHeight() + scroll_window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f) * 0.67f);
- SetWindowScrollY(scroll_window, scroll_window->Scroll.y - g.IO.MouseWheel * scroll_amount);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1 && "Mismatched Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls: did you call End/EndChild too much?");
}
}
- if (g.IO.MouseWheelH != 0.0f && scroll_allowed && !g.IO.KeyCtrl)
+
+ // Hide implicit/fallback "Debug" window if it hasn't been used
+ g.FrameScopePushedImplicitWindow = false;
+ if (g.CurrentWindow && !g.CurrentWindow->WriteAccessed)
+ g.CurrentWindow->Active = false;
+ End();
+
+ // Show CTRL+TAB list window
+ if (g.NavWindowingTarget)
+ NavUpdateWindowingList();
+
+ // Drag and Drop: Elapse payload (if delivered, or if source stops being submitted)
+ if (g.DragDropActive)
{
- // Mouse wheel horizontal scrolling (for hardware that supports it)
- float scroll_amount = scroll_window->CalcFontSize();
- SetWindowScrollX(scroll_window, scroll_window->Scroll.x - g.IO.MouseWheelH * scroll_amount);
+ bool is_delivered = g.DragDropPayload.Delivery;
+ bool is_elapsed = (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount + 1 < g.FrameCount) && ((g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload) || !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton));
+ if (is_delivered || is_elapsed)
+ ClearDragDrop();
}
-}
-
-// The reason this is exposed in imgui_internal.h is: on touch-based system that don't have hovering, we want to dispatch inputs to the right target (imgui vs imgui+app)
-void ImGui::UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- // Find the window hovered by mouse:
- // - Child windows can extend beyond the limit of their parent so we need to derive HoveredRootWindow from HoveredWindow.
- // - When moving a window we can skip the search, which also conveniently bypasses the fact that window->WindowRectClipped is lagging as this point of the frame.
- // - We also support the moved window toggling the NoInputs flag after moving has started in order to be able to detect windows below it, which is useful for e.g. docking mechanisms.
- FindHoveredWindow();
+ // Drag and Drop: Fallback for source tooltip. This is not ideal but better than nothing.
+ if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropSourceFrameCount < g.FrameCount)
+ {
+ g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
+ SetTooltip("...");
+ g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
+ }
- // Modal windows prevents cursor from hovering behind them.
- ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
- if (modal_window)
- if (g.HoveredRootWindow && !IsWindowChildOf(g.HoveredRootWindow, modal_window))
- g.HoveredRootWindow = g.HoveredWindow = NULL;
+ // End frame
+ g.FrameScopeActive = false;
+ g.FrameCountEnded = g.FrameCount;
- // Disabled mouse?
- if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse)
- g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;
+ // Initiate moving window + handle left-click and right-click focus
+ UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame();
- // We track click ownership. When clicked outside of a window the click is owned by the application and won't report hovering nor request capture even while dragging over our windows afterward.
- int mouse_earliest_button_down = -1;
- bool mouse_any_down = false;
- for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); i++)
+ // Sort the window list so that all child windows are after their parent
+ // We cannot do that on FocusWindow() because childs may not exist yet
+ g.WindowsSortBuffer.resize(0);
+ g.WindowsSortBuffer.reserve(g.Windows.Size);
+ for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
{
- if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i])
- g.IO.MouseDownOwned[i] = (g.HoveredWindow != NULL) || (!g.OpenPopupStack.empty());
- mouse_any_down |= g.IO.MouseDown[i];
- if (g.IO.MouseDown[i])
- if (mouse_earliest_button_down == -1 || g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] < g.IO.MouseClickedTime[mouse_earliest_button_down])
- mouse_earliest_button_down = i;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+ if (window->Active && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) // if a child is active its parent will add it
+ continue;
+ AddWindowToSortBuffer(&g.WindowsSortBuffer, window);
}
- const bool mouse_avail_to_imgui = (mouse_earliest_button_down == -1) || g.IO.MouseDownOwned[mouse_earliest_button_down];
- // If mouse was first clicked outside of ImGui bounds we also cancel out hovering.
- // FIXME: For patterns of drag and drop across OS windows, we may need to rework/remove this test (first committed 311c0ca9 on 2015/02)
- const bool mouse_dragging_extern_payload = g.DragDropActive && (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern) != 0;
- if (!mouse_avail_to_imgui && !mouse_dragging_extern_payload)
- g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;
-
- // Update io.WantCaptureMouse for the user application (true = dispatch mouse info to imgui, false = dispatch mouse info to imgui + app)
- if (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != -1)
- g.IO.WantCaptureMouse = (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != 0);
- else
- g.IO.WantCaptureMouse = (mouse_avail_to_imgui && (g.HoveredWindow != NULL || mouse_any_down)) || (!g.OpenPopupStack.empty());
+ // This usually assert if there is a mismatch between the ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow / ParentWindow values and DC.ChildWindows[] in parents, aka we've done something wrong.
+ IM_ASSERT(g.Windows.Size == g.WindowsSortBuffer.Size);
+ g.Windows.swap(g.WindowsSortBuffer);
+ g.IO.MetricsActiveWindows = g.WindowsActiveCount;
- // Update io.WantCaptureKeyboard for the user application (true = dispatch keyboard info to imgui, false = dispatch keyboard info to imgui + app)
- if (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != -1)
- g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != 0);
- else
- g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.ActiveId != 0) || (modal_window != NULL);
- if (g.IO.NavActive && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) && !(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard))
- g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = true;
+ // Unlock font atlas
+ g.IO.Fonts->Locked = false;
- // Update io.WantTextInput flag, this is to allow systems without a keyboard (e.g. mobile, hand-held) to show a software keyboard if possible
- g.IO.WantTextInput = (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != -1) ? (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != 0) : false;
+ // Clear Input data for next frame
+ g.IO.MouseWheel = g.IO.MouseWheelH = 0.0f;
+ g.IO.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
+ memset(g.IO.NavInputs, 0, sizeof(g.IO.NavInputs));
}
-void ImGui::NewFrame()
+void ImGui::Render()
{
- IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() or ImGui::SetCurrentContext()?");
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- // Check user data
- // (We pass an error message in the assert expression to make it visible to programmers who are not using a debugger, as most assert handlers display their argument)
IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
- IM_ASSERT(g.IO.DeltaTime >= 0.0f && "Need a positive DeltaTime (zero is tolerated but will cause some timing issues)");
- IM_ASSERT(g.IO.DisplaySize.x >= 0.0f && g.IO.DisplaySize.y >= 0.0f && "Invalid DisplaySize value");
- IM_ASSERT(g.IO.Fonts->Fonts.Size > 0 && "Font Atlas not built. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() / GetTexDataAsAlpha8() ?");
- IM_ASSERT(g.IO.Fonts->Fonts[0]->IsLoaded() && "Font Atlas not built. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() / GetTexDataAsAlpha8() ?");
- IM_ASSERT(g.Style.CurveTessellationTol > 0.0f && "Invalid style setting");
- IM_ASSERT(g.Style.Alpha >= 0.0f && g.Style.Alpha <= 1.0f && "Invalid style setting. Alpha cannot be negative (allows us to avoid a few clamps in color computations)");
- IM_ASSERT((g.FrameCount == 0 || g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount) && "Forgot to call Render() or EndFrame() at the end of the previous frame?");
- for (int n = 0; n < ImGuiKey_COUNT; n++)
- IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[n] >= -1 && g.IO.KeyMap[n] < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown) && "io.KeyMap[] contains an out of bound value (need to be 0..512, or -1 for unmapped key)");
-
- // Perform simple check for required key mapping (we intentionally do NOT check all keys to not pressure user into setting up everything, but Space is required and was only recently added in 1.60 WIP)
- if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard)
- IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_Space] != -1 && "ImGuiKey_Space is not mapped, required for keyboard navigation.");
- // The beta io.OptResizeWindowsFromEdges option requires back-end to honor mouse cursor changes and set the ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors flag accordingly.
- if (g.IO.OptResizeWindowsFromEdges && !(g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors))
- g.IO.OptResizeWindowsFromEdges = false;
+ if (g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount)
+ EndFrame();
+ g.FrameCountRendered = g.FrameCount;
- // Load settings on first frame (if not explicitly loaded manually before)
- if (!g.SettingsLoaded)
+ // Gather ImDrawList to render (for each active window)
+ g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices = g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices = g.IO.MetricsRenderWindows = 0;
+ g.DrawDataBuilder.Clear();
+ ImGuiWindow* windows_to_render_front_most[2];
+ windows_to_render_front_most[0] = (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)) ? g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow : NULL;
+ windows_to_render_front_most[1] = g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingList : NULL;
+ for (int n = 0; n != g.Windows.Size; n++)
{
- IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsWindows.empty());
- if (g.IO.IniFilename)
- LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
- g.SettingsLoaded = true;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
+ if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(window) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) == 0 && window != windows_to_render_front_most[0] && window != windows_to_render_front_most[1])
+ AddRootWindowToDrawData(window);
}
+ for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(windows_to_render_front_most); n++)
+ if (windows_to_render_front_most[n] && IsWindowActiveAndVisible(windows_to_render_front_most[n])) // NavWindowingTarget is always temporarily displayed as the front-most window
+ AddRootWindowToDrawData(windows_to_render_front_most[n]);
+ g.DrawDataBuilder.FlattenIntoSingleLayer();
- // Save settings (with a delay after the last modification, so we don't spam disk too much)
- if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer > 0.0f)
- {
- g.SettingsDirtyTimer -= g.IO.DeltaTime;
- if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
- {
- if (g.IO.IniFilename != NULL)
- SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
- else
- g.IO.WantSaveIniSettings = true; // Let user know they can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory(). user will need to clear io.WantSaveIniSettings themselves.
- g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
- }
- }
+ // Draw software mouse cursor if requested
+ if (g.IO.MouseDrawCursor)
+ RenderMouseCursor(&g.OverlayDrawList, g.IO.MousePos, g.Style.MouseCursorScale, g.MouseCursor);
- g.Time += g.IO.DeltaTime;
- g.FrameCount += 1;
- g.TooltipOverrideCount = 0;
- g.WindowsActiveCount = 0;
+ if (!g.OverlayDrawList.VtxBuffer.empty())
+ AddDrawListToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], &g.OverlayDrawList);
- // Setup current font and draw list
- g.IO.Fonts->Locked = true;
- SetCurrentFont(GetDefaultFont());
- IM_ASSERT(g.Font->IsLoaded());
- g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen = ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.IO.DisplaySize.y);
- g.DrawListSharedData.CurveTessellationTol = g.Style.CurveTessellationTol;
+ // Setup ImDrawData structure for end-user
+ SetupDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], &g.DrawData);
+ g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices = g.DrawData.TotalVtxCount;
+ g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices = g.DrawData.TotalIdxCount;
- g.OverlayDrawList.Clear();
- g.OverlayDrawList.PushTextureID(g.IO.Fonts->TexID);
- g.OverlayDrawList.PushClipRectFullScreen();
- g.OverlayDrawList.Flags = (g.Style.AntiAliasedLines ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines : 0) | (g.Style.AntiAliasedFill ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill : 0);
+ // (Legacy) Call the Render callback function. The current prefer way is to let the user retrieve GetDrawData() and call the render function themselves.
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+ if (g.DrawData.CmdListsCount > 0 && g.IO.RenderDrawListsFn != NULL)
+ g.IO.RenderDrawListsFn(&g.DrawData);
+#endif
+}
- // Mark rendering data as invalid to prevent user who may have a handle on it to use it
- g.DrawData.Clear();
+// Calculate text size. Text can be multi-line. Optionally ignore text after a ## marker.
+// CalcTextSize("") should return ImVec2(0.0f, GImGui->FontSize)
+ImVec2 ImGui::CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_double_hash, float wrap_width)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- // Clear reference to active widget if the widget isn't alive anymore
- if (!g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame)
- g.HoveredIdTimer = 0.0f;
- g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame = g.HoveredId;
- g.HoveredId = 0;
- g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
- if (!g.ActiveIdIsAlive && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == g.ActiveId && g.ActiveId != 0)
- ClearActiveID();
- if (g.ActiveId)
- g.ActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
- g.LastActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
- g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame = g.ActiveId;
- g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = g.ActiveIdWindow;
- g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameValueChanged = g.ActiveIdValueChanged;
- g.ActiveIdIsAlive = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = false;
- g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated = false;
- if (g.ScalarAsInputTextId && g.ActiveId != g.ScalarAsInputTextId)
- g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;
+ const char* text_display_end;
+ if (hide_text_after_double_hash)
+ text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end); // Hide anything after a '##' string
+ else
+ text_display_end = text_end;
+
+ ImFont* font = g.Font;
+ const float font_size = g.FontSize;
+ if (text == text_display_end)
+ return ImVec2(0.0f, font_size);
+ ImVec2 text_size = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, wrap_width, text, text_display_end, NULL);
- // Elapse drag & drop payload
- if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount + 1 < g.FrameCount)
+ // Round
+ text_size.x = (float)(int)(text_size.x + 0.95f);
+
+ return text_size;
+}
+
+// Helper to calculate coarse clipping of large list of evenly sized items.
+// NB: Prefer using the ImGuiListClipper higher-level helper if you can! Read comments and instructions there on how those use this sort of pattern.
+// NB: 'items_count' is only used to clamp the result, if you don't know your count you can use INT_MAX
+void ImGui::CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
{
- ClearDragDrop();
- g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.clear();
- memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
+ // If logging is active, do not perform any clipping
+ *out_items_display_start = 0;
+ *out_items_display_end = items_count;
+ return;
+ }
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ {
+ *out_items_display_start = *out_items_display_end = 0;
+ return;
}
- g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr;
- g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = 0;
- g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX;
- g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
- // Update keyboard input state
- memcpy(g.IO.KeysDownDurationPrev, g.IO.KeysDownDuration, sizeof(g.IO.KeysDownDuration));
- for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown); i++)
- g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] = g.IO.KeysDown[i] ? (g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
+ // We create the union of the ClipRect and the NavScoringRect which at worst should be 1 page away from ClipRect
+ ImRect unclipped_rect = window->ClipRect;
+ if (g.NavMoveRequest)
+ unclipped_rect.Add(g.NavScoringRectScreen);
- // Update gamepad/keyboard directional navigation
- NavUpdate();
+ const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ int start = (int)((unclipped_rect.Min.y - pos.y) / items_height);
+ int end = (int)((unclipped_rect.Max.y - pos.y) / items_height);
- // Update mouse input state
- UpdateMouseInputs();
+ // When performing a navigation request, ensure we have one item extra in the direction we are moving to
+ if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Up)
+ start--;
+ if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Down)
+ end++;
- // Calculate frame-rate for the user, as a purely luxurious feature
- g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum += g.IO.DeltaTime - g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx];
- g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx] = g.IO.DeltaTime;
- g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx + 1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame);
- g.IO.Framerate = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum > 0.0f) ? (1.0f / (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum / (float)IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame))) : FLT_MAX;
+ start = ImClamp(start, 0, items_count);
+ end = ImClamp(end + 1, start, items_count);
+ *out_items_display_start = start;
+ *out_items_display_end = end;
+}
- // Handle user moving window with mouse (at the beginning of the frame to avoid input lag or sheering)
- UpdateMouseMovingWindow();
- UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags();
+// Find window given position, search front-to-back
+// FIXME: Note that we have an inconsequential lag here: OuterRectClipped is updated in Begin(), so windows moved programatically
+// with SetWindowPos() and not SetNextWindowPos() will have that rectangle lagging by a frame at the time FindHoveredWindow() is
+// called, aka before the next Begin(). Moving window isn't affected.
+static void FindHoveredWindow()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- // Background darkening/whitening
- if (GetFrontMostPopupModal() != NULL || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha > 0.0f))
- g.DimBgRatio = ImMin(g.DimBgRatio + g.IO.DeltaTime * 6.0f, 1.0f);
- else
- g.DimBgRatio = ImMax(g.DimBgRatio - g.IO.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f);
-
- g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow;
- g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = g.WantTextInputNextFrame = -1;
- g.PlatformImePos = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f); // OS Input Method Editor showing on top-left of our window by default
-
- // Mouse wheel scrolling, scale
- UpdateMouseWheel();
+ ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = NULL;
+ if (g.MovingWindow && !(g.MovingWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs))
+ hovered_window = g.MovingWindow;
- // Pressing TAB activate widget focus
- if (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.NavWindow != NULL && g.NavWindow->Active && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab, false))
+ ImVec2 padding_regular = g.Style.TouchExtraPadding;
+ ImVec2 padding_for_resize_from_edges = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? ImMax(g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, ImVec2(WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS, WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS)) : padding_regular;
+ for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
{
- if (g.NavId != 0 && g.NavIdTabCounter != INT_MAX)
- g.NavWindow->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = g.NavIdTabCounter + 1 + (g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : 1);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+ if (!window->Active || window->Hidden)
+ continue;
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs)
+ continue;
+
+ // Using the clipped AABB, a child window will typically be clipped by its parent (not always)
+ ImRect bb(window->OuterRectClipped);
+ if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize))
+ bb.Expand(padding_regular);
else
- g.NavWindow->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : 0;
- }
- g.NavIdTabCounter = INT_MAX;
+ bb.Expand(padding_for_resize_from_edges);
+ if (!bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
+ continue;
- // Mark all windows as not visible
- for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
- window->WasActive = window->Active;
- window->Active = false;
- window->WriteAccessed = false;
+ // Those seemingly unnecessary extra tests are because the code here is a little different in viewport/docking branches.
+ if (hovered_window == NULL)
+ hovered_window = window;
+ if (hovered_window)
+ break;
}
- // Closing the focused window restore focus to the first active root window in descending z-order
- if (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindow->WasActive)
- FocusFrontMostActiveWindow(NULL);
-
- // No window should be open at the beginning of the frame.
- // But in order to allow the user to call NewFrame() multiple times without calling Render(), we are doing an explicit clear.
- g.CurrentWindowStack.resize(0);
- g.CurrentPopupStack.resize(0);
- ClosePopupsOverWindow(g.NavWindow);
+ g.HoveredWindow = hovered_window;
+ g.HoveredRootWindow = g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow : NULL;
- // Create implicit window - we will only render it if the user has added something to it.
- // We don't use "Debug" to avoid colliding with user trying to create a "Debug" window with custom flags.
- SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(400,400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
- Begin("Debug##Default");
}
-static void* SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name)
+// Test if mouse cursor is hovering given rectangle
+// NB- Rectangle is clipped by our current clip setting
+// NB- Expand the rectangle to be generous on imprecise inputs systems (g.Style.TouchExtraPadding)
+bool ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip)
{
- ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettings(ImHash(name, 0));
- if (!settings)
- settings = CreateNewWindowSettings(name);
- return (void*)settings;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+ // Clip
+ ImRect rect_clipped(r_min, r_max);
+ if (clip)
+ rect_clipped.ClipWith(g.CurrentWindow->ClipRect);
+
+ // Expand for touch input
+ const ImRect rect_for_touch(rect_clipped.Min - g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, rect_clipped.Max + g.Style.TouchExtraPadding);
+ if (!rect_for_touch.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
+ return false;
+ return true;
}
-static void SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line)
+int ImGui::GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey imgui_key)
{
- ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (ImGuiWindowSettings*)entry;
- float x, y;
- int i;
- if (sscanf(line, "Pos=%f,%f", &x, &y) == 2) settings->Pos = ImVec2(x, y);
- else if (sscanf(line, "Size=%f,%f", &x, &y) == 2) settings->Size = ImMax(ImVec2(x, y), GImGui->Style.WindowMinSize);
- else if (sscanf(line, "Collapsed=%d", &i) == 1) settings->Collapsed = (i != 0);
+ IM_ASSERT(imgui_key >= 0 && imgui_key < ImGuiKey_COUNT);
+ return GImGui->IO.KeyMap[imgui_key];
}
-static void SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* imgui_ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf)
+// Note that imgui doesn't know the semantic of each entry of io.KeysDown[]. Use your own indices/enums according to how your back-end/engine stored them into io.KeysDown[]!
+bool ImGui::IsKeyDown(int user_key_index)
{
- // Gather data from windows that were active during this session
- ImGuiContext& g = *imgui_ctx;
- for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings)
- continue;
-
- ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (window->SettingsIdx != -1) ? &g.SettingsWindows[window->SettingsIdx] : ImGui::FindWindowSettings(window->ID);
- if (!settings)
- {
- settings = CreateNewWindowSettings(window->Name);
- window->SettingsIdx = g.SettingsWindows.index_from_pointer(settings);
- }
- IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == window->ID);
- settings->Pos = window->Pos;
- settings->Size = window->SizeFull;
- settings->Collapsed = window->Collapsed;
- }
-
- // Write a buffer
- // If a window wasn't opened in this session we preserve its settings
- buf->reserve(buf->size() + g.SettingsWindows.Size * 96); // ballpark reserve
- for (int i = 0; i != g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
- {
- const ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = &g.SettingsWindows[i];
- if (settings->Pos.x == FLT_MAX)
- continue;
- const char* name = settings->Name;
- if (const char* p = strstr(name, "###")) // Skip to the "###" marker if any. We don't skip past to match the behavior of GetID()
- name = p;
- buf->appendf("[%s][%s]\n", handler->TypeName, name);
- buf->appendf("Pos=%d,%d\n", (int)settings->Pos.x, (int)settings->Pos.y);
- buf->appendf("Size=%d,%d\n", (int)settings->Size.x, (int)settings->Size.y);
- buf->appendf("Collapsed=%d\n", settings->Collapsed);
- buf->appendf("\n");
- }
+ if (user_key_index < 0) return false;
+ IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(GImGui->IO.KeysDown));
+ return GImGui->IO.KeysDown[user_key_index];
}
-void ImGui::Initialize(ImGuiContext* context)
+int ImGui::CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(float t, float t_prev, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *context;
- IM_ASSERT(!g.Initialized && !g.SettingsLoaded);
-
- // Add .ini handle for ImGuiWindow type
- ImGuiSettingsHandler ini_handler;
- ini_handler.TypeName = "Window";
- ini_handler.TypeHash = ImHash("Window", 0, 0);
- ini_handler.ReadOpenFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadOpen;
- ini_handler.ReadLineFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadLine;
- ini_handler.WriteAllFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll;
- g.SettingsHandlers.push_front(ini_handler);
+ if (t == 0.0f)
+ return 1;
+ if (t <= repeat_delay || repeat_rate <= 0.0f)
+ return 0;
+ const int count = (int)((t - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate) - (int)((t_prev - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate);
+ return (count > 0) ? count : 0;
+}
- g.Initialized = true;
+int ImGui::GetKeyPressedAmount(int key_index, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (key_index < 0)
+ return 0;
+ IM_ASSERT(key_index >= 0 && key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
+ const float t = g.IO.KeysDownDuration[key_index];
+ return CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, repeat_delay, repeat_rate);
}
-// This function is merely here to free heap allocations.
-void ImGui::Shutdown(ImGuiContext* context)
+bool ImGui::IsKeyPressed(int user_key_index, bool repeat)
{
- // The fonts atlas can be used prior to calling NewFrame(), so we clear it even if g.Initialized is FALSE (which would happen if we never called NewFrame)
- ImGuiContext& g = *context;
- if (g.IO.Fonts && g.FontAtlasOwnedByContext)
- IM_DELETE(g.IO.Fonts);
- g.IO.Fonts = NULL;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (user_key_index < 0)
+ return false;
+ IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
+ const float t = g.IO.KeysDownDuration[user_key_index];
+ if (t == 0.0f)
+ return true;
+ if (repeat && t > g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)
+ return GetKeyPressedAmount(user_key_index, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate) > 0;
+ return false;
+}
- // Cleanup of other data are conditional on actually having initialized ImGui.
- if (!g.Initialized)
- return;
+bool ImGui::IsKeyReleased(int user_key_index)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (user_key_index < 0) return false;
+ IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
+ return g.IO.KeysDownDurationPrev[user_key_index] >= 0.0f && !g.IO.KeysDown[user_key_index];
+}
- // Save settings (unless we haven't attempted to load them: CreateContext/DestroyContext without a call to NewFrame shouldn't save an empty file)
- if (g.SettingsLoaded && g.IO.IniFilename != NULL)
- SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
+bool ImGui::IsMouseDown(int button)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+ return g.IO.MouseDown[button];
+}
- // Clear everything else
- for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++)
- IM_DELETE(g.Windows[i]);
- g.Windows.clear();
- g.WindowsSortBuffer.clear();
- g.CurrentWindow = NULL;
- g.CurrentWindowStack.clear();
- g.WindowsById.Clear();
- g.NavWindow = NULL;
- g.HoveredWindow = NULL;
- g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;
- g.ActiveIdWindow = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = NULL;
- g.MovingWindow = NULL;
- g.ColorModifiers.clear();
- g.StyleModifiers.clear();
- g.FontStack.clear();
- g.OpenPopupStack.clear();
- g.CurrentPopupStack.clear();
- g.DrawDataBuilder.ClearFreeMemory();
- g.OverlayDrawList.ClearFreeMemory();
- g.PrivateClipboard.clear();
- g.InputTextState.Text.clear();
- g.InputTextState.InitialText.clear();
- g.InputTextState.TempTextBuffer.clear();
+bool ImGui::IsAnyMouseDown()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); n++)
+ if (g.IO.MouseDown[n])
+ return true;
+ return false;
+}
- for (int i = 0; i < g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
- IM_DELETE(g.SettingsWindows[i].Name);
- g.SettingsWindows.clear();
- g.SettingsHandlers.clear();
+bool ImGui::IsMouseClicked(int button, bool repeat)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+ const float t = g.IO.MouseDownDuration[button];
+ if (t == 0.0f)
+ return true;
- if (g.LogFile && g.LogFile != stdout)
+ if (repeat && t > g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)
{
- fclose(g.LogFile);
- g.LogFile = NULL;
+ float delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate;
+ if ((ImFmod(t - delay, rate) > rate*0.5f) != (ImFmod(t - delay - g.IO.DeltaTime, rate) > rate*0.5f))
+ return true;
}
- g.LogClipboard.clear();
- g.Initialized = false;
+ return false;
}
-ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::FindWindowSettings(ImGuiID id)
+bool ImGui::IsMouseReleased(int button)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- for (int i = 0; i != g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
- if (g.SettingsWindows[i].ID == id)
- return &g.SettingsWindows[i];
- return NULL;
+ IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+ return g.IO.MouseReleased[button];
}
-static ImGuiWindowSettings* CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name)
+bool ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(int button)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.SettingsWindows.push_back(ImGuiWindowSettings());
- ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = &g.SettingsWindows.back();
- settings->Name = ImStrdup(name);
- settings->ID = ImHash(name, 0);
- return settings;
+ IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+ return g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[button];
}
-void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename)
+bool ImGui::IsMouseDragging(int button, float lock_threshold)
{
- size_t file_data_size = 0;
- char* file_data = (char*)ImFileLoadToMemory(ini_filename, "rb", &file_data_size);
- if (!file_data)
- return;
- LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(file_data, (size_t)file_data_size);
- ImGui::MemFree(file_data);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+ if (!g.IO.MouseDown[button])
+ return false;
+ if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
+ lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
+ return g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold;
}
-ImGuiSettingsHandler* ImGui::FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePos()
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiID type_hash = ImHash(type_name, 0, 0);
- for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
- if (g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].TypeHash == type_hash)
- return &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n];
- return NULL;
+ return GImGui->IO.MousePos;
}
-// Zero-tolerance, no error reporting, cheap .ini parsing
-void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size)
+// NB: prefer to call right after BeginPopup(). At the time Selectable/MenuItem is activated, the popup is already closed!
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
- IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsLoaded == false && g.FrameCount == 0);
-
- // For user convenience, we allow passing a non zero-terminated string (hence the ini_size parameter).
- // For our convenience and to make the code simpler, we'll also write zero-terminators within the buffer. So let's create a writable copy..
- if (ini_size == 0)
- ini_size = strlen(ini_data);
- char* buf = (char*)ImGui::MemAlloc(ini_size + 1);
- char* buf_end = buf + ini_size;
- memcpy(buf, ini_data, ini_size);
- buf[ini_size] = 0;
-
- void* entry_data = NULL;
- ImGuiSettingsHandler* entry_handler = NULL;
-
- char* line_end = NULL;
- for (char* line = buf; line < buf_end; line = line_end + 1)
- {
- // Skip new lines markers, then find end of the line
- while (*line == '\n' || *line == '\r')
- line++;
- line_end = line;
- while (line_end < buf_end && *line_end != '\n' && *line_end != '\r')
- line_end++;
- line_end[0] = 0;
-
- if (line[0] == '[' && line_end > line && line_end[-1] == ']')
- {
- // Parse "[Type][Name]". Note that 'Name' can itself contains [] characters, which is acceptable with the current format and parsing code.
- line_end[-1] = 0;
- const char* name_end = line_end - 1;
- const char* type_start = line + 1;
- char* type_end = (char*)(intptr_t)ImStrchrRange(type_start, name_end, ']');
- const char* name_start = type_end ? ImStrchrRange(type_end + 1, name_end, '[') : NULL;
- if (!type_end || !name_start)
- {
- name_start = type_start; // Import legacy entries that have no type
- type_start = "Window";
- }
- else
- {
- *type_end = 0; // Overwrite first ']'
- name_start++; // Skip second '['
- }
- entry_handler = FindSettingsHandler(type_start);
- entry_data = entry_handler ? entry_handler->ReadOpenFn(&g, entry_handler, name_start) : NULL;
- }
- else if (entry_handler != NULL && entry_data != NULL)
- {
- // Let type handler parse the line
- entry_handler->ReadLineFn(&g, entry_handler, entry_data, line);
- }
- }
- ImGui::MemFree(buf);
- g.SettingsLoaded = true;
+ if (g.BeginPopupStack.Size > 0)
+ return g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size-1].OpenMousePos;
+ return g.IO.MousePos;
}
-void ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename)
+// We typically use ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote an invalid mouse position.
+bool ImGui::IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
- if (!ini_filename)
- return;
-
- size_t ini_data_size = 0;
- const char* ini_data = SaveIniSettingsToMemory(&ini_data_size);
- FILE* f = ImFileOpen(ini_filename, "wt");
- if (!f)
- return;
- fwrite(ini_data, sizeof(char), ini_data_size, f);
- fclose(f);
+ // The assert is only to silence a false-positive in XCode Static Analysis.
+ // Because GImGui is not dereferenced in every code path, the static analyzer assume that it may be NULL (which it doesn't for other functions).
+ IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL);
+ const float MOUSE_INVALID = -256000.0f;
+ ImVec2 p = mouse_pos ? *mouse_pos : GImGui->IO.MousePos;
+ return p.x >= MOUSE_INVALID && p.y >= MOUSE_INVALID;
}
-// Call registered handlers (e.g. SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll() + custom handlers) to write their stuff into a text buffer
-const char* ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_size)
+// Return the delta from the initial clicking position.
+// This is locked and return 0.0f until the mouse moves past a distance threshold at least once.
+// NB: This is only valid if IsMousePosValid(). Back-ends in theory should always keep mouse position valid when dragging even outside the client window.
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(int button, float lock_threshold)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
- g.SettingsIniData.Buf.resize(0);
- g.SettingsIniData.Buf.push_back(0);
- for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
- {
- ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler = &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n];
- handler->WriteAllFn(&g, handler, &g.SettingsIniData);
- }
- if (out_size)
- *out_size = (size_t)g.SettingsIniData.size();
- return g.SettingsIniData.c_str();
+ IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+ if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
+ lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
+ if (g.IO.MouseDown[button])
+ if (g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold)
+ return g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button]; // Assume we can only get active with left-mouse button (at the moment).
+ return ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
}
-void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty()
+void ImGui::ResetMouseDragDelta(int button)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
- g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate;
+ IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+ // NB: We don't need to reset g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr
+ g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button] = g.IO.MousePos;
}
-void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty(ImGuiWindow* window)
+ImGuiMouseCursor ImGui::GetMouseCursor()
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
- if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
- g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate;
+ return GImGui->MouseCursor;
}
-// FIXME: Add a more explicit sort order in the window structure.
-static int IMGUI_CDECL ChildWindowComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+void ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type)
{
- const ImGuiWindow* const a = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)lhs;
- const ImGuiWindow* const b = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)rhs;
- if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
- return d;
- if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
- return d;
- return (a->BeginOrderWithinParent - b->BeginOrderWithinParent);
+ GImGui->MouseCursor = cursor_type;
}
-static void AddWindowToSortedBuffer(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window)
+void ImGui::CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool capture)
{
- out_sorted_windows->push_back(window);
- if (window->Active)
- {
- int count = window->DC.ChildWindows.Size;
- if (count > 1)
- ImQsort(window->DC.ChildWindows.begin(), (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiWindow*), ChildWindowComparer);
- for (int i = 0; i < count; i++)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i];
- if (child->Active)
- AddWindowToSortedBuffer(out_sorted_windows, child);
- }
- }
+ GImGui->WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = capture ? 1 : 0;
}
-static void AddDrawListToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list)
+void ImGui::CaptureMouseFromApp(bool capture)
{
- if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.empty())
- return;
+ GImGui->WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = capture ? 1 : 0;
+}
- // Remove trailing command if unused
- ImDrawCmd& last_cmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.back();
- if (last_cmd.ElemCount == 0 && last_cmd.UserCallback == NULL)
+bool ImGui::IsItemActive()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.ActiveId)
{
- draw_list->CmdBuffer.pop_back();
- if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.empty())
- return;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ return g.ActiveId == window->DC.LastItemId;
}
-
- // Draw list sanity check. Detect mismatch between PrimReserve() calls and incrementing _VtxCurrentIdx, _VtxWritePtr etc. May trigger for you if you are using PrimXXX functions incorrectly.
- IM_ASSERT(draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_VtxWritePtr == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size);
- IM_ASSERT(draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_IdxWritePtr == draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size);
- IM_ASSERT((int)draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size);
-
- // Check that draw_list doesn't use more vertices than indexable (default ImDrawIdx = unsigned short = 2 bytes = 64K vertices per ImDrawList = per window)
- // If this assert triggers because you are drawing lots of stuff manually:
- // A) Make sure you are coarse clipping, because ImDrawList let all your vertices pass. You can use the Metrics window to inspect draw list contents.
- // B) If you need/want meshes with more than 64K vertices, uncomment the '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' line in imconfig.h to set the index size to 4 bytes.
- // You'll need to handle the 4-bytes indices to your renderer. For example, the OpenGL example code detect index size at compile-time by doing:
- // glDrawElements(GL_TRIANGLES, (GLsizei)pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer_offset);
- // Your own engine or render API may use different parameters or function calls to specify index sizes. 2 and 4 bytes indices are generally supported by most API.
- // C) If for some reason you cannot use 4 bytes indices or don't want to, a workaround is to call BeginChild()/EndChild() before reaching the 64K limit to split your draw commands in multiple draw lists.
- if (sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2)
- IM_ASSERT(draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx < (1 << 16) && "Too many vertices in ImDrawList using 16-bit indices. Read comment above");
-
- out_list->push_back(draw_list);
+ return false;
}
-static void AddWindowToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_render_list, ImGuiWindow* window)
+bool ImGui::IsItemActivated()
{
- AddDrawListToDrawData(out_render_list, window->DrawList);
- for (int i = 0; i < window->DC.ChildWindows.Size; i++)
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.ActiveId)
{
- ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i];
- if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(child)) // clipped children may have been marked not active
- AddWindowToDrawData(out_render_list, child);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (g.ActiveId == window->DC.LastItemId && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame != window->DC.LastItemId)
+ return true;
}
+ return false;
}
-static void AddWindowToDrawDataSelectLayer(ImGuiWindow* window)
+bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.IO.MetricsActiveWindows++;
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
- AddWindowToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[1], window);
- else
- AddWindowToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], window);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ return (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == window->DC.LastItemId && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.ActiveId != window->DC.LastItemId);
}
-void ImDrawDataBuilder::FlattenIntoSingleLayer()
+bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()
{
- int n = Layers[0].Size;
- int size = n;
- for (int i = 1; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); i++)
- size += Layers[i].Size;
- Layers[0].resize(size);
- for (int layer_n = 1; layer_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); layer_n++)
- {
- ImVector<ImDrawList*>& layer = Layers[layer_n];
- if (layer.empty())
- continue;
- memcpy(&Layers[0][n], &layer[0], layer.Size * sizeof(ImDrawList*));
- n += layer.Size;
- layer.resize(0);
- }
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return IsItemDeactivated() && (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEdited || (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdHasBeenEdited));
}
-static void SetupDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* draw_lists, ImDrawData* out_draw_data)
+bool ImGui::IsItemFocused()
{
- ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
- out_draw_data->Valid = true;
- out_draw_data->CmdLists = (draw_lists->Size > 0) ? draw_lists->Data : NULL;
- out_draw_data->CmdListsCount = draw_lists->Size;
- out_draw_data->TotalVtxCount = out_draw_data->TotalIdxCount = 0;
- out_draw_data->DisplayPos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- out_draw_data->DisplaySize = io.DisplaySize;
- for (int n = 0; n < draw_lists->Size; n++)
- {
- out_draw_data->TotalVtxCount += draw_lists->Data[n]->VtxBuffer.Size;
- out_draw_data->TotalIdxCount += draw_lists->Data[n]->IdxBuffer.Size;
- }
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ if (g.NavId == 0 || g.NavDisableHighlight || g.NavId != window->DC.LastItemId)
+ return false;
+ return true;
}
-// When using this function it is sane to ensure that float are perfectly rounded to integer values, to that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render produce correct result.
-void ImGui::PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect)
+bool ImGui::IsItemClicked(int mouse_button)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DrawList->PushClipRect(clip_rect_min, clip_rect_max, intersect_with_current_clip_rect);
- window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
+ return IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_None);
}
-void ImGui::PopClipRect()
+bool ImGui::IsAnyItemHovered()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
- window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.HoveredId != 0 || g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0;
}
-// This is normally called by Render(). You may want to call it directly if you want to avoid calling Render() but the gain will be very minimal.
-void ImGui::EndFrame()
+bool ImGui::IsAnyItemActive()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized); // Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()
- if (g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount) // Don't process EndFrame() multiple times.
- return;
+ return g.ActiveId != 0;
+}
- // Notify OS when our Input Method Editor cursor has moved (e.g. CJK inputs using Microsoft IME)
- if (g.IO.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn && ImLengthSqr(g.PlatformImeLastPos - g.PlatformImePos) > 0.0001f)
- {
- g.IO.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn((int)g.PlatformImePos.x, (int)g.PlatformImePos.y);
- g.PlatformImeLastPos = g.PlatformImePos;
- }
+bool ImGui::IsAnyItemFocused()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight;
+}
- // Hide implicit "Debug" window if it hasn't been used
- IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1); // Mismatched Begin()/End() calls, did you forget to call end on g.CurrentWindow->Name?
- if (g.CurrentWindow && !g.CurrentWindow->WriteAccessed)
- g.CurrentWindow->Active = false;
- End();
-
- // Show CTRL+TAB list
- if (g.NavWindowingTarget)
- NavUpdateWindowingList();
-
- // Initiate moving window
- if (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.HoveredId == 0)
- {
- if (!g.NavWindow || !g.NavWindow->Appearing) // Unless we just made a window/popup appear
- {
- // Click to focus window and start moving (after we're done with all our widgets)
- if (g.IO.MouseClicked[0])
- {
- if (g.HoveredRootWindow != NULL)
- StartMouseMovingWindow(g.HoveredWindow);
- else if (g.NavWindow != NULL && GetFrontMostPopupModal() == NULL)
- FocusWindow(NULL); // Clicking on void disable focus
- }
+bool ImGui::IsItemVisible()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(window->DC.LastItemRect);
+}
- // With right mouse button we close popups without changing focus
- // (The left mouse button path calls FocusWindow which will lead NewFrame->ClosePopupsOverWindow to trigger)
- if (g.IO.MouseClicked[1])
- {
- // Find the top-most window between HoveredWindow and the front most Modal Window.
- // This is where we can trim the popup stack.
- ImGuiWindow* modal = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
- bool hovered_window_above_modal = false;
- if (modal == NULL)
- hovered_window_above_modal = true;
- for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0 && hovered_window_above_modal == false; i--)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
- if (window == modal)
- break;
- if (window == g.HoveredWindow)
- hovered_window_above_modal = true;
- }
- ClosePopupsOverWindow(hovered_window_above_modal ? g.HoveredWindow : modal);
- }
- }
- }
+bool ImGui::IsItemEdited()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return (window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited) != 0;
+}
- // Sort the window list so that all child windows are after their parent
- // We cannot do that on FocusWindow() because childs may not exist yet
- g.WindowsSortBuffer.resize(0);
- g.WindowsSortBuffer.reserve(g.Windows.Size);
- for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
- if (window->Active && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) // if a child is active its parent will add it
- continue;
- AddWindowToSortedBuffer(&g.WindowsSortBuffer, window);
- }
+// Allow last item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. Both may be activated during the same frame before the later one takes priority.
+void ImGui::SetItemAllowOverlap()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.HoveredId == g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId)
+ g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = true;
+ if (g.ActiveId == g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId)
+ g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = true;
+}
- IM_ASSERT(g.Windows.Size == g.WindowsSortBuffer.Size); // we done something wrong
- g.Windows.swap(g.WindowsSortBuffer);
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMin()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.LastItemRect.Min;
+}
- // Unlock font atlas
- g.IO.Fonts->Locked = false;
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMax()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.LastItemRect.Max;
+}
- // Clear Input data for next frame
- g.IO.MouseWheel = g.IO.MouseWheelH = 0.0f;
- memset(g.IO.InputCharacters, 0, sizeof(g.IO.InputCharacters));
- memset(g.IO.NavInputs, 0, sizeof(g.IO.NavInputs));
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectSize()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.LastItemRect.GetSize();
+}
- g.FrameCountEnded = g.FrameCount;
+static ImRect GetViewportRect()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return ImRect(0.0f, 0.0f, g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.IO.DisplaySize.y);
}
-void ImGui::Render()
+static bool ImGui::BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized); // Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount)
- ImGui::EndFrame();
- g.FrameCountRendered = g.FrameCount;
+ flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
+ flags |= (parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove); // Inherit the NoMove flag
- // Gather windows to render
- g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices = g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices = g.IO.MetricsActiveWindows = 0;
- g.DrawDataBuilder.Clear();
- ImGuiWindow* windows_to_render_front_most[2];
- windows_to_render_front_most[0] = (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)) ? g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow : NULL;
- windows_to_render_front_most[1] = g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingList : NULL;
- for (int n = 0; n != g.Windows.Size; n++)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
- if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(window) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) == 0 && window != windows_to_render_front_most[0] && window != windows_to_render_front_most[1])
- AddWindowToDrawDataSelectLayer(window);
- }
- for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(windows_to_render_front_most); n++)
- if (windows_to_render_front_most[n] && IsWindowActiveAndVisible(windows_to_render_front_most[n])) // NavWindowingTarget is always temporarily displayed as the front-most window
- AddWindowToDrawDataSelectLayer(windows_to_render_front_most[n]);
- g.DrawDataBuilder.FlattenIntoSingleLayer();
+ // Size
+ const ImVec2 content_avail = GetContentRegionAvail();
+ ImVec2 size = ImFloor(size_arg);
+ const int auto_fit_axises = ((size.x == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_X) : 0x00) | ((size.y == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y) : 0x00);
+ if (size.x <= 0.0f)
+ size.x = ImMax(content_avail.x + size.x, 4.0f); // Arbitrary minimum child size (0.0f causing too much issues)
+ if (size.y <= 0.0f)
+ size.y = ImMax(content_avail.y + size.y, 4.0f);
+ SetNextWindowSize(size);
- // Draw software mouse cursor if requested
- ImVec2 offset, size, uv[4];
- if (g.IO.MouseDrawCursor && g.IO.Fonts->GetMouseCursorTexData(g.MouseCursor, &offset, &size, &uv[0], &uv[2]))
- {
- const ImVec2 pos = g.IO.MousePos - offset;
- const ImTextureID tex_id = g.IO.Fonts->TexID;
- const float sc = g.Style.MouseCursorScale;
- g.OverlayDrawList.PushTextureID(tex_id);
- g.OverlayDrawList.AddImage(tex_id, pos + ImVec2(1,0)*sc, pos+ImVec2(1,0)*sc + size*sc, uv[2], uv[3], IM_COL32(0,0,0,48)); // Shadow
- g.OverlayDrawList.AddImage(tex_id, pos + ImVec2(2,0)*sc, pos+ImVec2(2,0)*sc + size*sc, uv[2], uv[3], IM_COL32(0,0,0,48)); // Shadow
- g.OverlayDrawList.AddImage(tex_id, pos, pos + size*sc, uv[2], uv[3], IM_COL32(0,0,0,255)); // Black border
- g.OverlayDrawList.AddImage(tex_id, pos, pos + size*sc, uv[0], uv[1], IM_COL32(255,255,255,255)); // White fill
- g.OverlayDrawList.PopTextureID();
- }
- if (!g.OverlayDrawList.VtxBuffer.empty())
- AddDrawListToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], &g.OverlayDrawList);
+ // Build up name. If you need to append to a same child from multiple location in the ID stack, use BeginChild(ImGuiID id) with a stable value.
+ char title[256];
+ if (name)
+ ImFormatString(title, IM_ARRAYSIZE(title), "%s/%s_%08X", parent_window->Name, name, id);
+ else
+ ImFormatString(title, IM_ARRAYSIZE(title), "%s/%08X", parent_window->Name, id);
- // Setup ImDrawData structure for end-user
- SetupDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], &g.DrawData);
- g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices = g.DrawData.TotalVtxCount;
- g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices = g.DrawData.TotalIdxCount;
+ const float backup_border_size = g.Style.ChildBorderSize;
+ if (!border)
+ g.Style.ChildBorderSize = 0.0f;
+ bool ret = Begin(title, NULL, flags);
+ g.Style.ChildBorderSize = backup_border_size;
- // Render. If user hasn't set a callback then they may retrieve the draw data via GetDrawData()
-#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
- if (g.DrawData.CmdListsCount > 0 && g.IO.RenderDrawListsFn != NULL)
- g.IO.RenderDrawListsFn(&g.DrawData);
-#endif
-}
+ ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ child_window->ChildId = id;
+ child_window->AutoFitChildAxises = auto_fit_axises;
-const char* ImGui::FindRenderedTextEnd(const char* text, const char* text_end)
-{
- const char* text_display_end = text;
- if (!text_end)
- text_end = (const char*)-1;
+ // Set the cursor to handle case where the user called SetNextWindowPos()+BeginChild() manually.
+ // While this is not really documented/defined, it seems that the expected thing to do.
+ if (child_window->BeginCount == 1)
+ parent_window->DC.CursorPos = child_window->Pos;
- while (text_display_end < text_end && *text_display_end != '\0' && (text_display_end[0] != '#' || text_display_end[1] != '#'))
- text_display_end++;
- return text_display_end;
+ // Process navigation-in immediately so NavInit can run on first frame
+ if (g.NavActivateId == id && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) && (child_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask != 0 || child_window->DC.NavHasScroll))
+ {
+ FocusWindow(child_window);
+ NavInitWindow(child_window, false);
+ SetActiveID(id+1, child_window); // Steal ActiveId with a dummy id so that key-press won't activate child item
+ g.ActiveIdSource = ImGuiInputSource_Nav;
+ }
+ return ret;
}
-// Pass text data straight to log (without being displayed)
-void ImGui::LogText(const char* fmt, ...)
+bool ImGui::BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (!g.LogEnabled)
- return;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ return BeginChildEx(str_id, window->GetID(str_id), size_arg, border, extra_flags);
+}
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- if (g.LogFile)
- vfprintf(g.LogFile, fmt, args);
- else
- g.LogClipboard.appendfv(fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
+bool ImGui::BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
+{
+ IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
+ return BeginChildEx(NULL, id, size_arg, border, extra_flags);
}
-// Internal version that takes a position to decide on newline placement and pad items according to their depth.
-// We split text into individual lines to add current tree level padding
-static void LogRenderedText(const ImVec2* ref_pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL)
+void ImGui::EndChild()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (!text_end)
- text_end = ImGui::FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
-
- const bool log_new_line = ref_pos && (ref_pos->y > window->DC.LogLinePosY + 1);
- if (ref_pos)
- window->DC.LogLinePosY = ref_pos->y;
-
- const char* text_remaining = text;
- if (g.LogStartDepth > window->DC.TreeDepth) // Re-adjust padding if we have popped out of our starting depth
- g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
- const int tree_depth = (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogStartDepth);
- for (;;)
+ IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow); // Mismatched BeginChild()/EndChild() callss
+ if (window->BeginCount > 1)
{
- // Split the string. Each new line (after a '\n') is followed by spacing corresponding to the current depth of our log entry.
- const char* line_end = text_remaining;
- while (line_end < text_end)
- if (*line_end == '\n')
- break;
- else
- line_end++;
- if (line_end >= text_end)
- line_end = NULL;
+ End();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ImVec2 sz = window->Size;
+ if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_X)) // Arbitrary minimum zero-ish child size of 4.0f causes less trouble than a 0.0f
+ sz.x = ImMax(4.0f, sz.x);
+ if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y))
+ sz.y = ImMax(4.0f, sz.y);
+ End();
- const bool is_first_line = (text == text_remaining);
- bool is_last_line = false;
- if (line_end == NULL)
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ ImRect bb(parent_window->DC.CursorPos, parent_window->DC.CursorPos + sz);
+ ItemSize(sz);
+ if ((window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask != 0 || window->DC.NavHasScroll) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened))
{
- is_last_line = true;
- line_end = text_end;
+ ItemAdd(bb, window->ChildId);
+ RenderNavHighlight(bb, window->ChildId);
+
+ // When browsing a window that has no activable items (scroll only) we keep a highlight on the child
+ if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0 && window == g.NavWindow)
+ RenderNavHighlight(ImRect(bb.Min - ImVec2(2,2), bb.Max + ImVec2(2,2)), g.NavId, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin);
}
- if (line_end != NULL && !(is_last_line && (line_end - text_remaining)==0))
+ else
{
- const int char_count = (int)(line_end - text_remaining);
- if (log_new_line || !is_first_line)
- ImGui::LogText(IM_NEWLINE "%*s%.*s", tree_depth*4, "", char_count, text_remaining);
- else
- ImGui::LogText(" %.*s", char_count, text_remaining);
+ // Not navigable into
+ ItemAdd(bb, 0);
}
-
- if (is_last_line)
- break;
- text_remaining = line_end + 1;
}
}
-// Internal ImGui functions to render text
-// RenderText***() functions calls ImDrawList::AddText() calls ImBitmapFont::RenderText()
-void ImGui::RenderText(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_hash)
+// Helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame.
+bool ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- // Hide anything after a '##' string
- const char* text_display_end;
- if (hide_text_after_hash)
- {
- text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
- }
- else
- {
- if (!text_end)
- text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
- text_display_end = text_end;
- }
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]);
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding);
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize);
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, style.FramePadding);
+ bool ret = BeginChild(id, size, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | extra_flags);
+ PopStyleVar(3);
+ PopStyleColor();
+ return ret;
+}
- if (text != text_display_end)
- {
- window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end);
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_display_end);
- }
+void ImGui::EndChildFrame()
+{
+ EndChild();
}
-void ImGui::RenderTextWrapped(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width)
+// Save and compare stack sizes on Begin()/End() to detect usage errors
+static void CheckStacksSize(ImGuiWindow* window, bool write)
{
+ // NOT checking: DC.ItemWidth, DC.AllowKeyboardFocus, DC.ButtonRepeat, DC.TextWrapPos (per window) to allow user to conveniently push once and not pop (they are cleared on Begin)
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ short* p_backup = &window->DC.StackSizesBackup[0];
+ { int current = window->IDStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = (short)current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "PushID/PopID or TreeNode/TreePop Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many PopID()/TreePop()
+ { int current = window->DC.GroupStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = (short)current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "BeginGroup/EndGroup Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many EndGroup()
+ { int current = g.BeginPopupStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = (short)current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "BeginMenu/EndMenu or BeginPopup/EndPopup Mismatch"); p_backup++;}// Too few or too many EndMenu()/EndPopup()
+ // For color, style and font stacks there is an incentive to use Push/Begin/Pop/.../End patterns, so we relax our checks a little to allow them.
+ { int current = g.ColorModifiers.Size; if (write) *p_backup = (short)current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushStyleColor/PopStyleColor Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many PopStyleColor()
+ { int current = g.StyleModifiers.Size; if (write) *p_backup = (short)current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushStyleVar/PopStyleVar Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many PopStyleVar()
+ { int current = g.FontStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = (short)current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushFont/PopFont Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many PopFont()
+ IM_ASSERT(p_backup == window->DC.StackSizesBackup + IM_ARRAYSIZE(window->DC.StackSizesBackup));
+}
- if (!text_end)
- text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
+static void SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiCond flags, bool enabled)
+{
+ window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & ~flags);
+ window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & ~flags);
+ window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & ~flags);
+}
- if (text != text_end)
- {
- window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_end, wrap_width);
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_end);
- }
+ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindWindowByID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return (ImGuiWindow*)g.WindowsById.GetVoidPtr(id);
}
-// Default clip_rect uses (pos_min,pos_max)
-// Handle clipping on CPU immediately (vs typically let the GPU clip the triangles that are overlapping the clipping rectangle edges)
-void ImGui::RenderTextClipped(const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align, const ImRect* clip_rect)
+ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindWindowByName(const char* name)
{
- // Hide anything after a '##' string
- const char* text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
- const int text_len = (int)(text_display_end - text);
- if (text_len == 0)
- return;
+ ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(name, 0);
+ return FindWindowByID(id);
+}
+static ImGuiWindow* CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImVec2 size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
+{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- // Perform CPU side clipping for single clipped element to avoid using scissor state
- ImVec2 pos = pos_min;
- const ImVec2 text_size = text_size_if_known ? *text_size_if_known : CalcTextSize(text, text_display_end, false, 0.0f);
+ // Create window the first time
+ ImGuiWindow* window = IM_NEW(ImGuiWindow)(&g, name);
+ window->Flags = flags;
+ g.WindowsById.SetVoidPtr(window->ID, window);
- const ImVec2* clip_min = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Min : &pos_min;
- const ImVec2* clip_max = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Max : &pos_max;
- bool need_clipping = (pos.x + text_size.x >= clip_max->x) || (pos.y + text_size.y >= clip_max->y);
- if (clip_rect) // If we had no explicit clipping rectangle then pos==clip_min
- need_clipping |= (pos.x < clip_min->x) || (pos.y < clip_min->y);
+ // Default/arbitrary window position. Use SetNextWindowPos() with the appropriate condition flag to change the initial position of a window.
+ window->Pos = ImVec2(60, 60);
- // Align whole block. We should defer that to the better rendering function when we'll have support for individual line alignment.
- if (align.x > 0.0f) pos.x = ImMax(pos.x, pos.x + (pos_max.x - pos.x - text_size.x) * align.x);
- if (align.y > 0.0f) pos.y = ImMax(pos.y, pos.y + (pos_max.y - pos.y - text_size.y) * align.y);
+ // User can disable loading and saving of settings. Tooltip and child windows also don't store settings.
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
+ if (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettings(window->ID))
+ {
+ // Retrieve settings from .ini file
+ window->SettingsIdx = g.SettingsWindows.index_from_ptr(settings);
+ SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, false);
+ window->Pos = ImFloor(settings->Pos);
+ window->Collapsed = settings->Collapsed;
+ if (ImLengthSqr(settings->Size) > 0.00001f)
+ size = ImFloor(settings->Size);
+ }
+ window->Size = window->SizeFull = window->SizeFullAtLastBegin = ImFloor(size);
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->Pos; // So first call to CalcSizeContents() doesn't return crazy values
- // Render
- if (need_clipping)
+ if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) != 0)
{
- ImVec4 fine_clip_rect(clip_min->x, clip_min->y, clip_max->x, clip_max->y);
- window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, &fine_clip_rect);
+ window->AutoFitFramesX = window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
+ window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
}
else
{
- window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, NULL);
+ if (window->Size.x <= 0.0f)
+ window->AutoFitFramesX = 2;
+ if (window->Size.y <= 0.0f)
+ window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
+ window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) || (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0);
}
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_display_end);
+
+ g.WindowsFocusOrder.push_back(window);
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)
+ g.Windows.push_front(window); // Quite slow but rare and only once
+ else
+ g.Windows.push_back(window);
+ return window;
}
-// Render a rectangle shaped with optional rounding and borders
-void ImGui::RenderFrame(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, bool border, float rounding)
+static ImVec2 CalcSizeAfterConstraint(ImGuiWindow* window, ImVec2 new_size)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, fill_col, rounding);
- const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize;
- if (border && border_size > 0.0f)
+ if (g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond != 0)
{
- window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min+ImVec2(1,1), p_max+ImVec2(1,1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
- window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
+ // Using -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size.
+ ImRect cr = g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect;
+ new_size.x = (cr.Min.x >= 0 && cr.Max.x >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.x, cr.Min.x, cr.Max.x) : window->SizeFull.x;
+ new_size.y = (cr.Min.y >= 0 && cr.Max.y >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.y, cr.Min.y, cr.Max.y) : window->SizeFull.y;
+ if (g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback)
+ {
+ ImGuiSizeCallbackData data;
+ data.UserData = g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData;
+ data.Pos = window->Pos;
+ data.CurrentSize = window->SizeFull;
+ data.DesiredSize = new_size;
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback(&data);
+ new_size = data.DesiredSize;
+ }
}
-}
-void ImGui::RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, float rounding)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize;
- if (border_size > 0.0f)
+ // Minimum size
+ if (!(window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)))
{
- window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min+ImVec2(1,1), p_max+ImVec2(1,1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
- window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
+ new_size = ImMax(new_size, g.Style.WindowMinSize);
+ new_size.y = ImMax(new_size.y, window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight() + ImMax(0.0f, g.Style.WindowRounding - 1.0f)); // Reduce artifacts with very small windows
}
+ return new_size;
}
-// Render an arrow. 'pos' is position of the arrow tip. half_sz.x is length from base to tip. half_sz.y is length on each side.
-void ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, ImGuiDir direction, ImU32 col)
+static ImVec2 CalcSizeContents(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- switch (direction)
- {
- case ImGuiDir_Left: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
- case ImGuiDir_Right: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
- case ImGuiDir_Up: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
- case ImGuiDir_Down: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
- case ImGuiDir_None: case ImGuiDir_COUNT: break; // Fix warnings
- }
+ if (window->Collapsed)
+ if (window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0)
+ return window->SizeContents;
+ if (window->Hidden && window->HiddenFramesForResize == 0 && window->HiddenFramesRegular > 0)
+ return window->SizeContents;
+
+ ImVec2 sz;
+ sz.x = (float)(int)((window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.x : (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x));
+ sz.y = (float)(int)((window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f) ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.y : (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y));
+ return sz + window->WindowPadding;
}
-// Render an arrow aimed to be aligned with text (p_min is a position in the same space text would be positioned). To e.g. denote expanded/collapsed state
-void ImGui::RenderArrow(ImVec2 p_min, ImGuiDir dir, float scale)
+static ImVec2 CalcSizeAutoFit(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_contents)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- const float h = g.FontSize * 1.00f;
- float r = h * 0.40f * scale;
- ImVec2 center = p_min + ImVec2(h * 0.50f, h * 0.50f * scale);
-
- ImVec2 a, b, c;
- switch (dir)
+ ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
{
- case ImGuiDir_Up:
- case ImGuiDir_Down:
- if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) r = -r;
- a = ImVec2(+0.000f,+0.750f) * r;
- b = ImVec2(-0.866f,-0.750f) * r;
- c = ImVec2(+0.866f,-0.750f) * r;
- break;
- case ImGuiDir_Left:
- case ImGuiDir_Right:
- if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) r = -r;
- a = ImVec2(+0.750f,+0.000f) * r;
- b = ImVec2(-0.750f,+0.866f) * r;
- c = ImVec2(-0.750f,-0.866f) * r;
- break;
- case ImGuiDir_None:
- case ImGuiDir_COUNT:
- IM_ASSERT(0);
- break;
+ // Tooltip always resize
+ return size_contents;
}
+ else
+ {
+ // Maximum window size is determined by the display size
+ const bool is_popup = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0;
+ const bool is_menu = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0;
+ ImVec2 size_min = style.WindowMinSize;
+ if (is_popup || is_menu) // Popups and menus bypass style.WindowMinSize by default, but we give then a non-zero minimum size to facilitate understanding problematic cases (e.g. empty popups)
+ size_min = ImMin(size_min, ImVec2(4.0f, 4.0f));
+ ImVec2 size_auto_fit = ImClamp(size_contents, size_min, ImMax(size_min, g.IO.DisplaySize - style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding * 2.0f));
- g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->AddTriangleFilled(center + a, center + b, center + c, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+ // When the window cannot fit all contents (either because of constraints, either because screen is too small),
+ // we are growing the size on the other axis to compensate for expected scrollbar. FIXME: Might turn bigger than ViewportSize-WindowPadding.
+ ImVec2 size_auto_fit_after_constraint = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
+ if (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.x < size_contents.x && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar))
+ size_auto_fit.y += style.ScrollbarSize;
+ if (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.y < size_contents.y && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar))
+ size_auto_fit.x += style.ScrollbarSize;
+ return size_auto_fit;
+ }
}
-void ImGui::RenderBullet(ImVec2 pos)
+ImVec2 ImGui::CalcWindowExpectedSize(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(pos, GImGui->FontSize*0.20f, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), 8);
+ ImVec2 size_contents = CalcSizeContents(window);
+ return CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, CalcSizeAutoFit(window, size_contents));
}
-void ImGui::RenderCheckMark(ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, float sz)
+float ImGui::GetWindowScrollMaxX(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- float thickness = ImMax(sz / 5.0f, 1.0f);
- sz -= thickness*0.5f;
- pos += ImVec2(thickness*0.25f, thickness*0.25f);
+ return ImMax(0.0f, window->SizeContents.x - (window->SizeFull.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x));
+}
- float third = sz / 3.0f;
- float bx = pos.x + third;
- float by = pos.y + sz - third*0.5f;
- window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx - third, by - third));
- window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx, by));
- window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx + third*2, by - third*2));
- window->DrawList->PathStroke(col, false, thickness);
+float ImGui::GetWindowScrollMaxY(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+ return ImMax(0.0f, window->SizeContents.y - (window->SizeFull.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y));
}
-void ImGui::RenderNavHighlight(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags flags)
+static ImVec2 CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window, bool snap_on_edges)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (id != g.NavId)
- return;
- if (g.NavDisableHighlight && !(flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw))
- return;
- ImGuiWindow* window = ImGui::GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame)
- return;
-
- float rounding = (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding) ? 0.0f : g.Style.FrameRounding;
- ImRect display_rect = bb;
- display_rect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
- if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault)
+ ImVec2 scroll = window->Scroll;
+ if (window->ScrollTarget.x < FLT_MAX)
{
- const float THICKNESS = 2.0f;
- const float DISTANCE = 3.0f + THICKNESS * 0.5f;
- display_rect.Expand(ImVec2(DISTANCE,DISTANCE));
- bool fully_visible = window->ClipRect.Contains(display_rect);
- if (!fully_visible)
- window->DrawList->PushClipRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max);
- window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min + ImVec2(THICKNESS*0.5f,THICKNESS*0.5f), display_rect.Max - ImVec2(THICKNESS*0.5f,THICKNESS*0.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, THICKNESS);
- if (!fully_visible)
- window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+ float cr_x = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x;
+ scroll.x = window->ScrollTarget.x - cr_x * (window->SizeFull.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x);
}
- if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin)
+ if (window->ScrollTarget.y < FLT_MAX)
{
- window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, ~0, 1.0f);
+ // 'snap_on_edges' allows for a discontinuity at the edge of scrolling limits to take account of WindowPadding so that scrolling to make the last item visible scroll far enough to see the padding.
+ float cr_y = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y;
+ float target_y = window->ScrollTarget.y;
+ if (snap_on_edges && cr_y <= 0.0f && target_y <= window->WindowPadding.y)
+ target_y = 0.0f;
+ if (snap_on_edges && cr_y >= 1.0f && target_y >= window->SizeContents.y - window->WindowPadding.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y)
+ target_y = window->SizeContents.y;
+ scroll.y = target_y - (1.0f - cr_y) * (window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight()) - cr_y * (window->SizeFull.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y);
+ }
+ scroll = ImMax(scroll, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+ if (!window->Collapsed && !window->SkipItems)
+ {
+ scroll.x = ImMin(scroll.x, ImGui::GetWindowScrollMaxX(window));
+ scroll.y = ImMin(scroll.y, ImGui::GetWindowScrollMaxY(window));
}
+ return scroll;
}
-// Calculate text size. Text can be multi-line. Optionally ignore text after a ## marker.
-// CalcTextSize("") should return ImVec2(0.0f, GImGui->FontSize)
-ImVec2 ImGui::CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_double_hash, float wrap_width)
+static ImGuiCol GetWindowBgColorIdxFromFlags(ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- const char* text_display_end;
- if (hide_text_after_double_hash)
- text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end); // Hide anything after a '##' string
- else
- text_display_end = text_end;
+ if (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
+ return ImGuiCol_PopupBg;
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+ return ImGuiCol_ChildBg;
+ return ImGuiCol_WindowBg;
+}
- ImFont* font = g.Font;
- const float font_size = g.FontSize;
- if (text == text_display_end)
- return ImVec2(0.0f, font_size);
- ImVec2 text_size = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, wrap_width, text, text_display_end, NULL);
+static void CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& corner_target, const ImVec2& corner_norm, ImVec2* out_pos, ImVec2* out_size)
+{
+ ImVec2 pos_min = ImLerp(corner_target, window->Pos, corner_norm); // Expected window upper-left
+ ImVec2 pos_max = ImLerp(window->Pos + window->Size, corner_target, corner_norm); // Expected window lower-right
+ ImVec2 size_expected = pos_max - pos_min;
+ ImVec2 size_constrained = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_expected);
+ *out_pos = pos_min;
+ if (corner_norm.x == 0.0f)
+ out_pos->x -= (size_constrained.x - size_expected.x);
+ if (corner_norm.y == 0.0f)
+ out_pos->y -= (size_constrained.y - size_expected.y);
+ *out_size = size_constrained;
+}
- // Cancel out character spacing for the last character of a line (it is baked into glyph->AdvanceX field)
- const float font_scale = font_size / font->FontSize;
- const float character_spacing_x = 1.0f * font_scale;
- if (text_size.x > 0.0f)
- text_size.x -= character_spacing_x;
- text_size.x = (float)(int)(text_size.x + 0.95f);
+struct ImGuiResizeGripDef
+{
+ ImVec2 CornerPosN;
+ ImVec2 InnerDir;
+ int AngleMin12, AngleMax12;
+};
- return text_size;
+static const ImGuiResizeGripDef resize_grip_def[4] =
+{
+ { ImVec2(1,1), ImVec2(-1,-1), 0, 3 }, // Lower right
+ { ImVec2(0,1), ImVec2(+1,-1), 3, 6 }, // Lower left
+ { ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(+1,+1), 6, 9 }, // Upper left
+ { ImVec2(1,0), ImVec2(-1,+1), 9,12 }, // Upper right
+};
+
+static ImRect GetResizeBorderRect(ImGuiWindow* window, int border_n, float perp_padding, float thickness)
+{
+ ImRect rect = window->Rect();
+ if (thickness == 0.0f) rect.Max -= ImVec2(1,1);
+ if (border_n == 0) return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Min.y - thickness, rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Min.y + thickness); // Top
+ if (border_n == 1) return ImRect(rect.Max.x - thickness, rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Max.x + thickness, rect.Max.y - perp_padding); // Right
+ if (border_n == 2) return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Max.y - thickness, rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Max.y + thickness); // Bottom
+ if (border_n == 3) return ImRect(rect.Min.x - thickness, rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Min.x + thickness, rect.Max.y - perp_padding); // Left
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return ImRect();
}
-// Helper to calculate coarse clipping of large list of evenly sized items.
-// NB: Prefer using the ImGuiListClipper higher-level helper if you can! Read comments and instructions there on how those use this sort of pattern.
-// NB: 'items_count' is only used to clamp the result, if you don't know your count you can use INT_MAX
-void ImGui::CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end)
+// Handle resize for: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad
+static void ImGui::UpdateManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4])
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- {
- // If logging is active, do not perform any clipping
- *out_items_display_start = 0;
- *out_items_display_end = items_count;
+ ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) || window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
return;
- }
- if (window->SkipItems)
- {
- *out_items_display_start = *out_items_display_end = 0;
+ if (window->WasActive == false) // Early out to avoid running this code for e.g. an hidden implicit/fallback Debug window.
return;
- }
-
- // We create the union of the ClipRect and the NavScoringRect which at worst should be 1 page away from ClipRect
- ImRect unclipped_rect = window->ClipRect;
- if (g.NavMoveRequest)
- unclipped_rect.Add(g.NavScoringRectScreen);
- const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- int start = (int)((unclipped_rect.Min.y - pos.y) / items_height);
- int end = (int)((unclipped_rect.Max.y - pos.y) / items_height);
-
- // When performing a navigation request, ensure we have one item extra in the direction we are moving to
- if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Up)
- start--;
- if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Down)
- end++;
+ const int resize_border_count = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? 4 : 0;
+ const float grip_draw_size = (float)(int)ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.35f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f);
+ const float grip_hover_inner_size = (float)(int)(grip_draw_size * 0.75f);
+ const float grip_hover_outer_size = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS : 0.0f;
- start = ImClamp(start, 0, items_count);
- end = ImClamp(end + 1, start, items_count);
- *out_items_display_start = start;
- *out_items_display_end = end;
-}
+ ImVec2 pos_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+ ImVec2 size_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
-// Find window given position, search front-to-back
-// FIXME: Note that we have a lag here because WindowRectClipped is updated in Begin() so windows moved by user via SetWindowPos() and not SetNextWindowPos() will have that rectangle lagging by a frame at the time FindHoveredWindow() is called, aka before the next Begin(). Moving window thankfully isn't affected.
-static void FindHoveredWindow()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ // Manual resize grips
+ PushID("#RESIZE");
+ for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++)
+ {
+ const ImGuiResizeGripDef& grip = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n];
+ const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, grip.CornerPosN);
- ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = NULL;
- if (g.MovingWindow && !(g.MovingWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs))
- hovered_window = g.MovingWindow;
+ // Using the FlattenChilds button flag we make the resize button accessible even if we are hovering over a child window
+ ImRect resize_rect(corner - grip.InnerDir * grip_hover_outer_size, corner + grip.InnerDir * grip_hover_inner_size);
+ if (resize_rect.Min.x > resize_rect.Max.x) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.x, resize_rect.Max.x);
+ if (resize_rect.Min.y > resize_rect.Max.y) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.y, resize_rect.Max.y);
+ bool hovered, held;
+ ButtonBehavior(resize_rect, window->GetID((void*)(intptr_t)resize_grip_n), &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
+ //GetOverlayDrawList(window)->AddRect(resize_rect.Min, resize_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+ if (hovered || held)
+ g.MouseCursor = (resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE;
- for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0 && hovered_window == NULL; i--)
+ if (held && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0] && resize_grip_n == 0)
+ {
+ // Manual auto-fit when double-clicking
+ size_target = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+ else if (held)
+ {
+ // Resize from any of the four corners
+ // We don't use an incremental MouseDelta but rather compute an absolute target size based on mouse position
+ ImVec2 corner_target = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset + ImLerp(grip.InnerDir * grip_hover_outer_size, grip.InnerDir * -grip_hover_inner_size, grip.CornerPosN); // Corner of the window corresponding to our corner grip
+ CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, corner_target, grip.CornerPosN, &pos_target, &size_target);
+ }
+ if (resize_grip_n == 0 || held || hovered)
+ resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n] = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered : ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip);
+ }
+ for (int border_n = 0; border_n < resize_border_count; border_n++)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
- if (!window->Active || window->Hidden)
- continue;
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs)
- continue;
+ bool hovered, held;
+ ImRect border_rect = GetResizeBorderRect(window, border_n, grip_hover_inner_size, WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS);
+ ButtonBehavior(border_rect, window->GetID((void*)(intptr_t)(border_n + 4)), &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren);
+ //GetOverlayDrawList(window)->AddRect(border_rect.Min, border_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+ if ((hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer > WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_FEEDBACK_TIMER) || held)
+ {
+ g.MouseCursor = (border_n & 1) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS;
+ if (held)
+ *border_held = border_n;
+ }
+ if (held)
+ {
+ ImVec2 border_target = window->Pos;
+ ImVec2 border_posn;
+ if (border_n == 0) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 0); border_target.y = (g.IO.MousePos.y - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.y + WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS); } // Top
+ if (border_n == 1) { border_posn = ImVec2(1, 0); border_target.x = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS); } // Right
+ if (border_n == 2) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 1); border_target.y = (g.IO.MousePos.y - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.y + WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS); } // Bottom
+ if (border_n == 3) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 0); border_target.x = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_HALF_THICKNESS); } // Left
+ CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, border_target, border_posn, &pos_target, &size_target);
+ }
+ }
+ PopID();
- // Using the clipped AABB, a child window will typically be clipped by its parent (not always)
- ImRect bb(window->OuterRectClipped.Min - g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, window->OuterRectClipped.Max + g.Style.TouchExtraPadding);
- if (bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
+ // Navigation resize (keyboard/gamepad)
+ if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow == window)
+ {
+ ImVec2 nav_resize_delta;
+ if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard && g.IO.KeyShift)
+ nav_resize_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
+ if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
+ nav_resize_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
+ if (nav_resize_delta.x != 0.0f || nav_resize_delta.y != 0.0f)
{
- if (hovered_window == NULL)
- hovered_window = window;
- if (hovered_window)
- break;
+ const float NAV_RESIZE_SPEED = 600.0f;
+ nav_resize_delta *= ImFloor(NAV_RESIZE_SPEED * g.IO.DeltaTime * ImMin(g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.y));
+ g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
+ g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
+ resize_grip_col[0] = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive);
+ // FIXME-NAV: Should store and accumulate into a separate size buffer to handle sizing constraints properly, right now a constraint will make us stuck.
+ size_target = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull + nav_resize_delta);
}
}
- g.HoveredWindow = hovered_window;
- g.HoveredRootWindow = g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow : NULL;
+ // Apply back modified position/size to window
+ if (size_target.x != FLT_MAX)
+ {
+ window->SizeFull = size_target;
+ MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+ }
+ if (pos_target.x != FLT_MAX)
+ {
+ window->Pos = ImFloor(pos_target);
+ MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+ }
+ window->Size = window->SizeFull;
}
-// Test if mouse cursor is hovering given rectangle
-// NB- Rectangle is clipped by our current clip setting
-// NB- Expand the rectangle to be generous on imprecise inputs systems (g.Style.TouchExtraPadding)
-bool ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip)
+static void ImGui::RenderOuterBorders(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ float rounding = window->WindowRounding;
+ float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
+ if (border_size > 0.0f && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground))
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
- // Clip
- ImRect rect_clipped(r_min, r_max);
- if (clip)
- rect_clipped.ClipWith(g.CurrentWindow->ClipRect);
-
- // Expand for touch input
- const ImRect rect_for_touch(rect_clipped.Min - g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, rect_clipped.Max + g.Style.TouchExtraPadding);
- return rect_for_touch.Contains(g.IO.MousePos);
+ int border_held = window->ResizeBorderHeld;
+ if (border_held != -1)
+ {
+ struct ImGuiResizeBorderDef
+ {
+ ImVec2 InnerDir;
+ ImVec2 CornerPosN1, CornerPosN2;
+ float OuterAngle;
+ };
+ static const ImGuiResizeBorderDef resize_border_def[4] =
+ {
+ { ImVec2(0,+1), ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(1,0), IM_PI*1.50f }, // Top
+ { ImVec2(-1,0), ImVec2(1,0), ImVec2(1,1), IM_PI*0.00f }, // Right
+ { ImVec2(0,-1), ImVec2(1,1), ImVec2(0,1), IM_PI*0.50f }, // Bottom
+ { ImVec2(+1,0), ImVec2(0,1), ImVec2(0,0), IM_PI*1.00f } // Left
+ };
+ const ImGuiResizeBorderDef& def = resize_border_def[border_held];
+ ImRect border_r = GetResizeBorderRect(window, border_held, rounding, 0.0f);
+ window->DrawList->PathArcTo(ImLerp(border_r.Min, border_r.Max, def.CornerPosN1) + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f) + def.InnerDir * rounding, rounding, def.OuterAngle - IM_PI*0.25f, def.OuterAngle);
+ window->DrawList->PathArcTo(ImLerp(border_r.Min, border_r.Max, def.CornerPosN2) + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f) + def.InnerDir * rounding, rounding, def.OuterAngle, def.OuterAngle + IM_PI*0.25f);
+ window->DrawList->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive), false, ImMax(2.0f, border_size)); // Thicker than usual
+ }
+ if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0 && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
+ {
+ float y = window->Pos.y + window->TitleBarHeight() - 1;
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(window->Pos.x + border_size, y), ImVec2(window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - border_size, y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), g.Style.FrameBorderSize);
+ }
}
-static bool IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat)
+void ImGui::UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* parent_window)
{
- const int key_index = GImGui->IO.KeyMap[key];
- return (key_index >= 0) ? ImGui::IsKeyPressed(key_index, repeat) : false;
+ window->ParentWindow = parent_window;
+ window->RootWindow = window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = window->RootWindowForNav = window;
+ if (parent_window && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
+ window->RootWindow = parent_window->RootWindow;
+ if (parent_window && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)))
+ window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = parent_window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight;
+ while (window->RootWindowForNav->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(window->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow != NULL);
+ window->RootWindowForNav = window->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow;
+ }
}
-int ImGui::GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey imgui_key)
+// Push a new ImGui window to add widgets to.
+// - A default window called "Debug" is automatically stacked at the beginning of every frame so you can use widgets without explicitly calling a Begin/End pair.
+// - Begin/End can be called multiple times during the frame with the same window name to append content.
+// - The window name is used as a unique identifier to preserve window information across frames (and save rudimentary information to the .ini file).
+// You can use the "##" or "###" markers to use the same label with different id, or same id with different label. See documentation at the top of this file.
+// - Return false when window is collapsed, so you can early out in your code. You always need to call ImGui::End() even if false is returned.
+// - Passing 'bool* p_open' displays a Close button on the upper-right corner of the window, the pointed value will be set to false when the button is pressed.
+bool ImGui::Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
- IM_ASSERT(imgui_key >= 0 && imgui_key < ImGuiKey_COUNT);
- return GImGui->IO.KeyMap[imgui_key];
-}
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ IM_ASSERT(name != NULL && name[0] != '\0'); // Window name required
+ IM_ASSERT(g.FrameScopeActive); // Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()
+ IM_ASSERT(g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount); // Called ImGui::Render() or ImGui::EndFrame() and haven't called ImGui::NewFrame() again yet
-// Note that imgui doesn't know the semantic of each entry of io.KeysDown[]. Use your own indices/enums according to how your back-end/engine stored them into io.KeysDown[]!
-bool ImGui::IsKeyDown(int user_key_index)
-{
- if (user_key_index < 0) return false;
- IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(GImGui->IO.KeysDown));
- return GImGui->IO.KeysDown[user_key_index];
-}
+ // Find or create
+ ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name);
+ const bool window_just_created = (window == NULL);
+ if (window_just_created)
+ {
+ ImVec2 size_on_first_use = (g.NextWindowData.SizeCond != 0) ? g.NextWindowData.SizeVal : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); // Any condition flag will do since we are creating a new window here.
+ window = CreateNewWindow(name, size_on_first_use, flags);
+ }
-int ImGui::CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(float t, float t_prev, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate)
-{
- if (t == 0.0f)
- return 1;
- if (t <= repeat_delay || repeat_rate <= 0.0f)
- return 0;
- const int count = (int)((t - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate) - (int)((t_prev - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate);
- return (count > 0) ? count : 0;
-}
+ // Automatically disable manual moving/resizing when NoInputs is set
+ if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs) == ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs)
+ flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize;
-int ImGui::GetKeyPressedAmount(int key_index, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (key_index < 0) return false;
- IM_ASSERT(key_index >= 0 && key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
- const float t = g.IO.KeysDownDuration[key_index];
- return CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, repeat_delay, repeat_rate);
-}
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)
+ IM_ASSERT(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow);
-bool ImGui::IsKeyPressed(int user_key_index, bool repeat)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (user_key_index < 0) return false;
- IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
- const float t = g.IO.KeysDownDuration[user_key_index];
- if (t == 0.0f)
- return true;
- if (repeat && t > g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)
- return GetKeyPressedAmount(user_key_index, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate) > 0;
- return false;
-}
+ const int current_frame = g.FrameCount;
+ const bool first_begin_of_the_frame = (window->LastFrameActive != current_frame);
-bool ImGui::IsKeyReleased(int user_key_index)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (user_key_index < 0) return false;
- IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
- return g.IO.KeysDownDurationPrev[user_key_index] >= 0.0f && !g.IO.KeysDown[user_key_index];
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsMouseDown(int button)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
- return g.IO.MouseDown[button];
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsAnyMouseDown()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); n++)
- if (g.IO.MouseDown[n])
- return true;
- return false;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsMouseClicked(int button, bool repeat)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
- const float t = g.IO.MouseDownDuration[button];
- if (t == 0.0f)
- return true;
-
- if (repeat && t > g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)
- {
- float delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate;
- if ((ImFmod(t - delay, rate) > rate*0.5f) != (ImFmod(t - delay - g.IO.DeltaTime, rate) > rate*0.5f))
- return true;
- }
-
- return false;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsMouseReleased(int button)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
- return g.IO.MouseReleased[button];
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(int button)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
- return g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[button];
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsMouseDragging(int button, float lock_threshold)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
- if (!g.IO.MouseDown[button])
- return false;
- if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
- lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
- return g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold;
-}
-
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePos()
-{
- return GImGui->IO.MousePos;
-}
-
-// NB: prefer to call right after BeginPopup(). At the time Selectable/MenuItem is activated, the popup is already closed!
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.CurrentPopupStack.Size > 0)
- return g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size-1].OpenMousePos;
- return g.IO.MousePos;
-}
-
-// We typically use ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote an invalid mouse position
-bool ImGui::IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos)
-{
- if (mouse_pos == NULL)
- mouse_pos = &GImGui->IO.MousePos;
- const float MOUSE_INVALID = -256000.0f;
- return mouse_pos->x >= MOUSE_INVALID && mouse_pos->y >= MOUSE_INVALID;
-}
-
-// NB: This is only valid if IsMousePosValid(). Back-ends in theory should always keep mouse position valid when dragging even outside the client window.
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(int button, float lock_threshold)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
- if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
- lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
- if (g.IO.MouseDown[button])
- if (g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold)
- return g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button]; // Assume we can only get active with left-mouse button (at the moment).
- return ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
-}
-
-void ImGui::ResetMouseDragDelta(int button)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
- // NB: We don't need to reset g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr
- g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button] = g.IO.MousePos;
-}
-
-ImGuiMouseCursor ImGui::GetMouseCursor()
-{
- return GImGui->MouseCursor;
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type)
-{
- GImGui->MouseCursor = cursor_type;
-}
-
-void ImGui::CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool capture)
-{
- GImGui->WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = capture ? 1 : 0;
-}
-
-void ImGui::CaptureMouseFromApp(bool capture)
-{
- GImGui->WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = capture ? 1 : 0;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsItemActive()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.ActiveId)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- return g.ActiveId == window->DC.LastItemId;
- }
- return false;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- return (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == window->DC.LastItemId && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.ActiveId != window->DC.LastItemId);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return IsItemDeactivated() && (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameValueChanged || (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdValueChanged));
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsItemFocused()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.NavId && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavId == g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsItemClicked(int mouse_button)
-{
- return IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_None);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsAnyItemHovered()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.HoveredId != 0 || g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsAnyItemActive()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.ActiveId != 0;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsAnyItemFocused()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsItemVisible()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(window->DC.LastItemRect);
-}
-
-// Allow last item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. Both may be activated during the same frame before the later one takes priority.
-void ImGui::SetItemAllowOverlap()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.HoveredId == g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId)
- g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = true;
- if (g.ActiveId == g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId)
- g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = true;
-}
-
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMin()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.LastItemRect.Min;
-}
-
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMax()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.LastItemRect.Max;
-}
-
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectSize()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.LastItemRect.GetSize();
-}
-
-static ImRect GetViewportRect()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.IO.DisplayVisibleMin.x != g.IO.DisplayVisibleMax.x && g.IO.DisplayVisibleMin.y != g.IO.DisplayVisibleMax.y)
- return ImRect(g.IO.DisplayVisibleMin, g.IO.DisplayVisibleMax);
- return ImRect(0.0f, 0.0f, g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.IO.DisplaySize.y);
-}
-
-// Not exposed publicly as BeginTooltip() because bool parameters are evil. Let's see if other needs arise first.
-void ImGui::BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags, bool override_previous_tooltip)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- char window_name[16];
- ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", g.TooltipOverrideCount);
- if (override_previous_tooltip)
- if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(window_name))
- if (window->Active)
- {
- // Hide previous tooltip from being displayed. We can't easily "reset" the content of a window so we create a new one.
- window->Hidden = true;
- window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
- ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", ++g.TooltipOverrideCount);
- }
- ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings|ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav;
- Begin(window_name, NULL, flags | extra_flags);
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
-{
- BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
- TextV(fmt, args);
- EndTooltip();
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...)
-{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- SetTooltipV(fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
-}
-
-void ImGui::BeginTooltip()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget)
- {
- // The default tooltip position is a little offset to give space to see the context menu (it's also clamped within the current viewport/monitor)
- // In the context of a dragging tooltip we try to reduce that offset and we enforce following the cursor.
- // Whatever we do we want to call SetNextWindowPos() to enforce a tooltip position and disable clipping the tooltip without our display area, like regular tooltip do.
- //ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - g.Style.WindowPadding;
- ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos + ImVec2(16 * g.Style.MouseCursorScale, 8 * g.Style.MouseCursorScale);
- SetNextWindowPos(tooltip_pos);
- SetNextWindowBgAlpha(g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg].w * 0.60f);
- //PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, g.Style.Alpha * 0.60f); // This would be nice but e.g ColorButton with checkboard has issue with transparent colors :(
- BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
- }
- else
- {
- BeginTooltipEx(0, false);
- }
-}
-
-void ImGui::EndTooltip()
-{
- IM_ASSERT(GetCurrentWindowRead()->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip); // Mismatched BeginTooltip()/EndTooltip() calls
- End();
-}
-
-// Mark popup as open (toggle toward open state).
-// Popups are closed when user click outside, or activate a pressable item, or CloseCurrentPopup() is called within a BeginPopup()/EndPopup() block.
-// Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID-stack (so OpenPopup and BeginPopup needs to be at the same level).
-// One open popup per level of the popup hierarchy (NB: when assigning we reset the Window member of ImGuiPopupRef to NULL)
-void ImGui::OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
- int current_stack_size = g.CurrentPopupStack.Size;
- ImGuiPopupRef popup_ref; // Tagged as new ref as Window will be set back to NULL if we write this into OpenPopupStack.
- popup_ref.PopupId = id;
- popup_ref.Window = NULL;
- popup_ref.ParentWindow = parent_window;
- popup_ref.OpenFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
- popup_ref.OpenParentId = parent_window->IDStack.back();
- popup_ref.OpenMousePos = g.IO.MousePos;
- popup_ref.OpenPopupPos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
-
- //printf("[%05d] OpenPopupEx(0x%08X)\n", g.FrameCount, id);
- if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size < current_stack_size + 1)
- {
- g.OpenPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
- }
- else
- {
- // Gently handle the user mistakenly calling OpenPopup() every frame. It is a programming mistake! However, if we were to run the regular code path, the ui
- // would become completely unusable because the popup will always be in hidden-while-calculating-size state _while_ claiming focus. Which would be a very confusing
- // situation for the programmer. Instead, we silently allow the popup to proceed, it will keep reappearing and the programming error will be more obvious to understand.
- if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id && g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1)
- {
- g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount = popup_ref.OpenFrameCount;
- }
- else
- {
- // Close child popups if any, then flag popup for open/reopen
- g.OpenPopupStack.resize(current_stack_size + 1);
- g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size] = popup_ref;
- }
-
- // When reopening a popup we first refocus its parent, otherwise if its parent is itself a popup it would get closed by ClosePopupsOverWindow().
- // This is equivalent to what ClosePopupToLevel() does.
- //if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id)
- // FocusWindow(parent_window);
- }
-}
-
-void ImGui::OpenPopup(const char* str_id)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- OpenPopupEx(g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id));
-}
-
-void ImGui::ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.OpenPopupStack.empty())
- return;
-
- // When popups are stacked, clicking on a lower level popups puts focus back to it and close popups above it.
- // Don't close our own child popup windows.
- int n = 0;
- if (ref_window)
- {
- for (n = 0; n < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; n++)
- {
- ImGuiPopupRef& popup = g.OpenPopupStack[n];
- if (!popup.Window)
- continue;
- IM_ASSERT((popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0);
- if (popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
- continue;
-
- // Trim the stack if popups are not direct descendant of the reference window (which is often the NavWindow)
- bool has_focus = false;
- for (int m = n; m < g.OpenPopupStack.Size && !has_focus; m++)
- has_focus = (g.OpenPopupStack[m].Window && g.OpenPopupStack[m].Window->RootWindow == ref_window->RootWindow);
- if (!has_focus)
- break;
- }
- }
- if (n < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) // This test is not required but it allows to set a convenient breakpoint on the block below
- ClosePopupToLevel(n);
-}
-
-ImGuiWindow* ImGui::GetFrontMostPopupModal()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- for (int n = g.OpenPopupStack.Size-1; n >= 0; n--)
- if (ImGuiWindow* popup = g.OpenPopupStack.Data[n].Window)
- if (popup->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
- return popup;
- return NULL;
-}
-
-void ImGui::ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining)
-{
- IM_ASSERT(remaining >= 0);
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* focus_window = (remaining > 0) ? g.OpenPopupStack[remaining-1].Window : g.OpenPopupStack[0].ParentWindow;
- if (g.NavLayer == 0)
- focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(focus_window);
- FocusWindow(focus_window);
- focus_window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = true;
- g.OpenPopupStack.resize(remaining);
-}
-
-void ImGui::ClosePopup(ImGuiID id)
-{
- if (!IsPopupOpen(id))
- return;
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1);
-}
-
-// Close the popup we have begin-ed into.
-void ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- int popup_idx = g.CurrentPopupStack.Size - 1;
- if (popup_idx < 0 || popup_idx >= g.OpenPopupStack.Size || g.CurrentPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId != g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId)
- return;
- while (popup_idx > 0 && g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].Window && (g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
- popup_idx--;
- ClosePopupToLevel(popup_idx);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (!IsPopupOpen(id))
- {
- g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
- return false;
- }
-
- char name[20];
- if (extra_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
- ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Menu_%02d", g.CurrentPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth
- else
- ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Popup_%08x", id); // Not recycling, so we can close/open during the same frame
-
- bool is_open = Begin(name, NULL, extra_flags | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup);
- if (!is_open) // NB: Begin can return false when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
- EndPopup();
-
- return is_open;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= g.CurrentPopupStack.Size) // Early out for performance
- {
- g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
- return false;
- }
- return BeginPopupEx(g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id), flags|ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].PopupId == id;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].PopupId == g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(name);
- if (!IsPopupOpen(id))
- {
- g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
- return false;
- }
-
- // Center modal windows by default
- // FIXME: Should test for (PosCond & window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags) with the upcoming window.
- if (g.NextWindowData.PosCond == 0)
- SetNextWindowPos(g.IO.DisplaySize * 0.5f, ImGuiCond_Appearing, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
-
- bool is_open = Begin(name, p_open, flags | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
- if (!is_open || (p_open && !*p_open)) // NB: is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
- {
- EndPopup();
- if (is_open)
- ClosePopup(id);
- return false;
- }
-
- return is_open;
-}
-
-void ImGui::NavMoveRequestForward(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, const ImRect& bb_rel, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None);
- ImGui::NavMoveRequestCancel();
- g.NavMoveDir = move_dir;
- g.NavMoveClipDir = clip_dir;
- g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued;
- g.NavMoveRequestFlags = move_flags;
- g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] = bb_rel;
-}
-
-void ImGui::NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.NavWindow != window || !NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() || g.NavMoveRequestForward != ImGuiNavForward_None || g.NavLayer != 0)
- return;
- IM_ASSERT(move_flags != 0); // No points calling this with no wrapping
- ImRect bb_rel = window->NavRectRel[0];
-
- ImGuiDir clip_dir = g.NavMoveDir;
- if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX)))
- {
- bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = ImMax(window->SizeFull.x, window->SizeContents.x) - window->Scroll.x;
- if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX) { bb_rel.TranslateY(-bb_rel.GetHeight()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Up; }
- NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
- }
- if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX)))
- {
- bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = -window->Scroll.x;
- if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX) { bb_rel.TranslateY(+bb_rel.GetHeight()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Down; }
- NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
- }
- if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY)))
- {
- bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = ImMax(window->SizeFull.y, window->SizeContents.y) - window->Scroll.y;
- if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY) { bb_rel.TranslateX(-bb_rel.GetWidth()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Left; }
- NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
- }
- if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY)))
- {
- bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = -window->Scroll.y;
- if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY) { bb_rel.TranslateX(+bb_rel.GetWidth()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Right; }
- NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
- }
-}
-
-void ImGui::EndPopup()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; (void)g;
- IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup); // Mismatched BeginPopup()/EndPopup() calls
- IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentPopupStack.Size > 0);
-
- // Make all menus and popups wrap around for now, may need to expose that policy.
- NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(g.CurrentWindow, ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY);
-
- End();
-}
-
-bool ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
- if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
- {
- ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : window->DC.LastItemId; // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict!
- IM_ASSERT(id != 0); // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item)
- OpenPopupEx(id);
- return true;
- }
- return false;
-}
-
-// This is a helper to handle the simplest case of associating one named popup to one given widget.
-// You may want to handle this on user side if you have specific needs (e.g. tweaking IsItemHovered() parameters).
-// You can pass a NULL str_id to use the identifier of the last item.
-bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
- ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : window->DC.LastItemId; // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict!
- IM_ASSERT(id != 0); // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item)
- if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
- OpenPopupEx(id);
- return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, int mouse_button, bool also_over_items)
-{
- if (!str_id)
- str_id = "window_context";
- ImGuiID id = GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
- if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
- if (also_over_items || !IsAnyItemHovered())
- OpenPopupEx(id);
- return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
-{
- if (!str_id)
- str_id = "void_context";
- ImGuiID id = GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
- if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && !IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow))
- OpenPopupEx(id);
- return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
-}
-
-static bool ImGui::BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
- flags |= (parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove); // Inherit the NoMove flag
-
- // Size
- const ImVec2 content_avail = GetContentRegionAvail();
- ImVec2 size = ImFloor(size_arg);
- const int auto_fit_axises = ((size.x == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_X) : 0x00) | ((size.y == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y) : 0x00);
- if (size.x <= 0.0f)
- size.x = ImMax(content_avail.x + size.x, 4.0f); // Arbitrary minimum child size (0.0f causing too much issues)
- if (size.y <= 0.0f)
- size.y = ImMax(content_avail.y + size.y, 4.0f);
- SetNextWindowSize(size);
-
- // Name
- char title[256];
- if (name)
- ImFormatString(title, IM_ARRAYSIZE(title), "%s/%s", parent_window->Name, name);
- else
- ImFormatString(title, IM_ARRAYSIZE(title), "%s/%08X", parent_window->Name, id);
-
- const float backup_border_size = g.Style.ChildBorderSize;
- if (!border)
- g.Style.ChildBorderSize = 0.0f;
- bool ret = Begin(title, NULL, flags);
- g.Style.ChildBorderSize = backup_border_size;
-
- ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.CurrentWindow;
- child_window->ChildId = id;
- child_window->AutoFitChildAxises = auto_fit_axises;
-
- // Process navigation-in immediately so NavInit can run on first frame
- if (g.NavActivateId == id && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) && (child_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask != 0 || child_window->DC.NavHasScroll))
- {
- FocusWindow(child_window);
- NavInitWindow(child_window, false);
- SetActiveID(id+1, child_window); // Steal ActiveId with a dummy id so that key-press won't activate child item
- g.ActiveIdSource = ImGuiInputSource_Nav;
- }
-
- return ret;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- return BeginChildEx(str_id, window->GetID(str_id), size_arg, border, extra_flags);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
-{
- IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
- return BeginChildEx(NULL, id, size_arg, border, extra_flags);
-}
-
-void ImGui::EndChild()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow); // Mismatched BeginChild()/EndChild() callss
- if (window->BeginCount > 1)
- {
- End();
- }
- else
- {
- ImVec2 sz = window->Size;
- if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_X)) // Arbitrary minimum zero-ish child size of 4.0f causes less trouble than a 0.0f
- sz.x = ImMax(4.0f, sz.x);
- if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y))
- sz.y = ImMax(4.0f, sz.y);
- End();
-
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
- ImRect bb(parent_window->DC.CursorPos, parent_window->DC.CursorPos + sz);
- ItemSize(sz);
- if ((window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask != 0 || window->DC.NavHasScroll) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened))
- {
- ItemAdd(bb, window->ChildId);
- RenderNavHighlight(bb, window->ChildId);
-
- // When browsing a window that has no activable items (scroll only) we keep a highlight on the child
- if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0 && window == g.NavWindow)
- RenderNavHighlight(ImRect(bb.Min - ImVec2(2,2), bb.Max + ImVec2(2,2)), g.NavId, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin);
- }
- else
- {
- // Not navigable into
- ItemAdd(bb, 0);
- }
- }
-}
-
-// Helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame.
-bool ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]);
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding);
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize);
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, style.FramePadding);
- bool ret = BeginChild(id, size, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | extra_flags);
- PopStyleVar(3);
- PopStyleColor();
- return ret;
-}
-
-void ImGui::EndChildFrame()
-{
- EndChild();
-}
-
-// Save and compare stack sizes on Begin()/End() to detect usage errors
-static void CheckStacksSize(ImGuiWindow* window, bool write)
-{
- // NOT checking: DC.ItemWidth, DC.AllowKeyboardFocus, DC.ButtonRepeat, DC.TextWrapPos (per window) to allow user to conveniently push once and not pop (they are cleared on Begin)
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- int* p_backup = &window->DC.StackSizesBackup[0];
- { int current = window->IDStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "PushID/PopID or TreeNode/TreePop Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many PopID()/TreePop()
- { int current = window->DC.GroupStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "BeginGroup/EndGroup Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many EndGroup()
- { int current = g.CurrentPopupStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "BeginMenu/EndMenu or BeginPopup/EndPopup Mismatch"); p_backup++;}// Too few or too many EndMenu()/EndPopup()
- // For color, style and font stacks there is an incentive to use Push/Begin/Pop/.../End patterns, so we relax our checks a little to allow them.
- { int current = g.ColorModifiers.Size; if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushStyleColor/PopStyleColor Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many PopStyleColor()
- { int current = g.StyleModifiers.Size; if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushStyleVar/PopStyleVar Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many PopStyleVar()
- { int current = g.FontStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushFont/PopFont Mismatch!"); p_backup++; } // Too few or too many PopFont()
- IM_ASSERT(p_backup == window->DC.StackSizesBackup + IM_ARRAYSIZE(window->DC.StackSizesBackup));
-}
-
-enum ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy
-{
- ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default,
- ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox
-};
-
-static ImRect FindAllowedExtentRectForWindow(ImGuiWindow*)
-{
- ImVec2 padding = GImGui->Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding;
- ImRect r_screen = GetViewportRect();
- r_screen.Expand(ImVec2((r_screen.GetWidth() > padding.x * 2) ? -padding.x : 0.0f, (r_screen.GetHeight() > padding.y * 2) ? -padding.y : 0.0f));
- return r_screen;
-}
-
-// r_avoid = the rectangle to avoid (e.g. for tooltip it is a rectangle around the mouse cursor which we want to avoid. for popups it's a small point around the cursor.)
-// r_outer = the visible area rectangle, minus safe area padding. If our popup size won't fit because of safe area padding we ignore it.
-static ImVec2 FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(const ImVec2& ref_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDir* last_dir, const ImRect& r_outer, const ImRect& r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy policy = ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default)
-{
- ImVec2 base_pos_clamped = ImClamp(ref_pos, r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max - size);
- //GImGui->OverlayDrawList.AddRect(r_avoid.Min, r_avoid.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));
- //GImGui->OverlayDrawList.AddRect(r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max, IM_COL32(0,255,0,255));
-
- // Combo Box policy (we want a connecting edge)
- if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox)
- {
- const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Left, ImGuiDir_Up };
- for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++)
- {
- const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n];
- if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction?
- continue;
- ImVec2 pos;
- if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Max.y); // Below, Toward Right (default)
- if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Right
- if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Max.y); // Below, Toward Left
- if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Left
- if (!r_outer.Contains(ImRect(pos, pos + size)))
- continue;
- *last_dir = dir;
- return pos;
- }
- }
-
- // Default popup policy
- const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Up, ImGuiDir_Left };
- for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++)
- {
- const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n];
- if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction?
- continue;
- float avail_w = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left ? r_avoid.Min.x : r_outer.Max.x) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Right ? r_avoid.Max.x : r_outer.Min.x);
- float avail_h = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up ? r_avoid.Min.y : r_outer.Max.y) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Down ? r_avoid.Max.y : r_outer.Min.y);
- if (avail_w < size.x || avail_h < size.y)
- continue;
- ImVec2 pos;
- pos.x = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? r_avoid.Min.x - size.x : (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) ? r_avoid.Max.x : base_pos_clamped.x;
- pos.y = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? r_avoid.Min.y - size.y : (dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? r_avoid.Max.y : base_pos_clamped.y;
- *last_dir = dir;
- return pos;
- }
-
- // Fallback, try to keep within display
- *last_dir = ImGuiDir_None;
- ImVec2 pos = ref_pos;
- pos.x = ImMax(ImMin(pos.x + size.x, r_outer.Max.x) - size.x, r_outer.Min.x);
- pos.y = ImMax(ImMin(pos.y + size.y, r_outer.Max.y) - size.y, r_outer.Min.y);
- return pos;
-}
-
-static ImVec2 FindBestWindowPosForPopup(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- ImRect r_outer = FindAllowedExtentRectForWindow(window);
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
- {
- // Child menus typically request _any_ position within the parent menu item, and then our FindBestWindowPosForPopup() function will move the new menu outside the parent bounds.
- // This is how we end up with child menus appearing (most-commonly) on the right of the parent menu.
- IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == window);
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindowStack[g.CurrentWindowStack.Size - 2];
- float horizontal_overlap = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x; // We want some overlap to convey the relative depth of each menu (currently the amount of overlap is hard-coded to style.ItemSpacing.x).
- ImRect r_avoid;
- if (parent_window->DC.MenuBarAppending)
- r_avoid = ImRect(-FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.y + parent_window->TitleBarHeight(), FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.y + parent_window->TitleBarHeight() + parent_window->MenuBarHeight());
- else
- r_avoid = ImRect(parent_window->Pos.x + horizontal_overlap, -FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.x + parent_window->Size.x - horizontal_overlap - parent_window->ScrollbarSizes.x, FLT_MAX);
- return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
- }
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
- {
- ImRect r_avoid = ImRect(window->Pos.x - 1, window->Pos.y - 1, window->Pos.x + 1, window->Pos.y + 1);
- return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
- }
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
- {
- // Position tooltip (always follows mouse)
- float sc = g.Style.MouseCursorScale;
- ImVec2 ref_pos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
- ImRect r_avoid;
- if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && !(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos))
- r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 16, ref_pos.y + 8);
- else
- r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 24 * sc, ref_pos.y + 24 * sc); // FIXME: Hard-coded based on mouse cursor shape expectation. Exact dimension not very important.
- ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(ref_pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
- if (window->AutoPosLastDirection == ImGuiDir_None)
- pos = ref_pos + ImVec2(2, 2); // If there's not enough room, for tooltip we prefer avoiding the cursor at all cost even if it means that part of the tooltip won't be visible.
- return pos;
- }
- IM_ASSERT(0);
- return window->Pos;
-}
-
-static void SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiCond flags, bool enabled)
-{
- window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & ~flags);
- window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & ~flags);
- window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & ~flags);
-}
-
-ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindWindowByName(const char* name)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiID id = ImHash(name, 0);
- return (ImGuiWindow*)g.WindowsById.GetVoidPtr(id);
-}
-
-static ImGuiWindow* CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImVec2 size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- // Create window the first time
- ImGuiWindow* window = IM_NEW(ImGuiWindow)(&g, name);
- window->Flags = flags;
- g.WindowsById.SetVoidPtr(window->ID, window);
-
- // Default/arbitrary window position. Use SetNextWindowPos() with the appropriate condition flag to change the initial position of a window.
- window->Pos = ImVec2(60, 60);
-
- // User can disable loading and saving of settings. Tooltip and child windows also don't store settings.
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
- if (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettings(window->ID))
- {
- // Retrieve settings from .ini file
- window->SettingsIdx = g.SettingsWindows.index_from_pointer(settings);
- SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, false);
- window->Pos = ImFloor(settings->Pos);
- window->Collapsed = settings->Collapsed;
- if (ImLengthSqr(settings->Size) > 0.00001f)
- size = ImFloor(settings->Size);
- }
- window->Size = window->SizeFull = window->SizeFullAtLastBegin = size;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->Pos; // So first call to CalcSizeContents() doesn't return crazy values
-
- if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) != 0)
- {
- window->AutoFitFramesX = window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
- window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
- }
- else
- {
- if (window->Size.x <= 0.0f)
- window->AutoFitFramesX = 2;
- if (window->Size.y <= 0.0f)
- window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
- window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) || (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0);
- }
-
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)
- g.Windows.insert(g.Windows.begin(), window); // Quite slow but rare and only once
- else
- g.Windows.push_back(window);
- return window;
-}
-
-static ImVec2 CalcSizeAfterConstraint(ImGuiWindow* window, ImVec2 new_size)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond != 0)
- {
- // Using -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size.
- ImRect cr = g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect;
- new_size.x = (cr.Min.x >= 0 && cr.Max.x >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.x, cr.Min.x, cr.Max.x) : window->SizeFull.x;
- new_size.y = (cr.Min.y >= 0 && cr.Max.y >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.y, cr.Min.y, cr.Max.y) : window->SizeFull.y;
- if (g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback)
- {
- ImGuiSizeCallbackData data;
- data.UserData = g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData;
- data.Pos = window->Pos;
- data.CurrentSize = window->SizeFull;
- data.DesiredSize = new_size;
- g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback(&data);
- new_size = data.DesiredSize;
- }
- }
-
- // Minimum size
- if (!(window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)))
- {
- new_size = ImMax(new_size, g.Style.WindowMinSize);
- new_size.y = ImMax(new_size.y, window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight() + ImMax(0.0f, g.Style.WindowRounding - 1.0f)); // Reduce artifacts with very small windows
- }
- return new_size;
-}
-
-static ImVec2 CalcSizeContents(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- ImVec2 sz;
- sz.x = (float)(int)((window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.x : (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x));
- sz.y = (float)(int)((window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f) ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.y : (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y));
- return sz + window->WindowPadding;
-}
-
-static ImVec2 CalcSizeAutoFit(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_contents)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
- {
- // Tooltip always resize
- return size_contents;
- }
- else
- {
- // When the window cannot fit all contents (either because of constraints, either because screen is too small): we are growing the size on the other axis to compensate for expected scrollbar. FIXME: Might turn bigger than DisplaySize-WindowPadding.
- const bool is_popup = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0;
- const bool is_menu = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0;
- ImVec2 size_min = style.WindowMinSize;
- if (is_popup || is_menu) // Popups and menus bypass style.WindowMinSize by default, but we give then a non-zero minimum size to facilitate understanding problematic cases (e.g. empty popups)
- size_min = ImMin(size_min, ImVec2(4.0f, 4.0f));
- ImVec2 size_auto_fit = ImClamp(size_contents, size_min, ImMax(size_min, g.IO.DisplaySize - style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding * 2.0f));
- ImVec2 size_auto_fit_after_constraint = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
- if (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.x < size_contents.x && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar))
- size_auto_fit.y += style.ScrollbarSize;
- if (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.y < size_contents.y && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar))
- size_auto_fit.x += style.ScrollbarSize;
- return size_auto_fit;
- }
-}
-
-static float GetScrollMaxX(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- return ImMax(0.0f, window->SizeContents.x - (window->SizeFull.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x));
-}
-
-static float GetScrollMaxY(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- return ImMax(0.0f, window->SizeContents.y - (window->SizeFull.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y));
-}
-
-static ImVec2 CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window, bool snap_on_edges)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImVec2 scroll = window->Scroll;
- if (window->ScrollTarget.x < FLT_MAX)
- {
- float cr_x = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x;
- scroll.x = window->ScrollTarget.x - cr_x * (window->SizeFull.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x);
- }
- if (window->ScrollTarget.y < FLT_MAX)
- {
- // 'snap_on_edges' allows for a discontinuity at the edge of scrolling limits to take account of WindowPadding so that scrolling to make the last item visible scroll far enough to see the padding.
- float cr_y = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y;
- float target_y = window->ScrollTarget.y;
- if (snap_on_edges && cr_y <= 0.0f && target_y <= window->WindowPadding.y)
- target_y = 0.0f;
- if (snap_on_edges && cr_y >= 1.0f && target_y >= window->SizeContents.y - window->WindowPadding.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y)
- target_y = window->SizeContents.y;
- scroll.y = target_y - (1.0f - cr_y) * (window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight()) - cr_y * (window->SizeFull.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y);
- }
- scroll = ImMax(scroll, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
- if (!window->Collapsed && !window->SkipItems)
- {
- scroll.x = ImMin(scroll.x, GetScrollMaxX(window));
- scroll.y = ImMin(scroll.y, GetScrollMaxY(window));
- }
- return scroll;
-}
-
-static ImGuiCol GetWindowBgColorIdxFromFlags(ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
-{
- if (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
- return ImGuiCol_PopupBg;
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
- return ImGuiCol_ChildBg;
- return ImGuiCol_WindowBg;
-}
-
-static void CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& corner_target, const ImVec2& corner_norm, ImVec2* out_pos, ImVec2* out_size)
-{
- ImVec2 pos_min = ImLerp(corner_target, window->Pos, corner_norm); // Expected window upper-left
- ImVec2 pos_max = ImLerp(window->Pos + window->Size, corner_target, corner_norm); // Expected window lower-right
- ImVec2 size_expected = pos_max - pos_min;
- ImVec2 size_constrained = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_expected);
- *out_pos = pos_min;
- if (corner_norm.x == 0.0f)
- out_pos->x -= (size_constrained.x - size_expected.x);
- if (corner_norm.y == 0.0f)
- out_pos->y -= (size_constrained.y - size_expected.y);
- *out_size = size_constrained;
-}
-
-struct ImGuiResizeGripDef
-{
- ImVec2 CornerPos;
- ImVec2 InnerDir;
- int AngleMin12, AngleMax12;
-};
-
-const ImGuiResizeGripDef resize_grip_def[4] =
-{
- { ImVec2(1,1), ImVec2(-1,-1), 0, 3 }, // Lower right
- { ImVec2(0,1), ImVec2(+1,-1), 3, 6 }, // Lower left
- { ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(+1,+1), 6, 9 }, // Upper left
- { ImVec2(1,0), ImVec2(-1,+1), 9,12 }, // Upper right
-};
-
-static ImRect GetBorderRect(ImGuiWindow* window, int border_n, float perp_padding, float thickness)
-{
- ImRect rect = window->Rect();
- if (thickness == 0.0f) rect.Max -= ImVec2(1,1);
- if (border_n == 0) return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Min.y, rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Min.y + thickness);
- if (border_n == 1) return ImRect(rect.Max.x - thickness, rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Max.x, rect.Max.y - perp_padding);
- if (border_n == 2) return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Max.y - thickness, rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Max.y);
- if (border_n == 3) return ImRect(rect.Min.x, rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Min.x + thickness, rect.Max.y - perp_padding);
- IM_ASSERT(0);
- return ImRect();
-}
-
-// Handle resize for: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad
-static void ImGui::UpdateManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4])
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
- if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) || window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
- return;
-
- const int resize_border_count = g.IO.OptResizeWindowsFromEdges ? 4 : 0;
- const float grip_draw_size = (float)(int)ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.35f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f);
- const float grip_hover_size = (float)(int)(grip_draw_size * 0.75f);
-
- ImVec2 pos_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
- ImVec2 size_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
-
- // Manual resize grips
- PushID("#RESIZE");
- for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++)
- {
- const ImGuiResizeGripDef& grip = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n];
- const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, grip.CornerPos);
-
- // Using the FlattenChilds button flag we make the resize button accessible even if we are hovering over a child window
- ImRect resize_rect(corner, corner + grip.InnerDir * grip_hover_size);
- if (resize_rect.Min.x > resize_rect.Max.x) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.x, resize_rect.Max.x);
- if (resize_rect.Min.y > resize_rect.Max.y) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.y, resize_rect.Max.y);
- bool hovered, held;
- ButtonBehavior(resize_rect, window->GetID((void*)(intptr_t)resize_grip_n), &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
- if (hovered || held)
- g.MouseCursor = (resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE;
-
- if (held && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0] && resize_grip_n == 0)
- {
- // Manual auto-fit when double-clicking
- size_target = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
- ClearActiveID();
- }
- else if (held)
- {
- // Resize from any of the four corners
- // We don't use an incremental MouseDelta but rather compute an absolute target size based on mouse position
- ImVec2 corner_target = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset + resize_rect.GetSize() * grip.CornerPos; // Corner of the window corresponding to our corner grip
- CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, corner_target, grip.CornerPos, &pos_target, &size_target);
- }
- if (resize_grip_n == 0 || held || hovered)
- resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n] = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered : ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip);
- }
- for (int border_n = 0; border_n < resize_border_count; border_n++)
- {
- const float BORDER_SIZE = 5.0f; // FIXME: Only works _inside_ window because of HoveredWindow check.
- const float BORDER_APPEAR_TIMER = 0.05f; // Reduce visual noise
- bool hovered, held;
- ImRect border_rect = GetBorderRect(window, border_n, grip_hover_size, BORDER_SIZE);
- ButtonBehavior(border_rect, window->GetID((void*)(intptr_t)(border_n + 4)), &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren);
- if ((hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer > BORDER_APPEAR_TIMER) || held)
- {
- g.MouseCursor = (border_n & 1) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS;
- if (held) *border_held = border_n;
- }
- if (held)
- {
- ImVec2 border_target = window->Pos;
- ImVec2 border_posn;
- if (border_n == 0) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 0); border_target.y = (g.IO.MousePos.y - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.y); }
- if (border_n == 1) { border_posn = ImVec2(1, 0); border_target.x = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + BORDER_SIZE); }
- if (border_n == 2) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 1); border_target.y = (g.IO.MousePos.y - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.y + BORDER_SIZE); }
- if (border_n == 3) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 0); border_target.x = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x); }
- CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, border_target, border_posn, &pos_target, &size_target);
- }
- }
- PopID();
-
- // Navigation resize (keyboard/gamepad)
- if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow == window)
- {
- ImVec2 nav_resize_delta;
- if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard && g.IO.KeyShift)
- nav_resize_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
- if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
- nav_resize_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
- if (nav_resize_delta.x != 0.0f || nav_resize_delta.y != 0.0f)
- {
- const float NAV_RESIZE_SPEED = 600.0f;
- nav_resize_delta *= ImFloor(NAV_RESIZE_SPEED * g.IO.DeltaTime * ImMin(g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.y));
- g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
- g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
- resize_grip_col[0] = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive);
- // FIXME-NAV: Should store and accumulate into a separate size buffer to handle sizing constraints properly, right now a constraint will make us stuck.
- size_target = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull + nav_resize_delta);
- }
- }
-
- // Apply back modified position/size to window
- if (size_target.x != FLT_MAX)
- {
- window->SizeFull = size_target;
- MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
- }
- if (pos_target.x != FLT_MAX)
- {
- window->Pos = ImFloor(pos_target);
- MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
- }
-
- window->Size = window->SizeFull;
-}
-
-void ImGui::UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* parent_window)
-{
- window->ParentWindow = parent_window;
- window->RootWindow = window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = window->RootWindowForNav = window;
- if (parent_window && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
- window->RootWindow = parent_window->RootWindow;
- if (parent_window && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)))
- window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = parent_window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight;
- while (window->RootWindowForNav->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)
- window->RootWindowForNav = window->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow;
-}
-
-// Push a new ImGui window to add widgets to.
-// - A default window called "Debug" is automatically stacked at the beginning of every frame so you can use widgets without explicitly calling a Begin/End pair.
-// - Begin/End can be called multiple times during the frame with the same window name to append content.
-// - The window name is used as a unique identifier to preserve window information across frames (and save rudimentary information to the .ini file).
-// You can use the "##" or "###" markers to use the same label with different id, or same id with different label. See documentation at the top of this file.
-// - Return false when window is collapsed, so you can early out in your code. You always need to call ImGui::End() even if false is returned.
-// - Passing 'bool* p_open' displays a Close button on the upper-right corner of the window, the pointed value will be set to false when the button is pressed.
-bool ImGui::Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- IM_ASSERT(name != NULL); // Window name required
- IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized); // Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()
- IM_ASSERT(g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount); // Called ImGui::Render() or ImGui::EndFrame() and haven't called ImGui::NewFrame() again yet
-
- // Find or create
- ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name);
- const bool window_just_created = (window == NULL);
- if (window_just_created)
- {
- ImVec2 size_on_first_use = (g.NextWindowData.SizeCond != 0) ? g.NextWindowData.SizeVal : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); // Any condition flag will do since we are creating a new window here.
- window = CreateNewWindow(name, size_on_first_use, flags);
- }
-
- // Automatically disable manual moving/resizing when NoInputs is set
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs)
- flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize;
-
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)
- IM_ASSERT(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow);
-
- const int current_frame = g.FrameCount;
- const bool first_begin_of_the_frame = (window->LastFrameActive != current_frame);
- if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
- window->Flags = (ImGuiWindowFlags)flags;
- else
- flags = window->Flags;
-
- // Parent window is latched only on the first call to Begin() of the frame, so further append-calls can be done from a different window stack
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window_in_stack = g.CurrentWindowStack.empty() ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back();
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window = first_begin_of_the_frame ? ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) ? parent_window_in_stack : NULL) : window->ParentWindow;
- IM_ASSERT(parent_window != NULL || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow));
- window->HasCloseButton = (p_open != NULL);
-
- // Update the Appearing flag
- bool window_just_activated_by_user = (window->LastFrameActive < current_frame - 1); // Not using !WasActive because the implicit "Debug" window would always toggle off->on
- const bool window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize = (window->HiddenFramesForResize > 0);
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
- {
- ImGuiPopupRef& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size];
- window_just_activated_by_user |= (window->PopupId != popup_ref.PopupId); // We recycle popups so treat window as activated if popup id changed
- window_just_activated_by_user |= (window != popup_ref.Window);
- }
- window->Appearing = (window_just_activated_by_user || window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize);
- if (window->Appearing)
- SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, true);
-
- // Add to stack
- g.CurrentWindowStack.push_back(window);
- SetCurrentWindow(window);
- CheckStacksSize(window, true);
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
- {
- ImGuiPopupRef& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size];
- popup_ref.Window = window;
- g.CurrentPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
- window->PopupId = popup_ref.PopupId;
- }
-
- if (window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
- window->NavLastIds[0] = 0;
-
- // Process SetNextWindow***() calls
- bool window_pos_set_by_api = false;
- bool window_size_x_set_by_api = false, window_size_y_set_by_api = false;
- if (g.NextWindowData.PosCond)
- {
- window_pos_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.PosCond) != 0;
- if (window_pos_set_by_api && ImLengthSqr(g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal) > 0.00001f)
- {
- // May be processed on the next frame if this is our first frame and we are measuring size
- // FIXME: Look into removing the branch so everything can go through this same code path for consistency.
- window->SetWindowPosVal = g.NextWindowData.PosVal;
- window->SetWindowPosPivot = g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal;
- window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
- }
- else
- {
- SetWindowPos(window, g.NextWindowData.PosVal, g.NextWindowData.PosCond);
- }
- }
- if (g.NextWindowData.SizeCond)
- {
- window_size_x_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.x > 0.0f);
- window_size_y_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.y > 0.0f);
- SetWindowSize(window, g.NextWindowData.SizeVal, g.NextWindowData.SizeCond);
- }
- if (g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeCond)
- {
- // Adjust passed "client size" to become a "window size"
- window->SizeContentsExplicit = g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal;
- if (window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f)
- window->SizeContentsExplicit.y += window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight();
- }
- else if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
- {
- window->SizeContentsExplicit = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- }
- if (g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond)
- SetWindowCollapsed(window, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond);
- if (g.NextWindowData.FocusCond)
- FocusWindow(window);
- if (window->Appearing)
- SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, false);
-
- // When reusing window again multiple times a frame, just append content (don't need to setup again)
- if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
- {
- // Initialize
- const bool window_is_child_tooltip = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip); // FIXME-WIP: Undocumented behavior of Child+Tooltip for pinned tooltip (#1345)
- UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(window, flags, parent_window);
-
- window->Active = true;
- window->BeginOrderWithinParent = 0;
- window->BeginOrderWithinContext = g.WindowsActiveCount++;
- window->BeginCount = 0;
- window->ClipRect = ImVec4(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX,+FLT_MAX,+FLT_MAX);
- window->LastFrameActive = current_frame;
- window->IDStack.resize(1);
-
- // UPDATE CONTENTS SIZE, UPDATE HIDDEN STATUS
-
- // Update contents size from last frame for auto-fitting (or use explicit size)
- window->SizeContents = CalcSizeContents(window);
- if (window->HiddenFramesRegular > 0)
- window->HiddenFramesRegular--;
- if (window->HiddenFramesForResize > 0)
- window->HiddenFramesForResize--;
-
- // Hide new windows for one frame until they calculate their size
- if (window_just_created && (!window_size_x_set_by_api || !window_size_y_set_by_api))
- window->HiddenFramesForResize = 1;
-
- // Hide popup/tooltip window when re-opening while we measure size (because we recycle the windows)
- // We reset Size/SizeContents for reappearing popups/tooltips early in this function, so further code won't be tempted to use the old size.
- if (window_just_activated_by_user && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) != 0)
- {
- window->HiddenFramesForResize = 1;
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)
- {
- if (!window_size_x_set_by_api)
- window->Size.x = window->SizeFull.x = 0.f;
- if (!window_size_y_set_by_api)
- window->Size.y = window->SizeFull.y = 0.f;
- window->SizeContents = ImVec2(0.f, 0.f);
- }
- }
-
- SetCurrentWindow(window);
-
- // Lock border size and padding for the frame (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies)
- window->WindowBorderSize = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? style.ChildBorderSize : ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupBorderSize : style.WindowBorderSize;
- window->WindowPadding = style.WindowPadding;
- if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) && window->WindowBorderSize == 0.0f)
- window->WindowPadding = ImVec2(0.0f, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? style.WindowPadding.y : 0.0f);
- window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = ImMax(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, style.ItemSpacing.x), g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.x);
- window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y = g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y;
-
- // Collapse window by double-clicking on title bar
- // At this point we don't have a clipping rectangle setup yet, so we can use the title bar area for hit detection and drawing
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse))
- {
- // We don't use a regular button+id to test for double-click on title bar (mostly due to legacy reason, could be fixed), so verify that we don't have items over the title bar.
- ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect();
- if (g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredId == 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == 0 && IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max) && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
- window->CollapseToggleWanted = true;
- if (window->CollapseToggleWanted)
- {
- window->Collapsed = !window->Collapsed;
- MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
- FocusWindow(window);
- }
- }
- else
- {
- window->Collapsed = false;
- }
- window->CollapseToggleWanted = false;
-
- // SIZE
-
- // Calculate auto-fit size, handle automatic resize
- const ImVec2 size_auto_fit = CalcSizeAutoFit(window, window->SizeContents);
- ImVec2 size_full_modified(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
- if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && !window->Collapsed)
- {
- // Using SetNextWindowSize() overrides ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize, so it can be used on tooltips/popups, etc.
- if (!window_size_x_set_by_api)
- window->SizeFull.x = size_full_modified.x = size_auto_fit.x;
- if (!window_size_y_set_by_api)
- window->SizeFull.y = size_full_modified.y = size_auto_fit.y;
- }
- else if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
- {
- // Auto-fit may only grow window during the first few frames
- // We still process initial auto-fit on collapsed windows to get a window width, but otherwise don't honor ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize when collapsed.
- if (!window_size_x_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesX > 0)
- window->SizeFull.x = size_full_modified.x = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.x, size_auto_fit.x) : size_auto_fit.x;
- if (!window_size_y_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
- window->SizeFull.y = size_full_modified.y = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.y, size_auto_fit.y) : size_auto_fit.y;
- if (!window->Collapsed)
- MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
- }
-
- // Apply minimum/maximum window size constraints and final size
- window->SizeFull = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull);
- window->Size = window->Collapsed && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? window->TitleBarRect().GetSize() : window->SizeFull;
-
- // SCROLLBAR STATUS
-
- // Update scrollbar status (based on the Size that was effective during last frame or the auto-resized Size).
- if (!window->Collapsed)
- {
- // When reading the current size we need to read it after size constraints have been applied
- float size_x_for_scrollbars = size_full_modified.x != FLT_MAX ? window->SizeFull.x : window->SizeFullAtLastBegin.x;
- float size_y_for_scrollbars = size_full_modified.y != FLT_MAX ? window->SizeFull.y : window->SizeFullAtLastBegin.y;
- window->ScrollbarY = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar) || ((window->SizeContents.y > size_y_for_scrollbars) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar));
- window->ScrollbarX = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar) || ((window->SizeContents.x > size_x_for_scrollbars - (window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar));
- if (window->ScrollbarX && !window->ScrollbarY)
- window->ScrollbarY = (window->SizeContents.y > size_y_for_scrollbars - style.ScrollbarSize) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
- window->ScrollbarSizes = ImVec2(window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f, window->ScrollbarX ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f);
- }
-
- // POSITION
-
- // Popup latch its initial position, will position itself when it appears next frame
- if (window_just_activated_by_user)
- {
- window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_None;
- if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api)
- window->Pos = g.CurrentPopupStack.back().OpenPopupPos;
- }
-
- // Position child window
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
- {
- window->BeginOrderWithinParent = parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size;
- parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.push_back(window);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip)
- window->Pos = parent_window->DC.CursorPos;
- }
-
- const bool window_pos_with_pivot = (window->SetWindowPosVal.x != FLT_MAX && window->HiddenFramesForResize == 0);
- if (window_pos_with_pivot)
- SetWindowPos(window, ImMax(style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding, window->SetWindowPosVal - window->SizeFull * window->SetWindowPosPivot), 0); // Position given a pivot (e.g. for centering)
- else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0)
- window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
- else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize)
- window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
- else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip)
- window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
-
- // Clamp position so it stays visible
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
- {
- if (!window_pos_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0 && g.IO.DisplaySize.x > 0.0f && g.IO.DisplaySize.y > 0.0f) // Ignore zero-sized display explicitly to avoid losing positions if a window manager reports zero-sized window when initializing or minimizing.
- {
- ImVec2 padding = ImMax(style.DisplayWindowPadding, style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding);
- window->Pos = ImMax(window->Pos + window->Size, padding) - window->Size;
- window->Pos = ImMin(window->Pos, g.IO.DisplaySize - padding);
- }
- }
- window->Pos = ImFloor(window->Pos);
-
- // Lock window rounding for the frame (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies)
- window->WindowRounding = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? style.ChildRounding : ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupRounding : style.WindowRounding;
-
- // Prepare for item focus requests
- window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent = (window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext == INT_MAX || window->FocusIdxAllCounter == -1) ? INT_MAX : (window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext + (window->FocusIdxAllCounter+1)) % (window->FocusIdxAllCounter+1);
- window->FocusIdxTabRequestCurrent = (window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext == INT_MAX || window->FocusIdxTabCounter == -1) ? INT_MAX : (window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext + (window->FocusIdxTabCounter+1)) % (window->FocusIdxTabCounter+1);
- window->FocusIdxAllCounter = window->FocusIdxTabCounter = -1;
- window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext = window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = INT_MAX;
-
- // Apply scrolling
- window->Scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window, true);
- window->ScrollTarget = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
-
- // Apply window focus (new and reactivated windows are moved to front)
- bool want_focus = false;
- if (window_just_activated_by_user && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing))
- if (!(flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
- want_focus = true;
-
- // Handle manual resize: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad
- int border_held = -1;
- ImU32 resize_grip_col[4] = { 0 };
- const int resize_grip_count = g.IO.OptResizeWindowsFromEdges ? 2 : 1; // 4
- const float grip_draw_size = (float)(int)ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.35f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f);
- if (!window->Collapsed)
- UpdateManualResize(window, size_auto_fit, &border_held, resize_grip_count, &resize_grip_col[0]);
-
- // Default item width. Make it proportional to window size if window manually resizes
- if (window->Size.x > 0.0f && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
- window->ItemWidthDefault = (float)(int)(window->Size.x * 0.65f);
- else
- window->ItemWidthDefault = (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 16.0f);
-
- // DRAWING
-
- // Setup draw list and outer clipping rectangle
- window->DrawList->Clear();
- window->DrawList->Flags = (g.Style.AntiAliasedLines ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines : 0) | (g.Style.AntiAliasedFill ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill : 0);
- window->DrawList->PushTextureID(g.Font->ContainerAtlas->TexID);
- ImRect viewport_rect(GetViewportRect());
- if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_is_child_tooltip)
- PushClipRect(parent_window->ClipRect.Min, parent_window->ClipRect.Max, true);
- else
- PushClipRect(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, true);
-
- // Draw modal window background (darkens what is behind them, all viewports)
- const bool dim_bg_for_modal = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && window == GetFrontMostPopupModal() && window->HiddenFramesForResize <= 0;
- const bool dim_bg_for_window_list = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim && (window == g.NavWindowingTargetAnim->RootWindow);
- if (dim_bg_for_modal || dim_bg_for_window_list)
- {
- const ImU32 dim_bg_col = GetColorU32(dim_bg_for_modal ? ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg : ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, g.DimBgRatio);
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, dim_bg_col);
- }
-
- // Draw navigation selection/windowing rectangle background
- if (dim_bg_for_window_list && window == g.NavWindowingTargetAnim)
- {
- ImRect bb = window->Rect();
- bb.Expand(g.FontSize);
- if (!bb.Contains(viewport_rect)) // Avoid drawing if the window covers all the viewport anyway
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha * 0.25f), g.Style.WindowRounding);
- }
-
- // Draw window + handle manual resize
- const float window_rounding = window->WindowRounding;
- const float window_border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
- const ImGuiWindow* window_to_highlight = g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget : g.NavWindow;
- const bool title_bar_is_highlight = want_focus || (window_to_highlight && window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight == window_to_highlight->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight);
- const ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect();
- if (window->Collapsed)
- {
- // Title bar only
- float backup_border_size = style.FrameBorderSize;
- g.Style.FrameBorderSize = window->WindowBorderSize;
- ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32((title_bar_is_highlight && !g.NavDisableHighlight) ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed);
- RenderFrame(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, true, window_rounding);
- g.Style.FrameBorderSize = backup_border_size;
- }
- else
- {
- // Window background
- ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(GetWindowBgColorIdxFromFlags(flags));
- if (g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond != 0)
- {
- bg_col = (bg_col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT);
- g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond = 0;
- }
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(window->Pos + ImVec2(0, window->TitleBarHeight()), window->Pos + window->Size, bg_col, window_rounding, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot);
-
- // Title bar
- ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32(window->Collapsed ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed : title_bar_is_highlight ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBg);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, window_rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_Top);
-
- // Menu bar
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)
- {
- ImRect menu_bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
- menu_bar_rect.ClipWith(window->Rect()); // Soft clipping, in particular child window don't have minimum size covering the menu bar so this is useful for them.
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(menu_bar_rect.Min, menu_bar_rect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg), (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? window_rounding : 0.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_Top);
- if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f && menu_bar_rect.Max.y < window->Pos.y + window->Size.y)
- window->DrawList->AddLine(menu_bar_rect.GetBL(), menu_bar_rect.GetBR(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), style.FrameBorderSize);
- }
-
- // Scrollbars
- if (window->ScrollbarX)
- Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal);
- if (window->ScrollbarY)
- Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical);
-
- // Render resize grips (after their input handling so we don't have a frame of latency)
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize))
- {
- for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++)
- {
- const ImGuiResizeGripDef& grip = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n];
- const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, grip.CornerPos);
- window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(window_border_size, grip_draw_size) : ImVec2(grip_draw_size, window_border_size)));
- window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(grip_draw_size, window_border_size) : ImVec2(window_border_size, grip_draw_size)));
- window->DrawList->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(corner.x + grip.InnerDir.x * (window_rounding + window_border_size), corner.y + grip.InnerDir.y * (window_rounding + window_border_size)), window_rounding, grip.AngleMin12, grip.AngleMax12);
- window->DrawList->PathFillConvex(resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n]);
- }
- }
-
- // Borders
- if (window_border_size > 0.0f)
- window->DrawList->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), window_rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, window_border_size);
- if (border_held != -1)
- {
- ImRect border = GetBorderRect(window, border_held, grip_draw_size, 0.0f);
- window->DrawList->AddLine(border.Min, border.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive), ImMax(1.0f, window_border_size));
- }
- if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0 && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
- window->DrawList->AddLine(title_bar_rect.GetBL() + ImVec2(style.WindowBorderSize, -1), title_bar_rect.GetBR() + ImVec2(-style.WindowBorderSize, -1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), style.FrameBorderSize);
- }
-
- // Draw navigation selection/windowing rectangle border
- if (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim == window)
- {
- float rounding = ImMax(window->WindowRounding, g.Style.WindowRounding);
- ImRect bb = window->Rect();
- bb.Expand(g.FontSize);
- if (bb.Contains(viewport_rect)) // If a window fits the entire viewport, adjust its highlight inward
- {
- bb.Expand(-g.FontSize - 1.0f);
- rounding = window->WindowRounding;
- }
- window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha), rounding, ~0, 3.0f);
- }
-
- // Store a backup of SizeFull which we will use next frame to decide if we need scrollbars.
- window->SizeFullAtLastBegin = window->SizeFull;
-
- // Update various regions. Variables they depends on are set above in this function.
- // FIXME: window->ContentsRegionRect.Max is currently very misleading / partly faulty, but some BeginChild() patterns relies on it.
- window->ContentsRegionRect.Min.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + window->WindowPadding.x;
- window->ContentsRegionRect.Min.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + window->WindowPadding.y + window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight();
- window->ContentsRegionRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x - window->WindowPadding.x + (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.x : (window->Size.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x));
- window->ContentsRegionRect.Max.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y - window->WindowPadding.y + (window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.y : (window->Size.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y));
-
- // Setup drawing context
- // (NB: That term "drawing context / DC" lost its meaning a long time ago. Initially was meant to hold transient data only. Nowadays difference between window-> and window->DC-> is dubious.)
- window->DC.IndentX = 0.0f + window->WindowPadding.x - window->Scroll.x;
- window->DC.GroupOffsetX = 0.0f;
- window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX = 0.0f;
- window->DC.CursorStartPos = window->Pos + ImVec2(window->DC.IndentX + window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX, window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight() + window->WindowPadding.y - window->Scroll.y);
- window->DC.CursorPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
- window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = window->DC.CursorPos;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
- window->DC.CurrentLineHeight = window->DC.PrevLineHeight = 0.0f;
- window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
- window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = false;
- window->DC.NavHasScroll = (GetScrollMaxY() > 0.0f);
- window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask = window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext;
- window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext = 0x00;
- window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
- window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f;
- window->DC.ChildWindows.resize(0);
- window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
- window->DC.ParentLayoutType = parent_window ? parent_window->DC.LayoutType : ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
- window->DC.ItemFlags = parent_window ? parent_window->DC.ItemFlags : ImGuiItemFlags_Default_;
- window->DC.ItemWidth = window->ItemWidthDefault;
- window->DC.TextWrapPos = -1.0f; // disabled
- window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.resize(0);
- window->DC.ItemWidthStack.resize(0);
- window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.resize(0);
- window->DC.ColumnsSet = NULL;
- window->DC.TreeDepth = 0;
- window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop = 0x00;
- window->DC.StateStorage = &window->StateStorage;
- window->DC.GroupStack.resize(0);
- window->MenuColumns.Update(3, style.ItemSpacing.x, window_just_activated_by_user);
-
- if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (window->DC.ItemFlags != parent_window->DC.ItemFlags))
- {
- window->DC.ItemFlags = parent_window->DC.ItemFlags;
- window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemFlags);
- }
-
- if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0)
- window->AutoFitFramesX--;
- if (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
- window->AutoFitFramesY--;
-
- // Apply focus (we need to call FocusWindow() AFTER setting DC.CursorStartPos so our initial navigation reference rectangle can start around there)
- if (want_focus)
- {
- FocusWindow(window);
- NavInitWindow(window, false);
- }
-
- // Title bar
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
- {
- // Close & collapse button are on layer 1 (same as menus) and don't default focus
- const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = window->DC.ItemFlags;
- window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
- window->DC.NavLayerCurrent++;
- window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask <<= 1;
-
- // Collapse button
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse))
- if (CollapseButton(window->GetID("#COLLAPSE"), window->Pos + style.FramePadding))
- window->CollapseToggleWanted = true; // Defer collapsing to next frame as we are too far in the Begin() function
-
- // Close button
- if (p_open != NULL)
- {
- const float pad = style.FramePadding.y;
- const float rad = g.FontSize * 0.5f;
- if (CloseButton(window->GetID("#CLOSE"), window->Rect().GetTR() + ImVec2(-pad - rad, pad + rad), rad + 1))
- *p_open = false;
- }
-
- window->DC.NavLayerCurrent--;
- window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask >>= 1;
- window->DC.ItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
-
- // Title text (FIXME: refactor text alignment facilities along with RenderText helpers, this is too much code for what it does.)
- ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(name, NULL, true);
- ImRect text_r = title_bar_rect;
- float pad_left = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse) ? style.FramePadding.x : (style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- float pad_right = (p_open == NULL) ? style.FramePadding.x : (style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- if (style.WindowTitleAlign.x > 0.0f)
- pad_right = ImLerp(pad_right, pad_left, style.WindowTitleAlign.x);
- text_r.Min.x += pad_left;
- text_r.Max.x -= pad_right;
- ImRect clip_rect = text_r;
- clip_rect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - (p_open ? title_bar_rect.GetHeight() - 3 : style.FramePadding.x); // Match the size of CloseButton()
- RenderTextClipped(text_r.Min, text_r.Max, name, NULL, &text_size, style.WindowTitleAlign, &clip_rect);
- }
-
- // Save clipped aabb so we can access it in constant-time in FindHoveredWindow()
- window->OuterRectClipped = window->Rect();
- window->OuterRectClipped.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
-
- // Pressing CTRL+C while holding on a window copy its content to the clipboard
- // This works but 1. doesn't handle multiple Begin/End pairs, 2. recursing into another Begin/End pair - so we need to work that out and add better logging scope.
- // Maybe we can support CTRL+C on every element?
- /*
- if (g.ActiveId == move_id)
- if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C))
- ImGui::LogToClipboard();
- */
-
- // Inner rectangle
- // We set this up after processing the resize grip so that our clip rectangle doesn't lag by a frame
- // Note that if our window is collapsed we will end up with an inverted (~null) clipping rectangle which is the correct behavior.
- window->InnerMainRect.Min.x = title_bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize;
- window->InnerMainRect.Min.y = title_bar_rect.Max.y + window->MenuBarHeight() + (((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) ? style.FrameBorderSize : window->WindowBorderSize);
- window->InnerMainRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x - window->WindowBorderSize;
- window->InnerMainRect.Max.y = window->Pos.y + window->Size.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y - window->WindowBorderSize;
- //window->DrawList->AddRect(window->InnerRect.Min, window->InnerRect.Max, IM_COL32_WHITE);
-
- // Inner clipping rectangle
- // Force round operator last to ensure that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render code produce correct result.
- window->InnerClipRect.Min.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Min.x + ImMax(0.0f, ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f - window->WindowBorderSize)));
- window->InnerClipRect.Min.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Min.y);
- window->InnerClipRect.Max.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Max.x - ImMax(0.0f, ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f - window->WindowBorderSize)));
- window->InnerClipRect.Max.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Max.y);
-
- // After Begin() we fill the last item / hovered data based on title bar data. It is a standard behavior (to allow creation of context menus on title bar only, etc.).
- window->DC.LastItemId = window->MoveId;
- window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags = IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, false) ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect : 0;
- window->DC.LastItemRect = title_bar_rect;
- }
-
- PushClipRect(window->InnerClipRect.Min, window->InnerClipRect.Max, true);
-
- // Clear 'accessed' flag last thing (After PushClipRect which will set the flag. We want the flag to stay false when the default "Debug" window is unused)
- if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
- window->WriteAccessed = false;
-
- window->BeginCount++;
- g.NextWindowData.Clear();
-
- if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
- {
- // Child window can be out of sight and have "negative" clip windows.
- // Mark them as collapsed so commands are skipped earlier (we can't manually collapse them because they have no title bar).
- IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) != 0);
-
- if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0)
- if (window->OuterRectClipped.Min.x >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.x || window->OuterRectClipped.Min.y >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.y)
- window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
-
- // Completely hide along with parent or if parent is collapsed
- if (parent_window && (parent_window->Collapsed || parent_window->Hidden))
- window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
- }
-
- // Don't render if style alpha is 0.0 at the time of Begin(). This is arbitrary and inconsistent but has been there for a long while (may remove at some point)
- if (style.Alpha <= 0.0f)
- window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
-
- // Update the Hidden flag
- window->Hidden = (window->HiddenFramesRegular > 0) || (window->HiddenFramesForResize);
-
- // Return false if we don't intend to display anything to allow user to perform an early out optimization
- window->SkipItems = (window->Collapsed || !window->Active || window->Hidden) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0 && window->HiddenFramesForResize <= 0;
-
- return !window->SkipItems;
-}
-
-// Old Begin() API with 5 parameters, avoid calling this version directly! Use SetNextWindowSize()/SetNextWindowBgAlpha() + Begin() instead.
-#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
-bool ImGui::Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open, const ImVec2& size_first_use, float bg_alpha_override, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
-{
- // Old API feature: we could pass the initial window size as a parameter. This was misleading because it only had an effect if the window didn't have data in the .ini file.
- if (size_first_use.x != 0.0f || size_first_use.y != 0.0f)
- ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(size_first_use, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
-
- // Old API feature: override the window background alpha with a parameter.
- if (bg_alpha_override >= 0.0f)
- ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(bg_alpha_override);
-
- return ImGui::Begin(name, p_open, flags);
-}
-#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
-
-void ImGui::End()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL)
- EndColumns();
- PopClipRect(); // Inner window clip rectangle
-
- // Stop logging
- if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) // FIXME: add more options for scope of logging
- LogFinish();
-
- // Pop from window stack
- g.CurrentWindowStack.pop_back();
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
- g.CurrentPopupStack.pop_back();
- CheckStacksSize(window, false);
- SetCurrentWindow(g.CurrentWindowStack.empty() ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back());
-}
-
-// Vertical scrollbar
-// The entire piece of code below is rather confusing because:
-// - We handle absolute seeking (when first clicking outside the grab) and relative manipulation (afterward or when clicking inside the grab)
-// - We store values as normalized ratio and in a form that allows the window content to change while we are holding on a scrollbar
-// - We handle both horizontal and vertical scrollbars, which makes the terminology not ideal.
-void ImGui::Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType direction)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- const bool horizontal = (direction == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal);
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(horizontal ? "#SCROLLX" : "#SCROLLY");
-
- // Render background
- bool other_scrollbar = (horizontal ? window->ScrollbarY : window->ScrollbarX);
- float other_scrollbar_size_w = other_scrollbar ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f;
- const ImRect window_rect = window->Rect();
- const float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
- ImRect bb = horizontal
- ? ImRect(window->Pos.x + border_size, window_rect.Max.y - style.ScrollbarSize, window_rect.Max.x - other_scrollbar_size_w - border_size, window_rect.Max.y - border_size)
- : ImRect(window_rect.Max.x - style.ScrollbarSize, window->Pos.y + border_size, window_rect.Max.x - border_size, window_rect.Max.y - other_scrollbar_size_w - border_size);
- if (!horizontal)
- bb.Min.y += window->TitleBarHeight() + ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? window->MenuBarHeight() : 0.0f);
- if (bb.GetWidth() <= 0.0f || bb.GetHeight() <= 0.0f)
- return;
-
- int window_rounding_corners;
- if (horizontal)
- window_rounding_corners = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | (other_scrollbar ? 0 : ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
- else
- window_rounding_corners = (((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight : 0) | (other_scrollbar ? 0 : ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg), window->WindowRounding, window_rounding_corners);
- bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp((float)(int)((bb.Max.x - bb.Min.x - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp((float)(int)((bb.Max.y - bb.Min.y - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));
-
- // V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar)
- float scrollbar_size_v = horizontal ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight();
- float scroll_v = horizontal ? window->Scroll.x : window->Scroll.y;
- float win_size_avail_v = (horizontal ? window->SizeFull.x : window->SizeFull.y) - other_scrollbar_size_w;
- float win_size_contents_v = horizontal ? window->SizeContents.x : window->SizeContents.y;
-
- // Calculate the height of our grabbable box. It generally represent the amount visible (vs the total scrollable amount)
- // But we maintain a minimum size in pixel to allow for the user to still aim inside.
- IM_ASSERT(ImMax(win_size_contents_v, win_size_avail_v) > 0.0f); // Adding this assert to check if the ImMax(XXX,1.0f) is still needed. PLEASE CONTACT ME if this triggers.
- const float win_size_v = ImMax(ImMax(win_size_contents_v, win_size_avail_v), 1.0f);
- const float grab_h_pixels = ImClamp(scrollbar_size_v * (win_size_avail_v / win_size_v), style.GrabMinSize, scrollbar_size_v);
- const float grab_h_norm = grab_h_pixels / scrollbar_size_v;
-
- // Handle input right away. None of the code of Begin() is relying on scrolling position before calling Scrollbar().
- bool held = false;
- bool hovered = false;
- const bool previously_held = (g.ActiveId == id);
- ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
-
- float scroll_max = ImMax(1.0f, win_size_contents_v - win_size_avail_v);
- float scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(scroll_v / scroll_max);
- float grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;
- if (held && grab_h_norm < 1.0f)
- {
- float scrollbar_pos_v = horizontal ? bb.Min.x : bb.Min.y;
- float mouse_pos_v = horizontal ? g.IO.MousePos.x : g.IO.MousePos.y;
- float* click_delta_to_grab_center_v = horizontal ? &g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter.x : &g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter.y;
-
- // Click position in scrollbar normalized space (0.0f->1.0f)
- const float clicked_v_norm = ImSaturate((mouse_pos_v - scrollbar_pos_v) / scrollbar_size_v);
- SetHoveredID(id);
-
- bool seek_absolute = false;
- if (!previously_held)
- {
- // On initial click calculate the distance between mouse and the center of the grab
- if (clicked_v_norm >= grab_v_norm && clicked_v_norm <= grab_v_norm + grab_h_norm)
- {
- *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm*0.5f;
- }
- else
- {
- seek_absolute = true;
- *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = 0.0f;
- }
- }
-
- // Apply scroll
- // It is ok to modify Scroll here because we are being called in Begin() after the calculation of SizeContents and before setting up our starting position
- const float scroll_v_norm = ImSaturate((clicked_v_norm - *click_delta_to_grab_center_v - grab_h_norm*0.5f) / (1.0f - grab_h_norm));
- scroll_v = (float)(int)(0.5f + scroll_v_norm * scroll_max);//(win_size_contents_v - win_size_v));
- if (horizontal)
- window->Scroll.x = scroll_v;
- else
- window->Scroll.y = scroll_v;
-
- // Update values for rendering
- scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(scroll_v / scroll_max);
- grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;
-
- // Update distance to grab now that we have seeked and saturated
- if (seek_absolute)
- *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm*0.5f;
- }
-
- // Render
- const ImU32 grab_col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered : ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab);
- ImRect grab_rect;
- if (horizontal)
- grab_rect = ImRect(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm), bb.Min.y, ImMin(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, window_rect.Max.x), bb.Max.y);
- else
- grab_rect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm), bb.Max.x, ImMin(ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, window_rect.Max.y));
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_rect.Min, grab_rect.Max, grab_col, style.ScrollbarRounding);
-}
-
-void ImGui::BringWindowToFront(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* current_front_window = g.Windows.back();
- if (current_front_window == window || current_front_window->RootWindow == window)
- return;
- for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 2; i >= 0; i--) // We can ignore the front most window
- if (g.Windows[i] == window)
- {
- g.Windows.erase(g.Windows.Data + i);
- g.Windows.push_back(window);
- break;
- }
-}
-
-void ImGui::BringWindowToBack(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.Windows[0] == window)
- return;
- for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++)
- if (g.Windows[i] == window)
- {
- memmove(&g.Windows[1], &g.Windows[0], (size_t)i * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*));
- g.Windows[0] = window;
- break;
- }
-}
-
-// Moving window to front of display and set focus (which happens to be back of our sorted list)
-void ImGui::FocusWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- if (g.NavWindow != window)
- {
- g.NavWindow = window;
- if (window && g.NavDisableMouseHover)
- g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
- g.NavInitRequest = false;
- g.NavId = window ? window->NavLastIds[0] : 0; // Restore NavId
- g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
- g.NavLayer = 0;
- //printf("[%05d] FocusWindow(\"%s\")\n", g.FrameCount, window ? window->Name : NULL);
- }
-
- // Passing NULL allow to disable keyboard focus
- if (!window)
- return;
-
- // Move the root window to the top of the pile
- if (window->RootWindow)
- window = window->RootWindow;
-
- // Steal focus on active widgets
- if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) // FIXME: This statement should be unnecessary. Need further testing before removing it..
- if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->RootWindow != window)
- ClearActiveID();
-
- // Bring to front
- if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus))
- BringWindowToFront(window);
-}
-
-void ImGui::FocusFrontMostActiveWindow(ImGuiWindow* ignore_window)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
- if (g.Windows[i] != ignore_window && g.Windows[i]->WasActive && !(g.Windows[i]->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
- {
- ImGuiWindow* focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(g.Windows[i]);
- FocusWindow(focus_window);
- return;
- }
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushItemWidth(float item_width)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.ItemWidth = (item_width == 0.0f ? window->ItemWidthDefault : item_width);
- window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemWidth);
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushMultiItemsWidths(int components, float w_full)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- const ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
- if (w_full <= 0.0f)
- w_full = CalcItemWidth();
- const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)((w_full - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)) / (float)components));
- const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(w_full - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)));
- window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_last);
- for (int i = 0; i < components-1; i++)
- window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_one);
- window->DC.ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidthStack.back();
-}
-
-void ImGui::PopItemWidth()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.ItemWidthStack.pop_back();
- window->DC.ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidthStack.empty() ? window->ItemWidthDefault : window->DC.ItemWidthStack.back();
-}
-
-float ImGui::CalcItemWidth()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- float w = window->DC.ItemWidth;
- if (w < 0.0f)
- {
- // Align to a right-side limit. We include 1 frame padding in the calculation because this is how the width is always used (we add 2 frame padding to it), but we could move that responsibility to the widget as well.
- float width_to_right_edge = GetContentRegionAvail().x;
- w = ImMax(1.0f, width_to_right_edge + w);
- }
- w = (float)(int)w;
- return w;
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetCurrentFont(ImFont* font)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(font && font->IsLoaded()); // Font Atlas not created. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32 / GetTexDataAsAlpha8 ?
- IM_ASSERT(font->Scale > 0.0f);
- g.Font = font;
- g.FontBaseSize = g.IO.FontGlobalScale * g.Font->FontSize * g.Font->Scale;
- g.FontSize = g.CurrentWindow ? g.CurrentWindow->CalcFontSize() : 0.0f;
-
- ImFontAtlas* atlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
- g.DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel = atlas->TexUvWhitePixel;
- g.DrawListSharedData.Font = g.Font;
- g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = g.FontSize;
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushFont(ImFont* font)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (!font)
- font = GetDefaultFont();
- SetCurrentFont(font);
- g.FontStack.push_back(font);
- g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PushTextureID(font->ContainerAtlas->TexID);
-}
-
-void ImGui::PopFont()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PopTextureID();
- g.FontStack.pop_back();
- SetCurrentFont(g.FontStack.empty() ? GetDefaultFont() : g.FontStack.back());
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags option, bool enabled)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (enabled)
- window->DC.ItemFlags |= option;
- else
- window->DC.ItemFlags &= ~option;
- window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemFlags);
-}
-
-void ImGui::PopItemFlag()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.pop_back();
- window->DC.ItemFlags = window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.empty() ? ImGuiItemFlags_Default_ : window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.back();
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool allow_keyboard_focus)
-{
- PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_AllowKeyboardFocus, allow_keyboard_focus);
-}
-
-void ImGui::PopAllowKeyboardFocus()
-{
- PopItemFlag();
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat)
-{
- PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat, repeat);
-}
-
-void ImGui::PopButtonRepeat()
-{
- PopItemFlag();
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_pos_x)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.TextWrapPos = wrap_pos_x;
- window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.push_back(wrap_pos_x);
-}
-
-void ImGui::PopTextWrapPos()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.pop_back();
- window->DC.TextWrapPos = window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.empty() ? -1.0f : window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.back();
-}
-
-// FIXME: This may incur a round-trip (if the end user got their data from a float4) but eventually we aim to store the in-flight colors as ImU32
-void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiColMod backup;
- backup.Col = idx;
- backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx];
- g.ColorModifiers.push_back(backup);
- g.Style.Colors[idx] = ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col);
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4& col)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiColMod backup;
- backup.Col = idx;
- backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx];
- g.ColorModifiers.push_back(backup);
- g.Style.Colors[idx] = col;
-}
-
-void ImGui::PopStyleColor(int count)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- while (count > 0)
- {
- ImGuiColMod& backup = g.ColorModifiers.back();
- g.Style.Colors[backup.Col] = backup.BackupValue;
- g.ColorModifiers.pop_back();
- count--;
- }
-}
-
-struct ImGuiStyleVarInfo
-{
- ImGuiDataType Type;
- ImU32 Count;
- ImU32 Offset;
- void* GetVarPtr(ImGuiStyle* style) const { return (void*)((unsigned char*)style + Offset); }
-};
-
-static const ImGuiStyleVarInfo GStyleVarInfo[] =
-{
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, Alpha) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowPadding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowMinSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowTitleAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FramePadding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemInnerSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, IndentSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabMinSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding
- { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ButtonTextAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign
-};
-
-static const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* GetStyleVarInfo(ImGuiStyleVar idx)
-{
- IM_ASSERT(idx >= 0 && idx < ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT);
- IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GStyleVarInfo) == ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT);
- return &GStyleVarInfo[idx];
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val)
-{
- const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx);
- if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 1)
- {
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- float* pvar = (float*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
- g.StyleModifiers.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar));
- *pvar = val;
- return;
- }
- IM_ASSERT(0); // Called function with wrong-type? Variable is not a float.
-}
-
-void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2& val)
-{
- const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx);
- if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 2)
- {
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImVec2* pvar = (ImVec2*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
- g.StyleModifiers.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar));
- *pvar = val;
- return;
- }
- IM_ASSERT(0); // Called function with wrong-type? Variable is not a ImVec2.
-}
-
-void ImGui::PopStyleVar(int count)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- while (count > 0)
- {
- // We avoid a generic memcpy(data, &backup.Backup.., GDataTypeSize[info->Type] * info->Count), the overhead in Debug is not worth it.
- ImGuiStyleMod& backup = g.StyleModifiers.back();
- const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* info = GetStyleVarInfo(backup.VarIdx);
- void* data = info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
- if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 1) { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; }
- else if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 2) { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; ((float*)data)[1] = backup.BackupFloat[1]; }
- g.StyleModifiers.pop_back();
- count--;
- }
-}
-
-const char* ImGui::GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx)
-{
- // Create switch-case from enum with regexp: ImGuiCol_{.*}, --> case ImGuiCol_\1: return "\1";
- switch (idx)
- {
- case ImGuiCol_Text: return "Text";
- case ImGuiCol_TextDisabled: return "TextDisabled";
- case ImGuiCol_WindowBg: return "WindowBg";
- case ImGuiCol_ChildBg: return "ChildBg";
- case ImGuiCol_PopupBg: return "PopupBg";
- case ImGuiCol_Border: return "Border";
- case ImGuiCol_BorderShadow: return "BorderShadow";
- case ImGuiCol_FrameBg: return "FrameBg";
- case ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered: return "FrameBgHovered";
- case ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive: return "FrameBgActive";
- case ImGuiCol_TitleBg: return "TitleBg";
- case ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive: return "TitleBgActive";
- case ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed: return "TitleBgCollapsed";
- case ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg: return "MenuBarBg";
- case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg: return "ScrollbarBg";
- case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab: return "ScrollbarGrab";
- case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered: return "ScrollbarGrabHovered";
- case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive: return "ScrollbarGrabActive";
- case ImGuiCol_CheckMark: return "CheckMark";
- case ImGuiCol_SliderGrab: return "SliderGrab";
- case ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive: return "SliderGrabActive";
- case ImGuiCol_Button: return "Button";
- case ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered: return "ButtonHovered";
- case ImGuiCol_ButtonActive: return "ButtonActive";
- case ImGuiCol_Header: return "Header";
- case ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered: return "HeaderHovered";
- case ImGuiCol_HeaderActive: return "HeaderActive";
- case ImGuiCol_Separator: return "Separator";
- case ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered: return "SeparatorHovered";
- case ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive: return "SeparatorActive";
- case ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip: return "ResizeGrip";
- case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered: return "ResizeGripHovered";
- case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive: return "ResizeGripActive";
- case ImGuiCol_PlotLines: return "PlotLines";
- case ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered: return "PlotLinesHovered";
- case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram: return "PlotHistogram";
- case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered: return "PlotHistogramHovered";
- case ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg: return "TextSelectedBg";
- case ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget: return "DragDropTarget";
- case ImGuiCol_NavHighlight: return "NavHighlight";
- case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight: return "NavWindowingHighlight";
- case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg: return "NavWindowingDimBg";
- case ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg: return "ModalWindowDimBg";
- }
- IM_ASSERT(0);
- return "Unknown";
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsWindowChildOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent)
-{
- if (window->RootWindow == potential_parent)
- return true;
- while (window != NULL)
- {
- if (window == potential_parent)
- return true;
- window = window->ParentWindow;
- }
- return false;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
-{
- IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped) == 0); // Flags not supported by this function
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow)
- {
- if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL)
- return false;
- }
- else
- {
- switch (flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows))
- {
- case ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows:
- if (g.HoveredRootWindow != g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow)
- return false;
- break;
- case ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow:
- if (g.HoveredWindow != g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow)
- return false;
- break;
- case ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows:
- if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || !IsWindowChildOf(g.HoveredWindow, g.CurrentWindow))
- return false;
- break;
- default:
- if (g.HoveredWindow != g.CurrentWindow)
- return false;
- break;
- }
- }
-
- if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(g.HoveredRootWindow, flags))
- return false;
- if (!(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
- if (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != g.HoveredWindow->MoveId)
- return false;
- return true;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow); // Not inside a Begin()/End()
-
- if (flags & ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow)
- return g.NavWindow != NULL;
-
- switch (flags & (ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
- {
- case ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows:
- return g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindow == g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow;
- case ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow:
- return g.NavWindow == g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow;
- case ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows:
- return g.NavWindow && IsWindowChildOf(g.NavWindow, g.CurrentWindow);
- default:
- return g.NavWindow == g.CurrentWindow;
- }
-}
-
-// Can we focus this window with CTRL+TAB (or PadMenu + PadFocusPrev/PadFocusNext)
-bool ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(ImGuiWindow* window)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return window->Active && window == window->RootWindow && (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus) || window == g.NavWindow);
-}
-
-float ImGui::GetWindowWidth()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
- return window->Size.x;
-}
-
-float ImGui::GetWindowHeight()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
- return window->Size.y;
-}
-
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowPos()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- return window->Pos;
-}
-
-static void SetWindowScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_x)
-{
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x += window->Scroll.x; // SizeContents is generally computed based on CursorMaxPos which is affected by scroll position, so we need to apply our change to it.
- window->Scroll.x = new_scroll_x;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x -= window->Scroll.x;
-}
-
-static void SetWindowScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_y)
-{
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y += window->Scroll.y; // SizeContents is generally computed based on CursorMaxPos which is affected by scroll position, so we need to apply our change to it.
- window->Scroll.y = new_scroll_y;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y -= window->Scroll.y;
-}
-
-static void SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
- if (cond && (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
- return;
-
- IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
- window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
- window->SetWindowPosVal = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
-
- // Set
- const ImVec2 old_pos = window->Pos;
- window->Pos = ImFloor(pos);
- window->DC.CursorPos += (window->Pos - old_pos); // As we happen to move the window while it is being appended to (which is a bad idea - will smear) let's at least offset the cursor
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos += (window->Pos - old_pos); // And more importantly we need to adjust this so size calculation doesn't get affected.
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond);
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const char* name, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
- SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond);
-}
-
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowSize()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->Size;
-}
-
-static void SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
- if (cond && (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
- return;
-
- IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
- window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
-
- // Set
- if (size.x > 0.0f)
- {
- window->AutoFitFramesX = 0;
- window->SizeFull.x = size.x;
- }
- else
- {
- window->AutoFitFramesX = 2;
- window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
- }
- if (size.y > 0.0f)
- {
- window->AutoFitFramesY = 0;
- window->SizeFull.y = size.y;
- }
- else
- {
- window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
- window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
- }
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- SetWindowSize(GImGui->CurrentWindow, size, cond);
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const char* name, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
- SetWindowSize(window, size, cond);
-}
-
-static void SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
- if (cond && (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
- return;
- window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
-
- // Set
- window->Collapsed = collapsed;
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- SetWindowCollapsed(GImGui->CurrentWindow, collapsed, cond);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsWindowCollapsed()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->Collapsed;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::IsWindowAppearing()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->Appearing;
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(const char* name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
- SetWindowCollapsed(window, collapsed, cond);
-}
+ // Update Flags, LastFrameActive, BeginOrderXXX fields
+ if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+ window->Flags = (ImGuiWindowFlags)flags;
+ else
+ flags = window->Flags;
-void ImGui::SetWindowFocus()
-{
- FocusWindow(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
-}
+ // Parent window is latched only on the first call to Begin() of the frame, so further append-calls can be done from a different window stack
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window_in_stack = g.CurrentWindowStack.empty() ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back();
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window = first_begin_of_the_frame ? ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) ? parent_window_in_stack : NULL) : window->ParentWindow;
+ IM_ASSERT(parent_window != NULL || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow));
+ window->HasCloseButton = (p_open != NULL);
-void ImGui::SetWindowFocus(const char* name)
-{
- if (name)
+ // Update the Appearing flag
+ bool window_just_activated_by_user = (window->LastFrameActive < current_frame - 1); // Not using !WasActive because the implicit "Debug" window would always toggle off->on
+ const bool window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize = (window->HiddenFramesForResize > 0);
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
{
- if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
- FocusWindow(window);
+ ImGuiPopupRef& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size];
+ window_just_activated_by_user |= (window->PopupId != popup_ref.PopupId); // We recycle popups so treat window as activated if popup id changed
+ window_just_activated_by_user |= (window != popup_ref.Window);
}
- else
+ window->Appearing = (window_just_activated_by_user || window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize);
+ if (window->Appearing)
+ SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, true);
+
+ // Add to stack
+ g.CurrentWindowStack.push_back(window);
+ SetCurrentWindow(window);
+ CheckStacksSize(window, true);
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
{
- FocusWindow(NULL);
+ ImGuiPopupRef& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size];
+ popup_ref.Window = window;
+ g.BeginPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
+ window->PopupId = popup_ref.PopupId;
}
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond, const ImVec2& pivot)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
- g.NextWindowData.PosVal = pos;
- g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal = pivot;
- g.NextWindowData.PosCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
- g.NextWindowData.SizeVal = size;
- g.NextWindowData.SizeCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback, void* custom_callback_user_data)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = ImGuiCond_Always;
- g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect = ImRect(size_min, size_max);
- g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback = custom_callback;
- g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData = custom_callback_user_data;
-}
-
-void ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal = size; // In Begin() we will add the size of window decorations (title bar, menu etc.) to that to form a SizeContents value.
- g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeCond = ImGuiCond_Always;
-}
-void ImGui::SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
- g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal = collapsed;
- g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
-}
+ if (window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
+ window->NavLastIds[0] = 0;
-void ImGui::SetNextWindowFocus()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NextWindowData.FocusCond = ImGuiCond_Always; // Using a Cond member for consistency (may transition all of them to single flag set for fast Clear() op)
-}
+ // Process SetNextWindow***() calls
+ bool window_pos_set_by_api = false;
+ bool window_size_x_set_by_api = false, window_size_y_set_by_api = false;
+ if (g.NextWindowData.PosCond)
+ {
+ window_pos_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.PosCond) != 0;
+ if (window_pos_set_by_api && ImLengthSqr(g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal) > 0.00001f)
+ {
+ // May be processed on the next frame if this is our first frame and we are measuring size
+ // FIXME: Look into removing the branch so everything can go through this same code path for consistency.
+ window->SetWindowPosVal = g.NextWindowData.PosVal;
+ window->SetWindowPosPivot = g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal;
+ window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SetWindowPos(window, g.NextWindowData.PosVal, g.NextWindowData.PosCond);
+ }
+ }
+ if (g.NextWindowData.SizeCond)
+ {
+ window_size_x_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.x > 0.0f);
+ window_size_y_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.y > 0.0f);
+ SetWindowSize(window, g.NextWindowData.SizeVal, g.NextWindowData.SizeCond);
+ }
+ if (g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeCond)
+ {
+ // Adjust passed "client size" to become a "window size"
+ window->SizeContentsExplicit = g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal;
+ if (window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f)
+ window->SizeContentsExplicit.y += window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight();
+ }
+ else if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+ {
+ window->SizeContentsExplicit = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ }
+ if (g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond)
+ SetWindowCollapsed(window, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond);
+ if (g.NextWindowData.FocusCond)
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ if (window->Appearing)
+ SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, false);
-void ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal = alpha;
- g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond = ImGuiCond_Always; // Using a Cond member for consistency (may transition all of them to single flag set for fast Clear() op)
-}
+ // When reusing window again multiple times a frame, just append content (don't need to setup again)
+ if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+ {
+ // Initialize
+ const bool window_is_child_tooltip = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip); // FIXME-WIP: Undocumented behavior of Child+Tooltip for pinned tooltip (#1345)
+ UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(window, flags, parent_window);
-// In window space (not screen space!)
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionMax()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- ImVec2 mx = window->ContentsRegionRect.Max - window->Pos;
- if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
- mx.x = GetColumnOffset(window->DC.ColumnsSet->Current + 1) - window->WindowPadding.x;
- return mx;
-}
+ window->Active = true;
+ window->BeginOrderWithinParent = 0;
+ window->BeginOrderWithinContext = (short)(g.WindowsActiveCount++);
+ window->BeginCount = 0;
+ window->ClipRect = ImVec4(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX,+FLT_MAX,+FLT_MAX);
+ window->LastFrameActive = current_frame;
+ window->IDStack.resize(1);
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return GetContentRegionMax() - (window->DC.CursorPos - window->Pos);
-}
+ // Update stored window name when it changes (which can _only_ happen with the "###" operator, so the ID would stay unchanged).
+ // The title bar always display the 'name' parameter, so we only update the string storage if it needs to be visible to the end-user elsewhere.
+ bool window_title_visible_elsewhere = false;
+ if (g.NavWindowingList != NULL && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus) == 0) // Window titles visible when using CTRL+TAB
+ window_title_visible_elsewhere = true;
+ if (window_title_visible_elsewhere && !window_just_created && strcmp(name, window->Name) != 0)
+ {
+ size_t buf_len = (size_t)window->NameBufLen;
+ window->Name = ImStrdupcpy(window->Name, &buf_len, name);
+ window->NameBufLen = (int)buf_len;
+ }
-float ImGui::GetContentRegionAvailWidth()
-{
- return GetContentRegionAvail().x;
-}
+ // UPDATE CONTENTS SIZE, UPDATE HIDDEN STATUS
-// In window space (not screen space!)
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMin()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->ContentsRegionRect.Min - window->Pos;
-}
+ // Update contents size from last frame for auto-fitting (or use explicit size)
+ window->SizeContents = CalcSizeContents(window);
+ if (window->HiddenFramesRegular > 0)
+ window->HiddenFramesRegular--;
+ if (window->HiddenFramesForResize > 0)
+ window->HiddenFramesForResize--;
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->ContentsRegionRect.Max - window->Pos;
-}
+ // Hide new windows for one frame until they calculate their size
+ if (window_just_created && (!window_size_x_set_by_api || !window_size_y_set_by_api))
+ window->HiddenFramesForResize = 1;
-float ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionWidth()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->ContentsRegionRect.GetWidth();
-}
+ // Hide popup/tooltip window when re-opening while we measure size (because we recycle the windows)
+ // We reset Size/SizeContents for reappearing popups/tooltips early in this function, so further code won't be tempted to use the old size.
+ if (window_just_activated_by_user && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) != 0)
+ {
+ window->HiddenFramesForResize = 1;
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)
+ {
+ if (!window_size_x_set_by_api)
+ window->Size.x = window->SizeFull.x = 0.f;
+ if (!window_size_y_set_by_api)
+ window->Size.y = window->SizeFull.y = 0.f;
+ window->SizeContents = ImVec2(0.f, 0.f);
+ }
+ }
-float ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.FontSize;
-}
+ SetCurrentWindow(window);
-float ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
-}
+ // Lock border size and padding for the frame (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies)
+ window->WindowBorderSize = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? style.ChildBorderSize : ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupBorderSize : style.WindowBorderSize;
+ window->WindowPadding = style.WindowPadding;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) && window->WindowBorderSize == 0.0f)
+ window->WindowPadding = ImVec2(0.0f, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? style.WindowPadding.y : 0.0f);
+ window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = ImMax(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, style.ItemSpacing.x), g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.x);
+ window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y = g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y;
-float ImGui::GetFrameHeight()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f;
-}
+ // Collapse window by double-clicking on title bar
+ // At this point we don't have a clipping rectangle setup yet, so we can use the title bar area for hit detection and drawing
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse))
+ {
+ // We don't use a regular button+id to test for double-click on title bar (mostly due to legacy reason, could be fixed), so verify that we don't have items over the title bar.
+ ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect();
+ if (g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredId == 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == 0 && IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max) && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
+ window->WantCollapseToggle = true;
+ if (window->WantCollapseToggle)
+ {
+ window->Collapsed = !window->Collapsed;
+ MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ window->Collapsed = false;
+ }
+ window->WantCollapseToggle = false;
-float ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
-}
+ // SIZE
-ImDrawList* ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- return window->DrawList;
-}
+ // Calculate auto-fit size, handle automatic resize
+ const ImVec2 size_auto_fit = CalcSizeAutoFit(window, window->SizeContents);
+ ImVec2 size_full_modified(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+ if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && !window->Collapsed)
+ {
+ // Using SetNextWindowSize() overrides ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize, so it can be used on tooltips/popups, etc.
+ if (!window_size_x_set_by_api)
+ window->SizeFull.x = size_full_modified.x = size_auto_fit.x;
+ if (!window_size_y_set_by_api)
+ window->SizeFull.y = size_full_modified.y = size_auto_fit.y;
+ }
+ else if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
+ {
+ // Auto-fit may only grow window during the first few frames
+ // We still process initial auto-fit on collapsed windows to get a window width, but otherwise don't honor ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize when collapsed.
+ if (!window_size_x_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesX > 0)
+ window->SizeFull.x = size_full_modified.x = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.x, size_auto_fit.x) : size_auto_fit.x;
+ if (!window_size_y_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
+ window->SizeFull.y = size_full_modified.y = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.y, size_auto_fit.y) : size_auto_fit.y;
+ if (!window->Collapsed)
+ MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+ }
-ImFont* ImGui::GetFont()
-{
- return GImGui->Font;
-}
+ // Apply minimum/maximum window size constraints and final size
+ window->SizeFull = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull);
+ window->Size = window->Collapsed && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? window->TitleBarRect().GetSize() : window->SizeFull;
-float ImGui::GetFontSize()
-{
- return GImGui->FontSize;
-}
+ // SCROLLBAR STATUS
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetFontTexUvWhitePixel()
-{
- return GImGui->DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel;
-}
+ // Update scrollbar status (based on the Size that was effective during last frame or the auto-resized Size).
+ if (!window->Collapsed)
+ {
+ // When reading the current size we need to read it after size constraints have been applied
+ float size_x_for_scrollbars = size_full_modified.x != FLT_MAX ? window->SizeFull.x : window->SizeFullAtLastBegin.x;
+ float size_y_for_scrollbars = size_full_modified.y != FLT_MAX ? window->SizeFull.y : window->SizeFullAtLastBegin.y;
+ window->ScrollbarY = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar) || ((window->SizeContents.y > size_y_for_scrollbars) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar));
+ window->ScrollbarX = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar) || ((window->SizeContents.x > size_x_for_scrollbars - (window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar));
+ if (window->ScrollbarX && !window->ScrollbarY)
+ window->ScrollbarY = (window->SizeContents.y > size_y_for_scrollbars - style.ScrollbarSize) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
+ window->ScrollbarSizes = ImVec2(window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f, window->ScrollbarX ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f);
+ }
-void ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(float scale)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->FontWindowScale = scale;
- g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize();
-}
+ // POSITION
-// User generally sees positions in window coordinates. Internally we store CursorPos in absolute screen coordinates because it is more convenient.
-// Conversion happens as we pass the value to user, but it makes our naming convention confusing because GetCursorPos() == (DC.CursorPos - window.Pos). May want to rename 'DC.CursorPos'.
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorPos()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.CursorPos - window->Pos + window->Scroll;
-}
+ // Popup latch its initial position, will position itself when it appears next frame
+ if (window_just_activated_by_user)
+ {
+ window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_None;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api)
+ window->Pos = g.BeginPopupStack.back().OpenPopupPos;
+ }
-float ImGui::GetCursorPosX()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x;
-}
+ // Position child window
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(parent_window && parent_window->Active);
+ window->BeginOrderWithinParent = (short)parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size;
+ parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.push_back(window);
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip)
+ window->Pos = parent_window->DC.CursorPos;
+ }
-float ImGui::GetCursorPosY()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.CursorPos.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y;
-}
+ const bool window_pos_with_pivot = (window->SetWindowPosVal.x != FLT_MAX && window->HiddenFramesForResize == 0);
+ if (window_pos_with_pivot)
+ SetWindowPos(window, ImMax(style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding, window->SetWindowPosVal - window->SizeFull * window->SetWindowPosPivot), 0); // Position given a pivot (e.g. for centering)
+ else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0)
+ window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
+ else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize)
+ window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
+ else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip)
+ window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
-void ImGui::SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.CursorPos = window->Pos - window->Scroll + local_pos;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos);
-}
+ // Clamp position so it stays visible
+ // Ignore zero-sized display explicitly to avoid losing positions if a window manager reports zero-sized window when initializing or minimizing.
+ if (!window_pos_set_by_api && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0)
+ {
+ if (g.IO.DisplaySize.x > 0.0f && g.IO.DisplaySize.y > 0.0f) // Ignore zero-sized display explicitly to avoid losing positions if a window manager reports zero-sized window when initializing or minimizing.
+ {
+ ImVec2 padding = ImMax(style.DisplayWindowPadding, style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding);
+ ImVec2 size_for_clamping = ((g.IO.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) ? ImVec2(window->Size.x, window->TitleBarHeight()) : window->Size;
+ window->Pos = ImMax(window->Pos + size_for_clamping, padding) - size_for_clamping;
+ window->Pos = ImMin(window->Pos, g.IO.DisplaySize - padding);
+ }
+ }
+ window->Pos = ImFloor(window->Pos);
-void ImGui::SetCursorPosX(float x)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + x;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.x);
-}
+ // Lock window rounding for the frame (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies)
+ window->WindowRounding = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? style.ChildRounding : ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupRounding : style.WindowRounding;
-void ImGui::SetCursorPosY(float y)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + y;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
-}
+ // Prepare for item focus requests
+ window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent = (window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext == INT_MAX || window->FocusIdxAllCounter == -1) ? INT_MAX : (window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext + (window->FocusIdxAllCounter+1)) % (window->FocusIdxAllCounter+1);
+ window->FocusIdxTabRequestCurrent = (window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext == INT_MAX || window->FocusIdxTabCounter == -1) ? INT_MAX : (window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext + (window->FocusIdxTabCounter+1)) % (window->FocusIdxTabCounter+1);
+ window->FocusIdxAllCounter = window->FocusIdxTabCounter = -1;
+ window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext = window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = INT_MAX;
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorStartPos()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.CursorStartPos - window->Pos;
-}
+ // Apply scrolling
+ window->Scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window, true);
+ window->ScrollTarget = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.CursorPos;
-}
+ // Apply window focus (new and reactivated windows are moved to front)
+ bool want_focus = false;
+ if (window_just_activated_by_user && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing))
+ {
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+ want_focus = true;
+ else if ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) == 0)
+ want_focus = true;
+ }
-void ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& screen_pos)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.CursorPos = screen_pos;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos);
-}
+ // Handle manual resize: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad
+ int border_held = -1;
+ ImU32 resize_grip_col[4] = { 0 };
+ const int resize_grip_count = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? 2 : 1; // 4
+ const float grip_draw_size = (float)(int)ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.35f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f);
+ if (!window->Collapsed)
+ UpdateManualResize(window, size_auto_fit, &border_held, resize_grip_count, &resize_grip_col[0]);
+ window->ResizeBorderHeld = (signed char)border_held;
-float ImGui::GetScrollX()
-{
- return GImGui->CurrentWindow->Scroll.x;
-}
+ // Default item width. Make it proportional to window size if window manually resizes
+ if (window->Size.x > 0.0f && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+ window->ItemWidthDefault = (float)(int)(window->Size.x * 0.65f);
+ else
+ window->ItemWidthDefault = (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 16.0f);
-float ImGui::GetScrollY()
-{
- return GImGui->CurrentWindow->Scroll.y;
-}
+ // DRAWING
-float ImGui::GetScrollMaxX()
-{
- return GetScrollMaxX(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
-}
+ // Setup draw list and outer clipping rectangle
+ window->DrawList->Clear();
+ window->DrawList->Flags = (g.Style.AntiAliasedLines ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines : 0) | (g.Style.AntiAliasedFill ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill : 0);
+ window->DrawList->PushTextureID(g.Font->ContainerAtlas->TexID);
+ ImRect viewport_rect(GetViewportRect());
+ if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_is_child_tooltip)
+ PushClipRect(parent_window->ClipRect.Min, parent_window->ClipRect.Max, true);
+ else
+ PushClipRect(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, true);
-float ImGui::GetScrollMaxY()
-{
- return GetScrollMaxY(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
-}
+ // Draw modal window background (darkens what is behind them, all viewports)
+ const bool dim_bg_for_modal = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && window == GetFrontMostPopupModal() && window->HiddenFramesForResize <= 0;
+ const bool dim_bg_for_window_list = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim && (window == g.NavWindowingTargetAnim->RootWindow);
+ if (dim_bg_for_modal || dim_bg_for_window_list)
+ {
+ const ImU32 dim_bg_col = GetColorU32(dim_bg_for_modal ? ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg : ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, g.DimBgRatio);
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, dim_bg_col);
+ }
-void ImGui::SetScrollX(float scroll_x)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->ScrollTarget.x = scroll_x;
- window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f;
-}
+ // Draw navigation selection/windowing rectangle background
+ if (dim_bg_for_window_list && window == g.NavWindowingTargetAnim)
+ {
+ ImRect bb = window->Rect();
+ bb.Expand(g.FontSize);
+ if (!bb.Contains(viewport_rect)) // Avoid drawing if the window covers all the viewport anyway
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha * 0.25f), g.Style.WindowRounding);
+ }
-void ImGui::SetScrollY(float scroll_y)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->ScrollTarget.y = scroll_y + window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight(); // title bar height canceled out when using ScrollTargetRelY
- window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f;
-}
+ // Draw window + handle manual resize
+ // As we highlight the title bar when want_focus is set, multiple reappearing windows will have have their title bar highlighted on their reappearing frame.
+ const float window_rounding = window->WindowRounding;
+ const float window_border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
+ const ImGuiWindow* window_to_highlight = g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget : g.NavWindow;
+ const bool title_bar_is_highlight = want_focus || (window_to_highlight && window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight == window_to_highlight->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight);
+ const ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect();
+ if (window->Collapsed)
+ {
+ // Title bar only
+ float backup_border_size = style.FrameBorderSize;
+ g.Style.FrameBorderSize = window->WindowBorderSize;
+ ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32((title_bar_is_highlight && !g.NavDisableHighlight) ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed);
+ RenderFrame(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, true, window_rounding);
+ g.Style.FrameBorderSize = backup_border_size;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Window background
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground))
+ {
+ ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(GetWindowBgColorIdxFromFlags(flags));
+ float alpha = 1.0f;
+ if (g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond != 0)
+ alpha = g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal;
+ if (alpha != 1.0f)
+ bg_col = (bg_col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(alpha) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT);
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(window->Pos + ImVec2(0, window->TitleBarHeight()), window->Pos + window->Size, bg_col, window_rounding, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot);
+ }
+ g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond = 0;
+
+ // Title bar
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
+ {
+ ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32(title_bar_is_highlight ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBg);
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, window_rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_Top);
+ }
+
+ // Menu bar
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)
+ {
+ ImRect menu_bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
+ menu_bar_rect.ClipWith(window->Rect()); // Soft clipping, in particular child window don't have minimum size covering the menu bar so this is useful for them.
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(menu_bar_rect.Min, menu_bar_rect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg), (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? window_rounding : 0.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_Top);
+ if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f && menu_bar_rect.Max.y < window->Pos.y + window->Size.y)
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(menu_bar_rect.GetBL(), menu_bar_rect.GetBR(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), style.FrameBorderSize);
+ }
-void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(float pos_y, float center_y_ratio)
-{
- // We store a target position so centering can occur on the next frame when we are guaranteed to have a known window size
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- IM_ASSERT(center_y_ratio >= 0.0f && center_y_ratio <= 1.0f);
- window->ScrollTarget.y = (float)(int)(pos_y + window->Scroll.y);
- window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = center_y_ratio;
-}
+ // Scrollbars
+ if (window->ScrollbarX)
+ Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal);
+ if (window->ScrollbarY)
+ Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical);
-// center_y_ratio: 0.0f top of last item, 0.5f vertical center of last item, 1.0f bottom of last item.
-void ImGui::SetScrollHere(float center_y_ratio)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- float target_y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y - window->Pos.y; // Top of last item, in window space
- target_y += (window->DC.PrevLineHeight * center_y_ratio) + (GImGui->Style.ItemSpacing.y * (center_y_ratio - 0.5f) * 2.0f); // Precisely aim above, in the middle or below the last line.
- SetScrollFromPosY(target_y, center_y_ratio);
-}
+ // Render resize grips (after their input handling so we don't have a frame of latency)
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize))
+ {
+ for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++)
+ {
+ const ImGuiResizeGripDef& grip = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n];
+ const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, grip.CornerPosN);
+ window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(window_border_size, grip_draw_size) : ImVec2(grip_draw_size, window_border_size)));
+ window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(grip_draw_size, window_border_size) : ImVec2(window_border_size, grip_draw_size)));
+ window->DrawList->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(corner.x + grip.InnerDir.x * (window_rounding + window_border_size), corner.y + grip.InnerDir.y * (window_rounding + window_border_size)), window_rounding, grip.AngleMin12, grip.AngleMax12);
+ window->DrawList->PathFillConvex(resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n]);
+ }
+ }
-void ImGui::ActivateItem(ImGuiID id)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NavNextActivateId = id;
-}
+ // Borders
+ RenderOuterBorders(window);
+ }
-void ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset)
-{
- IM_ASSERT(offset >= -1); // -1 is allowed but not below
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext = window->FocusIdxAllCounter + 1 + offset;
- window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = INT_MAX;
-}
+ // Draw navigation selection/windowing rectangle border
+ if (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim == window)
+ {
+ float rounding = ImMax(window->WindowRounding, g.Style.WindowRounding);
+ ImRect bb = window->Rect();
+ bb.Expand(g.FontSize);
+ if (bb.Contains(viewport_rect)) // If a window fits the entire viewport, adjust its highlight inward
+ {
+ bb.Expand(-g.FontSize - 1.0f);
+ rounding = window->WindowRounding;
+ }
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha), rounding, ~0, 3.0f);
+ }
-void ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (!window->Appearing)
- return;
- if (g.NavWindow == window->RootWindowForNav && (g.NavInitRequest || g.NavInitResultId != 0) && g.NavLayer == g.NavWindow->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
- {
- g.NavInitRequest = false;
- g.NavInitResultId = g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemId;
- g.NavInitResultRectRel = ImRect(g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemRect.Min - g.NavWindow->Pos, g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemRect.Max - g.NavWindow->Pos);
- NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
- if (!IsItemVisible())
- SetScrollHere();
- }
-}
+ // Store a backup of SizeFull which we will use next frame to decide if we need scrollbars.
+ window->SizeFullAtLastBegin = window->SizeFull;
-void ImGui::SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* tree)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.StateStorage = tree ? tree : &window->StateStorage;
-}
+ // Update various regions. Variables they depends on are set above in this function.
+ // FIXME: window->ContentsRegionRect.Max is currently very misleading / partly faulty, but some BeginChild() patterns relies on it.
+ window->ContentsRegionRect.Min.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + window->WindowPadding.x;
+ window->ContentsRegionRect.Min.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + window->WindowPadding.y + window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight();
+ window->ContentsRegionRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x - window->WindowPadding.x + (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.x : (window->Size.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x));
+ window->ContentsRegionRect.Max.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y - window->WindowPadding.y + (window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.y : (window->Size.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y));
-ImGuiStorage* ImGui::GetStateStorage()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.StateStorage;
-}
+ // Setup drawing context
+ // (NB: That term "drawing context / DC" lost its meaning a long time ago. Initially was meant to hold transient data only. Nowadays difference between window-> and window->DC-> is dubious.)
+ window->DC.Indent.x = 0.0f + window->WindowPadding.x - window->Scroll.x;
+ window->DC.GroupOffset.x = 0.0f;
+ window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
+ window->DC.CursorStartPos = window->Pos + ImVec2(window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x, window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight() + window->WindowPadding.y - window->Scroll.y);
+ window->DC.CursorPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
+ window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
+ window->DC.CurrentLineSize = window->DC.PrevLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
+ window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = false;
+ window->DC.NavHasScroll = (GetWindowScrollMaxY(window) > 0.0f);
+ window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask = window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext;
+ window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext = 0x00;
+ window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
+ window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f;
+ window->DC.ChildWindows.resize(0);
+ window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
+ window->DC.ParentLayoutType = parent_window ? parent_window->DC.LayoutType : ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
+ window->DC.ItemFlags = parent_window ? parent_window->DC.ItemFlags : ImGuiItemFlags_Default_;
+ window->DC.ItemWidth = window->ItemWidthDefault;
+ window->DC.TextWrapPos = -1.0f; // disabled
+ window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.resize(0);
+ window->DC.ItemWidthStack.resize(0);
+ window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.resize(0);
+ window->DC.ColumnsSet = NULL;
+ window->DC.TreeDepth = 0;
+ window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop = 0x00;
+ window->DC.StateStorage = &window->StateStorage;
+ window->DC.GroupStack.resize(0);
+ window->MenuColumns.Update(3, style.ItemSpacing.x, window_just_activated_by_user);
-void ImGui::TextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (window->DC.ItemFlags != parent_window->DC.ItemFlags))
+ {
+ window->DC.ItemFlags = parent_window->DC.ItemFlags;
+ window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemFlags);
+ }
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const char* text_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
- TextUnformatted(g.TempBuffer, text_end);
-}
+ if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0)
+ window->AutoFitFramesX--;
+ if (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
+ window->AutoFitFramesY--;
-void ImGui::Text(const char* fmt, ...)
-{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- TextV(fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
-}
+ // Apply focus (we need to call FocusWindow() AFTER setting DC.CursorStartPos so our initial navigation reference rectangle can start around there)
+ if (want_focus)
+ {
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ NavInitWindow(window, false);
+ }
-void ImGui::TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, va_list args)
-{
- PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col);
- TextV(fmt, args);
- PopStyleColor();
-}
+ // Title bar
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
+ {
+ // Close & collapse button are on layer 1 (same as menus) and don't default focus
+ const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = window->DC.ItemFlags;
+ window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
+ window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+ window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu);
-void ImGui::TextColored(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, ...)
-{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- TextColoredV(col, fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
-}
+ // Collapse button
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse))
+ if (CollapseButton(window->GetID("#COLLAPSE"), window->Pos))
+ window->WantCollapseToggle = true; // Defer collapsing to next frame as we are too far in the Begin() function
-void ImGui::TextDisabledV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
-{
- PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GImGui->Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
- TextV(fmt, args);
- PopStyleColor();
-}
+ // Close button
+ if (p_open != NULL)
+ {
+ const float pad = style.FramePadding.y;
+ const float rad = g.FontSize * 0.5f;
+ if (CloseButton(window->GetID("#CLOSE"), window->Rect().GetTR() + ImVec2(-pad - rad, pad + rad), rad + 1))
+ *p_open = false;
+ }
-void ImGui::TextDisabled(const char* fmt, ...)
-{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- TextDisabledV(fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
-}
+ window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+ window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
+ window->DC.ItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
-void ImGui::TextWrappedV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
-{
- bool need_wrap = (GImGui->CurrentWindow->DC.TextWrapPos < 0.0f); // Keep existing wrap position is one ia already set
- if (need_wrap) PushTextWrapPos(0.0f);
- TextV(fmt, args);
- if (need_wrap) PopTextWrapPos();
-}
+ // Title bar text (with: horizontal alignment, avoiding collapse/close button, optional "unsaved document" marker)
+ // FIXME: Refactor text alignment facilities along with RenderText helpers, this is too much code..
+ const char* UNSAVED_DOCUMENT_MARKER = "*";
+ float marker_size_x = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument) ? CalcTextSize(UNSAVED_DOCUMENT_MARKER, NULL, false).x : 0.0f;
+ ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(name, NULL, true) + ImVec2(marker_size_x, 0.0f);
+ ImRect text_r = title_bar_rect;
+ float pad_left = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse) ? style.FramePadding.x : (style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ float pad_right = (p_open == NULL) ? style.FramePadding.x : (style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ if (style.WindowTitleAlign.x > 0.0f)
+ pad_right = ImLerp(pad_right, pad_left, style.WindowTitleAlign.x);
+ text_r.Min.x += pad_left;
+ text_r.Max.x -= pad_right;
+ ImRect clip_rect = text_r;
+ clip_rect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - (p_open ? title_bar_rect.GetHeight() - 3 : style.FramePadding.x); // Match the size of CloseButton()
+ RenderTextClipped(text_r.Min, text_r.Max, name, NULL, &text_size, style.WindowTitleAlign, &clip_rect);
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument)
+ {
+ ImVec2 marker_pos = ImVec2(ImMax(text_r.Min.x, text_r.Min.x + (text_r.GetWidth() - text_size.x) * style.WindowTitleAlign.x) + text_size.x, text_r.Min.y) + ImVec2(2 - marker_size_x, 0.0f);
+ ImVec2 off = ImVec2(0.0f, (float)(int)(-g.FontSize * 0.25f));
+ RenderTextClipped(marker_pos + off, text_r.Max + off, UNSAVED_DOCUMENT_MARKER, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0, style.WindowTitleAlign.y), &clip_rect);
+ }
+ }
-void ImGui::TextWrapped(const char* fmt, ...)
-{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- TextWrappedV(fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
-}
+ // Save clipped aabb so we can access it in constant-time in FindHoveredWindow()
+ window->OuterRectClipped = window->Rect();
+ window->OuterRectClipped.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
-void ImGui::TextUnformatted(const char* text, const char* text_end)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
+ // Pressing CTRL+C while holding on a window copy its content to the clipboard
+ // This works but 1. doesn't handle multiple Begin/End pairs, 2. recursing into another Begin/End pair - so we need to work that out and add better logging scope.
+ // Maybe we can support CTRL+C on every element?
+ /*
+ if (g.ActiveId == move_id)
+ if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C))
+ LogToClipboard();
+ */
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(text != NULL);
- const char* text_begin = text;
- if (text_end == NULL)
- text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
+ // Inner rectangle
+ // We set this up after processing the resize grip so that our clip rectangle doesn't lag by a frame
+ // Note that if our window is collapsed we will end up with an inverted (~null) clipping rectangle which is the correct behavior.
+ window->InnerMainRect.Min.x = title_bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize;
+ window->InnerMainRect.Min.y = title_bar_rect.Max.y + window->MenuBarHeight() + (((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) ? style.FrameBorderSize : window->WindowBorderSize);
+ window->InnerMainRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x - window->WindowBorderSize;
+ window->InnerMainRect.Max.y = window->Pos.y + window->Size.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y - window->WindowBorderSize;
+ //window->DrawList->AddRect(window->InnerRect.Min, window->InnerRect.Max, IM_COL32_WHITE);
- const ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset);
- const float wrap_pos_x = window->DC.TextWrapPos;
- const bool wrap_enabled = wrap_pos_x >= 0.0f;
- if (text_end - text > 2000 && !wrap_enabled)
- {
- // Long text!
- // Perform manual coarse clipping to optimize for long multi-line text
- // From this point we will only compute the width of lines that are visible. Optimization only available when word-wrapping is disabled.
- // We also don't vertically center the text within the line full height, which is unlikely to matter because we are likely the biggest and only item on the line.
- const char* line = text;
- const float line_height = GetTextLineHeight();
- const ImRect clip_rect = window->ClipRect;
- ImVec2 text_size(0,0);
-
- if (text_pos.y <= clip_rect.Max.y)
- {
- ImVec2 pos = text_pos;
+ // Inner clipping rectangle
+ // Force round operator last to ensure that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render code produce correct result.
+ window->InnerClipRect.Min.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Min.x + ImMax(0.0f, ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f - window->WindowBorderSize)));
+ window->InnerClipRect.Min.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Min.y);
+ window->InnerClipRect.Max.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Max.x - ImMax(0.0f, ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f - window->WindowBorderSize)));
+ window->InnerClipRect.Max.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Max.y);
- // Lines to skip (can't skip when logging text)
- if (!g.LogEnabled)
- {
- int lines_skippable = (int)((clip_rect.Min.y - text_pos.y) / line_height);
- if (lines_skippable > 0)
- {
- int lines_skipped = 0;
- while (line < text_end && lines_skipped < lines_skippable)
- {
- const char* line_end = strchr(line, '\n');
- if (!line_end)
- line_end = text_end;
- line = line_end + 1;
- lines_skipped++;
- }
- pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
- }
- }
+ // We fill last item data based on Title Bar, in order for IsItemHovered() and IsItemActive() to be usable after Begin().
+ // This is useful to allow creating context menus on title bar only, etc.
+ window->DC.LastItemId = window->MoveId;
+ window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags = IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, false) ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect : 0;
+ window->DC.LastItemRect = title_bar_rect;
+ }
- // Lines to render
- if (line < text_end)
- {
- ImRect line_rect(pos, pos + ImVec2(FLT_MAX, line_height));
- while (line < text_end)
- {
- const char* line_end = strchr(line, '\n');
- if (IsClippedEx(line_rect, 0, false))
- break;
-
- const ImVec2 line_size = CalcTextSize(line, line_end, false);
- text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_size.x);
- RenderText(pos, line, line_end, false);
- if (!line_end)
- line_end = text_end;
- line = line_end + 1;
- line_rect.Min.y += line_height;
- line_rect.Max.y += line_height;
- pos.y += line_height;
- }
+ PushClipRect(window->InnerClipRect.Min, window->InnerClipRect.Max, true);
- // Count remaining lines
- int lines_skipped = 0;
- while (line < text_end)
- {
- const char* line_end = strchr(line, '\n');
- if (!line_end)
- line_end = text_end;
- line = line_end + 1;
- lines_skipped++;
- }
- pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
- }
+ // Clear 'accessed' flag last thing (After PushClipRect which will set the flag. We want the flag to stay false when the default "Debug" window is unused)
+ if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+ window->WriteAccessed = false;
- text_size.y += (pos - text_pos).y;
- }
+ window->BeginCount++;
+ g.NextWindowData.Clear();
- ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
- ItemSize(bb);
- ItemAdd(bb, 0);
- }
- else
+ if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
{
- const float wrap_width = wrap_enabled ? CalcWrapWidthForPos(window->DC.CursorPos, wrap_pos_x) : 0.0f;
- const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false, wrap_width);
-
- // Account of baseline offset
- ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
- ItemSize(text_size);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
- return;
+ // Child window can be out of sight and have "negative" clip windows.
+ // Mark them as collapsed so commands are skipped earlier (we can't manually collapse them because they have no title bar).
+ IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) != 0);
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0)
+ if (window->OuterRectClipped.Min.x >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.x || window->OuterRectClipped.Min.y >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.y)
+ window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
- // Render (we don't hide text after ## in this end-user function)
- RenderTextWrapped(bb.Min, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width);
+ // Completely hide along with parent or if parent is collapsed
+ if (parent_window && (parent_window->Collapsed || parent_window->Hidden))
+ window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
}
-}
-
-void ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- window->DC.CurrentLineHeight = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineHeight, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
- window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset, g.Style.FramePadding.y);
-}
-
-// Add a label+text combo aligned to other label+value widgets
-void ImGui::LabelTextV(const char* label, const char* fmt, va_list args)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
+ // Don't render if style alpha is 0.0 at the time of Begin(). This is arbitrary and inconsistent but has been there for a long while (may remove at some point)
+ if (style.Alpha <= 0.0f)
+ window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const float w = CalcItemWidth();
+ // Update the Hidden flag
+ window->Hidden = (window->HiddenFramesRegular > 0) || (window->HiddenFramesForResize > 0);
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
- const ImRect value_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2));
- const ImRect total_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f), style.FramePadding.y*2) + label_size);
- ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0))
- return;
+ // Return false if we don't intend to display anything to allow user to perform an early out optimization
+ window->SkipItems = (window->Collapsed || !window->Active || window->Hidden) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0 && window->HiddenFramesForResize <= 0;
- // Render
- const char* value_text_begin = &g.TempBuffer[0];
- const char* value_text_end = value_text_begin + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
- RenderTextClipped(value_bb.Min, value_bb.Max, value_text_begin, value_text_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f));
- if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
- RenderText(ImVec2(value_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, value_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+ return !window->SkipItems;
}
-void ImGui::LabelText(const char* label, const char* fmt, ...)
+// Old Begin() API with 5 parameters, avoid calling this version directly! Use SetNextWindowSize()/SetNextWindowBgAlpha() + Begin() instead.
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+bool ImGui::Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open, const ImVec2& size_first_use, float bg_alpha_override, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- LabelTextV(label, fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
+ // Old API feature: we could pass the initial window size as a parameter. This was misleading because it only had an effect if the window didn't have data in the .ini file.
+ if (size_first_use.x != 0.0f || size_first_use.y != 0.0f)
+ SetNextWindowSize(size_first_use, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+
+ // Old API feature: override the window background alpha with a parameter.
+ if (bg_alpha_override >= 0.0f)
+ SetNextWindowBgAlpha(bg_alpha_override);
+
+ return Begin(name, p_open, flags);
}
+#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
-bool ImGui::ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+void ImGui::End()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled)
+ if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size <= 1 && g.FrameScopePushedImplicitWindow)
{
- if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = false;
- if (out_held) *out_held = false;
- if (g.ActiveId == id) ClearActiveID();
- return false;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1 && "Calling End() too many times!");
+ return; // FIXME-ERRORHANDLING
}
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 0);
- // Default behavior requires click+release on same spot
- if ((flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick)) == 0)
- flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease;
-
- ImGuiWindow* backup_hovered_window = g.HoveredWindow;
- if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredRootWindow == window)
- g.HoveredWindow = window;
-
- bool pressed = false;
- bool hovered = ItemHoverable(bb, id);
-
- // Drag source doesn't report as hovered
- if (hovered && g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover))
- hovered = false;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- // Special mode for Drag and Drop where holding button pressed for a long time while dragging another item triggers the button
- if (g.DragDropActive && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold) && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers))
- if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
- {
- hovered = true;
- SetHoveredID(id);
- if (CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(g.HoveredIdTimer + 0.0001f, g.HoveredIdTimer + 0.0001f - g.IO.DeltaTime, 0.01f, 0.70f)) // FIXME: Our formula for CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount() is fishy
- {
- pressed = true;
- FocusWindow(window);
- }
- }
+ if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL)
+ EndColumns();
+ PopClipRect(); // Inner window clip rectangle
- if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredRootWindow == window)
- g.HoveredWindow = backup_hovered_window;
+ // Stop logging
+ if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) // FIXME: add more options for scope of logging
+ LogFinish();
- // AllowOverlap mode (rarely used) requires previous frame HoveredId to be null or to match. This allows using patterns where a later submitted widget overlaps a previous one.
- if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap) && (g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0))
- hovered = false;
+ // Pop from window stack
+ g.CurrentWindowStack.pop_back();
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+ g.BeginPopupStack.pop_back();
+ CheckStacksSize(window, false);
+ SetCurrentWindow(g.CurrentWindowStack.empty() ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back());
+}
- // Mouse
- if (hovered)
- {
- if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers) || (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyShift && !g.IO.KeyAlt))
+void ImGui::BringWindowToFocusFront(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.WindowsFocusOrder.back() == window)
+ return;
+ for (int i = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 2; i >= 0; i--) // We can ignore the front most window
+ if (g.WindowsFocusOrder[i] == window)
{
- // | CLICKING | HOLDING with ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat
- // PressedOnClickRelease | <on release>* | <on repeat> <on repeat> .. (NOT on release) <-- MOST COMMON! (*) only if both click/release were over bounds
- // PressedOnClick | <on click> | <on click> <on repeat> <on repeat> ..
- // PressedOnRelease | <on release> | <on repeat> <on repeat> .. (NOT on release)
- // PressedOnDoubleClick | <on dclick> | <on dclick> <on repeat> <on repeat> ..
- // FIXME-NAV: We don't honor those different behaviors.
- if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0])
- {
- SetActiveID(id, window);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
- SetFocusID(id, window);
- FocusWindow(window);
- }
- if (((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
- {
- pressed = true;
- if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID)
- ClearActiveID();
- else
- SetActiveID(id, window); // Hold on ID
- FocusWindow(window);
- }
- if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease) && g.IO.MouseReleased[0])
- {
- if (!((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[0] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)) // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
- pressed = true;
- ClearActiveID();
- }
-
- // 'Repeat' mode acts when held regardless of _PressedOn flags (see table above).
- // Relies on repeat logic of IsMouseClicked() but we may as well do it ourselves if we end up exposing finer RepeatDelay/RepeatRate settings.
- if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.ActiveId == id && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[0] > 0.0f && IsMouseClicked(0, true))
- pressed = true;
+ memmove(&g.WindowsFocusOrder[i], &g.WindowsFocusOrder[i + 1], (size_t)(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - i - 1) * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*));
+ g.WindowsFocusOrder[g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1] = window;
+ break;
}
+}
- if (pressed)
- g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
- }
-
- // Gamepad/Keyboard navigation
- // We report navigated item as hovered but we don't set g.HoveredId to not interfere with mouse.
- if (g.NavId == id && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == window->MoveId))
- hovered = true;
-
- if (g.NavActivateDownId == id)
- {
- bool nav_activated_by_code = (g.NavActivateId == id);
- bool nav_activated_by_inputs = IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Activate, (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) ? ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat : ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
- if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs)
- pressed = true;
- if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs || g.ActiveId == id)
+void ImGui::BringWindowToDisplayFront(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* current_front_window = g.Windows.back();
+ if (current_front_window == window || current_front_window->RootWindow == window)
+ return;
+ for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 2; i >= 0; i--) // We can ignore the front most window
+ if (g.Windows[i] == window)
{
- // Set active id so it can be queried by user via IsItemActive(), equivalent of holding the mouse button.
- g.NavActivateId = id; // This is so SetActiveId assign a Nav source
- SetActiveID(id, window);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
- SetFocusID(id, window);
- g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
+ memmove(&g.Windows[i], &g.Windows[i + 1], (size_t)(g.Windows.Size - i - 1) * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*));
+ g.Windows[g.Windows.Size - 1] = window;
+ break;
}
- }
+}
- bool held = false;
- if (g.ActiveId == id)
- {
- if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
- {
- if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
- g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - bb.Min;
- if (g.IO.MouseDown[0])
- {
- held = true;
- }
- else
- {
- if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease))
- if (!((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[0] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)) // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
- if (!g.DragDropActive)
- pressed = true;
- ClearActiveID();
- }
- if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
- g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
- }
- else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
+void ImGui::BringWindowToDisplayBack(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.Windows[0] == window)
+ return;
+ for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++)
+ if (g.Windows[i] == window)
{
- if (g.NavActivateDownId != id)
- ClearActiveID();
+ memmove(&g.Windows[1], &g.Windows[0], (size_t)i * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*));
+ g.Windows[0] = window;
+ break;
}
- }
-
- if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = hovered;
- if (out_held) *out_held = held;
-
- return pressed;
}
-bool ImGui::ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+// Moving window to front of display and set focus (which happens to be back of our sorted list)
+void ImGui::FocusWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
-
- ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine) && style.FramePadding.y < window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset) // Try to vertically align buttons that are smaller/have no padding so that text baseline matches (bit hacky, since it shouldn't be a flag)
- pos.y += window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset - style.FramePadding.y;
- ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
- const ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
- ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
- return false;
-
- if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
- flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);
- if (pressed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
+ if (g.NavWindow != window)
+ {
+ g.NavWindow = window;
+ if (window && g.NavDisableMouseHover)
+ g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
+ g.NavInitRequest = false;
+ g.NavId = window ? window->NavLastIds[0] : 0; // Restore NavId
+ g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
+ g.NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+ //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("FocusWindow(\"%s\")\n", window ? window->Name : NULL);
+ }
- // Render
- const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
- RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
- RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);
- RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, bb.Max - style.FramePadding, label, NULL, &label_size, style.ButtonTextAlign, &bb);
+ // Passing NULL allow to disable keyboard focus
+ if (!window)
+ return;
- // Automatically close popups
- //if (pressed && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
- // CloseCurrentPopup();
+ // Move the root window to the top of the pile
+ if (window->RootWindow)
+ window = window->RootWindow;
- return pressed;
-}
+ // Steal focus on active widgets
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) // FIXME: This statement should be unnecessary. Need further testing before removing it..
+ if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->RootWindow != window)
+ ClearActiveID();
-bool ImGui::Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
-{
- return ButtonEx(label, size_arg, 0);
+ // Bring to front
+ BringWindowToFocusFront(window);
+ if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus))
+ BringWindowToDisplayFront(window);
}
-// Small buttons fits within text without additional vertical spacing.
-bool ImGui::SmallButton(const char* label)
+void ImGui::FocusPreviousWindowIgnoringOne(ImGuiWindow* ignore_window)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- float backup_padding_y = g.Style.FramePadding.y;
- g.Style.FramePadding.y = 0.0f;
- bool pressed = ButtonEx(label, ImVec2(0,0), ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine);
- g.Style.FramePadding.y = backup_padding_y;
- return pressed;
+ for (int i = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+ {
+ // We may later decide to test for different NoXXXInputs based on the active navigation input (mouse vs nav) but that may feel more confusing to the user.
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.WindowsFocusOrder[i];
+ if (window != ignore_window && window->WasActive && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
+ if ((window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)) != (ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+ {
+ ImGuiWindow* focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(window);
+ FocusWindow(focus_window);
+ return;
+ }
+ }
}
-bool ImGui::ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+void ImGui::PushItemWidth(float item_width)
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
- const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
- const float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
- ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
- return false;
-
- if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
- flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;
-
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);
-
- // Render
- const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
- RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
- RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
- RenderArrow(bb.Min + ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, size.x - g.FontSize - g.Style.FramePadding.x), ImMax(0.0f, size.y - g.FontSize - g.Style.FramePadding.y)), dir);
-
- return pressed;
+ window->DC.ItemWidth = (item_width == 0.0f ? window->ItemWidthDefault : item_width);
+ window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemWidth);
}
-bool ImGui::ArrowButton(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir)
+void ImGui::PushMultiItemsWidths(int components, float w_full)
{
- float sz = GetFrameHeight();
- return ArrowButtonEx(str_id, dir, ImVec2(sz, sz), 0);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
+ if (w_full <= 0.0f)
+ w_full = CalcItemWidth();
+ const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)((w_full - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)) / (float)components));
+ const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(w_full - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)));
+ window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_last);
+ for (int i = 0; i < components-1; i++)
+ window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_one);
+ window->DC.ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidthStack.back();
}
-// Tip: use ImGui::PushID()/PopID() to push indices or pointers in the ID stack.
-// Then you can keep 'str_id' empty or the same for all your buttons (instead of creating a string based on a non-string id)
-bool ImGui::InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+void ImGui::PopItemWidth()
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
- ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, 0.0f, 0.0f);
- const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
- ItemSize(bb);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
- return false;
-
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+ window->DC.ItemWidthStack.pop_back();
+ window->DC.ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidthStack.empty() ? window->ItemWidthDefault : window->DC.ItemWidthStack.back();
+}
- return pressed;
+float ImGui::CalcItemWidth()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ float w = window->DC.ItemWidth;
+ if (w < 0.0f)
+ {
+ // Align to a right-side limit. We include 1 frame padding in the calculation because this is how the width is always used (we add 2 frame padding to it), but we could move that responsibility to the widget as well.
+ float width_to_right_edge = GetContentRegionAvail().x;
+ w = ImMax(1.0f, width_to_right_edge + w);
+ }
+ w = (float)(int)w;
+ return w;
}
-// Button to close a window
-bool ImGui::CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos, float radius)
+void ImGui::SetCurrentFont(ImFont* font)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ IM_ASSERT(font && font->IsLoaded()); // Font Atlas not created. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32 / GetTexDataAsAlpha8 ?
+ IM_ASSERT(font->Scale > 0.0f);
+ g.Font = font;
+ g.FontBaseSize = ImMax(1.0f, g.IO.FontGlobalScale * g.Font->FontSize * g.Font->Scale);
+ g.FontSize = g.CurrentWindow ? g.CurrentWindow->CalcFontSize() : 0.0f;
- // We intentionally allow interaction when clipped so that a mechanical Alt,Right,Validate sequence close a window.
- // (this isn't the regular behavior of buttons, but it doesn't affect the user much because navigation tends to keep items visible).
- const ImRect bb(pos - ImVec2(radius,radius), pos + ImVec2(radius,radius));
- bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb, id);
+ ImFontAtlas* atlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
+ g.DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel = atlas->TexUvWhitePixel;
+ g.DrawListSharedData.Font = g.Font;
+ g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = g.FontSize;
+}
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
- if (is_clipped)
- return pressed;
+void ImGui::PushFont(ImFont* font)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (!font)
+ font = GetDefaultFont();
+ SetCurrentFont(font);
+ g.FontStack.push_back(font);
+ g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PushTextureID(font->ContainerAtlas->TexID);
+}
- // Render
- ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter();
- if (hovered)
- window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, ImMax(2.0f, radius), GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered), 9);
+void ImGui::PopFont()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PopTextureID();
+ g.FontStack.pop_back();
+ SetCurrentFont(g.FontStack.empty() ? GetDefaultFont() : g.FontStack.back());
+}
- float cross_extent = (radius * 0.7071f) - 1.0f;
- ImU32 cross_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
- center -= ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f);
- window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent,+cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent,-cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
- window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent,-cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent,+cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
+void ImGui::PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags option, bool enabled)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (enabled)
+ window->DC.ItemFlags |= option;
+ else
+ window->DC.ItemFlags &= ~option;
+ window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemFlags);
+}
- return pressed;
+void ImGui::PopItemFlag()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.pop_back();
+ window->DC.ItemFlags = window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.empty() ? ImGuiItemFlags_Default_ : window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.back();
}
-bool ImGui::CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos)
+// FIXME: Look into renaming this once we have settled the new Focus/Activation/TabStop system.
+void ImGui::PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool allow_keyboard_focus)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop, !allow_keyboard_focus);
+}
- ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize));
- ItemAdd(bb, id);
- bool ret = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, NULL, NULL, ImGuiButtonFlags_None);
- RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
- RenderArrow(bb.Min, window->Collapsed ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);
+void ImGui::PopAllowKeyboardFocus()
+{
+ PopItemFlag();
+}
- // Switch to moving the window after mouse is moved beyond the initial drag threshold
- if (IsItemActive() && IsMouseDragging())
- StartMouseMovingWindow(window);
+void ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat)
+{
+ PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat, repeat);
+}
- return ret;
+void ImGui::PopButtonRepeat()
+{
+ PopItemFlag();
}
-void ImGui::Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& tint_col, const ImVec4& border_col)
+void ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_pos_x)
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
-
- ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
- if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
- bb.Max += ImVec2(2,2);
- ItemSize(bb);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
- return;
-
- if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
- {
- window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(border_col), 0.0f);
- window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min+ImVec2(1,1), bb.Max-ImVec2(1,1), uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
- }
- else
- {
- window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min, bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
- }
+ window->DC.TextWrapPos = wrap_pos_x;
+ window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.push_back(wrap_pos_x);
}
-// frame_padding < 0: uses FramePadding from style (default)
-// frame_padding = 0: no framing
-// frame_padding > 0: set framing size
-// The color used are the button colors.
-bool ImGui::ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, int frame_padding, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col)
+void ImGui::PopTextWrapPos()
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
+ window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.pop_back();
+ window->DC.TextWrapPos = window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.empty() ? -1.0f : window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.back();
+}
+// FIXME: This may incur a round-trip (if the end user got their data from a float4) but eventually we aim to store the in-flight colors as ImU32
+void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col)
+{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
-
- // Default to using texture ID as ID. User can still push string/integer prefixes.
- // We could hash the size/uv to create a unique ID but that would prevent the user from animating UV.
- PushID((void *)user_texture_id);
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID("#image");
- PopID();
-
- const ImVec2 padding = (frame_padding >= 0) ? ImVec2((float)frame_padding, (float)frame_padding) : style.FramePadding;
- const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size + padding*2);
- const ImRect image_bb(window->DC.CursorPos + padding, window->DC.CursorPos + padding + size);
- ItemSize(bb);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
- return false;
-
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
-
- // Render
- const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
- RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
- RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, ImClamp((float)ImMin(padding.x, padding.y), 0.0f, style.FrameRounding));
- if (bg_col.w > 0.0f)
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(image_bb.Min, image_bb.Max, GetColorU32(bg_col));
- window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, image_bb.Min, image_bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
-
- return pressed;
+ ImGuiColorMod backup;
+ backup.Col = idx;
+ backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx];
+ g.ColorModifiers.push_back(backup);
+ g.Style.Colors[idx] = ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col);
}
-// Start logging ImGui output to TTY
-void ImGui::LogToTTY(int max_depth)
+void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4& col)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- return;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
- g.LogFile = stdout;
- g.LogEnabled = true;
- g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
- if (max_depth >= 0)
- g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
+ ImGuiColorMod backup;
+ backup.Col = idx;
+ backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx];
+ g.ColorModifiers.push_back(backup);
+ g.Style.Colors[idx] = col;
}
-// Start logging ImGui output to given file
-void ImGui::LogToFile(int max_depth, const char* filename)
+void ImGui::PopStyleColor(int count)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- return;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- if (!filename)
- {
- filename = g.IO.LogFilename;
- if (!filename)
- return;
- }
-
- IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
- g.LogFile = ImFileOpen(filename, "ab");
- if (!g.LogFile)
+ while (count > 0)
{
- IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile != NULL); // Consider this an error
- return;
+ ImGuiColorMod& backup = g.ColorModifiers.back();
+ g.Style.Colors[backup.Col] = backup.BackupValue;
+ g.ColorModifiers.pop_back();
+ count--;
}
- g.LogEnabled = true;
- g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
- if (max_depth >= 0)
- g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
}
-// Start logging ImGui output to clipboard
-void ImGui::LogToClipboard(int max_depth)
+struct ImGuiStyleVarInfo
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- return;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ ImGuiDataType Type;
+ ImU32 Count;
+ ImU32 Offset;
+ void* GetVarPtr(ImGuiStyle* style) const { return (void*)((unsigned char*)style + Offset); }
+};
- IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
- g.LogFile = NULL;
- g.LogEnabled = true;
- g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
- if (max_depth >= 0)
- g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
-}
+static const ImGuiStyleVarInfo GStyleVarInfo[] =
+{
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, Alpha) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowPadding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowMinSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowTitleAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FramePadding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemInnerSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, IndentSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabMinSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, TabRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ButtonTextAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign
+ { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, SelectableTextAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign
+};
-void ImGui::LogFinish()
+static const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* GetStyleVarInfo(ImGuiStyleVar idx)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (!g.LogEnabled)
- return;
+ IM_ASSERT(idx >= 0 && idx < ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT);
+ IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GStyleVarInfo) == ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT);
+ return &GStyleVarInfo[idx];
+}
- LogText(IM_NEWLINE);
- if (g.LogFile != NULL)
+void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val)
+{
+ const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx);
+ if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 1)
{
- if (g.LogFile == stdout)
- fflush(g.LogFile);
- else
- fclose(g.LogFile);
- g.LogFile = NULL;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ float* pvar = (float*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
+ g.StyleModifiers.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar));
+ *pvar = val;
+ return;
}
- if (g.LogClipboard.size() > 1)
+ IM_ASSERT(0); // Called function with wrong-type? Variable is not a float.
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2& val)
+{
+ const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx);
+ if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 2)
{
- SetClipboardText(g.LogClipboard.begin());
- g.LogClipboard.clear();
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImVec2* pvar = (ImVec2*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
+ g.StyleModifiers.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar));
+ *pvar = val;
+ return;
}
- g.LogEnabled = false;
+ IM_ASSERT(0); // Called function with wrong-type? Variable is not a ImVec2.
}
-// Helper to display logging buttons
-void ImGui::LogButtons()
+void ImGui::PopStyleVar(int count)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- PushID("LogButtons");
- const bool log_to_tty = Button("Log To TTY"); SameLine();
- const bool log_to_file = Button("Log To File"); SameLine();
- const bool log_to_clipboard = Button("Log To Clipboard"); SameLine();
- PushItemWidth(80.0f);
- PushAllowKeyboardFocus(false);
- SliderInt("Depth", &g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth, 0, 9, NULL);
- PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
- PopItemWidth();
- PopID();
-
- // Start logging at the end of the function so that the buttons don't appear in the log
- if (log_to_tty)
- LogToTTY(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth);
- if (log_to_file)
- LogToFile(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth, g.IO.LogFilename);
- if (log_to_clipboard)
- LogToClipboard(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth);
+ while (count > 0)
+ {
+ // We avoid a generic memcpy(data, &backup.Backup.., GDataTypeSize[info->Type] * info->Count), the overhead in Debug is not worth it.
+ ImGuiStyleMod& backup = g.StyleModifiers.back();
+ const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* info = GetStyleVarInfo(backup.VarIdx);
+ void* data = info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
+ if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 1) { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; }
+ else if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 2) { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; ((float*)data)[1] = backup.BackupFloat[1]; }
+ g.StyleModifiers.pop_back();
+ count--;
+ }
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+const char* ImGui::GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx)
{
- if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf)
- return true;
-
- // We only write to the tree storage if the user clicks (or explicitly use SetNextTreeNode*** functions)
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- ImGuiStorage* storage = window->DC.StateStorage;
-
- bool is_open;
- if (g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond != 0)
+ // Create switch-case from enum with regexp: ImGuiCol_{.*}, --> case ImGuiCol_\1: return "\1";
+ switch (idx)
{
- if (g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond & ImGuiCond_Always)
- {
- is_open = g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal;
- storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
- }
- else
- {
- // We treat ImGuiCond_Once and ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver the same because tree node state are not saved persistently.
- const int stored_value = storage->GetInt(id, -1);
- if (stored_value == -1)
- {
- is_open = g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal;
- storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
- }
- else
- {
- is_open = stored_value != 0;
- }
- }
- g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond = 0;
+ case ImGuiCol_Text: return "Text";
+ case ImGuiCol_TextDisabled: return "TextDisabled";
+ case ImGuiCol_WindowBg: return "WindowBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_ChildBg: return "ChildBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_PopupBg: return "PopupBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_Border: return "Border";
+ case ImGuiCol_BorderShadow: return "BorderShadow";
+ case ImGuiCol_FrameBg: return "FrameBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered: return "FrameBgHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive: return "FrameBgActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_TitleBg: return "TitleBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive: return "TitleBgActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed: return "TitleBgCollapsed";
+ case ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg: return "MenuBarBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg: return "ScrollbarBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab: return "ScrollbarGrab";
+ case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered: return "ScrollbarGrabHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive: return "ScrollbarGrabActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_CheckMark: return "CheckMark";
+ case ImGuiCol_SliderGrab: return "SliderGrab";
+ case ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive: return "SliderGrabActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_Button: return "Button";
+ case ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered: return "ButtonHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_ButtonActive: return "ButtonActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_Header: return "Header";
+ case ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered: return "HeaderHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_HeaderActive: return "HeaderActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_Separator: return "Separator";
+ case ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered: return "SeparatorHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive: return "SeparatorActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip: return "ResizeGrip";
+ case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered: return "ResizeGripHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive: return "ResizeGripActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_Tab: return "Tab";
+ case ImGuiCol_TabHovered: return "TabHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_TabActive: return "TabActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused: return "TabUnfocused";
+ case ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive: return "TabUnfocusedActive";
+ case ImGuiCol_PlotLines: return "PlotLines";
+ case ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered: return "PlotLinesHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram: return "PlotHistogram";
+ case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered: return "PlotHistogramHovered";
+ case ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg: return "TextSelectedBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget: return "DragDropTarget";
+ case ImGuiCol_NavHighlight: return "NavHighlight";
+ case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight: return "NavWindowingHighlight";
+ case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg: return "NavWindowingDimBg";
+ case ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg: return "ModalWindowDimBg";
}
- else
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return "Unknown";
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowChildOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent)
+{
+ if (window->RootWindow == potential_parent)
+ return true;
+ while (window != NULL)
{
- is_open = storage->GetInt(id, (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen) ? 1 : 0) != 0;
+ if (window == potential_parent)
+ return true;
+ window = window->ParentWindow;
}
-
- // When logging is enabled, we automatically expand tree nodes (but *NOT* collapsing headers.. seems like sensible behavior).
- // NB- If we are above max depth we still allow manually opened nodes to be logged.
- if (g.LogEnabled && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog) && window->DC.TreeDepth < g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth)
- is_open = true;
-
- return is_open;
+ return false;
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end)
+bool ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
+ IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped) == 0); // Flags not supported by this function
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const bool display_frame = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed) != 0;
- const ImVec2 padding = (display_frame || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding)) ? style.FramePadding : ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0.0f);
-
- if (!label_end)
- label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false);
-
- // We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height.
- const float text_base_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it
- const float frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrentLineHeight, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2), label_size.y + padding.y*2);
- ImRect frame_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, ImVec2(window->Pos.x + GetContentRegionMax().x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height));
- if (display_frame)
- {
- // Framed header expand a little outside the default padding
- frame_bb.Min.x -= (float)(int)(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f) - 1;
- frame_bb.Max.x += (float)(int)(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f) - 1;
- }
-
- const float text_offset_x = (g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x*3 : padding.x*2)); // Collapser arrow width + Spacing
- const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x*2 : 0.0f); // Include collapser
- ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), text_base_offset_y);
-
- // For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing
- // (Ideally we'd want to add a flag for the user to specify if we want the hit test to be done up to the right side of the content or not)
- const ImRect interact_bb = display_frame ? frame_bb : ImRect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x*2, frame_bb.Max.y);
- bool is_open = TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(id, flags);
-
- // Store a flag for the current depth to tell if we will allow closing this node when navigating one of its child.
- // For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop().
- // This is currently only support 32 level deep and we are fine with (1 << Depth) overflowing into a zero.
- if (is_open && !g.NavIdIsAlive && (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere) && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
- window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop |= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);
-
- bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id);
- window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect;
- window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect = frame_bb;
-
- if (!item_add)
- {
- if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
- TreePushRawID(id);
- return is_open;
- }
-
- // Flags that affects opening behavior:
- // - 0(default) ..................... single-click anywhere to open
- // - OpenOnDoubleClick .............. double-click anywhere to open
- // - OpenOnArrow .................... single-click on arrow to open
- // - OpenOnDoubleClick|OpenOnArrow .. single-click on arrow or double-click anywhere to open
- ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers | ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap) ? ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap : 0);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf))
- button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
- if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
- button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow) ? ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease : 0);
-
- bool hovered, held, pressed = ButtonBehavior(interact_bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf))
- {
- bool toggled = false;
- if (pressed)
- {
- toggled = !(flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)) || (g.NavActivateId == id);
- if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow)
- toggled |= IsMouseHoveringRect(interact_bb.Min, ImVec2(interact_bb.Min.x + text_offset_x, interact_bb.Max.y)) && (!g.NavDisableMouseHover);
- if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
- toggled |= g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0];
- if (g.DragDropActive && is_open) // When using Drag and Drop "hold to open" we keep the node highlighted after opening, but never close it again.
- toggled = false;
- }
-
- if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && is_open)
- {
- toggled = true;
- NavMoveRequestCancel();
- }
- if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && !is_open) // If there's something upcoming on the line we may want to give it the priority?
- {
- toggled = true;
- NavMoveRequestCancel();
- }
-
- if (toggled)
- {
- is_open = !is_open;
- window->DC.StateStorage->SetInt(id, is_open);
- }
- }
- if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
- SetItemAllowOverlap();
- // Render
- const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
- const ImVec2 text_pos = frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(text_offset_x, text_base_offset_y);
- if (display_frame)
- {
- // Framed type
- RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);
- RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin);
- RenderArrow(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(padding.x, text_base_offset_y), is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 1.0f);
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- {
- // NB: '##' is normally used to hide text (as a library-wide feature), so we need to specify the text range to make sure the ## aren't stripped out here.
- const char log_prefix[] = "\n##";
- const char log_suffix[] = "##";
- LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_prefix, log_prefix+3);
- RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
- LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_suffix+1, log_suffix+3);
- }
- else
- {
- RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
- }
+ if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow)
+ {
+ if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL)
+ return false;
}
else
{
- // Unframed typed for tree nodes
- if (hovered || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected))
+ switch (flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows))
{
- RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, col, false);
- RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin);
+ case ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows:
+ if (g.HoveredRootWindow != g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow)
+ return false;
+ break;
+ case ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow:
+ if (g.HoveredWindow != g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow)
+ return false;
+ break;
+ case ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows:
+ if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || !IsWindowChildOf(g.HoveredWindow, g.CurrentWindow))
+ return false;
+ break;
+ default:
+ if (g.HoveredWindow != g.CurrentWindow)
+ return false;
+ break;
}
-
- if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
- RenderBullet(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(text_offset_x * 0.5f, g.FontSize*0.50f + text_base_offset_y));
- else if (!(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf))
- RenderArrow(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(padding.x, g.FontSize*0.15f + text_base_offset_y), is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 0.70f);
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- LogRenderedText(&text_pos, ">");
- RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
}
- if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
- TreePushRawID(id);
- return is_open;
-}
-
-// CollapsingHeader returns true when opened but do not indent nor push into the ID stack (because of the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag).
-// This is basically the same as calling TreeNodeEx(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader). You can remove the _NoTreePushOnOpen flag if you want behavior closer to normal TreeNode().
-bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
+ if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(g.HoveredRootWindow, flags))
return false;
-
- return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader, label);
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
+ if (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != g.HoveredWindow->MoveId)
+ return false;
+ return true;
}
-bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+bool ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (p_open && !*p_open)
- return false;
+ if (flags & ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow)
+ return g.NavWindow != NULL;
- ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
- bool is_open = TreeNodeBehavior(id, flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader | (p_open ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap : 0), label);
- if (p_open)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow); // Not inside a Begin()/End()
+ switch (flags & (ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
{
- // Create a small overlapping close button // FIXME: We can evolve this into user accessible helpers to add extra buttons on title bars, headers, etc.
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- float button_sz = g.FontSize * 0.5f;
- ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup last_item_backup;
- if (CloseButton(window->GetID((void*)(intptr_t)(id+1)), ImVec2(ImMin(window->DC.LastItemRect.Max.x, window->ClipRect.Max.x) - g.Style.FramePadding.x - button_sz, window->DC.LastItemRect.Min.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y + button_sz), button_sz))
- *p_open = false;
- last_item_backup.Restore();
+ case ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows:
+ return g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindow == g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow;
+ case ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow:
+ return g.NavWindow == g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow;
+ case ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows:
+ return g.NavWindow && IsWindowChildOf(g.NavWindow, g.CurrentWindow);
+ default:
+ return g.NavWindow == g.CurrentWindow;
}
-
- return is_open;
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+// Can we focus this window with CTRL+TAB (or PadMenu + PadFocusPrev/PadFocusNext)
+// Note that NoNavFocus makes the window not reachable with CTRL+TAB but it can still be focused with mouse or programmaticaly.
+// If you want a window to never be focused, you may use the e.g. NoInputs flag.
+bool ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags, label, NULL);
+ return window->Active && window == window->RootWindow && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus);
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+float ImGui::GetWindowWidth()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const char* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
- return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(str_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ return window->Size.x;
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+float ImGui::GetWindowHeight()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ return window->Size.y;
+}
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowPos()
+{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const char* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
- return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(ptr_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ return window->Pos;
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+void ImGui::SetWindowScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_x)
{
- return TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x += window->Scroll.x; // SizeContents is generally computed based on CursorMaxPos which is affected by scroll position, so we need to apply our change to it.
+ window->Scroll.x = new_scroll_x;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x -= window->Scroll.x;
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+void ImGui::SetWindowScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_y)
{
- return TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y += window->Scroll.y; // SizeContents is generally computed based on CursorMaxPos which is affected by scroll position, so we need to apply our change to it.
+ window->Scroll.y = new_scroll_y;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y -= window->Scroll.y;
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
+void ImGui::SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, flags, fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
- return is_open;
+ // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
+ if (cond && (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
+ return;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+ window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+ window->SetWindowPosVal = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+
+ // Set
+ const ImVec2 old_pos = window->Pos;
+ window->Pos = ImFloor(pos);
+ window->DC.CursorPos += (window->Pos - old_pos); // As we happen to move the window while it is being appended to (which is a bad idea - will smear) let's at least offset the cursor
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos += (window->Pos - old_pos); // And more importantly we need to adjust this so size calculation doesn't get affected.
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
+void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, flags, fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
- return is_open;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond);
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...)
+void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const char* name, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
- return is_open;
+ if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
+ SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond);
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowSize()
{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
- return is_open;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->Size;
}
-bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* label)
+void ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
- return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), 0, label, NULL);
+ // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
+ if (cond && (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
+ return;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+ window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+
+ // Set
+ if (size.x > 0.0f)
+ {
+ window->AutoFitFramesX = 0;
+ window->SizeFull.x = ImFloor(size.x);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ window->AutoFitFramesX = 2;
+ window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
+ }
+ if (size.y > 0.0f)
+ {
+ window->AutoFitFramesY = 0;
+ window->SizeFull.y = ImFloor(size.y);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
+ window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
+ }
}
-void ImGui::TreeAdvanceToLabelPos()
+void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos.x += GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing();
+ SetWindowSize(GImGui->CurrentWindow, size, cond);
}
-// Horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode() or Bullet()
-float ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
+void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const char* name, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.FontSize + (g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
+ if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
+ SetWindowSize(window, size, cond);
}
-void ImGui::SetNextTreeNodeOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond)
+void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
+ // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
+ if (cond && (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
return;
- g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal = is_open;
- g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
+ window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+
+ // Set
+ window->Collapsed = collapsed;
}
-void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id)
+void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetID(str_id));
+ SetWindowCollapsed(GImGui->CurrentWindow, collapsed, cond);
}
-void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end)
+bool ImGui::IsWindowCollapsed()
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetID(str_id_begin, str_id_end));
+ return window->Collapsed;
}
-void ImGui::PushID(const void* ptr_id)
+bool ImGui::IsWindowAppearing()
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetID(ptr_id));
+ return window->Appearing;
}
-void ImGui::PushID(int int_id)
+void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(const char* name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- const void* ptr_id = (void*)(intptr_t)int_id;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetID(ptr_id));
+ if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
+ SetWindowCollapsed(window, collapsed, cond);
}
-void ImGui::PopID()
+void ImGui::SetWindowFocus()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- window->IDStack.pop_back();
+ FocusWindow(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowFocus(const char* name)
+{
+ if (name)
+ {
+ if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FocusWindow(NULL);
+ }
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond, const ImVec2& pivot)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+ g.NextWindowData.PosVal = pos;
+ g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal = pivot;
+ g.NextWindowData.PosCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeVal = size;
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}
-ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id)
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback, void* custom_callback_user_data)
{
- return GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = ImGuiCond_Always;
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect = ImRect(size_min, size_max);
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback = custom_callback;
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData = custom_callback_user_data;
}
-ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end)
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size)
{
- return GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id_begin, str_id_end);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal = size; // In Begin() we will add the size of window decorations (title bar, menu etc.) to that to form a SizeContents value.
+ g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeCond = ImGuiCond_Always;
}
-ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const void* ptr_id)
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- return GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(ptr_id);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+ g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal = collapsed;
+ g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}
-void ImGui::Bullet()
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowFocus()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrentLineHeight, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y*2), g.FontSize);
- const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, line_height));
- ItemSize(bb);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
- {
- SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x*2);
- return;
- }
-
- // Render and stay on same line
- RenderBullet(bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize*0.5f, line_height*0.5f));
- SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x*2);
+ g.NextWindowData.FocusCond = ImGuiCond_Always; // Using a Cond member for consistency (may transition all of them to single flag set for fast Clear() op)
}
-// Text with a little bullet aligned to the typical tree node.
-void ImGui::BulletTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
-
- const char* text_begin = g.TempBuffer;
- const char* text_end = text_begin + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false);
- const float text_base_offset_y = ImMax(0.0f, window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it
- const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrentLineHeight, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y*2), g.FontSize);
- const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? (label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x*2) : 0.0f), ImMax(line_height, label_size.y))); // Empty text doesn't add padding
- ItemSize(bb);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
- return;
-
- // Render
- RenderBullet(bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize*0.5f, line_height*0.5f));
- RenderText(bb.Min+ImVec2(g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x*2, text_base_offset_y), text_begin, text_end, false);
+ g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal = alpha;
+ g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond = ImGuiCond_Always; // Using a Cond member for consistency (may transition all of them to single flag set for fast Clear() op)
}
-void ImGui::BulletText(const char* fmt, ...)
+// FIXME: This is in window space (not screen space!)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionMax()
{
- va_list args;
- va_start(args, fmt);
- BulletTextV(fmt, args);
- va_end(args);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ ImVec2 mx = window->ContentsRegionRect.Max - window->Pos;
+ if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
+ mx.x = GetColumnOffset(window->DC.ColumnsSet->Current + 1) - window->WindowPadding.x;
+ return mx;
}
-static inline int DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_ptr, const char* format)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail()
{
- if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32) // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing the argument
- return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU32*)data_ptr);
- if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64) // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing the argument
- return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU64*)data_ptr);
- if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
- return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const float*)data_ptr);
- if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
- return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const double*)data_ptr);
- IM_ASSERT(0);
- return 0;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return GetContentRegionMax() - (window->DC.CursorPos - window->Pos);
}
-// FIXME: Adding support for clamping on boundaries of the data type would be nice.
-static void DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, void* arg1, const void* arg2)
+float ImGui::GetContentRegionAvailWidth()
{
- IM_ASSERT(op == '+' || op == '-');
- switch (data_type)
- {
- case ImGuiDataType_S32:
- if (op == '+') *(int*)output = *(const int*)arg1 + *(const int*)arg2;
- else if (op == '-') *(int*)output = *(const int*)arg1 - *(const int*)arg2;
- return;
- case ImGuiDataType_U32:
- if (op == '+') *(unsigned int*)output = *(const unsigned int*)arg1 + *(const ImU32*)arg2;
- else if (op == '-') *(unsigned int*)output = *(const unsigned int*)arg1 - *(const ImU32*)arg2;
- return;
- case ImGuiDataType_S64:
- if (op == '+') *(ImS64*)output = *(const ImS64*)arg1 + *(const ImS64*)arg2;
- else if (op == '-') *(ImS64*)output = *(const ImS64*)arg1 - *(const ImS64*)arg2;
- return;
- case ImGuiDataType_U64:
- if (op == '+') *(ImU64*)output = *(const ImU64*)arg1 + *(const ImU64*)arg2;
- else if (op == '-') *(ImU64*)output = *(const ImU64*)arg1 - *(const ImU64*)arg2;
- return;
- case ImGuiDataType_Float:
- if (op == '+') *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 + *(const float*)arg2;
- else if (op == '-') *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 - *(const float*)arg2;
- return;
- case ImGuiDataType_Double:
- if (op == '+') *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 + *(const double*)arg2;
- else if (op == '-') *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 - *(const double*)arg2;
- return;
- case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
- }
- IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return GetContentRegionAvail().x;
}
-struct ImGuiDataTypeInfo
+// In window space (not screen space!)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMin()
{
- size_t Size;
- const char* PrintFmt; // Unused
- const char* ScanFmt;
-};
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->ContentsRegionRect.Min - window->Pos;
+}
-static const ImGuiDataTypeInfo GDataTypeInfo[] =
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax()
{
- { sizeof(int), "%d", "%d" },
- { sizeof(unsigned int), "%u", "%u" },
-#ifdef _MSC_VER
- { sizeof(ImS64), "%I64d","%I64d" },
- { sizeof(ImU64), "%I64u","%I64u" },
-#else
- { sizeof(ImS64), "%lld", "%lld" },
- { sizeof(ImU64), "%llu", "%llu" },
-#endif
- { sizeof(float), "%f", "%f" }, // float are promoted to double in va_arg
- { sizeof(double), "%f", "%lf" },
-};
-IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GDataTypeInfo) == ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->ContentsRegionRect.Max - window->Pos;
+}
-// User can input math operators (e.g. +100) to edit a numerical values.
-// NB: This is _not_ a full expression evaluator. We should probably add one and replace this dumb mess..
-static bool DataTypeApplyOpFromText(const char* buf, const char* initial_value_buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format)
+float ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionWidth()
{
- while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
- buf++;
-
- // We don't support '-' op because it would conflict with inputing negative value.
- // Instead you can use +-100 to subtract from an existing value
- char op = buf[0];
- if (op == '+' || op == '*' || op == '/')
- {
- buf++;
- while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
- buf++;
- }
- else
- {
- op = 0;
- }
- if (!buf[0])
- return false;
-
- // Copy the value in an opaque buffer so we can compare at the end of the function if it changed at all.
- IM_ASSERT(data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
- int data_backup[2];
- IM_ASSERT(GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size <= sizeof(data_backup));
- memcpy(data_backup, data_ptr, GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size);
-
- if (format == NULL)
- format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].ScanFmt;
-
- int arg1i = 0;
- if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32)
- {
- int* v = (int*)data_ptr;
- int arg0i = *v;
- float arg1f = 0.0f;
- if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0i) < 1)
- return false;
- // Store operand in a float so we can use fractional value for multipliers (*1.1), but constant always parsed as integer so we can fit big integers (e.g. 2000000003) past float precision
- if (op == '+') { if (sscanf(buf, "%d", &arg1i)) *v = (int)(arg0i + arg1i); } // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
- else if (op == '*') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f)) *v = (int)(arg0i * arg1f); } // Multiply
- else if (op == '/') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f) && arg1f != 0.0f) *v = (int)(arg0i / arg1f); } // Divide
- else { if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1i) == 1) *v = arg1i; } // Assign constant
- }
- else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
- {
- // Assign constant
- // FIXME: We don't bother handling support for legacy operators since they are a little too crappy. Instead we may implement a proper expression evaluator in the future.
- sscanf(buf, format, data_ptr);
- }
- else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
- {
- // For floats we have to ignore format with precision (e.g. "%.2f") because sscanf doesn't take them in
- format = "%f";
- float* v = (float*)data_ptr;
- float arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0f;
- if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
- return false;
- if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
- return false;
- if (op == '+') { *v = arg0f + arg1f; } // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
- else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; } // Multiply
- else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
- else { *v = arg1f; } // Assign constant
- }
- else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
- {
- format = "%lf"; // scanf differentiate float/double unlike printf which forces everything to double because of ellipsis
- double* v = (double*)data_ptr;
- double arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0;
- if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
- return false;
- if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
- return false;
- if (op == '+') { *v = arg0f + arg1f; } // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
- else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; } // Multiply
- else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
- else { *v = arg1f; } // Assign constant
- }
- return memcmp(data_backup, data_ptr, GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size) != 0;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->ContentsRegionRect.GetWidth();
}
-// Create text input in place of a slider (when CTRL+Clicking on slider)
-// FIXME: Logic is messy and confusing.
-bool ImGui::InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format)
+float ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
-
- // Our replacement widget will override the focus ID (registered previously to allow for a TAB focus to happen)
- // On the first frame, g.ScalarAsInputTextId == 0, then on subsequent frames it becomes == id
- SetActiveID(g.ScalarAsInputTextId, window);
- g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
- SetHoveredID(0);
- FocusableItemUnregister(window);
-
- char fmt_buf[32];
- char data_buf[32];
- format = ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(format, fmt_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_buf));
- DataTypeFormatString(data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), data_type, data_ptr, format);
- ImStrTrimBlanks(data_buf);
- ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ((data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific : ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal);
- bool value_changed = InputTextEx(label, data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), bb.GetSize(), flags);
- if (g.ScalarAsInputTextId == 0) // First frame we started displaying the InputText widget
- {
- IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id); // InputText ID expected to match the Slider ID
- g.ScalarAsInputTextId = g.ActiveId;
- SetHoveredID(id);
- }
- if (value_changed)
- return DataTypeApplyOpFromText(data_buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.begin(), data_type, data_ptr, NULL);
- return false;
+ return g.FontSize;
}
-// We don't use strchr() because our strings are usually very short and often start with '%'
-const char* ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* fmt)
+float ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()
{
- while (char c = fmt[0])
- {
- if (c == '%' && fmt[1] != '%')
- return fmt;
- else if (c == '%')
- fmt++;
- fmt++;
- }
- return fmt;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
}
-const char* ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* fmt)
+float ImGui::GetFrameHeight()
{
- // Printf/scanf types modifiers: I/L/h/j/l/t/w/z. Other uppercase letters qualify as types aka end of the format.
- if (fmt[0] != '%')
- return fmt;
- const unsigned int ignored_uppercase_mask = (1 << ('I'-'A')) | (1 << ('L'-'A'));
- const unsigned int ignored_lowercase_mask = (1 << ('h'-'a')) | (1 << ('j'-'a')) | (1 << ('l'-'a')) | (1 << ('t'-'a')) | (1 << ('w'-'a')) | (1 << ('z'-'a'));
- for (char c; (c = *fmt) != 0; fmt++)
- {
- if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z' && ((1 << (c - 'A')) & ignored_uppercase_mask) == 0)
- return fmt + 1;
- if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z' && ((1 << (c - 'a')) & ignored_lowercase_mask) == 0)
- return fmt + 1;
- }
- return fmt;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f;
}
-// Extract the format out of a format string with leading or trailing decorations
-// fmt = "blah blah" -> return fmt
-// fmt = "%.3f" -> return fmt
-// fmt = "hello %.3f" -> return fmt + 6
-// fmt = "%.3f hello" -> return buf written with "%.3f"
-const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* fmt, char* buf, int buf_size)
+float ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing()
{
- const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
- if (fmt_start[0] != '%')
- return fmt;
- const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);
- if (fmt_end[0] == 0) // If we only have leading decoration, we don't need to copy the data.
- return fmt_start;
- ImStrncpy(buf, fmt_start, ImMin((int)(fmt_end + 1 - fmt_start), buf_size));
- return buf;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
}
-// Parse display precision back from the display format string
-// FIXME: This is still used by some navigation code path to infer a minimum tweak step, but we should aim to rework widgets so it isn't needed.
-int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* fmt, int default_precision)
+ImDrawList* ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()
{
- fmt = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
- if (fmt[0] != '%')
- return default_precision;
- fmt++;
- while (*fmt >= '0' && *fmt <= '9')
- fmt++;
- int precision = INT_MAX;
- if (*fmt == '.')
- {
- fmt = ImAtoi<int>(fmt + 1, &precision);
- if (precision < 0 || precision > 99)
- precision = default_precision;
- }
- if (*fmt == 'e' || *fmt == 'E') // Maximum precision with scientific notation
- precision = -1;
- if ((*fmt == 'g' || *fmt == 'G') && precision == INT_MAX)
- precision = -1;
- return (precision == INT_MAX) ? default_precision : precision;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ return window->DrawList;
}
-static float GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(int decimal_precision)
+ImFont* ImGui::GetFont()
{
- static const float min_steps[10] = { 1.0f, 0.1f, 0.01f, 0.001f, 0.0001f, 0.00001f, 0.000001f, 0.0000001f, 0.00000001f, 0.000000001f };
- if (decimal_precision < 0)
- return FLT_MIN;
- return (decimal_precision >= 0 && decimal_precision < 10) ? min_steps[decimal_precision] : ImPow(10.0f, (float)-decimal_precision);
+ return GImGui->Font;
}
-template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE>
-static inline TYPE RoundScalarWithFormat(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v)
+float ImGui::GetFontSize()
{
- const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(format);
- if (fmt_start[0] != '%' || fmt_start[1] == '%') // Don't apply if the value is not visible in the format string
- return v;
- char v_str[64];
- ImFormatString(v_str, IM_ARRAYSIZE(v_str), fmt_start, v);
- const char* p = v_str;
- while (*p == ' ')
- p++;
- if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
- v = (TYPE)ImAtof(p);
- else
- ImAtoi(p, (SIGNEDTYPE*)&v);
- return v;
+ return GImGui->FontSize;
}
-template<typename TYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
-static inline float SliderBehaviorCalcRatioFromValue(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, float power, float linear_zero_pos)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetFontTexUvWhitePixel()
{
- if (v_min == v_max)
- return 0.0f;
-
- const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f) && (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
- const TYPE v_clamped = (v_min < v_max) ? ImClamp(v, v_min, v_max) : ImClamp(v, v_max, v_min);
- if (is_power)
- {
- if (v_clamped < 0.0f)
- {
- const float f = 1.0f - (float)((v_clamped - v_min) / (ImMin((TYPE)0, v_max) - v_min));
- return (1.0f - ImPow(f, 1.0f/power)) * linear_zero_pos;
- }
- else
- {
- const float f = (float)((v_clamped - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)) / (v_max - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)));
- return linear_zero_pos + ImPow(f, 1.0f/power) * (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
- }
- }
-
- // Linear slider
- return (float)((FLOATTYPE)(v_clamped - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min));
+ return GImGui->DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel;
}
-// FIXME: Move some of the code into SliderBehavior(). Current responsability is larger than what the equivalent DragBehaviorT<> does, we also do some rendering, etc.
-template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
-static bool ImGui::SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+void ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(float scale)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
-
- const bool is_horizontal = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) == 0;
- const bool is_decimal = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
- const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f) && is_decimal;
-
- const float grab_padding = 2.0f;
- const float slider_sz = is_horizontal ? (bb.GetWidth() - grab_padding * 2.0f) : (bb.GetHeight() - grab_padding * 2.0f);
- float grab_sz = style.GrabMinSize;
- SIGNEDTYPE v_range = (v_min < v_max ? v_max - v_min : v_min - v_max);
- if (!is_decimal && v_range >= 0) // v_range < 0 may happen on integer overflows
- grab_sz = ImMax((float)(slider_sz / (v_range + 1)), style.GrabMinSize); // For integer sliders: if possible have the grab size represent 1 unit
- grab_sz = ImMin(grab_sz, slider_sz);
- const float slider_usable_sz = slider_sz - grab_sz;
- const float slider_usable_pos_min = (is_horizontal ? bb.Min.x : bb.Min.y) + grab_padding + grab_sz*0.5f;
- const float slider_usable_pos_max = (is_horizontal ? bb.Max.x : bb.Max.y) - grab_padding - grab_sz*0.5f;
-
- // For power curve sliders that cross over sign boundary we want the curve to be symmetric around 0.0f
- float linear_zero_pos; // 0.0->1.0f
- if (is_power && v_min * v_max < 0.0f)
- {
- // Different sign
- const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_min_to_0 = ImPow(v_min >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_min : -(FLOATTYPE)v_min, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f/power);
- const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_max_to_0 = ImPow(v_max >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_max : -(FLOATTYPE)v_max, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f/power);
- linear_zero_pos = (float)(linear_dist_min_to_0 / (linear_dist_min_to_0 + linear_dist_max_to_0));
- }
- else
- {
- // Same sign
- linear_zero_pos = v_min < 0.0f ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
- }
-
- // Process interacting with the slider
- bool value_changed = false;
- if (g.ActiveId == id)
- {
- bool set_new_value = false;
- float clicked_t = 0.0f;
- if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
- {
- if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
- {
- ClearActiveID();
- }
- else
- {
- const float mouse_abs_pos = is_horizontal ? g.IO.MousePos.x : g.IO.MousePos.y;
- clicked_t = (slider_usable_sz > 0.0f) ? ImClamp((mouse_abs_pos - slider_usable_pos_min) / slider_usable_sz, 0.0f, 1.0f) : 0.0f;
- if (!is_horizontal)
- clicked_t = 1.0f - clicked_t;
- set_new_value = true;
- }
- }
- else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
- {
- const ImVec2 delta2 = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard | ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 0.0f, 0.0f);
- float delta = is_horizontal ? delta2.x : -delta2.y;
- if (g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
- {
- ClearActiveID();
- }
- else if (delta != 0.0f)
- {
- clicked_t = SliderBehaviorCalcRatioFromValue<TYPE,FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
- const int decimal_precision = is_decimal ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
- if ((decimal_precision > 0) || is_power)
- {
- delta /= 100.0f; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in % of slider bounds
- if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
- delta /= 10.0f;
- }
- else
- {
- if ((v_range >= -100.0f && v_range <= 100.0f) || IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
- delta = ((delta < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) / (float)v_range; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in integer steps
- else
- delta /= 100.0f;
- }
- if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast))
- delta *= 10.0f;
- set_new_value = true;
- if ((clicked_t >= 1.0f && delta > 0.0f) || (clicked_t <= 0.0f && delta < 0.0f)) // This is to avoid applying the saturation when already past the limits
- set_new_value = false;
- else
- clicked_t = ImSaturate(clicked_t + delta);
- }
- }
-
- if (set_new_value)
- {
- TYPE v_new;
- if (is_power)
- {
- // Account for power curve scale on both sides of the zero
- if (clicked_t < linear_zero_pos)
- {
- // Negative: rescale to the negative range before powering
- float a = 1.0f - (clicked_t / linear_zero_pos);
- a = ImPow(a, power);
- v_new = ImLerp(ImMin(v_max, (TYPE)0), v_min, a);
- }
- else
- {
- // Positive: rescale to the positive range before powering
- float a;
- if (ImFabs(linear_zero_pos - 1.0f) > 1.e-6f)
- a = (clicked_t - linear_zero_pos) / (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
- else
- a = clicked_t;
- a = ImPow(a, power);
- v_new = ImLerp(ImMax(v_min, (TYPE)0), v_max, a);
- }
- }
- else
- {
- // Linear slider
- if (is_decimal)
- {
- v_new = ImLerp(v_min, v_max, clicked_t);
- }
- else
- {
- // For integer values we want the clicking position to match the grab box so we round above
- // This code is carefully tuned to work with large values (e.g. high ranges of U64) while preserving this property..
- FLOATTYPE v_new_off_f = (v_max - v_min) * clicked_t;
- TYPE v_new_off_floor = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f);
- TYPE v_new_off_round = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f + (FLOATTYPE)0.5);
- if (!is_decimal && v_new_off_floor < v_new_off_round)
- v_new = v_min + v_new_off_round;
- else
- v_new = v_min + v_new_off_floor;
- }
- }
-
- // Round to user desired precision based on format string
- v_new = RoundScalarWithFormat<TYPE,SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);
-
- // Apply result
- if (*v != v_new)
- {
- *v = v_new;
- value_changed = true;
- }
- }
- }
-
- // Draw
- float grab_t = SliderBehaviorCalcRatioFromValue<TYPE,FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
- if (!is_horizontal)
- grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
- const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
- ImRect grab_bb;
- if (is_horizontal)
- grab_bb = ImRect(grab_pos - grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Min.y + grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Max.y - grab_padding);
- else
- grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min.x + grab_padding, grab_pos - grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Max.x - grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz*0.5f);
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);
-
- return value_changed;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->FontWindowScale = scale;
+ g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize();
}
-// For 32-bits and larger types, slider bounds are limited to half the natural type range.
-// So e.g. an integer Slider between INT_MAX-10 and INT_MAX will fail, but an integer Slider between INT_MAX/2-10 and INT_MAX/2 will be ok.
-// It would be possible to lift that limitation with some work but it doesn't seem to be worth it for sliders.
-bool ImGui::SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
-{
- // Draw frame
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
- RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
- RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
-
- switch (data_type)
- {
- case ImGuiDataType_S32:
- IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS32*)v_min >= IM_S32_MIN/2 && *(const ImS32*)v_max <= IM_S32_MAX/2);
- return SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImS32*)v, *(const ImS32*)v_min, *(const ImS32*)v_max, format, power, flags);
- case ImGuiDataType_U32:
- IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU32*)v_min <= IM_U32_MAX/2);
- return SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImU32*)v, *(const ImU32*)v_min, *(const ImU32*)v_max, format, power, flags);
- case ImGuiDataType_S64:
- IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS64*)v_min >= IM_S64_MIN/2 && *(const ImS64*)v_max <= IM_S64_MAX/2);
- return SliderBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImS64*)v, *(const ImS64*)v_min, *(const ImS64*)v_max, format, power, flags);
- case ImGuiDataType_U64:
- IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU64*)v_min <= IM_U64_MAX/2);
- return SliderBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImU64*)v, *(const ImU64*)v_min, *(const ImU64*)v_max, format, power, flags);
- case ImGuiDataType_Float:
- IM_ASSERT(*(const float*)v_min >= -FLT_MAX/2.0f && *(const float*)v_max <= FLT_MAX/2.0f);
- return SliderBehaviorT<float, float, float >(bb, id, data_type, (float*)v, *(const float*)v_min, *(const float*)v_max, format, power, flags);
- case ImGuiDataType_Double:
- IM_ASSERT(*(const double*)v_min >= -DBL_MAX/2.0f && *(const double*)v_max <= DBL_MAX/2.0f);
- return SliderBehaviorT<double,double,double>(bb, id, data_type, (double*)v, *(const double*)v_min, *(const double*)v_max, format, power, flags);
- case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
- }
- IM_ASSERT(0);
- return false;
+// User generally sees positions in window coordinates. Internally we store CursorPos in absolute screen coordinates because it is more convenient.
+// Conversion happens as we pass the value to user, but it makes our naming convention confusing because GetCursorPos() == (DC.CursorPos - window.Pos). May want to rename 'DC.CursorPos'.
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorPos()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.CursorPos - window->Pos + window->Scroll;
}
-// FIXME-LEGACY: Prior to 1.61 our DragInt() function internally used floats and because of this the compile-time default value for format was "%.0f".
-// Even though we changed the compile-time default, we expect users to have carried %f around, which would break the display of DragInt() calls.
-// To honor backward compatibility we are rewriting the format string, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS is enabled. What could possibly go wrong?!
-static const char* PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(const char* fmt)
+float ImGui::GetCursorPosX()
{
- if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == '.' && fmt[2] == '0' && fmt[3] == 'f' && fmt[4] == 0) // Fast legacy path for "%.0f" which is expected to be the most common case.
- return "%d";
- const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt); // Find % (if any, and ignore %%)
- const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start); // Find end of format specifier, which itself is an exercise of confidence/recklessness (because snprintf is dependent on libc or user).
- if (fmt_end > fmt_start && fmt_end[-1] == 'f')
- {
-#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
- if (fmt_start == fmt && fmt_end[0] == 0)
- return "%d";
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImFormatString(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), "%.*s%%d%s", (int)(fmt_start - fmt), fmt, fmt_end); // Honor leading and trailing decorations, but lose alignment/precision.
- return g.TempBuffer;
-#else
- IM_ASSERT(0 && "DragInt(): Invalid format string!"); // Old versions used a default parameter of "%.0f", please replace with e.g. "%d"
-#endif
- }
- return fmt;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x;
}
-bool ImGui::SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+float ImGui::GetCursorPosY()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
- const float w = CalcItemWidth();
-
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
- const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
- const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
-
- // NB- we don't call ItemSize() yet because we may turn into a text edit box below
- if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
- {
- ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- return false;
- }
-
- // Default format string when passing NULL
- // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
- IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
- if (format == NULL)
- format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
- else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
- format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
-
- // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Slider turns it into an input box
- bool start_text_input = false;
- const bool tab_focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
- const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
- if (tab_focus_requested || (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || (g.NavInputId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId != id))
- {
- SetActiveID(id, window);
- SetFocusID(id, window);
- FocusWindow(window);
- g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
- if (tab_focus_requested || g.IO.KeyCtrl || g.NavInputId == id)
- {
- start_text_input = true;
- g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;
- }
- }
- if (start_text_input || (g.ActiveId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId == id))
- return InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, v, format);
-
- // Actual slider behavior + render grab
- ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power);
- if (value_changed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
-
- // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
- char value_buf[64];
- const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
- RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f));
-
- if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
- RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
-
- return value_changed;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.CursorPos.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y;
}
-bool ImGui::SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos)
{
- return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->DC.CursorPos = window->Pos - window->Scroll + local_pos;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos);
}
-bool ImGui::VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::SetCursorPosX(float x)
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
-
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
- const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
- const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
-
- ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- if (!ItemAdd(frame_bb, id))
- return false;
-
- // Default format string when passing NULL
- // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
- IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
- if (format == NULL)
- format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
- else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
- format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
-
- const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
- if ((hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
- {
- SetActiveID(id, window);
- SetFocusID(id, window);
- FocusWindow(window);
- g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
- }
-
- // Actual slider behavior + render grab
- const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical);
- if (value_changed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
-
- // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
- // For the vertical slider we allow centered text to overlap the frame padding
- char value_buf[64];
- const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
- RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));
- if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
- RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
-
- return value_changed;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + x;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.x);
}
-bool ImGui::SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min, float v_degrees_max)
+void ImGui::SetCursorPosY(float y)
{
- float v_deg = (*v_rad) * 360.0f / (2*IM_PI);
- bool value_changed = SliderFloat(label, &v_deg, v_degrees_min, v_degrees_max, "%.0f deg", 1.0f);
- *v_rad = v_deg * (2*IM_PI) / 360.0f;
- return value_changed;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + y;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
}
-bool ImGui::SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorStartPos()
{
- return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.CursorStartPos - window->Pos;
}
-bool ImGui::VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos()
{
- return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.CursorPos;
}
-bool ImGui::VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+void ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos)
{
- return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->DC.CursorPos = pos;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos);
}
-// Add multiple sliders on 1 line for compact edition of multiple components
-bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+float ImGui::GetScrollX()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- bool value_changed = false;
- BeginGroup();
- PushID(label);
- PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
- size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
- for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
- {
- PushID(i);
- value_changed |= SliderScalar("##v", data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power);
- SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- PopID();
- PopItemWidth();
- v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
- }
- PopID();
-
- TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
- EndGroup();
- return value_changed;
+ return GImGui->CurrentWindow->Scroll.x;
}
-bool ImGui::SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+float ImGui::GetScrollY()
{
- return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ return GImGui->CurrentWindow->Scroll.y;
}
-bool ImGui::SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+float ImGui::GetScrollMaxX()
{
- return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ return GetWindowScrollMaxX(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
}
-bool ImGui::SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+float ImGui::GetScrollMaxY()
{
- return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ return GetWindowScrollMaxY(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
}
-bool ImGui::SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+void ImGui::SetScrollX(float scroll_x)
{
- return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->ScrollTarget.x = scroll_x;
+ window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f;
}
-bool ImGui::SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+void ImGui::SetScrollY(float scroll_y)
{
- return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->ScrollTarget.y = scroll_y + window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight(); // title bar height canceled out when using ScrollTargetRelY
+ window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f;
}
-bool ImGui::SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(float local_y, float center_y_ratio)
{
- return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ // We store a target position so centering can occur on the next frame when we are guaranteed to have a known window size
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ IM_ASSERT(center_y_ratio >= 0.0f && center_y_ratio <= 1.0f);
+ window->ScrollTarget.y = (float)(int)(local_y + window->Scroll.y);
+ window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = center_y_ratio;
}
-// This is called by DragBehavior() when the widget is active (held by mouse or being manipulated with Nav controls)
-template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
-static bool ImGui::DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power)
+// center_y_ratio: 0.0f top of last item, 0.5f vertical center of last item, 1.0f bottom of last item.
+void ImGui::SetScrollHereY(float center_y_ratio)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- // Default tweak speed
- bool has_min_max = (v_min != v_max) && (v_max - v_max < FLT_MAX);
- if (v_speed == 0.0f && has_min_max)
- v_speed = (float)((v_max - v_min) * g.DragSpeedDefaultRatio);
-
- // Inputs accumulates into g.DragCurrentAccum, which is flushed into the current value as soon as it makes a difference with our precision settings
- float adjust_delta = 0.0f;
- if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && IsMousePosValid() && g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[0] > 1.0f*1.0f)
- {
- adjust_delta = g.IO.MouseDelta.x;
- if (g.IO.KeyAlt)
- adjust_delta *= 1.0f/100.0f;
- if (g.IO.KeyShift)
- adjust_delta *= 10.0f;
- }
- else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
- {
- int decimal_precision = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
- adjust_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard|ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 1.0f/10.0f, 10.0f).x;
- v_speed = ImMax(v_speed, GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(decimal_precision));
- }
- adjust_delta *= v_speed;
-
- // Clear current value on activation
- // Avoid altering values and clamping when we are _already_ past the limits and heading in the same direction, so e.g. if range is 0..255, current value is 300 and we are pushing to the right side, keep the 300.
- bool is_just_activated = g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated;
- bool is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward = has_min_max && ((*v >= v_max && adjust_delta > 0.0f) || (*v <= v_min && adjust_delta < 0.0f));
- if (is_just_activated || is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward)
- {
- g.DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
- g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
- }
- else if (adjust_delta != 0.0f)
- {
- g.DragCurrentAccum += adjust_delta;
- g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = true;
- }
-
- if (!g.DragCurrentAccumDirty)
- return false;
-
- TYPE v_cur = *v;
- FLOATTYPE v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = (FLOATTYPE)0.0f;
-
- const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f && (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) && has_min_max);
- if (is_power)
- {
- // Offset + round to user desired precision, with a curve on the v_min..v_max range to get more precision on one side of the range
- FLOATTYPE v_old_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
- FLOATTYPE v_new_norm_curved = v_old_norm_curved + (g.DragCurrentAccum / (v_max - v_min));
- v_cur = v_min + (TYPE)ImPow(ImSaturate((float)v_new_norm_curved), power) * (v_max - v_min);
- v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = v_old_norm_curved;
- }
- else
- {
- v_cur += (TYPE)g.DragCurrentAccum;
- }
-
- // Round to user desired precision based on format string
- v_cur = RoundScalarWithFormat<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_cur);
-
- // Preserve remainder after rounding has been applied. This also allow slow tweaking of values.
- g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
- if (is_power)
- {
- FLOATTYPE v_cur_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
- g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)(v_cur_norm_curved - v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder);
- }
- else
- {
- g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_cur - (SIGNEDTYPE)*v);
- }
-
- // Lose zero sign for float/double
- if (v_cur == (TYPE)-0)
- v_cur = (TYPE)0;
-
- // Clamp values (handle overflow/wrap-around)
- if (*v != v_cur && has_min_max)
- {
- if (v_cur < v_min || (v_cur > *v && adjust_delta < 0.0f))
- v_cur = v_min;
- if (v_cur > v_max || (v_cur < *v && adjust_delta > 0.0f))
- v_cur = v_max;
- }
-
- // Apply result
- if (*v == v_cur)
- return false;
- *v = v_cur;
- return true;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ float target_y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y - window->Pos.y; // Top of last item, in window space
+ target_y += (window->DC.PrevLineSize.y * center_y_ratio) + (GImGui->Style.ItemSpacing.y * (center_y_ratio - 0.5f) * 2.0f); // Precisely aim above, in the middle or below the last line.
+ SetScrollFromPosY(target_y, center_y_ratio);
}
-bool ImGui::DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::ActivateItem(ImGuiID id)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.ActiveId == id)
- {
- if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && !g.IO.MouseDown[0])
- ClearActiveID();
- else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav && g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
- ClearActiveID();
- }
- if (g.ActiveId != id)
- return false;
-
- switch (data_type)
- {
- case ImGuiDataType_S32: return DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImS32*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS32* )v_min : IM_S32_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS32* )v_max : IM_S32_MAX, format, power);
- case ImGuiDataType_U32: return DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImU32*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU32* )v_min : IM_U32_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU32* )v_max : IM_U32_MAX, format, power);
- case ImGuiDataType_S64: return DragBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImS64*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS64* )v_min : IM_S64_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS64* )v_max : IM_S64_MAX, format, power);
- case ImGuiDataType_U64: return DragBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImU64*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU64* )v_min : IM_U64_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU64* )v_max : IM_U64_MAX, format, power);
- case ImGuiDataType_Float: return DragBehaviorT<float, float, float >(data_type, (float*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const float* )v_min : -FLT_MAX, v_max ? *(const float* )v_max : FLT_MAX, format, power);
- case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DragBehaviorT<double,double,double>(data_type, (double*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const double*)v_min : -DBL_MAX, v_max ? *(const double*)v_max : DBL_MAX, format, power);
- case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
- }
- IM_ASSERT(0);
- return false;
+ g.NavNextActivateId = id;
}
-bool ImGui::DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset)
{
+ IM_ASSERT(offset >= -1); // -1 is allowed but not below
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- if (power != 1.0f)
- IM_ASSERT(v_min != NULL && v_max != NULL); // When using a power curve the drag needs to have known bounds
+ window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext = window->FocusIdxAllCounter + 1 + offset;
+ window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = INT_MAX;
+}
+void ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus()
+{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
- const float w = CalcItemWidth();
-
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
- const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
- const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
- const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
-
- // NB- we don't call ItemSize() yet because we may turn into a text edit box below
- if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
- {
- ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- return false;
- }
- const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
-
- // Default format string when passing NULL
- // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
- IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
- if (format == NULL)
- format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
- else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
- format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
-
- // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Drag turns it into an input box
- bool start_text_input = false;
- const bool tab_focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
- if (tab_focus_requested || (hovered && (g.IO.MouseClicked[0] || g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0])) || g.NavActivateId == id || (g.NavInputId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId != id))
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (!window->Appearing)
+ return;
+ if (g.NavWindow == window->RootWindowForNav && (g.NavInitRequest || g.NavInitResultId != 0) && g.NavLayer == g.NavWindow->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
{
- SetActiveID(id, window);
- SetFocusID(id, window);
- FocusWindow(window);
- g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
- if (tab_focus_requested || g.IO.KeyCtrl || g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0] || g.NavInputId == id)
- {
- start_text_input = true;
- g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;
- }
+ g.NavInitRequest = false;
+ g.NavInitResultId = g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemId;
+ g.NavInitResultRectRel = ImRect(g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemRect.Min - g.NavWindow->Pos, g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemRect.Max - g.NavWindow->Pos);
+ NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+ if (!IsItemVisible())
+ SetScrollHereY();
}
- if (start_text_input || (g.ActiveId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId == id))
- return InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, v, format);
-
- // Actual drag behavior
- ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- const bool value_changed = DragBehavior(id, data_type, v, v_speed, v_min, v_max, format, power);
- if (value_changed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
-
- // Draw frame
- const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
- RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
- RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, style.FrameRounding);
-
- // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
- char value_buf[64];
- const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
- RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
-
- if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
- RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);
-
- return value_changed;
}
-bool ImGui::DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* tree)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- bool value_changed = false;
- BeginGroup();
- PushID(label);
- PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
- size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
- for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
- {
- PushID(i);
- value_changed |= DragScalar("##v", data_type, v, v_speed, v_min, v_max, format, power);
- SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- PopID();
- PopItemWidth();
- v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
- }
- PopID();
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ window->DC.StateStorage = tree ? tree : &window->StateStorage;
+}
- TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
- EndGroup();
- return value_changed;
+ImGuiStorage* ImGui::GetStateStorage()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ return window->DC.StateStorage;
}
-bool ImGui::DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id)
{
- return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(str_id));
}
-bool ImGui::DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end)
{
- return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(str_id_begin, str_id_end));
}
-bool ImGui::DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::PushID(const void* ptr_id)
{
- return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(ptr_id));
}
-bool ImGui::DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+void ImGui::PushID(int int_id)
{
- return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+ const void* ptr_id = (void*)(intptr_t)int_id;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(ptr_id));
}
-bool ImGui::DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max, float power)
+void ImGui::PopID()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ window->IDStack.pop_back();
+}
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- PushID(label);
- BeginGroup();
- PushMultiItemsWidths(2);
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ return window->GetID(str_id);
+}
- bool value_changed = DragFloat("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? -FLT_MAX : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format, power);
- PopItemWidth();
- SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- value_changed |= DragFloat("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? FLT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format, power);
- PopItemWidth();
- SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ return window->GetID(str_id_begin, str_id_end);
+}
- TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
- EndGroup();
- PopID();
- return value_changed;
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const void* ptr_id)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ return window->GetID(ptr_id);
}
-// NB: v_speed is float to allow adjusting the drag speed with more precision
-bool ImGui::DragInt(const char* label, int* v, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size)
{
- return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;;
+ return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size));
}
-bool ImGui::DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max)
{
- return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;;
+ return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(rect_min, rect_max));
}
-bool ImGui::DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+// Lock horizontal starting position + capture group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
+void ImGui::BeginGroup()
{
- return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+
+ window->DC.GroupStack.resize(window->DC.GroupStack.Size + 1);
+ ImGuiGroupData& group_data = window->DC.GroupStack.back();
+ group_data.BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
+ group_data.BackupIndent = window->DC.Indent;
+ group_data.BackupGroupOffset = window->DC.GroupOffset;
+ group_data.BackupCurrentLineSize = window->DC.CurrentLineSize;
+ group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
+ group_data.BackupLogLinePosY = window->DC.LogLinePosY;
+ group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive = g.ActiveIdIsAlive;
+ group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
+ group_data.AdvanceCursor = true;
+
+ window->DC.GroupOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x - window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+ window->DC.Indent = window->DC.GroupOffset;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ window->DC.CurrentLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f; // To enforce Log carriage return
}
-bool ImGui::DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+void ImGui::EndGroup()
{
- return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.GroupStack.empty()); // Mismatched BeginGroup()/EndGroup() calls
+
+ ImGuiGroupData& group_data = window->DC.GroupStack.back();
+
+ ImRect group_bb(group_data.BackupCursorPos, window->DC.CursorMaxPos);
+ group_bb.Max = ImMax(group_bb.Min, group_bb.Max);
+
+ window->DC.CursorPos = group_data.BackupCursorPos;
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorMaxPos);
+ window->DC.Indent = group_data.BackupIndent;
+ window->DC.GroupOffset = group_data.BackupGroupOffset;
+ window->DC.CurrentLineSize = group_data.BackupCurrentLineSize;
+ window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
+ window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f; // To enforce Log carriage return
+
+ if (group_data.AdvanceCursor)
+ {
+ window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset, group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset); // FIXME: Incorrect, we should grab the base offset from the *first line* of the group but it is hard to obtain now.
+ ItemSize(group_bb.GetSize(), 0.0f);
+ ItemAdd(group_bb, 0);
+ }
+
+ // If the current ActiveId was declared within the boundary of our group, we copy it to LastItemId so IsItemActive(), IsItemDeactivated() etc. will be functional on the entire group.
+ // It would be be neater if we replaced window.DC.LastItemId by e.g. 'bool LastItemIsActive', but would put a little more burden on individual widgets.
+ // (and if you grep for LastItemId you'll notice it is only used in that context.
+ if ((group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive != g.ActiveId) && (g.ActiveIdIsAlive == g.ActiveId) && g.ActiveId) // && g.ActiveIdWindow->RootWindow == window->RootWindow)
+ window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveId;
+ else if (!group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive) // && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow->RootWindow == window->RootWindow)
+ window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame;
+ window->DC.LastItemRect = group_bb;
+
+ window->DC.GroupStack.pop_back();
+
+ //window->DrawList->AddRect(group_bb.Min, group_bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255)); // [Debug]
}
-bool ImGui::DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max)
+// Gets back to previous line and continue with horizontal layout
+// pos_x == 0 : follow right after previous item
+// pos_x != 0 : align to specified x position (relative to window/group left)
+// spacing_w < 0 : use default spacing if pos_x == 0, no spacing if pos_x != 0
+// spacing_w >= 0 : enforce spacing amount
+void ImGui::SameLine(float pos_x, float spacing_w)
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
+ return;
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- PushID(label);
- BeginGroup();
- PushMultiItemsWidths(2);
-
- bool value_changed = DragInt("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MIN : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format);
- PopItemWidth();
- SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- value_changed |= DragInt("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format);
- PopItemWidth();
- SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
-
- TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
- EndGroup();
- PopID();
-
- return value_changed;
+ if (pos_x != 0.0f)
+ {
+ if (spacing_w < 0.0f) spacing_w = 0.0f;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + pos_x + spacing_w + window->DC.GroupOffset.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (spacing_w < 0.0f) spacing_w = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x + spacing_w;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y;
+ }
+ window->DC.CurrentLineSize = window->DC.PrevLineSize;
+ window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset;
}
-void ImGui::PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
+void ImGui::Indent(float indent_w)
{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
+ window->DC.Indent.x += (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+}
+void ImGui::Unindent(float indent_w)
+{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ window->DC.Indent.x -= (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+}
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
- if (graph_size.x == 0.0f)
- graph_size.x = CalcItemWidth();
- if (graph_size.y == 0.0f)
- graph_size.y = label_size.y + (style.FramePadding.y * 2);
-
- const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(graph_size.x, graph_size.y));
- const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
- const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0));
- ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0, &frame_bb))
- return;
- const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(inner_bb, 0);
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] TOOLTIPS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- // Determine scale from values if not specified
- if (scale_min == FLT_MAX || scale_max == FLT_MAX)
+void ImGui::BeginTooltip()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget)
{
- float v_min = FLT_MAX;
- float v_max = -FLT_MAX;
- for (int i = 0; i < values_count; i++)
- {
- const float v = values_getter(data, i);
- v_min = ImMin(v_min, v);
- v_max = ImMax(v_max, v);
- }
- if (scale_min == FLT_MAX)
- scale_min = v_min;
- if (scale_max == FLT_MAX)
- scale_max = v_max;
+ // The default tooltip position is a little offset to give space to see the context menu (it's also clamped within the current viewport/monitor)
+ // In the context of a dragging tooltip we try to reduce that offset and we enforce following the cursor.
+ // Whatever we do we want to call SetNextWindowPos() to enforce a tooltip position and disable clipping the tooltip without our display area, like regular tooltip do.
+ //ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - g.Style.WindowPadding;
+ ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos + ImVec2(16 * g.Style.MouseCursorScale, 8 * g.Style.MouseCursorScale);
+ SetNextWindowPos(tooltip_pos);
+ SetNextWindowBgAlpha(g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg].w * 0.60f);
+ //PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, g.Style.Alpha * 0.60f); // This would be nice but e.g ColorButton with checkboard has issue with transparent colors :(
+ BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
}
-
- RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
-
- if (values_count > 0)
+ else
{
- int res_w = ImMin((int)graph_size.x, values_count) + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
- int item_count = values_count + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
-
- // Tooltip on hover
- int v_hovered = -1;
- if (hovered)
- {
- const float t = ImClamp((g.IO.MousePos.x - inner_bb.Min.x) / (inner_bb.Max.x - inner_bb.Min.x), 0.0f, 0.9999f);
- const int v_idx = (int)(t * item_count);
- IM_ASSERT(v_idx >= 0 && v_idx < values_count);
-
- const float v0 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + values_offset) % values_count);
- const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + 1 + values_offset) % values_count);
- if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
- SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g\n%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0, v_idx+1, v1);
- else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
- SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0);
- v_hovered = v_idx;
- }
-
- const float t_step = 1.0f / (float)res_w;
- const float inv_scale = (scale_min == scale_max) ? 0.0f : (1.0f / (scale_max - scale_min));
-
- float v0 = values_getter(data, (0 + values_offset) % values_count);
- float t0 = 0.0f;
- ImVec2 tp0 = ImVec2( t0, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v0 - scale_min) * inv_scale) ); // Point in the normalized space of our target rectangle
- float histogram_zero_line_t = (scale_min * scale_max < 0.0f) ? (-scale_min * inv_scale) : (scale_min < 0.0f ? 0.0f : 1.0f); // Where does the zero line stands
-
- const ImU32 col_base = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLines : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram);
- const ImU32 col_hovered = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered);
+ BeginTooltipEx(0, false);
+ }
+}
- for (int n = 0; n < res_w; n++)
- {
- const float t1 = t0 + t_step;
- const int v1_idx = (int)(t0 * item_count + 0.5f);
- IM_ASSERT(v1_idx >= 0 && v1_idx < values_count);
- const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v1_idx + values_offset + 1) % values_count);
- const ImVec2 tp1 = ImVec2( t1, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v1 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );
-
- // NB: Draw calls are merged together by the DrawList system. Still, we should render our batch are lower level to save a bit of CPU.
- ImVec2 pos0 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, tp0);
- ImVec2 pos1 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? tp1 : ImVec2(tp1.x, histogram_zero_line_t));
- if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
- {
- window->DrawList->AddLine(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
- }
- else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
+// Not exposed publicly as BeginTooltip() because bool parameters are evil. Let's see if other needs arise first.
+void ImGui::BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags, bool override_previous_tooltip)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ char window_name[16];
+ ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", g.TooltipOverrideCount);
+ if (override_previous_tooltip)
+ if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(window_name))
+ if (window->Active)
{
- if (pos1.x >= pos0.x + 2.0f)
- pos1.x -= 1.0f;
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
+ // Hide previous tooltip from being displayed. We can't easily "reset" the content of a window so we create a new one.
+ window->Hidden = true;
+ window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
+ ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", ++g.TooltipOverrideCount);
}
-
- t0 = t1;
- tp0 = tp1;
- }
- }
-
- // Text overlay
- if (overlay_text)
- RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, overlay_text, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));
-
- if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
- RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);
+ ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings|ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize;
+ Begin(window_name, NULL, flags | extra_flags);
}
-struct ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData
+void ImGui::EndTooltip()
{
- const float* Values;
- int Stride;
-
- ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData(const float* values, int stride) { Values = values; Stride = stride; }
-};
+ IM_ASSERT(GetCurrentWindowRead()->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip); // Mismatched BeginTooltip()/EndTooltip() calls
+ End();
+}
-static float Plot_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx)
+void ImGui::SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
- ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData* plot_data = (ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData*)data;
- const float v = *(const float*)(const void*)((const unsigned char*)plot_data->Values + (size_t)idx * plot_data->Stride);
- return v;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget)
+ BeginTooltip();
+ else
+ BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
+ TextV(fmt, args);
+ EndTooltip();
}
-void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
+void ImGui::SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...)
{
- ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
- PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ SetTooltipV(fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
}
-void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] POPUPS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id)
{
- PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].PopupId == id;
}
-void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
+bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id)
{
- ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
- PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].PopupId == g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
}
-void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
+ImGuiWindow* ImGui::GetFrontMostPopupModal()
{
- PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ for (int n = g.OpenPopupStack.Size-1; n >= 0; n--)
+ if (ImGuiWindow* popup = g.OpenPopupStack.Data[n].Window)
+ if (popup->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
+ return popup;
+ return NULL;
}
-// size_arg (for each axis) < 0.0f: align to end, 0.0f: auto, > 0.0f: specified size
-void ImGui::ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg, const char* overlay)
+void ImGui::OpenPopup(const char* str_id)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
-
- ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- ImRect bb(pos, pos + CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
- ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
- return;
-
- // Render
- fraction = ImSaturate(fraction);
- RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
- bb.Expand(ImVec2(-style.FrameBorderSize, -style.FrameBorderSize));
- const ImVec2 fill_br = ImVec2(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, fraction), bb.Max.y);
- RenderRectFilledRangeH(window->DrawList, bb, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram), 0.0f, fraction, style.FrameRounding);
-
- // Default displaying the fraction as percentage string, but user can override it
- char overlay_buf[32];
- if (!overlay)
- {
- ImFormatString(overlay_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(overlay_buf), "%.0f%%", fraction*100+0.01f);
- overlay = overlay_buf;
- }
-
- ImVec2 overlay_size = CalcTextSize(overlay, NULL);
- if (overlay_size.x > 0.0f)
- RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(ImClamp(fill_br.x + style.ItemSpacing.x, bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - overlay_size.x - style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), bb.Min.y), bb.Max, overlay, NULL, &overlay_size, ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f), &bb);
+ OpenPopupEx(g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id));
}
-bool ImGui::Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v)
+// Mark popup as open (toggle toward open state).
+// Popups are closed when user click outside, or activate a pressable item, or CloseCurrentPopup() is called within a BeginPopup()/EndPopup() block.
+// Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID-stack (so OpenPopup and BeginPopup needs to be at the same level).
+// One open popup per level of the popup hierarchy (NB: when assigning we reset the Window member of ImGuiPopupRef to NULL)
+void ImGui::OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
-
- const ImRect check_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2)); // We want a square shape to we use Y twice
- ItemSize(check_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ int current_stack_size = g.BeginPopupStack.Size;
+ ImGuiPopupRef popup_ref; // Tagged as new ref as Window will be set back to NULL if we write this into OpenPopupStack.
+ popup_ref.PopupId = id;
+ popup_ref.Window = NULL;
+ popup_ref.ParentWindow = parent_window;
+ popup_ref.OpenFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
+ popup_ref.OpenParentId = parent_window->IDStack.back();
+ popup_ref.OpenPopupPos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
+ popup_ref.OpenMousePos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? g.IO.MousePos : popup_ref.OpenPopupPos;
- ImRect total_bb = check_bb;
- if (label_size.x > 0)
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- const ImRect text_bb(window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(0,style.FramePadding.y), window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(0,style.FramePadding.y) + label_size);
- if (label_size.x > 0)
+ //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("OpenPopupEx(0x%08X)\n", g.FrameCount, id);
+ if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size < current_stack_size + 1)
{
- ItemSize(ImVec2(text_bb.GetWidth(), check_bb.GetHeight()), style.FramePadding.y);
- total_bb = ImRect(ImMin(check_bb.Min, text_bb.Min), ImMax(check_bb.Max, text_bb.Max));
+ g.OpenPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
}
-
- if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
- return false;
-
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
- if (pressed)
+ else
{
- *v = !(*v);
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
- }
+ // Gently handle the user mistakenly calling OpenPopup() every frame. It is a programming mistake! However, if we were to run the regular code path, the ui
+ // would become completely unusable because the popup will always be in hidden-while-calculating-size state _while_ claiming focus. Which would be a very confusing
+ // situation for the programmer. Instead, we silently allow the popup to proceed, it will keep reappearing and the programming error will be more obvious to understand.
+ if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id && g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1)
+ {
+ g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount = popup_ref.OpenFrameCount;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Close child popups if any, then flag popup for open/reopen
+ g.OpenPopupStack.resize(current_stack_size + 1);
+ g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size] = popup_ref;
+ }
- RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
- RenderFrame(check_bb.Min, check_bb.Max, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
- if (*v)
- {
- const float check_sz = ImMin(check_bb.GetWidth(), check_bb.GetHeight());
- const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(check_sz / 6.0f));
- RenderCheckMark(check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad,pad), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark), check_bb.GetWidth() - pad*2.0f);
+ // When reopening a popup we first refocus its parent, otherwise if its parent is itself a popup it would get closed by ClosePopupsOverWindow().
+ // This is equivalent to what ClosePopupToLevel() does.
+ //if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id)
+ // FocusWindow(parent_window);
}
-
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- LogRenderedText(&text_bb.Min, *v ? "[x]" : "[ ]");
- if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
- RenderText(text_bb.Min, label);
-
- return pressed;
}
-bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value)
+bool ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
{
- bool v = ((*flags & flags_value) == flags_value);
- bool pressed = Checkbox(label, &v);
- if (pressed)
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
{
- if (v)
- *flags |= flags_value;
- else
- *flags &= ~flags_value;
+ ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : window->DC.LastItemId; // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict!
+ IM_ASSERT(id != 0); // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item)
+ OpenPopupEx(id);
+ return true;
}
-
- return pressed;
+ return false;
}
-bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, bool active)
+void ImGui::ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
-
- const ImRect check_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2-1, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2-1));
- ItemSize(check_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (g.OpenPopupStack.empty())
+ return;
- ImRect total_bb = check_bb;
- if (label_size.x > 0)
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- const ImRect text_bb(window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(0, style.FramePadding.y), window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(0, style.FramePadding.y) + label_size);
- if (label_size.x > 0)
+ // When popups are stacked, clicking on a lower level popups puts focus back to it and close popups above it.
+ // Don't close our own child popup windows.
+ int popup_count_to_keep = 0;
+ if (ref_window)
{
- ItemSize(ImVec2(text_bb.GetWidth(), check_bb.GetHeight()), style.FramePadding.y);
- total_bb.Add(text_bb);
- }
-
- if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
- return false;
-
- ImVec2 center = check_bb.GetCenter();
- center.x = (float)(int)center.x + 0.5f;
- center.y = (float)(int)center.y + 0.5f;
- const float radius = check_bb.GetHeight() * 0.5f;
-
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
- if (pressed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
+ // Find the highest popup which is a descendant of the reference window (generally reference window = NavWindow)
+ for (; popup_count_to_keep < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; popup_count_to_keep++)
+ {
+ ImGuiPopupRef& popup = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_count_to_keep];
+ if (!popup.Window)
+ continue;
+ IM_ASSERT((popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0);
+ if (popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+ continue;
- RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
- window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), 16);
- if (active)
- {
- const float check_sz = ImMin(check_bb.GetWidth(), check_bb.GetHeight());
- const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(check_sz / 6.0f));
- window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius-pad, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark), 16);
+ // Trim the stack if popups are not direct descendant of the reference window (which is often the NavWindow)
+ bool popup_or_descendent_has_focus = false;
+ for (int m = popup_count_to_keep; m < g.OpenPopupStack.Size && !popup_or_descendent_has_focus; m++)
+ if (g.OpenPopupStack[m].Window && g.OpenPopupStack[m].Window->RootWindow == ref_window->RootWindow)
+ popup_or_descendent_has_focus = true;
+ if (!popup_or_descendent_has_focus)
+ break;
+ }
}
-
- if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
+ if (popup_count_to_keep < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) // This test is not required but it allows to set a convenient breakpoint on the statement below
{
- window->DrawList->AddCircle(center+ImVec2(1,1), radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
- window->DrawList->AddCircle(center, radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
+ //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("ClosePopupsOverWindow(%s) -> ClosePopupToLevel(%d)\n", ref_window->Name, popup_count_to_keep);
+ ClosePopupToLevel(popup_count_to_keep, false);
}
-
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- LogRenderedText(&text_bb.Min, active ? "(x)" : "( )");
- if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
- RenderText(text_bb.Min, label);
-
- return pressed;
}
-bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, int v_button)
+void ImGui::ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining, bool apply_focus_to_window_under)
{
- const bool pressed = RadioButton(label, *v == v_button);
- if (pressed)
- *v = v_button;
- return pressed;
-}
-
-static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end)
-{
- int line_count = 0;
- const char* s = text_begin;
- while (char c = *s++) // We are only matching for \n so we can ignore UTF-8 decoding
- if (c == '\n')
- line_count++;
- s--;
- if (s[0] != '\n' && s[0] != '\r')
- line_count++;
- *out_text_end = s;
- return line_count;
-}
-
-static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining, ImVec2* out_offset, bool stop_on_new_line)
-{
- ImFont* font = GImGui->Font;
- const float line_height = GImGui->FontSize;
- const float scale = line_height / font->FontSize;
-
- ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0,0);
- float line_width = 0.0f;
+ IM_ASSERT(remaining >= 0);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* focus_window = (remaining > 0) ? g.OpenPopupStack[remaining-1].Window : g.OpenPopupStack[0].ParentWindow;
+ g.OpenPopupStack.resize(remaining);
- const ImWchar* s = text_begin;
- while (s < text_end)
+ // FIXME: This code is faulty and we may want to eventually to replace or remove the 'apply_focus_to_window_under=true' path completely.
+ // Instead of using g.OpenPopupStack[remaining-1].Window etc. we should find the highest root window that is behind the popups we are closing.
+ // The current code will set focus to the parent of the popup window which is incorrect.
+ // It rarely manifested until now because UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame() would call FocusWindow() again on the clicked window,
+ // leading to a chain of focusing A (clicked window) then B (parent window of the popup) then A again.
+ // However if the clicked window has the _NoMove flag set we would be left with B focused.
+ // For now, we have disabled this path when called from ClosePopupsOverWindow() because the users of ClosePopupsOverWindow() don't need to alter focus anyway,
+ // but we should inspect and fix this properly.
+ if (apply_focus_to_window_under)
{
- unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*s++);
- if (c == '\n')
- {
- text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width);
- text_size.y += line_height;
- line_width = 0.0f;
- if (stop_on_new_line)
- break;
- continue;
- }
- if (c == '\r')
- continue;
-
- const float char_width = font->GetCharAdvance((unsigned short)c) * scale;
- line_width += char_width;
+ if (g.NavLayer == 0)
+ focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(focus_window);
+ FocusWindow(focus_window);
}
-
- if (text_size.x < line_width)
- text_size.x = line_width;
-
- if (out_offset)
- *out_offset = ImVec2(line_width, text_size.y + line_height); // offset allow for the possibility of sitting after a trailing \n
-
- if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f) // whereas size.y will ignore the trailing \n
- text_size.y += line_height;
-
- if (remaining)
- *remaining = s;
-
- return text_size;
}
-// Wrapper for stb_textedit.h to edit text (our wrapper is for: statically sized buffer, single-line, wchar characters. InputText converts between UTF-8 and wchar)
-namespace ImGuiStb
+// Close the popup we have begin-ed into.
+void ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup()
{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ int popup_idx = g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1;
+ if (popup_idx < 0 || popup_idx >= g.OpenPopupStack.Size || g.BeginPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId != g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId)
+ return;
+
+ // Closing a menu closes its top-most parent popup (unless a modal)
+ while (popup_idx > 0)
+ {
+ ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].Window;
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx - 1].Window;
+ bool close_parent = false;
+ if (popup_window && (popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+ if (parent_popup_window == NULL || !(parent_popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal))
+ close_parent = true;
+ if (!close_parent)
+ break;
+ popup_idx--;
+ }
+ //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("CloseCurrentPopup %d -> %d\n", g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1, popup_idx);
+ ClosePopupToLevel(popup_idx, true);
-static int STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj) { return obj->CurLenW; }
-static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { return obj->Text[idx]; }
-static float STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int line_start_idx, int char_idx) { ImWchar c = obj->Text[line_start_idx+char_idx]; if (c == '\n') return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE; return GImGui->Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (GImGui->FontSize / GImGui->Font->FontSize); }
-static int STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(int key) { return key >= 0x10000 ? 0 : key; }
-static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n';
-static void STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(StbTexteditRow* r, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int line_start_idx)
-{
- const ImWchar* text = obj->Text.Data;
- const ImWchar* text_remaining = NULL;
- const ImVec2 size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(text + line_start_idx, text + obj->CurLenW, &text_remaining, NULL, true);
- r->x0 = 0.0f;
- r->x1 = size.x;
- r->baseline_y_delta = size.y;
- r->ymin = 0.0f;
- r->ymax = size.y;
- r->num_chars = (int)(text_remaining - (text + line_start_idx));
+ // A common pattern is to close a popup when selecting a menu item/selectable that will open another window.
+ // To improve this usage pattern, we avoid nav highlight for a single frame in the parent window.
+ // Similarly, we could avoid mouse hover highlight in this window but it is less visually problematic.
+ if (ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow)
+ window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = true;
}
-static bool is_separator(unsigned int c) { return ImCharIsBlankW(c) || c==',' || c==';' || c=='(' || c==')' || c=='{' || c=='}' || c=='[' || c==']' || c=='|'; }
-static int is_word_boundary_from_right(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { return idx > 0 ? (is_separator( obj->Text[idx-1] ) && !is_separator( obj->Text[idx] ) ) : 1; }
-static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { idx--; while (idx >= 0 && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx--; return idx < 0 ? 0 : idx; }
-#ifdef __APPLE__ // FIXME: Move setting to IO structure
-static int is_word_boundary_from_left(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { return idx > 0 ? (!is_separator( obj->Text[idx-1] ) && is_separator( obj->Text[idx] ) ) : 1; }
-static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_left(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
-#else
-static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
-#endif
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL // They need to be #define for stb_textedit.h
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL
-
-static void STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int pos, int n)
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
{
- ImWchar* dst = obj->Text.Data + pos;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (!IsPopupOpen(id))
+ {
+ g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ char name[20];
+ if (extra_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
+ ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Menu_%02d", g.BeginPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth
+ else
+ ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Popup_%08x", id); // Not recycling, so we can close/open during the same frame
- // We maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar formats
- obj->CurLenA -= ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(dst, dst + n);
- obj->CurLenW -= n;
+ bool is_open = Begin(name, NULL, extra_flags | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup);
+ if (!is_open) // NB: Begin can return false when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
+ EndPopup();
- // Offset remaining text
- const ImWchar* src = obj->Text.Data + pos + n;
- while (ImWchar c = *src++)
- *dst++ = c;
- *dst = '\0';
+ return is_open;
}
-static bool STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int pos, const ImWchar* new_text, int new_text_len)
+bool ImGui::BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
- const int text_len = obj->CurLenW;
- IM_ASSERT(pos <= text_len);
- if (new_text_len + text_len + 1 > obj->Text.Size)
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= g.BeginPopupStack.Size) // Early out for performance
+ {
+ g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
return false;
+ }
+ flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings;
+ return BeginPopupEx(g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id), flags);
+}
- const int new_text_len_utf8 = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(new_text, new_text + new_text_len);
- if (new_text_len_utf8 + obj->CurLenA + 1 > obj->BufSizeA)
+// If 'p_open' is specified for a modal popup window, the popup will have a regular close button which will close the popup.
+// Note that popup visibility status is owned by imgui (and manipulated with e.g. OpenPopup) so the actual value of *p_open is meaningless here.
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(name);
+ if (!IsPopupOpen(id))
+ {
+ g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
return false;
+ }
- ImWchar* text = obj->Text.Data;
- if (pos != text_len)
- memmove(text + pos + new_text_len, text + pos, (size_t)(text_len - pos) * sizeof(ImWchar));
- memcpy(text + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(ImWchar));
-
- obj->CurLenW += new_text_len;
- obj->CurLenA += new_text_len_utf8;
- obj->Text[obj->CurLenW] = '\0';
+ // Center modal windows by default
+ // FIXME: Should test for (PosCond & window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags) with the upcoming window.
+ if (g.NextWindowData.PosCond == 0)
+ SetNextWindowPos(g.IO.DisplaySize * 0.5f, ImGuiCond_Appearing, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
- return true;
+ flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings;
+ const bool is_open = Begin(name, p_open, flags);
+ if (!is_open || (p_open && !*p_open)) // NB: is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
+ {
+ EndPopup();
+ if (is_open)
+ ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);
+ return false;
+ }
+ return is_open;
}
-// We don't use an enum so we can build even with conflicting symbols (if another user of stb_textedit.h leak their STB_TEXTEDIT_K_* symbols)
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT 0x10000 // keyboard input to move cursor left
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT 0x10001 // keyboard input to move cursor right
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP 0x10002 // keyboard input to move cursor up
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN 0x10003 // keyboard input to move cursor down
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART 0x10004 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND 0x10005 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART 0x10006 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND 0x10007 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE 0x10008 // keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE 0x10009 // keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO 0x1000A // keyboard input to perform undo
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO 0x1000B // keyboard input to perform redo
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT 0x1000C // keyboard input to move cursor left one word
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT 0x1000D // keyboard input to move cursor right one word
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT 0x20000
+void ImGui::EndPopup()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup); // Mismatched BeginPopup()/EndPopup() calls
+ IM_ASSERT(g.BeginPopupStack.Size > 0);
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
-#include "stb_textedit.h"
+ // Make all menus and popups wrap around for now, may need to expose that policy.
+ NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(g.CurrentWindow, ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY);
+ End();
}
-void ImGuiTextEditState::OnKeyPressed(int key)
+// This is a helper to handle the simplest case of associating one named popup to one given widget.
+// You may want to handle this on user side if you have specific needs (e.g. tweaking IsItemHovered() parameters).
+// You can pass a NULL str_id to use the identifier of the last item.
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
{
- stb_textedit_key(this, &StbState, key);
- CursorFollow = true;
- CursorAnimReset();
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : window->DC.LastItemId; // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict!
+ IM_ASSERT(id != 0); // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item)
+ if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
+ OpenPopupEx(id);
+ return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
}
-// Public API to manipulate UTF-8 text
-// We expose UTF-8 to the user (unlike the STB_TEXTEDIT_* functions which are manipulating wchar)
-// FIXME: The existence of this rarely exercised code path is a bit of a nuisance.
-void ImGuiTextEditCallbackData::DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count)
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, int mouse_button, bool also_over_items)
{
- IM_ASSERT(pos + bytes_count <= BufTextLen);
- char* dst = Buf + pos;
- const char* src = Buf + pos + bytes_count;
- while (char c = *src++)
- *dst++ = c;
- *dst = '\0';
-
- if (CursorPos + bytes_count >= pos)
- CursorPos -= bytes_count;
- else if (CursorPos >= pos)
- CursorPos = pos;
- SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
- BufDirty = true;
- BufTextLen -= bytes_count;
+ if (!str_id)
+ str_id = "window_context";
+ ImGuiID id = GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
+ if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
+ if (also_over_items || !IsAnyItemHovered())
+ OpenPopupEx(id);
+ return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
}
-void ImGuiTextEditCallbackData::InsertChars(int pos, const char* new_text, const char* new_text_end)
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
{
- const int new_text_len = new_text_end ? (int)(new_text_end - new_text) : (int)strlen(new_text);
- if (new_text_len + BufTextLen + 1 >= BufSize)
- return;
-
- if (BufTextLen != pos)
- memmove(Buf + pos + new_text_len, Buf + pos, (size_t)(BufTextLen - pos));
- memcpy(Buf + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(char));
- Buf[BufTextLen + new_text_len] = '\0';
-
- if (CursorPos >= pos)
- CursorPos += new_text_len;
- SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
- BufDirty = true;
- BufTextLen += new_text_len;
+ if (!str_id)
+ str_id = "void_context";
+ ImGuiID id = GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
+ if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && !IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow))
+ OpenPopupEx(id);
+ return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
}
-// Return false to discard a character.
-static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiTextEditCallback callback, void* user_data)
+ImRect ImGui::GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(ImGuiWindow*)
{
- unsigned int c = *p_char;
-
- if (c < 128 && c != ' ' && !isprint((int)(c & 0xFF)))
- {
- bool pass = false;
- pass |= (c == '\n' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline));
- pass |= (c == '\t' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput));
- if (!pass)
- return false;
- }
-
- if (c >= 0xE000 && c <= 0xF8FF) // Filter private Unicode range. I don't imagine anybody would want to input them. GLFW on OSX seems to send private characters for special keys like arrow keys.
- return false;
-
- if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific))
- {
- if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal)
- if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/'))
- return false;
-
- if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)
- if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/') && (c != 'e') && (c != 'E'))
- return false;
-
- if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal)
- if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && !(c >= 'a' && c <= 'f') && !(c >= 'A' && c <= 'F'))
- return false;
-
- if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)
- if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
- *p_char = (c += (unsigned int)('A'-'a'));
-
- if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank)
- if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
- return false;
- }
-
- if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter)
- {
- ImGuiTextEditCallbackData callback_data;
- memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiTextEditCallbackData));
- callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter;
- callback_data.EventChar = (ImWchar)c;
- callback_data.Flags = flags;
- callback_data.UserData = user_data;
- if (callback(&callback_data) != 0)
- return false;
- *p_char = callback_data.EventChar;
- if (!callback_data.EventChar)
- return false;
- }
-
- return true;
+ ImVec2 padding = GImGui->Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding;
+ ImRect r_screen = GetViewportRect();
+ r_screen.Expand(ImVec2((r_screen.GetWidth() > padding.x * 2) ? -padding.x : 0.0f, (r_screen.GetHeight() > padding.y * 2) ? -padding.y : 0.0f));
+ return r_screen;
}
-// Edit a string of text
-// NB: when active, hold on a privately held copy of the text (and apply back to 'buf'). So changing 'buf' while active has no effect.
-// FIXME: Rather messy function partly because we are doing UTF8 > u16 > UTF8 conversions on the go to more easily handle stb_textedit calls. Ideally we should stay in UTF-8 all the time. See https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188
-bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiTextEditCallback callback, void* user_data)
+// r_avoid = the rectangle to avoid (e.g. for tooltip it is a rectangle around the mouse cursor which we want to avoid. for popups it's a small point around the cursor.)
+// r_outer = the visible area rectangle, minus safe area padding. If our popup size won't fit because of safe area padding we ignore it.
+ImVec2 ImGui::FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(const ImVec2& ref_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDir* last_dir, const ImRect& r_outer, const ImRect& r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy policy)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline))); // Can't use both together (they both use up/down keys)
- IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))); // Can't use both together (they both use tab key)
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
-
- const bool is_multiline = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline) != 0;
- const bool is_editable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) == 0;
- const bool is_password = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) != 0;
- const bool is_undoable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo) == 0;
-
- if (is_multiline) // Open group before calling GetID() because groups tracks id created within their scope,
- BeginGroup();
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
- ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), (is_multiline ? GetTextLineHeight() * 8.0f : label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f); // Arbitrary default of 8 lines high for multi-line
- const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
- const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x) : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+ ImVec2 base_pos_clamped = ImClamp(ref_pos, r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max - size);
+ //GImGui->OverlayDrawList.AddRect(r_avoid.Min, r_avoid.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));
+ //GImGui->OverlayDrawList.AddRect(r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max, IM_COL32(0,255,0,255));
- ImGuiWindow* draw_window = window;
- if (is_multiline)
+ // Combo Box policy (we want a connecting edge)
+ if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox)
{
- ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb);
- if (!BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize()))
+ const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Left, ImGuiDir_Up };
+ for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++)
{
- EndChildFrame();
- EndGroup();
- return false;
+ const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n];
+ if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction?
+ continue;
+ ImVec2 pos;
+ if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Max.y); // Below, Toward Right (default)
+ if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Right
+ if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Max.y); // Below, Toward Left
+ if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Left
+ if (!r_outer.Contains(ImRect(pos, pos + size)))
+ continue;
+ *last_dir = dir;
+ return pos;
}
- draw_window = GetCurrentWindow();
- draw_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext |= draw_window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask; // This is to ensure that EndChild() will display a navigation highlight
- size.x -= draw_window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
}
- else
- {
- ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
- return false;
- }
- const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
- if (hovered)
- g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput;
- // Password pushes a temporary font with only a fallback glyph
- if (is_password)
+ // Default popup policy
+ const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Up, ImGuiDir_Left };
+ for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++)
{
- const ImFontGlyph* glyph = g.Font->FindGlyph('*');
- ImFont* password_font = &g.InputTextPasswordFont;
- password_font->FontSize = g.Font->FontSize;
- password_font->Scale = g.Font->Scale;
- password_font->DisplayOffset = g.Font->DisplayOffset;
- password_font->Ascent = g.Font->Ascent;
- password_font->Descent = g.Font->Descent;
- password_font->ContainerAtlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
- password_font->FallbackGlyph = glyph;
- password_font->FallbackAdvanceX = glyph->AdvanceX;
- IM_ASSERT(password_font->Glyphs.empty() && password_font->IndexAdvanceX.empty() && password_font->IndexLookup.empty());
- PushFont(password_font);
+ const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n];
+ if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction?
+ continue;
+ float avail_w = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left ? r_avoid.Min.x : r_outer.Max.x) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Right ? r_avoid.Max.x : r_outer.Min.x);
+ float avail_h = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up ? r_avoid.Min.y : r_outer.Max.y) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Down ? r_avoid.Max.y : r_outer.Min.y);
+ if (avail_w < size.x || avail_h < size.y)
+ continue;
+ ImVec2 pos;
+ pos.x = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? r_avoid.Min.x - size.x : (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) ? r_avoid.Max.x : base_pos_clamped.x;
+ pos.y = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? r_avoid.Min.y - size.y : (dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? r_avoid.Max.y : base_pos_clamped.y;
+ *last_dir = dir;
+ return pos;
}
- // NB: we are only allowed to access 'edit_state' if we are the active widget.
- ImGuiTextEditState& edit_state = g.InputTextState;
-
- const bool focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id, (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion|ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput)) == 0); // Using completion callback disable keyboard tabbing
- const bool focus_requested_by_code = focus_requested && (window->FocusIdxAllCounter == window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent);
- const bool focus_requested_by_tab = focus_requested && !focus_requested_by_code;
-
- const bool user_clicked = hovered && io.MouseClicked[0];
- const bool user_scrolled = is_multiline && g.ActiveId == 0 && edit_state.Id == id && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == draw_window->GetIDNoKeepAlive("#SCROLLY");
- const bool user_nav_input_start = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((g.NavInputId == id) || (g.NavActivateId == id && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard));
+ // Fallback, try to keep within display
+ *last_dir = ImGuiDir_None;
+ ImVec2 pos = ref_pos;
+ pos.x = ImMax(ImMin(pos.x + size.x, r_outer.Max.x) - size.x, r_outer.Min.x);
+ pos.y = ImMax(ImMin(pos.y + size.y, r_outer.Max.y) - size.y, r_outer.Min.y);
+ return pos;
+}
- bool clear_active_id = false;
+ImVec2 ImGui::FindBestWindowPosForPopup(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- bool select_all = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll) != 0 || user_nav_input_start) && (!is_multiline);
- if (focus_requested || user_clicked || user_scrolled || user_nav_input_start)
+ ImRect r_outer = GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(window);
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
{
- if (g.ActiveId != id)
- {
- // Start edition
- // Take a copy of the initial buffer value (both in original UTF-8 format and converted to wchar)
- // From the moment we focused we are ignoring the content of 'buf' (unless we are in read-only mode)
- const int prev_len_w = edit_state.CurLenW;
- edit_state.Text.resize(buf_size+1); // wchar count <= UTF-8 count. we use +1 to make sure that .Data isn't NULL so it doesn't crash.
- edit_state.InitialText.resize(buf_size+1); // UTF-8. we use +1 to make sure that .Data isn't NULL so it doesn't crash.
- ImStrncpy(edit_state.InitialText.Data, buf, edit_state.InitialText.Size);
- const char* buf_end = NULL;
- edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.Text.Data, edit_state.Text.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
- edit_state.CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf); // We can't get the result from ImFormatString() above because it is not UTF-8 aware. Here we'll cut off malformed UTF-8.
- edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
-
- // Preserve cursor position and undo/redo stack if we come back to same widget
- // FIXME: We should probably compare the whole buffer to be on the safety side. Comparing buf (utf8) and edit_state.Text (wchar).
- const bool recycle_state = (edit_state.Id == id) && (prev_len_w == edit_state.CurLenW);
- if (recycle_state)
- {
- // Recycle existing cursor/selection/undo stack but clamp position
- // Note a single mouse click will override the cursor/position immediately by calling stb_textedit_click handler.
- edit_state.CursorClamp();
- }
- else
- {
- edit_state.Id = id;
- edit_state.ScrollX = 0.0f;
- stb_textedit_initialize_state(&edit_state.StbState, !is_multiline);
- if (!is_multiline && focus_requested_by_code)
- select_all = true;
- }
- if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode)
- edit_state.StbState.insert_mode = true;
- if (!is_multiline && (focus_requested_by_tab || (user_clicked && io.KeyCtrl)))
- select_all = true;
- }
- SetActiveID(id, window);
- SetFocusID(id, window);
- FocusWindow(window);
- if (!is_multiline && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory))
- g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags |= ((1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down));
+ // Child menus typically request _any_ position within the parent menu item, and then we move the new menu outside the parent bounds.
+ // This is how we end up with child menus appearing (most-commonly) on the right of the parent menu.
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == window);
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindowStack[g.CurrentWindowStack.Size - 2];
+ float horizontal_overlap = g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; // We want some overlap to convey the relative depth of each menu (currently the amount of overlap is hard-coded to style.ItemSpacing.x).
+ ImRect r_avoid;
+ if (parent_window->DC.MenuBarAppending)
+ r_avoid = ImRect(-FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.y + parent_window->TitleBarHeight(), FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.y + parent_window->TitleBarHeight() + parent_window->MenuBarHeight());
+ else
+ r_avoid = ImRect(parent_window->Pos.x + horizontal_overlap, -FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.x + parent_window->Size.x - horizontal_overlap - parent_window->ScrollbarSizes.x, FLT_MAX);
+ return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
}
- else if (io.MouseClicked[0])
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
{
- // Release focus when we click outside
- clear_active_id = true;
+ ImRect r_avoid = ImRect(window->Pos.x - 1, window->Pos.y - 1, window->Pos.x + 1, window->Pos.y + 1);
+ return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
}
-
- bool value_changed = false;
- bool enter_pressed = false;
-
- if (g.ActiveId == id)
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
{
- if (!is_editable && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
- {
- // When read-only we always use the live data passed to the function
- edit_state.Text.resize(buf_size+1);
- const char* buf_end = NULL;
- edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.Text.Data, edit_state.Text.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
- edit_state.CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);
- edit_state.CursorClamp();
- }
-
- edit_state.BufSizeA = buf_size;
-
- // Although we are active we don't prevent mouse from hovering other elements unless we are interacting right now with the widget.
- // Down the line we should have a cleaner library-wide concept of Selected vs Active.
- g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = !io.MouseDown[0];
- g.WantTextInputNextFrame = 1;
-
- // Edit in progress
- const float mouse_x = (io.MousePos.x - frame_bb.Min.x - style.FramePadding.x) + edit_state.ScrollX;
- const float mouse_y = (is_multiline ? (io.MousePos.y - draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y - style.FramePadding.y) : (g.FontSize*0.5f));
-
- const bool is_osx = io.OptMacOSXBehaviors;
- if (select_all || (hovered && !is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
- {
- edit_state.SelectAll();
- edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock = true;
- }
- else if (hovered && is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
- {
- // Double-click select a word only, OS X style (by simulating keystrokes)
- edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT);
- edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
- }
- else if (io.MouseClicked[0] && !edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock)
- {
- if (hovered)
- {
- stb_textedit_click(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, mouse_x, mouse_y);
- edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
- }
- }
- else if (io.MouseDown[0] && !edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock && (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f))
- {
- stb_textedit_drag(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, mouse_x, mouse_y);
- edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
- edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
- }
- if (edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock && !io.MouseDown[0])
- edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock = false;
-
- if (io.InputCharacters[0])
- {
- // Process text input (before we check for Return because using some IME will effectively send a Return?)
- // We ignore CTRL inputs, but need to allow ALT+CTRL as some keyboards (e.g. German) use AltGR (which _is_ Alt+Ctrl) to input certain characters.
- bool ignore_inputs = (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt) || (is_osx && io.KeySuper);
- if (!ignore_inputs && is_editable && !user_nav_input_start)
- for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.InputCharacters) && io.InputCharacters[n]; n++)
- {
- // Insert character if they pass filtering
- unsigned int c = (unsigned int)io.InputCharacters[n];
- if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, user_data))
- edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
- }
-
- // Consume characters
- memset(g.IO.InputCharacters, 0, sizeof(g.IO.InputCharacters));
- }
- }
-
- bool cancel_edit = false;
- if (g.ActiveId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated && !clear_active_id)
- {
- // Handle key-presses
- const int k_mask = (io.KeyShift ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT : 0);
- const bool is_osx = io.OptMacOSXBehaviors;
- const bool is_shortcut_key = (is_osx ? (io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl) : (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeySuper)) && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyShift; // OS X style: Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl
- const bool is_osx_shift_shortcut = is_osx && io.KeySuper && io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;
- const bool is_wordmove_key_down = is_osx ? io.KeyAlt : io.KeyCtrl; // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl
- const bool is_startend_key_down = is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt; // OS X style: Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End
- const bool is_ctrl_key_only = io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyShift && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;
- const bool is_shift_key_only = io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;
-
- const bool is_cut = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_X)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete))) && is_editable && !is_password && (!is_multiline || edit_state.HasSelection());
- const bool is_copy = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C)) || (is_ctrl_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_password && (!is_multiline || edit_state.HasSelection());
- const bool is_paste = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_V)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && is_editable;
- const bool is_undo = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z)) && is_editable && is_undoable);
- const bool is_redo = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Y)) || (is_osx_shift_shortcut && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z))) && is_editable && is_undoable;
-
- if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow)) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT) | k_mask); }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_RightArrow)) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT) | k_mask); }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow) && is_multiline) { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetWindowScrollY(draw_window, ImMax(draw_window->Scroll.y - g.FontSize, 0.0f)); else edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP) | k_mask); }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow) && is_multiline) { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetWindowScrollY(draw_window, ImMin(draw_window->Scroll.y + g.FontSize, GetScrollMaxY())); else edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN) | k_mask); }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Home)) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | k_mask); }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_End)) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | k_mask); }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete) && is_editable) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | k_mask); }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && is_editable)
- {
- if (!edit_state.HasSelection())
- {
- if (is_wordmove_key_down) edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
- else if (is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyCtrl) edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
- }
- edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | k_mask);
- }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Enter))
- {
- bool ctrl_enter_for_new_line = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine) != 0;
- if (!is_multiline || (ctrl_enter_for_new_line && !io.KeyCtrl) || (!ctrl_enter_for_new_line && io.KeyCtrl))
- {
- enter_pressed = clear_active_id = true;
- }
- else if (is_editable)
- {
- unsigned int c = '\n'; // Insert new line
- if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, user_data))
- edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
- }
- }
- else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput) && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab) && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyShift && !io.KeyAlt && is_editable)
- {
- unsigned int c = '\t'; // Insert TAB
- if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, user_data))
- edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
- }
- else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Escape))
- {
- clear_active_id = cancel_edit = true;
- }
- else if (is_undo || is_redo)
- {
- edit_state.OnKeyPressed(is_undo ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO);
- edit_state.ClearSelection();
- }
- else if (is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_A))
- {
- edit_state.SelectAll();
- edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
- }
- else if (is_cut || is_copy)
- {
- // Cut, Copy
- if (io.SetClipboardTextFn)
- {
- const int ib = edit_state.HasSelection() ? ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end) : 0;
- const int ie = edit_state.HasSelection() ? ImMax(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end) : edit_state.CurLenW;
- edit_state.TempTextBuffer.resize((ie-ib) * 4 + 1);
- ImTextStrToUtf8(edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Data, edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Size, edit_state.Text.Data+ib, edit_state.Text.Data+ie);
- SetClipboardText(edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Data);
- }
- if (is_cut)
- {
- if (!edit_state.HasSelection())
- edit_state.SelectAll();
- edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
- stb_textedit_cut(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState);
- }
- }
- else if (is_paste)
- {
- if (const char* clipboard = GetClipboardText())
- {
- // Filter pasted buffer
- const int clipboard_len = (int)strlen(clipboard);
- ImWchar* clipboard_filtered = (ImWchar*)ImGui::MemAlloc((clipboard_len+1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
- int clipboard_filtered_len = 0;
- for (const char* s = clipboard; *s; )
- {
- unsigned int c;
- s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, NULL);
- if (c == 0)
- break;
- if (c >= 0x10000 || !InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, user_data))
- continue;
- clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len++] = (ImWchar)c;
- }
- clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len] = 0;
- if (clipboard_filtered_len > 0) // If everything was filtered, ignore the pasting operation
- {
- stb_textedit_paste(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, clipboard_filtered, clipboard_filtered_len);
- edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
- }
- ImGui::MemFree(clipboard_filtered);
- }
- }
+ // Position tooltip (always follows mouse)
+ float sc = g.Style.MouseCursorScale;
+ ImVec2 ref_pos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
+ ImRect r_avoid;
+ if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && !(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos))
+ r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 16, ref_pos.y + 8);
+ else
+ r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 24 * sc, ref_pos.y + 24 * sc); // FIXME: Hard-coded based on mouse cursor shape expectation. Exact dimension not very important.
+ ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(ref_pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
+ if (window->AutoPosLastDirection == ImGuiDir_None)
+ pos = ref_pos + ImVec2(2, 2); // If there's not enough room, for tooltip we prefer avoiding the cursor at all cost even if it means that part of the tooltip won't be visible.
+ return pos;
}
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return window->Pos;
+}
- if (g.ActiveId == id)
- {
- if (cancel_edit)
- {
- // Restore initial value. Only return true if restoring to the initial value changes the current buffer contents.
- if (is_editable && strncmp(buf, edit_state.InitialText.Data, buf_size) != 0)
- {
- ImStrncpy(buf, edit_state.InitialText.Data, buf_size);
- value_changed = true;
- }
- }
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] VIEWPORTS, PLATFORM WINDOWS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- // When using 'ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue' as a special case we reapply the live buffer back to the input buffer before clearing ActiveId, even though strictly speaking it wasn't modified on this frame.
- // If we didn't do that, code like InputInt() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue would fail. Also this allows the user to use InputText() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue without maintaining any user-side storage.
- bool apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer = !cancel_edit || (enter_pressed && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0);
- if (apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer)
- {
- // Apply new value immediately - copy modified buffer back
- // Note that as soon as the input box is active, the in-widget value gets priority over any underlying modification of the input buffer
- // FIXME: We actually always render 'buf' when calling DrawList->AddText, making the comment above incorrect.
- // FIXME-OPT: CPU waste to do this every time the widget is active, should mark dirty state from the stb_textedit callbacks.
- if (is_editable)
- {
- edit_state.TempTextBuffer.resize(edit_state.Text.Size * 4);
- ImTextStrToUtf8(edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Data, edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Size, edit_state.Text.Data, NULL);
- }
+// (this section is filled in the 'viewport' and 'docking' branches)
- // User callback
- if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)) != 0)
- {
- IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL);
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] KEYBOARD/GAMEPAD NAVIGATION
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- // The reason we specify the usage semantic (Completion/History) is that Completion needs to disable keyboard TABBING at the moment.
- ImGuiInputTextFlags event_flag = 0;
- ImGuiKey event_key = ImGuiKey_COUNT;
- if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab))
- {
- event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion;
- event_key = ImGuiKey_Tab;
- }
- else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow))
- {
- event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
- event_key = ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
- }
- else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow))
- {
- event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
- event_key = ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
- }
- else if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)
- event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways;
+ImGuiDir ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(float dx, float dy)
+{
+ if (ImFabs(dx) > ImFabs(dy))
+ return (dx > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Left;
+ return (dy > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Up;
+}
- if (event_flag)
- {
- ImGuiTextEditCallbackData callback_data;
- memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiTextEditCallbackData));
- callback_data.EventFlag = event_flag;
- callback_data.Flags = flags;
- callback_data.UserData = user_data;
- callback_data.ReadOnly = !is_editable;
-
- callback_data.EventKey = event_key;
- callback_data.Buf = edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Data;
- callback_data.BufTextLen = edit_state.CurLenA;
- callback_data.BufSize = edit_state.BufSizeA;
- callback_data.BufDirty = false;
-
- // We have to convert from wchar-positions to UTF-8-positions, which can be pretty slow (an incentive to ditch the ImWchar buffer, see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
- ImWchar* text = edit_state.Text.Data;
- const int utf8_cursor_pos = callback_data.CursorPos = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.cursor);
- const int utf8_selection_start = callback_data.SelectionStart = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.select_start);
- const int utf8_selection_end = callback_data.SelectionEnd = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.select_end);
-
- // Call user code
- callback(&callback_data);
-
- // Read back what user may have modified
- IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Buf == edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Data); // Invalid to modify those fields
- IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufSize == edit_state.BufSizeA);
- IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Flags == flags);
- if (callback_data.CursorPos != utf8_cursor_pos) edit_state.StbState.cursor = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.CursorPos);
- if (callback_data.SelectionStart != utf8_selection_start) edit_state.StbState.select_start = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionStart);
- if (callback_data.SelectionEnd != utf8_selection_end) edit_state.StbState.select_end = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionEnd);
- if (callback_data.BufDirty)
- {
- IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufTextLen == (int)strlen(callback_data.Buf)); // You need to maintain BufTextLen if you change the text!
- edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.Text.Data, edit_state.Text.Size, callback_data.Buf, NULL);
- edit_state.CurLenA = callback_data.BufTextLen; // Assume correct length and valid UTF-8 from user, saves us an extra strlen()
- edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
- }
- }
- }
+static float inline NavScoreItemDistInterval(float a0, float a1, float b0, float b1)
+{
+ if (a1 < b0)
+ return a1 - b0;
+ if (b1 < a0)
+ return a0 - b1;
+ return 0.0f;
+}
- // Copy back to user buffer
- if (is_editable && strcmp(edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Data, buf) != 0)
- {
- ImStrncpy(buf, edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Data, buf_size);
- value_changed = true;
- }
- }
+static void inline NavClampRectToVisibleAreaForMoveDir(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImRect& r, const ImRect& clip_rect)
+{
+ if (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right)
+ {
+ r.Min.y = ImClamp(r.Min.y, clip_rect.Min.y, clip_rect.Max.y);
+ r.Max.y = ImClamp(r.Max.y, clip_rect.Min.y, clip_rect.Max.y);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ r.Min.x = ImClamp(r.Min.x, clip_rect.Min.x, clip_rect.Max.x);
+ r.Max.x = ImClamp(r.Max.x, clip_rect.Min.x, clip_rect.Max.x);
}
+}
- // Release active ID at the end of the function (so e.g. pressing Return still does a final application of the value)
- if (clear_active_id && g.ActiveId == id)
- ClearActiveID();
+// Scoring function for directional navigation. Based on https://gist.github.com/rygorous/6981057
+static bool NavScoreItem(ImGuiNavMoveResult* result, ImRect cand)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (g.NavLayer != window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
+ return false;
- // Render
- // Select which buffer we are going to display. When ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoLiveEdit is set 'buf' might still be the old value. We set buf to NULL to prevent accidental usage from now on.
- const char* buf_display = (g.ActiveId == id && is_editable) ? edit_state.TempTextBuffer.Data : buf; buf = NULL;
+ const ImRect& curr = g.NavScoringRectScreen; // Current modified source rect (NB: we've applied Max.x = Min.x in NavUpdate() to inhibit the effect of having varied item width)
+ g.NavScoringCount++;
- if (!is_multiline)
+ // When entering through a NavFlattened border, we consider child window items as fully clipped for scoring
+ if (window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow)
{
- RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
- RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+ IM_ASSERT((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
+ if (!window->ClipRect.Contains(cand))
+ return false;
+ cand.ClipWithFull(window->ClipRect); // This allows the scored item to not overlap other candidates in the parent window
}
- const ImVec4 clip_rect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + size.x, frame_bb.Min.y + size.y); // Not using frame_bb.Max because we have adjusted size
- ImVec2 render_pos = is_multiline ? draw_window->DC.CursorPos : frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding;
- ImVec2 text_size(0.f, 0.f);
- const bool is_currently_scrolling = (edit_state.Id == id && is_multiline && g.ActiveId == draw_window->GetIDNoKeepAlive("#SCROLLY"));
- if (g.ActiveId == id || is_currently_scrolling)
- {
- edit_state.CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime;
+ // We perform scoring on items bounding box clipped by the current clipping rectangle on the other axis (clipping on our movement axis would give us equal scores for all clipped items)
+ // For example, this ensure that items in one column are not reached when moving vertically from items in another column.
+ NavClampRectToVisibleAreaForMoveDir(g.NavMoveClipDir, cand, window->ClipRect);
- // This is going to be messy. We need to:
- // - Display the text (this alone can be more easily clipped)
- // - Handle scrolling, highlight selection, display cursor (those all requires some form of 1d->2d cursor position calculation)
- // - Measure text height (for scrollbar)
- // We are attempting to do most of that in **one main pass** to minimize the computation cost (non-negligible for large amount of text) + 2nd pass for selection rendering (we could merge them by an extra refactoring effort)
- // FIXME: This should occur on buf_display but we'd need to maintain cursor/select_start/select_end for UTF-8.
- const ImWchar* text_begin = edit_state.Text.Data;
- ImVec2 cursor_offset, select_start_offset;
+ // Compute distance between boxes
+ // FIXME-NAV: Introducing biases for vertical navigation, needs to be removed.
+ float dbx = NavScoreItemDistInterval(cand.Min.x, cand.Max.x, curr.Min.x, curr.Max.x);
+ float dby = NavScoreItemDistInterval(ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.8f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.8f)); // Scale down on Y to keep using box-distance for vertically touching items
+ if (dby != 0.0f && dbx != 0.0f)
+ dbx = (dbx/1000.0f) + ((dbx > 0.0f) ? +1.0f : -1.0f);
+ float dist_box = ImFabs(dbx) + ImFabs(dby);
- {
- // Count lines + find lines numbers straddling 'cursor' and 'select_start' position.
- const ImWchar* searches_input_ptr[2];
- searches_input_ptr[0] = text_begin + edit_state.StbState.cursor;
- searches_input_ptr[1] = NULL;
- int searches_remaining = 1;
- int searches_result_line_number[2] = { -1, -999 };
- if (edit_state.StbState.select_start != edit_state.StbState.select_end)
- {
- searches_input_ptr[1] = text_begin + ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);
- searches_result_line_number[1] = -1;
- searches_remaining++;
- }
+ // Compute distance between centers (this is off by a factor of 2, but we only compare center distances with each other so it doesn't matter)
+ float dcx = (cand.Min.x + cand.Max.x) - (curr.Min.x + curr.Max.x);
+ float dcy = (cand.Min.y + cand.Max.y) - (curr.Min.y + curr.Max.y);
+ float dist_center = ImFabs(dcx) + ImFabs(dcy); // L1 metric (need this for our connectedness guarantee)
- // Iterate all lines to find our line numbers
- // In multi-line mode, we never exit the loop until all lines are counted, so add one extra to the searches_remaining counter.
- searches_remaining += is_multiline ? 1 : 0;
- int line_count = 0;
- for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; *s != 0; s++)
- if (*s == '\n')
- {
- line_count++;
- if (searches_result_line_number[0] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[0]) { searches_result_line_number[0] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
- if (searches_result_line_number[1] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[1]) { searches_result_line_number[1] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
- }
- line_count++;
- if (searches_result_line_number[0] == -1) searches_result_line_number[0] = line_count;
- if (searches_result_line_number[1] == -1) searches_result_line_number[1] = line_count;
-
- // Calculate 2d position by finding the beginning of the line and measuring distance
- cursor_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[0], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[0]).x;
- cursor_offset.y = searches_result_line_number[0] * g.FontSize;
- if (searches_result_line_number[1] >= 0)
- {
- select_start_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[1], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[1]).x;
- select_start_offset.y = searches_result_line_number[1] * g.FontSize;
- }
+ // Determine which quadrant of 'curr' our candidate item 'cand' lies in based on distance
+ ImGuiDir quadrant;
+ float dax = 0.0f, day = 0.0f, dist_axial = 0.0f;
+ if (dbx != 0.0f || dby != 0.0f)
+ {
+ // For non-overlapping boxes, use distance between boxes
+ dax = dbx;
+ day = dby;
+ dist_axial = dist_box;
+ quadrant = ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(dbx, dby);
+ }
+ else if (dcx != 0.0f || dcy != 0.0f)
+ {
+ // For overlapping boxes with different centers, use distance between centers
+ dax = dcx;
+ day = dcy;
+ dist_axial = dist_center;
+ quadrant = ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(dcx, dcy);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Degenerate case: two overlapping buttons with same center, break ties arbitrarily (note that LastItemId here is really the _previous_ item order, but it doesn't matter)
+ quadrant = (window->DC.LastItemId < g.NavId) ? ImGuiDir_Left : ImGuiDir_Right;
+ }
- // Store text height (note that we haven't calculated text width at all, see GitHub issues #383, #1224)
- if (is_multiline)
- text_size = ImVec2(size.x, line_count * g.FontSize);
+#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
+ char buf[128];
+ if (ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(cand.Min, cand.Max))
+ {
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "dbox (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\ndcen (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\nd (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\nnav %c, quadrant %c", dbx, dby, dist_box, dcx, dcy, dist_center, dax, day, dist_axial, "WENS"[g.NavMoveDir], "WENS"[quadrant]);
+ ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList(window);
+ draw_list->AddRect(curr.Min, curr.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,100));
+ draw_list->AddRect(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,200));
+ draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Max-ImVec2(4,4), cand.Max+ImGui::CalcTextSize(buf)+ImVec2(4,4), IM_COL32(40,0,0,150));
+ draw_list->AddText(g.IO.FontDefault, 13.0f, cand.Max, ~0U, buf);
+ }
+ else if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) // Hold to preview score in matching quadrant. Press C to rotate.
+ {
+ if (ImGui::IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C)) { g.NavMoveDirLast = (ImGuiDir)((g.NavMoveDirLast + 1) & 3); g.IO.KeysDownDuration[g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_C]] = 0.01f; }
+ if (quadrant == g.NavMoveDir)
+ {
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%.0f/%.0f", dist_box, dist_center);
+ ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList(window);
+ draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200));
+ draw_list->AddText(g.IO.FontDefault, 13.0f, cand.Min, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
}
+ }
+ #endif
- // Scroll
- if (edit_state.CursorFollow)
+ // Is it in the quadrant we're interesting in moving to?
+ bool new_best = false;
+ if (quadrant == g.NavMoveDir)
+ {
+ // Does it beat the current best candidate?
+ if (dist_box < result->DistBox)
{
- // Horizontal scroll in chunks of quarter width
- if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll))
- {
- const float scroll_increment_x = size.x * 0.25f;
- if (cursor_offset.x < edit_state.ScrollX)
- edit_state.ScrollX = (float)(int)ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x);
- else if (cursor_offset.x - size.x >= edit_state.ScrollX)
- edit_state.ScrollX = (float)(int)(cursor_offset.x - size.x + scroll_increment_x);
- }
- else
+ result->DistBox = dist_box;
+ result->DistCenter = dist_center;
+ return true;
+ }
+ if (dist_box == result->DistBox)
+ {
+ // Try using distance between center points to break ties
+ if (dist_center < result->DistCenter)
{
- edit_state.ScrollX = 0.0f;
+ result->DistCenter = dist_center;
+ new_best = true;
}
-
- // Vertical scroll
- if (is_multiline)
+ else if (dist_center == result->DistCenter)
{
- float scroll_y = draw_window->Scroll.y;
- if (cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize < scroll_y)
- scroll_y = ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize);
- else if (cursor_offset.y - size.y >= scroll_y)
- scroll_y = cursor_offset.y - size.y;
- draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y += (draw_window->Scroll.y - scroll_y); // To avoid a frame of lag
- draw_window->Scroll.y = scroll_y;
- render_pos.y = draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+ // Still tied! we need to be extra-careful to make sure everything gets linked properly. We consistently break ties by symbolically moving "later" items
+ // (with higher index) to the right/downwards by an infinitesimal amount since we the current "best" button already (so it must have a lower index),
+ // this is fairly easy. This rule ensures that all buttons with dx==dy==0 will end up being linked in order of appearance along the x axis.
+ if (((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? dby : dbx) < 0.0f) // moving bj to the right/down decreases distance
+ new_best = true;
}
}
- edit_state.CursorFollow = false;
- const ImVec2 render_scroll = ImVec2(edit_state.ScrollX, 0.0f);
+ }
- // Draw selection
- if (edit_state.StbState.select_start != edit_state.StbState.select_end)
- {
- const ImWchar* text_selected_begin = text_begin + ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);
- const ImWchar* text_selected_end = text_begin + ImMax(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);
-
- float bg_offy_up = is_multiline ? 0.0f : -1.0f; // FIXME: those offsets should be part of the style? they don't play so well with multi-line selection.
- float bg_offy_dn = is_multiline ? 0.0f : 2.0f;
- ImU32 bg_color = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg);
- ImVec2 rect_pos = render_pos + select_start_offset - render_scroll;
- for (const ImWchar* p = text_selected_begin; p < text_selected_end; )
+ // Axial check: if 'curr' has no link at all in some direction and 'cand' lies roughly in that direction, add a tentative link. This will only be kept if no "real" matches
+ // are found, so it only augments the graph produced by the above method using extra links. (important, since it doesn't guarantee strong connectedness)
+ // This is just to avoid buttons having no links in a particular direction when there's a suitable neighbor. you get good graphs without this too.
+ // 2017/09/29: FIXME: This now currently only enabled inside menu bars, ideally we'd disable it everywhere. Menus in particular need to catch failure. For general navigation it feels awkward.
+ // Disabling it may lead to disconnected graphs when nodes are very spaced out on different axis. Perhaps consider offering this as an option?
+ if (result->DistBox == FLT_MAX && dist_axial < result->DistAxial) // Check axial match
+ if (g.NavLayer == 1 && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+ if ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && dax < 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && dax > 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up && day < 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down && day > 0.0f))
{
- if (rect_pos.y > clip_rect.w + g.FontSize)
- break;
- if (rect_pos.y < clip_rect.y)
- {
- while (p < text_selected_end)
- if (*p++ == '\n')
- break;
- }
- else
- {
- ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true);
- if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = (float)(int)(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((unsigned short)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
- ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos +ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn));
- rect.ClipWith(clip_rect);
- if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
- draw_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(rect.Min, rect.Max, bg_color);
- }
- rect_pos.x = render_pos.x - render_scroll.x;
- rect_pos.y += g.FontSize;
+ result->DistAxial = dist_axial;
+ new_best = true;
}
- }
-
- draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, render_pos - render_scroll, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), buf_display, buf_display + edit_state.CurLenA, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
- // Draw blinking cursor
- bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.OptCursorBlink) || (g.InputTextState.CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(g.InputTextState.CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f;
- ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = render_pos + cursor_offset - render_scroll;
- ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y-g.FontSize+0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x+1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y-1.5f);
- if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
- draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
-
- // Notify OS of text input position for advanced IME (-1 x offset so that Windows IME can cover our cursor. Bit of an extra nicety.)
- if (is_editable)
- g.PlatformImePos = ImVec2(cursor_screen_pos.x - 1, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize);
- }
- else
- {
- // Render text only
- const char* buf_end = NULL;
- if (is_multiline)
- text_size = ImVec2(size.x, InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(buf_display, &buf_end) * g.FontSize); // We don't need width
- draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, render_pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), buf_display, buf_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
- }
-
- if (is_multiline)
- {
- Dummy(text_size + ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize)); // Always add room to scroll an extra line
- EndChildFrame();
- EndGroup();
- }
-
- if (is_password)
- PopFont();
-
- // Log as text
- if (g.LogEnabled && !is_password)
- LogRenderedText(&render_pos, buf_display, NULL);
-
- if (label_size.x > 0)
- RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
-
- if (value_changed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
-
- if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0)
- return enter_pressed;
- else
- return value_changed;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiTextEditCallback callback, void* user_data)
-{
- IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
- return InputTextEx(label, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0,0), flags, callback, user_data);
-}
-
-bool ImGui::InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiTextEditCallback callback, void* user_data)
-{
- return InputTextEx(label, buf, (int)buf_size, size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline, callback, user_data);
+ return new_best;
}
-// NB: format here must be a simple "%xx" format string with no prefix/suffix (unlike the Drag/Slider functions "format" argument)
-bool ImGui::InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const void* step, const void* step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+// We get there when either NavId == id, or when g.NavAnyRequest is set (which is updated by NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag above)
+static void ImGui::NavProcessItem(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& nav_bb, const ImGuiID id)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
-
- IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
- if (format == NULL)
- format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
-
- char buf[64];
- DataTypeFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), data_type, data_ptr, format);
+ //if (!g.IO.NavActive) // [2017/10/06] Removed this possibly redundant test but I am not sure of all the side-effects yet. Some of the feature here will need to work regardless of using a _NoNavInputs flag.
+ // return;
- bool value_changed = false;
- if ((extra_flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) == 0)
- extra_flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal;
- extra_flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll;
+ const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = window->DC.ItemFlags;
+ const ImRect nav_bb_rel(nav_bb.Min - window->Pos, nav_bb.Max - window->Pos);
- if (step != NULL)
+ // Process Init Request
+ if (g.NavInitRequest && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
{
- const float button_size = GetFrameHeight();
-
- BeginGroup(); // The only purpose of the group here is to allow the caller to query item data e.g. IsItemActive()
- PushID(label);
- PushItemWidth(ImMax(1.0f, CalcItemWidth() - (button_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * 2));
- if (InputText("", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), extra_flags)) // PushId(label) + "" gives us the expected ID from outside point of view
- value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.Data, data_type, data_ptr, format);
- PopItemWidth();
-
- // Step buttons
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- if (ButtonEx("-", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups))
+ // Even if 'ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus' is on (typically collapse/close button) we record the first ResultId so they can be used as a fallback
+ if (!(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus) || g.NavInitResultId == 0)
+ {
+ g.NavInitResultId = id;
+ g.NavInitResultRectRel = nav_bb_rel;
+ }
+ if (!(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus))
{
- DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '-', data_ptr, data_ptr, g.IO.KeyCtrl && step_fast ? step_fast : step);
- value_changed = true;
+ g.NavInitRequest = false; // Found a match, clear request
+ NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
}
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- if (ButtonEx("+", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups))
+ }
+
+ // Process Move Request (scoring for navigation)
+ // FIXME-NAV: Consider policy for double scoring (scoring from NavScoringRectScreen + scoring from a rect wrapped according to current wrapping policy)
+ if ((g.NavId != id || (g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId)) && !(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav))
+ {
+ ImGuiNavMoveResult* result = (window == g.NavWindow) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : &g.NavMoveResultOther;
+#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
+ // [DEBUG] Score all items in NavWindow at all times
+ if (!g.NavMoveRequest)
+ g.NavMoveDir = g.NavMoveDirLast;
+ bool new_best = NavScoreItem(result, nav_bb) && g.NavMoveRequest;
+#else
+ bool new_best = g.NavMoveRequest && NavScoreItem(result, nav_bb);
+#endif
+ if (new_best)
{
- DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '+', data_ptr, data_ptr, g.IO.KeyCtrl && step_fast ? step_fast : step);
- value_changed = true;
+ result->ID = id;
+ result->SelectScopeId = g.MultiSelectScopeId;
+ result->Window = window;
+ result->RectRel = nav_bb_rel;
}
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
- PopID();
- EndGroup();
+ const float VISIBLE_RATIO = 0.70f;
+ if ((g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet) && window->ClipRect.Overlaps(nav_bb))
+ if (ImClamp(nav_bb.Max.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) - ImClamp(nav_bb.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) >= (nav_bb.Max.y - nav_bb.Min.y) * VISIBLE_RATIO)
+ if (NavScoreItem(&g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet, nav_bb))
+ {
+ result = &g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet;
+ result->ID = id;
+ result->SelectScopeId = g.MultiSelectScopeId;
+ result->Window = window;
+ result->RectRel = nav_bb_rel;
+ }
}
- else
+
+ // Update window-relative bounding box of navigated item
+ if (g.NavId == id)
{
- if (InputText(label, buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), extra_flags))
- value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.Data, data_type, data_ptr, format);
+ g.NavWindow = window; // Always refresh g.NavWindow, because some operations such as FocusItem() don't have a window.
+ g.NavLayer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
+ g.NavIdIsAlive = true;
+ g.NavIdTabCounter = window->FocusIdxTabCounter;
+ window->NavRectRel[window->DC.NavLayerCurrent] = nav_bb_rel; // Store item bounding box (relative to window position)
}
-
- return value_changed;
}
-bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+bool ImGui::NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet()
{
- extra_flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
- return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0f ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0f ? &step_fast : NULL), format, extra_flags);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0;
}
-bool ImGui::InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step, double step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestCancel()
{
- extra_flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
- return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Double, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, extra_flags);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.NavMoveRequest = false;
+ NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
}
-bool ImGui::InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step, int step_fast, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestForward(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, const ImRect& bb_rel, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags)
{
- // Hexadecimal input provided as a convenience but the flag name is awkward. Typically you'd use InputText() to parse your own data, if you want to handle prefixes.
- const char* format = (extra_flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) ? "%08X" : "%d";
- return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, extra_flags);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None);
+ ImGui::NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ g.NavMoveDir = move_dir;
+ g.NavMoveClipDir = clip_dir;
+ g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued;
+ g.NavMoveRequestFlags = move_flags;
+ g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] = bb_rel;
}
-bool ImGui::InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* step, const void* step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- bool value_changed = false;
- BeginGroup();
- PushID(label);
- PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
- size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
- for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
+ if (g.NavWindow != window || !NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() || g.NavMoveRequestForward != ImGuiNavForward_None || g.NavLayer != 0)
+ return;
+ IM_ASSERT(move_flags != 0); // No points calling this with no wrapping
+ ImRect bb_rel = window->NavRectRel[0];
+
+ ImGuiDir clip_dir = g.NavMoveDir;
+ if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX)))
{
- PushID(i);
- value_changed |= InputScalar("##v", data_type, v, step, step_fast, format, extra_flags);
- SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- PopID();
- PopItemWidth();
- v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
+ bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = ImMax(window->SizeFull.x, window->SizeContents.x) - window->Scroll.x;
+ if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX) { bb_rel.TranslateY(-bb_rel.GetHeight()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Up; }
+ NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
+ }
+ if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX)))
+ {
+ bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = -window->Scroll.x;
+ if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX) { bb_rel.TranslateY(+bb_rel.GetHeight()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Down; }
+ NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
+ }
+ if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY)))
+ {
+ bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = ImMax(window->SizeFull.y, window->SizeContents.y) - window->Scroll.y;
+ if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY) { bb_rel.TranslateX(-bb_rel.GetWidth()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Left; }
+ NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
+ }
+ if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY)))
+ {
+ bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = -window->Scroll.y;
+ if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY) { bb_rel.TranslateX(+bb_rel.GetWidth()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Right; }
+ NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
}
- PopID();
-
- TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
- EndGroup();
- return value_changed;
}
-bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+static void ImGui::NavSaveLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* nav_window)
{
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window = nav_window;
+ while (parent_window && (parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0 && (parent_window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0)
+ parent_window = parent_window->ParentWindow;
+ if (parent_window && parent_window != nav_window)
+ parent_window->NavLastChildNavWindow = nav_window;
}
-bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+// Call when we are expected to land on Layer 0 after FocusWindow()
+static ImGuiWindow* ImGui::NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
+ return window->NavLastChildNavWindow ? window->NavLastChildNavWindow : window;
}
-bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+static void NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer layer)
{
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.NavLayer = layer;
+ if (layer == 0)
+ g.NavWindow = ImGui::NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(g.NavWindow);
+ if (layer == 0 && g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0] != 0)
+ ImGui::SetNavIDWithRectRel(g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0], layer, g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[0]);
+ else
+ ImGui::NavInitWindow(g.NavWindow, true);
}
-// Prefer using "const char* format" directly, which is more flexible and consistent with other API.
-#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
-bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+static inline void ImGui::NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag()
{
- char format[16] = "%f";
- if (decimal_precision >= 0)
- ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
- return InputFloat(label, v, step, step_fast, format, extra_flags);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.NavAnyRequest = g.NavMoveRequest || g.NavInitRequest || (IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING && g.NavWindow != NULL);
+ if (g.NavAnyRequest)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL);
}
-bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+// This needs to be called before we submit any widget (aka in or before Begin)
+void ImGui::NavInitWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool force_reinit)
{
- char format[16] = "%f";
- if (decimal_precision >= 0)
- ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(window == g.NavWindow);
+ bool init_for_nav = false;
+ if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+ if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || (window->NavLastIds[0] == 0) || force_reinit)
+ init_for_nav = true;
+ if (init_for_nav)
+ {
+ SetNavID(0, g.NavLayer);
+ g.NavInitRequest = true;
+ g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
+ g.NavInitResultId = 0;
+ g.NavInitResultRectRel = ImRect();
+ NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ g.NavId = window->NavLastIds[0];
+ }
}
-bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+static ImVec2 ImGui::NavCalcPreferredRefPos()
{
- char format[16] = "%f";
- if (decimal_precision >= 0)
- ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.NavDisableHighlight || !g.NavDisableMouseHover || !g.NavWindow)
+ {
+ // Mouse (we need a fallback in case the mouse becomes invalid after being used)
+ if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos))
+ return g.IO.MousePos;
+ return g.LastValidMousePos;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // When navigation is active and mouse is disabled, decide on an arbitrary position around the bottom left of the currently navigated item.
+ const ImRect& rect_rel = g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer];
+ ImVec2 pos = g.NavWindow->Pos + ImVec2(rect_rel.Min.x + ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.x * 4, rect_rel.GetWidth()), rect_rel.Max.y - ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.y, rect_rel.GetHeight()));
+ ImRect visible_rect = GetViewportRect();
+ return ImFloor(ImClamp(pos, visible_rect.Min, visible_rect.Max)); // ImFloor() is important because non-integer mouse position application in back-end might be lossy and result in undesirable non-zero delta.
+ }
}
-bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+float ImGui::GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput n, ImGuiInputReadMode mode)
{
- char format[16] = "%f";
- if (decimal_precision >= 0)
- ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
-}
-#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Down)
+ return g.IO.NavInputs[n]; // Instant, read analog input (0.0f..1.0f, as provided by user)
-bool ImGui::InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
-{
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, NULL, NULL, "%d", extra_flags);
+ const float t = g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[n];
+ if (t < 0.0f && mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Released) // Return 1.0f when just released, no repeat, ignore analog input.
+ return (g.IO.NavInputsDownDurationPrev[n] >= 0.0f ? 1.0f : 0.0f);
+ if (t < 0.0f)
+ return 0.0f;
+ if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed) // Return 1.0f when just pressed, no repeat, ignore analog input.
+ return (t == 0.0f) ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
+ if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)
+ return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.80f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.80f);
+ if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow)
+ return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 1.00f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 2.00f);
+ if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast)
+ return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.80f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.30f);
+ return 0.0f;
}
-bool ImGui::InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags dir_sources, ImGuiInputReadMode mode, float slow_factor, float fast_factor)
{
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, NULL, NULL, "%d", extra_flags);
+ ImVec2 delta(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard)
+ delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_, mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_, mode));
+ if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad)
+ delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft, mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp, mode));
+ if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick)
+ delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft, mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp, mode));
+ if (slow_factor != 0.0f && IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
+ delta *= slow_factor;
+ if (fast_factor != 0.0f && IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast))
+ delta *= fast_factor;
+ return delta;
}
-bool ImGui::InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
+// Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view
+// NB: We modify rect_rel by the amount we scrolled for, so it is immediately updated.
+static void NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& item_rect)
{
- return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, NULL, NULL, "%d", extra_flags);
-}
+ ImRect window_rect(window->InnerMainRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), window->InnerMainRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1));
+ //GetOverlayDrawList(window)->AddRect(window_rect.Min, window_rect.Max, IM_COL32_WHITE); // [DEBUG]
+ if (window_rect.Contains(item_rect))
+ return;
-static float CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(int items_count)
-{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (items_count <= 0)
- return FLT_MAX;
- return (g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y) * items_count - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y + (g.Style.WindowPadding.y * 2);
+ if (window->ScrollbarX && item_rect.Min.x < window_rect.Min.x)
+ {
+ window->ScrollTarget.x = item_rect.Min.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x - g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
+ window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f;
+ }
+ else if (window->ScrollbarX && item_rect.Max.x >= window_rect.Max.x)
+ {
+ window->ScrollTarget.x = item_rect.Max.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
+ window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 1.0f;
+ }
+ if (item_rect.Min.y < window_rect.Min.y)
+ {
+ window->ScrollTarget.y = item_rect.Min.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
+ window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f;
+ }
+ else if (item_rect.Max.y >= window_rect.Max.y)
+ {
+ window->ScrollTarget.y = item_rect.Max.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
+ window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 1.0f;
+ }
}
-bool ImGui::BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
+static void ImGui::NavUpdate()
{
- // Always consume the SetNextWindowSizeConstraint() call in our early return paths
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiCond backup_next_window_size_constraint = g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond;
- g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = 0;
+ g.IO.WantSetMousePos = false;
+#if 0
+ if (g.NavScoringCount > 0) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("NavScoringCount %d for '%s' layer %d (Init:%d, Move:%d)\n", g.FrameCount, g.NavScoringCount, g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL", g.NavLayer, g.NavInitRequest || g.NavInitResultId != 0, g.NavMoveRequest);
+#endif
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
+ // Set input source as Gamepad when buttons are pressed before we map Keyboard (some features differs when used with Gamepad vs Keyboard)
+ bool nav_keyboard_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0;
+ bool nav_gamepad_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0;
+ if (nav_gamepad_active)
+ if (g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Activate] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Input] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Cancel] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Menu] > 0.0f)
+ g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad;
+
+ // Update Keyboard->Nav inputs mapping
+ if (nav_keyboard_active)
+ {
+ #define NAV_MAP_KEY(_KEY, _NAV_INPUT) if (IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[_KEY])) { g.IO.NavInputs[_NAV_INPUT] = 1.0f; g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard; }
+ NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Space, ImGuiNavInput_Activate );
+ NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Enter, ImGuiNavInput_Input );
+ NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Escape, ImGuiNavInput_Cancel );
+ NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_ );
+ NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_RightArrow,ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_);
+ NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_ );
+ NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_DownArrow, ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_ );
+ if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow] = 1.0f;
+ if (g.IO.KeyShift) g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast] = 1.0f;
+ if (g.IO.KeyAlt) g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_KeyMenu_] = 1.0f;
+ #undef NAV_MAP_KEY
+ }
+ memcpy(g.IO.NavInputsDownDurationPrev, g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration, sizeof(g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration));
+ for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.NavInputs); i++)
+ g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] = (g.IO.NavInputs[i] > 0.0f) ? (g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
+
+ // Process navigation init request (select first/default focus)
+ if (g.NavInitResultId != 0 && (!g.NavDisableHighlight || g.NavInitRequestFromMove))
+ {
+ // Apply result from previous navigation init request (will typically select the first item, unless SetItemDefaultFocus() has been called)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow);
+ if (g.NavInitRequestFromMove)
+ SetNavIDWithRectRel(g.NavInitResultId, g.NavLayer, g.NavInitResultRectRel);
+ else
+ SetNavID(g.NavInitResultId, g.NavLayer);
+ g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] = g.NavInitResultRectRel;
+ }
+ g.NavInitRequest = false;
+ g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
+ g.NavInitResultId = 0;
+ g.NavJustMovedToId = 0;
+
+ // Process navigation move request
+ if (g.NavMoveRequest)
+ NavUpdateMoveResult();
+
+ // When a forwarded move request failed, we restore the highlight that we disabled during the forward frame
+ if (g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_ForwardActive)
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequest);
+ if (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0)
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
+ g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_None;
+ }
+
+ // Apply application mouse position movement, after we had a chance to process move request result.
+ if (g.NavMousePosDirty && g.NavIdIsAlive)
+ {
+ // Set mouse position given our knowledge of the navigated item position from last frame
+ if ((g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) && (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos))
+ {
+ if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow)
+ {
+ g.IO.MousePos = g.IO.MousePosPrev = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
+ g.IO.WantSetMousePos = true;
+ }
+ }
+ g.NavMousePosDirty = false;
+ }
+ g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
+ g.NavJustTabbedId = 0;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavLayer == 0 || g.NavLayer == 1);
- IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together
+ // Store our return window (for returning from Layer 1 to Layer 0) and clear it as soon as we step back in our own Layer 0
+ if (g.NavWindow)
+ NavSaveLastChildNavWindow(g.NavWindow);
+ if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow != NULL && g.NavLayer == 0)
+ g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow = NULL;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
-
- const float arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight();
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
- const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : CalcItemWidth();
- const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
- const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
- ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
- return false;
+ // Update CTRL+TAB and Windowing features (hold Square to move/resize/etc.)
+ NavUpdateWindowing();
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(frame_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
- bool popup_open = IsPopupOpen(id);
+ // Set output flags for user application
+ g.IO.NavActive = (nav_keyboard_active || nav_gamepad_active) && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs);
+ g.IO.NavVisible = (g.IO.NavActive && g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight) || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL);
- const ImRect value_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max - ImVec2(arrow_size, 0.0f));
- const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
- RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(frame_bb.Min, ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size, frame_bb.Max.y), frame_col, style.FrameRounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_Left);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
+ // Process NavCancel input (to close a popup, get back to parent, clear focus)
+ if (IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Cancel, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed))
{
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size, frame_bb.Min.y), frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32((popup_open || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button), style.FrameRounding, (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Right);
- RenderArrow(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size + style.FramePadding.y, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), ImGuiDir_Down);
+ if (g.ActiveId != 0)
+ {
+ if (!(g.ActiveIdBlockNavInputFlags & (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel)))
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+ else if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow)
+ {
+ // Exit child window
+ ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.NavWindow;
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.NavWindow->ParentWindow;
+ IM_ASSERT(child_window->ChildId != 0);
+ FocusWindow(parent_window);
+ SetNavID(child_window->ChildId, 0);
+ g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
+ if (g.NavDisableMouseHover)
+ g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
+ }
+ else if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0)
+ {
+ // Close open popup/menu
+ if (!(g.OpenPopupStack.back().Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal))
+ ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1, true);
+ }
+ else if (g.NavLayer != 0)
+ {
+ // Leave the "menu" layer
+ NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Clear NavLastId for popups but keep it for regular child window so we can leave one and come back where we were
+ if (g.NavWindow && ((g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)))
+ g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0] = 0;
+ g.NavId = 0;
+ }
}
- RenderFrameBorder(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, style.FrameRounding);
- if (preview_value != NULL && !(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
- RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, value_bb.Max, preview_value, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
- if (label_size.x > 0)
- RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
- if ((pressed || g.NavActivateId == id) && !popup_open)
+ // Process manual activation request
+ g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavInputId = 0;
+ if (g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight && !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
{
- if (window->DC.NavLayerCurrent == 0)
- window->NavLastIds[0] = id;
- OpenPopupEx(id);
- popup_open = true;
+ bool activate_down = IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_Activate);
+ bool activate_pressed = activate_down && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Activate, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
+ if (g.ActiveId == 0 && activate_pressed)
+ g.NavActivateId = g.NavId;
+ if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && activate_down)
+ g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavId;
+ if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && activate_pressed)
+ g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavId;
+ if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Input, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed))
+ g.NavInputId = g.NavId;
}
+ if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+ if (g.NavActivateId != 0)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavActivateDownId == g.NavActivateId);
+ g.NavMoveRequest = false;
- if (!popup_open)
- return false;
+ // Process programmatic activation request
+ if (g.NavNextActivateId != 0)
+ g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavInputId = g.NavNextActivateId;
+ g.NavNextActivateId = 0;
- if (backup_next_window_size_constraint)
+ // Initiate directional inputs request
+ const int allowed_dir_flags = (g.ActiveId == 0) ? ~0 : g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags;
+ if (g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None)
{
- g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = backup_next_window_size_constraint;
- g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x = ImMax(g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x, w);
+ g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_None;
+ g.NavMoveRequestFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_None;
+ if (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindowingTarget && allowed_dir_flags && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+ {
+ if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Left)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft, ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Left;
+ if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Right)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight,ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_,ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Right;
+ if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Up)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp, ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up;
+ if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Down)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown, ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down;
+ }
+ g.NavMoveClipDir = g.NavMoveDir;
}
else
{
- if ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_) == 0)
- flags |= ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular;
- IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_)); // Only one
- int popup_max_height_in_items = -1;
- if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular) popup_max_height_in_items = 8;
- else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall) popup_max_height_in_items = 4;
- else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge) popup_max_height_in_items = 20;
- SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(w, 0.0f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
+ // Forwarding previous request (which has been modified, e.g. wrap around menus rewrite the requests with a starting rectangle at the other side of the window)
+ // (Preserve g.NavMoveRequestFlags, g.NavMoveClipDir which were set by the NavMoveRequestForward() function)
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None && g.NavMoveClipDir != ImGuiDir_None);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued);
+ g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardActive;
}
- char name[16];
- ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Combo_%02d", g.CurrentPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth
-
- // Peak into expected window size so we can position it
- if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = FindWindowByName(name))
- if (popup_window->WasActive)
- {
- ImVec2 size_contents = CalcSizeContents(popup_window);
- ImVec2 size_expected = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(popup_window, CalcSizeAutoFit(popup_window, size_contents));
- if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft)
- popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_Left;
- ImRect r_outer = FindAllowedExtentRectForWindow(popup_window);
- ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(frame_bb.GetBL(), size_expected, &popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, frame_bb, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox);
- SetNextWindowPos(pos);
- }
+ // Update PageUp/PageDown scroll
+ float nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = 0.0f;
+ if (nav_keyboard_active)
+ nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = NavUpdatePageUpPageDown(allowed_dir_flags);
- // Horizontally align ourselves with the framed text
- ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings;
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, style.WindowPadding.y));
- bool ret = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
- PopStyleVar();
- if (!ret)
+ // If we initiate a movement request and have no current NavId, we initiate a InitDefautRequest that will be used as a fallback if the direction fails to find a match
+ if (g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None)
{
- EndPopup();
- IM_ASSERT(0); // This should never happen as we tested for IsPopupOpen() above
- return false;
+ g.NavMoveRequest = true;
+ g.NavMoveDirLast = g.NavMoveDir;
}
- return true;
-}
-
-void ImGui::EndCombo()
-{
- EndPopup();
-}
-
-// Getter for the old Combo() API: const char*[]
-static bool Items_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
-{
- const char* const* items = (const char* const*)data;
- if (out_text)
- *out_text = items[idx];
- return true;
-}
-
-// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0"
-static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
-{
- // FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited.
- const char* items_separated_by_zeros = (const char*)data;
- int items_count = 0;
- const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;
- while (*p)
+ if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavId == 0)
{
- if (idx == items_count)
- break;
- p += strlen(p) + 1;
- items_count++;
+ g.NavInitRequest = g.NavInitRequestFromMove = true;
+ g.NavInitResultId = 0;
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
}
- if (!*p)
- return false;
- if (out_text)
- *out_text = p;
- return true;
-}
-
-// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can.
-bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- // Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo()
- const char* preview_value = NULL;
- if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count)
- items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value);
-
- // The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here.
- if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond)
- SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
-
- if (!BeginCombo(label, preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags_None))
- return false;
+ NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
- // Display items
- // FIXME-OPT: Use clipper (but we need to disable it on the appearing frame to make sure our call to SetItemDefaultFocus() is processed)
- bool value_changed = false;
- for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++)
- {
- PushID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
- const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
- const char* item_text;
- if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
- item_text = "*Unknown item*";
- if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
+ // Scrolling
+ if (g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.NavWindowingTarget)
+ {
+ // *Fallback* manual-scroll with Nav directional keys when window has no navigable item
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+ const float scroll_speed = ImFloor(window->CalcFontSize() * 100 * g.IO.DeltaTime + 0.5f); // We need round the scrolling speed because sub-pixel scroll isn't reliably supported.
+ if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavHasScroll && g.NavMoveRequest)
{
- value_changed = true;
- *current_item = i;
+ if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right)
+ SetWindowScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed));
+ if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down)
+ SetWindowScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed));
}
- if (item_selected)
- SetItemDefaultFocus();
- PopID();
- }
-
- EndCombo();
- return value_changed;
-}
-
-// Combo box helper allowing to pass an array of strings.
-bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items)
-{
- const bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_in_items);
- return value_changed;
-}
-
-// Combo box helper allowing to pass all items in a single string literal holding multiple zero-terminated items "item1\0item2\0"
-bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int height_in_items)
-{
- int items_count = 0;
- const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros; // FIXME-OPT: Avoid computing this, or at least only when combo is open
- while (*p)
- {
- p += strlen(p) + 1;
- items_count++;
- }
- bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_SingleStringGetter, (void*)items_separated_by_zeros, items_count, height_in_items);
- return value_changed;
-}
-
-// Tip: pass an empty label (e.g. "##dummy") then you can use the space to draw other text or image.
-// But you need to make sure the ID is unique, e.g. enclose calls in PushID/PopID or use ##unique_id.
-bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet) // FIXME-OPT: Avoid if vertically clipped.
- PopClipRect();
-
- ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
- ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
- ImVec2 size(size_arg.x != 0.0f ? size_arg.x : label_size.x, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : label_size.y);
- ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- pos.y += window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
- ImRect bb_inner(pos, pos + size);
- ItemSize(bb_inner);
-
- // Fill horizontal space.
- ImVec2 window_padding = window->WindowPadding;
- float max_x = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? GetWindowContentRegionMax().x : GetContentRegionMax().x;
- float w_draw = ImMax(label_size.x, window->Pos.x + max_x - window_padding.x - window->DC.CursorPos.x);
- ImVec2 size_draw((size_arg.x != 0 && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth)) ? size_arg.x : w_draw, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : size.y);
- ImRect bb(pos, pos + size_draw);
- if (size_arg.x == 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth))
- bb.Max.x += window_padding.x;
-
- // Selectables are tightly packed together, we extend the box to cover spacing between selectable.
- float spacing_L = (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
- float spacing_U = (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.y * 0.5f);
- float spacing_R = style.ItemSpacing.x - spacing_L;
- float spacing_D = style.ItemSpacing.y - spacing_U;
- bb.Min.x -= spacing_L;
- bb.Min.y -= spacing_U;
- bb.Max.x += spacing_R;
- bb.Max.y += spacing_D;
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) ? 0 : id))
- {
- if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet)
- PushColumnClipRect();
- return false;
- }
-
- // We use NoHoldingActiveID on menus so user can click and _hold_ on a menu then drag to browse child entries
- ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0;
- if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID;
- if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick;
- if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease;
- if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled;
- if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick;
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
- if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled)
- selected = false;
-
- // Hovering selectable with mouse updates NavId accordingly so navigation can be resumed with gamepad/keyboard (this doesn't happen on most widgets)
- if (pressed || hovered)
- if (!g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow == window && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
+ // *Normal* Manual scroll with NavScrollXXX keys
+ // Next movement request will clamp the NavId reference rectangle to the visible area, so navigation will resume within those bounds.
+ ImVec2 scroll_dir = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down, 1.0f/10.0f, 10.0f);
+ if (scroll_dir.x != 0.0f && window->ScrollbarX)
{
- g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
- SetNavID(id, window->DC.NavLayerCurrent);
+ SetWindowScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + scroll_dir.x * scroll_speed));
+ g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = true;
+ }
+ if (scroll_dir.y != 0.0f)
+ {
+ SetWindowScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + scroll_dir.y * scroll_speed));
+ g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = true;
}
- if (pressed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
-
- // Render
- if (hovered || selected)
- {
- const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
- RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
- RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding);
- }
-
- if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet)
- {
- PushColumnClipRect();
- bb.Max.x -= (GetContentRegionMax().x - max_x);
}
- if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
- RenderTextClipped(bb_inner.Min, bb.Max, label, NULL, &label_size, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
- if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PopStyleColor();
-
- // Automatically close popups
- if (pressed && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups) && !(window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup))
- CloseCurrentPopup();
- return pressed;
-}
+ // Reset search results
+ g.NavMoveResultLocal.Clear();
+ g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.Clear();
+ g.NavMoveResultOther.Clear();
-bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
-{
- if (Selectable(label, *p_selected, flags, size_arg))
+ // When we have manually scrolled (without using navigation) and NavId becomes out of bounds, we project its bounding box to the visible area to restart navigation within visible items
+ if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect && g.NavLayer == 0)
{
- *p_selected = !*p_selected;
- return true;
- }
- return false;
-}
-
-// FIXME: Rename to BeginListBox()
-// Helper to calculate the size of a listbox and display a label on the right.
-// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, PushItemWidth(-1) and pass an empty label "##empty"
-bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();
- const ImGuiID id = GetID(label);
- const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
-
- // Size default to hold ~7 items. Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
- ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.4f + style.ItemSpacing.y);
- ImVec2 frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y));
- ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
- ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
- window->DC.LastItemRect = bb; // Forward storage for ListBoxFooter.. dodgy.
-
- BeginGroup();
- if (label_size.x > 0)
- RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
-
- BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize());
- return true;
-}
-
-// FIXME: Rename to BeginListBox()
-bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items)
-{
- // Size default to hold ~7 items. Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
- // We don't add +0.40f if items_count <= height_in_items. It is slightly dodgy, because it means a dynamic list of items will make the widget resize occasionally when it crosses that size.
- // I am expecting that someone will come and complain about this behavior in a remote future, then we can advise on a better solution.
- if (height_in_items < 0)
- height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7);
- float height_in_items_f = height_in_items < items_count ? (height_in_items + 0.40f) : (height_in_items + 0.00f);
-
- // We include ItemSpacing.y so that a list sized for the exact number of items doesn't make a scrollbar appears. We could also enforce that by passing a flag to BeginChild().
- ImVec2 size;
- size.x = 0.0f;
- size.y = GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y;
- return ListBoxHeader(label, size);
-}
-
-// FIXME: Rename to EndListBox()
-void ImGui::ListBoxFooter()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* parent_window = GetCurrentWindow()->ParentWindow;
- const ImRect bb = parent_window->DC.LastItemRect;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();
-
- EndChildFrame();
-
- // Redeclare item size so that it includes the label (we have stored the full size in LastItemRect)
- // We call SameLine() to restore DC.CurrentLine* data
- SameLine();
- parent_window->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
- ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
- EndGroup();
-}
-
-bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_items)
-{
- const bool value_changed = ListBox(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_items);
- return value_changed;
-}
-
-bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
-{
- if (!ListBoxHeader(label, items_count, height_in_items))
- return false;
-
- // Assume all items have even height (= 1 line of text). If you need items of different or variable sizes you can create a custom version of ListBox() in your code without using the clipper.
- bool value_changed = false;
- ImGuiListClipper clipper(items_count, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()); // We know exactly our line height here so we pass it as a minor optimization, but generally you don't need to.
- while (clipper.Step())
- for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+ ImRect window_rect_rel(window->InnerMainRect.Min - window->Pos - ImVec2(1,1), window->InnerMainRect.Max - window->Pos + ImVec2(1,1));
+ if (!window_rect_rel.Contains(window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer]))
{
- const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
- const char* item_text;
- if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
- item_text = "*Unknown item*";
-
- PushID(i);
- if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
- {
- *current_item = i;
- value_changed = true;
- }
- if (item_selected)
- SetItemDefaultFocus();
- PopID();
+ float pad = window->CalcFontSize() * 0.5f;
+ window_rect_rel.Expand(ImVec2(-ImMin(window_rect_rel.GetWidth(), pad), -ImMin(window_rect_rel.GetHeight(), pad))); // Terrible approximation for the intent of starting navigation from first fully visible item
+ window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].ClipWith(window_rect_rel);
+ g.NavId = 0;
}
- ListBoxFooter();
- return value_changed;
+ g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = false;
+ }
+
+ // For scoring we use a single segment on the left side our current item bounding box (not touching the edge to avoid box overlap with zero-spaced items)
+ ImRect nav_rect_rel = (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].IsInverted()) ? g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] : ImRect(0,0,0,0);
+ g.NavScoringRectScreen = g.NavWindow ? ImRect(g.NavWindow->Pos + nav_rect_rel.Min, g.NavWindow->Pos + nav_rect_rel.Max) : GetViewportRect();
+ g.NavScoringRectScreen.TranslateY(nav_scoring_rect_offset_y);
+ g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x = ImMin(g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x + 1.0f, g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max.x);
+ g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max.x = g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x;
+ IM_ASSERT(!g.NavScoringRectScreen.IsInverted()); // Ensure if we have a finite, non-inverted bounding box here will allows us to remove extraneous ImFabs() calls in NavScoreItem().
+ //g.OverlayDrawList.AddRect(g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min, g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); // [DEBUG]
+ g.NavScoringCount = 0;
+#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS
+ if (g.NavWindow) { for (int layer = 0; layer < 2; layer++) GetOverlayDrawList(g.NavWindow)->AddRect(g.NavWindow->Pos + g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[layer].Min, g.NavWindow->Pos + g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[layer].Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); } // [DEBUG]
+ if (g.NavWindow) { ImU32 col = (!g.NavWindow->Hidden) ? IM_COL32(255,0,255,255) : IM_COL32(255,0,0,255); ImVec2 p = NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); char buf[32]; ImFormatString(buf, 32, "%d", g.NavLayer); GetOverlayDrawList(g.NavWindow)->AddCircleFilled(p, 3.0f, col); GetOverlayDrawList(g.NavWindow)->AddText(NULL, 13.0f, p + ImVec2(8,-4), col, buf); }
+#endif
}
-bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled)
+// Apply result from previous frame navigation directional move request
+static void ImGui::NavUpdateMoveResult()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
-
- ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease | (enabled ? 0 : ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled);
- bool pressed;
- if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
- {
- // Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful
- // Note that in this situation we render neither the shortcut neither the selected tick mark
- float w = label_size.x;
- window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, style.ItemSpacing * 2.0f);
- pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
- PopStyleVar();
- window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
- }
- else
+ if (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0)
{
- ImVec2 shortcut_size = shortcut ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, shortcut_size.x, (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback for next frame
- float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
- pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
- if (shortcut_size.x > 0.0f)
+ // In a situation when there is no results but NavId != 0, re-enable the Navigation highlight (because g.NavId is not considered as a possible result)
+ if (g.NavId != 0)
{
- PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
- RenderText(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[1] + extra_w, 0.0f), shortcut, NULL, false);
- PopStyleColor();
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
+ g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
}
- if (selected)
- RenderCheckMark(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.40f, g.FontSize * 0.134f * 0.5f), GetColorU32(enabled ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled), g.FontSize * 0.866f);
+ return;
}
- return pressed;
-}
-bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled)
-{
- if (MenuItem(label, shortcut, p_selected ? *p_selected : false, enabled))
+ // Select which result to use
+ ImGuiNavMoveResult* result = (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID != 0) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : &g.NavMoveResultOther;
+
+ // PageUp/PageDown behavior first jumps to the bottom/top mostly visible item, _otherwise_ use the result from the previous/next page.
+ if (g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet)
+ if (g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.ID != g.NavId)
+ result = &g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet;
+
+ // Maybe entering a flattened child from the outside? In this case solve the tie using the regular scoring rules.
+ if (result != &g.NavMoveResultOther && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.Window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow)
+ if ((g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox < result->DistBox) || (g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox == result->DistBox && g.NavMoveResultOther.DistCenter < result->DistCenter))
+ result = &g.NavMoveResultOther;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow && result->Window);
+
+ // Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view.
+ if (g.NavLayer == 0)
{
- if (p_selected)
- *p_selected = !*p_selected;
- return true;
+ ImRect rect_abs = ImRect(result->RectRel.Min + result->Window->Pos, result->RectRel.Max + result->Window->Pos);
+ NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(result->Window, rect_abs);
+
+ // Estimate upcoming scroll so we can offset our result position so mouse position can be applied immediately after in NavUpdate()
+ ImVec2 next_scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(result->Window, false);
+ ImVec2 delta_scroll = result->Window->Scroll - next_scroll;
+ result->RectRel.Translate(delta_scroll);
+
+ // Also scroll parent window to keep us into view if necessary (we could/should technically recurse back the whole the parent hierarchy).
+ if (result->Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+ NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(result->Window->ParentWindow, ImRect(rect_abs.Min + delta_scroll, rect_abs.Max + delta_scroll));
}
- return false;
+
+ ClearActiveID();
+ g.NavWindow = result->Window;
+ if (g.NavId != result->ID)
+ {
+ // Don't set NavJustMovedToId if just landed on the same spot (which may happen with ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId)
+ g.NavJustMovedToId = result->ID;
+ g.NavJustMovedToSelectScopeId = result->SelectScopeId;
+ }
+ SetNavIDWithRectRel(result->ID, g.NavLayer, result->RectRel);
+ g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = false;
}
-// For the main menu bar, which cannot be moved, we honor g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding to ensure text can be visible on a TV set.
-bool ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar()
+static float ImGui::NavUpdatePageUpPageDown(int allowed_dir_flags)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.x, ImMax(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.y - g.Style.FramePadding.y, 0.0f));
- SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
- SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y + g.FontBaseSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y));
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, ImVec2(0,0));
- ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
- bool is_open = Begin("##MainMenuBar", NULL, window_flags) && BeginMenuBar();
- PopStyleVar(2);
- g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- if (!is_open)
+ if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavLayer == 0)
{
- End();
- return false;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+ bool page_up_held = IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp]) && (allowed_dir_flags & (1 << ImGuiDir_Up));
+ bool page_down_held = IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown]) && (allowed_dir_flags & (1 << ImGuiDir_Down));
+ if (page_up_held != page_down_held) // If either (not both) are pressed
+ {
+ if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavHasScroll)
+ {
+ // Fallback manual-scroll when window has no navigable item
+ if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp], true))
+ SetWindowScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y - window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight());
+ else if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown], true))
+ SetWindowScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y + window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight());
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ const ImRect& nav_rect_rel = window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer];
+ const float page_offset_y = ImMax(0.0f, window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight() - window->CalcFontSize() * 1.0f + nav_rect_rel.GetHeight());
+ float nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = 0.0f;
+ if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp], true))
+ {
+ nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = -page_offset_y;
+ g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down; // Because our scoring rect is offset, we intentionally request the opposite direction (so we can always land on the last item)
+ g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Up;
+ g.NavMoveRequestFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet;
+ }
+ else if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown], true))
+ {
+ nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = +page_offset_y;
+ g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up; // Because our scoring rect is offset, we intentionally request the opposite direction (so we can always land on the last item)
+ g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Down;
+ g.NavMoveRequestFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet;
+ }
+ return nav_scoring_rect_offset_y;
+ }
+ }
}
- return true;
+ return 0.0f;
}
-void ImGui::EndMainMenuBar()
+static int FindWindowFocusIndex(ImGuiWindow* window) // FIXME-OPT O(N)
{
- EndMenuBar();
-
- // When the user has left the menu layer (typically: closed menus through activation of an item), we restore focus to the previous window
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.CurrentWindow == g.NavWindow && g.NavLayer == 0)
- FocusFrontMostActiveWindow(g.NavWindow);
-
- End();
+ for (int i = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size-1; i >= 0; i--)
+ if (g.WindowsFocusOrder[i] == window)
+ return i;
+ return -1;
}
-bool ImGui::BeginMenuBar()
+static ImGuiWindow* FindWindowNavFocusable(int i_start, int i_stop, int dir) // FIXME-OPT O(N)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
- if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
- return false;
-
- IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
- BeginGroup(); // Backup position on layer 0
- PushID("##menubar");
-
- // We don't clip with current window clipping rectangle as it is already set to the area below. However we clip with window full rect.
- // We remove 1 worth of rounding to Max.x to that text in long menus and small windows don't tend to display over the lower-right rounded area, which looks particularly glitchy.
- ImRect bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
- ImRect clip_rect(ImFloor(bar_rect.Min.x + 0.5f), ImFloor(bar_rect.Min.y + window->WindowBorderSize + 0.5f), ImFloor(ImMax(bar_rect.Min.x, bar_rect.Max.x - window->WindowRounding) + 0.5f), ImFloor(bar_rect.Max.y + 0.5f));
- clip_rect.ClipWith(window->OuterRectClipped);
- PushClipRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, false);
-
- window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(bar_rect.Min.x + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x, bar_rect.Min.y + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y);
- window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
- window->DC.NavLayerCurrent++;
- window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask <<= 1;
- window->DC.MenuBarAppending = true;
- AlignTextToFramePadding();
- return true;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ for (int i = i_start; i >= 0 && i < g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size && i != i_stop; i += dir)
+ if (ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(g.WindowsFocusOrder[i]))
+ return g.WindowsFocusOrder[i];
+ return NULL;
}
-void ImGui::EndMenuBar()
+static void NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(int focus_change_dir)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget);
+ if (g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
+ return;
- // Nav: When a move request within one of our child menu failed, capture the request to navigate among our siblings.
- if (NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
- {
- ImGuiWindow* nav_earliest_child = g.NavWindow;
- while (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow && (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
- nav_earliest_child = nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow;
- if (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow == window && nav_earliest_child->DC.ParentLayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal && g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None)
- {
- // To do so we claim focus back, restore NavId and then process the movement request for yet another frame.
- // This involve a one-frame delay which isn't very problematic in this situation. We could remove it by scoring in advance for multiple window (probably not worth the hassle/cost)
- IM_ASSERT(window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext & 0x02); // Sanity check
- FocusWindow(window);
- SetNavIDWithRectRel(window->NavLastIds[1], 1, window->NavRectRel[1]);
- g.NavLayer = 1;
- g.NavDisableHighlight = true; // Hide highlight for the current frame so we don't see the intermediary selection.
- g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued;
- NavMoveRequestCancel();
- }
- }
-
- IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
- IM_ASSERT(window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
- PopClipRect();
- PopID();
- window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->MenuBarRect().Min.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos.
- window->DC.GroupStack.back().AdvanceCursor = false;
- EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0
- window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
- window->DC.NavLayerCurrent--;
- window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask >>= 1;
- window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
+ const int i_current = FindWindowFocusIndex(g.NavWindowingTarget);
+ ImGuiWindow* window_target = FindWindowNavFocusable(i_current + focus_change_dir, -INT_MAX, focus_change_dir);
+ if (!window_target)
+ window_target = FindWindowNavFocusable((focus_change_dir < 0) ? (g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1) : 0, i_current, focus_change_dir);
+ if (window_target) // Don't reset windowing target if there's a single window in the list
+ g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window_target;
+ g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
}
-bool ImGui::BeginMenu(const char* label, bool enabled)
+// Window management mode (hold to: change focus/move/resize, tap to: toggle menu layer)
+static void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowing()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
-
- ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
-
- bool pressed;
- bool menu_is_open = IsPopupOpen(id);
- bool menuset_is_open = !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].OpenParentId == window->IDStack.back());
- ImGuiWindow* backed_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
- if (menuset_is_open)
- g.NavWindow = window; // Odd hack to allow hovering across menus of a same menu-set (otherwise we wouldn't be able to hover parent)
+ ImGuiWindow* apply_focus_window = NULL;
+ bool apply_toggle_layer = false;
- // The reference position stored in popup_pos will be used by Begin() to find a suitable position for the child menu (using FindBestWindowPosForPopup).
- ImVec2 popup_pos, pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
+ ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
+ if (modal_window != NULL)
{
- // Menu inside an horizontal menu bar
- // Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction.
- // For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin()
- popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - window->WindowPadding.x, pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
- window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
- PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, style.ItemSpacing * 2.0f);
- float w = label_size.x;
- pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
- PopStyleVar();
- window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
+ g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
+ return;
}
- else
+
+ // Fade out
+ if (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim && g.NavWindowingTarget == NULL)
{
- // Menu inside a menu
- popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y);
- float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, 0.0f, (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback to next frame
- float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
- pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
- if (!enabled) PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
- RenderArrow(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.30f, 0.0f), ImGuiDir_Right);
- if (!enabled) PopStyleColor();
+ g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha - g.IO.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f);
+ if (g.DimBgRatio <= 0.0f && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha <= 0.0f)
+ g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = NULL;
}
- const bool hovered = enabled && ItemHoverable(window->DC.LastItemRect, id);
- if (menuset_is_open)
- g.NavWindow = backed_nav_window;
-
- bool want_open = false, want_close = false;
- if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) // (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
- {
- // Implement http://bjk5.com/post/44698559168/breaking-down-amazons-mega-dropdown to avoid using timers, so menus feels more reactive.
- bool moving_within_opened_triangle = false;
- if (g.HoveredWindow == window && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].ParentWindow == window && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+ // Start CTRL-TAB or Square+L/R window selection
+ bool start_windowing_with_gamepad = !g.NavWindowingTarget && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Menu, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
+ bool start_windowing_with_keyboard = !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab) && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard);
+ if (start_windowing_with_gamepad || start_windowing_with_keyboard)
+ if (ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow : FindWindowNavFocusable(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1, -INT_MAX, -1))
{
- if (ImGuiWindow* next_window = g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].Window)
- {
- ImRect next_window_rect = next_window->Rect();
- ImVec2 ta = g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseDelta;
- ImVec2 tb = (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetTL() : next_window_rect.GetTR();
- ImVec2 tc = (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetBL() : next_window_rect.GetBR();
- float extra = ImClamp(ImFabs(ta.x - tb.x) * 0.30f, 5.0f, 30.0f); // add a bit of extra slack.
- ta.x += (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? -0.5f : +0.5f; // to avoid numerical issues
- tb.y = ta.y + ImMax((tb.y - extra) - ta.y, -100.0f); // triangle is maximum 200 high to limit the slope and the bias toward large sub-menus // FIXME: Multiply by fb_scale?
- tc.y = ta.y + ImMin((tc.y + extra) - ta.y, +100.0f);
- moving_within_opened_triangle = ImTriangleContainsPoint(ta, tb, tc, g.IO.MousePos);
- //window->DrawList->PushClipRectFullScreen(); window->DrawList->AddTriangleFilled(ta, tb, tc, moving_within_opened_triangle ? IM_COL32(0,128,0,128) : IM_COL32(128,0,0,128)); window->DrawList->PopClipRect(); // Debug
- }
+ g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window;
+ g.NavWindowingTimer = g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 0.0f;
+ g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = start_windowing_with_keyboard ? false : true;
+ g.NavInputSource = start_windowing_with_keyboard ? ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard : ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad;
}
- want_close = (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && !moving_within_opened_triangle);
- want_open = (!menu_is_open && hovered && !moving_within_opened_triangle) || (!menu_is_open && hovered && pressed);
-
- if (g.NavActivateId == id)
- {
- want_close = menu_is_open;
- want_open = !menu_is_open;
- }
- if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) // Nav-Right to open
- {
- want_open = true;
- NavMoveRequestCancel();
- }
- }
- else
+ // Gamepad update
+ g.NavWindowingTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+ if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
{
- // Menu bar
- if (menu_is_open && pressed && menuset_is_open) // Click an open menu again to close it
- {
- want_close = true;
- want_open = menu_is_open = false;
- }
- else if (pressed || (hovered && menuset_is_open && !menu_is_open)) // First click to open, then hover to open others
+ // Highlight only appears after a brief time holding the button, so that a fast tap on PadMenu (to toggle NavLayer) doesn't add visual noise
+ g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f));
+
+ // Select window to focus
+ const int focus_change_dir = (int)IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow) - (int)IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow);
+ if (focus_change_dir != 0)
{
- want_open = true;
+ NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(focus_change_dir);
+ g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 1.0f;
}
- else if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) // Nav-Down to open
+
+ // Single press toggles NavLayer, long press with L/R apply actual focus on release (until then the window was merely rendered front-most)
+ if (!IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_Menu))
{
- want_open = true;
- NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ g.NavWindowingToggleLayer &= (g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha < 1.0f); // Once button was held long enough we don't consider it a tap-to-toggle-layer press anymore.
+ if (g.NavWindowingToggleLayer && g.NavWindow)
+ apply_toggle_layer = true;
+ else if (!g.NavWindowingToggleLayer)
+ apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget;
+ g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
}
}
- if (!enabled) // explicitly close if an open menu becomes disabled, facilitate users code a lot in pattern such as 'if (BeginMenu("options", has_object)) { ..use object.. }'
- want_close = true;
- if (want_close && IsPopupOpen(id))
- ClosePopupToLevel(g.CurrentPopupStack.Size);
-
- if (!menu_is_open && want_open && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size)
+ // Keyboard: Focus
+ if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard)
{
- // Don't recycle same menu level in the same frame, first close the other menu and yield for a frame.
- OpenPopup(label);
- return false;
+ // Visuals only appears after a brief time after pressing TAB the first time, so that a fast CTRL+TAB doesn't add visual noise
+ g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f)); // 1.0f
+ if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab, true))
+ NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(g.IO.KeyShift ? +1 : -1);
+ if (!g.IO.KeyCtrl)
+ apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget;
}
- menu_is_open |= want_open;
- if (want_open)
- OpenPopup(label);
+ // Keyboard: Press and Release ALT to toggle menu layer
+ // FIXME: We lack an explicit IO variable for "is the imgui window focused", so compare mouse validity to detect the common case of back-end clearing releases all keys on ALT-TAB
+ if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap) && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_KeyMenu_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Released))
+ if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) == IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePosPrev))
+ apply_toggle_layer = true;
- if (menu_is_open)
+ // Move window
+ if (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
{
- // Sub-menus are ChildWindow so that mouse can be hovering across them (otherwise top-most popup menu would steal focus and not allow hovering on parent menu)
- SetNextWindowPos(popup_pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
- ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ((window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) ? ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow : ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu);
- menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
+ ImVec2 move_delta;
+ if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard && !g.IO.KeyShift)
+ move_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
+ if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
+ move_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
+ if (move_delta.x != 0.0f || move_delta.y != 0.0f)
+ {
+ const float NAV_MOVE_SPEED = 800.0f;
+ const float move_speed = ImFloor(NAV_MOVE_SPEED * g.IO.DeltaTime * ImMin(g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.y)); // FIXME: Doesn't code variable framerate very well
+ g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow->Pos += move_delta * move_speed;
+ g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
+ MarkIniSettingsDirty(g.NavWindowingTarget);
+ }
}
- return menu_is_open;
-}
-
-void ImGui::EndMenu()
-{
- // Nav: When a left move request _within our child menu_ failed, close the menu.
- // A menu doesn't close itself because EndMenuBar() wants the catch the last Left<>Right inputs.
- // However, it means that with the current code, a BeginMenu() from outside another menu or a menu-bar won't be closable with the Left direction.
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow == window && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical)
+ // Apply final focus
+ if (apply_focus_window && (g.NavWindow == NULL || apply_focus_window != g.NavWindow->RootWindow))
{
- ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1);
- NavMoveRequestCancel();
- }
-
- EndPopup();
-}
-
-// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
-void ImGui::ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
+ g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
+ apply_focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(apply_focus_window);
+ ClosePopupsOverWindow(apply_focus_window);
+ FocusWindow(apply_focus_window);
+ if (apply_focus_window->NavLastIds[0] == 0)
+ NavInitWindow(apply_focus_window, false);
- int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
- BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
+ // If the window only has a menu layer, select it directly
+ if (apply_focus_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu))
+ g.NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+ }
+ if (apply_focus_window)
+ g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
- const char* text_end = text ? FindRenderedTextEnd(text, NULL) : text;
- if (text_end > text)
+ // Apply menu/layer toggle
+ if (apply_toggle_layer && g.NavWindow)
{
- TextUnformatted(text, text_end);
- Separator();
+ // Move to parent menu if necessary
+ ImGuiWindow* new_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
+ while ((new_nav_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask & (1 << 1)) == 0
+ && (new_nav_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0
+ && (new_nav_window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0)
+ new_nav_window = new_nav_window->ParentWindow;
+ if (new_nav_window != g.NavWindow)
+ {
+ ImGuiWindow* old_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
+ FocusWindow(new_nav_window);
+ new_nav_window->NavLastChildNavWindow = old_nav_window;
+ }
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
+ g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
+ NavRestoreLayer((g.NavWindow->DC.NavLayerActiveMask & (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu)) ? (ImGuiNavLayer)((int)g.NavLayer ^ 1) : ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
}
-
- ImVec2 sz(g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2, g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
- ColorButton("##preview", ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]), (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, sz);
- SameLine();
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
- Text("#%02X%02X%02X\nR: %d, G: %d, B: %d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, cr, cg, cb, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
- else
- Text("#%02X%02X%02X%02X\nR:%d, G:%d, B:%d, A:%d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, ca, cr, cg, cb, ca, col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
- EndTooltip();
}
-static inline ImU32 ImAlphaBlendColor(ImU32 col_a, ImU32 col_b)
+// Window has already passed the IsWindowNavFocusable()
+static const char* GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- float t = ((col_b >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) / 255.f;
- int r = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
- int g = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
- int b = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
- return IM_COL32(r, g, b, 0xFF);
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+ return "(Popup)";
+ if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) && strcmp(window->Name, "##MainMenuBar") == 0)
+ return "(Main menu bar)";
+ return "(Untitled)";
}
-// NB: This is rather brittle and will show artifact when rounding this enabled if rounded corners overlap multiple cells. Caller currently responsible for avoiding that.
-// I spent a non reasonable amount of time trying to getting this right for ColorButton with rounding+anti-aliasing+ImGuiColorEditFlags_HalfAlphaPreview flag + various grid sizes and offsets, and eventually gave up... probably more reasonable to disable rounding alltogether.
-void ImGui::RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding, int rounding_corners_flags)
+// Overlay displayed when using CTRL+TAB. Called by EndFrame().
+void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowingList()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) < 0xFF)
- {
- ImU32 col_bg1 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(204,204,204,255), col));
- ImU32 col_bg2 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), col));
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col_bg1, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL);
- int yi = 0;
- for (float y = p_min.y + grid_off.y; y < p_max.y; y += grid_step, yi++)
- {
- float y1 = ImClamp(y, p_min.y, p_max.y), y2 = ImMin(y + grid_step, p_max.y);
- if (y2 <= y1)
- continue;
- for (float x = p_min.x + grid_off.x + (yi & 1) * grid_step; x < p_max.x; x += grid_step * 2.0f)
- {
- float x1 = ImClamp(x, p_min.x, p_max.x), x2 = ImMin(x + grid_step, p_max.x);
- if (x2 <= x1)
- continue;
- int rounding_corners_flags_cell = 0;
- if (y1 <= p_min.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight; }
- if (y2 >= p_max.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight; }
- rounding_corners_flags_cell &= rounding_corners_flags;
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x1,y1), ImVec2(x2,y2), col_bg2, rounding_corners_flags_cell ? rounding : 0.0f, rounding_corners_flags_cell);
- }
- }
- }
- else
+ if (g.NavWindowingTimer < NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY)
+ return;
+
+ if (g.NavWindowingList == NULL)
+ g.NavWindowingList = FindWindowByName("###NavWindowingList");
+ SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(g.IO.DisplaySize.x * 0.20f, g.IO.DisplaySize.y * 0.20f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX));
+ SetNextWindowPos(g.IO.DisplaySize * 0.5f, ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, g.Style.WindowPadding * 2.0f);
+ Begin("###NavWindowingList", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
+ for (int n = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--)
{
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.WindowsFocusOrder[n];
+ if (!IsWindowNavFocusable(window))
+ continue;
+ const char* label = window->Name;
+ if (label == FindRenderedTextEnd(label))
+ label = GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(window);
+ Selectable(label, g.NavWindowingTarget == window);
}
+ End();
+ PopStyleVar();
}
-void ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
- flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask;
- if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) == 0)
- flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask;
- if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) == 0)
- flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
- IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask))); // Check only 1 option is selected
- IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask))); // Check only 1 option is selected
- IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))); // Check only 1 option is selected
- g.ColorEditOptions = flags;
-}
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] COLUMNS
+// In the current version, Columns are very weak. Needs to be replaced with a more full-featured system.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// A little colored square. Return true when clicked.
-// FIXME: May want to display/ignore the alpha component in the color display? Yet show it in the tooltip.
-// 'desc_id' is not called 'label' because we don't display it next to the button, but only in the tooltip.
-bool ImGui::ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, ImVec2 size)
+void ImGui::NextColumn()
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
+ if (window->SkipItems || window->DC.ColumnsSet == NULL)
+ return;
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(desc_id);
- float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
- if (size.x == 0.0f)
- size.x = default_size;
- if (size.y == 0.0f)
- size.y = default_size;
- const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
- ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
- return false;
-
- bool hovered, held;
- bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
-
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
- flags &= ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf);
+ PopItemWidth();
+ PopClipRect();
- ImVec4 col_without_alpha(col.x, col.y, col.z, 1.0f);
- float grid_step = ImMin(size.x, size.y) / 2.99f;
- float rounding = ImMin(g.Style.FrameRounding, grid_step * 0.5f);
- ImRect bb_inner = bb;
- float off = -0.75f; // The border (using Col_FrameBg) tends to look off when color is near-opaque and rounding is enabled. This offset seemed like a good middle ground to reduce those artifacts.
- bb_inner.Expand(off);
- if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf) && col.w < 1.0f)
- {
- float mid_x = (float)(int)((bb_inner.Min.x + bb_inner.Max.x) * 0.5f + 0.5f);
- RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2(bb_inner.Min.x + grid_step, bb_inner.Min.y), bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col), grid_step, ImVec2(-grid_step + off, off), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight| ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, ImVec2(mid_x, bb_inner.Max.y), GetColorU32(col_without_alpha), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft|ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft);
- }
- else
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
+ columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
+ if (++columns->Current < columns->Count)
{
- // Because GetColorU32() multiplies by the global style Alpha and we don't want to display a checkerboard if the source code had no alpha
- ImVec4 col_source = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview) ? col : col_without_alpha;
- if (col_source.w < 1.0f)
- RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), grid_step, ImVec2(off, off), rounding);
- else
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All);
+ // Columns 1+ cancel out IndentX
+ window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current) - window->DC.Indent.x + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
+ window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(columns->Current);
}
- RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
- if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
- RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, rounding);
else
- window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), rounding); // Color button are often in need of some sort of border
-
- // Drag and Drop Source
- // NB: The ActiveId test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropSource() does the same test.
- if (g.ActiveId == id && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropSource())
{
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
- SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F, &col, sizeof(float) * 3, ImGuiCond_Once);
- else
- SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, &col, sizeof(float) * 4, ImGuiCond_Once);
- ColorButton(desc_id, col, flags);
- SameLine();
- TextUnformatted("Color");
- EndDragDropSource();
+ window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
+ window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
+ columns->Current = 0;
+ columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY;
}
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
+ window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMinY;
+ window->DC.CurrentLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
- // Tooltip
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip) && hovered)
- ColorTooltip(desc_id, &col.x, flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf));
-
- if (pressed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
-
- return pressed;
+ PushColumnClipRect();
+ PushItemWidth(GetColumnWidth() * 0.65f); // FIXME: Move on columns setup
}
-bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+int ImGui::GetColumnIndex()
{
- return ColorEdit4(label, col, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.ColumnsSet ? window->DC.ColumnsSet->Current : 0;
}
-void ImGui::ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+int ImGui::GetColumnsCount()
{
- bool allow_opt_inputs = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask);
- bool allow_opt_datatype = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
- if ((!allow_opt_inputs && !allow_opt_datatype) || !BeginPopup("context"))
- return;
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiColorEditFlags opts = g.ColorEditOptions;
- if (allow_opt_inputs)
- {
- if (RadioButton("RGB", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB;
- if (RadioButton("HSV", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV;
- if (RadioButton("HEX", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX;
- }
- if (allow_opt_datatype)
- {
- if (allow_opt_inputs) Separator();
- if (RadioButton("0..255", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8;
- if (RadioButton("0.00..1.00", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
- }
-
- if (allow_opt_inputs || allow_opt_datatype)
- Separator();
- if (Button("Copy as..", ImVec2(-1,0)))
- OpenPopup("Copy");
- if (BeginPopup("Copy"))
- {
- int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
- char buf[64];
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff)", col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
- if (Selectable(buf))
- SetClipboardText(buf);
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%d,%d,%d,%d)", cr, cg, cb, ca);
- if (Selectable(buf))
- SetClipboardText(buf);
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb);
- else
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb, ca);
- if (Selectable(buf))
- SetClipboardText(buf);
- EndPopup();
- }
-
- g.ColorEditOptions = opts;
- EndPopup();
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ return window->DC.ColumnsSet ? window->DC.ColumnsSet->Count : 1;
}
-static void ColorPickerOptionsPopup(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const float* ref_col)
+static float OffsetNormToPixels(const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, float offset_norm)
{
- bool allow_opt_picker = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
- bool allow_opt_alpha_bar = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
- if ((!allow_opt_picker && !allow_opt_alpha_bar) || !ImGui::BeginPopup("context"))
- return;
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (allow_opt_picker)
- {
- ImVec2 picker_size(g.FontSize * 8, ImMax(g.FontSize * 8 - (ImGui::GetFrameHeight() + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), 1.0f)); // FIXME: Picker size copied from main picker function
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(picker_size.x);
- for (int picker_type = 0; picker_type < 2; picker_type++)
- {
- // Draw small/thumbnail version of each picker type (over an invisible button for selection)
- if (picker_type > 0) ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::PushID(picker_type);
- ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview|(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
- if (picker_type == 0) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
- if (picker_type == 1) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
- ImVec2 backup_pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
- if (ImGui::Selectable("##selectable", false, 0, picker_size)) // By default, Selectable() is closing popup
- g.ColorEditOptions = (g.ColorEditOptions & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) | (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
- ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(backup_pos);
- ImVec4 dummy_ref_col;
- memcpy(&dummy_ref_col.x, ref_col, sizeof(float) * (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha ? 3 : 4));
- ImGui::ColorPicker4("##dummypicker", &dummy_ref_col.x, picker_flags);
- ImGui::PopID();
- }
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- }
- if (allow_opt_alpha_bar)
- {
- if (allow_opt_picker) ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::CheckboxFlags("Alpha Bar", (unsigned int*)&g.ColorEditOptions, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
- }
- ImGui::EndPopup();
+ return offset_norm * (columns->MaxX - columns->MinX);
}
-// Edit colors components (each component in 0.0f..1.0f range).
-// See enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ for available options. e.g. Only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
-// With typical options: Left-click on colored square to open color picker. Right-click to open option menu. CTRL-Click over input fields to edit them and TAB to go to next item.
-bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+static float PixelsToOffsetNorm(const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, float offset)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
- const float w_extra = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview) ? 0.0f : (square_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- const float w_items_all = CalcItemWidth() - w_extra;
- const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
-
- BeginGroup();
- PushID(label);
-
- // If we're not showing any slider there's no point in doing any HSV conversions
- const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_untouched = flags;
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs)
- flags = (flags & (~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions;
-
- // Context menu: display and modify options (before defaults are applied)
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
- ColorEditOptionsPopup(col, flags);
-
- // Read stored options
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask))
- flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask))
- flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
- flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
- flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask));
-
- const bool alpha = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) == 0;
- const bool hdr = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR) != 0;
- const int components = alpha ? 4 : 3;
-
- // Convert to the formats we need
- float f[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f };
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)
- ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
- int i[4] = { IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[0]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[1]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[2]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[3]) };
-
- bool value_changed = false;
- bool value_changed_as_float = false;
-
- if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
- {
- // RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders
- const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)((w_items_all - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)) / (float)components));
- const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(w_items_all - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)));
-
- const bool hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x);
- const char* ids[4] = { "##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W" };
- const char* fmt_table_int[3][4] =
- {
- { "%3d", "%3d", "%3d", "%3d" }, // Short display
- { "R:%3d", "G:%3d", "B:%3d", "A:%3d" }, // Long display for RGBA
- { "H:%3d", "S:%3d", "V:%3d", "A:%3d" } // Long display for HSVA
- };
- const char* fmt_table_float[3][4] =
- {
- { "%0.3f", "%0.3f", "%0.3f", "%0.3f" }, // Short display
- { "R:%0.3f", "G:%0.3f", "B:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }, // Long display for RGBA
- { "H:%0.3f", "S:%0.3f", "V:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" } // Long display for HSVA
- };
- const int fmt_idx = hide_prefix ? 0 : (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV) ? 2 : 1;
-
- PushItemWidth(w_item_one);
- for (int n = 0; n < components; n++)
- {
- if (n > 0)
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- if (n + 1 == components)
- PushItemWidth(w_item_last);
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float)
- value_changed = value_changed_as_float = value_changed | DragFloat(ids[n], &f[n], 1.0f/255.0f, 0.0f, hdr ? 0.0f : 1.0f, fmt_table_float[fmt_idx][n]);
- else
- value_changed |= DragInt(ids[n], &i[n], 1.0f, 0, hdr ? 0 : 255, fmt_table_int[fmt_idx][n]);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
- OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
- }
- PopItemWidth();
- PopItemWidth();
- }
- else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
- {
- // RGB Hexadecimal Input
- char buf[64];
- if (alpha)
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255), ImClamp(i[3],0,255));
- else
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255));
- PushItemWidth(w_items_all);
- if (InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase))
- {
- value_changed = true;
- char* p = buf;
- while (*p == '#' || ImCharIsBlankA(*p))
- p++;
- i[0] = i[1] = i[2] = i[3] = 0;
- if (alpha)
- sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2], (unsigned int*)&i[3]); // Treat at unsigned (%X is unsigned)
- else
- sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2]);
- }
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
- OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
- PopItemWidth();
- }
-
- ImGuiWindow* picker_active_window = NULL;
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview))
- {
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs))
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
-
- const ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f);
- if (ColorButton("##ColorButton", col_v4, flags))
- {
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker))
- {
- // Store current color and open a picker
- g.ColorPickerRef = col_v4;
- OpenPopup("picker");
- SetNextWindowPos(window->DC.LastItemRect.GetBL() + ImVec2(-1,style.ItemSpacing.y));
- }
- }
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
- OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
-
- if (BeginPopup("picker"))
- {
- picker_active_window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (label != label_display_end)
- {
- TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
- Separator();
- }
- ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
- ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = (flags_untouched & picker_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
- PushItemWidth(square_sz * 12.0f); // Use 256 + bar sizes?
- value_changed |= ColorPicker4("##picker", col, picker_flags, &g.ColorPickerRef.x);
- PopItemWidth();
- EndPopup();
- }
- }
+ return offset / (columns->MaxX - columns->MinX);
+}
- if (label != label_display_end && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
- {
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
- }
+static inline float GetColumnsRectHalfWidth() { return 4.0f; }
- // Convert back
- if (picker_active_window == NULL)
- {
- if (!value_changed_as_float)
- for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
- f[n] = i[n] / 255.0f;
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)
- ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
- if (value_changed)
- {
- col[0] = f[0];
- col[1] = f[1];
- col[2] = f[2];
- if (alpha)
- col[3] = f[3];
- }
- }
+static float GetDraggedColumnOffset(ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, int column_index)
+{
+ // Active (dragged) column always follow mouse. The reason we need this is that dragging a column to the right edge of an auto-resizing
+ // window creates a feedback loop because we store normalized positions. So while dragging we enforce absolute positioning.
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ IM_ASSERT(column_index > 0); // We are not supposed to drag column 0.
+ IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == columns->ID + ImGuiID(column_index));
- PopID();
- EndGroup();
+ float x = g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + GetColumnsRectHalfWidth() - window->Pos.x;
+ x = ImMax(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index - 1) + g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
+ if ((columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths))
+ x = ImMin(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index + 1) - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
- // Drag and Drop Target
- // NB: The flag test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropTarget() does the same test.
- if ((window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropTarget())
- {
- if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
- {
- memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3);
- value_changed = true;
- }
- if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
- {
- memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * components);
- value_changed = true;
- }
- EndDragDropTarget();
- }
+ return x;
+}
- // When picker is being actively used, use its active id so IsItemActive() will function on ColorEdit4().
- if (picker_active_window && g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow == picker_active_window)
- window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveId;
+float ImGui::GetColumnOffset(int column_index)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
+ IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
- if (value_changed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(window->DC.LastItemId);
+ if (column_index < 0)
+ column_index = columns->Current;
+ IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);
- return value_changed;
+ const float t = columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
+ const float x_offset = ImLerp(columns->MinX, columns->MaxX, t);
+ return x_offset;
}
-bool ImGui::ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+static float GetColumnWidthEx(ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, int column_index, bool before_resize = false)
{
- float col4[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f };
- if (!ColorPicker4(label, col4, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha))
- return false;
- col[0] = col4[0]; col[1] = col4[1]; col[2] = col4[2];
- return true;
+ if (column_index < 0)
+ column_index = columns->Current;
+
+ float offset_norm;
+ if (before_resize)
+ offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNormBeforeResize - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNormBeforeResize;
+ else
+ offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
+ return OffsetNormToPixels(columns, offset_norm);
}
-static void RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, float bar_w)
+float ImGui::GetColumnWidth(int column_index)
{
- ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x + 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32_BLACK);
- ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y), half_sz, ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32_WHITE);
- ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x - 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Left, IM_COL32_BLACK);
- ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x, pos.y), half_sz, ImGuiDir_Left, IM_COL32_WHITE);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
+ IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
+
+ if (column_index < 0)
+ column_index = columns->Current;
+ return OffsetNormToPixels(columns, columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm);
}
-// ColorPicker
-// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
-// FIXME: we adjust the big color square height based on item width, which may cause a flickering feedback loop (if automatic height makes a vertical scrollbar appears, affecting automatic width..)
-bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const float* ref_col)
+void ImGui::SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList;
-
- ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
- ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
-
- PushID(label);
- BeginGroup();
-
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
- flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview;
-
- // Context menu: display and store options.
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
- ColorPickerOptionsPopup(flags, col);
-
- // Read stored options
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
- flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault) & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
- IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))); // Check that only 1 is selected
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
- flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
-
- // Setup
- int components = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4;
- bool alpha_bar = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
- ImVec2 picker_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
- float bars_width = square_sz; // Arbitrary smallish width of Hue/Alpha picking bars
- float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, CalcItemWidth() - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box
- float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
- float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
- float bars_triangles_half_sz = (float)(int)(bars_width * 0.20f);
-
- float backup_initial_col[4];
- memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float));
-
- float wheel_thickness = sv_picker_size * 0.08f;
- float wheel_r_outer = sv_picker_size * 0.50f;
- float wheel_r_inner = wheel_r_outer - wheel_thickness;
- ImVec2 wheel_center(picker_pos.x + (sv_picker_size + bars_width)*0.5f, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size*0.5f);
-
- // Note: the triangle is displayed rotated with triangle_pa pointing to Hue, but most coordinates stays unrotated for logic.
- float triangle_r = wheel_r_inner - (int)(sv_picker_size * 0.027f);
- ImVec2 triangle_pa = ImVec2(triangle_r, 0.0f); // Hue point.
- ImVec2 triangle_pb = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * -0.866025f); // Black point.
- ImVec2 triangle_pc = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * +0.866025f); // White point.
-
- float H,S,V;
- ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], H, S, V);
-
- bool value_changed = false, value_changed_h = false, value_changed_sv = false;
-
- PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, true);
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
- {
- // Hue wheel + SV triangle logic
- InvisibleButton("hsv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + bars_width, sv_picker_size));
- if (IsItemActive())
- {
- ImVec2 initial_off = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - wheel_center;
- ImVec2 current_off = g.IO.MousePos - wheel_center;
- float initial_dist2 = ImLengthSqr(initial_off);
- if (initial_dist2 >= (wheel_r_inner-1)*(wheel_r_inner-1) && initial_dist2 <= (wheel_r_outer+1)*(wheel_r_outer+1))
- {
- // Interactive with Hue wheel
- H = ImAtan2(current_off.y, current_off.x) / IM_PI*0.5f;
- if (H < 0.0f)
- H += 1.0f;
- value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
- }
- float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
- float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
- if (ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, ImRotate(initial_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle)))
- {
- // Interacting with SV triangle
- ImVec2 current_off_unrotated = ImRotate(current_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
- if (!ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated))
- current_off_unrotated = ImTriangleClosestPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated);
- float uu, vv, ww;
- ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated, uu, vv, ww);
- V = ImClamp(1.0f - vv, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
- S = ImClamp(uu / V, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
- value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
- }
- }
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
- OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
- }
- else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
- {
- // SV rectangle logic
- InvisibleButton("sv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size));
- if (IsItemActive())
- {
- S = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.x - picker_pos.x) / (sv_picker_size-1));
- V = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
- value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
- }
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
- OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
-
- // Hue bar logic
- SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
- InvisibleButton("hue", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
- if (IsItemActive())
- {
- H = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
- value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
- }
- }
-
- // Alpha bar logic
- if (alpha_bar)
- {
- SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
- InvisibleButton("alpha", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
- if (IsItemActive())
- {
- col[3] = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
- value_changed = true;
- }
- }
- PopItemFlag(); // ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav
-
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
- {
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- BeginGroup();
- }
-
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
- {
- const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
- if (label != label_display_end)
- {
- if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
- SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
- }
- }
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
+ IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
- if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
- {
- PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
- ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
- if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
- Text("Current");
- ColorButton("##current", col_v4, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip)), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2));
- if (ref_col != NULL)
- {
- Text("Original");
- ImVec4 ref_col_v4(ref_col[0], ref_col[1], ref_col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : ref_col[3]);
- if (ColorButton("##original", ref_col_v4, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip)), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2)))
- {
- memcpy(col, ref_col, components * sizeof(float));
- value_changed = true;
- }
- }
- PopItemFlag();
- EndGroup();
- }
+ if (column_index < 0)
+ column_index = columns->Current;
+ IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);
- // Convert back color to RGB
- if (value_changed_h || value_changed_sv)
- ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H >= 1.0f ? H - 10 * 1e-6f : H, S > 0.0f ? S : 10*1e-6f, V > 0.0f ? V : 1e-6f, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+ const bool preserve_width = !(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths) && (column_index < columns->Count-1);
+ const float width = preserve_width ? GetColumnWidthEx(columns, column_index, columns->IsBeingResized) : 0.0f;
- // R,G,B and H,S,V slider color editor
- if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
- {
- PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x);
- ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
- ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker;
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
- value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB);
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
- value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hsv", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV);
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
- value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hex", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX);
- PopItemWidth();
- }
+ if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoForceWithinWindow))
+ offset = ImMin(offset, columns->MaxX - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing * (columns->Count - column_index));
+ columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm = PixelsToOffsetNorm(columns, offset - columns->MinX);
- // Try to cancel hue wrap (after ColorEdit), if any
- if (value_changed)
- {
- float new_H, new_S, new_V;
- ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], new_H, new_S, new_V);
- if (new_H <= 0 && H > 0)
- {
- if (new_V <= 0 && V != new_V)
- ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, new_V <= 0 ? V * 0.5f : new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
- else if (new_S <= 0)
- ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, new_S <= 0 ? S * 0.5f : new_S, new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
- }
- }
+ if (preserve_width)
+ SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, offset + ImMax(g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing, width));
+}
- ImVec4 hue_color_f(1, 1, 1, 1); ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, 1, 1, hue_color_f.x, hue_color_f.y, hue_color_f.z);
- ImU32 hue_color32 = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(hue_color_f);
- ImU32 col32_no_alpha = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f));
+void ImGui::SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
+ IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
- const ImU32 hue_colors[6+1] = { IM_COL32(255,0,0,255), IM_COL32(255,255,0,255), IM_COL32(0,255,0,255), IM_COL32(0,255,255,255), IM_COL32(0,0,255,255), IM_COL32(255,0,255,255), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255) };
- ImVec2 sv_cursor_pos;
+ if (column_index < 0)
+ column_index = columns->Current;
+ SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, GetColumnOffset(column_index) + width);
+}
- if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
- {
- // Render Hue Wheel
- const float aeps = 1.5f / wheel_r_outer; // Half a pixel arc length in radians (2pi cancels out).
- const int segment_per_arc = ImMax(4, (int)wheel_r_outer / 12);
- for (int n = 0; n < 6; n++)
- {
- const float a0 = (n) /6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI - aeps;
- const float a1 = (n+1.0f)/6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + aeps;
- const int vert_start_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
- draw_list->PathArcTo(wheel_center, (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, a0, a1, segment_per_arc);
- draw_list->PathStroke(IM_COL32_WHITE, false, wheel_thickness);
- const int vert_end_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
-
- // Paint colors over existing vertices
- ImVec2 gradient_p0(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a0) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a0) * wheel_r_inner);
- ImVec2 gradient_p1(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a1) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a1) * wheel_r_inner);
- ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx, draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx, gradient_p0, gradient_p1, hue_colors[n], hue_colors[n+1]);
- }
+void ImGui::PushColumnClipRect(int column_index)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
+ if (column_index < 0)
+ column_index = columns->Current;
- // Render Cursor + preview on Hue Wheel
- float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
- float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
- ImVec2 hue_cursor_pos(wheel_center.x + cos_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, wheel_center.y + sin_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f);
- float hue_cursor_rad = value_changed_h ? wheel_thickness * 0.65f : wheel_thickness * 0.55f;
- int hue_cursor_segments = ImClamp((int)(hue_cursor_rad / 1.4f), 9, 32);
- draw_list->AddCircleFilled(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, hue_color32, hue_cursor_segments);
- draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad+1, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), hue_cursor_segments);
- draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, IM_COL32_WHITE, hue_cursor_segments);
-
- // Render SV triangle (rotated according to hue)
- ImVec2 tra = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pa, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
- ImVec2 trb = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pb, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
- ImVec2 trc = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pc, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
- ImVec2 uv_white = GetFontTexUvWhitePixel();
- draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 6);
- draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, hue_color32);
- draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, hue_color32);
- draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, IM_COL32_WHITE);
- draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS);
- draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK);
- draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS);
- draw_list->AddTriangle(tra, trb, trc, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), 1.5f);
- sv_cursor_pos = ImLerp(ImLerp(trc, tra, ImSaturate(S)), trb, ImSaturate(1 - V));
- }
- else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
- {
- // Render SV Square
- draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), IM_COL32_WHITE, hue_color32, hue_color32, IM_COL32_WHITE);
- draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS, IM_COL32_BLACK, IM_COL32_BLACK);
- RenderFrameBorder(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
- sv_cursor_pos.x = ImClamp((float)(int)(picker_pos.x + ImSaturate(S) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f), picker_pos.x + 2, picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size - 2); // Sneakily prevent the circle to stick out too much
- sv_cursor_pos.y = ImClamp((float)(int)(picker_pos.y + ImSaturate(1 - V) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f), picker_pos.y + 2, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size - 2);
-
- // Render Hue Bar
- for (int i = 0; i < 6; ++i)
- draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y + i * (sv_picker_size / 6)), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + (i + 1) * (sv_picker_size / 6)), hue_colors[i], hue_colors[i], hue_colors[i + 1], hue_colors[i + 1]);
- float bar0_line_y = (float)(int)(picker_pos.y + H * sv_picker_size + 0.5f);
- RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
- RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar0_pos_x - 1, bar0_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f);
- }
-
- // Render cursor/preview circle (clamp S/V within 0..1 range because floating points colors may lead HSV values to be out of range)
- float sv_cursor_rad = value_changed_sv ? 10.0f : 6.0f;
- draw_list->AddCircleFilled(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, col32_no_alpha, 12);
- draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad+1, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), 12);
- draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, IM_COL32_WHITE, 12);
-
- // Render alpha bar
- if (alpha_bar)
- {
- float alpha = ImSaturate(col[3]);
- ImRect bar1_bb(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y, bar1_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size);
- RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, IM_COL32(0,0,0,0), bar1_bb.GetWidth() / 2.0f, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
- draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, col32_no_alpha, col32_no_alpha, col32_no_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK, col32_no_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK);
- float bar1_line_y = (float)(int)(picker_pos.y + (1.0f - alpha) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f);
- RenderFrameBorder(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0.0f);
- RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar1_pos_x - 1, bar1_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f);
- }
-
- EndGroup();
-
- if (value_changed && memcmp(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)) == 0)
- value_changed = false;
- if (value_changed)
- MarkItemValueChanged(window->DC.LastItemId);
+ PushClipRect(columns->Columns[column_index].ClipRect.Min, columns->Columns[column_index].ClipRect.Max, false);
+}
- PopID();
+static ImGuiColumnsSet* FindOrAddColumnsSet(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id)
+{
+ for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
+ if (window->ColumnsStorage[n].ID == id)
+ return &window->ColumnsStorage[n];
- return value_changed;
+ window->ColumnsStorage.push_back(ImGuiColumnsSet());
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage.back();
+ columns->ID = id;
+ return columns;
}
-// Horizontal/vertical separating line
-void ImGui::Separator()
+void ImGui::BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiColumnsFlags flags)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- // Those flags should eventually be overridable by the user
- ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal;
- IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & (ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal | ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)))); // Check that only 1 option is selected
- if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)
- {
- VerticalSeparator();
- return;
- }
-
- // Horizontal Separator
- if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
- PopClipRect();
+ IM_ASSERT(columns_count > 1);
+ IM_ASSERT(window->DC.ColumnsSet == NULL); // Nested columns are currently not supported
- float x1 = window->Pos.x;
- float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;
- if (!window->DC.GroupStack.empty())
- x1 += window->DC.IndentX;
+ // Differentiate column ID with an arbitrary prefix for cases where users name their columns set the same as another widget.
+ // In addition, when an identifier isn't explicitly provided we include the number of columns in the hash to make it uniquer.
+ PushID(0x11223347 + (str_id ? 0 : columns_count));
+ ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id ? str_id : "columns");
+ PopID();
- const ImRect bb(ImVec2(x1, window->DC.CursorPos.y), ImVec2(x2, window->DC.CursorPos.y+1.0f));
- ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); // NB: we don't provide our width so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit, we don't provide height to not alter layout.
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
- {
- if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
- PushColumnClipRect();
- return;
- }
+ // Acquire storage for the columns set
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = FindOrAddColumnsSet(window, id);
+ IM_ASSERT(columns->ID == id);
+ columns->Current = 0;
+ columns->Count = columns_count;
+ columns->Flags = flags;
+ window->DC.ColumnsSet = columns;
- window->DrawList->AddLine(bb.Min, ImVec2(bb.Max.x,bb.Min.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
+ // Set state for first column
+ const float content_region_width = (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x) : (window->InnerClipRect.Max.x - window->Pos.x);
+ columns->MinX = window->DC.Indent.x - g.Style.ItemSpacing.x; // Lock our horizontal range
+ columns->MaxX = ImMax(content_region_width - window->Scroll.x, columns->MinX + 1.0f);
+ columns->StartPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+ columns->StartMaxPosX = window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x;
+ columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+ window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- LogRenderedText(NULL, IM_NEWLINE "--------------------------------");
+ // Clear data if columns count changed
+ if (columns->Columns.Size != 0 && columns->Columns.Size != columns_count + 1)
+ columns->Columns.resize(0);
- if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
+ // Initialize defaults
+ columns->IsFirstFrame = (columns->Columns.Size == 0);
+ if (columns->Columns.Size == 0)
{
- PushColumnClipRect();
- window->DC.ColumnsSet->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+ columns->Columns.reserve(columns_count + 1);
+ for (int n = 0; n < columns_count + 1; n++)
+ {
+ ImGuiColumnData column;
+ column.OffsetNorm = n / (float)columns_count;
+ columns->Columns.push_back(column);
+ }
}
-}
-void ImGui::VerticalSeparator()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-
- float y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
- float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrentLineHeight;
- const ImRect bb(ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, y1), ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + 1.0f, y2));
- ItemSize(ImVec2(bb.GetWidth(), 0.0f));
- if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
- return;
+ for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++)
+ {
+ // Compute clipping rectangle
+ ImGuiColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n];
+ float clip_x1 = ImFloor(0.5f + window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n) - 1.0f);
+ float clip_x2 = ImFloor(0.5f + window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n + 1) - 1.0f);
+ column->ClipRect = ImRect(clip_x1, -FLT_MAX, clip_x2, +FLT_MAX);
+ column->ClipRect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
+ }
- window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y), ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
- if (g.LogEnabled)
- LogText(" |");
+ window->DrawList->ChannelsSplit(columns->Count);
+ PushColumnClipRect();
+ PushItemWidth(GetColumnWidth() * 0.65f);
}
-// Using 'hover_visibility_delay' allows us to hide the highlight and mouse cursor for a short time, which can be convenient to reduce visual noise.
-bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend, float hover_visibility_delay)
+void ImGui::EndColumns()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = window->DC.ItemFlags;
- window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
- bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
- window->DC.ItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
- if (!item_add)
- return false;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
+ IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
- bool hovered, held;
- ImRect bb_interact = bb;
- bb_interact.Expand(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImVec2(0.0f, hover_extend) : ImVec2(hover_extend, 0.0f));
- ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
- if (g.ActiveId != id)
- SetItemAllowOverlap();
+ PopItemWidth();
+ PopClipRect();
+ window->DrawList->ChannelsMerge();
- if (held || (g.HoveredId == id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay))
- SetMouseCursor(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);
+ columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
+ window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMaxY;
+ if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_GrowParentContentsSize))
+ window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = columns->StartMaxPosX; // Restore cursor max pos, as columns don't grow parent
- ImRect bb_render = bb;
- if (held)
+ // Draw columns borders and handle resize
+ bool is_being_resized = false;
+ if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder) && !window->SkipItems)
{
- ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min;
- float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x;
+ const float y1 = columns->StartPosY;
+ const float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+ int dragging_column = -1;
+ for (int n = 1; n < columns->Count; n++)
+ {
+ float x = window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n);
+ const ImGuiID column_id = columns->ID + ImGuiID(n);
+ const float column_hw = GetColumnsRectHalfWidth(); // Half-width for interaction
+ const ImRect column_rect(ImVec2(x - column_hw, y1), ImVec2(x + column_hw, y2));
+ KeepAliveID(column_id);
+ if (IsClippedEx(column_rect, column_id, false))
+ continue;
- // Minimum pane size
- if (mouse_delta < min_size1 - *size1)
- mouse_delta = min_size1 - *size1;
- if (mouse_delta > *size2 - min_size2)
- mouse_delta = *size2 - min_size2;
+ bool hovered = false, held = false;
+ if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
+ {
+ ButtonBehavior(column_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held);
+ if (hovered || held)
+ g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW;
+ if (held && !(columns->Columns[n].Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
+ dragging_column = n;
+ }
- // Apply resize
- *size1 += mouse_delta;
- *size2 -= mouse_delta;
- bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta));
+ // Draw column (we clip the Y boundaries CPU side because very long triangles are mishandled by some GPU drivers.)
+ const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
+ const float xi = (float)(int)x;
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(xi, ImMax(y1 + 1.0f, window->ClipRect.Min.y)), ImVec2(xi, ImMin(y2, window->ClipRect.Max.y)), col);
+ }
- MarkItemValueChanged(id);
+ // Apply dragging after drawing the column lines, so our rendered lines are in sync with how items were displayed during the frame.
+ if (dragging_column != -1)
+ {
+ if (!columns->IsBeingResized)
+ for (int n = 0; n < columns->Count + 1; n++)
+ columns->Columns[n].OffsetNormBeforeResize = columns->Columns[n].OffsetNorm;
+ columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized = true;
+ float x = GetDraggedColumnOffset(columns, dragging_column);
+ SetColumnOffset(dragging_column, x);
+ }
}
+ columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized;
- // Render
- const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : (hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay) ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
- window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, col, g.Style.FrameRounding);
-
- return held;
+ window->DC.ColumnsSet = NULL;
+ window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
}
-void ImGui::Spacing()
+// [2018-03: This is currently the only public API, while we are working on making BeginColumns/EndColumns user-facing]
+void ImGui::Columns(int columns_count, const char* id, bool border)
{
ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
- ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
-}
+ IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1);
-void ImGui::Dummy(const ImVec2& size)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
+ ImGuiColumnsFlags flags = (border ? 0 : ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder);
+ //flags |= ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths; // NB: Legacy behavior
+ if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL && window->DC.ColumnsSet->Count == columns_count && window->DC.ColumnsSet->Flags == flags)
return;
- const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
- ItemSize(bb);
- ItemAdd(bb, 0);
-}
+ if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL)
+ EndColumns();
-bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size));
+ if (columns_count != 1)
+ BeginColumns(id, columns_count, flags);
}
-bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(rect_min, rect_max));
-}
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] DRAG AND DROP
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Lock horizontal starting position + capture group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
-void ImGui::BeginGroup()
+void ImGui::ClearDragDrop()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
-
- window->DC.GroupStack.resize(window->DC.GroupStack.Size + 1);
- ImGuiGroupData& group_data = window->DC.GroupStack.back();
- group_data.BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
- group_data.BackupIndentX = window->DC.IndentX;
- group_data.BackupGroupOffsetX = window->DC.GroupOffsetX;
- group_data.BackupCurrentLineHeight = window->DC.CurrentLineHeight;
- group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
- group_data.BackupLogLinePosY = window->DC.LogLinePosY;
- group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive = g.ActiveIdIsAlive;
- group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
- group_data.AdvanceCursor = true;
+ g.DragDropActive = false;
+ g.DragDropPayload.Clear();
+ g.DragDropAcceptFlags = ImGuiDragDropFlags_None;
+ g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = 0;
+ g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX;
+ g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = -1;
- window->DC.GroupOffsetX = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x - window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX;
- window->DC.IndentX = window->DC.GroupOffsetX;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
- window->DC.CurrentLineHeight = 0.0f;
- window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f; // To enforce Log carriage return
+ g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.clear();
+ memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
}
-void ImGui::EndGroup()
+// Call when current ID is active.
+// When this returns true you need to: a) call SetDragDropPayload() exactly once, b) you may render the payload visual/description, c) call EndDragDropSource()
+bool ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.GroupStack.empty()); // Mismatched BeginGroup()/EndGroup() calls
-
- ImGuiGroupData& group_data = window->DC.GroupStack.back();
-
- ImRect group_bb(group_data.BackupCursorPos, window->DC.CursorMaxPos);
- group_bb.Max = ImMax(group_bb.Min, group_bb.Max);
-
- window->DC.CursorPos = group_data.BackupCursorPos;
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorMaxPos);
- window->DC.IndentX = group_data.BackupIndentX;
- window->DC.GroupOffsetX = group_data.BackupGroupOffsetX;
- window->DC.CurrentLineHeight = group_data.BackupCurrentLineHeight;
- window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
- window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f; // To enforce Log carriage return
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (group_data.AdvanceCursor)
+ bool source_drag_active = false;
+ ImGuiID source_id = 0;
+ ImGuiID source_parent_id = 0;
+ int mouse_button = 0;
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern))
{
- window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset, group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset); // FIXME: Incorrect, we should grab the base offset from the *first line* of the group but it is hard to obtain now.
- ItemSize(group_bb.GetSize(), group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset);
- ItemAdd(group_bb, 0);
- }
-
- // If the current ActiveId was declared within the boundary of our group, we copy it to LastItemId so IsItemActive(), IsItemDeactivated() etc. will be functional on the entire group.
- // It would be be neater if we replaced window.DC.LastItemId by e.g. 'bool LastItemIsActive', but put a little more burden on individual widgets.
- // (and if you grep for LastItemId you'll notice it is only used in that context.
- if (!group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive && g.ActiveIdIsAlive && g.ActiveId) // && g.ActiveIdWindow->RootWindow == window->RootWindow)
- window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveId;
- else if (!group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive) // && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow->RootWindow == window->RootWindow)
- window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame;
- window->DC.LastItemRect = group_bb;
-
- window->DC.GroupStack.pop_back();
-
- //window->DrawList->AddRect(group_bb.Min, group_bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255)); // [Debug]
-}
+ source_id = window->DC.LastItemId;
+ if (source_id != 0 && g.ActiveId != source_id) // Early out for most common case
+ return false;
+ if (g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button] == false)
+ return false;
-// Gets back to previous line and continue with horizontal layout
-// pos_x == 0 : follow right after previous item
-// pos_x != 0 : align to specified x position (relative to window/group left)
-// spacing_w < 0 : use default spacing if pos_x == 0, no spacing if pos_x != 0
-// spacing_w >= 0 : enforce spacing amount
-void ImGui::SameLine(float pos_x, float spacing_w)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
+ if (source_id == 0)
+ {
+ // If you want to use BeginDragDropSource() on an item with no unique identifier for interaction, such as Text() or Image(), you need to:
+ // A) Read the explanation below, B) Use the ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID flag, C) Swallow your programmer pride.
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID))
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return false;
+ }
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (pos_x != 0.0f)
- {
- if (spacing_w < 0.0f) spacing_w = 0.0f;
- window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + pos_x + spacing_w + window->DC.GroupOffsetX + window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX;
- window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y;
+ // Magic fallback (=somehow reprehensible) to handle items with no assigned ID, e.g. Text(), Image()
+ // We build a throwaway ID based on current ID stack + relative AABB of items in window.
+ // THE IDENTIFIER WON'T SURVIVE ANY REPOSITIONING OF THE WIDGET, so if your widget moves your dragging operation will be canceled.
+ // We don't need to maintain/call ClearActiveID() as releasing the button will early out this function and trigger !ActiveIdIsAlive.
+ bool is_hovered = (window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) != 0;
+ if (!is_hovered && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdWindow != window))
+ return false;
+ source_id = window->DC.LastItemId = window->GetIDFromRectangle(window->DC.LastItemRect);
+ if (is_hovered)
+ SetHoveredID(source_id);
+ if (is_hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[mouse_button])
+ {
+ SetActiveID(source_id, window);
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ }
+ if (g.ActiveId == source_id) // Allow the underlying widget to display/return hovered during the mouse release frame, else we would get a flicker.
+ g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = is_hovered;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
+ }
+ if (g.ActiveId != source_id)
+ return false;
+ source_parent_id = window->IDStack.back();
+ source_drag_active = IsMouseDragging(mouse_button);
}
else
{
- if (spacing_w < 0.0f) spacing_w = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
- window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x + spacing_w;
- window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y;
+ window = NULL;
+ source_id = ImHashStr("#SourceExtern", 0);
+ source_drag_active = true;
}
- window->DC.CurrentLineHeight = window->DC.PrevLineHeight;
- window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset;
-}
-
-void ImGui::NewLine()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems)
- return;
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- const ImGuiLayoutType backup_layout_type = window->DC.LayoutType;
- window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
- if (window->DC.CurrentLineHeight > 0.0f) // In the event that we are on a line with items that is smaller that FontSize high, we will preserve its height.
- ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
- else
- ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize));
- window->DC.LayoutType = backup_layout_type;
-}
+ if (source_drag_active)
+ {
+ if (!g.DragDropActive)
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(source_id != 0);
+ ClearDragDrop();
+ ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
+ payload.SourceId = source_id;
+ payload.SourceParentId = source_parent_id;
+ g.DragDropActive = true;
+ g.DragDropSourceFlags = flags;
+ g.DragDropMouseButton = mouse_button;
+ }
+ g.DragDropSourceFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
+ g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
-void ImGui::NextColumn()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- if (window->SkipItems || window->DC.ColumnsSet == NULL)
- return;
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
+ {
+ // Target can request the Source to not display its tooltip (we use a dedicated flag to make this request explicit)
+ // We unfortunately can't just modify the source flags and skip the call to BeginTooltip, as caller may be emitting contents.
+ BeginTooltip();
+ if (g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev && (g.DragDropAcceptFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip))
+ {
+ ImGuiWindow* tooltip_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ tooltip_window->SkipItems = true;
+ tooltip_window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
+ }
+ }
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- PopItemWidth();
- PopClipRect();
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover) && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern))
+ window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags &= ~ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect;
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
- columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
- if (++columns->Current < columns->Count)
- {
- // Columns 1+ cancel out IndentX
- window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current) - window->DC.IndentX + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
- window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(columns->Current);
- }
- else
- {
- window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX = 0.0f;
- window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
- columns->Current = 0;
- columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY;
+ return true;
}
- window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.IndentX + window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX);
- window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMinY;
- window->DC.CurrentLineHeight = 0.0f;
- window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
-
- PushColumnClipRect();
- PushItemWidth(GetColumnWidth() * 0.65f); // FIXME: Move on columns setup
-}
-
-int ImGui::GetColumnIndex()
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.ColumnsSet ? window->DC.ColumnsSet->Current : 0;
+ return false;
}
-int ImGui::GetColumnsCount()
+void ImGui::EndDragDropSource()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- return window->DC.ColumnsSet ? window->DC.ColumnsSet->Count : 1;
-}
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget && "Not after a BeginDragDropSource()?");
-static float OffsetNormToPixels(const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, float offset_norm)
-{
- return offset_norm * (columns->MaxX - columns->MinX);
-}
+ if (!(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
+ EndTooltip();
-static float PixelsToOffsetNorm(const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, float offset)
-{
- return offset / (columns->MaxX - columns->MinX);
+ // Discard the drag if have not called SetDragDropPayload()
+ if (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount == -1)
+ ClearDragDrop();
+ g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
}
-static inline float GetColumnsRectHalfWidth() { return 4.0f; }
-
-static float GetDraggedColumnOffset(ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, int column_index)
+// Use 'cond' to choose to submit payload on drag start or every frame
+bool ImGui::SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t data_size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
- // Active (dragged) column always follow mouse. The reason we need this is that dragging a column to the right edge of an auto-resizing
- // window creates a feedback loop because we store normalized positions. So while dragging we enforce absolute positioning.
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- IM_ASSERT(column_index > 0); // We are not supposed to drag column 0.
- IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == columns->ID + ImGuiID(column_index));
-
- float x = g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + GetColumnsRectHalfWidth() - window->Pos.x;
- x = ImMax(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index - 1) + g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
- if ((columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths))
- x = ImMin(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index + 1) - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
-
- return x;
-}
+ ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
+ if (cond == 0)
+ cond = ImGuiCond_Always;
-float ImGui::GetColumnOffset(int column_index)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
- IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
+ IM_ASSERT(type != NULL);
+ IM_ASSERT(strlen(type) < IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType) && "Payload type can be at most 32 characters long");
+ IM_ASSERT((data != NULL && data_size > 0) || (data == NULL && data_size == 0));
+ IM_ASSERT(cond == ImGuiCond_Always || cond == ImGuiCond_Once);
+ IM_ASSERT(payload.SourceId != 0); // Not called between BeginDragDropSource() and EndDragDropSource()
- if (column_index < 0)
- column_index = columns->Current;
- IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);
+ if (cond == ImGuiCond_Always || payload.DataFrameCount == -1)
+ {
+ // Copy payload
+ ImStrncpy(payload.DataType, type, IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType));
+ g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize(0);
+ if (data_size > sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal))
+ {
+ // Store in heap
+ g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize((int)data_size);
+ payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.Data;
+ memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size);
+ }
+ else if (data_size > 0)
+ {
+ // Store locally
+ memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
+ payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal;
+ memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ payload.Data = NULL;
+ }
+ payload.DataSize = (int)data_size;
+ }
+ payload.DataFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
- const float t = columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
- const float x_offset = ImLerp(columns->MinX, columns->MaxX, t);
- return x_offset;
+ return (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount) || (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1);
}
-static float GetColumnWidthEx(ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, int column_index, bool before_resize = false)
+bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTargetCustom(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
{
- if (column_index < 0)
- column_index = columns->Current;
-
- float offset_norm;
- if (before_resize)
- offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNormBeforeResize - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNormBeforeResize;
- else
- offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
- return OffsetNormToPixels(columns, offset_norm);
-}
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (!g.DragDropActive)
+ return false;
-float ImGui::GetColumnWidth(int column_index)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
- IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || window->RootWindow != g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow)
+ return false;
+ IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
+ if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max) || (id == g.DragDropPayload.SourceId))
+ return false;
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
- if (column_index < 0)
- column_index = columns->Current;
- return OffsetNormToPixels(columns, columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget == false);
+ g.DragDropTargetRect = bb;
+ g.DragDropTargetId = id;
+ g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
+ return true;
}
-void ImGui::SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset)
+// We don't use BeginDragDropTargetCustom() and duplicate its code because:
+// 1) we use LastItemRectHoveredRect which handles items that pushes a temporarily clip rectangle in their code. Calling BeginDragDropTargetCustom(LastItemRect) would not handle them.
+// 2) and it's faster. as this code may be very frequently called, we want to early out as fast as we can.
+// Also note how the HoveredWindow test is positioned differently in both functions (in both functions we optimize for the cheapest early out case)
+bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
- IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
-
- if (column_index < 0)
- column_index = columns->Current;
- IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);
-
- const bool preserve_width = !(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths) && (column_index < columns->Count-1);
- const float width = preserve_width ? GetColumnWidthEx(columns, column_index, columns->IsBeingResized) : 0.0f;
-
- if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoForceWithinWindow))
- offset = ImMin(offset, columns->MaxX - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing * (columns->Count - column_index));
- columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm = PixelsToOffsetNorm(columns, offset - columns->MinX);
+ if (!g.DragDropActive)
+ return false;
- if (preserve_width)
- SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, offset + ImMax(g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing, width));
-}
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (!(window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect))
+ return false;
+ if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || window->RootWindow != g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow)
+ return false;
-void ImGui::SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
- IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
+ const ImRect& display_rect = (window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect) ? window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect : window->DC.LastItemRect;
+ ImGuiID id = window->DC.LastItemId;
+ if (id == 0)
+ id = window->GetIDFromRectangle(display_rect);
+ if (g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id)
+ return false;
- if (column_index < 0)
- column_index = columns->Current;
- SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, GetColumnOffset(column_index) + width);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget == false);
+ g.DragDropTargetRect = display_rect;
+ g.DragDropTargetId = id;
+ g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
+ return true;
}
-void ImGui::PushColumnClipRect(int column_index)
+bool ImGui::IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
- if (column_index < 0)
- column_index = columns->Current;
-
- PushClipRect(columns->Columns[column_index].ClipRect.Min, columns->Columns[column_index].ClipRect.Max, false);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev != 0;
}
-static ImGuiColumnsSet* FindOrAddColumnsSet(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id)
+const ImGuiPayload* ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags)
{
- for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
- if (window->ColumnsStorage[n].ID == id)
- return &window->ColumnsStorage[n];
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive); // Not called between BeginDragDropTarget() and EndDragDropTarget() ?
+ IM_ASSERT(payload.DataFrameCount != -1); // Forgot to call EndDragDropTarget() ?
+ if (type != NULL && !payload.IsDataType(type))
+ return NULL;
- window->ColumnsStorage.push_back(ImGuiColumnsSet());
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage.back();
- columns->ID = id;
- return columns;
+ // Accept smallest drag target bounding box, this allows us to nest drag targets conveniently without ordering constraints.
+ // NB: We currently accept NULL id as target. However, overlapping targets requires a unique ID to function!
+ const bool was_accepted_previously = (g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev == g.DragDropTargetId);
+ ImRect r = g.DragDropTargetRect;
+ float r_surface = r.GetWidth() * r.GetHeight();
+ if (r_surface < g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface)
+ {
+ g.DragDropAcceptFlags = flags;
+ g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropTargetId;
+ g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = r_surface;
+ }
+
+ // Render default drop visuals
+ payload.Preview = was_accepted_previously;
+ flags |= (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect); // Source can also inhibit the preview (useful for external sources that lives for 1 frame)
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect) && payload.Preview)
+ {
+ // FIXME-DRAG: Settle on a proper default visuals for drop target.
+ r.Expand(3.5f);
+ bool push_clip_rect = !window->ClipRect.Contains(r);
+ if (push_clip_rect) window->DrawList->PushClipRect(r.Min-ImVec2(1,1), r.Max+ImVec2(1,1));
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget), 0.0f, ~0, 2.0f);
+ if (push_clip_rect) window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+ }
+
+ g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
+ payload.Delivery = was_accepted_previously && !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton); // For extern drag sources affecting os window focus, it's easier to just test !IsMouseDown() instead of IsMouseReleased()
+ if (!payload.Delivery && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery))
+ return NULL;
+
+ return &payload;
}
-void ImGui::BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiColumnsFlags flags)
+const ImGuiPayload* ImGui::GetDragDropPayload()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
-
- IM_ASSERT(columns_count > 1);
- IM_ASSERT(window->DC.ColumnsSet == NULL); // Nested columns are currently not supported
-
- // Differentiate column ID with an arbitrary prefix for cases where users name their columns set the same as another widget.
- // In addition, when an identifier isn't explicitly provided we include the number of columns in the hash to make it uniquer.
- PushID(0x11223347 + (str_id ? 0 : columns_count));
- ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id ? str_id : "columns");
- PopID();
+ return g.DragDropActive ? &g.DragDropPayload : NULL;
+}
- // Acquire storage for the columns set
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = FindOrAddColumnsSet(window, id);
- IM_ASSERT(columns->ID == id);
- columns->Current = 0;
- columns->Count = columns_count;
- columns->Flags = flags;
- window->DC.ColumnsSet = columns;
+// We don't really use/need this now, but added it for the sake of consistency and because we might need it later.
+void ImGui::EndDragDropTarget()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget);
+ g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
+}
- // Set state for first column
- const float content_region_width = (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x) : (window->InnerClipRect.Max.x - window->Pos.x);
- columns->MinX = window->DC.IndentX - g.Style.ItemSpacing.x; // Lock our horizontal range
- columns->MaxX = ImMax(content_region_width - window->Scroll.x, columns->MinX + 1.0f);
- columns->StartPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
- columns->StartMaxPosX = window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x;
- columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
- window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX = 0.0f;
- window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.IndentX + window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX);
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] DOCKING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- // Clear data if columns count changed
- if (columns->Columns.Size != 0 && columns->Columns.Size != columns_count + 1)
- columns->Columns.resize(0);
+// (this section is filled in the 'docking' branch)
- // Initialize defaults
- columns->IsFirstFrame = (columns->Columns.Size == 0);
- if (columns->Columns.Size == 0)
- {
- columns->Columns.reserve(columns_count + 1);
- for (int n = 0; n < columns_count + 1; n++)
- {
- ImGuiColumnData column;
- column.OffsetNorm = n / (float)columns_count;
- columns->Columns.push_back(column);
- }
- }
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] LOGGING/CAPTURING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// All text output from the interface can be captured into tty/file/clipboard.
+// By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++)
- {
- // Compute clipping rectangle
- ImGuiColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n];
- float clip_x1 = ImFloor(0.5f + window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n) - 1.0f);
- float clip_x2 = ImFloor(0.5f + window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n + 1) - 1.0f);
- column->ClipRect = ImRect(clip_x1, -FLT_MAX, clip_x2, +FLT_MAX);
- column->ClipRect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
- }
+// Pass text data straight to log (without being displayed)
+void ImGui::LogText(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (!g.LogEnabled)
+ return;
- window->DrawList->ChannelsSplit(columns->Count);
- PushColumnClipRect();
- PushItemWidth(GetColumnWidth() * 0.65f);
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ if (g.LogFile)
+ vfprintf(g.LogFile, fmt, args);
+ else
+ g.LogClipboard.appendfv(fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
}
-void ImGui::EndColumns()
+// Internal version that takes a position to decide on newline placement and pad items according to their depth.
+// We split text into individual lines to add current tree level padding
+void ImGui::LogRenderedText(const ImVec2* ref_pos, const char* text, const char* text_end)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
- IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- PopItemWidth();
- PopClipRect();
- window->DrawList->ChannelsMerge();
+ if (!text_end)
+ text_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
- columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
- window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMaxY;
- if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_GrowParentContentsSize))
- window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = columns->StartMaxPosX; // Restore cursor max pos, as columns don't grow parent
+ const bool log_new_line = ref_pos && (ref_pos->y > window->DC.LogLinePosY + 1);
+ if (ref_pos)
+ window->DC.LogLinePosY = ref_pos->y;
- // Draw columns borders and handle resize
- bool is_being_resized = false;
- if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder) && !window->SkipItems)
+ const char* text_remaining = text;
+ if (g.LogStartDepth > window->DC.TreeDepth) // Re-adjust padding if we have popped out of our starting depth
+ g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
+ const int tree_depth = (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogStartDepth);
+ for (;;)
{
- const float y1 = columns->StartPosY;
- const float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
- int dragging_column = -1;
- for (int n = 1; n < columns->Count; n++)
+ // Split the string. Each new line (after a '\n') is followed by spacing corresponding to the current depth of our log entry.
+ const char* line_start = text_remaining;
+ const char* line_end = ImStreolRange(line_start, text_end);
+ const bool is_first_line = (line_start == text);
+ const bool is_last_line = (line_end == text_end);
+ if (!is_last_line || (line_start != line_end))
{
- float x = window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n);
- const ImGuiID column_id = columns->ID + ImGuiID(n);
- const float column_hw = GetColumnsRectHalfWidth(); // Half-width for interaction
- const ImRect column_rect(ImVec2(x - column_hw, y1), ImVec2(x + column_hw, y2));
- KeepAliveID(column_id);
- if (IsClippedEx(column_rect, column_id, false))
- continue;
-
- bool hovered = false, held = false;
- if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
- {
- ButtonBehavior(column_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held);
- if (hovered || held)
- g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW;
- if (held && !(columns->Columns[n].Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
- dragging_column = n;
- }
-
- // Draw column (we clip the Y boundaries CPU side because very long triangles are mishandled by some GPU drivers.)
- const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
- const float xi = (float)(int)x;
- window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(xi, ImMax(y1 + 1.0f, window->ClipRect.Min.y)), ImVec2(xi, ImMin(y2, window->ClipRect.Max.y)), col);
+ const int char_count = (int)(line_end - line_start);
+ if (log_new_line || !is_first_line)
+ LogText(IM_NEWLINE "%*s%.*s", tree_depth*4, "", char_count, line_start);
+ else
+ LogText(" %.*s", char_count, line_start);
}
- // Apply dragging after drawing the column lines, so our rendered lines are in sync with how items were displayed during the frame.
- if (dragging_column != -1)
- {
- if (!columns->IsBeingResized)
- for (int n = 0; n < columns->Count + 1; n++)
- columns->Columns[n].OffsetNormBeforeResize = columns->Columns[n].OffsetNorm;
- columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized = true;
- float x = GetDraggedColumnOffset(columns, dragging_column);
- SetColumnOffset(dragging_column, x);
- }
+ if (is_last_line)
+ break;
+ text_remaining = line_end + 1;
}
- columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized;
-
- window->DC.ColumnsSet = NULL;
- window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX = 0.0f;
- window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.IndentX + window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX);
}
-// [2018-03: This is currently the only public API, while we are working on making BeginColumns/EndColumns user-facing]
-void ImGui::Columns(int columns_count, const char* id, bool border)
+// Start logging ImGui output to TTY
+void ImGui::LogToTTY(int max_depth)
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1);
-
- ImGuiColumnsFlags flags = (border ? 0 : ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder);
- //flags |= ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths; // NB: Legacy behavior
- if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL && window->DC.ColumnsSet->Count == columns_count && window->DC.ColumnsSet->Flags == flags)
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
return;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL)
- EndColumns();
-
- if (columns_count != 1)
- BeginColumns(id, columns_count, flags);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
+ g.LogFile = stdout;
+ g.LogEnabled = true;
+ g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
+ if (max_depth >= 0)
+ g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
}
-void ImGui::Indent(float indent_w)
+// Start logging ImGui output to given file
+void ImGui::LogToFile(int max_depth, const char* filename)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.IndentX += (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing;
- window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.IndentX + window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX;
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ return;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ if (!filename)
+ {
+ filename = g.IO.LogFilename;
+ if (!filename)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
+ g.LogFile = ImFileOpen(filename, "ab");
+ if (!g.LogFile)
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return;
+ }
+ g.LogEnabled = true;
+ g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
+ if (max_depth >= 0)
+ g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
}
-void ImGui::Unindent(float indent_w)
+// Start logging ImGui output to clipboard
+void ImGui::LogToClipboard(int max_depth)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- window->DC.IndentX -= (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing;
- window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.IndentX + window->DC.ColumnsOffsetX;
-}
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ return;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-void ImGui::TreePush(const char* str_id)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- Indent();
- window->DC.TreeDepth++;
- PushID(str_id ? str_id : "#TreePush");
+ IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
+ g.LogFile = NULL;
+ g.LogEnabled = true;
+ g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
+ if (max_depth >= 0)
+ g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
}
-void ImGui::TreePush(const void* ptr_id)
+void ImGui::LogFinish()
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- Indent();
- window->DC.TreeDepth++;
- PushID(ptr_id ? ptr_id : (const void*)"#TreePush");
-}
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (!g.LogEnabled)
+ return;
-void ImGui::TreePushRawID(ImGuiID id)
-{
- ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
- Indent();
- window->DC.TreeDepth++;
- window->IDStack.push_back(id);
+ LogText(IM_NEWLINE);
+ if (g.LogFile != NULL)
+ {
+ if (g.LogFile == stdout)
+ fflush(g.LogFile);
+ else
+ fclose(g.LogFile);
+ g.LogFile = NULL;
+ }
+ if (g.LogClipboard.size() > 1)
+ {
+ SetClipboardText(g.LogClipboard.begin());
+ g.LogClipboard.clear();
+ }
+ g.LogEnabled = false;
}
-void ImGui::TreePop()
+// Helper to display logging buttons
+void ImGui::LogButtons()
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- Unindent();
-
- window->DC.TreeDepth--;
- if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet())
- if (g.NavIdIsAlive && (window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop & (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth)))
- {
- SetNavID(window->IDStack.back(), g.NavLayer);
- NavMoveRequestCancel();
- }
- window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop &= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth) - 1;
- IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // There should always be 1 element in the IDStack (pushed during window creation). If this triggers you called TreePop/PopID too much.
+ PushID("LogButtons");
+ const bool log_to_tty = Button("Log To TTY"); SameLine();
+ const bool log_to_file = Button("Log To File"); SameLine();
+ const bool log_to_clipboard = Button("Log To Clipboard"); SameLine();
+ PushItemWidth(80.0f);
+ PushAllowKeyboardFocus(false);
+ SliderInt("Depth", &g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth, 0, 9, NULL);
+ PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
+ PopItemWidth();
PopID();
-}
-void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, bool b)
-{
- Text("%s: %s", prefix, (b ? "true" : "false"));
+ // Start logging at the end of the function so that the buttons don't appear in the log
+ if (log_to_tty)
+ LogToTTY(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth);
+ if (log_to_file)
+ LogToFile(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth, g.IO.LogFilename);
+ if (log_to_clipboard)
+ LogToClipboard(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth);
}
-void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, int v)
-{
- Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
-}
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] SETTINGS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v)
+void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty()
{
- Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
+ g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate;
}
-void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format)
+void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
- if (float_format)
- {
- char fmt[64];
- ImFormatString(fmt, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt), "%%s: %s", float_format);
- Text(fmt, prefix, v);
- }
- else
- {
- Text("%s: %.3f", prefix, v);
- }
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
+ if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
+ g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate;
}
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// DRAG AND DROP
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-void ImGui::ClearDragDrop()
+ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- g.DragDropActive = false;
- g.DragDropPayload.Clear();
- g.DragDropAcceptFlags = 0;
- g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = 0;
- g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX;
- g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = -1;
+ g.SettingsWindows.push_back(ImGuiWindowSettings());
+ ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = &g.SettingsWindows.back();
+ settings->Name = ImStrdup(name);
+ settings->ID = ImHashStr(name, 0);
+ return settings;
}
-// Call when current ID is active.
-// When this returns true you need to: a) call SetDragDropPayload() exactly once, b) you may render the payload visual/description, c) call EndDragDropSource()
-bool ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags)
+ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::FindWindowSettings(ImGuiID id)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
-
- bool source_drag_active = false;
- ImGuiID source_id = 0;
- ImGuiID source_parent_id = 0;
- int mouse_button = 0;
- if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern))
- {
- source_id = window->DC.LastItemId;
- if (source_id != 0 && g.ActiveId != source_id) // Early out for most common case
- return false;
- if (g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button] == false)
- return false;
-
- if (source_id == 0)
- {
- // If you want to use BeginDragDropSource() on an item with no unique identifier for interaction, such as Text() or Image(), you need to:
- // A) Read the explanation below, B) Use the ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID flag, C) Swallow your programmer pride.
- if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID))
- {
- IM_ASSERT(0);
- return false;
- }
-
- // Magic fallback (=somehow reprehensible) to handle items with no assigned ID, e.g. Text(), Image()
- // We build a throwaway ID based on current ID stack + relative AABB of items in window.
- // THE IDENTIFIER WON'T SURVIVE ANY REPOSITIONING OF THE WIDGET, so if your widget moves your dragging operation will be canceled.
- // We don't need to maintain/call ClearActiveID() as releasing the button will early out this function and trigger !ActiveIdIsAlive.
- bool is_hovered = (window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) != 0;
- if (!is_hovered && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdWindow != window))
- return false;
- source_id = window->DC.LastItemId = window->GetIDFromRectangle(window->DC.LastItemRect);
- if (is_hovered)
- SetHoveredID(source_id);
- if (is_hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[mouse_button])
- {
- SetActiveID(source_id, window);
- FocusWindow(window);
- }
- if (g.ActiveId == source_id) // Allow the underlying widget to display/return hovered during the mouse release frame, else we would get a flicker.
- g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = is_hovered;
- }
- else
- {
- g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
- }
- if (g.ActiveId != source_id)
- return false;
- source_parent_id = window->IDStack.back();
- source_drag_active = IsMouseDragging(mouse_button);
- }
- else
- {
- window = NULL;
- source_id = ImHash("#SourceExtern", 0);
- source_drag_active = true;
- }
-
- if (source_drag_active)
- {
- if (!g.DragDropActive)
- {
- IM_ASSERT(source_id != 0);
- ClearDragDrop();
- ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
- payload.SourceId = source_id;
- payload.SourceParentId = source_parent_id;
- g.DragDropActive = true;
- g.DragDropSourceFlags = flags;
- g.DragDropMouseButton = mouse_button;
- }
- g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
-
- if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
- {
- // Target can request the Source to not display its tooltip (we use a dedicated flag to make this request explicit)
- // We unfortunately can't just modify the source flags and skip the call to BeginTooltip, as caller may be emitting contents.
- BeginTooltip();
- if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev && (g.DragDropAcceptFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip))
- {
- ImGuiWindow* tooltip_window = g.CurrentWindow;
- tooltip_window->SkipItems = true;
- tooltip_window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
- }
- }
+ for (int i = 0; i != g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
+ if (g.SettingsWindows[i].ID == id)
+ return &g.SettingsWindows[i];
+ return NULL;
+}
- if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover) && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern))
- window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags &= ~ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect;
+ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::FindOrCreateWindowSettings(const char* name)
+{
+ if (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = FindWindowSettings(ImHashStr(name, 0)))
+ return settings;
+ return CreateNewWindowSettings(name);
+}
- return true;
- }
- return false;
+void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename)
+{
+ size_t file_data_size = 0;
+ char* file_data = (char*)ImFileLoadToMemory(ini_filename, "rb", &file_data_size);
+ if (!file_data)
+ return;
+ LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(file_data, (size_t)file_data_size);
+ ImGui::MemFree(file_data);
}
-void ImGui::EndDragDropSource()
+ImGuiSettingsHandler* ImGui::FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);
- IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget && "Not after a BeginDragDropSource()?");
-
- if (!(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
- EndTooltip();
-
- // Discard the drag if have not called SetDragDropPayload()
- if (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount == -1)
- ClearDragDrop();
- g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
+ const ImGuiID type_hash = ImHashStr(type_name, 0);
+ for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
+ if (g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].TypeHash == type_hash)
+ return &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n];
+ return NULL;
}
-// Use 'cond' to choose to submit payload on drag start or every frame
-bool ImGui::SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t data_size, ImGuiCond cond)
+// Zero-tolerance, no error reporting, cheap .ini parsing
+void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
- if (cond == 0)
- cond = ImGuiCond_Always;
+ IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
+ IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsLoaded == false && g.FrameCount == 0);
- IM_ASSERT(type != NULL);
- IM_ASSERT(strlen(type) < IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType) && "Payload type can be at most 32 characters long");
- IM_ASSERT((data != NULL && data_size > 0) || (data == NULL && data_size == 0));
- IM_ASSERT(cond == ImGuiCond_Always || cond == ImGuiCond_Once);
- IM_ASSERT(payload.SourceId != 0); // Not called between BeginDragDropSource() and EndDragDropSource()
+ // For user convenience, we allow passing a non zero-terminated string (hence the ini_size parameter).
+ // For our convenience and to make the code simpler, we'll also write zero-terminators within the buffer. So let's create a writable copy..
+ if (ini_size == 0)
+ ini_size = strlen(ini_data);
+ char* buf = (char*)ImGui::MemAlloc(ini_size + 1);
+ char* buf_end = buf + ini_size;
+ memcpy(buf, ini_data, ini_size);
+ buf[ini_size] = 0;
- if (cond == ImGuiCond_Always || payload.DataFrameCount == -1)
+ void* entry_data = NULL;
+ ImGuiSettingsHandler* entry_handler = NULL;
+
+ char* line_end = NULL;
+ for (char* line = buf; line < buf_end; line = line_end + 1)
{
- // Copy payload
- ImStrncpy(payload.DataType, type, IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType));
- g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize(0);
- if (data_size > sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal))
- {
- // Store in heap
- g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize((int)data_size);
- payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.Data;
- memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size);
- }
- else if (data_size > 0)
+ // Skip new lines markers, then find end of the line
+ while (*line == '\n' || *line == '\r')
+ line++;
+ line_end = line;
+ while (line_end < buf_end && *line_end != '\n' && *line_end != '\r')
+ line_end++;
+ line_end[0] = 0;
+ if (line[0] == ';')
+ continue;
+ if (line[0] == '[' && line_end > line && line_end[-1] == ']')
{
- // Store locally
- memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
- payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal;
- memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size);
+ // Parse "[Type][Name]". Note that 'Name' can itself contains [] characters, which is acceptable with the current format and parsing code.
+ line_end[-1] = 0;
+ const char* name_end = line_end - 1;
+ const char* type_start = line + 1;
+ char* type_end = (char*)(intptr_t)ImStrchrRange(type_start, name_end, ']');
+ const char* name_start = type_end ? ImStrchrRange(type_end + 1, name_end, '[') : NULL;
+ if (!type_end || !name_start)
+ {
+ name_start = type_start; // Import legacy entries that have no type
+ type_start = "Window";
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *type_end = 0; // Overwrite first ']'
+ name_start++; // Skip second '['
+ }
+ entry_handler = FindSettingsHandler(type_start);
+ entry_data = entry_handler ? entry_handler->ReadOpenFn(&g, entry_handler, name_start) : NULL;
}
- else
+ else if (entry_handler != NULL && entry_data != NULL)
{
- payload.Data = NULL;
+ // Let type handler parse the line
+ entry_handler->ReadLineFn(&g, entry_handler, entry_data, line);
}
- payload.DataSize = (int)data_size;
}
- payload.DataFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
-
- return (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount) || (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1);
+ ImGui::MemFree(buf);
+ g.SettingsLoaded = true;
}
-bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTargetCustom(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
+void ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (!g.DragDropActive)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || window->RootWindow != g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow)
- return false;
- IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
- if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max) || (id == g.DragDropPayload.SourceId))
- return false;
+ g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
+ if (!ini_filename)
+ return;
- IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget == false);
- g.DragDropTargetRect = bb;
- g.DragDropTargetId = id;
- g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
- return true;
+ size_t ini_data_size = 0;
+ const char* ini_data = SaveIniSettingsToMemory(&ini_data_size);
+ FILE* f = ImFileOpen(ini_filename, "wt");
+ if (!f)
+ return;
+ fwrite(ini_data, sizeof(char), ini_data_size, f);
+ fclose(f);
}
-// We don't use BeginDragDropTargetCustom() and duplicate its code because:
-// 1) we use LastItemRectHoveredRect which handles items that pushes a temporarily clip rectangle in their code. Calling BeginDragDropTargetCustom(LastItemRect) would not handle them.
-// 2) and it's faster. as this code may be very frequently called, we want to early out as fast as we can.
-// Also note how the HoveredWindow test is positioned differently in both functions (in both functions we optimize for the cheapest early out case)
-bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget()
+// Call registered handlers (e.g. SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll() + custom handlers) to write their stuff into a text buffer
+const char* ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_size)
{
ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (!g.DragDropActive)
- return false;
-
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- if (!(window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect))
- return false;
- if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || window->RootWindow != g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow)
- return false;
-
- const ImRect& display_rect = (window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect) ? window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect : window->DC.LastItemRect;
- ImGuiID id = window->DC.LastItemId;
- if (id == 0)
- id = window->GetIDFromRectangle(display_rect);
- if (g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id)
- return false;
-
- IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget == false);
- g.DragDropTargetRect = display_rect;
- g.DragDropTargetId = id;
- g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
- return true;
+ g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
+ g.SettingsIniData.Buf.resize(0);
+ g.SettingsIniData.Buf.push_back(0);
+ for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
+ {
+ ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler = &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n];
+ handler->WriteAllFn(&g, handler, &g.SettingsIniData);
+ }
+ if (out_size)
+ *out_size = (size_t)g.SettingsIniData.size();
+ return g.SettingsIniData.c_str();
}
-bool ImGui::IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted()
+static void* SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- return g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev != 0;
+ ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettings(ImHashStr(name, 0));
+ if (!settings)
+ settings = ImGui::CreateNewWindowSettings(name);
+ return (void*)settings;
}
-const ImGuiPayload* ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags)
+static void SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line)
{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
- ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
- IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive); // Not called between BeginDragDropTarget() and EndDragDropTarget() ?
- IM_ASSERT(payload.DataFrameCount != -1); // Forgot to call EndDragDropTarget() ?
- if (type != NULL && !payload.IsDataType(type))
- return NULL;
+ ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (ImGuiWindowSettings*)entry;
+ float x, y;
+ int i;
+ if (sscanf(line, "Pos=%f,%f", &x, &y) == 2) settings->Pos = ImVec2(x, y);
+ else if (sscanf(line, "Size=%f,%f", &x, &y) == 2) settings->Size = ImMax(ImVec2(x, y), GImGui->Style.WindowMinSize);
+ else if (sscanf(line, "Collapsed=%d", &i) == 1) settings->Collapsed = (i != 0);
+}
- // Accept smallest drag target bounding box, this allows us to nest drag targets conveniently without ordering constraints.
- // NB: We currently accept NULL id as target. However, overlapping targets requires a unique ID to function!
- const bool was_accepted_previously = (g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev == g.DragDropTargetId);
- ImRect r = g.DragDropTargetRect;
- float r_surface = r.GetWidth() * r.GetHeight();
- if (r_surface < g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface)
+static void SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* imgui_ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf)
+{
+ // Gather data from windows that were active during this session
+ // (if a window wasn't opened in this session we preserve its settings)
+ ImGuiContext& g = *imgui_ctx;
+ for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
{
- g.DragDropAcceptFlags = flags;
- g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropTargetId;
- g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = r_surface;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+ if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings)
+ continue;
+
+ ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (window->SettingsIdx != -1) ? &g.SettingsWindows[window->SettingsIdx] : ImGui::FindWindowSettings(window->ID);
+ if (!settings)
+ {
+ settings = ImGui::CreateNewWindowSettings(window->Name);
+ window->SettingsIdx = g.SettingsWindows.index_from_ptr(settings);
+ }
+ IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == window->ID);
+ settings->Pos = window->Pos;
+ settings->Size = window->SizeFull;
+ settings->Collapsed = window->Collapsed;
}
- // Render default drop visuals
- payload.Preview = was_accepted_previously;
- flags |= (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect); // Source can also inhibit the preview (useful for external sources that lives for 1 frame)
- if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect) && payload.Preview)
+ // Write to text buffer
+ buf->reserve(buf->size() + g.SettingsWindows.Size * 96); // ballpark reserve
+ for (int i = 0; i != g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
{
- // FIXME-DRAG: Settle on a proper default visuals for drop target.
- r.Expand(3.5f);
- bool push_clip_rect = !window->ClipRect.Contains(r);
- if (push_clip_rect) window->DrawList->PushClipRect(r.Min-ImVec2(1,1), r.Max+ImVec2(1,1));
- window->DrawList->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget), 0.0f, ~0, 2.0f);
- if (push_clip_rect) window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+ const ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = &g.SettingsWindows[i];
+ if (settings->Pos.x == FLT_MAX)
+ continue;
+ const char* name = settings->Name;
+ if (const char* p = strstr(name, "###")) // Skip to the "###" marker if any. We don't skip past to match the behavior of GetID()
+ name = p;
+ buf->appendf("[%s][%s]\n", handler->TypeName, name);
+ buf->appendf("Pos=%d,%d\n", (int)settings->Pos.x, (int)settings->Pos.y);
+ buf->appendf("Size=%d,%d\n", (int)settings->Size.x, (int)settings->Size.y);
+ buf->appendf("Collapsed=%d\n", settings->Collapsed);
+ buf->appendf("\n");
}
-
- g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
- payload.Delivery = was_accepted_previously && !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton); // For extern drag sources affecting os window focus, it's easier to just test !IsMouseDown() instead of IsMouseReleased()
- if (!payload.Delivery && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery))
- return NULL;
-
- return &payload;
-}
-
-// We don't really use/need this now, but added it for the sake of consistency and because we might need it later.
-void ImGui::EndDragDropTarget()
-{
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);
- IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget);
- g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// PLATFORM DEPENDENT HELPERS
+// [SECTION] PLATFORM DEPENDENT HELPERS
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(_WINDOWS_) && (!defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS) || !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS))
-#undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(_WINDOWS_) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) && (!defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS) || !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS))
+#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#endif
#ifndef __MINGW32__
#include <Windows.h>
#else
#endif
// Win32 API clipboard implementation
-#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS)
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS)
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma comment(lib, "user32")
#endif
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// HELP, METRICS
+// [SECTION] METRICS/DEBUG WINDOW
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
void ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open)
{
- if (ImGui::Begin("ImGui Metrics", p_open))
+ if (!ImGui::Begin("ImGui Metrics", p_open))
{
- static bool show_draw_cmd_clip_rects = true;
- static bool show_window_begin_order = false;
- ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s", ImGui::GetVersion());
- ImGui::Text("Application average %.3f ms/frame (%.1f FPS)", 1000.0f / ImGui::GetIO().Framerate, ImGui::GetIO().Framerate);
- ImGui::Text("%d vertices, %d indices (%d triangles)", ImGui::GetIO().MetricsRenderVertices, ImGui::GetIO().MetricsRenderIndices, ImGui::GetIO().MetricsRenderIndices / 3);
- ImGui::Text("%d allocations", (int)GImAllocatorActiveAllocationsCount);
- ImGui::Checkbox("Show clipping rectangles when hovering draw commands", &show_draw_cmd_clip_rects);
- ImGui::Checkbox("Ctrl shows window begin order", &show_window_begin_order);
+ ImGui::End();
+ return;
+ }
- ImGui::Separator();
+ static bool show_draw_cmd_clip_rects = true;
+ static bool show_window_begin_order = false;
+ ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+ ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s", ImGui::GetVersion());
+ ImGui::Text("Application average %.3f ms/frame (%.1f FPS)", 1000.0f / io.Framerate, io.Framerate);
+ ImGui::Text("%d vertices, %d indices (%d triangles)", io.MetricsRenderVertices, io.MetricsRenderIndices, io.MetricsRenderIndices / 3);
+ ImGui::Text("%d active windows (%d visible)", io.MetricsActiveWindows, io.MetricsRenderWindows);
+ ImGui::Text("%d allocations", io.MetricsActiveAllocations);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Show clipping rectangles when hovering draw commands", &show_draw_cmd_clip_rects);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Ctrl shows window begin order", &show_window_begin_order);
+ ImGui::Separator();
- struct Funcs
+ struct Funcs
+ {
+ static void NodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window, ImDrawList* draw_list, const char* label)
{
- static void NodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window, ImDrawList* draw_list, const char* label)
+ bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode(draw_list, "%s: '%s' %d vtx, %d indices, %d cmds", label, draw_list->_OwnerName ? draw_list->_OwnerName : "", draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size, draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size, draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size);
+ if (draw_list == ImGui::GetWindowDrawList())
{
- bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode(draw_list, "%s: '%s' %d vtx, %d indices, %d cmds", label, draw_list->_OwnerName ? draw_list->_OwnerName : "", draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size, draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size, draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size);
- if (draw_list == ImGui::GetWindowDrawList())
- {
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::TextColored(ImColor(255,100,100), "CURRENTLY APPENDING"); // Can't display stats for active draw list! (we don't have the data double-buffered)
- if (node_open) ImGui::TreePop();
- return;
- }
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f,0.4f,0.4f,1.0f), "CURRENTLY APPENDING"); // Can't display stats for active draw list! (we don't have the data double-buffered)
+ if (node_open) ImGui::TreePop();
+ return;
+ }
- ImDrawList* overlay_draw_list = GetOverlayDrawList(); // Render additional visuals into the top-most draw list
- if (window && IsItemHovered())
- overlay_draw_list->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
- if (!node_open)
- return;
+ ImDrawList* overlay_draw_list = GetOverlayDrawList(window); // Render additional visuals into the top-most draw list
+ if (window && IsItemHovered())
+ overlay_draw_list->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+ if (!node_open)
+ return;
- int elem_offset = 0;
- for (const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.begin(); pcmd < draw_list->CmdBuffer.end(); elem_offset += pcmd->ElemCount, pcmd++)
+ int elem_offset = 0;
+ for (const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.begin(); pcmd < draw_list->CmdBuffer.end(); elem_offset += pcmd->ElemCount, pcmd++)
+ {
+ if (pcmd->UserCallback == NULL && pcmd->ElemCount == 0)
+ continue;
+ if (pcmd->UserCallback)
{
- if (pcmd->UserCallback == NULL && pcmd->ElemCount == 0)
- continue;
- if (pcmd->UserCallback)
- {
- ImGui::BulletText("Callback %p, user_data %p", pcmd->UserCallback, pcmd->UserCallbackData);
- continue;
- }
- ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = (draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0) ? draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data : NULL;
- bool pcmd_node_open = ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(pcmd - draw_list->CmdBuffer.begin()), "Draw %4d %s vtx, tex 0x%p, clip_rect (%4.0f,%4.0f)-(%4.0f,%4.0f)", pcmd->ElemCount, draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0 ? "indexed" : "non-indexed", pcmd->TextureId, pcmd->ClipRect.x, pcmd->ClipRect.y, pcmd->ClipRect.z, pcmd->ClipRect.w);
- if (show_draw_cmd_clip_rects && ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- {
- ImRect clip_rect = pcmd->ClipRect;
- ImRect vtxs_rect;
- for (int i = elem_offset; i < elem_offset + (int)pcmd->ElemCount; i++)
- vtxs_rect.Add(draw_list->VtxBuffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[i] : i].pos);
- clip_rect.Floor(); overlay_draw_list->AddRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,255));
- vtxs_rect.Floor(); overlay_draw_list->AddRect(vtxs_rect.Min, vtxs_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
- }
- if (!pcmd_node_open)
- continue;
+ ImGui::BulletText("Callback %p, user_data %p", pcmd->UserCallback, pcmd->UserCallbackData);
+ continue;
+ }
+ ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = (draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0) ? draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data : NULL;
+ bool pcmd_node_open = ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(pcmd - draw_list->CmdBuffer.begin()), "Draw %4d %s vtx, tex 0x%p, clip_rect (%4.0f,%4.0f)-(%4.0f,%4.0f)", pcmd->ElemCount, draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0 ? "indexed" : "non-indexed", pcmd->TextureId, pcmd->ClipRect.x, pcmd->ClipRect.y, pcmd->ClipRect.z, pcmd->ClipRect.w);
+ if (show_draw_cmd_clip_rects && ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+ {
+ ImRect clip_rect = pcmd->ClipRect;
+ ImRect vtxs_rect;
+ for (int i = elem_offset; i < elem_offset + (int)pcmd->ElemCount; i++)
+ vtxs_rect.Add(draw_list->VtxBuffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[i] : i].pos);
+ clip_rect.Floor(); overlay_draw_list->AddRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,255));
+ vtxs_rect.Floor(); overlay_draw_list->AddRect(vtxs_rect.Min, vtxs_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
+ }
+ if (!pcmd_node_open)
+ continue;
- // Display individual triangles/vertices. Hover on to get the corresponding triangle highlighted.
- ImGuiListClipper clipper(pcmd->ElemCount/3); // Manually coarse clip our print out of individual vertices to save CPU, only items that may be visible.
- while (clipper.Step())
- for (int prim = clipper.DisplayStart, vtx_i = elem_offset + clipper.DisplayStart*3; prim < clipper.DisplayEnd; prim++)
+ // Display individual triangles/vertices. Hover on to get the corresponding triangle highlighted.
+ ImGuiListClipper clipper(pcmd->ElemCount/3); // Manually coarse clip our print out of individual vertices to save CPU, only items that may be visible.
+ while (clipper.Step())
+ for (int prim = clipper.DisplayStart, idx_i = elem_offset + clipper.DisplayStart*3; prim < clipper.DisplayEnd; prim++)
+ {
+ char buf[300];
+ char *buf_p = buf, *buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf);
+ ImVec2 triangles_pos[3];
+ for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, idx_i++)
{
- char buf[300];
- char *buf_p = buf, *buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf);
- ImVec2 triangles_pos[3];
- for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, vtx_i++)
- {
- ImDrawVert& v = draw_list->VtxBuffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[vtx_i] : vtx_i];
- triangles_pos[n] = v.pos;
- buf_p += ImFormatString(buf_p, (int)(buf_end - buf_p), "%s %04d: pos (%8.2f,%8.2f), uv (%.6f,%.6f), col %08X\n", (n == 0) ? "vtx" : " ", vtx_i, v.pos.x, v.pos.y, v.uv.x, v.uv.y, v.col);
- }
- ImGui::Selectable(buf, false);
- if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- {
- ImDrawListFlags backup_flags = overlay_draw_list->Flags;
- overlay_draw_list->Flags &= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines; // Disable AA on triangle outlines at is more readable for very large and thin triangles.
- overlay_draw_list->AddPolyline(triangles_pos, 3, IM_COL32(255,255,0,255), true, 1.0f);
- overlay_draw_list->Flags = backup_flags;
- }
+ int vtx_i = idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[idx_i] : idx_i;
+ ImDrawVert& v = draw_list->VtxBuffer[vtx_i];
+ triangles_pos[n] = v.pos;
+ buf_p += ImFormatString(buf_p, buf_end - buf_p, "%s %04d: pos (%8.2f,%8.2f), uv (%.6f,%.6f), col %08X\n",
+ (n == 0) ? "idx" : " ", idx_i, v.pos.x, v.pos.y, v.uv.x, v.uv.y, v.col);
}
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::Selectable(buf, false);
+ if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+ {
+ ImDrawListFlags backup_flags = overlay_draw_list->Flags;
+ overlay_draw_list->Flags &= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines; // Disable AA on triangle outlines at is more readable for very large and thin triangles.
+ overlay_draw_list->AddPolyline(triangles_pos, 3, IM_COL32(255,255,0,255), true, 1.0f);
+ overlay_draw_list->Flags = backup_flags;
+ }
+ }
ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
-
static void NodeWindows(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>& windows, const char* label)
- {
- if (!ImGui::TreeNode(label, "%s (%d)", label, windows.Size))
- return;
- for (int i = 0; i < windows.Size; i++)
- Funcs::NodeWindow(windows[i], "Window");
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ static void NodeWindows(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>& windows, const char* label)
+ {
+ if (!ImGui::TreeNode(label, "%s (%d)", label, windows.Size))
+ return;
+ for (int i = 0; i < windows.Size; i++)
+ Funcs::NodeWindow(windows[i], "Window");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- static void NodeWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const char* label)
+ static void NodeWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const char* label)
+ {
+ if (!ImGui::TreeNode(window, "%s '%s', %d @ 0x%p", label, window->Name, window->Active || window->WasActive, window))
+ return;
+ ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
+ NodeDrawList(window, window->DrawList, "DrawList");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Pos: (%.1f,%.1f), Size: (%.1f,%.1f), SizeContents (%.1f,%.1f)", window->Pos.x, window->Pos.y, window->Size.x, window->Size.y, window->SizeContents.x, window->SizeContents.y);
+ ImGui::BulletText("Flags: 0x%08X (%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s..)", flags,
+ (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? "Child " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) ? "Tooltip " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) ? "Popup " : "",
+ (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) ? "Modal " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? "ChildMenu " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings) ? "NoSavedSettings " : "",
+ (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs)? "NoMouseInputs":"", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) ? "NoNavInputs" : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) ? "AlwaysAutoResize" : "");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Scroll: (%.2f/%.2f,%.2f/%.2f)", window->Scroll.x, GetWindowScrollMaxX(window), window->Scroll.y, GetWindowScrollMaxY(window));
+ ImGui::BulletText("Active: %d/%d, WriteAccessed: %d, BeginOrderWithinContext: %d", window->Active, window->WasActive, window->WriteAccessed, (window->Active || window->WasActive) ? window->BeginOrderWithinContext : -1);
+ ImGui::BulletText("Appearing: %d, Hidden: %d (Reg %d Resize %d), SkipItems: %d", window->Appearing, window->Hidden, window->HiddenFramesRegular, window->HiddenFramesForResize, window->SkipItems);
+ ImGui::BulletText("NavLastIds: 0x%08X,0x%08X, NavLayerActiveMask: %X", window->NavLastIds[0], window->NavLastIds[1], window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask);
+ ImGui::BulletText("NavLastChildNavWindow: %s", window->NavLastChildNavWindow ? window->NavLastChildNavWindow->Name : "NULL");
+ if (!window->NavRectRel[0].IsInverted())
+ ImGui::BulletText("NavRectRel[0]: (%.1f,%.1f)(%.1f,%.1f)", window->NavRectRel[0].Min.x, window->NavRectRel[0].Min.y, window->NavRectRel[0].Max.x, window->NavRectRel[0].Max.y);
+ else
+ ImGui::BulletText("NavRectRel[0]: <None>");
+ if (window->RootWindow != window) NodeWindow(window->RootWindow, "RootWindow");
+ if (window->ParentWindow != NULL) NodeWindow(window->ParentWindow, "ParentWindow");
+ if (window->DC.ChildWindows.Size > 0) NodeWindows(window->DC.ChildWindows, "ChildWindows");
+ if (window->ColumnsStorage.Size > 0 && ImGui::TreeNode("Columns", "Columns sets (%d)", window->ColumnsStorage.Size))
{
- if (!ImGui::TreeNode(window, "%s '%s', %d @ 0x%p", label, window->Name, window->Active || window->WasActive, window))
- return;
- ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
- NodeDrawList(window, window->DrawList, "DrawList");
- ImGui::BulletText("Pos: (%.1f,%.1f), Size: (%.1f,%.1f), SizeContents (%.1f,%.1f)", window->Pos.x, window->Pos.y, window->Size.x, window->Size.y, window->SizeContents.x, window->SizeContents.y);
- ImGui::BulletText("Flags: 0x%08X (%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s..)", flags,
- (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? "Child " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) ? "Tooltip " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) ? "Popup " : "",
- (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) ? "Modal " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? "ChildMenu " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings) ? "NoSavedSettings " : "",
- (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs) ? "NoInputs":"", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) ? "AlwaysAutoResize" : "");
- ImGui::BulletText("Scroll: (%.2f/%.2f,%.2f/%.2f)", window->Scroll.x, GetScrollMaxX(window), window->Scroll.y, GetScrollMaxY(window));
- ImGui::BulletText("Active: %d/%d, WriteAccessed: %d, BeginOrderWithinContext: %d", window->Active, window->WasActive, window->WriteAccessed, (window->Active || window->WasActive) ? window->BeginOrderWithinContext : -1);
- ImGui::BulletText("Appearing: %d, Hidden: %d (Reg %d Resize %d), SkipItems: %d", window->Appearing, window->Hidden, window->HiddenFramesRegular, window->HiddenFramesForResize, window->SkipItems);
- ImGui::BulletText("NavLastIds: 0x%08X,0x%08X, NavLayerActiveMask: %X", window->NavLastIds[0], window->NavLastIds[1], window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask);
- ImGui::BulletText("NavLastChildNavWindow: %s", window->NavLastChildNavWindow ? window->NavLastChildNavWindow->Name : "NULL");
- if (!window->NavRectRel[0].IsInverted())
- ImGui::BulletText("NavRectRel[0]: (%.1f,%.1f)(%.1f,%.1f)", window->NavRectRel[0].Min.x, window->NavRectRel[0].Min.y, window->NavRectRel[0].Max.x, window->NavRectRel[0].Max.y);
- else
- ImGui::BulletText("NavRectRel[0]: <None>");
- if (window->RootWindow != window) NodeWindow(window->RootWindow, "RootWindow");
- if (window->ParentWindow != NULL) NodeWindow(window->ParentWindow, "ParentWindow");
- if (window->DC.ChildWindows.Size > 0) NodeWindows(window->DC.ChildWindows, "ChildWindows");
- if (window->ColumnsStorage.Size > 0 && ImGui::TreeNode("Columns", "Columns sets (%d)", window->ColumnsStorage.Size))
+ for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
{
- for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
+ const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage[n];
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(uintptr_t)columns->ID, "Columns Id: 0x%08X, Count: %d, Flags: 0x%04X", columns->ID, columns->Count, columns->Flags))
{
- const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage[n];
- if (ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(uintptr_t)columns->ID, "Columns Id: 0x%08X, Count: %d, Flags: 0x%04X", columns->ID, columns->Count, columns->Flags))
- {
- ImGui::BulletText("Width: %.1f (MinX: %.1f, MaxX: %.1f)", columns->MaxX - columns->MinX, columns->MinX, columns->MaxX);
- for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns->Columns.Size; column_n++)
- ImGui::BulletText("Column %02d: OffsetNorm %.3f (= %.1f px)", column_n, columns->Columns[column_n].OffsetNorm, OffsetNormToPixels(columns, columns->Columns[column_n].OffsetNorm));
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::BulletText("Width: %.1f (MinX: %.1f, MaxX: %.1f)", columns->MaxX - columns->MinX, columns->MinX, columns->MaxX);
+ for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns->Columns.Size; column_n++)
+ ImGui::BulletText("Column %02d: OffsetNorm %.3f (= %.1f px)", column_n, columns->Columns[column_n].OffsetNorm, OffsetNormToPixels(columns, columns->Columns[column_n].OffsetNorm));
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
- ImGui::BulletText("Storage: %d bytes", window->StateStorage.Data.Size * (int)sizeof(ImGuiStorage::Pair));
ImGui::TreePop();
}
- };
-
- // Access private state, we are going to display the draw lists from last frame
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- Funcs::NodeWindows(g.Windows, "Windows");
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("DrawList", "Active DrawLists (%d)", g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0].Size))
- {
- for (int i = 0; i < g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0].Size; i++)
- Funcs::NodeDrawList(NULL, g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0][i], "DrawList");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Storage: %d bytes", window->StateStorage.Data.Size * (int)sizeof(ImGuiStorage::Pair));
ImGui::TreePop();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Popups", "Popups (%d)", g.OpenPopupStack.Size))
+
+ static void NodeTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
- for (int i = 0; i < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; i++)
+ // Standalone tab bars (not associated to docking/windows functionality) currently hold no discernible strings.
+ char buf[256];
+ char* p = buf;
+ const char* buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf);
+ ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, "TabBar (%d tabs)%s", tab_bar->Tabs.Size, (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible < ImGui::GetFrameCount() - 2) ? " *Inactive*" : "");
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode(tab_bar, "%s", buf))
{
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.OpenPopupStack[i].Window;
- ImGui::BulletText("PopupID: %08x, Window: '%s'%s%s", g.OpenPopupStack[i].PopupId, window ? window->Name : "NULL", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? " ChildWindow" : "", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? " ChildMenu" : "");
+ for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+ {
+ const ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+ ImGui::PushID(tab);
+ if (ImGui::SmallButton("<")) { TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(tab_bar, tab, -1); } ImGui::SameLine(0, 2);
+ if (ImGui::SmallButton(">")) { TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(tab_bar, tab, +1); } ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("%02d%c Tab 0x%08X", tab_n, (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId) ? '*' : ' ', tab->ID);
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ }
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Internal state"))
+ };
+
+ // Access private state, we are going to display the draw lists from last frame
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ Funcs::NodeWindows(g.Windows, "Windows");
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("DrawList", "Active DrawLists (%d)", g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0].Size))
+ {
+ for (int i = 0; i < g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0].Size; i++)
+ Funcs::NodeDrawList(NULL, g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0][i], "DrawList");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Popups", "Popups (%d)", g.OpenPopupStack.Size))
+ {
+ for (int i = 0; i < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; i++)
{
- const char* input_source_names[] = { "None", "Mouse", "Nav", "NavKeyboard", "NavGamepad" }; IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(input_source_names) == ImGuiInputSource_COUNT);
- ImGui::Text("HoveredWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->Name : "NULL");
- ImGui::Text("HoveredRootWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredRootWindow ? g.HoveredRootWindow->Name : "NULL");
- ImGui::Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X/0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d", g.HoveredId, g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame, g.HoveredIdTimer, g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap); // Data is "in-flight" so depending on when the Metrics window is called we may see current frame information or not
- ImGui::Text("ActiveId: 0x%08X/0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d, Source: %s", g.ActiveId, g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame, g.ActiveIdTimer, g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap, input_source_names[g.ActiveIdSource]);
- ImGui::Text("ActiveIdWindow: '%s'", g.ActiveIdWindow ? g.ActiveIdWindow->Name : "NULL");
- ImGui::Text("MovingWindow: '%s'", g.MovingWindow ? g.MovingWindow->Name : "NULL");
- ImGui::Text("NavWindow: '%s'", g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL");
- ImGui::Text("NavId: 0x%08X, NavLayer: %d", g.NavId, g.NavLayer);
- ImGui::Text("NavInputSource: %s", input_source_names[g.NavInputSource]);
- ImGui::Text("NavActive: %d, NavVisible: %d", g.IO.NavActive, g.IO.NavVisible);
- ImGui::Text("NavActivateId: 0x%08X, NavInputId: 0x%08X", g.NavActivateId, g.NavInputId);
- ImGui::Text("NavDisableHighlight: %d, NavDisableMouseHover: %d", g.NavDisableHighlight, g.NavDisableMouseHover);
- ImGui::Text("NavWindowingTarget: '%s'", g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget->Name : "NULL");
- ImGui::Text("DragDrop: %d, SourceId = 0x%08X, Payload \"%s\" (%d bytes)", g.DragDropActive, g.DragDropPayload.SourceId, g.DragDropPayload.DataType, g.DragDropPayload.DataSize);
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.OpenPopupStack[i].Window;
+ ImGui::BulletText("PopupID: %08x, Window: '%s'%s%s", g.OpenPopupStack[i].PopupId, window ? window->Name : "NULL", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? " ChildWindow" : "", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? " ChildMenu" : "");
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("TabBars", "Tab Bars (%d)", g.TabBars.Data.Size))
+ {
+ for (int n = 0; n < g.TabBars.Data.Size; n++)
+ Funcs::NodeTabBar(g.TabBars.GetByIndex(n));
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Internal state"))
+ {
+ const char* input_source_names[] = { "None", "Mouse", "Nav", "NavKeyboard", "NavGamepad" }; IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(input_source_names) == ImGuiInputSource_COUNT);
+ ImGui::Text("HoveredWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->Name : "NULL");
+ ImGui::Text("HoveredRootWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredRootWindow ? g.HoveredRootWindow->Name : "NULL");
+ ImGui::Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X/0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d", g.HoveredId, g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame, g.HoveredIdTimer, g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap); // Data is "in-flight" so depending on when the Metrics window is called we may see current frame information or not
+ ImGui::Text("ActiveId: 0x%08X/0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d, Source: %s", g.ActiveId, g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame, g.ActiveIdTimer, g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap, input_source_names[g.ActiveIdSource]);
+ ImGui::Text("ActiveIdWindow: '%s'", g.ActiveIdWindow ? g.ActiveIdWindow->Name : "NULL");
+ ImGui::Text("MovingWindow: '%s'", g.MovingWindow ? g.MovingWindow->Name : "NULL");
+ ImGui::Text("NavWindow: '%s'", g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL");
+ ImGui::Text("NavId: 0x%08X, NavLayer: %d", g.NavId, g.NavLayer);
+ ImGui::Text("NavInputSource: %s", input_source_names[g.NavInputSource]);
+ ImGui::Text("NavActive: %d, NavVisible: %d", g.IO.NavActive, g.IO.NavVisible);
+ ImGui::Text("NavActivateId: 0x%08X, NavInputId: 0x%08X", g.NavActivateId, g.NavInputId);
+ ImGui::Text("NavDisableHighlight: %d, NavDisableMouseHover: %d", g.NavDisableHighlight, g.NavDisableMouseHover);
+ ImGui::Text("NavWindowingTarget: '%s'", g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget->Name : "NULL");
+ ImGui::Text("DragDrop: %d, SourceId = 0x%08X, Payload \"%s\" (%d bytes)", g.DragDropActive, g.DragDropPayload.SourceId, g.DragDropPayload.DataType, g.DragDropPayload.DataSize);
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && show_window_begin_order)
+ if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && show_window_begin_order)
+ {
+ for (int n = 0; n < g.Windows.Size; n++)
{
- for (int n = 0; n < g.Windows.Size; n++)
- {
- ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
- if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || !window->WasActive)
- continue;
- char buf[32];
- ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%d", window->BeginOrderWithinContext);
- float font_size = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 2;
- ImDrawList* overlay_draw_list = GetOverlayDrawList();
- overlay_draw_list->AddRectFilled(window->Pos, window->Pos + ImVec2(font_size, font_size), IM_COL32(200, 100, 100, 255));
- overlay_draw_list->AddText(NULL, font_size, window->Pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
- }
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
+ if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || !window->WasActive)
+ continue;
+ char buf[32];
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%d", window->BeginOrderWithinContext);
+ float font_size = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 2;
+ ImDrawList* overlay_draw_list = GetOverlayDrawList(window);
+ overlay_draw_list->AddRectFilled(window->Pos, window->Pos + ImVec2(font_size, font_size), IM_COL32(200, 100, 100, 255));
+ overlay_draw_list->AddText(NULL, font_size, window->Pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
}
}
ImGui::End();
-// dear imgui, v1.63 WIP
+// dear imgui, v1.68 WIP
// (headers)
// See imgui.cpp file for documentation.
// Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp for demo code.
-// Read 'Programmer guide' in imgui.cpp for notes on how to setup ImGui in your codebase.
+// Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' below for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
// Get latest version at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+// Header mess
+// Forward declarations and basic types
+// ImGui API (Dear ImGui end-user API)
+// Flags & Enumerations
+// ImVector<>
+// ImGuiStyle
+// ImGuiIO
+// Misc data structures (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData, ImGuiSizeCallbackData, ImGuiPayload)
+// Obsolete functions
+// Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, ImColor)
+// Draw List API (ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData)
+// Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFont)
+
+*/
+
#pragma once
-// Configuration file (edit imconfig.h or define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG to set your own filename)
+// Configuration file (edit imconfig.h or define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG to your own filename)
#ifdef IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
#include IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
#endif
#include "imconfig.h"
#endif
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Header mess
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
#include <float.h> // FLT_MAX
#include <stdarg.h> // va_list
#include <stddef.h> // ptrdiff_t, NULL
#include <string.h> // memset, memmove, memcpy, strlen, strchr, strcpy, strcmp
// Version
-#define IMGUI_VERSION "1.63 WIP"
+// (Integer encoded as XYYZZ for use in #if preprocessor conditionals. Work in progress versions typically starts at XYY00 then bounced up to XYY01 when release tagging happens)
+#define IMGUI_VERSION "1.68 WIP"
+#define IMGUI_VERSION_NUM 16800
#define IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(IMGUI_VERSION, sizeof(ImGuiIO), sizeof(ImGuiStyle), sizeof(ImVec2), sizeof(ImVec4), sizeof(ImDrawVert))
// Define attributes of all API symbols declarations (e.g. for DLL under Windows)
#define IMGUI_API
#endif
#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_API
-#define IMGUI_IMPL_API IMGUI_API
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_API IMGUI_API
#endif
-// Helpers
+// Helper Macros
#ifndef IM_ASSERT
#include <assert.h>
#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR) assert(_EXPR) // You can override the default assert handler by editing imconfig.h
#endif
#define IM_ARRAYSIZE(_ARR) ((int)(sizeof(_ARR)/sizeof(*_ARR))) // Size of a static C-style array. Don't use on pointers!
#define IM_OFFSETOF(_TYPE,_MEMBER) ((size_t)&(((_TYPE*)0)->_MEMBER)) // Offset of _MEMBER within _TYPE. Standardized as offsetof() in modern C++.
+#define IM_UNUSED(_VAR) ((void)_VAR) // Used to silence "unused variable warnings". Often useful as asserts may be stripped out from final builds.
+// Warnings
#if defined(__clang__)
#pragma clang diagnostic push
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"
+#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"
+#endif
#elif defined(__GNUC__) && __GNUC__ >= 8
#pragma GCC diagnostic push
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"
#endif
-// Forward declarations
-struct ImDrawChannel; // Temporary storage for outputting drawing commands out of order, used by ImDrawList::ChannelsSplit()
-struct ImDrawCmd; // A single draw command within a parent ImDrawList (generally maps to 1 GPU draw call)
-struct ImDrawData; // All draw command lists required to render the frame
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Forward declarations and basic types
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImDrawChannel; // Temporary storage for ImDrawList ot output draw commands out of order, used by ImDrawList::ChannelsSplit()
+struct ImDrawCmd; // A single draw command within a parent ImDrawList (generally maps to 1 GPU draw call, unless it is a callback)
+struct ImDrawData; // All draw command lists required to render the frame + pos/size coordinates to use for the projection matrix.
struct ImDrawList; // A single draw command list (generally one per window, conceptually you may see this as a dynamic "mesh" builder)
struct ImDrawListSharedData; // Data shared among multiple draw lists (typically owned by parent ImGui context, but you may create one yourself)
-struct ImDrawVert; // A single vertex (20 bytes by default, override layout with IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT)
+struct ImDrawVert; // A single vertex (pos + uv + col = 20 bytes by default. Override layout with IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT)
struct ImFont; // Runtime data for a single font within a parent ImFontAtlas
struct ImFontAtlas; // Runtime data for multiple fonts, bake multiple fonts into a single texture, TTF/OTF font loader
struct ImFontConfig; // Configuration data when adding a font or merging fonts
-struct ImColor; // Helper functions to create a color that can be converted to either u32 or float4 (*obsolete* please avoid using)
+struct ImFontGlyph; // A single font glyph (code point + coordinates within in ImFontAtlas + offset)
+struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder; // Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data
+struct ImColor; // Helper functions to create a color that can be converted to either u32 or float4 (*OBSOLETE* please avoid using)
+struct ImGuiContext; // Dear ImGui context (opaque structure, unless including imgui_internal.h)
struct ImGuiIO; // Main configuration and I/O between your application and ImGui
-struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame; // Simple helper for running a block of code not more than once a frame, used by IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME macro
-struct ImGuiStorage; // Simple custom key value storage
-struct ImGuiStyle; // Runtime data for styling/colors
-struct ImGuiTextFilter; // Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]"
-struct ImGuiTextBuffer; // Text buffer for logging/accumulating text
-struct ImGuiTextEditCallbackData; // Shared state of ImGui::InputText() when using custom ImGuiTextEditCallback (rare/advanced use)
-struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData; // Structure used to constraint window size in custom ways when using custom ImGuiSizeCallback (rare/advanced use)
+struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData; // Shared state of InputText() when using custom ImGuiInputTextCallback (rare/advanced use)
struct ImGuiListClipper; // Helper to manually clip large list of items
+struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame; // Helper for running a block of code not more than once a frame, used by IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME macro
struct ImGuiPayload; // User data payload for drag and drop operations
-struct ImGuiContext; // ImGui context (opaque)
+struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData; // Callback data when using SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() (rare/advanced use)
+struct ImGuiStorage; // Helper for key->value storage
+struct ImGuiStyle; // Runtime data for styling/colors
+struct ImGuiTextBuffer; // Helper to hold and append into a text buffer (~string builder)
+struct ImGuiTextFilter; // Helper to parse and apply text filters (e.g. "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]")
+
+// Typedefs and Enums/Flags (declared as int for compatibility with old C++, to allow using as flags and to not pollute the top of this file)
+// Use your programming IDE "Go to definition" facility on the names of the center columns to find the actual flags/enum lists.
#ifndef ImTextureID
typedef void* ImTextureID; // User data to identify a texture (this is whatever to you want it to be! read the FAQ about ImTextureID in imgui.cpp)
#endif
-
-// Typedefs and Enumerations (declared as int for compatibility with old C++ and to not pollute the top of this file)
-// Use your programming IDE "Go to definition" facility on the names of the right-most columns to find the actual flags/enum lists.
typedef unsigned int ImGuiID; // Unique ID used by widgets (typically hashed from a stack of string)
-typedef unsigned short ImWchar; // Character for keyboard input/display
-typedef int ImGuiCol; // enum: a color identifier for styling // enum ImGuiCol_
-typedef int ImGuiDataType; // enum: a primary data type // enum ImGuiDataType_
-typedef int ImGuiDir; // enum: a cardinal direction // enum ImGuiDir_
-typedef int ImGuiCond; // enum: a condition for Set*() // enum ImGuiCond_
-typedef int ImGuiKey; // enum: a key identifier (ImGui-side enum) // enum ImGuiKey_
-typedef int ImGuiNavInput; // enum: an input identifier for navigation // enum ImGuiNavInput_
-typedef int ImGuiMouseCursor; // enum: a mouse cursor identifier // enum ImGuiMouseCursor_
-typedef int ImGuiStyleVar; // enum: a variable identifier for styling // enum ImGuiStyleVar_
-typedef int ImDrawCornerFlags; // flags: for ImDrawList::AddRect*() etc. // enum ImDrawCornerFlags_
-typedef int ImDrawListFlags; // flags: for ImDrawList // enum ImDrawListFlags_
-typedef int ImFontAtlasFlags; // flags: for ImFontAtlas // enum ImFontAtlasFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiBackendFlags; // flags: for io.BackendFlags // enum ImGuiBackendFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiColorEditFlags; // flags: for ColorEdit*(), ColorPicker*() // enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiColumnsFlags; // flags: for *Columns*() // enum ImGuiColumnsFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiConfigFlags; // flags: for io.ConfigFlags // enum ImGuiConfigFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiComboFlags; // flags: for BeginCombo() // enum ImGuiComboFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiDragDropFlags; // flags: for *DragDrop*() // enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiFocusedFlags; // flags: for IsWindowFocused() // enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiHoveredFlags; // flags: for IsItemHovered() etc. // enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiInputTextFlags; // flags: for InputText*() // enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiSelectableFlags; // flags: for Selectable() // enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiTreeNodeFlags; // flags: for TreeNode*(),CollapsingHeader()// enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiWindowFlags; // flags: for Begin*() // enum ImGuiWindowFlags_
-typedef int (*ImGuiTextEditCallback)(ImGuiTextEditCallbackData *data);
+typedef unsigned short ImWchar; // A single U16 character for keyboard input/display. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
+typedef int ImGuiCol; // -> enum ImGuiCol_ // Enum: A color identifier for styling
+typedef int ImGuiCond; // -> enum ImGuiCond_ // Enum: A condition for Set*()
+typedef int ImGuiDataType; // -> enum ImGuiDataType_ // Enum: A primary data type
+typedef int ImGuiDir; // -> enum ImGuiDir_ // Enum: A cardinal direction
+typedef int ImGuiKey; // -> enum ImGuiKey_ // Enum: A key identifier (ImGui-side enum)
+typedef int ImGuiNavInput; // -> enum ImGuiNavInput_ // Enum: An input identifier for navigation
+typedef int ImGuiMouseCursor; // -> enum ImGuiMouseCursor_ // Enum: A mouse cursor identifier
+typedef int ImGuiStyleVar; // -> enum ImGuiStyleVar_ // Enum: A variable identifier for styling
+typedef int ImDrawCornerFlags; // -> enum ImDrawCornerFlags_ // Flags: for ImDrawList::AddRect*() etc.
+typedef int ImDrawListFlags; // -> enum ImDrawListFlags_ // Flags: for ImDrawList
+typedef int ImFontAtlasFlags; // -> enum ImFontAtlasFlags_ // Flags: for ImFontAtlas
+typedef int ImGuiBackendFlags; // -> enum ImGuiBackendFlags_ // Flags: for io.BackendFlags
+typedef int ImGuiColorEditFlags; // -> enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ // Flags: for ColorEdit*(), ColorPicker*()
+typedef int ImGuiColumnsFlags; // -> enum ImGuiColumnsFlags_ // Flags: for Columns(), BeginColumns()
+typedef int ImGuiConfigFlags; // -> enum ImGuiConfigFlags_ // Flags: for io.ConfigFlags
+typedef int ImGuiComboFlags; // -> enum ImGuiComboFlags_ // Flags: for BeginCombo()
+typedef int ImGuiDragDropFlags; // -> enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_ // Flags: for *DragDrop*()
+typedef int ImGuiFocusedFlags; // -> enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_ // Flags: for IsWindowFocused()
+typedef int ImGuiHoveredFlags; // -> enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_ // Flags: for IsItemHovered(), IsWindowHovered() etc.
+typedef int ImGuiInputTextFlags; // -> enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_ // Flags: for InputText*()
+typedef int ImGuiSelectableFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_ // Flags: for Selectable()
+typedef int ImGuiTabBarFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTabBar()
+typedef int ImGuiTabItemFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTabItem()
+typedef int ImGuiTreeNodeFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ // Flags: for TreeNode*(),CollapsingHeader()
+typedef int ImGuiWindowFlags; // -> enum ImGuiWindowFlags_ // Flags: for Begin*()
+typedef int (*ImGuiInputTextCallback)(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData *data);
typedef void (*ImGuiSizeCallback)(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data);
// Scalar data types
typedef signed int ImS32; // 32-bit signed integer == int
typedef unsigned int ImU32; // 32-bit unsigned integer (often used to store packed colors)
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__)
-typedef signed __int64 ImS64; // 64-bit signed integer
-typedef unsigned __int64 ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer
+typedef signed __int64 ImS64; // 64-bit signed integer (pre and post C++11 with Visual Studio)
+typedef unsigned __int64 ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer (pre and post C++11 with Visual Studio)
+#elif (defined(__clang__) || defined(__GNUC__)) && (__cplusplus < 201100)
+#include <stdint.h>
+typedef int64_t ImS64; // 64-bit signed integer (pre C++11)
+typedef uint64_t ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer (pre C++11)
#else
-typedef signed long long ImS64; // 64-bit signed integer
-typedef unsigned long long ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer
+typedef signed long long ImS64; // 64-bit signed integer (post C++11)
+typedef unsigned long long ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer (post C++11)
#endif
// 2D vector (often used to store positions, sizes, etc.)
float x, y;
ImVec2() { x = y = 0.0f; }
ImVec2(float _x, float _y) { x = _x; y = _y; }
- float operator[] (size_t i) const { IM_ASSERT(i <= 1); return (&x)[i]; } // We very rarely use this [] operator, the assert overhead is fine.
+ float operator[] (size_t idx) const { IM_ASSERT(idx <= 1); return (&x)[idx]; } // We very rarely use this [] operator, the assert overhead is fine.
+ float& operator[] (size_t idx) { IM_ASSERT(idx <= 1); return (&x)[idx]; } // We very rarely use this [] operator, the assert overhead is fine.
#ifdef IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA
IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and ImVec2.
#endif
#endif
};
-// Dear ImGui end-user API
-// (In a namespace so you can add extra functions in your own separate file. Please don't modify imgui.cpp/.h!)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// ImGui: Dear ImGui end-user API
+// (Inside a namespace so you can add extra functions in your own separate file. Please don't modify imgui.cpp/.h!)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
namespace ImGui
{
// Context creation and access
// Demo, Debug, Information
IMGUI_API void ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create demo/test window (previously called ShowTestWindow). demonstrate most ImGui features. call this to learn about the library! try to make it always available in your application!
- IMGUI_API void ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create metrics window. display ImGui internals: draw commands (with individual draw calls and vertices), window list, basic internal state, etc.
+ IMGUI_API void ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create about window. display Dear ImGui version, credits and build/system information.
+ IMGUI_API void ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create metrics window. display Dear ImGui internals: draw commands (with individual draw calls and vertices), window list, basic internal state, etc.
IMGUI_API void ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref = NULL); // add style editor block (not a window). you can pass in a reference ImGuiStyle structure to compare to, revert to and save to (else it uses the default style)
IMGUI_API bool ShowStyleSelector(const char* label); // add style selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the default styles.
IMGUI_API void ShowFontSelector(const char* label); // add font selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the loaded fonts.
IMGUI_API void ShowUserGuide(); // add basic help/info block (not a window): how to manipulate ImGui as a end-user (mouse/keyboard controls).
- IMGUI_API const char* GetVersion(); // get a version string e.g. "1.23"
+ IMGUI_API const char* GetVersion(); // get the compiled version string e.g. "1.23"
// Styles
IMGUI_API void StyleColorsDark(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // new, recommended style (default)
IMGUI_API void StyleColorsLight(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // best used with borders and a custom, thicker font
// Windows
- // (Begin = push window to the stack and start appending to it. End = pop window from the stack. You may append multiple times to the same window during the same frame)
- // Begin()/BeginChild() return false to indicate the window being collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting anything to the window.
- // You need to always call a matching End()/EndChild() for a Begin()/BeginChild() call, regardless of its return value (this is due to legacy reason and is inconsistent with BeginMenu/EndMenu, BeginPopup/EndPopup and other functions where the End call should only be called if the corresponding Begin function returned true.)
- // Passing 'bool* p_open != NULL' shows a close widget in the upper-right corner of the window, which when clicking will set the boolean to false.
- // Use child windows to introduce independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window. Child windows can embed their own child.
+ // - Begin() = push window to the stack and start appending to it. End() = pop window from the stack.
+ // - You may append multiple times to the same window during the same frame.
+ // - Passing 'bool* p_open != NULL' shows a window-closing widget in the upper-right corner of the window,
+ // which clicking will set the boolean to false when clicked.
+ // - Begin() return false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting
+ // anything to the window. Always call a matching End() for each Begin() call, regardless of its return value!
+ // [this is due to legacy reason and is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu, BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc.
+ // where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function returned true.]
+ // - Note that the bottom of window stack always contains a window called "Debug".
IMGUI_API bool Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API void End();
- IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // Begin a scrolling region. size==0.0f: use remaining window size, size<0.0f: use remaining window size minus abs(size). size>0.0f: fixed size. each axis can use a different mode, e.g. ImVec2(0,400).
+
+ // Child Windows
+ // - Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window. Child windows can embed their own child.
+ // - For each independent axis of 'size': ==0.0f: use remaining host window size / >0.0f: fixed size / <0.0f: use remaining window size minus abs(size) / Each axis can use a different mode, e.g. ImVec2(0,400).
+ // - BeginChild() returns false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting anything to the window.
+ // Always call a matching EndChild() for each BeginChild() call, regardless of its return value [this is due to legacy reason and is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu, BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function returned true.]
+ IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API void EndChild();
// Windows Utilities
+ // - "current window" = the window we are appending into while inside a Begin()/End() block. "next window" = next window we will Begin() into.
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowAppearing();
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowCollapsed();
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags=0); // is current window focused? or its root/child, depending on flags. see flags for options.
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags=0); // is current window hovered (and typically: not blocked by a popup/modal)? see flags for options. NB: If you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to imgui or to your app, you should use the 'io.WantCaptureMouse' boolean for that! Please read the FAQ!
- IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetWindowDrawList(); // get draw list associated to the window, to append your own drawing primitives
+ IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetWindowDrawList(); // get draw list associated to the current window, to append your own drawing primitives
+
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowPos(); // get current window position in screen space (useful if you want to do your own drawing via the DrawList API)
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowSize(); // get current window size
IMGUI_API float GetWindowWidth(); // get current window width (shortcut for GetWindowSize().x)
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size); // set next window content size (~ enforce the range of scrollbars). not including window decorations (title bar, menu bar, etc.). set an axis to 0.0f to leave it automatic. call before Begin()
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window collapsed state. call before Begin()
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowFocus(); // set next window to be focused / front-most. call before Begin()
- IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha); // set next window background color alpha. helper to easily modify ImGuiCol_WindowBg/ChildBg/PopupBg.
+ IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha); // set next window background color alpha. helper to easily modify ImGuiCol_WindowBg/ChildBg/PopupBg. you may also use ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground.
IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window position - call within Begin()/End(). prefer using SetNextWindowPos(), as this may incur tearing and side-effects.
IMGUI_API void SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window size - call within Begin()/End(). set to ImVec2(0,0) to force an auto-fit. prefer using SetNextWindowSize(), as this may incur tearing and minor side-effects.
IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window collapsed state. prefer using SetNextWindowCollapsed().
IMGUI_API float GetScrollMaxY(); // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.Y - WindowSize.Y
IMGUI_API void SetScrollX(float scroll_x); // set scrolling amount [0..GetScrollMaxX()]
IMGUI_API void SetScrollY(float scroll_y); // set scrolling amount [0..GetScrollMaxY()]
- IMGUI_API void SetScrollHere(float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_y_ratio=0.0: top, 0.5: center, 1.0: bottom. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead.
- IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosY(float pos_y, float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make given position valid. use GetCursorPos() or GetCursorStartPos()+offset to get valid positions.
+ IMGUI_API void SetScrollHereY(float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_y_ratio=0.0: top, 0.5: center, 1.0: bottom. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead.
+ IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosY(float local_y, float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make given position valid. use GetCursorPos() or GetCursorStartPos()+offset to get valid positions.
// Parameters stacks (shared)
IMGUI_API void PushFont(ImFont* font); // use NULL as a shortcut to push default font
IMGUI_API void PushItemWidth(float item_width); // width of items for the common item+label case, pixels. 0.0f = default to ~2/3 of windows width, >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to the right of window (so -1.0f always align width to the right side)
IMGUI_API void PopItemWidth();
IMGUI_API float CalcItemWidth(); // width of item given pushed settings and current cursor position
- IMGUI_API void PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_pos_x = 0.0f); // word-wrapping for Text*() commands. < 0.0f: no wrapping; 0.0f: wrap to end of window (or column); > 0.0f: wrap at 'wrap_pos_x' position in window local space
+ IMGUI_API void PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_local_pos_x = 0.0f); // word-wrapping for Text*() commands. < 0.0f: no wrapping; 0.0f: wrap to end of window (or column); > 0.0f: wrap at 'wrap_pos_x' position in window local space
IMGUI_API void PopTextWrapPos();
IMGUI_API void PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool allow_keyboard_focus); // allow focusing using TAB/Shift-TAB, enabled by default but you can disable it for certain widgets
IMGUI_API void PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
IMGUI_API void PopButtonRepeat();
// Cursor / Layout
+ // - By "cursor" we mean the current output position.
+ // - The typical widget behavior is to output themselves at the current cursor position, then move the cursor one line down.
IMGUI_API void Separator(); // separator, generally horizontal. inside a menu bar or in horizontal layout mode, this becomes a vertical separator.
- IMGUI_API void SameLine(float pos_x = 0.0f, float spacing_w = -1.0f); // call between widgets or groups to layout them horizontally
- IMGUI_API void NewLine(); // undo a SameLine()
- IMGUI_API void Spacing(); // add vertical spacing
- IMGUI_API void Dummy(const ImVec2& size); // add a dummy item of given size
+ IMGUI_API void SameLine(float local_pos_x = 0.0f, float spacing_w = -1.0f); // call between widgets or groups to layout them horizontally. X position given in window coordinates.
+ IMGUI_API void NewLine(); // undo a SameLine() or force a new line when in an horizontal-layout context.
+ IMGUI_API void Spacing(); // add vertical spacing.
+ IMGUI_API void Dummy(const ImVec2& size); // add a dummy item of given size. unlike InvisibleButton(), Dummy() won't take the mouse click or be navigable into.
IMGUI_API void Indent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position toward the right, by style.IndentSpacing or indent_w if != 0
IMGUI_API void Unindent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position back to the left, by style.IndentSpacing or indent_w if != 0
- IMGUI_API void BeginGroup(); // lock horizontal starting position + capture group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
- IMGUI_API void EndGroup();
- IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorPos(); // cursor position is relative to window position
- IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosX(); // "
- IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosY(); // "
- IMGUI_API void SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos); // "
- IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosX(float x); // "
- IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosY(float y); // "
- IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorStartPos(); // initial cursor position
+ IMGUI_API void BeginGroup(); // lock horizontal starting position
+ IMGUI_API void EndGroup(); // unlock horizontal starting position + capture the whole group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorPos(); // cursor position in window coordinates (relative to window position)
+ IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosX(); // (some functions are using window-relative coordinates, such as: GetCursorPos, GetCursorStartPos, GetContentRegionMax, GetWindowContentRegion* etc.
+ IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosY(); // other functions such as GetCursorScreenPos or everything in ImDrawList::
+ IMGUI_API void SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos); // are using the main, absolute coordinate system.
+ IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosX(float local_x); // GetWindowPos() + GetCursorPos() == GetCursorScreenPos() etc.)
+ IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosY(float local_y); //
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorStartPos(); // initial cursor position in window coordinates
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorScreenPos(); // cursor position in absolute screen coordinates [0..io.DisplaySize] (useful to work with ImDrawList API)
- IMGUI_API void SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& screen_pos); // cursor position in absolute screen coordinates [0..io.DisplaySize]
+ IMGUI_API void SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos); // cursor position in absolute screen coordinates [0..io.DisplaySize]
IMGUI_API void AlignTextToFramePadding(); // vertically align upcoming text baseline to FramePadding.y so that it will align properly to regularly framed items (call if you have text on a line before a framed item)
IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeight(); // ~ FontSize
IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of text)
IMGUI_API float GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2 + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of framed widgets)
// ID stack/scopes
- // Read the FAQ for more details about how ID are handled in dear imgui. If you are creating widgets in a loop you most
- // likely want to push a unique identifier (e.g. object pointer, loop index) to uniquely differentiate them.
- // You can also use the "##foobar" syntax within widget label to distinguish them from each others.
- // In this header file we use the "label"/"name" terminology to denote a string that will be displayed and used as an ID,
- // whereas "str_id" denote a string that is only used as an ID and not aimed to be displayed.
- IMGUI_API void PushID(const char* str_id); // push identifier into the ID stack. IDs are hash of the entire stack!
- IMGUI_API void PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end);
- IMGUI_API void PushID(const void* ptr_id);
- IMGUI_API void PushID(int int_id);
- IMGUI_API void PopID();
+ // - Read the FAQ for more details about how ID are handled in dear imgui. If you are creating widgets in a loop you most
+ // likely want to push a unique identifier (e.g. object pointer, loop index) to uniquely differentiate them.
+ // - The resulting ID are hashes of the entire stack.
+ // - You can also use the "Label##foobar" syntax within widget label to distinguish them from each others.
+ // - In this header file we use the "label"/"name" terminology to denote a string that will be displayed and used as an ID,
+ // whereas "str_id" denote a string that is only used as an ID and not normally displayed.
+ IMGUI_API void PushID(const char* str_id); // push string into the ID stack (will hash string).
+ IMGUI_API void PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end); // push string into the ID stack (will hash string).
+ IMGUI_API void PushID(const void* ptr_id); // push pointer into the ID stack (will hash pointer).
+ IMGUI_API void PushID(int int_id); // push integer into the ID stack (will hash integer).
+ IMGUI_API void PopID(); // pop from the ID stack.
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const char* str_id); // calculate unique ID (hash of whole ID stack + given parameter). e.g. if you want to query into ImGuiStorage yourself
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end);
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const void* ptr_id);
IMGUI_API void BulletTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
// Widgets: Main
- // Most widgets return true when the value has been changed or when pressed/selected
+ // - Most widgets return true when the value has been changed or when pressed/selected
IMGUI_API bool Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0)); // button
IMGUI_API bool SmallButton(const char* label); // button with FramePadding=(0,0) to easily embed within text
IMGUI_API bool InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size); // button behavior without the visuals, useful to build custom behaviors using the public api (along with IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.)
IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value);
IMGUI_API bool RadioButton(const char* label, bool active); // use with e.g. if (RadioButton("one", my_value==1)) { my_value = 1; }
IMGUI_API bool RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, int v_button); // shortcut to handle the above pattern when value is an integer
- IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0,0), int stride = sizeof(float));
- IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0,0));
- IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0,0), int stride = sizeof(float));
- IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0,0));
IMGUI_API void ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg = ImVec2(-1,0), const char* overlay = NULL);
IMGUI_API void Bullet(); // draw a small circle and keep the cursor on the same line. advance cursor x position by GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing(), same distance that TreeNode() uses
// Widgets: Combo Box
- // The new BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() items.
- // The old Combo() api are helpers over BeginCombo()/EndCombo() which are kept available for convenience purpose.
+ // - The new BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() items.
+ // - The old Combo() api are helpers over BeginCombo()/EndCombo() which are kept available for convenience purpose.
IMGUI_API bool BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API void EndCombo(); // only call EndCombo() if BeginCombo() returns true!
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1); // Separate items with \0 within a string, end item-list with \0\0. e.g. "One\0Two\0Three\0"
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool(*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
- // Widgets: Drags (tip: ctrl+click on a drag box to input with keyboard. manually input values aren't clamped, can go off-bounds)
- // For all the Float2/Float3/Float4/Int2/Int3/Int4 versions of every functions, note that a 'float v[X]' function argument is the same as 'float* v', the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. You can pass address of your first element out of a contiguous set, e.g. &myvector.x
- // Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
- // Speed are per-pixel of mouse movement (v_speed=0.2f: mouse needs to move by 5 pixels to increase value by 1). For gamepad/keyboard navigation, minimum speed is Max(v_speed, minimum_step_at_given_precision).
+ // Widgets: Drags
+ // - CTRL+Click on any drag box to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped and can go off-bounds.
+ // - For all the Float2/Float3/Float4/Int2/Int3/Int4 versions of every functions, note that a 'float v[X]' function argument is the same as 'float* v', the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. You can pass address of your first element out of a contiguous set, e.g. &myvector.x
+ // - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
+ // - Speed are per-pixel of mouse movement (v_speed=0.2f: mouse needs to move by 5 pixels to increase value by 1). For gamepad/keyboard navigation, minimum speed is Max(v_speed, minimum_step_at_given_precision).
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", float power = 1.0f); // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", float power = 1.0f);
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", float power = 1.0f);
IMGUI_API bool DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min = NULL, const void* v_max = NULL, const char* format = NULL, float power = 1.0f);
IMGUI_API bool DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, float v_speed, const void* v_min = NULL, const void* v_max = NULL, const char* format = NULL, float power = 1.0f);
- // Widgets: Input with Keyboard
- IMGUI_API bool InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiTextEditCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
- IMGUI_API bool InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0), ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiTextEditCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
- IMGUI_API bool InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step = 0.0f, float step_fast = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step = 1, int step_fast = 100, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step = 0.0f, double step_fast = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.6f", ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* step = NULL, const void* step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* step = NULL, const void* step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
-
- // Widgets: Sliders (tip: ctrl+click on a slider to input with keyboard. manually input values aren't clamped, can go off-bounds)
- // Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
+ // Widgets: Sliders
+ // - CTRL+Click on any slider to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped and can go off-bounds.
+ // - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", float power = 1.0f); // adjust format to decorate the value with a prefix or a suffix for in-slider labels or unit display. Use power!=1.0 for power curve sliders
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", float power = 1.0f);
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", float power = 1.0f);
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", float power = 1.0f);
- IMGUI_API bool SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min = -360.0f, float v_degrees_max = +360.0f);
+ IMGUI_API bool SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min = -360.0f, float v_degrees_max = +360.0f, const char* format = "%.0f deg");
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d");
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d");
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d");
IMGUI_API bool VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d");
IMGUI_API bool VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format = NULL, float power = 1.0f);
+ // Widgets: Input with Keyboard
+ // - If you want to use InputText() with a dynamic string type such as std::string or your own, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h
+ // - Most of the ImGuiInputTextFlags flags are only useful for InputText() and not for InputFloatX, InputIntX, InputDouble etc.
+ IMGUI_API bool InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0), ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step = 0.0f, float step_fast = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step = 1, int step_fast = 100, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step = 0.0, double step_fast = 0.0, const char* format = "%.6f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* step = NULL, const void* step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* step = NULL, const void* step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+
// Widgets: Color Editor/Picker (tip: the ColorEdit* functions have a little colored preview square that can be left-clicked to open a picker, and right-clicked to open an option menu.)
- // Note that a 'float v[X]' function argument is the same as 'float* v', the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. You can the pass the address of a first float element out of a contiguous structure, e.g. &myvector.x
+ // - Note that in C++ a 'float v[X]' function argument is the _same_ as 'float* v', the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. You can the pass the address of a first float element out of a contiguous structure, e.g. &myvector.x
IMGUI_API bool ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API void SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags); // initialize current options (generally on application startup) if you want to select a default format, picker type, etc. User will be able to change many settings, unless you pass the _NoOptions flag to your calls.
// Widgets: Trees
- // TreeNode functions return true when the node is open, in which case you need to also call TreePop() when you are finished displaying the tree node contents.
+ // - TreeNode functions return true when the node is open, in which case you need to also call TreePop() when you are finished displaying the tree node contents.
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const char* label);
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // helper variation to completely decorelate the id from the displayed string. Read the FAQ about why and how to use ID. to align arbitrary text at the same level as a TreeNode() you can use Bullet().
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // "
IMGUI_API bool CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // if returning 'true' the header is open. doesn't indent nor push on ID stack. user doesn't have to call TreePop().
IMGUI_API bool CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // when 'p_open' isn't NULL, display an additional small close button on upper right of the header
- // Widgets: Selectable / Lists
+ // Widgets: Selectables
+ // - A selectable highlights when hovered, and can display another color when selected.
+ // - Neighbors selectable extend their highlight bounds in order to leave no gap between them.
IMGUI_API bool Selectable(const char* label, bool selected = false, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0)); // "bool selected" carry the selection state (read-only). Selectable() is clicked is returns true so you can modify your selection state. size.x==0.0: use remaining width, size.x>0.0: specify width. size.y==0.0: use label height, size.y>0.0: specify height
IMGUI_API bool Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0)); // "bool* p_selected" point to the selection state (read-write), as a convenient helper.
+
+ // Widgets: List Boxes
+ // - FIXME: To be consistent with all the newer API, ListBoxHeader/ListBoxFooter should in reality be called BeginListBox/EndListBox. Will rename them.
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
IMGUI_API bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0,0)); // use if you want to reimplement ListBox() will custom data or interactions. if the function return true, you can output elements then call ListBoxFooter() afterwards.
IMGUI_API bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1); // "
IMGUI_API void ListBoxFooter(); // terminate the scrolling region. only call ListBoxFooter() if ListBoxHeader() returned true!
- // Widgets: Value() Helpers. Output single value in "name: value" format (tip: freely declare more in your code to handle your types. you can add functions to the ImGui namespace)
+ // Widgets: Data Plotting
+ IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float));
+ IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
+ IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float));
+ IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
+
+ // Widgets: Value() Helpers.
+ // - Those are merely shortcut to calling Text() with a format string. Output single value in "name: value" format (tip: freely declare more in your code to handle your types. you can add functions to the ImGui namespace)
IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, bool b);
IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, int v);
IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v);
IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format = NULL);
- // Tooltips
- IMGUI_API void BeginTooltip(); // begin/append a tooltip window. to create full-featured tooltip (with any kind of items).
- IMGUI_API void EndTooltip();
- IMGUI_API void SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // set a text-only tooltip, typically use with ImGui::IsItemHovered(). overidde any previous call to SetTooltip().
- IMGUI_API void SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
-
- // Menus
+ // Widgets: Menus
IMGUI_API bool BeginMainMenuBar(); // create and append to a full screen menu-bar.
IMGUI_API void EndMainMenuBar(); // only call EndMainMenuBar() if BeginMainMenuBar() returns true!
IMGUI_API bool BeginMenuBar(); // append to menu-bar of current window (requires ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar flag set on parent window).
IMGUI_API bool MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut = NULL, bool selected = false, bool enabled = true); // return true when activated. shortcuts are displayed for convenience but not processed by ImGui at the moment
IMGUI_API bool MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled = true); // return true when activated + toggle (*p_selected) if p_selected != NULL
- // Popups
+ // Tooltips
+ IMGUI_API void BeginTooltip(); // begin/append a tooltip window. to create full-featured tooltip (with any kind of items).
+ IMGUI_API void EndTooltip();
+ IMGUI_API void SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // set a text-only tooltip, typically use with ImGui::IsItemHovered(). overidde any previous call to SetTooltip().
+ IMGUI_API void SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
+
+ // Popups, Modals
+ // The properties of popups windows are:
+ // - They block normal mouse hovering detection outside them. (*)
+ // - Unless modal, they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
+ // - Their visibility state (~bool) is held internally by imgui instead of being held by the programmer as we are used to with regular Begin() calls.
+ // User can manipulate the visibility state by calling OpenPopup().
+ // (*) One can use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) to bypass it and detect hovering even when normally blocked by a popup.
+ // Those three properties are connected. The library needs to hold their visibility state because it can close popups at any time.
IMGUI_API void OpenPopup(const char* str_id); // call to mark popup as open (don't call every frame!). popups are closed when user click outside, or if CloseCurrentPopup() is called within a BeginPopup()/EndPopup() block. By default, Selectable()/MenuItem() are calling CloseCurrentPopup(). Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID-stack (so OpenPopup and BeginPopup needs to be at the same level).
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // return true if the popup is open, and you can start outputting to it. only call EndPopup() if BeginPopup() returns true!
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id = NULL, int mouse_button = 1); // helper to open and begin popup when clicked on last item. if you can pass a NULL str_id only if the previous item had an id. If you want to use that on a non-interactive item such as Text() you need to pass in an explicit ID here. read comments in .cpp!
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id = NULL, int mouse_button = 1); // helper to open and begin popup when clicked in void (where there are no imgui windows).
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // modal dialog (regular window with title bar, block interactions behind the modal window, can't close the modal window by clicking outside)
IMGUI_API void EndPopup(); // only call EndPopup() if BeginPopupXXX() returns true!
- IMGUI_API bool OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id = NULL, int mouse_button = 1); // helper to open popup when clicked on last item. return true when just opened.
- IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id); // return true if the popup is open
+ IMGUI_API bool OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id = NULL, int mouse_button = 1); // helper to open popup when clicked on last item (note: actually triggers on the mouse _released_ event to be consistent with popup behaviors). return true when just opened.
+ IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id); // return true if the popup is open at the current begin-ed level of the popup stack.
IMGUI_API void CloseCurrentPopup(); // close the popup we have begin-ed into. clicking on a MenuItem or Selectable automatically close the current popup.
// Columns
- // You can also use SameLine(pos_x) for simplified columns. The columns API is still work-in-progress and rather lacking.
+ // - You can also use SameLine(pos_x) to mimic simplified columns.
+ // - The columns API is work-in-progress and rather lacking (columns are arguably the worst part of dear imgui at the moment!)
IMGUI_API void Columns(int count = 1, const char* id = NULL, bool border = true);
IMGUI_API void NextColumn(); // next column, defaults to current row or next row if the current row is finished
IMGUI_API int GetColumnIndex(); // get current column index
IMGUI_API void SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset_x); // set position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use current column
IMGUI_API int GetColumnsCount();
- // Logging/Capture: all text output from interface is captured to tty/file/clipboard. By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging.
- IMGUI_API void LogToTTY(int max_depth = -1); // start logging to tty
+ // Tab Bars, Tabs
+ // [BETA API] API may evolve!
+ IMGUI_API bool BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags = 0); // create and append into a TabBar
+ IMGUI_API void EndTabBar(); // only call EndTabBar() if BeginTabBar() returns true!
+ IMGUI_API bool BeginTabItem(const char* label, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0);// create a Tab. Returns true if the Tab is selected.
+ IMGUI_API void EndTabItem(); // only call EndTabItem() if BeginTabItem() returns true!
+ IMGUI_API void SetTabItemClosed(const char* tab_or_docked_window_label); // notify TabBar or Docking system of a closed tab/window ahead (useful to reduce visual flicker on reorderable tab bars). For tab-bar: call after BeginTabBar() and before Tab submissions. Otherwise call with a window name.
+
+ // Logging/Capture
+ // - All text output from the interface can be captured into tty/file/clipboard. By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging.
+ IMGUI_API void LogToTTY(int max_depth = -1); // start logging to tty (stdout)
IMGUI_API void LogToFile(int max_depth = -1, const char* filename = NULL); // start logging to file
IMGUI_API void LogToClipboard(int max_depth = -1); // start logging to OS clipboard
IMGUI_API void LogFinish(); // stop logging (close file, etc.)
IMGUI_API void LogText(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // pass text data straight to log (without being displayed)
// Drag and Drop
- // [BETA API] Missing Demo code. API may evolve.
+ // [BETA API] API may evolve!
IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // call when the current item is active. If this return true, you can call SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource()
IMGUI_API bool SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t size, ImGuiCond cond = 0);// type is a user defined string of maximum 32 characters. Strings starting with '_' are reserved for dear imgui internal types. Data is copied and held by imgui.
IMGUI_API void EndDragDropSource(); // only call EndDragDropSource() if BeginDragDropSource() returns true!
- IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropTarget(); // call after submitting an item that may receive an item. If this returns true, you can call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget()
- IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // accept contents of a given type. If ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery is set you can peek into the payload before the mouse button is released.
- IMGUI_API void EndDragDropTarget(); // only call EndDragDropTarget() if BeginDragDropTarget() returns true!
+ IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropTarget(); // call after submitting an item that may receive a payload. If this returns true, you can call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget()
+ IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // accept contents of a given type. If ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery is set you can peek into the payload before the mouse button is released.
+ IMGUI_API void EndDragDropTarget(); // only call EndDragDropTarget() if BeginDragDropTarget() returns true!
+ IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* GetDragDropPayload(); // peek directly into the current payload from anywhere. may return NULL. use ImGuiPayload::IsDataType() to test for the payload type.
// Clipping
IMGUI_API void PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect);
IMGUI_API void PopClipRect();
// Focus, Activation
- // (Prefer using "SetItemDefaultFocus()" over "if (IsWindowAppearing()) SetScrollHere()" when applicable, to make your code more forward compatible when navigation branch is merged)
- IMGUI_API void SetItemDefaultFocus(); // make last item the default focused item of a window. Please use instead of "if (IsWindowAppearing()) SetScrollHere()" to signify "default item".
+ // - Prefer using "SetItemDefaultFocus()" over "if (IsWindowAppearing()) SetScrollHereY()" when applicable to signify "this is the default item"
+ IMGUI_API void SetItemDefaultFocus(); // make last item the default focused item of a window.
IMGUI_API void SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset = 0); // focus keyboard on the next widget. Use positive 'offset' to access sub components of a multiple component widget. Use -1 to access previous widget.
- // Utilities
+ // Item/Widgets Utilities
+ // - Most of the functions are referring to the last/previous item we submitted.
+ // - See Demo Window under "Widgets->Querying Status" for an interactive visualization of most of those functions.
IMGUI_API bool IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags = 0); // is the last item hovered? (and usable, aka not blocked by a popup, etc.). See ImGuiHoveredFlags for more options.
IMGUI_API bool IsItemActive(); // is the last item active? (e.g. button being held, text field being edited. This will continuously return true while holding mouse button on an item. Items that don't interact will always return false)
IMGUI_API bool IsItemFocused(); // is the last item focused for keyboard/gamepad navigation?
IMGUI_API bool IsItemClicked(int mouse_button = 0); // is the last item clicked? (e.g. button/node just clicked on) == IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered()
IMGUI_API bool IsItemVisible(); // is the last item visible? (items may be out of sight because of clipping/scrolling)
+ IMGUI_API bool IsItemEdited(); // did the last item modify its underlying value this frame? or was pressed? This is generally the same as the "bool" return value of many widgets.
+ IMGUI_API bool IsItemActivated(); // was the last item just made active (item was previously inactive).
IMGUI_API bool IsItemDeactivated(); // was the last item just made inactive (item was previously active). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that requires continuous editing.
- IMGUI_API bool IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange(); // was the last item just made inactive and made a value change when it was active? (e.g. Slider/Drag moved). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that requires continuous editing. Note that you may get false positives (some widgets such as Combo()/ListBox()/Selectable() will return true even when clicking an already selected item).
+ IMGUI_API bool IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); // was the last item just made inactive and made a value change when it was active? (e.g. Slider/Drag moved). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that requires continuous editing. Note that you may get false positives (some widgets such as Combo()/ListBox()/Selectable() will return true even when clicking an already selected item).
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemHovered();
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemActive();
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemFocused();
- IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMin(); // get bounding rectangle of last item, in screen space
- IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMax(); // "
- IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectSize(); // get size of last item, in screen space
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMin(); // get upper-left bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space)
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMax(); // get lower-right bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space)
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectSize(); // get size of last item
IMGUI_API void SetItemAllowOverlap(); // allow last item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. sometimes useful with invisible buttons, selectables, etc. to catch unused area.
+
+ // Miscellaneous Utilities
IMGUI_API bool IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size); // test if rectangle (of given size, starting from cursor position) is visible / not clipped.
IMGUI_API bool IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max); // test if rectangle (in screen space) is visible / not clipped. to perform coarse clipping on user's side.
- IMGUI_API double GetTime();
- IMGUI_API int GetFrameCount();
+ IMGUI_API double GetTime(); // get global imgui time. incremented by io.DeltaTime every frame.
+ IMGUI_API int GetFrameCount(); // get global imgui frame count. incremented by 1 every frame.
IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetOverlayDrawList(); // this draw list will be the last rendered one, useful to quickly draw overlays shapes/text
IMGUI_API ImDrawListSharedData* GetDrawListSharedData(); // you may use this when creating your own ImDrawList instances
IMGUI_API const char* GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx);
IMGUI_API ImGuiStorage* GetStateStorage();
IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_double_hash = false, float wrap_width = -1.0f);
IMGUI_API void CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end); // calculate coarse clipping for large list of evenly sized items. Prefer using the ImGuiListClipper higher-level helper if you can.
-
IMGUI_API bool BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame
IMGUI_API void EndChildFrame(); // always call EndChildFrame() regardless of BeginChildFrame() return values (which indicates a collapsed/clipped window)
+ // Color Utilities
IMGUI_API ImVec4 ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in);
IMGUI_API ImU32 ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(const ImVec4& in);
IMGUI_API void ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float& out_h, float& out_s, float& out_v);
IMGUI_API void ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(float h, float s, float v, float& out_r, float& out_g, float& out_b);
- // Inputs
+ // Inputs Utilities
IMGUI_API int GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey imgui_key); // map ImGuiKey_* values into user's key index. == io.KeyMap[key]
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyDown(int user_key_index); // is key being held. == io.KeysDown[user_key_index]. note that imgui doesn't know the semantic of each entry of io.KeysDown[]. Use your own indices/enums according to how your backend/engine stored them into io.KeysDown[]!
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyPressed(int user_key_index, bool repeat = true); // was key pressed (went from !Down to Down). if repeat=true, uses io.KeyRepeatDelay / KeyRepeatRate
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDoubleClicked(int button); // did mouse button double-clicked. a double-click returns false in IsMouseClicked(). uses io.MouseDoubleClickTime.
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseReleased(int button); // did mouse button released (went from Down to !Down)
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDragging(int button = 0, float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // is mouse dragging. if lock_threshold < -1.0f uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold
- IMGUI_API bool IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip = true); // is mouse hovering given bounding rect (in screen space). clipped by current clipping settings. disregarding of consideration of focus/window ordering/blocked by a popup.
+ IMGUI_API bool IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip = true); // is mouse hovering given bounding rect (in screen space). clipped by current clipping settings, but disregarding of other consideration of focus/window ordering/popup-block.
IMGUI_API bool IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos = NULL); //
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMousePos(); // shortcut to ImGui::GetIO().MousePos provided by user, to be consistent with other calls
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup(); // retrieve backup of mouse position at the time of opening popup we have BeginPopup() into
- IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMouseDragDelta(int button = 0, float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // dragging amount since clicking. if lock_threshold < -1.0f uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMouseDragDelta(int button = 0, float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // return the delta from the initial clicking position. This is locked and return 0.0f until the mouse moves past a distance threshold at least once. If lock_threshold < -1.0f uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold
IMGUI_API void ResetMouseDragDelta(int button = 0); //
IMGUI_API ImGuiMouseCursor GetMouseCursor(); // get desired cursor type, reset in ImGui::NewFrame(), this is updated during the frame. valid before Render(). If you use software rendering by setting io.MouseDrawCursor ImGui will render those for you
IMGUI_API void SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor type); // set desired cursor type
- IMGUI_API void CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool capture = true); // manually override io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag next frame (said flag is entirely left for your application to handle). e.g. force capture keyboard when your widget is being hovered.
- IMGUI_API void CaptureMouseFromApp(bool capture = true); // manually override io.WantCaptureMouse flag next frame (said flag is entirely left for your application to handle).
+ IMGUI_API void CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool want_capture_keyboard_value = true); // attention: misleading name! manually override io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag next frame (said flag is entirely left for your application to handle). e.g. force capture keyboard when your widget is being hovered. This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureKeyboard = want_capture_keyboard_value"; after the next NewFrame() call.
+ IMGUI_API void CaptureMouseFromApp(bool want_capture_mouse_value = true); // attention: misleading name! manually override io.WantCaptureMouse flag next frame (said flag is entirely left for your application to handle). This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureMouse = want_capture_mouse_value;" after the next NewFrame() call.
// Clipboard Utilities (also see the LogToClipboard() function to capture or output text data to the clipboard)
IMGUI_API const char* GetClipboardText();
IMGUI_API void SetClipboardText(const char* text);
// Settings/.Ini Utilities
- // The disk functions are automatically called if io.IniFilename != NULL (default is "imgui.ini").
- // Set io.IniFilename to NULL to load/save manually. Read io.WantSaveIniSettings description about handling .ini saving manually.
+ // - The disk functions are automatically called if io.IniFilename != NULL (default is "imgui.ini").
+ // - Set io.IniFilename to NULL to load/save manually. Read io.WantSaveIniSettings description about handling .ini saving manually.
IMGUI_API void LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame(). NewFrame() automatically calls LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(io.IniFilename).
IMGUI_API void LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size=0); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame() to provide .ini data from your own data source.
IMGUI_API void SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename);
IMGUI_API const char* SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_ini_size = NULL); // return a zero-terminated string with the .ini data which you can save by your own mean. call when io.WantSaveIniSettings is set, then save data by your own mean and clear io.WantSaveIniSettings.
// Memory Utilities
- // All those functions are not reliant on the current context.
- // If you reload the contents of imgui.cpp at runtime, you may need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions() again.
- IMGUI_API void SetAllocatorFunctions(void* (*alloc_func)(size_t sz, void* user_data), void(*free_func)(void* ptr, void* user_data), void* user_data = NULL);
+ // - All those functions are not reliant on the current context.
+ // - If you reload the contents of imgui.cpp at runtime, you may need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions() again.
+ IMGUI_API void SetAllocatorFunctions(void* (*alloc_func)(size_t sz, void* user_data), void (*free_func)(void* ptr, void* user_data), void* user_data = NULL);
IMGUI_API void* MemAlloc(size_t size);
IMGUI_API void MemFree(void* ptr);
} // namespace ImGui
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Flags & Enumerations
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
// Flags for ImGui::Begin()
enum ImGuiWindowFlags_
{
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse = 1 << 4, // Disable user vertically scrolling with mouse wheel. On child window, mouse wheel will be forwarded to the parent unless NoScrollbar is also set.
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse = 1 << 5, // Disable user collapsing window by double-clicking on it
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize = 1 << 6, // Resize every window to its content every frame
+ ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground = 1 << 7, // Disable drawing background color (WindowBg, etc.) and outside border. Similar as using SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f).
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings = 1 << 8, // Never load/save settings in .ini file
- ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs = 1 << 9, // Disable catching mouse or keyboard inputs, hovering test with pass through.
+ ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs = 1 << 9, // Disable catching mouse, hovering test with pass through.
ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar = 1 << 10, // Has a menu-bar
ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar = 1 << 11, // Allow horizontal scrollbar to appear (off by default). You may use SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(width,0.0f)); prior to calling Begin() to specify width. Read code in imgui_demo in the "Horizontal Scrolling" section.
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing = 1 << 12, // Disable taking focus when transitioning from hidden to visible state
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding = 1 << 16, // Ensure child windows without border uses style.WindowPadding (ignored by default for non-bordered child windows, because more convenient)
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs = 1 << 18, // No gamepad/keyboard navigation within the window
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus = 1 << 19, // No focusing toward this window with gamepad/keyboard navigation (e.g. skipped by CTRL+TAB)
+ ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 20, // Append '*' to title without affecting the ID, as a convenience to avoid using the ### operator. When used in a tab/docking context, tab is selected on closure and closure is deferred by one frame to allow code to cancel the closure (with a confirmation popup, etc.) without flicker.
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
+ ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse,
+ ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
// [Internal]
ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened = 1 << 23, // [BETA] Allow gamepad/keyboard navigation to cross over parent border to this child (only use on child that have no scrolling!)
// [Obsolete]
//ImGuiWindowFlags_ShowBorders = 1 << 7, // --> Set style.FrameBorderSize=1.0f / style.WindowBorderSize=1.0f to enable borders around windows and items
- //ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide = 1 << 17, // --> Set io.OptResizeWindowsFromEdges and make sure mouse cursors are supported by back-end (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors)
+ //ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide = 1 << 17, // --> Set io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges and make sure mouse cursors are supported by back-end (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors)
};
// Flags for ImGui::InputText()
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank = 1 << 3, // Filter out spaces, tabs
ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll = 1 << 4, // Select entire text when first taking mouse focus
ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue = 1 << 5, // Return 'true' when Enter is pressed (as opposed to when the value was modified)
- ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion = 1 << 6, // Call user function on pressing TAB (for completion handling)
- ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory = 1 << 7, // Call user function on pressing Up/Down arrows (for history handling)
- ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways = 1 << 8, // Call user function every time. User code may query cursor position, modify text buffer.
- ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter = 1 << 9, // Call user function to filter character. Modify data->EventChar to replace/filter input, or return 1 to discard character.
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion = 1 << 6, // Callback on pressing TAB (for completion handling)
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory = 1 << 7, // Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows (for history handling)
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways = 1 << 8, // Callback on each iteration. User code may query cursor position, modify text buffer.
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter = 1 << 9, // Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard.
ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput = 1 << 10, // Pressing TAB input a '\t' character into the text field
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine = 1 << 11, // In multi-line mode, unfocus with Enter, add new line with Ctrl+Enter (default is opposite: unfocus with Ctrl+Enter, add line with Enter).
ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll = 1 << 12, // Disable following the cursor horizontally
ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password = 1 << 15, // Password mode, display all characters as '*'
ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo = 1 << 16, // Disable undo/redo. Note that input text owns the text data while active, if you want to provide your own undo/redo stack you need e.g. to call ClearActiveID().
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific = 1 << 17, // Allow 0123456789.+-*/eE (Scientific notation input)
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize = 1 << 18, // Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow. Notify when the string wants to be resized (for string types which hold a cache of their Size). You will be provided a new BufSize in the callback and NEED to honor it. (see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example of using this)
// [Internal]
ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline = 1 << 20 // For internal use by InputTextMultiline()
};
ImGuiSelectableFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups = 1 << 0, // Clicking this don't close parent popup window
ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns = 1 << 1, // Selectable frame can span all columns (text will still fit in current column)
- ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick = 1 << 2 // Generate press events on double clicks too
+ ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick = 1 << 2, // Generate press events on double clicks too
+ ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled = 1 << 3 // Cannot be selected, display greyed out text
};
// Flags for ImGui::BeginCombo()
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_ = ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest
};
+// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabBar()
+enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_
+{
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_None = 0,
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable = 1 << 0, // Allow manually dragging tabs to re-order them + New tabs are appended at the end of list
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs = 1 << 1, // Automatically select new tabs when they appear
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton = 1 << 2,
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton = 1 << 3, // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false.
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons = 1 << 4,
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 5, // Disable tooltips when hovering a tab
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown = 1 << 6, // Resize tabs when they don't fit
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll = 1 << 7, // Add scroll buttons when tabs don't fit
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown | ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll,
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_ = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabItem()
+enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_
+{
+ ImGuiTabItemFlags_None = 0,
+ ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 0, // Append '*' to title without affecting the ID, as a convenience to avoid using the ### operator. Also: tab is selected on closure and closure is deferred by one frame to allow code to undo it without flicker.
+ ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected = 1 << 1, // Trigger flag to programatically make the tab selected when calling BeginTabItem()
+ ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton = 1 << 2, // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false.
+ ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId = 1 << 3 // Don't call PushID(tab->ID)/PopID() on BeginTabItem()/EndTabItem()
+};
+
// Flags for ImGui::IsWindowFocused()
enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_
{
ImGuiFocusedFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows = 1 << 0, // IsWindowFocused(): Return true if any children of the window is focused
ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow = 1 << 1, // IsWindowFocused(): Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy)
- ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow = 1 << 2, // IsWindowFocused(): Return true if any window is focused
+ ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow = 1 << 2, // IsWindowFocused(): Return true if any window is focused. Important: If you are trying to tell how to dispatch your low-level inputs, do NOT use this. Use ImGui::GetIO().WantCaptureMouse instead.
ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows = ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows
};
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers = 1 << 2, // Disable the behavior that allows to open tree nodes and collapsing header by holding over them while dragging a source item.
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID = 1 << 3, // Allow items such as Text(), Image() that have no unique identifier to be used as drag source, by manufacturing a temporary identifier based on their window-relative position. This is extremely unusual within the dear imgui ecosystem and so we made it explicit.
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern = 1 << 4, // External source (from outside of imgui), won't attempt to read current item/window info. Will always return true. Only one Extern source can be active simultaneously.
+ ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload = 1 << 5, // Automatically expire the payload if the source cease to be submitted (otherwise payloads are persisting while being dragged)
// AcceptDragDropPayload() flags
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery = 1 << 10, // AcceptDragDropPayload() will returns true even before the mouse button is released. You can then call IsDelivery() to test if the payload needs to be delivered.
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect = 1 << 11, // Do not draw the default highlight rectangle when hovering over target.
ImGuiKey_COUNT
};
-// [BETA] Gamepad/Keyboard directional navigation
+// Gamepad/Keyboard directional navigation
// Keyboard: Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard to enable. NewFrame() will automatically fill io.NavInputs[] based on your io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[] arrays.
// Gamepad: Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad to enable. Back-end: set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad and fill the io.NavInputs[] fields before calling NewFrame(). Note that io.NavInputs[] is cleared by EndFrame().
-// Read instructions in imgui.cpp for more details. Download PNG/PSD at goo.gl/9LgVZW.
+// Read instructions in imgui.cpp for more details. Download PNG/PSD at http://goo.gl/9LgVZW.
enum ImGuiNavInput_
{
// Gamepad Mapping
// Configuration flags stored in io.ConfigFlags. Set by user/application.
enum ImGuiConfigFlags_
{
+ ImGuiConfigFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard = 1 << 0, // Master keyboard navigation enable flag. NewFrame() will automatically fill io.NavInputs[] based on io.KeysDown[].
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad = 1 << 1, // Master gamepad navigation enable flag. This is mostly to instruct your imgui back-end to fill io.NavInputs[]. Back-end also needs to set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad.
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos = 1 << 2, // Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. May be useful on TV/console systems where moving a virtual mouse is awkward. Will update io.MousePos and set io.WantSetMousePos=true. If enabled you MUST honor io.WantSetMousePos requests in your binding, otherwise ImGui will react as if the mouse is jumping around back and forth.
// Back-end capabilities flags stored in io.BackendFlags. Set by imgui_impl_xxx or custom back-end.
enum ImGuiBackendFlags_
{
+ ImGuiBackendFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad = 1 << 0, // Back-end supports gamepad and currently has one connected.
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors = 1 << 1, // Back-end supports honoring GetMouseCursor() value to change the OS cursor shape.
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos = 1 << 2 // Back-end supports io.WantSetMousePos requests to reposition the OS mouse position (only used if ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos is set).
ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip,
ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered,
ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive,
+ ImGuiCol_Tab,
+ ImGuiCol_TabHovered,
+ ImGuiCol_TabActive,
+ ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused,
+ ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive,
ImGuiCol_PlotLines,
ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered,
ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram,
// Obsolete names (will be removed)
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
- , ImGuiCol_ChildWindowBg = ImGuiCol_ChildBg, ImGuiCol_Column = ImGuiCol_Separator, ImGuiCol_ColumnHovered = ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered, ImGuiCol_ColumnActive = ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive
- , ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDarkening = ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg
+ , ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDarkening = ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg // [renamed in 1.63]
+ , ImGuiCol_ChildWindowBg = ImGuiCol_ChildBg // [renamed in 1.53]
+ , ImGuiCol_Column = ImGuiCol_Separator, ImGuiCol_ColumnHovered = ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered, ImGuiCol_ColumnActive = ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive // [renamed in 1.51]
//ImGuiCol_CloseButton, ImGuiCol_CloseButtonActive, ImGuiCol_CloseButtonHovered, // [unused since 1.60+] the close button now uses regular button colors.
//ImGuiCol_ComboBg, // [unused since 1.53+] ComboBg has been merged with PopupBg, so a redirect isn't accurate.
#endif
ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding, // float ScrollbarRounding
ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, // float GrabMinSize
ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding, // float GrabRounding
+ ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding, // float TabRounding
ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign, // ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign
+ ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, // ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign
ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT
// Obsolete names (will be removed)
#endif
};
-// Enumeration for ColorEdit3() / ColorEdit4() / ColorPicker3() / ColorPicker4() / ColorButton()
+// Flags for ColorEdit3() / ColorEdit4() / ColorPicker3() / ColorPicker4() / ColorButton()
enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_
{
ImGuiColorEditFlags_None = 0,
#endif
};
-// Condition for ImGui::SetWindow***(), SetNextWindow***(), SetNextTreeNode***() functions
+// Enumateration for ImGui::SetWindow***(), SetNextWindow***(), SetNextTreeNode***() functions
+// Represent a condition.
// Important: Treat as a regular enum! Do NOT combine multiple values using binary operators! All the functions above treat 0 as a shortcut to ImGuiCond_Always.
enum ImGuiCond_
{
#endif
};
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Helper: ImVector<>
+// Lightweight std::vector<>-like class to avoid dragging dependencies (also, some implementations of STL with debug enabled are absurdly slow, we bypass it so our code runs fast in debug).
+// You generally do NOT need to care or use this ever. But we need to make it available in imgui.h because some of our data structures are relying on it.
+// Important: clear() frees memory, resize(0) keep the allocated buffer. We use resize(0) a lot to intentionally recycle allocated buffers across frames and amortize our costs.
+// Important: our implementation does NOT call C++ constructors/destructors, we treat everything as raw data! This is intentional but be extra mindful of that,
+// do NOT use this class as a std::vector replacement in your own code! Many of the structures used by dear imgui can be safely initialized by a zero-memset.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+template<typename T>
+struct ImVector
+{
+ int Size;
+ int Capacity;
+ T* Data;
+
+ // Provide standard typedefs but we don't use them ourselves.
+ typedef T value_type;
+ typedef value_type* iterator;
+ typedef const value_type* const_iterator;
+
+ // Constructors, destructor
+ inline ImVector() { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; }
+ inline ImVector(const ImVector<T>& src) { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; operator=(src); }
+ inline ImVector<T>& operator=(const ImVector<T>& src) { clear(); resize(src.Size); memcpy(Data, src.Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T)); return *this; }
+ inline ~ImVector() { if (Data) ImGui::MemFree(Data); }
+
+ inline bool empty() const { return Size == 0; }
+ inline int size() const { return Size; }
+ inline int size_in_bytes() const { return Size * (int)sizeof(T); }
+ inline int capacity() const { return Capacity; }
+ inline T& operator[](int i) { IM_ASSERT(i < Size); return Data[i]; }
+ inline const T& operator[](int i) const { IM_ASSERT(i < Size); return Data[i]; }
+
+ inline void clear() { if (Data) { Size = Capacity = 0; ImGui::MemFree(Data); Data = NULL; } }
+ inline T* begin() { return Data; }
+ inline const T* begin() const { return Data; }
+ inline T* end() { return Data + Size; }
+ inline const T* end() const { return Data + Size; }
+ inline T& front() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; }
+ inline const T& front() const { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; }
+ inline T& back() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; }
+ inline const T& back() const { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; }
+ inline void swap(ImVector<T>& rhs) { int rhs_size = rhs.Size; rhs.Size = Size; Size = rhs_size; int rhs_cap = rhs.Capacity; rhs.Capacity = Capacity; Capacity = rhs_cap; T* rhs_data = rhs.Data; rhs.Data = Data; Data = rhs_data; }
+
+ inline int _grow_capacity(int sz) const { int new_capacity = Capacity ? (Capacity + Capacity/2) : 8; return new_capacity > sz ? new_capacity : sz; }
+ inline void resize(int new_size) { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); Size = new_size; }
+ inline void resize(int new_size, const T& v) { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); if (new_size > Size) for (int n = Size; n < new_size; n++) memcpy(&Data[n], &v, sizeof(v)); Size = new_size; }
+ inline void reserve(int new_capacity) { if (new_capacity <= Capacity) return; T* new_data = (T*)ImGui::MemAlloc((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(T)); if (Data) { memcpy(new_data, Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T)); ImGui::MemFree(Data); } Data = new_data; Capacity = new_capacity; }
+
+ // NB: It is illegal to call push_back/push_front/insert with a reference pointing inside the ImVector data itself! e.g. v.push_back(v[10]) is forbidden.
+ inline void push_back(const T& v) { if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); memcpy(&Data[Size], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; }
+ inline void pop_back() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); Size--; }
+ inline void push_front(const T& v) { if (Size == 0) push_back(v); else insert(Data, v); }
+ inline T* erase(const T* it) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + 1, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - 1) * sizeof(T)); Size--; return Data + off; }
+ inline T* erase(const T* it, const T* it_last){ IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data+Size && it_last > it && it_last <= Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t count = it_last - it; const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + count, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - count) * sizeof(T)); Size -= (int)count; return Data + off; }
+ inline T* erase_unsorted(const T* it) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (it < Data+Size-1) memcpy(Data + off, Data + Size - 1, sizeof(T)); Size--; return Data + off; }
+ inline T* insert(const T* it, const T& v) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it <= Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); if (off < (int)Size) memmove(Data + off + 1, Data + off, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off) * sizeof(T)); memcpy(&Data[off], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; return Data + off; }
+ inline bool contains(const T& v) const { const T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data++ == v) return true; return false; }
+ inline int index_from_ptr(const T* it) const { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it <= Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// ImGuiStyle
// You may modify the ImGui::GetStyle() main instance during initialization and before NewFrame().
-// During the frame, use ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_XXXX)/PopStyleVar() to alter the main style values, and ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_XXX)/PopStyleColor() for colors.
+// During the frame, use ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_XXXX)/PopStyleVar() to alter the main style values,
+// and ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_XXX)/PopStyleColor() for colors.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
struct ImGuiStyle
{
float Alpha; // Global alpha applies to everything in ImGui.
float ScrollbarRounding; // Radius of grab corners for scrollbar.
float GrabMinSize; // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar.
float GrabRounding; // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs.
- ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign; // Alignment of button text when button is larger than text. Defaults to (0.5f,0.5f) for horizontally+vertically centered.
- ImVec2 DisplayWindowPadding; // Window positions are clamped to be visible within the display area by at least this amount. Only covers regular windows.
+ float TabRounding; // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs.
+ float TabBorderSize; // Thickness of border around tabs.
+ ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign; // Alignment of button text when button is larger than text. Defaults to (0.5f, 0.5f) (centered).
+ ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign; // Alignment of selectable text when selectable is larger than text. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.0f) (top-left aligned).
+ ImVec2 DisplayWindowPadding; // Window position are clamped to be visible within the display area by at least this amount. Only applies to regular windows.
ImVec2 DisplaySafeAreaPadding; // If you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Apply to popups/tooltips as well regular windows. NB: Prefer configuring your TV sets correctly!
float MouseCursorScale; // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). May be removed later.
bool AntiAliasedLines; // Enable anti-aliasing on lines/borders. Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU.
IMGUI_API void ScaleAllSizes(float scale_factor);
};
-// This is where your app communicate with ImGui. Access via ImGui::GetIO().
-// Read 'Programmer guide' section in .cpp file for general usage.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// ImGuiIO
+// Communicate most settings and inputs/outputs to Dear ImGui using this structure.
+// Access via ImGui::GetIO(). Read 'Programmer guide' section in .cpp file for general usage.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
struct ImGuiIO
{
//------------------------------------------------------------------
- // Settings (fill once) // Default value:
+ // Configuration (fill once) // Default value
//------------------------------------------------------------------
- ImGuiConfigFlags ConfigFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiConfigFlags_ enum. Set by user/application. Gamepad/keyboard navigation options, etc.
- ImGuiBackendFlags BackendFlags; // = 0 // Set ImGuiBackendFlags_ enum. Set by imgui_impl_xxx files or custom back-end to communicate features supported by the back-end.
- ImVec2 DisplaySize; // <unset> // Display size, in pixels. For clamping windows positions.
- float DeltaTime; // = 1.0f/60.0f // Time elapsed since last frame, in seconds.
- float IniSavingRate; // = 5.0f // Minimum time between saving positions/sizes to .ini file, in seconds.
- const char* IniFilename; // = "imgui.ini" // Path to .ini file. Set NULL to disable automatic .ini loading/saving, if e.g. you want to manually load/save from memory.
- const char* LogFilename; // = "imgui_log.txt" // Path to .log file (default parameter to ImGui::LogToFile when no file is specified).
- float MouseDoubleClickTime; // = 0.30f // Time for a double-click, in seconds.
- float MouseDoubleClickMaxDist; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold to stay in to validate a double-click, in pixels.
- float MouseDragThreshold; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold before considering we are dragging.
- int KeyMap[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // <unset> // Map of indices into the KeysDown[512] entries array which represent your "native" keyboard state.
- float KeyRepeatDelay; // = 0.250f // When holding a key/button, time before it starts repeating, in seconds (for buttons in Repeat mode, etc.).
- float KeyRepeatRate; // = 0.050f // When holding a key/button, rate at which it repeats, in seconds.
- void* UserData; // = NULL // Store your own data for retrieval by callbacks.
-
- ImFontAtlas* Fonts; // <auto> // Load and assemble one or more fonts into a single tightly packed texture. Output to Fonts array.
- float FontGlobalScale; // = 1.0f // Global scale all fonts
- bool FontAllowUserScaling; // = false // Allow user scaling text of individual window with CTRL+Wheel.
- ImFont* FontDefault; // = NULL // Font to use on NewFrame(). Use NULL to uses Fonts->Fonts[0].
- ImVec2 DisplayFramebufferScale; // = (1.0f,1.0f) // For retina display or other situations where window coordinates are different from framebuffer coordinates. User storage only, presently not used by ImGui.
- ImVec2 DisplayVisibleMin; // <unset> (0.0f,0.0f) // If you use DisplaySize as a virtual space larger than your screen, set DisplayVisibleMin/Max to the visible area.
- ImVec2 DisplayVisibleMax; // <unset> (0.0f,0.0f) // If the values are the same, we defaults to Min=(0.0f) and Max=DisplaySize
+ ImGuiConfigFlags ConfigFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiConfigFlags_ enum. Set by user/application. Gamepad/keyboard navigation options, etc.
+ ImGuiBackendFlags BackendFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiBackendFlags_ enum. Set by back-end (imgui_impl_xxx files or custom back-end) to communicate features supported by the back-end.
+ ImVec2 DisplaySize; // <unset> // Main display size, in pixels.
+ float DeltaTime; // = 1.0f/60.0f // Time elapsed since last frame, in seconds.
+ float IniSavingRate; // = 5.0f // Minimum time between saving positions/sizes to .ini file, in seconds.
+ const char* IniFilename; // = "imgui.ini" // Path to .ini file. Set NULL to disable automatic .ini loading/saving, if e.g. you want to manually load/save from memory.
+ const char* LogFilename; // = "imgui_log.txt"// Path to .log file (default parameter to ImGui::LogToFile when no file is specified).
+ float MouseDoubleClickTime; // = 0.30f // Time for a double-click, in seconds.
+ float MouseDoubleClickMaxDist; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold to stay in to validate a double-click, in pixels.
+ float MouseDragThreshold; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold before considering we are dragging.
+ int KeyMap[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // <unset> // Map of indices into the KeysDown[512] entries array which represent your "native" keyboard state.
+ float KeyRepeatDelay; // = 0.250f // When holding a key/button, time before it starts repeating, in seconds (for buttons in Repeat mode, etc.).
+ float KeyRepeatRate; // = 0.050f // When holding a key/button, rate at which it repeats, in seconds.
+ void* UserData; // = NULL // Store your own data for retrieval by callbacks.
+
+ ImFontAtlas*Fonts; // <auto> // Load, rasterize and pack one or more fonts into a single texture.
+ float FontGlobalScale; // = 1.0f // Global scale all fonts
+ bool FontAllowUserScaling; // = false // Allow user scaling text of individual window with CTRL+Wheel.
+ ImFont* FontDefault; // = NULL // Font to use on NewFrame(). Use NULL to uses Fonts->Fonts[0].
+ ImVec2 DisplayFramebufferScale; // = (1, 1) // For retina display or other situations where window coordinates are different from framebuffer coordinates. This generally ends up in ImDrawData::FramebufferScale.
// Miscellaneous options
- bool OptMacOSXBehaviors; // = defined(__APPLE__) // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl, Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl, Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End, Double click selects by word instead of selecting whole text, Multi-selection in lists uses Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl
- bool OptCursorBlink; // = true // Enable blinking cursor, for users who consider it annoying.
- bool OptResizeWindowsFromEdges;// = false // [BETA] Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner. This requires (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback. (This used to be the ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide flag)
+ bool MouseDrawCursor; // = false // Request ImGui to draw a mouse cursor for you (if you are on a platform without a mouse cursor). Cannot be easily renamed to 'io.ConfigXXX' because this is frequently used by back-end implementations.
+ bool ConfigMacOSXBehaviors; // = defined(__APPLE__) // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl, Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl, Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End, Double click selects by word instead of selecting whole text, Multi-selection in lists uses Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl (was called io.OptMacOSXBehaviors prior to 1.63)
+ bool ConfigInputTextCursorBlink; // = true // Set to false to disable blinking cursor, for users who consider it distracting. (was called: io.OptCursorBlink prior to 1.63)
+ bool ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges; // = true // Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner. This requires (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback. (This used to be the a per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide flag)
+ bool ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly; // = false // [BETA] Set to true to only allow moving windows when clicked+dragged from the title bar. Windows without a title bar are not affected.
//------------------------------------------------------------------
- // Settings (User Functions)
+ // Platform Functions
+ // (the imgui_impl_xxxx back-end files are setting those up for you)
//------------------------------------------------------------------
- // Optional: access OS clipboard
+ // Optional: Platform/Renderer back-end name (informational only! will be displayed in About Window) + User data for back-end/wrappers to store their own stuff.
+ const char* BackendPlatformName; // = NULL
+ const char* BackendRendererName; // = NULL
+ void* BackendPlatformUserData; // = NULL
+ void* BackendRendererUserData; // = NULL
+ void* BackendLanguageUserData; // = NULL
+
+ // Optional: Access OS clipboard
// (default to use native Win32 clipboard on Windows, otherwise uses a private clipboard. Override to access OS clipboard on other architectures)
const char* (*GetClipboardTextFn)(void* user_data);
void (*SetClipboardTextFn)(void* user_data, const char* text);
void* ClipboardUserData;
- // Optional: notify OS Input Method Editor of the screen position of your cursor for text input position (e.g. when using Japanese/Chinese IME in Windows)
+ // Optional: Notify OS Input Method Editor of the screen position of your cursor for text input position (e.g. when using Japanese/Chinese IME on Windows)
// (default to use native imm32 api on Windows)
void (*ImeSetInputScreenPosFn)(int x, int y);
- void* ImeWindowHandle; // (Windows) Set this to your HWND to get automatic IME cursor positioning.
+ void* ImeWindowHandle; // = NULL // (Windows) Set this to your HWND to get automatic IME cursor positioning.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
- // [OBSOLETE] Rendering function, will be automatically called in Render(). Please call your rendering function yourself now!
+ // [OBSOLETE since 1.60+] Rendering function, will be automatically called in Render(). Please call your rendering function yourself now!
// You can obtain the ImDrawData* by calling ImGui::GetDrawData() after Render(). See example applications if you are unsure of how to implement this.
void (*RenderDrawListsFn)(ImDrawData* data);
#else
- // This is only here to keep ImGuiIO the same size, so that IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS can exceptionally be used outside of imconfig.h.
- void* RenderDrawListsFnDummy;
+ // This is only here to keep ImGuiIO the same size/layout, so that IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS can exceptionally be used outside of imconfig.h.
+ void* RenderDrawListsFnUnused;
#endif
//------------------------------------------------------------------
bool MouseDown[5]; // Mouse buttons: 0=left, 1=right, 2=middle + extras. ImGui itself mostly only uses left button (BeginPopupContext** are using right button). Others buttons allows us to track if the mouse is being used by your application + available to user as a convenience via IsMouse** API.
float MouseWheel; // Mouse wheel Vertical: 1 unit scrolls about 5 lines text.
float MouseWheelH; // Mouse wheel Horizontal. Most users don't have a mouse with an horizontal wheel, may not be filled by all back-ends.
- bool MouseDrawCursor; // Request ImGui to draw a mouse cursor for you (if you are on a platform without a mouse cursor).
bool KeyCtrl; // Keyboard modifier pressed: Control
bool KeyShift; // Keyboard modifier pressed: Shift
bool KeyAlt; // Keyboard modifier pressed: Alt
bool KeySuper; // Keyboard modifier pressed: Cmd/Super/Windows
bool KeysDown[512]; // Keyboard keys that are pressed (ideally left in the "native" order your engine has access to keyboard keys, so you can use your own defines/enums for keys).
- ImWchar InputCharacters[16+1]; // List of characters input (translated by user from keypress+keyboard state). Fill using AddInputCharacter() helper.
- float NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT]; // Gamepad inputs (keyboard keys will be auto-mapped and be written here by ImGui::NewFrame, all values will be cleared back to zero in ImGui::EndFrame)
+ float NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT]; // Gamepad inputs. Cleared back to zero by EndFrame(). Keyboard keys will be auto-mapped and be written here by NewFrame().
// Functions
- IMGUI_API void AddInputCharacter(ImWchar c); // Add new character into InputCharacters[]
- IMGUI_API void AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* utf8_chars); // Add new characters into InputCharacters[] from an UTF-8 string
- inline void ClearInputCharacters() { InputCharacters[0] = 0; } // Clear the text input buffer manually
+ IMGUI_API void AddInputCharacter(ImWchar c); // Queue new character input
+ IMGUI_API void AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* str); // Queue new characters input from an UTF-8 string
+ IMGUI_API void ClearInputCharacters(); // Clear the text input buffer manually
//------------------------------------------------------------------
// Output - Retrieve after calling NewFrame()
//------------------------------------------------------------------
- bool WantCaptureMouse; // When io.WantCaptureMouse is true, imgui will use the mouse inputs, do not dispatch them to your main game/application (in both cases, always pass on mouse inputs to imgui). (e.g. unclicked mouse is hovering over an imgui window, widget is active, mouse was clicked over an imgui window, etc.).
- bool WantCaptureKeyboard; // When io.WantCaptureKeyboard is true, imgui will use the keyboard inputs, do not dispatch them to your main game/application (in both cases, always pass keyboard inputs to imgui). (e.g. InputText active, or an imgui window is focused and navigation is enabled, etc.).
- bool WantTextInput; // Mobile/console: when io.WantTextInput is true, you may display an on-screen keyboard. This is set by ImGui when it wants textual keyboard input to happen (e.g. when a InputText widget is active).
- bool WantSetMousePos; // MousePos has been altered, back-end should reposition mouse on next frame. Set only when ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag is enabled.
- bool WantSaveIniSettings; // When manual .ini load/save is active (io.IniFilename == NULL), this will be set to notify your application that you can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory() and save yourself. IMPORTANT: You need to clear io.WantSaveIniSettings yourself.
- bool NavActive; // Directional navigation is currently allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events) = a window is focused and it doesn't use the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag.
- bool NavVisible; // Directional navigation is visible and allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events).
- float Framerate; // Application framerate estimation, in frame per second. Solely for convenience. Rolling average estimation based on IO.DeltaTime over 120 frames
- int MetricsRenderVertices; // Vertices output during last call to Render()
- int MetricsRenderIndices; // Indices output during last call to Render() = number of triangles * 3
- int MetricsActiveWindows; // Number of visible root windows (exclude child windows)
- ImVec2 MouseDelta; // Mouse delta. Note that this is zero if either current or previous position are invalid (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX), so a disappearing/reappearing mouse won't have a huge delta.
+ bool WantCaptureMouse; // When io.WantCaptureMouse is true, imgui will use the mouse inputs, do not dispatch them to your main game/application (in both cases, always pass on mouse inputs to imgui). (e.g. unclicked mouse is hovering over an imgui window, widget is active, mouse was clicked over an imgui window, etc.).
+ bool WantCaptureKeyboard; // When io.WantCaptureKeyboard is true, imgui will use the keyboard inputs, do not dispatch them to your main game/application (in both cases, always pass keyboard inputs to imgui). (e.g. InputText active, or an imgui window is focused and navigation is enabled, etc.).
+ bool WantTextInput; // Mobile/console: when io.WantTextInput is true, you may display an on-screen keyboard. This is set by ImGui when it wants textual keyboard input to happen (e.g. when a InputText widget is active).
+ bool WantSetMousePos; // MousePos has been altered, back-end should reposition mouse on next frame. Set only when ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag is enabled.
+ bool WantSaveIniSettings; // When manual .ini load/save is active (io.IniFilename == NULL), this will be set to notify your application that you can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory() and save yourself. IMPORTANT: You need to clear io.WantSaveIniSettings yourself.
+ bool NavActive; // Directional navigation is currently allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events) = a window is focused and it doesn't use the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag.
+ bool NavVisible; // Directional navigation is visible and allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events).
+ float Framerate; // Application framerate estimation, in frame per second. Solely for convenience. Rolling average estimation based on IO.DeltaTime over 120 frames
+ int MetricsRenderVertices; // Vertices output during last call to Render()
+ int MetricsRenderIndices; // Indices output during last call to Render() = number of triangles * 3
+ int MetricsRenderWindows; // Number of visible windows
+ int MetricsActiveWindows; // Number of active windows
+ int MetricsActiveAllocations; // Number of active allocations, updated by MemAlloc/MemFree based on current context. May be off if you have multiple imgui contexts.
+ ImVec2 MouseDelta; // Mouse delta. Note that this is zero if either current or previous position are invalid (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX), so a disappearing/reappearing mouse won't have a huge delta.
//------------------------------------------------------------------
// [Internal] ImGui will maintain those fields. Forward compatibility not guaranteed!
//------------------------------------------------------------------
- ImVec2 MousePosPrev; // Previous mouse position temporary storage (nb: not for public use, set to MousePos in NewFrame())
- ImVec2 MouseClickedPos[5]; // Position at time of clicking
- double MouseClickedTime[5]; // Time of last click (used to figure out double-click)
- bool MouseClicked[5]; // Mouse button went from !Down to Down
- bool MouseDoubleClicked[5]; // Has mouse button been double-clicked?
- bool MouseReleased[5]; // Mouse button went from Down to !Down
- bool MouseDownOwned[5]; // Track if button was clicked inside a window. We don't request mouse capture from the application if click started outside ImGui bounds.
- float MouseDownDuration[5]; // Duration the mouse button has been down (0.0f == just clicked)
- float MouseDownDurationPrev[5]; // Previous time the mouse button has been down
- ImVec2 MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[5]; // Maximum distance, absolute, on each axis, of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point
- float MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[5]; // Squared maximum distance of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point
- float KeysDownDuration[512]; // Duration the keyboard key has been down (0.0f == just pressed)
- float KeysDownDurationPrev[512]; // Previous duration the key has been down
+ ImVec2 MousePosPrev; // Previous mouse position (note that MouseDelta is not necessary == MousePos-MousePosPrev, in case either position is invalid)
+ ImVec2 MouseClickedPos[5]; // Position at time of clicking
+ double MouseClickedTime[5]; // Time of last click (used to figure out double-click)
+ bool MouseClicked[5]; // Mouse button went from !Down to Down
+ bool MouseDoubleClicked[5]; // Has mouse button been double-clicked?
+ bool MouseReleased[5]; // Mouse button went from Down to !Down
+ bool MouseDownOwned[5]; // Track if button was clicked inside a window. We don't request mouse capture from the application if click started outside ImGui bounds.
+ float MouseDownDuration[5]; // Duration the mouse button has been down (0.0f == just clicked)
+ float MouseDownDurationPrev[5]; // Previous time the mouse button has been down
+ ImVec2 MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[5]; // Maximum distance, absolute, on each axis, of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point
+ float MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[5]; // Squared maximum distance of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point
+ float KeysDownDuration[512]; // Duration the keyboard key has been down (0.0f == just pressed)
+ float KeysDownDurationPrev[512]; // Previous duration the key has been down
float NavInputsDownDuration[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT];
float NavInputsDownDurationPrev[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT];
+ ImVector<ImWchar> InputQueueCharacters; // Queue of _characters_ input (obtained by platform back-end). Fill using AddInputCharacter() helper.
IMGUI_API ImGuiIO();
};
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Misc data structures
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Shared state of InputText(), passed as an argument to your callback when a ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* flag is used.
+// The callback function should return 0 by default.
+// Callbacks (follow a flag name and see comments in ImGuiInputTextFlags_ declarations for more details)
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion: Callback on pressing TAB
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory: Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways: Callback on each iteration
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter: Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard.
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize: Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow.
+struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData
+{
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags EventFlag; // One ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* // Read-only
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags Flags; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only
+ void* UserData; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only
+
+ // Arguments for the different callback events
+ // - To modify the text buffer in a callback, prefer using the InsertChars() / DeleteChars() function. InsertChars() will take care of calling the resize callback if necessary.
+ // - If you know your edits are not going to resize the underlying buffer allocation, you may modify the contents of 'Buf[]' directly. You need to update 'BufTextLen' accordingly (0 <= BufTextLen < BufSize) and set 'BufDirty'' to true so InputText can update its internal state.
+ ImWchar EventChar; // Character input // Read-write // [CharFilter] Replace character with another one, or set to zero to drop. return 1 is equivalent to setting EventChar=0;
+ ImGuiKey EventKey; // Key pressed (Up/Down/TAB) // Read-only // [Completion,History]
+ char* Buf; // Text buffer // Read-write // [Resize] Can replace pointer / [Completion,History,Always] Only write to pointed data, don't replace the actual pointer!
+ int BufTextLen; // Text length (in bytes) // Read-write // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Exclude zero-terminator storage. In C land: == strlen(some_text), in C++ land: string.length()
+ int BufSize; // Buffer size (in bytes) = capacity+1 // Read-only // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Include zero-terminator storage. In C land == ARRAYSIZE(my_char_array), in C++ land: string.capacity()+1
+ bool BufDirty; // Set if you modify Buf/BufTextLen! // Write // [Completion,History,Always]
+ int CursorPos; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always]
+ int SelectionStart; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always] == to SelectionEnd when no selection)
+ int SelectionEnd; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always]
+
+ // Helper functions for text manipulation.
+ // Use those function to benefit from the CallbackResize behaviors. Calling those function reset the selection.
+ IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextCallbackData();
+ IMGUI_API void DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count);
+ IMGUI_API void InsertChars(int pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL);
+ bool HasSelection() const { return SelectionStart != SelectionEnd; }
+};
+
+// Resizing callback data to apply custom constraint. As enabled by SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). Callback is called during the next Begin().
+// NB: For basic min/max size constraint on each axis you don't need to use the callback! The SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() parameters are enough.
+struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData
+{
+ void* UserData; // Read-only. What user passed to SetNextWindowSizeConstraints()
+ ImVec2 Pos; // Read-only. Window position, for reference.
+ ImVec2 CurrentSize; // Read-only. Current window size.
+ ImVec2 DesiredSize; // Read-write. Desired size, based on user's mouse position. Write to this field to restrain resizing.
+};
+
+// Data payload for Drag and Drop operations: AcceptDragDropPayload(), GetDragDropPayload()
+struct ImGuiPayload
+{
+ // Members
+ void* Data; // Data (copied and owned by dear imgui)
+ int DataSize; // Data size
+
+ // [Internal]
+ ImGuiID SourceId; // Source item id
+ ImGuiID SourceParentId; // Source parent id (if available)
+ int DataFrameCount; // Data timestamp
+ char DataType[32+1]; // Data type tag (short user-supplied string, 32 characters max)
+ bool Preview; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse has been hovering the target item (nb: handle overlapping drag targets)
+ bool Delivery; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse button is released over the target item.
+
+ ImGuiPayload() { Clear(); }
+ void Clear() { SourceId = SourceParentId = 0; Data = NULL; DataSize = 0; memset(DataType, 0, sizeof(DataType)); DataFrameCount = -1; Preview = Delivery = false; }
+ bool IsDataType(const char* type) const { return DataFrameCount != -1 && strcmp(type, DataType) == 0; }
+ bool IsPreview() const { return Preview; }
+ bool IsDelivery() const { return Delivery; }
+};
+
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Obsolete functions (Will be removed! Read 'API BREAKING CHANGES' section in imgui.cpp for details)
+// Please keep your copy of dear imgui up to date! Occasionally set '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' in imconfig.h to stay ahead.
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
namespace ImGui
{
- // OBSOLETED in 1.61 (from Apr 2018)
- IMGUI_API bool InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0); // Use the 'const char* format' version instead of 'decimal_precision'!
- IMGUI_API bool InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags = 0);
- // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (from Dec 2017)
+ // OBSOLETED in 1.66 (from Sep 2018)
+ static inline void SetScrollHere(float center_ratio=0.5f){ SetScrollHereY(center_ratio); }
+ // OBSOLETED in 1.63 (between Aug 2018 and Sept 2018)
+ static inline bool IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() { return IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); }
+ // OBSOLETED in 1.61 (between Apr 2018 and Aug 2018)
+ IMGUI_API bool InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); // Use the 'const char* format' version instead of 'decimal_precision'!
+ IMGUI_API bool InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+ // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (between Dec 2017 and Apr 2018)
static inline bool IsAnyWindowFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow); }
static inline bool IsAnyWindowHovered() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow); }
- static inline ImVec2 CalcItemRectClosestPoint(const ImVec2& pos, bool on_edge = false, float outward = 0.f) { (void)on_edge; (void)outward; IM_ASSERT(0); return pos; }
+ static inline ImVec2 CalcItemRectClosestPoint(const ImVec2& pos, bool on_edge = false, float outward = 0.f) { IM_UNUSED(on_edge); IM_UNUSED(outward); IM_ASSERT(0); return pos; }
// OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
static inline void ShowTestWindow() { return ShowDemoWindow(); }
static inline bool IsRootWindowFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow); }
static inline bool IsPosHoveringAnyWindow(const ImVec2&) { IM_ASSERT(0); return false; } // This was misleading and partly broken. You probably want to use the ImGui::GetIO().WantCaptureMouse flag instead.
static inline bool IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow); }
static inline bool IsMouseHoveringWindow() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem); }
- // OBSOLETED IN 1.49 (between Apr 2016 and May 2016)
- static inline bool CollapsingHeader(const char* label, const char* str_id, bool framed = true, bool default_open = false) { (void)str_id; (void)framed; ImGuiTreeNodeFlags default_open_flags = 1 << 5; return CollapsingHeader(label, (default_open ? default_open_flags : 0)); }
}
+typedef ImGuiInputTextCallback ImGuiTextEditCallback; // OBSOLETE in 1.63 (from Aug 2018): made the names consistent
+typedef ImGuiInputTextCallbackData ImGuiTextEditCallbackData;
#endif
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Helpers
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Helper: Lightweight std::vector<> like class to avoid dragging dependencies (also: Windows implementation of STL with debug enabled is absurdly slow, so let's bypass it so our code runs fast in debug).
-// *Important* Our implementation does NOT call C++ constructors/destructors. This is intentional, we do not require it but you have to be mindful of that. Do _not_ use this class as a std::vector replacement in your code!
-template<typename T>
-class ImVector
-{
-public:
- int Size;
- int Capacity;
- T* Data;
-
- typedef T value_type;
- typedef value_type* iterator;
- typedef const value_type* const_iterator;
-
- inline ImVector() { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; }
- inline ~ImVector() { if (Data) ImGui::MemFree(Data); }
- inline ImVector(const ImVector<T>& src) { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; operator=(src); }
- inline ImVector& operator=(const ImVector<T>& src) { clear(); resize(src.Size); memcpy(Data, src.Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(value_type)); return *this; }
-
- inline bool empty() const { return Size == 0; }
- inline int size() const { return Size; }
- inline int capacity() const { return Capacity; }
- inline value_type& operator[](int i) { IM_ASSERT(i < Size); return Data[i]; }
- inline const value_type& operator[](int i) const { IM_ASSERT(i < Size); return Data[i]; }
-
- inline void clear() { if (Data) { Size = Capacity = 0; ImGui::MemFree(Data); Data = NULL; } }
- inline iterator begin() { return Data; }
- inline const_iterator begin() const { return Data; }
- inline iterator end() { return Data + Size; }
- inline const_iterator end() const { return Data + Size; }
- inline value_type& front() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; }
- inline const value_type& front() const { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; }
- inline value_type& back() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; }
- inline const value_type& back() const { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; }
- inline void swap(ImVector<value_type>& rhs) { int rhs_size = rhs.Size; rhs.Size = Size; Size = rhs_size; int rhs_cap = rhs.Capacity; rhs.Capacity = Capacity; Capacity = rhs_cap; value_type* rhs_data = rhs.Data; rhs.Data = Data; Data = rhs_data; }
-
- inline int _grow_capacity(int sz) const { int new_capacity = Capacity ? (Capacity + Capacity/2) : 8; return new_capacity > sz ? new_capacity : sz; }
- inline void resize(int new_size) { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); Size = new_size; }
- inline void resize(int new_size,const value_type& v){ if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); if (new_size > Size) for (int n = Size; n < new_size; n++) memcpy(&Data[n], &v, sizeof(v)); Size = new_size; }
- inline void reserve(int new_capacity)
- {
- if (new_capacity <= Capacity)
- return;
- value_type* new_data = (value_type*)ImGui::MemAlloc((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(value_type));
- if (Data)
- {
- memcpy(new_data, Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(value_type));
- ImGui::MemFree(Data);
- }
- Data = new_data;
- Capacity = new_capacity;
- }
-
- // NB: It is forbidden to call push_back/push_front/insert with a reference pointing inside the ImVector data itself! e.g. v.push_back(v[10]) is forbidden.
- inline void push_back(const value_type& v) { if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); memcpy(&Data[Size], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; }
- inline void pop_back() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); Size--; }
- inline void push_front(const value_type& v) { if (Size == 0) push_back(v); else insert(Data, v); }
- inline iterator erase(const_iterator it) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + 1, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - 1) * sizeof(value_type)); Size--; return Data + off; }
- inline iterator erase(const_iterator it, const_iterator it_last){ IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data+Size && it_last > it && it_last <= Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t count = it_last - it; const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + count, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - count) * sizeof(value_type)); Size -= (int)count; return Data + off; }
- inline iterator erase_unsorted(const_iterator it) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (it < Data+Size-1) memcpy(Data + off, Data + Size - 1, sizeof(value_type)); Size--; return Data + off; }
- inline iterator insert(const_iterator it, const value_type& v) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it <= Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); if (off < (int)Size) memmove(Data + off + 1, Data + off, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off) * sizeof(value_type)); memcpy(&Data[off], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; return Data + off; }
- inline bool contains(const value_type& v) const { const T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data++ == v) return true; return false; }
- inline int index_from_pointer(const_iterator it) const { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it <= Data+Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; }
-};
-
// Helper: IM_NEW(), IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(), IM_DELETE() macros to call MemAlloc + Placement New, Placement Delete + MemFree
// We call C++ constructor on own allocated memory via the placement "new(ptr) Type()" syntax.
// Defining a custom placement new() with a dummy parameter allows us to bypass including <new> which on some platforms complains when user has disabled exceptions.
};
// Helper: Macro for ImGuiOnceUponAFrame. Attention: The macro expands into 2 statement so make sure you don't use it within e.g. an if() statement without curly braces.
-#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS // Will obsolete
-#define IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame imgui_oaf; if (imgui_oaf)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+#define IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame imgui_oaf; if (imgui_oaf) // OBSOLETED in 1.51, will remove!
#endif
// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]"
struct ImGuiTextFilter
{
IMGUI_API ImGuiTextFilter(const char* default_filter = "");
- IMGUI_API bool Draw(const char* label = "Filter (inc,-exc)", float width = 0.0f); // Helper calling InputText+Build
+ IMGUI_API bool Draw(const char* label = "Filter (inc,-exc)", float width = 0.0f); // Helper calling InputText+Build
IMGUI_API bool PassFilter(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL) const;
IMGUI_API void Build();
void Clear() { InputBuf[0] = 0; Build(); }
int CountGrep;
};
-// Helper: Text buffer for logging/accumulating text
+// Helper: Growable text buffer for logging/accumulating text
+// (this could be called 'ImGuiTextBuilder' / 'ImGuiStringBuilder')
struct ImGuiTextBuffer
{
ImVector<char> Buf;
-
- ImGuiTextBuffer() { Buf.push_back(0); }
- inline char operator[](int i) { return Buf.Data[i]; }
- const char* begin() const { return &Buf.front(); }
- const char* end() const { return &Buf.back(); } // Buf is zero-terminated, so end() will point on the zero-terminator
- int size() const { return Buf.Size - 1; }
- bool empty() { return Buf.Size <= 1; }
- void clear() { Buf.clear(); Buf.push_back(0); }
- void reserve(int capacity) { Buf.reserve(capacity); }
- const char* c_str() const { return Buf.Data; }
+ static char EmptyString[1];
+
+ ImGuiTextBuffer() { }
+ inline char operator[](int i) { IM_ASSERT(Buf.Data != NULL); return Buf.Data[i]; }
+ const char* begin() const { return Buf.Data ? &Buf.front() : EmptyString; }
+ const char* end() const { return Buf.Data ? &Buf.back() : EmptyString; } // Buf is zero-terminated, so end() will point on the zero-terminator
+ int size() const { return Buf.Size ? Buf.Size - 1 : 0; }
+ bool empty() { return Buf.Size <= 1; }
+ void clear() { Buf.clear(); }
+ void reserve(int capacity) { Buf.reserve(capacity); }
+ const char* c_str() const { return Buf.Data ? Buf.Data : EmptyString; }
+ IMGUI_API void append(const char* str, const char* str_end = NULL);
IMGUI_API void appendf(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2);
IMGUI_API void appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
};
-// Helper: Simple Key->value storage
+// Helper: Key->Value storage
// Typically you don't have to worry about this since a storage is held within each Window.
// We use it to e.g. store collapse state for a tree (Int 0/1)
// This is optimized for efficient lookup (dichotomy into a contiguous buffer) and rare insertion (typically tied to user interactions aka max once a frame)
IMGUI_API void BuildSortByKey();
};
-// Shared state of InputText(), passed to callback when a ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* flag is used and the corresponding callback is triggered.
-struct ImGuiTextEditCallbackData
-{
- ImGuiInputTextFlags EventFlag; // One of ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* // Read-only
- ImGuiInputTextFlags Flags; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only
- void* UserData; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only
- bool ReadOnly; // Read-only mode // Read-only
-
- // CharFilter event:
- ImWchar EventChar; // Character input // Read-write (replace character or set to zero)
-
- // Completion,History,Always events:
- // If you modify the buffer contents make sure you update 'BufTextLen' and set 'BufDirty' to true.
- ImGuiKey EventKey; // Key pressed (Up/Down/TAB) // Read-only
- char* Buf; // Current text buffer // Read-write (pointed data only, can't replace the actual pointer)
- int BufTextLen; // Current text length in bytes // Read-write
- int BufSize; // Maximum text length in bytes // Read-only
- bool BufDirty; // Set if you modify Buf/BufTextLen!! // Write
- int CursorPos; // // Read-write
- int SelectionStart; // // Read-write (== to SelectionEnd when no selection)
- int SelectionEnd; // // Read-write
-
- // NB: Helper functions for text manipulation. Calling those function loses selection.
- IMGUI_API void DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count);
- IMGUI_API void InsertChars(int pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL);
- bool HasSelection() const { return SelectionStart != SelectionEnd; }
-};
-
-// Resizing callback data to apply custom constraint. As enabled by SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). Callback is called during the next Begin().
-// NB: For basic min/max size constraint on each axis you don't need to use the callback! The SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() parameters are enough.
-struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData
-{
- void* UserData; // Read-only. What user passed to SetNextWindowSizeConstraints()
- ImVec2 Pos; // Read-only. Window position, for reference.
- ImVec2 CurrentSize; // Read-only. Current window size.
- ImVec2 DesiredSize; // Read-write. Desired size, based on user's mouse position. Write to this field to restrain resizing.
-};
-
-// Data payload for Drag and Drop operations
-struct ImGuiPayload
+// Helper: Manually clip large list of items.
+// If you are submitting lots of evenly spaced items and you have a random access to the list, you can perform coarse clipping based on visibility to save yourself from processing those items at all.
+// The clipper calculates the range of visible items and advance the cursor to compensate for the non-visible items we have skipped.
+// ImGui already clip items based on their bounds but it needs to measure text size to do so. Coarse clipping before submission makes this cost and your own data fetching/submission cost null.
+// Usage:
+// ImGuiListClipper clipper(1000); // we have 1000 elements, evenly spaced.
+// while (clipper.Step())
+// for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+// ImGui::Text("line number %d", i);
+// - Step 0: the clipper let you process the first element, regardless of it being visible or not, so we can measure the element height (step skipped if we passed a known height as second arg to constructor).
+// - Step 1: the clipper infer height from first element, calculate the actual range of elements to display, and position the cursor before the first element.
+// - (Step 2: dummy step only required if an explicit items_height was passed to constructor or Begin() and user call Step(). Does nothing and switch to Step 3.)
+// - Step 3: the clipper validate that we have reached the expected Y position (corresponding to element DisplayEnd), advance the cursor to the end of the list and then returns 'false' to end the loop.
+struct ImGuiListClipper
{
- // Members
- void* Data; // Data (copied and owned by dear imgui)
- int DataSize; // Data size
+ float StartPosY;
+ float ItemsHeight;
+ int ItemsCount, StepNo, DisplayStart, DisplayEnd;
- // [Internal]
- ImGuiID SourceId; // Source item id
- ImGuiID SourceParentId; // Source parent id (if available)
- int DataFrameCount; // Data timestamp
- char DataType[32+1]; // Data type tag (short user-supplied string, 32 characters max)
- bool Preview; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse has been hovering the target item (nb: handle overlapping drag targets)
- bool Delivery; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse button is released over the target item.
+ // items_count: Use -1 to ignore (you can call Begin later). Use INT_MAX if you don't know how many items you have (in which case the cursor won't be advanced in the final step).
+ // items_height: Use -1.0f to be calculated automatically on first step. Otherwise pass in the distance between your items, typically GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() or GetFrameHeightWithSpacing().
+ // If you don't specify an items_height, you NEED to call Step(). If you specify items_height you may call the old Begin()/End() api directly, but prefer calling Step().
+ ImGuiListClipper(int items_count = -1, float items_height = -1.0f) { Begin(items_count, items_height); } // NB: Begin() initialize every fields (as we allow user to call Begin/End multiple times on a same instance if they want).
+ ~ImGuiListClipper() { IM_ASSERT(ItemsCount == -1); } // Assert if user forgot to call End() or Step() until false.
- ImGuiPayload() { Clear(); }
- void Clear() { SourceId = SourceParentId = 0; Data = NULL; DataSize = 0; memset(DataType, 0, sizeof(DataType)); DataFrameCount = -1; Preview = Delivery = false; }
- bool IsDataType(const char* type) const { return DataFrameCount != -1 && strcmp(type, DataType) == 0; }
- bool IsPreview() const { return Preview; }
- bool IsDelivery() const { return Delivery; }
+ IMGUI_API bool Step(); // Call until it returns false. The DisplayStart/DisplayEnd fields will be set and you can process/draw those items.
+ IMGUI_API void Begin(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f); // Automatically called by constructor if you passed 'items_count' or by Step() in Step 1.
+ IMGUI_API void End(); // Automatically called on the last call of Step() that returns false.
};
// Helpers macros to generate 32-bits encoded colors
static ImColor HSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f) { float r,g,b; ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, r, g, b); return ImColor(r,g,b,a); }
};
-// Helper: Manually clip large list of items.
-// If you are submitting lots of evenly spaced items and you have a random access to the list, you can perform coarse clipping based on visibility to save yourself from processing those items at all.
-// The clipper calculates the range of visible items and advance the cursor to compensate for the non-visible items we have skipped.
-// ImGui already clip items based on their bounds but it needs to measure text size to do so. Coarse clipping before submission makes this cost and your own data fetching/submission cost null.
-// Usage:
-// ImGuiListClipper clipper(1000); // we have 1000 elements, evenly spaced.
-// while (clipper.Step())
-// for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
-// ImGui::Text("line number %d", i);
-// - Step 0: the clipper let you process the first element, regardless of it being visible or not, so we can measure the element height (step skipped if we passed a known height as second arg to constructor).
-// - Step 1: the clipper infer height from first element, calculate the actual range of elements to display, and position the cursor before the first element.
-// - (Step 2: dummy step only required if an explicit items_height was passed to constructor or Begin() and user call Step(). Does nothing and switch to Step 3.)
-// - Step 3: the clipper validate that we have reached the expected Y position (corresponding to element DisplayEnd), advance the cursor to the end of the list and then returns 'false' to end the loop.
-struct ImGuiListClipper
-{
- float StartPosY;
- float ItemsHeight;
- int ItemsCount, StepNo, DisplayStart, DisplayEnd;
-
- // items_count: Use -1 to ignore (you can call Begin later). Use INT_MAX if you don't know how many items you have (in which case the cursor won't be advanced in the final step).
- // items_height: Use -1.0f to be calculated automatically on first step. Otherwise pass in the distance between your items, typically GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() or GetFrameHeightWithSpacing().
- // If you don't specify an items_height, you NEED to call Step(). If you specify items_height you may call the old Begin()/End() api directly, but prefer calling Step().
- ImGuiListClipper(int items_count = -1, float items_height = -1.0f) { Begin(items_count, items_height); } // NB: Begin() initialize every fields (as we allow user to call Begin/End multiple times on a same instance if they want).
- ~ImGuiListClipper() { IM_ASSERT(ItemsCount == -1); } // Assert if user forgot to call End() or Step() until false.
-
- IMGUI_API bool Step(); // Call until it returns false. The DisplayStart/DisplayEnd fields will be set and you can process/draw those items.
- IMGUI_API void Begin(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f); // Automatically called by constructor if you passed 'items_count' or by Step() in Step 1.
- IMGUI_API void End(); // Automatically called on the last call of Step() that returns false.
-};
-
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Draw List
+// Draw List API (ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData)
// Hold a series of drawing commands. The user provides a renderer for ImDrawData which essentially contains an array of ImDrawList.
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Draw callbacks for advanced uses.
-// NB- You most likely do NOT need to use draw callbacks just to create your own widget or customized UI rendering (you can poke into the draw list for that)
-// Draw callback may be useful for example, A) Change your GPU render state, B) render a complex 3D scene inside a UI element (without an intermediate texture/render target), etc.
-// The expected behavior from your rendering function is 'if (cmd.UserCallback != NULL) cmd.UserCallback(parent_list, cmd); else RenderTriangles()'
+// NB: You most likely do NOT need to use draw callbacks just to create your own widget or customized UI rendering,
+// you can poke into the draw list for that! Draw callback may be useful for example to: A) Change your GPU render state,
+// B) render a complex 3D scene inside a UI element without an intermediate texture/render target, etc.
+// The expected behavior from your rendering function is 'if (cmd.UserCallback != NULL) { cmd.UserCallback(parent_list, cmd); } else { RenderTriangles() }'
typedef void (*ImDrawCallback)(const ImDrawList* parent_list, const ImDrawCmd* cmd);
// Typically, 1 command = 1 GPU draw call (unless command is a callback)
ImDrawCallback UserCallback; // If != NULL, call the function instead of rendering the vertices. clip_rect and texture_id will be set normally.
void* UserCallbackData; // The draw callback code can access this.
- ImDrawCmd() { ElemCount = 0; ClipRect.x = ClipRect.y = ClipRect.z = ClipRect.w = 0.0f; TextureId = NULL; UserCallback = NULL; UserCallbackData = NULL; }
+ ImDrawCmd() { ElemCount = 0; ClipRect.x = ClipRect.y = ClipRect.z = ClipRect.w = 0.0f; TextureId = (ImTextureID)NULL; UserCallback = NULL; UserCallbackData = NULL; }
};
-// Vertex index (override with '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' inside in imconfig.h)
+// Vertex index (override with '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' in imconfig.h)
#ifndef ImDrawIdx
typedef unsigned short ImDrawIdx;
#endif
enum ImDrawListFlags_
{
- ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines = 1 << 0,
- ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill = 1 << 1
+ ImDrawListFlags_None = 0,
+ ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines = 1 << 0, // Lines are anti-aliased (*2 the number of triangles for 1.0f wide line, otherwise *3 the number of triangles)
+ ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill = 1 << 1 // Filled shapes have anti-aliased edges (*2 the number of vertices)
};
// Draw command list
IMGUI_API void AddBezierCurve(const ImVec2& pos0, const ImVec2& cp0, const ImVec2& cp1, const ImVec2& pos1, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0);
// Stateful path API, add points then finish with PathFillConvex() or PathStroke()
- inline void PathClear() { _Path.resize(0); }
+ inline void PathClear() { _Path.Size = 0; }
inline void PathLineTo(const ImVec2& pos) { _Path.push_back(pos); }
- inline void PathLineToMergeDuplicate(const ImVec2& pos) { if (_Path.Size == 0 || memcmp(&_Path[_Path.Size-1], &pos, 8) != 0) _Path.push_back(pos); }
- inline void PathFillConvex(ImU32 col) { AddConvexPolyFilled(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col); PathClear(); } // Note: Anti-aliased filling requires points to be in clockwise order.
- inline void PathStroke(ImU32 col, bool closed, float thickness = 1.0f) { AddPolyline(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col, closed, thickness); PathClear(); }
+ inline void PathLineToMergeDuplicate(const ImVec2& pos) { if (_Path.Size == 0 || memcmp(&_Path.Data[_Path.Size-1], &pos, 8) != 0) _Path.push_back(pos); }
+ inline void PathFillConvex(ImU32 col) { AddConvexPolyFilled(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col); _Path.Size = 0; } // Note: Anti-aliased filling requires points to be in clockwise order.
+ inline void PathStroke(ImU32 col, bool closed, float thickness = 1.0f) { AddPolyline(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col, closed, thickness); _Path.Size = 0; }
IMGUI_API void PathArcTo(const ImVec2& centre, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments = 10);
IMGUI_API void PathArcToFast(const ImVec2& centre, float radius, int a_min_of_12, int a_max_of_12); // Use precomputed angles for a 12 steps circle
IMGUI_API void PathBezierCurveTo(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, int num_segments = 0);
int TotalVtxCount; // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's VtxBuffer.Size
ImVec2 DisplayPos; // Upper-left position of the viewport to render (== upper-left of the orthogonal projection matrix to use)
ImVec2 DisplaySize; // Size of the viewport to render (== io.DisplaySize for the main viewport) (DisplayPos + DisplaySize == lower-right of the orthogonal projection matrix to use)
+ ImVec2 FramebufferScale; // Amount of pixels for each unit of DisplaySize. Based on io.DisplayFramebufferScale. Generally (1,1) on normal display, (2,2) on OSX with Retina display.
// Functions
ImDrawData() { Valid = false; Clear(); }
~ImDrawData() { Clear(); }
- void Clear() { Valid = false; CmdLists = NULL; CmdListsCount = TotalVtxCount = TotalIdxCount = 0; DisplayPos = DisplaySize = ImVec2(0.f, 0.f); } // The ImDrawList are owned by ImGuiContext!
- IMGUI_API void DeIndexAllBuffers(); // Helper to convert all buffers from indexed to non-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering!
- IMGUI_API void ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& sc); // Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd. Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than ImGui expects, or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution.
+ void Clear() { Valid = false; CmdLists = NULL; CmdListsCount = TotalVtxCount = TotalIdxCount = 0; DisplayPos = DisplaySize = FramebufferScale = ImVec2(0.f, 0.f); } // The ImDrawList are owned by ImGuiContext!
+ IMGUI_API void DeIndexAllBuffers(); // Helper to convert all buffers from indexed to non-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering!
+ IMGUI_API void ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& fb_scale); // Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd. Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than ImGui expects, or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution.
};
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFont)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
struct ImFontConfig
{
void* FontData; // // TTF/OTF data
bool FontDataOwnedByAtlas; // true // TTF/OTF data ownership taken by the container ImFontAtlas (will delete memory itself).
int FontNo; // 0 // Index of font within TTF/OTF file
float SizePixels; // // Size in pixels for rasterizer (more or less maps to the resulting font height).
- int OversampleH; // 3 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. We don't use sub-pixel positions on the Y axis.
+ int OversampleH; // 3 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. Read https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/tests/oversample/README.md for details.
int OversampleV; // 1 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. We don't use sub-pixel positions on the Y axis.
bool PixelSnapH; // false // Align every glyph to pixel boundary. Useful e.g. if you are merging a non-pixel aligned font with the default font. If enabled, you can set OversampleH/V to 1.
ImVec2 GlyphExtraSpacing; // 0, 0 // Extra spacing (in pixels) between glyphs. Only X axis is supported for now.
float U0, V0, U1, V1; // Texture coordinates
};
+// Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data. Feed your application strings/characters to it then call BuildRanges().
+// This is essentially a tightly packed of vector of 64k booleans = 8KB storage.
+struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder
+{
+ ImVector<int> UsedChars; // Store 1-bit per Unicode code point (0=unused, 1=used)
+
+ ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder() { UsedChars.resize(0x10000 / sizeof(int)); memset(UsedChars.Data, 0, 0x10000 / sizeof(int)); }
+ bool GetBit(int n) const { int off = (n >> 5); int mask = 1 << (n & 31); return (UsedChars[off] & mask) != 0; } // Get bit n in the array
+ void SetBit(int n) { int off = (n >> 5); int mask = 1 << (n & 31); UsedChars[off] |= mask; } // Set bit n in the array
+ void AddChar(ImWchar c) { SetBit(c); } // Add character
+ IMGUI_API void AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // Add string (each character of the UTF-8 string are added)
+ IMGUI_API void AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges); // Add ranges, e.g. builder.AddRanges(ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesDefault()) to force add all of ASCII/Latin+Ext
+ IMGUI_API void BuildRanges(ImVector<ImWchar>* out_ranges); // Output new ranges
+};
+
enum ImFontAtlasFlags_
{
+ ImFontAtlasFlags_None = 0,
ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight = 1 << 0, // Don't round the height to next power of two
ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors = 1 << 1 // Don't build software mouse cursors into the atlas
};
-// Load and rasterize multiple TTF/OTF fonts into a same texture.
-// Sharing a texture for multiple fonts allows us to reduce the number of draw calls during rendering.
-// We also add custom graphic data into the texture that serves for ImGui.
-// 1. (Optional) Call AddFont*** functions. If you don't call any, the default font will be loaded for you.
-// 2. Call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32() to build and retrieve pixels data.
-// 3. Upload the pixels data into a texture within your graphics system.
-// 4. Call SetTexID(my_tex_id); and pass the pointer/identifier to your texture. This value will be passed back to you during rendering to identify the texture.
-// IMPORTANT: If you pass a 'glyph_ranges' array to AddFont*** functions, you need to make sure that your array persist up until the ImFont is build (when calling GetTexData*** or Build()). We only copy the pointer, not the data.
+// Load and rasterize multiple TTF/OTF fonts into a same texture. The font atlas will build a single texture holding:
+// - One or more fonts.
+// - Custom graphics data needed to render the shapes needed by Dear ImGui.
+// - Mouse cursor shapes for software cursor rendering (unless setting 'Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors' in the font atlas).
+// It is the user-code responsibility to setup/build the atlas, then upload the pixel data into a texture accessible by your graphics api.
+// - Optionally, call any of the AddFont*** functions. If you don't call any, the default font embedded in the code will be loaded for you.
+// - Call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32() to build and retrieve pixels data.
+// - Upload the pixels data into a texture within your graphics system (see imgui_impl_xxxx.cpp examples)
+// - Call SetTexID(my_tex_id); and pass the pointer/identifier to your texture in a format natural to your graphics API.
+// This value will be passed back to you during rendering to identify the texture. Read FAQ entry about ImTextureID for more details.
+// Common pitfalls:
+// - If you pass a 'glyph_ranges' array to AddFont*** functions, you need to make sure that your array persist up until the
+// atlas is build (when calling GetTexData*** or Build()). We only copy the pointer, not the data.
+// - Important: By default, AddFontFromMemoryTTF() takes ownership of the data. Even though we are not writing to it, we will free the pointer on destruction.
+// You can set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed,
+// - Even though many functions are suffixed with "TTF", OTF data is supported just as well.
+// - This is an old API and it is currently awkward for those and and various other reasons! We will address them in the future!
struct ImFontAtlas
{
IMGUI_API ImFontAtlas();
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFont(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg);
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL);
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromFileTTF(const char* filename, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL);
- IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* font_data, int font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // Note: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas! Will be deleted after Build(). Set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas to false to keep ownership.
+ IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* font_data, int font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // Note: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas! Will be deleted after destruction of the atlas. Set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed.
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(const void* compressed_font_data, int compressed_font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp.
IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(const char* compressed_font_data_base85, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data_base85' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp with -base85 parameter.
IMGUI_API void ClearInputData(); // Clear input data (all ImFontConfig structures including sizes, TTF data, glyph ranges, etc.) = all the data used to build the texture and fonts.
// Build atlas, retrieve pixel data.
// User is in charge of copying the pixels into graphics memory (e.g. create a texture with your engine). Then store your texture handle with SetTexID().
- // RGBA32 format is provided for convenience and compatibility, but note that unless you use CustomRect to draw color data, the RGB pixels emitted from Fonts will all be white (~75% of waste).
- // Pitch = Width * BytesPerPixels
+ // The pitch is always = Width * BytesPerPixels (1 or 4)
+ // Building in RGBA32 format is provided for convenience and compatibility, but note that unless you manually manipulate or copy color data into
+ // the texture (e.g. when using the AddCustomRect*** api), then the RGB pixels emitted will always be white (~75% of memory/bandwidth waste.
IMGUI_API bool Build(); // Build pixels data. This is called automatically for you by the GetTexData*** functions.
- IMGUI_API bool IsBuilt() { return Fonts.Size > 0 && (TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL || TexPixelsRGBA32 != NULL); }
IMGUI_API void GetTexDataAsAlpha8(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL); // 1 byte per-pixel
IMGUI_API void GetTexDataAsRGBA32(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL); // 4 bytes-per-pixel
+ bool IsBuilt() { return Fonts.Size > 0 && (TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL || TexPixelsRGBA32 != NULL); }
void SetTexID(ImTextureID id) { TexID = id; }
//-------------------------------------------
// Helpers to retrieve list of common Unicode ranges (2 value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list)
// NB: Make sure that your string are UTF-8 and NOT in your local code page. In C++11, you can create UTF-8 string literal using the u8"Hello world" syntax. See FAQ for details.
- // NB: Consider using GlyphRangesBuilder to build glyph ranges from textual data.
+ // NB: Consider using ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to build glyph ranges from textual data.
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesDefault(); // Basic Latin, Extended Latin
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesKorean(); // Default + Korean characters
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesJapanese(); // Default + Hiragana, Katakana, Half-Width, Selection of 1946 Ideographs
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesCyrillic(); // Default + about 400 Cyrillic characters
IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesThai(); // Default + Thai characters
- // Helpers to build glyph ranges from text data. Feed your application strings/characters to it then call BuildRanges().
- struct GlyphRangesBuilder
- {
- ImVector<unsigned char> UsedChars; // Store 1-bit per Unicode code point (0=unused, 1=used)
- GlyphRangesBuilder() { UsedChars.resize(0x10000 / 8); memset(UsedChars.Data, 0, 0x10000 / 8); }
- bool GetBit(int n) const { return (UsedChars[n >> 3] & (1 << (n & 7))) != 0; }
- void SetBit(int n) { UsedChars[n >> 3] |= 1 << (n & 7); } // Set bit 'c' in the array
- void AddChar(ImWchar c) { SetBit(c); } // Add character
- IMGUI_API void AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // Add string (each character of the UTF-8 string are added)
- IMGUI_API void AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges); // Add ranges, e.g. builder.AddRanges(ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesDefault()) to force add all of ASCII/Latin+Ext
- IMGUI_API void BuildRanges(ImVector<ImWchar>* out_ranges); // Output new ranges
- };
-
//-------------------------------------------
// Custom Rectangles/Glyphs API
//-------------------------------------------
ImFontAtlasFlags Flags; // Build flags (see ImFontAtlasFlags_)
ImTextureID TexID; // User data to refer to the texture once it has been uploaded to user's graphic systems. It is passed back to you during rendering via the ImDrawCmd structure.
int TexDesiredWidth; // Texture width desired by user before Build(). Must be a power-of-two. If have many glyphs your graphics API have texture size restrictions you may want to increase texture width to decrease height.
- int TexGlyphPadding; // Padding between glyphs within texture in pixels. Defaults to 1.
+ int TexGlyphPadding; // Padding between glyphs within texture in pixels. Defaults to 1. If your rendering method doesn't rely on bilinear filtering you may set this to 0.
// [Internal]
// NB: Access texture data via GetTexData*() calls! Which will setup a default font for you.
ImVector<CustomRect> CustomRects; // Rectangles for packing custom texture data into the atlas.
ImVector<ImFontConfig> ConfigData; // Internal data
int CustomRectIds[1]; // Identifiers of custom texture rectangle used by ImFontAtlas/ImDrawList
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+ typedef ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder GlyphRangesBuilder; // OBSOLETE 1.67+
+#endif
};
// Font runtime data and rendering
// ImFontAtlas automatically loads a default embedded font for you when you call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32().
struct ImFont
{
- // Members: Hot ~62/78 bytes
- float FontSize; // <user set> // Height of characters, set during loading (don't change after loading)
- float Scale; // = 1.f // Base font scale, multiplied by the per-window font scale which you can adjust with SetFontScale()
- ImVec2 DisplayOffset; // = (0.f,0.f) // Offset font rendering by xx pixels
- ImVector<ImFontGlyph> Glyphs; // // All glyphs.
- ImVector<float> IndexAdvanceX; // // Sparse. Glyphs->AdvanceX in a directly indexable way (more cache-friendly, for CalcTextSize functions which are often bottleneck in large UI).
- ImVector<unsigned short> IndexLookup; // // Sparse. Index glyphs by Unicode code-point.
- const ImFontGlyph* FallbackGlyph; // == FindGlyph(FontFallbackChar)
- float FallbackAdvanceX; // == FallbackGlyph->AdvanceX
- ImWchar FallbackChar; // = '?' // Replacement glyph if one isn't found. Only set via SetFallbackChar()
-
- // Members: Cold ~18/26 bytes
- short ConfigDataCount; // ~ 1 // Number of ImFontConfig involved in creating this font. Bigger than 1 when merging multiple font sources into one ImFont.
- ImFontConfig* ConfigData; // // Pointer within ContainerAtlas->ConfigData
- ImFontAtlas* ContainerAtlas; // // What we has been loaded into
- float Ascent, Descent; // // Ascent: distance from top to bottom of e.g. 'A' [0..FontSize]
- bool DirtyLookupTables;
- int MetricsTotalSurface;// // Total surface in pixels to get an idea of the font rasterization/texture cost (not exact, we approximate the cost of padding between glyphs)
+ // Members: Hot ~20/24 bytes (for CalcTextSize)
+ ImVector<float> IndexAdvanceX; // 12-16 // out // // Sparse. Glyphs->AdvanceX in a directly indexable way (cache-friendly for CalcTextSize functions which only this this info, and are often bottleneck in large UI).
+ float FallbackAdvanceX; // 4 // out // = FallbackGlyph->AdvanceX
+ float FontSize; // 4 // in // // Height of characters/line, set during loading (don't change after loading)
+
+ // Members: Hot ~36/48 bytes (for CalcTextSize + render loop)
+ ImVector<ImWchar> IndexLookup; // 12-16 // out // // Sparse. Index glyphs by Unicode code-point.
+ ImVector<ImFontGlyph> Glyphs; // 12-16 // out // // All glyphs.
+ const ImFontGlyph* FallbackGlyph; // 4-8 // out // = FindGlyph(FontFallbackChar)
+ ImVec2 DisplayOffset; // 8 // in // = (0,0) // Offset font rendering by xx pixels
+
+ // Members: Cold ~32/40 bytes
+ ImFontAtlas* ContainerAtlas; // 4-8 // out // // What we has been loaded into
+ const ImFontConfig* ConfigData; // 4-8 // in // // Pointer within ContainerAtlas->ConfigData
+ short ConfigDataCount; // 2 // in // ~ 1 // Number of ImFontConfig involved in creating this font. Bigger than 1 when merging multiple font sources into one ImFont.
+ ImWchar FallbackChar; // 2 // in // = '?' // Replacement glyph if one isn't found. Only set via SetFallbackChar()
+ float Scale; // 4 // in // = 1.f // Base font scale, multiplied by the per-window font scale which you can adjust with SetWindowFontScale()
+ float Ascent, Descent; // 4+4 // out // // Ascent: distance from top to bottom of e.g. 'A' [0..FontSize]
+ int MetricsTotalSurface;// 4 // out // // Total surface in pixels to get an idea of the font rasterization/texture cost (not exact, we approximate the cost of padding between glyphs)
+ bool DirtyLookupTables; // 1 // out //
// Methods
IMGUI_API ImFont();
IMGUI_API ~ImFont();
- IMGUI_API void ClearOutputData();
- IMGUI_API void BuildLookupTable();
IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph*FindGlyph(ImWchar c) const;
IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph*FindGlyphNoFallback(ImWchar c) const;
- IMGUI_API void SetFallbackChar(ImWchar c);
float GetCharAdvance(ImWchar c) const { return ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size) ? IndexAdvanceX[(int)c] : FallbackAdvanceX; }
bool IsLoaded() const { return ContainerAtlas != NULL; }
const char* GetDebugName() const { return ConfigData ? ConfigData->Name : "<unknown>"; }
// 'wrap_width' enable automatic word-wrapping across multiple lines to fit into given width. 0.0f to disable.
IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSizeA(float size, float max_width, float wrap_width, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL, const char** remaining = NULL) const; // utf8
IMGUI_API const char* CalcWordWrapPositionA(float scale, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width) const;
- IMGUI_API void RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, unsigned short c) const;
+ IMGUI_API void RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, ImWchar c) const;
IMGUI_API void RenderText(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, const ImVec4& clip_rect, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, float wrap_width = 0.0f, bool cpu_fine_clip = false) const;
- // [Internal]
+ // [Internal] Don't use!
+ IMGUI_API void BuildLookupTable();
+ IMGUI_API void ClearOutputData();
IMGUI_API void GrowIndex(int new_size);
IMGUI_API void AddGlyph(ImWchar c, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float u0, float v0, float u1, float v1, float advance_x);
IMGUI_API void AddRemapChar(ImWchar dst, ImWchar src, bool overwrite_dst = true); // Makes 'dst' character/glyph points to 'src' character/glyph. Currently needs to be called AFTER fonts have been built.
+ IMGUI_API void SetFallbackChar(ImWchar c);
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
typedef ImFontGlyph Glyph; // OBSOLETE 1.52+
-// dear imgui, v1.63 WIP
+// dear imgui, v1.68 WIP
// (demo code)
-// Message to the person tempted to delete this file when integrating ImGui into their code base:
-// Don't do it! Do NOT remove this file from your project! It is useful reference code that you and other users will want to refer to.
+// Message to the person tempted to delete this file when integrating Dear ImGui into their code base:
+// Do NOT remove this file from your project! Think again! It is the most useful reference code that you and other coders
+// will want to refer to and call. Have the ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() function wired in an always-available debug menu of
+// your game/app! Removing this file from your project is hindering access to documentation for everyone in your team,
+// likely leading you to poorer usage of the library.
// Everything in this file will be stripped out by the linker if you don't call ImGui::ShowDemoWindow().
-// During development, you can call ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in your code to learn about various features of ImGui. Have it wired in a debug menu!
-// Removing this file from your project is hindering access to documentation for everyone in your team, likely leading you to poorer usage of the library.
-// Note that you can #define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS in imconfig.h for the same effect.
-// If you want to link core ImGui in your final builds but not those demo windows, #define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS in imconfig.h and those functions will be empty.
-// In other situation, when you have ImGui available you probably want this to be available for reference and execution.
+// If you want to link core Dear ImGui in your shipped builds but want an easy guarantee that the demo will not be linked,
+// you can setup your imconfig.h with #define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS and those functions will be empty.
+// In other situation, whenever you have Dear ImGui available you probably want this to be available for reference.
// Thank you,
// -Your beloved friend, imgui_demo.cpp (that you won't delete)
-// Message to beginner C/C++ programmers about the meaning of the 'static' keyword: in this demo code, we frequently we use 'static' variables inside functions.
-// A static variable persist across calls, so it is essentially like a global variable but declared inside the scope of the function.
-// We do this as a way to gather code and data in the same place, just to make the demo code faster to read, faster to write, and use less code.
-// It also happens to be a convenient way of storing simple UI related information as long as your function doesn't need to be reentrant or used in threads.
-// This might be a pattern you occasionally want to use in your code, but most of the real data you would be editing is likely to be stored outside your functions.
+// Message to beginner C/C++ programmers about the meaning of the 'static' keyword:
+// In this demo code, we frequently we use 'static' variables inside functions. A static variable persist across calls, so it is
+// essentially like a global variable but declared inside the scope of the function. We do this as a way to gather code and data
+// in the same place, to make the demo source code faster to read, faster to write, and smaller in size.
+// It also happens to be a convenient way of storing simple UI related information as long as your function doesn't need to be reentrant
+// or used in threads. This might be a pattern you will want to use in your code, but most of the real data you would be editing is
+// likely going to be stored outside your functions.
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+// [SECTION] Forward Declarations, Helpers
+// [SECTION] Demo Window / ShowDemoWindow()
+// [SECTION] About Window / ShowAboutWindow()
+// [SECTION] Style Editor / ShowStyleEditor()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Main Menu Bar / ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Console / ShowExampleAppConsole()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Log / ShowExampleAppLog()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Simple Layout / ShowExampleAppLayout()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Property Editor / ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Long Text / ShowExampleAppLongText()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Auto Resize / ShowExampleAppAutoResize()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Constrained Resize / ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Simple Overlay / ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Manipulating Window Titles / ShowExampleAppWindowTitles()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Custom Rendering using ImDrawList API / ShowExampleAppCustomRendering()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Documents Handling / ShowExampleAppDocuments()
+
+*/
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
-#define snprintf _snprintf
#endif
#ifdef __clang__
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning : use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-void-pointer-cast" // warning : cast to 'void *' from smaller integer type 'int'
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-security" // warning : warning: format string is not a string literal
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wexit-time-destructors" // warning : declaration requires an exit-time destructor // exit-time destruction order is undefined. if MemFree() leads to users code that has been disabled before exit it might cause problems. ImGui coding style welcomes static/globals.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-macros" // warning : warning: macro is not used // we define snprintf/vsnprintf on Windows so they are available, but not always used.
+#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning : zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#endif
+#if __has_warning("-Wdouble-promotion")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
+#endif
#if __has_warning("-Wreserved-id-macro")
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-id-macro" // warning : macro name is a reserved identifier //
#endif
// Play it nice with Windows users. Notepad in 2017 still doesn't display text data with Unix-style \n.
#ifdef _WIN32
-#define IM_NEWLINE "\r\n"
+#define IM_NEWLINE "\r\n"
+#define snprintf _snprintf
+#define vsnprintf _vsnprintf
#else
-#define IM_NEWLINE "\n"
+#define IM_NEWLINE "\n"
#endif
#define IM_MAX(_A,_B) (((_A) >= (_B)) ? (_A) : (_B))
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// DEMO CODE
+// [SECTION] Forward Declarations, Helpers
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
#if !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_TEST_WINDOWS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS) // Obsolete name since 1.53, TEST->DEMO
#if !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS)
// Forward Declarations
+static void ShowExampleAppDocuments(bool* p_open);
static void ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar();
static void ShowExampleAppConsole(bool* p_open);
static void ShowExampleAppLog(bool* p_open);
ImGui::Unindent();
}
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Demo Window / ShowDemoWindow()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// We split the contents of the big ShowDemoWindow() function into smaller functions (because the link time of very large functions grow non-linearly)
+static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets();
+static void ShowDemoWindowLayout();
+static void ShowDemoWindowPopups();
+static void ShowDemoWindowColumns();
+static void ShowDemoWindowMisc();
+
// Demonstrate most Dear ImGui features (this is big function!)
// You may execute this function to experiment with the UI and understand what it does. You may then search for keywords in the code when you are interested by a specific feature.
void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open)
{
// Examples Apps (accessible from the "Examples" menu)
+ static bool show_app_documents = false;
static bool show_app_main_menu_bar = false;
static bool show_app_console = false;
static bool show_app_log = false;
static bool show_app_window_titles = false;
static bool show_app_custom_rendering = false;
+ if (show_app_documents) ShowExampleAppDocuments(&show_app_documents); // Process the Document app next, as it may also use a DockSpace()
if (show_app_main_menu_bar) ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar();
if (show_app_console) ShowExampleAppConsole(&show_app_console);
if (show_app_log) ShowExampleAppLog(&show_app_log);
if (show_app_metrics) { ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(&show_app_metrics); }
if (show_app_style_editor) { ImGui::Begin("Style Editor", &show_app_style_editor); ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(); ImGui::End(); }
- if (show_app_about)
- {
- ImGui::Begin("About Dear ImGui", &show_app_about, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize);
- ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui, %s", ImGui::GetVersion());
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::Text("By Omar Cornut and all dear imgui contributors.");
- ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui is licensed under the MIT License, see LICENSE for more information.");
- ImGui::End();
- }
+ if (show_app_about) { ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(&show_app_about); }
// Demonstrate the various window flags. Typically you would just use the default!
static bool no_titlebar = false;
static bool no_collapse = false;
static bool no_close = false;
static bool no_nav = false;
+ static bool no_background = false;
+ static bool no_bring_to_front = false;
ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = 0;
- if (no_titlebar) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar;
- if (no_scrollbar) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar;
- if (!no_menu) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
- if (no_move) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;
- if (no_resize) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize;
- if (no_collapse) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse;
- if (no_nav) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav;
- if (no_close) p_open = NULL; // Don't pass our bool* to Begin
+ if (no_titlebar) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar;
+ if (no_scrollbar) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar;
+ if (!no_menu) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
+ if (no_move) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;
+ if (no_resize) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize;
+ if (no_collapse) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse;
+ if (no_nav) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav;
+ if (no_background) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground;
+ if (no_bring_to_front) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus;
+ if (no_close) p_open = NULL; // Don't pass our bool* to Begin
// We specify a default position/size in case there's no data in the .ini file. Typically this isn't required! We only do it to make the Demo applications a little more welcoming.
ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(650, 20), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
ImGui::MenuItem("Simple overlay", NULL, &show_app_simple_overlay);
ImGui::MenuItem("Manipulating window titles", NULL, &show_app_window_titles);
ImGui::MenuItem("Custom rendering", NULL, &show_app_custom_rendering);
+ ImGui::MenuItem("Documents", NULL, &show_app_documents);
ImGui::EndMenu();
}
if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Help"))
ImGui::Spacing();
if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Help"))
{
- ImGui::TextWrapped("This window is being created by the ShowDemoWindow() function. Please refer to the code in imgui_demo.cpp for reference.\n\n");
+ ImGui::Text("PROGRAMMER GUIDE:");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Please see the ShowDemoWindow() code in imgui_demo.cpp. <- you are here!");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Please see the comments in imgui.cpp.");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Please see the examples/ in application.");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Enable 'io.ConfigFlags |= NavEnableKeyboard' for keyboard controls.");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Enable 'io.ConfigFlags |= NavEnableGamepad' for gamepad controls.");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+
ImGui::Text("USER GUIDE:");
ImGui::ShowUserGuide();
}
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Window options"))
+ if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Configuration"))
{
- ImGui::Checkbox("No titlebar", &no_titlebar); ImGui::SameLine(150);
- ImGui::Checkbox("No scrollbar", &no_scrollbar); ImGui::SameLine(300);
- ImGui::Checkbox("No menu", &no_menu);
- ImGui::Checkbox("No move", &no_move); ImGui::SameLine(150);
- ImGui::Checkbox("No resize", &no_resize); ImGui::SameLine(300);
- ImGui::Checkbox("No collapse", &no_collapse);
- ImGui::Checkbox("No close", &no_close); ImGui::SameLine(150);
- ImGui::Checkbox("No nav", &no_nav);
+ ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Configuration##2"))
+ {
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableKeyboard", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard);
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableGamepad", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Required back-end to feed in gamepad inputs in io.NavInputs[] and set io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad.\n\nRead instructions in imgui.cpp for details.");
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableSetMousePos", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. See comment for ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos.");
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NoMouse", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse);
+ if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse) // Create a way to restore this flag otherwise we could be stuck completely!
+ {
+ if (fmodf((float)ImGui::GetTime(), 0.40f) < 0.20f)
+ {
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("<<PRESS SPACE TO DISABLE>>");
+ }
+ if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGui::GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey_Space)))
+ io.ConfigFlags &= ~ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse;
+ }
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NoMouseCursorChange", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Instruct back-end to not alter mouse cursor shape and visibility.");
+ ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink", &io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Set to false to disable blinking cursor, for users who consider it distracting");
+ ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges", &io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner.\nThis requires (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback.");
+ ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly", &io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("io.MouseDrawCursor", &io.MouseDrawCursor);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Instruct Dear ImGui to render a mouse cursor for you. Note that a mouse cursor rendered via your application GPU rendering path will feel more laggy than hardware cursor, but will be more in sync with your other visuals.\n\nSome desktop applications may use both kinds of cursors (e.g. enable software cursor only when resizing/dragging something).");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ }
+
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Backend Flags"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("Those flags are set by the back-ends (imgui_impl_xxx files) to specify their capabilities.");
+ ImGuiBackendFlags backend_flags = io.BackendFlags; // Make a local copy to avoid modifying the back-end flags.
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasGamepad", (unsigned int *)&backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad);
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasMouseCursors", (unsigned int *)&backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors);
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasSetMousePos", (unsigned int *)&backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos);
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ }
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Style"))
{
ImGui::ShowStyleEditor();
ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Separator();
}
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Capture/Logging"))
{
- ImGui::TextWrapped("The logging API redirects all text output so you can easily capture the content of a window or a block. Tree nodes can be automatically expanded. You can also call ImGui::LogText() to output directly to the log without a visual output.");
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("The logging API redirects all text output so you can easily capture the content of a window or a block. Tree nodes can be automatically expanded.");
+ ShowHelpMarker("Try opening any of the contents below in this window and then click one of the \"Log To\" button.");
ImGui::LogButtons();
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("You can also call ImGui::LogText() to output directly to the log without a visual output.");
+ if (ImGui::Button("Copy \"Hello, world!\" to clipboard"))
+ {
+ ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+ ImGui::LogText("Hello, world!");
+ ImGui::LogFinish();
+ }
ImGui::TreePop();
}
}
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Widgets"))
+ if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Window options"))
{
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
- {
- static int clicked = 0;
- if (ImGui::Button("Button"))
- clicked++;
- if (clicked & 1)
- {
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Thanks for clicking me!");
- }
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No titlebar", &no_titlebar); ImGui::SameLine(150);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No scrollbar", &no_scrollbar); ImGui::SameLine(300);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No menu", &no_menu);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No move", &no_move); ImGui::SameLine(150);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No resize", &no_resize); ImGui::SameLine(300);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No collapse", &no_collapse);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No close", &no_close); ImGui::SameLine(150);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No nav", &no_nav); ImGui::SameLine(300);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No background", &no_background);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("No bring to front", &no_bring_to_front);
+ }
- static bool check = true;
- ImGui::Checkbox("checkbox", &check);
+ // All demo contents
+ ShowDemoWindowWidgets();
+ ShowDemoWindowLayout();
+ ShowDemoWindowPopups();
+ ShowDemoWindowColumns();
+ ShowDemoWindowMisc();
- static int e = 0;
- ImGui::RadioButton("radio a", &e, 0); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("radio b", &e, 1); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("radio c", &e, 2);
+ // End of ShowDemoWindow()
+ ImGui::End();
+}
- // Color buttons, demonstrate using PushID() to add unique identifier in the ID stack, and changing style.
- for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++)
- {
- if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PushID(i);
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.6f, 0.6f));
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.7f, 0.7f));
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f));
- ImGui::Button("Click");
- ImGui::PopStyleColor(3);
- ImGui::PopID();
- }
+static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
+{
+ if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Widgets"))
+ return;
- // Arrow buttons
- static int counter = 0;
- float spacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x;
- ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(true);
- if (ImGui::ArrowButton("##left", ImGuiDir_Left)) { counter--; }
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
- if (ImGui::ArrowButton("##right", ImGuiDir_Right)) { counter++; }
- ImGui::PopButtonRepeat();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+ {
+ static int clicked = 0;
+ if (ImGui::Button("Button"))
+ clicked++;
+ if (clicked & 1)
+ {
ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("%d", counter);
+ ImGui::Text("Thanks for clicking me!");
+ }
- ImGui::Text("Hover over me");
- if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip");
+ static bool check = true;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("checkbox", &check);
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("- or me");
- if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- {
- ImGui::BeginTooltip();
- ImGui::Text("I am a fancy tooltip");
- static float arr[] = { 0.6f, 0.1f, 1.0f, 0.5f, 0.92f, 0.1f, 0.2f };
- ImGui::PlotLines("Curve", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr));
- ImGui::EndTooltip();
- }
+ static int e = 0;
+ ImGui::RadioButton("radio a", &e, 0); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::RadioButton("radio b", &e, 1); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::RadioButton("radio c", &e, 2);
- ImGui::Separator();
+ // Color buttons, demonstrate using PushID() to add unique identifier in the ID stack, and changing style.
+ for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++)
+ {
+ if (i > 0)
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushID(i);
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.6f, 0.6f));
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.7f, 0.7f));
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f));
+ ImGui::Button("Click");
+ ImGui::PopStyleColor(3);
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ }
- ImGui::LabelText("label", "Value");
+ // Use AlignTextToFramePadding() to align text baseline to the baseline of framed elements (otherwise a Text+SameLine+Button sequence will have the text a little too high by default)
+ ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+ ImGui::Text("Hold to repeat:");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
- {
- // Using the _simplified_ one-liner Combo() api here
- // See "Combo" section for examples of how to use the more complete BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api.
- const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIII", "JJJJ", "KKKK", "LLLLLLL", "MMMM", "OOOOOOO" };
- static int item_current = 0;
- ImGui::Combo("combo", &item_current, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Refer to the \"Combo\" section below for an explanation of the full BeginCombo/EndCombo API, and demonstration of various flags.\n");
- }
+ // Arrow buttons with Repeater
+ static int counter = 0;
+ float spacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+ ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(true);
+ if (ImGui::ArrowButton("##left", ImGuiDir_Left)) { counter--; }
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
+ if (ImGui::ArrowButton("##right", ImGuiDir_Right)) { counter++; }
+ ImGui::PopButtonRepeat();
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("%d", counter);
- {
- static char str0[128] = "Hello, world!";
- static int i0 = 123;
- ImGui::InputText("input text", str0, IM_ARRAYSIZE(str0));
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Hold SHIFT or use mouse to select text.\n" "CTRL+Left/Right to word jump.\n" "CTRL+A or double-click to select all.\n" "CTRL+X,CTRL+C,CTRL+V clipboard.\n" "CTRL+Z,CTRL+Y undo/redo.\n" "ESCAPE to revert.\n");
+ ImGui::Text("Hover over me");
+ if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+ ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip");
- ImGui::InputInt("input int", &i0);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("You can apply arithmetic operators +,*,/ on numerical values.\n e.g. [ 100 ], input \'*2\', result becomes [ 200 ]\nUse +- to subtract.\n");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("- or me");
+ if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+ {
+ ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+ ImGui::Text("I am a fancy tooltip");
+ static float arr[] = { 0.6f, 0.1f, 1.0f, 0.5f, 0.92f, 0.1f, 0.2f };
+ ImGui::PlotLines("Curve", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr));
+ ImGui::EndTooltip();
+ }
- static float f0 = 0.001f;
- ImGui::InputFloat("input float", &f0, 0.01f, 1.0f);
+ ImGui::Separator();
- static double d0 = 999999.00000001;
- ImGui::InputDouble("input double", &d0, 0.01f, 1.0f, "%.8f");
+ ImGui::LabelText("label", "Value");
- static float f1 = 1.e10f;
- ImGui::InputFloat("input scientific", &f1, 0.0f, 0.0f, "%e");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("You can input value using the scientific notation,\n e.g. \"1e+8\" becomes \"100000000\".\n");
+ {
+ // Using the _simplified_ one-liner Combo() api here
+ // See "Combo" section for examples of how to use the more complete BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api.
+ const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIII", "JJJJ", "KKKK", "LLLLLLL", "MMMM", "OOOOOOO" };
+ static int item_current = 0;
+ ImGui::Combo("combo", &item_current, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Refer to the \"Combo\" section below for an explanation of the full BeginCombo/EndCombo API, and demonstration of various flags.\n");
+ }
- static float vec4a[4] = { 0.10f, 0.20f, 0.30f, 0.44f };
- ImGui::InputFloat3("input float3", vec4a);
- }
+ {
+ static char str0[128] = "Hello, world!";
+ static int i0 = 123;
+ ImGui::InputText("input text", str0, IM_ARRAYSIZE(str0));
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("USER:\nHold SHIFT or use mouse to select text.\n" "CTRL+Left/Right to word jump.\n" "CTRL+A or double-click to select all.\n" "CTRL+X,CTRL+C,CTRL+V clipboard.\n" "CTRL+Z,CTRL+Y undo/redo.\n" "ESCAPE to revert.\n\nPROGRAMMER:\nYou can use the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize facility if you need to wire InputText() to a dynamic string type. See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example (this is not demonstrated in imgui_demo.cpp).");
- {
- static int i1 = 50, i2 = 42;
- ImGui::DragInt("drag int", &i1, 1);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Click and drag to edit value.\nHold SHIFT/ALT for faster/slower edit.\nDouble-click or CTRL+click to input value.");
+ ImGui::InputInt("input int", &i0);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("You can apply arithmetic operators +,*,/ on numerical values.\n e.g. [ 100 ], input \'*2\', result becomes [ 200 ]\nUse +- to subtract.\n");
- ImGui::DragInt("drag int 0..100", &i2, 1, 0, 100, "%d%%");
+ static float f0 = 0.001f;
+ ImGui::InputFloat("input float", &f0, 0.01f, 1.0f, "%.3f");
- static float f1=1.00f, f2=0.0067f;
- ImGui::DragFloat("drag float", &f1, 0.005f);
- ImGui::DragFloat("drag small float", &f2, 0.0001f, 0.0f, 0.0f, "%.06f ns");
- }
+ static double d0 = 999999.00000001;
+ ImGui::InputDouble("input double", &d0, 0.01f, 1.0f, "%.8f");
- {
- static int i1=0;
- ImGui::SliderInt("slider int", &i1, -1, 3);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("CTRL+click to input value.");
-
- static float f1=0.123f, f2=0.0f;
- ImGui::SliderFloat("slider float", &f1, 0.0f, 1.0f, "ratio = %.3f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("slider float (curve)", &f2, -10.0f, 10.0f, "%.4f", 2.0f);
- static float angle = 0.0f;
- ImGui::SliderAngle("slider angle", &angle);
- }
+ static float f1 = 1.e10f;
+ ImGui::InputFloat("input scientific", &f1, 0.0f, 0.0f, "%e");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("You can input value using the scientific notation,\n e.g. \"1e+8\" becomes \"100000000\".\n");
- {
- static float col1[3] = { 1.0f,0.0f,0.2f };
- static float col2[4] = { 0.4f,0.7f,0.0f,0.5f };
- ImGui::ColorEdit3("color 1", col1);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Click on the colored square to open a color picker.\nClick and hold to use drag and drop.\nRight-click on the colored square to show options.\nCTRL+click on individual component to input value.\n");
+ static float vec4a[4] = { 0.10f, 0.20f, 0.30f, 0.44f };
+ ImGui::InputFloat3("input float3", vec4a);
+ }
- ImGui::ColorEdit4("color 2", col2);
- }
+ {
+ static int i1 = 50, i2 = 42;
+ ImGui::DragInt("drag int", &i1, 1);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Click and drag to edit value.\nHold SHIFT/ALT for faster/slower edit.\nDouble-click or CTRL+click to input value.");
- {
- // List box
- const char* listbox_items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi", "Mango", "Orange", "Pineapple", "Strawberry", "Watermelon" };
- static int listbox_item_current = 1;
- ImGui::ListBox("listbox\n(single select)", &listbox_item_current, listbox_items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(listbox_items), 4);
-
- //static int listbox_item_current2 = 2;
- //ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1);
- //ImGui::ListBox("##listbox2", &listbox_item_current2, listbox_items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(listbox_items), 4);
- //ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- }
+ ImGui::DragInt("drag int 0..100", &i2, 1, 0, 100, "%d%%");
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ static float f1=1.00f, f2=0.0067f;
+ ImGui::DragFloat("drag float", &f1, 0.005f);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("drag small float", &f2, 0.0001f, 0.0f, 0.0f, "%.06f ns");
}
- // Testing ImGuiOnceUponAFrame helper.
- //static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame once;
- //for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
- // if (once)
- // ImGui::Text("This will be displayed only once.");
+ {
+ static int i1=0;
+ ImGui::SliderInt("slider int", &i1, -1, 3);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("CTRL+click to input value.");
+
+ static float f1=0.123f, f2=0.0f;
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("slider float", &f1, 0.0f, 1.0f, "ratio = %.3f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("slider float (curve)", &f2, -10.0f, 10.0f, "%.4f", 2.0f);
+ static float angle = 0.0f;
+ ImGui::SliderAngle("slider angle", &angle);
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Trees"))
{
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic trees"))
- {
- for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
- if (ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)i, "Child %d", i))
- {
- ImGui::Text("blah blah");
- ImGui::SameLine();
- if (ImGui::SmallButton("button")) { };
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ static float col1[3] = { 1.0f,0.0f,0.2f };
+ static float col2[4] = { 0.4f,0.7f,0.0f,0.5f };
+ ImGui::ColorEdit3("color 1", col1);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Click on the colored square to open a color picker.\nClick and hold to use drag and drop.\nRight-click on the colored square to show options.\nCTRL+click on individual component to input value.\n");
+
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("color 2", col2);
+ }
+
+ {
+ // List box
+ const char* listbox_items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi", "Mango", "Orange", "Pineapple", "Strawberry", "Watermelon" };
+ static int listbox_item_current = 1;
+ ImGui::ListBox("listbox\n(single select)", &listbox_item_current, listbox_items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(listbox_items), 4);
+
+ //static int listbox_item_current2 = 2;
+ //ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1);
+ //ImGui::ListBox("##listbox2", &listbox_item_current2, listbox_items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(listbox_items), 4);
+ //ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ }
+
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+
+ // Testing ImGuiOnceUponAFrame helper.
+ //static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame once;
+ //for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+ // if (once)
+ // ImGui::Text("This will be displayed only once.");
+
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Trees"))
+ {
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic trees"))
+ {
+ for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)i, "Child %d", i))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("blah blah");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::SmallButton("button")) { };
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced, with Selectable nodes"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced, with Selectable nodes"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("This is a more standard looking tree with selectable nodes.\nClick to select, CTRL+Click to toggle, click on arrows or double-click to open.");
+ static bool align_label_with_current_x_position = false;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Align label with current X position)", &align_label_with_current_x_position);
+ ImGui::Text("Hello!");
+ if (align_label_with_current_x_position)
+ ImGui::Unindent(ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
+
+ static int selection_mask = (1 << 2); // Dumb representation of what may be user-side selection state. You may carry selection state inside or outside your objects in whatever format you see fit.
+ int node_clicked = -1; // Temporary storage of what node we have clicked to process selection at the end of the loop. May be a pointer to your own node type, etc.
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing, ImGui::GetFontSize()*3); // Increase spacing to differentiate leaves from expanded contents.
+ for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++)
{
- ShowHelpMarker("This is a more standard looking tree with selectable nodes.\nClick to select, CTRL+Click to toggle, click on arrows or double-click to open.");
- static bool align_label_with_current_x_position = false;
- ImGui::Checkbox("Align label with current X position)", &align_label_with_current_x_position);
- ImGui::Text("Hello!");
- if (align_label_with_current_x_position)
- ImGui::Unindent(ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
-
- static int selection_mask = (1 << 2); // Dumb representation of what may be user-side selection state. You may carry selection state inside or outside your objects in whatever format you see fit.
- int node_clicked = -1; // Temporary storage of what node we have clicked to process selection at the end of the loop. May be a pointer to your own node type, etc.
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing, ImGui::GetFontSize()*3); // Increase spacing to differentiate leaves from expanded contents.
- for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+ // Disable the default open on single-click behavior and pass in Selected flag according to our selection state.
+ ImGuiTreeNodeFlags node_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick | ((selection_mask & (1 << i)) ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected : 0);
+ if (i < 3)
{
- // Disable the default open on single-click behavior and pass in Selected flag according to our selection state.
- ImGuiTreeNodeFlags node_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick | ((selection_mask & (1 << i)) ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected : 0);
- if (i < 3)
- {
- // Node
- bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)i, node_flags, "Selectable Node %d", i);
- if (ImGui::IsItemClicked())
- node_clicked = i;
- if (node_open)
- {
- ImGui::Text("Blah blah\nBlah Blah");
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
- }
- else
+ // Node
+ bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)i, node_flags, "Selectable Node %d", i);
+ if (ImGui::IsItemClicked())
+ node_clicked = i;
+ if (node_open)
{
- // Leaf: The only reason we have a TreeNode at all is to allow selection of the leaf. Otherwise we can use BulletText() or TreeAdvanceToLabelPos()+Text().
- node_flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen; // ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet
- ImGui::TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)i, node_flags, "Selectable Leaf %d", i);
- if (ImGui::IsItemClicked())
- node_clicked = i;
+ ImGui::Text("Blah blah\nBlah Blah");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
}
- if (node_clicked != -1)
+ else
{
- // Update selection state. Process outside of tree loop to avoid visual inconsistencies during the clicking-frame.
- if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl)
- selection_mask ^= (1 << node_clicked); // CTRL+click to toggle
- else //if (!(selection_mask & (1 << node_clicked))) // Depending on selection behavior you want, this commented bit preserve selection when clicking on item that is part of the selection
- selection_mask = (1 << node_clicked); // Click to single-select
+ // Leaf: The only reason we have a TreeNode at all is to allow selection of the leaf. Otherwise we can use BulletText() or TreeAdvanceToLabelPos()+Text().
+ node_flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen; // ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet
+ ImGui::TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)i, node_flags, "Selectable Leaf %d", i);
+ if (ImGui::IsItemClicked())
+ node_clicked = i;
}
- ImGui::PopStyleVar();
- if (align_label_with_current_x_position)
- ImGui::Indent(ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ if (node_clicked != -1)
+ {
+ // Update selection state. Process outside of tree loop to avoid visual inconsistencies during the clicking-frame.
+ if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl)
+ selection_mask ^= (1 << node_clicked); // CTRL+click to toggle
+ else //if (!(selection_mask & (1 << node_clicked))) // Depending on selection behavior you want, this commented bit preserve selection when clicking on item that is part of the selection
+ selection_mask = (1 << node_clicked); // Click to single-select
+ }
+ ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+ if (align_label_with_current_x_position)
+ ImGui::Indent(ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Collapsing Headers"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Collapsing Headers"))
+ {
+ static bool closable_group = true;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Enable extra group", &closable_group);
+ if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header"))
{
- static bool closable_group = true;
- ImGui::Checkbox("Enable extra group", &closable_group);
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header"))
- {
- ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", IsItemHovered());
- for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
- ImGui::Text("Some content %d", i);
- }
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header with a close button", &closable_group))
- {
- ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", IsItemHovered());
- for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
- ImGui::Text("More content %d", i);
- }
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", ImGui::IsItemHovered());
+ for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+ ImGui::Text("Some content %d", i);
+ }
+ if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header with a close button", &closable_group))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", ImGui::IsItemHovered());
+ for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+ ImGui::Text("More content %d", i);
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Bullets"))
+ {
+ ImGui::BulletText("Bullet point 1");
+ ImGui::BulletText("Bullet point 2\nOn multiple lines");
+ ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::Text("Bullet point 3 (two calls)");
+ ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::SmallButton("Button");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Bullets"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text"))
+ {
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Colored Text"))
{
- ImGui::BulletText("Bullet point 1");
- ImGui::BulletText("Bullet point 2\nOn multiple lines");
- ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::Text("Bullet point 3 (two calls)");
- ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::SmallButton("Button");
+ // Using shortcut. You can use PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor() for more flexibility.
+ ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f,0.0f,1.0f,1.0f), "Pink");
+ ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f,1.0f,0.0f,1.0f), "Yellow");
+ ImGui::TextDisabled("Disabled");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("The TextDisabled color is stored in ImGuiStyle.");
ImGui::TreePop();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Word Wrapping"))
{
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Colored Text"))
- {
- // Using shortcut. You can use PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor() for more flexibility.
- ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f,0.0f,1.0f,1.0f), "Pink");
- ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f,1.0f,0.0f,1.0f), "Yellow");
- ImGui::TextDisabled("Disabled");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("The TextDisabled color is stored in ImGuiStyle.");
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ // Using shortcut. You can use PushTextWrapPos()/PopTextWrapPos() for more flexibility.
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("This text should automatically wrap on the edge of the window. The current implementation for text wrapping follows simple rules suitable for English and possibly other languages.");
+ ImGui::Spacing();
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Word Wrapping"))
- {
- // Using shortcut. You can use PushTextWrapPos()/PopTextWrapPos() for more flexibility.
- ImGui::TextWrapped("This text should automatically wrap on the edge of the window. The current implementation for text wrapping follows simple rules suitable for English and possibly other languages.");
- ImGui::Spacing();
-
- static float wrap_width = 200.0f;
- ImGui::SliderFloat("Wrap width", &wrap_width, -20, 600, "%.0f");
-
- ImGui::Text("Test paragraph 1:");
- ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
- ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width, pos.y), ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width + 10, pos.y + ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()), IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
- ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetCursorPos().x + wrap_width);
- ImGui::Text("The lazy dog is a good dog. This paragraph is made to fit within %.0f pixels. Testing a 1 character word. The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.", wrap_width);
- ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRect(ImGui::GetItemRectMin(), ImGui::GetItemRectMax(), IM_COL32(255,255,0,255));
- ImGui::PopTextWrapPos();
-
- ImGui::Text("Test paragraph 2:");
- pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
- ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width, pos.y), ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width + 10, pos.y + ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()), IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
- ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetCursorPos().x + wrap_width);
- ImGui::Text("aaaaaaaa bbbbbbbb, c cccccccc,dddddddd. d eeeeeeee ffffffff. gggggggg!hhhhhhhh");
- ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRect(ImGui::GetItemRectMin(), ImGui::GetItemRectMax(), IM_COL32(255,255,0,255));
- ImGui::PopTextWrapPos();
+ static float wrap_width = 200.0f;
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("Wrap width", &wrap_width, -20, 600, "%.0f");
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::Text("Test paragraph 1:");
+ ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+ ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width, pos.y), ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width + 10, pos.y + ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()), IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
+ ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetCursorPos().x + wrap_width);
+ ImGui::Text("The lazy dog is a good dog. This paragraph is made to fit within %.0f pixels. Testing a 1 character word. The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.", wrap_width);
+ ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRect(ImGui::GetItemRectMin(), ImGui::GetItemRectMax(), IM_COL32(255,255,0,255));
+ ImGui::PopTextWrapPos();
+
+ ImGui::Text("Test paragraph 2:");
+ pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+ ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width, pos.y), ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width + 10, pos.y + ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()), IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
+ ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetCursorPos().x + wrap_width);
+ ImGui::Text("aaaaaaaa bbbbbbbb, c cccccccc,dddddddd. d eeeeeeee ffffffff. gggggggg!hhhhhhhh");
+ ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRect(ImGui::GetItemRectMin(), ImGui::GetItemRectMax(), IM_COL32(255,255,0,255));
+ ImGui::PopTextWrapPos();
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("UTF-8 Text"))
- {
- // UTF-8 test with Japanese characters
- // (Needs a suitable font, try Noto, or Arial Unicode, or M+ fonts. Read misc/fonts/README.txt for details.)
- // - From C++11 you can use the u8"my text" syntax to encode literal strings as UTF-8
- // - For earlier compiler, you may be able to encode your sources as UTF-8 (e.g. Visual Studio save your file as 'UTF-8 without signature')
- // - FOR THIS DEMO FILE ONLY, BECAUSE WE WANT TO SUPPORT OLD COMPILERS, WE ARE *NOT* INCLUDING RAW UTF-8 CHARACTERS IN THIS SOURCE FILE.
- // Instead we are encoding a few strings with hexadecimal constants. Don't do this in your application!
- // Please use u8"text in any language" in your application!
- // Note that characters values are preserved even by InputText() if the font cannot be displayed, so you can safely copy & paste garbled characters into another application.
- ImGui::TextWrapped("CJK text will only appears if the font was loaded with the appropriate CJK character ranges. Call io.Font->LoadFromFileTTF() manually to load extra character ranges. Read misc/fonts/README.txt for details.");
- ImGui::Text("Hiragana: \xe3\x81\x8b\xe3\x81\x8d\xe3\x81\x8f\xe3\x81\x91\xe3\x81\x93 (kakikukeko)"); // Normally we would use u8"blah blah" with the proper characters directly in the string.
- ImGui::Text("Kanjis: \xe6\x97\xa5\xe6\x9c\xac\xe8\xaa\x9e (nihongo)");
- static char buf[32] = "\xe6\x97\xa5\xe6\x9c\xac\xe8\xaa\x9e";
- //static char buf[32] = u8"NIHONGO"; // <- this is how you would write it with C++11, using real kanjis
- ImGui::InputText("UTF-8 input", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
ImGui::TreePop();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Images"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("UTF-8 Text"))
{
- ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
- ImGui::TextWrapped("Below we are displaying the font texture (which is the only texture we have access to in this demo). Use the 'ImTextureID' type as storage to pass pointers or identifier to your own texture data. Hover the texture for a zoomed view!");
-
- // Here we are grabbing the font texture because that's the only one we have access to inside the demo code.
- // Remember that ImTextureID is just storage for whatever you want it to be, it is essentially a value that will be passed to the render function inside the ImDrawCmd structure.
- // If you use one of the default imgui_impl_XXXX.cpp renderer, they all have comments at the top of their file to specify what they expect to be stored in ImTextureID.
- // (for example, the imgui_impl_dx11.cpp renderer expect a 'ID3D11ShaderResourceView*' pointer. The imgui_impl_glfw_gl3.cpp renderer expect a GLuint OpenGL texture identifier etc.)
- // If you decided that ImTextureID = MyEngineTexture*, then you can pass your MyEngineTexture* pointers to ImGui::Image(), and gather width/height through your own functions, etc.
- // Using ShowMetricsWindow() as a "debugger" to inspect the draw data that are being passed to your render will help you debug issues if you are confused about this.
- // Consider using the lower-level ImDrawList::AddImage() API, via ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddImage().
- ImTextureID my_tex_id = io.Fonts->TexID;
- float my_tex_w = (float)io.Fonts->TexWidth;
- float my_tex_h = (float)io.Fonts->TexHeight;
-
- ImGui::Text("%.0fx%.0f", my_tex_w, my_tex_h);
- ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
- ImGui::Image(my_tex_id, ImVec2(my_tex_w, my_tex_h), ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(1,1), ImColor(255,255,255,255), ImColor(255,255,255,128));
- if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- {
- ImGui::BeginTooltip();
- float region_sz = 32.0f;
- float region_x = io.MousePos.x - pos.x - region_sz * 0.5f; if (region_x < 0.0f) region_x = 0.0f; else if (region_x > my_tex_w - region_sz) region_x = my_tex_w - region_sz;
- float region_y = io.MousePos.y - pos.y - region_sz * 0.5f; if (region_y < 0.0f) region_y = 0.0f; else if (region_y > my_tex_h - region_sz) region_y = my_tex_h - region_sz;
- float zoom = 4.0f;
- ImGui::Text("Min: (%.2f, %.2f)", region_x, region_y);
- ImGui::Text("Max: (%.2f, %.2f)", region_x + region_sz, region_y + region_sz);
- ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2((region_x) / my_tex_w, (region_y) / my_tex_h);
- ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2((region_x + region_sz) / my_tex_w, (region_y + region_sz) / my_tex_h);
- ImGui::Image(my_tex_id, ImVec2(region_sz * zoom, region_sz * zoom), uv0, uv1, ImColor(255,255,255,255), ImColor(255,255,255,128));
- ImGui::EndTooltip();
- }
- ImGui::TextWrapped("And now some textured buttons..");
- static int pressed_count = 0;
- for (int i = 0; i < 8; i++)
- {
- ImGui::PushID(i);
- int frame_padding = -1 + i; // -1 = uses default padding
- if (ImGui::ImageButton(my_tex_id, ImVec2(32,32), ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(32.0f/my_tex_w,32/my_tex_h), frame_padding, ImColor(0,0,0,255)))
- pressed_count += 1;
- ImGui::PopID();
- ImGui::SameLine();
- }
- ImGui::NewLine();
- ImGui::Text("Pressed %d times.", pressed_count);
+ // UTF-8 test with Japanese characters
+ // (Needs a suitable font, try Noto, or Arial Unicode, or M+ fonts. Read misc/fonts/README.txt for details.)
+ // - From C++11 you can use the u8"my text" syntax to encode literal strings as UTF-8
+ // - For earlier compiler, you may be able to encode your sources as UTF-8 (e.g. Visual Studio save your file as 'UTF-8 without signature')
+ // - FOR THIS DEMO FILE ONLY, BECAUSE WE WANT TO SUPPORT OLD COMPILERS, WE ARE *NOT* INCLUDING RAW UTF-8 CHARACTERS IN THIS SOURCE FILE.
+ // Instead we are encoding a few strings with hexadecimal constants. Don't do this in your application!
+ // Please use u8"text in any language" in your application!
+ // Note that characters values are preserved even by InputText() if the font cannot be displayed, so you can safely copy & paste garbled characters into another application.
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("CJK text will only appears if the font was loaded with the appropriate CJK character ranges. Call io.Font->AddFontFromFileTTF() manually to load extra character ranges. Read misc/fonts/README.txt for details.");
+ ImGui::Text("Hiragana: \xe3\x81\x8b\xe3\x81\x8d\xe3\x81\x8f\xe3\x81\x91\xe3\x81\x93 (kakikukeko)"); // Normally we would use u8"blah blah" with the proper characters directly in the string.
+ ImGui::Text("Kanjis: \xe6\x97\xa5\xe6\x9c\xac\xe8\xaa\x9e (nihongo)");
+ static char buf[32] = "\xe6\x97\xa5\xe6\x9c\xac\xe8\xaa\x9e";
+ //static char buf[32] = u8"NIHONGO"; // <- this is how you would write it with C++11, using real kanjis
+ ImGui::InputText("UTF-8 input", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Combo"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Images"))
+ {
+ ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("Below we are displaying the font texture (which is the only texture we have access to in this demo). Use the 'ImTextureID' type as storage to pass pointers or identifier to your own texture data. Hover the texture for a zoomed view!");
+
+ // Here we are grabbing the font texture because that's the only one we have access to inside the demo code.
+ // Remember that ImTextureID is just storage for whatever you want it to be, it is essentially a value that will be passed to the render function inside the ImDrawCmd structure.
+ // If you use one of the default imgui_impl_XXXX.cpp renderer, they all have comments at the top of their file to specify what they expect to be stored in ImTextureID.
+ // (for example, the imgui_impl_dx11.cpp renderer expect a 'ID3D11ShaderResourceView*' pointer. The imgui_impl_glfw_gl3.cpp renderer expect a GLuint OpenGL texture identifier etc.)
+ // If you decided that ImTextureID = MyEngineTexture*, then you can pass your MyEngineTexture* pointers to ImGui::Image(), and gather width/height through your own functions, etc.
+ // Using ShowMetricsWindow() as a "debugger" to inspect the draw data that are being passed to your render will help you debug issues if you are confused about this.
+ // Consider using the lower-level ImDrawList::AddImage() API, via ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddImage().
+ ImTextureID my_tex_id = io.Fonts->TexID;
+ float my_tex_w = (float)io.Fonts->TexWidth;
+ float my_tex_h = (float)io.Fonts->TexHeight;
+
+ ImGui::Text("%.0fx%.0f", my_tex_w, my_tex_h);
+ ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+ ImGui::Image(my_tex_id, ImVec2(my_tex_w, my_tex_h), ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(1,1), ImColor(255,255,255,255), ImColor(255,255,255,128));
+ if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+ {
+ ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+ float region_sz = 32.0f;
+ float region_x = io.MousePos.x - pos.x - region_sz * 0.5f; if (region_x < 0.0f) region_x = 0.0f; else if (region_x > my_tex_w - region_sz) region_x = my_tex_w - region_sz;
+ float region_y = io.MousePos.y - pos.y - region_sz * 0.5f; if (region_y < 0.0f) region_y = 0.0f; else if (region_y > my_tex_h - region_sz) region_y = my_tex_h - region_sz;
+ float zoom = 4.0f;
+ ImGui::Text("Min: (%.2f, %.2f)", region_x, region_y);
+ ImGui::Text("Max: (%.2f, %.2f)", region_x + region_sz, region_y + region_sz);
+ ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2((region_x) / my_tex_w, (region_y) / my_tex_h);
+ ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2((region_x + region_sz) / my_tex_w, (region_y + region_sz) / my_tex_h);
+ ImGui::Image(my_tex_id, ImVec2(region_sz * zoom, region_sz * zoom), uv0, uv1, ImColor(255,255,255,255), ImColor(255,255,255,128));
+ ImGui::EndTooltip();
+ }
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("And now some textured buttons..");
+ static int pressed_count = 0;
+ for (int i = 0; i < 8; i++)
{
- // Expose flags as checkbox for the demo
- static ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0;
- ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft", (unsigned int*)&flags, ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft);
- if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton", (unsigned int*)&flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
- flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
- if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview", (unsigned int*)&flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
- flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
+ ImGui::PushID(i);
+ int frame_padding = -1 + i; // -1 = uses default padding
+ if (ImGui::ImageButton(my_tex_id, ImVec2(32,32), ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(32.0f/my_tex_w,32/my_tex_h), frame_padding, ImColor(0,0,0,255)))
+ pressed_count += 1;
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ }
+ ImGui::NewLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Pressed %d times.", pressed_count);
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- // General BeginCombo() API, you have full control over your selection data and display type.
- // (your selection data could be an index, a pointer to the object, an id for the object, a flag stored in the object itself, etc.)
- const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIII", "JJJJ", "KKKK", "LLLLLLL", "MMMM", "OOOOOOO" };
- static const char* item_current = items[0]; // Here our selection is a single pointer stored outside the object.
- if (ImGui::BeginCombo("combo 1", item_current, flags)) // The second parameter is the label previewed before opening the combo.
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Combo"))
+ {
+ // Expose flags as checkbox for the demo
+ static ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0;
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft", (unsigned int*)&flags, ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft);
+ if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton", (unsigned int*)&flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
+ flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
+ if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview", (unsigned int*)&flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
+ flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
+
+ // General BeginCombo() API, you have full control over your selection data and display type.
+ // (your selection data could be an index, a pointer to the object, an id for the object, a flag stored in the object itself, etc.)
+ const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIII", "JJJJ", "KKKK", "LLLLLLL", "MMMM", "OOOOOOO" };
+ static const char* item_current = items[0]; // Here our selection is a single pointer stored outside the object.
+ if (ImGui::BeginCombo("combo 1", item_current, flags)) // The second parameter is the label previewed before opening the combo.
+ {
+ for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(items); n++)
{
- for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(items); n++)
- {
- bool is_selected = (item_current == items[n]);
- if (ImGui::Selectable(items[n], is_selected))
- item_current = items[n];
- if (is_selected)
- ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus(); // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + for keyboard navigation support in the upcoming navigation branch)
- }
- ImGui::EndCombo();
+ bool is_selected = (item_current == items[n]);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable(items[n], is_selected))
+ item_current = items[n];
+ if (is_selected)
+ ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus(); // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + for keyboard navigation support in the upcoming navigation branch)
}
+ ImGui::EndCombo();
+ }
- // Simplified one-liner Combo() API, using values packed in a single constant string
- static int item_current_2 = 0;
- ImGui::Combo("combo 2 (one-liner)", &item_current_2, "aaaa\0bbbb\0cccc\0dddd\0eeee\0\0");
+ // Simplified one-liner Combo() API, using values packed in a single constant string
+ static int item_current_2 = 0;
+ ImGui::Combo("combo 2 (one-liner)", &item_current_2, "aaaa\0bbbb\0cccc\0dddd\0eeee\0\0");
- // Simplified one-liner Combo() using an array of const char*
- static int item_current_3 = -1; // If the selection isn't within 0..count, Combo won't display a preview
- ImGui::Combo("combo 3 (array)", &item_current_3, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+ // Simplified one-liner Combo() using an array of const char*
+ static int item_current_3 = -1; // If the selection isn't within 0..count, Combo won't display a preview
+ ImGui::Combo("combo 3 (array)", &item_current_3, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
- // Simplified one-liner Combo() using an accessor function
- struct FuncHolder { static bool ItemGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_str) { *out_str = ((const char**)data)[idx]; return true; } };
- static int item_current_4 = 0;
- ImGui::Combo("combo 4 (function)", &item_current_4, &FuncHolder::ItemGetter, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+ // Simplified one-liner Combo() using an accessor function
+ struct FuncHolder { static bool ItemGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_str) { *out_str = ((const char**)data)[idx]; return true; } };
+ static int item_current_4 = 0;
+ ImGui::Combo("combo 4 (function)", &item_current_4, &FuncHolder::ItemGetter, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selectables"))
+ {
+ // Selectable() has 2 overloads:
+ // - The one taking "bool selected" as a read-only selection information. When Selectable() has been clicked is returns true and you can alter selection state accordingly.
+ // - The one taking "bool* p_selected" as a read-write selection information (convenient in some cases)
+ // The earlier is more flexible, as in real application your selection may be stored in a different manner (in flags within objects, as an external list, etc).
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+ {
+ static bool selection[5] = { false, true, false, false, false };
+ ImGui::Selectable("1. I am selectable", &selection[0]);
+ ImGui::Selectable("2. I am selectable", &selection[1]);
+ ImGui::Text("3. I am not selectable");
+ ImGui::Selectable("4. I am selectable", &selection[3]);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable("5. I am double clickable", selection[4], ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick))
+ if (ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(0))
+ selection[4] = !selection[4];
ImGui::TreePop();
}
-
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selectables"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selection State: Single Selection"))
{
- // Selectable() has 2 overloads:
- // - The one taking "bool selected" as a read-only selection information. When Selectable() has been clicked is returns true and you can alter selection state accordingly.
- // - The one taking "bool* p_selected" as a read-write selection information (convenient in some cases)
- // The earlier is more flexible, as in real application your selection may be stored in a different manner (in flags within objects, as an external list, etc).
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
- {
- static bool selection[5] = { false, true, false, false, false };
- ImGui::Selectable("1. I am selectable", &selection[0]);
- ImGui::Selectable("2. I am selectable", &selection[1]);
- ImGui::Text("3. I am not selectable");
- ImGui::Selectable("4. I am selectable", &selection[3]);
- if (ImGui::Selectable("5. I am double clickable", selection[4], ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick))
- if (ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(0))
- selection[4] = !selection[4];
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selection State: Single Selection"))
+ static int selected = -1;
+ for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
{
- static int selected = -1;
- for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
- {
- char buf[32];
- sprintf(buf, "Object %d", n);
- if (ImGui::Selectable(buf, selected == n))
- selected = n;
- }
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ char buf[32];
+ sprintf(buf, "Object %d", n);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable(buf, selected == n))
+ selected = n;
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selection State: Multiple Selection"))
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selection State: Multiple Selection"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("Hold CTRL and click to select multiple items.");
+ static bool selection[5] = { false, false, false, false, false };
+ for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
{
- ShowHelpMarker("Hold CTRL and click to select multiple items.");
- static bool selection[5] = { false, false, false, false, false };
- for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
+ char buf[32];
+ sprintf(buf, "Object %d", n);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable(buf, selection[n]))
{
- char buf[32];
- sprintf(buf, "Object %d", n);
- if (ImGui::Selectable(buf, selection[n]))
- {
- if (!ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl) // Clear selection when CTRL is not held
- memset(selection, 0, sizeof(selection));
- selection[n] ^= 1;
- }
+ if (!ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl) // Clear selection when CTRL is not held
+ memset(selection, 0, sizeof(selection));
+ selection[n] ^= 1;
}
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Rendering more text into the same line"))
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Rendering more text into the same line"))
+ {
+ // Using the Selectable() override that takes "bool* p_selected" parameter and toggle your booleans automatically.
+ static bool selected[3] = { false, false, false };
+ ImGui::Selectable("main.c", &selected[0]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text(" 2,345 bytes");
+ ImGui::Selectable("Hello.cpp", &selected[1]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text("12,345 bytes");
+ ImGui::Selectable("Hello.h", &selected[2]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text(" 2,345 bytes");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("In columns"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Columns(3, NULL, false);
+ static bool selected[16] = { 0 };
+ for (int i = 0; i < 16; i++)
{
- // Using the Selectable() override that takes "bool* p_selected" parameter and toggle your booleans automatically.
- static bool selected[3] = { false, false, false };
- ImGui::Selectable("main.c", &selected[0]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text(" 2,345 bytes");
- ImGui::Selectable("Hello.cpp", &selected[1]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text("12,345 bytes");
- ImGui::Selectable("Hello.h", &selected[2]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text(" 2,345 bytes");
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ char label[32]; sprintf(label, "Item %d", i);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable(label, &selected[i])) {}
+ ImGui::NextColumn();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("In columns"))
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Grid"))
+ {
+ static bool selected[4*4] = { true, false, false, false, false, true, false, false, false, false, true, false, false, false, false, true };
+ for (int i = 0; i < 4*4; i++)
{
- ImGui::Columns(3, NULL, false);
- static bool selected[16] = { 0 };
- for (int i = 0; i < 16; i++)
+ ImGui::PushID(i);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable("Sailor", &selected[i], 0, ImVec2(50,50)))
{
- char label[32]; sprintf(label, "Item %d", i);
- if (ImGui::Selectable(label, &selected[i])) {}
- ImGui::NextColumn();
+ // Note: We _unnecessarily_ test for both x/y and i here only to silence some static analyzer. The second part of each test is unnecessary.
+ int x = i % 4;
+ int y = i / 4;
+ if (x > 0) { selected[i - 1] ^= 1; }
+ if (x < 3 && i < 15) { selected[i + 1] ^= 1; }
+ if (y > 0 && i > 3) { selected[i - 4] ^= 1; }
+ if (y < 3 && i < 12) { selected[i + 4] ^= 1; }
}
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ if ((i % 4) < 3) ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PopID();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Grid"))
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Alignment"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("Alignment applies when a selectable is larger than its text content.\nBy default, Selectables uses style.SelectableTextAlign but it can be overriden on a per-item basis using PushStyleVar().");
+ static bool selected[3*3] = { true, false, true, false, true, false, true, false, true };
+ for (int y = 0; y < 3; y++)
{
- static bool selected[16] = { true, false, false, false, false, true, false, false, false, false, true, false, false, false, false, true };
- for (int i = 0; i < 16; i++)
+ for (int x = 0; x < 3; x++)
{
- ImGui::PushID(i);
- if (ImGui::Selectable("Sailor", &selected[i], 0, ImVec2(50,50)))
- {
- int x = i % 4, y = i / 4;
- if (x > 0) selected[i - 1] ^= 1;
- if (x < 3) selected[i + 1] ^= 1;
- if (y > 0) selected[i - 4] ^= 1;
- if (y < 3) selected[i + 4] ^= 1;
- }
- if ((i % 4) < 3) ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PopID();
+ ImVec2 alignment = ImVec2((float)x / 2.0f, (float)y / 2.0f);
+ char name[32];
+ sprintf(name, "(%.1f,%.1f)", alignment.x, alignment.y);
+ if (x > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, alignment);
+ ImGui::Selectable(name, &selected[3*y+x], ImGuiSelectableFlags_None, ImVec2(80,80));
+ ImGui::PopStyleVar();
}
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Filtered Text Input"))
- {
- static char buf1[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("default", buf1, 64);
- static char buf2[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("decimal", buf2, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal);
- static char buf3[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("hexadecimal", buf3, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase);
- static char buf4[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("uppercase", buf4, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase);
- static char buf5[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("no blank", buf5, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank);
- struct TextFilters { static int FilterImGuiLetters(ImGuiTextEditCallbackData* data) { if (data->EventChar < 256 && strchr("imgui", (char)data->EventChar)) return 0; return 1; } };
- static char buf6[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("\"imgui\" letters", buf6, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter, TextFilters::FilterImGuiLetters);
-
- ImGui::Text("Password input");
- static char bufpass[64] = "password123";
- ImGui::InputText("password", bufpass, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Display all characters as '*'.\nDisable clipboard cut and copy.\nDisable logging.\n");
- ImGui::InputText("password (clear)", bufpass, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank);
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Filtered Text Input"))
+ {
+ static char buf1[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("default", buf1, 64);
+ static char buf2[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("decimal", buf2, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal);
+ static char buf3[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("hexadecimal", buf3, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase);
+ static char buf4[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("uppercase", buf4, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase);
+ static char buf5[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("no blank", buf5, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank);
+ struct TextFilters { static int FilterImGuiLetters(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data) { if (data->EventChar < 256 && strchr("imgui", (char)data->EventChar)) return 0; return 1; } };
+ static char buf6[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("\"imgui\" letters", buf6, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter, TextFilters::FilterImGuiLetters);
+
+ ImGui::Text("Password input");
+ static char bufpass[64] = "password123";
+ ImGui::InputText("password", bufpass, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Display all characters as '*'.\nDisable clipboard cut and copy.\nDisable logging.\n");
+ ImGui::InputText("password (clear)", bufpass, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank);
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Multi-line Text Input"))
- {
- static bool read_only = false;
- static char text[1024*16] =
- "/*\n"
- " The Pentium F00F bug, shorthand for F0 0F C7 C8,\n"
- " the hexadecimal encoding of one offending instruction,\n"
- " more formally, the invalid operand with locked CMPXCHG8B\n"
- " instruction bug, is a design flaw in the majority of\n"
- " Intel Pentium, Pentium MMX, and Pentium OverDrive\n"
- " processors (all in the P5 microarchitecture).\n"
- "*/\n\n"
- "label:\n"
- "\tlock cmpxchg8b eax\n";
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Multi-line Text Input"))
+ {
+ // Note: we are using a fixed-sized buffer for simplicity here. See ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize
+ // and the code in misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for how to setup InputText() for dynamically resizing strings.
+ static bool read_only = false;
+ static char text[1024*16] =
+ "/*\n"
+ " The Pentium F00F bug, shorthand for F0 0F C7 C8,\n"
+ " the hexadecimal encoding of one offending instruction,\n"
+ " more formally, the invalid operand with locked CMPXCHG8B\n"
+ " instruction bug, is a design flaw in the majority of\n"
+ " Intel Pentium, Pentium MMX, and Pentium OverDrive\n"
+ " processors (all in the P5 microarchitecture).\n"
+ "*/\n\n"
+ "label:\n"
+ "\tlock cmpxchg8b eax\n";
+
+ ShowHelpMarker("You can use the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize facility if you need to wire InputTextMultiline() to a dynamic string type. See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example. (This is not demonstrated in imgui_demo.cpp)");
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Read-only", &read_only);
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput | (read_only ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
+ ImGui::InputTextMultiline("##source", text, IM_ARRAYSIZE(text), ImVec2(-1.0f, ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() * 16), flags);
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0,0));
- ImGui::Checkbox("Read-only", &read_only);
- ImGui::PopStyleVar();
- ImGui::InputTextMultiline("##source", text, IM_ARRAYSIZE(text), ImVec2(-1.0f, ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() * 16), ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput | (read_only ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly : 0));
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Plots Widgets"))
+ {
+ static bool animate = true;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Animate", &animate);
+
+ static float arr[] = { 0.6f, 0.1f, 1.0f, 0.5f, 0.92f, 0.1f, 0.2f };
+ ImGui::PlotLines("Frame Times", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr));
+
+ // Create a dummy array of contiguous float values to plot
+ // Tip: If your float aren't contiguous but part of a structure, you can pass a pointer to your first float and the sizeof() of your structure in the Stride parameter.
+ static float values[90] = { 0 };
+ static int values_offset = 0;
+ static double refresh_time = 0.0;
+ if (!animate || refresh_time == 0.0)
+ refresh_time = ImGui::GetTime();
+ while (refresh_time < ImGui::GetTime()) // Create dummy data at fixed 60 hz rate for the demo
+ {
+ static float phase = 0.0f;
+ values[values_offset] = cosf(phase);
+ values_offset = (values_offset+1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(values);
+ phase += 0.10f*values_offset;
+ refresh_time += 1.0f/60.0f;
}
+ ImGui::PlotLines("Lines", values, IM_ARRAYSIZE(values), values_offset, "avg 0.0", -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0,80));
+ ImGui::PlotHistogram("Histogram", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr), 0, NULL, 0.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0,80));
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Plots Widgets"))
+ // Use functions to generate output
+ // FIXME: This is rather awkward because current plot API only pass in indices. We probably want an API passing floats and user provide sample rate/count.
+ struct Funcs
{
- static bool animate = true;
- ImGui::Checkbox("Animate", &animate);
+ static float Sin(void*, int i) { return sinf(i * 0.1f); }
+ static float Saw(void*, int i) { return (i & 1) ? 1.0f : -1.0f; }
+ };
+ static int func_type = 0, display_count = 70;
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(100); ImGui::Combo("func", &func_type, "Sin\0Saw\0"); ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SliderInt("Sample count", &display_count, 1, 400);
+ float (*func)(void*, int) = (func_type == 0) ? Funcs::Sin : Funcs::Saw;
+ ImGui::PlotLines("Lines", func, NULL, display_count, 0, NULL, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0,80));
+ ImGui::PlotHistogram("Histogram", func, NULL, display_count, 0, NULL, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0,80));
+ ImGui::Separator();
- static float arr[] = { 0.6f, 0.1f, 1.0f, 0.5f, 0.92f, 0.1f, 0.2f };
- ImGui::PlotLines("Frame Times", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr));
-
- // Create a dummy array of contiguous float values to plot
- // Tip: If your float aren't contiguous but part of a structure, you can pass a pointer to your first float and the sizeof() of your structure in the Stride parameter.
- static float values[90] = { 0 };
- static int values_offset = 0;
- static double refresh_time = 0.0;
- if (!animate || refresh_time == 0.0f)
- refresh_time = ImGui::GetTime();
- while (refresh_time < ImGui::GetTime()) // Create dummy data at fixed 60 hz rate for the demo
- {
- static float phase = 0.0f;
- values[values_offset] = cosf(phase);
- values_offset = (values_offset+1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(values);
- phase += 0.10f*values_offset;
- refresh_time += 1.0f/60.0f;
- }
- ImGui::PlotLines("Lines", values, IM_ARRAYSIZE(values), values_offset, "avg 0.0", -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0,80));
- ImGui::PlotHistogram("Histogram", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr), 0, NULL, 0.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0,80));
+ // Animate a simple progress bar
+ static float progress = 0.0f, progress_dir = 1.0f;
+ if (animate)
+ {
+ progress += progress_dir * 0.4f * ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime;
+ if (progress >= +1.1f) { progress = +1.1f; progress_dir *= -1.0f; }
+ if (progress <= -0.1f) { progress = -0.1f; progress_dir *= -1.0f; }
+ }
- // Use functions to generate output
- // FIXME: This is rather awkward because current plot API only pass in indices. We probably want an API passing floats and user provide sample rate/count.
- struct Funcs
- {
- static float Sin(void*, int i) { return sinf(i * 0.1f); }
- static float Saw(void*, int i) { return (i & 1) ? 1.0f : -1.0f; }
- };
- static int func_type = 0, display_count = 70;
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(100); ImGui::Combo("func", &func_type, "Sin\0Saw\0"); ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::SliderInt("Sample count", &display_count, 1, 400);
- float (*func)(void*, int) = (func_type == 0) ? Funcs::Sin : Funcs::Saw;
- ImGui::PlotLines("Lines", func, NULL, display_count, 0, NULL, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0,80));
- ImGui::PlotHistogram("Histogram", func, NULL, display_count, 0, NULL, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0,80));
- ImGui::Separator();
+ // Typically we would use ImVec2(-1.0f,0.0f) to use all available width, or ImVec2(width,0.0f) for a specified width. ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f) uses ItemWidth.
+ ImGui::ProgressBar(progress, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ ImGui::Text("Progress Bar");
+
+ float progress_saturated = (progress < 0.0f) ? 0.0f : (progress > 1.0f) ? 1.0f : progress;
+ char buf[32];
+ sprintf(buf, "%d/%d", (int)(progress_saturated*1753), 1753);
+ ImGui::ProgressBar(progress, ImVec2(0.f,0.f), buf);
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- // Animate a simple progress bar
- static float progress = 0.0f, progress_dir = 1.0f;
- if (animate)
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Color/Picker Widgets"))
+ {
+ static ImVec4 color = ImVec4(114.0f/255.0f, 144.0f/255.0f, 154.0f/255.0f, 200.0f/255.0f);
+
+ static bool alpha_preview = true;
+ static bool alpha_half_preview = false;
+ static bool drag_and_drop = true;
+ static bool options_menu = true;
+ static bool hdr = false;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha Preview", &alpha_preview);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With Half Alpha Preview", &alpha_half_preview);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With Drag and Drop", &drag_and_drop);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With Options Menu", &options_menu); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Right-click on the individual color widget to show options.");
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With HDR", &hdr); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Currently all this does is to lift the 0..1 limits on dragging widgets.");
+ int misc_flags = (hdr ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR : 0) | (drag_and_drop ? 0 : ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) | (alpha_half_preview ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf : (alpha_preview ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview : 0)) | (options_menu ? 0 : ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions);
+
+ ImGui::Text("Color widget:");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Click on the colored square to open a color picker.\nCTRL+click on individual component to input value.\n");
+ ImGui::ColorEdit3("MyColor##1", (float*)&color, misc_flags);
+
+ ImGui::Text("Color widget HSV with Alpha:");
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##2", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV | misc_flags);
+
+ ImGui::Text("Color widget with Float Display:");
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##2f", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | misc_flags);
+
+ ImGui::Text("Color button with Picker:");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("With the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs flag you can hide all the slider/text inputs.\nWith the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel flag you can pass a non-empty label which will only be used for the tooltip and picker popup.");
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##3", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | misc_flags);
+
+ ImGui::Text("Color button with Custom Picker Popup:");
+
+ // Generate a dummy default palette. The palette will persist and can be edited.
+ static bool saved_palette_init = true;
+ static ImVec4 saved_palette[32] = { };
+ if (saved_palette_init)
+ {
+ for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(saved_palette); n++)
{
- progress += progress_dir * 0.4f * ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime;
- if (progress >= +1.1f) { progress = +1.1f; progress_dir *= -1.0f; }
- if (progress <= -0.1f) { progress = -0.1f; progress_dir *= -1.0f; }
+ ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(n / 31.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f, saved_palette[n].x, saved_palette[n].y, saved_palette[n].z);
+ saved_palette[n].w = 1.0f; // Alpha
}
-
- // Typically we would use ImVec2(-1.0f,0.0f) to use all available width, or ImVec2(width,0.0f) for a specified width. ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f) uses ItemWidth.
- ImGui::ProgressBar(progress, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- ImGui::Text("Progress Bar");
-
- float progress_saturated = (progress < 0.0f) ? 0.0f : (progress > 1.0f) ? 1.0f : progress;
- char buf[32];
- sprintf(buf, "%d/%d", (int)(progress_saturated*1753), 1753);
- ImGui::ProgressBar(progress, ImVec2(0.f,0.f), buf);
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ saved_palette_init = false;
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Color/Picker Widgets"))
+ static ImVec4 backup_color;
+ bool open_popup = ImGui::ColorButton("MyColor##3b", color, misc_flags);
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ open_popup |= ImGui::Button("Palette");
+ if (open_popup)
{
- static ImVec4 color = ImColor(114, 144, 154, 200);
-
- static bool alpha_preview = true;
- static bool alpha_half_preview = false;
- static bool drag_and_drop = true;
- static bool options_menu = true;
- static bool hdr = false;
- ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha Preview", &alpha_preview);
- ImGui::Checkbox("With Half Alpha Preview", &alpha_half_preview);
- ImGui::Checkbox("With Drag and Drop", &drag_and_drop);
- ImGui::Checkbox("With Options Menu", &options_menu); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Right-click on the individual color widget to show options.");
- ImGui::Checkbox("With HDR", &hdr); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Currently all this does is to lift the 0..1 limits on dragging widgets.");
- int misc_flags = (hdr ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR : 0) | (drag_and_drop ? 0 : ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) | (alpha_half_preview ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf : (alpha_preview ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview : 0)) | (options_menu ? 0 : ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions);
-
- ImGui::Text("Color widget:");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Click on the colored square to open a color picker.\nCTRL+click on individual component to input value.\n");
- ImGui::ColorEdit3("MyColor##1", (float*)&color, misc_flags);
-
- ImGui::Text("Color widget HSV with Alpha:");
- ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##2", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV | misc_flags);
-
- ImGui::Text("Color widget with Float Display:");
- ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##2f", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | misc_flags);
-
- ImGui::Text("Color button with Picker:");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("With the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs flag you can hide all the slider/text inputs.\nWith the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel flag you can pass a non-empty label which will only be used for the tooltip and picker popup.");
- ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##3", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | misc_flags);
-
- ImGui::Text("Color button with Custom Picker Popup:");
-
- // Generate a dummy palette
- static bool saved_palette_inited = false;
- static ImVec4 saved_palette[32];
- if (!saved_palette_inited)
- for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(saved_palette); n++)
- {
- ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(n / 31.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f, saved_palette[n].x, saved_palette[n].y, saved_palette[n].z);
- saved_palette[n].w = 1.0f; // Alpha
- }
- saved_palette_inited = true;
-
- static ImVec4 backup_color;
- bool open_popup = ImGui::ColorButton("MyColor##3b", color, misc_flags);
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("mypicker");
+ backup_color = color;
+ }
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopup("mypicker"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("MY CUSTOM COLOR PICKER WITH AN AMAZING PALETTE!");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::ColorPicker4("##picker", (float*)&color, misc_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview);
ImGui::SameLine();
- open_popup |= ImGui::Button("Palette");
- if (open_popup)
- {
- ImGui::OpenPopup("mypicker");
- backup_color = color;
- }
- if (ImGui::BeginPopup("mypicker"))
+
+ ImGui::BeginGroup(); // Lock X position
+ ImGui::Text("Current");
+ ImGui::ColorButton("##current", color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf, ImVec2(60,40));
+ ImGui::Text("Previous");
+ if (ImGui::ColorButton("##previous", backup_color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf, ImVec2(60,40)))
+ color = backup_color;
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("Palette");
+ for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(saved_palette); n++)
{
- // FIXME: Adding a drag and drop example here would be perfect!
- ImGui::Text("MY CUSTOM COLOR PICKER WITH AN AMAZING PALETTE!");
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::ColorPicker4("##picker", (float*)&color, misc_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview);
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::BeginGroup();
- ImGui::Text("Current");
- ImGui::ColorButton("##current", color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf, ImVec2(60,40));
- ImGui::Text("Previous");
- if (ImGui::ColorButton("##previous", backup_color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf, ImVec2(60,40)))
- color = backup_color;
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::Text("Palette");
- for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(saved_palette); n++)
+ ImGui::PushID(n);
+ if ((n % 8) != 0)
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y);
+ if (ImGui::ColorButton("##palette", saved_palette[n], ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, ImVec2(20,20)))
+ color = ImVec4(saved_palette[n].x, saved_palette[n].y, saved_palette[n].z, color.w); // Preserve alpha!
+
+ // Allow user to drop colors into each palette entry
+ // (Note that ColorButton is already a drag source by default, unless using ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop)
+ if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget())
{
- ImGui::PushID(n);
- if ((n % 8) != 0)
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y);
- if (ImGui::ColorButton("##palette", saved_palette[n], ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, ImVec2(20,20)))
- color = ImVec4(saved_palette[n].x, saved_palette[n].y, saved_palette[n].z, color.w); // Preserve alpha!
-
- if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget())
- {
- if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
- memcpy((float*)&saved_palette[n], payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3);
- if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
- memcpy((float*)&saved_palette[n], payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 4);
- EndDragDropTarget();
- }
-
- ImGui::PopID();
+ if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
+ memcpy((float*)&saved_palette[n], payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3);
+ if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
+ memcpy((float*)&saved_palette[n], payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 4);
+ ImGui::EndDragDropTarget();
}
- ImGui::EndGroup();
- ImGui::EndPopup();
+
+ ImGui::PopID();
}
+ ImGui::EndGroup();
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
- ImGui::Text("Color button only:");
- ImGui::ColorButton("MyColor##3c", *(ImVec4*)&color, misc_flags, ImVec2(80,80));
-
- ImGui::Text("Color picker:");
- static bool alpha = true;
- static bool alpha_bar = true;
- static bool side_preview = true;
- static bool ref_color = false;
- static ImVec4 ref_color_v(1.0f,0.0f,1.0f,0.5f);
- static int inputs_mode = 2;
- static int picker_mode = 0;
- ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha", &alpha);
- ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha Bar", &alpha_bar);
- ImGui::Checkbox("With Side Preview", &side_preview);
- if (side_preview)
+ ImGui::Text("Color button only:");
+ ImGui::ColorButton("MyColor##3c", *(ImVec4*)&color, misc_flags, ImVec2(80,80));
+
+ ImGui::Text("Color picker:");
+ static bool alpha = true;
+ static bool alpha_bar = true;
+ static bool side_preview = true;
+ static bool ref_color = false;
+ static ImVec4 ref_color_v(1.0f,0.0f,1.0f,0.5f);
+ static int inputs_mode = 2;
+ static int picker_mode = 0;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha", &alpha);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha Bar", &alpha_bar);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With Side Preview", &side_preview);
+ if (side_preview)
+ {
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Checkbox("With Ref Color", &ref_color);
+ if (ref_color)
{
ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Checkbox("With Ref Color", &ref_color);
- if (ref_color)
- {
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::ColorEdit4("##RefColor", &ref_color_v.x, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | misc_flags);
- }
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("##RefColor", &ref_color_v.x, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | misc_flags);
}
- ImGui::Combo("Inputs Mode", &inputs_mode, "All Inputs\0No Inputs\0RGB Input\0HSV Input\0HEX Input\0");
- ImGui::Combo("Picker Mode", &picker_mode, "Auto/Current\0Hue bar + SV rect\0Hue wheel + SV triangle\0");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("User can right-click the picker to change mode.");
- ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = misc_flags;
- if (!alpha) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha; // This is by default if you call ColorPicker3() instead of ColorPicker4()
- if (alpha_bar) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
- if (!side_preview) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview;
- if (picker_mode == 1) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
- if (picker_mode == 2) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
- if (inputs_mode == 1) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs;
- if (inputs_mode == 2) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB;
- if (inputs_mode == 3) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV;
- if (inputs_mode == 4) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX;
- ImGui::ColorPicker4("MyColor##4", (float*)&color, flags, ref_color ? &ref_color_v.x : NULL);
-
- ImGui::Text("Programmatically set defaults:");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("SetColorEditOptions() is designed to allow you to set boot-time default.\nWe don't have Push/Pop functions because you can force options on a per-widget basis if needed, and the user can change non-forced ones with the options menu.\nWe don't have a getter to avoid encouraging you to persistently save values that aren't forward-compatible.");
- if (ImGui::Button("Default: Uint8 + HSV + Hue Bar"))
- ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar);
- if (ImGui::Button("Default: Float + HDR + Hue Wheel"))
- ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel);
-
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::Combo("Inputs Mode", &inputs_mode, "All Inputs\0No Inputs\0RGB Input\0HSV Input\0HEX Input\0");
+ ImGui::Combo("Picker Mode", &picker_mode, "Auto/Current\0Hue bar + SV rect\0Hue wheel + SV triangle\0");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("User can right-click the picker to change mode.");
+ ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = misc_flags;
+ if (!alpha) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha; // This is by default if you call ColorPicker3() instead of ColorPicker4()
+ if (alpha_bar) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
+ if (!side_preview) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview;
+ if (picker_mode == 1) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
+ if (picker_mode == 2) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
+ if (inputs_mode == 1) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs;
+ if (inputs_mode == 2) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB;
+ if (inputs_mode == 3) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV;
+ if (inputs_mode == 4) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX;
+ ImGui::ColorPicker4("MyColor##4", (float*)&color, flags, ref_color ? &ref_color_v.x : NULL);
+
+ ImGui::Text("Programmatically set defaults:");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("SetColorEditOptions() is designed to allow you to set boot-time default.\nWe don't have Push/Pop functions because you can force options on a per-widget basis if needed, and the user can change non-forced ones with the options menu.\nWe don't have a getter to avoid encouraging you to persistently save values that aren't forward-compatible.");
+ if (ImGui::Button("Default: Uint8 + HSV + Hue Bar"))
+ ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar);
+ if (ImGui::Button("Default: Float + HDR + Hue Wheel"))
+ ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel);
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Range Widgets"))
- {
- static float begin = 10, end = 90;
- static int begin_i = 100, end_i = 1000;
- ImGui::DragFloatRange2("range", &begin, &end, 0.25f, 0.0f, 100.0f, "Min: %.1f %%", "Max: %.1f %%");
- ImGui::DragIntRange2("range int (no bounds)", &begin_i, &end_i, 5, 0, 0, "Min: %d units", "Max: %d units");
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Data Types"))
- {
- // The DragScalar, InputScalar, SliderScalar functions allow manipulating most common data types: signed/unsigned int/long long and float/double
- // To avoid polluting the public API with all possible combinations, we use the ImGuiDataType enum to pass the type, and argument-by-values are turned into argument-by-address.
- // This is the reason the test code below creates local variables to hold "zero" "one" etc. for each types.
- // In practice, if you frequently use a given type that is not covered by the normal API entry points, you may want to wrap it yourself inside a 1 line function
- // which can take typed values argument instead of void*, and then pass their address to the generic function. For example:
- // bool SliderU64(const char *label, u64* value, u64 min = 0, u64 max = 0, const char* format = "%lld") { return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_U64, value, &min, &max, format); }
- // Below are helper variables we can take the address of to work-around this:
- // Note that the SliderScalar function has a maximum usable range of half the natural type maximum, hence the /2 below.
- const ImS32 s32_zero = 0, s32_one = 1, s32_fifty = 50, s32_min = INT_MIN/2, s32_max = INT_MAX/2, s32_hi_a = INT_MAX/2 - 100, s32_hi_b = INT_MAX/2;
- const ImU32 u32_zero = 0, u32_one = 1, u32_fifty = 50, u32_min = 0, u32_max = UINT_MAX/2, u32_hi_a = UINT_MAX/2 - 100, u32_hi_b = UINT_MAX/2;
- const ImS64 s64_zero = 0, s64_one = 1, s64_fifty = 50, s64_min = LLONG_MIN/2, s64_max = LLONG_MAX/2, s64_hi_a = LLONG_MAX/2 - 100, s64_hi_b = LLONG_MAX/2;
- const ImU64 u64_zero = 0, u64_one = 1, u64_fifty = 50, u64_min = 0, u64_max = ULLONG_MAX/2, u64_hi_a = ULLONG_MAX/2 - 100, u64_hi_b = ULLONG_MAX/2;
- const float f32_zero = 0.f, f32_one = 1.f, f32_lo_a = -10000000000.0f, f32_hi_a = +10000000000.0f;
- const double f64_zero = 0., f64_one = 1., f64_lo_a = -1000000000000000, f64_hi_a = +1000000000000000;
-
- // State
- static ImS32 s32_v = -1;
- static ImU32 u32_v = (ImU32)-1;
- static ImS64 s64_v = -1;
- static ImU64 u64_v = (ImU64)-1;
- static float f32_v = 0.123f;
- static double f64_v = 90000.01234567890123456789;
-
- const float drag_speed = 0.2f;
- static bool drag_clamp = false;
- ImGui::Text("Drags:");
- ImGui::Checkbox("Clamp integers to 0..50", &drag_clamp); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("As with every widgets in dear imgui, we never modify values unless there is a user interaction.\nYou can override the clamping limits by using CTRL+Click to input a value.");
- ImGui::DragScalar("drag s32", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s32_fifty : NULL);
- ImGui::DragScalar("drag u32", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u32_fifty : NULL, "%u ms");
- ImGui::DragScalar("drag s64", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s64_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s64_fifty : NULL);
- ImGui::DragScalar("drag u64", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u64_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u64_fifty : NULL);
- ImGui::DragScalar("drag float", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, 0.005f, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%f", 1.0f);
- ImGui::DragScalar("drag float ^2", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, 0.005f, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%f", 2.0f); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("You can use the 'power' parameter to increase tweaking precision on one side of the range.");
- ImGui::DragScalar("drag double", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, 0.0005f, &f64_zero, NULL, "%.10f grams", 1.0f);
- ImGui::DragScalar("drag double ^2", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, 0.0005f, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "0 < %.10f < 1", 2.0f);
-
- ImGui::Text("Sliders");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 low", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_zero, &s32_fifty,"%d");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 high", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_hi_a, &s32_hi_b, "%d");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 full", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_min, &s32_max, "%d");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 low", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_zero, &u32_fifty,"%u");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 high", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_hi_a, &u32_hi_b, "%u");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 full", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_min, &u32_max, "%u");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 low", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_zero, &s64_fifty,"%I64d");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 high", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_hi_a, &s64_hi_b, "%I64d");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 full", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_min, &s64_max, "%I64d");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 low", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_zero, &u64_fifty,"%I64u ms");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 high", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_hi_a, &u64_hi_b, "%I64u ms");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 full", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_min, &u64_max, "%I64u ms");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float low", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_zero, &f32_one);
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float low^2", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%.10f", 2.0f);
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float high", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_lo_a, &f32_hi_a, "%e");
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double low", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "%.10f grams", 1.0f);
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double low^2",ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "%.10f", 2.0f);
- ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double high", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_lo_a, &f64_hi_a, "%e grams", 1.0f);
-
- static bool inputs_step = true;
- ImGui::Text("Inputs");
- ImGui::Checkbox("Show step buttons", &inputs_step);
- ImGui::InputScalar("input s32", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, inputs_step ? &s32_one : NULL, NULL, "%d");
- ImGui::InputScalar("input s32 hex", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, inputs_step ? &s32_one : NULL, NULL, "%08X", ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal);
- ImGui::InputScalar("input u32", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, inputs_step ? &u32_one : NULL, NULL, "%u");
- ImGui::InputScalar("input u32 hex", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, inputs_step ? &u32_one : NULL, NULL, "%08X", ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal);
- ImGui::InputScalar("input s64", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, inputs_step ? &s64_one : NULL);
- ImGui::InputScalar("input u64", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, inputs_step ? &u64_one : NULL);
- ImGui::InputScalar("input float", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, inputs_step ? &f32_one : NULL);
- ImGui::InputScalar("input double", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, inputs_step ? &f64_one : NULL);
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Range Widgets"))
+ {
+ static float begin = 10, end = 90;
+ static int begin_i = 100, end_i = 1000;
+ ImGui::DragFloatRange2("range", &begin, &end, 0.25f, 0.0f, 100.0f, "Min: %.1f %%", "Max: %.1f %%");
+ ImGui::DragIntRange2("range int (no bounds)", &begin_i, &end_i, 5, 0, 0, "Min: %d units", "Max: %d units");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Data Types"))
+ {
+ // The DragScalar/InputScalar/SliderScalar functions allow various data types: signed/unsigned int/long long and float/double
+ // To avoid polluting the public API with all possible combinations, we use the ImGuiDataType enum to pass the type,
+ // and passing all arguments by address.
+ // This is the reason the test code below creates local variables to hold "zero" "one" etc. for each types.
+ // In practice, if you frequently use a given type that is not covered by the normal API entry points, you can wrap it
+ // yourself inside a 1 line function which can take typed argument as value instead of void*, and then pass their address
+ // to the generic function. For example:
+ // bool MySliderU64(const char *label, u64* value, u64 min = 0, u64 max = 0, const char* format = "%lld")
+ // {
+ // return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_U64, value, &min, &max, format);
+ // }
+
+ // Limits (as helper variables that we can take the address of)
+ // Note that the SliderScalar function has a maximum usable range of half the natural type maximum, hence the /2 below.
+ #ifndef LLONG_MIN
+ ImS64 LLONG_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1;
+ ImS64 LLONG_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL;
+ ImU64 ULLONG_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1);
+ #endif
+ const ImS32 s32_zero = 0, s32_one = 1, s32_fifty = 50, s32_min = INT_MIN/2, s32_max = INT_MAX/2, s32_hi_a = INT_MAX/2 - 100, s32_hi_b = INT_MAX/2;
+ const ImU32 u32_zero = 0, u32_one = 1, u32_fifty = 50, u32_min = 0, u32_max = UINT_MAX/2, u32_hi_a = UINT_MAX/2 - 100, u32_hi_b = UINT_MAX/2;
+ const ImS64 s64_zero = 0, s64_one = 1, s64_fifty = 50, s64_min = LLONG_MIN/2, s64_max = LLONG_MAX/2, s64_hi_a = LLONG_MAX/2 - 100, s64_hi_b = LLONG_MAX/2;
+ const ImU64 u64_zero = 0, u64_one = 1, u64_fifty = 50, u64_min = 0, u64_max = ULLONG_MAX/2, u64_hi_a = ULLONG_MAX/2 - 100, u64_hi_b = ULLONG_MAX/2;
+ const float f32_zero = 0.f, f32_one = 1.f, f32_lo_a = -10000000000.0f, f32_hi_a = +10000000000.0f;
+ const double f64_zero = 0., f64_one = 1., f64_lo_a = -1000000000000000.0, f64_hi_a = +1000000000000000.0;
+
+ // State
+ static ImS32 s32_v = -1;
+ static ImU32 u32_v = (ImU32)-1;
+ static ImS64 s64_v = -1;
+ static ImU64 u64_v = (ImU64)-1;
+ static float f32_v = 0.123f;
+ static double f64_v = 90000.01234567890123456789;
+
+ const float drag_speed = 0.2f;
+ static bool drag_clamp = false;
+ ImGui::Text("Drags:");
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Clamp integers to 0..50", &drag_clamp); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("As with every widgets in dear imgui, we never modify values unless there is a user interaction.\nYou can override the clamping limits by using CTRL+Click to input a value.");
+ ImGui::DragScalar("drag s32", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s32_fifty : NULL);
+ ImGui::DragScalar("drag u32", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u32_fifty : NULL, "%u ms");
+ ImGui::DragScalar("drag s64", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s64_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s64_fifty : NULL);
+ ImGui::DragScalar("drag u64", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u64_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u64_fifty : NULL);
+ ImGui::DragScalar("drag float", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, 0.005f, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%f", 1.0f);
+ ImGui::DragScalar("drag float ^2", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, 0.005f, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%f", 2.0f); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("You can use the 'power' parameter to increase tweaking precision on one side of the range.");
+ ImGui::DragScalar("drag double", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, 0.0005f, &f64_zero, NULL, "%.10f grams", 1.0f);
+ ImGui::DragScalar("drag double ^2", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, 0.0005f, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "0 < %.10f < 1", 2.0f);
+
+ ImGui::Text("Sliders");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 low", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_zero, &s32_fifty,"%d");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 high", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_hi_a, &s32_hi_b, "%d");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 full", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_min, &s32_max, "%d");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 low", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_zero, &u32_fifty,"%u");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 high", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_hi_a, &u32_hi_b, "%u");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 full", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_min, &u32_max, "%u");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 low", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_zero, &s64_fifty,"%I64d");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 high", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_hi_a, &s64_hi_b, "%I64d");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 full", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_min, &s64_max, "%I64d");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 low", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_zero, &u64_fifty,"%I64u ms");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 high", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_hi_a, &u64_hi_b, "%I64u ms");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 full", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_min, &u64_max, "%I64u ms");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float low", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_zero, &f32_one);
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float low^2", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%.10f", 2.0f);
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float high", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_lo_a, &f32_hi_a, "%e");
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double low", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "%.10f grams", 1.0f);
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double low^2",ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "%.10f", 2.0f);
+ ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double high", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_lo_a, &f64_hi_a, "%e grams", 1.0f);
+
+ static bool inputs_step = true;
+ ImGui::Text("Inputs");
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Show step buttons", &inputs_step);
+ ImGui::InputScalar("input s32", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, inputs_step ? &s32_one : NULL, NULL, "%d");
+ ImGui::InputScalar("input s32 hex", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, inputs_step ? &s32_one : NULL, NULL, "%08X", ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal);
+ ImGui::InputScalar("input u32", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, inputs_step ? &u32_one : NULL, NULL, "%u");
+ ImGui::InputScalar("input u32 hex", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, inputs_step ? &u32_one : NULL, NULL, "%08X", ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal);
+ ImGui::InputScalar("input s64", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, inputs_step ? &s64_one : NULL);
+ ImGui::InputScalar("input u64", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, inputs_step ? &u64_one : NULL);
+ ImGui::InputScalar("input float", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, inputs_step ? &f32_one : NULL);
+ ImGui::InputScalar("input double", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, inputs_step ? &f64_one : NULL);
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Multi-component Widgets"))
- {
- static float vec4f[4] = { 0.10f, 0.20f, 0.30f, 0.44f };
- static int vec4i[4] = { 1, 5, 100, 255 };
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::InputFloat2("input float2", vec4f);
- ImGui::DragFloat2("drag float2", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("slider float2", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
- ImGui::InputInt2("input int2", vec4i);
- ImGui::DragInt2("drag int2", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
- ImGui::SliderInt2("slider int2", vec4i, 0, 255);
- ImGui::Spacing();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Multi-component Widgets"))
+ {
+ static float vec4f[4] = { 0.10f, 0.20f, 0.30f, 0.44f };
+ static int vec4i[4] = { 1, 5, 100, 255 };
+
+ ImGui::InputFloat2("input float2", vec4f);
+ ImGui::DragFloat2("drag float2", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("slider float2", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+ ImGui::InputInt2("input int2", vec4i);
+ ImGui::DragInt2("drag int2", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
+ ImGui::SliderInt2("slider int2", vec4i, 0, 255);
+ ImGui::Spacing();
+
+ ImGui::InputFloat3("input float3", vec4f);
+ ImGui::DragFloat3("drag float3", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+ ImGui::SliderFloat3("slider float3", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+ ImGui::InputInt3("input int3", vec4i);
+ ImGui::DragInt3("drag int3", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
+ ImGui::SliderInt3("slider int3", vec4i, 0, 255);
+ ImGui::Spacing();
+
+ ImGui::InputFloat4("input float4", vec4f);
+ ImGui::DragFloat4("drag float4", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+ ImGui::SliderFloat4("slider float4", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+ ImGui::InputInt4("input int4", vec4i);
+ ImGui::DragInt4("drag int4", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
+ ImGui::SliderInt4("slider int4", vec4i, 0, 255);
- ImGui::InputFloat3("input float3", vec4f);
- ImGui::DragFloat3("drag float3", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
- ImGui::SliderFloat3("slider float3", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
- ImGui::InputInt3("input int3", vec4i);
- ImGui::DragInt3("drag int3", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
- ImGui::SliderInt3("slider int3", vec4i, 0, 255);
- ImGui::Spacing();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::InputFloat4("input float4", vec4f);
- ImGui::DragFloat4("drag float4", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
- ImGui::SliderFloat4("slider float4", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
- ImGui::InputInt4("input int4", vec4i);
- ImGui::DragInt4("drag int4", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
- ImGui::SliderInt4("slider int4", vec4i, 0, 255);
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Vertical Sliders"))
+ {
+ const float spacing = 4;
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(spacing, spacing));
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ static int int_value = 0;
+ ImGui::VSliderInt("##int", ImVec2(18,160), &int_value, 0, 5);
+ ImGui::SameLine();
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Vertical Sliders"))
+ static float values[7] = { 0.0f, 0.60f, 0.35f, 0.9f, 0.70f, 0.20f, 0.0f };
+ ImGui::PushID("set1");
+ for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++)
{
- const float spacing = 4;
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(spacing, spacing));
-
- static int int_value = 0;
- ImGui::VSliderInt("##int", ImVec2(18,160), &int_value, 0, 5);
- ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushID(i);
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBg, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.5f, 0.5f));
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.6f, 0.5f));
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.7f, 0.5f));
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_SliderGrab, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.9f, 0.9f));
+ ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", ImVec2(18,160), &values[i], 0.0f, 1.0f, "");
+ if (ImGui::IsItemActive() || ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+ ImGui::SetTooltip("%.3f", values[i]);
+ ImGui::PopStyleColor(4);
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ }
+ ImGui::PopID();
- static float values[7] = { 0.0f, 0.60f, 0.35f, 0.9f, 0.70f, 0.20f, 0.0f };
- ImGui::PushID("set1");
- for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++)
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushID("set2");
+ static float values2[4] = { 0.20f, 0.80f, 0.40f, 0.25f };
+ const int rows = 3;
+ const ImVec2 small_slider_size(18, (160.0f-(rows-1)*spacing)/rows);
+ for (int nx = 0; nx < 4; nx++)
+ {
+ if (nx > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::BeginGroup();
+ for (int ny = 0; ny < rows; ny++)
{
- if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PushID(i);
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBg, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.5f, 0.5f));
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.6f, 0.5f));
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.7f, 0.5f));
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_SliderGrab, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i/7.0f, 0.9f, 0.9f));
- ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", ImVec2(18,160), &values[i], 0.0f, 1.0f, "");
+ ImGui::PushID(nx*rows+ny);
+ ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", small_slider_size, &values2[nx], 0.0f, 1.0f, "");
if (ImGui::IsItemActive() || ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- ImGui::SetTooltip("%.3f", values[i]);
- ImGui::PopStyleColor(4);
+ ImGui::SetTooltip("%.3f", values2[nx]);
ImGui::PopID();
}
- ImGui::PopID();
+ ImGui::EndGroup();
+ }
+ ImGui::PopID();
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PushID("set2");
- static float values2[4] = { 0.20f, 0.80f, 0.40f, 0.25f };
- const int rows = 3;
- const ImVec2 small_slider_size(18, (160.0f-(rows-1)*spacing)/rows);
- for (int nx = 0; nx < 4; nx++)
- {
- if (nx > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::BeginGroup();
- for (int ny = 0; ny < rows; ny++)
- {
- ImGui::PushID(nx*rows+ny);
- ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", small_slider_size, &values2[nx], 0.0f, 1.0f, "");
- if (ImGui::IsItemActive() || ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- ImGui::SetTooltip("%.3f", values2[nx]);
- ImGui::PopID();
- }
- ImGui::EndGroup();
- }
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushID("set3");
+ for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++)
+ {
+ if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushID(i);
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, 40);
+ ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", ImVec2(40,160), &values[i], 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f\nsec");
+ ImGui::PopStyleVar();
ImGui::PopID();
+ }
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PushID("set3");
- for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++)
- {
- if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PushID(i);
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, 40);
- ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", ImVec2(40,160), &values[i], 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f\nsec");
- ImGui::PopStyleVar();
- ImGui::PopID();
- }
- ImGui::PopID();
- ImGui::PopStyleVar();
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag and Drop"))
+ {
+ {
+ // ColorEdit widgets automatically act as drag source and drag target.
+ // They are using standardized payload strings IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F and IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F to allow your own widgets
+ // to use colors in their drag and drop interaction. Also see the demo in Color Picker -> Palette demo.
+ ImGui::BulletText("Drag and drop in standard widgets");
+ ImGui::Indent();
+ static float col1[3] = { 1.0f,0.0f,0.2f };
+ static float col2[4] = { 0.4f,0.7f,0.0f,0.5f };
+ ImGui::ColorEdit3("color 1", col1);
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("color 2", col2);
+ ImGui::Unindent();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag and Drop"))
{
+ ImGui::BulletText("Drag and drop to copy/swap items");
+ ImGui::Indent();
+ enum Mode
{
- // ColorEdit widgets automatically act as drag source and drag target.
- // They are using standardized payload strings IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F and IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F to allow your own widgets
- // to use colors in their drag and drop interaction. Also see the demo in Color Picker -> Palette demo.
- ImGui::BulletText("Drag and drop in standard widgets");
- ImGui::Indent();
- static float col1[3] = { 1.0f,0.0f,0.2f };
- static float col2[4] = { 0.4f,0.7f,0.0f,0.5f };
- ImGui::ColorEdit3("color 1", col1);
- ImGui::ColorEdit4("color 2", col2);
- ImGui::Unindent();
- }
-
+ Mode_Copy,
+ Mode_Move,
+ Mode_Swap
+ };
+ static int mode = 0;
+ if (ImGui::RadioButton("Copy", mode == Mode_Copy)) { mode = Mode_Copy; } ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::RadioButton("Move", mode == Mode_Move)) { mode = Mode_Move; } ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::RadioButton("Swap", mode == Mode_Swap)) { mode = Mode_Swap; }
+ static const char* names[9] = { "Bobby", "Beatrice", "Betty", "Brianna", "Barry", "Bernard", "Bibi", "Blaine", "Bryn" };
+ for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); n++)
{
- ImGui::BulletText("Drag and drop to copy/swap items");
- ImGui::Indent();
- enum Mode
+ ImGui::PushID(n);
+ if ((n % 3) != 0)
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button(names[n], ImVec2(60,60));
+
+ // Our buttons are both drag sources and drag targets here!
+ if (ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags_None))
{
- Mode_Copy,
- Mode_Move,
- Mode_Swap
- };
- static int mode = 0;
- if (ImGui::RadioButton("Copy", mode == Mode_Copy)) { mode = Mode_Copy; } ImGui::SameLine();
- if (ImGui::RadioButton("Move", mode == Mode_Move)) { mode = Mode_Move; } ImGui::SameLine();
- if (ImGui::RadioButton("Swap", mode == Mode_Swap)) { mode = Mode_Swap; }
- static const char* names[9] = { "Bobby", "Beatrice", "Betty", "Brianna", "Barry", "Bernard", "Bibi", "Blaine", "Bryn" };
- for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); n++)
+ ImGui::SetDragDropPayload("DND_DEMO_CELL", &n, sizeof(int)); // Set payload to carry the index of our item (could be anything)
+ if (mode == Mode_Copy) { ImGui::Text("Copy %s", names[n]); } // Display preview (could be anything, e.g. when dragging an image we could decide to display the filename and a small preview of the image, etc.)
+ if (mode == Mode_Move) { ImGui::Text("Move %s", names[n]); }
+ if (mode == Mode_Swap) { ImGui::Text("Swap %s", names[n]); }
+ ImGui::EndDragDropSource();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget())
{
- ImGui::PushID(n);
- if ((n % 3) != 0)
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button(names[n], ImVec2(60,60));
-
- // Our buttons are both drag sources and drag targets here!
- if (ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags_None))
+ if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload("DND_DEMO_CELL"))
{
- ImGui::SetDragDropPayload("DND_DEMO_CELL", &n, sizeof(int)); // Set payload to carry the index of our item (could be anything)
- if (mode == Mode_Copy) { ImGui::Text("Copy %s", names[n]); } // Display preview (could be anything, e.g. when dragging an image we could decide to display the filename and a small preview of the image, etc.)
- if (mode == Mode_Move) { ImGui::Text("Move %s", names[n]); }
- if (mode == Mode_Swap) { ImGui::Text("Swap %s", names[n]); }
- ImGui::EndDragDropSource();
- }
- if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget())
- {
- if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload("DND_DEMO_CELL"))
+ IM_ASSERT(payload->DataSize == sizeof(int));
+ int payload_n = *(const int*)payload->Data;
+ if (mode == Mode_Copy)
{
- IM_ASSERT(payload->DataSize == sizeof(int));
- int payload_n = *(const int*)payload->Data;
- if (mode == Mode_Copy)
- {
- names[n] = names[payload_n];
- }
- if (mode == Mode_Move)
- {
- names[n] = names[payload_n];
- names[payload_n] = "";
- }
- if (mode == Mode_Swap)
- {
- const char* tmp = names[n];
- names[n] = names[payload_n];
- names[payload_n] = tmp;
- }
+ names[n] = names[payload_n];
+ }
+ if (mode == Mode_Move)
+ {
+ names[n] = names[payload_n];
+ names[payload_n] = "";
+ }
+ if (mode == Mode_Swap)
+ {
+ const char* tmp = names[n];
+ names[n] = names[payload_n];
+ names[payload_n] = tmp;
}
- ImGui::EndDragDropTarget();
}
- ImGui::PopID();
+ ImGui::EndDragDropTarget();
}
- ImGui::Unindent();
+ ImGui::PopID();
}
-
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Unindent();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Active, Focused, Hovered & Focused Tests"))
- {
- // Display the value of IsItemHovered() and other common item state functions. Note that the flags can be combined.
- // (because BulletText is an item itself and that would affect the output of IsItemHovered() we pass all state in a single call to simplify the code).
- static int item_type = 1;
- static bool b = false;
- static float col4f[4] = { 1.0f, 0.5, 0.0f, 1.0f };
- ImGui::RadioButton("Text", &item_type, 0); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("Button", &item_type, 1); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("CheckBox", &item_type, 2); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("SliderFloat", &item_type, 3); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("ColorEdit4", &item_type, 4); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("ListBox", &item_type, 5);
- bool ret = false;
- if (item_type == 0) { ImGui::Text("ITEM: Text"); } // Testing text items with no identifier/interaction
- if (item_type == 1) { ret = ImGui::Button("ITEM: Button"); } // Testing button
- if (item_type == 2) { ret = ImGui::Checkbox("ITEM: CheckBox", &b); } // Testing checkbox
- if (item_type == 3) { ret = ImGui::SliderFloat("ITEM: SliderFloat", &col4f[0], 0.0f, 1.0f); } // Testing basic item
- if (item_type == 4) { ret = ImGui::ColorEdit4("ITEM: ColorEdit4", col4f); } // Testing multi-component items (IsItemXXX flags are reported merged)
- if (item_type == 5) { const char* items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi" }; static int current = 1; ret = ImGui::ListBox("ITEM: ListBox", ¤t, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items), IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); }
- ImGui::BulletText(
- "Return value = %d\n"
- "IsItemFocused() = %d\n"
- "IsItemHovered() = %d\n"
- "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n"
- "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) = %d\n"
- "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenOverlapped) = %d\n"
- "IsItemHovered(_RectOnly) = %d\n"
- "IsItemActive() = %d\n"
- "IsItemDeactivated() = %d\n"
- "IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() = %d\n"
- "IsItemVisible() = %d\n",
- ret,
- ImGui::IsItemFocused(),
- ImGui::IsItemHovered(),
- ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup),
- ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem),
- ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped),
- ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly),
- ImGui::IsItemActive(),
- ImGui::IsItemDeactivated(),
- ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange(),
- ImGui::IsItemVisible()
- );
-
- static bool embed_all_inside_a_child_window = false;
- ImGui::Checkbox("Embed everything inside a child window (for additional testing)", &embed_all_inside_a_child_window);
- if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window)
- ImGui::BeginChild("outer_child", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20), true);
-
- // Testing IsWindowFocused() function with its various flags. Note that the flags can be combined.
- ImGui::BulletText(
- "IsWindowFocused() = %d\n"
- "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows) = %d\n"
- "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow) = %d\n"
- "IsWindowFocused(_RootWindow) = %d\n"
- "IsWindowFocused(_AnyWindow) = %d\n",
- ImGui::IsWindowFocused(),
- ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows),
- ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow),
- ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow),
- ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow));
-
- // Testing IsWindowHovered() function with its various flags. Note that the flags can be combined.
- ImGui::BulletText(
- "IsWindowHovered() = %d\n"
- "IsWindowHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n"
- "IsWindowHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) = %d\n"
- "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows) = %d\n"
- "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow) = %d\n"
- "IsWindowHovered(_RootWindow) = %d\n"
- "IsWindowHovered(_AnyWindow) = %d\n",
- ImGui::IsWindowHovered(),
- ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup),
- ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem),
- ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows),
- ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow),
- ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow),
- ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow));
-
- ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 50), true);
- ImGui::Text("This is another child window for testing with the _ChildWindows flag.");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Querying Status (Active/Focused/Hovered etc.)"))
+ {
+ // Display the value of IsItemHovered() and other common item state functions. Note that the flags can be combined.
+ // (because BulletText is an item itself and that would affect the output of IsItemHovered() we pass all state in a single call to simplify the code).
+ static int item_type = 1;
+ static bool b = false;
+ static float col4f[4] = { 1.0f, 0.5, 0.0f, 1.0f };
+ ImGui::RadioButton("Text", &item_type, 0);
+ ImGui::RadioButton("Button", &item_type, 1);
+ ImGui::RadioButton("Checkbox", &item_type, 2);
+ ImGui::RadioButton("SliderFloat", &item_type, 3);
+ ImGui::RadioButton("ColorEdit4", &item_type, 4);
+ ImGui::RadioButton("ListBox", &item_type, 5);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ bool ret = false;
+ if (item_type == 0) { ImGui::Text("ITEM: Text"); } // Testing text items with no identifier/interaction
+ if (item_type == 1) { ret = ImGui::Button("ITEM: Button"); } // Testing button
+ if (item_type == 2) { ret = ImGui::Checkbox("ITEM: Checkbox", &b); } // Testing checkbox
+ if (item_type == 3) { ret = ImGui::SliderFloat("ITEM: SliderFloat", &col4f[0], 0.0f, 1.0f); } // Testing basic item
+ if (item_type == 4) { ret = ImGui::ColorEdit4("ITEM: ColorEdit4", col4f); } // Testing multi-component items (IsItemXXX flags are reported merged)
+ if (item_type == 5) { const char* items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi" }; static int current = 1; ret = ImGui::ListBox("ITEM: ListBox", ¤t, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items), IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); }
+ ImGui::BulletText(
+ "Return value = %d\n"
+ "IsItemFocused() = %d\n"
+ "IsItemHovered() = %d\n"
+ "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n"
+ "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) = %d\n"
+ "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenOverlapped) = %d\n"
+ "IsItemHovered(_RectOnly) = %d\n"
+ "IsItemActive() = %d\n"
+ "IsItemEdited() = %d\n"
+ "IsItemActivated() = %d\n"
+ "IsItemDeactivated() = %d\n"
+ "IsItemDeactivatedEdit() = %d\n"
+ "IsItemVisible() = %d\n"
+ "GetItemRectMin() = (%.1f, %.1f)\n"
+ "GetItemRectMax() = (%.1f, %.1f)\n"
+ "GetItemRectSize() = (%.1f, %.1f)",
+ ret,
+ ImGui::IsItemFocused(),
+ ImGui::IsItemHovered(),
+ ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup),
+ ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem),
+ ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped),
+ ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly),
+ ImGui::IsItemActive(),
+ ImGui::IsItemEdited(),
+ ImGui::IsItemActivated(),
+ ImGui::IsItemDeactivated(),
+ ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(),
+ ImGui::IsItemVisible(),
+ ImGui::GetItemRectMin().x, ImGui::GetItemRectMin().y,
+ ImGui::GetItemRectMax().x, ImGui::GetItemRectMax().y,
+ ImGui::GetItemRectSize().x, ImGui::GetItemRectSize().y
+ );
+
+ static bool embed_all_inside_a_child_window = false;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Embed everything inside a child window (for additional testing)", &embed_all_inside_a_child_window);
+ if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window)
+ ImGui::BeginChild("outer_child", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20), true);
+
+ // Testing IsWindowFocused() function with its various flags. Note that the flags can be combined.
+ ImGui::BulletText(
+ "IsWindowFocused() = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows) = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow) = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowFocused(_RootWindow) = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowFocused(_AnyWindow) = %d\n",
+ ImGui::IsWindowFocused(),
+ ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows),
+ ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow),
+ ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow),
+ ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow));
+
+ // Testing IsWindowHovered() function with its various flags. Note that the flags can be combined.
+ ImGui::BulletText(
+ "IsWindowHovered() = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows) = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow) = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowHovered(_RootWindow) = %d\n"
+ "IsWindowHovered(_AnyWindow) = %d\n",
+ ImGui::IsWindowHovered(),
+ ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup),
+ ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem),
+ ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows),
+ ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow),
+ ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow),
+ ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow));
+
+ ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 50), true);
+ ImGui::Text("This is another child window for testing the _ChildWindows flag.");
+ ImGui::EndChild();
+ if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window)
ImGui::EndChild();
- if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window)
- EndChild();
-
- // Calling IsItemHovered() after begin returns the hovered status of the title bar.
- // This is useful in particular if you want to create a context menu (with BeginPopupContextItem) associated to the title bar of a window.
- static bool test_window = false;
- ImGui::Checkbox("Hovered/Active tests after Begin() for title bar testing", &test_window);
- if (test_window)
+
+ // Calling IsItemHovered() after begin returns the hovered status of the title bar.
+ // This is useful in particular if you want to create a context menu (with BeginPopupContextItem) associated to the title bar of a window.
+ static bool test_window = false;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Hovered/Active tests after Begin() for title bar testing", &test_window);
+ if (test_window)
+ {
+ ImGui::Begin("Title bar Hovered/Active tests", &test_window);
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) // <-- This is using IsItemHovered()
{
- ImGui::Begin("Title bar Hovered/Active tests", &test_window);
- if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) // <-- This is using IsItemHovered()
- {
- if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close")) { test_window = false; }
- ImGui::EndPopup();
- }
- ImGui::Text(
- "IsItemHovered() after begin = %d (== is title bar hovered)\n"
- "IsItemActive() after begin = %d (== is window being clicked/moved)\n",
- ImGui::IsItemHovered(), ImGui::IsItemActive());
- ImGui::End();
+ if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close")) { test_window = false; }
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
}
-
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Text(
+ "IsItemHovered() after begin = %d (== is title bar hovered)\n"
+ "IsItemActive() after begin = %d (== is window being clicked/moved)\n",
+ ImGui::IsItemHovered(), ImGui::IsItemActive());
+ ImGui::End();
}
+
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
+}
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Layout"))
- {
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Child regions"))
- {
- static bool disable_mouse_wheel = false;
- static bool disable_menu = false;
- ImGui::Checkbox("Disable Mouse Wheel", &disable_mouse_wheel);
- ImGui::Checkbox("Disable Menu", &disable_menu);
+static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
+{
+ if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Layout"))
+ return;
- static int line = 50;
- bool goto_line = ImGui::Button("Goto");
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
- goto_line |= ImGui::InputInt("##Line", &line, 0, 0, ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue);
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Child windows"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window.");
+ static bool disable_mouse_wheel = false;
+ static bool disable_menu = false;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Disable Mouse Wheel", &disable_mouse_wheel);
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Disable Menu", &disable_menu);
+
+ static int line = 50;
+ bool goto_line = ImGui::Button("Goto");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
+ goto_line |= ImGui::InputInt("##Line", &line, 0, 0, ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue);
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- // Child 1: no border, enable horizontal scrollbar
+ // Child 1: no border, enable horizontal scrollbar
+ {
+ ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar | (disable_mouse_wheel ? ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse : 0);
+ ImGui::BeginChild("Child1", ImVec2(ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionWidth() * 0.5f, 260), false, window_flags);
+ for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
{
- ImGui::BeginChild("Child1", ImVec2(ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionWidth() * 0.5f, 300), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar | (disable_mouse_wheel ? ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse : 0));
- for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
- {
- ImGui::Text("%04d: scrollable region", i);
- if (goto_line && line == i)
- ImGui::SetScrollHere();
- }
- if (goto_line && line >= 100)
- ImGui::SetScrollHere();
- ImGui::EndChild();
+ ImGui::Text("%04d: scrollable region", i);
+ if (goto_line && line == i)
+ ImGui::SetScrollHereY();
}
+ if (goto_line && line >= 100)
+ ImGui::SetScrollHereY();
+ ImGui::EndChild();
+ }
- ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SameLine();
- // Child 2: rounded border
+ // Child 2: rounded border
+ {
+ ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = (disable_mouse_wheel ? ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse : 0) | (disable_menu ? 0 : ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, 5.0f);
+ ImGui::BeginChild("Child2", ImVec2(0, 260), true, window_flags);
+ if (!disable_menu && ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
{
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, 5.0f);
- ImGui::BeginChild("Child2", ImVec2(0,300), true, (disable_mouse_wheel ? ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse : 0) | (disable_menu ? 0 : ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar));
- if (!disable_menu && ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+ if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu"))
{
- if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu"))
- {
- ShowExampleMenuFile();
- ImGui::EndMenu();
- }
- ImGui::EndMenuBar();
- }
- ImGui::Columns(2);
- for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
- {
- char buf[32];
- sprintf(buf, "%03d", i);
- ImGui::Button(buf, ImVec2(-1.0f, 0.0f));
- ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ShowExampleMenuFile();
+ ImGui::EndMenu();
}
- ImGui::EndChild();
- ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+ ImGui::EndMenuBar();
}
-
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Columns(2);
+ for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
+ {
+ char buf[32];
+ sprintf(buf, "%03d", i);
+ ImGui::Button(buf, ImVec2(-1.0f, 0.0f));
+ ImGui::NextColumn();
+ }
+ ImGui::EndChild();
+ ImGui::PopStyleVar();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Widgets Width"))
+ ImGui::Separator();
+
+ // Demonstrate a few extra things
+ // - Changing ImGuiCol_ChildBg (which is transparent black in default styles)
+ // - Using SetCursorPos() to position the child window (because the child window is an item from the POV of the parent window)
+ // You can also call SetNextWindowPos() to position the child window. The parent window will effectively layout from this position.
+ // - Using ImGui::GetItemRectMin/Max() to query the "item" state (because the child window is an item from the POV of the parent window)
+ // See "Widgets" -> "Querying Status (Active/Focused/Hovered etc.)" section for more details about this.
{
- static float f = 0.0f;
- ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(100)");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Fixed width.");
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
- ImGui::DragFloat("float##1", &f);
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ ImGui::SetCursorPosX(50);
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 100));
+ ImGui::BeginChild("blah", ImVec2(200, 100), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_None);
+ for (int n = 0; n < 50; n++)
+ ImGui::Text("Some test %d", n);
+ ImGui::EndChild();
+ ImVec2 child_rect_min = ImGui::GetItemRectMin();
+ ImVec2 child_rect_max = ImGui::GetItemRectMax();
+ ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+ ImGui::Text("Rect of child window is: (%.0f,%.0f) (%.0f,%.0f)", child_rect_min.x, child_rect_min.y, child_rect_max.x, child_rect_max.y);
+ }
- ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(GetWindowWidth() * 0.5f)");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Half of window width.");
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.5f);
- ImGui::DragFloat("float##2", &f);
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(GetContentRegionAvailWidth() * 0.5f)");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Half of available width.\n(~ right-cursor_pos)\n(works within a column set)");
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvailWidth() * 0.5f);
- ImGui::DragFloat("float##3", &f);
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Widgets Width"))
+ {
+ static float f = 0.0f;
+ ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(100)");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Fixed width.");
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("float##1", &f);
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(-100)");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Align to right edge minus 100");
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(-100);
- ImGui::DragFloat("float##4", &f);
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(GetWindowWidth() * 0.5f)");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Half of window width.");
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.5f);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("float##2", &f);
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(-1)");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Align to right edge");
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1);
- ImGui::DragFloat("float##5", &f);
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(GetContentRegionAvailWidth() * 0.5f)");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Half of available width.\n(~ right-cursor_pos)\n(works within a column set)");
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvailWidth() * 0.5f);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("float##3", &f);
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(-100)");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Align to right edge minus 100");
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(-100);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("float##4", &f);
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic Horizontal Layout"))
- {
- ImGui::TextWrapped("(Use ImGui::SameLine() to keep adding items to the right of the preceding item)");
+ ImGui::Text("PushItemWidth(-1)");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Align to right edge");
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("float##5", &f);
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- // Text
- ImGui::Text("Two items: Hello"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1,1,0,1), "Sailor");
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic Horizontal Layout"))
+ {
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("(Use ImGui::SameLine() to keep adding items to the right of the preceding item)");
+
+ // Text
+ ImGui::Text("Two items: Hello"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1,1,0,1), "Sailor");
+
+ // Adjust spacing
+ ImGui::Text("More spacing: Hello"); ImGui::SameLine(0, 20);
+ ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1,1,0,1), "Sailor");
+
+ // Button
+ ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+ ImGui::Text("Normal buttons"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("Apple"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("Corniflower");
+
+ // Button
+ ImGui::Text("Small buttons"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SmallButton("Like this one"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("can fit within a text block.");
+
+ // Aligned to arbitrary position. Easy/cheap column.
+ ImGui::Text("Aligned");
+ ImGui::SameLine(150); ImGui::Text("x=150");
+ ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text("x=300");
+ ImGui::Text("Aligned");
+ ImGui::SameLine(150); ImGui::SmallButton("x=150");
+ ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::SmallButton("x=300");
+
+ // Checkbox
+ static bool c1 = false, c2 = false, c3 = false, c4 = false;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("My", &c1); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Tailor", &c2); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Is", &c3); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Rich", &c4);
+
+ // Various
+ static float f0 = 1.0f, f1 = 2.0f, f2 = 3.0f;
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(80);
+ const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD" };
+ static int item = -1;
+ ImGui::Combo("Combo", &item, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("X", &f0, 0.0f, 5.0f); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("Y", &f1, 0.0f, 5.0f); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("Z", &f2, 0.0f, 5.0f);
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- // Adjust spacing
- ImGui::Text("More spacing: Hello"); ImGui::SameLine(0, 20);
- ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1,1,0,1), "Sailor");
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(80);
+ ImGui::Text("Lists:");
+ static int selection[4] = { 0, 1, 2, 3 };
+ for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++)
+ {
+ if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushID(i);
+ ImGui::ListBox("", &selection[i], items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ //if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) ImGui::SetTooltip("ListBox %d hovered", i);
+ }
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- // Button
- ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
- ImGui::Text("Normal buttons"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("Apple"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("Corniflower");
-
- // Button
- ImGui::Text("Small buttons"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::SmallButton("Like this one"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("can fit within a text block.");
-
- // Aligned to arbitrary position. Easy/cheap column.
- ImGui::Text("Aligned");
- ImGui::SameLine(150); ImGui::Text("x=150");
- ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text("x=300");
- ImGui::Text("Aligned");
- ImGui::SameLine(150); ImGui::SmallButton("x=150");
- ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::SmallButton("x=300");
-
- // Checkbox
- static bool c1=false,c2=false,c3=false,c4=false;
- ImGui::Checkbox("My", &c1); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Checkbox("Tailor", &c2); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Checkbox("Is", &c3); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Checkbox("Rich", &c4);
-
- // Various
- static float f0=1.0f, f1=2.0f, f2=3.0f;
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(80);
- const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD" };
- static int item = -1;
- ImGui::Combo("Combo", &item, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::SliderFloat("X", &f0, 0.0f,5.0f); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::SliderFloat("Y", &f1, 0.0f,5.0f); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::SliderFloat("Z", &f2, 0.0f,5.0f);
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ // Dummy
+ ImVec2 button_sz(40, 40);
+ ImGui::Button("A", button_sz); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Dummy(button_sz); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("B", button_sz);
+
+ // Manually wrapping (we should eventually provide this as an automatic layout feature, but for now you can do it manually)
+ ImGui::Text("Manually wrapping:");
+ ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
+ int buttons_count = 20;
+ float window_visible_x2 = ImGui::GetWindowPos().x + ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax().x;
+ for (int n = 0; n < buttons_count; n++)
+ {
+ ImGui::PushID(n);
+ ImGui::Button("Box", button_sz);
+ float last_button_x2 = ImGui::GetItemRectMax().x;
+ float next_button_x2 = last_button_x2 + style.ItemSpacing.x + button_sz.x; // Expected position if next button was on same line
+ if (n + 1 < buttons_count && next_button_x2 < window_visible_x2)
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ }
+
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(80);
- ImGui::Text("Lists:");
- static int selection[4] = { 0, 1, 2, 3 };
- for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++)
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tabs"))
+ {
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+ {
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_None;
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MyTabBar", tab_bar_flags))
{
- if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PushID(i);
- ImGui::ListBox("", &selection[i], items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
- ImGui::PopID();
- //if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) ImGui::SetTooltip("ListBox %d hovered", i);
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Avocado"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("This is the Avocado tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah");
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Broccoli"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("This is the Broccoli tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah");
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Cucumber"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("This is the Cucumber tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah");
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
+ }
+ ImGui::EndTabBar();
}
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
-
- // Dummy
- ImVec2 sz(30,30);
- ImGui::Button("A", sz); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Dummy(sz); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("B", sz);
-
+ ImGui::Separator();
ImGui::TreePop();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Groups"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced & Close Button"))
{
- ImGui::TextWrapped("(Using ImGui::BeginGroup()/EndGroup() to layout items. BeginGroup() basically locks the horizontal position. EndGroup() bundles the whole group so that you can use functions such as IsItemHovered() on it.)");
- ImGui::BeginGroup();
+ // Expose a couple of the available flags. In most cases you may just call BeginTabBar() with no flags (0).
+ static ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable;
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable", (unsigned int*)&tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable);
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs", (unsigned int*)&tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs);
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton", (unsigned int*)&tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton);
+ ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton", (unsigned int*)&tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton);
+ if ((tab_bar_flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0)
+ tab_bar_flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;
+ if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown", (unsigned int*)&tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown))
+ tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown);
+ if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll", (unsigned int*)&tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll))
+ tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll);
+
+ // Tab Bar
+ const char* names[4] = { "Artichoke", "Beetroot", "Celery", "Daikon" };
+ static bool opened[4] = { true, true, true, true }; // Persistent user state
+ for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(opened); n++)
{
- ImGui::BeginGroup();
- ImGui::Button("AAA");
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("BBB");
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::BeginGroup();
- ImGui::Button("CCC");
- ImGui::Button("DDD");
- ImGui::EndGroup();
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("EEE");
- ImGui::EndGroup();
- if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- ImGui::SetTooltip("First group hovered");
+ if (n > 0) { ImGui::SameLine(); }
+ ImGui::Checkbox(names[n], &opened[n]);
}
- // Capture the group size and create widgets using the same size
- ImVec2 size = ImGui::GetItemRectSize();
- const float values[5] = { 0.5f, 0.20f, 0.80f, 0.60f, 0.25f };
- ImGui::PlotHistogram("##values", values, IM_ARRAYSIZE(values), 0, NULL, 0.0f, 1.0f, size);
- ImGui::Button("ACTION", ImVec2((size.x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.x)*0.5f,size.y));
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("REACTION", ImVec2((size.x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.x)*0.5f,size.y));
- ImGui::EndGroup();
- ImGui::SameLine();
-
- ImGui::Button("LEVERAGE\nBUZZWORD", size);
- ImGui::SameLine();
-
- if (ImGui::ListBoxHeader("List", size))
+ // Passing a bool* to BeginTabItem() is similar to passing one to Begin(): the underlying bool will be set to false when the tab is closed.
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MyTabBar", tab_bar_flags))
{
- ImGui::Selectable("Selected", true);
- ImGui::Selectable("Not Selected", false);
- ImGui::ListBoxFooter();
+ for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(opened); n++)
+ if (opened[n] && ImGui::BeginTabItem(names[n], &opened[n]))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("This is the %s tab!", names[n]);
+ if (n & 1)
+ ImGui::Text("I am an odd tab.");
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
+ }
+ ImGui::EndTabBar();
}
-
+ ImGui::Separator();
ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text Baseline Alignment"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Groups"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("Using ImGui::BeginGroup()/EndGroup() to layout items. BeginGroup() basically locks the horizontal position. EndGroup() bundles the whole group so that you can use functions such as IsItemHovered() on it.");
+ ImGui::BeginGroup();
{
- ImGui::TextWrapped("(This is testing the vertical alignment that occurs on text to keep it at the same baseline as widgets. Lines only composed of text or \"small\" widgets fit in less vertical spaces than lines with normal widgets)");
-
- ImGui::Text("One\nTwo\nThree"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Banana");
-
- ImGui::Text("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("One\nTwo\nThree");
-
- ImGui::Button("HOP##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Banana");
+ ImGui::BeginGroup();
+ ImGui::Button("AAA");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("BBB");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::BeginGroup();
+ ImGui::Button("CCC");
+ ImGui::Button("DDD");
+ ImGui::EndGroup();
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("EEE");
+ ImGui::EndGroup();
+ if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+ ImGui::SetTooltip("First group hovered");
+ }
+ // Capture the group size and create widgets using the same size
+ ImVec2 size = ImGui::GetItemRectSize();
+ const float values[5] = { 0.5f, 0.20f, 0.80f, 0.60f, 0.25f };
+ ImGui::PlotHistogram("##values", values, IM_ARRAYSIZE(values), 0, NULL, 0.0f, 1.0f, size);
- ImGui::Button("HOP##2"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Banana");
+ ImGui::Button("ACTION", ImVec2((size.x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.x)*0.5f, size.y));
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("REACTION", ImVec2((size.x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.x)*0.5f, size.y));
+ ImGui::EndGroup();
+ ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("TEST##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("TEST"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::SmallButton("TEST##2");
+ ImGui::Button("LEVERAGE\nBUZZWORD", size);
+ ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); // If your line starts with text, call this to align it to upcoming widgets.
- ImGui::Text("Text aligned to Widget"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("Widget##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Widget"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::SmallButton("Widget##2"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Button("Widget##3");
+ if (ImGui::ListBoxHeader("List", size))
+ {
+ ImGui::Selectable("Selected", true);
+ ImGui::Selectable("Not Selected", false);
+ ImGui::ListBoxFooter();
+ }
- // Tree
- const float spacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x;
- ImGui::Button("Button##1");
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Node##1")) { for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++) ImGui::BulletText("Item %d..", i); ImGui::TreePop(); } // Dummy tree data
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); // Vertically align text node a bit lower so it'll be vertically centered with upcoming widget. Otherwise you can use SmallButton (smaller fit).
- bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode("Node##2"); // Common mistake to avoid: if we want to SameLine after TreeNode we need to do it before we add child content.
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); ImGui::Button("Button##2");
- if (node_open) { for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++) ImGui::BulletText("Item %d..", i); ImGui::TreePop(); } // Dummy tree data
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text Baseline Alignment"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("This is testing the vertical alignment that gets applied on text to keep it aligned with widgets. Lines only composed of text or \"small\" widgets fit in less vertical spaces than lines with normal widgets.");
+
+ ImGui::Text("One\nTwo\nThree"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Banana");
+
+ ImGui::Text("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("One\nTwo\nThree");
+
+ ImGui::Button("HOP##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Banana");
+
+ ImGui::Button("HOP##2"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Banana");
+
+ ImGui::Button("TEST##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("TEST"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SmallButton("TEST##2");
+
+ ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); // If your line starts with text, call this to align it to upcoming widgets.
+ ImGui::Text("Text aligned to Widget"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("Widget##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Widget"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SmallButton("Widget##2"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Button("Widget##3");
+
+ // Tree
+ const float spacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+ ImGui::Button("Button##1");
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Node##1")) { for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++) ImGui::BulletText("Item %d..", i); ImGui::TreePop(); } // Dummy tree data
+
+ ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); // Vertically align text node a bit lower so it'll be vertically centered with upcoming widget. Otherwise you can use SmallButton (smaller fit).
+ bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode("Node##2"); // Common mistake to avoid: if we want to SameLine after TreeNode we need to do it before we add child content.
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); ImGui::Button("Button##2");
+ if (node_open) { for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++) ImGui::BulletText("Item %d..", i); ImGui::TreePop(); } // Dummy tree data
+
+ // Bullet
+ ImGui::Button("Button##3");
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
+ ImGui::BulletText("Bullet text");
+
+ ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+ ImGui::BulletText("Node");
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); ImGui::Button("Button##4");
- // Bullet
- ImGui::Button("Button##3");
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
- ImGui::BulletText("Bullet text");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
- ImGui::BulletText("Node");
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); ImGui::Button("Button##4");
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Scrolling"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("Use SetScrollHereY() or SetScrollFromPosY() to scroll to a given position.");
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ static bool track = true;
+ static int track_line = 50, scroll_to_px = 200;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Track", &track);
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
+ ImGui::SameLine(130); track |= ImGui::DragInt("##line", &track_line, 0.25f, 0, 99, "Line = %d");
+ bool scroll_to = ImGui::Button("Scroll To Pos");
+ ImGui::SameLine(130); scroll_to |= ImGui::DragInt("##pos_y", &scroll_to_px, 1.00f, 0, 9999, "Y = %d px");
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ if (scroll_to) track = false;
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Scrolling"))
+ for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
{
- ImGui::TextWrapped("(Use SetScrollHere() or SetScrollFromPosY() to scroll to a given position.)");
- static bool track = true;
- static int track_line = 50, scroll_to_px = 200;
- ImGui::Checkbox("Track", &track);
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
- ImGui::SameLine(130); track |= ImGui::DragInt("##line", &track_line, 0.25f, 0, 99, "Line = %d");
- bool scroll_to = ImGui::Button("Scroll To Pos");
- ImGui::SameLine(130); scroll_to |= ImGui::DragInt("##pos_y", &scroll_to_px, 1.00f, 0, 9999, "Y = %d px");
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- if (scroll_to) track = false;
-
- for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+ if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::BeginGroup();
+ ImGui::Text("%s", i == 0 ? "Top" : i == 1 ? "25%" : i == 2 ? "Center" : i == 3 ? "75%" : "Bottom");
+ ImGui::BeginChild(ImGui::GetID((void*)(intptr_t)i), ImVec2(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.17f, 200.0f), true);
+ if (scroll_to)
+ ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(ImGui::GetCursorStartPos().y + scroll_to_px, i * 0.25f);
+ for (int line = 0; line < 100; line++)
{
- if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::BeginGroup();
- ImGui::Text("%s", i == 0 ? "Top" : i == 1 ? "25%" : i == 2 ? "Center" : i == 3 ? "75%" : "Bottom");
- ImGui::BeginChild(ImGui::GetID((void*)(intptr_t)i), ImVec2(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.17f, 200.0f), true);
- if (scroll_to)
- ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(ImGui::GetCursorStartPos().y + scroll_to_px, i * 0.25f);
- for (int line = 0; line < 100; line++)
+ if (track && line == track_line)
{
- if (track && line == track_line)
- {
- ImGui::TextColored(ImColor(255,255,0), "Line %d", line);
- ImGui::SetScrollHere(i * 0.25f); // 0.0f:top, 0.5f:center, 1.0f:bottom
- }
- else
- {
- ImGui::Text("Line %d", line);
- }
+ ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1,1,0,1), "Line %d", line);
+ ImGui::SetScrollHereY(i * 0.25f); // 0.0f:top, 0.5f:center, 1.0f:bottom
}
- float scroll_y = ImGui::GetScrollY(), scroll_max_y = ImGui::GetScrollMaxY();
- ImGui::EndChild();
- ImGui::Text("%.0f/%0.f", scroll_y, scroll_max_y);
- ImGui::EndGroup();
- }
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
-
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Horizontal Scrolling"))
- {
- ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::TextWrapped("Horizontal scrolling for a window has to be enabled explicitly via the ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar flag.");
- ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::TextWrapped("You may want to explicitly specify content width by calling SetNextWindowContentWidth() before Begin().");
- static int lines = 7;
- ImGui::SliderInt("Lines", &lines, 1, 15);
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding, 3.0f);
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2.0f, 1.0f));
- ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing()*7 + 30), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
- for (int line = 0; line < lines; line++)
- {
- // Display random stuff (for the sake of this trivial demo we are using basic Button+SameLine. If you want to create your own time line for a real application you may be better off
- // manipulating the cursor position yourself, aka using SetCursorPos/SetCursorScreenPos to position the widgets yourself. You may also want to use the lower-level ImDrawList API)
- int num_buttons = 10 + ((line & 1) ? line * 9 : line * 3);
- for (int n = 0; n < num_buttons; n++)
+ else
{
- if (n > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::PushID(n + line * 1000);
- char num_buf[16];
- sprintf(num_buf, "%d", n);
- const char* label = (!(n%15)) ? "FizzBuzz" : (!(n%3)) ? "Fizz" : (!(n%5)) ? "Buzz" : num_buf;
- float hue = n*0.05f;
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.6f, 0.6f));
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.7f, 0.7f));
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.8f, 0.8f));
- ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(40.0f + sinf((float)(line + n)) * 20.0f, 0.0f));
- ImGui::PopStyleColor(3);
- ImGui::PopID();
+ ImGui::Text("Line %d", line);
}
}
- float scroll_x = ImGui::GetScrollX(), scroll_max_x = ImGui::GetScrollMaxX();
+ float scroll_y = ImGui::GetScrollY(), scroll_max_y = ImGui::GetScrollMaxY();
ImGui::EndChild();
- ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
- float scroll_x_delta = 0.0f;
- ImGui::SmallButton("<<"); if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) scroll_x_delta = -ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime * 1000.0f; ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("Scroll from code"); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::SmallButton(">>"); if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) scroll_x_delta = +ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime * 1000.0f; ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Text("%.0f/%.0f", scroll_x, scroll_max_x);
- if (scroll_x_delta != 0.0f)
+ ImGui::Text("%.0f/%0.f", scroll_y, scroll_max_y);
+ ImGui::EndGroup();
+ }
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Horizontal Scrolling"))
+ {
+ ShowHelpMarker("Horizontal scrolling for a window has to be enabled explicitly via the ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar flag.\n\nYou may want to explicitly specify content width by calling SetNextWindowContentWidth() before Begin().");
+ static int lines = 7;
+ ImGui::SliderInt("Lines", &lines, 1, 15);
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding, 3.0f);
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2.0f, 1.0f));
+ ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() * 7 + 30), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
+ for (int line = 0; line < lines; line++)
+ {
+ // Display random stuff (for the sake of this trivial demo we are using basic Button+SameLine. If you want to create your own time line for a real application you may be better off
+ // manipulating the cursor position yourself, aka using SetCursorPos/SetCursorScreenPos to position the widgets yourself. You may also want to use the lower-level ImDrawList API)
+ int num_buttons = 10 + ((line & 1) ? line * 9 : line * 3);
+ for (int n = 0; n < num_buttons; n++)
{
- ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling"); // Demonstrate a trick: you can use Begin to set yourself in the context of another window (here we are already out of your child window)
- ImGui::SetScrollX(ImGui::GetScrollX() + scroll_x_delta);
- ImGui::End();
+ if (n > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushID(n + line * 1000);
+ char num_buf[16];
+ sprintf(num_buf, "%d", n);
+ const char* label = (!(n%15)) ? "FizzBuzz" : (!(n%3)) ? "Fizz" : (!(n%5)) ? "Buzz" : num_buf;
+ float hue = n*0.05f;
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.6f, 0.6f));
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.7f, 0.7f));
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.8f, 0.8f));
+ ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(40.0f + sinf((float)(line + n)) * 20.0f, 0.0f));
+ ImGui::PopStyleColor(3);
+ ImGui::PopID();
}
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
-
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Clipping"))
+ float scroll_x = ImGui::GetScrollX(), scroll_max_x = ImGui::GetScrollMaxX();
+ ImGui::EndChild();
+ ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+ float scroll_x_delta = 0.0f;
+ ImGui::SmallButton("<<"); if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) { scroll_x_delta = -ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime * 1000.0f; } ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("Scroll from code"); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::SmallButton(">>"); if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) { scroll_x_delta = +ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime * 1000.0f; } ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Text("%.0f/%.0f", scroll_x, scroll_max_x);
+ if (scroll_x_delta != 0.0f)
{
- static ImVec2 size(100, 100), offset(50, 20);
- ImGui::TextWrapped("On a per-widget basis we are occasionally clipping text CPU-side if it won't fit in its frame. Otherwise we are doing coarser clipping + passing a scissor rectangle to the renderer. The system is designed to try minimizing both execution and CPU/GPU rendering cost.");
- ImGui::DragFloat2("size", (float*)&size, 0.5f, 0.0f, 200.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::TextWrapped("(Click and drag)");
- ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
- ImVec4 clip_rect(pos.x, pos.y, pos.x+size.x, pos.y+size.y);
- ImGui::InvisibleButton("##dummy", size);
- if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging()) { offset.x += ImGui::GetIO().MouseDelta.x; offset.y += ImGui::GetIO().MouseDelta.y; }
- ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(pos, ImVec2(pos.x+size.x,pos.y+size.y), IM_COL32(90,90,120,255));
- ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddText(ImGui::GetFont(), ImGui::GetFontSize()*2.0f, ImVec2(pos.x+offset.x,pos.y+offset.y), IM_COL32(255,255,255,255), "Line 1 hello\nLine 2 clip me!", NULL, 0.0f, &clip_rect);
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling"); // Demonstrate a trick: you can use Begin to set yourself in the context of another window (here we are already out of your child window)
+ ImGui::SetScrollX(ImGui::GetScrollX() + scroll_x_delta);
+ ImGui::EndChild();
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Popups & Modal windows"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Clipping"))
{
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Popups"))
- {
- ImGui::TextWrapped("When a popup is active, it inhibits interacting with windows that are behind the popup. Clicking outside the popup closes it.");
+ static ImVec2 size(100, 100), offset(50, 20);
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("On a per-widget basis we are occasionally clipping text CPU-side if it won't fit in its frame. Otherwise we are doing coarser clipping + passing a scissor rectangle to the renderer. The system is designed to try minimizing both execution and CPU/GPU rendering cost.");
+ ImGui::DragFloat2("size", (float*)&size, 0.5f, 1.0f, 200.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("(Click and drag)");
+ ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+ ImVec4 clip_rect(pos.x, pos.y, pos.x + size.x, pos.y + size.y);
+ ImGui::InvisibleButton("##dummy", size);
+ if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging()) { offset.x += ImGui::GetIO().MouseDelta.x; offset.y += ImGui::GetIO().MouseDelta.y; }
+ ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(pos, ImVec2(pos.x + size.x, pos.y + size.y), IM_COL32(90, 90, 120, 255));
+ ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddText(ImGui::GetFont(), ImGui::GetFontSize()*2.0f, ImVec2(pos.x + offset.x, pos.y + offset.y), IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), "Line 1 hello\nLine 2 clip me!", NULL, 0.0f, &clip_rect);
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+}
- static int selected_fish = -1;
- const char* names[] = { "Bream", "Haddock", "Mackerel", "Pollock", "Tilefish" };
- static bool toggles[] = { true, false, false, false, false };
+static void ShowDemoWindowPopups()
+{
+ if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Popups & Modal windows"))
+ return;
- // Simple selection popup
- // (If you want to show the current selection inside the Button itself, you may want to build a string using the "###" operator to preserve a constant ID with a variable label)
- if (ImGui::Button("Select.."))
- ImGui::OpenPopup("select");
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::TextUnformatted(selected_fish == -1 ? "<None>" : names[selected_fish]);
- if (ImGui::BeginPopup("select"))
- {
- ImGui::Text("Aquarium");
- ImGui::Separator();
- for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++)
- if (ImGui::Selectable(names[i]))
- selected_fish = i;
- ImGui::EndPopup();
+ // The properties of popups windows are:
+ // - They block normal mouse hovering detection outside them. (*)
+ // - Unless modal, they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
+ // - Their visibility state (~bool) is held internally by imgui instead of being held by the programmer as we are used to with regular Begin() calls.
+ // User can manipulate the visibility state by calling OpenPopup().
+ // (*) One can use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) to bypass it and detect hovering even when normally blocked by a popup.
+ // Those three properties are connected. The library needs to hold their visibility state because it can close popups at any time.
+
+ // Typical use for regular windows:
+ // bool my_tool_is_active = false; if (ImGui::Button("Open")) my_tool_is_active = true; [...] if (my_tool_is_active) Begin("My Tool", &my_tool_is_active) { [...] } End();
+ // Typical use for popups:
+ // if (ImGui::Button("Open")) ImGui::OpenPopup("MyPopup"); if (ImGui::BeginPopup("MyPopup") { [...] EndPopup(); }
+
+ // With popups we have to go through a library call (here OpenPopup) to manipulate the visibility state.
+ // This may be a bit confusing at first but it should quickly make sense. Follow on the examples below.
+
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Popups"))
+ {
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("When a popup is active, it inhibits interacting with windows that are behind the popup. Clicking outside the popup closes it.");
+
+ static int selected_fish = -1;
+ const char* names[] = { "Bream", "Haddock", "Mackerel", "Pollock", "Tilefish" };
+ static bool toggles[] = { true, false, false, false, false };
+
+ // Simple selection popup
+ // (If you want to show the current selection inside the Button itself, you may want to build a string using the "###" operator to preserve a constant ID with a variable label)
+ if (ImGui::Button("Select.."))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("my_select_popup");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::TextUnformatted(selected_fish == -1 ? "<None>" : names[selected_fish]);
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_select_popup"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("Aquarium");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++)
+ if (ImGui::Selectable(names[i]))
+ selected_fish = i;
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
+
+ // Showing a menu with toggles
+ if (ImGui::Button("Toggle.."))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("my_toggle_popup");
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_toggle_popup"))
+ {
+ for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++)
+ ImGui::MenuItem(names[i], "", &toggles[i]);
+ if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Sub-menu"))
+ {
+ ImGui::MenuItem("Click me");
+ ImGui::EndMenu();
}
- // Showing a menu with toggles
- if (ImGui::Button("Toggle.."))
- ImGui::OpenPopup("toggle");
- if (ImGui::BeginPopup("toggle"))
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("Tooltip here");
+ if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+ ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip over a popup");
+
+ if (ImGui::Button("Stacked Popup"))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("another popup");
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopup("another popup"))
{
for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++)
ImGui::MenuItem(names[i], "", &toggles[i]);
ImGui::MenuItem("Click me");
ImGui::EndMenu();
}
-
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::Text("Tooltip here");
- if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
- ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip over a popup");
-
- if (ImGui::Button("Stacked Popup"))
- ImGui::OpenPopup("another popup");
- if (ImGui::BeginPopup("another popup"))
- {
- for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++)
- ImGui::MenuItem(names[i], "", &toggles[i]);
- if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Sub-menu"))
- {
- ImGui::MenuItem("Click me");
- ImGui::EndMenu();
- }
- ImGui::EndPopup();
- }
- ImGui::EndPopup();
- }
-
- if (ImGui::Button("Popup Menu.."))
- ImGui::OpenPopup("FilePopup");
- if (ImGui::BeginPopup("FilePopup"))
- {
- ShowExampleMenuFile();
ImGui::EndPopup();
}
-
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Context menus"))
+ // Call the more complete ShowExampleMenuFile which we use in various places of this demo
+ if (ImGui::Button("File Menu.."))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("my_file_popup");
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_file_popup"))
{
- // BeginPopupContextItem() is a helper to provide common/simple popup behavior of essentially doing:
- // if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(0))
- // OpenPopup(id);
- // return BeginPopup(id);
- // For more advanced uses you may want to replicate and cuztomize this code. This the comments inside BeginPopupContextItem() implementation.
- static float value = 0.5f;
- ImGui::Text("Value = %.3f (<-- right-click here)", value);
- if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem("item context menu"))
- {
- if (ImGui::Selectable("Set to zero")) value = 0.0f;
- if (ImGui::Selectable("Set to PI")) value = 3.1415f;
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1);
- ImGui::DragFloat("##Value", &value, 0.1f, 0.0f, 0.0f);
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::EndPopup();
- }
+ ShowExampleMenuFile();
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
- static char name[32] = "Label1";
- char buf[64]; sprintf(buf, "Button: %s###Button", name); // ### operator override ID ignoring the preceding label
- ImGui::Button(buf);
- if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) // When used after an item that has an ID (here the Button), we can skip providing an ID to BeginPopupContextItem().
- {
- ImGui::Text("Edit name:");
- ImGui::InputText("##edit", name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name));
- if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
- ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
- ImGui::EndPopup();
- }
- ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("(<-- right-click here)");
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Context menus"))
+ {
+ // BeginPopupContextItem() is a helper to provide common/simple popup behavior of essentially doing:
+ // if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseReleased(0))
+ // OpenPopup(id);
+ // return BeginPopup(id);
+ // For more advanced uses you may want to replicate and cuztomize this code. This the comments inside BeginPopupContextItem() implementation.
+ static float value = 0.5f;
+ ImGui::Text("Value = %.3f (<-- right-click here)", value);
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem("item context menu"))
+ {
+ if (ImGui::Selectable("Set to zero")) value = 0.0f;
+ if (ImGui::Selectable("Set to PI")) value = 3.1415f;
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("##Value", &value, 0.1f, 0.0f, 0.0f);
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Modals"))
+ // We can also use OpenPopupOnItemClick() which is the same as BeginPopupContextItem() but without the Begin call.
+ // So here we will make it that clicking on the text field with the right mouse button (1) will toggle the visibility of the popup above.
+ ImGui::Text("(You can also right-click me to the same popup as above.)");
+ ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("item context menu", 1);
+
+ // When used after an item that has an ID (here the Button), we can skip providing an ID to BeginPopupContextItem().
+ // BeginPopupContextItem() will use the last item ID as the popup ID.
+ // In addition here, we want to include your editable label inside the button label. We use the ### operator to override the ID (read FAQ about ID for details)
+ static char name[32] = "Label1";
+ char buf[64]; sprintf(buf, "Button: %s###Button", name); // ### operator override ID ignoring the preceding label
+ ImGui::Button(buf);
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem())
{
- ImGui::TextWrapped("Modal windows are like popups but the user cannot close them by clicking outside the window.");
+ ImGui::Text("Edit name:");
+ ImGui::InputText("##edit", name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name));
+ if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
+ ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("(<-- right-click here)");
- if (ImGui::Button("Delete.."))
- ImGui::OpenPopup("Delete?");
- if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Delete?", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
- {
- ImGui::Text("All those beautiful files will be deleted.\nThis operation cannot be undone!\n\n");
- ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- //static int dummy_i = 0;
- //ImGui::Combo("Combo", &dummy_i, "Delete\0Delete harder\0");
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Modals"))
+ {
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("Modal windows are like popups but the user cannot close them by clicking outside the window.");
- static bool dont_ask_me_next_time = false;
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0,0));
- ImGui::Checkbox("Don't ask me next time", &dont_ask_me_next_time);
- ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+ if (ImGui::Button("Delete.."))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("Delete?");
- if (ImGui::Button("OK", ImVec2(120,0))) { ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); }
- ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
- ImGui::SameLine();
- if (ImGui::Button("Cancel", ImVec2(120,0))) { ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); }
- ImGui::EndPopup();
- }
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Delete?", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("All those beautiful files will be deleted.\nThis operation cannot be undone!\n\n");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+
+ //static int dummy_i = 0;
+ //ImGui::Combo("Combo", &dummy_i, "Delete\0Delete harder\0");
+
+ static bool dont_ask_me_next_time = false;
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Don't ask me next time", &dont_ask_me_next_time);
+ ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+
+ if (ImGui::Button("OK", ImVec2(120, 0))) { ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); }
+ ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::Button("Cancel", ImVec2(120, 0))) { ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); }
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
- if (ImGui::Button("Stacked modals.."))
- ImGui::OpenPopup("Stacked 1");
- if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Stacked 1"))
+ if (ImGui::Button("Stacked modals.."))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("Stacked 1");
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Stacked 1", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+ {
+ if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
{
- ImGui::Text("Hello from Stacked The First\nUsing style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg] behind it.");
- static int item = 1;
- ImGui::Combo("Combo", &item, "aaaa\0bbbb\0cccc\0dddd\0eeee\0\0");
- static float color[4] = { 0.4f,0.7f,0.0f,0.5f };
- ImGui::ColorEdit4("color", color); // This is to test behavior of stacked regular popups over a modal
-
- if (ImGui::Button("Add another modal.."))
- ImGui::OpenPopup("Stacked 2");
- if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Stacked 2"))
+ if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
{
- ImGui::Text("Hello from Stacked The Second!");
- if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
- ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
- ImGui::EndPopup();
+ if (ImGui::MenuItem("Dummy menu item")) {}
+ ImGui::EndMenu();
}
+ ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+ }
+ ImGui::Text("Hello from Stacked The First\nUsing style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg] behind it.");
+
+ // Testing behavior of widgets stacking their own regular popups over the modal.
+ static int item = 1;
+ static float color[4] = { 0.4f,0.7f,0.0f,0.5f };
+ ImGui::Combo("Combo", &item, "aaaa\0bbbb\0cccc\0dddd\0eeee\0\0");
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("color", color);
+
+ if (ImGui::Button("Add another modal.."))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("Stacked 2");
+ // Also demonstrate passing a bool* to BeginPopupModal(), this will create a regular close button which will close the popup.
+ // Note that the visibility state of popups is owned by imgui, so the input value of the bool actually doesn't matter here.
+ bool dummy_open = true;
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Stacked 2", &dummy_open))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("Hello from Stacked The Second!");
if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
ImGui::EndPopup();
}
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
+ ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
}
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Menus inside a regular window"))
- {
- ImGui::TextWrapped("Below we are testing adding menu items to a regular window. It's rather unusual but should work!");
- ImGui::Separator();
- // NB: As a quirk in this very specific example, we want to differentiate the parent of this menu from the parent of the various popup menus above.
- // To do so we are encloding the items in a PushID()/PopID() block to make them two different menusets. If we don't, opening any popup above and hovering our menu here
- // would open it. This is because once a menu is active, we allow to switch to a sibling menu by just hovering on it, which is the desired behavior for regular menus.
- ImGui::PushID("foo");
- ImGui::MenuItem("Menu item", "CTRL+M");
- if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu inside a regular window"))
- {
- ShowExampleMenuFile();
- ImGui::EndMenu();
- }
- ImGui::PopID();
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Columns"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Menus inside a regular window"))
{
- ImGui::PushID("Columns");
-
- // Basic columns
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("Below we are testing adding menu items to a regular window. It's rather unusual but should work!");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ // NB: As a quirk in this very specific example, we want to differentiate the parent of this menu from the parent of the various popup menus above.
+ // To do so we are encloding the items in a PushID()/PopID() block to make them two different menusets. If we don't, opening any popup above and hovering our menu here
+ // would open it. This is because once a menu is active, we allow to switch to a sibling menu by just hovering on it, which is the desired behavior for regular menus.
+ ImGui::PushID("foo");
+ ImGui::MenuItem("Menu item", "CTRL+M");
+ if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu inside a regular window"))
{
- ImGui::Text("Without border:");
- ImGui::Columns(3, "mycolumns3", false); // 3-ways, no border
- ImGui::Separator();
- for (int n = 0; n < 14; n++)
- {
- char label[32];
- sprintf(label, "Item %d", n);
- if (ImGui::Selectable(label)) {}
- //if (ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(-1,0))) {}
- ImGui::NextColumn();
- }
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- ImGui::Separator();
-
- ImGui::Text("With border:");
- ImGui::Columns(4, "mycolumns"); // 4-ways, with border
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::Text("ID"); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text("Name"); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text("Path"); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text("Hovered"); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Separator();
- const char* names[3] = { "One", "Two", "Three" };
- const char* paths[3] = { "/path/one", "/path/two", "/path/three" };
- static int selected = -1;
- for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++)
- {
- char label[32];
- sprintf(label, "%04d", i);
- if (ImGui::Selectable(label, selected == i, ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns))
- selected = i;
- bool hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
- ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text(names[i]); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text(paths[i]); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text("%d", hovered); ImGui::NextColumn();
- }
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ShowExampleMenuFile();
+ ImGui::EndMenu();
}
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+}
- // Create multiple items in a same cell before switching to next column
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Mixed items"))
- {
- ImGui::Columns(3, "mixed");
- ImGui::Separator();
-
- ImGui::Text("Hello");
- ImGui::Button("Banana");
- ImGui::NextColumn();
+static void ShowDemoWindowColumns()
+{
+ if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Columns"))
+ return;
- ImGui::Text("ImGui");
- ImGui::Button("Apple");
- static float foo = 1.0f;
- ImGui::InputFloat("red", &foo, 0.05f, 0, "%.3f");
- ImGui::Text("An extra line here.");
- ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::PushID("Columns");
- ImGui::Text("Sailor");
- ImGui::Button("Corniflower");
- static float bar = 1.0f;
- ImGui::InputFloat("blue", &bar, 0.05f, 0, "%.3f");
+ // Basic columns
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("Without border:");
+ ImGui::Columns(3, "mycolumns3", false); // 3-ways, no border
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ for (int n = 0; n < 14; n++)
+ {
+ char label[32];
+ sprintf(label, "Item %d", n);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable(label)) {}
+ //if (ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(-1,0))) {}
ImGui::NextColumn();
-
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category A")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category B")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
- if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category C")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::Separator();
- // Word wrapping
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Word-wrapping"))
+ ImGui::Text("With border:");
+ ImGui::Columns(4, "mycolumns"); // 4-ways, with border
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("ID"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text("Name"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text("Path"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text("Hovered"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ const char* names[3] = { "One", "Two", "Three" };
+ const char* paths[3] = { "/path/one", "/path/two", "/path/three" };
+ static int selected = -1;
+ for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++)
{
- ImGui::Columns(2, "word-wrapping");
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::TextWrapped("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.");
- ImGui::TextWrapped("Hello Left");
+ char label[32];
+ sprintf(label, "%04d", i);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable(label, selected == i, ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns))
+ selected = i;
+ bool hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::TextWrapped("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.");
- ImGui::TextWrapped("Hello Right");
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Text(names[i]); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text(paths[i]); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text("%d", hovered); ImGui::NextColumn();
}
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+
+ // Create multiple items in a same cell before switching to next column
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Mixed items"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Columns(3, "mixed");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+
+ ImGui::Text("Hello");
+ ImGui::Button("Banana");
+ ImGui::NextColumn();
+
+ ImGui::Text("ImGui");
+ ImGui::Button("Apple");
+ static float foo = 1.0f;
+ ImGui::InputFloat("red", &foo, 0.05f, 0, "%.3f");
+ ImGui::Text("An extra line here.");
+ ImGui::NextColumn();
+
+ ImGui::Text("Sailor");
+ ImGui::Button("Corniflower");
+ static float bar = 1.0f;
+ ImGui::InputFloat("blue", &bar, 0.05f, 0, "%.3f");
+ ImGui::NextColumn();
+
+ if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category A")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
+ if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category B")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
+ if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category C")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+
+ // Word wrapping
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Word-wrapping"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Columns(2, "word-wrapping");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.");
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("Hello Left");
+ ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.");
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("Hello Right");
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Borders"))
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Borders"))
+ {
+ // NB: Future columns API should allow automatic horizontal borders.
+ static bool h_borders = true;
+ static bool v_borders = true;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("horizontal", &h_borders);
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::Checkbox("vertical", &v_borders);
+ ImGui::Columns(4, NULL, v_borders);
+ for (int i = 0; i < 4*3; i++)
{
- // NB: Future columns API should allow automatic horizontal borders.
- static bool h_borders = true;
- static bool v_borders = true;
- ImGui::Checkbox("horizontal", &h_borders);
- ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::Checkbox("vertical", &v_borders);
- ImGui::Columns(4, NULL, v_borders);
- for (int i = 0; i < 4*3; i++)
- {
- if (h_borders && ImGui::GetColumnIndex() == 0)
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::Text("%c%c%c", 'a'+i, 'a'+i, 'a'+i);
- ImGui::Text("Width %.2f\nOffset %.2f", ImGui::GetColumnWidth(), ImGui::GetColumnOffset());
- ImGui::NextColumn();
- }
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- if (h_borders)
+ if (h_borders && ImGui::GetColumnIndex() == 0)
ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Text("%c%c%c", 'a'+i, 'a'+i, 'a'+i);
+ ImGui::Text("Width %.2f\nOffset %.2f", ImGui::GetColumnWidth(), ImGui::GetColumnOffset());
+ ImGui::NextColumn();
}
-
- // Scrolling columns
- /*
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Vertical Scrolling"))
- {
- ImGui::BeginChild("##header", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()+ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y));
- ImGui::Columns(3);
- ImGui::Text("ID"); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text("Name"); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text("Path"); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ if (h_borders)
ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::EndChild();
- ImGui::BeginChild("##scrollingregion", ImVec2(0, 60));
- ImGui::Columns(3);
- for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
- {
- ImGui::Text("%04d", i); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text("Foobar"); ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Text("/path/foobar/%04d/", i); ImGui::NextColumn();
- }
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- ImGui::EndChild();
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
- */
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Horizontal Scrolling"))
+ // Scrolling columns
+ /*
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Vertical Scrolling"))
+ {
+ ImGui::BeginChild("##header", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()+ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y));
+ ImGui::Columns(3);
+ ImGui::Text("ID"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text("Name"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text("Path"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::EndChild();
+ ImGui::BeginChild("##scrollingregion", ImVec2(0, 60));
+ ImGui::Columns(3);
+ for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
{
- ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(1500.0f, 0.0f));
- ImGui::BeginChild("##ScrollingRegion", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
- ImGui::Columns(10);
- int ITEMS_COUNT = 2000;
- ImGuiListClipper clipper(ITEMS_COUNT); // Also demonstrate using the clipper for large list
- while (clipper.Step())
- {
- for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
- for (int j = 0; j < 10; j++)
- {
- ImGui::Text("Line %d Column %d...", i, j);
- ImGui::NextColumn();
- }
- }
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- ImGui::EndChild();
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::Text("%04d", i); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text("Foobar"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Text("/path/foobar/%04d/", i); ImGui::NextColumn();
}
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::EndChild();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ */
- bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode("Tree within single cell");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("NB: Tree node must be poped before ending the cell. There's no storage of state per-cell.");
- if (node_open)
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Horizontal Scrolling"))
+ {
+ ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(1500.0f, 0.0f));
+ ImGui::BeginChild("##ScrollingRegion", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
+ ImGui::Columns(10);
+ int ITEMS_COUNT = 2000;
+ ImGuiListClipper clipper(ITEMS_COUNT); // Also demonstrate using the clipper for large list
+ while (clipper.Step())
{
- ImGui::Columns(2, "tree items");
- ImGui::Separator();
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Hello")) { ImGui::BulletText("Sailor"); ImGui::TreePop(); } ImGui::NextColumn();
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Bonjour")) { ImGui::BulletText("Marin"); ImGui::TreePop(); } ImGui::NextColumn();
- ImGui::Columns(1);
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+ for (int j = 0; j < 10; j++)
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("Line %d Column %d...", i, j);
+ ImGui::NextColumn();
+ }
}
- ImGui::PopID();
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::EndChild();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+
+ bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode("Tree within single cell");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("NB: Tree node must be poped before ending the cell. There's no storage of state per-cell.");
+ if (node_open)
+ {
+ ImGui::Columns(2, "tree items");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Hello")) { ImGui::BulletText("Sailor"); ImGui::TreePop(); } ImGui::NextColumn();
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Bonjour")) { ImGui::BulletText("Marin"); ImGui::TreePop(); } ImGui::NextColumn();
+ ImGui::Columns(1);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::PopID();
+}
+static void ShowDemoWindowMisc()
+{
if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Filtering"))
{
static ImGuiTextFilter filter;
ImGui::Text("WantSetMousePos: %d", io.WantSetMousePos);
ImGui::Text("NavActive: %d, NavVisible: %d", io.NavActive, io.NavVisible);
- ImGui::Checkbox("io.MouseDrawCursor", &io.MouseDrawCursor);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Instruct ImGui to render a mouse cursor for you in software. Note that a mouse cursor rendered via your application GPU rendering path will feel more laggy than hardware cursor, but will be more in sync with your other visuals.\n\nSome desktop applications may use both kinds of cursors (e.g. enable software cursor only when resizing/dragging something).");
-
- ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableGamepad [beta]", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad);
- ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableKeyboard [beta]", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard);
- ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableSetMousePos", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. See comment for ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos.");
- ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NoMouseCursorChange", (unsigned int *)&io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Instruct back-end to not alter mouse cursor shape and visibility.");
-
if (ImGui::TreeNode("Keyboard, Mouse & Navigation State"))
{
if (ImGui::IsMousePosValid())
// Use >= 0 parameter to SetKeyboardFocusHere() to focus an upcoming item
static float f3[3] = { 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f };
int focus_ahead = -1;
- if (ImGui::Button("Focus on X")) focus_ahead = 0; ImGui::SameLine();
- if (ImGui::Button("Focus on Y")) focus_ahead = 1; ImGui::SameLine();
- if (ImGui::Button("Focus on Z")) focus_ahead = 2;
+ if (ImGui::Button("Focus on X")) { focus_ahead = 0; } ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::Button("Focus on Y")) { focus_ahead = 1; } ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::Button("Focus on Z")) { focus_ahead = 2; }
if (focus_ahead != -1) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(focus_ahead);
ImGui::SliderFloat3("Float3", &f3[0], 0.0f, 1.0f);
const char* mouse_cursors_names[] = { "Arrow", "TextInput", "Move", "ResizeNS", "ResizeEW", "ResizeNESW", "ResizeNWSE", "Hand" };
IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(mouse_cursors_names) == ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT);
- ImGui::Text("Current mouse cursor = %d: %s", ImGui::GetMouseCursor(), mouse_cursors_names[ImGui::GetMouseCursor()]);
- ImGui::Text("Hover to see mouse cursors:");
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Your application can render a different mouse cursor based on what ImGui::GetMouseCursor() returns. If software cursor rendering (io.MouseDrawCursor) is set ImGui will draw the right cursor for you, otherwise your backend needs to handle it.");
- for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT; i++)
- {
- char label[32];
- sprintf(label, "Mouse cursor %d: %s", i, mouse_cursors_names[i]);
- ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::Selectable(label, false);
- if (ImGui::IsItemHovered() || ImGui::IsItemFocused())
- ImGui::SetMouseCursor(i);
- }
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::Text("Current mouse cursor = %d: %s", ImGui::GetMouseCursor(), mouse_cursors_names[ImGui::GetMouseCursor()]);
+ ImGui::Text("Hover to see mouse cursors:");
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Your application can render a different mouse cursor based on what ImGui::GetMouseCursor() returns. If software cursor rendering (io.MouseDrawCursor) is set ImGui will draw the right cursor for you, otherwise your backend needs to handle it.");
+ for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT; i++)
+ {
+ char label[32];
+ sprintf(label, "Mouse cursor %d: %s", i, mouse_cursors_names[i]);
+ ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::Selectable(label, false);
+ if (ImGui::IsItemHovered() || ImGui::IsItemFocused())
+ ImGui::SetMouseCursor(i);
+ }
+ ImGui::TreePop();
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] About Window / ShowAboutWindow()
+// Access from ImGui Demo -> Help -> About
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open)
+{
+ if (!ImGui::Begin("About Dear ImGui", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+ {
+ ImGui::End();
+ return;
+ }
+ ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s", ImGui::GetVersion());
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("By Omar Cornut and all dear imgui contributors.");
+ ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui is licensed under the MIT License, see LICENSE for more information.");
+
+ static bool show_config_info = false;
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Config/Build Information", &show_config_info);
+ if (show_config_info)
+ {
+ ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+ ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
+
+ bool copy_to_clipboard = ImGui::Button("Copy to clipboard");
+ ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGui::GetID("cfginfos"), ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 18), ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
+ if (copy_to_clipboard)
+ ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+
+ ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s (%d)", IMGUI_VERSION, IMGUI_VERSION_NUM);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("sizeof(size_t): %d, sizeof(ImDrawIdx): %d, sizeof(ImDrawVert): %d", (int)sizeof(size_t), (int)sizeof(ImDrawIdx), (int)sizeof(ImDrawVert));
+ ImGui::Text("define: __cplusplus=%d", (int)__cplusplus);
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+ ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS
+ ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS
+ ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS
+ ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS
+ ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_MATH_FUNCTIONS
+ ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_MATH_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS
+ ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR
+ ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR");
+#endif
+#ifdef _WIN32
+ ImGui::Text("define: _WIN32");
+#endif
+#ifdef _WIN64
+ ImGui::Text("define: _WIN64");
+#endif
+#ifdef __linux__
+ ImGui::Text("define: __linux__");
+#endif
+#ifdef __APPLE__
+ ImGui::Text("define: __APPLE__");
+#endif
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+ ImGui::Text("define: _MSC_VER=%d", _MSC_VER);
+#endif
+#ifdef __MINGW32__
+ ImGui::Text("define: __MINGW32__");
+#endif
+#ifdef __MINGW64__
+ ImGui::Text("define: __MINGW64__");
+#endif
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+ ImGui::Text("define: __GNUC__=%d", (int)__GNUC__);
+#endif
+#ifdef __clang_version__
+ ImGui::Text("define: __clang_version__=%s", __clang_version__);
+#endif
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("io.BackendPlatformName: %s", io.BackendPlatformName ? io.BackendPlatformName : "NULL");
+ ImGui::Text("io.BackendRendererName: %s", io.BackendRendererName ? io.BackendRendererName : "NULL");
+ ImGui::Text("io.ConfigFlags: 0x%08X", io.ConfigFlags);
+ if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) ImGui::Text(" NavEnableKeyboard");
+ if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) ImGui::Text(" NavEnableGamepad");
+ if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) ImGui::Text(" NavEnableSetMousePos");
+ if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard) ImGui::Text(" NavNoCaptureKeyboard");
+ if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse) ImGui::Text(" NoMouse");
+ if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange) ImGui::Text(" NoMouseCursorChange");
+ if (io.MouseDrawCursor) ImGui::Text("io.MouseDrawCursor");
+ if (io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors");
+ if (io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink");
+ if (io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges");
+ if (io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly");
+ ImGui::Text("io.BackendFlags: 0x%08X", io.BackendFlags);
+ if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) ImGui::Text(" HasGamepad");
+ if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) ImGui::Text(" HasMouseCursors");
+ if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos) ImGui::Text(" HasSetMousePos");
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("io.Fonts: %d fonts, Flags: 0x%08X, TexSize: %d,%d", io.Fonts->Fonts.Size, io.Fonts->Flags, io.Fonts->TexWidth, io.Fonts->TexHeight);
+ ImGui::Text("io.DisplaySize: %.2f,%.2f", io.DisplaySize.x, io.DisplaySize.y);
+ ImGui::Text("io.DisplayFramebufferScale: %.2f,%.2f", io.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, io.DisplayFramebufferScale.y);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("style.WindowPadding: %.2f,%.2f", style.WindowPadding.x, style.WindowPadding.y);
+ ImGui::Text("style.WindowBorderSize: %.2f", style.WindowBorderSize);
+ ImGui::Text("style.FramePadding: %.2f,%.2f", style.FramePadding.x, style.FramePadding.y);
+ ImGui::Text("style.FrameRounding: %.2f", style.FrameRounding);
+ ImGui::Text("style.FrameBorderSize: %.2f", style.FrameBorderSize);
+ ImGui::Text("style.ItemSpacing: %.2f,%.2f", style.ItemSpacing.x, style.ItemSpacing.y);
+ ImGui::Text("style.ItemInnerSpacing: %.2f,%.2f", style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, style.ItemInnerSpacing.y);
+
+ if (copy_to_clipboard)
+ ImGui::LogFinish();
+ ImGui::EndChildFrame();
}
-
- // End of ShowDemoWindow()
ImGui::End();
}
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Style Editor / ShowStyleEditor()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
// Demo helper function to select among default colors. See ShowStyleEditor() for more advanced options.
// Here we use the simplified Combo() api that packs items into a single literal string. Useful for quick combo boxes where the choices are known locally.
bool ImGui::ShowStyleSelector(const char* label)
if (ImGui::BeginCombo(label, font_current->GetDebugName()))
{
for (int n = 0; n < io.Fonts->Fonts.Size; n++)
- if (ImGui::Selectable(io.Fonts->Fonts[n]->GetDebugName(), io.Fonts->Fonts[n] == font_current))
- io.FontDefault = io.Fonts->Fonts[n];
+ {
+ ImFont* font = io.Fonts->Fonts[n];
+ ImGui::PushID((void*)font);
+ if (ImGui::Selectable(font->GetDebugName(), font == font_current))
+ io.FontDefault = font;
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ }
ImGui::EndCombo();
}
ImGui::SameLine();
ImGui::SameLine();
ShowHelpMarker("Save/Revert in local non-persistent storage. Default Colors definition are not affected. Use \"Export Colors\" below to save them somewhere.");
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Rendering"))
- {
- ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased lines", &style.AntiAliasedLines); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("When disabling anti-aliasing lines, you'll probably want to disable borders in your style as well.");
- ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased fill", &style.AntiAliasedFill);
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
- ImGui::DragFloat("Curve Tessellation Tolerance", &style.CurveTessellationTol, 0.02f, 0.10f, FLT_MAX, NULL, 2.0f);
- if (style.CurveTessellationTol < 0.0f) style.CurveTessellationTol = 0.10f;
- ImGui::DragFloat("Global Alpha", &style.Alpha, 0.005f, 0.20f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); // Not exposing zero here so user doesn't "lose" the UI (zero alpha clips all widgets). But application code could have a toggle to switch between zero and non-zero.
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
-
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Settings"))
- {
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowPadding", (float*)&style.WindowPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupRounding", &style.PopupRounding, 0.0f, 16.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("FramePadding", (float*)&style.FramePadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemInnerSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemInnerSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("TouchExtraPadding", (float*)&style.TouchExtraPadding, 0.0f, 10.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("IndentSpacing", &style.IndentSpacing, 0.0f, 30.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("ScrollbarSize", &style.ScrollbarSize, 1.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabMinSize", &style.GrabMinSize, 1.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::Text("BorderSize");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowBorderSize", &style.WindowBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("ChildBorderSize", &style.ChildBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupBorderSize", &style.PopupBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameBorderSize", &style.FrameBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::Text("Rounding");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowRounding", &style.WindowRounding, 0.0f, 14.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("ChildRounding", &style.ChildRounding, 0.0f, 16.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameRounding", &style.FrameRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("ScrollbarRounding", &style.ScrollbarRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabRounding", &style.GrabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::Text("Alignment");
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowTitleAlign", (float*)&style.WindowTitleAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f");
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("ButtonTextAlign", (float*)&style.ButtonTextAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Alignment applies when a button is larger than its text content.");
- ImGui::Text("Safe Area Padding"); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Adjust if you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV where scaling has not been configured).");
- ImGui::SliderFloat2("DisplaySafeAreaPadding", (float*)&style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding, 0.0f, 30.0f, "%.0f");
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::Separator();
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Colors"))
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##tabs", ImGuiTabBarFlags_None))
{
- static int output_dest = 0;
- static bool output_only_modified = true;
- if (ImGui::Button("Export Unsaved"))
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Sizes"))
{
- if (output_dest == 0)
- ImGui::LogToClipboard();
- else
- ImGui::LogToTTY();
- ImGui::LogText("ImVec4* colors = ImGui::GetStyle().Colors;" IM_NEWLINE);
- for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++)
- {
- const ImVec4& col = style.Colors[i];
- const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i);
- if (!output_only_modified || memcmp(&col, &ref->Colors[i], sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0)
- ImGui::LogText("colors[ImGuiCol_%s]%*s= ImVec4(%.2ff, %.2ff, %.2ff, %.2ff);" IM_NEWLINE, name, 23-(int)strlen(name), "", col.x, col.y, col.z, col.w);
- }
- ImGui::LogFinish();
+ ImGui::Text("Main");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowPadding", (float*)&style.WindowPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("FramePadding", (float*)&style.FramePadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemInnerSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemInnerSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("TouchExtraPadding", (float*)&style.TouchExtraPadding, 0.0f, 10.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("IndentSpacing", &style.IndentSpacing, 0.0f, 30.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("ScrollbarSize", &style.ScrollbarSize, 1.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabMinSize", &style.GrabMinSize, 1.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::Text("Borders");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowBorderSize", &style.WindowBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("ChildBorderSize", &style.ChildBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupBorderSize", &style.PopupBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameBorderSize", &style.FrameBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("TabBorderSize", &style.TabBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::Text("Rounding");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowRounding", &style.WindowRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("ChildRounding", &style.ChildRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameRounding", &style.FrameRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupRounding", &style.PopupRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("ScrollbarRounding", &style.ScrollbarRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabRounding", &style.GrabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat("TabRounding", &style.TabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::Text("Alignment");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowTitleAlign", (float*)&style.WindowTitleAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("ButtonTextAlign", (float*)&style.ButtonTextAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Alignment applies when a button is larger than its text content.");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("SelectableTextAlign", (float*)&style.SelectableTextAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Alignment applies when a selectable is larger than its text content.");
+ ImGui::Text("Safe Area Padding"); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Adjust if you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV where scaling has not been configured).");
+ ImGui::SliderFloat2("DisplaySafeAreaPadding", (float*)&style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding, 0.0f, 30.0f, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
}
- ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::PushItemWidth(120); ImGui::Combo("##output_type", &output_dest, "To Clipboard\0To TTY\0"); ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Checkbox("Only Modified Colors", &output_only_modified);
- ImGui::Text("Tip: Left-click on colored square to open color picker,\nRight-click to open edit options menu.");
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Colors"))
+ {
+ static int output_dest = 0;
+ static bool output_only_modified = true;
+ if (ImGui::Button("Export Unsaved"))
+ {
+ if (output_dest == 0)
+ ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+ else
+ ImGui::LogToTTY();
+ ImGui::LogText("ImVec4* colors = ImGui::GetStyle().Colors;" IM_NEWLINE);
+ for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++)
+ {
+ const ImVec4& col = style.Colors[i];
+ const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i);
+ if (!output_only_modified || memcmp(&col, &ref->Colors[i], sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0)
+ ImGui::LogText("colors[ImGuiCol_%s]%*s= ImVec4(%.2ff, %.2ff, %.2ff, %.2ff);" IM_NEWLINE, name, 23 - (int)strlen(name), "", col.x, col.y, col.z, col.w);
+ }
+ ImGui::LogFinish();
+ }
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::PushItemWidth(120); ImGui::Combo("##output_type", &output_dest, "To Clipboard\0To TTY\0"); ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Checkbox("Only Modified Colors", &output_only_modified);
- static ImGuiTextFilter filter;
- filter.Draw("Filter colors", 200);
+ static ImGuiTextFilter filter;
+ filter.Draw("Filter colors", ImGui::GetFontSize() * 16);
- static ImGuiColorEditFlags alpha_flags = 0;
- ImGui::RadioButton("Opaque", &alpha_flags, 0); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("Alpha", &alpha_flags, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview); ImGui::SameLine();
- ImGui::RadioButton("Both", &alpha_flags, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf);
+ static ImGuiColorEditFlags alpha_flags = 0;
+ ImGui::RadioButton("Opaque", &alpha_flags, 0); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::RadioButton("Alpha", &alpha_flags, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::RadioButton("Both", &alpha_flags, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf); ImGui::SameLine();
+ ShowHelpMarker("In the color list:\nLeft-click on colored square to open color picker,\nRight-click to open edit options menu.");
- ImGui::BeginChild("#colors", ImVec2(0, 300), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(-160);
- for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++)
- {
- const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i);
- if (!filter.PassFilter(name))
- continue;
- ImGui::PushID(i);
- ImGui::ColorEdit4("##color", (float*)&style.Colors[i], ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar | alpha_flags);
- if (memcmp(&style.Colors[i], &ref->Colors[i], sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0)
+ ImGui::BeginChild("##colors", ImVec2(0, 0), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(-160);
+ for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++)
{
- // Tips: in a real user application, you may want to merge and use an icon font into the main font, so instead of "Save"/"Revert" you'd use icons.
- // Read the FAQ and misc/fonts/README.txt about using icon fonts. It's really easy and super convenient!
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); if (ImGui::Button("Save")) ref->Colors[i] = style.Colors[i];
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); if (ImGui::Button("Revert")) style.Colors[i] = ref->Colors[i];
+ const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i);
+ if (!filter.PassFilter(name))
+ continue;
+ ImGui::PushID(i);
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("##color", (float*)&style.Colors[i], ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar | alpha_flags);
+ if (memcmp(&style.Colors[i], &ref->Colors[i], sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0)
+ {
+ // Tips: in a real user application, you may want to merge and use an icon font into the main font, so instead of "Save"/"Revert" you'd use icons.
+ // Read the FAQ and misc/fonts/README.txt about using icon fonts. It's really easy and super convenient!
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); if (ImGui::Button("Save")) ref->Colors[i] = style.Colors[i];
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); if (ImGui::Button("Revert")) style.Colors[i] = ref->Colors[i];
+ }
+ ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ ImGui::TextUnformatted(name);
+ ImGui::PopID();
}
- ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
- ImGui::TextUnformatted(name);
- ImGui::PopID();
- }
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::EndChild();
-
- ImGui::TreePop();
- }
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+ ImGui::EndChild();
- bool fonts_opened = ImGui::TreeNode("Fonts", "Fonts (%d)", ImGui::GetIO().Fonts->Fonts.Size);
- if (fonts_opened)
- {
- ImFontAtlas* atlas = ImGui::GetIO().Fonts;
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Atlas texture", "Atlas texture (%dx%d pixels)", atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight))
- {
- ImGui::Image(atlas->TexID, ImVec2((float)atlas->TexWidth, (float)atlas->TexHeight), ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(1,1), ImColor(255,255,255,255), ImColor(255,255,255,128));
- ImGui::TreePop();
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
}
- ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
- for (int i = 0; i < atlas->Fonts.Size; i++)
+
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Fonts"))
{
- ImFont* font = atlas->Fonts[i];
- ImGui::PushID(font);
- bool font_details_opened = ImGui::TreeNode(font, "Font %d: \'%s\', %.2f px, %d glyphs", i, font->ConfigData ? font->ConfigData[0].Name : "", font->FontSize, font->Glyphs.Size);
- ImGui::SameLine(); if (ImGui::SmallButton("Set as default")) ImGui::GetIO().FontDefault = font;
- if (font_details_opened)
+ ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+ ImFontAtlas* atlas = io.Fonts;
+ ShowHelpMarker("Read FAQ and misc/fonts/README.txt for details on font loading.");
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(120);
+ for (int i = 0; i < atlas->Fonts.Size; i++)
{
- ImGui::PushFont(font);
- ImGui::Text("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog");
- ImGui::PopFont();
- ImGui::DragFloat("Font scale", &font->Scale, 0.005f, 0.3f, 2.0f, "%.1f"); // Scale only this font
- ImGui::InputFloat("Font offset", &font->DisplayOffset.y, 1, 1, 0);
- ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Note than the default embedded font is NOT meant to be scaled.\n\nFont are currently rendered into bitmaps at a given size at the time of building the atlas. You may oversample them to get some flexibility with scaling. You can also render at multiple sizes and select which one to use at runtime.\n\n(Glimmer of hope: the atlas system should hopefully be rewritten in the future to make scaling more natural and automatic.)");
- ImGui::Text("Ascent: %f, Descent: %f, Height: %f", font->Ascent, font->Descent, font->Ascent - font->Descent);
- ImGui::Text("Fallback character: '%c' (%d)", font->FallbackChar, font->FallbackChar);
- ImGui::Text("Texture surface: %d pixels (approx) ~ %dx%d", font->MetricsTotalSurface, (int)sqrtf((float)font->MetricsTotalSurface), (int)sqrtf((float)font->MetricsTotalSurface));
- for (int config_i = 0; config_i < font->ConfigDataCount; config_i++)
- if (ImFontConfig* cfg = &font->ConfigData[config_i])
- ImGui::BulletText("Input %d: \'%s\', Oversample: (%d,%d), PixelSnapH: %d", config_i, cfg->Name, cfg->OversampleH, cfg->OversampleV, cfg->PixelSnapH);
- if (ImGui::TreeNode("Glyphs", "Glyphs (%d)", font->Glyphs.Size))
+ ImFont* font = atlas->Fonts[i];
+ ImGui::PushID(font);
+ bool font_details_opened = ImGui::TreeNode(font, "Font %d: \"%s\"\n%.2f px, %d glyphs, %d file(s)", i, font->ConfigData ? font->ConfigData[0].Name : "", font->FontSize, font->Glyphs.Size, font->ConfigDataCount);
+ ImGui::SameLine(); if (ImGui::SmallButton("Set as default")) { io.FontDefault = font; }
+ if (font_details_opened)
{
- // Display all glyphs of the fonts in separate pages of 256 characters
- for (int base = 0; base < 0x10000; base += 256)
+ ImGui::PushFont(font);
+ ImGui::Text("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog");
+ ImGui::PopFont();
+ ImGui::DragFloat("Font scale", &font->Scale, 0.005f, 0.3f, 2.0f, "%.1f"); // Scale only this font
+ ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("Note than the default embedded font is NOT meant to be scaled.\n\nFont are currently rendered into bitmaps at a given size at the time of building the atlas. You may oversample them to get some flexibility with scaling. You can also render at multiple sizes and select which one to use at runtime.\n\n(Glimmer of hope: the atlas system should hopefully be rewritten in the future to make scaling more natural and automatic.)");
+ ImGui::InputFloat("Font offset", &font->DisplayOffset.y, 1, 1, "%.0f");
+ ImGui::Text("Ascent: %f, Descent: %f, Height: %f", font->Ascent, font->Descent, font->Ascent - font->Descent);
+ ImGui::Text("Fallback character: '%c' (%d)", font->FallbackChar, font->FallbackChar);
+ const float surface_sqrt = sqrtf((float)font->MetricsTotalSurface);
+ ImGui::Text("Texture surface: %d pixels (approx) ~ %dx%d", font->MetricsTotalSurface, (int)surface_sqrt, (int)surface_sqrt);
+ for (int config_i = 0; config_i < font->ConfigDataCount; config_i++)
+ if (const ImFontConfig* cfg = &font->ConfigData[config_i])
+ ImGui::BulletText("Input %d: \'%s\', Oversample: (%d,%d), PixelSnapH: %d", config_i, cfg->Name, cfg->OversampleH, cfg->OversampleV, cfg->PixelSnapH);
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Glyphs", "Glyphs (%d)", font->Glyphs.Size))
{
- int count = 0;
- for (int n = 0; n < 256; n++)
- count += font->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)(base + n)) ? 1 : 0;
- if (count > 0 && ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)base, "U+%04X..U+%04X (%d %s)", base, base+255, count, count > 1 ? "glyphs" : "glyph"))
+ // Display all glyphs of the fonts in separate pages of 256 characters
+ for (int base = 0; base < 0x10000; base += 256)
{
- float cell_size = font->FontSize * 1;
- float cell_spacing = style.ItemSpacing.y;
- ImVec2 base_pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
- ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+ int count = 0;
for (int n = 0; n < 256; n++)
+ count += font->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)(base + n)) ? 1 : 0;
+ if (count > 0 && ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)base, "U+%04X..U+%04X (%d %s)", base, base + 255, count, count > 1 ? "glyphs" : "glyph"))
{
- ImVec2 cell_p1(base_pos.x + (n % 16) * (cell_size + cell_spacing), base_pos.y + (n / 16) * (cell_size + cell_spacing));
- ImVec2 cell_p2(cell_p1.x + cell_size, cell_p1.y + cell_size);
- const ImFontGlyph* glyph = font->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)(base+n));
- draw_list->AddRect(cell_p1, cell_p2, glyph ? IM_COL32(255,255,255,100) : IM_COL32(255,255,255,50));
- if (glyph)
- font->RenderChar(draw_list, cell_size, cell_p1, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), (ImWchar)(base+n)); // We use ImFont::RenderChar as a shortcut because we don't have UTF-8 conversion functions available to generate a string.
- if (glyph && ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(cell_p1, cell_p2))
+ float cell_size = font->FontSize * 1;
+ float cell_spacing = style.ItemSpacing.y;
+ ImVec2 base_pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+ ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+ for (int n = 0; n < 256; n++)
{
- ImGui::BeginTooltip();
- ImGui::Text("Codepoint: U+%04X", base+n);
- ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::Text("AdvanceX: %.1f", glyph->AdvanceX);
- ImGui::Text("Pos: (%.2f,%.2f)->(%.2f,%.2f)", glyph->X0, glyph->Y0, glyph->X1, glyph->Y1);
- ImGui::Text("UV: (%.3f,%.3f)->(%.3f,%.3f)", glyph->U0, glyph->V0, glyph->U1, glyph->V1);
- ImGui::EndTooltip();
+ ImVec2 cell_p1(base_pos.x + (n % 16) * (cell_size + cell_spacing), base_pos.y + (n / 16) * (cell_size + cell_spacing));
+ ImVec2 cell_p2(cell_p1.x + cell_size, cell_p1.y + cell_size);
+ const ImFontGlyph* glyph = font->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)(base + n));
+ draw_list->AddRect(cell_p1, cell_p2, glyph ? IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 100) : IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 50));
+ if (glyph)
+ font->RenderChar(draw_list, cell_size, cell_p1, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), (ImWchar)(base + n)); // We use ImFont::RenderChar as a shortcut because we don't have UTF-8 conversion functions available to generate a string.
+ if (glyph && ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(cell_p1, cell_p2))
+ {
+ ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+ ImGui::Text("Codepoint: U+%04X", base + n);
+ ImGui::Separator();
+ ImGui::Text("AdvanceX: %.1f", glyph->AdvanceX);
+ ImGui::Text("Pos: (%.2f,%.2f)->(%.2f,%.2f)", glyph->X0, glyph->Y0, glyph->X1, glyph->Y1);
+ ImGui::Text("UV: (%.3f,%.3f)->(%.3f,%.3f)", glyph->U0, glyph->V0, glyph->U1, glyph->V1);
+ ImGui::EndTooltip();
+ }
}
+ ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2((cell_size + cell_spacing) * 16, (cell_size + cell_spacing) * 16));
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
- ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2((cell_size + cell_spacing) * 16, (cell_size + cell_spacing) * 16));
- ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::TreePop();
}
ImGui::TreePop();
}
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::TreeNode("Atlas texture", "Atlas texture (%dx%d pixels)", atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight))
+ {
+ ImGui::Image(atlas->TexID, ImVec2((float)atlas->TexWidth, (float)atlas->TexHeight), ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(1, 1), ImColor(255, 255, 255, 255), ImColor(255, 255, 255, 128));
ImGui::TreePop();
}
- ImGui::PopID();
+
+ static float window_scale = 1.0f;
+ if (ImGui::DragFloat("this window scale", &window_scale, 0.005f, 0.3f, 2.0f, "%.2f")) // scale only this window
+ ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(window_scale);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("global scale", &io.FontGlobalScale, 0.005f, 0.3f, 2.0f, "%.2f"); // scale everything
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
}
- static float window_scale = 1.0f;
- ImGui::DragFloat("this window scale", &window_scale, 0.005f, 0.3f, 2.0f, "%.1f"); // scale only this window
- ImGui::DragFloat("global scale", &ImGui::GetIO().FontGlobalScale, 0.005f, 0.3f, 2.0f, "%.1f"); // scale everything
- ImGui::PopItemWidth();
- ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(window_scale);
- ImGui::TreePop();
+
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Rendering"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased lines", &style.AntiAliasedLines); ImGui::SameLine(); ShowHelpMarker("When disabling anti-aliasing lines, you'll probably want to disable borders in your style as well.");
+ ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased fill", &style.AntiAliasedFill);
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
+ ImGui::DragFloat("Curve Tessellation Tolerance", &style.CurveTessellationTol, 0.02f, 0.10f, FLT_MAX, "%.2f", 2.0f);
+ if (style.CurveTessellationTol < 0.10f) style.CurveTessellationTol = 0.10f;
+ ImGui::DragFloat("Global Alpha", &style.Alpha, 0.005f, 0.20f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); // Not exposing zero here so user doesn't "lose" the UI (zero alpha clips all widgets). But application code could have a toggle to switch between zero and non-zero.
+ ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
+ }
+
+ ImGui::EndTabBar();
}
ImGui::PopItemWidth();
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: MAIN MENU BAR
+// [SECTION] Example App: Main Menu Bar / ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate creating a fullscreen menu bar and populating it.
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: CONSOLE
+// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Console / ShowExampleAppConsole()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Demonstrating creating a simple console window, with scrolling, filtering, completion and history.
+// Demonstrate creating a simple console window, with scrolling, filtering, completion and history.
// For the console example, here we are using a more C++ like approach of declaring a class to hold the data and the functions.
struct ExampleAppConsole
{
char InputBuf[256];
ImVector<char*> Items;
- bool ScrollToBottom;
+ ImVector<const char*> Commands;
ImVector<char*> History;
int HistoryPos; // -1: new line, 0..History.Size-1 browsing history.
- ImVector<const char*> Commands;
+ ImGuiTextFilter Filter;
+ bool AutoScroll;
+ bool ScrollToBottom;
ExampleAppConsole()
{
Commands.push_back("HISTORY");
Commands.push_back("CLEAR");
Commands.push_back("CLASSIFY"); // "classify" is only here to provide an example of "C"+[tab] completing to "CL" and displaying matches.
+ AutoScroll = true;
+ ScrollToBottom = true;
AddLog("Welcome to Dear ImGui!");
}
~ExampleAppConsole()
// Portable helpers
static int Stricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2) { int d; while ((d = toupper(*str2) - toupper(*str1)) == 0 && *str1) { str1++; str2++; } return d; }
static int Strnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, int n) { int d = 0; while (n > 0 && (d = toupper(*str2) - toupper(*str1)) == 0 && *str1) { str1++; str2++; n--; } return d; }
- static char* Strdup(const char *str) { size_t len = strlen(str) + 1; void* buff = malloc(len); return (char*)memcpy(buff, (const void*)str, len); }
+ static char* Strdup(const char *str) { size_t len = strlen(str) + 1; void* buf = malloc(len); IM_ASSERT(buf); return (char*)memcpy(buf, (const void*)str, len); }
static void Strtrim(char* str) { char* str_end = str + strlen(str); while (str_end > str && str_end[-1] == ' ') str_end--; *str_end = 0; }
void ClearLog()
buf[IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)-1] = 0;
va_end(args);
Items.push_back(Strdup(buf));
- ScrollToBottom = true;
+ if (AutoScroll)
+ ScrollToBottom = true;
}
void Draw(const char* title, bool* p_open)
// TODO: display items starting from the bottom
- if (ImGui::SmallButton("Add Dummy Text")) { AddLog("%d some text", Items.Size); AddLog("some more text"); AddLog("display very important message here!"); } ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::SmallButton("Add Dummy Text")) { AddLog("%d some text", Items.Size); AddLog("some more text"); AddLog("display very important message here!"); } ImGui::SameLine();
if (ImGui::SmallButton("Add Dummy Error")) { AddLog("[error] something went wrong"); } ImGui::SameLine();
if (ImGui::SmallButton("Clear")) { ClearLog(); } ImGui::SameLine();
bool copy_to_clipboard = ImGui::SmallButton("Copy"); ImGui::SameLine();
ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0,0));
- static ImGuiTextFilter filter;
- filter.Draw("Filter (\"incl,-excl\") (\"error\")", 180);
- ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+ // Options menu
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopup("Options"))
+ {
+ if (ImGui::Checkbox("Auto-scroll", &AutoScroll))
+ if (AutoScroll)
+ ScrollToBottom = true;
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
+
+ // Options, Filter
+ if (ImGui::Button("Options"))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("Options");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ Filter.Draw("Filter (\"incl,-excl\") (\"error\")", 180);
ImGui::Separator();
const float footer_height_to_reserve = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y + ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); // 1 separator, 1 input text
ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(4,1)); // Tighten spacing
if (copy_to_clipboard)
ImGui::LogToClipboard();
- ImVec4 col_default_text = ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_Text);
for (int i = 0; i < Items.Size; i++)
{
const char* item = Items[i];
- if (!filter.PassFilter(item))
+ if (!Filter.PassFilter(item))
continue;
- ImVec4 col = col_default_text;
- if (strstr(item, "[error]")) col = ImColor(1.0f,0.4f,0.4f,1.0f);
- else if (strncmp(item, "# ", 2) == 0) col = ImColor(1.0f,0.78f,0.58f,1.0f);
- ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col);
+
+ // Normally you would store more information in your item (e.g. make Items[] an array of structure, store color/type etc.)
+ bool pop_color = false;
+ if (strstr(item, "[error]")) { ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, ImVec4(1.0f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f)); pop_color = true; }
+ else if (strncmp(item, "# ", 2) == 0) { ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, ImVec4(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.6f, 1.0f)); pop_color = true; }
ImGui::TextUnformatted(item);
- ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+ if (pop_color)
+ ImGui::PopStyleColor();
}
if (copy_to_clipboard)
ImGui::LogFinish();
if (ScrollToBottom)
- ImGui::SetScrollHere(1.0f);
+ ImGui::SetScrollHereY(1.0f);
ScrollToBottom = false;
ImGui::PopStyleVar();
ImGui::EndChild();
bool reclaim_focus = false;
if (ImGui::InputText("Input", InputBuf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue|ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion|ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory, &TextEditCallbackStub, (void*)this))
{
- Strtrim(InputBuf);
- if (InputBuf[0])
- ExecCommand(InputBuf);
- strcpy(InputBuf, "");
+ char* s = InputBuf;
+ Strtrim(s);
+ if (s[0])
+ ExecCommand(s);
+ strcpy(s, "");
reclaim_focus = true;
}
- // Demonstrate keeping focus on the input box
+ // Auto-focus on window apparition
ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
if (reclaim_focus)
ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(-1); // Auto focus previous widget
{
AddLog("Unknown command: '%s'\n", command_line);
}
+
+ // On commad input, we scroll to bottom even if AutoScroll==false
+ ScrollToBottom = true;
}
- static int TextEditCallbackStub(ImGuiTextEditCallbackData* data) // In C++11 you are better off using lambdas for this sort of forwarding callbacks
+ static int TextEditCallbackStub(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data) // In C++11 you are better off using lambdas for this sort of forwarding callbacks
{
ExampleAppConsole* console = (ExampleAppConsole*)data->UserData;
return console->TextEditCallback(data);
}
- int TextEditCallback(ImGuiTextEditCallbackData* data)
+ int TextEditCallback(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data)
{
//AddLog("cursor: %d, selection: %d-%d", data->CursorPos, data->SelectionStart, data->SelectionEnd);
switch (data->EventFlag)
// A better implementation would preserve the data on the current input line along with cursor position.
if (prev_history_pos != HistoryPos)
{
- data->CursorPos = data->SelectionStart = data->SelectionEnd = data->BufTextLen = (int)snprintf(data->Buf, (size_t)data->BufSize, "%s", (HistoryPos >= 0) ? History[HistoryPos] : "");
- data->BufDirty = true;
+ const char* history_str = (HistoryPos >= 0) ? History[HistoryPos] : "";
+ data->DeleteChars(0, data->BufTextLen);
+ data->InsertChars(0, history_str);
}
}
}
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: LOG
+// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Log / ShowExampleAppLog()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Usage:
{
ImGuiTextBuffer Buf;
ImGuiTextFilter Filter;
- ImVector<int> LineOffsets; // Index to lines offset
+ ImVector<int> LineOffsets; // Index to lines offset. We maintain this with AddLog() calls, allowing us to have a random access on lines
+ bool AutoScroll;
bool ScrollToBottom;
- void Clear() { Buf.clear(); LineOffsets.clear(); }
+ ExampleAppLog()
+ {
+ AutoScroll = true;
+ ScrollToBottom = false;
+ Clear();
+ }
+
+ void Clear()
+ {
+ Buf.clear();
+ LineOffsets.clear();
+ LineOffsets.push_back(0);
+ }
void AddLog(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2)
{
va_end(args);
for (int new_size = Buf.size(); old_size < new_size; old_size++)
if (Buf[old_size] == '\n')
- LineOffsets.push_back(old_size);
- ScrollToBottom = true;
+ LineOffsets.push_back(old_size + 1);
+ if (AutoScroll)
+ ScrollToBottom = true;
}
void Draw(const char* title, bool* p_open = NULL)
{
- ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(500,400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
if (!ImGui::Begin(title, p_open))
{
ImGui::End();
return;
}
- if (ImGui::Button("Clear")) Clear();
+
+ // Options menu
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopup("Options"))
+ {
+ if (ImGui::Checkbox("Auto-scroll", &AutoScroll))
+ if (AutoScroll)
+ ScrollToBottom = true;
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
+
+ // Main window
+ if (ImGui::Button("Options"))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("Options");
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ bool clear = ImGui::Button("Clear");
ImGui::SameLine();
bool copy = ImGui::Button("Copy");
ImGui::SameLine();
Filter.Draw("Filter", -100.0f);
+
ImGui::Separator();
ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", ImVec2(0,0), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
- if (copy) ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+ if (clear)
+ Clear();
+ if (copy)
+ ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+
+ ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
+ const char* buf = Buf.begin();
+ const char* buf_end = Buf.end();
if (Filter.IsActive())
{
- const char* buf_begin = Buf.begin();
- const char* line = buf_begin;
- for (int line_no = 0; line != NULL; line_no++)
+ // In this example we don't use the clipper when Filter is enabled.
+ // This is because we don't have a random access on the result on our filter.
+ // A real application processing logs with ten of thousands of entries may want to store the result of search/filter.
+ // especially if the filtering function is not trivial (e.g. reg-exp).
+ for (int line_no = 0; line_no < LineOffsets.Size; line_no++)
{
- const char* line_end = (line_no < LineOffsets.Size) ? buf_begin + LineOffsets[line_no] : NULL;
- if (Filter.PassFilter(line, line_end))
- ImGui::TextUnformatted(line, line_end);
- line = line_end && line_end[1] ? line_end + 1 : NULL;
+ const char* line_start = buf + LineOffsets[line_no];
+ const char* line_end = (line_no + 1 < LineOffsets.Size) ? (buf + LineOffsets[line_no + 1] - 1) : buf_end;
+ if (Filter.PassFilter(line_start, line_end))
+ ImGui::TextUnformatted(line_start, line_end);
}
}
else
{
- ImGui::TextUnformatted(Buf.begin());
+ // The simplest and easy way to display the entire buffer:
+ // ImGui::TextUnformatted(buf_begin, buf_end);
+ // And it'll just work. TextUnformatted() has specialization for large blob of text and will fast-forward to skip non-visible lines.
+ // Here we instead demonstrate using the clipper to only process lines that are within the visible area.
+ // If you have tens of thousands of items and their processing cost is non-negligible, coarse clipping them on your side is recommended.
+ // Using ImGuiListClipper requires A) random access into your data, and B) items all being the same height,
+ // both of which we can handle since we an array pointing to the beginning of each line of text.
+ // When using the filter (in the block of code above) we don't have random access into the data to display anymore, which is why we don't use the clipper.
+ // Storing or skimming through the search result would make it possible (and would be recommended if you want to search through tens of thousands of entries)
+ ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+ clipper.Begin(LineOffsets.Size);
+ while (clipper.Step())
+ {
+ for (int line_no = clipper.DisplayStart; line_no < clipper.DisplayEnd; line_no++)
+ {
+ const char* line_start = buf + LineOffsets[line_no];
+ const char* line_end = (line_no + 1 < LineOffsets.Size) ? (buf + LineOffsets[line_no + 1] - 1) : buf_end;
+ ImGui::TextUnformatted(line_start, line_end);
+ }
+ }
+ clipper.End();
}
+ ImGui::PopStyleVar();
if (ScrollToBottom)
- ImGui::SetScrollHere(1.0f);
+ ImGui::SetScrollHereY(1.0f);
ScrollToBottom = false;
ImGui::EndChild();
ImGui::End();
{
static ExampleAppLog log;
- // Demo: add random items (unless Ctrl is held)
- static double last_time = -1.0;
- double time = ImGui::GetTime();
- if (time - last_time >= 0.20f && !ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl)
+ // For the demo: add a debug button _BEFORE_ the normal log window contents
+ // We take advantage of the fact that multiple calls to Begin()/End() are appending to the same window.
+ // Most of the contents of the window will be added by the log.Draw() call.
+ ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(500, 400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+ ImGui::Begin("Example: Log", p_open);
+ if (ImGui::SmallButton("[Debug] Add 5 entries"))
{
- const char* random_words[] = { "system", "info", "warning", "error", "fatal", "notice", "log" };
- log.AddLog("[%s] Hello, time is %.1f, frame count is %d\n", random_words[rand() % IM_ARRAYSIZE(random_words)], time, ImGui::GetFrameCount());
- last_time = time;
+ static int counter = 0;
+ for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
+ {
+ const char* categories[3] = { "info", "warn", "error" };
+ const char* words[] = { "Bumfuzzled", "Cattywampus", "Snickersnee", "Abibliophobia", "Absquatulate", "Nincompoop", "Pauciloquent" };
+ log.AddLog("[%05d] [%s] Hello, current time is %.1f, here's a word: '%s'\n",
+ ImGui::GetFrameCount(), categories[counter % IM_ARRAYSIZE(categories)], ImGui::GetTime(), words[counter % IM_ARRAYSIZE(words)]);
+ counter++;
+ }
}
+ ImGui::End();
log.Draw("Example: Log", p_open);
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: SIMPLE LAYOUT
+// [SECTION] Example App: Simple Layout / ShowExampleAppLayout()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate create a window with multiple child windows.
static void ShowExampleAppLayout(bool* p_open)
{
ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(500, 440), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
- if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Layout", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+ if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Simple layout", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
{
if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
{
ImGui::BeginChild("item view", ImVec2(0, -ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing())); // Leave room for 1 line below us
ImGui::Text("MyObject: %d", selected);
ImGui::Separator();
- ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. ");
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##Tabs", ImGuiTabBarFlags_None))
+ {
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Description"))
+ {
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. ");
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Details"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("ID: 0123456789");
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
+ }
+ ImGui::EndTabBar();
+ }
ImGui::EndChild();
if (ImGui::Button("Revert")) {}
ImGui::SameLine();
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: PROPERTY EDITOR
+// [SECTION] Example App: Property Editor / ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate create a simple property editor.
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: LONG TEXT
+// [SECTION] Example App: Long Text / ShowExampleAppLongText()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate/test rendering huge amount of text, and the incidence of clipping.
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: AUTO RESIZE
+// [SECTION] Example App: Auto Resize / ShowExampleAppAutoResize()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate creating a window which gets auto-resized according to its content.
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: CONSTRAINED RESIZE
+// [SECTION] Example App: Constrained Resize / ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate creating a window with custom resize constraints.
if (type == 2) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(100, 100), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX)); // Width > 100, Height > 100
if (type == 3) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(400, -1), ImVec2(500, -1)); // Width 400-500
if (type == 4) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(-1, 400), ImVec2(-1, 500)); // Height 400-500
- if (type == 5) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Square); // Always Square
- if (type == 6) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Step, (void*)100);// Fixed Step
+ if (type == 5) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Square); // Always Square
+ if (type == 6) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Step, (void*)(intptr_t)100); // Fixed Step
ImGuiWindowFlags flags = auto_resize ? ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize : 0;
if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Constrained Resize", p_open, flags))
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: SIMPLE OVERLAY
+// [SECTION] Example App: Simple Overlay / ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate creating a simple static window with no decoration + a context-menu to choose which corner of the screen to use.
{
const float DISTANCE = 10.0f;
static int corner = 0;
- ImVec2 window_pos = ImVec2((corner & 1) ? ImGui::GetIO().DisplaySize.x - DISTANCE : DISTANCE, (corner & 2) ? ImGui::GetIO().DisplaySize.y - DISTANCE : DISTANCE);
- ImVec2 window_pos_pivot = ImVec2((corner & 1) ? 1.0f : 0.0f, (corner & 2) ? 1.0f : 0.0f);
+ ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
if (corner != -1)
+ {
+ ImVec2 window_pos = ImVec2((corner & 1) ? io.DisplaySize.x - DISTANCE : DISTANCE, (corner & 2) ? io.DisplaySize.y - DISTANCE : DISTANCE);
+ ImVec2 window_pos_pivot = ImVec2((corner & 1) ? 1.0f : 0.0f, (corner & 2) ? 1.0f : 0.0f);
ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(window_pos, ImGuiCond_Always, window_pos_pivot);
+ }
ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.3f); // Transparent background
- if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Simple Overlay", p_open, (corner != -1 ? ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove : 0) | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav))
+ if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Simple overlay", p_open, (corner != -1 ? ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove : 0) | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav))
{
ImGui::Text("Simple overlay\n" "in the corner of the screen.\n" "(right-click to change position)");
ImGui::Separator();
if (ImGui::IsMousePosValid())
- ImGui::Text("Mouse Position: (%.1f,%.1f)", ImGui::GetIO().MousePos.x, ImGui::GetIO().MousePos.y);
+ ImGui::Text("Mouse Position: (%.1f,%.1f)", io.MousePos.x, io.MousePos.y);
else
ImGui::Text("Mouse Position: <invalid>");
if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow())
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: WINDOW TITLES
+// [SECTION] Example App: Manipulating Window Titles / ShowExampleAppWindowTitles()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate using "##" and "###" in identifiers to manipulate ID generation.
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// EXAMPLE APP CODE: CUSTOM RENDERING
+// [SECTION] Example App: Custom Rendering using ImDrawList API / ShowExampleAppCustomRendering()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Demonstrate using the low-level ImDrawList to draw custom shapes.
static ImVec4 col = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 0.4f, 1.0f);
ImGui::DragFloat("Size", &sz, 0.2f, 2.0f, 72.0f, "%.0f");
ImGui::DragFloat("Thickness", &thickness, 0.05f, 1.0f, 8.0f, "%.02f");
- ImGui::ColorEdit3("Color", &col.x);
+ ImGui::ColorEdit4("Color", &col.x);
{
const ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
const ImU32 col32 = ImColor(col);
float x = p.x + 4.0f, y = p.y + 4.0f, spacing = 8.0f;
for (int n = 0; n < 2; n++)
{
- float curr_thickness = (n == 0) ? 1.0f : thickness;
- draw_list->AddCircle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f, y+sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col32, 20, curr_thickness); x += sz+spacing;
- draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, 0.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, curr_thickness); x += sz+spacing;
- draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, 10.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, curr_thickness); x += sz+spacing;
- draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, 10.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft|ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight, curr_thickness); x += sz+spacing;
- draw_list->AddTriangle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f, y), ImVec2(x+sz,y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x,y+sz-0.5f), col32, curr_thickness); x += sz+spacing;
- draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y ), col32, curr_thickness); x += sz+spacing; // Horizontal line (note: drawing a filled rectangle will be faster!)
- draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x, y+sz), col32, curr_thickness); x += spacing; // Vertical line (note: drawing a filled rectangle will be faster!)
- draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, curr_thickness); x += sz+spacing; // Diagonal line
- draw_list->AddBezierCurve(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz*1.3f,y+sz*0.3f), ImVec2(x+sz-sz*1.3f,y+sz-sz*0.3f), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, curr_thickness);
+ // First line uses a thickness of 1.0, second line uses the configurable thickness
+ float th = (n == 0) ? 1.0f : thickness;
+ draw_list->AddCircle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f, y+sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col32, 6, th); x += sz+spacing; // Hexagon
+ draw_list->AddCircle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f, y+sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col32, 20, th); x += sz+spacing; // Circle
+ draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, 0.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, th); x += sz+spacing;
+ draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, 10.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, th); x += sz+spacing;
+ draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, 10.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft|ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight, th); x += sz+spacing;
+ draw_list->AddTriangle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f, y), ImVec2(x+sz,y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x,y+sz-0.5f), col32, th); x += sz+spacing;
+ draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y ), col32, th); x += sz+spacing; // Horizontal line (note: drawing a filled rectangle will be faster!)
+ draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x, y+sz), col32, th); x += spacing; // Vertical line (note: drawing a filled rectangle will be faster!)
+ draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, th); x += sz+spacing; // Diagonal line
+ draw_list->AddBezierCurve(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz*1.3f,y+sz*0.3f), ImVec2(x+sz-sz*1.3f,y+sz-sz*0.3f), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, th);
x = p.x + 4;
y += sz+spacing;
}
- draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f, y+sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col32, 32); x += sz+spacing;
+ draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f, y+sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col32, 6); x += sz+spacing; // Hexagon
+ draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f, y+sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col32, 32); x += sz+spacing; // Circle
draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32); x += sz+spacing;
draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, 10.0f); x += sz+spacing;
draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz), col32, 10.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft|ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight); x += sz+spacing;
ImGui::End();
}
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Documents Handling / ShowExampleAppDocuments()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Simplified structure to mimic a Document model
+struct MyDocument
+{
+ const char* Name; // Document title
+ bool Open; // Set when the document is open (in this demo, we keep an array of all available documents to simplify the demo)
+ bool OpenPrev; // Copy of Open from last update.
+ bool Dirty; // Set when the document has been modified
+ bool WantClose; // Set when the document
+ ImVec4 Color; // An arbitrary variable associated to the document
+
+ MyDocument(const char* name, bool open = true, const ImVec4& color = ImVec4(1.0f,1.0f,1.0f,1.0f))
+ {
+ Name = name;
+ Open = OpenPrev = open;
+ Dirty = false;
+ WantClose = false;
+ Color = color;
+ }
+ void DoOpen() { Open = true; }
+ void DoQueueClose() { WantClose = true; }
+ void DoForceClose() { Open = false; Dirty = false; }
+ void DoSave() { Dirty = false; }
+
+ // Display dummy contents for the Document
+ static void DisplayContents(MyDocument* doc)
+ {
+ ImGui::PushID(doc);
+ ImGui::Text("Document \"%s\"", doc->Name);
+ ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, doc->Color);
+ ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua.");
+ ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+ if (ImGui::Button("Modify", ImVec2(100, 0)))
+ doc->Dirty = true;
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::Button("Save", ImVec2(100, 0)))
+ doc->DoSave();
+ ImGui::ColorEdit3("color", &doc->Color.x); // Useful to test drag and drop and hold-dragged-to-open-tab behavior.
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ }
+
+ // Display context menu for the Document
+ static void DisplayContextMenu(MyDocument* doc)
+ {
+ if (!ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem())
+ return;
+
+ char buf[256];
+ sprintf(buf, "Save %s", doc->Name);
+ if (ImGui::MenuItem(buf, "CTRL+S", false, doc->Open))
+ doc->DoSave();
+ if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close", "CTRL+W", false, doc->Open))
+ doc->DoQueueClose();
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
+};
+
+struct ExampleAppDocuments
+{
+ ImVector<MyDocument> Documents;
+
+ ExampleAppDocuments()
+ {
+ Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Lettuce", true, ImVec4(0.4f, 0.8f, 0.4f, 1.0f)));
+ Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Eggplant", true, ImVec4(0.8f, 0.5f, 1.0f, 1.0f)));
+ Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Carrot", true, ImVec4(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.5f, 1.0f)));
+ Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Tomato", false, ImVec4(1.0f, 0.3f, 0.4f, 1.0f)));
+ Documents.push_back(MyDocument("A Rather Long Title", false));
+ Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Some Document", false));
+ }
+};
+
+// [Optional] Notify the system of Tabs/Windows closure that happened outside the regular tab interface.
+// If a tab has been closed programmatically (aka closed from another source such as the Checkbox() in the demo, as opposed
+// to clicking on the regular tab closing button) and stops being submitted, it will take a frame for the tab bar to notice its absence.
+// During this frame there will be a gap in the tab bar, and if the tab that has disappeared was the selected one, the tab bar
+// will report no selected tab during the frame. This will effectively give the impression of a flicker for one frame.
+// We call SetTabItemClosed() to manually notify the Tab Bar or Docking system of removed tabs to avoid this glitch.
+// Note that this completely optional, and only affect tab bars with the ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable flag.
+static void NotifyOfDocumentsClosedElsewhere(ExampleAppDocuments& app)
+{
+ for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+ {
+ MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+ if (!doc->Open && doc->OpenPrev)
+ ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(doc->Name);
+ doc->OpenPrev = doc->Open;
+ }
+}
+
+void ShowExampleAppDocuments(bool* p_open)
+{
+ static ExampleAppDocuments app;
+
+ if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Documents", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+ {
+ ImGui::End();
+ return;
+ }
+
+ // Options
+ static bool opt_reorderable = true;
+ static ImGuiTabBarFlags opt_fitting_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;
+
+ // Menu
+ if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+ {
+ if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
+ {
+ int open_count = 0;
+ for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+ open_count += app.Documents[doc_n].Open ? 1 : 0;
+
+ if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Open", open_count < app.Documents.Size))
+ {
+ for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+ {
+ MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+ if (!doc->Open)
+ if (ImGui::MenuItem(doc->Name))
+ doc->DoOpen();
+ }
+ ImGui::EndMenu();
+ }
+ if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close All Documents", NULL, false, open_count > 0))
+ for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+ app.Documents[doc_n].DoQueueClose();
+ if (ImGui::MenuItem("Exit", "Alt+F4")) {}
+ ImGui::EndMenu();
+ }
+ ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+ }
+
+ // [Debug] List documents with one checkbox for each
+ for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+ {
+ MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+ if (doc_n > 0)
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ ImGui::PushID(doc);
+ if (ImGui::Checkbox(doc->Name, &doc->Open))
+ if (!doc->Open)
+ doc->DoForceClose();
+ ImGui::PopID();
+ }
+
+ ImGui::Separator();
+
+ // Submit Tab Bar and Tabs
+ {
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = (opt_fitting_flags) | (opt_reorderable ? ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable : 0);
+ if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##tabs", tab_bar_flags))
+ {
+ if (opt_reorderable)
+ NotifyOfDocumentsClosedElsewhere(app);
+
+ // [DEBUG] Stress tests
+ //if ((ImGui::GetFrameCount() % 30) == 0) docs[1].Open ^= 1; // [DEBUG] Automatically show/hide a tab. Test various interactions e.g. dragging with this on.
+ //if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl) ImGui::SetTabItemSelected(docs[1].Name); // [DEBUG] Test SetTabItemSelected(), probably not very useful as-is anyway..
+
+ // Submit Tabs
+ for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+ {
+ MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+ if (!doc->Open)
+ continue;
+
+ ImGuiTabItemFlags tab_flags = (doc->Dirty ? ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument : 0);
+ bool visible = ImGui::BeginTabItem(doc->Name, &doc->Open, tab_flags);
+
+ // Cancel attempt to close when unsaved add to save queue so we can display a popup.
+ if (!doc->Open && doc->Dirty)
+ {
+ doc->Open = true;
+ doc->DoQueueClose();
+ }
+
+ MyDocument::DisplayContextMenu(doc);
+ if (visible)
+ {
+ MyDocument::DisplayContents(doc);
+ ImGui::EndTabItem();
+ }
+ }
+
+ ImGui::EndTabBar();
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Update closing queue
+ static ImVector<MyDocument*> close_queue;
+ if (close_queue.empty())
+ {
+ // Close queue is locked once we started a popup
+ for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+ {
+ MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+ if (doc->WantClose)
+ {
+ doc->WantClose = false;
+ close_queue.push_back(doc);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Display closing confirmation UI
+ if (!close_queue.empty())
+ {
+ int close_queue_unsaved_documents = 0;
+ for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+ if (close_queue[n]->Dirty)
+ close_queue_unsaved_documents++;
+
+ if (close_queue_unsaved_documents == 0)
+ {
+ // Close documents when all are unsaved
+ for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+ close_queue[n]->DoForceClose();
+ close_queue.clear();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (!ImGui::IsPopupOpen("Save?"))
+ ImGui::OpenPopup("Save?");
+ if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Save?"))
+ {
+ ImGui::Text("Save change to the following items?");
+ ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1.0f);
+ ImGui::ListBoxHeader("##", close_queue_unsaved_documents, 6);
+ for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+ if (close_queue[n]->Dirty)
+ ImGui::Text("%s", close_queue[n]->Name);
+ ImGui::ListBoxFooter();
+
+ if (ImGui::Button("Yes", ImVec2(80, 0)))
+ {
+ for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+ {
+ if (close_queue[n]->Dirty)
+ close_queue[n]->DoSave();
+ close_queue[n]->DoForceClose();
+ }
+ close_queue.clear();
+ ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+ }
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::Button("No", ImVec2(80, 0)))
+ {
+ for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+ close_queue[n]->DoForceClose();
+ close_queue.clear();
+ ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+ }
+ ImGui::SameLine();
+ if (ImGui::Button("Cancel", ImVec2(80, 0)))
+ {
+ close_queue.clear();
+ ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+ }
+ ImGui::EndPopup();
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ ImGui::End();
+}
+
// End of Demo code
#else
+void ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(bool*) {}
void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool*) {}
void ImGui::ShowUserGuide() {}
void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle*) {}
-// dear imgui, v1.63 WIP
+// dear imgui, v1.68 WIP
// (drawing and font code)
-// Contains implementation for
-// - Default styles
-// - ImDrawList
-// - ImDrawData
-// - ImFontAtlas
-// - ImFont
-// - Default font data
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+// [SECTION] STB libraries implementation
+// [SECTION] Style functions
+// [SECTION] ImDrawList
+// [SECTION] ImDrawData
+// [SECTION] Helpers ShadeVertsXXX functions
+// [SECTION] ImFontConfig
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas glyph ranges helpers
+// [SECTION] ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder
+// [SECTION] ImFont
+// [SECTION] Internal Render Helpers
+// [SECTION] Decompression code
+// [SECTION] Default font data (ProggyClean.ttf)
+
+*/
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
#include <stdio.h> // vsnprintf, sscanf, printf
#if !defined(alloca)
-#if defined(__GLIBC__) || defined(__sun) || defined(__CYGWIN__)
+#if defined(__GLIBC__) || defined(__sun) || defined(__CYGWIN__) || defined(__APPLE__)
#include <alloca.h> // alloca (glibc uses <alloca.h>. Note that Cygwin may have _WIN32 defined, so the order matters here)
#elif defined(_WIN32)
#include <malloc.h> // alloca
#endif
#endif
+// Visual Studio warnings
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma warning (disable: 4505) // unreferenced local function has been removed (stb stuff)
#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
#endif
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
#ifdef __clang__
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning : use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning : comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants ok.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wglobal-constructors" // warning : declaration requires a global destructor // similar to above, not sure what the exact difference it.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion" // warning : implicit conversion changes signedness //
+#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning : zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#endif
#if __has_warning("-Wcomma")
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wcomma" // warning : possible misuse of comma operator here //
#endif
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-id-macro" // warning : macro name is a reserved identifier //
#endif
#if __has_warning("-Wdouble-promotion")
-#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
#endif
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used
#endif
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// STB libraries implementation
+// [SECTION] STB libraries implementation
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Compile time options:
#ifdef IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME
#include IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME
#else
-#include "stb_rect_pack.h"
+#include "imstb_rectpack.h"
#endif
#endif
#ifdef IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME
#include IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME
#else
-#include "stb_truetype.h"
+#include "imstb_truetype.h"
#endif
#endif
#endif
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Style functions
+// [SECTION] Style functions
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
void ImGui::StyleColorsDark(ImGuiStyle* dst)
colors[ImGuiCol_Text] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled] = ImVec4(0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg] = ImVec4(0.06f, 0.06f, 0.06f, 0.94f);
- colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.00f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg] = ImVec4(0.08f, 0.08f, 0.08f, 0.94f);
colors[ImGuiCol_Border] = ImVec4(0.43f, 0.43f, 0.50f, 0.50f);
colors[ImGuiCol_BorderShadow] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.25f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.95f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_Tab] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.80f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered] = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered];
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines] = ImVec4(0.61f, 0.61f, 0.61f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered] = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.43f, 0.35f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.16f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered] = ImVec4(0.78f, 0.82f, 1.00f, 0.60f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive] = ImVec4(0.78f, 0.82f, 1.00f, 0.90f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_Tab] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.80f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered] = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered];
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip] = ImVec4(0.80f, 0.80f, 0.80f, 0.56f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f);
colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.95f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_Tab] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.90f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered] = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered];
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f);
+ colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines] = ImVec4(0.39f, 0.39f, 0.39f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered] = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.43f, 0.35f, 1.00f);
colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImDrawListData
+// ImDrawList
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
ImDrawListSharedData::ImDrawListSharedData()
}
}
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImDrawList
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
void ImDrawList::Clear()
{
CmdBuffer.resize(0);
_IdxWritePtr += 6;
}
+// On AddPolyline() and AddConvexPolyFilled() we intentionally avoid using ImVec2 and superflous function calls to optimize debug/non-inlined builds.
+// Those macros expects l-values.
+#define IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(VX,VY) { float d2 = VX*VX + VY*VY; if (d2 > 0.0f) { float inv_len = 1.0f / ImSqrt(d2); VX *= inv_len; VY *= inv_len; } }
+#define IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_EPSILON_CLAMP(VX,VY,EPS,INVLENMAX) { float d2 = VX*VX + VY*VY; if (d2 > EPS) { float inv_len = 1.0f / ImSqrt(d2); if (inv_len > INVLENMAX) inv_len = INVLENMAX; VX *= inv_len; VY *= inv_len; } }
+
// TODO: Thickness anti-aliased lines cap are missing their AA fringe.
+// We avoid using the ImVec2 math operators here to reduce cost to a minimum for debug/non-inlined builds.
void ImDrawList::AddPolyline(const ImVec2* points, const int points_count, ImU32 col, bool closed, float thickness)
{
if (points_count < 2)
PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count);
// Temporary buffer
- ImVec2* temp_normals = (ImVec2*)alloca(points_count * (thick_line ? 5 : 3) * sizeof(ImVec2));
+ ImVec2* temp_normals = (ImVec2*)alloca(points_count * (thick_line ? 5 : 3) * sizeof(ImVec2)); //-V630
ImVec2* temp_points = temp_normals + points_count;
for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++)
{
const int i2 = (i1+1) == points_count ? 0 : i1+1;
- ImVec2 diff = points[i2] - points[i1];
- diff *= ImInvLength(diff, 1.0f);
- temp_normals[i1].x = diff.y;
- temp_normals[i1].y = -diff.x;
+ float dx = points[i2].x - points[i1].x;
+ float dy = points[i2].y - points[i1].y;
+ IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy);
+ temp_normals[i1].x = dy;
+ temp_normals[i1].y = -dx;
}
if (!closed)
temp_normals[points_count-1] = temp_normals[points_count-2];
unsigned int idx2 = (i1+1) == points_count ? _VtxCurrentIdx : idx1+3;
// Average normals
- ImVec2 dm = (temp_normals[i1] + temp_normals[i2]) * 0.5f;
- float dmr2 = dm.x*dm.x + dm.y*dm.y;
- if (dmr2 > 0.000001f)
- {
- float scale = 1.0f / dmr2;
- if (scale > 100.0f) scale = 100.0f;
- dm *= scale;
- }
- dm *= AA_SIZE;
- temp_points[i2*2+0] = points[i2] + dm;
- temp_points[i2*2+1] = points[i2] - dm;
+ float dm_x = (temp_normals[i1].x + temp_normals[i2].x) * 0.5f;
+ float dm_y = (temp_normals[i1].y + temp_normals[i2].y) * 0.5f;
+ IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_EPSILON_CLAMP(dm_x, dm_y, 0.000001f, 100.0f)
+ dm_x *= AA_SIZE;
+ dm_y *= AA_SIZE;
+
+ // Add temporary vertexes
+ ImVec2* out_vtx = &temp_points[i2*2];
+ out_vtx[0].x = points[i2].x + dm_x;
+ out_vtx[0].y = points[i2].y + dm_y;
+ out_vtx[1].x = points[i2].x - dm_x;
+ out_vtx[1].y = points[i2].y - dm_y;
// Add indexes
_IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2+0); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1+0); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1+2);
unsigned int idx2 = (i1+1) == points_count ? _VtxCurrentIdx : idx1+4;
// Average normals
- ImVec2 dm = (temp_normals[i1] + temp_normals[i2]) * 0.5f;
- float dmr2 = dm.x*dm.x + dm.y*dm.y;
- if (dmr2 > 0.000001f)
- {
- float scale = 1.0f / dmr2;
- if (scale > 100.0f) scale = 100.0f;
- dm *= scale;
- }
- ImVec2 dm_out = dm * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
- ImVec2 dm_in = dm * half_inner_thickness;
- temp_points[i2*4+0] = points[i2] + dm_out;
- temp_points[i2*4+1] = points[i2] + dm_in;
- temp_points[i2*4+2] = points[i2] - dm_in;
- temp_points[i2*4+3] = points[i2] - dm_out;
+ float dm_x = (temp_normals[i1].x + temp_normals[i2].x) * 0.5f;
+ float dm_y = (temp_normals[i1].y + temp_normals[i2].y) * 0.5f;
+ IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_EPSILON_CLAMP(dm_x, dm_y, 0.000001f, 100.0f);
+ float dm_out_x = dm_x * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
+ float dm_out_y = dm_y * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
+ float dm_in_x = dm_x * half_inner_thickness;
+ float dm_in_y = dm_y * half_inner_thickness;
+
+ // Add temporary vertexes
+ ImVec2* out_vtx = &temp_points[i2*4];
+ out_vtx[0].x = points[i2].x + dm_out_x;
+ out_vtx[0].y = points[i2].y + dm_out_y;
+ out_vtx[1].x = points[i2].x + dm_in_x;
+ out_vtx[1].y = points[i2].y + dm_in_y;
+ out_vtx[2].x = points[i2].x - dm_in_x;
+ out_vtx[2].y = points[i2].y - dm_in_y;
+ out_vtx[3].x = points[i2].x - dm_out_x;
+ out_vtx[3].y = points[i2].y - dm_out_y;
// Add indexes
_IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2+1); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1+1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1+2);
const int i2 = (i1+1) == points_count ? 0 : i1+1;
const ImVec2& p1 = points[i1];
const ImVec2& p2 = points[i2];
- ImVec2 diff = p2 - p1;
- diff *= ImInvLength(diff, 1.0f);
- const float dx = diff.x * (thickness * 0.5f);
- const float dy = diff.y * (thickness * 0.5f);
+ float dx = p2.x - p1.x;
+ float dy = p2.y - p1.y;
+ IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy);
+ dx *= (thickness * 0.5f);
+ dy *= (thickness * 0.5f);
+
_VtxWritePtr[0].pos.x = p1.x + dy; _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.y = p1.y - dx; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col;
_VtxWritePtr[1].pos.x = p2.x + dy; _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.y = p2.y - dx; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col;
_VtxWritePtr[2].pos.x = p2.x - dy; _VtxWritePtr[2].pos.y = p2.y + dx; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col;
}
}
+// We intentionally avoid using ImVec2 and its math operators here to reduce cost to a minimum for debug/non-inlined builds.
void ImDrawList::AddConvexPolyFilled(const ImVec2* points, const int points_count, ImU32 col)
{
+ if (points_count < 3)
+ return;
+
const ImVec2 uv = _Data->TexUvWhitePixel;
if (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill)
}
// Compute normals
- ImVec2* temp_normals = (ImVec2*)alloca(points_count * sizeof(ImVec2));
+ ImVec2* temp_normals = (ImVec2*)alloca(points_count * sizeof(ImVec2)); //-V630
for (int i0 = points_count-1, i1 = 0; i1 < points_count; i0 = i1++)
{
const ImVec2& p0 = points[i0];
const ImVec2& p1 = points[i1];
- ImVec2 diff = p1 - p0;
- diff *= ImInvLength(diff, 1.0f);
- temp_normals[i0].x = diff.y;
- temp_normals[i0].y = -diff.x;
+ float dx = p1.x - p0.x;
+ float dy = p1.y - p0.y;
+ IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy);
+ temp_normals[i0].x = dy;
+ temp_normals[i0].y = -dx;
}
for (int i0 = points_count-1, i1 = 0; i1 < points_count; i0 = i1++)
// Average normals
const ImVec2& n0 = temp_normals[i0];
const ImVec2& n1 = temp_normals[i1];
- ImVec2 dm = (n0 + n1) * 0.5f;
- float dmr2 = dm.x*dm.x + dm.y*dm.y;
- if (dmr2 > 0.000001f)
- {
- float scale = 1.0f / dmr2;
- if (scale > 100.0f) scale = 100.0f;
- dm *= scale;
- }
- dm *= AA_SIZE * 0.5f;
+ float dm_x = (n0.x + n1.x) * 0.5f;
+ float dm_y = (n0.y + n1.y) * 0.5f;
+ IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_EPSILON_CLAMP(dm_x, dm_y, 0.000001f, 100.0f);
+ dm_x *= AA_SIZE * 0.5f;
+ dm_y *= AA_SIZE * 0.5f;
// Add vertices
- _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = (points[i1] - dm); _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; // Inner
- _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = (points[i1] + dm); _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col_trans; // Outer
+ _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.x = (points[i1].x - dm_x); _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.y = (points[i1].y - dm_y); _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; // Inner
+ _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.x = (points[i1].x + dm_x); _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.y = (points[i1].y + dm_y); _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col_trans; // Outer
_VtxWritePtr += 2;
// Add indexes for fringes
_Path.push_back(centre);
return;
}
+
+ // Note that we are adding a point at both a_min and a_max.
+ // If you are trying to draw a full closed circle you don't want the overlapping points!
_Path.reserve(_Path.Size + (num_segments + 1));
for (int i = 0; i <= num_segments; i++)
{
void ImDrawList::AddCircle(const ImVec2& centre, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness)
{
- if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+ if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || num_segments <= 2)
return;
+ // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points
const float a_max = IM_PI*2.0f * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments;
- PathArcTo(centre, radius-0.5f, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments);
+ PathArcTo(centre, radius-0.5f, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1);
PathStroke(col, true, thickness);
}
void ImDrawList::AddCircleFilled(const ImVec2& centre, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments)
{
- if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+ if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || num_segments <= 2)
return;
+ // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points
const float a_max = IM_PI*2.0f * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments;
- PathArcTo(centre, radius, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments);
+ PathArcTo(centre, radius, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1);
PathFillConvex(col);
}
PathRect(a, b, rounding, rounding_corners);
PathFillConvex(col);
int vert_end_idx = VtxBuffer.Size;
- ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx, VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx, a, b, uv_a, uv_b, true);
+ ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(this, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, a, b, uv_a, uv_b, true);
if (push_texture_id)
PopTextureID();
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImDrawData
+// [SECTION] ImDrawData
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// For backward compatibility: convert all buffers from indexed to de-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering!
}
}
-// Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd. Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than ImGui expects, or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution.
-void ImDrawData::ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& scale)
+// Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd.
+// Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than draw_data->DisplaySize,
+// or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution.
+void ImDrawData::ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& fb_scale)
{
for (int i = 0; i < CmdListsCount; i++)
{
for (int cmd_i = 0; cmd_i < cmd_list->CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_i++)
{
ImDrawCmd* cmd = &cmd_list->CmdBuffer[cmd_i];
- cmd->ClipRect = ImVec4(cmd->ClipRect.x * scale.x, cmd->ClipRect.y * scale.y, cmd->ClipRect.z * scale.x, cmd->ClipRect.w * scale.y);
+ cmd->ClipRect = ImVec4(cmd->ClipRect.x * fb_scale.x, cmd->ClipRect.y * fb_scale.y, cmd->ClipRect.z * fb_scale.x, cmd->ClipRect.w * fb_scale.y);
}
}
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Shade functions
+// [SECTION] Helpers ShadeVertsXXX functions
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Generic linear color gradient, write to RGB fields, leave A untouched.
-void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawVert* vert_start, ImDrawVert* vert_end, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1)
+void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1)
{
ImVec2 gradient_extent = gradient_p1 - gradient_p0;
float gradient_inv_length2 = 1.0f / ImLengthSqr(gradient_extent);
+ ImDrawVert* vert_start = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx;
+ ImDrawVert* vert_end = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx;
for (ImDrawVert* vert = vert_start; vert < vert_end; vert++)
{
float d = ImDot(vert->pos - gradient_p0, gradient_extent);
}
// Distribute UV over (a, b) rectangle
-void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawVert* vert_start, ImDrawVert* vert_end, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp)
+void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp)
{
const ImVec2 size = b - a;
const ImVec2 uv_size = uv_b - uv_a;
size.x != 0.0f ? (uv_size.x / size.x) : 0.0f,
size.y != 0.0f ? (uv_size.y / size.y) : 0.0f);
+ ImDrawVert* vert_start = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx;
+ ImDrawVert* vert_end = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx;
if (clamp)
{
const ImVec2 min = ImMin(uv_a, uv_b);
const ImVec2 max = ImMax(uv_a, uv_b);
-
for (ImDrawVert* vertex = vert_start; vertex < vert_end; ++vertex)
vertex->uv = ImClamp(uv_a + ImMul(ImVec2(vertex->pos.x, vertex->pos.y) - a, scale), min, max);
}
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImFontConfig
+// [SECTION] ImFontConfig
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
ImFontConfig::ImFontConfig()
FontDataOwnedByAtlas = true;
FontNo = 0;
SizePixels = 0.0f;
- OversampleH = 3;
+ OversampleH = 3; // FIXME: 2 may be a better default?
OversampleV = 1;
PixelSnapH = false;
GlyphExtraSpacing = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImFontAtlas
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// A work of art lies ahead! (. = white layer, X = black layer, others are blank)
ImFontAtlas::ImFontAtlas()
{
Locked = false;
- Flags = 0x00;
- TexID = NULL;
+ Flags = ImFontAtlasFlags_None;
+ TexID = (ImTextureID)NULL;
TexDesiredWidth = 0;
TexGlyphPadding = 1;
GetTexDataAsAlpha8(&pixels, NULL, NULL);
if (pixels)
{
- TexPixelsRGBA32 = (unsigned int*)ImGui::MemAlloc((size_t)(TexWidth * TexHeight * 4));
+ TexPixelsRGBA32 = (unsigned int*)ImGui::MemAlloc((size_t)TexWidth * (size_t)TexHeight * 4);
const unsigned char* src = pixels;
unsigned int* dst = TexPixelsRGBA32;
for (int n = TexWidth * TexHeight; n > 0; n--)
if (!font_cfg->MergeMode)
Fonts.push_back(IM_NEW(ImFont));
else
- IM_ASSERT(!Fonts.empty()); // When using MergeMode make sure that a font has already been added before. You can use ImGui::GetIO().Fonts->AddFontDefault() to add the default imgui font.
+ IM_ASSERT(!Fonts.empty() && "Cannot use MergeMode for the first font"); // When using MergeMode make sure that a font has already been added before. You can use ImGui::GetIO().Fonts->AddFontDefault() to add the default imgui font.
ConfigData.push_back(*font_cfg);
ImFontConfig& new_font_cfg = ConfigData.back();
- if (!new_font_cfg.DstFont)
+ if (new_font_cfg.DstFont == NULL)
new_font_cfg.DstFont = Fonts.back();
if (!new_font_cfg.FontDataOwnedByAtlas)
{
font_cfg.OversampleH = font_cfg.OversampleV = 1;
font_cfg.PixelSnapH = true;
}
- if (font_cfg.Name[0] == '\0') strcpy(font_cfg.Name, "ProggyClean.ttf, 13px");
- if (font_cfg.SizePixels <= 0.0f) font_cfg.SizePixels = 13.0f;
+ if (font_cfg.SizePixels <= 0.0f)
+ font_cfg.SizePixels = 13.0f * 1.0f;
+ if (font_cfg.Name[0] == '\0')
+ ImFormatString(font_cfg.Name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(font_cfg.Name), "ProggyClean.ttf, %dpx", (int)font_cfg.SizePixels);
const char* ttf_compressed_base85 = GetDefaultCompressedFontDataTTFBase85();
- ImFont* font = AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(ttf_compressed_base85, font_cfg.SizePixels, &font_cfg, GetGlyphRangesDefault());
+ const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = font_cfg.GlyphRanges != NULL ? font_cfg.GlyphRanges : GetGlyphRangesDefault();
+ ImFont* font = AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(ttf_compressed_base85, font_cfg.SizePixels, &font_cfg, glyph_ranges);
font->DisplayOffset.y = 1.0f;
return font;
}
data[i] = table[data[i]];
}
+// Temporary data for one source font (multiple source fonts can be merged into one destination ImFont)
+// (C++03 doesn't allow instancing ImVector<> with function-local types so we declare the type here.)
+struct ImFontBuildSrcData
+{
+ stbtt_fontinfo FontInfo;
+ stbtt_pack_range PackRange; // Hold the list of codepoints to pack (essentially points to Codepoints.Data)
+ stbrp_rect* Rects; // Rectangle to pack. We first fill in their size and the packer will give us their position.
+ stbtt_packedchar* PackedChars; // Output glyphs
+ const ImWchar* SrcRanges; // Ranges as requested by user (user is allowed to request too much, e.g. 0x0020..0xFFFF)
+ int DstIndex; // Index into atlas->Fonts[] and dst_tmp_array[]
+ int GlyphsHighest; // Highest requested codepoint
+ int GlyphsCount; // Glyph count (excluding missing glyphs and glyphs already set by an earlier source font)
+ ImBoolVector GlyphsSet; // Glyph bit map (random access, 1-bit per codepoint. This will be a maximum of 8KB)
+ ImVector<int> GlyphsList; // Glyph codepoints list (flattened version of GlyphsMap)
+};
+
+// Temporary data for one destination ImFont* (multiple source fonts can be merged into one destination ImFont)
+struct ImFontBuildDstData
+{
+ int SrcCount; // Number of source fonts targeting this destination font.
+ int GlyphsHighest;
+ int GlyphsCount;
+ ImBoolVector GlyphsSet; // This is used to resolve collision when multiple sources are merged into a same destination font.
+};
+
+static void UnpackBoolVectorToFlatIndexList(const ImBoolVector* in, ImVector<int>* out)
+{
+ IM_ASSERT(sizeof(in->Storage.Data[0]) == sizeof(int));
+ const int* it_begin = in->Storage.begin();
+ const int* it_end = in->Storage.end();
+ for (const int* it = it_begin; it < it_end; it++)
+ if (int entries_32 = *it)
+ for (int bit_n = 0; bit_n < 32; bit_n++)
+ if (entries_32 & (1 << bit_n))
+ out->push_back((int)((it - it_begin) << 5) + bit_n);
+}
+
bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
{
IM_ASSERT(atlas->ConfigData.Size > 0);
ImFontAtlasBuildRegisterDefaultCustomRects(atlas);
- atlas->TexID = NULL;
+ // Clear atlas
+ atlas->TexID = (ImTextureID)NULL;
atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexHeight = 0;
atlas->TexUvScale = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
atlas->TexUvWhitePixel = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
atlas->ClearTexData();
- // Count glyphs/ranges
- int total_glyphs_count = 0;
- int total_ranges_count = 0;
- for (int input_i = 0; input_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; input_i++)
- {
- ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[input_i];
- if (!cfg.GlyphRanges)
- cfg.GlyphRanges = atlas->GetGlyphRangesDefault();
- for (const ImWchar* in_range = cfg.GlyphRanges; in_range[0] && in_range[1]; in_range += 2, total_ranges_count++)
- total_glyphs_count += (in_range[1] - in_range[0]) + 1;
- }
-
- // We need a width for the skyline algorithm. Using a dumb heuristic here to decide of width. User can override TexDesiredWidth and TexGlyphPadding if they wish.
- // Width doesn't really matter much, but some API/GPU have texture size limitations and increasing width can decrease height.
- atlas->TexWidth = (atlas->TexDesiredWidth > 0) ? atlas->TexDesiredWidth : (total_glyphs_count > 4000) ? 4096 : (total_glyphs_count > 2000) ? 2048 : (total_glyphs_count > 1000) ? 1024 : 512;
- atlas->TexHeight = 0;
-
- // Start packing
- const int max_tex_height = 1024*32;
- stbtt_pack_context spc = {};
- if (!stbtt_PackBegin(&spc, NULL, atlas->TexWidth, max_tex_height, 0, atlas->TexGlyphPadding, NULL))
- return false;
- stbtt_PackSetOversampling(&spc, 1, 1);
+ // Temporary storage for building
+ ImVector<ImFontBuildSrcData> src_tmp_array;
+ ImVector<ImFontBuildDstData> dst_tmp_array;
+ src_tmp_array.resize(atlas->ConfigData.Size);
+ dst_tmp_array.resize(atlas->Fonts.Size);
+ memset(src_tmp_array.Data, 0, (size_t)src_tmp_array.size_in_bytes());
+ memset(dst_tmp_array.Data, 0, (size_t)dst_tmp_array.size_in_bytes());
- // Pack our extra data rectangles first, so it will be on the upper-left corner of our texture (UV will have small values).
- ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(atlas, spc.pack_info);
-
- // Initialize font information (so we can error without any cleanup)
- struct ImFontTempBuildData
- {
- stbtt_fontinfo FontInfo;
- stbrp_rect* Rects;
- int RectsCount;
- stbtt_pack_range* Ranges;
- int RangesCount;
- };
- ImFontTempBuildData* tmp_array = (ImFontTempBuildData*)ImGui::MemAlloc((size_t)atlas->ConfigData.Size * sizeof(ImFontTempBuildData));
- for (int input_i = 0; input_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; input_i++)
+ // 1. Initialize font loading structure, check font data validity
+ for (int src_i = 0; src_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; src_i++)
{
- ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[input_i];
- ImFontTempBuildData& tmp = tmp_array[input_i];
+ ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+ ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
IM_ASSERT(cfg.DstFont && (!cfg.DstFont->IsLoaded() || cfg.DstFont->ContainerAtlas == atlas));
+ // Find index from cfg.DstFont (we allow the user to set cfg.DstFont. Also it makes casual debugging nicer than when storing indices)
+ src_tmp.DstIndex = -1;
+ for (int output_i = 0; output_i < atlas->Fonts.Size && src_tmp.DstIndex == -1; output_i++)
+ if (cfg.DstFont == atlas->Fonts[output_i])
+ src_tmp.DstIndex = output_i;
+ IM_ASSERT(src_tmp.DstIndex != -1); // cfg.DstFont not pointing within atlas->Fonts[] array?
+ if (src_tmp.DstIndex == -1)
+ return false;
+
+ // Initialize helper structure for font loading and verify that the TTF/OTF data is correct
const int font_offset = stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex((unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, cfg.FontNo);
IM_ASSERT(font_offset >= 0 && "FontData is incorrect, or FontNo cannot be found.");
- if (!stbtt_InitFont(&tmp.FontInfo, (unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, font_offset))
- {
- atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexHeight = 0; // Reset output on failure
- ImGui::MemFree(tmp_array);
+ if (!stbtt_InitFont(&src_tmp.FontInfo, (unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, font_offset))
return false;
- }
+
+ // Measure highest codepoints
+ ImFontBuildDstData& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex];
+ src_tmp.SrcRanges = cfg.GlyphRanges ? cfg.GlyphRanges : atlas->GetGlyphRangesDefault();
+ for (const ImWchar* src_range = src_tmp.SrcRanges; src_range[0] && src_range[1]; src_range += 2)
+ src_tmp.GlyphsHighest = ImMax(src_tmp.GlyphsHighest, (int)src_range[1]);
+ dst_tmp.SrcCount++;
+ dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest = ImMax(dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest, src_tmp.GlyphsHighest);
+ }
+
+ // 2. For every requested codepoint, check for their presence in the font data, and handle redundancy or overlaps between source fonts to avoid unused glyphs.
+ int total_glyphs_count = 0;
+ for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+ {
+ ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+ ImFontBuildDstData& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex];
+ ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
+ src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Resize(src_tmp.GlyphsHighest + 1);
+ if (dst_tmp.SrcCount > 1 && dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.Storage.empty())
+ dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.Resize(dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest + 1);
+
+ for (const ImWchar* src_range = src_tmp.SrcRanges; src_range[0] && src_range[1]; src_range += 2)
+ for (int codepoint = src_range[0]; codepoint <= src_range[1]; codepoint++)
+ {
+ if (cfg.MergeMode && dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.GetBit(codepoint)) // Don't overwrite existing glyphs. We could make this an option (e.g. MergeOverwrite)
+ continue;
+ if (!stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&src_tmp.FontInfo, codepoint)) // It is actually in the font?
+ continue;
+
+ // Add to avail set/counters
+ src_tmp.GlyphsCount++;
+ dst_tmp.GlyphsCount++;
+ src_tmp.GlyphsSet.SetBit(codepoint, true);
+ if (dst_tmp.SrcCount > 1)
+ dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.SetBit(codepoint, true);
+ total_glyphs_count++;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // 3. Unpack our bit map into a flat list (we now have all the Unicode points that we know are requested _and_ available _and_ not overlapping another)
+ for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+ {
+ ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+ src_tmp.GlyphsList.reserve(src_tmp.GlyphsCount);
+ UnpackBoolVectorToFlatIndexList(&src_tmp.GlyphsSet, &src_tmp.GlyphsList);
+ src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Clear();
+ IM_ASSERT(src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size == src_tmp.GlyphsCount);
}
+ for (int dst_i = 0; dst_i < dst_tmp_array.Size; dst_i++)
+ dst_tmp_array[dst_i].GlyphsSet.Clear();
+ dst_tmp_array.clear();
// Allocate packing character data and flag packed characters buffer as non-packed (x0=y0=x1=y1=0)
- int buf_packedchars_n = 0, buf_rects_n = 0, buf_ranges_n = 0;
- stbtt_packedchar* buf_packedchars = (stbtt_packedchar*)ImGui::MemAlloc(total_glyphs_count * sizeof(stbtt_packedchar));
- stbrp_rect* buf_rects = (stbrp_rect*)ImGui::MemAlloc(total_glyphs_count * sizeof(stbrp_rect));
- stbtt_pack_range* buf_ranges = (stbtt_pack_range*)ImGui::MemAlloc(total_ranges_count * sizeof(stbtt_pack_range));
- memset(buf_packedchars, 0, total_glyphs_count * sizeof(stbtt_packedchar));
- memset(buf_rects, 0, total_glyphs_count * sizeof(stbrp_rect)); // Unnecessary but let's clear this for the sake of sanity.
- memset(buf_ranges, 0, total_ranges_count * sizeof(stbtt_pack_range));
-
- // First font pass: pack all glyphs (no rendering at this point, we are working with rectangles in an infinitely tall texture at this point)
- for (int input_i = 0; input_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; input_i++)
- {
- ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[input_i];
- ImFontTempBuildData& tmp = tmp_array[input_i];
-
- // Setup ranges
- int font_glyphs_count = 0;
- int font_ranges_count = 0;
- for (const ImWchar* in_range = cfg.GlyphRanges; in_range[0] && in_range[1]; in_range += 2, font_ranges_count++)
- font_glyphs_count += (in_range[1] - in_range[0]) + 1;
- tmp.Ranges = buf_ranges + buf_ranges_n;
- tmp.RangesCount = font_ranges_count;
- buf_ranges_n += font_ranges_count;
- for (int i = 0; i < font_ranges_count; i++)
- {
- const ImWchar* in_range = &cfg.GlyphRanges[i * 2];
- stbtt_pack_range& range = tmp.Ranges[i];
- range.font_size = cfg.SizePixels;
- range.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = in_range[0];
- range.num_chars = (in_range[1] - in_range[0]) + 1;
- range.chardata_for_range = buf_packedchars + buf_packedchars_n;
- buf_packedchars_n += range.num_chars;
- }
+ // (We technically don't need to zero-clear buf_rects, but let's do it for the sake of sanity)
+ ImVector<stbrp_rect> buf_rects;
+ ImVector<stbtt_packedchar> buf_packedchars;
+ buf_rects.resize(total_glyphs_count);
+ buf_packedchars.resize(total_glyphs_count);
+ memset(buf_rects.Data, 0, (size_t)buf_rects.size_in_bytes());
+ memset(buf_packedchars.Data, 0, (size_t)buf_packedchars.size_in_bytes());
+
+ // 4. Gather glyphs sizes so we can pack them in our virtual canvas.
+ int total_surface = 0;
+ int buf_rects_out_n = 0;
+ int buf_packedchars_out_n = 0;
+ for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+ {
+ ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+ if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0)
+ continue;
- // Gather the sizes of all rectangle we need
- tmp.Rects = buf_rects + buf_rects_n;
- tmp.RectsCount = font_glyphs_count;
- buf_rects_n += font_glyphs_count;
- stbtt_PackSetOversampling(&spc, cfg.OversampleH, cfg.OversampleV);
- int n = stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(&spc, &tmp.FontInfo, tmp.Ranges, tmp.RangesCount, tmp.Rects);
- IM_ASSERT(n == font_glyphs_count);
-
- // Detect missing glyphs and replace them with a zero-sized box instead of relying on the default glyphs
- // This allows us merging overlapping icon fonts more easily.
- int rect_i = 0;
- for (int range_i = 0; range_i < tmp.RangesCount; range_i++)
- for (int char_i = 0; char_i < tmp.Ranges[range_i].num_chars; char_i++, rect_i++)
- if (stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&tmp.FontInfo, tmp.Ranges[range_i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + char_i) == 0)
- tmp.Rects[rect_i].w = tmp.Rects[rect_i].h = 0;
-
- // Pack
- stbrp_pack_rects((stbrp_context*)spc.pack_info, tmp.Rects, n);
-
- // Extend texture height
- // Also mark missing glyphs as non-packed so we don't attempt to render into them
- for (int i = 0; i < n; i++)
+ src_tmp.Rects = &buf_rects[buf_rects_out_n];
+ src_tmp.PackedChars = &buf_packedchars[buf_packedchars_out_n];
+ buf_rects_out_n += src_tmp.GlyphsCount;
+ buf_packedchars_out_n += src_tmp.GlyphsCount;
+
+ // Convert our ranges in the format stb_truetype wants
+ ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
+ src_tmp.PackRange.font_size = cfg.SizePixels;
+ src_tmp.PackRange.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = 0;
+ src_tmp.PackRange.array_of_unicode_codepoints = src_tmp.GlyphsList.Data;
+ src_tmp.PackRange.num_chars = src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size;
+ src_tmp.PackRange.chardata_for_range = src_tmp.PackedChars;
+ src_tmp.PackRange.h_oversample = (unsigned char)cfg.OversampleH;
+ src_tmp.PackRange.v_oversample = (unsigned char)cfg.OversampleV;
+
+ // Gather the sizes of all rectangles we will need to pack (this loop is based on stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects)
+ const float scale = (cfg.SizePixels > 0) ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&src_tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(&src_tmp.FontInfo, -cfg.SizePixels);
+ const int padding = atlas->TexGlyphPadding;
+ for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size; glyph_i++)
{
- if (tmp.Rects[i].w == 0 && tmp.Rects[i].h == 0)
- tmp.Rects[i].was_packed = 0;
- if (tmp.Rects[i].was_packed)
- atlas->TexHeight = ImMax(atlas->TexHeight, tmp.Rects[i].y + tmp.Rects[i].h);
+ int x0, y0, x1, y1;
+ const int glyph_index_in_font = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&src_tmp.FontInfo, src_tmp.GlyphsList[glyph_i]);
+ IM_ASSERT(glyph_index_in_font != 0);
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(&src_tmp.FontInfo, glyph_index_in_font, scale * cfg.OversampleH, scale * cfg.OversampleV, 0, 0, &x0, &y0, &x1, &y1);
+ src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].w = (stbrp_coord)(x1 - x0 + padding + cfg.OversampleH - 1);
+ src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h = (stbrp_coord)(y1 - y0 + padding + cfg.OversampleV - 1);
+ total_surface += src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].w * src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h;
}
}
- IM_ASSERT(buf_rects_n == total_glyphs_count);
- IM_ASSERT(buf_packedchars_n == total_glyphs_count);
- IM_ASSERT(buf_ranges_n == total_ranges_count);
- // Create texture
+ // We need a width for the skyline algorithm, any width!
+ // The exact width doesn't really matter much, but some API/GPU have texture size limitations and increasing width can decrease height.
+ // User can override TexDesiredWidth and TexGlyphPadding if they wish, otherwise we use a simple heuristic to select the width based on expected surface.
+ const int surface_sqrt = (int)ImSqrt((float)total_surface) + 1;
+ atlas->TexHeight = 0;
+ if (atlas->TexDesiredWidth > 0)
+ atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexDesiredWidth;
+ else
+ atlas->TexWidth = (surface_sqrt >= 4096*0.7f) ? 4096 : (surface_sqrt >= 2048*0.7f) ? 2048 : (surface_sqrt >= 1024*0.7f) ? 1024 : 512;
+
+ // 5. Start packing
+ // Pack our extra data rectangles first, so it will be on the upper-left corner of our texture (UV will have small values).
+ const int TEX_HEIGHT_MAX = 1024 * 32;
+ stbtt_pack_context spc = {};
+ stbtt_PackBegin(&spc, NULL, atlas->TexWidth, TEX_HEIGHT_MAX, 0, atlas->TexGlyphPadding, NULL);
+ ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(atlas, spc.pack_info);
+
+ // 6. Pack each source font. No rendering yet, we are working with rectangles in an infinitely tall texture at this point.
+ for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+ {
+ ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+ if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0)
+ continue;
+
+ stbrp_pack_rects((stbrp_context*)spc.pack_info, src_tmp.Rects, src_tmp.GlyphsCount);
+
+ // Extend texture height and mark missing glyphs as non-packed so we won't render them.
+ // FIXME: We are not handling packing failure here (would happen if we got off TEX_HEIGHT_MAX or if a single if larger than TexWidth?)
+ for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++)
+ if (src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].was_packed)
+ atlas->TexHeight = ImMax(atlas->TexHeight, src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].y + src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h);
+ }
+
+ // 7. Allocate texture
atlas->TexHeight = (atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight) ? (atlas->TexHeight + 1) : ImUpperPowerOfTwo(atlas->TexHeight);
atlas->TexUvScale = ImVec2(1.0f / atlas->TexWidth, 1.0f / atlas->TexHeight);
atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 = (unsigned char*)ImGui::MemAlloc(atlas->TexWidth * atlas->TexHeight);
spc.pixels = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8;
spc.height = atlas->TexHeight;
- // Second pass: render font characters
- for (int input_i = 0; input_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; input_i++)
+ // 8. Render/rasterize font characters into the texture
+ for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
{
- ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[input_i];
- ImFontTempBuildData& tmp = tmp_array[input_i];
- stbtt_PackSetOversampling(&spc, cfg.OversampleH, cfg.OversampleV);
- stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(&spc, &tmp.FontInfo, tmp.Ranges, tmp.RangesCount, tmp.Rects);
+ ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
+ ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+ if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0)
+ continue;
+
+ stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(&spc, &src_tmp.FontInfo, &src_tmp.PackRange, 1, src_tmp.Rects);
+
+ // Apply multiply operator
if (cfg.RasterizerMultiply != 1.0f)
{
unsigned char multiply_table[256];
ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(multiply_table, cfg.RasterizerMultiply);
- for (const stbrp_rect* r = tmp.Rects; r != tmp.Rects + tmp.RectsCount; r++)
+ stbrp_rect* r = &src_tmp.Rects[0];
+ for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++, r++)
if (r->was_packed)
- ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(multiply_table, spc.pixels, r->x, r->y, r->w, r->h, spc.stride_in_bytes);
+ ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(multiply_table, atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8, r->x, r->y, r->w, r->h, atlas->TexWidth * 1);
}
- tmp.Rects = NULL;
+ src_tmp.Rects = NULL;
}
// End packing
stbtt_PackEnd(&spc);
- ImGui::MemFree(buf_rects);
- buf_rects = NULL;
+ buf_rects.clear();
- // Third pass: setup ImFont and glyphs for runtime
- for (int input_i = 0; input_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; input_i++)
+ // 9. Setup ImFont and glyphs for runtime
+ for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
{
- ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[input_i];
- ImFontTempBuildData& tmp = tmp_array[input_i];
+ ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+ if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0)
+ continue;
+
+ ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
ImFont* dst_font = cfg.DstFont; // We can have multiple input fonts writing into a same destination font (when using MergeMode=true)
- if (cfg.MergeMode)
- dst_font->BuildLookupTable();
- const float font_scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels);
+ const float font_scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&src_tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels);
int unscaled_ascent, unscaled_descent, unscaled_line_gap;
- stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&tmp.FontInfo, &unscaled_ascent, &unscaled_descent, &unscaled_line_gap);
+ stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&src_tmp.FontInfo, &unscaled_ascent, &unscaled_descent, &unscaled_line_gap);
const float ascent = ImFloor(unscaled_ascent * font_scale + ((unscaled_ascent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1));
const float descent = ImFloor(unscaled_descent * font_scale + ((unscaled_descent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1));
const float font_off_x = cfg.GlyphOffset.x;
const float font_off_y = cfg.GlyphOffset.y + (float)(int)(dst_font->Ascent + 0.5f);
- for (int i = 0; i < tmp.RangesCount; i++)
+ for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++)
{
- stbtt_pack_range& range = tmp.Ranges[i];
- for (int char_idx = 0; char_idx < range.num_chars; char_idx += 1)
- {
- const stbtt_packedchar& pc = range.chardata_for_range[char_idx];
- if (!pc.x0 && !pc.x1 && !pc.y0 && !pc.y1)
- continue;
-
- const int codepoint = range.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + char_idx;
- if (cfg.MergeMode && dst_font->FindGlyphNoFallback((unsigned short)codepoint))
- continue;
-
- float char_advance_x_org = pc.xadvance;
- float char_advance_x_mod = ImClamp(char_advance_x_org, cfg.GlyphMinAdvanceX, cfg.GlyphMaxAdvanceX);
- float char_off_x = font_off_x;
- if (char_advance_x_org != char_advance_x_mod)
- char_off_x += cfg.PixelSnapH ? (float)(int)((char_advance_x_mod - char_advance_x_org) * 0.5f) : (char_advance_x_mod - char_advance_x_org) * 0.5f;
-
- stbtt_aligned_quad q;
- float dummy_x = 0.0f, dummy_y = 0.0f;
- stbtt_GetPackedQuad(range.chardata_for_range, atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight, char_idx, &dummy_x, &dummy_y, &q, 0);
- dst_font->AddGlyph((ImWchar)codepoint, q.x0 + char_off_x, q.y0 + font_off_y, q.x1 + char_off_x, q.y1 + font_off_y, q.s0, q.t0, q.s1, q.t1, char_advance_x_mod);
- }
+ const int codepoint = src_tmp.GlyphsList[glyph_i];
+ const stbtt_packedchar& pc = src_tmp.PackedChars[glyph_i];
+
+ const float char_advance_x_org = pc.xadvance;
+ const float char_advance_x_mod = ImClamp(char_advance_x_org, cfg.GlyphMinAdvanceX, cfg.GlyphMaxAdvanceX);
+ float char_off_x = font_off_x;
+ if (char_advance_x_org != char_advance_x_mod)
+ char_off_x += cfg.PixelSnapH ? (float)(int)((char_advance_x_mod - char_advance_x_org) * 0.5f) : (char_advance_x_mod - char_advance_x_org) * 0.5f;
+
+ // Register glyph
+ stbtt_aligned_quad q;
+ float dummy_x = 0.0f, dummy_y = 0.0f;
+ stbtt_GetPackedQuad(src_tmp.PackedChars, atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight, glyph_i, &dummy_x, &dummy_y, &q, 0);
+ dst_font->AddGlyph((ImWchar)codepoint, q.x0 + char_off_x, q.y0 + font_off_y, q.x1 + char_off_x, q.y1 + font_off_y, q.s0, q.t0, q.s1, q.t1, char_advance_x_mod);
}
}
- // Cleanup temporaries
- ImGui::MemFree(buf_packedchars);
- ImGui::MemFree(buf_ranges);
- ImGui::MemFree(tmp_array);
+ // Cleanup temporary (ImVector doesn't honor destructor)
+ for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+ src_tmp_array[src_i].~ImFontBuildSrcData();
ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(atlas);
-
return true;
}
font->ConfigDataCount++;
}
-void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* pack_context_opaque)
+void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* stbrp_context_opaque)
{
- stbrp_context* pack_context = (stbrp_context*)pack_context_opaque;
+ stbrp_context* pack_context = (stbrp_context*)stbrp_context_opaque;
+ IM_ASSERT(pack_context != NULL);
ImVector<ImFontAtlas::CustomRect>& user_rects = atlas->CustomRects;
IM_ASSERT(user_rects.Size >= 1); // We expect at least the default custom rects to be registered, else something went wrong.
ImVector<stbrp_rect> pack_rects;
pack_rects.resize(user_rects.Size);
- memset(pack_rects.Data, 0, sizeof(stbrp_rect) * user_rects.Size);
+ memset(pack_rects.Data, 0, (size_t)pack_rects.size_in_bytes());
for (int i = 0; i < user_rects.Size; i++)
{
pack_rects[i].w = user_rects[i].Width;
static const ImWchar ranges[] =
{
0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
- 0x3000, 0x30FF, // Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
+ 0x2000, 0x206F, // General Punctuation
+ 0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions
0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters
0x4e00, 0x9FAF, // CJK Ideograms
out_ranges[0] = 0;
}
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas glyph ranges helpers
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesChineseSimplifiedCommon()
{
// Store 2500 regularly used characters for Simplified Chinese.
// Sourced from https://zh.wiktionary.org/wiki/%E9%99%84%E5%BD%95:%E7%8E%B0%E4%BB%A3%E6%B1%89%E8%AF%AD%E5%B8%B8%E7%94%A8%E5%AD%97%E8%A1%A8
// This table covers 97.97% of all characters used during the month in July, 1987.
- // You can use ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder to create your own ranges derived from this, by merging existing ranges or adding new characters.
+ // You can use ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to create your own ranges derived from this, by merging existing ranges or adding new characters.
// (Stored as accumulative offsets from the initial unicode codepoint 0x4E00. This encoding is designed to helps us compact the source code size.)
static const short accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00[] =
{
static ImWchar base_ranges[] = // not zero-terminated
{
0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
- 0x3000, 0x30FF, // Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
+ 0x2000, 0x206F, // General Punctuation
+ 0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions
- 0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters
+ 0xFF00, 0xFFEF // Half-width characters
};
static ImWchar full_ranges[IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges) + IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00) * 2 + 1] = { 0 };
if (!full_ranges[0])
// 1946 common ideograms code points for Japanese
// Sourced from http://theinstructionlimit.com/common-kanji-character-ranges-for-xna-spritefont-rendering
// FIXME: Source a list of the revised 2136 Joyo Kanji list from 2010 and rebuild this.
- // You can use ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder to create your own ranges derived from this, by merging existing ranges or adding new characters.
+ // You can use ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to create your own ranges derived from this, by merging existing ranges or adding new characters.
// (Stored as accumulative offsets from the initial unicode codepoint 0x4E00. This encoding is designed to helps us compact the source code size.)
static const short accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00[] =
{
static ImWchar base_ranges[] = // not zero-terminated
{
0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
- 0x3000, 0x30FF, // Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
+ 0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions
- 0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters
+ 0xFF00, 0xFFEF // Half-width characters
};
static ImWchar full_ranges[IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges) + IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00)*2 + 1] = { 0 };
if (!full_ranges[0])
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder
+// [SECTION] ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-void ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder::AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end)
+void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end)
{
while (text_end ? (text < text_end) : *text)
{
}
}
-void ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder::AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges)
+void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges)
{
for (; ranges[0]; ranges += 2)
for (ImWchar c = ranges[0]; c <= ranges[1]; c++)
AddChar(c);
}
-void ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder::BuildRanges(ImVector<ImWchar>* out_ranges)
+void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::BuildRanges(ImVector<ImWchar>* out_ranges)
{
for (int n = 0; n < 0x10000; n++)
if (GetBit(n))
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ImFont
+// [SECTION] ImFont
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
ImFont::ImFont()
{
- Scale = 1.0f;
+ FontSize = 0.0f;
+ FallbackAdvanceX = 0.0f;
FallbackChar = (ImWchar)'?';
DisplayOffset = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- ClearOutputData();
+ FallbackGlyph = NULL;
+ ContainerAtlas = NULL;
+ ConfigData = NULL;
+ ConfigDataCount = 0;
+ DirtyLookupTables = false;
+ Scale = 1.0f;
+ Ascent = Descent = 0.0f;
+ MetricsTotalSurface = 0;
}
ImFont::~ImFont()
{
- // Invalidate active font so that the user gets a clear crash instead of a dangling pointer.
- // If you want to delete fonts you need to do it between Render() and NewFrame().
- // FIXME-CLEANUP
- /*
- ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
- if (g.Font == this)
- g.Font = NULL;
- */
ClearOutputData();
}
void ImFont::ClearOutputData()
{
FontSize = 0.0f;
+ FallbackAdvanceX = 0.0f;
Glyphs.clear();
IndexAdvanceX.clear();
IndexLookup.clear();
FallbackGlyph = NULL;
- FallbackAdvanceX = 0.0f;
- ConfigDataCount = 0;
- ConfigData = NULL;
ContainerAtlas = NULL;
- Ascent = Descent = 0.0f;
DirtyLookupTables = true;
+ Ascent = Descent = 0.0f;
MetricsTotalSurface = 0;
}
{
int codepoint = (int)Glyphs[i].Codepoint;
IndexAdvanceX[codepoint] = Glyphs[i].AdvanceX;
- IndexLookup[codepoint] = (unsigned short)i;
+ IndexLookup[codepoint] = (ImWchar)i;
}
// Create a glyph to handle TAB
// FIXME: Needs proper TAB handling but it needs to be contextualized (or we could arbitrary say that each string starts at "column 0" ?)
- if (FindGlyph((unsigned short)' '))
+ if (FindGlyph((ImWchar)' '))
{
if (Glyphs.back().Codepoint != '\t') // So we can call this function multiple times
Glyphs.resize(Glyphs.Size + 1);
ImFontGlyph& tab_glyph = Glyphs.back();
- tab_glyph = *FindGlyph((unsigned short)' ');
+ tab_glyph = *FindGlyph((ImWchar)' ');
tab_glyph.Codepoint = '\t';
tab_glyph.AdvanceX *= 4;
IndexAdvanceX[(int)tab_glyph.Codepoint] = (float)tab_glyph.AdvanceX;
- IndexLookup[(int)tab_glyph.Codepoint] = (unsigned short)(Glyphs.Size-1);
+ IndexLookup[(int)tab_glyph.Codepoint] = (ImWchar)(Glyphs.Size-1);
}
FallbackGlyph = FindGlyphNoFallback(FallbackChar);
if (new_size <= IndexLookup.Size)
return;
IndexAdvanceX.resize(new_size, -1.0f);
- IndexLookup.resize(new_size, (unsigned short)-1);
+ IndexLookup.resize(new_size, (ImWchar)-1);
}
// x0/y0/x1/y1 are offset from the character upper-left layout position, in pixels. Therefore x0/y0 are often fairly close to zero.
IM_ASSERT(IndexLookup.Size > 0); // Currently this can only be called AFTER the font has been built, aka after calling ImFontAtlas::GetTexDataAs*() function.
int index_size = IndexLookup.Size;
- if (dst < index_size && IndexLookup.Data[dst] == (unsigned short)-1 && !overwrite_dst) // 'dst' already exists
+ if (dst < index_size && IndexLookup.Data[dst] == (ImWchar)-1 && !overwrite_dst) // 'dst' already exists
return;
if (src >= index_size && dst >= index_size) // both 'dst' and 'src' don't exist -> no-op
return;
GrowIndex(dst + 1);
- IndexLookup[dst] = (src < index_size) ? IndexLookup.Data[src] : (unsigned short)-1;
+ IndexLookup[dst] = (src < index_size) ? IndexLookup.Data[src] : (ImWchar)-1;
IndexAdvanceX[dst] = (src < index_size) ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[src] : 1.0f;
}
{
if (c >= IndexLookup.Size)
return FallbackGlyph;
- const unsigned short i = IndexLookup[c];
- if (i == (unsigned short)-1)
+ const ImWchar i = IndexLookup.Data[c];
+ if (i == (ImWchar)-1)
return FallbackGlyph;
return &Glyphs.Data[i];
}
{
if (c >= IndexLookup.Size)
return NULL;
- const unsigned short i = IndexLookup[c];
- if (i == (unsigned short)-1)
+ const ImWchar i = IndexLookup.Data[c];
+ if (i == (ImWchar)-1)
return NULL;
return &Glyphs.Data[i];
}
}
}
- const float char_width = ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size ? IndexAdvanceX[(int)c] : FallbackAdvanceX);
+ const float char_width = ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[c] : FallbackAdvanceX);
if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
{
if (inside_word)
continue;
}
- const float char_width = ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size ? IndexAdvanceX[(int)c] : FallbackAdvanceX) * scale;
+ const float char_width = ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[c] : FallbackAdvanceX) * scale;
if (line_width + char_width >= max_width)
{
s = prev_s;
return text_size;
}
-void ImFont::RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, unsigned short c) const
+void ImFont::RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, ImWchar c) const
{
if (c == ' ' || c == '\t' || c == '\n' || c == '\r') // Match behavior of RenderText(), those 4 codepoints are hard-coded.
return;
const bool word_wrap_enabled = (wrap_width > 0.0f);
const char* word_wrap_eol = NULL;
- // Skip non-visible lines
+ // Fast-forward to first visible line
const char* s = text_begin;
- if (!word_wrap_enabled && y + line_height < clip_rect.y)
- while (s < text_end && *s != '\n') // Fast-forward to next line
- s++;
+ if (y + line_height < clip_rect.y && !word_wrap_enabled)
+ while (y + line_height < clip_rect.y && s < text_end)
+ {
+ s = (const char*)memchr(s, '\n', text_end - s);
+ s = s ? s + 1 : text_end;
+ y += line_height;
+ }
+
+ // For large text, scan for the last visible line in order to avoid over-reserving in the call to PrimReserve()
+ // Note that very large horizontal line will still be affected by the issue (e.g. a one megabyte string buffer without a newline will likely crash atm)
+ if (text_end - s > 10000 && !word_wrap_enabled)
+ {
+ const char* s_end = s;
+ float y_end = y;
+ while (y_end < clip_rect.w && s_end < text_end)
+ {
+ s_end = (const char*)memchr(s_end, '\n', text_end - s_end);
+ s_end = s_end ? s_end + 1 : text_end;
+ y_end += line_height;
+ }
+ text_end = s_end;
+ }
+ if (s == text_end)
+ return;
// Reserve vertices for remaining worse case (over-reserving is useful and easily amortized)
const int vtx_count_max = (int)(text_end - s) * 4;
{
x = pos.x;
y += line_height;
-
if (y > clip_rect.w)
- break;
- if (!word_wrap_enabled && y + line_height < clip_rect.y)
- while (s < text_end && *s != '\n') // Fast-forward to next line
- s++;
+ break; // break out of main loop
continue;
}
if (c == '\r')
}
float char_width = 0.0f;
- if (const ImFontGlyph* glyph = FindGlyph((unsigned short)c))
+ if (const ImFontGlyph* glyph = FindGlyph((ImWchar)c))
{
char_width = glyph->AdvanceX * scale;
}
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Internals Drawing Helpers
+// [SECTION] Internal Render Helpers
+// (progressively moved from imgui.cpp to here when they are redesigned to stop accessing ImGui global state)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - RenderMouseCursor()
+// - RenderArrowPointingAt()
+// - RenderRectFilledRangeH()
+// - RenderPixelEllipsis()
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+void ImGui::RenderMouseCursor(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, float scale, ImGuiMouseCursor mouse_cursor)
+{
+ if (mouse_cursor == ImGuiMouseCursor_None)
+ return;
+ IM_ASSERT(mouse_cursor > ImGuiMouseCursor_None && mouse_cursor < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT);
+
+ const ImU32 col_shadow = IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 48);
+ const ImU32 col_border = IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255); // Black
+ const ImU32 col_fill = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255); // White
+
+ ImFontAtlas* font_atlas = draw_list->_Data->Font->ContainerAtlas;
+ ImVec2 offset, size, uv[4];
+ if (font_atlas->GetMouseCursorTexData(mouse_cursor, &offset, &size, &uv[0], &uv[2]))
+ {
+ pos -= offset;
+ const ImTextureID tex_id = font_atlas->TexID;
+ draw_list->PushTextureID(tex_id);
+ draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos + ImVec2(1,0)*scale, pos + ImVec2(1,0)*scale + size*scale, uv[2], uv[3], col_shadow);
+ draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos + ImVec2(2,0)*scale, pos + ImVec2(2,0)*scale + size*scale, uv[2], uv[3], col_shadow);
+ draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos, pos + size*scale, uv[2], uv[3], col_border);
+ draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos, pos + size*scale, uv[0], uv[1], col_fill);
+ draw_list->PopTextureID();
+ }
+}
+
+// Render an arrow. 'pos' is position of the arrow tip. half_sz.x is length from base to tip. half_sz.y is length on each side.
+void ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, ImGuiDir direction, ImU32 col)
+{
+ switch (direction)
+ {
+ case ImGuiDir_Left: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
+ case ImGuiDir_Right: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
+ case ImGuiDir_Up: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
+ case ImGuiDir_Down: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
+ case ImGuiDir_None: case ImGuiDir_COUNT: break; // Fix warnings
+ }
+}
+
static inline float ImAcos01(float x)
{
if (x <= 0.0f) return IM_PI * 0.5f;
const float inv_rounding = 1.0f / rounding;
const float arc0_b = ImAcos01(1.0f - (p0.x - rect.Min.x) * inv_rounding);
const float arc0_e = ImAcos01(1.0f - (p1.x - rect.Min.x) * inv_rounding);
+ const float half_pi = IM_PI * 0.5f; // We will == compare to this because we know this is the exact value ImAcos01 can return.
const float x0 = ImMax(p0.x, rect.Min.x + rounding);
if (arc0_b == arc0_e)
{
draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x0, p1.y));
draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x0, p0.y));
}
- else if (arc0_b == 0.0f && arc0_e == IM_PI*0.5f)
+ else if (arc0_b == 0.0f && arc0_e == half_pi)
{
draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x0, p1.y - rounding), rounding, 3, 6); // BL
draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x0, p0.y + rounding), rounding, 6, 9); // TR
draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x1, p0.y));
draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x1, p1.y));
}
- else if (arc1_b == 0.0f && arc1_e == IM_PI*0.5f)
+ else if (arc1_b == 0.0f && arc1_e == half_pi)
{
draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x1, p0.y + rounding), rounding, 9, 12); // TR
draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x1, p1.y - rounding), rounding, 0, 3); // BR
draw_list->PathFillConvex(col);
}
+// FIXME: Rendering an ellipsis "..." is a surprisingly tricky problem for us... we cannot rely on font glyph having it,
+// and regular dot are typically too wide. If we render a dot/shape ourselves it comes with the risk that it wouldn't match
+// the boldness or positioning of what the font uses...
+void ImGui::RenderPixelEllipsis(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, int count, ImU32 col)
+{
+ ImFont* font = draw_list->_Data->Font;
+ const float font_scale = draw_list->_Data->FontSize / font->FontSize;
+ pos.y += (float)(int)(font->DisplayOffset.y + font->Ascent * font_scale + 0.5f - 1.0f);
+ for (int dot_n = 0; dot_n < count; dot_n++)
+ draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + dot_n * 2.0f, pos.y), ImVec2(pos.x + dot_n * 2.0f + 1.0f, pos.y + 1.0f), col);
+}
+
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// DEFAULT FONT DATA
+// [SECTION] Decompression code
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Compressed with stb_compress() then converted to a C array and encoded as base85.
// Use the program in misc/fonts/binary_to_compressed_c.cpp to create the array from a TTF file.
}
}
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Default font data (ProggyClean.ttf)
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// ProggyClean.ttf
// Copyright (c) 2004, 2005 Tristan Grimmer
-// dear imgui, v1.63 WIP
-// (internals)
+// dear imgui, v1.68 WIP
+// (internal structures/api)
// You may use this file to debug, understand or extend ImGui features but we don't provide any guarantee of forward compatibility!
// Set:
// #define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
// To implement maths operators for ImVec2 (disabled by default to not collide with using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA along with your own math types+operators)
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+// Header mess
+// Forward declarations
+// STB libraries includes
+// Context pointer
+// Generic helpers
+// Misc data structures
+// Main imgui context
+// Tab bar, tab item
+// Internal API
+
+*/
+
#pragma once
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Header mess
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
#ifndef IMGUI_VERSION
#error Must include imgui.h before imgui_internal.h
#endif
#ifdef __clang__
#pragma clang diagnostic push
-#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // for stb_textedit.h
-#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-prototypes" // for stb_textedit.h
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // for stb_textedit.h
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-prototypes" // for stb_textedit.h
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"
+#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"
+#endif
+#if __has_warning("-Wdouble-promotion")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"
+#endif
#endif
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Forward Declarations
+// Forward declarations
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
struct ImRect; // An axis-aligned rectangle (2 points)
struct ImDrawDataBuilder; // Helper to build a ImDrawData instance
struct ImDrawListSharedData; // Data shared between all ImDrawList instances
-struct ImGuiColMod; // Stacked color modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it
+struct ImGuiColorMod; // Stacked color modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it
struct ImGuiColumnData; // Storage data for a single column
struct ImGuiColumnsSet; // Storage data for a columns set
struct ImGuiContext; // Main imgui context
struct ImGuiGroupData; // Stacked storage data for BeginGroup()/EndGroup()
+struct ImGuiInputTextState; // Internal state of the currently focused/edited text input box
struct ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup; // Backup and restore IsItemHovered() internal data
struct ImGuiMenuColumns; // Simple column measurement, currently used for MenuItem() only
struct ImGuiNavMoveResult; // Result of a directional navigation move query result
struct ImGuiNextWindowData; // Storage for SetNexWindow** functions
struct ImGuiPopupRef; // Storage for current popup stack
-struct ImGuiSettingsHandler;
+struct ImGuiSettingsHandler; // Storage for one type registered in the .ini file
struct ImGuiStyleMod; // Stacked style modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it
-struct ImGuiTextEditState; // Internal state of the currently focused/edited text input box
+struct ImGuiTabBar; // Storage for a tab bar
+struct ImGuiTabItem; // Storage for a tab item (within a tab bar)
struct ImGuiWindow; // Storage for one window
-struct ImGuiWindowTempData; // Temporary storage for one, that's the data which in theory we could ditch at the end of the frame
+struct ImGuiWindowTempData; // Temporary storage for one window (that's the data which in theory we could ditch at the end of the frame)
struct ImGuiWindowSettings; // Storage for window settings stored in .ini file (we keep one of those even if the actual window wasn't instanced during this session)
-typedef int ImGuiLayoutType; // enum: horizontal or vertical // enum ImGuiLayoutType_
-typedef int ImGuiButtonFlags; // flags: for ButtonEx(), ButtonBehavior() // enum ImGuiButtonFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiItemFlags; // flags: for PushItemFlag() // enum ImGuiItemFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiItemStatusFlags; // flags: storage for DC.LastItemXXX // enum ImGuiItemStatusFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiNavHighlightFlags; // flags: for RenderNavHighlight() // enum ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags; // flags: for GetNavInputAmount2d() // enum ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiNavMoveFlags; // flags: for navigation requests // enum ImGuiNavMoveFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiSeparatorFlags; // flags: for Separator() - internal // enum ImGuiSeparatorFlags_
-typedef int ImGuiSliderFlags; // flags: for SliderBehavior() // enum ImGuiSliderFlags_
+// Use your programming IDE "Go to definition" facility on the names of the center columns to find the actual flags/enum lists.
+typedef int ImGuiLayoutType; // -> enum ImGuiLayoutType_ // Enum: Horizontal or vertical
+typedef int ImGuiButtonFlags; // -> enum ImGuiButtonFlags_ // Flags: for ButtonEx(), ButtonBehavior()
+typedef int ImGuiItemFlags; // -> enum ImGuiItemFlags_ // Flags: for PushItemFlag()
+typedef int ImGuiItemStatusFlags; // -> enum ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ // Flags: for DC.LastItemStatusFlags
+typedef int ImGuiNavHighlightFlags; // -> enum ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_ // Flags: for RenderNavHighlight()
+typedef int ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags; // -> enum ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_ // Flags: for GetNavInputAmount2d()
+typedef int ImGuiNavMoveFlags; // -> enum ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ // Flags: for navigation requests
+typedef int ImGuiSeparatorFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSeparatorFlags_ // Flags: for Separator() - internal
+typedef int ImGuiSliderFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSliderFlags_ // Flags: for SliderBehavior()
+typedef int ImGuiDragFlags; // -> enum ImGuiDragFlags_ // Flags: for DragBehavior()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// STB libraries
+// STB libraries includes
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace ImGuiStb
#undef STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING
#undef STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING ImGuiTextEditState
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING ImGuiInputTextState
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE ImWchar
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE -1.0f
-#include "stb_textedit.h"
+#include "imstb_textedit.h"
} // namespace ImGuiStb
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Context
+// Context pointer
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
#ifndef GImGui
#endif
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Helpers
+// Generic helpers
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
#define IM_PI 3.14159265358979323846f
#define IM_NEWLINE "\n"
#endif
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(_FMT,...) printf("[%05d] " _FMT, GImGui->FrameCount, __VA_ARGS__)
+#define IM_STATIC_ASSERT(_COND) typedef char static_assertion_##__line__[(_COND)?1:-1]
+#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(_VAL) ((int)((_VAL) * 255.0f + ((_VAL)>=0 ? 0.5f : -0.5f))) // Unsaturated, for display purpose
+#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(_VAL) ((int)(ImSaturate(_VAL) * 255.0f + 0.5f)) // Saturated, always output 0..255
+
// Enforce cdecl calling convention for functions called by the standard library, in case compilation settings changed the default to e.g. __vectorcall
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#define IMGUI_CDECL __cdecl
// Helpers: UTF-8 <> wchar
IMGUI_API int ImTextStrToUtf8(char* buf, int buf_size, const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end); // return output UTF-8 bytes count
-IMGUI_API int ImTextCharFromUtf8(unsigned int* out_char, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // return input UTF-8 bytes count
+IMGUI_API int ImTextCharFromUtf8(unsigned int* out_char, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // read one character. return input UTF-8 bytes count
IMGUI_API int ImTextStrFromUtf8(ImWchar* buf, int buf_size, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end, const char** in_remaining = NULL); // return input UTF-8 bytes count
IMGUI_API int ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // return number of UTF-8 code-points (NOT bytes count)
-IMGUI_API int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end); // return number of bytes to express string as UTF-8 code-points
+IMGUI_API int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // return number of bytes to express one char in UTF-8
+IMGUI_API int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end); // return number of bytes to express string in UTF-8
// Helpers: Misc
-IMGUI_API ImU32 ImHash(const void* data, int data_size, ImU32 seed = 0); // Pass data_size==0 for zero-terminated strings
+IMGUI_API ImU32 ImHashData(const void* data, size_t data_size, ImU32 seed = 0);
+IMGUI_API ImU32 ImHashStr(const char* data, size_t data_size, ImU32 seed = 0);
IMGUI_API void* ImFileLoadToMemory(const char* filename, const char* file_open_mode, size_t* out_file_size = NULL, int padding_bytes = 0);
IMGUI_API FILE* ImFileOpen(const char* filename, const char* file_open_mode);
static inline bool ImCharIsBlankA(char c) { return c == ' ' || c == '\t'; }
static inline bool ImIsPowerOfTwo(int v) { return v != 0 && (v & (v - 1)) == 0; }
static inline int ImUpperPowerOfTwo(int v) { v--; v |= v >> 1; v |= v >> 2; v |= v >> 4; v |= v >> 8; v |= v >> 16; v++; return v; }
#define ImQsort qsort
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+static inline ImU32 ImHash(const void* data, int size, ImU32 seed = 0) { return size ? ImHashData(data, (size_t)size, seed) : ImHashStr((const char*)data, 0, seed); } // [moved to ImHashStr/ImHashData in 1.68]
+#endif
// Helpers: Geometry
IMGUI_API ImVec2 ImLineClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& p);
IMGUI_API bool ImTriangleContainsPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p);
IMGUI_API ImVec2 ImTriangleClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p);
IMGUI_API void ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p, float& out_u, float& out_v, float& out_w);
+IMGUI_API ImGuiDir ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(float dx, float dy);
// Helpers: String
IMGUI_API int ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2);
IMGUI_API int ImStrnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, size_t count);
IMGUI_API void ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count);
IMGUI_API char* ImStrdup(const char* str);
+IMGUI_API char* ImStrdupcpy(char* dst, size_t* p_dst_size, const char* str);
IMGUI_API const char* ImStrchrRange(const char* str_begin, const char* str_end, char c);
IMGUI_API int ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str);
-IMGUI_API const ImWchar*ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin); // Find beginning-of-line
+IMGUI_API const char* ImStreolRange(const char* str, const char* str_end); // End end-of-line
+IMGUI_API const ImWchar*ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin); // Find beginning-of-line
IMGUI_API const char* ImStristr(const char* haystack, const char* haystack_end, const char* needle, const char* needle_end);
IMGUI_API void ImStrTrimBlanks(char* str);
IMGUI_API int ImFormatString(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
IMGUI_API int ImFormatStringV(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
IMGUI_API const char* ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* format);
IMGUI_API const char* ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* format);
-IMGUI_API const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* format, char* buf, int buf_size);
+IMGUI_API const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* format, char* buf, size_t buf_size);
IMGUI_API int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* format, int default_value);
// Helpers: ImVec2/ImVec4 operators
static inline float ImLinearSweep(float current, float target, float speed) { if (current < target) return ImMin(current + speed, target); if (current > target) return ImMax(current - speed, target); return current; }
static inline ImVec2 ImMul(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y); }
+// Helper: ImBoolVector. Store 1-bit per value.
+// Note that Resize() currently clears the whole vector.
+struct ImBoolVector
+{
+ ImVector<int> Storage;
+ ImBoolVector() { }
+ void Resize(int sz) { Storage.resize((sz + 31) >> 5); memset(Storage.Data, 0, (size_t)Storage.Size * sizeof(Storage.Data[0])); }
+ void Clear() { Storage.clear(); }
+ bool GetBit(int n) const { int off = (n >> 5); int mask = 1 << (n & 31); return (Storage[off] & mask) != 0; }
+ void SetBit(int n, bool v) { int off = (n >> 5); int mask = 1 << (n & 31); if (v) Storage[off] |= mask; else Storage[off] &= ~mask; }
+};
+
+// Helper: ImPool<>. Basic keyed storage for contiguous instances, slow/amortized insertion, O(1) indexable, O(Log N) queries by ID over a dense/hot buffer,
+// Honor constructor/destructor. Add/remove invalidate all pointers. Indexes have the same lifetime as the associated object.
+typedef int ImPoolIdx;
+template<typename T>
+struct IMGUI_API ImPool
+{
+ ImVector<T> Data; // Contiguous data
+ ImGuiStorage Map; // ID->Index
+ ImPoolIdx FreeIdx; // Next free idx to use
+
+ ImPool() { FreeIdx = 0; }
+ ~ImPool() { Clear(); }
+ T* GetByKey(ImGuiID key) { int idx = Map.GetInt(key, -1); return (idx != -1) ? &Data[idx] : NULL; }
+ T* GetByIndex(ImPoolIdx n) { return &Data[n]; }
+ ImPoolIdx GetIndex(const T* p) const { IM_ASSERT(p >= Data.Data && p < Data.Data + Data.Size); return (ImPoolIdx)(p - Data.Data); }
+ T* GetOrAddByKey(ImGuiID key) { int* p_idx = Map.GetIntRef(key, -1); if (*p_idx != -1) return &Data[*p_idx]; *p_idx = FreeIdx; return Add(); }
+ void Clear() { for (int n = 0; n < Map.Data.Size; n++) { int idx = Map.Data[n].val_i; if (idx != -1) Data[idx].~T(); } Map.Clear(); Data.clear(); FreeIdx = 0; }
+ T* Add() { int idx = FreeIdx; if (idx == Data.Size) { Data.resize(Data.Size + 1); FreeIdx++; } else { FreeIdx = *(int*)&Data[idx]; } IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(&Data[idx]) T(); return &Data[idx]; }
+ void Remove(ImGuiID key, const T* p) { Remove(key, GetIndex(p)); }
+ void Remove(ImGuiID key, ImPoolIdx idx) { Data[idx].~T(); *(int*)&Data[idx] = FreeIdx; FreeIdx = idx; Map.SetInt(key, -1); }
+ void Reserve(int capacity) { Data.reserve(capacity); Map.Data.reserve(capacity); }
+ int GetSize() const { return Data.Size; }
+};
+
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Types
+// Misc data structures
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
enum ImGuiButtonFlags_
ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical = 1 << 0
};
+enum ImGuiDragFlags_
+{
+ ImGuiDragFlags_None = 0,
+ ImGuiDragFlags_Vertical = 1 << 0
+};
+
enum ImGuiColumnsFlags_
{
// Default: 0
ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID = 1 << 10,
ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick = 1 << 11,
ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease = 1 << 12,
- ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled = 1 << 13,
- ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth = 1 << 14
+ ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth = 1 << 13
};
enum ImGuiSeparatorFlags_
ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical = 1 << 1
};
+// Transient per-window flags, reset at the beginning of the frame. For child window, inherited from parent on first Begin().
+// This is going to be exposed in imgui.h when stabilized enough.
+enum ImGuiItemFlags_
+{
+ ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop = 1 << 0, // false
+ ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat = 1 << 1, // false // Button() will return true multiple times based on io.KeyRepeatDelay and io.KeyRepeatRate settings.
+ ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled = 1 << 2, // false // [BETA] Disable interactions but doesn't affect visuals yet. See github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/211
+ ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav = 1 << 3, // false
+ ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus = 1 << 4, // false
+ ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup = 1 << 5, // false // MenuItem/Selectable() automatically closes current Popup window
+ ImGuiItemFlags_Default_ = 0
+};
+
// Storage for LastItem data
enum ImGuiItemStatusFlags_
{
ImGuiItemStatusFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect = 1 << 0,
- ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect = 1 << 1
+ ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect = 1 << 1,
+ ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited = 1 << 2 // Value exposed by item was edited in the current frame (should match the bool return value of most widgets)
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+ , // [imgui-test only]
+ ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable = 1 << 10, //
+ ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened = 1 << 11, //
+ ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable = 1 << 12, //
+ ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked = 1 << 13 //
+#endif
};
// FIXME: this is in development, not exposed/functional as a generic feature yet.
+// Horizontal/Vertical enums are fixed to 0/1 so they may be used to index ImVec2
enum ImGuiLayoutType_
{
- ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical,
- ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal
+ ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal = 0,
+ ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical = 1
};
+// X/Y enums are fixed to 0/1 so they may be used to index ImVec2
enum ImGuiAxis
{
ImGuiAxis_None = -1,
enum ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_
{
+ ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault = 1 << 0,
ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin = 1 << 1,
- ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw = 1 << 2,
+ ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw = 1 << 2, // Draw rectangular highlight if (g.NavId == id) _even_ when using the mouse.
ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding = 1 << 3
};
enum ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_
{
+ ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard = 1 << 0,
ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad = 1 << 1,
ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick = 1 << 2
enum ImGuiNavMoveFlags_
{
+ ImGuiNavMoveFlags_None = 0,
ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX = 1 << 0, // On failed request, restart from opposite side
ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY = 1 << 1,
ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX = 1 << 2, // On failed request, request from opposite side one line down (when NavDir==right) or one line up (when NavDir==left)
ImGuiNavForward_ForwardActive
};
+enum ImGuiNavLayer
+{
+ ImGuiNavLayer_Main = 0, // Main scrolling layer
+ ImGuiNavLayer_Menu = 1, // Menu layer (access with Alt/ImGuiNavInput_Menu)
+ ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT
+};
+
+enum ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy
+{
+ ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default,
+ ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox
+};
+
+// 1D vector (this odd construct is used to facilitate the transition between 1D and 2D, and the maintenance of some branches/patches)
+struct ImVec1
+{
+ float x;
+ ImVec1() { x = 0.0f; }
+ ImVec1(float _x) { x = _x; }
+};
+
+
// 2D axis aligned bounding-box
// NB: we can't rely on ImVec2 math operators being available here
struct IMGUI_API ImRect
};
// Stacked color modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it
-struct ImGuiColMod
+struct ImGuiColorMod
{
ImGuiCol Col;
ImVec4 BackupValue;
{
ImVec2 BackupCursorPos;
ImVec2 BackupCursorMaxPos;
- float BackupIndentX;
- float BackupGroupOffsetX;
- float BackupCurrentLineHeight;
+ ImVec1 BackupIndent;
+ ImVec1 BackupGroupOffset;
+ ImVec2 BackupCurrentLineSize;
float BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
float BackupLogLinePosY;
- bool BackupActiveIdIsAlive;
+ ImGuiID BackupActiveIdIsAlive;
bool BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
bool AdvanceCursor;
};
};
// Internal state of the currently focused/edited text input box
-struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTextEditState
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextState
{
- ImGuiID Id; // widget id owning the text state
- ImVector<ImWchar> Text; // edit buffer, we need to persist but can't guarantee the persistence of the user-provided buffer. so we copy into own buffer.
- ImVector<char> InitialText; // backup of end-user buffer at the time of focus (in UTF-8, unaltered)
- ImVector<char> TempTextBuffer;
- int CurLenA, CurLenW; // we need to maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar format.
- int BufSizeA; // end-user buffer size
- float ScrollX;
- ImGuiStb::STB_TexteditState StbState;
- float CursorAnim;
- bool CursorFollow;
- bool SelectedAllMouseLock;
-
- ImGuiTextEditState() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+ ImGuiID ID; // widget id owning the text state
+ ImVector<ImWchar> TextW; // edit buffer, we need to persist but can't guarantee the persistence of the user-provided buffer. so we copy into own buffer.
+ ImVector<char> InitialText; // backup of end-user buffer at the time of focus (in UTF-8, unaltered)
+ ImVector<char> TempBuffer; // temporary buffer for callback and other other operations. size=capacity.
+ int CurLenA, CurLenW; // we need to maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar format.
+ int BufCapacityA; // end-user buffer capacity
+ float ScrollX;
+ ImGuiStb::STB_TexteditState StbState;
+ float CursorAnim;
+ bool CursorFollow;
+ bool SelectedAllMouseLock;
+
+ // Temporarily set when active
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags UserFlags;
+ ImGuiInputTextCallback UserCallback;
+ void* UserCallbackData;
+
+ ImGuiInputTextState() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
void CursorAnimReset() { CursorAnim = -0.30f; } // After a user-input the cursor stays on for a while without blinking
void CursorClamp() { StbState.cursor = ImMin(StbState.cursor, CurLenW); StbState.select_start = ImMin(StbState.select_start, CurLenW); StbState.select_end = ImMin(StbState.select_end, CurLenW); }
bool HasSelection() const { return StbState.select_start != StbState.select_end; }
void ClearSelection() { StbState.select_start = StbState.select_end = StbState.cursor; }
- void SelectAll() { StbState.select_start = 0; StbState.cursor = StbState.select_end = CurLenW; StbState.has_preferred_x = false; }
- void OnKeyPressed(int key);
+ void SelectAll() { StbState.select_start = 0; StbState.cursor = StbState.select_end = CurLenW; StbState.has_preferred_x = 0; }
+ void OnKeyPressed(int key); // Cannot be inline because we call in code in stb_textedit.h implementation
};
// Windows data saved in imgui.ini file
struct ImGuiSettingsHandler
{
- const char* TypeName; // Short description stored in .ini file. Disallowed characters: '[' ']'
- ImGuiID TypeHash; // == ImHash(TypeName, 0, 0)
+ const char* TypeName; // Short description stored in .ini file. Disallowed characters: '[' ']'
+ ImGuiID TypeHash; // == ImHashStr(TypeName, 0, 0)
void* (*ReadOpenFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, const char* name); // Read: Called when entering into a new ini entry e.g. "[Window][Name]"
void (*ReadLineFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, void* entry, const char* line); // Read: Called for every line of text within an ini entry
void (*WriteAllFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* out_buf); // Write: Output every entries into 'out_buf'
struct ImGuiNavMoveResult
{
ImGuiID ID; // Best candidate
+ ImGuiID SelectScopeId;// Best candidate window current selectable group ID
ImGuiWindow* Window; // Best candidate window
float DistBox; // Best candidate box distance to current NavId
float DistCenter; // Best candidate center distance to current NavId
ImRect RectRel; // Best candidate bounding box in window relative space
ImGuiNavMoveResult() { Clear(); }
- void Clear() { ID = 0; Window = NULL; DistBox = DistCenter = DistAxial = FLT_MAX; RectRel = ImRect(); }
+ void Clear() { ID = SelectScopeId = 0; Window = NULL; DistBox = DistCenter = DistAxial = FLT_MAX; RectRel = ImRect(); }
};
// Storage for SetNexWindow** functions
}
};
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Tabs
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImGuiTabBarSortItem
+{
+ int Index;
+ float Width;
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Main imgui context
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
struct ImGuiContext
{
bool Initialized;
+ bool FrameScopeActive; // Set by NewFrame(), cleared by EndFrame()
+ bool FrameScopePushedImplicitWindow; // Set by NewFrame(), cleared by EndFrame()
bool FontAtlasOwnedByContext; // Io.Fonts-> is owned by the ImGuiContext and will be destructed along with it.
ImGuiIO IO;
ImGuiStyle Style;
int FrameCount;
int FrameCountEnded;
int FrameCountRendered;
- ImVector<ImGuiWindow*> Windows;
+ ImVector<ImGuiWindow*> Windows; // Windows, sorted in display order, back to front
+ ImVector<ImGuiWindow*> WindowsFocusOrder; // Windows, sorted in focus order, back to front
ImVector<ImGuiWindow*> WindowsSortBuffer;
ImVector<ImGuiWindow*> CurrentWindowStack;
ImGuiStorage WindowsById;
ImGuiID HoveredId; // Hovered widget
bool HoveredIdAllowOverlap;
ImGuiID HoveredIdPreviousFrame;
- float HoveredIdTimer;
+ float HoveredIdTimer; // Measure contiguous hovering time
+ float HoveredIdNotActiveTimer; // Measure contiguous hovering time where the item has not been active
ImGuiID ActiveId; // Active widget
ImGuiID ActiveIdPreviousFrame;
+ ImGuiID ActiveIdIsAlive; // Active widget has been seen this frame (we can't use a bool as the ActiveId may change within the frame)
float ActiveIdTimer;
- bool ActiveIdIsAlive; // Active widget has been seen this frame
bool ActiveIdIsJustActivated; // Set at the time of activation for one frame
bool ActiveIdAllowOverlap; // Active widget allows another widget to steal active id (generally for overlapping widgets, but not always)
- bool ActiveIdValueChanged;
+ bool ActiveIdHasBeenPressed; // Track whether the active id led to a press (this is to allow changing between PressOnClick and PressOnRelease without pressing twice). Used by range_select branch.
+ bool ActiveIdHasBeenEdited; // Was the value associated to the widget Edited over the course of the Active state.
bool ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
- bool ActiveIdPreviousFrameValueChanged;
+ bool ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEdited;
int ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags; // Active widget allows using directional navigation (e.g. can activate a button and move away from it)
+ int ActiveIdBlockNavInputFlags;
ImVec2 ActiveIdClickOffset; // Clicked offset from upper-left corner, if applicable (currently only set by ButtonBehavior)
ImGuiWindow* ActiveIdWindow;
ImGuiWindow* ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow;
ImGuiInputSource ActiveIdSource; // Activating with mouse or nav (gamepad/keyboard)
ImGuiID LastActiveId; // Store the last non-zero ActiveId, useful for animation.
float LastActiveIdTimer; // Store the last non-zero ActiveId timer since the beginning of activation, useful for animation.
+ ImVec2 LastValidMousePos;
ImGuiWindow* MovingWindow; // Track the window we clicked on (in order to preserve focus). The actually window that is moved is generally MovingWindow->RootWindow.
- ImVector<ImGuiColMod> ColorModifiers; // Stack for PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor()
+ ImVector<ImGuiColorMod> ColorModifiers; // Stack for PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor()
ImVector<ImGuiStyleMod> StyleModifiers; // Stack for PushStyleVar()/PopStyleVar()
ImVector<ImFont*> FontStack; // Stack for PushFont()/PopFont()
ImVector<ImGuiPopupRef> OpenPopupStack; // Which popups are open (persistent)
- ImVector<ImGuiPopupRef> CurrentPopupStack; // Which level of BeginPopup() we are in (reset every frame)
+ ImVector<ImGuiPopupRef> BeginPopupStack; // Which level of BeginPopup() we are in (reset every frame)
ImGuiNextWindowData NextWindowData; // Storage for SetNextWindow** functions
bool NextTreeNodeOpenVal; // Storage for SetNextTreeNode** functions
ImGuiCond NextTreeNodeOpenCond;
ImGuiID NavActivatePressedId; // ~~ IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Activate) ? NavId : 0
ImGuiID NavInputId; // ~~ IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Input) ? NavId : 0
ImGuiID NavJustTabbedId; // Just tabbed to this id.
- ImGuiID NavJustMovedToId; // Just navigated to this id (result of a successfully MoveRequest)
- ImGuiID NavNextActivateId; // Set by ActivateItem(), queued until next frame
- ImGuiInputSource NavInputSource; // Keyboard or Gamepad mode?
+ ImGuiID NavJustMovedToId; // Just navigated to this id (result of a successfully MoveRequest).
+ ImGuiID NavJustMovedToSelectScopeId; // Just navigated to this select scope id (result of a successfully MoveRequest).
+ ImGuiID NavNextActivateId; // Set by ActivateItem(), queued until next frame.
+ ImGuiInputSource NavInputSource; // Keyboard or Gamepad mode? THIS WILL ONLY BE None or NavGamepad or NavKeyboard.
ImRect NavScoringRectScreen; // Rectangle used for scoring, in screen space. Based of window->DC.NavRefRectRel[], modified for directional navigation scoring.
int NavScoringCount; // Metrics for debugging
ImGuiWindow* NavWindowingTarget; // When selecting a window (holding Menu+FocusPrev/Next, or equivalent of CTRL-TAB) this window is temporarily displayed front-most.
float NavWindowingTimer;
float NavWindowingHighlightAlpha;
bool NavWindowingToggleLayer;
- int NavLayer; // Layer we are navigating on. For now the system is hard-coded for 0=main contents and 1=menu/title bar, may expose layers later.
+ ImGuiNavLayer NavLayer; // Layer we are navigating on. For now the system is hard-coded for 0=main contents and 1=menu/title bar, may expose layers later.
int NavIdTabCounter; // == NavWindow->DC.FocusIdxTabCounter at time of NavId processing
bool NavIdIsAlive; // Nav widget has been seen this frame ~~ NavRefRectRel is valid
bool NavMousePosDirty; // When set we will update mouse position if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) if set (NB: this not enabled by default)
bool DragDropActive;
bool DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget;
ImGuiDragDropFlags DragDropSourceFlags;
+ int DragDropSourceFrameCount;
int DragDropMouseButton;
ImGuiPayload DragDropPayload;
ImRect DragDropTargetRect;
ImVector<unsigned char> DragDropPayloadBufHeap; // We don't expose the ImVector<> directly
unsigned char DragDropPayloadBufLocal[8]; // Local buffer for small payloads
+ // Tab bars
+ ImPool<ImGuiTabBar> TabBars;
+ ImVector<ImGuiTabBar*> CurrentTabBar;
+ ImVector<ImGuiTabBarSortItem> TabSortByWidthBuffer;
+
// Widget state
- ImGuiTextEditState InputTextState;
+ ImGuiInputTextState InputTextState;
ImFont InputTextPasswordFont;
ImGuiID ScalarAsInputTextId; // Temporary text input when CTRL+clicking on a slider, etc.
ImGuiColorEditFlags ColorEditOptions; // Store user options for color edit widgets
ImVec2 ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter; // Distance between mouse and center of grab box, normalized in parent space. Use storage?
int TooltipOverrideCount;
ImVector<char> PrivateClipboard; // If no custom clipboard handler is defined
- ImVec2 PlatformImePos, PlatformImeLastPos; // Cursor position request & last passed to the OS Input Method Editor
+
+ // Range-Select/Multi-Select
+ // [This is unused in this branch, but left here to facilitate merging/syncing multiple branches]
+ ImGuiID MultiSelectScopeId;
+
+ // Platform support
+ ImVec2 PlatformImePos; // Cursor position request & last passed to the OS Input Method Editor
+ ImVec2 PlatformImeLastPos;
// Settings
bool SettingsLoaded;
ImGuiContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas) : OverlayDrawList(NULL)
{
Initialized = false;
+ FrameScopeActive = FrameScopePushedImplicitWindow = false;
Font = NULL;
FontSize = FontBaseSize = 0.0f;
FontAtlasOwnedByContext = shared_font_atlas ? false : true;
HoveredId = 0;
HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
HoveredIdPreviousFrame = 0;
- HoveredIdTimer = 0.0f;
+ HoveredIdTimer = HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f;
ActiveId = 0;
ActiveIdPreviousFrame = 0;
+ ActiveIdIsAlive = 0;
ActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
- ActiveIdIsAlive = false;
ActiveIdIsJustActivated = false;
ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
- ActiveIdValueChanged = false;
+ ActiveIdHasBeenPressed = false;
+ ActiveIdHasBeenEdited = false;
ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = false;
- ActiveIdPreviousFrameValueChanged = false;
- ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = 0;
+ ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEdited = false;
+ ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = 0x00;
+ ActiveIdBlockNavInputFlags = 0x00;
ActiveIdClickOffset = ImVec2(-1,-1);
ActiveIdWindow = ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = NULL;
ActiveIdSource = ImGuiInputSource_None;
LastActiveId = 0;
LastActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
+ LastValidMousePos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
MovingWindow = NULL;
NextTreeNodeOpenVal = false;
NextTreeNodeOpenCond = 0;
NavWindow = NULL;
NavId = NavActivateId = NavActivateDownId = NavActivatePressedId = NavInputId = 0;
- NavJustTabbedId = NavJustMovedToId = NavNextActivateId = 0;
+ NavJustTabbedId = NavJustMovedToId = NavJustMovedToSelectScopeId = NavNextActivateId = 0;
NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_None;
NavScoringRectScreen = ImRect();
NavScoringCount = 0;
NavWindowingTarget = NavWindowingTargetAnim = NavWindowingList = NULL;
NavWindowingTimer = NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 0.0f;
NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
- NavLayer = 0;
+ NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
NavIdTabCounter = INT_MAX;
NavIdIsAlive = false;
NavMousePosDirty = false;
DragDropActive = DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
DragDropSourceFlags = 0;
+ DragDropSourceFrameCount = -1;
DragDropMouseButton = -1;
DragDropTargetId = 0;
DragDropAcceptFlags = 0;
DragSpeedDefaultRatio = 1.0f / 100.0f;
ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
TooltipOverrideCount = 0;
+
+ MultiSelectScopeId = 0;
+
PlatformImePos = PlatformImeLastPos = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
SettingsLoaded = false;
}
};
-// Transient per-window flags, reset at the beginning of the frame. For child window, inherited from parent on first Begin().
-// This is going to be exposed in imgui.h when stabilized enough.
-enum ImGuiItemFlags_
-{
- ImGuiItemFlags_AllowKeyboardFocus = 1 << 0, // true
- ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat = 1 << 1, // false // Button() will return true multiple times based on io.KeyRepeatDelay and io.KeyRepeatRate settings.
- ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled = 1 << 2, // false // [BETA] Disable interactions but doesn't affect visuals yet. See github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/211
- ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav = 1 << 3, // false
- ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus = 1 << 4, // false
- ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup = 1 << 5, // false // MenuItem/Selectable() automatically closes current Popup window
- ImGuiItemFlags_Default_ = ImGuiItemFlags_AllowKeyboardFocus
-};
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// ImGuiWindow
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Transient per-window data, reset at the beginning of the frame. This used to be called ImGuiDrawContext, hence the DC variable name in ImGuiWindow.
// FIXME: That's theory, in practice the delimitation between ImGuiWindow and ImGuiWindowTempData is quite tenuous and could be reconsidered.
{
ImVec2 CursorPos;
ImVec2 CursorPosPrevLine;
- ImVec2 CursorStartPos;
+ ImVec2 CursorStartPos; // Initial position in client area with padding
ImVec2 CursorMaxPos; // Used to implicitly calculate the size of our contents, always growing during the frame. Turned into window->SizeContents at the beginning of next frame
- float CurrentLineHeight;
+ ImVec2 CurrentLineSize;
float CurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
- float PrevLineHeight;
+ ImVec2 PrevLineSize;
float PrevLineTextBaseOffset;
float LogLinePosY;
int TreeDepth;
ImGuiItemStatusFlags LastItemStatusFlags;
ImRect LastItemRect; // Interaction rect
ImRect LastItemDisplayRect; // End-user display rect (only valid if LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect)
- bool NavHideHighlightOneFrame;
- bool NavHasScroll; // Set when scrolling can be used (ScrollMax > 0.0f)
- int NavLayerCurrent; // Current layer, 0..31 (we currently only use 0..1)
+ ImGuiNavLayer NavLayerCurrent; // Current layer, 0..31 (we currently only use 0..1)
int NavLayerCurrentMask; // = (1 << NavLayerCurrent) used by ItemAdd prior to clipping.
int NavLayerActiveMask; // Which layer have been written to (result from previous frame)
int NavLayerActiveMaskNext; // Which layer have been written to (buffer for current frame)
+ bool NavHideHighlightOneFrame;
+ bool NavHasScroll; // Set when scrolling can be used (ScrollMax > 0.0f)
bool MenuBarAppending; // FIXME: Remove this
ImVec2 MenuBarOffset; // MenuBarOffset.x is sort of equivalent of a per-layer CursorPos.x, saved/restored as we switch to the menu bar. The only situation when MenuBarOffset.y is > 0 if when (SafeAreaPadding.y > FramePadding.y), often used on TVs.
ImVector<ImGuiWindow*> ChildWindows;
ImVector<float> ItemWidthStack;
ImVector<float> TextWrapPosStack;
ImVector<ImGuiGroupData>GroupStack;
- int StackSizesBackup[6]; // Store size of various stacks for asserting
+ short StackSizesBackup[6]; // Store size of various stacks for asserting
- float IndentX; // Indentation / start position from left of window (increased by TreePush/TreePop, etc.)
- float GroupOffsetX;
- float ColumnsOffsetX; // Offset to the current column (if ColumnsCurrent > 0). FIXME: This and the above should be a stack to allow use cases like Tree->Column->Tree. Need revamp columns API.
+ ImVec1 Indent; // Indentation / start position from left of window (increased by TreePush/TreePop, etc.)
+ ImVec1 GroupOffset;
+ ImVec1 ColumnsOffset; // Offset to the current column (if ColumnsCurrent > 0). FIXME: This and the above should be a stack to allow use cases like Tree->Column->Tree. Need revamp columns API.
ImGuiColumnsSet* ColumnsSet; // Current columns set
ImGuiWindowTempData()
{
CursorPos = CursorPosPrevLine = CursorStartPos = CursorMaxPos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
- CurrentLineHeight = PrevLineHeight = 0.0f;
+ CurrentLineSize = PrevLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = PrevLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
LogLinePosY = -1.0f;
TreeDepth = 0;
LastItemId = 0;
LastItemStatusFlags = 0;
LastItemRect = LastItemDisplayRect = ImRect();
+ NavLayerActiveMask = NavLayerActiveMaskNext = 0x00;
+ NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+ NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
NavHideHighlightOneFrame = false;
NavHasScroll = false;
- NavLayerActiveMask = NavLayerActiveMaskNext = 0x00;
- NavLayerCurrent = 0;
- NavLayerCurrentMask = 1 << 0;
MenuBarAppending = false;
MenuBarOffset = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
StateStorage = NULL;
TextWrapPos = -1.0f;
memset(StackSizesBackup, 0, sizeof(StackSizesBackup));
- IndentX = 0.0f;
- GroupOffsetX = 0.0f;
- ColumnsOffsetX = 0.0f;
+ Indent = ImVec1(0.0f);
+ GroupOffset = ImVec1(0.0f);
+ ColumnsOffset = ImVec1(0.0f);
ColumnsSet = NULL;
}
};
ImVec2 WindowPadding; // Window padding at the time of begin.
float WindowRounding; // Window rounding at the time of begin.
float WindowBorderSize; // Window border size at the time of begin.
+ int NameBufLen; // Size of buffer storing Name. May be larger than strlen(Name)!
ImGuiID MoveId; // == window->GetID("#MOVE")
ImGuiID ChildId; // ID of corresponding item in parent window (for navigation to return from child window to parent window)
ImVec2 Scroll;
bool WasActive;
bool WriteAccessed; // Set to true when any widget access the current window
bool Collapsed; // Set when collapsing window to become only title-bar
- bool CollapseToggleWanted;
+ bool WantCollapseToggle;
bool SkipItems; // Set when items can safely be all clipped (e.g. window not visible or collapsed)
bool Appearing; // Set during the frame where the window is appearing (or re-appearing)
bool Hidden; // Do not display (== (HiddenFramesForResize > 0) ||
bool HasCloseButton; // Set when the window has a close button (p_open != NULL)
- int BeginOrderWithinParent; // Order within immediate parent window, if we are a child window. Otherwise 0.
- int BeginOrderWithinContext; // Order within entire imgui context. This is mostly used for debugging submission order related issues.
- int BeginCount; // Number of Begin() during the current frame (generally 0 or 1, 1+ if appending via multiple Begin/End pairs)
+ signed char ResizeBorderHeld; // Current border being held for resize (-1: none, otherwise 0-3)
+ short BeginCount; // Number of Begin() during the current frame (generally 0 or 1, 1+ if appending via multiple Begin/End pairs)
+ short BeginOrderWithinParent; // Order within immediate parent window, if we are a child window. Otherwise 0.
+ short BeginOrderWithinContext; // Order within entire imgui context. This is mostly used for debugging submission order related issues.
ImGuiID PopupId; // ID in the popup stack when this window is used as a popup/menu (because we use generic Name/ID for recycling)
int AutoFitFramesX, AutoFitFramesY;
bool AutoFitOnlyGrows;
ImGuiWindow* RootWindowForNav; // Point to ourself or first ancestor which doesn't have the NavFlattened flag.
ImGuiWindow* NavLastChildNavWindow; // When going to the menu bar, we remember the child window we came from. (This could probably be made implicit if we kept g.Windows sorted by last focused including child window.)
- ImGuiID NavLastIds[2]; // Last known NavId for this window, per layer (0/1)
- ImRect NavRectRel[2]; // Reference rectangle, in window relative space
+ ImGuiID NavLastIds[ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT]; // Last known NavId for this window, per layer (0/1)
+ ImRect NavRectRel[ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT]; // Reference rectangle, in window relative space
// Navigation / Focus
// FIXME-NAV: Merge all this with the new Nav system, at least the request variables should be moved to ImGuiContext
ImGuiID GetID(const char* str, const char* str_end = NULL);
ImGuiID GetID(const void* ptr);
ImGuiID GetIDNoKeepAlive(const char* str, const char* str_end = NULL);
+ ImGuiID GetIDNoKeepAlive(const void* ptr);
ImGuiID GetIDFromRectangle(const ImRect& r_abs);
// We don't use g.FontSize because the window may be != g.CurrentWidow.
void Restore() const { ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; window->DC.LastItemId = LastItemId; window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags = LastItemStatusFlags; window->DC.LastItemRect = LastItemRect; window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect = LastItemDisplayRect; }
};
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Tab bar, tab item
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+enum ImGuiTabBarFlagsPrivate_
+{
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode = 1 << 20, // Part of a dock node
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused = 1 << 21,
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings = 1 << 22 // FIXME: Settings are handled by the docking system, this only request the tab bar to mark settings dirty when reordering tabs
+};
+
+enum ImGuiTabItemFlagsPrivate_
+{
+ ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton = 1 << 20 // Store whether p_open is set or not, which we need to recompute WidthContents during layout.
+};
+
+// Storage for one active tab item (sizeof() 26~32 bytes)
+struct ImGuiTabItem
+{
+ ImGuiID ID;
+ ImGuiTabItemFlags Flags;
+ int LastFrameVisible;
+ int LastFrameSelected; // This allows us to infer an ordered list of the last activated tabs with little maintenance
+ int NameOffset; // When Window==NULL, offset to name within parent ImGuiTabBar::TabsNames
+ float Offset; // Position relative to beginning of tab
+ float Width; // Width currently displayed
+ float WidthContents; // Width of actual contents, stored during BeginTabItem() call
+
+ ImGuiTabItem() { ID = Flags = 0; LastFrameVisible = LastFrameSelected = -1; NameOffset = -1; Offset = Width = WidthContents = 0.0f; }
+};
+
+// Storage for a tab bar (sizeof() 92~96 bytes)
+struct ImGuiTabBar
+{
+ ImVector<ImGuiTabItem> Tabs;
+ ImGuiID ID; // Zero for tab-bars used by docking
+ ImGuiID SelectedTabId; // Selected tab
+ ImGuiID NextSelectedTabId;
+ ImGuiID VisibleTabId; // Can occasionally be != SelectedTabId (e.g. when previewing contents for CTRL+TAB preview)
+ int CurrFrameVisible;
+ int PrevFrameVisible;
+ ImRect BarRect;
+ float ContentsHeight;
+ float OffsetMax; // Distance from BarRect.Min.x, locked during layout
+ float OffsetNextTab; // Distance from BarRect.Min.x, incremented with each BeginTabItem() call, not used if ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable if set.
+ float ScrollingAnim;
+ float ScrollingTarget;
+ ImGuiTabBarFlags Flags;
+ ImGuiID ReorderRequestTabId;
+ int ReorderRequestDir;
+ bool WantLayout;
+ bool VisibleTabWasSubmitted;
+ short LastTabItemIdx; // For BeginTabItem()/EndTabItem()
+ ImVec2 FramePadding; // style.FramePadding locked at the time of BeginTabBar()
+ ImGuiTextBuffer TabsNames; // For non-docking tab bar we re-append names in a contiguous buffer.
+
+ ImGuiTabBar();
+ int GetTabOrder(const ImGuiTabItem* tab) const { return Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab); }
+ const char* GetTabName(const ImGuiTabItem* tab) const
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(tab->NameOffset != -1 && tab->NameOffset < TabsNames.Buf.Size);
+ return TabsNames.Buf.Data + tab->NameOffset;
+ }
+};
+
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Internal API
// No guarantee of forward compatibility here.
// - You are calling ImGui functions after ImGui::EndFrame()/ImGui::Render() and before the next ImGui::NewFrame(), which is also illegal.
inline ImGuiWindow* GetCurrentWindowRead() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentWindow; }
inline ImGuiWindow* GetCurrentWindow() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; g.CurrentWindow->WriteAccessed = true; return g.CurrentWindow; }
+ IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* FindWindowByID(ImGuiID id);
IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* FindWindowByName(const char* name);
IMGUI_API void FocusWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
- IMGUI_API void BringWindowToFront(ImGuiWindow* window);
- IMGUI_API void BringWindowToBack(ImGuiWindow* window);
+ IMGUI_API void FocusPreviousWindowIgnoringOne(ImGuiWindow* ignore_window);
+ IMGUI_API void BringWindowToFocusFront(ImGuiWindow* window);
+ IMGUI_API void BringWindowToDisplayFront(ImGuiWindow* window);
+ IMGUI_API void BringWindowToDisplayBack(ImGuiWindow* window);
IMGUI_API void UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* parent_window);
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcWindowExpectedSize(ImGuiWindow* window);
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowChildOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent);
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowNavFocusable(ImGuiWindow* window);
+ IMGUI_API void SetWindowScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_x);
+ IMGUI_API void SetWindowScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_y);
+ IMGUI_API float GetWindowScrollMaxX(ImGuiWindow* window);
+ IMGUI_API float GetWindowScrollMaxY(ImGuiWindow* window);
+ IMGUI_API ImRect GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(ImGuiWindow* window);
+ IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond);
+ IMGUI_API void SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond);
+ IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond);
+
IMGUI_API void SetCurrentFont(ImFont* font);
inline ImFont* GetDefaultFont() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.IO.FontDefault ? g.IO.FontDefault : g.IO.Fonts->Fonts[0]; }
// NewFrame
IMGUI_API void UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags();
IMGUI_API void StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
- IMGUI_API void UpdateMouseMovingWindow();
+ IMGUI_API void UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame();
+ IMGUI_API void UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame();
// Settings
IMGUI_API void MarkIniSettingsDirty();
IMGUI_API void MarkIniSettingsDirty(ImGuiWindow* window);
- IMGUI_API ImGuiSettingsHandler* FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name);
+ IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings* CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name);
IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings* FindWindowSettings(ImGuiID id);
+ IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings* FindOrCreateWindowSettings(const char* name);
+ IMGUI_API ImGuiSettingsHandler* FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name);
// Basic Accessors
inline ImGuiID GetItemID() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId; }
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetHoveredID();
IMGUI_API void SetHoveredID(ImGuiID id);
IMGUI_API void KeepAliveID(ImGuiID id);
- IMGUI_API void MarkItemValueChanged(ImGuiID id);
+ IMGUI_API void MarkItemEdited(ImGuiID id);
// Basic Helpers for widget code
IMGUI_API void ItemSize(const ImVec2& size, float text_offset_y = 0.0f);
IMGUI_API bool ItemAdd(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const ImRect* nav_bb = NULL);
IMGUI_API bool ItemHoverable(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id);
IMGUI_API bool IsClippedEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool clip_even_when_logged);
- IMGUI_API bool FocusableItemRegister(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id, bool tab_stop = true); // Return true if focus is requested
+ IMGUI_API bool FocusableItemRegister(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id, bool tab_stop = true); // Return true if focus is requested
IMGUI_API void FocusableItemUnregister(ImGuiWindow* window);
IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcItemSize(ImVec2 size, float default_x, float default_y);
IMGUI_API float CalcWrapWidthForPos(const ImVec2& pos, float wrap_pos_x);
// Popups, Modals, Tooltips
IMGUI_API void OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id);
- IMGUI_API void ClosePopup(ImGuiID id);
- IMGUI_API void ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining);
+ IMGUI_API void ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining, bool apply_focus_to_window_under);
IMGUI_API void ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window);
- IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id);
+ IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id); // Test for id within current popup stack level (currently begin-ed into); this doesn't scan the whole popup stack!
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags);
IMGUI_API void BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags, bool override_previous_tooltip = true);
IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* GetFrontMostPopupModal();
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 FindBestWindowPosForPopup(ImGuiWindow* window);
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(const ImVec2& ref_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDir* last_dir, const ImRect& r_outer, const ImRect& r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy policy = ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default);
// Navigation
IMGUI_API void NavInitWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool force_reinit);
+ IMGUI_API bool NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet();
IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestCancel();
IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestForward(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, const ImRect& bb_rel, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags);
IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags);
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags dir_sources, ImGuiInputReadMode mode, float slow_factor = 0.0f, float fast_factor = 0.0f);
IMGUI_API int CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(float t, float t_prev, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate);
IMGUI_API void ActivateItem(ImGuiID id); // Remotely activate a button, checkbox, tree node etc. given its unique ID. activation is queued and processed on the next frame when the item is encountered again.
+ IMGUI_API void SetNavID(ImGuiID id, int nav_layer);
+ IMGUI_API void SetNavIDWithRectRel(ImGuiID id, int nav_layer, const ImRect& rect_rel);
+
+ // Inputs
+ inline bool IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat = true) { const int key_index = GImGui->IO.KeyMap[key]; return (key_index >= 0) ? IsKeyPressed(key_index, repeat) : false; }
+ inline bool IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput n) { return GImGui->IO.NavInputs[n] > 0.0f; }
+ inline bool IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput n, ImGuiInputReadMode mode) { return GetNavInputAmount(n, mode) > 0.0f; }
+ inline bool IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput n1, ImGuiNavInput n2, ImGuiInputReadMode mode) { return (GetNavInputAmount(n1, mode) + GetNavInputAmount(n2, mode)) > 0.0f; }
// Drag and Drop
IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropTargetCustom(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id);
IMGUI_API void EndColumns(); // close columns
IMGUI_API void PushColumnClipRect(int column_index = -1);
+ // Tab Bars
+ IMGUI_API bool BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags);
+ IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id);
+ IMGUI_API void TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id);
+ IMGUI_API void TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab);
+ IMGUI_API void TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem* tab, int dir);
+ IMGUI_API bool TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags);
+ IMGUI_API ImVec2 TabItemCalcSize(const char* label, bool has_close_button);
+ IMGUI_API void TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImU32 col);
+ IMGUI_API bool TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImVec2 frame_padding, const char* label, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiID close_button_id);
+
// Render helpers
// AVOID USING OUTSIDE OF IMGUI.CPP! NOT FOR PUBLIC CONSUMPTION. THOSE FUNCTIONS ARE A MESS. THEIR SIGNATURE AND BEHAVIOR WILL CHANGE, THEY NEED TO BE REFACTORED INTO SOMETHING DECENT.
- // NB: All position are in absolute pixels coordinates (never using window coordinates internally)
+ // NB: All position are in absolute pixels coordinates (we are never using window coordinates internally)
IMGUI_API void RenderText(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_hash = true);
IMGUI_API void RenderTextWrapped(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width);
IMGUI_API void RenderTextClipped(const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align = ImVec2(0,0), const ImRect* clip_rect = NULL);
+ IMGUI_API void RenderTextClippedEx(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImRect* clip_rect = NULL);
IMGUI_API void RenderFrame(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, bool border = true, float rounding = 0.0f);
IMGUI_API void RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, float rounding = 0.0f);
IMGUI_API void RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding = 0.0f, int rounding_corners_flags = ~0);
IMGUI_API void RenderArrow(ImVec2 pos, ImGuiDir dir, float scale = 1.0f);
- IMGUI_API void RenderArrowPointingAt(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, ImGuiDir direction, ImU32 col);
IMGUI_API void RenderBullet(ImVec2 pos);
IMGUI_API void RenderCheckMark(ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, float sz);
IMGUI_API void RenderNavHighlight(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault); // Navigation highlight
- IMGUI_API void RenderRectFilledRangeH(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& rect, ImU32 col, float x_start_norm, float x_end_norm, float rounding);
IMGUI_API const char* FindRenderedTextEnd(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // Find the optional ## from which we stop displaying text.
+ IMGUI_API void LogRenderedText(const ImVec2* ref_pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL);
+
+ // Render helpers (those functions don't access any ImGui state!)
+ IMGUI_API void RenderMouseCursor(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, float scale, ImGuiMouseCursor mouse_cursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow);
+ IMGUI_API void RenderArrowPointingAt(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, ImGuiDir direction, ImU32 col);
+ IMGUI_API void RenderRectFilledRangeH(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& rect, ImU32 col, float x_start_norm, float x_end_norm, float rounding);
+ IMGUI_API void RenderPixelEllipsis(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, int count, ImU32 col);
// Widgets
IMGUI_API bool ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg = ImVec2(0,0), ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
IMGUI_API bool CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos);
IMGUI_API bool ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags);
IMGUI_API void Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType direction);
+ IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetScrollbarID(ImGuiLayoutType direction);
IMGUI_API void VerticalSeparator(); // Vertical separator, for menu bars (use current line height). Not exposed because it is misleading and it doesn't have an effect on regular layout.
// Widgets low-level behaviors
IMGUI_API bool ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
- IMGUI_API bool DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power);
- IMGUI_API bool SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+ IMGUI_API bool DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiDragFlags flags);
+ IMGUI_API bool SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb);
IMGUI_API bool SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend = 0.0f, float hover_visibility_delay = 0.0f);
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end = NULL);
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // Consume previous SetNextTreeNodeOpened() data, if any. May return true when logging
IMGUI_API void TreePushRawID(ImGuiID id);
- IMGUI_API bool InputTextEx(const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiTextEditCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
+ // Template functions are instantiated in imgui_widgets.cpp for a finite number of types.
+ // To use them externally (for custom widget) you may need an "extern template" statement in your code in order to link to existing instances and silence Clang warnings (see #2036).
+ // e.g. " extern template IMGUI_API float RoundScalarWithFormatT<float, float>(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, float v); "
+ template<typename T, typename SIGNED_T, typename FLOAT_T> IMGUI_API bool DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, T* v, float v_speed, const T v_min, const T v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiDragFlags flags);
+ template<typename T, typename SIGNED_T, typename FLOAT_T> IMGUI_API bool SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, T* v, const T v_min, const T v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb);
+ template<typename T, typename FLOAT_T> IMGUI_API float SliderCalcRatioFromValueT(ImGuiDataType data_type, T v, T v_min, T v_max, float power, float linear_zero_pos);
+ template<typename T, typename SIGNED_T> IMGUI_API T RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, T v);
+
+ // InputText
+ IMGUI_API bool InputTextEx(const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
IMGUI_API bool InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format);
+ // Color
IMGUI_API void ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags);
IMGUI_API void ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags);
+ IMGUI_API void ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float* ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags);
- IMGUI_API void PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size);
+ // Plot
+ IMGUI_API void PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 frame_size);
// Shade functions (write over already created vertices)
- IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawVert* vert_start, ImDrawVert* vert_end, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1);
- IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawVert* vert_start, ImDrawVert* vert_end, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp);
+ IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1);
+ IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp);
} // namespace ImGui
IMGUI_API bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildRegisterDefaultCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(ImFontAtlas* atlas, ImFont* font, ImFontConfig* font_config, float ascent, float descent);
-IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* spc);
+IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* stbrp_context_opaque);
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(unsigned char out_table[256], float in_multiply_factor);
IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(const unsigned char table[256], unsigned char* pixels, int x, int y, int w, int h, int stride);
+// Test engine hooks (imgui-test)
+//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+extern void ImGuiTestEngineHook_PreNewFrame(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+extern void ImGuiTestEngineHook_PostNewFrame(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+extern void ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(ImGuiContext* ctx, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id);
+extern void ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemInfo(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiItemStatusFlags flags);
+#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(_ID, _LABEL, _FLAGS) ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemInfo(&g, _ID, _LABEL, _FLAGS) // Register status flags
+#else
+#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(_ID, _LABEL, _FLAGS) do { } while (0)
+#endif
+
#ifdef __clang__
#pragma clang diagnostic pop
#endif
--- /dev/null
+// dear imgui, v1.68 WIP
+// (widgets code)
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Main (Button, Image, Checkbox, RadioButton, ProgressBar, Bullet, etc.)
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers (Spacing, Dummy, NewLine, Separator, etc.)
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
+// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers
+// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
+// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
+// [SECTION] Widgets: MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
+
+*/
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
+#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
+#endif
+
+#include "imgui.h"
+#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#endif
+#include "imgui_internal.h"
+
+#include <ctype.h> // toupper, isprint
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
+#include <stddef.h> // intptr_t
+#else
+#include <stdint.h> // intptr_t
+#endif
+
+// Visual Studio warnings
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant
+#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
+#endif
+
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
+#ifdef __clang__
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning : use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning : comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning : format string is not a string literal // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion" // warning : implicit conversion changes signedness //
+#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning : zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#endif
+#if __has_warning("-Wdouble-promotion")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
+#endif
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked
+#if __GNUC__ >= 8
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
+#endif
+#endif
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Data
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Those MIN/MAX values are not define because we need to point to them
+static const ImS32 IM_S32_MIN = INT_MIN; // (-2147483647 - 1), (0x80000000);
+static const ImS32 IM_S32_MAX = INT_MAX; // (2147483647), (0x7FFFFFFF)
+static const ImU32 IM_U32_MIN = 0;
+static const ImU32 IM_U32_MAX = UINT_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFF)
+#ifdef LLONG_MIN
+static const ImS64 IM_S64_MIN = LLONG_MIN; // (-9223372036854775807ll - 1ll);
+static const ImS64 IM_S64_MAX = LLONG_MAX; // (9223372036854775807ll);
+#else
+static const ImS64 IM_S64_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1;
+static const ImS64 IM_S64_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL;
+#endif
+static const ImU64 IM_U64_MIN = 0;
+#ifdef ULLONG_MAX
+static const ImU64 IM_U64_MAX = ULLONG_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFull);
+#else
+static const ImU64 IM_U64_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1);
+#endif
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Data Type helpers
+static inline int DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_ptr, const char* format);
+static void DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, void* arg_1, const void* arg_2);
+static bool DataTypeApplyOpFromText(const char* buf, const char* initial_value_buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format);
+
+// For InputTextEx()
+static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data);
+static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end);
+static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining = NULL, ImVec2* out_offset = NULL, bool stop_on_new_line = false);
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TextUnformatted()
+// - Text()
+// - TextV()
+// - TextColored()
+// - TextColoredV()
+// - TextDisabled()
+// - TextDisabledV()
+// - TextWrapped()
+// - TextWrappedV()
+// - LabelText()
+// - LabelTextV()
+// - BulletText()
+// - BulletTextV()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::TextUnformatted(const char* text, const char* text_end)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ IM_ASSERT(text != NULL);
+ const char* text_begin = text;
+ if (text_end == NULL)
+ text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
+
+ const ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset);
+ const float wrap_pos_x = window->DC.TextWrapPos;
+ const bool wrap_enabled = wrap_pos_x >= 0.0f;
+ if (text_end - text > 2000 && !wrap_enabled)
+ {
+ // Long text!
+ // Perform manual coarse clipping to optimize for long multi-line text
+ // - From this point we will only compute the width of lines that are visible. Optimization only available when word-wrapping is disabled.
+ // - We also don't vertically center the text within the line full height, which is unlikely to matter because we are likely the biggest and only item on the line.
+ // - We use memchr(), pay attention that well optimized versions of those str/mem functions are much faster than a casually written loop.
+ const char* line = text;
+ const float line_height = GetTextLineHeight();
+ const ImRect clip_rect = window->ClipRect;
+ ImVec2 text_size(0,0);
+
+ if (text_pos.y <= clip_rect.Max.y)
+ {
+ ImVec2 pos = text_pos;
+
+ // Lines to skip (can't skip when logging text)
+ if (!g.LogEnabled)
+ {
+ int lines_skippable = (int)((clip_rect.Min.y - text_pos.y) / line_height);
+ if (lines_skippable > 0)
+ {
+ int lines_skipped = 0;
+ while (line < text_end && lines_skipped < lines_skippable)
+ {
+ const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
+ if (!line_end)
+ line_end = text_end;
+ line = line_end + 1;
+ lines_skipped++;
+ }
+ pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Lines to render
+ if (line < text_end)
+ {
+ ImRect line_rect(pos, pos + ImVec2(FLT_MAX, line_height));
+ while (line < text_end)
+ {
+ if (IsClippedEx(line_rect, 0, false))
+ break;
+
+ const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
+ if (!line_end)
+ line_end = text_end;
+ const ImVec2 line_size = CalcTextSize(line, line_end, false);
+ text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_size.x);
+ RenderText(pos, line, line_end, false);
+ line = line_end + 1;
+ line_rect.Min.y += line_height;
+ line_rect.Max.y += line_height;
+ pos.y += line_height;
+ }
+
+ // Count remaining lines
+ int lines_skipped = 0;
+ while (line < text_end)
+ {
+ const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
+ if (!line_end)
+ line_end = text_end;
+ line = line_end + 1;
+ lines_skipped++;
+ }
+ pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
+ }
+
+ text_size.y += (pos - text_pos).y;
+ }
+
+ ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
+ ItemSize(text_size);
+ ItemAdd(bb, 0);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ const float wrap_width = wrap_enabled ? CalcWrapWidthForPos(window->DC.CursorPos, wrap_pos_x) : 0.0f;
+ const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false, wrap_width);
+
+ // Account of baseline offset
+ ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
+ ItemSize(text_size);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+ return;
+
+ // Render (we don't hide text after ## in this end-user function)
+ RenderTextWrapped(bb.Min, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width);
+ }
+}
+
+void ImGui::Text(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ TextV(fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const char* text_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
+ TextUnformatted(g.TempBuffer, text_end);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextColored(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ TextColoredV(col, fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col);
+ TextV(fmt, args);
+ PopStyleColor();
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextDisabled(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ TextDisabledV(fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextDisabledV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GImGui->Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
+ TextV(fmt, args);
+ PopStyleColor();
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextWrapped(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ TextWrappedV(fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextWrappedV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ bool need_backup = (GImGui->CurrentWindow->DC.TextWrapPos < 0.0f); // Keep existing wrap position if one is already set
+ if (need_backup)
+ PushTextWrapPos(0.0f);
+ TextV(fmt, args);
+ if (need_backup)
+ PopTextWrapPos();
+}
+
+void ImGui::LabelText(const char* label, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ LabelTextV(label, fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+}
+
+// Add a label+text combo aligned to other label+value widgets
+void ImGui::LabelTextV(const char* label, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const float w = CalcItemWidth();
+
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ const ImRect value_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2));
+ const ImRect total_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f), style.FramePadding.y*2) + label_size);
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0))
+ return;
+
+ // Render
+ const char* value_text_begin = &g.TempBuffer[0];
+ const char* value_text_end = value_text_begin + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
+ RenderTextClipped(value_bb.Min, value_bb.Max, value_text_begin, value_text_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f));
+ if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(value_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, value_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+}
+
+void ImGui::BulletText(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ BulletTextV(fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+}
+
+// Text with a little bullet aligned to the typical tree node.
+void ImGui::BulletTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+ const char* text_begin = g.TempBuffer;
+ const char* text_end = text_begin + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false);
+ const float text_base_offset_y = ImMax(0.0f, window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it
+ const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y*2), g.FontSize);
+ const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? (label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x*2) : 0.0f), ImMax(line_height, label_size.y))); // Empty text doesn't add padding
+ ItemSize(bb);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+ return;
+
+ // Render
+ RenderBullet(bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize*0.5f, line_height*0.5f));
+ RenderText(bb.Min+ImVec2(g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x*2, text_base_offset_y), text_begin, text_end, false);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Main
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ButtonBehavior() [Internal]
+// - Button()
+// - SmallButton()
+// - InvisibleButton()
+// - ArrowButton()
+// - CloseButton() [Internal]
+// - CollapseButton() [Internal]
+// - Scrollbar() [Internal]
+// - Image()
+// - ImageButton()
+// - Checkbox()
+// - CheckboxFlags()
+// - RadioButton()
+// - ProgressBar()
+// - Bullet()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled)
+ {
+ if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = false;
+ if (out_held) *out_held = false;
+ if (g.ActiveId == id) ClearActiveID();
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ // Default behavior requires click+release on same spot
+ if ((flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick)) == 0)
+ flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease;
+
+ ImGuiWindow* backup_hovered_window = g.HoveredWindow;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredRootWindow == window)
+ g.HoveredWindow = window;
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+ if (id != 0 && window->DC.LastItemId != id)
+ ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(&g, bb, id);
+#endif
+
+ bool pressed = false;
+ bool hovered = ItemHoverable(bb, id);
+
+ // Drag source doesn't report as hovered
+ if (hovered && g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover))
+ hovered = false;
+
+ // Special mode for Drag and Drop where holding button pressed for a long time while dragging another item triggers the button
+ if (g.DragDropActive && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold) && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers))
+ if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
+ {
+ hovered = true;
+ SetHoveredID(id);
+ if (CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(g.HoveredIdTimer + 0.0001f, g.HoveredIdTimer + 0.0001f - g.IO.DeltaTime, 0.01f, 0.70f)) // FIXME: Our formula for CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount() is fishy
+ {
+ pressed = true;
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ }
+ }
+
+ if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredRootWindow == window)
+ g.HoveredWindow = backup_hovered_window;
+
+ // AllowOverlap mode (rarely used) requires previous frame HoveredId to be null or to match. This allows using patterns where a later submitted widget overlaps a previous one.
+ if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap) && (g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0))
+ hovered = false;
+
+ // Mouse
+ if (hovered)
+ {
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers) || (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyShift && !g.IO.KeyAlt))
+ {
+ // | CLICKING | HOLDING with ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat
+ // PressedOnClickRelease | <on release>* | <on repeat> <on repeat> .. (NOT on release) <-- MOST COMMON! (*) only if both click/release were over bounds
+ // PressedOnClick | <on click> | <on click> <on repeat> <on repeat> ..
+ // PressedOnRelease | <on release> | <on repeat> <on repeat> .. (NOT on release)
+ // PressedOnDoubleClick | <on dclick> | <on dclick> <on repeat> <on repeat> ..
+ // FIXME-NAV: We don't honor those different behaviors.
+ if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0])
+ {
+ SetActiveID(id, window);
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
+ SetFocusID(id, window);
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ }
+ if (((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
+ {
+ pressed = true;
+ if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID)
+ ClearActiveID();
+ else
+ SetActiveID(id, window); // Hold on ID
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ }
+ if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease) && g.IO.MouseReleased[0])
+ {
+ if (!((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[0] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)) // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
+ pressed = true;
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+
+ // 'Repeat' mode acts when held regardless of _PressedOn flags (see table above).
+ // Relies on repeat logic of IsMouseClicked() but we may as well do it ourselves if we end up exposing finer RepeatDelay/RepeatRate settings.
+ if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.ActiveId == id && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[0] > 0.0f && IsMouseClicked(0, true))
+ pressed = true;
+ }
+
+ if (pressed)
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+ }
+
+ // Gamepad/Keyboard navigation
+ // We report navigated item as hovered but we don't set g.HoveredId to not interfere with mouse.
+ if (g.NavId == id && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == window->MoveId))
+ hovered = true;
+
+ if (g.NavActivateDownId == id)
+ {
+ bool nav_activated_by_code = (g.NavActivateId == id);
+ bool nav_activated_by_inputs = IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Activate, (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) ? ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat : ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
+ if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs)
+ pressed = true;
+ if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs || g.ActiveId == id)
+ {
+ // Set active id so it can be queried by user via IsItemActive(), equivalent of holding the mouse button.
+ g.NavActivateId = id; // This is so SetActiveId assign a Nav source
+ SetActiveID(id, window);
+ if ((nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs) && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
+ SetFocusID(id, window);
+ g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
+ }
+ }
+
+ bool held = false;
+ if (g.ActiveId == id)
+ {
+ if (pressed)
+ g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressed = true;
+ if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
+ {
+ if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+ g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - bb.Min;
+ if (g.IO.MouseDown[0])
+ {
+ held = true;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease))
+ if (!((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[0] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)) // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
+ if (!g.DragDropActive)
+ pressed = true;
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+ }
+ else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
+ {
+ if (g.NavActivateDownId != id)
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = hovered;
+ if (out_held) *out_held = held;
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+ ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine) && style.FramePadding.y < window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset) // Try to vertically align buttons that are smaller/have no padding so that text baseline matches (bit hacky, since it shouldn't be a flag)
+ pos.y += window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset - style.FramePadding.y;
+ ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+
+ const ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
+ ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+ return false;
+
+ if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
+ flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);
+ if (pressed)
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+ // Render
+ const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+ RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+ RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);
+ RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, bb.Max - style.FramePadding, label, NULL, &label_size, style.ButtonTextAlign, &bb);
+
+ // Automatically close popups
+ //if (pressed && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
+ // CloseCurrentPopup();
+
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags);
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+ return ButtonEx(label, size_arg, 0);
+}
+
+// Small buttons fits within text without additional vertical spacing.
+bool ImGui::SmallButton(const char* label)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ float backup_padding_y = g.Style.FramePadding.y;
+ g.Style.FramePadding.y = 0.0f;
+ bool pressed = ButtonEx(label, ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine);
+ g.Style.FramePadding.y = backup_padding_y;
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+// Tip: use ImGui::PushID()/PopID() to push indices or pointers in the ID stack.
+// Then you can keep 'str_id' empty or the same for all your buttons (instead of creating a string based on a non-string id)
+bool ImGui::InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ // Cannot use zero-size for InvisibleButton(). Unlike Button() there is not way to fallback using the label size.
+ IM_ASSERT(size_arg.x != 0.0f && size_arg.y != 0.0f);
+
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+ ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, 0.0f, 0.0f);
+ const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+ ItemSize(size);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+ return false;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+ const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+ const float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
+ ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+ return false;
+
+ if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
+ flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);
+
+ // Render
+ const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+ RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+ RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
+ RenderArrow(bb.Min + ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, (size.x - g.FontSize) * 0.5f), ImMax(0.0f, (size.y - g.FontSize) * 0.5f)), dir);
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ArrowButton(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir)
+{
+ float sz = GetFrameHeight();
+ return ArrowButtonEx(str_id, dir, ImVec2(sz, sz), 0);
+}
+
+// Button to close a window
+bool ImGui::CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos, float radius)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ // We intentionally allow interaction when clipped so that a mechanical Alt,Right,Validate sequence close a window.
+ // (this isn't the regular behavior of buttons, but it doesn't affect the user much because navigation tends to keep items visible).
+ const ImRect bb(pos - ImVec2(radius,radius), pos + ImVec2(radius,radius));
+ bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb, id);
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+ if (is_clipped)
+ return pressed;
+
+ // Render
+ ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter();
+ if (hovered)
+ window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, ImMax(2.0f, radius), GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered), 9);
+
+ float cross_extent = (radius * 0.7071f) - 1.0f;
+ ImU32 cross_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+ center -= ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f);
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent,+cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent,-cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent,-cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent,+cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
+ ItemAdd(bb, id);
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_None);
+
+ ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+ if (hovered || held)
+ window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(bb.GetCenter() + ImVec2(0.0f, -0.5f), g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f, col, 9);
+ RenderArrow(bb.Min + g.Style.FramePadding, window->Collapsed ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);
+
+ // Switch to moving the window after mouse is moved beyond the initial drag threshold
+ if (IsItemActive() && IsMouseDragging())
+ StartMouseMovingWindow(window);
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetScrollbarID(ImGuiLayoutType direction)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ return window->GetID((direction == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? "#SCROLLX" : "#SCROLLY");
+}
+
+// Vertical/Horizontal scrollbar
+// The entire piece of code below is rather confusing because:
+// - We handle absolute seeking (when first clicking outside the grab) and relative manipulation (afterward or when clicking inside the grab)
+// - We store values as normalized ratio and in a form that allows the window content to change while we are holding on a scrollbar
+// - We handle both horizontal and vertical scrollbars, which makes the terminology not ideal.
+void ImGui::Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType direction)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ const bool horizontal = (direction == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal);
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = GetScrollbarID(direction);
+
+ // Render background
+ bool other_scrollbar = (horizontal ? window->ScrollbarY : window->ScrollbarX);
+ float other_scrollbar_size_w = other_scrollbar ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f;
+ const ImRect window_rect = window->Rect();
+ const float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
+ ImRect bb = horizontal
+ ? ImRect(window->Pos.x + border_size, window_rect.Max.y - style.ScrollbarSize, window_rect.Max.x - other_scrollbar_size_w - border_size, window_rect.Max.y - border_size)
+ : ImRect(window_rect.Max.x - style.ScrollbarSize, window->Pos.y + border_size, window_rect.Max.x - border_size, window_rect.Max.y - other_scrollbar_size_w - border_size);
+ if (!horizontal)
+ bb.Min.y += window->TitleBarHeight() + ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? window->MenuBarHeight() : 0.0f);
+
+ const float bb_height = bb.GetHeight();
+ if (bb.GetWidth() <= 0.0f || bb_height <= 0.0f)
+ return;
+
+ // When we are too small, start hiding and disabling the grab (this reduce visual noise on very small window and facilitate using the resize grab)
+ float alpha = 1.0f;
+ if ((direction == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) && bb_height < g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)
+ {
+ alpha = ImSaturate((bb_height - g.FontSize) / (g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+ if (alpha <= 0.0f)
+ return;
+ }
+ const bool allow_interaction = (alpha >= 1.0f);
+
+ int window_rounding_corners;
+ if (horizontal)
+ window_rounding_corners = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | (other_scrollbar ? 0 : ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
+ else
+ window_rounding_corners = (((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight : 0) | (other_scrollbar ? 0 : ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg), window->WindowRounding, window_rounding_corners);
+ bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp((float)(int)((bb.Max.x - bb.Min.x - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp((float)(int)((bb.Max.y - bb.Min.y - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));
+
+ // V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar)
+ float scrollbar_size_v = horizontal ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight();
+ float scroll_v = horizontal ? window->Scroll.x : window->Scroll.y;
+ float win_size_avail_v = (horizontal ? window->SizeFull.x : window->SizeFull.y) - other_scrollbar_size_w;
+ float win_size_contents_v = horizontal ? window->SizeContents.x : window->SizeContents.y;
+
+ // Calculate the height of our grabbable box. It generally represent the amount visible (vs the total scrollable amount)
+ // But we maintain a minimum size in pixel to allow for the user to still aim inside.
+ IM_ASSERT(ImMax(win_size_contents_v, win_size_avail_v) > 0.0f); // Adding this assert to check if the ImMax(XXX,1.0f) is still needed. PLEASE CONTACT ME if this triggers.
+ const float win_size_v = ImMax(ImMax(win_size_contents_v, win_size_avail_v), 1.0f);
+ const float grab_h_pixels = ImClamp(scrollbar_size_v * (win_size_avail_v / win_size_v), style.GrabMinSize, scrollbar_size_v);
+ const float grab_h_norm = grab_h_pixels / scrollbar_size_v;
+
+ // Handle input right away. None of the code of Begin() is relying on scrolling position before calling Scrollbar().
+ bool held = false;
+ bool hovered = false;
+ const bool previously_held = (g.ActiveId == id);
+ ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
+
+ float scroll_max = ImMax(1.0f, win_size_contents_v - win_size_avail_v);
+ float scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(scroll_v / scroll_max);
+ float grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;
+ if (held && allow_interaction && grab_h_norm < 1.0f)
+ {
+ float scrollbar_pos_v = horizontal ? bb.Min.x : bb.Min.y;
+ float mouse_pos_v = horizontal ? g.IO.MousePos.x : g.IO.MousePos.y;
+ float* click_delta_to_grab_center_v = horizontal ? &g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter.x : &g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter.y;
+
+ // Click position in scrollbar normalized space (0.0f->1.0f)
+ const float clicked_v_norm = ImSaturate((mouse_pos_v - scrollbar_pos_v) / scrollbar_size_v);
+ SetHoveredID(id);
+
+ bool seek_absolute = false;
+ if (!previously_held)
+ {
+ // On initial click calculate the distance between mouse and the center of the grab
+ if (clicked_v_norm >= grab_v_norm && clicked_v_norm <= grab_v_norm + grab_h_norm)
+ {
+ *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm*0.5f;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ seek_absolute = true;
+ *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = 0.0f;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Apply scroll
+ // It is ok to modify Scroll here because we are being called in Begin() after the calculation of SizeContents and before setting up our starting position
+ const float scroll_v_norm = ImSaturate((clicked_v_norm - *click_delta_to_grab_center_v - grab_h_norm*0.5f) / (1.0f - grab_h_norm));
+ scroll_v = (float)(int)(0.5f + scroll_v_norm * scroll_max);//(win_size_contents_v - win_size_v));
+ if (horizontal)
+ window->Scroll.x = scroll_v;
+ else
+ window->Scroll.y = scroll_v;
+
+ // Update values for rendering
+ scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(scroll_v / scroll_max);
+ grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;
+
+ // Update distance to grab now that we have seeked and saturated
+ if (seek_absolute)
+ *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm*0.5f;
+ }
+
+ // Render grab
+ const ImU32 grab_col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered : ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab, alpha);
+ ImRect grab_rect;
+ if (horizontal)
+ grab_rect = ImRect(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm), bb.Min.y, ImMin(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, window_rect.Max.x), bb.Max.y);
+ else
+ grab_rect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm), bb.Max.x, ImMin(ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, window_rect.Max.y));
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_rect.Min, grab_rect.Max, grab_col, style.ScrollbarRounding);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& tint_col, const ImVec4& border_col)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+ if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
+ bb.Max += ImVec2(2, 2);
+ ItemSize(bb);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+ return;
+
+ if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(border_col), 0.0f);
+ window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min + ImVec2(1, 1), bb.Max - ImVec2(1, 1), uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min, bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
+ }
+}
+
+// frame_padding < 0: uses FramePadding from style (default)
+// frame_padding = 0: no framing
+// frame_padding > 0: set framing size
+// The color used are the button colors.
+bool ImGui::ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, int frame_padding, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+ // Default to using texture ID as ID. User can still push string/integer prefixes.
+ // We could hash the size/uv to create a unique ID but that would prevent the user from animating UV.
+ PushID((void*)(intptr_t)user_texture_id);
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID("#image");
+ PopID();
+
+ const ImVec2 padding = (frame_padding >= 0) ? ImVec2((float)frame_padding, (float)frame_padding) : style.FramePadding;
+ const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size + padding * 2);
+ const ImRect image_bb(window->DC.CursorPos + padding, window->DC.CursorPos + padding + size);
+ ItemSize(bb);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+ return false;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+
+ // Render
+ const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+ RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+ RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, ImClamp((float)ImMin(padding.x, padding.y), 0.0f, style.FrameRounding));
+ if (bg_col.w > 0.0f)
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(image_bb.Min, image_bb.Max, GetColorU32(bg_col));
+ window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, image_bb.Min, image_bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+ const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
+ const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
+ return false;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+ if (pressed)
+ {
+ *v = !(*v);
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+ }
+
+ const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
+ RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
+ RenderFrame(check_bb.Min, check_bb.Max, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+ if (*v)
+ {
+ const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(square_sz / 6.0f));
+ RenderCheckMark(check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark), square_sz - pad*2.0f);
+ }
+
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ LogRenderedText(&total_bb.Min, *v ? "[x]" : "[ ]");
+ if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value)
+{
+ bool v = ((*flags & flags_value) == flags_value);
+ bool pressed = Checkbox(label, &v);
+ if (pressed)
+ {
+ if (v)
+ *flags |= flags_value;
+ else
+ *flags &= ~flags_value;
+ }
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, bool active)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+ const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
+ const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
+ const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
+ return false;
+
+ ImVec2 center = check_bb.GetCenter();
+ center.x = (float)(int)center.x + 0.5f;
+ center.y = (float)(int)center.y + 0.5f;
+ const float radius = (square_sz - 1.0f) * 0.5f;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+ if (pressed)
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+ RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
+ window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), 16);
+ if (active)
+ {
+ const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(square_sz / 6.0f));
+ window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius - pad, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark), 16);
+ }
+
+ if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddCircle(center + ImVec2(1,1), radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
+ window->DrawList->AddCircle(center, radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
+ }
+
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ LogRenderedText(&total_bb.Min, active ? "(x)" : "( )");
+ if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, int v_button)
+{
+ const bool pressed = RadioButton(label, *v == v_button);
+ if (pressed)
+ *v = v_button;
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+// size_arg (for each axis) < 0.0f: align to end, 0.0f: auto, > 0.0f: specified size
+void ImGui::ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg, const char* overlay)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+ ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ ImRect bb(pos, pos + CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
+ ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+ return;
+
+ // Render
+ fraction = ImSaturate(fraction);
+ RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+ bb.Expand(ImVec2(-style.FrameBorderSize, -style.FrameBorderSize));
+ const ImVec2 fill_br = ImVec2(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, fraction), bb.Max.y);
+ RenderRectFilledRangeH(window->DrawList, bb, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram), 0.0f, fraction, style.FrameRounding);
+
+ // Default displaying the fraction as percentage string, but user can override it
+ char overlay_buf[32];
+ if (!overlay)
+ {
+ ImFormatString(overlay_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(overlay_buf), "%.0f%%", fraction*100+0.01f);
+ overlay = overlay_buf;
+ }
+
+ ImVec2 overlay_size = CalcTextSize(overlay, NULL);
+ if (overlay_size.x > 0.0f)
+ RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(ImClamp(fill_br.x + style.ItemSpacing.x, bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - overlay_size.x - style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), bb.Min.y), bb.Max, overlay, NULL, &overlay_size, ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f), &bb);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Bullet()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y*2), g.FontSize);
+ const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, line_height));
+ ItemSize(bb);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+ {
+ SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x*2);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ // Render and stay on same line
+ RenderBullet(bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize*0.5f, line_height*0.5f));
+ SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x*2);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - Spacing()
+// - Dummy()
+// - NewLine()
+// - AlignTextToFramePadding()
+// - Separator()
+// - VerticalSeparator() [Internal]
+// - SplitterBehavior() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::Spacing()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+ ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
+}
+
+void ImGui::Dummy(const ImVec2& size)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+ ItemSize(bb);
+ ItemAdd(bb, 0);
+}
+
+void ImGui::NewLine()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiLayoutType backup_layout_type = window->DC.LayoutType;
+ window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
+ if (window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y > 0.0f) // In the event that we are on a line with items that is smaller that FontSize high, we will preserve its height.
+ ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
+ else
+ ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize));
+ window->DC.LayoutType = backup_layout_type;
+}
+
+void ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
+ window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset, g.Style.FramePadding.y);
+}
+
+// Horizontal/vertical separating line
+void ImGui::Separator()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+ // Those flags should eventually be overridable by the user
+ ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal;
+ IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & (ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal | ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)))); // Check that only 1 option is selected
+ if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)
+ {
+ VerticalSeparator();
+ return;
+ }
+
+ // Horizontal Separator
+ if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
+ PopClipRect();
+
+ float x1 = window->Pos.x;
+ float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;
+ if (!window->DC.GroupStack.empty())
+ x1 += window->DC.Indent.x;
+
+ const ImRect bb(ImVec2(x1, window->DC.CursorPos.y), ImVec2(x2, window->DC.CursorPos.y+1.0f));
+ ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); // NB: we don't provide our width so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit, we don't provide height to not alter layout.
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+ {
+ if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
+ PushColumnClipRect();
+ return;
+ }
+
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(bb.Min, ImVec2(bb.Max.x,bb.Min.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
+
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ LogRenderedText(&bb.Min, "--------------------------------");
+
+ if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
+ {
+ PushColumnClipRect();
+ window->DC.ColumnsSet->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+ }
+}
+
+void ImGui::VerticalSeparator()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+ float y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+ float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y;
+ const ImRect bb(ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, y1), ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + 1.0f, y2));
+ ItemSize(ImVec2(bb.GetWidth(), 0.0f));
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+ return;
+
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y), ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ LogText(" |");
+}
+
+// Using 'hover_visibility_delay' allows us to hide the highlight and mouse cursor for a short time, which can be convenient to reduce visual noise.
+bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend, float hover_visibility_delay)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = window->DC.ItemFlags;
+ window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
+ bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
+ window->DC.ItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
+ if (!item_add)
+ return false;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ ImRect bb_interact = bb;
+ bb_interact.Expand(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImVec2(0.0f, hover_extend) : ImVec2(hover_extend, 0.0f));
+ ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
+ if (g.ActiveId != id)
+ SetItemAllowOverlap();
+
+ if (held || (g.HoveredId == id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay))
+ SetMouseCursor(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);
+
+ ImRect bb_render = bb;
+ if (held)
+ {
+ ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min;
+ float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x;
+
+ // Minimum pane size
+ float size_1_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size1 - min_size1);
+ float size_2_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size2 - min_size2);
+ if (mouse_delta < -size_1_maximum_delta)
+ mouse_delta = -size_1_maximum_delta;
+ if (mouse_delta > size_2_maximum_delta)
+ mouse_delta = size_2_maximum_delta;
+
+ // Apply resize
+ if (mouse_delta != 0.0f)
+ {
+ if (mouse_delta < 0.0f)
+ IM_ASSERT(*size1 + mouse_delta >= min_size1);
+ if (mouse_delta > 0.0f)
+ IM_ASSERT(*size2 - mouse_delta >= min_size2);
+ *size1 += mouse_delta;
+ *size2 -= mouse_delta;
+ bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta));
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Render
+ const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : (hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay) ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, col, g.Style.FrameRounding);
+
+ return held;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - BeginCombo()
+// - EndCombo()
+// - Combo()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static float CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(int items_count)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (items_count <= 0)
+ return FLT_MAX;
+ return (g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y) * items_count - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y + (g.Style.WindowPadding.y * 2);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
+{
+ // Always consume the SetNextWindowSizeConstraint() call in our early return paths
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiCond backup_next_window_size_constraint = g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond;
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = 0;
+
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together
+
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+
+ const float arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight();
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : CalcItemWidth();
+ const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
+ const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
+ return false;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(frame_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+ bool popup_open = IsPopupOpen(id);
+
+ const ImRect value_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max - ImVec2(arrow_size, 0.0f));
+ const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
+ RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(frame_bb.Min, ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size, frame_bb.Max.y), frame_col, style.FrameRounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_Left);
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size, frame_bb.Min.y), frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32((popup_open || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button), style.FrameRounding, (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Right);
+ RenderArrow(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size + style.FramePadding.y, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), ImGuiDir_Down);
+ }
+ RenderFrameBorder(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, style.FrameRounding);
+ if (preview_value != NULL && !(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
+ RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, value_bb.Max, preview_value, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
+ if (label_size.x > 0)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+ if ((pressed || g.NavActivateId == id) && !popup_open)
+ {
+ if (window->DC.NavLayerCurrent == 0)
+ window->NavLastIds[0] = id;
+ OpenPopupEx(id);
+ popup_open = true;
+ }
+
+ if (!popup_open)
+ return false;
+
+ if (backup_next_window_size_constraint)
+ {
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = backup_next_window_size_constraint;
+ g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x = ImMax(g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x, w);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_) == 0)
+ flags |= ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular;
+ IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_)); // Only one
+ int popup_max_height_in_items = -1;
+ if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular) popup_max_height_in_items = 8;
+ else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall) popup_max_height_in_items = 4;
+ else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge) popup_max_height_in_items = 20;
+ SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(w, 0.0f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
+ }
+
+ char name[16];
+ ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Combo_%02d", g.BeginPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth
+
+ // Peak into expected window size so we can position it
+ if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = FindWindowByName(name))
+ if (popup_window->WasActive)
+ {
+ ImVec2 size_expected = CalcWindowExpectedSize(popup_window);
+ if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft)
+ popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_Left;
+ ImRect r_outer = GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(popup_window);
+ ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(frame_bb.GetBL(), size_expected, &popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, frame_bb, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox);
+ SetNextWindowPos(pos);
+ }
+
+ // Horizontally align ourselves with the framed text
+ ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings;
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, style.WindowPadding.y));
+ bool ret = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
+ PopStyleVar();
+ if (!ret)
+ {
+ EndPopup();
+ IM_ASSERT(0); // This should never happen as we tested for IsPopupOpen() above
+ return false;
+ }
+ return true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndCombo()
+{
+ EndPopup();
+}
+
+// Getter for the old Combo() API: const char*[]
+static bool Items_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
+{
+ const char* const* items = (const char* const*)data;
+ if (out_text)
+ *out_text = items[idx];
+ return true;
+}
+
+// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0"
+static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
+{
+ // FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited.
+ const char* items_separated_by_zeros = (const char*)data;
+ int items_count = 0;
+ const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;
+ while (*p)
+ {
+ if (idx == items_count)
+ break;
+ p += strlen(p) + 1;
+ items_count++;
+ }
+ if (!*p)
+ return false;
+ if (out_text)
+ *out_text = p;
+ return true;
+}
+
+// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can.
+bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+ // Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo()
+ const char* preview_value = NULL;
+ if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count)
+ items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value);
+
+ // The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here.
+ if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond)
+ SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
+
+ if (!BeginCombo(label, preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags_None))
+ return false;
+
+ // Display items
+ // FIXME-OPT: Use clipper (but we need to disable it on the appearing frame to make sure our call to SetItemDefaultFocus() is processed)
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++)
+ {
+ PushID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
+ const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
+ const char* item_text;
+ if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
+ item_text = "*Unknown item*";
+ if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
+ {
+ value_changed = true;
+ *current_item = i;
+ }
+ if (item_selected)
+ SetItemDefaultFocus();
+ PopID();
+ }
+
+ EndCombo();
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+// Combo box helper allowing to pass an array of strings.
+bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items)
+{
+ const bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_in_items);
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+// Combo box helper allowing to pass all items in a single string literal holding multiple zero-terminated items "item1\0item2\0"
+bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int height_in_items)
+{
+ int items_count = 0;
+ const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros; // FIXME-OPT: Avoid computing this, or at least only when combo is open
+ while (*p)
+ {
+ p += strlen(p) + 1;
+ items_count++;
+ }
+ bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_SingleStringGetter, (void*)items_separated_by_zeros, items_count, height_in_items);
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - PatchFormatStringFloatToInt()
+// - DataTypeFormatString()
+// - DataTypeApplyOp()
+// - DataTypeApplyOpFromText()
+// - GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision
+// - RoundScalarWithFormat<>()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImGuiDataTypeInfo
+{
+ size_t Size;
+ const char* PrintFmt; // Unused
+ const char* ScanFmt;
+};
+
+static const ImGuiDataTypeInfo GDataTypeInfo[] =
+{
+ { sizeof(int), "%d", "%d" },
+ { sizeof(unsigned int), "%u", "%u" },
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+ { sizeof(ImS64), "%I64d","%I64d" },
+ { sizeof(ImU64), "%I64u","%I64u" },
+#else
+ { sizeof(ImS64), "%lld", "%lld" },
+ { sizeof(ImU64), "%llu", "%llu" },
+#endif
+ { sizeof(float), "%f", "%f" }, // float are promoted to double in va_arg
+ { sizeof(double), "%f", "%lf" },
+};
+IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GDataTypeInfo) == ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+
+// FIXME-LEGACY: Prior to 1.61 our DragInt() function internally used floats and because of this the compile-time default value for format was "%.0f".
+// Even though we changed the compile-time default, we expect users to have carried %f around, which would break the display of DragInt() calls.
+// To honor backward compatibility we are rewriting the format string, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS is enabled. What could possibly go wrong?!
+static const char* PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(const char* fmt)
+{
+ if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == '.' && fmt[2] == '0' && fmt[3] == 'f' && fmt[4] == 0) // Fast legacy path for "%.0f" which is expected to be the most common case.
+ return "%d";
+ const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt); // Find % (if any, and ignore %%)
+ const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start); // Find end of format specifier, which itself is an exercise of confidence/recklessness (because snprintf is dependent on libc or user).
+ if (fmt_end > fmt_start && fmt_end[-1] == 'f')
+ {
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+ if (fmt_start == fmt && fmt_end[0] == 0)
+ return "%d";
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImFormatString(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), "%.*s%%d%s", (int)(fmt_start - fmt), fmt, fmt_end); // Honor leading and trailing decorations, but lose alignment/precision.
+ return g.TempBuffer;
+#else
+ IM_ASSERT(0 && "DragInt(): Invalid format string!"); // Old versions used a default parameter of "%.0f", please replace with e.g. "%d"
+#endif
+ }
+ return fmt;
+}
+
+static inline int DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_ptr, const char* format)
+{
+ if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32) // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing the argument
+ return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU32*)data_ptr);
+ if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64) // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing the argument
+ return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU64*)data_ptr);
+ if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
+ return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const float*)data_ptr);
+ if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
+ return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const double*)data_ptr);
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return 0;
+}
+
+// FIXME: Adding support for clamping on boundaries of the data type would be nice.
+static void DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, void* arg1, const void* arg2)
+{
+ IM_ASSERT(op == '+' || op == '-');
+ switch (data_type)
+ {
+ case ImGuiDataType_S32:
+ if (op == '+') *(int*)output = *(const int*)arg1 + *(const int*)arg2;
+ else if (op == '-') *(int*)output = *(const int*)arg1 - *(const int*)arg2;
+ return;
+ case ImGuiDataType_U32:
+ if (op == '+') *(unsigned int*)output = *(const unsigned int*)arg1 + *(const ImU32*)arg2;
+ else if (op == '-') *(unsigned int*)output = *(const unsigned int*)arg1 - *(const ImU32*)arg2;
+ return;
+ case ImGuiDataType_S64:
+ if (op == '+') *(ImS64*)output = *(const ImS64*)arg1 + *(const ImS64*)arg2;
+ else if (op == '-') *(ImS64*)output = *(const ImS64*)arg1 - *(const ImS64*)arg2;
+ return;
+ case ImGuiDataType_U64:
+ if (op == '+') *(ImU64*)output = *(const ImU64*)arg1 + *(const ImU64*)arg2;
+ else if (op == '-') *(ImU64*)output = *(const ImU64*)arg1 - *(const ImU64*)arg2;
+ return;
+ case ImGuiDataType_Float:
+ if (op == '+') *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 + *(const float*)arg2;
+ else if (op == '-') *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 - *(const float*)arg2;
+ return;
+ case ImGuiDataType_Double:
+ if (op == '+') *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 + *(const double*)arg2;
+ else if (op == '-') *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 - *(const double*)arg2;
+ return;
+ case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
+ }
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+}
+
+// User can input math operators (e.g. +100) to edit a numerical values.
+// NB: This is _not_ a full expression evaluator. We should probably add one and replace this dumb mess..
+static bool DataTypeApplyOpFromText(const char* buf, const char* initial_value_buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format)
+{
+ while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
+ buf++;
+
+ // We don't support '-' op because it would conflict with inputing negative value.
+ // Instead you can use +-100 to subtract from an existing value
+ char op = buf[0];
+ if (op == '+' || op == '*' || op == '/')
+ {
+ buf++;
+ while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
+ buf++;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ op = 0;
+ }
+ if (!buf[0])
+ return false;
+
+ // Copy the value in an opaque buffer so we can compare at the end of the function if it changed at all.
+ IM_ASSERT(data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+ int data_backup[2];
+ IM_ASSERT(GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size <= sizeof(data_backup));
+ memcpy(data_backup, data_ptr, GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size);
+
+ if (format == NULL)
+ format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].ScanFmt;
+
+ int arg1i = 0;
+ if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32)
+ {
+ int* v = (int*)data_ptr;
+ int arg0i = *v;
+ float arg1f = 0.0f;
+ if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0i) < 1)
+ return false;
+ // Store operand in a float so we can use fractional value for multipliers (*1.1), but constant always parsed as integer so we can fit big integers (e.g. 2000000003) past float precision
+ if (op == '+') { if (sscanf(buf, "%d", &arg1i)) *v = (int)(arg0i + arg1i); } // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
+ else if (op == '*') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f)) *v = (int)(arg0i * arg1f); } // Multiply
+ else if (op == '/') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f) && arg1f != 0.0f) *v = (int)(arg0i / arg1f); } // Divide
+ else { if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1i) == 1) *v = arg1i; } // Assign constant
+ }
+ else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
+ {
+ // Assign constant
+ // FIXME: We don't bother handling support for legacy operators since they are a little too crappy. Instead we may implement a proper expression evaluator in the future.
+ sscanf(buf, format, data_ptr);
+ }
+ else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
+ {
+ // For floats we have to ignore format with precision (e.g. "%.2f") because sscanf doesn't take them in
+ format = "%f";
+ float* v = (float*)data_ptr;
+ float arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0f;
+ if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
+ return false;
+ if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
+ return false;
+ if (op == '+') { *v = arg0f + arg1f; } // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
+ else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; } // Multiply
+ else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
+ else { *v = arg1f; } // Assign constant
+ }
+ else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
+ {
+ format = "%lf"; // scanf differentiate float/double unlike printf which forces everything to double because of ellipsis
+ double* v = (double*)data_ptr;
+ double arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0;
+ if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
+ return false;
+ if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
+ return false;
+ if (op == '+') { *v = arg0f + arg1f; } // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
+ else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; } // Multiply
+ else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
+ else { *v = arg1f; } // Assign constant
+ }
+ return memcmp(data_backup, data_ptr, GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size) != 0;
+}
+
+static float GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(int decimal_precision)
+{
+ static const float min_steps[10] = { 1.0f, 0.1f, 0.01f, 0.001f, 0.0001f, 0.00001f, 0.000001f, 0.0000001f, 0.00000001f, 0.000000001f };
+ if (decimal_precision < 0)
+ return FLT_MIN;
+ return (decimal_precision < IM_ARRAYSIZE(min_steps)) ? min_steps[decimal_precision] : ImPow(10.0f, (float)-decimal_precision);
+}
+
+template<typename TYPE>
+static const char* ImAtoi(const char* src, TYPE* output)
+{
+ int negative = 0;
+ if (*src == '-') { negative = 1; src++; }
+ if (*src == '+') { src++; }
+ TYPE v = 0;
+ while (*src >= '0' && *src <= '9')
+ v = (v * 10) + (*src++ - '0');
+ *output = negative ? -v : v;
+ return src;
+}
+
+template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE>
+TYPE ImGui::RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v)
+{
+ const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(format);
+ if (fmt_start[0] != '%' || fmt_start[1] == '%') // Don't apply if the value is not visible in the format string
+ return v;
+ char v_str[64];
+ ImFormatString(v_str, IM_ARRAYSIZE(v_str), fmt_start, v);
+ const char* p = v_str;
+ while (*p == ' ')
+ p++;
+ if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
+ v = (TYPE)ImAtof(p);
+ else
+ ImAtoi(p, (SIGNEDTYPE*)&v);
+ return v;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DragBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
+// - DragBehavior() [Internal]
+// - DragScalar()
+// - DragScalarN()
+// - DragFloat()
+// - DragFloat2()
+// - DragFloat3()
+// - DragFloat4()
+// - DragFloatRange2()
+// - DragInt()
+// - DragInt2()
+// - DragInt3()
+// - DragInt4()
+// - DragIntRange2()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// This is called by DragBehavior() when the widget is active (held by mouse or being manipulated with Nav controls)
+template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
+bool ImGui::DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiDragFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiDragFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
+ const bool is_decimal = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
+ const bool has_min_max = (v_min != v_max);
+ const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f && is_decimal && has_min_max && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX));
+
+ // Default tweak speed
+ if (v_speed == 0.0f && has_min_max && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX))
+ v_speed = (float)((v_max - v_min) * g.DragSpeedDefaultRatio);
+
+ // Inputs accumulates into g.DragCurrentAccum, which is flushed into the current value as soon as it makes a difference with our precision settings
+ float adjust_delta = 0.0f;
+ if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && IsMousePosValid() && g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[0] > 1.0f*1.0f)
+ {
+ adjust_delta = g.IO.MouseDelta[axis];
+ if (g.IO.KeyAlt)
+ adjust_delta *= 1.0f / 100.0f;
+ if (g.IO.KeyShift)
+ adjust_delta *= 10.0f;
+ }
+ else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
+ {
+ int decimal_precision = is_decimal ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
+ adjust_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard | ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 1.0f / 10.0f, 10.0f)[axis];
+ v_speed = ImMax(v_speed, GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(decimal_precision));
+ }
+ adjust_delta *= v_speed;
+
+ // For vertical drag we currently assume that Up=higher value (like we do with vertical sliders). This may become a parameter.
+ if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
+ adjust_delta = -adjust_delta;
+
+ // Clear current value on activation
+ // Avoid altering values and clamping when we are _already_ past the limits and heading in the same direction, so e.g. if range is 0..255, current value is 300 and we are pushing to the right side, keep the 300.
+ bool is_just_activated = g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated;
+ bool is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward = has_min_max && ((*v >= v_max && adjust_delta > 0.0f) || (*v <= v_min && adjust_delta < 0.0f));
+ bool is_drag_direction_change_with_power = is_power && ((adjust_delta < 0 && g.DragCurrentAccum > 0) || (adjust_delta > 0 && g.DragCurrentAccum < 0));
+ if (is_just_activated || is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward || is_drag_direction_change_with_power)
+ {
+ g.DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
+ g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
+ }
+ else if (adjust_delta != 0.0f)
+ {
+ g.DragCurrentAccum += adjust_delta;
+ g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = true;
+ }
+
+ if (!g.DragCurrentAccumDirty)
+ return false;
+
+ TYPE v_cur = *v;
+ FLOATTYPE v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = (FLOATTYPE)0.0f;
+
+ if (is_power)
+ {
+ // Offset + round to user desired precision, with a curve on the v_min..v_max range to get more precision on one side of the range
+ FLOATTYPE v_old_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
+ FLOATTYPE v_new_norm_curved = v_old_norm_curved + (g.DragCurrentAccum / (v_max - v_min));
+ v_cur = v_min + (TYPE)ImPow(ImSaturate((float)v_new_norm_curved), power) * (v_max - v_min);
+ v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = v_old_norm_curved;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ v_cur += (TYPE)g.DragCurrentAccum;
+ }
+
+ // Round to user desired precision based on format string
+ v_cur = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_cur);
+
+ // Preserve remainder after rounding has been applied. This also allow slow tweaking of values.
+ g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
+ if (is_power)
+ {
+ FLOATTYPE v_cur_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
+ g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)(v_cur_norm_curved - v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_cur - (SIGNEDTYPE)*v);
+ }
+
+ // Lose zero sign for float/double
+ if (v_cur == (TYPE)-0)
+ v_cur = (TYPE)0;
+
+ // Clamp values (+ handle overflow/wrap-around for integer types)
+ if (*v != v_cur && has_min_max)
+ {
+ if (v_cur < v_min || (v_cur > *v && adjust_delta < 0.0f && !is_decimal))
+ v_cur = v_min;
+ if (v_cur > v_max || (v_cur < *v && adjust_delta > 0.0f && !is_decimal))
+ v_cur = v_max;
+ }
+
+ // Apply result
+ if (*v == v_cur)
+ return false;
+ *v = v_cur;
+ return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiDragFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.ActiveId == id)
+ {
+ if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && !g.IO.MouseDown[0])
+ ClearActiveID();
+ else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav && g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+ if (g.ActiveId != id)
+ return false;
+
+ switch (data_type)
+ {
+ case ImGuiDataType_S32: return DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImS32*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS32* )v_min : IM_S32_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS32* )v_max : IM_S32_MAX, format, power, flags);
+ case ImGuiDataType_U32: return DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImU32*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU32* )v_min : IM_U32_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU32* )v_max : IM_U32_MAX, format, power, flags);
+ case ImGuiDataType_S64: return DragBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImS64*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS64* )v_min : IM_S64_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS64* )v_max : IM_S64_MAX, format, power, flags);
+ case ImGuiDataType_U64: return DragBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImU64*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU64* )v_min : IM_U64_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU64* )v_max : IM_U64_MAX, format, power, flags);
+ case ImGuiDataType_Float: return DragBehaviorT<float, float, float >(data_type, (float*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const float* )v_min : -FLT_MAX, v_max ? *(const float* )v_max : FLT_MAX, format, power, flags);
+ case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DragBehaviorT<double,double,double>(data_type, (double*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const double*)v_min : -DBL_MAX, v_max ? *(const double*)v_max : DBL_MAX, format, power, flags);
+ case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
+ }
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ if (power != 1.0f)
+ IM_ASSERT(v_min != NULL && v_max != NULL); // When using a power curve the drag needs to have known bounds
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+ const float w = CalcItemWidth();
+
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
+ const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
+ return false;
+
+ const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+
+ // Default format string when passing NULL
+ // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
+ IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+ if (format == NULL)
+ format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
+ else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
+ format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
+
+ // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Drag turns it into an input box
+ bool start_text_input = false;
+ const bool tab_focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
+ if (tab_focus_requested || (hovered && (g.IO.MouseClicked[0] || g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0])) || g.NavActivateId == id || (g.NavInputId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId != id))
+ {
+ SetActiveID(id, window);
+ SetFocusID(id, window);
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
+ if (tab_focus_requested || g.IO.KeyCtrl || g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0] || g.NavInputId == id)
+ {
+ start_text_input = true;
+ g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;
+ }
+ }
+ if (start_text_input || (g.ActiveId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId == id))
+ {
+ window->DC.CursorPos = frame_bb.Min;
+ FocusableItemUnregister(window);
+ return InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, v, format);
+ }
+
+ // Actual drag behavior
+ const bool value_changed = DragBehavior(id, data_type, v, v_speed, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiDragFlags_None);
+ if (value_changed)
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+ // Draw frame
+ const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
+ RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+ RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, style.FrameRounding);
+
+ // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
+ char value_buf[64];
+ const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
+ RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+
+ if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ BeginGroup();
+ PushID(label);
+ PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
+ size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
+ for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
+ {
+ PushID(i);
+ value_changed |= DragScalar("", data_type, v, v_speed, v_min, v_max, format, power);
+ SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ PopID();
+ PopItemWidth();
+ v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
+ }
+ PopID();
+
+ TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
+ EndGroup();
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max, float power)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ PushID(label);
+ BeginGroup();
+ PushMultiItemsWidths(2);
+
+ bool value_changed = DragFloat("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? -FLT_MAX : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format, power);
+ PopItemWidth();
+ SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ value_changed |= DragFloat("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? FLT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format, power);
+ PopItemWidth();
+ SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+
+ TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
+ EndGroup();
+ PopID();
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+// NB: v_speed is float to allow adjusting the drag speed with more precision
+bool ImGui::DragInt(const char* label, int* v, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ PushID(label);
+ BeginGroup();
+ PushMultiItemsWidths(2);
+
+ bool value_changed = DragInt("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MIN : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format);
+ PopItemWidth();
+ SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ value_changed |= DragInt("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format);
+ PopItemWidth();
+ SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+
+ TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
+ EndGroup();
+ PopID();
+
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - SliderBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
+// - SliderBehavior() [Internal]
+// - SliderScalar()
+// - SliderScalarN()
+// - SliderFloat()
+// - SliderFloat2()
+// - SliderFloat3()
+// - SliderFloat4()
+// - SliderAngle()
+// - SliderInt()
+// - SliderInt2()
+// - SliderInt3()
+// - SliderInt4()
+// - VSliderScalar()
+// - VSliderFloat()
+// - VSliderInt()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+template<typename TYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
+float ImGui::SliderCalcRatioFromValueT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, float power, float linear_zero_pos)
+{
+ if (v_min == v_max)
+ return 0.0f;
+
+ const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f) && (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
+ const TYPE v_clamped = (v_min < v_max) ? ImClamp(v, v_min, v_max) : ImClamp(v, v_max, v_min);
+ if (is_power)
+ {
+ if (v_clamped < 0.0f)
+ {
+ const float f = 1.0f - (float)((v_clamped - v_min) / (ImMin((TYPE)0, v_max) - v_min));
+ return (1.0f - ImPow(f, 1.0f/power)) * linear_zero_pos;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ const float f = (float)((v_clamped - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)) / (v_max - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)));
+ return linear_zero_pos + ImPow(f, 1.0f/power) * (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Linear slider
+ return (float)((FLOATTYPE)(v_clamped - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min));
+}
+
+// FIXME: Move some of the code into SliderBehavior(). Current responsability is larger than what the equivalent DragBehaviorT<> does, we also do some rendering, etc.
+template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
+bool ImGui::SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+ const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
+ const bool is_decimal = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
+ const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f) && is_decimal;
+
+ const float grab_padding = 2.0f;
+ const float slider_sz = (bb.Max[axis] - bb.Min[axis]) - grab_padding * 2.0f;
+ float grab_sz = style.GrabMinSize;
+ SIGNEDTYPE v_range = (v_min < v_max ? v_max - v_min : v_min - v_max);
+ if (!is_decimal && v_range >= 0) // v_range < 0 may happen on integer overflows
+ grab_sz = ImMax((float)(slider_sz / (v_range + 1)), style.GrabMinSize); // For integer sliders: if possible have the grab size represent 1 unit
+ grab_sz = ImMin(grab_sz, slider_sz);
+ const float slider_usable_sz = slider_sz - grab_sz;
+ const float slider_usable_pos_min = bb.Min[axis] + grab_padding + grab_sz*0.5f;
+ const float slider_usable_pos_max = bb.Max[axis] - grab_padding - grab_sz*0.5f;
+
+ // For power curve sliders that cross over sign boundary we want the curve to be symmetric around 0.0f
+ float linear_zero_pos; // 0.0->1.0f
+ if (is_power && v_min * v_max < 0.0f)
+ {
+ // Different sign
+ const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_min_to_0 = ImPow(v_min >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_min : -(FLOATTYPE)v_min, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f/power);
+ const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_max_to_0 = ImPow(v_max >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_max : -(FLOATTYPE)v_max, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f/power);
+ linear_zero_pos = (float)(linear_dist_min_to_0 / (linear_dist_min_to_0 + linear_dist_max_to_0));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Same sign
+ linear_zero_pos = v_min < 0.0f ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
+ }
+
+ // Process interacting with the slider
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ if (g.ActiveId == id)
+ {
+ bool set_new_value = false;
+ float clicked_t = 0.0f;
+ if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
+ {
+ if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
+ {
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ const float mouse_abs_pos = g.IO.MousePos[axis];
+ clicked_t = (slider_usable_sz > 0.0f) ? ImClamp((mouse_abs_pos - slider_usable_pos_min) / slider_usable_sz, 0.0f, 1.0f) : 0.0f;
+ if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
+ clicked_t = 1.0f - clicked_t;
+ set_new_value = true;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
+ {
+ const ImVec2 delta2 = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard | ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 0.0f, 0.0f);
+ float delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? delta2.x : -delta2.y;
+ if (g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+ {
+ ClearActiveID();
+ }
+ else if (delta != 0.0f)
+ {
+ clicked_t = SliderCalcRatioFromValueT<TYPE,FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
+ const int decimal_precision = is_decimal ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
+ if ((decimal_precision > 0) || is_power)
+ {
+ delta /= 100.0f; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in % of slider bounds
+ if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
+ delta /= 10.0f;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if ((v_range >= -100.0f && v_range <= 100.0f) || IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
+ delta = ((delta < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) / (float)v_range; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in integer steps
+ else
+ delta /= 100.0f;
+ }
+ if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast))
+ delta *= 10.0f;
+ set_new_value = true;
+ if ((clicked_t >= 1.0f && delta > 0.0f) || (clicked_t <= 0.0f && delta < 0.0f)) // This is to avoid applying the saturation when already past the limits
+ set_new_value = false;
+ else
+ clicked_t = ImSaturate(clicked_t + delta);
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (set_new_value)
+ {
+ TYPE v_new;
+ if (is_power)
+ {
+ // Account for power curve scale on both sides of the zero
+ if (clicked_t < linear_zero_pos)
+ {
+ // Negative: rescale to the negative range before powering
+ float a = 1.0f - (clicked_t / linear_zero_pos);
+ a = ImPow(a, power);
+ v_new = ImLerp(ImMin(v_max, (TYPE)0), v_min, a);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Positive: rescale to the positive range before powering
+ float a;
+ if (ImFabs(linear_zero_pos - 1.0f) > 1.e-6f)
+ a = (clicked_t - linear_zero_pos) / (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
+ else
+ a = clicked_t;
+ a = ImPow(a, power);
+ v_new = ImLerp(ImMax(v_min, (TYPE)0), v_max, a);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Linear slider
+ if (is_decimal)
+ {
+ v_new = ImLerp(v_min, v_max, clicked_t);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // For integer values we want the clicking position to match the grab box so we round above
+ // This code is carefully tuned to work with large values (e.g. high ranges of U64) while preserving this property..
+ FLOATTYPE v_new_off_f = (v_max - v_min) * clicked_t;
+ TYPE v_new_off_floor = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f);
+ TYPE v_new_off_round = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f + (FLOATTYPE)0.5);
+ if (!is_decimal && v_new_off_floor < v_new_off_round)
+ v_new = v_min + v_new_off_round;
+ else
+ v_new = v_min + v_new_off_floor;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Round to user desired precision based on format string
+ v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE,SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);
+
+ // Apply result
+ if (*v != v_new)
+ {
+ *v = v_new;
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Output grab position so it can be displayed by the caller
+ float grab_t = SliderCalcRatioFromValueT<TYPE,FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
+ if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
+ grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
+ const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
+ if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
+ *out_grab_bb = ImRect(grab_pos - grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Min.y + grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Max.y - grab_padding);
+ else
+ *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min.x + grab_padding, grab_pos - grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Max.x - grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz*0.5f);
+
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+// For 32-bits and larger types, slider bounds are limited to half the natural type range.
+// So e.g. an integer Slider between INT_MAX-10 and INT_MAX will fail, but an integer Slider between INT_MAX/2-10 and INT_MAX/2 will be ok.
+// It would be possible to lift that limitation with some work but it doesn't seem to be worth it for sliders.
+bool ImGui::SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
+{
+ switch (data_type)
+ {
+ case ImGuiDataType_S32:
+ IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS32*)v_min >= IM_S32_MIN/2 && *(const ImS32*)v_max <= IM_S32_MAX/2);
+ return SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImS32*)v, *(const ImS32*)v_min, *(const ImS32*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
+ case ImGuiDataType_U32:
+ IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU32*)v_min <= IM_U32_MAX/2);
+ return SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImU32*)v, *(const ImU32*)v_min, *(const ImU32*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
+ case ImGuiDataType_S64:
+ IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS64*)v_min >= IM_S64_MIN/2 && *(const ImS64*)v_max <= IM_S64_MAX/2);
+ return SliderBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImS64*)v, *(const ImS64*)v_min, *(const ImS64*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
+ case ImGuiDataType_U64:
+ IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU64*)v_min <= IM_U64_MAX/2);
+ return SliderBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImU64*)v, *(const ImU64*)v_min, *(const ImU64*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
+ case ImGuiDataType_Float:
+ IM_ASSERT(*(const float*)v_min >= -FLT_MAX/2.0f && *(const float*)v_max <= FLT_MAX/2.0f);
+ return SliderBehaviorT<float, float, float >(bb, id, data_type, (float*)v, *(const float*)v_min, *(const float*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
+ case ImGuiDataType_Double:
+ IM_ASSERT(*(const double*)v_min >= -DBL_MAX/2.0f && *(const double*)v_max <= DBL_MAX/2.0f);
+ return SliderBehaviorT<double,double,double>(bb, id, data_type, (double*)v, *(const double*)v_min, *(const double*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
+ case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
+ }
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+ const float w = CalcItemWidth();
+
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
+ const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
+ return false;
+
+ // Default format string when passing NULL
+ // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
+ IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+ if (format == NULL)
+ format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
+ else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
+ format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
+
+ // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Slider turns it into an input box
+ bool start_text_input = false;
+ const bool tab_focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
+ const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+ if (tab_focus_requested || (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || (g.NavInputId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId != id))
+ {
+ SetActiveID(id, window);
+ SetFocusID(id, window);
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
+ if (tab_focus_requested || g.IO.KeyCtrl || g.NavInputId == id)
+ {
+ start_text_input = true;
+ g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;
+ }
+ }
+ if (start_text_input || (g.ActiveId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId == id))
+ {
+ window->DC.CursorPos = frame_bb.Min;
+ FocusableItemUnregister(window);
+ return InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, v, format);
+ }
+
+ // Draw frame
+ const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
+ RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+ RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
+
+ // Slider behavior
+ ImRect grab_bb;
+ const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_None, &grab_bb);
+ if (value_changed)
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+ // Render grab
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);
+
+ // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
+ char value_buf[64];
+ const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
+ RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f));
+
+ if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+// Add multiple sliders on 1 line for compact edition of multiple components
+bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ BeginGroup();
+ PushID(label);
+ PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
+ size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
+ for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
+ {
+ PushID(i);
+ value_changed |= SliderScalar("", data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power);
+ SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ PopID();
+ PopItemWidth();
+ v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
+ }
+ PopID();
+
+ TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
+ EndGroup();
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min, float v_degrees_max, const char* format)
+{
+ if (format == NULL)
+ format = "%.0f deg";
+ float v_deg = (*v_rad) * 360.0f / (2*IM_PI);
+ bool value_changed = SliderFloat(label, &v_deg, v_degrees_min, v_degrees_max, format, 1.0f);
+ *v_rad = v_deg * (2*IM_PI) / 360.0f;
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+ const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+ ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(frame_bb, id))
+ return false;
+
+ // Default format string when passing NULL
+ // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
+ IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+ if (format == NULL)
+ format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
+ else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
+ format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
+
+ const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+ if ((hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
+ {
+ SetActiveID(id, window);
+ SetFocusID(id, window);
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
+ }
+
+ // Draw frame
+ const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
+ RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+ RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
+
+ // Slider behavior
+ ImRect grab_bb;
+ const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical, &grab_bb);
+ if (value_changed)
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+ // Render grab
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);
+
+ // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
+ // For the vertical slider we allow centered text to overlap the frame padding
+ char value_buf[64];
+ const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
+ RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));
+ if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+ return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
+{
+ return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ImParseFormatFindStart() [Internal]
+// - ImParseFormatFindEnd() [Internal]
+// - ImParseFormatTrimDecorations() [Internal]
+// - ImParseFormatPrecision() [Internal]
+// - InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement() [Internal]
+// - InputScalar()
+// - InputScalarN()
+// - InputFloat()
+// - InputFloat2()
+// - InputFloat3()
+// - InputFloat4()
+// - InputInt()
+// - InputInt2()
+// - InputInt3()
+// - InputInt4()
+// - InputDouble()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// We don't use strchr() because our strings are usually very short and often start with '%'
+const char* ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* fmt)
+{
+ while (char c = fmt[0])
+ {
+ if (c == '%' && fmt[1] != '%')
+ return fmt;
+ else if (c == '%')
+ fmt++;
+ fmt++;
+ }
+ return fmt;
+}
+
+const char* ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* fmt)
+{
+ // Printf/scanf types modifiers: I/L/h/j/l/t/w/z. Other uppercase letters qualify as types aka end of the format.
+ if (fmt[0] != '%')
+ return fmt;
+ const unsigned int ignored_uppercase_mask = (1 << ('I'-'A')) | (1 << ('L'-'A'));
+ const unsigned int ignored_lowercase_mask = (1 << ('h'-'a')) | (1 << ('j'-'a')) | (1 << ('l'-'a')) | (1 << ('t'-'a')) | (1 << ('w'-'a')) | (1 << ('z'-'a'));
+ for (char c; (c = *fmt) != 0; fmt++)
+ {
+ if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z' && ((1 << (c - 'A')) & ignored_uppercase_mask) == 0)
+ return fmt + 1;
+ if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z' && ((1 << (c - 'a')) & ignored_lowercase_mask) == 0)
+ return fmt + 1;
+ }
+ return fmt;
+}
+
+// Extract the format out of a format string with leading or trailing decorations
+// fmt = "blah blah" -> return fmt
+// fmt = "%.3f" -> return fmt
+// fmt = "hello %.3f" -> return fmt + 6
+// fmt = "%.3f hello" -> return buf written with "%.3f"
+const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* fmt, char* buf, size_t buf_size)
+{
+ const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
+ if (fmt_start[0] != '%')
+ return fmt;
+ const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);
+ if (fmt_end[0] == 0) // If we only have leading decoration, we don't need to copy the data.
+ return fmt_start;
+ ImStrncpy(buf, fmt_start, ImMin((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_start) + 1, buf_size));
+ return buf;
+}
+
+// Parse display precision back from the display format string
+// FIXME: This is still used by some navigation code path to infer a minimum tweak step, but we should aim to rework widgets so it isn't needed.
+int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* fmt, int default_precision)
+{
+ fmt = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
+ if (fmt[0] != '%')
+ return default_precision;
+ fmt++;
+ while (*fmt >= '0' && *fmt <= '9')
+ fmt++;
+ int precision = INT_MAX;
+ if (*fmt == '.')
+ {
+ fmt = ImAtoi<int>(fmt + 1, &precision);
+ if (precision < 0 || precision > 99)
+ precision = default_precision;
+ }
+ if (*fmt == 'e' || *fmt == 'E') // Maximum precision with scientific notation
+ precision = -1;
+ if ((*fmt == 'g' || *fmt == 'G') && precision == INT_MAX)
+ precision = -1;
+ return (precision == INT_MAX) ? default_precision : precision;
+}
+
+// Create text input in place of an active drag/slider (used when doing a CTRL+Click on drag/slider widgets)
+// FIXME: Facilitate using this in variety of other situations.
+bool ImGui::InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+ // On the first frame, g.ScalarAsInputTextId == 0, then on subsequent frames it becomes == id.
+ // We clear ActiveID on the first frame to allow the InputText() taking it back.
+ if (g.ScalarAsInputTextId == 0)
+ ClearActiveID();
+
+ char fmt_buf[32];
+ char data_buf[32];
+ format = ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(format, fmt_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_buf));
+ DataTypeFormatString(data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), data_type, data_ptr, format);
+ ImStrTrimBlanks(data_buf);
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ((data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific : ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal);
+ bool value_changed = InputTextEx(label, data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), bb.GetSize(), flags);
+ if (g.ScalarAsInputTextId == 0)
+ {
+ // First frame we started displaying the InputText widget, we expect it to take the active id.
+ IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id);
+ g.ScalarAsInputTextId = g.ActiveId;
+ }
+ if (value_changed)
+ return DataTypeApplyOpFromText(data_buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.Data, data_type, data_ptr, NULL);
+ return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const void* step, const void* step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+ if (format == NULL)
+ format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
+
+ char buf[64];
+ DataTypeFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), data_type, data_ptr, format);
+
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) == 0)
+ flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal;
+ flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll;
+
+ if (step != NULL)
+ {
+ const float button_size = GetFrameHeight();
+
+ BeginGroup(); // The only purpose of the group here is to allow the caller to query item data e.g. IsItemActive()
+ PushID(label);
+ PushItemWidth(ImMax(1.0f, CalcItemWidth() - (button_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * 2));
+ if (InputText("", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags)) // PushId(label) + "" gives us the expected ID from outside point of view
+ value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.Data, data_type, data_ptr, format);
+ PopItemWidth();
+
+ // Step buttons
+ ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups;
+ if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly)
+ button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled;
+ SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ if (ButtonEx("-", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags))
+ {
+ DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '-', data_ptr, data_ptr, g.IO.KeyCtrl && step_fast ? step_fast : step);
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ if (ButtonEx("+", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags))
+ {
+ DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '+', data_ptr, data_ptr, g.IO.KeyCtrl && step_fast ? step_fast : step);
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
+
+ PopID();
+ EndGroup();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (InputText(label, buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags))
+ value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.Data, data_type, data_ptr, format);
+ }
+
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* step, const void* step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ BeginGroup();
+ PushID(label);
+ PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
+ size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
+ for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
+ {
+ PushID(i);
+ value_changed |= InputScalar("", data_type, v, step, step_fast, format, flags);
+ SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ PopID();
+ PopItemWidth();
+ v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
+ }
+ PopID();
+
+ TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
+ EndGroup();
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
+ return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0f ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0f ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+
+// Prefer using "const char* format" directly, which is more flexible and consistent with other API.
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ char format[16] = "%f";
+ if (decimal_precision >= 0)
+ ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
+ return InputFloat(label, v, step, step_fast, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ char format[16] = "%f";
+ if (decimal_precision >= 0)
+ ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ char format[16] = "%f";
+ if (decimal_precision >= 0)
+ ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ char format[16] = "%f";
+ if (decimal_precision >= 0)
+ ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+
+bool ImGui::InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step, int step_fast, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ // Hexadecimal input provided as a convenience but the flag name is awkward. Typically you'd use InputText() to parse your own data, if you want to handle prefixes.
+ const char* format = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) ? "%08X" : "%d";
+ return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step, double step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+ flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
+ return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Double, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - InputText()
+// - InputTextMultiline()
+// - InputTextEx() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
+{
+ IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
+ return InputTextEx(label, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0,0), flags, callback, user_data);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
+{
+ return InputTextEx(label, buf, (int)buf_size, size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline, callback, user_data);
+}
+
+static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end)
+{
+ int line_count = 0;
+ const char* s = text_begin;
+ while (char c = *s++) // We are only matching for \n so we can ignore UTF-8 decoding
+ if (c == '\n')
+ line_count++;
+ s--;
+ if (s[0] != '\n' && s[0] != '\r')
+ line_count++;
+ *out_text_end = s;
+ return line_count;
+}
+
+static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining, ImVec2* out_offset, bool stop_on_new_line)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImFont* font = g.Font;
+ const float line_height = g.FontSize;
+ const float scale = line_height / font->FontSize;
+
+ ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0,0);
+ float line_width = 0.0f;
+
+ const ImWchar* s = text_begin;
+ while (s < text_end)
+ {
+ unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*s++);
+ if (c == '\n')
+ {
+ text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width);
+ text_size.y += line_height;
+ line_width = 0.0f;
+ if (stop_on_new_line)
+ break;
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (c == '\r')
+ continue;
+
+ const float char_width = font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)c) * scale;
+ line_width += char_width;
+ }
+
+ if (text_size.x < line_width)
+ text_size.x = line_width;
+
+ if (out_offset)
+ *out_offset = ImVec2(line_width, text_size.y + line_height); // offset allow for the possibility of sitting after a trailing \n
+
+ if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f) // whereas size.y will ignore the trailing \n
+ text_size.y += line_height;
+
+ if (remaining)
+ *remaining = s;
+
+ return text_size;
+}
+
+// Wrapper for stb_textedit.h to edit text (our wrapper is for: statically sized buffer, single-line, wchar characters. InputText converts between UTF-8 and wchar)
+namespace ImGuiStb
+{
+
+static int STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj) { return obj->CurLenW; }
+static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { return obj->TextW[idx]; }
+static float STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int line_start_idx, int char_idx) { ImWchar c = obj->TextW[line_start_idx+char_idx]; if (c == '\n') return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE; return GImGui->Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (GImGui->FontSize / GImGui->Font->FontSize); }
+static int STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(int key) { return key >= 0x10000 ? 0 : key; }
+static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n';
+static void STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(StbTexteditRow* r, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int line_start_idx)
+{
+ const ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
+ const ImWchar* text_remaining = NULL;
+ const ImVec2 size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(text + line_start_idx, text + obj->CurLenW, &text_remaining, NULL, true);
+ r->x0 = 0.0f;
+ r->x1 = size.x;
+ r->baseline_y_delta = size.y;
+ r->ymin = 0.0f;
+ r->ymax = size.y;
+ r->num_chars = (int)(text_remaining - (text + line_start_idx));
+}
+
+static bool is_separator(unsigned int c) { return ImCharIsBlankW(c) || c==',' || c==';' || c=='(' || c==')' || c=='{' || c=='}' || c=='[' || c==']' || c=='|'; }
+static int is_word_boundary_from_right(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { return idx > 0 ? (is_separator( obj->TextW[idx-1] ) && !is_separator( obj->TextW[idx] ) ) : 1; }
+static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { idx--; while (idx >= 0 && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx--; return idx < 0 ? 0 : idx; }
+#ifdef __APPLE__ // FIXME: Move setting to IO structure
+static int is_word_boundary_from_left(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { return idx > 0 ? (!is_separator( obj->TextW[idx-1] ) && is_separator( obj->TextW[idx] ) ) : 1; }
+static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_left(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
+#else
+static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx) { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
+#endif
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL // They need to be #define for stb_textedit.h
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL
+
+static void STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int pos, int n)
+{
+ ImWchar* dst = obj->TextW.Data + pos;
+
+ // We maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar formats
+ obj->CurLenA -= ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(dst, dst + n);
+ obj->CurLenW -= n;
+
+ // Offset remaining text (FIXME-OPT: Use memmove)
+ const ImWchar* src = obj->TextW.Data + pos + n;
+ while (ImWchar c = *src++)
+ *dst++ = c;
+ *dst = '\0';
+}
+
+static bool STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int pos, const ImWchar* new_text, int new_text_len)
+{
+ const bool is_resizable = (obj->UserFlags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
+ const int text_len = obj->CurLenW;
+ IM_ASSERT(pos <= text_len);
+
+ const int new_text_len_utf8 = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(new_text, new_text + new_text_len);
+ if (!is_resizable && (new_text_len_utf8 + obj->CurLenA + 1 > obj->BufCapacityA))
+ return false;
+
+ // Grow internal buffer if needed
+ if (new_text_len + text_len + 1 > obj->TextW.Size)
+ {
+ if (!is_resizable)
+ return false;
+ IM_ASSERT(text_len < obj->TextW.Size);
+ obj->TextW.resize(text_len + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1);
+ }
+
+ ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
+ if (pos != text_len)
+ memmove(text + pos + new_text_len, text + pos, (size_t)(text_len - pos) * sizeof(ImWchar));
+ memcpy(text + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(ImWchar));
+
+ obj->CurLenW += new_text_len;
+ obj->CurLenA += new_text_len_utf8;
+ obj->TextW[obj->CurLenW] = '\0';
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+// We don't use an enum so we can build even with conflicting symbols (if another user of stb_textedit.h leak their STB_TEXTEDIT_K_* symbols)
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT 0x10000 // keyboard input to move cursor left
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT 0x10001 // keyboard input to move cursor right
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP 0x10002 // keyboard input to move cursor up
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN 0x10003 // keyboard input to move cursor down
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART 0x10004 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND 0x10005 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART 0x10006 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND 0x10007 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE 0x10008 // keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE 0x10009 // keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO 0x1000A // keyboard input to perform undo
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO 0x1000B // keyboard input to perform redo
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT 0x1000C // keyboard input to move cursor left one word
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT 0x1000D // keyboard input to move cursor right one word
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT 0x20000
+
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
+#include "imstb_textedit.h"
+
+}
+
+void ImGuiInputTextState::OnKeyPressed(int key)
+{
+ stb_textedit_key(this, &StbState, key);
+ CursorFollow = true;
+ CursorAnimReset();
+}
+
+ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ImGuiInputTextCallbackData()
+{
+ memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+}
+
+// Public API to manipulate UTF-8 text
+// We expose UTF-8 to the user (unlike the STB_TEXTEDIT_* functions which are manipulating wchar)
+// FIXME: The existence of this rarely exercised code path is a bit of a nuisance.
+void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count)
+{
+ IM_ASSERT(pos + bytes_count <= BufTextLen);
+ char* dst = Buf + pos;
+ const char* src = Buf + pos + bytes_count;
+ while (char c = *src++)
+ *dst++ = c;
+ *dst = '\0';
+
+ if (CursorPos + bytes_count >= pos)
+ CursorPos -= bytes_count;
+ else if (CursorPos >= pos)
+ CursorPos = pos;
+ SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
+ BufDirty = true;
+ BufTextLen -= bytes_count;
+}
+
+void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::InsertChars(int pos, const char* new_text, const char* new_text_end)
+{
+ const bool is_resizable = (Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
+ const int new_text_len = new_text_end ? (int)(new_text_end - new_text) : (int)strlen(new_text);
+ if (new_text_len + BufTextLen >= BufSize)
+ {
+ if (!is_resizable)
+ return;
+
+ // Contrary to STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS() this is working in the UTF8 buffer, hence the midly similar code (until we remove the U16 buffer alltogether!)
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiInputTextState* edit_state = &g.InputTextState;
+ IM_ASSERT(edit_state->ID != 0 && g.ActiveId == edit_state->ID);
+ IM_ASSERT(Buf == edit_state->TempBuffer.Data);
+ int new_buf_size = BufTextLen + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1;
+ edit_state->TempBuffer.reserve(new_buf_size + 1);
+ Buf = edit_state->TempBuffer.Data;
+ BufSize = edit_state->BufCapacityA = new_buf_size;
+ }
+
+ if (BufTextLen != pos)
+ memmove(Buf + pos + new_text_len, Buf + pos, (size_t)(BufTextLen - pos));
+ memcpy(Buf + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(char));
+ Buf[BufTextLen + new_text_len] = '\0';
+
+ if (CursorPos >= pos)
+ CursorPos += new_text_len;
+ SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
+ BufDirty = true;
+ BufTextLen += new_text_len;
+}
+
+// Return false to discard a character.
+static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
+{
+ unsigned int c = *p_char;
+
+ if (c < 128 && c != ' ' && !isprint((int)(c & 0xFF)))
+ {
+ bool pass = false;
+ pass |= (c == '\n' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline));
+ pass |= (c == '\t' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput));
+ if (!pass)
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ if (c >= 0xE000 && c <= 0xF8FF) // Filter private Unicode range. I don't imagine anybody would want to input them. GLFW on OSX seems to send private characters for special keys like arrow keys.
+ return false;
+
+ if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific))
+ {
+ if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal)
+ if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/'))
+ return false;
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)
+ if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/') && (c != 'e') && (c != 'E'))
+ return false;
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal)
+ if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && !(c >= 'a' && c <= 'f') && !(c >= 'A' && c <= 'F'))
+ return false;
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)
+ if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
+ *p_char = (c += (unsigned int)('A'-'a'));
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank)
+ if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter)
+ {
+ ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
+ memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
+ callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter;
+ callback_data.EventChar = (ImWchar)c;
+ callback_data.Flags = flags;
+ callback_data.UserData = user_data;
+ if (callback(&callback_data) != 0)
+ return false;
+ *p_char = callback_data.EventChar;
+ if (!callback_data.EventChar)
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+// Edit a string of text
+// - buf_size account for the zero-terminator, so a buf_size of 6 can hold "Hello" but not "Hello!".
+// This is so we can easily call InputText() on static arrays using ARRAYSIZE() and to match
+// Note that in std::string world, capacity() would omit 1 byte used by the zero-terminator.
+// - When active, hold on a privately held copy of the text (and apply back to 'buf'). So changing 'buf' while the InputText is active has no effect.
+// - If you want to use ImGui::InputText() with std::string, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h
+// (FIXME: Rather messy function partly because we are doing UTF8 > u16 > UTF8 conversions on the go to more easily handle stb_textedit calls. Ideally we should stay in UTF-8 all the time. See https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
+bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* callback_user_data)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline))); // Can't use both together (they both use up/down keys)
+ IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))); // Can't use both together (they both use tab key)
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+ const bool is_multiline = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline) != 0;
+ const bool is_editable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) == 0;
+ const bool is_password = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) != 0;
+ const bool is_undoable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo) == 0;
+ const bool is_resizable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
+ if (is_resizable)
+ IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL); // Must provide a callback if you set the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag!
+
+ if (is_multiline) // Open group before calling GetID() because groups tracks id created within their scope,
+ BeginGroup();
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), (is_multiline ? GetTextLineHeight() * 8.0f : label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f); // Arbitrary default of 8 lines high for multi-line
+ const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+ const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x) : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+ ImGuiWindow* draw_window = window;
+ if (is_multiline)
+ {
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
+ {
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ EndGroup();
+ return false;
+ }
+ if (!BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize()))
+ {
+ EndChildFrame();
+ EndGroup();
+ return false;
+ }
+ draw_window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ draw_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext |= draw_window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask; // This is to ensure that EndChild() will display a navigation highlight
+ size.x -= draw_window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
+ return false;
+ }
+ const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+ if (hovered)
+ g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput;
+
+ // Password pushes a temporary font with only a fallback glyph
+ if (is_password)
+ {
+ const ImFontGlyph* glyph = g.Font->FindGlyph('*');
+ ImFont* password_font = &g.InputTextPasswordFont;
+ password_font->FontSize = g.Font->FontSize;
+ password_font->Scale = g.Font->Scale;
+ password_font->DisplayOffset = g.Font->DisplayOffset;
+ password_font->Ascent = g.Font->Ascent;
+ password_font->Descent = g.Font->Descent;
+ password_font->ContainerAtlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
+ password_font->FallbackGlyph = glyph;
+ password_font->FallbackAdvanceX = glyph->AdvanceX;
+ IM_ASSERT(password_font->Glyphs.empty() && password_font->IndexAdvanceX.empty() && password_font->IndexLookup.empty());
+ PushFont(password_font);
+ }
+
+ // NB: we are only allowed to access 'edit_state' if we are the active widget.
+ ImGuiInputTextState& edit_state = g.InputTextState;
+
+ const bool focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id, (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion|ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput)) == 0); // Using completion callback disable keyboard tabbing
+ const bool focus_requested_by_code = focus_requested && (window->FocusIdxAllCounter == window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent);
+ const bool focus_requested_by_tab = focus_requested && !focus_requested_by_code;
+
+ const bool user_clicked = hovered && io.MouseClicked[0];
+ const bool user_scrolled = is_multiline && g.ActiveId == 0 && edit_state.ID == id && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == draw_window->GetIDNoKeepAlive("#SCROLLY");
+ const bool user_nav_input_start = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((g.NavInputId == id) || (g.NavActivateId == id && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard));
+
+ bool clear_active_id = false;
+
+ bool select_all = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll) != 0 || user_nav_input_start) && (!is_multiline);
+ if (focus_requested || user_clicked || user_scrolled || user_nav_input_start)
+ {
+ if (g.ActiveId != id)
+ {
+ // Start edition
+ // Take a copy of the initial buffer value (both in original UTF-8 format and converted to wchar)
+ // From the moment we focused we are ignoring the content of 'buf' (unless we are in read-only mode)
+ const int prev_len_w = edit_state.CurLenW;
+ const int init_buf_len = (int)strlen(buf);
+ edit_state.TextW.resize(buf_size+1); // wchar count <= UTF-8 count. we use +1 to make sure that .Data isn't NULL so it doesn't crash.
+ edit_state.InitialText.resize(init_buf_len + 1); // UTF-8. we use +1 to make sure that .Data isn't NULL so it doesn't crash.
+ memcpy(edit_state.InitialText.Data, buf, init_buf_len + 1);
+ const char* buf_end = NULL;
+ edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.TextW.Data, buf_size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
+ edit_state.CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf); // We can't get the result from ImStrncpy() above because it is not UTF-8 aware. Here we'll cut off malformed UTF-8.
+ edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
+
+ // Preserve cursor position and undo/redo stack if we come back to same widget
+ // FIXME: We should probably compare the whole buffer to be on the safety side. Comparing buf (utf8) and edit_state.Text (wchar).
+ const bool recycle_state = (edit_state.ID == id) && (prev_len_w == edit_state.CurLenW);
+ if (recycle_state)
+ {
+ // Recycle existing cursor/selection/undo stack but clamp position
+ // Note a single mouse click will override the cursor/position immediately by calling stb_textedit_click handler.
+ edit_state.CursorClamp();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ edit_state.ID = id;
+ edit_state.ScrollX = 0.0f;
+ stb_textedit_initialize_state(&edit_state.StbState, !is_multiline);
+ if (!is_multiline && focus_requested_by_code)
+ select_all = true;
+ }
+ if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode)
+ edit_state.StbState.insert_mode = 1;
+ if (!is_multiline && (focus_requested_by_tab || (user_clicked && io.KeyCtrl)))
+ select_all = true;
+ }
+ SetActiveID(id, window);
+ SetFocusID(id, window);
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ g.ActiveIdBlockNavInputFlags = (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel);
+ if (!is_multiline && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory))
+ g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = ((1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down));
+ }
+ else if (io.MouseClicked[0])
+ {
+ // Release focus when we click outside
+ clear_active_id = true;
+ }
+
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ bool enter_pressed = false;
+ int backup_current_text_length = 0;
+
+ if (g.ActiveId == id)
+ {
+ if (!is_editable && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+ {
+ // When read-only we always use the live data passed to the function
+ edit_state.TextW.resize(buf_size+1);
+ const char* buf_end = NULL;
+ edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.TextW.Data, edit_state.TextW.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
+ edit_state.CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);
+ edit_state.CursorClamp();
+ }
+
+ backup_current_text_length = edit_state.CurLenA;
+ edit_state.BufCapacityA = buf_size;
+ edit_state.UserFlags = flags;
+ edit_state.UserCallback = callback;
+ edit_state.UserCallbackData = callback_user_data;
+
+ // Although we are active we don't prevent mouse from hovering other elements unless we are interacting right now with the widget.
+ // Down the line we should have a cleaner library-wide concept of Selected vs Active.
+ g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = !io.MouseDown[0];
+ g.WantTextInputNextFrame = 1;
+
+ // Edit in progress
+ const float mouse_x = (io.MousePos.x - frame_bb.Min.x - style.FramePadding.x) + edit_state.ScrollX;
+ const float mouse_y = (is_multiline ? (io.MousePos.y - draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y - style.FramePadding.y) : (g.FontSize*0.5f));
+
+ const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
+ if (select_all || (hovered && !is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
+ {
+ edit_state.SelectAll();
+ edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock = true;
+ }
+ else if (hovered && is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
+ {
+ // Double-click select a word only, OS X style (by simulating keystrokes)
+ edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT);
+ edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+ }
+ else if (io.MouseClicked[0] && !edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock)
+ {
+ if (hovered)
+ {
+ stb_textedit_click(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, mouse_x, mouse_y);
+ edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
+ }
+ }
+ else if (io.MouseDown[0] && !edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock && (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f))
+ {
+ stb_textedit_drag(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, mouse_x, mouse_y);
+ edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
+ edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
+ }
+ if (edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock && !io.MouseDown[0])
+ edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock = false;
+
+ if (io.InputQueueCharacters.Size > 0)
+ {
+ // Process text input (before we check for Return because using some IME will effectively send a Return?)
+ // We ignore CTRL inputs, but need to allow ALT+CTRL as some keyboards (e.g. German) use AltGR (which _is_ Alt+Ctrl) to input certain characters.
+ bool ignore_inputs = (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt) || (is_osx && io.KeySuper);
+ if (!ignore_inputs && is_editable && !user_nav_input_start)
+ for (int n = 0; n < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; n++)
+ {
+ // Insert character if they pass filtering
+ unsigned int c = (unsigned int)io.InputQueueCharacters[n];
+ if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
+ edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
+ }
+
+ // Consume characters
+ io.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
+ }
+ }
+
+ bool cancel_edit = false;
+ if (g.ActiveId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated && !clear_active_id)
+ {
+ // Handle key-presses
+ const int k_mask = (io.KeyShift ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT : 0);
+ const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
+ const bool is_shortcut_key = (is_osx ? (io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl) : (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeySuper)) && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyShift; // OS X style: Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl
+ const bool is_osx_shift_shortcut = is_osx && io.KeySuper && io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;
+ const bool is_wordmove_key_down = is_osx ? io.KeyAlt : io.KeyCtrl; // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl
+ const bool is_startend_key_down = is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt; // OS X style: Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End
+ const bool is_ctrl_key_only = io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyShift && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;
+ const bool is_shift_key_only = io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;
+
+ const bool is_cut = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_X)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete))) && is_editable && !is_password && (!is_multiline || edit_state.HasSelection());
+ const bool is_copy = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C)) || (is_ctrl_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_password && (!is_multiline || edit_state.HasSelection());
+ const bool is_paste = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_V)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && is_editable;
+ const bool is_undo = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z)) && is_editable && is_undoable);
+ const bool is_redo = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Y)) || (is_osx_shift_shortcut && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z))) && is_editable && is_undoable;
+
+ if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow)) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT) | k_mask); }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_RightArrow)) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT) | k_mask); }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow) && is_multiline) { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetWindowScrollY(draw_window, ImMax(draw_window->Scroll.y - g.FontSize, 0.0f)); else edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP) | k_mask); }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow) && is_multiline) { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetWindowScrollY(draw_window, ImMin(draw_window->Scroll.y + g.FontSize, GetScrollMaxY())); else edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN) | k_mask); }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Home)) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | k_mask); }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_End)) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | k_mask); }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete) && is_editable) { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | k_mask); }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && is_editable)
+ {
+ if (!edit_state.HasSelection())
+ {
+ if (is_wordmove_key_down) edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+ else if (is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyCtrl) edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+ }
+ edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | k_mask);
+ }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Enter))
+ {
+ bool ctrl_enter_for_new_line = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine) != 0;
+ if (!is_multiline || (ctrl_enter_for_new_line && !io.KeyCtrl) || (!ctrl_enter_for_new_line && io.KeyCtrl))
+ {
+ enter_pressed = clear_active_id = true;
+ }
+ else if (is_editable)
+ {
+ unsigned int c = '\n'; // Insert new line
+ if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
+ edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
+ }
+ }
+ else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput) && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab) && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyShift && !io.KeyAlt && is_editable)
+ {
+ unsigned int c = '\t'; // Insert TAB
+ if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
+ edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
+ }
+ else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Escape))
+ {
+ clear_active_id = cancel_edit = true;
+ }
+ else if (is_undo || is_redo)
+ {
+ edit_state.OnKeyPressed(is_undo ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO);
+ edit_state.ClearSelection();
+ }
+ else if (is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_A))
+ {
+ edit_state.SelectAll();
+ edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
+ }
+ else if (is_cut || is_copy)
+ {
+ // Cut, Copy
+ if (io.SetClipboardTextFn)
+ {
+ const int ib = edit_state.HasSelection() ? ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end) : 0;
+ const int ie = edit_state.HasSelection() ? ImMax(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end) : edit_state.CurLenW;
+ edit_state.TempBuffer.resize((ie-ib) * 4 + 1);
+ ImTextStrToUtf8(edit_state.TempBuffer.Data, edit_state.TempBuffer.Size, edit_state.TextW.Data+ib, edit_state.TextW.Data+ie);
+ SetClipboardText(edit_state.TempBuffer.Data);
+ }
+ if (is_cut)
+ {
+ if (!edit_state.HasSelection())
+ edit_state.SelectAll();
+ edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
+ stb_textedit_cut(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState);
+ }
+ }
+ else if (is_paste)
+ {
+ if (const char* clipboard = GetClipboardText())
+ {
+ // Filter pasted buffer
+ const int clipboard_len = (int)strlen(clipboard);
+ ImWchar* clipboard_filtered = (ImWchar*)MemAlloc((clipboard_len+1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
+ int clipboard_filtered_len = 0;
+ for (const char* s = clipboard; *s; )
+ {
+ unsigned int c;
+ s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, NULL);
+ if (c == 0)
+ break;
+ if (c >= 0x10000 || !InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
+ continue;
+ clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len++] = (ImWchar)c;
+ }
+ clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len] = 0;
+ if (clipboard_filtered_len > 0) // If everything was filtered, ignore the pasting operation
+ {
+ stb_textedit_paste(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, clipboard_filtered, clipboard_filtered_len);
+ edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
+ }
+ MemFree(clipboard_filtered);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (g.ActiveId == id)
+ {
+ const char* apply_new_text = NULL;
+ int apply_new_text_length = 0;
+ if (cancel_edit)
+ {
+ // Restore initial value. Only return true if restoring to the initial value changes the current buffer contents.
+ if (is_editable && strcmp(buf, edit_state.InitialText.Data) != 0)
+ {
+ apply_new_text = edit_state.InitialText.Data;
+ apply_new_text_length = edit_state.InitialText.Size - 1;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // When using 'ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue' as a special case we reapply the live buffer back to the input buffer before clearing ActiveId, even though strictly speaking it wasn't modified on this frame.
+ // If we didn't do that, code like InputInt() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue would fail. Also this allows the user to use InputText() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue without maintaining any user-side storage.
+ bool apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer = !cancel_edit || (enter_pressed && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0);
+ if (apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer)
+ {
+ // Apply new value immediately - copy modified buffer back
+ // Note that as soon as the input box is active, the in-widget value gets priority over any underlying modification of the input buffer
+ // FIXME: We actually always render 'buf' when calling DrawList->AddText, making the comment above incorrect.
+ // FIXME-OPT: CPU waste to do this every time the widget is active, should mark dirty state from the stb_textedit callbacks.
+ if (is_editable)
+ {
+ edit_state.TempBuffer.resize(edit_state.TextW.Size * 4 + 1);
+ ImTextStrToUtf8(edit_state.TempBuffer.Data, edit_state.TempBuffer.Size, edit_state.TextW.Data, NULL);
+ }
+
+ // User callback
+ if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)) != 0)
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL);
+
+ // The reason we specify the usage semantic (Completion/History) is that Completion needs to disable keyboard TABBING at the moment.
+ ImGuiInputTextFlags event_flag = 0;
+ ImGuiKey event_key = ImGuiKey_COUNT;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab))
+ {
+ event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion;
+ event_key = ImGuiKey_Tab;
+ }
+ else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow))
+ {
+ event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
+ event_key = ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
+ }
+ else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow))
+ {
+ event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
+ event_key = ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
+ }
+ else if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)
+ event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways;
+
+ if (event_flag)
+ {
+ ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
+ memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
+ callback_data.EventFlag = event_flag;
+ callback_data.Flags = flags;
+ callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;
+
+ callback_data.EventKey = event_key;
+ callback_data.Buf = edit_state.TempBuffer.Data;
+ callback_data.BufTextLen = edit_state.CurLenA;
+ callback_data.BufSize = edit_state.BufCapacityA;
+ callback_data.BufDirty = false;
+
+ // We have to convert from wchar-positions to UTF-8-positions, which can be pretty slow (an incentive to ditch the ImWchar buffer, see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
+ ImWchar* text = edit_state.TextW.Data;
+ const int utf8_cursor_pos = callback_data.CursorPos = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.cursor);
+ const int utf8_selection_start = callback_data.SelectionStart = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.select_start);
+ const int utf8_selection_end = callback_data.SelectionEnd = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.select_end);
+
+ // Call user code
+ callback(&callback_data);
+
+ // Read back what user may have modified
+ IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Buf == edit_state.TempBuffer.Data); // Invalid to modify those fields
+ IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufSize == edit_state.BufCapacityA);
+ IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Flags == flags);
+ if (callback_data.CursorPos != utf8_cursor_pos) { edit_state.StbState.cursor = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.CursorPos); edit_state.CursorFollow = true; }
+ if (callback_data.SelectionStart != utf8_selection_start) { edit_state.StbState.select_start = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionStart); }
+ if (callback_data.SelectionEnd != utf8_selection_end) { edit_state.StbState.select_end = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionEnd); }
+ if (callback_data.BufDirty)
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufTextLen == (int)strlen(callback_data.Buf)); // You need to maintain BufTextLen if you change the text!
+ if (callback_data.BufTextLen > backup_current_text_length && is_resizable)
+ edit_state.TextW.resize(edit_state.TextW.Size + (callback_data.BufTextLen - backup_current_text_length));
+ edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.TextW.Data, edit_state.TextW.Size, callback_data.Buf, NULL);
+ edit_state.CurLenA = callback_data.BufTextLen; // Assume correct length and valid UTF-8 from user, saves us an extra strlen()
+ edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Will copy result string if modified
+ if (is_editable && strcmp(edit_state.TempBuffer.Data, buf) != 0)
+ {
+ apply_new_text = edit_state.TempBuffer.Data;
+ apply_new_text_length = edit_state.CurLenA;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Copy result to user buffer
+ if (apply_new_text)
+ {
+ IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length >= 0);
+ if (backup_current_text_length != apply_new_text_length && is_resizable)
+ {
+ ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
+ callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize;
+ callback_data.Flags = flags;
+ callback_data.Buf = buf;
+ callback_data.BufTextLen = apply_new_text_length;
+ callback_data.BufSize = ImMax(buf_size, apply_new_text_length + 1);
+ callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;
+ callback(&callback_data);
+ buf = callback_data.Buf;
+ buf_size = callback_data.BufSize;
+ apply_new_text_length = ImMin(callback_data.BufTextLen, buf_size - 1);
+ IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length <= buf_size);
+ }
+
+ // If the underlying buffer resize was denied or not carried to the next frame, apply_new_text_length+1 may be >= buf_size.
+ ImStrncpy(buf, apply_new_text, ImMin(apply_new_text_length + 1, buf_size));
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+
+ // Clear temporary user storage
+ edit_state.UserFlags = 0;
+ edit_state.UserCallback = NULL;
+ edit_state.UserCallbackData = NULL;
+ }
+
+ // Release active ID at the end of the function (so e.g. pressing Return still does a final application of the value)
+ if (clear_active_id && g.ActiveId == id)
+ ClearActiveID();
+
+ // Render
+ // Select which buffer we are going to display. When ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoLiveEdit is set 'buf' might still be the old value. We set buf to NULL to prevent accidental usage from now on.
+ const char* buf_display = (g.ActiveId == id && is_editable) ? edit_state.TempBuffer.Data : buf; buf = NULL;
+
+ // Set upper limit of single-line InputTextEx() at 2 million characters strings. The current pathological worst case is a long line
+ // without any carriage return, which would makes ImFont::RenderText() reserve too many vertices and probably crash. Avoid it altogether.
+ // Note that we only use this limit on single-line InputText(), so a pathologically large line on a InputTextMultiline() would still crash.
+ const int buf_display_max_length = 2 * 1024 * 1024;
+
+ if (!is_multiline)
+ {
+ RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+ RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+ }
+
+ const ImVec4 clip_rect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + size.x, frame_bb.Min.y + size.y); // Not using frame_bb.Max because we have adjusted size
+ ImVec2 render_pos = is_multiline ? draw_window->DC.CursorPos : frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding;
+ ImVec2 text_size(0.f, 0.f);
+ const bool is_currently_scrolling = (edit_state.ID == id && is_multiline && g.ActiveId == draw_window->GetIDNoKeepAlive("#SCROLLY"));
+ if (g.ActiveId == id || is_currently_scrolling)
+ {
+ edit_state.CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime;
+
+ // This is going to be messy. We need to:
+ // - Display the text (this alone can be more easily clipped)
+ // - Handle scrolling, highlight selection, display cursor (those all requires some form of 1d->2d cursor position calculation)
+ // - Measure text height (for scrollbar)
+ // We are attempting to do most of that in **one main pass** to minimize the computation cost (non-negligible for large amount of text) + 2nd pass for selection rendering (we could merge them by an extra refactoring effort)
+ // FIXME: This should occur on buf_display but we'd need to maintain cursor/select_start/select_end for UTF-8.
+ const ImWchar* text_begin = edit_state.TextW.Data;
+ ImVec2 cursor_offset, select_start_offset;
+
+ {
+ // Count lines + find lines numbers straddling 'cursor' and 'select_start' position.
+ const ImWchar* searches_input_ptr[2];
+ searches_input_ptr[0] = text_begin + edit_state.StbState.cursor;
+ searches_input_ptr[1] = NULL;
+ int searches_remaining = 1;
+ int searches_result_line_number[2] = { -1, -999 };
+ if (edit_state.StbState.select_start != edit_state.StbState.select_end)
+ {
+ searches_input_ptr[1] = text_begin + ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);
+ searches_result_line_number[1] = -1;
+ searches_remaining++;
+ }
+
+ // Iterate all lines to find our line numbers
+ // In multi-line mode, we never exit the loop until all lines are counted, so add one extra to the searches_remaining counter.
+ searches_remaining += is_multiline ? 1 : 0;
+ int line_count = 0;
+ //for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; (s = (const ImWchar*)wcschr((const wchar_t*)s, (wchar_t)'\n')) != NULL; s++) // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bits
+ for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; *s != 0; s++)
+ if (*s == '\n')
+ {
+ line_count++;
+ if (searches_result_line_number[0] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[0]) { searches_result_line_number[0] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
+ if (searches_result_line_number[1] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[1]) { searches_result_line_number[1] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
+ }
+ line_count++;
+ if (searches_result_line_number[0] == -1) searches_result_line_number[0] = line_count;
+ if (searches_result_line_number[1] == -1) searches_result_line_number[1] = line_count;
+
+ // Calculate 2d position by finding the beginning of the line and measuring distance
+ cursor_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[0], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[0]).x;
+ cursor_offset.y = searches_result_line_number[0] * g.FontSize;
+ if (searches_result_line_number[1] >= 0)
+ {
+ select_start_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[1], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[1]).x;
+ select_start_offset.y = searches_result_line_number[1] * g.FontSize;
+ }
+
+ // Store text height (note that we haven't calculated text width at all, see GitHub issues #383, #1224)
+ if (is_multiline)
+ text_size = ImVec2(size.x, line_count * g.FontSize);
+ }
+
+ // Scroll
+ if (edit_state.CursorFollow)
+ {
+ // Horizontal scroll in chunks of quarter width
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll))
+ {
+ const float scroll_increment_x = size.x * 0.25f;
+ if (cursor_offset.x < edit_state.ScrollX)
+ edit_state.ScrollX = (float)(int)ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x);
+ else if (cursor_offset.x - size.x >= edit_state.ScrollX)
+ edit_state.ScrollX = (float)(int)(cursor_offset.x - size.x + scroll_increment_x);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ edit_state.ScrollX = 0.0f;
+ }
+
+ // Vertical scroll
+ if (is_multiline)
+ {
+ float scroll_y = draw_window->Scroll.y;
+ if (cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize < scroll_y)
+ scroll_y = ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize);
+ else if (cursor_offset.y - size.y >= scroll_y)
+ scroll_y = cursor_offset.y - size.y;
+ draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y += (draw_window->Scroll.y - scroll_y); // To avoid a frame of lag
+ draw_window->Scroll.y = scroll_y;
+ render_pos.y = draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+ }
+ }
+ edit_state.CursorFollow = false;
+ const ImVec2 render_scroll = ImVec2(edit_state.ScrollX, 0.0f);
+
+ // Draw selection
+ if (edit_state.StbState.select_start != edit_state.StbState.select_end)
+ {
+ const ImWchar* text_selected_begin = text_begin + ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);
+ const ImWchar* text_selected_end = text_begin + ImMax(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);
+
+ float bg_offy_up = is_multiline ? 0.0f : -1.0f; // FIXME: those offsets should be part of the style? they don't play so well with multi-line selection.
+ float bg_offy_dn = is_multiline ? 0.0f : 2.0f;
+ ImU32 bg_color = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg);
+ ImVec2 rect_pos = render_pos + select_start_offset - render_scroll;
+ for (const ImWchar* p = text_selected_begin; p < text_selected_end; )
+ {
+ if (rect_pos.y > clip_rect.w + g.FontSize)
+ break;
+ if (rect_pos.y < clip_rect.y)
+ {
+ //p = (const ImWchar*)wmemchr((const wchar_t*)p, '\n', text_selected_end - p); // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bits
+ //p = p ? p + 1 : text_selected_end;
+ while (p < text_selected_end)
+ if (*p++ == '\n')
+ break;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true);
+ if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = (float)(int)(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
+ ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos +ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn));
+ rect.ClipWith(clip_rect);
+ if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
+ draw_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(rect.Min, rect.Max, bg_color);
+ }
+ rect_pos.x = render_pos.x - render_scroll.x;
+ rect_pos.y += g.FontSize;
+ }
+ }
+
+ const int buf_display_len = edit_state.CurLenA;
+ if (is_multiline || buf_display_len < buf_display_max_length)
+ draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, render_pos - render_scroll, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), buf_display, buf_display + buf_display_len, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
+
+ // Draw blinking cursor
+ bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) || (g.InputTextState.CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(g.InputTextState.CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f;
+ ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = render_pos + cursor_offset - render_scroll;
+ ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y-g.FontSize+0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x+1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y-1.5f);
+ if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
+ draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+
+ // Notify OS of text input position for advanced IME (-1 x offset so that Windows IME can cover our cursor. Bit of an extra nicety.)
+ if (is_editable)
+ g.PlatformImePos = ImVec2(cursor_screen_pos.x - 1, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Render text only
+ const char* buf_end = NULL;
+ if (is_multiline)
+ text_size = ImVec2(size.x, InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(buf_display, &buf_end) * g.FontSize); // We don't need width
+ else
+ buf_end = buf_display + strlen(buf_display);
+ if (is_multiline || (buf_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length)
+ draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, render_pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), buf_display, buf_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
+ }
+
+ if (is_multiline)
+ {
+ Dummy(text_size + ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize)); // Always add room to scroll an extra line
+ EndChildFrame();
+ EndGroup();
+ }
+
+ if (is_password)
+ PopFont();
+
+ // Log as text
+ if (g.LogEnabled && !is_password)
+ LogRenderedText(&render_pos, buf_display, NULL);
+
+ if (label_size.x > 0)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+ if (value_changed)
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
+ if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0)
+ return enter_pressed;
+ else
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ColorEdit3()
+// - ColorEdit4()
+// - ColorPicker3()
+// - RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard() [Internal]
+// - ColorPicker4()
+// - ColorButton()
+// - SetColorEditOptions()
+// - ColorTooltip() [Internal]
+// - ColorEditOptionsPopup() [Internal]
+// - ColorPickerOptionsPopup() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+ return ColorEdit4(label, col, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+}
+
+// Edit colors components (each component in 0.0f..1.0f range).
+// See enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ for available options. e.g. Only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
+// With typical options: Left-click on colored square to open color picker. Right-click to open option menu. CTRL-Click over input fields to edit them and TAB to go to next item.
+bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
+ const float w_extra = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview) ? 0.0f : (square_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ const float w_items_all = CalcItemWidth() - w_extra;
+ const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+
+ BeginGroup();
+ PushID(label);
+
+ // If we're not showing any slider there's no point in doing any HSV conversions
+ const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_untouched = flags;
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs)
+ flags = (flags & (~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions;
+
+ // Context menu: display and modify options (before defaults are applied)
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+ ColorEditOptionsPopup(col, flags);
+
+ // Read stored options
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask))
+ flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask);
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask))
+ flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
+ flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
+ flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask));
+
+ const bool alpha = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) == 0;
+ const bool hdr = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR) != 0;
+ const int components = alpha ? 4 : 3;
+
+ // Convert to the formats we need
+ float f[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f };
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)
+ ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
+ int i[4] = { IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[0]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[1]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[2]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[3]) };
+
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ bool value_changed_as_float = false;
+
+ if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
+ {
+ // RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders
+ const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)((w_items_all - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)) / (float)components));
+ const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(w_items_all - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)));
+
+ const bool hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x);
+ const char* ids[4] = { "##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W" };
+ const char* fmt_table_int[3][4] =
+ {
+ { "%3d", "%3d", "%3d", "%3d" }, // Short display
+ { "R:%3d", "G:%3d", "B:%3d", "A:%3d" }, // Long display for RGBA
+ { "H:%3d", "S:%3d", "V:%3d", "A:%3d" } // Long display for HSVA
+ };
+ const char* fmt_table_float[3][4] =
+ {
+ { "%0.3f", "%0.3f", "%0.3f", "%0.3f" }, // Short display
+ { "R:%0.3f", "G:%0.3f", "B:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }, // Long display for RGBA
+ { "H:%0.3f", "S:%0.3f", "V:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" } // Long display for HSVA
+ };
+ const int fmt_idx = hide_prefix ? 0 : (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV) ? 2 : 1;
+
+ PushItemWidth(w_item_one);
+ for (int n = 0; n < components; n++)
+ {
+ if (n > 0)
+ SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ if (n + 1 == components)
+ PushItemWidth(w_item_last);
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float)
+ {
+ value_changed |= DragFloat(ids[n], &f[n], 1.0f/255.0f, 0.0f, hdr ? 0.0f : 1.0f, fmt_table_float[fmt_idx][n]);
+ value_changed_as_float |= value_changed;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ value_changed |= DragInt(ids[n], &i[n], 1.0f, 0, hdr ? 0 : 255, fmt_table_int[fmt_idx][n]);
+ }
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+ OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
+ }
+ PopItemWidth();
+ PopItemWidth();
+ }
+ else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
+ {
+ // RGB Hexadecimal Input
+ char buf[64];
+ if (alpha)
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255), ImClamp(i[3],0,255));
+ else
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255));
+ PushItemWidth(w_items_all);
+ if (InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase))
+ {
+ value_changed = true;
+ char* p = buf;
+ while (*p == '#' || ImCharIsBlankA(*p))
+ p++;
+ i[0] = i[1] = i[2] = i[3] = 0;
+ if (alpha)
+ sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2], (unsigned int*)&i[3]); // Treat at unsigned (%X is unsigned)
+ else
+ sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2]);
+ }
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+ OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
+ PopItemWidth();
+ }
+
+ ImGuiWindow* picker_active_window = NULL;
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview))
+ {
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs))
+ SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+
+ const ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f);
+ if (ColorButton("##ColorButton", col_v4, flags))
+ {
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker))
+ {
+ // Store current color and open a picker
+ g.ColorPickerRef = col_v4;
+ OpenPopup("picker");
+ SetNextWindowPos(window->DC.LastItemRect.GetBL() + ImVec2(-1,style.ItemSpacing.y));
+ }
+ }
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+ OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
+
+ if (BeginPopup("picker"))
+ {
+ picker_active_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (label != label_display_end)
+ {
+ TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
+ Spacing();
+ }
+ ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
+ ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = (flags_untouched & picker_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
+ PushItemWidth(square_sz * 12.0f); // Use 256 + bar sizes?
+ value_changed |= ColorPicker4("##picker", col, picker_flags, &g.ColorPickerRef.x);
+ PopItemWidth();
+ EndPopup();
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (label != label_display_end && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
+ {
+ SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
+ }
+
+ // Convert back
+ if (picker_active_window == NULL)
+ {
+ if (!value_changed_as_float)
+ for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
+ f[n] = i[n] / 255.0f;
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)
+ ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
+ if (value_changed)
+ {
+ col[0] = f[0];
+ col[1] = f[1];
+ col[2] = f[2];
+ if (alpha)
+ col[3] = f[3];
+ }
+ }
+
+ PopID();
+ EndGroup();
+
+ // Drag and Drop Target
+ // NB: The flag test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropTarget() does the same test.
+ if ((window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropTarget())
+ {
+ if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
+ {
+ memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3); // Preserve alpha if any //-V512
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
+ {
+ memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * components);
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ EndDragDropTarget();
+ }
+
+ // When picker is being actively used, use its active id so IsItemActive() will function on ColorEdit4().
+ if (picker_active_window && g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow == picker_active_window)
+ window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveId;
+
+ if (value_changed)
+ MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);
+
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+ float col4[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f };
+ if (!ColorPicker4(label, col4, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha))
+ return false;
+ col[0] = col4[0]; col[1] = col4[1]; col[2] = col4[2];
+ return true;
+}
+
+static inline ImU32 ImAlphaBlendColor(ImU32 col_a, ImU32 col_b)
+{
+ float t = ((col_b >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) / 255.f;
+ int r = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
+ int g = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
+ int b = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
+ return IM_COL32(r, g, b, 0xFF);
+}
+
+// Helper for ColorPicker4()
+// NB: This is rather brittle and will show artifact when rounding this enabled if rounded corners overlap multiple cells. Caller currently responsible for avoiding that.
+// I spent a non reasonable amount of time trying to getting this right for ColorButton with rounding+anti-aliasing+ImGuiColorEditFlags_HalfAlphaPreview flag + various grid sizes and offsets, and eventually gave up... probably more reasonable to disable rounding alltogether.
+void ImGui::RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding, int rounding_corners_flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) < 0xFF)
+ {
+ ImU32 col_bg1 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(204,204,204,255), col));
+ ImU32 col_bg2 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), col));
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col_bg1, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);
+
+ int yi = 0;
+ for (float y = p_min.y + grid_off.y; y < p_max.y; y += grid_step, yi++)
+ {
+ float y1 = ImClamp(y, p_min.y, p_max.y), y2 = ImMin(y + grid_step, p_max.y);
+ if (y2 <= y1)
+ continue;
+ for (float x = p_min.x + grid_off.x + (yi & 1) * grid_step; x < p_max.x; x += grid_step * 2.0f)
+ {
+ float x1 = ImClamp(x, p_min.x, p_max.x), x2 = ImMin(x + grid_step, p_max.x);
+ if (x2 <= x1)
+ continue;
+ int rounding_corners_flags_cell = 0;
+ if (y1 <= p_min.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight; }
+ if (y2 >= p_max.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight; }
+ rounding_corners_flags_cell &= rounding_corners_flags;
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x1,y1), ImVec2(x2,y2), col_bg2, rounding_corners_flags_cell ? rounding : 0.0f, rounding_corners_flags_cell);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);
+ }
+}
+
+// Helper for ColorPicker4()
+static void RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, float bar_w)
+{
+ ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x + 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32_BLACK);
+ ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y), half_sz, ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32_WHITE);
+ ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x - 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Left, IM_COL32_BLACK);
+ ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x, pos.y), half_sz, ImGuiDir_Left, IM_COL32_WHITE);
+}
+
+// Note: ColorPicker4() only accesses 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
+// FIXME: we adjust the big color square height based on item width, which may cause a flickering feedback loop (if automatic height makes a vertical scrollbar appears, affecting automatic width..)
+bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const float* ref_col)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList;
+
+ ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+
+ PushID(label);
+ BeginGroup();
+
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
+ flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview;
+
+ // Context menu: display and store options.
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+ ColorPickerOptionsPopup(col, flags);
+
+ // Read stored options
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
+ flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault) & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
+ IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))); // Check that only 1 is selected
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+ flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
+
+ // Setup
+ int components = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4;
+ bool alpha_bar = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+ ImVec2 picker_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
+ float bars_width = square_sz; // Arbitrary smallish width of Hue/Alpha picking bars
+ float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, CalcItemWidth() - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box
+ float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+ float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+ float bars_triangles_half_sz = (float)(int)(bars_width * 0.20f);
+
+ float backup_initial_col[4];
+ memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float));
+
+ float wheel_thickness = sv_picker_size * 0.08f;
+ float wheel_r_outer = sv_picker_size * 0.50f;
+ float wheel_r_inner = wheel_r_outer - wheel_thickness;
+ ImVec2 wheel_center(picker_pos.x + (sv_picker_size + bars_width)*0.5f, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size*0.5f);
+
+ // Note: the triangle is displayed rotated with triangle_pa pointing to Hue, but most coordinates stays unrotated for logic.
+ float triangle_r = wheel_r_inner - (int)(sv_picker_size * 0.027f);
+ ImVec2 triangle_pa = ImVec2(triangle_r, 0.0f); // Hue point.
+ ImVec2 triangle_pb = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * -0.866025f); // Black point.
+ ImVec2 triangle_pc = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * +0.866025f); // White point.
+
+ float H,S,V;
+ ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], H, S, V);
+
+ bool value_changed = false, value_changed_h = false, value_changed_sv = false;
+
+ PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, true);
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
+ {
+ // Hue wheel + SV triangle logic
+ InvisibleButton("hsv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + bars_width, sv_picker_size));
+ if (IsItemActive())
+ {
+ ImVec2 initial_off = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - wheel_center;
+ ImVec2 current_off = g.IO.MousePos - wheel_center;
+ float initial_dist2 = ImLengthSqr(initial_off);
+ if (initial_dist2 >= (wheel_r_inner-1)*(wheel_r_inner-1) && initial_dist2 <= (wheel_r_outer+1)*(wheel_r_outer+1))
+ {
+ // Interactive with Hue wheel
+ H = ImAtan2(current_off.y, current_off.x) / IM_PI*0.5f;
+ if (H < 0.0f)
+ H += 1.0f;
+ value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
+ }
+ float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
+ float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
+ if (ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, ImRotate(initial_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle)))
+ {
+ // Interacting with SV triangle
+ ImVec2 current_off_unrotated = ImRotate(current_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
+ if (!ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated))
+ current_off_unrotated = ImTriangleClosestPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated);
+ float uu, vv, ww;
+ ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated, uu, vv, ww);
+ V = ImClamp(1.0f - vv, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
+ S = ImClamp(uu / V, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
+ value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
+ }
+ }
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+ OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
+ }
+ else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
+ {
+ // SV rectangle logic
+ InvisibleButton("sv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size));
+ if (IsItemActive())
+ {
+ S = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.x - picker_pos.x) / (sv_picker_size-1));
+ V = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
+ value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
+ }
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+ OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
+
+ // Hue bar logic
+ SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
+ InvisibleButton("hue", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
+ if (IsItemActive())
+ {
+ H = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
+ value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Alpha bar logic
+ if (alpha_bar)
+ {
+ SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
+ InvisibleButton("alpha", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
+ if (IsItemActive())
+ {
+ col[3] = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ }
+ PopItemFlag(); // ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav
+
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
+ {
+ SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ BeginGroup();
+ }
+
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
+ {
+ const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+ if (label != label_display_end)
+ {
+ if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
+ SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+ TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
+ {
+ PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
+ ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
+ if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
+ Text("Current");
+ ColorButton("##current", col_v4, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip)), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2));
+ if (ref_col != NULL)
+ {
+ Text("Original");
+ ImVec4 ref_col_v4(ref_col[0], ref_col[1], ref_col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : ref_col[3]);
+ if (ColorButton("##original", ref_col_v4, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip)), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2)))
+ {
+ memcpy(col, ref_col, components * sizeof(float));
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ }
+ PopItemFlag();
+ EndGroup();
+ }
+
+ // Convert back color to RGB
+ if (value_changed_h || value_changed_sv)
+ ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H >= 1.0f ? H - 10 * 1e-6f : H, S > 0.0f ? S : 10*1e-6f, V > 0.0f ? V : 1e-6f, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+
+ // R,G,B and H,S,V slider color editor
+ bool value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = false;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
+ {
+ PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x);
+ ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
+ ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker;
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
+ if (ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB))
+ {
+ // FIXME: Hackily differenciating using the DragInt (ActiveId != 0 && !ActiveIdAllowOverlap) vs. using the InputText or DropTarget.
+ // For the later we don't want to run the hue-wrap canceling code. If you are well versed in HSV picker please provide your input! (See #2050)
+ value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap);
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
+ value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hsv", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV);
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
+ value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hex", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX);
+ PopItemWidth();
+ }
+
+ // Try to cancel hue wrap (after ColorEdit4 call), if any
+ if (value_changed_fix_hue_wrap)
+ {
+ float new_H, new_S, new_V;
+ ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], new_H, new_S, new_V);
+ if (new_H <= 0 && H > 0)
+ {
+ if (new_V <= 0 && V != new_V)
+ ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, new_V <= 0 ? V * 0.5f : new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+ else if (new_S <= 0)
+ ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, new_S <= 0 ? S * 0.5f : new_S, new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+ }
+ }
+
+ ImVec4 hue_color_f(1, 1, 1, 1); ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, 1, 1, hue_color_f.x, hue_color_f.y, hue_color_f.z);
+ ImU32 hue_color32 = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(hue_color_f);
+ ImU32 col32_no_alpha = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f));
+
+ const ImU32 hue_colors[6+1] = { IM_COL32(255,0,0,255), IM_COL32(255,255,0,255), IM_COL32(0,255,0,255), IM_COL32(0,255,255,255), IM_COL32(0,0,255,255), IM_COL32(255,0,255,255), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255) };
+ ImVec2 sv_cursor_pos;
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
+ {
+ // Render Hue Wheel
+ const float aeps = 1.5f / wheel_r_outer; // Half a pixel arc length in radians (2pi cancels out).
+ const int segment_per_arc = ImMax(4, (int)wheel_r_outer / 12);
+ for (int n = 0; n < 6; n++)
+ {
+ const float a0 = (n) /6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI - aeps;
+ const float a1 = (n+1.0f)/6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + aeps;
+ const int vert_start_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
+ draw_list->PathArcTo(wheel_center, (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, a0, a1, segment_per_arc);
+ draw_list->PathStroke(IM_COL32_WHITE, false, wheel_thickness);
+ const int vert_end_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
+
+ // Paint colors over existing vertices
+ ImVec2 gradient_p0(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a0) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a0) * wheel_r_inner);
+ ImVec2 gradient_p1(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a1) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a1) * wheel_r_inner);
+ ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(draw_list, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, gradient_p0, gradient_p1, hue_colors[n], hue_colors[n+1]);
+ }
+
+ // Render Cursor + preview on Hue Wheel
+ float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
+ float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
+ ImVec2 hue_cursor_pos(wheel_center.x + cos_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, wheel_center.y + sin_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f);
+ float hue_cursor_rad = value_changed_h ? wheel_thickness * 0.65f : wheel_thickness * 0.55f;
+ int hue_cursor_segments = ImClamp((int)(hue_cursor_rad / 1.4f), 9, 32);
+ draw_list->AddCircleFilled(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, hue_color32, hue_cursor_segments);
+ draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad+1, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), hue_cursor_segments);
+ draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, IM_COL32_WHITE, hue_cursor_segments);
+
+ // Render SV triangle (rotated according to hue)
+ ImVec2 tra = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pa, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
+ ImVec2 trb = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pb, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
+ ImVec2 trc = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pc, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
+ ImVec2 uv_white = GetFontTexUvWhitePixel();
+ draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 6);
+ draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, hue_color32);
+ draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, hue_color32);
+ draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, IM_COL32_WHITE);
+ draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS);
+ draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK);
+ draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS);
+ draw_list->AddTriangle(tra, trb, trc, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), 1.5f);
+ sv_cursor_pos = ImLerp(ImLerp(trc, tra, ImSaturate(S)), trb, ImSaturate(1 - V));
+ }
+ else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
+ {
+ // Render SV Square
+ draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), IM_COL32_WHITE, hue_color32, hue_color32, IM_COL32_WHITE);
+ draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS, IM_COL32_BLACK, IM_COL32_BLACK);
+ RenderFrameBorder(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
+ sv_cursor_pos.x = ImClamp((float)(int)(picker_pos.x + ImSaturate(S) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f), picker_pos.x + 2, picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size - 2); // Sneakily prevent the circle to stick out too much
+ sv_cursor_pos.y = ImClamp((float)(int)(picker_pos.y + ImSaturate(1 - V) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f), picker_pos.y + 2, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size - 2);
+
+ // Render Hue Bar
+ for (int i = 0; i < 6; ++i)
+ draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y + i * (sv_picker_size / 6)), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + (i + 1) * (sv_picker_size / 6)), hue_colors[i], hue_colors[i], hue_colors[i + 1], hue_colors[i + 1]);
+ float bar0_line_y = (float)(int)(picker_pos.y + H * sv_picker_size + 0.5f);
+ RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
+ RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar0_pos_x - 1, bar0_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f);
+ }
+
+ // Render cursor/preview circle (clamp S/V within 0..1 range because floating points colors may lead HSV values to be out of range)
+ float sv_cursor_rad = value_changed_sv ? 10.0f : 6.0f;
+ draw_list->AddCircleFilled(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, col32_no_alpha, 12);
+ draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad+1, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), 12);
+ draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, IM_COL32_WHITE, 12);
+
+ // Render alpha bar
+ if (alpha_bar)
+ {
+ float alpha = ImSaturate(col[3]);
+ ImRect bar1_bb(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y, bar1_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size);
+ RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, IM_COL32(0,0,0,0), bar1_bb.GetWidth() / 2.0f, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+ draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, col32_no_alpha, col32_no_alpha, col32_no_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK, col32_no_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK);
+ float bar1_line_y = (float)(int)(picker_pos.y + (1.0f - alpha) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f);
+ RenderFrameBorder(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0.0f);
+ RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar1_pos_x - 1, bar1_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f);
+ }
+
+ EndGroup();
+
+ if (value_changed && memcmp(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)) == 0)
+ value_changed = false;
+ if (value_changed)
+ MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);
+
+ PopID();
+
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+// A little colored square. Return true when clicked.
+// FIXME: May want to display/ignore the alpha component in the color display? Yet show it in the tooltip.
+// 'desc_id' is not called 'label' because we don't display it next to the button, but only in the tooltip.
+bool ImGui::ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, ImVec2 size)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(desc_id);
+ float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
+ if (size.x == 0.0f)
+ size.x = default_size;
+ if (size.y == 0.0f)
+ size.y = default_size;
+ const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+ ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+ return false;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
+ flags &= ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf);
+
+ ImVec4 col_without_alpha(col.x, col.y, col.z, 1.0f);
+ float grid_step = ImMin(size.x, size.y) / 2.99f;
+ float rounding = ImMin(g.Style.FrameRounding, grid_step * 0.5f);
+ ImRect bb_inner = bb;
+ float off = -0.75f; // The border (using Col_FrameBg) tends to look off when color is near-opaque and rounding is enabled. This offset seemed like a good middle ground to reduce those artifacts.
+ bb_inner.Expand(off);
+ if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf) && col.w < 1.0f)
+ {
+ float mid_x = (float)(int)((bb_inner.Min.x + bb_inner.Max.x) * 0.5f + 0.5f);
+ RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2(bb_inner.Min.x + grid_step, bb_inner.Min.y), bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col), grid_step, ImVec2(-grid_step + off, off), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight| ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, ImVec2(mid_x, bb_inner.Max.y), GetColorU32(col_without_alpha), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft|ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Because GetColorU32() multiplies by the global style Alpha and we don't want to display a checkerboard if the source code had no alpha
+ ImVec4 col_source = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview) ? col : col_without_alpha;
+ if (col_source.w < 1.0f)
+ RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), grid_step, ImVec2(off, off), rounding);
+ else
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All);
+ }
+ RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+ if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
+ RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, rounding);
+ else
+ window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), rounding); // Color button are often in need of some sort of border
+
+ // Drag and Drop Source
+ // NB: The ActiveId test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropSource() does the same test.
+ if (g.ActiveId == id && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropSource())
+ {
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
+ SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F, &col, sizeof(float) * 3, ImGuiCond_Once);
+ else
+ SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, &col, sizeof(float) * 4, ImGuiCond_Once);
+ ColorButton(desc_id, col, flags);
+ SameLine();
+ TextUnformatted("Color");
+ EndDragDropSource();
+ }
+
+ // Tooltip
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip) && hovered)
+ ColorTooltip(desc_id, &col.x, flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf));
+
+ if (pressed)
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
+ flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) == 0)
+ flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask;
+ if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) == 0)
+ flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
+ IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask))); // Check only 1 option is selected
+ IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask))); // Check only 1 option is selected
+ IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))); // Check only 1 option is selected
+ g.ColorEditOptions = flags;
+}
+
+// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
+void ImGui::ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+ int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
+ BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
+
+ const char* text_end = text ? FindRenderedTextEnd(text, NULL) : text;
+ if (text_end > text)
+ {
+ TextUnformatted(text, text_end);
+ Separator();
+ }
+
+ ImVec2 sz(g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2, g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
+ ColorButton("##preview", ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]), (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, sz);
+ SameLine();
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
+ Text("#%02X%02X%02X\nR: %d, G: %d, B: %d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, cr, cg, cb, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+ else
+ Text("#%02X%02X%02X%02X\nR:%d, G:%d, B:%d, A:%d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, ca, cr, cg, cb, ca, col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
+ EndTooltip();
+}
+
+void ImGui::ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+ bool allow_opt_inputs = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask);
+ bool allow_opt_datatype = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
+ if ((!allow_opt_inputs && !allow_opt_datatype) || !BeginPopup("context"))
+ return;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiColorEditFlags opts = g.ColorEditOptions;
+ if (allow_opt_inputs)
+ {
+ if (RadioButton("RGB", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB;
+ if (RadioButton("HSV", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV;
+ if (RadioButton("HEX", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX;
+ }
+ if (allow_opt_datatype)
+ {
+ if (allow_opt_inputs) Separator();
+ if (RadioButton("0..255", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8;
+ if (RadioButton("0.00..1.00", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
+ }
+
+ if (allow_opt_inputs || allow_opt_datatype)
+ Separator();
+ if (Button("Copy as..", ImVec2(-1,0)))
+ OpenPopup("Copy");
+ if (BeginPopup("Copy"))
+ {
+ int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
+ char buf[64];
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff)", col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
+ if (Selectable(buf))
+ SetClipboardText(buf);
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%d,%d,%d,%d)", cr, cg, cb, ca);
+ if (Selectable(buf))
+ SetClipboardText(buf);
+ if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb);
+ else
+ ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb, ca);
+ if (Selectable(buf))
+ SetClipboardText(buf);
+ EndPopup();
+ }
+
+ g.ColorEditOptions = opts;
+ EndPopup();
+}
+
+void ImGui::ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float* ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+ bool allow_opt_picker = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
+ bool allow_opt_alpha_bar = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
+ if ((!allow_opt_picker && !allow_opt_alpha_bar) || !BeginPopup("context"))
+ return;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (allow_opt_picker)
+ {
+ ImVec2 picker_size(g.FontSize * 8, ImMax(g.FontSize * 8 - (GetFrameHeight() + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), 1.0f)); // FIXME: Picker size copied from main picker function
+ PushItemWidth(picker_size.x);
+ for (int picker_type = 0; picker_type < 2; picker_type++)
+ {
+ // Draw small/thumbnail version of each picker type (over an invisible button for selection)
+ if (picker_type > 0) Separator();
+ PushID(picker_type);
+ ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview|(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+ if (picker_type == 0) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
+ if (picker_type == 1) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
+ ImVec2 backup_pos = GetCursorScreenPos();
+ if (Selectable("##selectable", false, 0, picker_size)) // By default, Selectable() is closing popup
+ g.ColorEditOptions = (g.ColorEditOptions & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) | (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
+ SetCursorScreenPos(backup_pos);
+ ImVec4 dummy_ref_col;
+ memcpy(&dummy_ref_col, ref_col, sizeof(float) * ((picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4));
+ ColorPicker4("##dummypicker", &dummy_ref_col.x, picker_flags);
+ PopID();
+ }
+ PopItemWidth();
+ }
+ if (allow_opt_alpha_bar)
+ {
+ if (allow_opt_picker) Separator();
+ CheckboxFlags("Alpha Bar", (unsigned int*)&g.ColorEditOptions, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
+ }
+ EndPopup();
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TreeNode()
+// - TreeNodeV()
+// - TreeNodeEx()
+// - TreeNodeExV()
+// - TreeNodeBehavior() [Internal]
+// - TreePush()
+// - TreePop()
+// - TreeAdvanceToLabelPos()
+// - GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
+// - SetNextTreeNodeOpen()
+// - CollapsingHeader()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+ return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+ return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* label)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+ return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), 0, label, NULL);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ return TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ return TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags, label, NULL);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, flags, fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+ return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+ va_start(args, fmt);
+ bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, flags, fmt, args);
+ va_end(args);
+ return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const char* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
+ return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(str_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const char* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
+ return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(ptr_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+{
+ if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf)
+ return true;
+
+ // We only write to the tree storage if the user clicks (or explicitly use SetNextTreeNode*** functions)
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ ImGuiStorage* storage = window->DC.StateStorage;
+
+ bool is_open;
+ if (g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond != 0)
+ {
+ if (g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond & ImGuiCond_Always)
+ {
+ is_open = g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal;
+ storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // We treat ImGuiCond_Once and ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver the same because tree node state are not saved persistently.
+ const int stored_value = storage->GetInt(id, -1);
+ if (stored_value == -1)
+ {
+ is_open = g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal;
+ storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ is_open = stored_value != 0;
+ }
+ }
+ g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond = 0;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ is_open = storage->GetInt(id, (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen) ? 1 : 0) != 0;
+ }
+
+ // When logging is enabled, we automatically expand tree nodes (but *NOT* collapsing headers.. seems like sensible behavior).
+ // NB- If we are above max depth we still allow manually opened nodes to be logged.
+ if (g.LogEnabled && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog) && window->DC.TreeDepth < g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth)
+ is_open = true;
+
+ return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const bool display_frame = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed) != 0;
+ const ImVec2 padding = (display_frame || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding)) ? style.FramePadding : ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0.0f);
+
+ if (!label_end)
+ label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false);
+
+ // We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height.
+ const float text_base_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it
+ const float frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2), label_size.y + padding.y*2);
+ ImRect frame_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, ImVec2(window->Pos.x + GetContentRegionMax().x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height));
+ if (display_frame)
+ {
+ // Framed header expand a little outside the default padding
+ frame_bb.Min.x -= (float)(int)(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f) - 1;
+ frame_bb.Max.x += (float)(int)(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f) - 1;
+ }
+
+ const float text_offset_x = (g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x*3 : padding.x*2)); // Collapser arrow width + Spacing
+ const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x*2 : 0.0f); // Include collapser
+ ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), text_base_offset_y);
+
+ // For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing
+ // (Ideally we'd want to add a flag for the user to specify if we want the hit test to be done up to the right side of the content or not)
+ const ImRect interact_bb = display_frame ? frame_bb : ImRect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x*2, frame_bb.Max.y);
+ bool is_open = TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(id, flags);
+ bool is_leaf = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf) != 0;
+
+ // Store a flag for the current depth to tell if we will allow closing this node when navigating one of its child.
+ // For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop().
+ // This is currently only support 32 level deep and we are fine with (1 << Depth) overflowing into a zero.
+ if (is_open && !g.NavIdIsAlive && (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere) && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
+ window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop |= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);
+
+ bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id);
+ window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect;
+ window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect = frame_bb;
+
+ if (!item_add)
+ {
+ if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
+ TreePushRawID(id);
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(window->DC.LastItemId, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
+ return is_open;
+ }
+
+ // Flags that affects opening behavior:
+ // - 0 (default) .................... single-click anywhere to open
+ // - OpenOnDoubleClick .............. double-click anywhere to open
+ // - OpenOnArrow .................... single-click on arrow to open
+ // - OpenOnDoubleClick|OpenOnArrow .. single-click on arrow or double-click anywhere to open
+ ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers;
+ if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
+ button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap;
+ if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
+ button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow) ? ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease : 0);
+ if (!is_leaf)
+ button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
+
+ bool selected = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected) != 0;
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(interact_bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
+ bool toggled = false;
+ if (!is_leaf)
+ {
+ if (pressed)
+ {
+ toggled = !(flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)) || (g.NavActivateId == id);
+ if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow)
+ toggled |= IsMouseHoveringRect(interact_bb.Min, ImVec2(interact_bb.Min.x + text_offset_x, interact_bb.Max.y)) && (!g.NavDisableMouseHover);
+ if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
+ toggled |= g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0];
+ if (g.DragDropActive && is_open) // When using Drag and Drop "hold to open" we keep the node highlighted after opening, but never close it again.
+ toggled = false;
+ }
+
+ if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && is_open)
+ {
+ toggled = true;
+ NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ }
+ if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && !is_open) // If there's something upcoming on the line we may want to give it the priority?
+ {
+ toggled = true;
+ NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ }
+
+ if (toggled)
+ {
+ is_open = !is_open;
+ window->DC.StateStorage->SetInt(id, is_open);
+ }
+ }
+ if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
+ SetItemAllowOverlap();
+
+ // Render
+ const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
+ const ImVec2 text_pos = frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(text_offset_x, text_base_offset_y);
+ ImGuiNavHighlightFlags nav_highlight_flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin;
+ if (display_frame)
+ {
+ // Framed type
+ RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);
+ RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
+ RenderArrow(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(padding.x, text_base_offset_y), is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 1.0f);
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ {
+ // NB: '##' is normally used to hide text (as a library-wide feature), so we need to specify the text range to make sure the ## aren't stripped out here.
+ const char log_prefix[] = "\n##";
+ const char log_suffix[] = "##";
+ LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_prefix, log_prefix+3);
+ RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
+ LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_suffix+1, log_suffix+3);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Unframed typed for tree nodes
+ if (hovered || selected)
+ {
+ RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, col, false);
+ RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
+ }
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
+ RenderBullet(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(text_offset_x * 0.5f, g.FontSize*0.50f + text_base_offset_y));
+ else if (!is_leaf)
+ RenderArrow(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(padding.x, g.FontSize*0.15f + text_base_offset_y), is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 0.70f);
+ if (g.LogEnabled)
+ LogRenderedText(&text_pos, ">");
+ RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
+ }
+
+ if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
+ TreePushRawID(id);
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
+ return is_open;
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreePush(const char* str_id)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ Indent();
+ window->DC.TreeDepth++;
+ PushID(str_id ? str_id : "#TreePush");
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreePush(const void* ptr_id)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ Indent();
+ window->DC.TreeDepth++;
+ PushID(ptr_id ? ptr_id : (const void*)"#TreePush");
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreePushRawID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ Indent();
+ window->DC.TreeDepth++;
+ window->IDStack.push_back(id);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreePop()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ Unindent();
+
+ window->DC.TreeDepth--;
+ if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet())
+ if (g.NavIdIsAlive && (window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop & (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth)))
+ {
+ SetNavID(window->IDStack.back(), g.NavLayer);
+ NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ }
+ window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop &= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth) - 1;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // There should always be 1 element in the IDStack (pushed during window creation). If this triggers you called TreePop/PopID too much.
+ PopID();
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreeAdvanceToLabelPos()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos.x += GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing();
+}
+
+// Horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode() or Bullet()
+float ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.FontSize + (g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextTreeNodeOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
+ return;
+ g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal = is_open;
+ g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
+}
+
+// CollapsingHeader returns true when opened but do not indent nor push into the ID stack (because of the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag).
+// This is basically the same as calling TreeNodeEx(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader). You can remove the _NoTreePushOnOpen flag if you want behavior closer to normal TreeNode().
+bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader, label);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ if (p_open && !*p_open)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+ bool is_open = TreeNodeBehavior(id, flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader | (p_open ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap : 0), label);
+ if (p_open)
+ {
+ // Create a small overlapping close button // FIXME: We can evolve this into user accessible helpers to add extra buttons on title bars, headers, etc.
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup last_item_backup;
+ float button_radius = g.FontSize * 0.5f;
+ ImVec2 button_center = ImVec2(ImMin(window->DC.LastItemRect.Max.x, window->ClipRect.Max.x) - g.Style.FramePadding.x - button_radius, window->DC.LastItemRect.GetCenter().y);
+ if (CloseButton(window->GetID((void*)((intptr_t)id+1)), button_center, button_radius))
+ *p_open = false;
+ last_item_backup.Restore();
+ }
+
+ return is_open;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - Selectable()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Tip: pass a non-visible label (e.g. "##dummy") then you can use the space to draw other text or image.
+// But you need to make sure the ID is unique, e.g. enclose calls in PushID/PopID or use ##unique_id.
+bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+ if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet) // FIXME-OPT: Avoid if vertically clipped.
+ PopClipRect();
+
+ ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+ ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ ImVec2 size(size_arg.x != 0.0f ? size_arg.x : label_size.x, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : label_size.y);
+ ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ pos.y += window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
+ ImRect bb_inner(pos, pos + size);
+ ItemSize(bb_inner);
+
+ // Fill horizontal space.
+ ImVec2 window_padding = window->WindowPadding;
+ float max_x = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? GetWindowContentRegionMax().x : GetContentRegionMax().x;
+ float w_draw = ImMax(label_size.x, window->Pos.x + max_x - window_padding.x - pos.x);
+ ImVec2 size_draw((size_arg.x != 0 && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth)) ? size_arg.x : w_draw, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : size.y);
+ ImRect bb(pos, pos + size_draw);
+ if (size_arg.x == 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth))
+ bb.Max.x += window_padding.x;
+
+ // Selectables are tightly packed together, we extend the box to cover spacing between selectable.
+ float spacing_L = (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
+ float spacing_U = (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.y * 0.5f);
+ float spacing_R = style.ItemSpacing.x - spacing_L;
+ float spacing_D = style.ItemSpacing.y - spacing_U;
+ bb.Min.x -= spacing_L;
+ bb.Min.y -= spacing_U;
+ bb.Max.x += spacing_R;
+ bb.Max.y += spacing_D;
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+ {
+ if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet)
+ PushColumnClipRect();
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ // We use NoHoldingActiveID on menus so user can click and _hold_ on a menu then drag to browse child entries
+ ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0;
+ if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID;
+ if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick;
+ if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease;
+ if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled;
+ if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick;
+ if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled)
+ selected = false;
+
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
+ // Hovering selectable with mouse updates NavId accordingly so navigation can be resumed with gamepad/keyboard (this doesn't happen on most widgets)
+ if (pressed || hovered)
+ if (!g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow == window && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
+ {
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+ SetNavID(id, window->DC.NavLayerCurrent);
+ }
+ if (pressed)
+ MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+ // Render
+ if (hovered || selected)
+ {
+ const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
+ RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
+ RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding);
+ }
+
+ if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet)
+ {
+ PushColumnClipRect();
+ bb.Max.x -= (GetContentRegionMax().x - max_x);
+ }
+
+ if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
+ RenderTextClipped(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, label, NULL, &label_size, style.SelectableTextAlign, &bb);
+ if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PopStyleColor();
+
+ // Automatically close popups
+ if (pressed && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups) && !(window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup))
+ CloseCurrentPopup();
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+ if (Selectable(label, *p_selected, flags, size_arg))
+ {
+ *p_selected = !*p_selected;
+ return true;
+ }
+ return false;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ListBox()
+// - ListBoxHeader()
+// - ListBoxFooter()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// FIXME: In principle this function should be called BeginListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
+// Helper to calculate the size of a listbox and display a label on the right.
+// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, PushItemWidth(-1) and pass an non-visible label e.g. "##empty"
+bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();
+ const ImGuiID id = GetID(label);
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+ // Size default to hold ~7 items. Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
+ ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.4f + style.ItemSpacing.y);
+ ImVec2 frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y));
+ ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
+ ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+ window->DC.LastItemRect = bb; // Forward storage for ListBoxFooter.. dodgy.
+
+ if (!IsRectVisible(bb.Min, bb.Max))
+ {
+ ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
+ ItemAdd(bb, 0, &frame_bb);
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ BeginGroup();
+ if (label_size.x > 0)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+ BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize());
+ return true;
+}
+
+// FIXME: In principle this function should be called EndListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
+bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items)
+{
+ // Size default to hold ~7.25 items.
+ // We add +25% worth of item height to allow the user to see at a glance if there are more items up/down, without looking at the scrollbar.
+ // We don't add this extra bit if items_count <= height_in_items. It is slightly dodgy, because it means a dynamic list of items will make the widget resize occasionally when it crosses that size.
+ // I am expecting that someone will come and complain about this behavior in a remote future, then we can advise on a better solution.
+ if (height_in_items < 0)
+ height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7);
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();
+ float height_in_items_f = (height_in_items < items_count) ? (height_in_items + 0.25f) : (height_in_items + 0.00f);
+
+ // We include ItemSpacing.y so that a list sized for the exact number of items doesn't make a scrollbar appears. We could also enforce that by passing a flag to BeginChild().
+ ImVec2 size;
+ size.x = 0.0f;
+ size.y = GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f;
+ return ListBoxHeader(label, size);
+}
+
+// FIXME: In principle this function should be called EndListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
+void ImGui::ListBoxFooter()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* parent_window = GetCurrentWindow()->ParentWindow;
+ const ImRect bb = parent_window->DC.LastItemRect;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();
+
+ EndChildFrame();
+
+ // Redeclare item size so that it includes the label (we have stored the full size in LastItemRect)
+ // We call SameLine() to restore DC.CurrentLine* data
+ SameLine();
+ parent_window->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
+ ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ EndGroup();
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_items)
+{
+ const bool value_changed = ListBox(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_items);
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
+{
+ if (!ListBoxHeader(label, items_count, height_in_items))
+ return false;
+
+ // Assume all items have even height (= 1 line of text). If you need items of different or variable sizes you can create a custom version of ListBox() in your code without using the clipper.
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ bool value_changed = false;
+ ImGuiListClipper clipper(items_count, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()); // We know exactly our line height here so we pass it as a minor optimization, but generally you don't need to.
+ while (clipper.Step())
+ for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+ {
+ const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
+ const char* item_text;
+ if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
+ item_text = "*Unknown item*";
+
+ PushID(i);
+ if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
+ {
+ *current_item = i;
+ value_changed = true;
+ }
+ if (item_selected)
+ SetItemDefaultFocus();
+ PopID();
+ }
+ ListBoxFooter();
+ if (value_changed)
+ MarkItemEdited(g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId);
+
+ return value_changed;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - PlotEx() [Internal]
+// - PlotLines()
+// - PlotHistogram()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 frame_size)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+
+ const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ if (frame_size.x == 0.0f)
+ frame_size.x = CalcItemWidth();
+ if (frame_size.y == 0.0f)
+ frame_size.y = label_size.y + (style.FramePadding.y * 2);
+
+ const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
+ const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
+ const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0));
+ ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0, &frame_bb))
+ return;
+ const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+
+ // Determine scale from values if not specified
+ if (scale_min == FLT_MAX || scale_max == FLT_MAX)
+ {
+ float v_min = FLT_MAX;
+ float v_max = -FLT_MAX;
+ for (int i = 0; i < values_count; i++)
+ {
+ const float v = values_getter(data, i);
+ v_min = ImMin(v_min, v);
+ v_max = ImMax(v_max, v);
+ }
+ if (scale_min == FLT_MAX)
+ scale_min = v_min;
+ if (scale_max == FLT_MAX)
+ scale_max = v_max;
+ }
+
+ RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+
+ if (values_count > 0)
+ {
+ int res_w = ImMin((int)frame_size.x, values_count) + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
+ int item_count = values_count + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
+
+ // Tooltip on hover
+ int v_hovered = -1;
+ if (hovered && inner_bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
+ {
+ const float t = ImClamp((g.IO.MousePos.x - inner_bb.Min.x) / (inner_bb.Max.x - inner_bb.Min.x), 0.0f, 0.9999f);
+ const int v_idx = (int)(t * item_count);
+ IM_ASSERT(v_idx >= 0 && v_idx < values_count);
+
+ const float v0 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + values_offset) % values_count);
+ const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + 1 + values_offset) % values_count);
+ if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
+ SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g\n%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0, v_idx+1, v1);
+ else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
+ SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0);
+ v_hovered = v_idx;
+ }
+
+ const float t_step = 1.0f / (float)res_w;
+ const float inv_scale = (scale_min == scale_max) ? 0.0f : (1.0f / (scale_max - scale_min));
+
+ float v0 = values_getter(data, (0 + values_offset) % values_count);
+ float t0 = 0.0f;
+ ImVec2 tp0 = ImVec2( t0, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v0 - scale_min) * inv_scale) ); // Point in the normalized space of our target rectangle
+ float histogram_zero_line_t = (scale_min * scale_max < 0.0f) ? (-scale_min * inv_scale) : (scale_min < 0.0f ? 0.0f : 1.0f); // Where does the zero line stands
+
+ const ImU32 col_base = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLines : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram);
+ const ImU32 col_hovered = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered);
+
+ for (int n = 0; n < res_w; n++)
+ {
+ const float t1 = t0 + t_step;
+ const int v1_idx = (int)(t0 * item_count + 0.5f);
+ IM_ASSERT(v1_idx >= 0 && v1_idx < values_count);
+ const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v1_idx + values_offset + 1) % values_count);
+ const ImVec2 tp1 = ImVec2( t1, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v1 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );
+
+ // NB: Draw calls are merged together by the DrawList system. Still, we should render our batch are lower level to save a bit of CPU.
+ ImVec2 pos0 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, tp0);
+ ImVec2 pos1 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? tp1 : ImVec2(tp1.x, histogram_zero_line_t));
+ if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
+ {
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
+ }
+ else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
+ {
+ if (pos1.x >= pos0.x + 2.0f)
+ pos1.x -= 1.0f;
+ window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
+ }
+
+ t0 = t1;
+ tp0 = tp1;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Text overlay
+ if (overlay_text)
+ RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, overlay_text, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));
+
+ if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+ RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);
+}
+
+struct ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData
+{
+ const float* Values;
+ int Stride;
+
+ ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData(const float* values, int stride) { Values = values; Stride = stride; }
+};
+
+static float Plot_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx)
+{
+ ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData* plot_data = (ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData*)data;
+ const float v = *(const float*)(const void*)((const unsigned char*)plot_data->Values + (size_t)idx * plot_data->Stride);
+ return v;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
+{
+ ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
+ PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
+{
+ PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
+{
+ ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
+ PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
+{
+ PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
+// Those is not very useful, legacy API.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - Value()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, bool b)
+{
+ Text("%s: %s", prefix, (b ? "true" : "false"));
+}
+
+void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, int v)
+{
+ Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v)
+{
+ Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format)
+{
+ if (float_format)
+ {
+ char fmt[64];
+ ImFormatString(fmt, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt), "%%s: %s", float_format);
+ Text(fmt, prefix, v);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ Text("%s: %.3f", prefix, v);
+ }
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ImGuiMenuColumns [Internal]
+// - BeginMainMenuBar()
+// - EndMainMenuBar()
+// - BeginMenuBar()
+// - EndMenuBar()
+// - BeginMenu()
+// - EndMenu()
+// - MenuItem()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Helpers for internal use
+ImGuiMenuColumns::ImGuiMenuColumns()
+{
+ Count = 0;
+ Spacing = Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
+ memset(Pos, 0, sizeof(Pos));
+ memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
+}
+
+void ImGuiMenuColumns::Update(int count, float spacing, bool clear)
+{
+ IM_ASSERT(Count <= IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos));
+ Count = count;
+ Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
+ Spacing = spacing;
+ if (clear) memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
+ for (int i = 0; i < Count; i++)
+ {
+ if (i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f)
+ Width += Spacing;
+ Pos[i] = (float)(int)Width;
+ Width += NextWidths[i];
+ NextWidths[i] = 0.0f;
+ }
+}
+
+float ImGuiMenuColumns::DeclColumns(float w0, float w1, float w2) // not using va_arg because they promote float to double
+{
+ NextWidth = 0.0f;
+ NextWidths[0] = ImMax(NextWidths[0], w0);
+ NextWidths[1] = ImMax(NextWidths[1], w1);
+ NextWidths[2] = ImMax(NextWidths[2], w2);
+ for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++)
+ NextWidth += NextWidths[i] + ((i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f) ? Spacing : 0.0f);
+ return ImMax(Width, NextWidth);
+}
+
+float ImGuiMenuColumns::CalcExtraSpace(float avail_w)
+{
+ return ImMax(0.0f, avail_w - Width);
+}
+
+// For the main menu bar, which cannot be moved, we honor g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding to ensure text can be visible on a TV set.
+bool ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.x, ImMax(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.y - g.Style.FramePadding.y, 0.0f));
+ SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+ SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y + g.FontBaseSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y));
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, ImVec2(0,0));
+ ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
+ bool is_open = Begin("##MainMenuBar", NULL, window_flags) && BeginMenuBar();
+ PopStyleVar(2);
+ g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ if (!is_open)
+ {
+ End();
+ return false;
+ }
+ return true; //-V1020
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndMainMenuBar()
+{
+ EndMenuBar();
+
+ // When the user has left the menu layer (typically: closed menus through activation of an item), we restore focus to the previous window
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.CurrentWindow == g.NavWindow && g.NavLayer == 0)
+ FocusPreviousWindowIgnoringOne(g.NavWindow);
+
+ End();
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginMenuBar()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+ if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+ return false;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
+ BeginGroup(); // Backup position on layer 0
+ PushID("##menubar");
+
+ // We don't clip with current window clipping rectangle as it is already set to the area below. However we clip with window full rect.
+ // We remove 1 worth of rounding to Max.x to that text in long menus and small windows don't tend to display over the lower-right rounded area, which looks particularly glitchy.
+ ImRect bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
+ ImRect clip_rect(ImFloor(bar_rect.Min.x + 0.5f), ImFloor(bar_rect.Min.y + window->WindowBorderSize + 0.5f), ImFloor(ImMax(bar_rect.Min.x, bar_rect.Max.x - window->WindowRounding) + 0.5f), ImFloor(bar_rect.Max.y + 0.5f));
+ clip_rect.ClipWith(window->OuterRectClipped);
+ PushClipRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, false);
+
+ window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(bar_rect.Min.x + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x, bar_rect.Min.y + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y);
+ window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
+ window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+ window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu);
+ window->DC.MenuBarAppending = true;
+ AlignTextToFramePadding();
+ return true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndMenuBar()
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+ // Nav: When a move request within one of our child menu failed, capture the request to navigate among our siblings.
+ if (NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+ {
+ ImGuiWindow* nav_earliest_child = g.NavWindow;
+ while (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow && (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+ nav_earliest_child = nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow;
+ if (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow == window && nav_earliest_child->DC.ParentLayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal && g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None)
+ {
+ // To do so we claim focus back, restore NavId and then process the movement request for yet another frame.
+ // This involve a one-frame delay which isn't very problematic in this situation. We could remove it by scoring in advance for multiple window (probably not worth the hassle/cost)
+ IM_ASSERT(window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext & 0x02); // Sanity check
+ FocusWindow(window);
+ SetNavIDWithRectRel(window->NavLastIds[1], 1, window->NavRectRel[1]);
+ g.NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+ g.NavDisableHighlight = true; // Hide highlight for the current frame so we don't see the intermediary selection.
+ g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued;
+ NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ }
+ }
+
+ IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
+ IM_ASSERT(window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
+ PopClipRect();
+ PopID();
+ window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->MenuBarRect().Min.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos.
+ window->DC.GroupStack.back().AdvanceCursor = false;
+ EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0
+ window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
+ window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+ window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
+ window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginMenu(const char* label, bool enabled)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+
+ ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+ bool pressed;
+ bool menu_is_open = IsPopupOpen(id);
+ bool menuset_is_open = !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].OpenParentId == window->IDStack.back());
+ ImGuiWindow* backed_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
+ if (menuset_is_open)
+ g.NavWindow = window; // Odd hack to allow hovering across menus of a same menu-set (otherwise we wouldn't be able to hover parent)
+
+ // The reference position stored in popup_pos will be used by Begin() to find a suitable position for the child menu,
+ // However the final position is going to be different! It is choosen by FindBestWindowPosForPopup().
+ // e.g. Menus tend to overlap each other horizontally to amplify relative Z-ordering.
+ ImVec2 popup_pos, pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
+ {
+ // Menu inside an horizontal menu bar
+ // Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction.
+ // For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin()
+ popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - 1.0f - (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f), pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, style.ItemSpacing * 2.0f);
+ float w = label_size.x;
+ pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
+ PopStyleVar();
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Menu inside a menu
+ popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y);
+ float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, 0.0f, (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback to next frame
+ float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
+ pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
+ if (!enabled) PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
+ RenderArrow(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.30f, 0.0f), ImGuiDir_Right);
+ if (!enabled) PopStyleColor();
+ }
+
+ const bool hovered = enabled && ItemHoverable(window->DC.LastItemRect, id);
+ if (menuset_is_open)
+ g.NavWindow = backed_nav_window;
+
+ bool want_open = false, want_close = false;
+ if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) // (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+ {
+ // Implement http://bjk5.com/post/44698559168/breaking-down-amazons-mega-dropdown to avoid using timers, so menus feels more reactive.
+ bool moving_within_opened_triangle = false;
+ if (g.HoveredWindow == window && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].ParentWindow == window && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+ {
+ if (ImGuiWindow* next_window = g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].Window)
+ {
+ // FIXME-DPI: Values should be derived from a master "scale" factor.
+ ImRect next_window_rect = next_window->Rect();
+ ImVec2 ta = g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseDelta;
+ ImVec2 tb = (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetTL() : next_window_rect.GetTR();
+ ImVec2 tc = (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetBL() : next_window_rect.GetBR();
+ float extra = ImClamp(ImFabs(ta.x - tb.x) * 0.30f, 5.0f, 30.0f); // add a bit of extra slack.
+ ta.x += (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? -0.5f : +0.5f; // to avoid numerical issues
+ tb.y = ta.y + ImMax((tb.y - extra) - ta.y, -100.0f); // triangle is maximum 200 high to limit the slope and the bias toward large sub-menus // FIXME: Multiply by fb_scale?
+ tc.y = ta.y + ImMin((tc.y + extra) - ta.y, +100.0f);
+ moving_within_opened_triangle = ImTriangleContainsPoint(ta, tb, tc, g.IO.MousePos);
+ //window->DrawList->PushClipRectFullScreen(); window->DrawList->AddTriangleFilled(ta, tb, tc, moving_within_opened_triangle ? IM_COL32(0,128,0,128) : IM_COL32(128,0,0,128)); window->DrawList->PopClipRect(); // Debug
+ }
+ }
+
+ want_close = (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && !moving_within_opened_triangle);
+ want_open = (!menu_is_open && hovered && !moving_within_opened_triangle) || (!menu_is_open && hovered && pressed);
+
+ if (g.NavActivateId == id)
+ {
+ want_close = menu_is_open;
+ want_open = !menu_is_open;
+ }
+ if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) // Nav-Right to open
+ {
+ want_open = true;
+ NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ // Menu bar
+ if (menu_is_open && pressed && menuset_is_open) // Click an open menu again to close it
+ {
+ want_close = true;
+ want_open = menu_is_open = false;
+ }
+ else if (pressed || (hovered && menuset_is_open && !menu_is_open)) // First click to open, then hover to open others
+ {
+ want_open = true;
+ }
+ else if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) // Nav-Down to open
+ {
+ want_open = true;
+ NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (!enabled) // explicitly close if an open menu becomes disabled, facilitate users code a lot in pattern such as 'if (BeginMenu("options", has_object)) { ..use object.. }'
+ want_close = true;
+ if (want_close && IsPopupOpen(id))
+ ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);
+
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable | (menu_is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
+
+ if (!menu_is_open && want_open && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size)
+ {
+ // Don't recycle same menu level in the same frame, first close the other menu and yield for a frame.
+ OpenPopup(label);
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ menu_is_open |= want_open;
+ if (want_open)
+ OpenPopup(label);
+
+ if (menu_is_open)
+ {
+ // Sub-menus are ChildWindow so that mouse can be hovering across them (otherwise top-most popup menu would steal focus and not allow hovering on parent menu)
+ SetNextWindowPos(popup_pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
+ ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus;
+ if (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+ flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
+ menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
+ }
+
+ return menu_is_open;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndMenu()
+{
+ // Nav: When a left move request _within our child menu_ failed, close ourselves (the _parent_ menu).
+ // A menu doesn't close itself because EndMenuBar() wants the catch the last Left<>Right inputs.
+ // However, it means that with the current code, a BeginMenu() from outside another menu or a menu-bar won't be closable with the Left direction.
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow == window && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical)
+ {
+ ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);
+ NavMoveRequestCancel();
+ }
+
+ EndPopup();
+}
+
+bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled)
+{
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+ ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease | (enabled ? 0 : ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled);
+ bool pressed;
+ if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
+ {
+ // Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful
+ // Note that in this situation we render neither the shortcut neither the selected tick mark
+ float w = label_size.x;
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
+ PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, style.ItemSpacing * 2.0f);
+ pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
+ PopStyleVar();
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ImVec2 shortcut_size = shortcut ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+ float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, shortcut_size.x, (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback for next frame
+ float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
+ pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
+ if (shortcut_size.x > 0.0f)
+ {
+ PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
+ RenderText(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[1] + extra_w, 0.0f), shortcut, NULL, false);
+ PopStyleColor();
+ }
+ if (selected)
+ RenderCheckMark(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.40f, g.FontSize * 0.134f * 0.5f), GetColorU32(enabled ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled), g.FontSize * 0.866f);
+ }
+
+ IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(window->DC.LastItemId, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (selected ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
+ return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled)
+{
+ if (MenuItem(label, shortcut, p_selected ? *p_selected : false, enabled))
+ {
+ if (p_selected)
+ *p_selected = !*p_selected;
+ return true;
+ }
+ return false;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [BETA API] API may evolve! This code has been extracted out of the Docking branch,
+// and some of the construct which are not used in Master may be left here to facilitate merging.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - BeginTabBar()
+// - BeginTabBarEx() [Internal]
+// - EndTabBar()
+// - TabBarLayout() [Internal]
+// - TabBarCalcTabID() [Internal]
+// - TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth() [Internal]
+// - TabBarFindTabById() [Internal]
+// - TabBarRemoveTab() [Internal]
+// - TabBarCloseTab() [Internal]
+// - TabBarScrollClamp()v
+// - TabBarScrollToTab() [Internal]
+// - TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder() [Internal]
+// - TabBarScrollingButtons() [Internal]
+// - TabBarTabListPopupButton() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace ImGui
+{
+ static void TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+ static ImU32 TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label);
+ static float TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth();
+ static float TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, float scrolling);
+ static void TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab);
+ static ImGuiTabItem* TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+ static ImGuiTabItem* TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+}
+
+ImGuiTabBar::ImGuiTabBar()
+{
+ ID = 0;
+ SelectedTabId = NextSelectedTabId = VisibleTabId = 0;
+ CurrFrameVisible = PrevFrameVisible = -1;
+ ContentsHeight = 0.0f;
+ OffsetMax = OffsetNextTab = 0.0f;
+ ScrollingAnim = ScrollingTarget = 0.0f;
+ Flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_None;
+ ReorderRequestTabId = 0;
+ ReorderRequestDir = 0;
+ WantLayout = VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false;
+ LastTabItemIdx = -1;
+}
+
+static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerByVisibleOffset(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+ const ImGuiTabItem* a = (const ImGuiTabItem*)lhs;
+ const ImGuiTabItem* b = (const ImGuiTabItem*)rhs;
+ return (int)(a->Offset - b->Offset);
+}
+
+static int IMGUI_CDECL TabBarSortItemComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+ const ImGuiTabBarSortItem* a = (const ImGuiTabBarSortItem*)lhs;
+ const ImGuiTabBarSortItem* b = (const ImGuiTabBarSortItem*)rhs;
+ if (int d = (int)(b->Width - a->Width))
+ return d;
+ return (b->Index - a->Index);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+ ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.TabBars.GetOrAddByKey(id);
+ ImRect tab_bar_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->InnerClipRect.Max.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
+ tab_bar->ID = id;
+ return BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_bb, flags | ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& tab_bar_bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
+ window->IDStack.push_back(tab_bar->ID);
+
+ g.CurrentTabBar.push_back(tab_bar);
+ if (tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible == g.FrameCount)
+ {
+ //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("BeginTabBarEx already called this frame\n", g.FrameCount);
+ IM_ASSERT(0);
+ return true;
+ }
+
+ // When toggling back from ordered to manually-reorderable, shuffle tabs to enforce the last visible order.
+ // Otherwise, the most recently inserted tabs would move at the end of visible list which can be a little too confusing or magic for the user.
+ if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1 && tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible != -1)
+ ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerByVisibleOffset);
+
+ // Flags
+ if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0)
+ flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;
+
+ tab_bar->Flags = flags;
+ tab_bar->BarRect = tab_bar_bb;
+ tab_bar->WantLayout = true; // Layout will be done on the first call to ItemTab()
+ tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible = tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible;
+ tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
+ tab_bar->FramePadding = g.Style.FramePadding;
+
+ // Layout
+ ItemSize(ImVec2(tab_bar->OffsetMax, tab_bar->BarRect.GetHeight()));
+ window->DC.CursorPos.x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x;
+
+ // Draw separator
+ const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_Tab);
+ const float y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y - 1.0f;
+ {
+ const float separator_min_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - window->WindowPadding.x;
+ const float separator_max_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x + window->WindowPadding.x;
+ window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
+ }
+ return true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndTabBar()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(!g.CurrentTabBar.empty()); // Mismatched BeginTabBar/EndTabBar
+ ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar.back();
+ if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
+ TabBarLayout(tab_bar);
+
+ // Restore the last visible height if no tab is visible, this reduce vertical flicker/movement when a tabs gets removed without calling SetTabItemClosed().
+ const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
+ if (tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted || tab_bar->VisibleTabId == 0 || tab_bar_appearing)
+ tab_bar->ContentsHeight = ImMax(window->DC.CursorPos.y - tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y, 0.0f);
+ else
+ window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->ContentsHeight;
+
+ if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
+ PopID();
+ g.CurrentTabBar.pop_back();
+}
+
+// This is called only once a frame before by the first call to ItemTab()
+// The reason we're not calling it in BeginTabBar() is to leave a chance to the user to call the SetTabItemClosed() functions.
+static void ImGui::TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ tab_bar->WantLayout = false;
+
+ // Garbage collect
+ int tab_dst_n = 0;
+ for (int tab_src_n = 0; tab_src_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_src_n++)
+ {
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
+ if (tab->LastFrameVisible < tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible)
+ {
+ if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
+ tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (tab_dst_n != tab_src_n)
+ tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n] = tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
+ tab_dst_n++;
+ }
+ if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size != tab_dst_n)
+ tab_bar->Tabs.resize(tab_dst_n);
+
+ // Setup next selected tab
+ ImGuiID scroll_track_selected_tab_id = 0;
+ if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId)
+ {
+ tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId;
+ tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
+ scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
+ }
+
+ // Process order change request (we could probably process it when requested but it's just saner to do it in a single spot).
+ if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId != 0)
+ {
+ if (ImGuiTabItem* tab1 = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId))
+ {
+ //IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable); // <- this may happen when using debug tools
+ int tab2_order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab1) + tab_bar->ReorderRequestDir;
+ if (tab2_order >= 0 && tab2_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size)
+ {
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab2 = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab2_order];
+ ImGuiTabItem item_tmp = *tab1;
+ *tab1 = *tab2;
+ *tab2 = item_tmp;
+ if (tab2->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
+ scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab2->ID;
+ tab1 = tab2 = NULL;
+ }
+ if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings)
+ MarkIniSettingsDirty();
+ }
+ tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = 0;
+ }
+
+ // Tab List Popup (will alter tab_bar->BarRect and therefore the available width!)
+ const bool tab_list_popup_button = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton) != 0;
+ if (tab_list_popup_button)
+ if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = TabBarTabListPopupButton(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Max.x!
+ scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID;
+
+ ImVector<ImGuiTabBarSortItem>& width_sort_buffer = g.TabSortByWidthBuffer;
+ width_sort_buffer.resize(tab_bar->Tabs.Size);
+
+ // Compute ideal widths
+ float width_total_contents = 0.0f;
+ ImGuiTabItem* most_recently_selected_tab = NULL;
+ bool found_selected_tab_id = false;
+ for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+ {
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+ IM_ASSERT(tab->LastFrameVisible >= tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible);
+
+ if (most_recently_selected_tab == NULL || most_recently_selected_tab->LastFrameSelected < tab->LastFrameSelected)
+ most_recently_selected_tab = tab;
+ if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
+ found_selected_tab_id = true;
+
+ // Refresh tab width immediately, otherwise changes of style e.g. style.FramePadding.x would noticeably lag in the tab bar.
+ // Additionally, when using TabBarAddTab() to manipulate tab bar order we occasionally insert new tabs that don't have a width yet,
+ // and we cannot wait for the next BeginTabItem() call. We cannot compute this width within TabBarAddTab() because font size depends on the active window.
+ const char* tab_name = tab_bar->GetTabName(tab);
+ tab->WidthContents = TabItemCalcSize(tab_name, (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton) ? false : true).x;
+
+ width_total_contents += (tab_n > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f) + tab->WidthContents;
+
+ // Store data so we can build an array sorted by width if we need to shrink tabs down
+ width_sort_buffer[tab_n].Index = tab_n;
+ width_sort_buffer[tab_n].Width = tab->WidthContents;
+ }
+
+ // Compute width
+ const float width_avail = tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth();
+ float width_excess = (width_avail < width_total_contents) ? (width_total_contents - width_avail) : 0.0f;
+ if (width_excess > 0.0f && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown))
+ {
+ // If we don't have enough room, resize down the largest tabs first
+ if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1)
+ ImQsort(width_sort_buffer.Data, (size_t)width_sort_buffer.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabBarSortItem), TabBarSortItemComparer);
+ int tab_count_same_width = 1;
+ while (width_excess > 0.0f && tab_count_same_width < tab_bar->Tabs.Size)
+ {
+ while (tab_count_same_width < tab_bar->Tabs.Size && width_sort_buffer[0].Width == width_sort_buffer[tab_count_same_width].Width)
+ tab_count_same_width++;
+ float width_to_remove_per_tab_max = (tab_count_same_width < tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? (width_sort_buffer[0].Width - width_sort_buffer[tab_count_same_width].Width) : (width_sort_buffer[0].Width - 1.0f);
+ float width_to_remove_per_tab = ImMin(width_excess / tab_count_same_width, width_to_remove_per_tab_max);
+ for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_count_same_width; tab_n++)
+ width_sort_buffer[tab_n].Width -= width_to_remove_per_tab;
+ width_excess -= width_to_remove_per_tab * tab_count_same_width;
+ }
+ for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+ tab_bar->Tabs[width_sort_buffer[tab_n].Index].Width = (float)(int)width_sort_buffer[tab_n].Width;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ const float tab_max_width = TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth();
+ for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+ {
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+ tab->Width = ImMin(tab->WidthContents, tab_max_width);
+ }
+ }
+
+ // Layout all active tabs
+ float offset_x = 0.0f;
+ for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+ {
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+ tab->Offset = offset_x;
+ if (scroll_track_selected_tab_id == 0 && g.NavJustMovedToId == tab->ID)
+ scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab->ID;
+ offset_x += tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+ }
+ tab_bar->OffsetMax = ImMax(offset_x - g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, 0.0f);
+ tab_bar->OffsetNextTab = 0.0f;
+
+ // Horizontal scrolling buttons
+ const bool scrolling_buttons = (tab_bar->OffsetMax > tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons) && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll);
+ if (scrolling_buttons)
+ if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = TabBarScrollingButtons(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Max.x!
+ scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID;
+
+ // If we have lost the selected tab, select the next most recently active one
+ if (found_selected_tab_id == false)
+ tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
+ if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0 && most_recently_selected_tab != NULL)
+ scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = most_recently_selected_tab->ID;
+
+ // Lock in visible tab
+ tab_bar->VisibleTabId = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
+ tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false;
+
+ // Update scrolling
+ if (scroll_track_selected_tab_id)
+ if (ImGuiTabItem* scroll_track_selected_tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, scroll_track_selected_tab_id))
+ TabBarScrollToTab(tab_bar, scroll_track_selected_tab);
+ tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingAnim);
+ tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget);
+ const float scrolling_speed = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount) ? FLT_MAX : (g.IO.DeltaTime * g.FontSize * 70.0f);
+ if (tab_bar->ScrollingAnim != tab_bar->ScrollingTarget)
+ tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = ImLinearSweep(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget, scrolling_speed);
+
+ // Clear name buffers
+ if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
+ tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.resize(0);
+}
+
+// Dockables uses Name/ID in the global namespace. Non-dockable items use the ID stack.
+static ImU32 ImGui::TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label)
+{
+ if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode)
+ {
+ ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(label, 0);
+ KeepAliveID(id);
+ return id;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+ return window->GetID(label);
+ }
+}
+
+static float ImGui::TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ return g.FontSize * 20.0f;
+}
+
+ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id)
+{
+ if (tab_id != 0)
+ for (int n = 0; n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; n++)
+ if (tab_bar->Tabs[n].ID == tab_id)
+ return &tab_bar->Tabs[n];
+ return NULL;
+}
+
+// The *TabId fields be already set by the docking system _before_ the actual TabItem was created, so we clear them regardless.
+void ImGui::TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id)
+{
+ if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id))
+ tab_bar->Tabs.erase(tab);
+ if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0; }
+ if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0; }
+ if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; }
+}
+
+// Called on manual closure attempt
+void ImGui::TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab)
+{
+ if ((tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument))
+ {
+ // This will remove a frame of lag for selecting another tab on closure.
+ // However we don't run it in the case where the 'Unsaved' flag is set, so user gets a chance to fully undo the closure
+ tab->LastFrameVisible = -1;
+ tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
+ }
+ else if ((tab_bar->VisibleTabId != tab->ID) && (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument))
+ {
+ // Actually select before expecting closure
+ tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = tab->ID;
+ }
+}
+
+static float ImGui::TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, float scrolling)
+{
+ scrolling = ImMin(scrolling, tab_bar->OffsetMax - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth());
+ return ImMax(scrolling, 0.0f);
+}
+
+static void ImGui::TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ float margin = g.FontSize * 1.0f; // When to scroll to make Tab N+1 visible always make a bit of N visible to suggest more scrolling area (since we don't have a scrollbar)
+ int order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab);
+ float tab_x1 = tab->Offset + (order > 0 ? -margin : 0.0f);
+ float tab_x2 = tab->Offset + tab->Width + (order + 1 < tab_bar->Tabs.Size ? margin : 1.0f);
+ if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget > tab_x1)
+ tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x1;
+ if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget + tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() < tab_x2)
+ tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x2 - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth();
+}
+
+void ImGui::TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem* tab, int dir)
+{
+ IM_ASSERT(dir == -1 || dir == +1);
+ IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0);
+ tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = tab->ID;
+ tab_bar->ReorderRequestDir = dir;
+}
+
+static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ const ImVec2 arrow_button_size(g.FontSize - 2.0f, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+ const float scrolling_buttons_width = arrow_button_size.x * 2.0f;
+
+ const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ //window->DrawList->AddRect(ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));
+
+ const ImRect avail_bar_rect = tab_bar->BarRect;
+ bool want_clip_rect = !avail_bar_rect.Contains(ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(scrolling_buttons_width, 0.0f)));
+ if (want_clip_rect)
+ PushClipRect(tab_bar->BarRect.Min, tab_bar->BarRect.Max + ImVec2(g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, 0.0f), true);
+
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = NULL;
+
+ int select_dir = 0;
+ ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
+ arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;
+
+ PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
+ PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
+ const float backup_repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay;
+ const float backup_repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate;
+ g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = 0.250f;
+ g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = 0.200f;
+ window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
+ if (ArrowButtonEx("##<", ImGuiDir_Left, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
+ select_dir = -1;
+ window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width + arrow_button_size.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
+ if (ArrowButtonEx("##>", ImGuiDir_Right, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
+ select_dir = +1;
+ PopStyleColor(2);
+ g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = backup_repeat_rate;
+ g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = backup_repeat_delay;
+
+ if (want_clip_rect)
+ PopClipRect();
+
+ if (select_dir != 0)
+ if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_item = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->SelectedTabId))
+ {
+ int selected_order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab_item);
+ int target_order = selected_order + select_dir;
+ tab_to_select = &tab_bar->Tabs[(target_order >= 0 && target_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? target_order : selected_order]; // If we are at the end of the list, still scroll to make our tab visible
+ }
+ window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
+ tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x -= scrolling_buttons_width + 1.0f;
+
+ return tab_to_select;
+}
+
+static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+ // We use g.Style.FramePadding.y to match the square ArrowButton size
+ const float tab_list_popup_button_width = g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y;
+ const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - g.Style.FramePadding.y, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
+ tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x += tab_list_popup_button_width;
+
+ ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
+ arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;
+ PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
+ PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
+ bool open = BeginCombo("##v", NULL, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview);
+ PopStyleColor(2);
+
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = NULL;
+ if (open)
+ {
+ for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+ {
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+ const char* tab_name = tab_bar->GetTabName(tab);
+ if (Selectable(tab_name, tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID))
+ tab_to_select = tab;
+ }
+ EndCombo();
+ }
+
+ window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
+ return tab_to_select;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [BETA API] API may evolve! This code has been extracted out of the Docking branch,
+// and some of the construct which are not used in Master may be left here to facilitate merging.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - BeginTabItem()
+// - EndTabItem()
+// - TabItemEx() [Internal]
+// - SetTabItemClosed()
+// - TabItemCalcSize() [Internal]
+// - TabItemBackground() [Internal]
+// - TabItemLabelAndCloseButton() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::BeginTabItem(const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentTabBar.Size > 0 && "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
+ ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar.back();
+ bool ret = TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, p_open, flags);
+ if (ret && !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
+ {
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
+ g.CurrentWindow->IDStack.push_back(tab->ID); // We already hashed 'label' so push into the ID stack directly instead of doing another hash through PushID(label)
+ }
+ return ret;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndTabItem()
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
+ return;
+
+ IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentTabBar.Size > 0 && "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
+ ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar.back();
+ IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx >= 0 && "Needs to be called between BeginTabItem() and EndTabItem()");
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
+ if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
+ g.CurrentWindow->IDStack.pop_back();
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
+{
+ // Layout whole tab bar if not already done
+ if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
+ TabBarLayout(tab_bar);
+
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+ if (window->SkipItems)
+ return false;
+
+ const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+ const ImGuiID id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label);
+
+ // If the user called us with *p_open == false, we early out and don't render. We make a dummy call to ItemAdd() so that attempts to use a contextual popup menu with an implicit ID won't use an older ID.
+ if (p_open && !*p_open)
+ {
+ PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
+ ItemAdd(ImRect(), id);
+ PopItemFlag();
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ // Calculate tab contents size
+ ImVec2 size = TabItemCalcSize(label, p_open != NULL);
+
+ // Acquire tab data
+ ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, id);
+ bool tab_is_new = false;
+ if (tab == NULL)
+ {
+ tab_bar->Tabs.push_back(ImGuiTabItem());
+ tab = &tab_bar->Tabs.back();
+ tab->ID = id;
+ tab->Width = size.x;
+ tab_is_new = true;
+ }
+ tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = (short)tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab);
+ tab->WidthContents = size.x;
+
+ if (p_open == NULL)
+ flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton;
+
+ const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
+ const bool tab_bar_focused = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) != 0;
+ const bool tab_appearing = (tab->LastFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
+ tab->LastFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
+ tab->Flags = flags;
+
+ // Append name with zero-terminator
+ tab->NameOffset = tab_bar->TabsNames.size();
+ tab_bar->TabsNames.append(label, label + strlen(label) + 1);
+
+ // If we are not reorderable, always reset offset based on submission order.
+ // (We already handled layout and sizing using the previous known order, but sizing is not affected by order!)
+ if (!tab_appearing && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable))
+ {
+ tab->Offset = tab_bar->OffsetNextTab;
+ tab_bar->OffsetNextTab += tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+ }
+
+ // Update selected tab
+ if (tab_appearing && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs) && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0)
+ if (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0)
+ tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id; // New tabs gets activated
+
+ // Lock visibility
+ bool tab_contents_visible = (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == id);
+ if (tab_contents_visible)
+ tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = true;
+
+ // On the very first frame of a tab bar we let first tab contents be visible to minimize appearing glitches
+ if (!tab_contents_visible && tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar_appearing)
+ if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size == 1 && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs))
+ tab_contents_visible = true;
+
+ if (tab_appearing && !(tab_bar_appearing && !tab_is_new))
+ {
+ PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
+ ItemAdd(ImRect(), id);
+ PopItemFlag();
+ return tab_contents_visible;
+ }
+
+ if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == id)
+ tab->LastFrameSelected = g.FrameCount;
+
+ // Backup current layout position
+ const ImVec2 backup_main_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+
+ // Layout
+ size.x = tab->Width;
+ window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2((float)(int)tab->Offset - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, 0.0f);
+ ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+ ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
+
+ // We don't have CPU clipping primitives to clip the CloseButton (until it becomes a texture), so need to add an extra draw call (temporary in the case of vertical animation)
+ bool want_clip_rect = (bb.Min.x < tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x) || (bb.Max.x >= tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x);
+ if (want_clip_rect)
+ PushClipRect(ImVec2(ImMax(bb.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x), bb.Min.y - 1), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x, bb.Max.y), true);
+
+ ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+ if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+ {
+ if (want_clip_rect)
+ PopClipRect();
+ window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;
+ return tab_contents_visible;
+ }
+
+ // Click to Select a tab
+ ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
+ if (g.DragDropActive)
+ button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
+ bool hovered, held;
+ bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
+ hovered |= (g.HoveredId == id);
+ if (pressed || ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected) && !tab_contents_visible)) // SetSelected can only be passed on explicit tab bar
+ tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;
+
+ // Allow the close button to overlap unless we are dragging (in which case we don't want any overlapping tabs to be hovered)
+ if (!held)
+ SetItemAllowOverlap();
+
+ // Drag and drop: re-order tabs
+ if (held && !tab_appearing && IsMouseDragging(0))
+ {
+ if (!g.DragDropActive && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable))
+ {
+ // While moving a tab it will jump on the other side of the mouse, so we also test for MouseDelta.x
+ if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x < 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x < bb.Min.x)
+ {
+ if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)
+ TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(tab_bar, tab, -1);
+ }
+ else if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x > 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x > bb.Max.x)
+ {
+ if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)
+ TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(tab_bar, tab, +1);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+#if 0
+ if (hovered && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > 0.50f && bb.GetWidth() < tab->WidthContents)
+ {
+ // Enlarge tab display when hovering
+ bb.Max.x = bb.Min.x + (float)(int)ImLerp(bb.GetWidth(), tab->WidthContents, ImSaturate((g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer - 0.40f) * 6.0f));
+ display_draw_list = GetOverlayDrawList(window);
+ TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive));
+ }
+#endif
+
+ // Render tab shape
+ ImDrawList* display_draw_list = window->DrawList;
+ const ImU32 tab_col = GetColorU32((held || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_TabHovered : tab_contents_visible ? (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive) : (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_Tab : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused));
+ TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_col);
+ RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+
+ // Select with right mouse button. This is so the common idiom for context menu automatically highlight the current widget.
+ const bool hovered_unblocked = IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup);
+ if (hovered_unblocked && (IsMouseClicked(1) || IsMouseReleased(1)))
+ tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;
+
+ if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton)
+ flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton;
+
+ // Render tab label, process close button
+ const ImGuiID close_button_id = p_open ? window->GetID((void*)((intptr_t)id + 1)) : 0;
+ bool just_closed = TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_bar->FramePadding, label, id, close_button_id);
+ if (just_closed && p_open != NULL)
+ {
+ *p_open = false;
+ TabBarCloseTab(tab_bar, tab);
+ }
+
+ // Restore main window position so user can draw there
+ if (want_clip_rect)
+ PopClipRect();
+ window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;
+
+ // Tooltip (FIXME: Won't work over the close button because ItemOverlap systems messes up with HoveredIdTimer)
+ if (g.HoveredId == id && !held && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > 0.50f)
+ if (!(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip))
+ SetTooltip("%.*s", (int)(FindRenderedTextEnd(label) - label), label);
+
+ return tab_contents_visible;
+}
+
+// [Public] This is call is 100% optional but it allows to remove some one-frame glitches when a tab has been unexpectedly removed.
+// To use it to need to call the function SetTabItemClosed() after BeginTabBar() and before any call to BeginTabItem()
+void ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(const char* label)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ bool is_within_manual_tab_bar = (g.CurrentTabBar.Size > 0) && !(g.CurrentTabBar.back()->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode);
+ if (is_within_manual_tab_bar)
+ {
+ ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar.back();
+ IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->WantLayout); // Needs to be called AFTER BeginTabBar() and BEFORE the first call to BeginTabItem()
+ ImGuiID tab_id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label);
+ TabBarRemoveTab(tab_bar, tab_id);
+ }
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::TabItemCalcSize(const char* label, bool has_close_button)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ ImVec2 size = ImVec2(label_size.x + g.Style.FramePadding.x, label_size.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+ if (has_close_button)
+ size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + (g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + g.FontSize); // We use Y intentionally to fit the close button circle.
+ else
+ size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + 1.0f;
+ return ImVec2(ImMin(size.x, TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()), size.y);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImU32 col)
+{
+ // While rendering tabs, we trim 1 pixel off the top of our bounding box so they can fit within a regular frame height while looking "detached" from it.
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ const float width = bb.GetWidth();
+ IM_UNUSED(flags);
+ IM_ASSERT(width > 0.0f);
+ const float rounding = ImMax(0.0f, ImMin(g.Style.TabRounding, width * 0.5f - 1.0f));
+ const float y1 = bb.Min.y + 1.0f;
+ const float y2 = bb.Max.y - 1.0f;
+ draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, y2));
+ draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 6, 9);
+ draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 9, 12);
+ draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x, y2));
+ draw_list->PathFillConvex(col);
+ if (g.Style.TabBorderSize > 0.0f)
+ {
+ draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + 0.5f, y2));
+ draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding + 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 6, 9);
+ draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding - 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 9, 12);
+ draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - 0.5f, y2));
+ draw_list->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), false, g.Style.TabBorderSize);
+ }
+}
+
+// Render text label (with custom clipping) + Unsaved Document marker + Close Button logic
+// We tend to lock style.FramePadding for a given tab-bar, hence the 'frame_padding' parameter.
+bool ImGui::TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImVec2 frame_padding, const char* label, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiID close_button_id)
+{
+ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+ ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+ if (bb.GetWidth() <= 1.0f)
+ return false;
+
+ // Render text label (with clipping + alpha gradient) + unsaved marker
+ const char* TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER = "*";
+ ImRect text_pixel_clip_bb(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x, bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x, bb.Max.y);
+ if (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument)
+ {
+ text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= CalcTextSize(TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER, NULL, false).x;
+ ImVec2 unsaved_marker_pos(ImMin(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x + label_size.x + 2, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x), bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y + (float)(int)(-g.FontSize * 0.25f));
+ RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, unsaved_marker_pos, bb.Max - frame_padding, TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER, NULL, NULL);
+ }
+ ImRect text_ellipsis_clip_bb = text_pixel_clip_bb;
+
+ // Close Button
+ // We are relying on a subtle and confusing distinction between 'hovered' and 'g.HoveredId' which happens because we are using ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlapMode + SetItemAllowOverlap()
+ // 'hovered' will be true when hovering the Tab but NOT when hovering the close button
+ // 'g.HoveredId==id' will be true when hovering the Tab including when hovering the close button
+ // 'g.ActiveId==close_button_id' will be true when we are holding on the close button, in which case both hovered booleans are false
+ bool close_button_pressed = false;
+ bool close_button_visible = false;
+ if (close_button_id != 0)
+ if (g.HoveredId == tab_id || g.HoveredId == close_button_id || g.ActiveId == close_button_id)
+ close_button_visible = true;
+ if (close_button_visible)
+ {
+ ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup last_item_backup;
+ const float close_button_sz = g.FontSize * 0.5f;
+ if (CloseButton(close_button_id, ImVec2(bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x - close_button_sz, bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y + close_button_sz), close_button_sz))
+ close_button_pressed = true;
+ last_item_backup.Restore();
+
+ // Close with middle mouse button
+ if (!(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton) && IsMouseClicked(2))
+ close_button_pressed = true;
+
+ text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= close_button_sz * 2.0f;
+ }
+
+ // Label with ellipsis
+ // FIXME: This should be extracted into a helper but the use of text_pixel_clip_bb and !close_button_visible makes it tricky to abstract at the moment
+ const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+ if (label_size.x > text_ellipsis_clip_bb.GetWidth())
+ {
+ const int ellipsis_dot_count = 3;
+ const float ellipsis_width = (1.0f + 1.0f) * ellipsis_dot_count - 1.0f;
+ const char* label_end = NULL;
+ float label_size_clipped_x = g.Font->CalcTextSizeA(g.FontSize, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.GetWidth() - ellipsis_width + 1.0f, 0.0f, label, label_display_end, &label_end).x;
+ if (label_end == label && label_end < label_display_end) // Always display at least 1 character if there's no room for character + ellipsis
+ {
+ label_end = label + ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(label, label_display_end);
+ label_size_clipped_x = g.Font->CalcTextSizeA(g.FontSize, FLT_MAX, 0.0f, label, label_end).x;
+ }
+ while (label_end > label && ImCharIsBlankA(label_end[-1])) // Trim trailing space
+ {
+ label_end--;
+ label_size_clipped_x -= g.Font->CalcTextSizeA(g.FontSize, FLT_MAX, 0.0f, label_end, label_end + 1).x; // Ascii blanks are always 1 byte
+ }
+ RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, text_pixel_clip_bb.Min, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+ const float ellipsis_x = text_pixel_clip_bb.Min.x + label_size_clipped_x + 1.0f;
+ if (!close_button_visible && ellipsis_x + ellipsis_width <= bb.Max.x)
+ RenderPixelEllipsis(draw_list, ImVec2(ellipsis_x, text_pixel_clip_bb.Min.y), ellipsis_dot_count, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, text_pixel_clip_bb.Min, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max, label, label_display_end, &label_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+ }
+
+ return close_button_pressed;
+}
--- /dev/null
+// [DEAR IMGUI]
+// This is a slightly modified version of stb_rect_pack.h 0.99.
+// Those changes would need to be pushed into nothings/stb:
+// - Added STBRP__CDECL
+// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes.
+
+// stb_rect_pack.h - v0.99 - public domain - rectangle packing
+// Sean Barrett 2014
+//
+// Useful for e.g. packing rectangular textures into an atlas.
+// Does not do rotation.
+//
+// Not necessarily the awesomest packing method, but better than
+// the totally naive one in stb_truetype (which is primarily what
+// this is meant to replace).
+//
+// Has only had a few tests run, may have issues.
+//
+// More docs to come.
+//
+// No memory allocations; uses qsort() and assert() from stdlib.
+// Can override those by defining STBRP_SORT and STBRP_ASSERT.
+//
+// This library currently uses the Skyline Bottom-Left algorithm.
+//
+// Please note: better rectangle packers are welcome! Please
+// implement them to the same API, but with a different init
+// function.
+//
+// Credits
+//
+// Library
+// Sean Barrett
+// Minor features
+// Martins Mozeiko
+// github:IntellectualKitty
+//
+// Bugfixes / warning fixes
+// Jeremy Jaussaud
+//
+// Version history:
+//
+// 0.99 (2019-02-07) warning fixes
+// 0.11 (2017-03-03) return packing success/fail result
+// 0.10 (2016-10-25) remove cast-away-const to avoid warnings
+// 0.09 (2016-08-27) fix compiler warnings
+// 0.08 (2015-09-13) really fix bug with empty rects (w=0 or h=0)
+// 0.07 (2015-09-13) fix bug with empty rects (w=0 or h=0)
+// 0.06 (2015-04-15) added STBRP_SORT to allow replacing qsort
+// 0.05: added STBRP_ASSERT to allow replacing assert
+// 0.04: fixed minor bug in STBRP_LARGE_RECTS support
+// 0.01: initial release
+//
+// LICENSE
+//
+// See end of file for license information.
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// INCLUDE SECTION
+//
+
+#ifndef STB_INCLUDE_STB_RECT_PACK_H
+#define STB_INCLUDE_STB_RECT_PACK_H
+
+#define STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION 1
+
+#ifdef STBRP_STATIC
+#define STBRP_DEF static
+#else
+#define STBRP_DEF extern
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+typedef struct stbrp_context stbrp_context;
+typedef struct stbrp_node stbrp_node;
+typedef struct stbrp_rect stbrp_rect;
+
+#ifdef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
+typedef int stbrp_coord;
+#else
+typedef unsigned short stbrp_coord;
+#endif
+
+STBRP_DEF int stbrp_pack_rects (stbrp_context *context, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects);
+// Assign packed locations to rectangles. The rectangles are of type
+// 'stbrp_rect' defined below, stored in the array 'rects', and there
+// are 'num_rects' many of them.
+//
+// Rectangles which are successfully packed have the 'was_packed' flag
+// set to a non-zero value and 'x' and 'y' store the minimum location
+// on each axis (i.e. bottom-left in cartesian coordinates, top-left
+// if you imagine y increasing downwards). Rectangles which do not fit
+// have the 'was_packed' flag set to 0.
+//
+// You should not try to access the 'rects' array from another thread
+// while this function is running, as the function temporarily reorders
+// the array while it executes.
+//
+// To pack into another rectangle, you need to call stbrp_init_target
+// again. To continue packing into the same rectangle, you can call
+// this function again. Calling this multiple times with multiple rect
+// arrays will probably produce worse packing results than calling it
+// a single time with the full rectangle array, but the option is
+// available.
+//
+// The function returns 1 if all of the rectangles were successfully
+// packed and 0 otherwise.
+
+struct stbrp_rect
+{
+ // reserved for your use:
+ int id;
+
+ // input:
+ stbrp_coord w, h;
+
+ // output:
+ stbrp_coord x, y;
+ int was_packed; // non-zero if valid packing
+
+}; // 16 bytes, nominally
+
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_init_target (stbrp_context *context, int width, int height, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes);
+// Initialize a rectangle packer to:
+// pack a rectangle that is 'width' by 'height' in dimensions
+// using temporary storage provided by the array 'nodes', which is 'num_nodes' long
+//
+// You must call this function every time you start packing into a new target.
+//
+// There is no "shutdown" function. The 'nodes' memory must stay valid for
+// the following stbrp_pack_rects() call (or calls), but can be freed after
+// the call (or calls) finish.
+//
+// Note: to guarantee best results, either:
+// 1. make sure 'num_nodes' >= 'width'
+// or 2. call stbrp_allow_out_of_mem() defined below with 'allow_out_of_mem = 1'
+//
+// If you don't do either of the above things, widths will be quantized to multiples
+// of small integers to guarantee the algorithm doesn't run out of temporary storage.
+//
+// If you do #2, then the non-quantized algorithm will be used, but the algorithm
+// may run out of temporary storage and be unable to pack some rectangles.
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem (stbrp_context *context, int allow_out_of_mem);
+// Optionally call this function after init but before doing any packing to
+// change the handling of the out-of-temp-memory scenario, described above.
+// If you call init again, this will be reset to the default (false).
+
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_heuristic (stbrp_context *context, int heuristic);
+// Optionally select which packing heuristic the library should use. Different
+// heuristics will produce better/worse results for different data sets.
+// If you call init again, this will be reset to the default.
+
+enum
+{
+ STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default=0,
+ STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight = STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default,
+ STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight
+};
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// the details of the following structures don't matter to you, but they must
+// be visible so you can handle the memory allocations for them
+
+struct stbrp_node
+{
+ stbrp_coord x,y;
+ stbrp_node *next;
+};
+
+struct stbrp_context
+{
+ int width;
+ int height;
+ int align;
+ int init_mode;
+ int heuristic;
+ int num_nodes;
+ stbrp_node *active_head;
+ stbrp_node *free_head;
+ stbrp_node extra[2]; // we allocate two extra nodes so optimal user-node-count is 'width' not 'width+2'
+};
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// IMPLEMENTATION SECTION
+//
+
+#ifdef STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION
+#ifndef STBRP_SORT
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#define STBRP_SORT qsort
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STBRP_ASSERT
+#include <assert.h>
+#define STBRP_ASSERT assert
+#endif
+
+// [DEAR IMGUI] Added STBRP__CDECL
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#define STBRP__NOTUSED(v) (void)(v)
+#define STBRP__CDECL __cdecl
+#else
+#define STBRP__NOTUSED(v) (void)sizeof(v)
+#define STBRP__CDECL
+#endif
+
+enum
+{
+ STBRP__INIT_skyline = 1
+};
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_heuristic(stbrp_context *context, int heuristic)
+{
+ switch (context->init_mode) {
+ case STBRP__INIT_skyline:
+ STBRP_ASSERT(heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight || heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight);
+ context->heuristic = heuristic;
+ break;
+ default:
+ STBRP_ASSERT(0);
+ }
+}
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem(stbrp_context *context, int allow_out_of_mem)
+{
+ if (allow_out_of_mem)
+ // if it's ok to run out of memory, then don't bother aligning them;
+ // this gives better packing, but may fail due to OOM (even though
+ // the rectangles easily fit). @TODO a smarter approach would be to only
+ // quantize once we've hit OOM, then we could get rid of this parameter.
+ context->align = 1;
+ else {
+ // if it's not ok to run out of memory, then quantize the widths
+ // so that num_nodes is always enough nodes.
+ //
+ // I.e. num_nodes * align >= width
+ // align >= width / num_nodes
+ // align = ceil(width/num_nodes)
+
+ context->align = (context->width + context->num_nodes-1) / context->num_nodes;
+ }
+}
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_init_target(stbrp_context *context, int width, int height, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes)
+{
+ int i;
+#ifndef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
+ STBRP_ASSERT(width <= 0xffff && height <= 0xffff);
+#endif
+
+ for (i=0; i < num_nodes-1; ++i)
+ nodes[i].next = &nodes[i+1];
+ nodes[i].next = NULL;
+ context->init_mode = STBRP__INIT_skyline;
+ context->heuristic = STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default;
+ context->free_head = &nodes[0];
+ context->active_head = &context->extra[0];
+ context->width = width;
+ context->height = height;
+ context->num_nodes = num_nodes;
+ stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem(context, 0);
+
+ // node 0 is the full width, node 1 is the sentinel (lets us not store width explicitly)
+ context->extra[0].x = 0;
+ context->extra[0].y = 0;
+ context->extra[0].next = &context->extra[1];
+ context->extra[1].x = (stbrp_coord) width;
+#ifdef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
+ context->extra[1].y = (1<<30);
+#else
+ context->extra[1].y = 65535;
+#endif
+ context->extra[1].next = NULL;
+}
+
+// find minimum y position if it starts at x1
+static int stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(stbrp_context *c, stbrp_node *first, int x0, int width, int *pwaste)
+{
+ stbrp_node *node = first;
+ int x1 = x0 + width;
+ int min_y, visited_width, waste_area;
+
+ STBRP__NOTUSED(c);
+
+ STBRP_ASSERT(first->x <= x0);
+
+ #if 0
+ // skip in case we're past the node
+ while (node->next->x <= x0)
+ ++node;
+ #else
+ STBRP_ASSERT(node->next->x > x0); // we ended up handling this in the caller for efficiency
+ #endif
+
+ STBRP_ASSERT(node->x <= x0);
+
+ min_y = 0;
+ waste_area = 0;
+ visited_width = 0;
+ while (node->x < x1) {
+ if (node->y > min_y) {
+ // raise min_y higher.
+ // we've accounted for all waste up to min_y,
+ // but we'll now add more waste for everything we've visted
+ waste_area += visited_width * (node->y - min_y);
+ min_y = node->y;
+ // the first time through, visited_width might be reduced
+ if (node->x < x0)
+ visited_width += node->next->x - x0;
+ else
+ visited_width += node->next->x - node->x;
+ } else {
+ // add waste area
+ int under_width = node->next->x - node->x;
+ if (under_width + visited_width > width)
+ under_width = width - visited_width;
+ waste_area += under_width * (min_y - node->y);
+ visited_width += under_width;
+ }
+ node = node->next;
+ }
+
+ *pwaste = waste_area;
+ return min_y;
+}
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ int x,y;
+ stbrp_node **prev_link;
+} stbrp__findresult;
+
+static stbrp__findresult stbrp__skyline_find_best_pos(stbrp_context *c, int width, int height)
+{
+ int best_waste = (1<<30), best_x, best_y = (1 << 30);
+ stbrp__findresult fr;
+ stbrp_node **prev, *node, *tail, **best = NULL;
+
+ // align to multiple of c->align
+ width = (width + c->align - 1);
+ width -= width % c->align;
+ STBRP_ASSERT(width % c->align == 0);
+
+ node = c->active_head;
+ prev = &c->active_head;
+ while (node->x + width <= c->width) {
+ int y,waste;
+ y = stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(c, node, node->x, width, &waste);
+ if (c->heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight) { // actually just want to test BL
+ // bottom left
+ if (y < best_y) {
+ best_y = y;
+ best = prev;
+ }
+ } else {
+ // best-fit
+ if (y + height <= c->height) {
+ // can only use it if it first vertically
+ if (y < best_y || (y == best_y && waste < best_waste)) {
+ best_y = y;
+ best_waste = waste;
+ best = prev;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ prev = &node->next;
+ node = node->next;
+ }
+
+ best_x = (best == NULL) ? 0 : (*best)->x;
+
+ // if doing best-fit (BF), we also have to try aligning right edge to each node position
+ //
+ // e.g, if fitting
+ //
+ // ____________________
+ // |____________________|
+ //
+ // into
+ //
+ // | |
+ // | ____________|
+ // |____________|
+ //
+ // then right-aligned reduces waste, but bottom-left BL is always chooses left-aligned
+ //
+ // This makes BF take about 2x the time
+
+ if (c->heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight) {
+ tail = c->active_head;
+ node = c->active_head;
+ prev = &c->active_head;
+ // find first node that's admissible
+ while (tail->x < width)
+ tail = tail->next;
+ while (tail) {
+ int xpos = tail->x - width;
+ int y,waste;
+ STBRP_ASSERT(xpos >= 0);
+ // find the left position that matches this
+ while (node->next->x <= xpos) {
+ prev = &node->next;
+ node = node->next;
+ }
+ STBRP_ASSERT(node->next->x > xpos && node->x <= xpos);
+ y = stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(c, node, xpos, width, &waste);
+ if (y + height < c->height) {
+ if (y <= best_y) {
+ if (y < best_y || waste < best_waste || (waste==best_waste && xpos < best_x)) {
+ best_x = xpos;
+ STBRP_ASSERT(y <= best_y);
+ best_y = y;
+ best_waste = waste;
+ best = prev;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ tail = tail->next;
+ }
+ }
+
+ fr.prev_link = best;
+ fr.x = best_x;
+ fr.y = best_y;
+ return fr;
+}
+
+static stbrp__findresult stbrp__skyline_pack_rectangle(stbrp_context *context, int width, int height)
+{
+ // find best position according to heuristic
+ stbrp__findresult res = stbrp__skyline_find_best_pos(context, width, height);
+ stbrp_node *node, *cur;
+
+ // bail if:
+ // 1. it failed
+ // 2. the best node doesn't fit (we don't always check this)
+ // 3. we're out of memory
+ if (res.prev_link == NULL || res.y + height > context->height || context->free_head == NULL) {
+ res.prev_link = NULL;
+ return res;
+ }
+
+ // on success, create new node
+ node = context->free_head;
+ node->x = (stbrp_coord) res.x;
+ node->y = (stbrp_coord) (res.y + height);
+
+ context->free_head = node->next;
+
+ // insert the new node into the right starting point, and
+ // let 'cur' point to the remaining nodes needing to be
+ // stiched back in
+
+ cur = *res.prev_link;
+ if (cur->x < res.x) {
+ // preserve the existing one, so start testing with the next one
+ stbrp_node *next = cur->next;
+ cur->next = node;
+ cur = next;
+ } else {
+ *res.prev_link = node;
+ }
+
+ // from here, traverse cur and free the nodes, until we get to one
+ // that shouldn't be freed
+ while (cur->next && cur->next->x <= res.x + width) {
+ stbrp_node *next = cur->next;
+ // move the current node to the free list
+ cur->next = context->free_head;
+ context->free_head = cur;
+ cur = next;
+ }
+
+ // stitch the list back in
+ node->next = cur;
+
+ if (cur->x < res.x + width)
+ cur->x = (stbrp_coord) (res.x + width);
+
+#ifdef _DEBUG
+ cur = context->active_head;
+ while (cur->x < context->width) {
+ STBRP_ASSERT(cur->x < cur->next->x);
+ cur = cur->next;
+ }
+ STBRP_ASSERT(cur->next == NULL);
+
+ {
+ int count=0;
+ cur = context->active_head;
+ while (cur) {
+ cur = cur->next;
+ ++count;
+ }
+ cur = context->free_head;
+ while (cur) {
+ cur = cur->next;
+ ++count;
+ }
+ STBRP_ASSERT(count == context->num_nodes+2);
+ }
+#endif
+
+ return res;
+}
+
+// [DEAR IMGUI] Added STBRP__CDECL
+static int STBRP__CDECL rect_height_compare(const void *a, const void *b)
+{
+ const stbrp_rect *p = (const stbrp_rect *) a;
+ const stbrp_rect *q = (const stbrp_rect *) b;
+ if (p->h > q->h)
+ return -1;
+ if (p->h < q->h)
+ return 1;
+ return (p->w > q->w) ? -1 : (p->w < q->w);
+}
+
+// [DEAR IMGUI] Added STBRP__CDECL
+static int STBRP__CDECL rect_original_order(const void *a, const void *b)
+{
+ const stbrp_rect *p = (const stbrp_rect *) a;
+ const stbrp_rect *q = (const stbrp_rect *) b;
+ return (p->was_packed < q->was_packed) ? -1 : (p->was_packed > q->was_packed);
+}
+
+#ifdef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
+#define STBRP__MAXVAL 0xffffffff
+#else
+#define STBRP__MAXVAL 0xffff
+#endif
+
+STBRP_DEF int stbrp_pack_rects(stbrp_context *context, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
+{
+ int i, all_rects_packed = 1;
+
+ // we use the 'was_packed' field internally to allow sorting/unsorting
+ for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
+ rects[i].was_packed = i;
+ }
+
+ // sort according to heuristic
+ STBRP_SORT(rects, num_rects, sizeof(rects[0]), rect_height_compare);
+
+ for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
+ if (rects[i].w == 0 || rects[i].h == 0) {
+ rects[i].x = rects[i].y = 0; // empty rect needs no space
+ } else {
+ stbrp__findresult fr = stbrp__skyline_pack_rectangle(context, rects[i].w, rects[i].h);
+ if (fr.prev_link) {
+ rects[i].x = (stbrp_coord) fr.x;
+ rects[i].y = (stbrp_coord) fr.y;
+ } else {
+ rects[i].x = rects[i].y = STBRP__MAXVAL;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ // unsort
+ STBRP_SORT(rects, num_rects, sizeof(rects[0]), rect_original_order);
+
+ // set was_packed flags and all_rects_packed status
+ for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
+ rects[i].was_packed = !(rects[i].x == STBRP__MAXVAL && rects[i].y == STBRP__MAXVAL);
+ if (!rects[i].was_packed)
+ all_rects_packed = 0;
+ }
+
+ // return the all_rects_packed status
+ return all_rects_packed;
+}
+#endif
+
+/*
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
+Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
+this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
+the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
+use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
+of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
+so, subject to the following conditions:
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
+copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
+OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
+SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
+This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
+Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
+software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
+commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
+In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
+software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
+domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
+the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
+overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
+this software under copyright law.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
+ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+*/
--- /dev/null
+// [DEAR IMGUI]
+// This is a slightly modified version of stb_textedit.h 1.13.
+// Those changes would need to be pushed into nothings/stb:
+// - Fix in stb_textedit_discard_redo (see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/321)
+// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes.
+
+// stb_textedit.h - v1.13 - public domain - Sean Barrett
+// Development of this library was sponsored by RAD Game Tools
+//
+// This C header file implements the guts of a multi-line text-editing
+// widget; you implement display, word-wrapping, and low-level string
+// insertion/deletion, and stb_textedit will map user inputs into
+// insertions & deletions, plus updates to the cursor position,
+// selection state, and undo state.
+//
+// It is intended for use in games and other systems that need to build
+// their own custom widgets and which do not have heavy text-editing
+// requirements (this library is not recommended for use for editing large
+// texts, as its performance does not scale and it has limited undo).
+//
+// Non-trivial behaviors are modelled after Windows text controls.
+//
+//
+// LICENSE
+//
+// See end of file for license information.
+//
+//
+// DEPENDENCIES
+//
+// Uses the C runtime function 'memmove', which you can override
+// by defining STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove before the implementation.
+// Uses no other functions. Performs no runtime allocations.
+//
+//
+// VERSION HISTORY
+//
+// 1.13 (2019-02-07) fix bug in undo size management
+// 1.12 (2018-01-29) user can change STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE, fix redo to avoid crash
+// 1.11 (2017-03-03) fix HOME on last line, dragging off single-line textfield
+// 1.10 (2016-10-25) supress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
+// 1.9 (2016-08-27) customizable move-by-word
+// 1.8 (2016-04-02) better keyboard handling when mouse button is down
+// 1.7 (2015-09-13) change y range handling in case baseline is non-0
+// 1.6 (2015-04-15) allow STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove
+// 1.5 (2014-09-10) add support for secondary keys for OS X
+// 1.4 (2014-08-17) fix signed/unsigned warnings
+// 1.3 (2014-06-19) fix mouse clicking to round to nearest char boundary
+// 1.2 (2014-05-27) fix some RAD types that had crept into the new code
+// 1.1 (2013-12-15) move-by-word (requires STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE )
+// 1.0 (2012-07-26) improve documentation, initial public release
+// 0.3 (2012-02-24) bugfixes, single-line mode; insert mode
+// 0.2 (2011-11-28) fixes to undo/redo
+// 0.1 (2010-07-08) initial version
+//
+// ADDITIONAL CONTRIBUTORS
+//
+// Ulf Winklemann: move-by-word in 1.1
+// Fabian Giesen: secondary key inputs in 1.5
+// Martins Mozeiko: STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove in 1.6
+//
+// Bugfixes:
+// Scott Graham
+// Daniel Keller
+// Omar Cornut
+// Dan Thompson
+//
+// USAGE
+//
+// This file behaves differently depending on what symbols you define
+// before including it.
+//
+//
+// Header-file mode:
+//
+// If you do not define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION before including this,
+// it will operate in "header file" mode. In this mode, it declares a
+// single public symbol, STB_TexteditState, which encapsulates the current
+// state of a text widget (except for the string, which you will store
+// separately).
+//
+// To compile in this mode, you must define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE to a
+// primitive type that defines a single character (e.g. char, wchar_t, etc).
+//
+// To save space or increase undo-ability, you can optionally define the
+// following things that are used by the undo system:
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE small int type encoding a valid cursor position
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT the number of undo states to allow
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT the number of characters to store in the undo buffer
+//
+// If you don't define these, they are set to permissive types and
+// moderate sizes. The undo system does no memory allocations, so
+// it grows STB_TexteditState by the worst-case storage which is (in bytes):
+//
+// [4 + 3 * sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE)] * STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATE_COUNT
+// + sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE) * STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHAR_COUNT
+//
+//
+// Implementation mode:
+//
+// If you define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION before including this, it
+// will compile the implementation of the text edit widget, depending
+// on a large number of symbols which must be defined before the include.
+//
+// The implementation is defined only as static functions. You will then
+// need to provide your own APIs in the same file which will access the
+// static functions.
+//
+// The basic concept is that you provide a "string" object which
+// behaves like an array of characters. stb_textedit uses indices to
+// refer to positions in the string, implicitly representing positions
+// in the displayed textedit. This is true for both plain text and
+// rich text; even with rich text stb_truetype interacts with your
+// code as if there was an array of all the displayed characters.
+//
+// Symbols that must be the same in header-file and implementation mode:
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE the character type
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE small type that is a valid cursor position
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT the number of undo states to allow
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT the number of characters to store in the undo buffer
+//
+// Symbols you must define for implementation mode:
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING the type of object representing a string being edited,
+// typically this is a wrapper object with other data you need
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(obj) the length of the string (ideally O(1))
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r,obj,n) returns the results of laying out a line of characters
+// starting from character #n (see discussion below)
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(obj,n,i) returns the pixel delta from the xpos of the i'th character
+// to the xpos of the i+1'th char for a line of characters
+// starting at character #n (i.e. accounts for kerning
+// with previous char)
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(k) maps a keyboard input to an insertable character
+// (return type is int, -1 means not valid to insert)
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(obj,i) returns the i'th character of obj, 0-based
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE the character returned by _GETCHAR() we recognize
+// as manually wordwrapping for end-of-line positioning
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(obj,i,n) delete n characters starting at i
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(obj,i,c*,n) insert n characters at i (pointed to by STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE*)
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT a power of two that is or'd in to a keyboard input to represent the shift key
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT keyboard input to move cursor left
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT keyboard input to move cursor right
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP keyboard input to move cursor up
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN keyboard input to move cursor down
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART keyboard input to move cursor to start of line // e.g. HOME
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND keyboard input to move cursor to end of line // e.g. END
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART keyboard input to move cursor to start of text // e.g. ctrl-HOME
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND keyboard input to move cursor to end of text // e.g. ctrl-END
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO keyboard input to perform undo
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO keyboard input to perform redo
+//
+// Optional:
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT keyboard input to toggle insert mode
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE(ch) true if character is whitespace (e.g. 'isspace'),
+// required for default WORDLEFT/WORDRIGHT handlers
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(obj,i) custom handler for WORDLEFT, returns index to move cursor to
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(obj,i) custom handler for WORDRIGHT, returns index to move cursor to
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT keyboard input to move cursor left one word // e.g. ctrl-LEFT
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT keyboard input to move cursor right one word // e.g. ctrl-RIGHT
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
+//
+// Todo:
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP keyboard input to move cursor up a page
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN keyboard input to move cursor down a page
+//
+// Keyboard input must be encoded as a single integer value; e.g. a character code
+// and some bitflags that represent shift states. to simplify the interface, SHIFT must
+// be a bitflag, so we can test the shifted state of cursor movements to allow selection,
+// i.e. (STB_TEXTED_K_RIGHT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) should be shifted right-arrow.
+//
+// You can encode other things, such as CONTROL or ALT, in additional bits, and
+// then test for their presence in e.g. STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT. For example,
+// my Windows implementations add an additional CONTROL bit, and an additional KEYDOWN
+// bit. Then all of the STB_TEXTEDIT_K_ values bitwise-or in the KEYDOWN bit,
+// and I pass both WM_KEYDOWN and WM_CHAR events to the "key" function in the
+// API below. The control keys will only match WM_KEYDOWN events because of the
+// keydown bit I add, and STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT only tests for the KEYDOWN
+// bit so it only decodes WM_CHAR events.
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW returns information about the shape of one displayed
+// row of characters assuming they start on the i'th character--the width and
+// the height and the number of characters consumed. This allows this library
+// to traverse the entire layout incrementally. You need to compute word-wrapping
+// here.
+//
+// Each textfield keeps its own insert mode state, which is not how normal
+// applications work. To keep an app-wide insert mode, update/copy the
+// "insert_mode" field of STB_TexteditState before/after calling API functions.
+//
+// API
+//
+// void stb_textedit_initialize_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
+//
+// void stb_textedit_click(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
+// void stb_textedit_drag(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
+// int stb_textedit_cut(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+// int stb_textedit_paste(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int len)
+// void stb_textedit_key(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXEDIT_KEYTYPE key)
+//
+// Each of these functions potentially updates the string and updates the
+// state.
+//
+// initialize_state:
+// set the textedit state to a known good default state when initially
+// constructing the textedit.
+//
+// click:
+// call this with the mouse x,y on a mouse down; it will update the cursor
+// and reset the selection start/end to the cursor point. the x,y must
+// be relative to the text widget, with (0,0) being the top left.
+//
+// drag:
+// call this with the mouse x,y on a mouse drag/up; it will update the
+// cursor and the selection end point
+//
+// cut:
+// call this to delete the current selection; returns true if there was
+// one. you should FIRST copy the current selection to the system paste buffer.
+// (To copy, just copy the current selection out of the string yourself.)
+//
+// paste:
+// call this to paste text at the current cursor point or over the current
+// selection if there is one.
+//
+// key:
+// call this for keyboard inputs sent to the textfield. you can use it
+// for "key down" events or for "translated" key events. if you need to
+// do both (as in Win32), or distinguish Unicode characters from control
+// inputs, set a high bit to distinguish the two; then you can define the
+// various definitions like STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT have the is-key-event bit
+// set, and make STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOCHAR check that the is-key-event bit is
+// clear. STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE defaults to int, but you can #define it to
+// anything other type you wante before including.
+//
+//
+// When rendering, you can read the cursor position and selection state from
+// the STB_TexteditState.
+//
+//
+// Notes:
+//
+// This is designed to be usable in IMGUI, so it allows for the possibility of
+// running in an IMGUI that has NOT cached the multi-line layout. For this
+// reason, it provides an interface that is compatible with computing the
+// layout incrementally--we try to make sure we make as few passes through
+// as possible. (For example, to locate the mouse pointer in the text, we
+// could define functions that return the X and Y positions of characters
+// and binary search Y and then X, but if we're doing dynamic layout this
+// will run the layout algorithm many times, so instead we manually search
+// forward in one pass. Similar logic applies to e.g. up-arrow and
+// down-arrow movement.)
+//
+// If it's run in a widget that *has* cached the layout, then this is less
+// efficient, but it's not horrible on modern computers. But you wouldn't
+// want to edit million-line files with it.
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+//// Header-file mode
+////
+////
+
+#ifndef INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
+#define INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// STB_TexteditState
+//
+// Definition of STB_TexteditState which you should store
+// per-textfield; it includes cursor position, selection state,
+// and undo state.
+//
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT 99
+#endif
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT 999
+#endif
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE int
+#endif
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE int
+#endif
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ // private data
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE where;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE insert_length;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE delete_length;
+ int char_storage;
+} StbUndoRecord;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ // private data
+ StbUndoRecord undo_rec [STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT];
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE undo_char[STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT];
+ short undo_point, redo_point;
+ int undo_char_point, redo_char_point;
+} StbUndoState;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ /////////////////////
+ //
+ // public data
+ //
+
+ int cursor;
+ // position of the text cursor within the string
+
+ int select_start; // selection start point
+ int select_end;
+ // selection start and end point in characters; if equal, no selection.
+ // note that start may be less than or greater than end (e.g. when
+ // dragging the mouse, start is where the initial click was, and you
+ // can drag in either direction)
+
+ unsigned char insert_mode;
+ // each textfield keeps its own insert mode state. to keep an app-wide
+ // insert mode, copy this value in/out of the app state
+
+ /////////////////////
+ //
+ // private data
+ //
+ unsigned char cursor_at_end_of_line; // not implemented yet
+ unsigned char initialized;
+ unsigned char has_preferred_x;
+ unsigned char single_line;
+ unsigned char padding1, padding2, padding3;
+ float preferred_x; // this determines where the cursor up/down tries to seek to along x
+ StbUndoState undostate;
+} STB_TexteditState;
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// StbTexteditRow
+//
+// Result of layout query, used by stb_textedit to determine where
+// the text in each row is.
+
+// result of layout query
+typedef struct
+{
+ float x0,x1; // starting x location, end x location (allows for align=right, etc)
+ float baseline_y_delta; // position of baseline relative to previous row's baseline
+ float ymin,ymax; // height of row above and below baseline
+ int num_chars;
+} StbTexteditRow;
+#endif //INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+//// Implementation mode
+////
+////
+
+
+// implementation isn't include-guarded, since it might have indirectly
+// included just the "header" portion
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove
+#include <string.h>
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove memmove
+#endif
+
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Mouse input handling
+//
+
+// traverse the layout to locate the nearest character to a display position
+static int stb_text_locate_coord(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, float x, float y)
+{
+ StbTexteditRow r;
+ int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ float base_y = 0, prev_x;
+ int i=0, k;
+
+ r.x0 = r.x1 = 0;
+ r.ymin = r.ymax = 0;
+ r.num_chars = 0;
+
+ // search rows to find one that straddles 'y'
+ while (i < n) {
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
+ if (r.num_chars <= 0)
+ return n;
+
+ if (i==0 && y < base_y + r.ymin)
+ return 0;
+
+ if (y < base_y + r.ymax)
+ break;
+
+ i += r.num_chars;
+ base_y += r.baseline_y_delta;
+ }
+
+ // below all text, return 'after' last character
+ if (i >= n)
+ return n;
+
+ // check if it's before the beginning of the line
+ if (x < r.x0)
+ return i;
+
+ // check if it's before the end of the line
+ if (x < r.x1) {
+ // search characters in row for one that straddles 'x'
+ prev_x = r.x0;
+ for (k=0; k < r.num_chars; ++k) {
+ float w = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, i, k);
+ if (x < prev_x+w) {
+ if (x < prev_x+w/2)
+ return k+i;
+ else
+ return k+i+1;
+ }
+ prev_x += w;
+ }
+ // shouldn't happen, but if it does, fall through to end-of-line case
+ }
+
+ // if the last character is a newline, return that. otherwise return 'after' the last character
+ if (STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, i+r.num_chars-1) == STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+ return i+r.num_chars-1;
+ else
+ return i+r.num_chars;
+}
+
+// API click: on mouse down, move the cursor to the clicked location, and reset the selection
+static void stb_textedit_click(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
+{
+ // In single-line mode, just always make y = 0. This lets the drag keep working if the mouse
+ // goes off the top or bottom of the text
+ if( state->single_line )
+ {
+ StbTexteditRow r;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
+ y = r.ymin;
+ }
+
+ state->cursor = stb_text_locate_coord(str, x, y);
+ state->select_start = state->cursor;
+ state->select_end = state->cursor;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+}
+
+// API drag: on mouse drag, move the cursor and selection endpoint to the clicked location
+static void stb_textedit_drag(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
+{
+ int p = 0;
+
+ // In single-line mode, just always make y = 0. This lets the drag keep working if the mouse
+ // goes off the top or bottom of the text
+ if( state->single_line )
+ {
+ StbTexteditRow r;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
+ y = r.ymin;
+ }
+
+ if (state->select_start == state->select_end)
+ state->select_start = state->cursor;
+
+ p = stb_text_locate_coord(str, x, y);
+ state->cursor = state->select_end = p;
+}
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Keyboard input handling
+//
+
+// forward declarations
+static void stb_text_undo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state);
+static void stb_text_redo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state);
+static void stb_text_makeundo_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length);
+static void stb_text_makeundo_insert(STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length);
+static void stb_text_makeundo_replace(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int old_length, int new_length);
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ float x,y; // position of n'th character
+ float height; // height of line
+ int first_char, length; // first char of row, and length
+ int prev_first; // first char of previous row
+} StbFindState;
+
+// find the x/y location of a character, and remember info about the previous row in
+// case we get a move-up event (for page up, we'll have to rescan)
+static void stb_textedit_find_charpos(StbFindState *find, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int n, int single_line)
+{
+ StbTexteditRow r;
+ int prev_start = 0;
+ int z = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ int i=0, first;
+
+ if (n == z) {
+ // if it's at the end, then find the last line -- simpler than trying to
+ // explicitly handle this case in the regular code
+ if (single_line) {
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
+ find->y = 0;
+ find->first_char = 0;
+ find->length = z;
+ find->height = r.ymax - r.ymin;
+ find->x = r.x1;
+ } else {
+ find->y = 0;
+ find->x = 0;
+ find->height = 1;
+ while (i < z) {
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
+ prev_start = i;
+ i += r.num_chars;
+ }
+ find->first_char = i;
+ find->length = 0;
+ find->prev_first = prev_start;
+ }
+ return;
+ }
+
+ // search rows to find the one that straddles character n
+ find->y = 0;
+
+ for(;;) {
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
+ if (n < i + r.num_chars)
+ break;
+ prev_start = i;
+ i += r.num_chars;
+ find->y += r.baseline_y_delta;
+ }
+
+ find->first_char = first = i;
+ find->length = r.num_chars;
+ find->height = r.ymax - r.ymin;
+ find->prev_first = prev_start;
+
+ // now scan to find xpos
+ find->x = r.x0;
+ for (i=0; first+i < n; ++i)
+ find->x += STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, first, i);
+}
+
+#define STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(s) ((s)->select_start != (s)->select_end)
+
+// make the selection/cursor state valid if client altered the string
+static void stb_textedit_clamp(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+ if (state->select_start > n) state->select_start = n;
+ if (state->select_end > n) state->select_end = n;
+ // if clamping forced them to be equal, move the cursor to match
+ if (state->select_start == state->select_end)
+ state->cursor = state->select_start;
+ }
+ if (state->cursor > n) state->cursor = n;
+}
+
+// delete characters while updating undo
+static void stb_textedit_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int len)
+{
+ stb_text_makeundo_delete(str, state, where, len);
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, where, len);
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+}
+
+// delete the section
+static void stb_textedit_delete_selection(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+ if (state->select_start < state->select_end) {
+ stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->select_start, state->select_end - state->select_start);
+ state->select_end = state->cursor = state->select_start;
+ } else {
+ stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->select_end, state->select_start - state->select_end);
+ state->select_start = state->cursor = state->select_end;
+ }
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ }
+}
+
+// canoncialize the selection so start <= end
+static void stb_textedit_sortselection(STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ if (state->select_end < state->select_start) {
+ int temp = state->select_end;
+ state->select_end = state->select_start;
+ state->select_start = temp;
+ }
+}
+
+// move cursor to first character of selection
+static void stb_textedit_move_to_first(STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+ stb_textedit_sortselection(state);
+ state->cursor = state->select_start;
+ state->select_end = state->select_start;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ }
+}
+
+// move cursor to last character of selection
+static void stb_textedit_move_to_last(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+ stb_textedit_sortselection(state);
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ state->cursor = state->select_end;
+ state->select_start = state->select_end;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ }
+}
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE
+static int is_word_boundary( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int idx )
+{
+ return idx > 0 ? (STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE( STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str,idx-1) ) && !STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE( STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, idx) ) ) : 1;
+}
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT
+static int stb_textedit_move_to_word_previous( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int c )
+{
+ --c; // always move at least one character
+ while( c >= 0 && !is_word_boundary( str, c ) )
+ --c;
+
+ if( c < 0 )
+ c = 0;
+
+ return c;
+}
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT stb_textedit_move_to_word_previous
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT
+static int stb_textedit_move_to_word_next( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int c )
+{
+ const int len = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ ++c; // always move at least one character
+ while( c < len && !is_word_boundary( str, c ) )
+ ++c;
+
+ if( c > len )
+ c = len;
+
+ return c;
+}
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT stb_textedit_move_to_word_next
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+// update selection and cursor to match each other
+static void stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ if (!STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ state->select_start = state->select_end = state->cursor;
+ else
+ state->cursor = state->select_end;
+}
+
+// API cut: delete selection
+static int stb_textedit_cut(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+ stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); // implicitly clamps
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ return 1;
+ }
+ return 0;
+}
+
+// API paste: replace existing selection with passed-in text
+static int stb_textedit_paste_internal(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int len)
+{
+ // if there's a selection, the paste should delete it
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state);
+ // try to insert the characters
+ if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, text, len)) {
+ stb_text_makeundo_insert(state, state->cursor, len);
+ state->cursor += len;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ return 1;
+ }
+ // remove the undo since we didn't actually insert the characters
+ if (state->undostate.undo_point)
+ --state->undostate.undo_point;
+ return 0;
+}
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE int
+#endif
+
+// API key: process a keyboard input
+static void stb_textedit_key(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE key)
+{
+retry:
+ switch (key) {
+ default: {
+ int c = STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(key);
+ if (c > 0) {
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE ch = (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE) c;
+
+ // can't add newline in single-line mode
+ if (c == '\n' && state->single_line)
+ break;
+
+ if (state->insert_mode && !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state) && state->cursor < STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str)) {
+ stb_text_makeundo_replace(str, state, state->cursor, 1, 1);
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, state->cursor, 1);
+ if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, &ch, 1)) {
+ ++state->cursor;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ }
+ } else {
+ stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); // implicitly clamps
+ if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, &ch, 1)) {
+ stb_text_makeundo_insert(state, state->cursor, 1);
+ ++state->cursor;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT:
+ state->insert_mode = !state->insert_mode;
+ break;
+#endif
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO:
+ stb_text_undo(str, state);
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO:
+ stb_text_redo(str, state);
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT:
+ // if currently there's a selection, move cursor to start of selection
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+ else
+ if (state->cursor > 0)
+ --state->cursor;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT:
+ // if currently there's a selection, move cursor to end of selection
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state);
+ else
+ ++state->cursor;
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+ // move selection left
+ if (state->select_end > 0)
+ --state->select_end;
+ state->cursor = state->select_end;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT:
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+ else {
+ state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(str, state->cursor);
+ stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ if( !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION( state ) )
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+
+ state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(str, state->cursor);
+ state->select_end = state->cursor;
+
+ stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
+ break;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT:
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state);
+ else {
+ state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(str, state->cursor);
+ stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ if( !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION( state ) )
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+
+ state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(str, state->cursor);
+ state->select_end = state->cursor;
+
+ stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
+ break;
+#endif
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+ // move selection right
+ ++state->select_end;
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ state->cursor = state->select_end;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN:
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
+ StbFindState find;
+ StbTexteditRow row;
+ int i, sel = (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) != 0;
+
+ if (state->single_line) {
+ // on windows, up&down in single-line behave like left&right
+ key = STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+ goto retry;
+ }
+
+ if (sel)
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+ else if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ stb_textedit_move_to_last(str,state);
+
+ // compute current position of cursor point
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ stb_textedit_find_charpos(&find, str, state->cursor, state->single_line);
+
+ // now find character position down a row
+ if (find.length) {
+ float goal_x = state->has_preferred_x ? state->preferred_x : find.x;
+ float x;
+ int start = find.first_char + find.length;
+ state->cursor = start;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&row, str, state->cursor);
+ x = row.x0;
+ for (i=0; i < row.num_chars; ++i) {
+ float dx = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, start, i);
+ #ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE
+ if (dx == STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE)
+ break;
+ #endif
+ x += dx;
+ if (x > goal_x)
+ break;
+ ++state->cursor;
+ }
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+
+ state->has_preferred_x = 1;
+ state->preferred_x = goal_x;
+
+ if (sel)
+ state->select_end = state->cursor;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP:
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
+ StbFindState find;
+ StbTexteditRow row;
+ int i, sel = (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) != 0;
+
+ if (state->single_line) {
+ // on windows, up&down become left&right
+ key = STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT | (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+ goto retry;
+ }
+
+ if (sel)
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+ else if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+
+ // compute current position of cursor point
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ stb_textedit_find_charpos(&find, str, state->cursor, state->single_line);
+
+ // can only go up if there's a previous row
+ if (find.prev_first != find.first_char) {
+ // now find character position up a row
+ float goal_x = state->has_preferred_x ? state->preferred_x : find.x;
+ float x;
+ state->cursor = find.prev_first;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&row, str, state->cursor);
+ x = row.x0;
+ for (i=0; i < row.num_chars; ++i) {
+ float dx = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, find.prev_first, i);
+ #ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE
+ if (dx == STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE)
+ break;
+ #endif
+ x += dx;
+ if (x > goal_x)
+ break;
+ ++state->cursor;
+ }
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+
+ state->has_preferred_x = 1;
+ state->preferred_x = goal_x;
+
+ if (sel)
+ state->select_end = state->cursor;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE:
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ stb_textedit_delete_selection(str, state);
+ else {
+ int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ if (state->cursor < n)
+ stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->cursor, 1);
+ }
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE:
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+ stb_textedit_delete_selection(str, state);
+ else {
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ if (state->cursor > 0) {
+ stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->cursor-1, 1);
+ --state->cursor;
+ }
+ }
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2:
+#endif
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART:
+ state->cursor = state->select_start = state->select_end = 0;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2:
+#endif
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND:
+ state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ state->select_start = state->select_end = 0;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+#endif
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+ state->cursor = state->select_end = 0;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+#endif
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+ state->cursor = state->select_end = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2:
+#endif
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART:
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+ if (state->single_line)
+ state->cursor = 0;
+ else while (state->cursor > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor-1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+ --state->cursor;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2:
+#endif
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND: {
+ int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+ if (state->single_line)
+ state->cursor = n;
+ else while (state->cursor < n && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+ ++state->cursor;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+ }
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+#endif
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+ if (state->single_line)
+ state->cursor = 0;
+ else while (state->cursor > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor-1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+ --state->cursor;
+ state->select_end = state->cursor;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+#endif
+ case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
+ int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+ stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+ stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+ if (state->single_line)
+ state->cursor = n;
+ else while (state->cursor < n && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+ ++state->cursor;
+ state->select_end = state->cursor;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ break;
+ }
+
+// @TODO:
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP - move cursor up a page
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN - move cursor down a page
+ }
+}
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Undo processing
+//
+// @OPTIMIZE: the undo/redo buffer should be circular
+
+static void stb_textedit_flush_redo(StbUndoState *state)
+{
+ state->redo_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT;
+ state->redo_char_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT;
+}
+
+// discard the oldest entry in the undo list
+static void stb_textedit_discard_undo(StbUndoState *state)
+{
+ if (state->undo_point > 0) {
+ // if the 0th undo state has characters, clean those up
+ if (state->undo_rec[0].char_storage >= 0) {
+ int n = state->undo_rec[0].insert_length, i;
+ // delete n characters from all other records
+ state->undo_char_point -= n;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_char, state->undo_char + n, (size_t) (state->undo_char_point*sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE)));
+ for (i=0; i < state->undo_point; ++i)
+ if (state->undo_rec[i].char_storage >= 0)
+ state->undo_rec[i].char_storage -= n; // @OPTIMIZE: get rid of char_storage and infer it
+ }
+ --state->undo_point;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_rec, state->undo_rec+1, (size_t) (state->undo_point*sizeof(state->undo_rec[0])));
+ }
+}
+
+// discard the oldest entry in the redo list--it's bad if this
+// ever happens, but because undo & redo have to store the actual
+// characters in different cases, the redo character buffer can
+// fill up even though the undo buffer didn't
+static void stb_textedit_discard_redo(StbUndoState *state)
+{
+ int k = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT-1;
+
+ if (state->redo_point <= k) {
+ // if the k'th undo state has characters, clean those up
+ if (state->undo_rec[k].char_storage >= 0) {
+ int n = state->undo_rec[k].insert_length, i;
+ // move the remaining redo character data to the end of the buffer
+ state->redo_char_point += n;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_char + state->redo_char_point, state->undo_char + state->redo_char_point-n, (size_t) ((STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT - state->redo_char_point)*sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE)));
+ // adjust the position of all the other records to account for above memmove
+ for (i=state->redo_point; i < k; ++i)
+ if (state->undo_rec[i].char_storage >= 0)
+ state->undo_rec[i].char_storage += n;
+ }
+ // now move all the redo records towards the end of the buffer; the first one is at 'redo_point'
+ // {DEAR IMGUI]
+ size_t move_size = (size_t)((STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT - state->redo_point - 1) * sizeof(state->undo_rec[0]));
+ const char* buf_begin = (char*)state->undo_rec; (void)buf_begin;
+ const char* buf_end = (char*)state->undo_rec + sizeof(state->undo_rec); (void)buf_end;
+ IM_ASSERT(((char*)(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point)) >= buf_begin);
+ IM_ASSERT(((char*)(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point + 1) + move_size) <= buf_end);
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point+1, state->undo_rec + state->redo_point, move_size);
+
+ // now move redo_point to point to the new one
+ ++state->redo_point;
+ }
+}
+
+static StbUndoRecord *stb_text_create_undo_record(StbUndoState *state, int numchars)
+{
+ // any time we create a new undo record, we discard redo
+ stb_textedit_flush_redo(state);
+
+ // if we have no free records, we have to make room, by sliding the
+ // existing records down
+ if (state->undo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
+ stb_textedit_discard_undo(state);
+
+ // if the characters to store won't possibly fit in the buffer, we can't undo
+ if (numchars > STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) {
+ state->undo_point = 0;
+ state->undo_char_point = 0;
+ return NULL;
+ }
+
+ // if we don't have enough free characters in the buffer, we have to make room
+ while (state->undo_char_point + numchars > STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT)
+ stb_textedit_discard_undo(state);
+
+ return &state->undo_rec[state->undo_point++];
+}
+
+static STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *stb_text_createundo(StbUndoState *state, int pos, int insert_len, int delete_len)
+{
+ StbUndoRecord *r = stb_text_create_undo_record(state, insert_len);
+ if (r == NULL)
+ return NULL;
+
+ r->where = pos;
+ r->insert_length = (STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE) insert_len;
+ r->delete_length = (STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE) delete_len;
+
+ if (insert_len == 0) {
+ r->char_storage = -1;
+ return NULL;
+ } else {
+ r->char_storage = state->undo_char_point;
+ state->undo_char_point += insert_len;
+ return &state->undo_char[r->char_storage];
+ }
+}
+
+static void stb_text_undo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ StbUndoState *s = &state->undostate;
+ StbUndoRecord u, *r;
+ if (s->undo_point == 0)
+ return;
+
+ // we need to do two things: apply the undo record, and create a redo record
+ u = s->undo_rec[s->undo_point-1];
+ r = &s->undo_rec[s->redo_point-1];
+ r->char_storage = -1;
+
+ r->insert_length = u.delete_length;
+ r->delete_length = u.insert_length;
+ r->where = u.where;
+
+ if (u.delete_length) {
+ // if the undo record says to delete characters, then the redo record will
+ // need to re-insert the characters that get deleted, so we need to store
+ // them.
+
+ // there are three cases:
+ // there's enough room to store the characters
+ // characters stored for *redoing* don't leave room for redo
+ // characters stored for *undoing* don't leave room for redo
+ // if the last is true, we have to bail
+
+ if (s->undo_char_point + u.delete_length >= STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) {
+ // the undo records take up too much character space; there's no space to store the redo characters
+ r->insert_length = 0;
+ } else {
+ int i;
+
+ // there's definitely room to store the characters eventually
+ while (s->undo_char_point + u.delete_length > s->redo_char_point) {
+ // should never happen:
+ if (s->redo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
+ return;
+ // there's currently not enough room, so discard a redo record
+ stb_textedit_discard_redo(s);
+ }
+ r = &s->undo_rec[s->redo_point-1];
+
+ r->char_storage = s->redo_char_point - u.delete_length;
+ s->redo_char_point = s->redo_char_point - u.delete_length;
+
+ // now save the characters
+ for (i=0; i < u.delete_length; ++i)
+ s->undo_char[r->char_storage + i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, u.where + i);
+ }
+
+ // now we can carry out the deletion
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, u.where, u.delete_length);
+ }
+
+ // check type of recorded action:
+ if (u.insert_length) {
+ // easy case: was a deletion, so we need to insert n characters
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, u.where, &s->undo_char[u.char_storage], u.insert_length);
+ s->undo_char_point -= u.insert_length;
+ }
+
+ state->cursor = u.where + u.insert_length;
+
+ s->undo_point--;
+ s->redo_point--;
+}
+
+static void stb_text_redo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+ StbUndoState *s = &state->undostate;
+ StbUndoRecord *u, r;
+ if (s->redo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
+ return;
+
+ // we need to do two things: apply the redo record, and create an undo record
+ u = &s->undo_rec[s->undo_point];
+ r = s->undo_rec[s->redo_point];
+
+ // we KNOW there must be room for the undo record, because the redo record
+ // was derived from an undo record
+
+ u->delete_length = r.insert_length;
+ u->insert_length = r.delete_length;
+ u->where = r.where;
+ u->char_storage = -1;
+
+ if (r.delete_length) {
+ // the redo record requires us to delete characters, so the undo record
+ // needs to store the characters
+
+ if (s->undo_char_point + u->insert_length > s->redo_char_point) {
+ u->insert_length = 0;
+ u->delete_length = 0;
+ } else {
+ int i;
+ u->char_storage = s->undo_char_point;
+ s->undo_char_point = s->undo_char_point + u->insert_length;
+
+ // now save the characters
+ for (i=0; i < u->insert_length; ++i)
+ s->undo_char[u->char_storage + i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, u->where + i);
+ }
+
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, r.where, r.delete_length);
+ }
+
+ if (r.insert_length) {
+ // easy case: need to insert n characters
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, r.where, &s->undo_char[r.char_storage], r.insert_length);
+ s->redo_char_point += r.insert_length;
+ }
+
+ state->cursor = r.where + r.insert_length;
+
+ s->undo_point++;
+ s->redo_point++;
+}
+
+static void stb_text_makeundo_insert(STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length)
+{
+ stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, 0, length);
+}
+
+static void stb_text_makeundo_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length)
+{
+ int i;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, length, 0);
+ if (p) {
+ for (i=0; i < length; ++i)
+ p[i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, where+i);
+ }
+}
+
+static void stb_text_makeundo_replace(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int old_length, int new_length)
+{
+ int i;
+ STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, old_length, new_length);
+ if (p) {
+ for (i=0; i < old_length; ++i)
+ p[i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, where+i);
+ }
+}
+
+// reset the state to default
+static void stb_textedit_clear_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
+{
+ state->undostate.undo_point = 0;
+ state->undostate.undo_char_point = 0;
+ state->undostate.redo_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT;
+ state->undostate.redo_char_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT;
+ state->select_end = state->select_start = 0;
+ state->cursor = 0;
+ state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+ state->preferred_x = 0;
+ state->cursor_at_end_of_line = 0;
+ state->initialized = 1;
+ state->single_line = (unsigned char) is_single_line;
+ state->insert_mode = 0;
+}
+
+// API initialize
+static void stb_textedit_initialize_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
+{
+ stb_textedit_clear_state(state, is_single_line);
+}
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic push
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual"
+#endif
+
+static int stb_textedit_paste(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE const *ctext, int len)
+{
+ return stb_textedit_paste_internal(str, state, (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *) ctext, len);
+}
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
+#endif
+
+#endif//STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+/*
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
+Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
+this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
+the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
+use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
+of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
+so, subject to the following conditions:
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
+copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
+OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
+SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
+This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
+Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
+software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
+commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
+In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
+software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
+domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
+the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
+overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
+this software under copyright law.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
+ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+*/
--- /dev/null
+// [DEAR IMGUI]
+// This is a slightly modified version of stb_truetype.h 1.20.
+// Mostly fixing for compiler and static analyzer warnings.
+// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes.
+
+// stb_truetype.h - v1.20 - public domain
+// authored from 2009-2016 by Sean Barrett / RAD Game Tools
+//
+// This library processes TrueType files:
+// parse files
+// extract glyph metrics
+// extract glyph shapes
+// render glyphs to one-channel bitmaps with antialiasing (box filter)
+// render glyphs to one-channel SDF bitmaps (signed-distance field/function)
+//
+// Todo:
+// non-MS cmaps
+// crashproof on bad data
+// hinting? (no longer patented)
+// cleartype-style AA?
+// optimize: use simple memory allocator for intermediates
+// optimize: build edge-list directly from curves
+// optimize: rasterize directly from curves?
+//
+// ADDITIONAL CONTRIBUTORS
+//
+// Mikko Mononen: compound shape support, more cmap formats
+// Tor Andersson: kerning, subpixel rendering
+// Dougall Johnson: OpenType / Type 2 font handling
+// Daniel Ribeiro Maciel: basic GPOS-based kerning
+//
+// Misc other:
+// Ryan Gordon
+// Simon Glass
+// github:IntellectualKitty
+// Imanol Celaya
+// Daniel Ribeiro Maciel
+//
+// Bug/warning reports/fixes:
+// "Zer" on mollyrocket Fabian "ryg" Giesen
+// Cass Everitt Martins Mozeiko
+// stoiko (Haemimont Games) Cap Petschulat
+// Brian Hook Omar Cornut
+// Walter van Niftrik github:aloucks
+// David Gow Peter LaValle
+// David Given Sergey Popov
+// Ivan-Assen Ivanov Giumo X. Clanjor
+// Anthony Pesch Higor Euripedes
+// Johan Duparc Thomas Fields
+// Hou Qiming Derek Vinyard
+// Rob Loach Cort Stratton
+// Kenney Phillis Jr. github:oyvindjam
+// Brian Costabile github:vassvik
+//
+// VERSION HISTORY
+//
+// 1.20 (2019-02-07) PackFontRange skips missing codepoints; GetScaleFontVMetrics()
+// 1.19 (2018-02-11) GPOS kerning, STBTT_fmod
+// 1.18 (2018-01-29) add missing function
+// 1.17 (2017-07-23) make more arguments const; doc fix
+// 1.16 (2017-07-12) SDF support
+// 1.15 (2017-03-03) make more arguments const
+// 1.14 (2017-01-16) num-fonts-in-TTC function
+// 1.13 (2017-01-02) support OpenType fonts, certain Apple fonts
+// 1.12 (2016-10-25) suppress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
+// 1.11 (2016-04-02) fix unused-variable warning
+// 1.10 (2016-04-02) user-defined fabs(); rare memory leak; remove duplicate typedef
+// 1.09 (2016-01-16) warning fix; avoid crash on outofmem; use allocation userdata properly
+// 1.08 (2015-09-13) document stbtt_Rasterize(); fixes for vertical & horizontal edges
+// 1.07 (2015-08-01) allow PackFontRanges to accept arrays of sparse codepoints;
+// variant PackFontRanges to pack and render in separate phases;
+// fix stbtt_GetFontOFfsetForIndex (never worked for non-0 input?);
+// fixed an assert() bug in the new rasterizer
+// replace assert() with STBTT_assert() in new rasterizer
+//
+// Full history can be found at the end of this file.
+//
+// LICENSE
+//
+// See end of file for license information.
+//
+// USAGE
+//
+// Include this file in whatever places need to refer to it. In ONE C/C++
+// file, write:
+// #define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+// before the #include of this file. This expands out the actual
+// implementation into that C/C++ file.
+//
+// To make the implementation private to the file that generates the implementation,
+// #define STBTT_STATIC
+//
+// Simple 3D API (don't ship this, but it's fine for tools and quick start)
+// stbtt_BakeFontBitmap() -- bake a font to a bitmap for use as texture
+// stbtt_GetBakedQuad() -- compute quad to draw for a given char
+//
+// Improved 3D API (more shippable):
+// #include "stb_rect_pack.h" -- optional, but you really want it
+// stbtt_PackBegin()
+// stbtt_PackSetOversampling() -- for improved quality on small fonts
+// stbtt_PackFontRanges() -- pack and renders
+// stbtt_PackEnd()
+// stbtt_GetPackedQuad()
+//
+// "Load" a font file from a memory buffer (you have to keep the buffer loaded)
+// stbtt_InitFont()
+// stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex() -- indexing for TTC font collections
+// stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts() -- number of fonts for TTC font collections
+//
+// Render a unicode codepoint to a bitmap
+// stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap() -- allocates and returns a bitmap
+// stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap() -- renders into bitmap you provide
+// stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox() -- how big the bitmap must be
+//
+// Character advance/positioning
+// stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics()
+// stbtt_GetFontVMetrics()
+// stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2()
+// stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance()
+//
+// Starting with version 1.06, the rasterizer was replaced with a new,
+// faster and generally-more-precise rasterizer. The new rasterizer more
+// accurately measures pixel coverage for anti-aliasing, except in the case
+// where multiple shapes overlap, in which case it overestimates the AA pixel
+// coverage. Thus, anti-aliasing of intersecting shapes may look wrong. If
+// this turns out to be a problem, you can re-enable the old rasterizer with
+// #define STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION 1
+// which will incur about a 15% speed hit.
+//
+// ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
+//
+// Immediately after this block comment are a series of sample programs.
+//
+// After the sample programs is the "header file" section. This section
+// includes documentation for each API function.
+//
+// Some important concepts to understand to use this library:
+//
+// Codepoint
+// Characters are defined by unicode codepoints, e.g. 65 is
+// uppercase A, 231 is lowercase c with a cedilla, 0x7e30 is
+// the hiragana for "ma".
+//
+// Glyph
+// A visual character shape (every codepoint is rendered as
+// some glyph)
+//
+// Glyph index
+// A font-specific integer ID representing a glyph
+//
+// Baseline
+// Glyph shapes are defined relative to a baseline, which is the
+// bottom of uppercase characters. Characters extend both above
+// and below the baseline.
+//
+// Current Point
+// As you draw text to the screen, you keep track of a "current point"
+// which is the origin of each character. The current point's vertical
+// position is the baseline. Even "baked fonts" use this model.
+//
+// Vertical Font Metrics
+// The vertical qualities of the font, used to vertically position
+// and space the characters. See docs for stbtt_GetFontVMetrics.
+//
+// Font Size in Pixels or Points
+// The preferred interface for specifying font sizes in stb_truetype
+// is to specify how tall the font's vertical extent should be in pixels.
+// If that sounds good enough, skip the next paragraph.
+//
+// Most font APIs instead use "points", which are a common typographic
+// measurement for describing font size, defined as 72 points per inch.
+// stb_truetype provides a point API for compatibility. However, true
+// "per inch" conventions don't make much sense on computer displays
+// since different monitors have different number of pixels per
+// inch. For example, Windows traditionally uses a convention that
+// there are 96 pixels per inch, thus making 'inch' measurements have
+// nothing to do with inches, and thus effectively defining a point to
+// be 1.333 pixels. Additionally, the TrueType font data provides
+// an explicit scale factor to scale a given font's glyphs to points,
+// but the author has observed that this scale factor is often wrong
+// for non-commercial fonts, thus making fonts scaled in points
+// according to the TrueType spec incoherently sized in practice.
+//
+// DETAILED USAGE:
+//
+// Scale:
+// Select how high you want the font to be, in points or pixels.
+// Call ScaleForPixelHeight or ScaleForMappingEmToPixels to compute
+// a scale factor SF that will be used by all other functions.
+//
+// Baseline:
+// You need to select a y-coordinate that is the baseline of where
+// your text will appear. Call GetFontBoundingBox to get the baseline-relative
+// bounding box for all characters. SF*-y0 will be the distance in pixels
+// that the worst-case character could extend above the baseline, so if
+// you want the top edge of characters to appear at the top of the
+// screen where y=0, then you would set the baseline to SF*-y0.
+//
+// Current point:
+// Set the current point where the first character will appear. The
+// first character could extend left of the current point; this is font
+// dependent. You can either choose a current point that is the leftmost
+// point and hope, or add some padding, or check the bounding box or
+// left-side-bearing of the first character to be displayed and set
+// the current point based on that.
+//
+// Displaying a character:
+// Compute the bounding box of the character. It will contain signed values
+// relative to <current_point, baseline>. I.e. if it returns x0,y0,x1,y1,
+// then the character should be displayed in the rectangle from
+// <current_point+SF*x0, baseline+SF*y0> to <current_point+SF*x1,baseline+SF*y1).
+//
+// Advancing for the next character:
+// Call GlyphHMetrics, and compute 'current_point += SF * advance'.
+//
+//
+// ADVANCED USAGE
+//
+// Quality:
+//
+// - Use the functions with Subpixel at the end to allow your characters
+// to have subpixel positioning. Since the font is anti-aliased, not
+// hinted, this is very import for quality. (This is not possible with
+// baked fonts.)
+//
+// - Kerning is now supported, and if you're supporting subpixel rendering
+// then kerning is worth using to give your text a polished look.
+//
+// Performance:
+//
+// - Convert Unicode codepoints to glyph indexes and operate on the glyphs;
+// if you don't do this, stb_truetype is forced to do the conversion on
+// every call.
+//
+// - There are a lot of memory allocations. We should modify it to take
+// a temp buffer and allocate from the temp buffer (without freeing),
+// should help performance a lot.
+//
+// NOTES
+//
+// The system uses the raw data found in the .ttf file without changing it
+// and without building auxiliary data structures. This is a bit inefficient
+// on little-endian systems (the data is big-endian), but assuming you're
+// caching the bitmaps or glyph shapes this shouldn't be a big deal.
+//
+// It appears to be very hard to programmatically determine what font a
+// given file is in a general way. I provide an API for this, but I don't
+// recommend it.
+//
+//
+// SOURCE STATISTICS (based on v0.6c, 2050 LOC)
+//
+// Documentation & header file 520 LOC \___ 660 LOC documentation
+// Sample code 140 LOC /
+// Truetype parsing 620 LOC ---- 620 LOC TrueType
+// Software rasterization 240 LOC \.
+// Curve tessellation 120 LOC \__ 550 LOC Bitmap creation
+// Bitmap management 100 LOC /
+// Baked bitmap interface 70 LOC /
+// Font name matching & access 150 LOC ---- 150
+// C runtime library abstraction 60 LOC ---- 60
+//
+//
+// PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS FOR 1.06:
+//
+// 32-bit 64-bit
+// Previous release: 8.83 s 7.68 s
+// Pool allocations: 7.72 s 6.34 s
+// Inline sort : 6.54 s 5.65 s
+// New rasterizer : 5.63 s 5.00 s
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+//// SAMPLE PROGRAMS
+////
+//
+// Incomplete text-in-3d-api example, which draws quads properly aligned to be lossless
+//
+#if 0
+#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION // force following include to generate implementation
+#include "stb_truetype.h"
+
+unsigned char ttf_buffer[1<<20];
+unsigned char temp_bitmap[512*512];
+
+stbtt_bakedchar cdata[96]; // ASCII 32..126 is 95 glyphs
+GLuint ftex;
+
+void my_stbtt_initfont(void)
+{
+ fread(ttf_buffer, 1, 1<<20, fopen("c:/windows/fonts/times.ttf", "rb"));
+ stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(ttf_buffer,0, 32.0, temp_bitmap,512,512, 32,96, cdata); // no guarantee this fits!
+ // can free ttf_buffer at this point
+ glGenTextures(1, &ftex);
+ glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, ftex);
+ glTexImage2D(GL_TEXTURE_2D, 0, GL_ALPHA, 512,512, 0, GL_ALPHA, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, temp_bitmap);
+ // can free temp_bitmap at this point
+ glTexParameteri(GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_MIN_FILTER, GL_LINEAR);
+}
+
+void my_stbtt_print(float x, float y, char *text)
+{
+ // assume orthographic projection with units = screen pixels, origin at top left
+ glEnable(GL_TEXTURE_2D);
+ glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, ftex);
+ glBegin(GL_QUADS);
+ while (*text) {
+ if (*text >= 32 && *text < 128) {
+ stbtt_aligned_quad q;
+ stbtt_GetBakedQuad(cdata, 512,512, *text-32, &x,&y,&q,1);//1=opengl & d3d10+,0=d3d9
+ glTexCoord2f(q.s0,q.t1); glVertex2f(q.x0,q.y0);
+ glTexCoord2f(q.s1,q.t1); glVertex2f(q.x1,q.y0);
+ glTexCoord2f(q.s1,q.t0); glVertex2f(q.x1,q.y1);
+ glTexCoord2f(q.s0,q.t0); glVertex2f(q.x0,q.y1);
+ }
+ ++text;
+ }
+ glEnd();
+}
+#endif
+//
+//
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Complete program (this compiles): get a single bitmap, print as ASCII art
+//
+#if 0
+#include <stdio.h>
+#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION // force following include to generate implementation
+#include "stb_truetype.h"
+
+char ttf_buffer[1<<25];
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+ stbtt_fontinfo font;
+ unsigned char *bitmap;
+ int w,h,i,j,c = (argc > 1 ? atoi(argv[1]) : 'a'), s = (argc > 2 ? atoi(argv[2]) : 20);
+
+ fread(ttf_buffer, 1, 1<<25, fopen(argc > 3 ? argv[3] : "c:/windows/fonts/arialbd.ttf", "rb"));
+
+ stbtt_InitFont(&font, ttf_buffer, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(ttf_buffer,0));
+ bitmap = stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(&font, 0,stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&font, s), c, &w, &h, 0,0);
+
+ for (j=0; j < h; ++j) {
+ for (i=0; i < w; ++i)
+ putchar(" .:ioVM@"[bitmap[j*w+i]>>5]);
+ putchar('\n');
+ }
+ return 0;
+}
+#endif
+//
+// Output:
+//
+// .ii.
+// @@@@@@.
+// V@Mio@@o
+// :i. V@V
+// :oM@@M
+// :@@@MM@M
+// @@o o@M
+// :@@. M@M
+// @@@o@@@@
+// :M@@V:@@.
+//
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Complete program: print "Hello World!" banner, with bugs
+//
+#if 0
+char buffer[24<<20];
+unsigned char screen[20][79];
+
+int main(int arg, char **argv)
+{
+ stbtt_fontinfo font;
+ int i,j,ascent,baseline,ch=0;
+ float scale, xpos=2; // leave a little padding in case the character extends left
+ char *text = "Heljo World!"; // intentionally misspelled to show 'lj' brokenness
+
+ fread(buffer, 1, 1000000, fopen("c:/windows/fonts/arialbd.ttf", "rb"));
+ stbtt_InitFont(&font, buffer, 0);
+
+ scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&font, 15);
+ stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&font, &ascent,0,0);
+ baseline = (int) (ascent*scale);
+
+ while (text[ch]) {
+ int advance,lsb,x0,y0,x1,y1;
+ float x_shift = xpos - (float) floor(xpos);
+ stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(&font, text[ch], &advance, &lsb);
+ stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(&font, text[ch], scale,scale,x_shift,0, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
+ stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(&font, &screen[baseline + y0][(int) xpos + x0], x1-x0,y1-y0, 79, scale,scale,x_shift,0, text[ch]);
+ // note that this stomps the old data, so where character boxes overlap (e.g. 'lj') it's wrong
+ // because this API is really for baking character bitmaps into textures. if you want to render
+ // a sequence of characters, you really need to render each bitmap to a temp buffer, then
+ // "alpha blend" that into the working buffer
+ xpos += (advance * scale);
+ if (text[ch+1])
+ xpos += scale*stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(&font, text[ch],text[ch+1]);
+ ++ch;
+ }
+
+ for (j=0; j < 20; ++j) {
+ for (i=0; i < 78; ++i)
+ putchar(" .:ioVM@"[screen[j][i]>>5]);
+ putchar('\n');
+ }
+
+ return 0;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+//// INTEGRATION WITH YOUR CODEBASE
+////
+//// The following sections allow you to supply alternate definitions
+//// of C library functions used by stb_truetype, e.g. if you don't
+//// link with the C runtime library.
+
+#ifdef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+ // #define your own (u)stbtt_int8/16/32 before including to override this
+ #ifndef stbtt_uint8
+ typedef unsigned char stbtt_uint8;
+ typedef signed char stbtt_int8;
+ typedef unsigned short stbtt_uint16;
+ typedef signed short stbtt_int16;
+ typedef unsigned int stbtt_uint32;
+ typedef signed int stbtt_int32;
+ #endif
+
+ typedef char stbtt__check_size32[sizeof(stbtt_int32)==4 ? 1 : -1];
+ typedef char stbtt__check_size16[sizeof(stbtt_int16)==2 ? 1 : -1];
+
+ // e.g. #define your own STBTT_ifloor/STBTT_iceil() to avoid math.h
+ #ifndef STBTT_ifloor
+ #include <math.h>
+ #define STBTT_ifloor(x) ((int) floor(x))
+ #define STBTT_iceil(x) ((int) ceil(x))
+ #endif
+
+ #ifndef STBTT_sqrt
+ #include <math.h>
+ #define STBTT_sqrt(x) sqrt(x)
+ #define STBTT_pow(x,y) pow(x,y)
+ #endif
+
+ #ifndef STBTT_fmod
+ #include <math.h>
+ #define STBTT_fmod(x,y) fmod(x,y)
+ #endif
+
+ #ifndef STBTT_cos
+ #include <math.h>
+ #define STBTT_cos(x) cos(x)
+ #define STBTT_acos(x) acos(x)
+ #endif
+
+ #ifndef STBTT_fabs
+ #include <math.h>
+ #define STBTT_fabs(x) fabs(x)
+ #endif
+
+ // #define your own functions "STBTT_malloc" / "STBTT_free" to avoid malloc.h
+ #ifndef STBTT_malloc
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #define STBTT_malloc(x,u) ((void)(u),malloc(x))
+ #define STBTT_free(x,u) ((void)(u),free(x))
+ #endif
+
+ #ifndef STBTT_assert
+ #include <assert.h>
+ #define STBTT_assert(x) assert(x)
+ #endif
+
+ #ifndef STBTT_strlen
+ #include <string.h>
+ #define STBTT_strlen(x) strlen(x)
+ #endif
+
+ #ifndef STBTT_memcpy
+ #include <string.h>
+ #define STBTT_memcpy memcpy
+ #define STBTT_memset memset
+ #endif
+#endif
+
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+//// INTERFACE
+////
+////
+
+#ifndef __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
+#define __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
+
+#ifdef STBTT_STATIC
+#define STBTT_DEF static
+#else
+#define STBTT_DEF extern
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+// private structure
+typedef struct
+{
+ unsigned char *data;
+ int cursor;
+ int size;
+} stbtt__buf;
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// TEXTURE BAKING API
+//
+// If you use this API, you only have to call two functions ever.
+//
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ unsigned short x0,y0,x1,y1; // coordinates of bbox in bitmap
+ float xoff,yoff,xadvance;
+} stbtt_bakedchar;
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(const unsigned char *data, int offset, // font location (use offset=0 for plain .ttf)
+ float pixel_height, // height of font in pixels
+ unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, // bitmap to be filled in
+ int first_char, int num_chars, // characters to bake
+ stbtt_bakedchar *chardata); // you allocate this, it's num_chars long
+// if return is positive, the first unused row of the bitmap
+// if return is negative, returns the negative of the number of characters that fit
+// if return is 0, no characters fit and no rows were used
+// This uses a very crappy packing.
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ float x0,y0,s0,t0; // top-left
+ float x1,y1,s1,t1; // bottom-right
+} stbtt_aligned_quad;
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetBakedQuad(const stbtt_bakedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, // same data as above
+ int char_index, // character to display
+ float *xpos, float *ypos, // pointers to current position in screen pixel space
+ stbtt_aligned_quad *q, // output: quad to draw
+ int opengl_fillrule); // true if opengl fill rule; false if DX9 or earlier
+// Call GetBakedQuad with char_index = 'character - first_char', and it
+// creates the quad you need to draw and advances the current position.
+//
+// The coordinate system used assumes y increases downwards.
+//
+// Characters will extend both above and below the current position;
+// see discussion of "BASELINE" above.
+//
+// It's inefficient; you might want to c&p it and optimize it.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetScaledFontVMetrics(const unsigned char *fontdata, int index, float size, float *ascent, float *descent, float *lineGap);
+// Query the font vertical metrics without having to create a font first.
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// NEW TEXTURE BAKING API
+//
+// This provides options for packing multiple fonts into one atlas, not
+// perfectly but better than nothing.
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ unsigned short x0,y0,x1,y1; // coordinates of bbox in bitmap
+ float xoff,yoff,xadvance;
+ float xoff2,yoff2;
+} stbtt_packedchar;
+
+typedef struct stbtt_pack_context stbtt_pack_context;
+typedef struct stbtt_fontinfo stbtt_fontinfo;
+#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION
+typedef struct stbrp_rect stbrp_rect;
+#endif
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackBegin(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned char *pixels, int width, int height, int stride_in_bytes, int padding, void *alloc_context);
+// Initializes a packing context stored in the passed-in stbtt_pack_context.
+// Future calls using this context will pack characters into the bitmap passed
+// in here: a 1-channel bitmap that is width * height. stride_in_bytes is
+// the distance from one row to the next (or 0 to mean they are packed tightly
+// together). "padding" is the amount of padding to leave between each
+// character (normally you want '1' for bitmaps you'll use as textures with
+// bilinear filtering).
+//
+// Returns 0 on failure, 1 on success.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackEnd (stbtt_pack_context *spc);
+// Cleans up the packing context and frees all memory.
+
+#define STBTT_POINT_SIZE(x) (-(x))
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRange(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, float font_size,
+ int first_unicode_char_in_range, int num_chars_in_range, stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range);
+// Creates character bitmaps from the font_index'th font found in fontdata (use
+// font_index=0 if you don't know what that is). It creates num_chars_in_range
+// bitmaps for characters with unicode values starting at first_unicode_char_in_range
+// and increasing. Data for how to render them is stored in chardata_for_range;
+// pass these to stbtt_GetPackedQuad to get back renderable quads.
+//
+// font_size is the full height of the character from ascender to descender,
+// as computed by stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight. To use a point size as computed
+// by stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels, wrap the point size in STBTT_POINT_SIZE()
+// and pass that result as 'font_size':
+// ..., 20 , ... // font max minus min y is 20 pixels tall
+// ..., STBTT_POINT_SIZE(20), ... // 'M' is 20 pixels tall
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ float font_size;
+ int first_unicode_codepoint_in_range; // if non-zero, then the chars are continuous, and this is the first codepoint
+ int *array_of_unicode_codepoints; // if non-zero, then this is an array of unicode codepoints
+ int num_chars;
+ stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range; // output
+ unsigned char h_oversample, v_oversample; // don't set these, they're used internally
+} stbtt_pack_range;
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRanges(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges);
+// Creates character bitmaps from multiple ranges of characters stored in
+// ranges. This will usually create a better-packed bitmap than multiple
+// calls to stbtt_PackFontRange. Note that you can call this multiple
+// times within a single PackBegin/PackEnd.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetOversampling(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned int h_oversample, unsigned int v_oversample);
+// Oversampling a font increases the quality by allowing higher-quality subpixel
+// positioning, and is especially valuable at smaller text sizes.
+//
+// This function sets the amount of oversampling for all following calls to
+// stbtt_PackFontRange(s) or stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects for a given
+// pack context. The default (no oversampling) is achieved by h_oversample=1
+// and v_oversample=1. The total number of pixels required is
+// h_oversample*v_oversample larger than the default; for example, 2x2
+// oversampling requires 4x the storage of 1x1. For best results, render
+// oversampled textures with bilinear filtering. Look at the readme in
+// stb/tests/oversample for information about oversampled fonts
+//
+// To use with PackFontRangesGather etc., you must set it before calls
+// call to PackFontRangesGatherRects.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetSkipMissingCodepoints(stbtt_pack_context *spc, int skip);
+// If skip != 0, this tells stb_truetype to skip any codepoints for which
+// there is no corresponding glyph. If skip=0, which is the default, then
+// codepoints without a glyph recived the font's "missing character" glyph,
+// typically an empty box by convention.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetPackedQuad(const stbtt_packedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, // same data as above
+ int char_index, // character to display
+ float *xpos, float *ypos, // pointers to current position in screen pixel space
+ stbtt_aligned_quad *q, // output: quad to draw
+ int align_to_integer);
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects);
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects);
+// Calling these functions in sequence is roughly equivalent to calling
+// stbtt_PackFontRanges(). If you more control over the packing of multiple
+// fonts, or if you want to pack custom data into a font texture, take a look
+// at the source to of stbtt_PackFontRanges() and create a custom version
+// using these functions, e.g. call GatherRects multiple times,
+// building up a single array of rects, then call PackRects once,
+// then call RenderIntoRects repeatedly. This may result in a
+// better packing than calling PackFontRanges multiple times
+// (or it may not).
+
+// this is an opaque structure that you shouldn't mess with which holds
+// all the context needed from PackBegin to PackEnd.
+struct stbtt_pack_context {
+ void *user_allocator_context;
+ void *pack_info;
+ int width;
+ int height;
+ int stride_in_bytes;
+ int padding;
+ int skip_missing;
+ unsigned int h_oversample, v_oversample;
+ unsigned char *pixels;
+ void *nodes;
+};
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// FONT LOADING
+//
+//
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts(const unsigned char *data);
+// This function will determine the number of fonts in a font file. TrueType
+// collection (.ttc) files may contain multiple fonts, while TrueType font
+// (.ttf) files only contain one font. The number of fonts can be used for
+// indexing with the previous function where the index is between zero and one
+// less than the total fonts. If an error occurs, -1 is returned.
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(const unsigned char *data, int index);
+// Each .ttf/.ttc file may have more than one font. Each font has a sequential
+// index number starting from 0. Call this function to get the font offset for
+// a given index; it returns -1 if the index is out of range. A regular .ttf
+// file will only define one font and it always be at offset 0, so it will
+// return '0' for index 0, and -1 for all other indices.
+
+// The following structure is defined publicly so you can declare one on
+// the stack or as a global or etc, but you should treat it as opaque.
+struct stbtt_fontinfo
+{
+ void * userdata;
+ unsigned char * data; // pointer to .ttf file
+ int fontstart; // offset of start of font
+
+ int numGlyphs; // number of glyphs, needed for range checking
+
+ int loca,head,glyf,hhea,hmtx,kern,gpos; // table locations as offset from start of .ttf
+ int index_map; // a cmap mapping for our chosen character encoding
+ int indexToLocFormat; // format needed to map from glyph index to glyph
+
+ stbtt__buf cff; // cff font data
+ stbtt__buf charstrings; // the charstring index
+ stbtt__buf gsubrs; // global charstring subroutines index
+ stbtt__buf subrs; // private charstring subroutines index
+ stbtt__buf fontdicts; // array of font dicts
+ stbtt__buf fdselect; // map from glyph to fontdict
+};
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_InitFont(stbtt_fontinfo *info, const unsigned char *data, int offset);
+// Given an offset into the file that defines a font, this function builds
+// the necessary cached info for the rest of the system. You must allocate
+// the stbtt_fontinfo yourself, and stbtt_InitFont will fill it out. You don't
+// need to do anything special to free it, because the contents are pure
+// value data with no additional data structures. Returns 0 on failure.
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// CHARACTER TO GLYPH-INDEX CONVERSIOn
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint);
+// If you're going to perform multiple operations on the same character
+// and you want a speed-up, call this function with the character you're
+// going to process, then use glyph-based functions instead of the
+// codepoint-based functions.
+// Returns 0 if the character codepoint is not defined in the font.
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// CHARACTER PROPERTIES
+//
+
+STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels);
+// computes a scale factor to produce a font whose "height" is 'pixels' tall.
+// Height is measured as the distance from the highest ascender to the lowest
+// descender; in other words, it's equivalent to calling stbtt_GetFontVMetrics
+// and computing:
+// scale = pixels / (ascent - descent)
+// so if you prefer to measure height by the ascent only, use a similar calculation.
+
+STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels);
+// computes a scale factor to produce a font whose EM size is mapped to
+// 'pixels' tall. This is probably what traditional APIs compute, but
+// I'm not positive.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *ascent, int *descent, int *lineGap);
+// ascent is the coordinate above the baseline the font extends; descent
+// is the coordinate below the baseline the font extends (i.e. it is typically negative)
+// lineGap is the spacing between one row's descent and the next row's ascent...
+// so you should advance the vertical position by "*ascent - *descent + *lineGap"
+// these are expressed in unscaled coordinates, so you must multiply by
+// the scale factor for a given size
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *typoAscent, int *typoDescent, int *typoLineGap);
+// analogous to GetFontVMetrics, but returns the "typographic" values from the OS/2
+// table (specific to MS/Windows TTF files).
+//
+// Returns 1 on success (table present), 0 on failure.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
+// the bounding box around all possible characters
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing);
+// leftSideBearing is the offset from the current horizontal position to the left edge of the character
+// advanceWidth is the offset from the current horizontal position to the next horizontal position
+// these are expressed in unscaled coordinates
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int ch1, int ch2);
+// an additional amount to add to the 'advance' value between ch1 and ch2
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
+// Gets the bounding box of the visible part of the glyph, in unscaled coordinates
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing);
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2);
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
+// as above, but takes one or more glyph indices for greater efficiency
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// GLYPH SHAPES (you probably don't need these, but they have to go before
+// the bitmaps for C declaration-order reasons)
+//
+
+#ifndef STBTT_vmove // you can predefine these to use different values (but why?)
+ enum {
+ STBTT_vmove=1,
+ STBTT_vline,
+ STBTT_vcurve,
+ STBTT_vcubic
+ };
+#endif
+
+#ifndef stbtt_vertex // you can predefine this to use different values
+ // (we share this with other code at RAD)
+ #define stbtt_vertex_type short // can't use stbtt_int16 because that's not visible in the header file
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ stbtt_vertex_type x,y,cx,cy,cx1,cy1;
+ unsigned char type,padding;
+ } stbtt_vertex;
+#endif
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index);
+// returns non-zero if nothing is drawn for this glyph
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, stbtt_vertex **vertices);
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **vertices);
+// returns # of vertices and fills *vertices with the pointer to them
+// these are expressed in "unscaled" coordinates
+//
+// The shape is a series of contours. Each one starts with
+// a STBTT_moveto, then consists of a series of mixed
+// STBTT_lineto and STBTT_curveto segments. A lineto
+// draws a line from previous endpoint to its x,y; a curveto
+// draws a quadratic bezier from previous endpoint to
+// its x,y, using cx,cy as the bezier control point.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_vertex *vertices);
+// frees the data allocated above
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// BITMAP RENDERING
+//
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeBitmap(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata);
+// frees the bitmap allocated below
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+// allocates a large-enough single-channel 8bpp bitmap and renders the
+// specified character/glyph at the specified scale into it, with
+// antialiasing. 0 is no coverage (transparent), 255 is fully covered (opaque).
+// *width & *height are filled out with the width & height of the bitmap,
+// which is stored left-to-right, top-to-bottom.
+//
+// xoff/yoff are the offset it pixel space from the glyph origin to the top-left of the bitmap
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+// the same as stbtt_GetCodepoitnBitmap, but you can specify a subpixel
+// shift for the character
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint);
+// the same as stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap, but you pass in storage for the bitmap
+// in the form of 'output', with row spacing of 'out_stride' bytes. the bitmap
+// is clipped to out_w/out_h bytes. Call stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox to get the
+// width and height and positioning info for it first.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint);
+// same as stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap, but you can specify a subpixel
+// shift for the character
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int codepoint);
+// same as stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel, but prefiltering
+// is performed (see stbtt_PackSetOversampling)
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
+// get the bbox of the bitmap centered around the glyph origin; so the
+// bitmap width is ix1-ix0, height is iy1-iy0, and location to place
+// the bitmap top left is (leftSideBearing*scale,iy0).
+// (Note that the bitmap uses y-increases-down, but the shape uses
+// y-increases-up, so CodepointBitmapBox and CodepointBox are inverted.)
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
+// same as stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox, but you can specify a subpixel
+// shift for the character
+
+// the following functions are equivalent to the above functions, but operate
+// on glyph indices instead of Unicode codepoints (for efficiency)
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int glyph);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y,float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
+
+
+// @TODO: don't expose this structure
+typedef struct
+{
+ int w,h,stride;
+ unsigned char *pixels;
+} stbtt__bitmap;
+
+// rasterize a shape with quadratic beziers into a bitmap
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_Rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, // 1-channel bitmap to draw into
+ float flatness_in_pixels, // allowable error of curve in pixels
+ stbtt_vertex *vertices, // array of vertices defining shape
+ int num_verts, // number of vertices in above array
+ float scale_x, float scale_y, // scale applied to input vertices
+ float shift_x, float shift_y, // translation applied to input vertices
+ int x_off, int y_off, // another translation applied to input
+ int invert, // if non-zero, vertically flip shape
+ void *userdata); // context for to STBTT_MALLOC
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Signed Distance Function (or Field) rendering
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeSDF(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata);
+// frees the SDF bitmap allocated below
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int glyph, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetCodepointSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int codepoint, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+// These functions compute a discretized SDF field for a single character, suitable for storing
+// in a single-channel texture, sampling with bilinear filtering, and testing against
+// larger than some threshold to produce scalable fonts.
+// info -- the font
+// scale -- controls the size of the resulting SDF bitmap, same as it would be creating a regular bitmap
+// glyph/codepoint -- the character to generate the SDF for
+// padding -- extra "pixels" around the character which are filled with the distance to the character (not 0),
+// which allows effects like bit outlines
+// onedge_value -- value 0-255 to test the SDF against to reconstruct the character (i.e. the isocontour of the character)
+// pixel_dist_scale -- what value the SDF should increase by when moving one SDF "pixel" away from the edge (on the 0..255 scale)
+// if positive, > onedge_value is inside; if negative, < onedge_value is inside
+// width,height -- output height & width of the SDF bitmap (including padding)
+// xoff,yoff -- output origin of the character
+// return value -- a 2D array of bytes 0..255, width*height in size
+//
+// pixel_dist_scale & onedge_value are a scale & bias that allows you to make
+// optimal use of the limited 0..255 for your application, trading off precision
+// and special effects. SDF values outside the range 0..255 are clamped to 0..255.
+//
+// Example:
+// scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(22)
+// padding = 5
+// onedge_value = 180
+// pixel_dist_scale = 180/5.0 = 36.0
+//
+// This will create an SDF bitmap in which the character is about 22 pixels
+// high but the whole bitmap is about 22+5+5=32 pixels high. To produce a filled
+// shape, sample the SDF at each pixel and fill the pixel if the SDF value
+// is greater than or equal to 180/255. (You'll actually want to antialias,
+// which is beyond the scope of this example.) Additionally, you can compute
+// offset outlines (e.g. to stroke the character border inside & outside,
+// or only outside). For example, to fill outside the character up to 3 SDF
+// pixels, you would compare against (180-36.0*3)/255 = 72/255. The above
+// choice of variables maps a range from 5 pixels outside the shape to
+// 2 pixels inside the shape to 0..255; this is intended primarily for apply
+// outside effects only (the interior range is needed to allow proper
+// antialiasing of the font at *smaller* sizes)
+//
+// The function computes the SDF analytically at each SDF pixel, not by e.g.
+// building a higher-res bitmap and approximating it. In theory the quality
+// should be as high as possible for an SDF of this size & representation, but
+// unclear if this is true in practice (perhaps building a higher-res bitmap
+// and computing from that can allow drop-out prevention).
+//
+// The algorithm has not been optimized at all, so expect it to be slow
+// if computing lots of characters or very large sizes.
+
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Finding the right font...
+//
+// You should really just solve this offline, keep your own tables
+// of what font is what, and don't try to get it out of the .ttf file.
+// That's because getting it out of the .ttf file is really hard, because
+// the names in the file can appear in many possible encodings, in many
+// possible languages, and e.g. if you need a case-insensitive comparison,
+// the details of that depend on the encoding & language in a complex way
+// (actually underspecified in truetype, but also gigantic).
+//
+// But you can use the provided functions in two possible ways:
+// stbtt_FindMatchingFont() will use *case-sensitive* comparisons on
+// unicode-encoded names to try to find the font you want;
+// you can run this before calling stbtt_InitFont()
+//
+// stbtt_GetFontNameString() lets you get any of the various strings
+// from the file yourself and do your own comparisons on them.
+// You have to have called stbtt_InitFont() first.
+
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindMatchingFont(const unsigned char *fontdata, const char *name, int flags);
+// returns the offset (not index) of the font that matches, or -1 if none
+// if you use STBTT_MACSTYLE_DONTCARE, use a font name like "Arial Bold".
+// if you use any other flag, use a font name like "Arial"; this checks
+// the 'macStyle' header field; i don't know if fonts set this consistently
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_DONTCARE 0
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_BOLD 1
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_ITALIC 2
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_UNDERSCORE 4
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_NONE 8 // <= not same as 0, this makes us check the bitfield is 0
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian(const char *s1, int len1, const char *s2, int len2);
+// returns 1/0 whether the first string interpreted as utf8 is identical to
+// the second string interpreted as big-endian utf16... useful for strings from next func
+
+STBTT_DEF const char *stbtt_GetFontNameString(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int *length, int platformID, int encodingID, int languageID, int nameID);
+// returns the string (which may be big-endian double byte, e.g. for unicode)
+// and puts the length in bytes in *length.
+//
+// some of the values for the IDs are below; for more see the truetype spec:
+// http://developer.apple.com/textfonts/TTRefMan/RM06/Chap6name.html
+// http://www.microsoft.com/typography/otspec/name.htm
+
+enum { // platformID
+ STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE =0,
+ STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC =1,
+ STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_ISO =2,
+ STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT =3
+};
+
+enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE
+ STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_1_0 =0,
+ STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_1_1 =1,
+ STBTT_UNICODE_EID_ISO_10646 =2,
+ STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_2_0_BMP=3,
+ STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_2_0_FULL=4
+};
+
+enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT
+ STBTT_MS_EID_SYMBOL =0,
+ STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_BMP =1,
+ STBTT_MS_EID_SHIFTJIS =2,
+ STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_FULL =10
+};
+
+enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC; same as Script Manager codes
+ STBTT_MAC_EID_ROMAN =0, STBTT_MAC_EID_ARABIC =4,
+ STBTT_MAC_EID_JAPANESE =1, STBTT_MAC_EID_HEBREW =5,
+ STBTT_MAC_EID_CHINESE_TRAD =2, STBTT_MAC_EID_GREEK =6,
+ STBTT_MAC_EID_KOREAN =3, STBTT_MAC_EID_RUSSIAN =7
+};
+
+enum { // languageID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT; same as LCID...
+ // problematic because there are e.g. 16 english LCIDs and 16 arabic LCIDs
+ STBTT_MS_LANG_ENGLISH =0x0409, STBTT_MS_LANG_ITALIAN =0x0410,
+ STBTT_MS_LANG_CHINESE =0x0804, STBTT_MS_LANG_JAPANESE =0x0411,
+ STBTT_MS_LANG_DUTCH =0x0413, STBTT_MS_LANG_KOREAN =0x0412,
+ STBTT_MS_LANG_FRENCH =0x040c, STBTT_MS_LANG_RUSSIAN =0x0419,
+ STBTT_MS_LANG_GERMAN =0x0407, STBTT_MS_LANG_SPANISH =0x0409,
+ STBTT_MS_LANG_HEBREW =0x040d, STBTT_MS_LANG_SWEDISH =0x041D
+};
+
+enum { // languageID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC
+ STBTT_MAC_LANG_ENGLISH =0 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_JAPANESE =11,
+ STBTT_MAC_LANG_ARABIC =12, STBTT_MAC_LANG_KOREAN =23,
+ STBTT_MAC_LANG_DUTCH =4 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_RUSSIAN =32,
+ STBTT_MAC_LANG_FRENCH =1 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_SPANISH =6 ,
+ STBTT_MAC_LANG_GERMAN =2 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_SWEDISH =5 ,
+ STBTT_MAC_LANG_HEBREW =10, STBTT_MAC_LANG_CHINESE_SIMPLIFIED =33,
+ STBTT_MAC_LANG_ITALIAN =3 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_CHINESE_TRAD =19
+};
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif // __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
+
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+//// IMPLEMENTATION
+////
+////
+
+#ifdef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+#ifndef STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE
+#define STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE 8
+#endif
+
+#if STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE > 255
+#error "STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE cannot be > 255"
+#endif
+
+typedef int stbtt__test_oversample_pow2[(STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE & (STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE-1)) == 0 ? 1 : -1];
+
+#ifndef STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION
+#define STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION 2
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#define STBTT__NOTUSED(v) (void)(v)
+#else
+#define STBTT__NOTUSED(v) (void)sizeof(v)
+#endif
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// stbtt__buf helpers to parse data from file
+//
+
+static stbtt_uint8 stbtt__buf_get8(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+ if (b->cursor >= b->size)
+ return 0;
+ return b->data[b->cursor++];
+}
+
+static stbtt_uint8 stbtt__buf_peek8(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+ if (b->cursor >= b->size)
+ return 0;
+ return b->data[b->cursor];
+}
+
+static void stbtt__buf_seek(stbtt__buf *b, int o)
+{
+ STBTT_assert(!(o > b->size || o < 0));
+ b->cursor = (o > b->size || o < 0) ? b->size : o;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__buf_skip(stbtt__buf *b, int o)
+{
+ stbtt__buf_seek(b, b->cursor + o);
+}
+
+static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__buf_get(stbtt__buf *b, int n)
+{
+ stbtt_uint32 v = 0;
+ int i;
+ STBTT_assert(n >= 1 && n <= 4);
+ for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
+ v = (v << 8) | stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+ return v;
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__new_buf(const void *p, size_t size)
+{
+ stbtt__buf r;
+ STBTT_assert(size < 0x40000000);
+ r.data = (stbtt_uint8*) p;
+ r.size = (int) size;
+ r.cursor = 0;
+ return r;
+}
+
+#define stbtt__buf_get16(b) stbtt__buf_get((b), 2)
+#define stbtt__buf_get32(b) stbtt__buf_get((b), 4)
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__buf_range(const stbtt__buf *b, int o, int s)
+{
+ stbtt__buf r = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+ if (o < 0 || s < 0 || o > b->size || s > b->size - o) return r;
+ r.data = b->data + o;
+ r.size = s;
+ return r;
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__cff_get_index(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+ int count, start, offsize;
+ start = b->cursor;
+ count = stbtt__buf_get16(b);
+ if (count) {
+ offsize = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+ STBTT_assert(offsize >= 1 && offsize <= 4);
+ stbtt__buf_skip(b, offsize * count);
+ stbtt__buf_skip(b, stbtt__buf_get(b, offsize) - 1);
+ }
+ return stbtt__buf_range(b, start, b->cursor - start);
+}
+
+static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__cff_int(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+ int b0 = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+ if (b0 >= 32 && b0 <= 246) return b0 - 139;
+ else if (b0 >= 247 && b0 <= 250) return (b0 - 247)*256 + stbtt__buf_get8(b) + 108;
+ else if (b0 >= 251 && b0 <= 254) return -(b0 - 251)*256 - stbtt__buf_get8(b) - 108;
+ else if (b0 == 28) return stbtt__buf_get16(b);
+ else if (b0 == 29) return stbtt__buf_get32(b);
+ STBTT_assert(0);
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__cff_skip_operand(stbtt__buf *b) {
+ int v, b0 = stbtt__buf_peek8(b);
+ STBTT_assert(b0 >= 28);
+ if (b0 == 30) {
+ stbtt__buf_skip(b, 1);
+ while (b->cursor < b->size) {
+ v = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+ if ((v & 0xF) == 0xF || (v >> 4) == 0xF)
+ break;
+ }
+ } else {
+ stbtt__cff_int(b);
+ }
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__dict_get(stbtt__buf *b, int key)
+{
+ stbtt__buf_seek(b, 0);
+ while (b->cursor < b->size) {
+ int start = b->cursor, end, op;
+ while (stbtt__buf_peek8(b) >= 28)
+ stbtt__cff_skip_operand(b);
+ end = b->cursor;
+ op = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+ if (op == 12) op = stbtt__buf_get8(b) | 0x100;
+ if (op == key) return stbtt__buf_range(b, start, end-start);
+ }
+ return stbtt__buf_range(b, 0, 0);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__dict_get_ints(stbtt__buf *b, int key, int outcount, stbtt_uint32 *out)
+{
+ int i;
+ stbtt__buf operands = stbtt__dict_get(b, key);
+ for (i = 0; i < outcount && operands.cursor < operands.size; i++)
+ out[i] = stbtt__cff_int(&operands);
+}
+
+static int stbtt__cff_index_count(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+ stbtt__buf_seek(b, 0);
+ return stbtt__buf_get16(b);
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__cff_index_get(stbtt__buf b, int i)
+{
+ int count, offsize, start, end;
+ stbtt__buf_seek(&b, 0);
+ count = stbtt__buf_get16(&b);
+ offsize = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
+ STBTT_assert(i >= 0 && i < count);
+ STBTT_assert(offsize >= 1 && offsize <= 4);
+ stbtt__buf_skip(&b, i*offsize);
+ start = stbtt__buf_get(&b, offsize);
+ end = stbtt__buf_get(&b, offsize);
+ return stbtt__buf_range(&b, 2+(count+1)*offsize+start, end - start);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// accessors to parse data from file
+//
+
+// on platforms that don't allow misaligned reads, if we want to allow
+// truetype fonts that aren't padded to alignment, define ALLOW_UNALIGNED_TRUETYPE
+
+#define ttBYTE(p) (* (stbtt_uint8 *) (p))
+#define ttCHAR(p) (* (stbtt_int8 *) (p))
+#define ttFixed(p) ttLONG(p)
+
+static stbtt_uint16 ttUSHORT(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return p[0]*256 + p[1]; }
+static stbtt_int16 ttSHORT(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return p[0]*256 + p[1]; }
+static stbtt_uint32 ttULONG(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return (p[0]<<24) + (p[1]<<16) + (p[2]<<8) + p[3]; }
+static stbtt_int32 ttLONG(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return (p[0]<<24) + (p[1]<<16) + (p[2]<<8) + p[3]; }
+
+#define stbtt_tag4(p,c0,c1,c2,c3) ((p)[0] == (c0) && (p)[1] == (c1) && (p)[2] == (c2) && (p)[3] == (c3))
+#define stbtt_tag(p,str) stbtt_tag4(p,str[0],str[1],str[2],str[3])
+
+static int stbtt__isfont(stbtt_uint8 *font)
+{
+ // check the version number
+ if (stbtt_tag4(font, '1',0,0,0)) return 1; // TrueType 1
+ if (stbtt_tag(font, "typ1")) return 1; // TrueType with type 1 font -- we don't support this!
+ if (stbtt_tag(font, "OTTO")) return 1; // OpenType with CFF
+ if (stbtt_tag4(font, 0,1,0,0)) return 1; // OpenType 1.0
+ if (stbtt_tag(font, "true")) return 1; // Apple specification for TrueType fonts
+ return 0;
+}
+
+// @OPTIMIZE: binary search
+static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__find_table(stbtt_uint8 *data, stbtt_uint32 fontstart, const char *tag)
+{
+ stbtt_int32 num_tables = ttUSHORT(data+fontstart+4);
+ stbtt_uint32 tabledir = fontstart + 12;
+ stbtt_int32 i;
+ for (i=0; i < num_tables; ++i) {
+ stbtt_uint32 loc = tabledir + 16*i;
+ if (stbtt_tag(data+loc+0, tag))
+ return ttULONG(data+loc+8);
+ }
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex_internal(unsigned char *font_collection, int index)
+{
+ // if it's just a font, there's only one valid index
+ if (stbtt__isfont(font_collection))
+ return index == 0 ? 0 : -1;
+
+ // check if it's a TTC
+ if (stbtt_tag(font_collection, "ttcf")) {
+ // version 1?
+ if (ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00010000 || ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00020000) {
+ stbtt_int32 n = ttLONG(font_collection+8);
+ if (index >= n)
+ return -1;
+ return ttULONG(font_collection+12+index*4);
+ }
+ }
+ return -1;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts_internal(unsigned char *font_collection)
+{
+ // if it's just a font, there's only one valid font
+ if (stbtt__isfont(font_collection))
+ return 1;
+
+ // check if it's a TTC
+ if (stbtt_tag(font_collection, "ttcf")) {
+ // version 1?
+ if (ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00010000 || ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00020000) {
+ return ttLONG(font_collection+8);
+ }
+ }
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__get_subrs(stbtt__buf cff, stbtt__buf fontdict)
+{
+ stbtt_uint32 subrsoff = 0, private_loc[2] = { 0, 0 };
+ stbtt__buf pdict;
+ stbtt__dict_get_ints(&fontdict, 18, 2, private_loc);
+ if (!private_loc[1] || !private_loc[0]) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+ pdict = stbtt__buf_range(&cff, private_loc[1], private_loc[0]);
+ stbtt__dict_get_ints(&pdict, 19, 1, &subrsoff);
+ if (!subrsoff) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+ stbtt__buf_seek(&cff, private_loc[1]+subrsoff);
+ return stbtt__cff_get_index(&cff);
+}
+
+static int stbtt_InitFont_internal(stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *data, int fontstart)
+{
+ stbtt_uint32 cmap, t;
+ stbtt_int32 i,numTables;
+
+ info->data = data;
+ info->fontstart = fontstart;
+ info->cff = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+
+ cmap = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "cmap"); // required
+ info->loca = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "loca"); // required
+ info->head = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "head"); // required
+ info->glyf = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "glyf"); // required
+ info->hhea = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "hhea"); // required
+ info->hmtx = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "hmtx"); // required
+ info->kern = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "kern"); // not required
+ info->gpos = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "GPOS"); // not required
+
+ if (!cmap || !info->head || !info->hhea || !info->hmtx)
+ return 0;
+ if (info->glyf) {
+ // required for truetype
+ if (!info->loca) return 0;
+ } else {
+ // initialization for CFF / Type2 fonts (OTF)
+ stbtt__buf b, topdict, topdictidx;
+ stbtt_uint32 cstype = 2, charstrings = 0, fdarrayoff = 0, fdselectoff = 0;
+ stbtt_uint32 cff;
+
+ cff = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "CFF ");
+ if (!cff) return 0;
+
+ info->fontdicts = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+ info->fdselect = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+
+ // @TODO this should use size from table (not 512MB)
+ info->cff = stbtt__new_buf(data+cff, 512*1024*1024);
+ b = info->cff;
+
+ // read the header
+ stbtt__buf_skip(&b, 2);
+ stbtt__buf_seek(&b, stbtt__buf_get8(&b)); // hdrsize
+
+ // @TODO the name INDEX could list multiple fonts,
+ // but we just use the first one.
+ stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); // name INDEX
+ topdictidx = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
+ topdict = stbtt__cff_index_get(topdictidx, 0);
+ stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); // string INDEX
+ info->gsubrs = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
+
+ stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 17, 1, &charstrings);
+ stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 6, 1, &cstype);
+ stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 36, 1, &fdarrayoff);
+ stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 37, 1, &fdselectoff);
+ info->subrs = stbtt__get_subrs(b, topdict);
+
+ // we only support Type 2 charstrings
+ if (cstype != 2) return 0;
+ if (charstrings == 0) return 0;
+
+ if (fdarrayoff) {
+ // looks like a CID font
+ if (!fdselectoff) return 0;
+ stbtt__buf_seek(&b, fdarrayoff);
+ info->fontdicts = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
+ info->fdselect = stbtt__buf_range(&b, fdselectoff, b.size-fdselectoff);
+ }
+
+ stbtt__buf_seek(&b, charstrings);
+ info->charstrings = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
+ }
+
+ t = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "maxp");
+ if (t)
+ info->numGlyphs = ttUSHORT(data+t+4);
+ else
+ info->numGlyphs = 0xffff;
+
+ // find a cmap encoding table we understand *now* to avoid searching
+ // later. (todo: could make this installable)
+ // the same regardless of glyph.
+ numTables = ttUSHORT(data + cmap + 2);
+ info->index_map = 0;
+ for (i=0; i < numTables; ++i) {
+ stbtt_uint32 encoding_record = cmap + 4 + 8 * i;
+ // find an encoding we understand:
+ switch(ttUSHORT(data+encoding_record)) {
+ case STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT:
+ switch (ttUSHORT(data+encoding_record+2)) {
+ case STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_BMP:
+ case STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_FULL:
+ // MS/Unicode
+ info->index_map = cmap + ttULONG(data+encoding_record+4);
+ break;
+ }
+ break;
+ case STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE:
+ // Mac/iOS has these
+ // all the encodingIDs are unicode, so we don't bother to check it
+ info->index_map = cmap + ttULONG(data+encoding_record+4);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ if (info->index_map == 0)
+ return 0;
+
+ info->indexToLocFormat = ttUSHORT(data+info->head + 50);
+ return 1;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint)
+{
+ stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data;
+ stbtt_uint32 index_map = info->index_map;
+
+ stbtt_uint16 format = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 0);
+ if (format == 0) { // apple byte encoding
+ stbtt_int32 bytes = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 2);
+ if (unicode_codepoint < bytes-6)
+ return ttBYTE(data + index_map + 6 + unicode_codepoint);
+ return 0;
+ } else if (format == 6) {
+ stbtt_uint32 first = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 6);
+ stbtt_uint32 count = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 8);
+ if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint >= first && (stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint < first+count)
+ return ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 10 + (unicode_codepoint - first)*2);
+ return 0;
+ } else if (format == 2) {
+ STBTT_assert(0); // @TODO: high-byte mapping for japanese/chinese/korean
+ return 0;
+ } else if (format == 4) { // standard mapping for windows fonts: binary search collection of ranges
+ stbtt_uint16 segcount = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+6) >> 1;
+ stbtt_uint16 searchRange = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+8) >> 1;
+ stbtt_uint16 entrySelector = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+10);
+ stbtt_uint16 rangeShift = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+12) >> 1;
+
+ // do a binary search of the segments
+ stbtt_uint32 endCount = index_map + 14;
+ stbtt_uint32 search = endCount;
+
+ if (unicode_codepoint > 0xffff)
+ return 0;
+
+ // they lie from endCount .. endCount + segCount
+ // but searchRange is the nearest power of two, so...
+ if (unicode_codepoint >= ttUSHORT(data + search + rangeShift*2))
+ search += rangeShift*2;
+
+ // now decrement to bias correctly to find smallest
+ search -= 2;
+ while (entrySelector) {
+ stbtt_uint16 end;
+ searchRange >>= 1;
+ end = ttUSHORT(data + search + searchRange*2);
+ if (unicode_codepoint > end)
+ search += searchRange*2;
+ --entrySelector;
+ }
+ search += 2;
+
+ {
+ stbtt_uint16 offset, start;
+ stbtt_uint16 item = (stbtt_uint16) ((search - endCount) >> 1);
+
+ STBTT_assert(unicode_codepoint <= ttUSHORT(data + endCount + 2*item));
+ start = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*2 + 2 + 2*item);
+ if (unicode_codepoint < start)
+ return 0;
+
+ offset = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*6 + 2 + 2*item);
+ if (offset == 0)
+ return (stbtt_uint16) (unicode_codepoint + ttSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*4 + 2 + 2*item));
+
+ return ttUSHORT(data + offset + (unicode_codepoint-start)*2 + index_map + 14 + segcount*6 + 2 + 2*item);
+ }
+ } else if (format == 12 || format == 13) {
+ stbtt_uint32 ngroups = ttULONG(data+index_map+12);
+ stbtt_int32 low,high;
+ low = 0; high = (stbtt_int32)ngroups;
+ // Binary search the right group.
+ while (low < high) {
+ stbtt_int32 mid = low + ((high-low) >> 1); // rounds down, so low <= mid < high
+ stbtt_uint32 start_char = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12);
+ stbtt_uint32 end_char = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12+4);
+ if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint < start_char)
+ high = mid;
+ else if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint > end_char)
+ low = mid+1;
+ else {
+ stbtt_uint32 start_glyph = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12+8);
+ if (format == 12)
+ return start_glyph + unicode_codepoint-start_char;
+ else // format == 13
+ return start_glyph;
+ }
+ }
+ return 0; // not found
+ }
+ // @TODO
+ STBTT_assert(0);
+ return 0;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, stbtt_vertex **vertices)
+{
+ return stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, unicode_codepoint), vertices);
+}
+
+static void stbtt_setvertex(stbtt_vertex *v, stbtt_uint8 type, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy)
+{
+ v->type = type;
+ v->x = (stbtt_int16) x;
+ v->y = (stbtt_int16) y;
+ v->cx = (stbtt_int16) cx;
+ v->cy = (stbtt_int16) cy;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
+{
+ int g1,g2;
+
+ STBTT_assert(!info->cff.size);
+
+ if (glyph_index >= info->numGlyphs) return -1; // glyph index out of range
+ if (info->indexToLocFormat >= 2) return -1; // unknown index->glyph map format
+
+ if (info->indexToLocFormat == 0) {
+ g1 = info->glyf + ttUSHORT(info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 2) * 2;
+ g2 = info->glyf + ttUSHORT(info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 2 + 2) * 2;
+ } else {
+ g1 = info->glyf + ttULONG (info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 4);
+ g2 = info->glyf + ttULONG (info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 4 + 4);
+ }
+
+ return g1==g2 ? -1 : g1; // if length is 0, return -1
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
+{
+ if (info->cff.size) {
+ stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(info, glyph_index, x0, y0, x1, y1);
+ } else {
+ int g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
+ if (g < 0) return 0;
+
+ if (x0) *x0 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 2);
+ if (y0) *y0 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 4);
+ if (x1) *x1 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 6);
+ if (y1) *y1 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 8);
+ }
+ return 1;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
+{
+ return stbtt_GetGlyphBox(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), x0,y0,x1,y1);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
+{
+ stbtt_int16 numberOfContours;
+ int g;
+ if (info->cff.size)
+ return stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(info, glyph_index, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL) == 0;
+ g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
+ if (g < 0) return 1;
+ numberOfContours = ttSHORT(info->data + g);
+ return numberOfContours == 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__close_shape(stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_vertices, int was_off, int start_off,
+ stbtt_int32 sx, stbtt_int32 sy, stbtt_int32 scx, stbtt_int32 scy, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy)
+{
+ if (start_off) {
+ if (was_off)
+ stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, (cx+scx)>>1, (cy+scy)>>1, cx,cy);
+ stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, sx,sy,scx,scy);
+ } else {
+ if (was_off)
+ stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve,sx,sy,cx,cy);
+ else
+ stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vline,sx,sy,0,0);
+ }
+ return num_vertices;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphShapeTT(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
+{
+ stbtt_int16 numberOfContours;
+ stbtt_uint8 *endPtsOfContours;
+ stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data;
+ stbtt_vertex *vertices=0;
+ int num_vertices=0;
+ int g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
+
+ *pvertices = NULL;
+
+ if (g < 0) return 0;
+
+ numberOfContours = ttSHORT(data + g);
+
+ if (numberOfContours > 0) {
+ stbtt_uint8 flags=0,flagcount;
+ stbtt_int32 ins, i,j=0,m,n, next_move, was_off=0, off, start_off=0;
+ stbtt_int32 x,y,cx,cy,sx,sy, scx,scy;
+ stbtt_uint8 *points;
+ endPtsOfContours = (data + g + 10);
+ ins = ttUSHORT(data + g + 10 + numberOfContours * 2);
+ points = data + g + 10 + numberOfContours * 2 + 2 + ins;
+
+ n = 1+ttUSHORT(endPtsOfContours + numberOfContours*2-2);
+
+ m = n + 2*numberOfContours; // a loose bound on how many vertices we might need
+ vertices = (stbtt_vertex *) STBTT_malloc(m * sizeof(vertices[0]), info->userdata);
+ if (vertices == 0)
+ return 0;
+
+ next_move = 0;
+ flagcount=0;
+
+ // in first pass, we load uninterpreted data into the allocated array
+ // above, shifted to the end of the array so we won't overwrite it when
+ // we create our final data starting from the front
+
+ off = m - n; // starting offset for uninterpreted data, regardless of how m ends up being calculated
+
+ // first load flags
+
+ for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
+ if (flagcount == 0) {
+ flags = *points++;
+ if (flags & 8)
+ flagcount = *points++;
+ } else
+ --flagcount;
+ vertices[off+i].type = flags;
+ }
+
+ // now load x coordinates
+ x=0;
+ for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
+ flags = vertices[off+i].type;
+ if (flags & 2) {
+ stbtt_int16 dx = *points++;
+ x += (flags & 16) ? dx : -dx; // ???
+ } else {
+ if (!(flags & 16)) {
+ x = x + (stbtt_int16) (points[0]*256 + points[1]);
+ points += 2;
+ }
+ }
+ vertices[off+i].x = (stbtt_int16) x;
+ }
+
+ // now load y coordinates
+ y=0;
+ for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
+ flags = vertices[off+i].type;
+ if (flags & 4) {
+ stbtt_int16 dy = *points++;
+ y += (flags & 32) ? dy : -dy; // ???
+ } else {
+ if (!(flags & 32)) {
+ y = y + (stbtt_int16) (points[0]*256 + points[1]);
+ points += 2;
+ }
+ }
+ vertices[off+i].y = (stbtt_int16) y;
+ }
+
+ // now convert them to our format
+ num_vertices=0;
+ sx = sy = cx = cy = scx = scy = 0;
+ for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
+ flags = vertices[off+i].type;
+ x = (stbtt_int16) vertices[off+i].x;
+ y = (stbtt_int16) vertices[off+i].y;
+
+ if (next_move == i) {
+ if (i != 0)
+ num_vertices = stbtt__close_shape(vertices, num_vertices, was_off, start_off, sx,sy,scx,scy,cx,cy);
+
+ // now start the new one
+ start_off = !(flags & 1);
+ if (start_off) {
+ // if we start off with an off-curve point, then when we need to find a point on the curve
+ // where we can start, and we need to save some state for when we wraparound.
+ scx = x;
+ scy = y;
+ if (!(vertices[off+i+1].type & 1)) {
+ // next point is also a curve point, so interpolate an on-point curve
+ sx = (x + (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].x) >> 1;
+ sy = (y + (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].y) >> 1;
+ } else {
+ // otherwise just use the next point as our start point
+ sx = (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].x;
+ sy = (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].y;
+ ++i; // we're using point i+1 as the starting point, so skip it
+ }
+ } else {
+ sx = x;
+ sy = y;
+ }
+ stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vmove,sx,sy,0,0);
+ was_off = 0;
+ next_move = 1 + ttUSHORT(endPtsOfContours+j*2);
+ ++j;
+ } else {
+ if (!(flags & 1)) { // if it's a curve
+ if (was_off) // two off-curve control points in a row means interpolate an on-curve midpoint
+ stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, (cx+x)>>1, (cy+y)>>1, cx, cy);
+ cx = x;
+ cy = y;
+ was_off = 1;
+ } else {
+ if (was_off)
+ stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, x,y, cx, cy);
+ else
+ stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vline, x,y,0,0);
+ was_off = 0;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ num_vertices = stbtt__close_shape(vertices, num_vertices, was_off, start_off, sx,sy,scx,scy,cx,cy);
+ } else if (numberOfContours == -1) {
+ // Compound shapes.
+ int more = 1;
+ stbtt_uint8 *comp = data + g + 10;
+ num_vertices = 0;
+ vertices = 0;
+ while (more) {
+ stbtt_uint16 flags, gidx;
+ int comp_num_verts = 0, i;
+ stbtt_vertex *comp_verts = 0, *tmp = 0;
+ float mtx[6] = {1,0,0,1,0,0}, m, n;
+
+ flags = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
+ gidx = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
+
+ if (flags & 2) { // XY values
+ if (flags & 1) { // shorts
+ mtx[4] = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
+ mtx[5] = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
+ } else {
+ mtx[4] = ttCHAR(comp); comp+=1;
+ mtx[5] = ttCHAR(comp); comp+=1;
+ }
+ }
+ else {
+ // @TODO handle matching point
+ STBTT_assert(0);
+ }
+ if (flags & (1<<3)) { // WE_HAVE_A_SCALE
+ mtx[0] = mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+ mtx[1] = mtx[2] = 0;
+ } else if (flags & (1<<6)) { // WE_HAVE_AN_X_AND_YSCALE
+ mtx[0] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+ mtx[1] = mtx[2] = 0;
+ mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+ } else if (flags & (1<<7)) { // WE_HAVE_A_TWO_BY_TWO
+ mtx[0] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+ mtx[1] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+ mtx[2] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+ mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+ }
+
+ // Find transformation scales.
+ m = (float) STBTT_sqrt(mtx[0]*mtx[0] + mtx[1]*mtx[1]);
+ n = (float) STBTT_sqrt(mtx[2]*mtx[2] + mtx[3]*mtx[3]);
+
+ // Get indexed glyph.
+ comp_num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, gidx, &comp_verts);
+ if (comp_num_verts > 0) {
+ // Transform vertices.
+ for (i = 0; i < comp_num_verts; ++i) {
+ stbtt_vertex* v = &comp_verts[i];
+ stbtt_vertex_type x,y;
+ x=v->x; y=v->y;
+ v->x = (stbtt_vertex_type)(m * (mtx[0]*x + mtx[2]*y + mtx[4]));
+ v->y = (stbtt_vertex_type)(n * (mtx[1]*x + mtx[3]*y + mtx[5]));
+ x=v->cx; y=v->cy;
+ v->cx = (stbtt_vertex_type)(m * (mtx[0]*x + mtx[2]*y + mtx[4]));
+ v->cy = (stbtt_vertex_type)(n * (mtx[1]*x + mtx[3]*y + mtx[5]));
+ }
+ // Append vertices.
+ tmp = (stbtt_vertex*)STBTT_malloc((num_vertices+comp_num_verts)*sizeof(stbtt_vertex), info->userdata);
+ if (!tmp) {
+ if (vertices) STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+ if (comp_verts) STBTT_free(comp_verts, info->userdata);
+ return 0;
+ }
+ if (num_vertices > 0) STBTT_memcpy(tmp, vertices, num_vertices*sizeof(stbtt_vertex)); //-V595
+ STBTT_memcpy(tmp+num_vertices, comp_verts, comp_num_verts*sizeof(stbtt_vertex));
+ if (vertices) STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+ vertices = tmp;
+ STBTT_free(comp_verts, info->userdata);
+ num_vertices += comp_num_verts;
+ }
+ // More components ?
+ more = flags & (1<<5);
+ }
+ } else if (numberOfContours < 0) {
+ // @TODO other compound variations?
+ STBTT_assert(0);
+ } else {
+ // numberOfCounters == 0, do nothing
+ }
+
+ *pvertices = vertices;
+ return num_vertices;
+}
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ int bounds;
+ int started;
+ float first_x, first_y;
+ float x, y;
+ stbtt_int32 min_x, max_x, min_y, max_y;
+
+ stbtt_vertex *pvertices;
+ int num_vertices;
+} stbtt__csctx;
+
+#define STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(bounds) {bounds,0, 0,0, 0,0, 0,0,0,0, NULL, 0}
+
+static void stbtt__track_vertex(stbtt__csctx *c, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y)
+{
+ if (x > c->max_x || !c->started) c->max_x = x;
+ if (y > c->max_y || !c->started) c->max_y = y;
+ if (x < c->min_x || !c->started) c->min_x = x;
+ if (y < c->min_y || !c->started) c->min_y = y;
+ c->started = 1;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_v(stbtt__csctx *c, stbtt_uint8 type, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy, stbtt_int32 cx1, stbtt_int32 cy1)
+{
+ if (c->bounds) {
+ stbtt__track_vertex(c, x, y);
+ if (type == STBTT_vcubic) {
+ stbtt__track_vertex(c, cx, cy);
+ stbtt__track_vertex(c, cx1, cy1);
+ }
+ } else {
+ stbtt_setvertex(&c->pvertices[c->num_vertices], type, x, y, cx, cy);
+ c->pvertices[c->num_vertices].cx1 = (stbtt_int16) cx1;
+ c->pvertices[c->num_vertices].cy1 = (stbtt_int16) cy1;
+ }
+ c->num_vertices++;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_close_shape(stbtt__csctx *ctx)
+{
+ if (ctx->first_x != ctx->x || ctx->first_y != ctx->y)
+ stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vline, (int)ctx->first_x, (int)ctx->first_y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx, float dy)
+{
+ stbtt__csctx_close_shape(ctx);
+ ctx->first_x = ctx->x = ctx->x + dx;
+ ctx->first_y = ctx->y = ctx->y + dy;
+ stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vmove, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_rline_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx, float dy)
+{
+ ctx->x += dx;
+ ctx->y += dy;
+ stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vline, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx1, float dy1, float dx2, float dy2, float dx3, float dy3)
+{
+ float cx1 = ctx->x + dx1;
+ float cy1 = ctx->y + dy1;
+ float cx2 = cx1 + dx2;
+ float cy2 = cy1 + dy2;
+ ctx->x = cx2 + dx3;
+ ctx->y = cy2 + dy3;
+ stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vcubic, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, (int)cx1, (int)cy1, (int)cx2, (int)cy2);
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__get_subr(stbtt__buf idx, int n)
+{
+ int count = stbtt__cff_index_count(&idx);
+ int bias = 107;
+ if (count >= 33900)
+ bias = 32768;
+ else if (count >= 1240)
+ bias = 1131;
+ n += bias;
+ if (n < 0 || n >= count)
+ return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+ return stbtt__cff_index_get(idx, n);
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__cid_get_glyph_subrs(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
+{
+ stbtt__buf fdselect = info->fdselect;
+ int nranges, start, end, v, fmt, fdselector = -1, i;
+
+ stbtt__buf_seek(&fdselect, 0);
+ fmt = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
+ if (fmt == 0) {
+ // untested
+ stbtt__buf_skip(&fdselect, glyph_index);
+ fdselector = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
+ } else if (fmt == 3) {
+ nranges = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
+ start = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
+ for (i = 0; i < nranges; i++) {
+ v = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
+ end = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
+ if (glyph_index >= start && glyph_index < end) {
+ fdselector = v;
+ break;
+ }
+ start = end;
+ }
+ }
+ if (fdselector == -1) stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+ return stbtt__get_subrs(info->cff, stbtt__cff_index_get(info->fontdicts, fdselector));
+}
+
+static int stbtt__run_charstring(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt__csctx *c)
+{
+ int in_header = 1, maskbits = 0, subr_stack_height = 0, sp = 0, v, i, b0;
+ int has_subrs = 0, clear_stack;
+ float s[48];
+ stbtt__buf subr_stack[10], subrs = info->subrs, b;
+ float f;
+
+#define STBTT__CSERR(s) (0)
+
+ // this currently ignores the initial width value, which isn't needed if we have hmtx
+ b = stbtt__cff_index_get(info->charstrings, glyph_index);
+ while (b.cursor < b.size) {
+ i = 0;
+ clear_stack = 1;
+ b0 = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
+ switch (b0) {
+ // @TODO implement hinting
+ case 0x13: // hintmask
+ case 0x14: // cntrmask
+ if (in_header)
+ maskbits += (sp / 2); // implicit "vstem"
+ in_header = 0;
+ stbtt__buf_skip(&b, (maskbits + 7) / 8);
+ break;
+
+ case 0x01: // hstem
+ case 0x03: // vstem
+ case 0x12: // hstemhm
+ case 0x17: // vstemhm
+ maskbits += (sp / 2);
+ break;
+
+ case 0x15: // rmoveto
+ in_header = 0;
+ if (sp < 2) return STBTT__CSERR("rmoveto stack");
+ stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, s[sp-2], s[sp-1]);
+ break;
+ case 0x04: // vmoveto
+ in_header = 0;
+ if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("vmoveto stack");
+ stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, 0, s[sp-1]);
+ break;
+ case 0x16: // hmoveto
+ in_header = 0;
+ if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("hmoveto stack");
+ stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, s[sp-1], 0);
+ break;
+
+ case 0x05: // rlineto
+ if (sp < 2) return STBTT__CSERR("rlineto stack");
+ for (; i + 1 < sp; i += 2)
+ stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
+ break;
+
+ // hlineto/vlineto and vhcurveto/hvcurveto alternate horizontal and vertical
+ // starting from a different place.
+
+ case 0x07: // vlineto
+ if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("vlineto stack");
+ goto vlineto;
+ case 0x06: // hlineto
+ if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("hlineto stack");
+ for (;;) {
+ if (i >= sp) break;
+ stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], 0);
+ i++;
+ vlineto:
+ if (i >= sp) break;
+ stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, 0, s[i]);
+ i++;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case 0x1F: // hvcurveto
+ if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("hvcurveto stack");
+ goto hvcurveto;
+ case 0x1E: // vhcurveto
+ if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("vhcurveto stack");
+ for (;;) {
+ if (i + 3 >= sp) break;
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, 0, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], (sp - i == 5) ? s[i + 4] : 0.0f);
+ i += 4;
+ hvcurveto:
+ if (i + 3 >= sp) break;
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], 0, s[i+1], s[i+2], (sp - i == 5) ? s[i+4] : 0.0f, s[i+3]);
+ i += 4;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case 0x08: // rrcurveto
+ if (sp < 6) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
+ for (; i + 5 < sp; i += 6)
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
+ break;
+
+ case 0x18: // rcurveline
+ if (sp < 8) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
+ for (; i + 5 < sp - 2; i += 6)
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
+ if (i + 1 >= sp) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
+ stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
+ break;
+
+ case 0x19: // rlinecurve
+ if (sp < 8) return STBTT__CSERR("rlinecurve stack");
+ for (; i + 1 < sp - 6; i += 2)
+ stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
+ if (i + 5 >= sp) return STBTT__CSERR("rlinecurve stack");
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
+ break;
+
+ case 0x1A: // vvcurveto
+ case 0x1B: // hhcurveto
+ if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("(vv|hh)curveto stack");
+ f = 0.0;
+ if (sp & 1) { f = s[i]; i++; }
+ for (; i + 3 < sp; i += 4) {
+ if (b0 == 0x1B)
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], f, s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], 0.0);
+ else
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, f, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], 0.0, s[i+3]);
+ f = 0.0;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case 0x0A: // callsubr
+ if (!has_subrs) {
+ if (info->fdselect.size)
+ subrs = stbtt__cid_get_glyph_subrs(info, glyph_index);
+ has_subrs = 1;
+ }
+ // fallthrough
+ case 0x1D: // callgsubr
+ if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("call(g|)subr stack");
+ v = (int) s[--sp];
+ if (subr_stack_height >= 10) return STBTT__CSERR("recursion limit");
+ subr_stack[subr_stack_height++] = b;
+ b = stbtt__get_subr(b0 == 0x0A ? subrs : info->gsubrs, v);
+ if (b.size == 0) return STBTT__CSERR("subr not found");
+ b.cursor = 0;
+ clear_stack = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case 0x0B: // return
+ if (subr_stack_height <= 0) return STBTT__CSERR("return outside subr");
+ b = subr_stack[--subr_stack_height];
+ clear_stack = 0;
+ break;
+
+ case 0x0E: // endchar
+ stbtt__csctx_close_shape(c);
+ return 1;
+
+ case 0x0C: { // two-byte escape
+ float dx1, dx2, dx3, dx4, dx5, dx6, dy1, dy2, dy3, dy4, dy5, dy6;
+ float dx, dy;
+ int b1 = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
+ switch (b1) {
+ // @TODO These "flex" implementations ignore the flex-depth and resolution,
+ // and always draw beziers.
+ case 0x22: // hflex
+ if (sp < 7) return STBTT__CSERR("hflex stack");
+ dx1 = s[0];
+ dx2 = s[1];
+ dy2 = s[2];
+ dx3 = s[3];
+ dx4 = s[4];
+ dx5 = s[5];
+ dx6 = s[6];
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, 0, dx2, dy2, dx3, 0);
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, 0, dx5, -dy2, dx6, 0);
+ break;
+
+ case 0x23: // flex
+ if (sp < 13) return STBTT__CSERR("flex stack");
+ dx1 = s[0];
+ dy1 = s[1];
+ dx2 = s[2];
+ dy2 = s[3];
+ dx3 = s[4];
+ dy3 = s[5];
+ dx4 = s[6];
+ dy4 = s[7];
+ dx5 = s[8];
+ dy5 = s[9];
+ dx6 = s[10];
+ dy6 = s[11];
+ //fd is s[12]
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, dy3);
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, dy4, dx5, dy5, dx6, dy6);
+ break;
+
+ case 0x24: // hflex1
+ if (sp < 9) return STBTT__CSERR("hflex1 stack");
+ dx1 = s[0];
+ dy1 = s[1];
+ dx2 = s[2];
+ dy2 = s[3];
+ dx3 = s[4];
+ dx4 = s[5];
+ dx5 = s[6];
+ dy5 = s[7];
+ dx6 = s[8];
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, 0);
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, 0, dx5, dy5, dx6, -(dy1+dy2+dy5));
+ break;
+
+ case 0x25: // flex1
+ if (sp < 11) return STBTT__CSERR("flex1 stack");
+ dx1 = s[0];
+ dy1 = s[1];
+ dx2 = s[2];
+ dy2 = s[3];
+ dx3 = s[4];
+ dy3 = s[5];
+ dx4 = s[6];
+ dy4 = s[7];
+ dx5 = s[8];
+ dy5 = s[9];
+ dx6 = dy6 = s[10];
+ dx = dx1+dx2+dx3+dx4+dx5;
+ dy = dy1+dy2+dy3+dy4+dy5;
+ if (STBTT_fabs(dx) > STBTT_fabs(dy))
+ dy6 = -dy;
+ else
+ dx6 = -dx;
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, dy3);
+ stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, dy4, dx5, dy5, dx6, dy6);
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ return STBTT__CSERR("unimplemented");
+ }
+ } break;
+
+ default:
+ if (b0 != 255 && b0 != 28 && (b0 < 32 || b0 > 254)) //-V560
+ return STBTT__CSERR("reserved operator");
+
+ // push immediate
+ if (b0 == 255) {
+ f = (float)(stbtt_int32)stbtt__buf_get32(&b) / 0x10000;
+ } else {
+ stbtt__buf_skip(&b, -1);
+ f = (float)(stbtt_int16)stbtt__cff_int(&b);
+ }
+ if (sp >= 48) return STBTT__CSERR("push stack overflow");
+ s[sp++] = f;
+ clear_stack = 0;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (clear_stack) sp = 0;
+ }
+ return STBTT__CSERR("no endchar");
+
+#undef STBTT__CSERR
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphShapeT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
+{
+ // runs the charstring twice, once to count and once to output (to avoid realloc)
+ stbtt__csctx count_ctx = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(1);
+ stbtt__csctx output_ctx = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(0);
+ if (stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &count_ctx)) {
+ *pvertices = (stbtt_vertex*)STBTT_malloc(count_ctx.num_vertices*sizeof(stbtt_vertex), info->userdata);
+ output_ctx.pvertices = *pvertices;
+ if (stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &output_ctx)) {
+ STBTT_assert(output_ctx.num_vertices == count_ctx.num_vertices);
+ return output_ctx.num_vertices;
+ }
+ }
+ *pvertices = NULL;
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
+{
+ stbtt__csctx c = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(1);
+ int r = stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &c);
+ if (x0) *x0 = r ? c.min_x : 0;
+ if (y0) *y0 = r ? c.min_y : 0;
+ if (x1) *x1 = r ? c.max_x : 0;
+ if (y1) *y1 = r ? c.max_y : 0;
+ return r ? c.num_vertices : 0;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
+{
+ if (!info->cff.size)
+ return stbtt__GetGlyphShapeTT(info, glyph_index, pvertices);
+ else
+ return stbtt__GetGlyphShapeT2(info, glyph_index, pvertices);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing)
+{
+ stbtt_uint16 numOfLongHorMetrics = ttUSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 34);
+ if (glyph_index < numOfLongHorMetrics) {
+ if (advanceWidth) *advanceWidth = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*glyph_index);
+ if (leftSideBearing) *leftSideBearing = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*glyph_index + 2);
+ } else {
+ if (advanceWidth) *advanceWidth = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*(numOfLongHorMetrics-1));
+ if (leftSideBearing) *leftSideBearing = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*numOfLongHorMetrics + 2*(glyph_index - numOfLongHorMetrics));
+ }
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphKernInfoAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2)
+{
+ stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data + info->kern;
+ stbtt_uint32 needle, straw;
+ int l, r, m;
+
+ // we only look at the first table. it must be 'horizontal' and format 0.
+ if (!info->kern)
+ return 0;
+ if (ttUSHORT(data+2) < 1) // number of tables, need at least 1
+ return 0;
+ if (ttUSHORT(data+8) != 1) // horizontal flag must be set in format
+ return 0;
+
+ l = 0;
+ r = ttUSHORT(data+10) - 1;
+ needle = glyph1 << 16 | glyph2;
+ while (l <= r) {
+ m = (l + r) >> 1;
+ straw = ttULONG(data+18+(m*6)); // note: unaligned read
+ if (needle < straw)
+ r = m - 1;
+ else if (needle > straw)
+ l = m + 1;
+ else
+ return ttSHORT(data+22+(m*6));
+ }
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetCoverageIndex(stbtt_uint8 *coverageTable, int glyph)
+{
+ stbtt_uint16 coverageFormat = ttUSHORT(coverageTable);
+ switch(coverageFormat) {
+ case 1: {
+ stbtt_uint16 glyphCount = ttUSHORT(coverageTable + 2);
+
+ // Binary search.
+ stbtt_int32 l=0, r=glyphCount-1, m;
+ int straw, needle=glyph;
+ while (l <= r) {
+ stbtt_uint8 *glyphArray = coverageTable + 4;
+ stbtt_uint16 glyphID;
+ m = (l + r) >> 1;
+ glyphID = ttUSHORT(glyphArray + 2 * m);
+ straw = glyphID;
+ if (needle < straw)
+ r = m - 1;
+ else if (needle > straw)
+ l = m + 1;
+ else {
+ return m;
+ }
+ }
+ } break;
+
+ case 2: {
+ stbtt_uint16 rangeCount = ttUSHORT(coverageTable + 2);
+ stbtt_uint8 *rangeArray = coverageTable + 4;
+
+ // Binary search.
+ stbtt_int32 l=0, r=rangeCount-1, m;
+ int strawStart, strawEnd, needle=glyph;
+ while (l <= r) {
+ stbtt_uint8 *rangeRecord;
+ m = (l + r) >> 1;
+ rangeRecord = rangeArray + 6 * m;
+ strawStart = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord);
+ strawEnd = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord + 2);
+ if (needle < strawStart)
+ r = m - 1;
+ else if (needle > strawEnd)
+ l = m + 1;
+ else {
+ stbtt_uint16 startCoverageIndex = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord + 4);
+ return startCoverageIndex + glyph - strawStart;
+ }
+ }
+ } break;
+
+ default: {
+ // There are no other cases.
+ STBTT_assert(0);
+ } break;
+ }
+
+ return -1;
+}
+
+static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetGlyphClass(stbtt_uint8 *classDefTable, int glyph)
+{
+ stbtt_uint16 classDefFormat = ttUSHORT(classDefTable);
+ switch(classDefFormat)
+ {
+ case 1: {
+ stbtt_uint16 startGlyphID = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 2);
+ stbtt_uint16 glyphCount = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 4);
+ stbtt_uint8 *classDef1ValueArray = classDefTable + 6;
+
+ if (glyph >= startGlyphID && glyph < startGlyphID + glyphCount)
+ return (stbtt_int32)ttUSHORT(classDef1ValueArray + 2 * (glyph - startGlyphID));
+
+ // [DEAR IMGUI] Commented to fix static analyzer warning
+ //classDefTable = classDef1ValueArray + 2 * glyphCount;
+ } break;
+
+ case 2: {
+ stbtt_uint16 classRangeCount = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 2);
+ stbtt_uint8 *classRangeRecords = classDefTable + 4;
+
+ // Binary search.
+ stbtt_int32 l=0, r=classRangeCount-1, m;
+ int strawStart, strawEnd, needle=glyph;
+ while (l <= r) {
+ stbtt_uint8 *classRangeRecord;
+ m = (l + r) >> 1;
+ classRangeRecord = classRangeRecords + 6 * m;
+ strawStart = ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord);
+ strawEnd = ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord + 2);
+ if (needle < strawStart)
+ r = m - 1;
+ else if (needle > strawEnd)
+ l = m + 1;
+ else
+ return (stbtt_int32)ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord + 4);
+ }
+
+ // [DEAR IMGUI] Commented to fix static analyzer warning
+ //classDefTable = classRangeRecords + 6 * classRangeCount;
+ } break;
+
+ default: {
+ // There are no other cases.
+ STBTT_assert(0);
+ } break;
+ }
+
+ return -1;
+}
+
+// Define to STBTT_assert(x) if you want to break on unimplemented formats.
+#define STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(x)
+
+static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetGlyphGPOSInfoAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2)
+{
+ stbtt_uint16 lookupListOffset;
+ stbtt_uint8 *lookupList;
+ stbtt_uint16 lookupCount;
+ stbtt_uint8 *data;
+ stbtt_int32 i;
+
+ if (!info->gpos) return 0;
+
+ data = info->data + info->gpos;
+
+ if (ttUSHORT(data+0) != 1) return 0; // Major version 1
+ if (ttUSHORT(data+2) != 0) return 0; // Minor version 0
+
+ lookupListOffset = ttUSHORT(data+8);
+ lookupList = data + lookupListOffset;
+ lookupCount = ttUSHORT(lookupList);
+
+ for (i=0; i<lookupCount; ++i) {
+ stbtt_uint16 lookupOffset = ttUSHORT(lookupList + 2 + 2 * i);
+ stbtt_uint8 *lookupTable = lookupList + lookupOffset;
+
+ stbtt_uint16 lookupType = ttUSHORT(lookupTable);
+ stbtt_uint16 subTableCount = ttUSHORT(lookupTable + 4);
+ stbtt_uint8 *subTableOffsets = lookupTable + 6;
+ switch(lookupType) {
+ case 2: { // Pair Adjustment Positioning Subtable
+ stbtt_int32 sti;
+ for (sti=0; sti<subTableCount; sti++) {
+ stbtt_uint16 subtableOffset = ttUSHORT(subTableOffsets + 2 * sti);
+ stbtt_uint8 *table = lookupTable + subtableOffset;
+ stbtt_uint16 posFormat = ttUSHORT(table);
+ stbtt_uint16 coverageOffset = ttUSHORT(table + 2);
+ stbtt_int32 coverageIndex = stbtt__GetCoverageIndex(table + coverageOffset, glyph1);
+ if (coverageIndex == -1) continue;
+
+ switch (posFormat) {
+ case 1: {
+ stbtt_int32 l, r, m;
+ int straw, needle;
+ stbtt_uint16 valueFormat1 = ttUSHORT(table + 4);
+ stbtt_uint16 valueFormat2 = ttUSHORT(table + 6);
+ stbtt_int32 valueRecordPairSizeInBytes = 2;
+ stbtt_uint16 pairSetCount = ttUSHORT(table + 8);
+ stbtt_uint16 pairPosOffset = ttUSHORT(table + 10 + 2 * coverageIndex);
+ stbtt_uint8 *pairValueTable = table + pairPosOffset;
+ stbtt_uint16 pairValueCount = ttUSHORT(pairValueTable);
+ stbtt_uint8 *pairValueArray = pairValueTable + 2;
+ // TODO: Support more formats.
+ STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(valueFormat1 == 4);
+ if (valueFormat1 != 4) return 0;
+ STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(valueFormat2 == 0);
+ if (valueFormat2 != 0) return 0;
+
+ STBTT_assert(coverageIndex < pairSetCount);
+ STBTT__NOTUSED(pairSetCount);
+
+ needle=glyph2;
+ r=pairValueCount-1;
+ l=0;
+
+ // Binary search.
+ while (l <= r) {
+ stbtt_uint16 secondGlyph;
+ stbtt_uint8 *pairValue;
+ m = (l + r) >> 1;
+ pairValue = pairValueArray + (2 + valueRecordPairSizeInBytes) * m;
+ secondGlyph = ttUSHORT(pairValue);
+ straw = secondGlyph;
+ if (needle < straw)
+ r = m - 1;
+ else if (needle > straw)
+ l = m + 1;
+ else {
+ stbtt_int16 xAdvance = ttSHORT(pairValue + 2);
+ return xAdvance;
+ }
+ }
+ } break;
+
+ case 2: {
+ stbtt_uint16 valueFormat1 = ttUSHORT(table + 4);
+ stbtt_uint16 valueFormat2 = ttUSHORT(table + 6);
+
+ stbtt_uint16 classDef1Offset = ttUSHORT(table + 8);
+ stbtt_uint16 classDef2Offset = ttUSHORT(table + 10);
+ int glyph1class = stbtt__GetGlyphClass(table + classDef1Offset, glyph1);
+ int glyph2class = stbtt__GetGlyphClass(table + classDef2Offset, glyph2);
+
+ stbtt_uint16 class1Count = ttUSHORT(table + 12);
+ stbtt_uint16 class2Count = ttUSHORT(table + 14);
+ STBTT_assert(glyph1class < class1Count);
+ STBTT_assert(glyph2class < class2Count);
+
+ // TODO: Support more formats.
+ STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(valueFormat1 == 4);
+ if (valueFormat1 != 4) return 0;
+ STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(valueFormat2 == 0);
+ if (valueFormat2 != 0) return 0;
+
+ if (glyph1class >= 0 && glyph1class < class1Count && glyph2class >= 0 && glyph2class < class2Count) {
+ stbtt_uint8 *class1Records = table + 16;
+ stbtt_uint8 *class2Records = class1Records + 2 * (glyph1class * class2Count);
+ stbtt_int16 xAdvance = ttSHORT(class2Records + 2 * glyph2class);
+ return xAdvance;
+ }
+ } break;
+
+ default: {
+ // There are no other cases.
+ STBTT_assert(0);
+ break;
+ };
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+ };
+
+ default:
+ // TODO: Implement other stuff.
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return 0;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int g1, int g2)
+{
+ int xAdvance = 0;
+
+ if (info->gpos)
+ xAdvance += stbtt__GetGlyphGPOSInfoAdvance(info, g1, g2);
+
+ if (info->kern)
+ xAdvance += stbtt__GetGlyphKernInfoAdvance(info, g1, g2);
+
+ return xAdvance;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int ch1, int ch2)
+{
+ if (!info->kern && !info->gpos) // if no kerning table, don't waste time looking up both codepoint->glyphs
+ return 0;
+ return stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,ch1), stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,ch2));
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing)
+{
+ stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), advanceWidth, leftSideBearing);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *ascent, int *descent, int *lineGap)
+{
+ if (ascent ) *ascent = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 4);
+ if (descent) *descent = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 6);
+ if (lineGap) *lineGap = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 8);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *typoAscent, int *typoDescent, int *typoLineGap)
+{
+ int tab = stbtt__find_table(info->data, info->fontstart, "OS/2");
+ if (!tab)
+ return 0;
+ if (typoAscent ) *typoAscent = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 68);
+ if (typoDescent) *typoDescent = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 70);
+ if (typoLineGap) *typoLineGap = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 72);
+ return 1;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
+{
+ *x0 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 36);
+ *y0 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 38);
+ *x1 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 40);
+ *y1 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 42);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float height)
+{
+ int fheight = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hhea + 4) - ttSHORT(info->data + info->hhea + 6);
+ return (float) height / fheight;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels)
+{
+ int unitsPerEm = ttUSHORT(info->data + info->head + 18);
+ return pixels / unitsPerEm;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_vertex *v)
+{
+ STBTT_free(v, info->userdata);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// antialiasing software rasterizer
+//
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y,float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
+{
+ int x0=0,y0=0,x1,y1; // =0 suppresses compiler warning
+ if (!stbtt_GetGlyphBox(font, glyph, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1)) {
+ // e.g. space character
+ if (ix0) *ix0 = 0;
+ if (iy0) *iy0 = 0;
+ if (ix1) *ix1 = 0;
+ if (iy1) *iy1 = 0;
+ } else {
+ // move to integral bboxes (treating pixels as little squares, what pixels get touched)?
+ if (ix0) *ix0 = STBTT_ifloor( x0 * scale_x + shift_x);
+ if (iy0) *iy0 = STBTT_ifloor(-y1 * scale_y + shift_y);
+ if (ix1) *ix1 = STBTT_iceil ( x1 * scale_x + shift_x);
+ if (iy1) *iy1 = STBTT_iceil (-y0 * scale_y + shift_y);
+ }
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
+{
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, glyph, scale_x, scale_y,0.0f,0.0f, ix0, iy0, ix1, iy1);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
+{
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(font,codepoint), scale_x, scale_y,shift_x,shift_y, ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
+{
+ stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, codepoint, scale_x, scale_y,0.0f,0.0f, ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Rasterizer
+
+typedef struct stbtt__hheap_chunk
+{
+ struct stbtt__hheap_chunk *next;
+} stbtt__hheap_chunk;
+
+typedef struct stbtt__hheap
+{
+ struct stbtt__hheap_chunk *head;
+ void *first_free;
+ int num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
+} stbtt__hheap;
+
+static void *stbtt__hheap_alloc(stbtt__hheap *hh, size_t size, void *userdata)
+{
+ if (hh->first_free) {
+ void *p = hh->first_free;
+ hh->first_free = * (void **) p;
+ return p;
+ } else {
+ if (hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk == 0) {
+ int count = (size < 32 ? 2000 : size < 128 ? 800 : 100);
+ stbtt__hheap_chunk *c = (stbtt__hheap_chunk *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(stbtt__hheap_chunk) + size * count, userdata);
+ if (c == NULL)
+ return NULL;
+ c->next = hh->head;
+ hh->head = c;
+ hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk = count;
+ }
+ --hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
+ return (char *) (hh->head) + sizeof(stbtt__hheap_chunk) + size * hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
+ }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__hheap_free(stbtt__hheap *hh, void *p)
+{
+ *(void **) p = hh->first_free;
+ hh->first_free = p;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__hheap_cleanup(stbtt__hheap *hh, void *userdata)
+{
+ stbtt__hheap_chunk *c = hh->head;
+ while (c) {
+ stbtt__hheap_chunk *n = c->next;
+ STBTT_free(c, userdata);
+ c = n;
+ }
+}
+
+typedef struct stbtt__edge {
+ float x0,y0, x1,y1;
+ int invert;
+} stbtt__edge;
+
+
+typedef struct stbtt__active_edge
+{
+ struct stbtt__active_edge *next;
+ #if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION==1
+ int x,dx;
+ float ey;
+ int direction;
+ #elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION==2
+ float fx,fdx,fdy;
+ float direction;
+ float sy;
+ float ey;
+ #else
+ #error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
+ #endif
+} stbtt__active_edge;
+
+#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
+#define STBTT_FIXSHIFT 10
+#define STBTT_FIX (1 << STBTT_FIXSHIFT)
+#define STBTT_FIXMASK (STBTT_FIX-1)
+
+static stbtt__active_edge *stbtt__new_active(stbtt__hheap *hh, stbtt__edge *e, int off_x, float start_point, void *userdata)
+{
+ stbtt__active_edge *z = (stbtt__active_edge *) stbtt__hheap_alloc(hh, sizeof(*z), userdata);
+ float dxdy = (e->x1 - e->x0) / (e->y1 - e->y0);
+ STBTT_assert(z != NULL);
+ if (!z) return z;
+
+ // round dx down to avoid overshooting
+ if (dxdy < 0)
+ z->dx = -STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * -dxdy);
+ else
+ z->dx = STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * dxdy);
+
+ z->x = STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * e->x0 + z->dx * (start_point - e->y0)); // use z->dx so when we offset later it's by the same amount
+ z->x -= off_x * STBTT_FIX;
+
+ z->ey = e->y1;
+ z->next = 0;
+ z->direction = e->invert ? 1 : -1;
+ return z;
+}
+#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
+static stbtt__active_edge *stbtt__new_active(stbtt__hheap *hh, stbtt__edge *e, int off_x, float start_point, void *userdata)
+{
+ stbtt__active_edge *z = (stbtt__active_edge *) stbtt__hheap_alloc(hh, sizeof(*z), userdata);
+ float dxdy = (e->x1 - e->x0) / (e->y1 - e->y0);
+ STBTT_assert(z != NULL);
+ //STBTT_assert(e->y0 <= start_point);
+ if (!z) return z;
+ z->fdx = dxdy;
+ z->fdy = dxdy != 0.0f ? (1.0f/dxdy) : 0.0f;
+ z->fx = e->x0 + dxdy * (start_point - e->y0);
+ z->fx -= off_x;
+ z->direction = e->invert ? 1.0f : -1.0f;
+ z->sy = e->y0;
+ z->ey = e->y1;
+ z->next = 0;
+ return z;
+}
+#else
+#error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
+#endif
+
+#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
+// note: this routine clips fills that extend off the edges... ideally this
+// wouldn't happen, but it could happen if the truetype glyph bounding boxes
+// are wrong, or if the user supplies a too-small bitmap
+static void stbtt__fill_active_edges(unsigned char *scanline, int len, stbtt__active_edge *e, int max_weight)
+{
+ // non-zero winding fill
+ int x0=0, w=0;
+
+ while (e) {
+ if (w == 0) {
+ // if we're currently at zero, we need to record the edge start point
+ x0 = e->x; w += e->direction;
+ } else {
+ int x1 = e->x; w += e->direction;
+ // if we went to zero, we need to draw
+ if (w == 0) {
+ int i = x0 >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT;
+ int j = x1 >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT;
+
+ if (i < len && j >= 0) {
+ if (i == j) {
+ // x0,x1 are the same pixel, so compute combined coverage
+ scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) ((x1 - x0) * max_weight >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
+ } else {
+ if (i >= 0) // add antialiasing for x0
+ scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) (((STBTT_FIX - (x0 & STBTT_FIXMASK)) * max_weight) >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
+ else
+ i = -1; // clip
+
+ if (j < len) // add antialiasing for x1
+ scanline[j] = scanline[j] + (stbtt_uint8) (((x1 & STBTT_FIXMASK) * max_weight) >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
+ else
+ j = len; // clip
+
+ for (++i; i < j; ++i) // fill pixels between x0 and x1
+ scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) max_weight;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ e = e->next;
+ }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__edge *e, int n, int vsubsample, int off_x, int off_y, void *userdata)
+{
+ stbtt__hheap hh = { 0, 0, 0 };
+ stbtt__active_edge *active = NULL;
+ int y,j=0;
+ int max_weight = (255 / vsubsample); // weight per vertical scanline
+ int s; // vertical subsample index
+ unsigned char scanline_data[512], *scanline;
+
+ if (result->w > 512)
+ scanline = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(result->w, userdata);
+ else
+ scanline = scanline_data;
+
+ y = off_y * vsubsample;
+ e[n].y0 = (off_y + result->h) * (float) vsubsample + 1;
+
+ while (j < result->h) {
+ STBTT_memset(scanline, 0, result->w);
+ for (s=0; s < vsubsample; ++s) {
+ // find center of pixel for this scanline
+ float scan_y = y + 0.5f;
+ stbtt__active_edge **step = &active;
+
+ // update all active edges;
+ // remove all active edges that terminate before the center of this scanline
+ while (*step) {
+ stbtt__active_edge * z = *step;
+ if (z->ey <= scan_y) {
+ *step = z->next; // delete from list
+ STBTT_assert(z->direction);
+ z->direction = 0;
+ stbtt__hheap_free(&hh, z);
+ } else {
+ z->x += z->dx; // advance to position for current scanline
+ step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
+ }
+ }
+
+ // resort the list if needed
+ for(;;) {
+ int changed=0;
+ step = &active;
+ while (*step && (*step)->next) {
+ if ((*step)->x > (*step)->next->x) {
+ stbtt__active_edge *t = *step;
+ stbtt__active_edge *q = t->next;
+
+ t->next = q->next;
+ q->next = t;
+ *step = q;
+ changed = 1;
+ }
+ step = &(*step)->next;
+ }
+ if (!changed) break;
+ }
+
+ // insert all edges that start before the center of this scanline -- omit ones that also end on this scanline
+ while (e->y0 <= scan_y) {
+ if (e->y1 > scan_y) {
+ stbtt__active_edge *z = stbtt__new_active(&hh, e, off_x, scan_y, userdata);
+ if (z != NULL) {
+ // find insertion point
+ if (active == NULL)
+ active = z;
+ else if (z->x < active->x) {
+ // insert at front
+ z->next = active;
+ active = z;
+ } else {
+ // find thing to insert AFTER
+ stbtt__active_edge *p = active;
+ while (p->next && p->next->x < z->x)
+ p = p->next;
+ // at this point, p->next->x is NOT < z->x
+ z->next = p->next;
+ p->next = z;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ ++e;
+ }
+
+ // now process all active edges in XOR fashion
+ if (active)
+ stbtt__fill_active_edges(scanline, result->w, active, max_weight);
+
+ ++y;
+ }
+ STBTT_memcpy(result->pixels + j * result->stride, scanline, result->w);
+ ++j;
+ }
+
+ stbtt__hheap_cleanup(&hh, userdata);
+
+ if (scanline != scanline_data)
+ STBTT_free(scanline, userdata);
+}
+
+#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
+
+// the edge passed in here does not cross the vertical line at x or the vertical line at x+1
+// (i.e. it has already been clipped to those)
+static void stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(float *scanline, int x, stbtt__active_edge *e, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1)
+{
+ if (y0 == y1) return;
+ STBTT_assert(y0 < y1);
+ STBTT_assert(e->sy <= e->ey);
+ if (y0 > e->ey) return;
+ if (y1 < e->sy) return;
+ if (y0 < e->sy) {
+ x0 += (x1-x0) * (e->sy - y0) / (y1-y0);
+ y0 = e->sy;
+ }
+ if (y1 > e->ey) {
+ x1 += (x1-x0) * (e->ey - y1) / (y1-y0);
+ y1 = e->ey;
+ }
+
+ if (x0 == x)
+ STBTT_assert(x1 <= x+1);
+ else if (x0 == x+1)
+ STBTT_assert(x1 >= x);
+ else if (x0 <= x)
+ STBTT_assert(x1 <= x);
+ else if (x0 >= x+1)
+ STBTT_assert(x1 >= x+1);
+ else
+ STBTT_assert(x1 >= x && x1 <= x+1);
+
+ if (x0 <= x && x1 <= x)
+ scanline[x] += e->direction * (y1-y0);
+ else if (x0 >= x+1 && x1 >= x+1)
+ ;
+ else {
+ STBTT_assert(x0 >= x && x0 <= x+1 && x1 >= x && x1 <= x+1);
+ scanline[x] += e->direction * (y1-y0) * (1-((x0-x)+(x1-x))/2); // coverage = 1 - average x position
+ }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__fill_active_edges_new(float *scanline, float *scanline_fill, int len, stbtt__active_edge *e, float y_top)
+{
+ float y_bottom = y_top+1;
+
+ while (e) {
+ // brute force every pixel
+
+ // compute intersection points with top & bottom
+ STBTT_assert(e->ey >= y_top);
+
+ if (e->fdx == 0) {
+ float x0 = e->fx;
+ if (x0 < len) {
+ if (x0 >= 0) {
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,(int) x0,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline_fill-1,(int) x0+1,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
+ } else {
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline_fill-1,0,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
+ }
+ }
+ } else {
+ float x0 = e->fx;
+ float dx = e->fdx;
+ float xb = x0 + dx;
+ float x_top, x_bottom;
+ float sy0,sy1;
+ float dy = e->fdy;
+ STBTT_assert(e->sy <= y_bottom && e->ey >= y_top);
+
+ // compute endpoints of line segment clipped to this scanline (if the
+ // line segment starts on this scanline. x0 is the intersection of the
+ // line with y_top, but that may be off the line segment.
+ if (e->sy > y_top) {
+ x_top = x0 + dx * (e->sy - y_top);
+ sy0 = e->sy;
+ } else {
+ x_top = x0;
+ sy0 = y_top;
+ }
+ if (e->ey < y_bottom) {
+ x_bottom = x0 + dx * (e->ey - y_top);
+ sy1 = e->ey;
+ } else {
+ x_bottom = xb;
+ sy1 = y_bottom;
+ }
+
+ if (x_top >= 0 && x_bottom >= 0 && x_top < len && x_bottom < len) {
+ // from here on, we don't have to range check x values
+
+ if ((int) x_top == (int) x_bottom) {
+ float height;
+ // simple case, only spans one pixel
+ int x = (int) x_top;
+ height = sy1 - sy0;
+ STBTT_assert(x >= 0 && x < len);
+ scanline[x] += e->direction * (1-((x_top - x) + (x_bottom-x))/2) * height;
+ scanline_fill[x] += e->direction * height; // everything right of this pixel is filled
+ } else {
+ int x,x1,x2;
+ float y_crossing, step, sign, area;
+ // covers 2+ pixels
+ if (x_top > x_bottom) {
+ // flip scanline vertically; signed area is the same
+ float t;
+ sy0 = y_bottom - (sy0 - y_top);
+ sy1 = y_bottom - (sy1 - y_top);
+ t = sy0, sy0 = sy1, sy1 = t;
+ t = x_bottom, x_bottom = x_top, x_top = t;
+ dx = -dx;
+ dy = -dy;
+ t = x0, x0 = xb, xb = t;
+ // [DEAR IMGUI] Fix static analyzer warning
+ (void)dx; // [ImGui: fix static analyzer warning]
+ }
+
+ x1 = (int) x_top;
+ x2 = (int) x_bottom;
+ // compute intersection with y axis at x1+1
+ y_crossing = (x1+1 - x0) * dy + y_top;
+
+ sign = e->direction;
+ // area of the rectangle covered from y0..y_crossing
+ area = sign * (y_crossing-sy0);
+ // area of the triangle (x_top,y0), (x+1,y0), (x+1,y_crossing)
+ scanline[x1] += area * (1-((x_top - x1)+(x1+1-x1))/2);
+
+ step = sign * dy;
+ for (x = x1+1; x < x2; ++x) {
+ scanline[x] += area + step/2;
+ area += step;
+ }
+ y_crossing += dy * (x2 - (x1+1));
+
+ STBTT_assert(STBTT_fabs(area) <= 1.01f);
+
+ scanline[x2] += area + sign * (1-((x2-x2)+(x_bottom-x2))/2) * (sy1-y_crossing);
+
+ scanline_fill[x2] += sign * (sy1-sy0);
+ }
+ } else {
+ // if edge goes outside of box we're drawing, we require
+ // clipping logic. since this does not match the intended use
+ // of this library, we use a different, very slow brute
+ // force implementation
+ int x;
+ for (x=0; x < len; ++x) {
+ // cases:
+ //
+ // there can be up to two intersections with the pixel. any intersection
+ // with left or right edges can be handled by splitting into two (or three)
+ // regions. intersections with top & bottom do not necessitate case-wise logic.
+ //
+ // the old way of doing this found the intersections with the left & right edges,
+ // then used some simple logic to produce up to three segments in sorted order
+ // from top-to-bottom. however, this had a problem: if an x edge was epsilon
+ // across the x border, then the corresponding y position might not be distinct
+ // from the other y segment, and it might ignored as an empty segment. to avoid
+ // that, we need to explicitly produce segments based on x positions.
+
+ // rename variables to clearly-defined pairs
+ float y0 = y_top;
+ float x1 = (float) (x);
+ float x2 = (float) (x+1);
+ float x3 = xb;
+ float y3 = y_bottom;
+
+ // x = e->x + e->dx * (y-y_top)
+ // (y-y_top) = (x - e->x) / e->dx
+ // y = (x - e->x) / e->dx + y_top
+ float y1 = (x - x0) / dx + y_top;
+ float y2 = (x+1 - x0) / dx + y_top;
+
+ if (x0 < x1 && x3 > x2) { // three segments descending down-right
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x2,y2);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
+ } else if (x3 < x1 && x0 > x2) { // three segments descending down-left
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x1,y1);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
+ } else if (x0 < x1 && x3 > x1) { // two segments across x, down-right
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
+ } else if (x3 < x1 && x0 > x1) { // two segments across x, down-left
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
+ } else if (x0 < x2 && x3 > x2) { // two segments across x+1, down-right
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
+ } else if (x3 < x2 && x0 > x2) { // two segments across x+1, down-left
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
+ } else { // one segment
+ stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x3,y3);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ e = e->next;
+ }
+}
+
+// directly AA rasterize edges w/o supersampling
+static void stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__edge *e, int n, int vsubsample, int off_x, int off_y, void *userdata)
+{
+ stbtt__hheap hh = { 0, 0, 0 };
+ stbtt__active_edge *active = NULL;
+ int y,j=0, i;
+ float scanline_data[129], *scanline, *scanline2;
+
+ STBTT__NOTUSED(vsubsample);
+
+ if (result->w > 64)
+ scanline = (float *) STBTT_malloc((result->w*2+1) * sizeof(float), userdata);
+ else
+ scanline = scanline_data;
+
+ scanline2 = scanline + result->w;
+
+ y = off_y;
+ e[n].y0 = (float) (off_y + result->h) + 1;
+
+ while (j < result->h) {
+ // find center of pixel for this scanline
+ float scan_y_top = y + 0.0f;
+ float scan_y_bottom = y + 1.0f;
+ stbtt__active_edge **step = &active;
+
+ STBTT_memset(scanline , 0, result->w*sizeof(scanline[0]));
+ STBTT_memset(scanline2, 0, (result->w+1)*sizeof(scanline[0]));
+
+ // update all active edges;
+ // remove all active edges that terminate before the top of this scanline
+ while (*step) {
+ stbtt__active_edge * z = *step;
+ if (z->ey <= scan_y_top) {
+ *step = z->next; // delete from list
+ STBTT_assert(z->direction);
+ z->direction = 0;
+ stbtt__hheap_free(&hh, z);
+ } else {
+ step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
+ }
+ }
+
+ // insert all edges that start before the bottom of this scanline
+ while (e->y0 <= scan_y_bottom) {
+ if (e->y0 != e->y1) {
+ stbtt__active_edge *z = stbtt__new_active(&hh, e, off_x, scan_y_top, userdata);
+ if (z != NULL) {
+ if (j == 0 && off_y != 0) {
+ if (z->ey < scan_y_top) {
+ // this can happen due to subpixel positioning and some kind of fp rounding error i think
+ z->ey = scan_y_top;
+ }
+ }
+ STBTT_assert(z->ey >= scan_y_top); // if we get really unlucky a tiny bit of an edge can be out of bounds
+ // insert at front
+ z->next = active;
+ active = z;
+ }
+ }
+ ++e;
+ }
+
+ // now process all active edges
+ if (active)
+ stbtt__fill_active_edges_new(scanline, scanline2+1, result->w, active, scan_y_top);
+
+ {
+ float sum = 0;
+ for (i=0; i < result->w; ++i) {
+ float k;
+ int m;
+ sum += scanline2[i];
+ k = scanline[i] + sum;
+ k = (float) STBTT_fabs(k)*255 + 0.5f;
+ m = (int) k;
+ if (m > 255) m = 255;
+ result->pixels[j*result->stride + i] = (unsigned char) m;
+ }
+ }
+ // advance all the edges
+ step = &active;
+ while (*step) {
+ stbtt__active_edge *z = *step;
+ z->fx += z->fdx; // advance to position for current scanline
+ step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
+ }
+
+ ++y;
+ ++j;
+ }
+
+ stbtt__hheap_cleanup(&hh, userdata);
+
+ if (scanline != scanline_data)
+ STBTT_free(scanline, userdata);
+}
+#else
+#error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
+#endif
+
+#define STBTT__COMPARE(a,b) ((a)->y0 < (b)->y0)
+
+static void stbtt__sort_edges_ins_sort(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
+{
+ int i,j;
+ for (i=1; i < n; ++i) {
+ stbtt__edge t = p[i], *a = &t;
+ j = i;
+ while (j > 0) {
+ stbtt__edge *b = &p[j-1];
+ int c = STBTT__COMPARE(a,b);
+ if (!c) break;
+ p[j] = p[j-1];
+ --j;
+ }
+ if (i != j)
+ p[j] = t;
+ }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
+{
+ /* threshold for transitioning to insertion sort */
+ while (n > 12) {
+ stbtt__edge t;
+ int c01,c12,c,m,i,j;
+
+ /* compute median of three */
+ m = n >> 1;
+ c01 = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0],&p[m]);
+ c12 = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[m],&p[n-1]);
+ /* if 0 >= mid >= end, or 0 < mid < end, then use mid */
+ if (c01 != c12) {
+ /* otherwise, we'll need to swap something else to middle */
+ int z;
+ c = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0],&p[n-1]);
+ /* 0>mid && mid<n: 0>n => n; 0<n => 0 */
+ /* 0<mid && mid>n: 0>n => 0; 0<n => n */
+ z = (c == c12) ? 0 : n-1;
+ t = p[z];
+ p[z] = p[m];
+ p[m] = t;
+ }
+ /* now p[m] is the median-of-three */
+ /* swap it to the beginning so it won't move around */
+ t = p[0];
+ p[0] = p[m];
+ p[m] = t;
+
+ /* partition loop */
+ i=1;
+ j=n-1;
+ for(;;) {
+ /* handling of equality is crucial here */
+ /* for sentinels & efficiency with duplicates */
+ for (;;++i) {
+ if (!STBTT__COMPARE(&p[i], &p[0])) break;
+ }
+ for (;;--j) {
+ if (!STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0], &p[j])) break;
+ }
+ /* make sure we haven't crossed */
+ if (i >= j) break;
+ t = p[i];
+ p[i] = p[j];
+ p[j] = t;
+
+ ++i;
+ --j;
+ }
+ /* recurse on smaller side, iterate on larger */
+ if (j < (n-i)) {
+ stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p,j);
+ p = p+i;
+ n = n-i;
+ } else {
+ stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p+i, n-i);
+ n = j;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__sort_edges(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
+{
+ stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p, n);
+ stbtt__sort_edges_ins_sort(p, n);
+}
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ float x,y;
+} stbtt__point;
+
+static void stbtt__rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__point *pts, int *wcount, int windings, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int off_x, int off_y, int invert, void *userdata)
+{
+ float y_scale_inv = invert ? -scale_y : scale_y;
+ stbtt__edge *e;
+ int n,i,j,k,m;
+#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
+ int vsubsample = result->h < 8 ? 15 : 5;
+#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
+ int vsubsample = 1;
+#else
+ #error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
+#endif
+ // vsubsample should divide 255 evenly; otherwise we won't reach full opacity
+
+ // now we have to blow out the windings into explicit edge lists
+ n = 0;
+ for (i=0; i < windings; ++i)
+ n += wcount[i];
+
+ e = (stbtt__edge *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*e) * (n+1), userdata); // add an extra one as a sentinel
+ if (e == 0) return;
+ n = 0;
+
+ m=0;
+ for (i=0; i < windings; ++i) {
+ stbtt__point *p = pts + m;
+ m += wcount[i];
+ j = wcount[i]-1;
+ for (k=0; k < wcount[i]; j=k++) {
+ int a=k,b=j;
+ // skip the edge if horizontal
+ if (p[j].y == p[k].y)
+ continue;
+ // add edge from j to k to the list
+ e[n].invert = 0;
+ if (invert ? p[j].y > p[k].y : p[j].y < p[k].y) {
+ e[n].invert = 1;
+ a=j,b=k;
+ }
+ e[n].x0 = p[a].x * scale_x + shift_x;
+ e[n].y0 = (p[a].y * y_scale_inv + shift_y) * vsubsample;
+ e[n].x1 = p[b].x * scale_x + shift_x;
+ e[n].y1 = (p[b].y * y_scale_inv + shift_y) * vsubsample;
+ ++n;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // now sort the edges by their highest point (should snap to integer, and then by x)
+ //STBTT_sort(e, n, sizeof(e[0]), stbtt__edge_compare);
+ stbtt__sort_edges(e, n);
+
+ // now, traverse the scanlines and find the intersections on each scanline, use xor winding rule
+ stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(result, e, n, vsubsample, off_x, off_y, userdata);
+
+ STBTT_free(e, userdata);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__add_point(stbtt__point *points, int n, float x, float y)
+{
+ if (!points) return; // during first pass, it's unallocated
+ points[n].x = x;
+ points[n].y = y;
+}
+
+// tessellate until threshold p is happy... @TODO warped to compensate for non-linear stretching
+static int stbtt__tesselate_curve(stbtt__point *points, int *num_points, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float objspace_flatness_squared, int n)
+{
+ // midpoint
+ float mx = (x0 + 2*x1 + x2)/4;
+ float my = (y0 + 2*y1 + y2)/4;
+ // versus directly drawn line
+ float dx = (x0+x2)/2 - mx;
+ float dy = (y0+y2)/2 - my;
+ if (n > 16) // 65536 segments on one curve better be enough!
+ return 1;
+ if (dx*dx+dy*dy > objspace_flatness_squared) { // half-pixel error allowed... need to be smaller if AA
+ stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, num_points, x0,y0, (x0+x1)/2.0f,(y0+y1)/2.0f, mx,my, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
+ stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, num_points, mx,my, (x1+x2)/2.0f,(y1+y2)/2.0f, x2,y2, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
+ } else {
+ stbtt__add_point(points, *num_points,x2,y2);
+ *num_points = *num_points+1;
+ }
+ return 1;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__tesselate_cubic(stbtt__point *points, int *num_points, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float objspace_flatness_squared, int n)
+{
+ // @TODO this "flatness" calculation is just made-up nonsense that seems to work well enough
+ float dx0 = x1-x0;
+ float dy0 = y1-y0;
+ float dx1 = x2-x1;
+ float dy1 = y2-y1;
+ float dx2 = x3-x2;
+ float dy2 = y3-y2;
+ float dx = x3-x0;
+ float dy = y3-y0;
+ float longlen = (float) (STBTT_sqrt(dx0*dx0+dy0*dy0)+STBTT_sqrt(dx1*dx1+dy1*dy1)+STBTT_sqrt(dx2*dx2+dy2*dy2));
+ float shortlen = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dx*dx+dy*dy);
+ float flatness_squared = longlen*longlen-shortlen*shortlen;
+
+ if (n > 16) // 65536 segments on one curve better be enough!
+ return;
+
+ if (flatness_squared > objspace_flatness_squared) {
+ float x01 = (x0+x1)/2;
+ float y01 = (y0+y1)/2;
+ float x12 = (x1+x2)/2;
+ float y12 = (y1+y2)/2;
+ float x23 = (x2+x3)/2;
+ float y23 = (y2+y3)/2;
+
+ float xa = (x01+x12)/2;
+ float ya = (y01+y12)/2;
+ float xb = (x12+x23)/2;
+ float yb = (y12+y23)/2;
+
+ float mx = (xa+xb)/2;
+ float my = (ya+yb)/2;
+
+ stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, num_points, x0,y0, x01,y01, xa,ya, mx,my, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
+ stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, num_points, mx,my, xb,yb, x23,y23, x3,y3, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
+ } else {
+ stbtt__add_point(points, *num_points,x3,y3);
+ *num_points = *num_points+1;
+ }
+}
+
+// returns number of contours
+static stbtt__point *stbtt_FlattenCurves(stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_verts, float objspace_flatness, int **contour_lengths, int *num_contours, void *userdata)
+{
+ stbtt__point *points=0;
+ int num_points=0;
+
+ float objspace_flatness_squared = objspace_flatness * objspace_flatness;
+ int i,n=0,start=0, pass;
+
+ // count how many "moves" there are to get the contour count
+ for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i)
+ if (vertices[i].type == STBTT_vmove)
+ ++n;
+
+ *num_contours = n;
+ if (n == 0) return 0;
+
+ *contour_lengths = (int *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(**contour_lengths) * n, userdata);
+
+ if (*contour_lengths == 0) {
+ *num_contours = 0;
+ return 0;
+ }
+
+ // make two passes through the points so we don't need to realloc
+ for (pass=0; pass < 2; ++pass) {
+ float x=0,y=0;
+ if (pass == 1) {
+ points = (stbtt__point *) STBTT_malloc(num_points * sizeof(points[0]), userdata);
+ if (points == NULL) goto error;
+ }
+ num_points = 0;
+ n= -1;
+ for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) {
+ switch (vertices[i].type) {
+ case STBTT_vmove:
+ // start the next contour
+ if (n >= 0)
+ (*contour_lengths)[n] = num_points - start;
+ ++n;
+ start = num_points;
+
+ x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
+ stbtt__add_point(points, num_points++, x,y);
+ break;
+ case STBTT_vline:
+ x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
+ stbtt__add_point(points, num_points++, x, y);
+ break;
+ case STBTT_vcurve:
+ stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, &num_points, x,y,
+ vertices[i].cx, vertices[i].cy,
+ vertices[i].x, vertices[i].y,
+ objspace_flatness_squared, 0);
+ x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
+ break;
+ case STBTT_vcubic:
+ stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, &num_points, x,y,
+ vertices[i].cx, vertices[i].cy,
+ vertices[i].cx1, vertices[i].cy1,
+ vertices[i].x, vertices[i].y,
+ objspace_flatness_squared, 0);
+ x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ (*contour_lengths)[n] = num_points - start;
+ }
+
+ return points;
+error:
+ STBTT_free(points, userdata);
+ STBTT_free(*contour_lengths, userdata);
+ *contour_lengths = 0;
+ *num_contours = 0;
+ return NULL;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_Rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, float flatness_in_pixels, stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_verts, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int x_off, int y_off, int invert, void *userdata)
+{
+ float scale = scale_x > scale_y ? scale_y : scale_x;
+ int winding_count = 0;
+ int *winding_lengths = NULL;
+ stbtt__point *windings = stbtt_FlattenCurves(vertices, num_verts, flatness_in_pixels / scale, &winding_lengths, &winding_count, userdata);
+ if (windings) {
+ stbtt__rasterize(result, windings, winding_lengths, winding_count, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, x_off, y_off, invert, userdata);
+ STBTT_free(winding_lengths, userdata);
+ STBTT_free(windings, userdata);
+ }
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeBitmap(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata)
+{
+ STBTT_free(bitmap, userdata);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+ int ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1;
+ stbtt__bitmap gbm;
+ stbtt_vertex *vertices;
+ int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &vertices);
+
+ if (scale_x == 0) scale_x = scale_y;
+ if (scale_y == 0) {
+ if (scale_x == 0) {
+ STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+ return NULL;
+ }
+ scale_y = scale_x;
+ }
+
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, &ix0,&iy0,&ix1,&iy1);
+
+ // now we get the size
+ gbm.w = (ix1 - ix0);
+ gbm.h = (iy1 - iy0);
+ gbm.pixels = NULL; // in case we error
+
+ if (width ) *width = gbm.w;
+ if (height) *height = gbm.h;
+ if (xoff ) *xoff = ix0;
+ if (yoff ) *yoff = iy0;
+
+ if (gbm.w && gbm.h) {
+ gbm.pixels = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(gbm.w * gbm.h, info->userdata);
+ if (gbm.pixels) {
+ gbm.stride = gbm.w;
+
+ stbtt_Rasterize(&gbm, 0.35f, vertices, num_verts, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, ix0, iy0, 1, info->userdata);
+ }
+ }
+ STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+ return gbm.pixels;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+ return stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f, 0.0f, glyph, width, height, xoff, yoff);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph)
+{
+ int ix0,iy0;
+ stbtt_vertex *vertices;
+ int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &vertices);
+ stbtt__bitmap gbm;
+
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, &ix0,&iy0,0,0);
+ gbm.pixels = output;
+ gbm.w = out_w;
+ gbm.h = out_h;
+ gbm.stride = out_stride;
+
+ if (gbm.w && gbm.h)
+ stbtt_Rasterize(&gbm, 0.35f, vertices, num_verts, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, ix0,iy0, 1, info->userdata);
+
+ STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph)
+{
+ stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, glyph);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+ return stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y,shift_x,shift_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), width,height,xoff,yoff);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int codepoint)
+{
+ stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, oversample_x, oversample_y, sub_x, sub_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint));
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint)
+{
+ stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint));
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+ return stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, codepoint, width,height,xoff,yoff);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint)
+{
+ stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, codepoint);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// bitmap baking
+//
+// This is SUPER-CRAPPY packing to keep source code small
+
+static int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap_internal(unsigned char *data, int offset, // font location (use offset=0 for plain .ttf)
+ float pixel_height, // height of font in pixels
+ unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, // bitmap to be filled in
+ int first_char, int num_chars, // characters to bake
+ stbtt_bakedchar *chardata)
+{
+ float scale;
+ int x,y,bottom_y, i;
+ stbtt_fontinfo f;
+ f.userdata = NULL;
+ if (!stbtt_InitFont(&f, data, offset))
+ return -1;
+ STBTT_memset(pixels, 0, pw*ph); // background of 0 around pixels
+ x=y=1;
+ bottom_y = 1;
+
+ scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&f, pixel_height);
+
+ for (i=0; i < num_chars; ++i) {
+ int advance, lsb, x0,y0,x1,y1,gw,gh;
+ int g = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&f, first_char + i);
+ stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(&f, g, &advance, &lsb);
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(&f, g, scale,scale, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
+ gw = x1-x0;
+ gh = y1-y0;
+ if (x + gw + 1 >= pw)
+ y = bottom_y, x = 1; // advance to next row
+ if (y + gh + 1 >= ph) // check if it fits vertically AFTER potentially moving to next row
+ return -i;
+ STBTT_assert(x+gw < pw);
+ STBTT_assert(y+gh < ph);
+ stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(&f, pixels+x+y*pw, gw,gh,pw, scale,scale, g);
+ chardata[i].x0 = (stbtt_int16) x;
+ chardata[i].y0 = (stbtt_int16) y;
+ chardata[i].x1 = (stbtt_int16) (x + gw);
+ chardata[i].y1 = (stbtt_int16) (y + gh);
+ chardata[i].xadvance = scale * advance;
+ chardata[i].xoff = (float) x0;
+ chardata[i].yoff = (float) y0;
+ x = x + gw + 1;
+ if (y+gh+1 > bottom_y)
+ bottom_y = y+gh+1;
+ }
+ return bottom_y;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetBakedQuad(const stbtt_bakedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, int char_index, float *xpos, float *ypos, stbtt_aligned_quad *q, int opengl_fillrule)
+{
+ float d3d_bias = opengl_fillrule ? 0 : -0.5f;
+ float ipw = 1.0f / pw, iph = 1.0f / ph;
+ const stbtt_bakedchar *b = chardata + char_index;
+ int round_x = STBTT_ifloor((*xpos + b->xoff) + 0.5f);
+ int round_y = STBTT_ifloor((*ypos + b->yoff) + 0.5f);
+
+ q->x0 = round_x + d3d_bias;
+ q->y0 = round_y + d3d_bias;
+ q->x1 = round_x + b->x1 - b->x0 + d3d_bias;
+ q->y1 = round_y + b->y1 - b->y0 + d3d_bias;
+
+ q->s0 = b->x0 * ipw;
+ q->t0 = b->y0 * iph;
+ q->s1 = b->x1 * ipw;
+ q->t1 = b->y1 * iph;
+
+ *xpos += b->xadvance;
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// rectangle packing replacement routines if you don't have stb_rect_pack.h
+//
+
+#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION
+
+typedef int stbrp_coord;
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// //
+// //
+// COMPILER WARNING ?!?!? //
+// //
+// //
+// if you get a compile warning due to these symbols being defined more than //
+// once, move #include "stb_rect_pack.h" before #include "stb_truetype.h" //
+// //
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ int width,height;
+ int x,y,bottom_y;
+} stbrp_context;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+ unsigned char x;
+} stbrp_node;
+
+struct stbrp_rect
+{
+ stbrp_coord x,y;
+ int id,w,h,was_packed;
+};
+
+static void stbrp_init_target(stbrp_context *con, int pw, int ph, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes)
+{
+ con->width = pw;
+ con->height = ph;
+ con->x = 0;
+ con->y = 0;
+ con->bottom_y = 0;
+ STBTT__NOTUSED(nodes);
+ STBTT__NOTUSED(num_nodes);
+}
+
+static void stbrp_pack_rects(stbrp_context *con, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
+{
+ int i;
+ for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
+ if (con->x + rects[i].w > con->width) {
+ con->x = 0;
+ con->y = con->bottom_y;
+ }
+ if (con->y + rects[i].h > con->height)
+ break;
+ rects[i].x = con->x;
+ rects[i].y = con->y;
+ rects[i].was_packed = 1;
+ con->x += rects[i].w;
+ if (con->y + rects[i].h > con->bottom_y)
+ con->bottom_y = con->y + rects[i].h;
+ }
+ for ( ; i < num_rects; ++i)
+ rects[i].was_packed = 0;
+}
+#endif
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// bitmap baking
+//
+// This is SUPER-AWESOME (tm Ryan Gordon) packing using stb_rect_pack.h. If
+// stb_rect_pack.h isn't available, it uses the BakeFontBitmap strategy.
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackBegin(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, int stride_in_bytes, int padding, void *alloc_context)
+{
+ stbrp_context *context = (stbrp_context *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*context) ,alloc_context);
+ int num_nodes = pw - padding;
+ stbrp_node *nodes = (stbrp_node *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*nodes ) * num_nodes,alloc_context);
+
+ if (context == NULL || nodes == NULL) {
+ if (context != NULL) STBTT_free(context, alloc_context);
+ if (nodes != NULL) STBTT_free(nodes , alloc_context);
+ return 0;
+ }
+
+ spc->user_allocator_context = alloc_context;
+ spc->width = pw;
+ spc->height = ph;
+ spc->pixels = pixels;
+ spc->pack_info = context;
+ spc->nodes = nodes;
+ spc->padding = padding;
+ spc->stride_in_bytes = stride_in_bytes != 0 ? stride_in_bytes : pw;
+ spc->h_oversample = 1;
+ spc->v_oversample = 1;
+ spc->skip_missing = 0;
+
+ stbrp_init_target(context, pw-padding, ph-padding, nodes, num_nodes);
+
+ if (pixels)
+ STBTT_memset(pixels, 0, pw*ph); // background of 0 around pixels
+
+ return 1;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackEnd (stbtt_pack_context *spc)
+{
+ STBTT_free(spc->nodes , spc->user_allocator_context);
+ STBTT_free(spc->pack_info, spc->user_allocator_context);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetOversampling(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned int h_oversample, unsigned int v_oversample)
+{
+ STBTT_assert(h_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE);
+ STBTT_assert(v_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE);
+ if (h_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE)
+ spc->h_oversample = h_oversample;
+ if (v_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE)
+ spc->v_oversample = v_oversample;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetSkipMissingCodepoints(stbtt_pack_context *spc, int skip)
+{
+ spc->skip_missing = skip;
+}
+
+#define STBTT__OVER_MASK (STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE-1)
+
+static void stbtt__h_prefilter(unsigned char *pixels, int w, int h, int stride_in_bytes, unsigned int kernel_width)
+{
+ unsigned char buffer[STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE];
+ int safe_w = w - kernel_width;
+ int j;
+ STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); // suppress bogus warning from VS2013 -analyze
+ for (j=0; j < h; ++j) {
+ int i;
+ unsigned int total;
+ STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, kernel_width);
+
+ total = 0;
+
+ // make kernel_width a constant in common cases so compiler can optimize out the divide
+ switch (kernel_width) {
+ case 2:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+ pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 2);
+ }
+ break;
+ case 3:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+ pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 3);
+ }
+ break;
+ case 4:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+ pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 4);
+ }
+ break;
+ case 5:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+ pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 5);
+ }
+ break;
+ default:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+ pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ for (; i < w; ++i) {
+ STBTT_assert(pixels[i] == 0);
+ total -= buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
+ }
+
+ pixels += stride_in_bytes;
+ }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__v_prefilter(unsigned char *pixels, int w, int h, int stride_in_bytes, unsigned int kernel_width)
+{
+ unsigned char buffer[STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE];
+ int safe_h = h - kernel_width;
+ int j;
+ STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); // suppress bogus warning from VS2013 -analyze
+ for (j=0; j < w; ++j) {
+ int i;
+ unsigned int total;
+ STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, kernel_width);
+
+ total = 0;
+
+ // make kernel_width a constant in common cases so compiler can optimize out the divide
+ switch (kernel_width) {
+ case 2:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+ pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 2);
+ }
+ break;
+ case 3:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+ pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 3);
+ }
+ break;
+ case 4:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+ pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 4);
+ }
+ break;
+ case 5:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+ pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 5);
+ }
+ break;
+ default:
+ for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+ total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+ pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ for (; i < h; ++i) {
+ STBTT_assert(pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] == 0);
+ total -= buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+ pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
+ }
+
+ pixels += 1;
+ }
+}
+
+static float stbtt__oversample_shift(int oversample)
+{
+ if (!oversample)
+ return 0.0f;
+
+ // The prefilter is a box filter of width "oversample",
+ // which shifts phase by (oversample - 1)/2 pixels in
+ // oversampled space. We want to shift in the opposite
+ // direction to counter this.
+ return (float)-(oversample - 1) / (2.0f * (float)oversample);
+}
+
+// rects array must be big enough to accommodate all characters in the given ranges
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects)
+{
+ int i,j,k;
+
+ k=0;
+ for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) {
+ float fh = ranges[i].font_size;
+ float scale = fh > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(info, fh) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(info, -fh);
+ ranges[i].h_oversample = (unsigned char) spc->h_oversample;
+ ranges[i].v_oversample = (unsigned char) spc->v_oversample;
+ for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) {
+ int x0,y0,x1,y1;
+ int codepoint = ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints == NULL ? ranges[i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + j : ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints[j];
+ int glyph = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint);
+ if (glyph == 0 && spc->skip_missing) {
+ rects[k].w = rects[k].h = 0;
+ } else {
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info,glyph,
+ scale * spc->h_oversample,
+ scale * spc->v_oversample,
+ 0,0,
+ &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
+ rects[k].w = (stbrp_coord) (x1-x0 + spc->padding + spc->h_oversample-1);
+ rects[k].h = (stbrp_coord) (y1-y0 + spc->padding + spc->v_oversample-1);
+ }
+ ++k;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return k;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int prefilter_x, int prefilter_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int glyph)
+{
+ stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info,
+ output,
+ out_w - (prefilter_x - 1),
+ out_h - (prefilter_y - 1),
+ out_stride,
+ scale_x,
+ scale_y,
+ shift_x,
+ shift_y,
+ glyph);
+
+ if (prefilter_x > 1)
+ stbtt__h_prefilter(output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, prefilter_x);
+
+ if (prefilter_y > 1)
+ stbtt__v_prefilter(output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, prefilter_y);
+
+ *sub_x = stbtt__oversample_shift(prefilter_x);
+ *sub_y = stbtt__oversample_shift(prefilter_y);
+}
+
+// rects array must be big enough to accommodate all characters in the given ranges
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects)
+{
+ int i,j,k, return_value = 1;
+
+ // save current values
+ int old_h_over = spc->h_oversample;
+ int old_v_over = spc->v_oversample;
+
+ k = 0;
+ for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) {
+ float fh = ranges[i].font_size;
+ float scale = fh > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(info, fh) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(info, -fh);
+ float recip_h,recip_v,sub_x,sub_y;
+ spc->h_oversample = ranges[i].h_oversample;
+ spc->v_oversample = ranges[i].v_oversample;
+ recip_h = 1.0f / spc->h_oversample;
+ recip_v = 1.0f / spc->v_oversample;
+ sub_x = stbtt__oversample_shift(spc->h_oversample);
+ sub_y = stbtt__oversample_shift(spc->v_oversample);
+ for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) {
+ stbrp_rect *r = &rects[k];
+ if (r->was_packed && r->w != 0 && r->h != 0) {
+ stbtt_packedchar *bc = &ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j];
+ int advance, lsb, x0,y0,x1,y1;
+ int codepoint = ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints == NULL ? ranges[i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + j : ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints[j];
+ int glyph = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint);
+ stbrp_coord pad = (stbrp_coord) spc->padding;
+
+ // pad on left and top
+ r->x += pad;
+ r->y += pad;
+ r->w -= pad;
+ r->h -= pad;
+ stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(info, glyph, &advance, &lsb);
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(info, glyph,
+ scale * spc->h_oversample,
+ scale * spc->v_oversample,
+ &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
+ stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info,
+ spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
+ r->w - spc->h_oversample+1,
+ r->h - spc->v_oversample+1,
+ spc->stride_in_bytes,
+ scale * spc->h_oversample,
+ scale * spc->v_oversample,
+ 0,0,
+ glyph);
+
+ if (spc->h_oversample > 1)
+ stbtt__h_prefilter(spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
+ r->w, r->h, spc->stride_in_bytes,
+ spc->h_oversample);
+
+ if (spc->v_oversample > 1)
+ stbtt__v_prefilter(spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
+ r->w, r->h, spc->stride_in_bytes,
+ spc->v_oversample);
+
+ bc->x0 = (stbtt_int16) r->x;
+ bc->y0 = (stbtt_int16) r->y;
+ bc->x1 = (stbtt_int16) (r->x + r->w);
+ bc->y1 = (stbtt_int16) (r->y + r->h);
+ bc->xadvance = scale * advance;
+ bc->xoff = (float) x0 * recip_h + sub_x;
+ bc->yoff = (float) y0 * recip_v + sub_y;
+ bc->xoff2 = (x0 + r->w) * recip_h + sub_x;
+ bc->yoff2 = (y0 + r->h) * recip_v + sub_y;
+ } else {
+ return_value = 0; // if any fail, report failure
+ }
+
+ ++k;
+ }
+ }
+
+ // restore original values
+ spc->h_oversample = old_h_over;
+ spc->v_oversample = old_v_over;
+
+ return return_value;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
+{
+ stbrp_pack_rects((stbrp_context *) spc->pack_info, rects, num_rects);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRanges(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges)
+{
+ stbtt_fontinfo info;
+ int i,j,n, return_value = 1;
+ //stbrp_context *context = (stbrp_context *) spc->pack_info;
+ stbrp_rect *rects;
+
+ // flag all characters as NOT packed
+ for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i)
+ for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j)
+ ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].x0 =
+ ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].y0 =
+ ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].x1 =
+ ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].y1 = 0;
+
+ n = 0;
+ for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i)
+ n += ranges[i].num_chars;
+
+ rects = (stbrp_rect *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*rects) * n, spc->user_allocator_context);
+ if (rects == NULL)
+ return 0;
+
+ info.userdata = spc->user_allocator_context;
+ stbtt_InitFont(&info, fontdata, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(fontdata,font_index));
+
+ n = stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(spc, &info, ranges, num_ranges, rects);
+
+ stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(spc, rects, n);
+
+ return_value = stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(spc, &info, ranges, num_ranges, rects);
+
+ STBTT_free(rects, spc->user_allocator_context);
+ return return_value;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRange(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, float font_size,
+ int first_unicode_codepoint_in_range, int num_chars_in_range, stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range)
+{
+ stbtt_pack_range range;
+ range.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = first_unicode_codepoint_in_range;
+ range.array_of_unicode_codepoints = NULL;
+ range.num_chars = num_chars_in_range;
+ range.chardata_for_range = chardata_for_range;
+ range.font_size = font_size;
+ return stbtt_PackFontRanges(spc, fontdata, font_index, &range, 1);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetScaledFontVMetrics(const unsigned char *fontdata, int index, float size, float *ascent, float *descent, float *lineGap)
+{
+ int i_ascent, i_descent, i_lineGap;
+ float scale;
+ stbtt_fontinfo info;
+ stbtt_InitFont(&info, fontdata, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(fontdata, index));
+ scale = size > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&info, size) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(&info, -size);
+ stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&info, &i_ascent, &i_descent, &i_lineGap);
+ *ascent = (float) i_ascent * scale;
+ *descent = (float) i_descent * scale;
+ *lineGap = (float) i_lineGap * scale;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetPackedQuad(const stbtt_packedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, int char_index, float *xpos, float *ypos, stbtt_aligned_quad *q, int align_to_integer)
+{
+ float ipw = 1.0f / pw, iph = 1.0f / ph;
+ const stbtt_packedchar *b = chardata + char_index;
+
+ if (align_to_integer) {
+ float x = (float) STBTT_ifloor((*xpos + b->xoff) + 0.5f);
+ float y = (float) STBTT_ifloor((*ypos + b->yoff) + 0.5f);
+ q->x0 = x;
+ q->y0 = y;
+ q->x1 = x + b->xoff2 - b->xoff;
+ q->y1 = y + b->yoff2 - b->yoff;
+ } else {
+ q->x0 = *xpos + b->xoff;
+ q->y0 = *ypos + b->yoff;
+ q->x1 = *xpos + b->xoff2;
+ q->y1 = *ypos + b->yoff2;
+ }
+
+ q->s0 = b->x0 * ipw;
+ q->t0 = b->y0 * iph;
+ q->s1 = b->x1 * ipw;
+ q->t1 = b->y1 * iph;
+
+ *xpos += b->xadvance;
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// sdf computation
+//
+
+#define STBTT_min(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
+#define STBTT_max(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (b) : (a))
+
+static int stbtt__ray_intersect_bezier(float orig[2], float ray[2], float q0[2], float q1[2], float q2[2], float hits[2][2])
+{
+ float q0perp = q0[1]*ray[0] - q0[0]*ray[1];
+ float q1perp = q1[1]*ray[0] - q1[0]*ray[1];
+ float q2perp = q2[1]*ray[0] - q2[0]*ray[1];
+ float roperp = orig[1]*ray[0] - orig[0]*ray[1];
+
+ float a = q0perp - 2*q1perp + q2perp;
+ float b = q1perp - q0perp;
+ float c = q0perp - roperp;
+
+ float s0 = 0., s1 = 0.;
+ int num_s = 0;
+
+ if (a != 0.0) {
+ float discr = b*b - a*c;
+ if (discr > 0.0) {
+ float rcpna = -1 / a;
+ float d = (float) STBTT_sqrt(discr);
+ s0 = (b+d) * rcpna;
+ s1 = (b-d) * rcpna;
+ if (s0 >= 0.0 && s0 <= 1.0)
+ num_s = 1;
+ if (d > 0.0 && s1 >= 0.0 && s1 <= 1.0) {
+ if (num_s == 0) s0 = s1;
+ ++num_s;
+ }
+ }
+ } else {
+ // 2*b*s + c = 0
+ // s = -c / (2*b)
+ s0 = c / (-2 * b);
+ if (s0 >= 0.0 && s0 <= 1.0)
+ num_s = 1;
+ }
+
+ if (num_s == 0)
+ return 0;
+ else {
+ float rcp_len2 = 1 / (ray[0]*ray[0] + ray[1]*ray[1]);
+ float rayn_x = ray[0] * rcp_len2, rayn_y = ray[1] * rcp_len2;
+
+ float q0d = q0[0]*rayn_x + q0[1]*rayn_y;
+ float q1d = q1[0]*rayn_x + q1[1]*rayn_y;
+ float q2d = q2[0]*rayn_x + q2[1]*rayn_y;
+ float rod = orig[0]*rayn_x + orig[1]*rayn_y;
+
+ float q10d = q1d - q0d;
+ float q20d = q2d - q0d;
+ float q0rd = q0d - rod;
+
+ hits[0][0] = q0rd + s0*(2.0f - 2.0f*s0)*q10d + s0*s0*q20d;
+ hits[0][1] = a*s0+b;
+
+ if (num_s > 1) {
+ hits[1][0] = q0rd + s1*(2.0f - 2.0f*s1)*q10d + s1*s1*q20d;
+ hits[1][1] = a*s1+b;
+ return 2;
+ } else {
+ return 1;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+static int equal(float *a, float *b)
+{
+ return (a[0] == b[0] && a[1] == b[1]);
+}
+
+static int stbtt__compute_crossings_x(float x, float y, int nverts, stbtt_vertex *verts)
+{
+ int i;
+ float orig[2], ray[2] = { 1, 0 };
+ float y_frac;
+ int winding = 0;
+
+ orig[0] = x;
+ //orig[1] = y; // [DEAR IMGUI] commmented double assignment
+
+ // make sure y never passes through a vertex of the shape
+ y_frac = (float) STBTT_fmod(y, 1.0f);
+ if (y_frac < 0.01f)
+ y += 0.01f;
+ else if (y_frac > 0.99f)
+ y -= 0.01f;
+ orig[1] = y;
+
+ // test a ray from (-infinity,y) to (x,y)
+ for (i=0; i < nverts; ++i) {
+ if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) {
+ int x0 = (int) verts[i-1].x, y0 = (int) verts[i-1].y;
+ int x1 = (int) verts[i ].x, y1 = (int) verts[i ].y;
+ if (y > STBTT_min(y0,y1) && y < STBTT_max(y0,y1) && x > STBTT_min(x0,x1)) {
+ float x_inter = (y - y0) / (y1 - y0) * (x1-x0) + x0;
+ if (x_inter < x)
+ winding += (y0 < y1) ? 1 : -1;
+ }
+ }
+ if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
+ int x0 = (int) verts[i-1].x , y0 = (int) verts[i-1].y ;
+ int x1 = (int) verts[i ].cx, y1 = (int) verts[i ].cy;
+ int x2 = (int) verts[i ].x , y2 = (int) verts[i ].y ;
+ int ax = STBTT_min(x0,STBTT_min(x1,x2)), ay = STBTT_min(y0,STBTT_min(y1,y2));
+ int by = STBTT_max(y0,STBTT_max(y1,y2));
+ if (y > ay && y < by && x > ax) {
+ float q0[2],q1[2],q2[2];
+ float hits[2][2];
+ q0[0] = (float)x0;
+ q0[1] = (float)y0;
+ q1[0] = (float)x1;
+ q1[1] = (float)y1;
+ q2[0] = (float)x2;
+ q2[1] = (float)y2;
+ if (equal(q0,q1) || equal(q1,q2)) {
+ x0 = (int)verts[i-1].x;
+ y0 = (int)verts[i-1].y;
+ x1 = (int)verts[i ].x;
+ y1 = (int)verts[i ].y;
+ if (y > STBTT_min(y0,y1) && y < STBTT_max(y0,y1) && x > STBTT_min(x0,x1)) {
+ float x_inter = (y - y0) / (y1 - y0) * (x1-x0) + x0;
+ if (x_inter < x)
+ winding += (y0 < y1) ? 1 : -1;
+ }
+ } else {
+ int num_hits = stbtt__ray_intersect_bezier(orig, ray, q0, q1, q2, hits);
+ if (num_hits >= 1)
+ if (hits[0][0] < 0)
+ winding += (hits[0][1] < 0 ? -1 : 1);
+ if (num_hits >= 2)
+ if (hits[1][0] < 0)
+ winding += (hits[1][1] < 0 ? -1 : 1);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ return winding;
+}
+
+static float stbtt__cuberoot( float x )
+{
+ if (x<0)
+ return -(float) STBTT_pow(-x,1.0f/3.0f);
+ else
+ return (float) STBTT_pow( x,1.0f/3.0f);
+}
+
+// x^3 + c*x^2 + b*x + a = 0
+static int stbtt__solve_cubic(float a, float b, float c, float* r)
+{
+ float s = -a / 3;
+ float p = b - a*a / 3;
+ float q = a * (2*a*a - 9*b) / 27 + c;
+ float p3 = p*p*p;
+ float d = q*q + 4*p3 / 27;
+ if (d >= 0) {
+ float z = (float) STBTT_sqrt(d);
+ float u = (-q + z) / 2;
+ float v = (-q - z) / 2;
+ u = stbtt__cuberoot(u);
+ v = stbtt__cuberoot(v);
+ r[0] = s + u + v;
+ return 1;
+ } else {
+ float u = (float) STBTT_sqrt(-p/3);
+ float v = (float) STBTT_acos(-STBTT_sqrt(-27/p3) * q / 2) / 3; // p3 must be negative, since d is negative
+ float m = (float) STBTT_cos(v);
+ float n = (float) STBTT_cos(v-3.141592/2)*1.732050808f;
+ r[0] = s + u * 2 * m;
+ r[1] = s - u * (m + n);
+ r[2] = s - u * (m - n);
+
+ //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[0]+a)*r[0]+b)*r[0]+c) < 0.05f); // these asserts may not be safe at all scales, though they're in bezier t parameter units so maybe?
+ //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[1]+a)*r[1]+b)*r[1]+c) < 0.05f);
+ //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[2]+a)*r[2]+b)*r[2]+c) < 0.05f);
+ return 3;
+ }
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int glyph, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+ float scale_x = scale, scale_y = scale;
+ int ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1;
+ int w,h;
+ unsigned char *data;
+
+ // if one scale is 0, use same scale for both
+ if (scale_x == 0) scale_x = scale_y;
+ if (scale_y == 0) {
+ if (scale_x == 0) return NULL; // if both scales are 0, return NULL
+ scale_y = scale_x;
+ }
+
+ stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale, scale, 0.0f,0.0f, &ix0,&iy0,&ix1,&iy1);
+
+ // if empty, return NULL
+ if (ix0 == ix1 || iy0 == iy1)
+ return NULL;
+
+ ix0 -= padding;
+ iy0 -= padding;
+ ix1 += padding;
+ iy1 += padding;
+
+ w = (ix1 - ix0);
+ h = (iy1 - iy0);
+
+ if (width ) *width = w;
+ if (height) *height = h;
+ if (xoff ) *xoff = ix0;
+ if (yoff ) *yoff = iy0;
+
+ // invert for y-downwards bitmaps
+ scale_y = -scale_y;
+
+ {
+ int x,y,i,j;
+ float *precompute;
+ stbtt_vertex *verts;
+ int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &verts);
+ data = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(w * h, info->userdata);
+ precompute = (float *) STBTT_malloc(num_verts * sizeof(float), info->userdata);
+
+ for (i=0,j=num_verts-1; i < num_verts; j=i++) {
+ if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) {
+ float x0 = verts[i].x*scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y*scale_y;
+ float x1 = verts[j].x*scale_x, y1 = verts[j].y*scale_y;
+ float dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt((x1-x0)*(x1-x0) + (y1-y0)*(y1-y0));
+ precompute[i] = (dist == 0) ? 0.0f : 1.0f / dist;
+ } else if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
+ float x2 = verts[j].x *scale_x, y2 = verts[j].y *scale_y;
+ float x1 = verts[i].cx*scale_x, y1 = verts[i].cy*scale_y;
+ float x0 = verts[i].x *scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y *scale_y;
+ float bx = x0 - 2*x1 + x2, by = y0 - 2*y1 + y2;
+ float len2 = bx*bx + by*by;
+ if (len2 != 0.0f)
+ precompute[i] = 1.0f / (bx*bx + by*by);
+ else
+ precompute[i] = 0.0f;
+ } else
+ precompute[i] = 0.0f;
+ }
+
+ for (y=iy0; y < iy1; ++y) {
+ for (x=ix0; x < ix1; ++x) {
+ float val;
+ float min_dist = 999999.0f;
+ float sx = (float) x + 0.5f;
+ float sy = (float) y + 0.5f;
+ float x_gspace = (sx / scale_x);
+ float y_gspace = (sy / scale_y);
+
+ int winding = stbtt__compute_crossings_x(x_gspace, y_gspace, num_verts, verts); // @OPTIMIZE: this could just be a rasterization, but needs to be line vs. non-tesselated curves so a new path
+
+ for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) {
+ float x0 = verts[i].x*scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y*scale_y;
+
+ // check against every point here rather than inside line/curve primitives -- @TODO: wrong if multiple 'moves' in a row produce a garbage point, and given culling, probably more efficient to do within line/curve
+ float dist2 = (x0-sx)*(x0-sx) + (y0-sy)*(y0-sy);
+ if (dist2 < min_dist*min_dist)
+ min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+
+ if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) {
+ float x1 = verts[i-1].x*scale_x, y1 = verts[i-1].y*scale_y;
+
+ // coarse culling against bbox
+ //if (sx > STBTT_min(x0,x1)-min_dist && sx < STBTT_max(x0,x1)+min_dist &&
+ // sy > STBTT_min(y0,y1)-min_dist && sy < STBTT_max(y0,y1)+min_dist)
+ float dist = (float) STBTT_fabs((x1-x0)*(y0-sy) - (y1-y0)*(x0-sx)) * precompute[i];
+ STBTT_assert(i != 0);
+ if (dist < min_dist) {
+ // check position along line
+ // x' = x0 + t*(x1-x0), y' = y0 + t*(y1-y0)
+ // minimize (x'-sx)*(x'-sx)+(y'-sy)*(y'-sy)
+ float dx = x1-x0, dy = y1-y0;
+ float px = x0-sx, py = y0-sy;
+ // minimize (px+t*dx)^2 + (py+t*dy)^2 = px*px + 2*px*dx*t + t^2*dx*dx + py*py + 2*py*dy*t + t^2*dy*dy
+ // derivative: 2*px*dx + 2*py*dy + (2*dx*dx+2*dy*dy)*t, set to 0 and solve
+ float t = -(px*dx + py*dy) / (dx*dx + dy*dy);
+ if (t >= 0.0f && t <= 1.0f)
+ min_dist = dist;
+ }
+ } else if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
+ float x2 = verts[i-1].x *scale_x, y2 = verts[i-1].y *scale_y;
+ float x1 = verts[i ].cx*scale_x, y1 = verts[i ].cy*scale_y;
+ float box_x0 = STBTT_min(STBTT_min(x0,x1),x2);
+ float box_y0 = STBTT_min(STBTT_min(y0,y1),y2);
+ float box_x1 = STBTT_max(STBTT_max(x0,x1),x2);
+ float box_y1 = STBTT_max(STBTT_max(y0,y1),y2);
+ // coarse culling against bbox to avoid computing cubic unnecessarily
+ if (sx > box_x0-min_dist && sx < box_x1+min_dist && sy > box_y0-min_dist && sy < box_y1+min_dist) {
+ int num=0;
+ float ax = x1-x0, ay = y1-y0;
+ float bx = x0 - 2*x1 + x2, by = y0 - 2*y1 + y2;
+ float mx = x0 - sx, my = y0 - sy;
+ float res[3],px,py,t,it;
+ float a_inv = precompute[i];
+ if (a_inv == 0.0) { // if a_inv is 0, it's 2nd degree so use quadratic formula
+ float a = 3*(ax*bx + ay*by);
+ float b = 2*(ax*ax + ay*ay) + (mx*bx+my*by);
+ float c = mx*ax+my*ay;
+ if (a == 0.0) { // if a is 0, it's linear
+ if (b != 0.0) {
+ res[num++] = -c/b;
+ }
+ } else {
+ float discriminant = b*b - 4*a*c;
+ if (discriminant < 0)
+ num = 0;
+ else {
+ float root = (float) STBTT_sqrt(discriminant);
+ res[0] = (-b - root)/(2*a);
+ res[1] = (-b + root)/(2*a);
+ num = 2; // don't bother distinguishing 1-solution case, as code below will still work
+ }
+ }
+ } else {
+ float b = 3*(ax*bx + ay*by) * a_inv; // could precompute this as it doesn't depend on sample point
+ float c = (2*(ax*ax + ay*ay) + (mx*bx+my*by)) * a_inv;
+ float d = (mx*ax+my*ay) * a_inv;
+ num = stbtt__solve_cubic(b, c, d, res);
+ }
+ if (num >= 1 && res[0] >= 0.0f && res[0] <= 1.0f) {
+ t = res[0], it = 1.0f - t;
+ px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
+ py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
+ dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
+ if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
+ min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+ }
+ if (num >= 2 && res[1] >= 0.0f && res[1] <= 1.0f) {
+ t = res[1], it = 1.0f - t;
+ px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
+ py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
+ dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
+ if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
+ min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+ }
+ if (num >= 3 && res[2] >= 0.0f && res[2] <= 1.0f) {
+ t = res[2], it = 1.0f - t;
+ px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
+ py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
+ dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
+ if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
+ min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ if (winding == 0)
+ min_dist = -min_dist; // if outside the shape, value is negative
+ val = onedge_value + pixel_dist_scale * min_dist;
+ if (val < 0)
+ val = 0;
+ else if (val > 255)
+ val = 255;
+ data[(y-iy0)*w+(x-ix0)] = (unsigned char) val;
+ }
+ }
+ STBTT_free(precompute, info->userdata);
+ STBTT_free(verts, info->userdata);
+ }
+ return data;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetCodepointSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int codepoint, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+ return stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(info, scale, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint), padding, onedge_value, pixel_dist_scale, width, height, xoff, yoff);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeSDF(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata)
+{
+ STBTT_free(bitmap, userdata);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// font name matching -- recommended not to use this
+//
+
+// check if a utf8 string contains a prefix which is the utf16 string; if so return length of matching utf8 string
+static stbtt_int32 stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix(stbtt_uint8 *s1, stbtt_int32 len1, stbtt_uint8 *s2, stbtt_int32 len2)
+{
+ stbtt_int32 i=0;
+
+ // convert utf16 to utf8 and compare the results while converting
+ while (len2) {
+ stbtt_uint16 ch = s2[0]*256 + s2[1];
+ if (ch < 0x80) {
+ if (i >= len1) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != ch) return -1;
+ } else if (ch < 0x800) {
+ if (i+1 >= len1) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0xc0 + (ch >> 6)) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + (ch & 0x3f)) return -1;
+ } else if (ch >= 0xd800 && ch < 0xdc00) {
+ stbtt_uint32 c;
+ stbtt_uint16 ch2 = s2[2]*256 + s2[3];
+ if (i+3 >= len1) return -1;
+ c = ((ch - 0xd800) << 10) + (ch2 - 0xdc00) + 0x10000;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0xf0 + (c >> 18)) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c >> 12) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c >> 6) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+ s2 += 2; // plus another 2 below
+ len2 -= 2;
+ } else if (ch >= 0xdc00 && ch < 0xe000) {
+ return -1;
+ } else {
+ if (i+2 >= len1) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0xe0 + (ch >> 12)) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((ch >> 6) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+ if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((ch ) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+ }
+ s2 += 2;
+ len2 -= 2;
+ }
+ return i;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal(char *s1, int len1, char *s2, int len2)
+{
+ return len1 == stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix((stbtt_uint8*) s1, len1, (stbtt_uint8*) s2, len2);
+}
+
+// returns results in whatever encoding you request... but note that 2-byte encodings
+// will be BIG-ENDIAN... use stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian() to compare
+STBTT_DEF const char *stbtt_GetFontNameString(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int *length, int platformID, int encodingID, int languageID, int nameID)
+{
+ stbtt_int32 i,count,stringOffset;
+ stbtt_uint8 *fc = font->data;
+ stbtt_uint32 offset = font->fontstart;
+ stbtt_uint32 nm = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "name");
+ if (!nm) return NULL;
+
+ count = ttUSHORT(fc+nm+2);
+ stringOffset = nm + ttUSHORT(fc+nm+4);
+ for (i=0; i < count; ++i) {
+ stbtt_uint32 loc = nm + 6 + 12 * i;
+ if (platformID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+0) && encodingID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+2)
+ && languageID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+4) && nameID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+6)) {
+ *length = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+8);
+ return (const char *) (fc+stringOffset+ttUSHORT(fc+loc+10));
+ }
+ }
+ return NULL;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__matchpair(stbtt_uint8 *fc, stbtt_uint32 nm, stbtt_uint8 *name, stbtt_int32 nlen, stbtt_int32 target_id, stbtt_int32 next_id)
+{
+ stbtt_int32 i;
+ stbtt_int32 count = ttUSHORT(fc+nm+2);
+ stbtt_int32 stringOffset = nm + ttUSHORT(fc+nm+4);
+
+ for (i=0; i < count; ++i) {
+ stbtt_uint32 loc = nm + 6 + 12 * i;
+ stbtt_int32 id = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+6);
+ if (id == target_id) {
+ // find the encoding
+ stbtt_int32 platform = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+0), encoding = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+2), language = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+4);
+
+ // is this a Unicode encoding?
+ if (platform == 0 || (platform == 3 && encoding == 1) || (platform == 3 && encoding == 10)) {
+ stbtt_int32 slen = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+8);
+ stbtt_int32 off = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+10);
+
+ // check if there's a prefix match
+ stbtt_int32 matchlen = stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix(name, nlen, fc+stringOffset+off,slen);
+ if (matchlen >= 0) {
+ // check for target_id+1 immediately following, with same encoding & language
+ if (i+1 < count && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+6) == next_id && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12) == platform && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+2) == encoding && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+4) == language) {
+ slen = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+8);
+ off = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+10);
+ if (slen == 0) {
+ if (matchlen == nlen)
+ return 1;
+ } else if (matchlen < nlen && name[matchlen] == ' ') {
+ ++matchlen;
+ if (stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal((char*) (name+matchlen), nlen-matchlen, (char*)(fc+stringOffset+off),slen))
+ return 1;
+ }
+ } else {
+ // if nothing immediately following
+ if (matchlen == nlen)
+ return 1;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ // @TODO handle other encodings
+ }
+ }
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__matches(stbtt_uint8 *fc, stbtt_uint32 offset, stbtt_uint8 *name, stbtt_int32 flags)
+{
+ stbtt_int32 nlen = (stbtt_int32) STBTT_strlen((char *) name);
+ stbtt_uint32 nm,hd;
+ if (!stbtt__isfont(fc+offset)) return 0;
+
+ // check italics/bold/underline flags in macStyle...
+ if (flags) {
+ hd = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "head");
+ if ((ttUSHORT(fc+hd+44) & 7) != (flags & 7)) return 0;
+ }
+
+ nm = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "name");
+ if (!nm) return 0;
+
+ if (flags) {
+ // if we checked the macStyle flags, then just check the family and ignore the subfamily
+ if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 16, -1)) return 1;
+ if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 1, -1)) return 1;
+ if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 3, -1)) return 1;
+ } else {
+ if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 16, 17)) return 1;
+ if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 1, 2)) return 1;
+ if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 3, -1)) return 1;
+ }
+
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_FindMatchingFont_internal(unsigned char *font_collection, char *name_utf8, stbtt_int32 flags)
+{
+ stbtt_int32 i;
+ for (i=0;;++i) {
+ stbtt_int32 off = stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(font_collection, i);
+ if (off < 0) return off;
+ if (stbtt__matches((stbtt_uint8 *) font_collection, off, (stbtt_uint8*) name_utf8, flags))
+ return off;
+ }
+}
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic push
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual"
+#endif
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(const unsigned char *data, int offset,
+ float pixel_height, unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph,
+ int first_char, int num_chars, stbtt_bakedchar *chardata)
+{
+ return stbtt_BakeFontBitmap_internal((unsigned char *) data, offset, pixel_height, pixels, pw, ph, first_char, num_chars, chardata);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(const unsigned char *data, int index)
+{
+ return stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex_internal((unsigned char *) data, index);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts(const unsigned char *data)
+{
+ return stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts_internal((unsigned char *) data);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_InitFont(stbtt_fontinfo *info, const unsigned char *data, int offset)
+{
+ return stbtt_InitFont_internal(info, (unsigned char *) data, offset);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindMatchingFont(const unsigned char *fontdata, const char *name, int flags)
+{
+ return stbtt_FindMatchingFont_internal((unsigned char *) fontdata, (char *) name, flags);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian(const char *s1, int len1, const char *s2, int len2)
+{
+ return stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal((char *) s1, len1, (char *) s2, len2);
+}
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
+#endif
+
+#endif // STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+
+// FULL VERSION HISTORY
+//
+// 1.19 (2018-02-11) OpenType GPOS kerning (horizontal only), STBTT_fmod
+// 1.18 (2018-01-29) add missing function
+// 1.17 (2017-07-23) make more arguments const; doc fix
+// 1.16 (2017-07-12) SDF support
+// 1.15 (2017-03-03) make more arguments const
+// 1.14 (2017-01-16) num-fonts-in-TTC function
+// 1.13 (2017-01-02) support OpenType fonts, certain Apple fonts
+// 1.12 (2016-10-25) suppress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
+// 1.11 (2016-04-02) fix unused-variable warning
+// 1.10 (2016-04-02) allow user-defined fabs() replacement
+// fix memory leak if fontsize=0.0
+// fix warning from duplicate typedef
+// 1.09 (2016-01-16) warning fix; avoid crash on outofmem; use alloc userdata for PackFontRanges
+// 1.08 (2015-09-13) document stbtt_Rasterize(); fixes for vertical & horizontal edges
+// 1.07 (2015-08-01) allow PackFontRanges to accept arrays of sparse codepoints;
+// allow PackFontRanges to pack and render in separate phases;
+// fix stbtt_GetFontOFfsetForIndex (never worked for non-0 input?);
+// fixed an assert() bug in the new rasterizer
+// replace assert() with STBTT_assert() in new rasterizer
+// 1.06 (2015-07-14) performance improvements (~35% faster on x86 and x64 on test machine)
+// also more precise AA rasterizer, except if shapes overlap
+// remove need for STBTT_sort
+// 1.05 (2015-04-15) fix misplaced definitions for STBTT_STATIC
+// 1.04 (2015-04-15) typo in example
+// 1.03 (2015-04-12) STBTT_STATIC, fix memory leak in new packing, various fixes
+// 1.02 (2014-12-10) fix various warnings & compile issues w/ stb_rect_pack, C++
+// 1.01 (2014-12-08) fix subpixel position when oversampling to exactly match
+// non-oversampled; STBTT_POINT_SIZE for packed case only
+// 1.00 (2014-12-06) add new PackBegin etc. API, w/ support for oversampling
+// 0.99 (2014-09-18) fix multiple bugs with subpixel rendering (ryg)
+// 0.9 (2014-08-07) support certain mac/iOS fonts without an MS platformID
+// 0.8b (2014-07-07) fix a warning
+// 0.8 (2014-05-25) fix a few more warnings
+// 0.7 (2013-09-25) bugfix: subpixel glyph bug fixed in 0.5 had come back
+// 0.6c (2012-07-24) improve documentation
+// 0.6b (2012-07-20) fix a few more warnings
+// 0.6 (2012-07-17) fix warnings; added stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels,
+// stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox, stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty
+// 0.5 (2011-12-09) bugfixes:
+// subpixel glyph renderer computed wrong bounding box
+// first vertex of shape can be off-curve (FreeSans)
+// 0.4b (2011-12-03) fixed an error in the font baking example
+// 0.4 (2011-12-01) kerning, subpixel rendering (tor)
+// bugfixes for:
+// codepoint-to-glyph conversion using table fmt=12
+// codepoint-to-glyph conversion using table fmt=4
+// stbtt_GetBakedQuad with non-square texture (Zer)
+// updated Hello World! sample to use kerning and subpixel
+// fixed some warnings
+// 0.3 (2009-06-24) cmap fmt=12, compound shapes (MM)
+// userdata, malloc-from-userdata, non-zero fill (stb)
+// 0.2 (2009-03-11) Fix unsigned/signed char warnings
+// 0.1 (2009-03-09) First public release
+//
+
+/*
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
+Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
+this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
+the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
+use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
+of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
+so, subject to the following conditions:
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
+copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
+OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
+SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
+This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
+Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
+software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
+commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
+In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
+software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
+domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
+the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
+overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
+this software under copyright law.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
+ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+*/
libimgui_core = static_library(
'intel_imgui_core',
- files('imgui.cpp', 'imgui_demo.cpp', 'imgui_draw.cpp'),
+ files('imgui.cpp', 'imgui_demo.cpp', 'imgui_draw.cpp', 'imgui_widgets.cpp'),
cpp_args : ['-w'],
- install: false
+ install : false
)
libimgui_core_dep = declare_dependency(
- link_with: libimgui_core,
- include_directories: include_directories('.')
+ link_with : libimgui_core,
+ include_directories : include_directories('.')
)
+++ /dev/null
-// stb_rect_pack.h - v0.11 - public domain - rectangle packing
-// Sean Barrett 2014
-//
-// Useful for e.g. packing rectangular textures into an atlas.
-// Does not do rotation.
-//
-// Not necessarily the awesomest packing method, but better than
-// the totally naive one in stb_truetype (which is primarily what
-// this is meant to replace).
-//
-// Has only had a few tests run, may have issues.
-//
-// More docs to come.
-//
-// No memory allocations; uses qsort() and assert() from stdlib.
-// Can override those by defining STBRP_SORT and STBRP_ASSERT.
-//
-// This library currently uses the Skyline Bottom-Left algorithm.
-//
-// Please note: better rectangle packers are welcome! Please
-// implement them to the same API, but with a different init
-// function.
-//
-// Credits
-//
-// Library
-// Sean Barrett
-// Minor features
-// Martins Mozeiko
-// github:IntellectualKitty
-//
-// Bugfixes / warning fixes
-// Jeremy Jaussaud
-//
-// Version history:
-//
-// 0.11 (2017-03-03) return packing success/fail result
-// 0.10 (2016-10-25) remove cast-away-const to avoid warnings
-// 0.09 (2016-08-27) fix compiler warnings
-// 0.08 (2015-09-13) really fix bug with empty rects (w=0 or h=0)
-// 0.07 (2015-09-13) fix bug with empty rects (w=0 or h=0)
-// 0.06 (2015-04-15) added STBRP_SORT to allow replacing qsort
-// 0.05: added STBRP_ASSERT to allow replacing assert
-// 0.04: fixed minor bug in STBRP_LARGE_RECTS support
-// 0.01: initial release
-//
-// LICENSE
-//
-// See end of file for license information.
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// INCLUDE SECTION
-//
-
-#ifndef STB_INCLUDE_STB_RECT_PACK_H
-#define STB_INCLUDE_STB_RECT_PACK_H
-
-#define STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION 1
-
-#ifdef STBRP_STATIC
-#define STBRP_DEF static
-#else
-#define STBRP_DEF extern
-#endif
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-extern "C" {
-#endif
-
-typedef struct stbrp_context stbrp_context;
-typedef struct stbrp_node stbrp_node;
-typedef struct stbrp_rect stbrp_rect;
-
-#ifdef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
-typedef int stbrp_coord;
-#else
-typedef unsigned short stbrp_coord;
-#endif
-
-STBRP_DEF int stbrp_pack_rects (stbrp_context *context, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects);
-// Assign packed locations to rectangles. The rectangles are of type
-// 'stbrp_rect' defined below, stored in the array 'rects', and there
-// are 'num_rects' many of them.
-//
-// Rectangles which are successfully packed have the 'was_packed' flag
-// set to a non-zero value and 'x' and 'y' store the minimum location
-// on each axis (i.e. bottom-left in cartesian coordinates, top-left
-// if you imagine y increasing downwards). Rectangles which do not fit
-// have the 'was_packed' flag set to 0.
-//
-// You should not try to access the 'rects' array from another thread
-// while this function is running, as the function temporarily reorders
-// the array while it executes.
-//
-// To pack into another rectangle, you need to call stbrp_init_target
-// again. To continue packing into the same rectangle, you can call
-// this function again. Calling this multiple times with multiple rect
-// arrays will probably produce worse packing results than calling it
-// a single time with the full rectangle array, but the option is
-// available.
-//
-// The function returns 1 if all of the rectangles were successfully
-// packed and 0 otherwise.
-
-struct stbrp_rect
-{
- // reserved for your use:
- int id;
-
- // input:
- stbrp_coord w, h;
-
- // output:
- stbrp_coord x, y;
- int was_packed; // non-zero if valid packing
-
-}; // 16 bytes, nominally
-
-
-STBRP_DEF void stbrp_init_target (stbrp_context *context, int width, int height, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes);
-// Initialize a rectangle packer to:
-// pack a rectangle that is 'width' by 'height' in dimensions
-// using temporary storage provided by the array 'nodes', which is 'num_nodes' long
-//
-// You must call this function every time you start packing into a new target.
-//
-// There is no "shutdown" function. The 'nodes' memory must stay valid for
-// the following stbrp_pack_rects() call (or calls), but can be freed after
-// the call (or calls) finish.
-//
-// Note: to guarantee best results, either:
-// 1. make sure 'num_nodes' >= 'width'
-// or 2. call stbrp_allow_out_of_mem() defined below with 'allow_out_of_mem = 1'
-//
-// If you don't do either of the above things, widths will be quantized to multiples
-// of small integers to guarantee the algorithm doesn't run out of temporary storage.
-//
-// If you do #2, then the non-quantized algorithm will be used, but the algorithm
-// may run out of temporary storage and be unable to pack some rectangles.
-
-STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem (stbrp_context *context, int allow_out_of_mem);
-// Optionally call this function after init but before doing any packing to
-// change the handling of the out-of-temp-memory scenario, described above.
-// If you call init again, this will be reset to the default (false).
-
-
-STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_heuristic (stbrp_context *context, int heuristic);
-// Optionally select which packing heuristic the library should use. Different
-// heuristics will produce better/worse results for different data sets.
-// If you call init again, this will be reset to the default.
-
-enum
-{
- STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default=0,
- STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight = STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default,
- STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight
-};
-
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// the details of the following structures don't matter to you, but they must
-// be visible so you can handle the memory allocations for them
-
-struct stbrp_node
-{
- stbrp_coord x,y;
- stbrp_node *next;
-};
-
-struct stbrp_context
-{
- int width;
- int height;
- int align;
- int init_mode;
- int heuristic;
- int num_nodes;
- stbrp_node *active_head;
- stbrp_node *free_head;
- stbrp_node extra[2]; // we allocate two extra nodes so optimal user-node-count is 'width' not 'width+2'
-};
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// IMPLEMENTATION SECTION
-//
-
-#ifdef STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION
-#ifndef STBRP_SORT
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#define STBRP_SORT qsort
-#endif
-
-#ifndef STBRP_ASSERT
-#include <assert.h>
-#define STBRP_ASSERT assert
-#endif
-
-#ifdef _MSC_VER
-#define STBRP__NOTUSED(v) (void)(v)
-#define STBRP__CDECL __cdecl
-#else
-#define STBRP__NOTUSED(v) (void)sizeof(v)
-#define STBRP__CDECL
-#endif
-
-enum
-{
- STBRP__INIT_skyline = 1
-};
-
-STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_heuristic(stbrp_context *context, int heuristic)
-{
- switch (context->init_mode) {
- case STBRP__INIT_skyline:
- STBRP_ASSERT(heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight || heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight);
- context->heuristic = heuristic;
- break;
- default:
- STBRP_ASSERT(0);
- }
-}
-
-STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem(stbrp_context *context, int allow_out_of_mem)
-{
- if (allow_out_of_mem)
- // if it's ok to run out of memory, then don't bother aligning them;
- // this gives better packing, but may fail due to OOM (even though
- // the rectangles easily fit). @TODO a smarter approach would be to only
- // quantize once we've hit OOM, then we could get rid of this parameter.
- context->align = 1;
- else {
- // if it's not ok to run out of memory, then quantize the widths
- // so that num_nodes is always enough nodes.
- //
- // I.e. num_nodes * align >= width
- // align >= width / num_nodes
- // align = ceil(width/num_nodes)
-
- context->align = (context->width + context->num_nodes-1) / context->num_nodes;
- }
-}
-
-STBRP_DEF void stbrp_init_target(stbrp_context *context, int width, int height, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes)
-{
- int i;
-#ifndef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
- STBRP_ASSERT(width <= 0xffff && height <= 0xffff);
-#endif
-
- for (i=0; i < num_nodes-1; ++i)
- nodes[i].next = &nodes[i+1];
- nodes[i].next = NULL;
- context->init_mode = STBRP__INIT_skyline;
- context->heuristic = STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default;
- context->free_head = &nodes[0];
- context->active_head = &context->extra[0];
- context->width = width;
- context->height = height;
- context->num_nodes = num_nodes;
- stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem(context, 0);
-
- // node 0 is the full width, node 1 is the sentinel (lets us not store width explicitly)
- context->extra[0].x = 0;
- context->extra[0].y = 0;
- context->extra[0].next = &context->extra[1];
- context->extra[1].x = (stbrp_coord) width;
-#ifdef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
- context->extra[1].y = (1<<30);
-#else
- context->extra[1].y = 65535;
-#endif
- context->extra[1].next = NULL;
-}
-
-// find minimum y position if it starts at x1
-static int stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(stbrp_context *c, stbrp_node *first, int x0, int width, int *pwaste)
-{
- stbrp_node *node = first;
- int x1 = x0 + width;
- int min_y, visited_width, waste_area;
-
- STBRP__NOTUSED(c);
-
- STBRP_ASSERT(first->x <= x0);
-
- #if 0
- // skip in case we're past the node
- while (node->next->x <= x0)
- ++node;
- #else
- STBRP_ASSERT(node->next->x > x0); // we ended up handling this in the caller for efficiency
- #endif
-
- STBRP_ASSERT(node->x <= x0);
-
- min_y = 0;
- waste_area = 0;
- visited_width = 0;
- while (node->x < x1) {
- if (node->y > min_y) {
- // raise min_y higher.
- // we've accounted for all waste up to min_y,
- // but we'll now add more waste for everything we've visted
- waste_area += visited_width * (node->y - min_y);
- min_y = node->y;
- // the first time through, visited_width might be reduced
- if (node->x < x0)
- visited_width += node->next->x - x0;
- else
- visited_width += node->next->x - node->x;
- } else {
- // add waste area
- int under_width = node->next->x - node->x;
- if (under_width + visited_width > width)
- under_width = width - visited_width;
- waste_area += under_width * (min_y - node->y);
- visited_width += under_width;
- }
- node = node->next;
- }
-
- *pwaste = waste_area;
- return min_y;
-}
-
-typedef struct
-{
- int x,y;
- stbrp_node **prev_link;
-} stbrp__findresult;
-
-static stbrp__findresult stbrp__skyline_find_best_pos(stbrp_context *c, int width, int height)
-{
- int best_waste = (1<<30), best_x, best_y = (1 << 30);
- stbrp__findresult fr;
- stbrp_node **prev, *node, *tail, **best = NULL;
-
- // align to multiple of c->align
- width = (width + c->align - 1);
- width -= width % c->align;
- STBRP_ASSERT(width % c->align == 0);
-
- node = c->active_head;
- prev = &c->active_head;
- while (node->x + width <= c->width) {
- int y,waste;
- y = stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(c, node, node->x, width, &waste);
- if (c->heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight) { // actually just want to test BL
- // bottom left
- if (y < best_y) {
- best_y = y;
- best = prev;
- }
- } else {
- // best-fit
- if (y + height <= c->height) {
- // can only use it if it first vertically
- if (y < best_y || (y == best_y && waste < best_waste)) {
- best_y = y;
- best_waste = waste;
- best = prev;
- }
- }
- }
- prev = &node->next;
- node = node->next;
- }
-
- best_x = (best == NULL) ? 0 : (*best)->x;
-
- // if doing best-fit (BF), we also have to try aligning right edge to each node position
- //
- // e.g, if fitting
- //
- // ____________________
- // |____________________|
- //
- // into
- //
- // | |
- // | ____________|
- // |____________|
- //
- // then right-aligned reduces waste, but bottom-left BL is always chooses left-aligned
- //
- // This makes BF take about 2x the time
-
- if (c->heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight) {
- tail = c->active_head;
- node = c->active_head;
- prev = &c->active_head;
- // find first node that's admissible
- while (tail->x < width)
- tail = tail->next;
- while (tail) {
- int xpos = tail->x - width;
- int y,waste;
- STBRP_ASSERT(xpos >= 0);
- // find the left position that matches this
- while (node->next->x <= xpos) {
- prev = &node->next;
- node = node->next;
- }
- STBRP_ASSERT(node->next->x > xpos && node->x <= xpos);
- y = stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(c, node, xpos, width, &waste);
- if (y + height < c->height) {
- if (y <= best_y) {
- if (y < best_y || waste < best_waste || (waste==best_waste && xpos < best_x)) {
- best_x = xpos;
- STBRP_ASSERT(y <= best_y);
- best_y = y;
- best_waste = waste;
- best = prev;
- }
- }
- }
- tail = tail->next;
- }
- }
-
- fr.prev_link = best;
- fr.x = best_x;
- fr.y = best_y;
- return fr;
-}
-
-static stbrp__findresult stbrp__skyline_pack_rectangle(stbrp_context *context, int width, int height)
-{
- // find best position according to heuristic
- stbrp__findresult res = stbrp__skyline_find_best_pos(context, width, height);
- stbrp_node *node, *cur;
-
- // bail if:
- // 1. it failed
- // 2. the best node doesn't fit (we don't always check this)
- // 3. we're out of memory
- if (res.prev_link == NULL || res.y + height > context->height || context->free_head == NULL) {
- res.prev_link = NULL;
- return res;
- }
-
- // on success, create new node
- node = context->free_head;
- node->x = (stbrp_coord) res.x;
- node->y = (stbrp_coord) (res.y + height);
-
- context->free_head = node->next;
-
- // insert the new node into the right starting point, and
- // let 'cur' point to the remaining nodes needing to be
- // stiched back in
-
- cur = *res.prev_link;
- if (cur->x < res.x) {
- // preserve the existing one, so start testing with the next one
- stbrp_node *next = cur->next;
- cur->next = node;
- cur = next;
- } else {
- *res.prev_link = node;
- }
-
- // from here, traverse cur and free the nodes, until we get to one
- // that shouldn't be freed
- while (cur->next && cur->next->x <= res.x + width) {
- stbrp_node *next = cur->next;
- // move the current node to the free list
- cur->next = context->free_head;
- context->free_head = cur;
- cur = next;
- }
-
- // stitch the list back in
- node->next = cur;
-
- if (cur->x < res.x + width)
- cur->x = (stbrp_coord) (res.x + width);
-
-#ifdef _DEBUG
- cur = context->active_head;
- while (cur->x < context->width) {
- STBRP_ASSERT(cur->x < cur->next->x);
- cur = cur->next;
- }
- STBRP_ASSERT(cur->next == NULL);
-
- {
- int count=0;
- cur = context->active_head;
- while (cur) {
- cur = cur->next;
- ++count;
- }
- cur = context->free_head;
- while (cur) {
- cur = cur->next;
- ++count;
- }
- STBRP_ASSERT(count == context->num_nodes+2);
- }
-#endif
-
- return res;
-}
-
-static int STBRP__CDECL rect_height_compare(const void *a, const void *b)
-{
- const stbrp_rect *p = (const stbrp_rect *) a;
- const stbrp_rect *q = (const stbrp_rect *) b;
- if (p->h > q->h)
- return -1;
- if (p->h < q->h)
- return 1;
- return (p->w > q->w) ? -1 : (p->w < q->w);
-}
-
-static int STBRP__CDECL rect_original_order(const void *a, const void *b)
-{
- const stbrp_rect *p = (const stbrp_rect *) a;
- const stbrp_rect *q = (const stbrp_rect *) b;
- return (p->was_packed < q->was_packed) ? -1 : (p->was_packed > q->was_packed);
-}
-
-#ifdef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
-#define STBRP__MAXVAL 0xffffffff
-#else
-#define STBRP__MAXVAL 0xffff
-#endif
-
-STBRP_DEF int stbrp_pack_rects(stbrp_context *context, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
-{
- int i, all_rects_packed = 1;
-
- // we use the 'was_packed' field internally to allow sorting/unsorting
- for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
- rects[i].was_packed = i;
- #ifndef STBRP_LARGE_RECTS
- STBRP_ASSERT(rects[i].w <= 0xffff && rects[i].h <= 0xffff);
- #endif
- }
-
- // sort according to heuristic
- STBRP_SORT(rects, num_rects, sizeof(rects[0]), rect_height_compare);
-
- for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
- if (rects[i].w == 0 || rects[i].h == 0) {
- rects[i].x = rects[i].y = 0; // empty rect needs no space
- } else {
- stbrp__findresult fr = stbrp__skyline_pack_rectangle(context, rects[i].w, rects[i].h);
- if (fr.prev_link) {
- rects[i].x = (stbrp_coord) fr.x;
- rects[i].y = (stbrp_coord) fr.y;
- } else {
- rects[i].x = rects[i].y = STBRP__MAXVAL;
- }
- }
- }
-
- // unsort
- STBRP_SORT(rects, num_rects, sizeof(rects[0]), rect_original_order);
-
- // set was_packed flags and all_rects_packed status
- for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
- rects[i].was_packed = !(rects[i].x == STBRP__MAXVAL && rects[i].y == STBRP__MAXVAL);
- if (!rects[i].was_packed)
- all_rects_packed = 0;
- }
-
- // return the all_rects_packed status
- return all_rects_packed;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
-Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
-Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
-this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
-the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
-use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
-of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
-so, subject to the following conditions:
-The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
-copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
-AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
-LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
-OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
-SOFTWARE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
-This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
-Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
-software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
-commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
-In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
-software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
-domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
-the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
-overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
-this software under copyright law.
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
-AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
-ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
-WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-*/
+++ /dev/null
-// [ImGui] this is a slightly modified version of stb_textedit.h 1.12. Those changes would need to be pushed into nothings/stb
-// [ImGui] - 2018-06: fixed undo/redo after pasting large amount of text (over 32 kb). Redo will still fail when undo buffers are exhausted, but text won't be corrupted (see nothings/stb issue #620)
-// [ImGui] - 2018-06: fix in stb_textedit_discard_redo (see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/321)
-// [ImGui] - fixed some minor warnings
-
-// stb_textedit.h - v1.12 - public domain - Sean Barrett
-// Development of this library was sponsored by RAD Game Tools
-//
-// This C header file implements the guts of a multi-line text-editing
-// widget; you implement display, word-wrapping, and low-level string
-// insertion/deletion, and stb_textedit will map user inputs into
-// insertions & deletions, plus updates to the cursor position,
-// selection state, and undo state.
-//
-// It is intended for use in games and other systems that need to build
-// their own custom widgets and which do not have heavy text-editing
-// requirements (this library is not recommended for use for editing large
-// texts, as its performance does not scale and it has limited undo).
-//
-// Non-trivial behaviors are modelled after Windows text controls.
-//
-//
-// LICENSE
-//
-// See end of file for license information.
-//
-//
-// DEPENDENCIES
-//
-// Uses the C runtime function 'memmove', which you can override
-// by defining STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove before the implementation.
-// Uses no other functions. Performs no runtime allocations.
-//
-//
-// VERSION HISTORY
-//
-// 1.12 (2018-01-29) user can change STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE, fix redo to avoid crash
-// 1.11 (2017-03-03) fix HOME on last line, dragging off single-line textfield
-// 1.10 (2016-10-25) supress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
-// 1.9 (2016-08-27) customizable move-by-word
-// 1.8 (2016-04-02) better keyboard handling when mouse button is down
-// 1.7 (2015-09-13) change y range handling in case baseline is non-0
-// 1.6 (2015-04-15) allow STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove
-// 1.5 (2014-09-10) add support for secondary keys for OS X
-// 1.4 (2014-08-17) fix signed/unsigned warnings
-// 1.3 (2014-06-19) fix mouse clicking to round to nearest char boundary
-// 1.2 (2014-05-27) fix some RAD types that had crept into the new code
-// 1.1 (2013-12-15) move-by-word (requires STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE )
-// 1.0 (2012-07-26) improve documentation, initial public release
-// 0.3 (2012-02-24) bugfixes, single-line mode; insert mode
-// 0.2 (2011-11-28) fixes to undo/redo
-// 0.1 (2010-07-08) initial version
-//
-// ADDITIONAL CONTRIBUTORS
-//
-// Ulf Winklemann: move-by-word in 1.1
-// Fabian Giesen: secondary key inputs in 1.5
-// Martins Mozeiko: STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove in 1.6
-//
-// Bugfixes:
-// Scott Graham
-// Daniel Keller
-// Omar Cornut
-// Dan Thompson
-//
-// USAGE
-//
-// This file behaves differently depending on what symbols you define
-// before including it.
-//
-//
-// Header-file mode:
-//
-// If you do not define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION before including this,
-// it will operate in "header file" mode. In this mode, it declares a
-// single public symbol, STB_TexteditState, which encapsulates the current
-// state of a text widget (except for the string, which you will store
-// separately).
-//
-// To compile in this mode, you must define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE to a
-// primitive type that defines a single character (e.g. char, wchar_t, etc).
-//
-// To save space or increase undo-ability, you can optionally define the
-// following things that are used by the undo system:
-//
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE small int type encoding a valid cursor position
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT the number of undo states to allow
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT the number of characters to store in the undo buffer
-//
-// If you don't define these, they are set to permissive types and
-// moderate sizes. The undo system does no memory allocations, so
-// it grows STB_TexteditState by the worst-case storage which is (in bytes):
-//
-// [4 + 3 * sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE)] * STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATE_COUNT
-// + sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE) * STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHAR_COUNT
-//
-//
-// Implementation mode:
-//
-// If you define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION before including this, it
-// will compile the implementation of the text edit widget, depending
-// on a large number of symbols which must be defined before the include.
-//
-// The implementation is defined only as static functions. You will then
-// need to provide your own APIs in the same file which will access the
-// static functions.
-//
-// The basic concept is that you provide a "string" object which
-// behaves like an array of characters. stb_textedit uses indices to
-// refer to positions in the string, implicitly representing positions
-// in the displayed textedit. This is true for both plain text and
-// rich text; even with rich text stb_truetype interacts with your
-// code as if there was an array of all the displayed characters.
-//
-// Symbols that must be the same in header-file and implementation mode:
-//
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE the character type
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE small type that is a valid cursor position
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT the number of undo states to allow
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT the number of characters to store in the undo buffer
-//
-// Symbols you must define for implementation mode:
-//
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING the type of object representing a string being edited,
-// typically this is a wrapper object with other data you need
-//
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(obj) the length of the string (ideally O(1))
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r,obj,n) returns the results of laying out a line of characters
-// starting from character #n (see discussion below)
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(obj,n,i) returns the pixel delta from the xpos of the i'th character
-// to the xpos of the i+1'th char for a line of characters
-// starting at character #n (i.e. accounts for kerning
-// with previous char)
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(k) maps a keyboard input to an insertable character
-// (return type is int, -1 means not valid to insert)
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(obj,i) returns the i'th character of obj, 0-based
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE the character returned by _GETCHAR() we recognize
-// as manually wordwrapping for end-of-line positioning
-//
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(obj,i,n) delete n characters starting at i
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(obj,i,c*,n) insert n characters at i (pointed to by STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE*)
-//
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT a power of two that is or'd in to a keyboard input to represent the shift key
-//
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT keyboard input to move cursor left
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT keyboard input to move cursor right
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP keyboard input to move cursor up
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN keyboard input to move cursor down
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART keyboard input to move cursor to start of line // e.g. HOME
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND keyboard input to move cursor to end of line // e.g. END
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART keyboard input to move cursor to start of text // e.g. ctrl-HOME
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND keyboard input to move cursor to end of text // e.g. ctrl-END
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO keyboard input to perform undo
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO keyboard input to perform redo
-//
-// Optional:
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT keyboard input to toggle insert mode
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE(ch) true if character is whitespace (e.g. 'isspace'),
-// required for default WORDLEFT/WORDRIGHT handlers
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(obj,i) custom handler for WORDLEFT, returns index to move cursor to
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(obj,i) custom handler for WORDRIGHT, returns index to move cursor to
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT keyboard input to move cursor left one word // e.g. ctrl-LEFT
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT keyboard input to move cursor right one word // e.g. ctrl-RIGHT
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
-//
-// Todo:
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP keyboard input to move cursor up a page
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN keyboard input to move cursor down a page
-//
-// Keyboard input must be encoded as a single integer value; e.g. a character code
-// and some bitflags that represent shift states. to simplify the interface, SHIFT must
-// be a bitflag, so we can test the shifted state of cursor movements to allow selection,
-// i.e. (STB_TEXTED_K_RIGHT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) should be shifted right-arrow.
-//
-// You can encode other things, such as CONTROL or ALT, in additional bits, and
-// then test for their presence in e.g. STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT. For example,
-// my Windows implementations add an additional CONTROL bit, and an additional KEYDOWN
-// bit. Then all of the STB_TEXTEDIT_K_ values bitwise-or in the KEYDOWN bit,
-// and I pass both WM_KEYDOWN and WM_CHAR events to the "key" function in the
-// API below. The control keys will only match WM_KEYDOWN events because of the
-// keydown bit I add, and STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT only tests for the KEYDOWN
-// bit so it only decodes WM_CHAR events.
-//
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW returns information about the shape of one displayed
-// row of characters assuming they start on the i'th character--the width and
-// the height and the number of characters consumed. This allows this library
-// to traverse the entire layout incrementally. You need to compute word-wrapping
-// here.
-//
-// Each textfield keeps its own insert mode state, which is not how normal
-// applications work. To keep an app-wide insert mode, update/copy the
-// "insert_mode" field of STB_TexteditState before/after calling API functions.
-//
-// API
-//
-// void stb_textedit_initialize_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
-//
-// void stb_textedit_click(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
-// void stb_textedit_drag(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
-// int stb_textedit_cut(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
-// int stb_textedit_paste(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int len)
-// void stb_textedit_key(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXEDIT_KEYTYPE key)
-//
-// Each of these functions potentially updates the string and updates the
-// state.
-//
-// initialize_state:
-// set the textedit state to a known good default state when initially
-// constructing the textedit.
-//
-// click:
-// call this with the mouse x,y on a mouse down; it will update the cursor
-// and reset the selection start/end to the cursor point. the x,y must
-// be relative to the text widget, with (0,0) being the top left.
-//
-// drag:
-// call this with the mouse x,y on a mouse drag/up; it will update the
-// cursor and the selection end point
-//
-// cut:
-// call this to delete the current selection; returns true if there was
-// one. you should FIRST copy the current selection to the system paste buffer.
-// (To copy, just copy the current selection out of the string yourself.)
-//
-// paste:
-// call this to paste text at the current cursor point or over the current
-// selection if there is one.
-//
-// key:
-// call this for keyboard inputs sent to the textfield. you can use it
-// for "key down" events or for "translated" key events. if you need to
-// do both (as in Win32), or distinguish Unicode characters from control
-// inputs, set a high bit to distinguish the two; then you can define the
-// various definitions like STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT have the is-key-event bit
-// set, and make STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOCHAR check that the is-key-event bit is
-// clear. STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE defaults to int, but you can #define it to
-// anything other type you wante before including.
-//
-//
-// When rendering, you can read the cursor position and selection state from
-// the STB_TexteditState.
-//
-//
-// Notes:
-//
-// This is designed to be usable in IMGUI, so it allows for the possibility of
-// running in an IMGUI that has NOT cached the multi-line layout. For this
-// reason, it provides an interface that is compatible with computing the
-// layout incrementally--we try to make sure we make as few passes through
-// as possible. (For example, to locate the mouse pointer in the text, we
-// could define functions that return the X and Y positions of characters
-// and binary search Y and then X, but if we're doing dynamic layout this
-// will run the layout algorithm many times, so instead we manually search
-// forward in one pass. Similar logic applies to e.g. up-arrow and
-// down-arrow movement.)
-//
-// If it's run in a widget that *has* cached the layout, then this is less
-// efficient, but it's not horrible on modern computers. But you wouldn't
-// want to edit million-line files with it.
-
-
-////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-////
-//// Header-file mode
-////
-////
-
-#ifndef INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
-#define INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
-
-////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// STB_TexteditState
-//
-// Definition of STB_TexteditState which you should store
-// per-textfield; it includes cursor position, selection state,
-// and undo state.
-//
-
-#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT 99
-#endif
-#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT 999
-#endif
-#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE int
-#endif
-#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE int
-#endif
-
-typedef struct
-{
- // private data
- STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE where;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE insert_length;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE delete_length;
- int char_storage;
-} StbUndoRecord;
-
-typedef struct
-{
- // private data
- StbUndoRecord undo_rec [STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT];
- STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE undo_char[STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT];
- short undo_point, redo_point;
- int undo_char_point, redo_char_point;
-} StbUndoState;
-
-typedef struct
-{
- /////////////////////
- //
- // public data
- //
-
- int cursor;
- // position of the text cursor within the string
-
- int select_start; // selection start point
- int select_end;
- // selection start and end point in characters; if equal, no selection.
- // note that start may be less than or greater than end (e.g. when
- // dragging the mouse, start is where the initial click was, and you
- // can drag in either direction)
-
- unsigned char insert_mode;
- // each textfield keeps its own insert mode state. to keep an app-wide
- // insert mode, copy this value in/out of the app state
-
- /////////////////////
- //
- // private data
- //
- unsigned char cursor_at_end_of_line; // not implemented yet
- unsigned char initialized;
- unsigned char has_preferred_x;
- unsigned char single_line;
- unsigned char padding1, padding2, padding3;
- float preferred_x; // this determines where the cursor up/down tries to seek to along x
- StbUndoState undostate;
-} STB_TexteditState;
-
-
-////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// StbTexteditRow
-//
-// Result of layout query, used by stb_textedit to determine where
-// the text in each row is.
-
-// result of layout query
-typedef struct
-{
- float x0,x1; // starting x location, end x location (allows for align=right, etc)
- float baseline_y_delta; // position of baseline relative to previous row's baseline
- float ymin,ymax; // height of row above and below baseline
- int num_chars;
-} StbTexteditRow;
-#endif //INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
-
-
-////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-////
-//// Implementation mode
-////
-////
-
-
-// implementation isn't include-guarded, since it might have indirectly
-// included just the "header" portion
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
-
-#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove
-#include <string.h>
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove memmove
-#endif
-
-
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// Mouse input handling
-//
-
-// traverse the layout to locate the nearest character to a display position
-static int stb_text_locate_coord(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, float x, float y)
-{
- StbTexteditRow r;
- int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- float base_y = 0, prev_x;
- int i=0, k;
-
- r.x0 = r.x1 = 0;
- r.ymin = r.ymax = 0;
- r.num_chars = 0;
-
- // search rows to find one that straddles 'y'
- while (i < n) {
- STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
- if (r.num_chars <= 0)
- return n;
-
- if (i==0 && y < base_y + r.ymin)
- return 0;
-
- if (y < base_y + r.ymax)
- break;
-
- i += r.num_chars;
- base_y += r.baseline_y_delta;
- }
-
- // below all text, return 'after' last character
- if (i >= n)
- return n;
-
- // check if it's before the beginning of the line
- if (x < r.x0)
- return i;
-
- // check if it's before the end of the line
- if (x < r.x1) {
- // search characters in row for one that straddles 'x'
- prev_x = r.x0;
- for (k=0; k < r.num_chars; ++k) {
- float w = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, i, k);
- if (x < prev_x+w) {
- if (x < prev_x+w/2)
- return k+i;
- else
- return k+i+1;
- }
- prev_x += w;
- }
- // shouldn't happen, but if it does, fall through to end-of-line case
- }
-
- // if the last character is a newline, return that. otherwise return 'after' the last character
- if (STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, i+r.num_chars-1) == STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
- return i+r.num_chars-1;
- else
- return i+r.num_chars;
-}
-
-// API click: on mouse down, move the cursor to the clicked location, and reset the selection
-static void stb_textedit_click(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
-{
- // In single-line mode, just always make y = 0. This lets the drag keep working if the mouse
- // goes off the top or bottom of the text
- if( state->single_line )
- {
- StbTexteditRow r;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
- y = r.ymin;
- }
-
- state->cursor = stb_text_locate_coord(str, x, y);
- state->select_start = state->cursor;
- state->select_end = state->cursor;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
-}
-
-// API drag: on mouse drag, move the cursor and selection endpoint to the clicked location
-static void stb_textedit_drag(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
-{
- int p = 0;
-
- // In single-line mode, just always make y = 0. This lets the drag keep working if the mouse
- // goes off the top or bottom of the text
- if( state->single_line )
- {
- StbTexteditRow r;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
- y = r.ymin;
- }
-
- if (state->select_start == state->select_end)
- state->select_start = state->cursor;
-
- p = stb_text_locate_coord(str, x, y);
- state->cursor = state->select_end = p;
-}
-
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// Keyboard input handling
-//
-
-// forward declarations
-static void stb_text_undo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state);
-static void stb_text_redo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state);
-static void stb_text_makeundo_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length);
-static void stb_text_makeundo_insert(STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length);
-static void stb_text_makeundo_replace(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int old_length, int new_length);
-
-typedef struct
-{
- float x,y; // position of n'th character
- float height; // height of line
- int first_char, length; // first char of row, and length
- int prev_first; // first char of previous row
-} StbFindState;
-
-// find the x/y location of a character, and remember info about the previous row in
-// case we get a move-up event (for page up, we'll have to rescan)
-static void stb_textedit_find_charpos(StbFindState *find, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int n, int single_line)
-{
- StbTexteditRow r;
- int prev_start = 0;
- int z = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- int i=0, first;
-
- if (n == z) {
- // if it's at the end, then find the last line -- simpler than trying to
- // explicitly handle this case in the regular code
- if (single_line) {
- STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
- find->y = 0;
- find->first_char = 0;
- find->length = z;
- find->height = r.ymax - r.ymin;
- find->x = r.x1;
- } else {
- find->y = 0;
- find->x = 0;
- find->height = 1;
- while (i < z) {
- STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
- prev_start = i;
- i += r.num_chars;
- }
- find->first_char = i;
- find->length = 0;
- find->prev_first = prev_start;
- }
- return;
- }
-
- // search rows to find the one that straddles character n
- find->y = 0;
-
- for(;;) {
- STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
- if (n < i + r.num_chars)
- break;
- prev_start = i;
- i += r.num_chars;
- find->y += r.baseline_y_delta;
- }
-
- find->first_char = first = i;
- find->length = r.num_chars;
- find->height = r.ymax - r.ymin;
- find->prev_first = prev_start;
-
- // now scan to find xpos
- find->x = r.x0;
- i = 0;
- for (i=0; first+i < n; ++i)
- find->x += STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, first, i);
-}
-
-#define STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(s) ((s)->select_start != (s)->select_end)
-
-// make the selection/cursor state valid if client altered the string
-static void stb_textedit_clamp(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
- if (state->select_start > n) state->select_start = n;
- if (state->select_end > n) state->select_end = n;
- // if clamping forced them to be equal, move the cursor to match
- if (state->select_start == state->select_end)
- state->cursor = state->select_start;
- }
- if (state->cursor > n) state->cursor = n;
-}
-
-// delete characters while updating undo
-static void stb_textedit_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int len)
-{
- stb_text_makeundo_delete(str, state, where, len);
- STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, where, len);
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
-}
-
-// delete the section
-static void stb_textedit_delete_selection(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
- if (state->select_start < state->select_end) {
- stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->select_start, state->select_end - state->select_start);
- state->select_end = state->cursor = state->select_start;
- } else {
- stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->select_end, state->select_start - state->select_end);
- state->select_start = state->cursor = state->select_end;
- }
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- }
-}
-
-// canoncialize the selection so start <= end
-static void stb_textedit_sortselection(STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- if (state->select_end < state->select_start) {
- int temp = state->select_end;
- state->select_end = state->select_start;
- state->select_start = temp;
- }
-}
-
-// move cursor to first character of selection
-static void stb_textedit_move_to_first(STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
- stb_textedit_sortselection(state);
- state->cursor = state->select_start;
- state->select_end = state->select_start;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- }
-}
-
-// move cursor to last character of selection
-static void stb_textedit_move_to_last(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
- stb_textedit_sortselection(state);
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- state->cursor = state->select_end;
- state->select_start = state->select_end;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- }
-}
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE
-static int is_word_boundary( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int idx )
-{
- return idx > 0 ? (STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE( STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str,idx-1) ) && !STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE( STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, idx) ) ) : 1;
-}
-
-#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT
-static int stb_textedit_move_to_word_previous( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int c )
-{
- --c; // always move at least one character
- while( c >= 0 && !is_word_boundary( str, c ) )
- --c;
-
- if( c < 0 )
- c = 0;
-
- return c;
-}
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT stb_textedit_move_to_word_previous
-#endif
-
-#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT
-static int stb_textedit_move_to_word_next( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int c )
-{
- const int len = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- ++c; // always move at least one character
- while( c < len && !is_word_boundary( str, c ) )
- ++c;
-
- if( c > len )
- c = len;
-
- return c;
-}
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT stb_textedit_move_to_word_next
-#endif
-
-#endif
-
-// update selection and cursor to match each other
-static void stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- if (!STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- state->select_start = state->select_end = state->cursor;
- else
- state->cursor = state->select_end;
-}
-
-// API cut: delete selection
-static int stb_textedit_cut(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
- stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); // implicity clamps
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- return 1;
- }
- return 0;
-}
-
-// API paste: replace existing selection with passed-in text
-static int stb_textedit_paste_internal(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int len)
-{
- // if there's a selection, the paste should delete it
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state);
- // try to insert the characters
- if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, text, len)) {
- stb_text_makeundo_insert(state, state->cursor, len);
- state->cursor += len;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- return 1;
- }
- // remove the undo since we didn't actually insert the characters
- if (state->undostate.undo_point)
- --state->undostate.undo_point;
- return 0;
-}
-
-#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE
-#define STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE int
-#endif
-
-// API key: process a keyboard input
-static void stb_textedit_key(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE key)
-{
-retry:
- switch (key) {
- default: {
- int c = STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(key);
- if (c > 0) {
- STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE ch = (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE) c;
-
- // can't add newline in single-line mode
- if (c == '\n' && state->single_line)
- break;
-
- if (state->insert_mode && !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state) && state->cursor < STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str)) {
- stb_text_makeundo_replace(str, state, state->cursor, 1, 1);
- STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, state->cursor, 1);
- if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, &ch, 1)) {
- ++state->cursor;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- }
- } else {
- stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); // implicity clamps
- if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, &ch, 1)) {
- stb_text_makeundo_insert(state, state->cursor, 1);
- ++state->cursor;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- }
- }
- }
- break;
- }
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT:
- state->insert_mode = !state->insert_mode;
- break;
-#endif
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO:
- stb_text_undo(str, state);
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO:
- stb_text_redo(str, state);
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT:
- // if currently there's a selection, move cursor to start of selection
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
- else
- if (state->cursor > 0)
- --state->cursor;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT:
- // if currently there's a selection, move cursor to end of selection
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state);
- else
- ++state->cursor;
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
- // move selection left
- if (state->select_end > 0)
- --state->select_end;
- state->cursor = state->select_end;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT:
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
- else {
- state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(str, state->cursor);
- stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
- }
- break;
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- if( !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION( state ) )
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
-
- state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(str, state->cursor);
- state->select_end = state->cursor;
-
- stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
- break;
-#endif
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT:
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state);
- else {
- state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(str, state->cursor);
- stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
- }
- break;
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- if( !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION( state ) )
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
-
- state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(str, state->cursor);
- state->select_end = state->cursor;
-
- stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
- break;
-#endif
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
- // move selection right
- ++state->select_end;
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- state->cursor = state->select_end;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN:
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
- StbFindState find;
- StbTexteditRow row;
- int i, sel = (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) != 0;
-
- if (state->single_line) {
- // on windows, up&down in single-line behave like left&right
- key = STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
- goto retry;
- }
-
- if (sel)
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
- else if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- stb_textedit_move_to_last(str,state);
-
- // compute current position of cursor point
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- stb_textedit_find_charpos(&find, str, state->cursor, state->single_line);
-
- // now find character position down a row
- if (find.length) {
- float goal_x = state->has_preferred_x ? state->preferred_x : find.x;
- float x;
- int start = find.first_char + find.length;
- state->cursor = start;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&row, str, state->cursor);
- x = row.x0;
- for (i=0; i < row.num_chars; ++i) {
- float dx = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, start, i);
- #ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE
- if (dx == STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE)
- break;
- #endif
- x += dx;
- if (x > goal_x)
- break;
- ++state->cursor;
- }
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
-
- state->has_preferred_x = 1;
- state->preferred_x = goal_x;
-
- if (sel)
- state->select_end = state->cursor;
- }
- break;
- }
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP:
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
- StbFindState find;
- StbTexteditRow row;
- int i, sel = (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) != 0;
-
- if (state->single_line) {
- // on windows, up&down become left&right
- key = STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT | (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
- goto retry;
- }
-
- if (sel)
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
- else if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
-
- // compute current position of cursor point
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- stb_textedit_find_charpos(&find, str, state->cursor, state->single_line);
-
- // can only go up if there's a previous row
- if (find.prev_first != find.first_char) {
- // now find character position up a row
- float goal_x = state->has_preferred_x ? state->preferred_x : find.x;
- float x;
- state->cursor = find.prev_first;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&row, str, state->cursor);
- x = row.x0;
- for (i=0; i < row.num_chars; ++i) {
- float dx = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, find.prev_first, i);
- #ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE
- if (dx == STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE)
- break;
- #endif
- x += dx;
- if (x > goal_x)
- break;
- ++state->cursor;
- }
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
-
- state->has_preferred_x = 1;
- state->preferred_x = goal_x;
-
- if (sel)
- state->select_end = state->cursor;
- }
- break;
- }
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE:
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- stb_textedit_delete_selection(str, state);
- else {
- int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- if (state->cursor < n)
- stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->cursor, 1);
- }
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE:
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
- stb_textedit_delete_selection(str, state);
- else {
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- if (state->cursor > 0) {
- stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->cursor-1, 1);
- --state->cursor;
- }
- }
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2:
-#endif
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART:
- state->cursor = state->select_start = state->select_end = 0;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2:
-#endif
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND:
- state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- state->select_start = state->select_end = 0;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
-#endif
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
- state->cursor = state->select_end = 0;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
-#endif
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
- state->cursor = state->select_end = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2:
-#endif
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART:
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
- if (state->single_line)
- state->cursor = 0;
- else while (state->cursor > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor-1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
- --state->cursor;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2:
-#endif
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND: {
- int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
- if (state->single_line)
- state->cursor = n;
- else while (state->cursor < n && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
- ++state->cursor;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
- }
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
-#endif
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
- if (state->single_line)
- state->cursor = 0;
- else while (state->cursor > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor-1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
- --state->cursor;
- state->select_end = state->cursor;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
-
-#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
-#endif
- case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
- int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
- stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
- stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
- if (state->single_line)
- state->cursor = n;
- else while (state->cursor < n && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
- ++state->cursor;
- state->select_end = state->cursor;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- break;
- }
-
-// @TODO:
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP - move cursor up a page
-// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN - move cursor down a page
- }
-}
-
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// Undo processing
-//
-// @OPTIMIZE: the undo/redo buffer should be circular
-
-static void stb_textedit_flush_redo(StbUndoState *state)
-{
- state->redo_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT;
- state->redo_char_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT;
-}
-
-// discard the oldest entry in the undo list
-static void stb_textedit_discard_undo(StbUndoState *state)
-{
- if (state->undo_point > 0) {
- // if the 0th undo state has characters, clean those up
- if (state->undo_rec[0].char_storage >= 0) {
- int n = state->undo_rec[0].insert_length, i;
- // delete n characters from all other records
- state->undo_char_point -= n;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_char, state->undo_char + n, (size_t) (state->undo_char_point*sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE)));
- for (i=0; i < state->undo_point; ++i)
- if (state->undo_rec[i].char_storage >= 0)
- state->undo_rec[i].char_storage -= n; // @OPTIMIZE: get rid of char_storage and infer it
- }
- --state->undo_point;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_rec, state->undo_rec+1, (size_t) (state->undo_point*sizeof(state->undo_rec[0])));
- }
-}
-
-// discard the oldest entry in the redo list--it's bad if this
-// ever happens, but because undo & redo have to store the actual
-// characters in different cases, the redo character buffer can
-// fill up even though the undo buffer didn't
-static void stb_textedit_discard_redo(StbUndoState *state)
-{
- int k = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT-1;
-
- if (state->redo_point <= k) {
- // if the k'th undo state has characters, clean those up
- if (state->undo_rec[k].char_storage >= 0) {
- int n = state->undo_rec[k].insert_length, i;
- // move the remaining redo character data to the end of the buffer
- state->redo_char_point += n;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_char + state->redo_char_point, state->undo_char + state->redo_char_point-n, (size_t) ((STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT - state->redo_char_point)*sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE)));
- // adjust the position of all the other records to account for above memmove
- for (i=state->redo_point; i < k; ++i)
- if (state->undo_rec[i].char_storage >= 0)
- state->undo_rec[i].char_storage += n;
- }
- // now move all the redo records towards the end of the buffer; the first one is at 'redo_point'
- STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point+1, state->undo_rec + state->redo_point, (size_t) ((STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT - state->redo_point)*sizeof(state->undo_rec[0])));
- // now move redo_point to point to the new one
- ++state->redo_point;
- }
-}
-
-static StbUndoRecord *stb_text_create_undo_record(StbUndoState *state, int numchars)
-{
- // any time we create a new undo record, we discard redo
- stb_textedit_flush_redo(state);
-
- // if we have no free records, we have to make room, by sliding the
- // existing records down
- if (state->undo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
- stb_textedit_discard_undo(state);
-
- // if the characters to store won't possibly fit in the buffer, we can't undo
- if (numchars > STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) {
- state->undo_point = 0;
- state->undo_char_point = 0;
- return NULL;
- }
-
- // if we don't have enough free characters in the buffer, we have to make room
- while (state->undo_char_point + numchars > STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT)
- stb_textedit_discard_undo(state);
-
- return &state->undo_rec[state->undo_point++];
-}
-
-static STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *stb_text_createundo(StbUndoState *state, int pos, int insert_len, int delete_len)
-{
- StbUndoRecord *r = stb_text_create_undo_record(state, insert_len);
- if (r == NULL)
- return NULL;
-
- r->where = pos;
- r->insert_length = (STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE) insert_len;
- r->delete_length = (STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE) delete_len;
-
- if (insert_len == 0) {
- r->char_storage = -1;
- return NULL;
- } else {
- r->char_storage = state->undo_char_point;
- state->undo_char_point += insert_len;
- return &state->undo_char[r->char_storage];
- }
-}
-
-static void stb_text_undo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- StbUndoState *s = &state->undostate;
- StbUndoRecord u, *r;
- if (s->undo_point == 0)
- return;
-
- // we need to do two things: apply the undo record, and create a redo record
- u = s->undo_rec[s->undo_point-1];
- r = &s->undo_rec[s->redo_point-1];
- r->char_storage = -1;
-
- r->insert_length = u.delete_length;
- r->delete_length = u.insert_length;
- r->where = u.where;
-
- if (u.delete_length) {
- // if the undo record says to delete characters, then the redo record will
- // need to re-insert the characters that get deleted, so we need to store
- // them.
-
- // there are three cases:
- // there's enough room to store the characters
- // characters stored for *redoing* don't leave room for redo
- // characters stored for *undoing* don't leave room for redo
- // if the last is true, we have to bail
-
- if (s->undo_char_point + u.delete_length >= STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) {
- // the undo records take up too much character space; there's no space to store the redo characters
- r->insert_length = 0;
- } else {
- int i;
-
- // there's definitely room to store the characters eventually
- while (s->undo_char_point + u.delete_length > s->redo_char_point) {
- // should never happen:
- if (s->redo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
- return;
- // there's currently not enough room, so discard a redo record
- stb_textedit_discard_redo(s);
- }
- r = &s->undo_rec[s->redo_point-1];
-
- r->char_storage = s->redo_char_point - u.delete_length;
- s->redo_char_point = s->redo_char_point - u.delete_length;
-
- // now save the characters
- for (i=0; i < u.delete_length; ++i)
- s->undo_char[r->char_storage + i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, u.where + i);
- }
-
- // now we can carry out the deletion
- STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, u.where, u.delete_length);
- }
-
- // check type of recorded action:
- if (u.insert_length) {
- // easy case: was a deletion, so we need to insert n characters
- STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, u.where, &s->undo_char[u.char_storage], u.insert_length);
- s->undo_char_point -= u.insert_length;
- }
-
- state->cursor = u.where + u.insert_length;
-
- s->undo_point--;
- s->redo_point--;
-}
-
-static void stb_text_redo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
-{
- StbUndoState *s = &state->undostate;
- StbUndoRecord *u, r;
- if (s->redo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
- return;
-
- // we need to do two things: apply the redo record, and create an undo record
- u = &s->undo_rec[s->undo_point];
- r = s->undo_rec[s->redo_point];
-
- // we KNOW there must be room for the undo record, because the redo record
- // was derived from an undo record
-
- u->delete_length = r.insert_length;
- u->insert_length = r.delete_length;
- u->where = r.where;
- u->char_storage = -1;
-
- if (r.delete_length) {
- // the redo record requires us to delete characters, so the undo record
- // needs to store the characters
-
- if (s->undo_char_point + u->insert_length > s->redo_char_point) {
- u->insert_length = 0;
- u->delete_length = 0;
- } else {
- int i;
- u->char_storage = s->undo_char_point;
- s->undo_char_point = s->undo_char_point + u->insert_length;
-
- // now save the characters
- for (i=0; i < u->insert_length; ++i)
- s->undo_char[u->char_storage + i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, u->where + i);
- }
-
- STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, r.where, r.delete_length);
- }
-
- if (r.insert_length) {
- // easy case: need to insert n characters
- STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, r.where, &s->undo_char[r.char_storage], r.insert_length);
- s->redo_char_point += r.insert_length;
- }
-
- state->cursor = r.where + r.insert_length;
-
- s->undo_point++;
- s->redo_point++;
-}
-
-static void stb_text_makeundo_insert(STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length)
-{
- stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, 0, length);
-}
-
-static void stb_text_makeundo_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length)
-{
- int i;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, length, 0);
- if (p) {
- for (i=0; i < length; ++i)
- p[i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, where+i);
- }
-}
-
-static void stb_text_makeundo_replace(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int old_length, int new_length)
-{
- int i;
- STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, old_length, new_length);
- if (p) {
- for (i=0; i < old_length; ++i)
- p[i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, where+i);
- }
-}
-
-// reset the state to default
-static void stb_textedit_clear_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
-{
- state->undostate.undo_point = 0;
- state->undostate.undo_char_point = 0;
- state->undostate.redo_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT;
- state->undostate.redo_char_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT;
- state->select_end = state->select_start = 0;
- state->cursor = 0;
- state->has_preferred_x = 0;
- state->preferred_x = 0;
- state->cursor_at_end_of_line = 0;
- state->initialized = 1;
- state->single_line = (unsigned char) is_single_line;
- state->insert_mode = 0;
-}
-
-// API initialize
-static void stb_textedit_initialize_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
-{
- stb_textedit_clear_state(state, is_single_line);
-}
-
-#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
-#pragma GCC diagnostic push
-#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual"
-#endif
-
-static int stb_textedit_paste(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE const *ctext, int len)
-{
- return stb_textedit_paste_internal(str, state, (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *) ctext, len);
-}
-
-#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
-#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
-#endif
-
-#endif//STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
-
-/*
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
-Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
-Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
-this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
-the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
-use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
-of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
-so, subject to the following conditions:
-The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
-copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
-AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
-LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
-OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
-SOFTWARE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
-This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
-Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
-software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
-commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
-In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
-software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
-domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
-the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
-overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
-this software under copyright law.
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
-AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
-ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
-WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-*/
+++ /dev/null
-// stb_truetype.h - v1.19 - public domain
-// authored from 2009-2016 by Sean Barrett / RAD Game Tools
-//
-// This library processes TrueType files:
-// parse files
-// extract glyph metrics
-// extract glyph shapes
-// render glyphs to one-channel bitmaps with antialiasing (box filter)
-// render glyphs to one-channel SDF bitmaps (signed-distance field/function)
-//
-// Todo:
-// non-MS cmaps
-// crashproof on bad data
-// hinting? (no longer patented)
-// cleartype-style AA?
-// optimize: use simple memory allocator for intermediates
-// optimize: build edge-list directly from curves
-// optimize: rasterize directly from curves?
-//
-// ADDITIONAL CONTRIBUTORS
-//
-// Mikko Mononen: compound shape support, more cmap formats
-// Tor Andersson: kerning, subpixel rendering
-// Dougall Johnson: OpenType / Type 2 font handling
-// Daniel Ribeiro Maciel: basic GPOS-based kerning
-//
-// Misc other:
-// Ryan Gordon
-// Simon Glass
-// github:IntellectualKitty
-// Imanol Celaya
-// Daniel Ribeiro Maciel
-//
-// Bug/warning reports/fixes:
-// "Zer" on mollyrocket Fabian "ryg" Giesen
-// Cass Everitt Martins Mozeiko
-// stoiko (Haemimont Games) Cap Petschulat
-// Brian Hook Omar Cornut
-// Walter van Niftrik github:aloucks
-// David Gow Peter LaValle
-// David Given Sergey Popov
-// Ivan-Assen Ivanov Giumo X. Clanjor
-// Anthony Pesch Higor Euripedes
-// Johan Duparc Thomas Fields
-// Hou Qiming Derek Vinyard
-// Rob Loach Cort Stratton
-// Kenney Phillis Jr. github:oyvindjam
-// Brian Costabile github:vassvik
-//
-// VERSION HISTORY
-//
-// 1.19 (2018-02-11) GPOS kerning, STBTT_fmod
-// 1.18 (2018-01-29) add missing function
-// 1.17 (2017-07-23) make more arguments const; doc fix
-// 1.16 (2017-07-12) SDF support
-// 1.15 (2017-03-03) make more arguments const
-// 1.14 (2017-01-16) num-fonts-in-TTC function
-// 1.13 (2017-01-02) support OpenType fonts, certain Apple fonts
-// 1.12 (2016-10-25) suppress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
-// 1.11 (2016-04-02) fix unused-variable warning
-// 1.10 (2016-04-02) user-defined fabs(); rare memory leak; remove duplicate typedef
-// 1.09 (2016-01-16) warning fix; avoid crash on outofmem; use allocation userdata properly
-// 1.08 (2015-09-13) document stbtt_Rasterize(); fixes for vertical & horizontal edges
-// 1.07 (2015-08-01) allow PackFontRanges to accept arrays of sparse codepoints;
-// variant PackFontRanges to pack and render in separate phases;
-// fix stbtt_GetFontOFfsetForIndex (never worked for non-0 input?);
-// fixed an assert() bug in the new rasterizer
-// replace assert() with STBTT_assert() in new rasterizer
-//
-// Full history can be found at the end of this file.
-//
-// LICENSE
-//
-// See end of file for license information.
-//
-// USAGE
-//
-// Include this file in whatever places neeed to refer to it. In ONE C/C++
-// file, write:
-// #define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
-// before the #include of this file. This expands out the actual
-// implementation into that C/C++ file.
-//
-// To make the implementation private to the file that generates the implementation,
-// #define STBTT_STATIC
-//
-// Simple 3D API (don't ship this, but it's fine for tools and quick start)
-// stbtt_BakeFontBitmap() -- bake a font to a bitmap for use as texture
-// stbtt_GetBakedQuad() -- compute quad to draw for a given char
-//
-// Improved 3D API (more shippable):
-// #include "stb_rect_pack.h" -- optional, but you really want it
-// stbtt_PackBegin()
-// stbtt_PackSetOversampling() -- for improved quality on small fonts
-// stbtt_PackFontRanges() -- pack and renders
-// stbtt_PackEnd()
-// stbtt_GetPackedQuad()
-//
-// "Load" a font file from a memory buffer (you have to keep the buffer loaded)
-// stbtt_InitFont()
-// stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex() -- indexing for TTC font collections
-// stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts() -- number of fonts for TTC font collections
-//
-// Render a unicode codepoint to a bitmap
-// stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap() -- allocates and returns a bitmap
-// stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap() -- renders into bitmap you provide
-// stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox() -- how big the bitmap must be
-//
-// Character advance/positioning
-// stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics()
-// stbtt_GetFontVMetrics()
-// stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2()
-// stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance()
-//
-// Starting with version 1.06, the rasterizer was replaced with a new,
-// faster and generally-more-precise rasterizer. The new rasterizer more
-// accurately measures pixel coverage for anti-aliasing, except in the case
-// where multiple shapes overlap, in which case it overestimates the AA pixel
-// coverage. Thus, anti-aliasing of intersecting shapes may look wrong. If
-// this turns out to be a problem, you can re-enable the old rasterizer with
-// #define STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION 1
-// which will incur about a 15% speed hit.
-//
-// ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
-//
-// Immediately after this block comment are a series of sample programs.
-//
-// After the sample programs is the "header file" section. This section
-// includes documentation for each API function.
-//
-// Some important concepts to understand to use this library:
-//
-// Codepoint
-// Characters are defined by unicode codepoints, e.g. 65 is
-// uppercase A, 231 is lowercase c with a cedilla, 0x7e30 is
-// the hiragana for "ma".
-//
-// Glyph
-// A visual character shape (every codepoint is rendered as
-// some glyph)
-//
-// Glyph index
-// A font-specific integer ID representing a glyph
-//
-// Baseline
-// Glyph shapes are defined relative to a baseline, which is the
-// bottom of uppercase characters. Characters extend both above
-// and below the baseline.
-//
-// Current Point
-// As you draw text to the screen, you keep track of a "current point"
-// which is the origin of each character. The current point's vertical
-// position is the baseline. Even "baked fonts" use this model.
-//
-// Vertical Font Metrics
-// The vertical qualities of the font, used to vertically position
-// and space the characters. See docs for stbtt_GetFontVMetrics.
-//
-// Font Size in Pixels or Points
-// The preferred interface for specifying font sizes in stb_truetype
-// is to specify how tall the font's vertical extent should be in pixels.
-// If that sounds good enough, skip the next paragraph.
-//
-// Most font APIs instead use "points", which are a common typographic
-// measurement for describing font size, defined as 72 points per inch.
-// stb_truetype provides a point API for compatibility. However, true
-// "per inch" conventions don't make much sense on computer displays
-// since different monitors have different number of pixels per
-// inch. For example, Windows traditionally uses a convention that
-// there are 96 pixels per inch, thus making 'inch' measurements have
-// nothing to do with inches, and thus effectively defining a point to
-// be 1.333 pixels. Additionally, the TrueType font data provides
-// an explicit scale factor to scale a given font's glyphs to points,
-// but the author has observed that this scale factor is often wrong
-// for non-commercial fonts, thus making fonts scaled in points
-// according to the TrueType spec incoherently sized in practice.
-//
-// DETAILED USAGE:
-//
-// Scale:
-// Select how high you want the font to be, in points or pixels.
-// Call ScaleForPixelHeight or ScaleForMappingEmToPixels to compute
-// a scale factor SF that will be used by all other functions.
-//
-// Baseline:
-// You need to select a y-coordinate that is the baseline of where
-// your text will appear. Call GetFontBoundingBox to get the baseline-relative
-// bounding box for all characters. SF*-y0 will be the distance in pixels
-// that the worst-case character could extend above the baseline, so if
-// you want the top edge of characters to appear at the top of the
-// screen where y=0, then you would set the baseline to SF*-y0.
-//
-// Current point:
-// Set the current point where the first character will appear. The
-// first character could extend left of the current point; this is font
-// dependent. You can either choose a current point that is the leftmost
-// point and hope, or add some padding, or check the bounding box or
-// left-side-bearing of the first character to be displayed and set
-// the current point based on that.
-//
-// Displaying a character:
-// Compute the bounding box of the character. It will contain signed values
-// relative to <current_point, baseline>. I.e. if it returns x0,y0,x1,y1,
-// then the character should be displayed in the rectangle from
-// <current_point+SF*x0, baseline+SF*y0> to <current_point+SF*x1,baseline+SF*y1).
-//
-// Advancing for the next character:
-// Call GlyphHMetrics, and compute 'current_point += SF * advance'.
-//
-//
-// ADVANCED USAGE
-//
-// Quality:
-//
-// - Use the functions with Subpixel at the end to allow your characters
-// to have subpixel positioning. Since the font is anti-aliased, not
-// hinted, this is very import for quality. (This is not possible with
-// baked fonts.)
-//
-// - Kerning is now supported, and if you're supporting subpixel rendering
-// then kerning is worth using to give your text a polished look.
-//
-// Performance:
-//
-// - Convert Unicode codepoints to glyph indexes and operate on the glyphs;
-// if you don't do this, stb_truetype is forced to do the conversion on
-// every call.
-//
-// - There are a lot of memory allocations. We should modify it to take
-// a temp buffer and allocate from the temp buffer (without freeing),
-// should help performance a lot.
-//
-// NOTES
-//
-// The system uses the raw data found in the .ttf file without changing it
-// and without building auxiliary data structures. This is a bit inefficient
-// on little-endian systems (the data is big-endian), but assuming you're
-// caching the bitmaps or glyph shapes this shouldn't be a big deal.
-//
-// It appears to be very hard to programmatically determine what font a
-// given file is in a general way. I provide an API for this, but I don't
-// recommend it.
-//
-//
-// SOURCE STATISTICS (based on v0.6c, 2050 LOC)
-//
-// Documentation & header file 520 LOC \___ 660 LOC documentation
-// Sample code 140 LOC /
-// Truetype parsing 620 LOC ---- 620 LOC TrueType
-// Software rasterization 240 LOC \ .
-// Curve tesselation 120 LOC \__ 550 LOC Bitmap creation
-// Bitmap management 100 LOC /
-// Baked bitmap interface 70 LOC /
-// Font name matching & access 150 LOC ---- 150
-// C runtime library abstraction 60 LOC ---- 60
-//
-//
-// PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS FOR 1.06:
-//
-// 32-bit 64-bit
-// Previous release: 8.83 s 7.68 s
-// Pool allocations: 7.72 s 6.34 s
-// Inline sort : 6.54 s 5.65 s
-// New rasterizer : 5.63 s 5.00 s
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-////
-//// SAMPLE PROGRAMS
-////
-//
-// Incomplete text-in-3d-api example, which draws quads properly aligned to be lossless
-//
-#if 0
-#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION // force following include to generate implementation
-#include "stb_truetype.h"
-
-unsigned char ttf_buffer[1<<20];
-unsigned char temp_bitmap[512*512];
-
-stbtt_bakedchar cdata[96]; // ASCII 32..126 is 95 glyphs
-GLuint ftex;
-
-void my_stbtt_initfont(void)
-{
- fread(ttf_buffer, 1, 1<<20, fopen("c:/windows/fonts/times.ttf", "rb"));
- stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(ttf_buffer,0, 32.0, temp_bitmap,512,512, 32,96, cdata); // no guarantee this fits!
- // can free ttf_buffer at this point
- glGenTextures(1, &ftex);
- glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, ftex);
- glTexImage2D(GL_TEXTURE_2D, 0, GL_ALPHA, 512,512, 0, GL_ALPHA, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, temp_bitmap);
- // can free temp_bitmap at this point
- glTexParameteri(GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_MIN_FILTER, GL_LINEAR);
-}
-
-void my_stbtt_print(float x, float y, char *text)
-{
- // assume orthographic projection with units = screen pixels, origin at top left
- glEnable(GL_TEXTURE_2D);
- glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, ftex);
- glBegin(GL_QUADS);
- while (*text) {
- if (*text >= 32 && *text < 128) {
- stbtt_aligned_quad q;
- stbtt_GetBakedQuad(cdata, 512,512, *text-32, &x,&y,&q,1);//1=opengl & d3d10+,0=d3d9
- glTexCoord2f(q.s0,q.t1); glVertex2f(q.x0,q.y0);
- glTexCoord2f(q.s1,q.t1); glVertex2f(q.x1,q.y0);
- glTexCoord2f(q.s1,q.t0); glVertex2f(q.x1,q.y1);
- glTexCoord2f(q.s0,q.t0); glVertex2f(q.x0,q.y1);
- }
- ++text;
- }
- glEnd();
-}
-#endif
-//
-//
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// Complete program (this compiles): get a single bitmap, print as ASCII art
-//
-#if 0
-#include <stdio.h>
-#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION // force following include to generate implementation
-#include "stb_truetype.h"
-
-char ttf_buffer[1<<25];
-
-int main(int argc, char **argv)
-{
- stbtt_fontinfo font;
- unsigned char *bitmap;
- int w,h,i,j,c = (argc > 1 ? atoi(argv[1]) : 'a'), s = (argc > 2 ? atoi(argv[2]) : 20);
-
- fread(ttf_buffer, 1, 1<<25, fopen(argc > 3 ? argv[3] : "c:/windows/fonts/arialbd.ttf", "rb"));
-
- stbtt_InitFont(&font, ttf_buffer, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(ttf_buffer,0));
- bitmap = stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(&font, 0,stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&font, s), c, &w, &h, 0,0);
-
- for (j=0; j < h; ++j) {
- for (i=0; i < w; ++i)
- putchar(" .:ioVM@"[bitmap[j*w+i]>>5]);
- putchar('\n');
- }
- return 0;
-}
-#endif
-//
-// Output:
-//
-// .ii.
-// @@@@@@.
-// V@Mio@@o
-// :i. V@V
-// :oM@@M
-// :@@@MM@M
-// @@o o@M
-// :@@. M@M
-// @@@o@@@@
-// :M@@V:@@.
-//
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// Complete program: print "Hello World!" banner, with bugs
-//
-#if 0
-char buffer[24<<20];
-unsigned char screen[20][79];
-
-int main(int arg, char **argv)
-{
- stbtt_fontinfo font;
- int i,j,ascent,baseline,ch=0;
- float scale, xpos=2; // leave a little padding in case the character extends left
- char *text = "Heljo World!"; // intentionally misspelled to show 'lj' brokenness
-
- fread(buffer, 1, 1000000, fopen("c:/windows/fonts/arialbd.ttf", "rb"));
- stbtt_InitFont(&font, buffer, 0);
-
- scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&font, 15);
- stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&font, &ascent,0,0);
- baseline = (int) (ascent*scale);
-
- while (text[ch]) {
- int advance,lsb,x0,y0,x1,y1;
- float x_shift = xpos - (float) floor(xpos);
- stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(&font, text[ch], &advance, &lsb);
- stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(&font, text[ch], scale,scale,x_shift,0, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
- stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(&font, &screen[baseline + y0][(int) xpos + x0], x1-x0,y1-y0, 79, scale,scale,x_shift,0, text[ch]);
- // note that this stomps the old data, so where character boxes overlap (e.g. 'lj') it's wrong
- // because this API is really for baking character bitmaps into textures. if you want to render
- // a sequence of characters, you really need to render each bitmap to a temp buffer, then
- // "alpha blend" that into the working buffer
- xpos += (advance * scale);
- if (text[ch+1])
- xpos += scale*stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(&font, text[ch],text[ch+1]);
- ++ch;
- }
-
- for (j=0; j < 20; ++j) {
- for (i=0; i < 78; ++i)
- putchar(" .:ioVM@"[screen[j][i]>>5]);
- putchar('\n');
- }
-
- return 0;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-////
-//// INTEGRATION WITH YOUR CODEBASE
-////
-//// The following sections allow you to supply alternate definitions
-//// of C library functions used by stb_truetype, e.g. if you don't
-//// link with the C runtime library.
-
-#ifdef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
- // #define your own (u)stbtt_int8/16/32 before including to override this
- #ifndef stbtt_uint8
- typedef unsigned char stbtt_uint8;
- typedef signed char stbtt_int8;
- typedef unsigned short stbtt_uint16;
- typedef signed short stbtt_int16;
- typedef unsigned int stbtt_uint32;
- typedef signed int stbtt_int32;
- #endif
-
- typedef char stbtt__check_size32[sizeof(stbtt_int32)==4 ? 1 : -1];
- typedef char stbtt__check_size16[sizeof(stbtt_int16)==2 ? 1 : -1];
-
- // e.g. #define your own STBTT_ifloor/STBTT_iceil() to avoid math.h
- #ifndef STBTT_ifloor
- #include <math.h>
- #define STBTT_ifloor(x) ((int) floor(x))
- #define STBTT_iceil(x) ((int) ceil(x))
- #endif
-
- #ifndef STBTT_sqrt
- #include <math.h>
- #define STBTT_sqrt(x) sqrt(x)
- #define STBTT_pow(x,y) pow(x,y)
- #endif
-
- #ifndef STBTT_fmod
- #include <math.h>
- #define STBTT_fmod(x,y) fmod(x,y)
- #endif
-
- #ifndef STBTT_cos
- #include <math.h>
- #define STBTT_cos(x) cos(x)
- #define STBTT_acos(x) acos(x)
- #endif
-
- #ifndef STBTT_fabs
- #include <math.h>
- #define STBTT_fabs(x) fabs(x)
- #endif
-
- // #define your own functions "STBTT_malloc" / "STBTT_free" to avoid malloc.h
- #ifndef STBTT_malloc
- #include <stdlib.h>
- #define STBTT_malloc(x,u) ((void)(u),malloc(x))
- #define STBTT_free(x,u) ((void)(u),free(x))
- #endif
-
- #ifndef STBTT_assert
- #include <assert.h>
- #define STBTT_assert(x) assert(x)
- #endif
-
- #ifndef STBTT_strlen
- #include <string.h>
- #define STBTT_strlen(x) strlen(x)
- #endif
-
- #ifndef STBTT_memcpy
- #include <string.h>
- #define STBTT_memcpy memcpy
- #define STBTT_memset memset
- #endif
-#endif
-
-///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-////
-//// INTERFACE
-////
-////
-
-#ifndef __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
-#define __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
-
-#ifdef STBTT_STATIC
-#define STBTT_DEF static
-#else
-#define STBTT_DEF extern
-#endif
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-extern "C" {
-#endif
-
-// private structure
-typedef struct
-{
- unsigned char *data;
- int cursor;
- int size;
-} stbtt__buf;
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// TEXTURE BAKING API
-//
-// If you use this API, you only have to call two functions ever.
-//
-
-typedef struct
-{
- unsigned short x0,y0,x1,y1; // coordinates of bbox in bitmap
- float xoff,yoff,xadvance;
-} stbtt_bakedchar;
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(const unsigned char *data, int offset, // font location (use offset=0 for plain .ttf)
- float pixel_height, // height of font in pixels
- unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, // bitmap to be filled in
- int first_char, int num_chars, // characters to bake
- stbtt_bakedchar *chardata); // you allocate this, it's num_chars long
-// if return is positive, the first unused row of the bitmap
-// if return is negative, returns the negative of the number of characters that fit
-// if return is 0, no characters fit and no rows were used
-// This uses a very crappy packing.
-
-typedef struct
-{
- float x0,y0,s0,t0; // top-left
- float x1,y1,s1,t1; // bottom-right
-} stbtt_aligned_quad;
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetBakedQuad(const stbtt_bakedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, // same data as above
- int char_index, // character to display
- float *xpos, float *ypos, // pointers to current position in screen pixel space
- stbtt_aligned_quad *q, // output: quad to draw
- int opengl_fillrule); // true if opengl fill rule; false if DX9 or earlier
-// Call GetBakedQuad with char_index = 'character - first_char', and it
-// creates the quad you need to draw and advances the current position.
-//
-// The coordinate system used assumes y increases downwards.
-//
-// Characters will extend both above and below the current position;
-// see discussion of "BASELINE" above.
-//
-// It's inefficient; you might want to c&p it and optimize it.
-
-
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// NEW TEXTURE BAKING API
-//
-// This provides options for packing multiple fonts into one atlas, not
-// perfectly but better than nothing.
-
-typedef struct
-{
- unsigned short x0,y0,x1,y1; // coordinates of bbox in bitmap
- float xoff,yoff,xadvance;
- float xoff2,yoff2;
-} stbtt_packedchar;
-
-typedef struct stbtt_pack_context stbtt_pack_context;
-typedef struct stbtt_fontinfo stbtt_fontinfo;
-#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION
-typedef struct stbrp_rect stbrp_rect;
-#endif
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackBegin(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned char *pixels, int width, int height, int stride_in_bytes, int padding, void *alloc_context);
-// Initializes a packing context stored in the passed-in stbtt_pack_context.
-// Future calls using this context will pack characters into the bitmap passed
-// in here: a 1-channel bitmap that is width * height. stride_in_bytes is
-// the distance from one row to the next (or 0 to mean they are packed tightly
-// together). "padding" is the amount of padding to leave between each
-// character (normally you want '1' for bitmaps you'll use as textures with
-// bilinear filtering).
-//
-// Returns 0 on failure, 1 on success.
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackEnd (stbtt_pack_context *spc);
-// Cleans up the packing context and frees all memory.
-
-#define STBTT_POINT_SIZE(x) (-(x))
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRange(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, float font_size,
- int first_unicode_char_in_range, int num_chars_in_range, stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range);
-// Creates character bitmaps from the font_index'th font found in fontdata (use
-// font_index=0 if you don't know what that is). It creates num_chars_in_range
-// bitmaps for characters with unicode values starting at first_unicode_char_in_range
-// and increasing. Data for how to render them is stored in chardata_for_range;
-// pass these to stbtt_GetPackedQuad to get back renderable quads.
-//
-// font_size is the full height of the character from ascender to descender,
-// as computed by stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight. To use a point size as computed
-// by stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels, wrap the point size in STBTT_POINT_SIZE()
-// and pass that result as 'font_size':
-// ..., 20 , ... // font max minus min y is 20 pixels tall
-// ..., STBTT_POINT_SIZE(20), ... // 'M' is 20 pixels tall
-
-typedef struct
-{
- float font_size;
- int first_unicode_codepoint_in_range; // if non-zero, then the chars are continuous, and this is the first codepoint
- int *array_of_unicode_codepoints; // if non-zero, then this is an array of unicode codepoints
- int num_chars;
- stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range; // output
- unsigned char h_oversample, v_oversample; // don't set these, they're used internally
-} stbtt_pack_range;
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRanges(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges);
-// Creates character bitmaps from multiple ranges of characters stored in
-// ranges. This will usually create a better-packed bitmap than multiple
-// calls to stbtt_PackFontRange. Note that you can call this multiple
-// times within a single PackBegin/PackEnd.
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetOversampling(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned int h_oversample, unsigned int v_oversample);
-// Oversampling a font increases the quality by allowing higher-quality subpixel
-// positioning, and is especially valuable at smaller text sizes.
-//
-// This function sets the amount of oversampling for all following calls to
-// stbtt_PackFontRange(s) or stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects for a given
-// pack context. The default (no oversampling) is achieved by h_oversample=1
-// and v_oversample=1. The total number of pixels required is
-// h_oversample*v_oversample larger than the default; for example, 2x2
-// oversampling requires 4x the storage of 1x1. For best results, render
-// oversampled textures with bilinear filtering. Look at the readme in
-// stb/tests/oversample for information about oversampled fonts
-//
-// To use with PackFontRangesGather etc., you must set it before calls
-// call to PackFontRangesGatherRects.
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetPackedQuad(const stbtt_packedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, // same data as above
- int char_index, // character to display
- float *xpos, float *ypos, // pointers to current position in screen pixel space
- stbtt_aligned_quad *q, // output: quad to draw
- int align_to_integer);
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects);
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects);
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects);
-// Calling these functions in sequence is roughly equivalent to calling
-// stbtt_PackFontRanges(). If you more control over the packing of multiple
-// fonts, or if you want to pack custom data into a font texture, take a look
-// at the source to of stbtt_PackFontRanges() and create a custom version
-// using these functions, e.g. call GatherRects multiple times,
-// building up a single array of rects, then call PackRects once,
-// then call RenderIntoRects repeatedly. This may result in a
-// better packing than calling PackFontRanges multiple times
-// (or it may not).
-
-// this is an opaque structure that you shouldn't mess with which holds
-// all the context needed from PackBegin to PackEnd.
-struct stbtt_pack_context {
- void *user_allocator_context;
- void *pack_info;
- int width;
- int height;
- int stride_in_bytes;
- int padding;
- unsigned int h_oversample, v_oversample;
- unsigned char *pixels;
- void *nodes;
-};
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// FONT LOADING
-//
-//
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts(const unsigned char *data);
-// This function will determine the number of fonts in a font file. TrueType
-// collection (.ttc) files may contain multiple fonts, while TrueType font
-// (.ttf) files only contain one font. The number of fonts can be used for
-// indexing with the previous function where the index is between zero and one
-// less than the total fonts. If an error occurs, -1 is returned.
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(const unsigned char *data, int index);
-// Each .ttf/.ttc file may have more than one font. Each font has a sequential
-// index number starting from 0. Call this function to get the font offset for
-// a given index; it returns -1 if the index is out of range. A regular .ttf
-// file will only define one font and it always be at offset 0, so it will
-// return '0' for index 0, and -1 for all other indices.
-
-// The following structure is defined publically so you can declare one on
-// the stack or as a global or etc, but you should treat it as opaque.
-struct stbtt_fontinfo
-{
- void * userdata;
- unsigned char * data; // pointer to .ttf file
- int fontstart; // offset of start of font
-
- int numGlyphs; // number of glyphs, needed for range checking
-
- int loca,head,glyf,hhea,hmtx,kern,gpos; // table locations as offset from start of .ttf
- int index_map; // a cmap mapping for our chosen character encoding
- int indexToLocFormat; // format needed to map from glyph index to glyph
-
- stbtt__buf cff; // cff font data
- stbtt__buf charstrings; // the charstring index
- stbtt__buf gsubrs; // global charstring subroutines index
- stbtt__buf subrs; // private charstring subroutines index
- stbtt__buf fontdicts; // array of font dicts
- stbtt__buf fdselect; // map from glyph to fontdict
-};
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_InitFont(stbtt_fontinfo *info, const unsigned char *data, int offset);
-// Given an offset into the file that defines a font, this function builds
-// the necessary cached info for the rest of the system. You must allocate
-// the stbtt_fontinfo yourself, and stbtt_InitFont will fill it out. You don't
-// need to do anything special to free it, because the contents are pure
-// value data with no additional data structures. Returns 0 on failure.
-
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// CHARACTER TO GLYPH-INDEX CONVERSIOn
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint);
-// If you're going to perform multiple operations on the same character
-// and you want a speed-up, call this function with the character you're
-// going to process, then use glyph-based functions instead of the
-// codepoint-based functions.
-
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// CHARACTER PROPERTIES
-//
-
-STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels);
-// computes a scale factor to produce a font whose "height" is 'pixels' tall.
-// Height is measured as the distance from the highest ascender to the lowest
-// descender; in other words, it's equivalent to calling stbtt_GetFontVMetrics
-// and computing:
-// scale = pixels / (ascent - descent)
-// so if you prefer to measure height by the ascent only, use a similar calculation.
-
-STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels);
-// computes a scale factor to produce a font whose EM size is mapped to
-// 'pixels' tall. This is probably what traditional APIs compute, but
-// I'm not positive.
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *ascent, int *descent, int *lineGap);
-// ascent is the coordinate above the baseline the font extends; descent
-// is the coordinate below the baseline the font extends (i.e. it is typically negative)
-// lineGap is the spacing between one row's descent and the next row's ascent...
-// so you should advance the vertical position by "*ascent - *descent + *lineGap"
-// these are expressed in unscaled coordinates, so you must multiply by
-// the scale factor for a given size
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *typoAscent, int *typoDescent, int *typoLineGap);
-// analogous to GetFontVMetrics, but returns the "typographic" values from the OS/2
-// table (specific to MS/Windows TTF files).
-//
-// Returns 1 on success (table present), 0 on failure.
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
-// the bounding box around all possible characters
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing);
-// leftSideBearing is the offset from the current horizontal position to the left edge of the character
-// advanceWidth is the offset from the current horizontal position to the next horizontal position
-// these are expressed in unscaled coordinates
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int ch1, int ch2);
-// an additional amount to add to the 'advance' value between ch1 and ch2
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
-// Gets the bounding box of the visible part of the glyph, in unscaled coordinates
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing);
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2);
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
-// as above, but takes one or more glyph indices for greater efficiency
-
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// GLYPH SHAPES (you probably don't need these, but they have to go before
-// the bitmaps for C declaration-order reasons)
-//
-
-#ifndef STBTT_vmove // you can predefine these to use different values (but why?)
- enum {
- STBTT_vmove=1,
- STBTT_vline,
- STBTT_vcurve,
- STBTT_vcubic
- };
-#endif
-
-#ifndef stbtt_vertex // you can predefine this to use different values
- // (we share this with other code at RAD)
- #define stbtt_vertex_type short // can't use stbtt_int16 because that's not visible in the header file
- typedef struct
- {
- stbtt_vertex_type x,y,cx,cy,cx1,cy1;
- unsigned char type,padding;
- } stbtt_vertex;
-#endif
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index);
-// returns non-zero if nothing is drawn for this glyph
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, stbtt_vertex **vertices);
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **vertices);
-// returns # of vertices and fills *vertices with the pointer to them
-// these are expressed in "unscaled" coordinates
-//
-// The shape is a series of countours. Each one starts with
-// a STBTT_moveto, then consists of a series of mixed
-// STBTT_lineto and STBTT_curveto segments. A lineto
-// draws a line from previous endpoint to its x,y; a curveto
-// draws a quadratic bezier from previous endpoint to
-// its x,y, using cx,cy as the bezier control point.
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_vertex *vertices);
-// frees the data allocated above
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// BITMAP RENDERING
-//
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeBitmap(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata);
-// frees the bitmap allocated below
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
-// allocates a large-enough single-channel 8bpp bitmap and renders the
-// specified character/glyph at the specified scale into it, with
-// antialiasing. 0 is no coverage (transparent), 255 is fully covered (opaque).
-// *width & *height are filled out with the width & height of the bitmap,
-// which is stored left-to-right, top-to-bottom.
-//
-// xoff/yoff are the offset it pixel space from the glyph origin to the top-left of the bitmap
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
-// the same as stbtt_GetCodepoitnBitmap, but you can specify a subpixel
-// shift for the character
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint);
-// the same as stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap, but you pass in storage for the bitmap
-// in the form of 'output', with row spacing of 'out_stride' bytes. the bitmap
-// is clipped to out_w/out_h bytes. Call stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox to get the
-// width and height and positioning info for it first.
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint);
-// same as stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap, but you can specify a subpixel
-// shift for the character
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int codepoint);
-// same as stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel, but prefiltering
-// is performed (see stbtt_PackSetOversampling)
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
-// get the bbox of the bitmap centered around the glyph origin; so the
-// bitmap width is ix1-ix0, height is iy1-iy0, and location to place
-// the bitmap top left is (leftSideBearing*scale,iy0).
-// (Note that the bitmap uses y-increases-down, but the shape uses
-// y-increases-up, so CodepointBitmapBox and CodepointBox are inverted.)
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
-// same as stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox, but you can specify a subpixel
-// shift for the character
-
-// the following functions are equivalent to the above functions, but operate
-// on glyph indices instead of Unicode codepoints (for efficiency)
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph);
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph);
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int glyph);
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y,float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
-
-
-// @TODO: don't expose this structure
-typedef struct
-{
- int w,h,stride;
- unsigned char *pixels;
-} stbtt__bitmap;
-
-// rasterize a shape with quadratic beziers into a bitmap
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_Rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, // 1-channel bitmap to draw into
- float flatness_in_pixels, // allowable error of curve in pixels
- stbtt_vertex *vertices, // array of vertices defining shape
- int num_verts, // number of vertices in above array
- float scale_x, float scale_y, // scale applied to input vertices
- float shift_x, float shift_y, // translation applied to input vertices
- int x_off, int y_off, // another translation applied to input
- int invert, // if non-zero, vertically flip shape
- void *userdata); // context for to STBTT_MALLOC
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// Signed Distance Function (or Field) rendering
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeSDF(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata);
-// frees the SDF bitmap allocated below
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int glyph, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetCodepointSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int codepoint, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
-// These functions compute a discretized SDF field for a single character, suitable for storing
-// in a single-channel texture, sampling with bilinear filtering, and testing against
-// larger than some threshhold to produce scalable fonts.
-// info -- the font
-// scale -- controls the size of the resulting SDF bitmap, same as it would be creating a regular bitmap
-// glyph/codepoint -- the character to generate the SDF for
-// padding -- extra "pixels" around the character which are filled with the distance to the character (not 0),
-// which allows effects like bit outlines
-// onedge_value -- value 0-255 to test the SDF against to reconstruct the character (i.e. the isocontour of the character)
-// pixel_dist_scale -- what value the SDF should increase by when moving one SDF "pixel" away from the edge (on the 0..255 scale)
-// if positive, > onedge_value is inside; if negative, < onedge_value is inside
-// width,height -- output height & width of the SDF bitmap (including padding)
-// xoff,yoff -- output origin of the character
-// return value -- a 2D array of bytes 0..255, width*height in size
-//
-// pixel_dist_scale & onedge_value are a scale & bias that allows you to make
-// optimal use of the limited 0..255 for your application, trading off precision
-// and special effects. SDF values outside the range 0..255 are clamped to 0..255.
-//
-// Example:
-// scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(22)
-// padding = 5
-// onedge_value = 180
-// pixel_dist_scale = 180/5.0 = 36.0
-//
-// This will create an SDF bitmap in which the character is about 22 pixels
-// high but the whole bitmap is about 22+5+5=32 pixels high. To produce a filled
-// shape, sample the SDF at each pixel and fill the pixel if the SDF value
-// is greater than or equal to 180/255. (You'll actually want to antialias,
-// which is beyond the scope of this example.) Additionally, you can compute
-// offset outlines (e.g. to stroke the character border inside & outside,
-// or only outside). For example, to fill outside the character up to 3 SDF
-// pixels, you would compare against (180-36.0*3)/255 = 72/255. The above
-// choice of variables maps a range from 5 pixels outside the shape to
-// 2 pixels inside the shape to 0..255; this is intended primarily for apply
-// outside effects only (the interior range is needed to allow proper
-// antialiasing of the font at *smaller* sizes)
-//
-// The function computes the SDF analytically at each SDF pixel, not by e.g.
-// building a higher-res bitmap and approximating it. In theory the quality
-// should be as high as possible for an SDF of this size & representation, but
-// unclear if this is true in practice (perhaps building a higher-res bitmap
-// and computing from that can allow drop-out prevention).
-//
-// The algorithm has not been optimized at all, so expect it to be slow
-// if computing lots of characters or very large sizes.
-
-
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// Finding the right font...
-//
-// You should really just solve this offline, keep your own tables
-// of what font is what, and don't try to get it out of the .ttf file.
-// That's because getting it out of the .ttf file is really hard, because
-// the names in the file can appear in many possible encodings, in many
-// possible languages, and e.g. if you need a case-insensitive comparison,
-// the details of that depend on the encoding & language in a complex way
-// (actually underspecified in truetype, but also gigantic).
-//
-// But you can use the provided functions in two possible ways:
-// stbtt_FindMatchingFont() will use *case-sensitive* comparisons on
-// unicode-encoded names to try to find the font you want;
-// you can run this before calling stbtt_InitFont()
-//
-// stbtt_GetFontNameString() lets you get any of the various strings
-// from the file yourself and do your own comparisons on them.
-// You have to have called stbtt_InitFont() first.
-
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindMatchingFont(const unsigned char *fontdata, const char *name, int flags);
-// returns the offset (not index) of the font that matches, or -1 if none
-// if you use STBTT_MACSTYLE_DONTCARE, use a font name like "Arial Bold".
-// if you use any other flag, use a font name like "Arial"; this checks
-// the 'macStyle' header field; i don't know if fonts set this consistently
-#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_DONTCARE 0
-#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_BOLD 1
-#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_ITALIC 2
-#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_UNDERSCORE 4
-#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_NONE 8 // <= not same as 0, this makes us check the bitfield is 0
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian(const char *s1, int len1, const char *s2, int len2);
-// returns 1/0 whether the first string interpreted as utf8 is identical to
-// the second string interpreted as big-endian utf16... useful for strings from next func
-
-STBTT_DEF const char *stbtt_GetFontNameString(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int *length, int platformID, int encodingID, int languageID, int nameID);
-// returns the string (which may be big-endian double byte, e.g. for unicode)
-// and puts the length in bytes in *length.
-//
-// some of the values for the IDs are below; for more see the truetype spec:
-// http://developer.apple.com/textfonts/TTRefMan/RM06/Chap6name.html
-// http://www.microsoft.com/typography/otspec/name.htm
-
-enum { // platformID
- STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE =0,
- STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC =1,
- STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_ISO =2,
- STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT =3
-};
-
-enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE
- STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_1_0 =0,
- STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_1_1 =1,
- STBTT_UNICODE_EID_ISO_10646 =2,
- STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_2_0_BMP=3,
- STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_2_0_FULL=4
-};
-
-enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT
- STBTT_MS_EID_SYMBOL =0,
- STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_BMP =1,
- STBTT_MS_EID_SHIFTJIS =2,
- STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_FULL =10
-};
-
-enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC; same as Script Manager codes
- STBTT_MAC_EID_ROMAN =0, STBTT_MAC_EID_ARABIC =4,
- STBTT_MAC_EID_JAPANESE =1, STBTT_MAC_EID_HEBREW =5,
- STBTT_MAC_EID_CHINESE_TRAD =2, STBTT_MAC_EID_GREEK =6,
- STBTT_MAC_EID_KOREAN =3, STBTT_MAC_EID_RUSSIAN =7
-};
-
-enum { // languageID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT; same as LCID...
- // problematic because there are e.g. 16 english LCIDs and 16 arabic LCIDs
- STBTT_MS_LANG_ENGLISH =0x0409, STBTT_MS_LANG_ITALIAN =0x0410,
- STBTT_MS_LANG_CHINESE =0x0804, STBTT_MS_LANG_JAPANESE =0x0411,
- STBTT_MS_LANG_DUTCH =0x0413, STBTT_MS_LANG_KOREAN =0x0412,
- STBTT_MS_LANG_FRENCH =0x040c, STBTT_MS_LANG_RUSSIAN =0x0419,
- STBTT_MS_LANG_GERMAN =0x0407, STBTT_MS_LANG_SPANISH =0x0409,
- STBTT_MS_LANG_HEBREW =0x040d, STBTT_MS_LANG_SWEDISH =0x041D
-};
-
-enum { // languageID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC
- STBTT_MAC_LANG_ENGLISH =0 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_JAPANESE =11,
- STBTT_MAC_LANG_ARABIC =12, STBTT_MAC_LANG_KOREAN =23,
- STBTT_MAC_LANG_DUTCH =4 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_RUSSIAN =32,
- STBTT_MAC_LANG_FRENCH =1 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_SPANISH =6 ,
- STBTT_MAC_LANG_GERMAN =2 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_SWEDISH =5 ,
- STBTT_MAC_LANG_HEBREW =10, STBTT_MAC_LANG_CHINESE_SIMPLIFIED =33,
- STBTT_MAC_LANG_ITALIAN =3 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_CHINESE_TRAD =19
-};
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif // __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
-
-///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-////
-//// IMPLEMENTATION
-////
-////
-
-#ifdef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
-
-#ifndef STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE
-#define STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE 8
-#endif
-
-#if STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE > 255
-#error "STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE cannot be > 255"
-#endif
-
-typedef int stbtt__test_oversample_pow2[(STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE & (STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE-1)) == 0 ? 1 : -1];
-
-#ifndef STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION
-#define STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION 2
-#endif
-
-#ifdef _MSC_VER
-#define STBTT__NOTUSED(v) (void)(v)
-#else
-#define STBTT__NOTUSED(v) (void)sizeof(v)
-#endif
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// stbtt__buf helpers to parse data from file
-//
-
-static stbtt_uint8 stbtt__buf_get8(stbtt__buf *b)
-{
- if (b->cursor >= b->size)
- return 0;
- return b->data[b->cursor++];
-}
-
-static stbtt_uint8 stbtt__buf_peek8(stbtt__buf *b)
-{
- if (b->cursor >= b->size)
- return 0;
- return b->data[b->cursor];
-}
-
-static void stbtt__buf_seek(stbtt__buf *b, int o)
-{
- STBTT_assert(!(o > b->size || o < 0));
- b->cursor = (o > b->size || o < 0) ? b->size : o;
-}
-
-static void stbtt__buf_skip(stbtt__buf *b, int o)
-{
- stbtt__buf_seek(b, b->cursor + o);
-}
-
-static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__buf_get(stbtt__buf *b, int n)
-{
- stbtt_uint32 v = 0;
- int i;
- STBTT_assert(n >= 1 && n <= 4);
- for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
- v = (v << 8) | stbtt__buf_get8(b);
- return v;
-}
-
-static stbtt__buf stbtt__new_buf(const void *p, size_t size)
-{
- stbtt__buf r;
- STBTT_assert(size < 0x40000000);
- r.data = (stbtt_uint8*) p;
- r.size = (int) size;
- r.cursor = 0;
- return r;
-}
-
-#define stbtt__buf_get16(b) stbtt__buf_get((b), 2)
-#define stbtt__buf_get32(b) stbtt__buf_get((b), 4)
-
-static stbtt__buf stbtt__buf_range(const stbtt__buf *b, int o, int s)
-{
- stbtt__buf r = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
- if (o < 0 || s < 0 || o > b->size || s > b->size - o) return r;
- r.data = b->data + o;
- r.size = s;
- return r;
-}
-
-static stbtt__buf stbtt__cff_get_index(stbtt__buf *b)
-{
- int count, start, offsize;
- start = b->cursor;
- count = stbtt__buf_get16(b);
- if (count) {
- offsize = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
- STBTT_assert(offsize >= 1 && offsize <= 4);
- stbtt__buf_skip(b, offsize * count);
- stbtt__buf_skip(b, stbtt__buf_get(b, offsize) - 1);
- }
- return stbtt__buf_range(b, start, b->cursor - start);
-}
-
-static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__cff_int(stbtt__buf *b)
-{
- int b0 = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
- if (b0 >= 32 && b0 <= 246) return b0 - 139;
- else if (b0 >= 247 && b0 <= 250) return (b0 - 247)*256 + stbtt__buf_get8(b) + 108;
- else if (b0 >= 251 && b0 <= 254) return -(b0 - 251)*256 - stbtt__buf_get8(b) - 108;
- else if (b0 == 28) return stbtt__buf_get16(b);
- else if (b0 == 29) return stbtt__buf_get32(b);
- STBTT_assert(0);
- return 0;
-}
-
-static void stbtt__cff_skip_operand(stbtt__buf *b) {
- int v, b0 = stbtt__buf_peek8(b);
- STBTT_assert(b0 >= 28);
- if (b0 == 30) {
- stbtt__buf_skip(b, 1);
- while (b->cursor < b->size) {
- v = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
- if ((v & 0xF) == 0xF || (v >> 4) == 0xF)
- break;
- }
- } else {
- stbtt__cff_int(b);
- }
-}
-
-static stbtt__buf stbtt__dict_get(stbtt__buf *b, int key)
-{
- stbtt__buf_seek(b, 0);
- while (b->cursor < b->size) {
- int start = b->cursor, end, op;
- while (stbtt__buf_peek8(b) >= 28)
- stbtt__cff_skip_operand(b);
- end = b->cursor;
- op = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
- if (op == 12) op = stbtt__buf_get8(b) | 0x100;
- if (op == key) return stbtt__buf_range(b, start, end-start);
- }
- return stbtt__buf_range(b, 0, 0);
-}
-
-static void stbtt__dict_get_ints(stbtt__buf *b, int key, int outcount, stbtt_uint32 *out)
-{
- int i;
- stbtt__buf operands = stbtt__dict_get(b, key);
- for (i = 0; i < outcount && operands.cursor < operands.size; i++)
- out[i] = stbtt__cff_int(&operands);
-}
-
-static int stbtt__cff_index_count(stbtt__buf *b)
-{
- stbtt__buf_seek(b, 0);
- return stbtt__buf_get16(b);
-}
-
-static stbtt__buf stbtt__cff_index_get(stbtt__buf b, int i)
-{
- int count, offsize, start, end;
- stbtt__buf_seek(&b, 0);
- count = stbtt__buf_get16(&b);
- offsize = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
- STBTT_assert(i >= 0 && i < count);
- STBTT_assert(offsize >= 1 && offsize <= 4);
- stbtt__buf_skip(&b, i*offsize);
- start = stbtt__buf_get(&b, offsize);
- end = stbtt__buf_get(&b, offsize);
- return stbtt__buf_range(&b, 2+(count+1)*offsize+start, end - start);
-}
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// accessors to parse data from file
-//
-
-// on platforms that don't allow misaligned reads, if we want to allow
-// truetype fonts that aren't padded to alignment, define ALLOW_UNALIGNED_TRUETYPE
-
-#define ttBYTE(p) (* (stbtt_uint8 *) (p))
-#define ttCHAR(p) (* (stbtt_int8 *) (p))
-#define ttFixed(p) ttLONG(p)
-
-static stbtt_uint16 ttUSHORT(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return p[0]*256 + p[1]; }
-static stbtt_int16 ttSHORT(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return p[0]*256 + p[1]; }
-static stbtt_uint32 ttULONG(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return (p[0]<<24) + (p[1]<<16) + (p[2]<<8) + p[3]; }
-static stbtt_int32 ttLONG(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return (p[0]<<24) + (p[1]<<16) + (p[2]<<8) + p[3]; }
-
-#define stbtt_tag4(p,c0,c1,c2,c3) ((p)[0] == (c0) && (p)[1] == (c1) && (p)[2] == (c2) && (p)[3] == (c3))
-#define stbtt_tag(p,str) stbtt_tag4(p,str[0],str[1],str[2],str[3])
-
-static int stbtt__isfont(stbtt_uint8 *font)
-{
- // check the version number
- if (stbtt_tag4(font, '1',0,0,0)) return 1; // TrueType 1
- if (stbtt_tag(font, "typ1")) return 1; // TrueType with type 1 font -- we don't support this!
- if (stbtt_tag(font, "OTTO")) return 1; // OpenType with CFF
- if (stbtt_tag4(font, 0,1,0,0)) return 1; // OpenType 1.0
- if (stbtt_tag(font, "true")) return 1; // Apple specification for TrueType fonts
- return 0;
-}
-
-// @OPTIMIZE: binary search
-static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__find_table(stbtt_uint8 *data, stbtt_uint32 fontstart, const char *tag)
-{
- stbtt_int32 num_tables = ttUSHORT(data+fontstart+4);
- stbtt_uint32 tabledir = fontstart + 12;
- stbtt_int32 i;
- for (i=0; i < num_tables; ++i) {
- stbtt_uint32 loc = tabledir + 16*i;
- if (stbtt_tag(data+loc+0, tag))
- return ttULONG(data+loc+8);
- }
- return 0;
-}
-
-static int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex_internal(unsigned char *font_collection, int index)
-{
- // if it's just a font, there's only one valid index
- if (stbtt__isfont(font_collection))
- return index == 0 ? 0 : -1;
-
- // check if it's a TTC
- if (stbtt_tag(font_collection, "ttcf")) {
- // version 1?
- if (ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00010000 || ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00020000) {
- stbtt_int32 n = ttLONG(font_collection+8);
- if (index >= n)
- return -1;
- return ttULONG(font_collection+12+index*4);
- }
- }
- return -1;
-}
-
-static int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts_internal(unsigned char *font_collection)
-{
- // if it's just a font, there's only one valid font
- if (stbtt__isfont(font_collection))
- return 1;
-
- // check if it's a TTC
- if (stbtt_tag(font_collection, "ttcf")) {
- // version 1?
- if (ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00010000 || ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00020000) {
- return ttLONG(font_collection+8);
- }
- }
- return 0;
-}
-
-static stbtt__buf stbtt__get_subrs(stbtt__buf cff, stbtt__buf fontdict)
-{
- stbtt_uint32 subrsoff = 0, private_loc[2] = { 0, 0 };
- stbtt__buf pdict;
- stbtt__dict_get_ints(&fontdict, 18, 2, private_loc);
- if (!private_loc[1] || !private_loc[0]) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
- pdict = stbtt__buf_range(&cff, private_loc[1], private_loc[0]);
- stbtt__dict_get_ints(&pdict, 19, 1, &subrsoff);
- if (!subrsoff) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
- stbtt__buf_seek(&cff, private_loc[1]+subrsoff);
- return stbtt__cff_get_index(&cff);
-}
-
-static int stbtt_InitFont_internal(stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *data, int fontstart)
-{
- stbtt_uint32 cmap, t;
- stbtt_int32 i,numTables;
-
- info->data = data;
- info->fontstart = fontstart;
- info->cff = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
-
- cmap = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "cmap"); // required
- info->loca = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "loca"); // required
- info->head = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "head"); // required
- info->glyf = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "glyf"); // required
- info->hhea = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "hhea"); // required
- info->hmtx = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "hmtx"); // required
- info->kern = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "kern"); // not required
- info->gpos = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "GPOS"); // not required
-
- if (!cmap || !info->head || !info->hhea || !info->hmtx)
- return 0;
- if (info->glyf) {
- // required for truetype
- if (!info->loca) return 0;
- } else {
- // initialization for CFF / Type2 fonts (OTF)
- stbtt__buf b, topdict, topdictidx;
- stbtt_uint32 cstype = 2, charstrings = 0, fdarrayoff = 0, fdselectoff = 0;
- stbtt_uint32 cff;
-
- cff = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "CFF ");
- if (!cff) return 0;
-
- info->fontdicts = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
- info->fdselect = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
-
- // @TODO this should use size from table (not 512MB)
- info->cff = stbtt__new_buf(data+cff, 512*1024*1024);
- b = info->cff;
-
- // read the header
- stbtt__buf_skip(&b, 2);
- stbtt__buf_seek(&b, stbtt__buf_get8(&b)); // hdrsize
-
- // @TODO the name INDEX could list multiple fonts,
- // but we just use the first one.
- stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); // name INDEX
- topdictidx = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
- topdict = stbtt__cff_index_get(topdictidx, 0);
- stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); // string INDEX
- info->gsubrs = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
-
- stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 17, 1, &charstrings);
- stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 6, 1, &cstype);
- stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 36, 1, &fdarrayoff);
- stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 37, 1, &fdselectoff);
- info->subrs = stbtt__get_subrs(b, topdict);
-
- // we only support Type 2 charstrings
- if (cstype != 2) return 0;
- if (charstrings == 0) return 0;
-
- if (fdarrayoff) {
- // looks like a CID font
- if (!fdselectoff) return 0;
- stbtt__buf_seek(&b, fdarrayoff);
- info->fontdicts = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
- info->fdselect = stbtt__buf_range(&b, fdselectoff, b.size-fdselectoff);
- }
-
- stbtt__buf_seek(&b, charstrings);
- info->charstrings = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
- }
-
- t = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "maxp");
- if (t)
- info->numGlyphs = ttUSHORT(data+t+4);
- else
- info->numGlyphs = 0xffff;
-
- // find a cmap encoding table we understand *now* to avoid searching
- // later. (todo: could make this installable)
- // the same regardless of glyph.
- numTables = ttUSHORT(data + cmap + 2);
- info->index_map = 0;
- for (i=0; i < numTables; ++i) {
- stbtt_uint32 encoding_record = cmap + 4 + 8 * i;
- // find an encoding we understand:
- switch(ttUSHORT(data+encoding_record)) {
- case STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT:
- switch (ttUSHORT(data+encoding_record+2)) {
- case STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_BMP:
- case STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_FULL:
- // MS/Unicode
- info->index_map = cmap + ttULONG(data+encoding_record+4);
- break;
- }
- break;
- case STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE:
- // Mac/iOS has these
- // all the encodingIDs are unicode, so we don't bother to check it
- info->index_map = cmap + ttULONG(data+encoding_record+4);
- break;
- }
- }
- if (info->index_map == 0)
- return 0;
-
- info->indexToLocFormat = ttUSHORT(data+info->head + 50);
- return 1;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint)
-{
- stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data;
- stbtt_uint32 index_map = info->index_map;
-
- stbtt_uint16 format = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 0);
- if (format == 0) { // apple byte encoding
- stbtt_int32 bytes = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 2);
- if (unicode_codepoint < bytes-6)
- return ttBYTE(data + index_map + 6 + unicode_codepoint);
- return 0;
- } else if (format == 6) {
- stbtt_uint32 first = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 6);
- stbtt_uint32 count = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 8);
- if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint >= first && (stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint < first+count)
- return ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 10 + (unicode_codepoint - first)*2);
- return 0;
- } else if (format == 2) {
- STBTT_assert(0); // @TODO: high-byte mapping for japanese/chinese/korean
- return 0;
- } else if (format == 4) { // standard mapping for windows fonts: binary search collection of ranges
- stbtt_uint16 segcount = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+6) >> 1;
- stbtt_uint16 searchRange = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+8) >> 1;
- stbtt_uint16 entrySelector = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+10);
- stbtt_uint16 rangeShift = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+12) >> 1;
-
- // do a binary search of the segments
- stbtt_uint32 endCount = index_map + 14;
- stbtt_uint32 search = endCount;
-
- if (unicode_codepoint > 0xffff)
- return 0;
-
- // they lie from endCount .. endCount + segCount
- // but searchRange is the nearest power of two, so...
- if (unicode_codepoint >= ttUSHORT(data + search + rangeShift*2))
- search += rangeShift*2;
-
- // now decrement to bias correctly to find smallest
- search -= 2;
- while (entrySelector) {
- stbtt_uint16 end;
- searchRange >>= 1;
- end = ttUSHORT(data + search + searchRange*2);
- if (unicode_codepoint > end)
- search += searchRange*2;
- --entrySelector;
- }
- search += 2;
-
- {
- stbtt_uint16 offset, start;
- stbtt_uint16 item = (stbtt_uint16) ((search - endCount) >> 1);
-
- STBTT_assert(unicode_codepoint <= ttUSHORT(data + endCount + 2*item));
- start = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*2 + 2 + 2*item);
- if (unicode_codepoint < start)
- return 0;
-
- offset = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*6 + 2 + 2*item);
- if (offset == 0)
- return (stbtt_uint16) (unicode_codepoint + ttSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*4 + 2 + 2*item));
-
- return ttUSHORT(data + offset + (unicode_codepoint-start)*2 + index_map + 14 + segcount*6 + 2 + 2*item);
- }
- } else if (format == 12 || format == 13) {
- stbtt_uint32 ngroups = ttULONG(data+index_map+12);
- stbtt_int32 low,high;
- low = 0; high = (stbtt_int32)ngroups;
- // Binary search the right group.
- while (low < high) {
- stbtt_int32 mid = low + ((high-low) >> 1); // rounds down, so low <= mid < high
- stbtt_uint32 start_char = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12);
- stbtt_uint32 end_char = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12+4);
- if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint < start_char)
- high = mid;
- else if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint > end_char)
- low = mid+1;
- else {
- stbtt_uint32 start_glyph = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12+8);
- if (format == 12)
- return start_glyph + unicode_codepoint-start_char;
- else // format == 13
- return start_glyph;
- }
- }
- return 0; // not found
- }
- // @TODO
- STBTT_assert(0);
- return 0;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, stbtt_vertex **vertices)
-{
- return stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, unicode_codepoint), vertices);
-}
-
-static void stbtt_setvertex(stbtt_vertex *v, stbtt_uint8 type, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy)
-{
- v->type = type;
- v->x = (stbtt_int16) x;
- v->y = (stbtt_int16) y;
- v->cx = (stbtt_int16) cx;
- v->cy = (stbtt_int16) cy;
-}
-
-static int stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
-{
- int g1,g2;
-
- STBTT_assert(!info->cff.size);
-
- if (glyph_index >= info->numGlyphs) return -1; // glyph index out of range
- if (info->indexToLocFormat >= 2) return -1; // unknown index->glyph map format
-
- if (info->indexToLocFormat == 0) {
- g1 = info->glyf + ttUSHORT(info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 2) * 2;
- g2 = info->glyf + ttUSHORT(info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 2 + 2) * 2;
- } else {
- g1 = info->glyf + ttULONG (info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 4);
- g2 = info->glyf + ttULONG (info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 4 + 4);
- }
-
- return g1==g2 ? -1 : g1; // if length is 0, return -1
-}
-
-static int stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
-{
- if (info->cff.size) {
- stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(info, glyph_index, x0, y0, x1, y1);
- } else {
- int g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
- if (g < 0) return 0;
-
- if (x0) *x0 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 2);
- if (y0) *y0 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 4);
- if (x1) *x1 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 6);
- if (y1) *y1 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 8);
- }
- return 1;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
-{
- return stbtt_GetGlyphBox(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), x0,y0,x1,y1);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
-{
- stbtt_int16 numberOfContours;
- int g;
- if (info->cff.size)
- return stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(info, glyph_index, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL) == 0;
- g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
- if (g < 0) return 1;
- numberOfContours = ttSHORT(info->data + g);
- return numberOfContours == 0;
-}
-
-static int stbtt__close_shape(stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_vertices, int was_off, int start_off,
- stbtt_int32 sx, stbtt_int32 sy, stbtt_int32 scx, stbtt_int32 scy, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy)
-{
- if (start_off) {
- if (was_off)
- stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, (cx+scx)>>1, (cy+scy)>>1, cx,cy);
- stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, sx,sy,scx,scy);
- } else {
- if (was_off)
- stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve,sx,sy,cx,cy);
- else
- stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vline,sx,sy,0,0);
- }
- return num_vertices;
-}
-
-static int stbtt__GetGlyphShapeTT(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
-{
- stbtt_int16 numberOfContours;
- stbtt_uint8 *endPtsOfContours;
- stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data;
- stbtt_vertex *vertices=0;
- int num_vertices=0;
- int g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
-
- *pvertices = NULL;
-
- if (g < 0) return 0;
-
- numberOfContours = ttSHORT(data + g);
-
- if (numberOfContours > 0) {
- stbtt_uint8 flags=0,flagcount;
- stbtt_int32 ins, i,j=0,m,n, next_move, was_off=0, off, start_off=0;
- stbtt_int32 x,y,cx,cy,sx,sy, scx,scy;
- stbtt_uint8 *points;
- endPtsOfContours = (data + g + 10);
- ins = ttUSHORT(data + g + 10 + numberOfContours * 2);
- points = data + g + 10 + numberOfContours * 2 + 2 + ins;
-
- n = 1+ttUSHORT(endPtsOfContours + numberOfContours*2-2);
-
- m = n + 2*numberOfContours; // a loose bound on how many vertices we might need
- vertices = (stbtt_vertex *) STBTT_malloc(m * sizeof(vertices[0]), info->userdata);
- if (vertices == 0)
- return 0;
-
- next_move = 0;
- flagcount=0;
-
- // in first pass, we load uninterpreted data into the allocated array
- // above, shifted to the end of the array so we won't overwrite it when
- // we create our final data starting from the front
-
- off = m - n; // starting offset for uninterpreted data, regardless of how m ends up being calculated
-
- // first load flags
-
- for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
- if (flagcount == 0) {
- flags = *points++;
- if (flags & 8)
- flagcount = *points++;
- } else
- --flagcount;
- vertices[off+i].type = flags;
- }
-
- // now load x coordinates
- x=0;
- for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
- flags = vertices[off+i].type;
- if (flags & 2) {
- stbtt_int16 dx = *points++;
- x += (flags & 16) ? dx : -dx; // ???
- } else {
- if (!(flags & 16)) {
- x = x + (stbtt_int16) (points[0]*256 + points[1]);
- points += 2;
- }
- }
- vertices[off+i].x = (stbtt_int16) x;
- }
-
- // now load y coordinates
- y=0;
- for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
- flags = vertices[off+i].type;
- if (flags & 4) {
- stbtt_int16 dy = *points++;
- y += (flags & 32) ? dy : -dy; // ???
- } else {
- if (!(flags & 32)) {
- y = y + (stbtt_int16) (points[0]*256 + points[1]);
- points += 2;
- }
- }
- vertices[off+i].y = (stbtt_int16) y;
- }
-
- // now convert them to our format
- num_vertices=0;
- sx = sy = cx = cy = scx = scy = 0;
- for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
- flags = vertices[off+i].type;
- x = (stbtt_int16) vertices[off+i].x;
- y = (stbtt_int16) vertices[off+i].y;
-
- if (next_move == i) {
- if (i != 0)
- num_vertices = stbtt__close_shape(vertices, num_vertices, was_off, start_off, sx,sy,scx,scy,cx,cy);
-
- // now start the new one
- start_off = !(flags & 1);
- if (start_off) {
- // if we start off with an off-curve point, then when we need to find a point on the curve
- // where we can start, and we need to save some state for when we wraparound.
- scx = x;
- scy = y;
- if (!(vertices[off+i+1].type & 1)) {
- // next point is also a curve point, so interpolate an on-point curve
- sx = (x + (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].x) >> 1;
- sy = (y + (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].y) >> 1;
- } else {
- // otherwise just use the next point as our start point
- sx = (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].x;
- sy = (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].y;
- ++i; // we're using point i+1 as the starting point, so skip it
- }
- } else {
- sx = x;
- sy = y;
- }
- stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vmove,sx,sy,0,0);
- was_off = 0;
- next_move = 1 + ttUSHORT(endPtsOfContours+j*2);
- ++j;
- } else {
- if (!(flags & 1)) { // if it's a curve
- if (was_off) // two off-curve control points in a row means interpolate an on-curve midpoint
- stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, (cx+x)>>1, (cy+y)>>1, cx, cy);
- cx = x;
- cy = y;
- was_off = 1;
- } else {
- if (was_off)
- stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, x,y, cx, cy);
- else
- stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vline, x,y,0,0);
- was_off = 0;
- }
- }
- }
- num_vertices = stbtt__close_shape(vertices, num_vertices, was_off, start_off, sx,sy,scx,scy,cx,cy);
- } else if (numberOfContours == -1) {
- // Compound shapes.
- int more = 1;
- stbtt_uint8 *comp = data + g + 10;
- num_vertices = 0;
- vertices = 0;
- while (more) {
- stbtt_uint16 flags, gidx;
- int comp_num_verts = 0, i;
- stbtt_vertex *comp_verts = 0, *tmp = 0;
- float mtx[6] = {1,0,0,1,0,0}, m, n;
-
- flags = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
- gidx = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
-
- if (flags & 2) { // XY values
- if (flags & 1) { // shorts
- mtx[4] = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
- mtx[5] = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
- } else {
- mtx[4] = ttCHAR(comp); comp+=1;
- mtx[5] = ttCHAR(comp); comp+=1;
- }
- }
- else {
- // @TODO handle matching point
- STBTT_assert(0);
- }
- if (flags & (1<<3)) { // WE_HAVE_A_SCALE
- mtx[0] = mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
- mtx[1] = mtx[2] = 0;
- } else if (flags & (1<<6)) { // WE_HAVE_AN_X_AND_YSCALE
- mtx[0] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
- mtx[1] = mtx[2] = 0;
- mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
- } else if (flags & (1<<7)) { // WE_HAVE_A_TWO_BY_TWO
- mtx[0] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
- mtx[1] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
- mtx[2] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
- mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
- }
-
- // Find transformation scales.
- m = (float) STBTT_sqrt(mtx[0]*mtx[0] + mtx[1]*mtx[1]);
- n = (float) STBTT_sqrt(mtx[2]*mtx[2] + mtx[3]*mtx[3]);
-
- // Get indexed glyph.
- comp_num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, gidx, &comp_verts);
- if (comp_num_verts > 0) {
- // Transform vertices.
- for (i = 0; i < comp_num_verts; ++i) {
- stbtt_vertex* v = &comp_verts[i];
- stbtt_vertex_type x,y;
- x=v->x; y=v->y;
- v->x = (stbtt_vertex_type)(m * (mtx[0]*x + mtx[2]*y + mtx[4]));
- v->y = (stbtt_vertex_type)(n * (mtx[1]*x + mtx[3]*y + mtx[5]));
- x=v->cx; y=v->cy;
- v->cx = (stbtt_vertex_type)(m * (mtx[0]*x + mtx[2]*y + mtx[4]));
- v->cy = (stbtt_vertex_type)(n * (mtx[1]*x + mtx[3]*y + mtx[5]));
- }
- // Append vertices.
- tmp = (stbtt_vertex*)STBTT_malloc((num_vertices+comp_num_verts)*sizeof(stbtt_vertex), info->userdata);
- if (!tmp) {
- if (vertices) STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
- if (comp_verts) STBTT_free(comp_verts, info->userdata);
- return 0;
- }
- if (num_vertices > 0) STBTT_memcpy(tmp, vertices, num_vertices*sizeof(stbtt_vertex));
- STBTT_memcpy(tmp+num_vertices, comp_verts, comp_num_verts*sizeof(stbtt_vertex));
- if (vertices) STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
- vertices = tmp;
- STBTT_free(comp_verts, info->userdata);
- num_vertices += comp_num_verts;
- }
- // More components ?
- more = flags & (1<<5);
- }
- } else if (numberOfContours < 0) {
- // @TODO other compound variations?
- STBTT_assert(0);
- } else {
- // numberOfCounters == 0, do nothing
- }
-
- *pvertices = vertices;
- return num_vertices;
-}
-
-typedef struct
-{
- int bounds;
- int started;
- float first_x, first_y;
- float x, y;
- stbtt_int32 min_x, max_x, min_y, max_y;
-
- stbtt_vertex *pvertices;
- int num_vertices;
-} stbtt__csctx;
-
-#define STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(bounds) {bounds,0, 0,0, 0,0, 0,0,0,0, NULL, 0}
-
-static void stbtt__track_vertex(stbtt__csctx *c, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y)
-{
- if (x > c->max_x || !c->started) c->max_x = x;
- if (y > c->max_y || !c->started) c->max_y = y;
- if (x < c->min_x || !c->started) c->min_x = x;
- if (y < c->min_y || !c->started) c->min_y = y;
- c->started = 1;
-}
-
-static void stbtt__csctx_v(stbtt__csctx *c, stbtt_uint8 type, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy, stbtt_int32 cx1, stbtt_int32 cy1)
-{
- if (c->bounds) {
- stbtt__track_vertex(c, x, y);
- if (type == STBTT_vcubic) {
- stbtt__track_vertex(c, cx, cy);
- stbtt__track_vertex(c, cx1, cy1);
- }
- } else {
- stbtt_setvertex(&c->pvertices[c->num_vertices], type, x, y, cx, cy);
- c->pvertices[c->num_vertices].cx1 = (stbtt_int16) cx1;
- c->pvertices[c->num_vertices].cy1 = (stbtt_int16) cy1;
- }
- c->num_vertices++;
-}
-
-static void stbtt__csctx_close_shape(stbtt__csctx *ctx)
-{
- if (ctx->first_x != ctx->x || ctx->first_y != ctx->y)
- stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vline, (int)ctx->first_x, (int)ctx->first_y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
-}
-
-static void stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx, float dy)
-{
- stbtt__csctx_close_shape(ctx);
- ctx->first_x = ctx->x = ctx->x + dx;
- ctx->first_y = ctx->y = ctx->y + dy;
- stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vmove, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
-}
-
-static void stbtt__csctx_rline_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx, float dy)
-{
- ctx->x += dx;
- ctx->y += dy;
- stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vline, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
-}
-
-static void stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx1, float dy1, float dx2, float dy2, float dx3, float dy3)
-{
- float cx1 = ctx->x + dx1;
- float cy1 = ctx->y + dy1;
- float cx2 = cx1 + dx2;
- float cy2 = cy1 + dy2;
- ctx->x = cx2 + dx3;
- ctx->y = cy2 + dy3;
- stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vcubic, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, (int)cx1, (int)cy1, (int)cx2, (int)cy2);
-}
-
-static stbtt__buf stbtt__get_subr(stbtt__buf idx, int n)
-{
- int count = stbtt__cff_index_count(&idx);
- int bias = 107;
- if (count >= 33900)
- bias = 32768;
- else if (count >= 1240)
- bias = 1131;
- n += bias;
- if (n < 0 || n >= count)
- return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
- return stbtt__cff_index_get(idx, n);
-}
-
-static stbtt__buf stbtt__cid_get_glyph_subrs(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
-{
- stbtt__buf fdselect = info->fdselect;
- int nranges, start, end, v, fmt, fdselector = -1, i;
-
- stbtt__buf_seek(&fdselect, 0);
- fmt = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
- if (fmt == 0) {
- // untested
- stbtt__buf_skip(&fdselect, glyph_index);
- fdselector = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
- } else if (fmt == 3) {
- nranges = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
- start = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
- for (i = 0; i < nranges; i++) {
- v = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
- end = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
- if (glyph_index >= start && glyph_index < end) {
- fdselector = v;
- break;
- }
- start = end;
- }
- }
- if (fdselector == -1) stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
- return stbtt__get_subrs(info->cff, stbtt__cff_index_get(info->fontdicts, fdselector));
-}
-
-static int stbtt__run_charstring(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt__csctx *c)
-{
- int in_header = 1, maskbits = 0, subr_stack_height = 0, sp = 0, v, i, b0;
- int has_subrs = 0, clear_stack;
- float s[48];
- stbtt__buf subr_stack[10], subrs = info->subrs, b;
- float f;
-
-#define STBTT__CSERR(s) (0)
-
- // this currently ignores the initial width value, which isn't needed if we have hmtx
- b = stbtt__cff_index_get(info->charstrings, glyph_index);
- while (b.cursor < b.size) {
- i = 0;
- clear_stack = 1;
- b0 = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
- switch (b0) {
- // @TODO implement hinting
- case 0x13: // hintmask
- case 0x14: // cntrmask
- if (in_header)
- maskbits += (sp / 2); // implicit "vstem"
- in_header = 0;
- stbtt__buf_skip(&b, (maskbits + 7) / 8);
- break;
-
- case 0x01: // hstem
- case 0x03: // vstem
- case 0x12: // hstemhm
- case 0x17: // vstemhm
- maskbits += (sp / 2);
- break;
-
- case 0x15: // rmoveto
- in_header = 0;
- if (sp < 2) return STBTT__CSERR("rmoveto stack");
- stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, s[sp-2], s[sp-1]);
- break;
- case 0x04: // vmoveto
- in_header = 0;
- if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("vmoveto stack");
- stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, 0, s[sp-1]);
- break;
- case 0x16: // hmoveto
- in_header = 0;
- if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("hmoveto stack");
- stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, s[sp-1], 0);
- break;
-
- case 0x05: // rlineto
- if (sp < 2) return STBTT__CSERR("rlineto stack");
- for (; i + 1 < sp; i += 2)
- stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
- break;
-
- // hlineto/vlineto and vhcurveto/hvcurveto alternate horizontal and vertical
- // starting from a different place.
-
- case 0x07: // vlineto
- if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("vlineto stack");
- goto vlineto;
- case 0x06: // hlineto
- if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("hlineto stack");
- for (;;) {
- if (i >= sp) break;
- stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], 0);
- i++;
- vlineto:
- if (i >= sp) break;
- stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, 0, s[i]);
- i++;
- }
- break;
-
- case 0x1F: // hvcurveto
- if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("hvcurveto stack");
- goto hvcurveto;
- case 0x1E: // vhcurveto
- if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("vhcurveto stack");
- for (;;) {
- if (i + 3 >= sp) break;
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, 0, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], (sp - i == 5) ? s[i + 4] : 0.0f);
- i += 4;
- hvcurveto:
- if (i + 3 >= sp) break;
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], 0, s[i+1], s[i+2], (sp - i == 5) ? s[i+4] : 0.0f, s[i+3]);
- i += 4;
- }
- break;
-
- case 0x08: // rrcurveto
- if (sp < 6) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
- for (; i + 5 < sp; i += 6)
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
- break;
-
- case 0x18: // rcurveline
- if (sp < 8) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
- for (; i + 5 < sp - 2; i += 6)
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
- if (i + 1 >= sp) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
- stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
- break;
-
- case 0x19: // rlinecurve
- if (sp < 8) return STBTT__CSERR("rlinecurve stack");
- for (; i + 1 < sp - 6; i += 2)
- stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
- if (i + 5 >= sp) return STBTT__CSERR("rlinecurve stack");
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
- break;
-
- case 0x1A: // vvcurveto
- case 0x1B: // hhcurveto
- if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("(vv|hh)curveto stack");
- f = 0.0;
- if (sp & 1) { f = s[i]; i++; }
- for (; i + 3 < sp; i += 4) {
- if (b0 == 0x1B)
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], f, s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], 0.0);
- else
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, f, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], 0.0, s[i+3]);
- f = 0.0;
- }
- break;
-
- case 0x0A: // callsubr
- if (!has_subrs) {
- if (info->fdselect.size)
- subrs = stbtt__cid_get_glyph_subrs(info, glyph_index);
- has_subrs = 1;
- }
- // fallthrough
- case 0x1D: // callgsubr
- if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("call(g|)subr stack");
- v = (int) s[--sp];
- if (subr_stack_height >= 10) return STBTT__CSERR("recursion limit");
- subr_stack[subr_stack_height++] = b;
- b = stbtt__get_subr(b0 == 0x0A ? subrs : info->gsubrs, v);
- if (b.size == 0) return STBTT__CSERR("subr not found");
- b.cursor = 0;
- clear_stack = 0;
- break;
-
- case 0x0B: // return
- if (subr_stack_height <= 0) return STBTT__CSERR("return outside subr");
- b = subr_stack[--subr_stack_height];
- clear_stack = 0;
- break;
-
- case 0x0E: // endchar
- stbtt__csctx_close_shape(c);
- return 1;
-
- case 0x0C: { // two-byte escape
- float dx1, dx2, dx3, dx4, dx5, dx6, dy1, dy2, dy3, dy4, dy5, dy6;
- float dx, dy;
- int b1 = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
- switch (b1) {
- // @TODO These "flex" implementations ignore the flex-depth and resolution,
- // and always draw beziers.
- case 0x22: // hflex
- if (sp < 7) return STBTT__CSERR("hflex stack");
- dx1 = s[0];
- dx2 = s[1];
- dy2 = s[2];
- dx3 = s[3];
- dx4 = s[4];
- dx5 = s[5];
- dx6 = s[6];
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, 0, dx2, dy2, dx3, 0);
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, 0, dx5, -dy2, dx6, 0);
- break;
-
- case 0x23: // flex
- if (sp < 13) return STBTT__CSERR("flex stack");
- dx1 = s[0];
- dy1 = s[1];
- dx2 = s[2];
- dy2 = s[3];
- dx3 = s[4];
- dy3 = s[5];
- dx4 = s[6];
- dy4 = s[7];
- dx5 = s[8];
- dy5 = s[9];
- dx6 = s[10];
- dy6 = s[11];
- //fd is s[12]
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, dy3);
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, dy4, dx5, dy5, dx6, dy6);
- break;
-
- case 0x24: // hflex1
- if (sp < 9) return STBTT__CSERR("hflex1 stack");
- dx1 = s[0];
- dy1 = s[1];
- dx2 = s[2];
- dy2 = s[3];
- dx3 = s[4];
- dx4 = s[5];
- dx5 = s[6];
- dy5 = s[7];
- dx6 = s[8];
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, 0);
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, 0, dx5, dy5, dx6, -(dy1+dy2+dy5));
- break;
-
- case 0x25: // flex1
- if (sp < 11) return STBTT__CSERR("flex1 stack");
- dx1 = s[0];
- dy1 = s[1];
- dx2 = s[2];
- dy2 = s[3];
- dx3 = s[4];
- dy3 = s[5];
- dx4 = s[6];
- dy4 = s[7];
- dx5 = s[8];
- dy5 = s[9];
- dx6 = dy6 = s[10];
- dx = dx1+dx2+dx3+dx4+dx5;
- dy = dy1+dy2+dy3+dy4+dy5;
- if (STBTT_fabs(dx) > STBTT_fabs(dy))
- dy6 = -dy;
- else
- dx6 = -dx;
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, dy3);
- stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, dy4, dx5, dy5, dx6, dy6);
- break;
-
- default:
- return STBTT__CSERR("unimplemented");
- }
- } break;
-
- default:
- if (b0 != 255 && b0 != 28 && (b0 < 32 || b0 > 254))
- return STBTT__CSERR("reserved operator");
-
- // push immediate
- if (b0 == 255) {
- f = (float)(stbtt_int32)stbtt__buf_get32(&b) / 0x10000;
- } else {
- stbtt__buf_skip(&b, -1);
- f = (float)(stbtt_int16)stbtt__cff_int(&b);
- }
- if (sp >= 48) return STBTT__CSERR("push stack overflow");
- s[sp++] = f;
- clear_stack = 0;
- break;
- }
- if (clear_stack) sp = 0;
- }
- return STBTT__CSERR("no endchar");
-
-#undef STBTT__CSERR
-}
-
-static int stbtt__GetGlyphShapeT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
-{
- // runs the charstring twice, once to count and once to output (to avoid realloc)
- stbtt__csctx count_ctx = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(1);
- stbtt__csctx output_ctx = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(0);
- if (stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &count_ctx)) {
- *pvertices = (stbtt_vertex*)STBTT_malloc(count_ctx.num_vertices*sizeof(stbtt_vertex), info->userdata);
- output_ctx.pvertices = *pvertices;
- if (stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &output_ctx)) {
- STBTT_assert(output_ctx.num_vertices == count_ctx.num_vertices);
- return output_ctx.num_vertices;
- }
- }
- *pvertices = NULL;
- return 0;
-}
-
-static int stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
-{
- stbtt__csctx c = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(1);
- int r = stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &c);
- if (x0) *x0 = r ? c.min_x : 0;
- if (y0) *y0 = r ? c.min_y : 0;
- if (x1) *x1 = r ? c.max_x : 0;
- if (y1) *y1 = r ? c.max_y : 0;
- return r ? c.num_vertices : 0;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
-{
- if (!info->cff.size)
- return stbtt__GetGlyphShapeTT(info, glyph_index, pvertices);
- else
- return stbtt__GetGlyphShapeT2(info, glyph_index, pvertices);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing)
-{
- stbtt_uint16 numOfLongHorMetrics = ttUSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 34);
- if (glyph_index < numOfLongHorMetrics) {
- if (advanceWidth) *advanceWidth = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*glyph_index);
- if (leftSideBearing) *leftSideBearing = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*glyph_index + 2);
- } else {
- if (advanceWidth) *advanceWidth = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*(numOfLongHorMetrics-1));
- if (leftSideBearing) *leftSideBearing = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*numOfLongHorMetrics + 2*(glyph_index - numOfLongHorMetrics));
- }
-}
-
-static int stbtt__GetGlyphKernInfoAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2)
-{
- stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data + info->kern;
- stbtt_uint32 needle, straw;
- int l, r, m;
-
- // we only look at the first table. it must be 'horizontal' and format 0.
- if (!info->kern)
- return 0;
- if (ttUSHORT(data+2) < 1) // number of tables, need at least 1
- return 0;
- if (ttUSHORT(data+8) != 1) // horizontal flag must be set in format
- return 0;
-
- l = 0;
- r = ttUSHORT(data+10) - 1;
- needle = glyph1 << 16 | glyph2;
- while (l <= r) {
- m = (l + r) >> 1;
- straw = ttULONG(data+18+(m*6)); // note: unaligned read
- if (needle < straw)
- r = m - 1;
- else if (needle > straw)
- l = m + 1;
- else
- return ttSHORT(data+22+(m*6));
- }
- return 0;
-}
-
-static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetCoverageIndex(stbtt_uint8 *coverageTable, int glyph)
-{
- stbtt_uint16 coverageFormat = ttUSHORT(coverageTable);
- switch(coverageFormat) {
- case 1: {
- stbtt_uint16 glyphCount = ttUSHORT(coverageTable + 2);
-
- // Binary search.
- stbtt_int32 l=0, r=glyphCount-1, m;
- int straw, needle=glyph;
- while (l <= r) {
- stbtt_uint8 *glyphArray = coverageTable + 4;
- stbtt_uint16 glyphID;
- m = (l + r) >> 1;
- glyphID = ttUSHORT(glyphArray + 2 * m);
- straw = glyphID;
- if (needle < straw)
- r = m - 1;
- else if (needle > straw)
- l = m + 1;
- else {
- return m;
- }
- }
- } break;
-
- case 2: {
- stbtt_uint16 rangeCount = ttUSHORT(coverageTable + 2);
- stbtt_uint8 *rangeArray = coverageTable + 4;
-
- // Binary search.
- stbtt_int32 l=0, r=rangeCount-1, m;
- int strawStart, strawEnd, needle=glyph;
- while (l <= r) {
- stbtt_uint8 *rangeRecord;
- m = (l + r) >> 1;
- rangeRecord = rangeArray + 6 * m;
- strawStart = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord);
- strawEnd = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord + 2);
- if (needle < strawStart)
- r = m - 1;
- else if (needle > strawEnd)
- l = m + 1;
- else {
- stbtt_uint16 startCoverageIndex = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord + 4);
- return startCoverageIndex + glyph - strawStart;
- }
- }
- } break;
-
- default: {
- // There are no other cases.
- STBTT_assert(0);
- } break;
- }
-
- return -1;
-}
-
-static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetGlyphClass(stbtt_uint8 *classDefTable, int glyph)
-{
- stbtt_uint16 classDefFormat = ttUSHORT(classDefTable);
- switch(classDefFormat)
- {
- case 1: {
- stbtt_uint16 startGlyphID = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 2);
- stbtt_uint16 glyphCount = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 4);
- stbtt_uint8 *classDef1ValueArray = classDefTable + 6;
-
- if (glyph >= startGlyphID && glyph < startGlyphID + glyphCount)
- return (stbtt_int32)ttUSHORT(classDef1ValueArray + 2 * (glyph - startGlyphID));
-
- classDefTable = classDef1ValueArray + 2 * glyphCount;
- } break;
-
- case 2: {
- stbtt_uint16 classRangeCount = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 2);
- stbtt_uint8 *classRangeRecords = classDefTable + 4;
-
- // Binary search.
- stbtt_int32 l=0, r=classRangeCount-1, m;
- int strawStart, strawEnd, needle=glyph;
- while (l <= r) {
- stbtt_uint8 *classRangeRecord;
- m = (l + r) >> 1;
- classRangeRecord = classRangeRecords + 6 * m;
- strawStart = ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord);
- strawEnd = ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord + 2);
- if (needle < strawStart)
- r = m - 1;
- else if (needle > strawEnd)
- l = m + 1;
- else
- return (stbtt_int32)ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord + 4);
- }
-
- classDefTable = classRangeRecords + 6 * classRangeCount;
- } break;
-
- default: {
- // There are no other cases.
- STBTT_assert(0);
- } break;
- }
-
- return -1;
-}
-
-// Define to STBTT_assert(x) if you want to break on unimplemented formats.
-#define STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(x)
-
-static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetGlyphGPOSInfoAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2)
-{
- stbtt_uint16 lookupListOffset;
- stbtt_uint8 *lookupList;
- stbtt_uint16 lookupCount;
- stbtt_uint8 *data;
- stbtt_int32 i;
-
- if (!info->gpos) return 0;
-
- data = info->data + info->gpos;
-
- if (ttUSHORT(data+0) != 1) return 0; // Major version 1
- if (ttUSHORT(data+2) != 0) return 0; // Minor version 0
-
- lookupListOffset = ttUSHORT(data+8);
- lookupList = data + lookupListOffset;
- lookupCount = ttUSHORT(lookupList);
-
- for (i=0; i<lookupCount; ++i) {
- stbtt_uint16 lookupOffset = ttUSHORT(lookupList + 2 + 2 * i);
- stbtt_uint8 *lookupTable = lookupList + lookupOffset;
-
- stbtt_uint16 lookupType = ttUSHORT(lookupTable);
- stbtt_uint16 subTableCount = ttUSHORT(lookupTable + 4);
- stbtt_uint8 *subTableOffsets = lookupTable + 6;
- switch(lookupType) {
- case 2: { // Pair Adjustment Positioning Subtable
- stbtt_int32 sti;
- for (sti=0; sti<subTableCount; sti++) {
- stbtt_uint16 subtableOffset = ttUSHORT(subTableOffsets + 2 * sti);
- stbtt_uint8 *table = lookupTable + subtableOffset;
- stbtt_uint16 posFormat = ttUSHORT(table);
- stbtt_uint16 coverageOffset = ttUSHORT(table + 2);
- stbtt_int32 coverageIndex = stbtt__GetCoverageIndex(table + coverageOffset, glyph1);
- if (coverageIndex == -1) continue;
-
- switch (posFormat) {
- case 1: {
- stbtt_int32 l, r, m;
- int straw, needle;
- stbtt_uint16 valueFormat1 = ttUSHORT(table + 4);
- stbtt_uint16 valueFormat2 = ttUSHORT(table + 6);
- stbtt_int32 valueRecordPairSizeInBytes = 2;
- stbtt_uint16 pairSetCount = ttUSHORT(table + 8);
- stbtt_uint16 pairPosOffset = ttUSHORT(table + 10 + 2 * coverageIndex);
- stbtt_uint8 *pairValueTable = table + pairPosOffset;
- stbtt_uint16 pairValueCount = ttUSHORT(pairValueTable);
- stbtt_uint8 *pairValueArray = pairValueTable + 2;
- // TODO: Support more formats.
- STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(valueFormat1 == 4);
- if (valueFormat1 != 4) return 0;
- STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(valueFormat2 == 0);
- if (valueFormat2 != 0) return 0;
-
- STBTT_assert(coverageIndex < pairSetCount);
- STBTT__NOTUSED(pairSetCount);
-
- needle=glyph2;
- r=pairValueCount-1;
- l=0;
-
- // Binary search.
- while (l <= r) {
- stbtt_uint16 secondGlyph;
- stbtt_uint8 *pairValue;
- m = (l + r) >> 1;
- pairValue = pairValueArray + (2 + valueRecordPairSizeInBytes) * m;
- secondGlyph = ttUSHORT(pairValue);
- straw = secondGlyph;
- if (needle < straw)
- r = m - 1;
- else if (needle > straw)
- l = m + 1;
- else {
- stbtt_int16 xAdvance = ttSHORT(pairValue + 2);
- return xAdvance;
- }
- }
- } break;
-
- case 2: {
- stbtt_uint16 valueFormat1 = ttUSHORT(table + 4);
- stbtt_uint16 valueFormat2 = ttUSHORT(table + 6);
-
- stbtt_uint16 classDef1Offset = ttUSHORT(table + 8);
- stbtt_uint16 classDef2Offset = ttUSHORT(table + 10);
- int glyph1class = stbtt__GetGlyphClass(table + classDef1Offset, glyph1);
- int glyph2class = stbtt__GetGlyphClass(table + classDef2Offset, glyph2);
-
- stbtt_uint16 class1Count = ttUSHORT(table + 12);
- stbtt_uint16 class2Count = ttUSHORT(table + 14);
- STBTT_assert(glyph1class < class1Count);
- STBTT_assert(glyph2class < class2Count);
-
- // TODO: Support more formats.
- STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(valueFormat1 == 4);
- if (valueFormat1 != 4) return 0;
- STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(valueFormat2 == 0);
- if (valueFormat2 != 0) return 0;
-
- if (glyph1class >= 0 && glyph1class < class1Count && glyph2class >= 0 && glyph2class < class2Count) {
- stbtt_uint8 *class1Records = table + 16;
- stbtt_uint8 *class2Records = class1Records + 2 * (glyph1class * class2Count);
- stbtt_int16 xAdvance = ttSHORT(class2Records + 2 * glyph2class);
- return xAdvance;
- }
- } break;
-
- default: {
- // There are no other cases.
- STBTT_assert(0);
- break;
- };
- }
- }
- break;
- };
-
- default:
- // TODO: Implement other stuff.
- break;
- }
- }
-
- return 0;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int g1, int g2)
-{
- int xAdvance = 0;
-
- if (info->gpos)
- xAdvance += stbtt__GetGlyphGPOSInfoAdvance(info, g1, g2);
-
- if (info->kern)
- xAdvance += stbtt__GetGlyphKernInfoAdvance(info, g1, g2);
-
- return xAdvance;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int ch1, int ch2)
-{
- if (!info->kern && !info->gpos) // if no kerning table, don't waste time looking up both codepoint->glyphs
- return 0;
- return stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,ch1), stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,ch2));
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing)
-{
- stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), advanceWidth, leftSideBearing);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *ascent, int *descent, int *lineGap)
-{
- if (ascent ) *ascent = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 4);
- if (descent) *descent = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 6);
- if (lineGap) *lineGap = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 8);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *typoAscent, int *typoDescent, int *typoLineGap)
-{
- int tab = stbtt__find_table(info->data, info->fontstart, "OS/2");
- if (!tab)
- return 0;
- if (typoAscent ) *typoAscent = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 68);
- if (typoDescent) *typoDescent = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 70);
- if (typoLineGap) *typoLineGap = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 72);
- return 1;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
-{
- *x0 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 36);
- *y0 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 38);
- *x1 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 40);
- *y1 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 42);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float height)
-{
- int fheight = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hhea + 4) - ttSHORT(info->data + info->hhea + 6);
- return (float) height / fheight;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels)
-{
- int unitsPerEm = ttUSHORT(info->data + info->head + 18);
- return pixels / unitsPerEm;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_vertex *v)
-{
- STBTT_free(v, info->userdata);
-}
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// antialiasing software rasterizer
-//
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y,float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
-{
- int x0=0,y0=0,x1,y1; // =0 suppresses compiler warning
- if (!stbtt_GetGlyphBox(font, glyph, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1)) {
- // e.g. space character
- if (ix0) *ix0 = 0;
- if (iy0) *iy0 = 0;
- if (ix1) *ix1 = 0;
- if (iy1) *iy1 = 0;
- } else {
- // move to integral bboxes (treating pixels as little squares, what pixels get touched)?
- if (ix0) *ix0 = STBTT_ifloor( x0 * scale_x + shift_x);
- if (iy0) *iy0 = STBTT_ifloor(-y1 * scale_y + shift_y);
- if (ix1) *ix1 = STBTT_iceil ( x1 * scale_x + shift_x);
- if (iy1) *iy1 = STBTT_iceil (-y0 * scale_y + shift_y);
- }
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
-{
- stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, glyph, scale_x, scale_y,0.0f,0.0f, ix0, iy0, ix1, iy1);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
-{
- stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(font,codepoint), scale_x, scale_y,shift_x,shift_y, ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
-{
- stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, codepoint, scale_x, scale_y,0.0f,0.0f, ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1);
-}
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// Rasterizer
-
-typedef struct stbtt__hheap_chunk
-{
- struct stbtt__hheap_chunk *next;
-} stbtt__hheap_chunk;
-
-typedef struct stbtt__hheap
-{
- struct stbtt__hheap_chunk *head;
- void *first_free;
- int num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
-} stbtt__hheap;
-
-static void *stbtt__hheap_alloc(stbtt__hheap *hh, size_t size, void *userdata)
-{
- if (hh->first_free) {
- void *p = hh->first_free;
- hh->first_free = * (void **) p;
- return p;
- } else {
- if (hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk == 0) {
- int count = (size < 32 ? 2000 : size < 128 ? 800 : 100);
- stbtt__hheap_chunk *c = (stbtt__hheap_chunk *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(stbtt__hheap_chunk) + size * count, userdata);
- if (c == NULL)
- return NULL;
- c->next = hh->head;
- hh->head = c;
- hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk = count;
- }
- --hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
- return (char *) (hh->head) + sizeof(stbtt__hheap_chunk) + size * hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
- }
-}
-
-static void stbtt__hheap_free(stbtt__hheap *hh, void *p)
-{
- *(void **) p = hh->first_free;
- hh->first_free = p;
-}
-
-static void stbtt__hheap_cleanup(stbtt__hheap *hh, void *userdata)
-{
- stbtt__hheap_chunk *c = hh->head;
- while (c) {
- stbtt__hheap_chunk *n = c->next;
- STBTT_free(c, userdata);
- c = n;
- }
-}
-
-typedef struct stbtt__edge {
- float x0,y0, x1,y1;
- int invert;
-} stbtt__edge;
-
-
-typedef struct stbtt__active_edge
-{
- struct stbtt__active_edge *next;
- #if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION==1
- int x,dx;
- float ey;
- int direction;
- #elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION==2
- float fx,fdx,fdy;
- float direction;
- float sy;
- float ey;
- #else
- #error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
- #endif
-} stbtt__active_edge;
-
-#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
-#define STBTT_FIXSHIFT 10
-#define STBTT_FIX (1 << STBTT_FIXSHIFT)
-#define STBTT_FIXMASK (STBTT_FIX-1)
-
-static stbtt__active_edge *stbtt__new_active(stbtt__hheap *hh, stbtt__edge *e, int off_x, float start_point, void *userdata)
-{
- stbtt__active_edge *z = (stbtt__active_edge *) stbtt__hheap_alloc(hh, sizeof(*z), userdata);
- float dxdy = (e->x1 - e->x0) / (e->y1 - e->y0);
- STBTT_assert(z != NULL);
- if (!z) return z;
-
- // round dx down to avoid overshooting
- if (dxdy < 0)
- z->dx = -STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * -dxdy);
- else
- z->dx = STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * dxdy);
-
- z->x = STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * e->x0 + z->dx * (start_point - e->y0)); // use z->dx so when we offset later it's by the same amount
- z->x -= off_x * STBTT_FIX;
-
- z->ey = e->y1;
- z->next = 0;
- z->direction = e->invert ? 1 : -1;
- return z;
-}
-#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
-static stbtt__active_edge *stbtt__new_active(stbtt__hheap *hh, stbtt__edge *e, int off_x, float start_point, void *userdata)
-{
- stbtt__active_edge *z = (stbtt__active_edge *) stbtt__hheap_alloc(hh, sizeof(*z), userdata);
- float dxdy = (e->x1 - e->x0) / (e->y1 - e->y0);
- STBTT_assert(z != NULL);
- //STBTT_assert(e->y0 <= start_point);
- if (!z) return z;
- z->fdx = dxdy;
- z->fdy = dxdy != 0.0f ? (1.0f/dxdy) : 0.0f;
- z->fx = e->x0 + dxdy * (start_point - e->y0);
- z->fx -= off_x;
- z->direction = e->invert ? 1.0f : -1.0f;
- z->sy = e->y0;
- z->ey = e->y1;
- z->next = 0;
- return z;
-}
-#else
-#error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
-#endif
-
-#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
-// note: this routine clips fills that extend off the edges... ideally this
-// wouldn't happen, but it could happen if the truetype glyph bounding boxes
-// are wrong, or if the user supplies a too-small bitmap
-static void stbtt__fill_active_edges(unsigned char *scanline, int len, stbtt__active_edge *e, int max_weight)
-{
- // non-zero winding fill
- int x0=0, w=0;
-
- while (e) {
- if (w == 0) {
- // if we're currently at zero, we need to record the edge start point
- x0 = e->x; w += e->direction;
- } else {
- int x1 = e->x; w += e->direction;
- // if we went to zero, we need to draw
- if (w == 0) {
- int i = x0 >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT;
- int j = x1 >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT;
-
- if (i < len && j >= 0) {
- if (i == j) {
- // x0,x1 are the same pixel, so compute combined coverage
- scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) ((x1 - x0) * max_weight >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
- } else {
- if (i >= 0) // add antialiasing for x0
- scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) (((STBTT_FIX - (x0 & STBTT_FIXMASK)) * max_weight) >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
- else
- i = -1; // clip
-
- if (j < len) // add antialiasing for x1
- scanline[j] = scanline[j] + (stbtt_uint8) (((x1 & STBTT_FIXMASK) * max_weight) >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
- else
- j = len; // clip
-
- for (++i; i < j; ++i) // fill pixels between x0 and x1
- scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) max_weight;
- }
- }
- }
- }
-
- e = e->next;
- }
-}
-
-static void stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__edge *e, int n, int vsubsample, int off_x, int off_y, void *userdata)
-{
- stbtt__hheap hh = { 0, 0, 0 };
- stbtt__active_edge *active = NULL;
- int y,j=0;
- int max_weight = (255 / vsubsample); // weight per vertical scanline
- int s; // vertical subsample index
- unsigned char scanline_data[512], *scanline;
-
- if (result->w > 512)
- scanline = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(result->w, userdata);
- else
- scanline = scanline_data;
-
- y = off_y * vsubsample;
- e[n].y0 = (off_y + result->h) * (float) vsubsample + 1;
-
- while (j < result->h) {
- STBTT_memset(scanline, 0, result->w);
- for (s=0; s < vsubsample; ++s) {
- // find center of pixel for this scanline
- float scan_y = y + 0.5f;
- stbtt__active_edge **step = &active;
-
- // update all active edges;
- // remove all active edges that terminate before the center of this scanline
- while (*step) {
- stbtt__active_edge * z = *step;
- if (z->ey <= scan_y) {
- *step = z->next; // delete from list
- STBTT_assert(z->direction);
- z->direction = 0;
- stbtt__hheap_free(&hh, z);
- } else {
- z->x += z->dx; // advance to position for current scanline
- step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
- }
- }
-
- // resort the list if needed
- for(;;) {
- int changed=0;
- step = &active;
- while (*step && (*step)->next) {
- if ((*step)->x > (*step)->next->x) {
- stbtt__active_edge *t = *step;
- stbtt__active_edge *q = t->next;
-
- t->next = q->next;
- q->next = t;
- *step = q;
- changed = 1;
- }
- step = &(*step)->next;
- }
- if (!changed) break;
- }
-
- // insert all edges that start before the center of this scanline -- omit ones that also end on this scanline
- while (e->y0 <= scan_y) {
- if (e->y1 > scan_y) {
- stbtt__active_edge *z = stbtt__new_active(&hh, e, off_x, scan_y, userdata);
- if (z != NULL) {
- // find insertion point
- if (active == NULL)
- active = z;
- else if (z->x < active->x) {
- // insert at front
- z->next = active;
- active = z;
- } else {
- // find thing to insert AFTER
- stbtt__active_edge *p = active;
- while (p->next && p->next->x < z->x)
- p = p->next;
- // at this point, p->next->x is NOT < z->x
- z->next = p->next;
- p->next = z;
- }
- }
- }
- ++e;
- }
-
- // now process all active edges in XOR fashion
- if (active)
- stbtt__fill_active_edges(scanline, result->w, active, max_weight);
-
- ++y;
- }
- STBTT_memcpy(result->pixels + j * result->stride, scanline, result->w);
- ++j;
- }
-
- stbtt__hheap_cleanup(&hh, userdata);
-
- if (scanline != scanline_data)
- STBTT_free(scanline, userdata);
-}
-
-#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
-
-// the edge passed in here does not cross the vertical line at x or the vertical line at x+1
-// (i.e. it has already been clipped to those)
-static void stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(float *scanline, int x, stbtt__active_edge *e, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1)
-{
- if (y0 == y1) return;
- STBTT_assert(y0 < y1);
- STBTT_assert(e->sy <= e->ey);
- if (y0 > e->ey) return;
- if (y1 < e->sy) return;
- if (y0 < e->sy) {
- x0 += (x1-x0) * (e->sy - y0) / (y1-y0);
- y0 = e->sy;
- }
- if (y1 > e->ey) {
- x1 += (x1-x0) * (e->ey - y1) / (y1-y0);
- y1 = e->ey;
- }
-
- if (x0 == x)
- STBTT_assert(x1 <= x+1);
- else if (x0 == x+1)
- STBTT_assert(x1 >= x);
- else if (x0 <= x)
- STBTT_assert(x1 <= x);
- else if (x0 >= x+1)
- STBTT_assert(x1 >= x+1);
- else
- STBTT_assert(x1 >= x && x1 <= x+1);
-
- if (x0 <= x && x1 <= x)
- scanline[x] += e->direction * (y1-y0);
- else if (x0 >= x+1 && x1 >= x+1)
- ;
- else {
- STBTT_assert(x0 >= x && x0 <= x+1 && x1 >= x && x1 <= x+1);
- scanline[x] += e->direction * (y1-y0) * (1-((x0-x)+(x1-x))/2); // coverage = 1 - average x position
- }
-}
-
-static void stbtt__fill_active_edges_new(float *scanline, float *scanline_fill, int len, stbtt__active_edge *e, float y_top)
-{
- float y_bottom = y_top+1;
-
- while (e) {
- // brute force every pixel
-
- // compute intersection points with top & bottom
- STBTT_assert(e->ey >= y_top);
-
- if (e->fdx == 0) {
- float x0 = e->fx;
- if (x0 < len) {
- if (x0 >= 0) {
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,(int) x0,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline_fill-1,(int) x0+1,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
- } else {
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline_fill-1,0,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
- }
- }
- } else {
- float x0 = e->fx;
- float dx = e->fdx;
- float xb = x0 + dx;
- float x_top, x_bottom;
- float sy0,sy1;
- float dy = e->fdy;
- STBTT_assert(e->sy <= y_bottom && e->ey >= y_top);
-
- // compute endpoints of line segment clipped to this scanline (if the
- // line segment starts on this scanline. x0 is the intersection of the
- // line with y_top, but that may be off the line segment.
- if (e->sy > y_top) {
- x_top = x0 + dx * (e->sy - y_top);
- sy0 = e->sy;
- } else {
- x_top = x0;
- sy0 = y_top;
- }
- if (e->ey < y_bottom) {
- x_bottom = x0 + dx * (e->ey - y_top);
- sy1 = e->ey;
- } else {
- x_bottom = xb;
- sy1 = y_bottom;
- }
-
- if (x_top >= 0 && x_bottom >= 0 && x_top < len && x_bottom < len) {
- // from here on, we don't have to range check x values
-
- if ((int) x_top == (int) x_bottom) {
- float height;
- // simple case, only spans one pixel
- int x = (int) x_top;
- height = sy1 - sy0;
- STBTT_assert(x >= 0 && x < len);
- scanline[x] += e->direction * (1-((x_top - x) + (x_bottom-x))/2) * height;
- scanline_fill[x] += e->direction * height; // everything right of this pixel is filled
- } else {
- int x,x1,x2;
- float y_crossing, step, sign, area;
- // covers 2+ pixels
- if (x_top > x_bottom) {
- // flip scanline vertically; signed area is the same
- float t;
- sy0 = y_bottom - (sy0 - y_top);
- sy1 = y_bottom - (sy1 - y_top);
- t = sy0, sy0 = sy1, sy1 = t;
- t = x_bottom, x_bottom = x_top, x_top = t;
- dx = -dx;
- dy = -dy;
- t = x0, x0 = xb, xb = t;
- }
-
- x1 = (int) x_top;
- x2 = (int) x_bottom;
- // compute intersection with y axis at x1+1
- y_crossing = (x1+1 - x0) * dy + y_top;
-
- sign = e->direction;
- // area of the rectangle covered from y0..y_crossing
- area = sign * (y_crossing-sy0);
- // area of the triangle (x_top,y0), (x+1,y0), (x+1,y_crossing)
- scanline[x1] += area * (1-((x_top - x1)+(x1+1-x1))/2);
-
- step = sign * dy;
- for (x = x1+1; x < x2; ++x) {
- scanline[x] += area + step/2;
- area += step;
- }
- y_crossing += dy * (x2 - (x1+1));
-
- STBTT_assert(STBTT_fabs(area) <= 1.01f);
-
- scanline[x2] += area + sign * (1-((x2-x2)+(x_bottom-x2))/2) * (sy1-y_crossing);
-
- scanline_fill[x2] += sign * (sy1-sy0);
- }
- } else {
- // if edge goes outside of box we're drawing, we require
- // clipping logic. since this does not match the intended use
- // of this library, we use a different, very slow brute
- // force implementation
- int x;
- for (x=0; x < len; ++x) {
- // cases:
- //
- // there can be up to two intersections with the pixel. any intersection
- // with left or right edges can be handled by splitting into two (or three)
- // regions. intersections with top & bottom do not necessitate case-wise logic.
- //
- // the old way of doing this found the intersections with the left & right edges,
- // then used some simple logic to produce up to three segments in sorted order
- // from top-to-bottom. however, this had a problem: if an x edge was epsilon
- // across the x border, then the corresponding y position might not be distinct
- // from the other y segment, and it might ignored as an empty segment. to avoid
- // that, we need to explicitly produce segments based on x positions.
-
- // rename variables to clearly-defined pairs
- float y0 = y_top;
- float x1 = (float) (x);
- float x2 = (float) (x+1);
- float x3 = xb;
- float y3 = y_bottom;
-
- // x = e->x + e->dx * (y-y_top)
- // (y-y_top) = (x - e->x) / e->dx
- // y = (x - e->x) / e->dx + y_top
- float y1 = (x - x0) / dx + y_top;
- float y2 = (x+1 - x0) / dx + y_top;
-
- if (x0 < x1 && x3 > x2) { // three segments descending down-right
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x2,y2);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
- } else if (x3 < x1 && x0 > x2) { // three segments descending down-left
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x1,y1);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
- } else if (x0 < x1 && x3 > x1) { // two segments across x, down-right
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
- } else if (x3 < x1 && x0 > x1) { // two segments across x, down-left
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
- } else if (x0 < x2 && x3 > x2) { // two segments across x+1, down-right
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
- } else if (x3 < x2 && x0 > x2) { // two segments across x+1, down-left
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
- } else { // one segment
- stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x3,y3);
- }
- }
- }
- }
- e = e->next;
- }
-}
-
-// directly AA rasterize edges w/o supersampling
-static void stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__edge *e, int n, int vsubsample, int off_x, int off_y, void *userdata)
-{
- stbtt__hheap hh = { 0, 0, 0 };
- stbtt__active_edge *active = NULL;
- int y,j=0, i;
- float scanline_data[129], *scanline, *scanline2;
-
- STBTT__NOTUSED(vsubsample);
-
- if (result->w > 64)
- scanline = (float *) STBTT_malloc((result->w*2+1) * sizeof(float), userdata);
- else
- scanline = scanline_data;
-
- scanline2 = scanline + result->w;
-
- y = off_y;
- e[n].y0 = (float) (off_y + result->h) + 1;
-
- while (j < result->h) {
- // find center of pixel for this scanline
- float scan_y_top = y + 0.0f;
- float scan_y_bottom = y + 1.0f;
- stbtt__active_edge **step = &active;
-
- STBTT_memset(scanline , 0, result->w*sizeof(scanline[0]));
- STBTT_memset(scanline2, 0, (result->w+1)*sizeof(scanline[0]));
-
- // update all active edges;
- // remove all active edges that terminate before the top of this scanline
- while (*step) {
- stbtt__active_edge * z = *step;
- if (z->ey <= scan_y_top) {
- *step = z->next; // delete from list
- STBTT_assert(z->direction);
- z->direction = 0;
- stbtt__hheap_free(&hh, z);
- } else {
- step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
- }
- }
-
- // insert all edges that start before the bottom of this scanline
- while (e->y0 <= scan_y_bottom) {
- if (e->y0 != e->y1) {
- stbtt__active_edge *z = stbtt__new_active(&hh, e, off_x, scan_y_top, userdata);
- if (z != NULL) {
- STBTT_assert(z->ey >= scan_y_top);
- // insert at front
- z->next = active;
- active = z;
- }
- }
- ++e;
- }
-
- // now process all active edges
- if (active)
- stbtt__fill_active_edges_new(scanline, scanline2+1, result->w, active, scan_y_top);
-
- {
- float sum = 0;
- for (i=0; i < result->w; ++i) {
- float k;
- int m;
- sum += scanline2[i];
- k = scanline[i] + sum;
- k = (float) STBTT_fabs(k)*255 + 0.5f;
- m = (int) k;
- if (m > 255) m = 255;
- result->pixels[j*result->stride + i] = (unsigned char) m;
- }
- }
- // advance all the edges
- step = &active;
- while (*step) {
- stbtt__active_edge *z = *step;
- z->fx += z->fdx; // advance to position for current scanline
- step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
- }
-
- ++y;
- ++j;
- }
-
- stbtt__hheap_cleanup(&hh, userdata);
-
- if (scanline != scanline_data)
- STBTT_free(scanline, userdata);
-}
-#else
-#error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
-#endif
-
-#define STBTT__COMPARE(a,b) ((a)->y0 < (b)->y0)
-
-static void stbtt__sort_edges_ins_sort(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
-{
- int i,j;
- for (i=1; i < n; ++i) {
- stbtt__edge t = p[i], *a = &t;
- j = i;
- while (j > 0) {
- stbtt__edge *b = &p[j-1];
- int c = STBTT__COMPARE(a,b);
- if (!c) break;
- p[j] = p[j-1];
- --j;
- }
- if (i != j)
- p[j] = t;
- }
-}
-
-static void stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
-{
- /* threshhold for transitioning to insertion sort */
- while (n > 12) {
- stbtt__edge t;
- int c01,c12,c,m,i,j;
-
- /* compute median of three */
- m = n >> 1;
- c01 = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0],&p[m]);
- c12 = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[m],&p[n-1]);
- /* if 0 >= mid >= end, or 0 < mid < end, then use mid */
- if (c01 != c12) {
- /* otherwise, we'll need to swap something else to middle */
- int z;
- c = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0],&p[n-1]);
- /* 0>mid && mid<n: 0>n => n; 0<n => 0 */
- /* 0<mid && mid>n: 0>n => 0; 0<n => n */
- z = (c == c12) ? 0 : n-1;
- t = p[z];
- p[z] = p[m];
- p[m] = t;
- }
- /* now p[m] is the median-of-three */
- /* swap it to the beginning so it won't move around */
- t = p[0];
- p[0] = p[m];
- p[m] = t;
-
- /* partition loop */
- i=1;
- j=n-1;
- for(;;) {
- /* handling of equality is crucial here */
- /* for sentinels & efficiency with duplicates */
- for (;;++i) {
- if (!STBTT__COMPARE(&p[i], &p[0])) break;
- }
- for (;;--j) {
- if (!STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0], &p[j])) break;
- }
- /* make sure we haven't crossed */
- if (i >= j) break;
- t = p[i];
- p[i] = p[j];
- p[j] = t;
-
- ++i;
- --j;
- }
- /* recurse on smaller side, iterate on larger */
- if (j < (n-i)) {
- stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p,j);
- p = p+i;
- n = n-i;
- } else {
- stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p+i, n-i);
- n = j;
- }
- }
-}
-
-static void stbtt__sort_edges(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
-{
- stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p, n);
- stbtt__sort_edges_ins_sort(p, n);
-}
-
-typedef struct
-{
- float x,y;
-} stbtt__point;
-
-static void stbtt__rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__point *pts, int *wcount, int windings, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int off_x, int off_y, int invert, void *userdata)
-{
- float y_scale_inv = invert ? -scale_y : scale_y;
- stbtt__edge *e;
- int n,i,j,k,m;
-#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
- int vsubsample = result->h < 8 ? 15 : 5;
-#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
- int vsubsample = 1;
-#else
- #error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
-#endif
- // vsubsample should divide 255 evenly; otherwise we won't reach full opacity
-
- // now we have to blow out the windings into explicit edge lists
- n = 0;
- for (i=0; i < windings; ++i)
- n += wcount[i];
-
- e = (stbtt__edge *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*e) * (n+1), userdata); // add an extra one as a sentinel
- if (e == 0) return;
- n = 0;
-
- m=0;
- for (i=0; i < windings; ++i) {
- stbtt__point *p = pts + m;
- m += wcount[i];
- j = wcount[i]-1;
- for (k=0; k < wcount[i]; j=k++) {
- int a=k,b=j;
- // skip the edge if horizontal
- if (p[j].y == p[k].y)
- continue;
- // add edge from j to k to the list
- e[n].invert = 0;
- if (invert ? p[j].y > p[k].y : p[j].y < p[k].y) {
- e[n].invert = 1;
- a=j,b=k;
- }
- e[n].x0 = p[a].x * scale_x + shift_x;
- e[n].y0 = (p[a].y * y_scale_inv + shift_y) * vsubsample;
- e[n].x1 = p[b].x * scale_x + shift_x;
- e[n].y1 = (p[b].y * y_scale_inv + shift_y) * vsubsample;
- ++n;
- }
- }
-
- // now sort the edges by their highest point (should snap to integer, and then by x)
- //STBTT_sort(e, n, sizeof(e[0]), stbtt__edge_compare);
- stbtt__sort_edges(e, n);
-
- // now, traverse the scanlines and find the intersections on each scanline, use xor winding rule
- stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(result, e, n, vsubsample, off_x, off_y, userdata);
-
- STBTT_free(e, userdata);
-}
-
-static void stbtt__add_point(stbtt__point *points, int n, float x, float y)
-{
- if (!points) return; // during first pass, it's unallocated
- points[n].x = x;
- points[n].y = y;
-}
-
-// tesselate until threshhold p is happy... @TODO warped to compensate for non-linear stretching
-static int stbtt__tesselate_curve(stbtt__point *points, int *num_points, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float objspace_flatness_squared, int n)
-{
- // midpoint
- float mx = (x0 + 2*x1 + x2)/4;
- float my = (y0 + 2*y1 + y2)/4;
- // versus directly drawn line
- float dx = (x0+x2)/2 - mx;
- float dy = (y0+y2)/2 - my;
- if (n > 16) // 65536 segments on one curve better be enough!
- return 1;
- if (dx*dx+dy*dy > objspace_flatness_squared) { // half-pixel error allowed... need to be smaller if AA
- stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, num_points, x0,y0, (x0+x1)/2.0f,(y0+y1)/2.0f, mx,my, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
- stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, num_points, mx,my, (x1+x2)/2.0f,(y1+y2)/2.0f, x2,y2, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
- } else {
- stbtt__add_point(points, *num_points,x2,y2);
- *num_points = *num_points+1;
- }
- return 1;
-}
-
-static void stbtt__tesselate_cubic(stbtt__point *points, int *num_points, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float objspace_flatness_squared, int n)
-{
- // @TODO this "flatness" calculation is just made-up nonsense that seems to work well enough
- float dx0 = x1-x0;
- float dy0 = y1-y0;
- float dx1 = x2-x1;
- float dy1 = y2-y1;
- float dx2 = x3-x2;
- float dy2 = y3-y2;
- float dx = x3-x0;
- float dy = y3-y0;
- float longlen = (float) (STBTT_sqrt(dx0*dx0+dy0*dy0)+STBTT_sqrt(dx1*dx1+dy1*dy1)+STBTT_sqrt(dx2*dx2+dy2*dy2));
- float shortlen = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dx*dx+dy*dy);
- float flatness_squared = longlen*longlen-shortlen*shortlen;
-
- if (n > 16) // 65536 segments on one curve better be enough!
- return;
-
- if (flatness_squared > objspace_flatness_squared) {
- float x01 = (x0+x1)/2;
- float y01 = (y0+y1)/2;
- float x12 = (x1+x2)/2;
- float y12 = (y1+y2)/2;
- float x23 = (x2+x3)/2;
- float y23 = (y2+y3)/2;
-
- float xa = (x01+x12)/2;
- float ya = (y01+y12)/2;
- float xb = (x12+x23)/2;
- float yb = (y12+y23)/2;
-
- float mx = (xa+xb)/2;
- float my = (ya+yb)/2;
-
- stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, num_points, x0,y0, x01,y01, xa,ya, mx,my, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
- stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, num_points, mx,my, xb,yb, x23,y23, x3,y3, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
- } else {
- stbtt__add_point(points, *num_points,x3,y3);
- *num_points = *num_points+1;
- }
-}
-
-// returns number of contours
-static stbtt__point *stbtt_FlattenCurves(stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_verts, float objspace_flatness, int **contour_lengths, int *num_contours, void *userdata)
-{
- stbtt__point *points=0;
- int num_points=0;
-
- float objspace_flatness_squared = objspace_flatness * objspace_flatness;
- int i,n=0,start=0, pass;
-
- // count how many "moves" there are to get the contour count
- for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i)
- if (vertices[i].type == STBTT_vmove)
- ++n;
-
- *num_contours = n;
- if (n == 0) return 0;
-
- *contour_lengths = (int *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(**contour_lengths) * n, userdata);
-
- if (*contour_lengths == 0) {
- *num_contours = 0;
- return 0;
- }
-
- // make two passes through the points so we don't need to realloc
- for (pass=0; pass < 2; ++pass) {
- float x=0,y=0;
- if (pass == 1) {
- points = (stbtt__point *) STBTT_malloc(num_points * sizeof(points[0]), userdata);
- if (points == NULL) goto error;
- }
- num_points = 0;
- n= -1;
- for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) {
- switch (vertices[i].type) {
- case STBTT_vmove:
- // start the next contour
- if (n >= 0)
- (*contour_lengths)[n] = num_points - start;
- ++n;
- start = num_points;
-
- x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
- stbtt__add_point(points, num_points++, x,y);
- break;
- case STBTT_vline:
- x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
- stbtt__add_point(points, num_points++, x, y);
- break;
- case STBTT_vcurve:
- stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, &num_points, x,y,
- vertices[i].cx, vertices[i].cy,
- vertices[i].x, vertices[i].y,
- objspace_flatness_squared, 0);
- x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
- break;
- case STBTT_vcubic:
- stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, &num_points, x,y,
- vertices[i].cx, vertices[i].cy,
- vertices[i].cx1, vertices[i].cy1,
- vertices[i].x, vertices[i].y,
- objspace_flatness_squared, 0);
- x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
- break;
- }
- }
- (*contour_lengths)[n] = num_points - start;
- }
-
- return points;
-error:
- STBTT_free(points, userdata);
- STBTT_free(*contour_lengths, userdata);
- *contour_lengths = 0;
- *num_contours = 0;
- return NULL;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_Rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, float flatness_in_pixels, stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_verts, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int x_off, int y_off, int invert, void *userdata)
-{
- float scale = scale_x > scale_y ? scale_y : scale_x;
- int winding_count = 0;
- int *winding_lengths = NULL;
- stbtt__point *windings = stbtt_FlattenCurves(vertices, num_verts, flatness_in_pixels / scale, &winding_lengths, &winding_count, userdata);
- if (windings) {
- stbtt__rasterize(result, windings, winding_lengths, winding_count, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, x_off, y_off, invert, userdata);
- STBTT_free(winding_lengths, userdata);
- STBTT_free(windings, userdata);
- }
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeBitmap(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata)
-{
- STBTT_free(bitmap, userdata);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
-{
- int ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1;
- stbtt__bitmap gbm;
- stbtt_vertex *vertices;
- int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &vertices);
-
- if (scale_x == 0) scale_x = scale_y;
- if (scale_y == 0) {
- if (scale_x == 0) {
- STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
- return NULL;
- }
- scale_y = scale_x;
- }
-
- stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, &ix0,&iy0,&ix1,&iy1);
-
- // now we get the size
- gbm.w = (ix1 - ix0);
- gbm.h = (iy1 - iy0);
- gbm.pixels = NULL; // in case we error
-
- if (width ) *width = gbm.w;
- if (height) *height = gbm.h;
- if (xoff ) *xoff = ix0;
- if (yoff ) *yoff = iy0;
-
- if (gbm.w && gbm.h) {
- gbm.pixels = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(gbm.w * gbm.h, info->userdata);
- if (gbm.pixels) {
- gbm.stride = gbm.w;
-
- stbtt_Rasterize(&gbm, 0.35f, vertices, num_verts, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, ix0, iy0, 1, info->userdata);
- }
- }
- STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
- return gbm.pixels;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
-{
- return stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f, 0.0f, glyph, width, height, xoff, yoff);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph)
-{
- int ix0,iy0;
- stbtt_vertex *vertices;
- int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &vertices);
- stbtt__bitmap gbm;
-
- stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, &ix0,&iy0,0,0);
- gbm.pixels = output;
- gbm.w = out_w;
- gbm.h = out_h;
- gbm.stride = out_stride;
-
- if (gbm.w && gbm.h)
- stbtt_Rasterize(&gbm, 0.35f, vertices, num_verts, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, ix0,iy0, 1, info->userdata);
-
- STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph)
-{
- stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, glyph);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
-{
- return stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y,shift_x,shift_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), width,height,xoff,yoff);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int codepoint)
-{
- stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, oversample_x, oversample_y, sub_x, sub_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint));
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint)
-{
- stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint));
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
-{
- return stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, codepoint, width,height,xoff,yoff);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint)
-{
- stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, codepoint);
-}
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// bitmap baking
-//
-// This is SUPER-CRAPPY packing to keep source code small
-
-static int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap_internal(unsigned char *data, int offset, // font location (use offset=0 for plain .ttf)
- float pixel_height, // height of font in pixels
- unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, // bitmap to be filled in
- int first_char, int num_chars, // characters to bake
- stbtt_bakedchar *chardata)
-{
- float scale;
- int x,y,bottom_y, i;
- stbtt_fontinfo f;
- f.userdata = NULL;
- if (!stbtt_InitFont(&f, data, offset))
- return -1;
- STBTT_memset(pixels, 0, pw*ph); // background of 0 around pixels
- x=y=1;
- bottom_y = 1;
-
- scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&f, pixel_height);
-
- for (i=0; i < num_chars; ++i) {
- int advance, lsb, x0,y0,x1,y1,gw,gh;
- int g = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&f, first_char + i);
- stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(&f, g, &advance, &lsb);
- stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(&f, g, scale,scale, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
- gw = x1-x0;
- gh = y1-y0;
- if (x + gw + 1 >= pw)
- y = bottom_y, x = 1; // advance to next row
- if (y + gh + 1 >= ph) // check if it fits vertically AFTER potentially moving to next row
- return -i;
- STBTT_assert(x+gw < pw);
- STBTT_assert(y+gh < ph);
- stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(&f, pixels+x+y*pw, gw,gh,pw, scale,scale, g);
- chardata[i].x0 = (stbtt_int16) x;
- chardata[i].y0 = (stbtt_int16) y;
- chardata[i].x1 = (stbtt_int16) (x + gw);
- chardata[i].y1 = (stbtt_int16) (y + gh);
- chardata[i].xadvance = scale * advance;
- chardata[i].xoff = (float) x0;
- chardata[i].yoff = (float) y0;
- x = x + gw + 1;
- if (y+gh+1 > bottom_y)
- bottom_y = y+gh+1;
- }
- return bottom_y;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetBakedQuad(const stbtt_bakedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, int char_index, float *xpos, float *ypos, stbtt_aligned_quad *q, int opengl_fillrule)
-{
- float d3d_bias = opengl_fillrule ? 0 : -0.5f;
- float ipw = 1.0f / pw, iph = 1.0f / ph;
- const stbtt_bakedchar *b = chardata + char_index;
- int round_x = STBTT_ifloor((*xpos + b->xoff) + 0.5f);
- int round_y = STBTT_ifloor((*ypos + b->yoff) + 0.5f);
-
- q->x0 = round_x + d3d_bias;
- q->y0 = round_y + d3d_bias;
- q->x1 = round_x + b->x1 - b->x0 + d3d_bias;
- q->y1 = round_y + b->y1 - b->y0 + d3d_bias;
-
- q->s0 = b->x0 * ipw;
- q->t0 = b->y0 * iph;
- q->s1 = b->x1 * ipw;
- q->t1 = b->y1 * iph;
-
- *xpos += b->xadvance;
-}
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// rectangle packing replacement routines if you don't have stb_rect_pack.h
-//
-
-#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION
-
-typedef int stbrp_coord;
-
-////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// //
-// //
-// COMPILER WARNING ?!?!? //
-// //
-// //
-// if you get a compile warning due to these symbols being defined more than //
-// once, move #include "stb_rect_pack.h" before #include "stb_truetype.h" //
-// //
-////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-typedef struct
-{
- int width,height;
- int x,y,bottom_y;
-} stbrp_context;
-
-typedef struct
-{
- unsigned char x;
-} stbrp_node;
-
-struct stbrp_rect
-{
- stbrp_coord x,y;
- int id,w,h,was_packed;
-};
-
-static void stbrp_init_target(stbrp_context *con, int pw, int ph, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes)
-{
- con->width = pw;
- con->height = ph;
- con->x = 0;
- con->y = 0;
- con->bottom_y = 0;
- STBTT__NOTUSED(nodes);
- STBTT__NOTUSED(num_nodes);
-}
-
-static void stbrp_pack_rects(stbrp_context *con, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
-{
- int i;
- for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
- if (con->x + rects[i].w > con->width) {
- con->x = 0;
- con->y = con->bottom_y;
- }
- if (con->y + rects[i].h > con->height)
- break;
- rects[i].x = con->x;
- rects[i].y = con->y;
- rects[i].was_packed = 1;
- con->x += rects[i].w;
- if (con->y + rects[i].h > con->bottom_y)
- con->bottom_y = con->y + rects[i].h;
- }
- for ( ; i < num_rects; ++i)
- rects[i].was_packed = 0;
-}
-#endif
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// bitmap baking
-//
-// This is SUPER-AWESOME (tm Ryan Gordon) packing using stb_rect_pack.h. If
-// stb_rect_pack.h isn't available, it uses the BakeFontBitmap strategy.
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackBegin(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, int stride_in_bytes, int padding, void *alloc_context)
-{
- stbrp_context *context = (stbrp_context *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*context) ,alloc_context);
- int num_nodes = pw - padding;
- stbrp_node *nodes = (stbrp_node *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*nodes ) * num_nodes,alloc_context);
-
- if (context == NULL || nodes == NULL) {
- if (context != NULL) STBTT_free(context, alloc_context);
- if (nodes != NULL) STBTT_free(nodes , alloc_context);
- return 0;
- }
-
- spc->user_allocator_context = alloc_context;
- spc->width = pw;
- spc->height = ph;
- spc->pixels = pixels;
- spc->pack_info = context;
- spc->nodes = nodes;
- spc->padding = padding;
- spc->stride_in_bytes = stride_in_bytes != 0 ? stride_in_bytes : pw;
- spc->h_oversample = 1;
- spc->v_oversample = 1;
-
- stbrp_init_target(context, pw-padding, ph-padding, nodes, num_nodes);
-
- if (pixels)
- STBTT_memset(pixels, 0, pw*ph); // background of 0 around pixels
-
- return 1;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackEnd (stbtt_pack_context *spc)
-{
- STBTT_free(spc->nodes , spc->user_allocator_context);
- STBTT_free(spc->pack_info, spc->user_allocator_context);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetOversampling(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned int h_oversample, unsigned int v_oversample)
-{
- STBTT_assert(h_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE);
- STBTT_assert(v_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE);
- if (h_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE)
- spc->h_oversample = h_oversample;
- if (v_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE)
- spc->v_oversample = v_oversample;
-}
-
-#define STBTT__OVER_MASK (STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE-1)
-
-static void stbtt__h_prefilter(unsigned char *pixels, int w, int h, int stride_in_bytes, unsigned int kernel_width)
-{
- unsigned char buffer[STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE];
- int safe_w = w - kernel_width;
- int j;
- STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); // suppress bogus warning from VS2013 -analyze
- for (j=0; j < h; ++j) {
- int i;
- unsigned int total;
- STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, kernel_width);
-
- total = 0;
-
- // make kernel_width a constant in common cases so compiler can optimize out the divide
- switch (kernel_width) {
- case 2:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
- pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 2);
- }
- break;
- case 3:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
- pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 3);
- }
- break;
- case 4:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
- pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 4);
- }
- break;
- case 5:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
- pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 5);
- }
- break;
- default:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
- pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
- }
- break;
- }
-
- for (; i < w; ++i) {
- STBTT_assert(pixels[i] == 0);
- total -= buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
- }
-
- pixels += stride_in_bytes;
- }
-}
-
-static void stbtt__v_prefilter(unsigned char *pixels, int w, int h, int stride_in_bytes, unsigned int kernel_width)
-{
- unsigned char buffer[STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE];
- int safe_h = h - kernel_width;
- int j;
- STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); // suppress bogus warning from VS2013 -analyze
- for (j=0; j < w; ++j) {
- int i;
- unsigned int total;
- STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, kernel_width);
-
- total = 0;
-
- // make kernel_width a constant in common cases so compiler can optimize out the divide
- switch (kernel_width) {
- case 2:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
- pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 2);
- }
- break;
- case 3:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
- pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 3);
- }
- break;
- case 4:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
- pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 4);
- }
- break;
- case 5:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
- pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 5);
- }
- break;
- default:
- for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
- total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
- pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
- }
- break;
- }
-
- for (; i < h; ++i) {
- STBTT_assert(pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] == 0);
- total -= buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
- pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
- }
-
- pixels += 1;
- }
-}
-
-static float stbtt__oversample_shift(int oversample)
-{
- if (!oversample)
- return 0.0f;
-
- // The prefilter is a box filter of width "oversample",
- // which shifts phase by (oversample - 1)/2 pixels in
- // oversampled space. We want to shift in the opposite
- // direction to counter this.
- return (float)-(oversample - 1) / (2.0f * (float)oversample);
-}
-
-// rects array must be big enough to accommodate all characters in the given ranges
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects)
-{
- int i,j,k;
-
- k=0;
- for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) {
- float fh = ranges[i].font_size;
- float scale = fh > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(info, fh) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(info, -fh);
- ranges[i].h_oversample = (unsigned char) spc->h_oversample;
- ranges[i].v_oversample = (unsigned char) spc->v_oversample;
- for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) {
- int x0,y0,x1,y1;
- int codepoint = ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints == NULL ? ranges[i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + j : ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints[j];
- int glyph = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint);
- stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info,glyph,
- scale * spc->h_oversample,
- scale * spc->v_oversample,
- 0,0,
- &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
- rects[k].w = (stbrp_coord) (x1-x0 + spc->padding + spc->h_oversample-1);
- rects[k].h = (stbrp_coord) (y1-y0 + spc->padding + spc->v_oversample-1);
- ++k;
- }
- }
-
- return k;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int prefilter_x, int prefilter_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int glyph)
-{
- stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info,
- output,
- out_w - (prefilter_x - 1),
- out_h - (prefilter_y - 1),
- out_stride,
- scale_x,
- scale_y,
- shift_x,
- shift_y,
- glyph);
-
- if (prefilter_x > 1)
- stbtt__h_prefilter(output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, prefilter_x);
-
- if (prefilter_y > 1)
- stbtt__v_prefilter(output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, prefilter_y);
-
- *sub_x = stbtt__oversample_shift(prefilter_x);
- *sub_y = stbtt__oversample_shift(prefilter_y);
-}
-
-// rects array must be big enough to accommodate all characters in the given ranges
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects)
-{
- int i,j,k, return_value = 1;
-
- // save current values
- int old_h_over = spc->h_oversample;
- int old_v_over = spc->v_oversample;
-
- k = 0;
- for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) {
- float fh = ranges[i].font_size;
- float scale = fh > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(info, fh) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(info, -fh);
- float recip_h,recip_v,sub_x,sub_y;
- spc->h_oversample = ranges[i].h_oversample;
- spc->v_oversample = ranges[i].v_oversample;
- recip_h = 1.0f / spc->h_oversample;
- recip_v = 1.0f / spc->v_oversample;
- sub_x = stbtt__oversample_shift(spc->h_oversample);
- sub_y = stbtt__oversample_shift(spc->v_oversample);
- for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) {
- stbrp_rect *r = &rects[k];
- if (r->was_packed) {
- stbtt_packedchar *bc = &ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j];
- int advance, lsb, x0,y0,x1,y1;
- int codepoint = ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints == NULL ? ranges[i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + j : ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints[j];
- int glyph = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint);
- stbrp_coord pad = (stbrp_coord) spc->padding;
-
- // pad on left and top
- r->x += pad;
- r->y += pad;
- r->w -= pad;
- r->h -= pad;
- stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(info, glyph, &advance, &lsb);
- stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(info, glyph,
- scale * spc->h_oversample,
- scale * spc->v_oversample,
- &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
- stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info,
- spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
- r->w - spc->h_oversample+1,
- r->h - spc->v_oversample+1,
- spc->stride_in_bytes,
- scale * spc->h_oversample,
- scale * spc->v_oversample,
- 0,0,
- glyph);
-
- if (spc->h_oversample > 1)
- stbtt__h_prefilter(spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
- r->w, r->h, spc->stride_in_bytes,
- spc->h_oversample);
-
- if (spc->v_oversample > 1)
- stbtt__v_prefilter(spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
- r->w, r->h, spc->stride_in_bytes,
- spc->v_oversample);
-
- bc->x0 = (stbtt_int16) r->x;
- bc->y0 = (stbtt_int16) r->y;
- bc->x1 = (stbtt_int16) (r->x + r->w);
- bc->y1 = (stbtt_int16) (r->y + r->h);
- bc->xadvance = scale * advance;
- bc->xoff = (float) x0 * recip_h + sub_x;
- bc->yoff = (float) y0 * recip_v + sub_y;
- bc->xoff2 = (x0 + r->w) * recip_h + sub_x;
- bc->yoff2 = (y0 + r->h) * recip_v + sub_y;
- } else {
- return_value = 0; // if any fail, report failure
- }
-
- ++k;
- }
- }
-
- // restore original values
- spc->h_oversample = old_h_over;
- spc->v_oversample = old_v_over;
-
- return return_value;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
-{
- stbrp_pack_rects((stbrp_context *) spc->pack_info, rects, num_rects);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRanges(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges)
-{
- stbtt_fontinfo info;
- int i,j,n, return_value = 1;
- //stbrp_context *context = (stbrp_context *) spc->pack_info;
- stbrp_rect *rects;
-
- // flag all characters as NOT packed
- for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i)
- for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j)
- ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].x0 =
- ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].y0 =
- ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].x1 =
- ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].y1 = 0;
-
- n = 0;
- for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i)
- n += ranges[i].num_chars;
-
- rects = (stbrp_rect *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*rects) * n, spc->user_allocator_context);
- if (rects == NULL)
- return 0;
-
- info.userdata = spc->user_allocator_context;
- stbtt_InitFont(&info, fontdata, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(fontdata,font_index));
-
- n = stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(spc, &info, ranges, num_ranges, rects);
-
- stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(spc, rects, n);
-
- return_value = stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(spc, &info, ranges, num_ranges, rects);
-
- STBTT_free(rects, spc->user_allocator_context);
- return return_value;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRange(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, float font_size,
- int first_unicode_codepoint_in_range, int num_chars_in_range, stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range)
-{
- stbtt_pack_range range;
- range.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = first_unicode_codepoint_in_range;
- range.array_of_unicode_codepoints = NULL;
- range.num_chars = num_chars_in_range;
- range.chardata_for_range = chardata_for_range;
- range.font_size = font_size;
- return stbtt_PackFontRanges(spc, fontdata, font_index, &range, 1);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetPackedQuad(const stbtt_packedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, int char_index, float *xpos, float *ypos, stbtt_aligned_quad *q, int align_to_integer)
-{
- float ipw = 1.0f / pw, iph = 1.0f / ph;
- const stbtt_packedchar *b = chardata + char_index;
-
- if (align_to_integer) {
- float x = (float) STBTT_ifloor((*xpos + b->xoff) + 0.5f);
- float y = (float) STBTT_ifloor((*ypos + b->yoff) + 0.5f);
- q->x0 = x;
- q->y0 = y;
- q->x1 = x + b->xoff2 - b->xoff;
- q->y1 = y + b->yoff2 - b->yoff;
- } else {
- q->x0 = *xpos + b->xoff;
- q->y0 = *ypos + b->yoff;
- q->x1 = *xpos + b->xoff2;
- q->y1 = *ypos + b->yoff2;
- }
-
- q->s0 = b->x0 * ipw;
- q->t0 = b->y0 * iph;
- q->s1 = b->x1 * ipw;
- q->t1 = b->y1 * iph;
-
- *xpos += b->xadvance;
-}
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// sdf computation
-//
-
-#define STBTT_min(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
-#define STBTT_max(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (b) : (a))
-
-static int stbtt__ray_intersect_bezier(float orig[2], float ray[2], float q0[2], float q1[2], float q2[2], float hits[2][2])
-{
- float q0perp = q0[1]*ray[0] - q0[0]*ray[1];
- float q1perp = q1[1]*ray[0] - q1[0]*ray[1];
- float q2perp = q2[1]*ray[0] - q2[0]*ray[1];
- float roperp = orig[1]*ray[0] - orig[0]*ray[1];
-
- float a = q0perp - 2*q1perp + q2perp;
- float b = q1perp - q0perp;
- float c = q0perp - roperp;
-
- float s0 = 0., s1 = 0.;
- int num_s = 0;
-
- if (a != 0.0) {
- float discr = b*b - a*c;
- if (discr > 0.0) {
- float rcpna = -1 / a;
- float d = (float) STBTT_sqrt(discr);
- s0 = (b+d) * rcpna;
- s1 = (b-d) * rcpna;
- if (s0 >= 0.0 && s0 <= 1.0)
- num_s = 1;
- if (d > 0.0 && s1 >= 0.0 && s1 <= 1.0) {
- if (num_s == 0) s0 = s1;
- ++num_s;
- }
- }
- } else {
- // 2*b*s + c = 0
- // s = -c / (2*b)
- s0 = c / (-2 * b);
- if (s0 >= 0.0 && s0 <= 1.0)
- num_s = 1;
- }
-
- if (num_s == 0)
- return 0;
- else {
- float rcp_len2 = 1 / (ray[0]*ray[0] + ray[1]*ray[1]);
- float rayn_x = ray[0] * rcp_len2, rayn_y = ray[1] * rcp_len2;
-
- float q0d = q0[0]*rayn_x + q0[1]*rayn_y;
- float q1d = q1[0]*rayn_x + q1[1]*rayn_y;
- float q2d = q2[0]*rayn_x + q2[1]*rayn_y;
- float rod = orig[0]*rayn_x + orig[1]*rayn_y;
-
- float q10d = q1d - q0d;
- float q20d = q2d - q0d;
- float q0rd = q0d - rod;
-
- hits[0][0] = q0rd + s0*(2.0f - 2.0f*s0)*q10d + s0*s0*q20d;
- hits[0][1] = a*s0+b;
-
- if (num_s > 1) {
- hits[1][0] = q0rd + s1*(2.0f - 2.0f*s1)*q10d + s1*s1*q20d;
- hits[1][1] = a*s1+b;
- return 2;
- } else {
- return 1;
- }
- }
-}
-
-static int equal(float *a, float *b)
-{
- return (a[0] == b[0] && a[1] == b[1]);
-}
-
-static int stbtt__compute_crossings_x(float x, float y, int nverts, stbtt_vertex *verts)
-{
- int i;
- float orig[2], ray[2] = { 1, 0 };
- float y_frac;
- int winding = 0;
-
- orig[0] = x;
- orig[1] = y;
-
- // make sure y never passes through a vertex of the shape
- y_frac = (float) STBTT_fmod(y, 1.0f);
- if (y_frac < 0.01f)
- y += 0.01f;
- else if (y_frac > 0.99f)
- y -= 0.01f;
- orig[1] = y;
-
- // test a ray from (-infinity,y) to (x,y)
- for (i=0; i < nverts; ++i) {
- if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) {
- int x0 = (int) verts[i-1].x, y0 = (int) verts[i-1].y;
- int x1 = (int) verts[i ].x, y1 = (int) verts[i ].y;
- if (y > STBTT_min(y0,y1) && y < STBTT_max(y0,y1) && x > STBTT_min(x0,x1)) {
- float x_inter = (y - y0) / (y1 - y0) * (x1-x0) + x0;
- if (x_inter < x)
- winding += (y0 < y1) ? 1 : -1;
- }
- }
- if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
- int x0 = (int) verts[i-1].x , y0 = (int) verts[i-1].y ;
- int x1 = (int) verts[i ].cx, y1 = (int) verts[i ].cy;
- int x2 = (int) verts[i ].x , y2 = (int) verts[i ].y ;
- int ax = STBTT_min(x0,STBTT_min(x1,x2)), ay = STBTT_min(y0,STBTT_min(y1,y2));
- int by = STBTT_max(y0,STBTT_max(y1,y2));
- if (y > ay && y < by && x > ax) {
- float q0[2],q1[2],q2[2];
- float hits[2][2];
- q0[0] = (float)x0;
- q0[1] = (float)y0;
- q1[0] = (float)x1;
- q1[1] = (float)y1;
- q2[0] = (float)x2;
- q2[1] = (float)y2;
- if (equal(q0,q1) || equal(q1,q2)) {
- x0 = (int)verts[i-1].x;
- y0 = (int)verts[i-1].y;
- x1 = (int)verts[i ].x;
- y1 = (int)verts[i ].y;
- if (y > STBTT_min(y0,y1) && y < STBTT_max(y0,y1) && x > STBTT_min(x0,x1)) {
- float x_inter = (y - y0) / (y1 - y0) * (x1-x0) + x0;
- if (x_inter < x)
- winding += (y0 < y1) ? 1 : -1;
- }
- } else {
- int num_hits = stbtt__ray_intersect_bezier(orig, ray, q0, q1, q2, hits);
- if (num_hits >= 1)
- if (hits[0][0] < 0)
- winding += (hits[0][1] < 0 ? -1 : 1);
- if (num_hits >= 2)
- if (hits[1][0] < 0)
- winding += (hits[1][1] < 0 ? -1 : 1);
- }
- }
- }
- }
- return winding;
-}
-
-static float stbtt__cuberoot( float x )
-{
- if (x<0)
- return -(float) STBTT_pow(-x,1.0f/3.0f);
- else
- return (float) STBTT_pow( x,1.0f/3.0f);
-}
-
-// x^3 + c*x^2 + b*x + a = 0
-static int stbtt__solve_cubic(float a, float b, float c, float* r)
-{
- float s = -a / 3;
- float p = b - a*a / 3;
- float q = a * (2*a*a - 9*b) / 27 + c;
- float p3 = p*p*p;
- float d = q*q + 4*p3 / 27;
- if (d >= 0) {
- float z = (float) STBTT_sqrt(d);
- float u = (-q + z) / 2;
- float v = (-q - z) / 2;
- u = stbtt__cuberoot(u);
- v = stbtt__cuberoot(v);
- r[0] = s + u + v;
- return 1;
- } else {
- float u = (float) STBTT_sqrt(-p/3);
- float v = (float) STBTT_acos(-STBTT_sqrt(-27/p3) * q / 2) / 3; // p3 must be negative, since d is negative
- float m = (float) STBTT_cos(v);
- float n = (float) STBTT_cos(v-3.141592/2)*1.732050808f;
- r[0] = s + u * 2 * m;
- r[1] = s - u * (m + n);
- r[2] = s - u * (m - n);
-
- //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[0]+a)*r[0]+b)*r[0]+c) < 0.05f); // these asserts may not be safe at all scales, though they're in bezier t parameter units so maybe?
- //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[1]+a)*r[1]+b)*r[1]+c) < 0.05f);
- //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[2]+a)*r[2]+b)*r[2]+c) < 0.05f);
- return 3;
- }
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int glyph, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
-{
- float scale_x = scale, scale_y = scale;
- int ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1;
- int w,h;
- unsigned char *data;
-
- // if one scale is 0, use same scale for both
- if (scale_x == 0) scale_x = scale_y;
- if (scale_y == 0) {
- if (scale_x == 0) return NULL; // if both scales are 0, return NULL
- scale_y = scale_x;
- }
-
- stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale, scale, 0.0f,0.0f, &ix0,&iy0,&ix1,&iy1);
-
- // if empty, return NULL
- if (ix0 == ix1 || iy0 == iy1)
- return NULL;
-
- ix0 -= padding;
- iy0 -= padding;
- ix1 += padding;
- iy1 += padding;
-
- w = (ix1 - ix0);
- h = (iy1 - iy0);
-
- if (width ) *width = w;
- if (height) *height = h;
- if (xoff ) *xoff = ix0;
- if (yoff ) *yoff = iy0;
-
- // invert for y-downwards bitmaps
- scale_y = -scale_y;
-
- {
- int x,y,i,j;
- float *precompute;
- stbtt_vertex *verts;
- int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &verts);
- data = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(w * h, info->userdata);
- precompute = (float *) STBTT_malloc(num_verts * sizeof(float), info->userdata);
-
- for (i=0,j=num_verts-1; i < num_verts; j=i++) {
- if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) {
- float x0 = verts[i].x*scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y*scale_y;
- float x1 = verts[j].x*scale_x, y1 = verts[j].y*scale_y;
- float dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt((x1-x0)*(x1-x0) + (y1-y0)*(y1-y0));
- precompute[i] = (dist == 0) ? 0.0f : 1.0f / dist;
- } else if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
- float x2 = verts[j].x *scale_x, y2 = verts[j].y *scale_y;
- float x1 = verts[i].cx*scale_x, y1 = verts[i].cy*scale_y;
- float x0 = verts[i].x *scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y *scale_y;
- float bx = x0 - 2*x1 + x2, by = y0 - 2*y1 + y2;
- float len2 = bx*bx + by*by;
- if (len2 != 0.0f)
- precompute[i] = 1.0f / (bx*bx + by*by);
- else
- precompute[i] = 0.0f;
- } else
- precompute[i] = 0.0f;
- }
-
- for (y=iy0; y < iy1; ++y) {
- for (x=ix0; x < ix1; ++x) {
- float val;
- float min_dist = 999999.0f;
- float sx = (float) x + 0.5f;
- float sy = (float) y + 0.5f;
- float x_gspace = (sx / scale_x);
- float y_gspace = (sy / scale_y);
-
- int winding = stbtt__compute_crossings_x(x_gspace, y_gspace, num_verts, verts); // @OPTIMIZE: this could just be a rasterization, but needs to be line vs. non-tesselated curves so a new path
-
- for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) {
- float x0 = verts[i].x*scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y*scale_y;
-
- // check against every point here rather than inside line/curve primitives -- @TODO: wrong if multiple 'moves' in a row produce a garbage point, and given culling, probably more efficient to do within line/curve
- float dist2 = (x0-sx)*(x0-sx) + (y0-sy)*(y0-sy);
- if (dist2 < min_dist*min_dist)
- min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
-
- if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) {
- float x1 = verts[i-1].x*scale_x, y1 = verts[i-1].y*scale_y;
-
- // coarse culling against bbox
- //if (sx > STBTT_min(x0,x1)-min_dist && sx < STBTT_max(x0,x1)+min_dist &&
- // sy > STBTT_min(y0,y1)-min_dist && sy < STBTT_max(y0,y1)+min_dist)
- float dist = (float) STBTT_fabs((x1-x0)*(y0-sy) - (y1-y0)*(x0-sx)) * precompute[i];
- STBTT_assert(i != 0);
- if (dist < min_dist) {
- // check position along line
- // x' = x0 + t*(x1-x0), y' = y0 + t*(y1-y0)
- // minimize (x'-sx)*(x'-sx)+(y'-sy)*(y'-sy)
- float dx = x1-x0, dy = y1-y0;
- float px = x0-sx, py = y0-sy;
- // minimize (px+t*dx)^2 + (py+t*dy)^2 = px*px + 2*px*dx*t + t^2*dx*dx + py*py + 2*py*dy*t + t^2*dy*dy
- // derivative: 2*px*dx + 2*py*dy + (2*dx*dx+2*dy*dy)*t, set to 0 and solve
- float t = -(px*dx + py*dy) / (dx*dx + dy*dy);
- if (t >= 0.0f && t <= 1.0f)
- min_dist = dist;
- }
- } else if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
- float x2 = verts[i-1].x *scale_x, y2 = verts[i-1].y *scale_y;
- float x1 = verts[i ].cx*scale_x, y1 = verts[i ].cy*scale_y;
- float box_x0 = STBTT_min(STBTT_min(x0,x1),x2);
- float box_y0 = STBTT_min(STBTT_min(y0,y1),y2);
- float box_x1 = STBTT_max(STBTT_max(x0,x1),x2);
- float box_y1 = STBTT_max(STBTT_max(y0,y1),y2);
- // coarse culling against bbox to avoid computing cubic unnecessarily
- if (sx > box_x0-min_dist && sx < box_x1+min_dist && sy > box_y0-min_dist && sy < box_y1+min_dist) {
- int num=0;
- float ax = x1-x0, ay = y1-y0;
- float bx = x0 - 2*x1 + x2, by = y0 - 2*y1 + y2;
- float mx = x0 - sx, my = y0 - sy;
- float res[3],px,py,t,it;
- float a_inv = precompute[i];
- if (a_inv == 0.0) { // if a_inv is 0, it's 2nd degree so use quadratic formula
- float a = 3*(ax*bx + ay*by);
- float b = 2*(ax*ax + ay*ay) + (mx*bx+my*by);
- float c = mx*ax+my*ay;
- if (a == 0.0) { // if a is 0, it's linear
- if (b != 0.0) {
- res[num++] = -c/b;
- }
- } else {
- float discriminant = b*b - 4*a*c;
- if (discriminant < 0)
- num = 0;
- else {
- float root = (float) STBTT_sqrt(discriminant);
- res[0] = (-b - root)/(2*a);
- res[1] = (-b + root)/(2*a);
- num = 2; // don't bother distinguishing 1-solution case, as code below will still work
- }
- }
- } else {
- float b = 3*(ax*bx + ay*by) * a_inv; // could precompute this as it doesn't depend on sample point
- float c = (2*(ax*ax + ay*ay) + (mx*bx+my*by)) * a_inv;
- float d = (mx*ax+my*ay) * a_inv;
- num = stbtt__solve_cubic(b, c, d, res);
- }
- if (num >= 1 && res[0] >= 0.0f && res[0] <= 1.0f) {
- t = res[0], it = 1.0f - t;
- px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
- py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
- dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
- if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
- min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
- }
- if (num >= 2 && res[1] >= 0.0f && res[1] <= 1.0f) {
- t = res[1], it = 1.0f - t;
- px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
- py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
- dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
- if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
- min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
- }
- if (num >= 3 && res[2] >= 0.0f && res[2] <= 1.0f) {
- t = res[2], it = 1.0f - t;
- px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
- py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
- dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
- if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
- min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
- }
- }
- }
- }
- if (winding == 0)
- min_dist = -min_dist; // if outside the shape, value is negative
- val = onedge_value + pixel_dist_scale * min_dist;
- if (val < 0)
- val = 0;
- else if (val > 255)
- val = 255;
- data[(y-iy0)*w+(x-ix0)] = (unsigned char) val;
- }
- }
- STBTT_free(precompute, info->userdata);
- STBTT_free(verts, info->userdata);
- }
- return data;
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetCodepointSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int codepoint, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
-{
- return stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(info, scale, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint), padding, onedge_value, pixel_dist_scale, width, height, xoff, yoff);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeSDF(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata)
-{
- STBTT_free(bitmap, userdata);
-}
-
-//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-//
-// font name matching -- recommended not to use this
-//
-
-// check if a utf8 string contains a prefix which is the utf16 string; if so return length of matching utf8 string
-static stbtt_int32 stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix(stbtt_uint8 *s1, stbtt_int32 len1, stbtt_uint8 *s2, stbtt_int32 len2)
-{
- stbtt_int32 i=0;
-
- // convert utf16 to utf8 and compare the results while converting
- while (len2) {
- stbtt_uint16 ch = s2[0]*256 + s2[1];
- if (ch < 0x80) {
- if (i >= len1) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != ch) return -1;
- } else if (ch < 0x800) {
- if (i+1 >= len1) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != 0xc0 + (ch >> 6)) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + (ch & 0x3f)) return -1;
- } else if (ch >= 0xd800 && ch < 0xdc00) {
- stbtt_uint32 c;
- stbtt_uint16 ch2 = s2[2]*256 + s2[3];
- if (i+3 >= len1) return -1;
- c = ((ch - 0xd800) << 10) + (ch2 - 0xdc00) + 0x10000;
- if (s1[i++] != 0xf0 + (c >> 18)) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c >> 12) & 0x3f)) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c >> 6) & 0x3f)) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f)) return -1;
- s2 += 2; // plus another 2 below
- len2 -= 2;
- } else if (ch >= 0xdc00 && ch < 0xe000) {
- return -1;
- } else {
- if (i+2 >= len1) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != 0xe0 + (ch >> 12)) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((ch >> 6) & 0x3f)) return -1;
- if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((ch ) & 0x3f)) return -1;
- }
- s2 += 2;
- len2 -= 2;
- }
- return i;
-}
-
-static int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal(char *s1, int len1, char *s2, int len2)
-{
- return len1 == stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix((stbtt_uint8*) s1, len1, (stbtt_uint8*) s2, len2);
-}
-
-// returns results in whatever encoding you request... but note that 2-byte encodings
-// will be BIG-ENDIAN... use stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian() to compare
-STBTT_DEF const char *stbtt_GetFontNameString(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int *length, int platformID, int encodingID, int languageID, int nameID)
-{
- stbtt_int32 i,count,stringOffset;
- stbtt_uint8 *fc = font->data;
- stbtt_uint32 offset = font->fontstart;
- stbtt_uint32 nm = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "name");
- if (!nm) return NULL;
-
- count = ttUSHORT(fc+nm+2);
- stringOffset = nm + ttUSHORT(fc+nm+4);
- for (i=0; i < count; ++i) {
- stbtt_uint32 loc = nm + 6 + 12 * i;
- if (platformID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+0) && encodingID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+2)
- && languageID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+4) && nameID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+6)) {
- *length = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+8);
- return (const char *) (fc+stringOffset+ttUSHORT(fc+loc+10));
- }
- }
- return NULL;
-}
-
-static int stbtt__matchpair(stbtt_uint8 *fc, stbtt_uint32 nm, stbtt_uint8 *name, stbtt_int32 nlen, stbtt_int32 target_id, stbtt_int32 next_id)
-{
- stbtt_int32 i;
- stbtt_int32 count = ttUSHORT(fc+nm+2);
- stbtt_int32 stringOffset = nm + ttUSHORT(fc+nm+4);
-
- for (i=0; i < count; ++i) {
- stbtt_uint32 loc = nm + 6 + 12 * i;
- stbtt_int32 id = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+6);
- if (id == target_id) {
- // find the encoding
- stbtt_int32 platform = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+0), encoding = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+2), language = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+4);
-
- // is this a Unicode encoding?
- if (platform == 0 || (platform == 3 && encoding == 1) || (platform == 3 && encoding == 10)) {
- stbtt_int32 slen = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+8);
- stbtt_int32 off = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+10);
-
- // check if there's a prefix match
- stbtt_int32 matchlen = stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix(name, nlen, fc+stringOffset+off,slen);
- if (matchlen >= 0) {
- // check for target_id+1 immediately following, with same encoding & language
- if (i+1 < count && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+6) == next_id && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12) == platform && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+2) == encoding && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+4) == language) {
- slen = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+8);
- off = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+10);
- if (slen == 0) {
- if (matchlen == nlen)
- return 1;
- } else if (matchlen < nlen && name[matchlen] == ' ') {
- ++matchlen;
- if (stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal((char*) (name+matchlen), nlen-matchlen, (char*)(fc+stringOffset+off),slen))
- return 1;
- }
- } else {
- // if nothing immediately following
- if (matchlen == nlen)
- return 1;
- }
- }
- }
-
- // @TODO handle other encodings
- }
- }
- return 0;
-}
-
-static int stbtt__matches(stbtt_uint8 *fc, stbtt_uint32 offset, stbtt_uint8 *name, stbtt_int32 flags)
-{
- stbtt_int32 nlen = (stbtt_int32) STBTT_strlen((char *) name);
- stbtt_uint32 nm,hd;
- if (!stbtt__isfont(fc+offset)) return 0;
-
- // check italics/bold/underline flags in macStyle...
- if (flags) {
- hd = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "head");
- if ((ttUSHORT(fc+hd+44) & 7) != (flags & 7)) return 0;
- }
-
- nm = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "name");
- if (!nm) return 0;
-
- if (flags) {
- // if we checked the macStyle flags, then just check the family and ignore the subfamily
- if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 16, -1)) return 1;
- if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 1, -1)) return 1;
- if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 3, -1)) return 1;
- } else {
- if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 16, 17)) return 1;
- if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 1, 2)) return 1;
- if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 3, -1)) return 1;
- }
-
- return 0;
-}
-
-static int stbtt_FindMatchingFont_internal(unsigned char *font_collection, char *name_utf8, stbtt_int32 flags)
-{
- stbtt_int32 i;
- for (i=0;;++i) {
- stbtt_int32 off = stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(font_collection, i);
- if (off < 0) return off;
- if (stbtt__matches((stbtt_uint8 *) font_collection, off, (stbtt_uint8*) name_utf8, flags))
- return off;
- }
-}
-
-#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
-#pragma GCC diagnostic push
-#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual"
-#endif
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(const unsigned char *data, int offset,
- float pixel_height, unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph,
- int first_char, int num_chars, stbtt_bakedchar *chardata)
-{
- return stbtt_BakeFontBitmap_internal((unsigned char *) data, offset, pixel_height, pixels, pw, ph, first_char, num_chars, chardata);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(const unsigned char *data, int index)
-{
- return stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex_internal((unsigned char *) data, index);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts(const unsigned char *data)
-{
- return stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts_internal((unsigned char *) data);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_InitFont(stbtt_fontinfo *info, const unsigned char *data, int offset)
-{
- return stbtt_InitFont_internal(info, (unsigned char *) data, offset);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindMatchingFont(const unsigned char *fontdata, const char *name, int flags)
-{
- return stbtt_FindMatchingFont_internal((unsigned char *) fontdata, (char *) name, flags);
-}
-
-STBTT_DEF int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian(const char *s1, int len1, const char *s2, int len2)
-{
- return stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal((char *) s1, len1, (char *) s2, len2);
-}
-
-#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
-#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
-#endif
-
-#endif // STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
-
-
-// FULL VERSION HISTORY
-//
-// 1.19 (2018-02-11) OpenType GPOS kerning (horizontal only), STBTT_fmod
-// 1.18 (2018-01-29) add missing function
-// 1.17 (2017-07-23) make more arguments const; doc fix
-// 1.16 (2017-07-12) SDF support
-// 1.15 (2017-03-03) make more arguments const
-// 1.14 (2017-01-16) num-fonts-in-TTC function
-// 1.13 (2017-01-02) support OpenType fonts, certain Apple fonts
-// 1.12 (2016-10-25) suppress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
-// 1.11 (2016-04-02) fix unused-variable warning
-// 1.10 (2016-04-02) allow user-defined fabs() replacement
-// fix memory leak if fontsize=0.0
-// fix warning from duplicate typedef
-// 1.09 (2016-01-16) warning fix; avoid crash on outofmem; use alloc userdata for PackFontRanges
-// 1.08 (2015-09-13) document stbtt_Rasterize(); fixes for vertical & horizontal edges
-// 1.07 (2015-08-01) allow PackFontRanges to accept arrays of sparse codepoints;
-// allow PackFontRanges to pack and render in separate phases;
-// fix stbtt_GetFontOFfsetForIndex (never worked for non-0 input?);
-// fixed an assert() bug in the new rasterizer
-// replace assert() with STBTT_assert() in new rasterizer
-// 1.06 (2015-07-14) performance improvements (~35% faster on x86 and x64 on test machine)
-// also more precise AA rasterizer, except if shapes overlap
-// remove need for STBTT_sort
-// 1.05 (2015-04-15) fix misplaced definitions for STBTT_STATIC
-// 1.04 (2015-04-15) typo in example
-// 1.03 (2015-04-12) STBTT_STATIC, fix memory leak in new packing, various fixes
-// 1.02 (2014-12-10) fix various warnings & compile issues w/ stb_rect_pack, C++
-// 1.01 (2014-12-08) fix subpixel position when oversampling to exactly match
-// non-oversampled; STBTT_POINT_SIZE for packed case only
-// 1.00 (2014-12-06) add new PackBegin etc. API, w/ support for oversampling
-// 0.99 (2014-09-18) fix multiple bugs with subpixel rendering (ryg)
-// 0.9 (2014-08-07) support certain mac/iOS fonts without an MS platformID
-// 0.8b (2014-07-07) fix a warning
-// 0.8 (2014-05-25) fix a few more warnings
-// 0.7 (2013-09-25) bugfix: subpixel glyph bug fixed in 0.5 had come back
-// 0.6c (2012-07-24) improve documentation
-// 0.6b (2012-07-20) fix a few more warnings
-// 0.6 (2012-07-17) fix warnings; added stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels,
-// stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox, stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty
-// 0.5 (2011-12-09) bugfixes:
-// subpixel glyph renderer computed wrong bounding box
-// first vertex of shape can be off-curve (FreeSans)
-// 0.4b (2011-12-03) fixed an error in the font baking example
-// 0.4 (2011-12-01) kerning, subpixel rendering (tor)
-// bugfixes for:
-// codepoint-to-glyph conversion using table fmt=12
-// codepoint-to-glyph conversion using table fmt=4
-// stbtt_GetBakedQuad with non-square texture (Zer)
-// updated Hello World! sample to use kerning and subpixel
-// fixed some warnings
-// 0.3 (2009-06-24) cmap fmt=12, compound shapes (MM)
-// userdata, malloc-from-userdata, non-zero fill (stb)
-// 0.2 (2009-03-11) Fix unsigned/signed char warnings
-// 0.1 (2009-03-09) First public release
-//
-
-/*
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
-Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
-Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
-this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
-the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
-use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
-of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
-so, subject to the following conditions:
-The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
-copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
-AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
-LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
-OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
-SOFTWARE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
-This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
-Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
-software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
-commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
-In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
-software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
-domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
-the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
-overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
-this software under copyright law.
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
-AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
-ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
-WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-*/
projects / mesa.git / commitdiff